NRG NPS PDF

Version 1.
11
Released : June 2003
Valid Until : August 2003
New Product Specifications
Multifunctional Machines
Printers
Color Multifunctional
Scanners
Facsimile
Analogue Copiers
Software Solutions
Copyprinters
Main Page WFW WFW-Connect

Always check for latest information on NRG Site
Version 1.11
Multifunctional
DMR12 DMR12F DMR13 DMR13A
DMR13F DMR15S DMR18S DMR18D
DMR22A DMR27A DMR32A DMR35A
DMR35B DMR45A DMR45B DMR55B
DMR60 DMR75 DMR85A DMR90B
DMR105A DMR105B DMRA07
Memory Matrix
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR12 / DMR12F / DMR13 / DMR13F

Digital 12 / 13ppm
Multifunctional Products
Nashuatec 1205/1205f/1305/1305f
Rex Rotary 1208/1208F/1308/1308F
Gestetner 1202/1202f/1302/1302f
First
Production Launch Country
Month Month of Origin
DMR12 October, 2001 December, 2001 China

DMR12F October, 2001 December, 2001 China
DMR13 August, 2001 October, 2001 China
DMR13F August, 2001 October, 2001 China
NRG International Limited

Marketing Department
Date Created: July, 2001
Version 7
February, 2003
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Main Features 5
Product Configuration & Option Interchangeability 7
NRG Product Comparison 13
Product Positioning 14
Target Market 17
Printer Controller 18
Product Specifications 26
Option Specifications 30
In the Box Accessories List 38
Environmental Specifications 40
Supplies and Reliability Data 41
What Fits What 42
Competitive Comparison 43
This is a pre-launch document and specifications are subject

to change. If in doubt or specifications are required for
tenders, etc please contact NRGI Guernsey for confirmation of
exact product details.
K:\Company\Market\NPS\DMR12_12F_13_13F.doc 1
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
INTRODUCTION
The DMR12, DMR12F, DMR13 and DMR13F are simplex only, copier-based digital machines,
designed to accelerate the migration from analogue to digital machines. The DMR12 and DMR13
are specifically targeted at the low-end Segment 1, while the DMR12F and DMR13F, with pre-
installed fax controller, will replace the LFO, a fax-based multi-functional machine.
Segment 1 (1 to 20cpm) is a key market, commanding over 50% of total units sold in Western
Europe, yet it still has some of the lowest levels of digitalisation. (35% in 2000) Our aim is to
encourage the digital migration, with corresponding connectivity and, therefore, increased volume.
The majority of unit placements of these machines are with end users. These new products should
enable distributors to expand their existing distribution channel, to increase overall market share.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The DMR12/F and DMR13/F are 4 new digital machines, with copy/print speeds of 12 and 13cpm,
respectively. In addition, the DMR12F and DMR13F are pre-configured with document feeder and
fax controller.
DMR12 and DMR13 standard configuration:
Platen cover as
standard
Internal Tray Output

Capacity 250 sheets
Bypass Tray
Standard paper tray DMR12 1 sheet
Capacity 250 sheets DMR13 100 sheets
DMR13 only optional 500-sheet paper tray (see picture below)
DMR13F with optional 1 tray paper bank:
Document feeder as
standard (Max. 30 sheets)
Internal Tray Output

Capacity 250 sheets
Standard paper tray

Capacity 250 sheets Bypass Tray
DMR12F 1 sheet
Optional 500-sheet paper tray DMR13F 100 sheets
(DMR13 and DMR13F only)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Operation Panel:
The operation panel is simply designed, with the fax, print and copy operation area segregated to
make each functions operation easy and simple.
Copier only
Copier + Fax +
Printer.
Fax Printer Copy

Common
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
MAIN FEATURES
General Features:
Small footprint so it may be placed on a desktop. (One of the smallest copiers ever
launched by NRG).
Ease of operation. The operation panel is designed on the familiar analogue panel.
Ease of installation. The machines are designed as Plug and Play, with the PCU pre-
installed.
Expandability with either a fax or print option, or option of machine pre-configured
with fax and document feeder.
Large paper capacity.
DMR12/F DMR13/F CMR130C CMR120A LFO

CMR131C CMR121A
Paper 250 sheets 250 sheets 250 sheets 250 sheets 150 sheets
Bank (A4/LT) (A4/LT) (A4/LT/LG) (A4/LT)
Bypass 1 sheet 100 sheets 80sheets 1 sheet 1 sheet
Option NO 500 sheets NO NO 100 sheets
Paper tray (A4/LT/LG) (A4/LT/LG)
Easy jam recovery.

When a jam happens, you open the side cover to remove the jammed paper. At that time,
the gears at the fusing roller get released, which loosens the jammed paper meaning it can be
removed very easily.
Easy to remove
jammed paper
Copier Features:
Scan Once, Print Many (by adding the 32MB memory option, the user can also access
electronic sorting).
12cpm or 13cpm copy speed.
Zoom 50 200%.
Fast 1st copy speed due to a short paper path, which shortens a first copy speed to 8
seconds (when the polygon mirror motor is spinning).
DMR12/F CMR120A CMR130C LFO Brother Xerox

DMR13/F CMR121A CMR131C MFC- 214PC/214DC
9750 LT
12/13cpm 12cpm 13cpm 10cpm 12cpm 14cpm
8 sec 9 sec 6.9 sec 12 sec 18 sec 6 sec
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Fast warm-up time
DMR12/F CMR120A CMR130C LFO Brother Xerox

DMR13/F CMR121A CMR131C MFC- 214PC/214DC
9750 LT
20 sec 15 sec 35 sec 15 sec 45 sec 40 sec
Environmentally Friendly
-Toner: Since these models use toner recycle system, there is no toner exhaust, which is
good for the environment.
- Energy Saver Mode: After a period of time, these models will automatically go into the
Energy Saving Mode, thus saving power consumption.
Printer Features:
12ppm or 13ppm print speed

Easy to install print option (approximately 5 minutes)
Networkable, and fully compliant with Windows 2000 and Windows NT4.0
PostScript capable for quicker processing of graphic intensive print jobs
Transmit once, RIP once, print many to minimise network traffic when printing several
sets
Electronic collation when the 32MB memory upgrade is installed
Font storage on the RAM memory (temporary storage)
600dpi
Fax Features:
Option of a machine pre-configured with fax and document feeder

Super G3 fax modem speed of 33.6Kbps
Scans at less than 2.4 seconds and transmits in under 3 seconds
16 quick, 50 speed and 5 group dials
1MB SAF memory as standard, with option to upgrade
Document feeder
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
PRODUCT CONFIGURATION & OPTION

INTERCHANGEABILITY
The DMR12 comes with a platen cover, 1 sheet bypass and 1 x 250-sheet paper tray. The DMR12F
comes with pre-installed fax controller and document feeder, 1 sheet bypass and 1 x 250-sheet
paper tray.
The DMR13 comes with a platen cover, 100-sheet bypass and 1 x 250-sheet paper tray. The
DMR12F comes with pre-installed fax controller and document feeder, 100-sheet bypass and 1 x
250-sheet paper tray.
The machines and options are detailed over the page: -
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
DMR12 DMR12F
ADF
(option)
Platen Fax unit
Bypass tray Bypass

1sheet tray
250 250 1 sheet
Printer controller
DMR13 PS2 Ethernet DMR13F
ADF Memory
(option)
Platen
Fax unit
Bypass tray
100 sheets Bypass
250 250 tray
100 sheets
500
1 Tray Paper Bank (option)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Internal Options:
Mainframe: Memory 32MB DIMM (required for electronic sorting) DMEBP32
Fax: Fax option (DMR12 and DMR13 only) ** DIF1013F

32MB DIMM (3MB for SAF)* DMEBP32
Print: Printer controller DIF1013PV2

Or: DIF1013PV3***
PS2 Clone DIF1018PS
Ethernet NIB DIF1018E
Memory 32MB DIMM DMEBP32
*The DMR12F and DMR13F (pre-configured machines) have 1 copier and fax board. Only 1
32MB option needs to be added to boost the memory for the copy and fax options. The printer
option is a separate board, needing separate memory chips.
**It is not recommended to install this option in the field as it is extremely difficult. The upgrade
involves taking out the copier board and replacing it with a new copier & fax board.
***DIF1013PV2 will be replaced by DIF1013PV3 from April 2003.
Option/Supply Interchangeability:
Remarks:
1) There are no common external options between the DMR12/F/13/F and the DMR15S/18S
2) Model DMR12/F and DMR13/F external options will be in the new body colour, to match the
colour of the mainframe.
External Options:
Item DMR12/F/13/F DMR15S/18S SF1
ADF Y N N
Paper Bank (500 sheets x 1) Y N Y
DMR13 and
DMR13F only
Internal Options:
Item DMR12/F/13/F DMR15S/18S SF1
Fax board Y ** N N
(DMR12 & DMR13
only)
Printer Controller board Y N N***
PS2 compatible Y Y Y
NIB Ethernet Y Y Y
DIMM (32MB) Y Y Y
Y: Can be used for this model
N: Cannot be used for this model
Y **: Can be used for this model. Not recommended to install this option in the field as it is extremely difficult to
install. The upgrade involves taking out the copier board and replacing it with a new copier and fax board.
***: The launch printer board is not compatible with the SF1. However, a version 2 board, which will be compatible,
is planned.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Option Correlation for Basic Copier and Fax:
DMR12
-must install together -Cannot install together R - Recommended
Printer Controller
PS2 compatible
32MB memory
(Copy & Fax)
ADF
FAX
NIC
Purchasing option
ADF R
32MB Memory (Copy & Fax)
FAX
Printer Controller
PS2 compatible
NIC
32MB copier memory is recommended when installing the ADF as, without optional 32MB
memory, Electronic Sorting is not supported. Some users will expect to use Electronic Sorting
when the machine is equipped with the ADF.
DMR12F

Printer Controller
Paper Bank (250)
PS2 compatible
32MB memory
(Copy & Fax)
NIC
Purchasing option
32MB memory (Copy & Fax)
Printer Controller
PS2 compatible
NIC
32MB copier memory is recommended with the pre-installed document feeder. Without optional
32MB memory, Electronic Sorting is not supported.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
DMR13
Printer Controller
Paper Bank (500)
PS2 compatible
32MB memory
(Copy & Fax)
ADF
FAX
NIC
Purchasing option
ADF R
Paper Bank (500)
32MB Memory
(Copy & Fax)
FAX
Printer Controller
PS2 compatible
NIC
32MB copier memory is recommended when installing the ADF as without optional 32MB
memory, Electronic Sorting is not supported. Some users will expect to use Electronic Sorting when
the machine is equipped with the ADF.
DMR13F

Printer Controller
Paper Bank (250)
PS2 compatible
32MB memory
(Copy & Fax)
NIC
Purchasing option
Paper Bank (500) R
32MB memory (Copy & Fax)
Printer Controller
PS2 compatible
NIC
32MB copier memory is recommended with the pre-installed document feeder. Without optional
32MB memory, Electronic Sorting is not supported.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Memory Configurations:
Copier & Fax:
DMR12 and DMR13 DMR12F and DMR13F

Standard memory 8MB 8MB
*5MB is used for page memory *5MB is used for page memory
performing scan once print many. performing scan once print many.
*1MB for FAX SAF
Optional memory 32MB 32MB
*5MB is used for additional page *5MB is used for additional page
memory due to dual access of memory due to dual access of
scanning and printing. scanning and printing.
*27MB is used for electronic sorting *24MB is used for electronic sorting
*3MB is used for FAX SAF
*Total FAX SAF memory is 4MB.
Number of pages stored in the memory when sort copying:
With 32MB Optional Memory:
Ricoh 6% Chart IT U T No. 4 Chart Lipstick Chart

Mode Paper Max. No. Operation Max. No. Operation Max. No. Operation
of Pages of Pages of Pages
Text A4/8.5 x 11 277 100 106 100 23 23
Photo A4/8.5 x 11 86 86 34 34 17 17
Note: 32MB optional memory is required to do sort copying.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
NRG PRODUCT COMPARISON

LFO: CMR120A: DMR12: CMR121A: DMR12F: CMR130C: DMR13: CMR131C: DMR13F: CMR151C: DMR15
S:
Copy Speed 10 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 15 15
Paper Size A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A3 A4 A3 A4 A3 A3
Standard Paper 150 251 251 251 251 250 350 250 350 580 350
Capacity (sheets)
Maximum Paper 250 251 251 251 251 330 850 330 850 580 1350
Capacity (sheets)
Expected Average 1000 1000 1,500 1000 1,500 1500 3000 2000 1500 3000 2000 4500 3500
Monthly Volume
Maximum Monthly 2000 3000 5000 3000 5000 7500 5000 7500 5000 10000 10000
Volume
Machine Life 5yrs or 60K 5yrs or 180K 5yrs or 300K 5yrs or 180K 5yrs or 300K 5yrs or 450K 5yrs or 300K 5yrs or 450K 5yrs or 300K 5yrs or 600K
First Copy Speed 12 9 8 9 8 6.9 8 6.9 8 6.9 6.9
(seconds)
Warm-up Time 15 15 20 15 20 35 20 35 20 45 25
(seconds)
Zoom 50 200% - 50 200% 70 141% 50 200% - 50 200% 61 141% 50 200% 50 200% 50 200%
Copier Memory 224KB - 8MB - 8MB - 8MB - 8MB - 0
Standard
Fax Controller Standard - Option, but not - Standard - Option, but not - Standard - Option
recommended recommended
Printer Controller Option - Option - Option - Option - Option - Option
Supplies Toner, Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y T
Developer and Drum
Dimensions 500 400 550 400 550 579 468 579 468 579 550
(Width mm)
Dimensions 450 550 450 550 450 560 450 560 450 560 568
(Depth mm)
Dimensions 230 220 371 220 371 420 371 420 371 420 420
(Height mm)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
PRODUCT POSITIONING
The DMR12, DMR12F, DMR13 and DMR13F are copier-based digital machines. They do not
replace any existing digital machines but are designed to accelerate the migration from analogue to
digital.
The DMR12, due for launch in December 2001, is targeted to replace some of the analogue
CMR120A sales. Also, with improved features, it will completely replace the CMR121A from
December 2001 (improved zoom, print option and digital functionality).
The DMR13, due for launch in October 2001, is targeted to replace some of the analogue
CMR130C and CMR131C sales. The DMR13 is well featured (improved zoom, print option,
digital functionality and paper capacity) but the analogue machines will continue, as they offer an
A3 original copy (DMR13 is A4 only).
DMR13F and DMR12F, October and December 2001 launches respectively, are both pre-
configured with a fax controller. These two models will also replace the LFO multifunctional
machine, with improved print/copy speed, significantly improved fax features and print capability.
CMR131C
DMR13
CMR130C
CMR121A
DMR12
CMR120A
DMR13F
LFO DMR12F
Current range October 2001 December 2001
Analogue Machines Digital Machines
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Market Situation:
The DMR12, DMR12F, DMR13, and DMR13F fit into Infosource segment 1, for machines of
speeds from 12 to 19cpm. In terms of units, this segment represents over 50% of the total sold so
is of key importance. The overall market is predicted to shrink by 3% this year and remain flat over
the next few years.
At 35% digitalisation in the year 2000, the take up of digital models in this segment is low.
However, it should be noted that 2000 was 30% up on 1999 and forecasts for 2001 indicate that
60% of machines shipped will be digital.
Note:
Source of information: Infosource Autumn Report 2000, Infosource Spring Report 2000 and
Infosource 2000-2003 Long-Range Forecast report.
The graphs below indicate the current mix of analogue and digital, by brand:
Konica
S harp 6% Others
Figure 1: Segment 1, Analogue and 8% 20%
Digital, Year 2000 (Market Size: 669,204)
Xerox
9%
Ricoh
8%
Canon
21%
NRG
9%
Minolta Toshiba
9% 10%
Konica
Others
5%
Figure 2: Segment 1, Digital, Year 14%
Sharp
2000 (Market Size: 192,729) 19%
Canon
10%
Toshiba
4%
Minolta
Xerox 6%
22%
NRG
Ricoh 13%
7%
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Sharp
Konica
4%
6%
Others
Xerox
24%
3%
Ricoh
9%
Figure 3. Segment 1, Analogue,
Year 2000 (Market Size: 476,475 NRG
7%
M inolta
10% Canon
25%
Toshiba
12%
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
TARGET MARKET
The DMR12/F and DMR13/F are targeted at the following markets:-
Small office users (1-4 people) or business personal machines

Small businesses
Replace the traditional 12 15cpm analogue copier by offering the following features:
Compact in size: Smallest digital copier, thanks to A4 size
Easy to use: Simple operation, like analogue copiers
Quick response: Warm-up time only 20 sec. and first copy time 8 sec.
Expandable: Printer option added
Mid to large offices as a work group fax or division printer
Replace stand-alone fax machines or add another printer to the customer site with the
DMR12F/13F fax and print capability
Mid to large offices as a business personal machine
Personal use all-in-one (Copier + Fax + Printer) multi-function product in large offices
Offices where the average output is around 1K per month
With most of our products the Financial Manager and IT Manager are targeted. With the
DMR12/F/13/F, however, the machine is likely to be bought by the end user. This is likely to be
either the professional home users or very small offices of 2-4 people.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
PRINTER CONTROLLER
The DMR12/F and DMR13/F have new printer controllers, which are shared with the SF1 and SF2.
The Ethernet NIB and PostScript are common to the DMR15S and DMR18S.
System Structure:
SDRAM 32/64/128MB
(option)
IC card Slot for
programme download
(Service person use)
IEEE1284 I/F DIMM Slot
Printer Controller 1 bit Serial

Video I/F
DIMM Slot 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
DMR12/F
DMR13/F
PS2 Compatible
(option) NIB (option)
Printer Options:
# Items Remarks Compatibility

1 Printer Unit PCL5e, PCL6, PS2 compatible New (Version 2 will be
(Option) common with SF1)
2 32/64/128MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM (144pin) Common with Memory

option for DMR15S/18S,
DMR22/27, SF1, etc
3 PostScript2 Compatible with Adobe PS2 Common with DMR15S/18S

and SF1
4 NIB Ethernet card with RJ45 port Common with DMR15S/18S

and SF1
Note 1. : Memory option (#2) must be installed with Printer Unit (#1).
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Printer Function:
Collation:
Collation is available, when specified by the PCL or PS driver. Collation is not executed by the
driver, but by the RAM on the controller. Available pages for collation depends on the combination
of PDL and memory capacity. Please refer to Memory specification.
Slip Sheet:
This feature allows a slip-sheet after every page. You can select the tray for both printing paper and
slip-sheet paper from the printer driver. You can also select print or not print to slip-sheet.
When this feature is selected, Collation is disabled. This feature is NOT available for Mac users.
Auto Continue:
With this feature set On, printing continues automatically (after 10 seconds) even if the following
errors occur. However, the page where the error occurred may not be printed out correctly.
- Print Overrun
- Memory Overflow
- Memory Full
If Auto Continue is set Off, and one of the above errors occurs, the controller stops printing and
displays an error message on the operation panel.
User Operation:
Auto Continue Operation Result

Off Press OK Key Continue to print current job
Press Job Reset Key Cancel current job
On ---- Continue to print current job
Page Protect:
On and Auto (Default) are selectable for Page Protect. If the setting is On, users can avoid
the error Print Overrun. However, the productivity may slow down. Users are required to select
between On and Auto before sending the job.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Auto Tray Select:
This feature automatically searches for a tray with paper size that matches the designated ones in
the following order.
Start Point Tray 1

Tray 2
Bypass Tray:
In order to print from the Bypass Tray, the Bypass Tray needs to be specified by the printer driver.
Paper sizes available from the Bypass Tray, such as Custom Size, can be fed from the Bypass Tray,
using Auto Tray Select. However, paper sizes that are also available in other paper banks
(Tray1/Tray2), like Letter, A4, etc., cannot be fed from the Bypass Tray by using Auto Tray
Select.
Tray Locking:
When this feature is On, the machine will perform as follows:

a) Locked tray is not searched when using auto tray select by the printer driver.
b) Tray switch to locked tray, or switch from locked tray to another one is NOT practiced.
c) Bypass Tray cannot be specified as Locked Tray. Tray 1 and Tray 2 are available to use
as Locked Tray.
d) Only one tray can be specified as the Locked Tray.
Font Storage:
Even though DMR12/F and DMR13/F do not carry HDD, font storage is available on RAM
memory. These fonts are stored temporarily and, once you turn off the power, reset, or switch the
PDL, such as from PCL to PS, the stored font will not remain.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Driver function:
Major Driver Functions are as follows:
(Yes= available, No=not available, ** indicates default settings)
SETTING PCL5e/6 PS2 SELECTION OPTIONS REMARKS

(Display (Tab name) (Tab name)
Name)
User ID: Yes Yes Type 8 alphanumeric (a-z, User ID is used to identify the
(Set-up) (Set-up) A-Z, 0-9) characters. user associated with a job. It can
be monitored by
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin/Client to identify the user
in the job history (per job basis).
Layout: Yes Yes 1 page per sheet**
(Set-up) (Set-up) 2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Page Order: Yes No Right, then Down** Enabled only if Layout is set for
(Set-up) Down, then Right more than 2 pages per sheet.
Left, then Down
Down, then Left
Custom Yes Yes Measurement Unit: cm or
Paper (Paper) (Paper) Inch
Paper Yes Yes Same paper for all
Selection (Paper) (Paper) pages**
Different paper for first
page
Use slip sheet
Resolution Yes Yes PCL5e/6: only 600dpi
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) PS2: 300/600dpi**
selectable
Edge Yes Yes On** When this function is On,
Smoothing (Print Quality) (Print Quality) Off approximately 1200dpi
appearance
Toner Saver Yes Yes Off**
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) On
Page Yes Yes Auto** Refer to Page Protect for details
Protect (Print Quality) (Print Quality) On
Watermark Yes Yes (None)** Driver has 5 built-in watermarks.
(Watermarks) (Watermarks) CONFIDENTIAL etc. User can create others.
User Code Yes Yes Displays up to 8 numeric This is used for account
(Statistics) (Personality) characters management of the user or the
group (as a guideline). It can be
monitored by SmartNetMonitor
for Admin to refer to the
accumulated statistics.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Image of PCL 5e Printer Driver (Setup Screen)
Image of PS Driver (Setup Screen)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Printer Utility for Mac:
This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients. This
utility was originally bundled with MFPs controller options and LPs that support Adobe
PostScript3, and is installed into Apple Macintosh Clients connected to the MFPs and LPs through
EtherTalk network. As the DMR12/F and DMR13/F do not have Adobe Genuine PostScript, this
feature will not be fully supported. By using this software, Macintosh customers can download PS
fonts/files to the printers memory, or change Printer Name/Zone etc.
Note: Mac is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc. in several countries. When this utility name is
used in leaflets, catalogues or other materials, the following description must be added. Mac is
a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Menu structure:
After launching this utility, the Menu bar below appears (File, Edit, Utility and Help).
By selecting each menu, several functions are shown in each dropdown list.
File Edit Utility Help
Download PS Fonts Undo Download PostScript File About Help

Display Printers Cut Select Zone Display Help
Fonts
Initialise Printers Copy Display Printer Status
Disk
Page Set-up Paste Launch Dialogue Console
Print Fonts Catalog Clear
Print Fonts Sample Select
All
Rename Printer Font
Restart Printer Size
Quit
Functions:
- File Menu -
Download PS Fonts:
Download Adobe PS Type1 Fonts to printers memory.
The fonts downloaded to the printers memory will be deleted when the printing device
restarts or is switched off.
Display Printers Fonts:
The names of downloaded fonts are displayed on this Utility Screen. Also, it is possible to
delete the downloaded fonts by using this function.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Page Set-up:
Set up the paper size to print the Printer Font Catalog.
Print Font Catalog:
Print the names of available fonts.
Rename Printer:
Displays the Printer Name shown in Chooser and allows the customer to change the
printer name (Up to 31 alpha/numeric characters).
Restart Printer:
Restart the printer from this utility.
Utility Menu
Download PostScript File:
Download PostScript Files to printer.
Select Zone:
Change current Zone to another.
Display Printers Status:
Display Printer Name, Zone Name, Total VM capacity, Free VM capacity, Total
Disk Space and Free Disk space.
Launch Dialogue Console:
Open editor to create, update, save and download PS files interactively (This function is for
skilful customers in handling PostScript files).
[Note]: Initialise Printers Disk and Print Fonts Sample will NOT be supported for these
models
Localization:
English only
System Requirement:
Mac Hardware PowerPC
Mac OS MacOS8.x, 9.x
Network EtherTalk
Supported engines DMR12/F DMR13/F
PostScript Type 1018 PostScript level2 Compatible (DIF1018PS)
UNIX Support:
Printing out from UNIX is supported but as these are not GW architecture, Super Option is not
available. Ricoh will develop a UNIX filter to support output from the UNIX environment.
Sub Paper Size Setting (A4 Letter Override function):

With this function, even if the customer accidentally sends a Letter size print job to the machine that
does not have Letter paper but only A4 paper, the printer controller automatically feeds A4 paper
set as Sub Paper Size. The details of these features are as follows:
- When "A4 size job" is sent to printer controller and A4 size paper is not loaded in any paper
trays but Letter size paper is found, the printer controller automatically feeds the Letter size
paper as "Sub Paper Size" and prints. In the case of a "Letter size job" being sent, A4 paper is
fed in the same manner.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
- When Letter size paper runs out after an "A4 size job" is overridden to "Letter size job", the
printer controller asks the user to load Letter size paper unless the A4 size paper tray is set. In a
case where A4 and Letter size paper trays are set, the printer controller asks the user to load A4
size paper.
- When the "A4 Letter Override" functions, no "print area adjustment" is done (just print the
original image on the Sub Paper"), therefore there may be a lack of print image on each edge.
- This function is applied to "A4 Letter" only. ("A5 Half Letter" override is not supported).
- Customer can select this function "ON" or "OFF" at the printer features of User Tools (Default
Setting is OFF).
- This function is available for printing jobs from PCL5e/6 and PS2, and not for copying and fax.
Printer Related Features NOT available for these machines:

- ProofPrint
- Form Overlay
- Macro Storage
- Secured printing
- Form Feed
New CD-Launcher:
New CD-Launcher development code called Holly will be supplied for DMR12/F and DMR13/F.
This new launcher requires printer drivers and utilities, and enables users to install easily by Auto-
Run. By clicking Quick Install button, Holly will automatically install PCL6 and SmartNetMonitor
for Client. (Auto-Run is not available for Mac).
Note 1. : Auto-Run is not available for Mac.

Note 2. : This screen shot is taken from CD Version1.00.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Mainframe Specification
(Remarks: SEF: short-edge feed, LEF: long-edge feed)
Engine
DMR12/F DMR13/F Remarks

1. Technology:
a) Reading element Flatbed with CCD array image-sensor
b) Printing processing Laser beam scanning/marking & electro-
photographic printing.
Dry, dual component toner development
2. Dimensions (W x D x
H):
a) Standard configuration W468 x D450 x H371 mm
b) With ADF Height: Approx. 446mm
3. Weight: DMR12/13: 20kg or less

DMR12F/13F: 22kg or less
4. Input Capacity:
a) Standard All models: 250 sheets tray x 1
DMR12/F: 1 sheet bypass tray
DMR13/F: 100 sheets multi bypass tray
b) Options DMR13/F 500sheet Max total capacity:
DMR12/F: 251 sheets
DMR13/F: 850 sheets
5. Output Capacity:
a) Standard: 250 sheets (internal tray)
6. Paper size / weight:
a) Size: Standard Tray:
A5 (LEF), A4
51/2 x 81/2(LEF)-81/2 x 11(SEF)
Bypass Tray:
A5 A4
5 1/2x 8 1/2(SEF) 8 1/2x 14(SEF)
90 - 216 x 140 - 1260mm
(3.54 8.5 x 5.51 49.61)
b) Weight: Standard Tray: 60 to 90 g/m2
Bypass Tray: 60 to 157 g/m2
7. Rating power spec: 200V model: 220-240V, 50/60Hz
8. Power consumption: Full system: Less than 1.0KW
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Copier Features:
General Feature

st
1 copy speed Less than 8 seconds When polygon mirror motor
is spinning.
(A4 / 8 1/2 x 11 SEF from the standard tray,
no R/E)
Multi copy speed DMR12/F: 12cpm (12cpm one to one copying) .
DMR13/F: 13cpm (13cpm one to one copying)
(A4 / 8 1/2 x 11 LEF, no R/E)
Multiple copy Up to 99
Resolution 600 dpi
Grey Scale (per dot) Scanning: 256 levels, Marking: Binary
Warm-up time Less than 20 seconds 20 degrees C
Memory Capacity Standard: Please see section on

8MB memory configuration.
Enlargement 141, 200% 2E

Reduction 93, 71, 50% 3R
Zoom 50% to 200% in 1% steps
Image density Manual or automatic
adjustment
Interrupt copy Not available
Electronic counter DMR12/F: Electric counter (Mechanical
counter: service option)
DMR13/F: Mechanical counter and Electric

counter
User code Standard (10 codes, eight digits)
Language English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish,
Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Finnish, and
Hungarian. Russian language expected August
2002.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Machine Comparison:
DMR12 DMR12F DMR13 DMR13F

cpm 12cpm 12cpm 13cpm 13cpm
Bypass 1sheet 1sheet 100sheets 100sheets
tray
ADF Option Standard Option Standard
Platen cover Standard Standard Standard Standard
Paper bank No No Option Option
Supply THM THM Toner Toner
Toner Hopper Toner Hopper
Magazine Magazine
Fax unit Option* Standard Option Standard
Mechanical Service Service Standard Standard
Counter option option
Memory 8MB 8MB 8MB 8MB
(1MB for Fax (1MB for Fax SAF)
SAF)
*Installation of the fax unit is not recommended. Please refer to page 9 for details.
Enhanced Features:
DMR12/F DMR13/F
APS / AMS No
Auto tray switch Option (Available with optional paper bank.)
Directional No
magnification
Directional size No
magnification
Photo mode Standard (photo mode)
Auto start Standard
User program No
Duplex No
Electronic sort Option (32MB option memory required)
*Rotate sorting is not available.
Scan once copy many Standard
Image rotation No
Series copy No
Combine copy Standard (From 2 one-sided original to one-
sided copy)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Copy Speed Matrix:
-Continuous copying
Paper size DMR12 DMR12

(no reduction/enlargement)
A4/ 8.5*11 LEF 12 13
-ADF one to one copying
Paper size DMR12/F DMR13/F

(no reduction/enlargement)
A4/ 8.5*11 LEF 12 12
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
OPTION SPECIFICATIONS
Fax Features:
General Features:
DMR12F DMR13F Remarks

Circuit: PSTN, PBX
Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3
Resolution: 200 x 100dpi, 200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi
8 x 3.85 l/mm, 8 x 7.7 l/mm, 8 x 15.4 l/mm
Compression method: MH, MR, MMR
Scanning speed: Less than 2.4 second (200 x 100dpi, A4 / 81/2 x
11 SEF)
Number of Pages 16 pages/minute (ITV-T no1 chart, 200 x 100dpi,
Scanned: short edge feed)
Modem speed: Standard with Automatic Shift Down:
336000, 31200, 28800, 26400, 21600, 19200,
16800, 14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
Transmission speed: G3: Approx.3 seconds (200x100dpi, ITUT #1
chart, TTI off, memory transmission)
SAF memory: Standard: 1 MB Please see section on
Option: 3 MB (Total SAF memory should be memory configuration.
4MB)
Page memory Standard: 5.3 MB Option: no
Memory backup: 12 hours (After recharging for 7 days)
Super smoothing: Standard
Stamp: No
TTI/RTI: Standard
CSI: Standard
Quick dial: Standard (16 numbers)
Speed dial: Standard (50 numbers)
Group dial: Standard (5 groups, Max. 133 numbers per group)
Keystroke program: No
Redial: Standard
AI short protocol: Standard
Direct fax number Standard
entry:
Dual access: Standard
Restricted access: Standard (8 digits, 10 Personal Codes)
Label insertion: Standard
Auto document No
Telephone directory Standard
Page count No
Auto reduction No
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
General Features continued
Wild cards Standard

Summer time (day Standard
light saving time)
ID code programming Yes
User function key Standard (3 keys)
Night timer No
Energy saver Standard
LCD prompt Standard
Remaining memory Standard
indication
Time indicator /clock Yes / Standard
adjustment
User parameter Standard
setting
User data transfer Standard
Memory file transfer Standard
Transmission Features:

Immediate transmission Standard
Memory transmission Standard
Serial broadcasting Standard (Max. 133 numbers)
(later)
Send later Standard
Error correction mode Standard
Page retransmission Standard
Economy transmission No
Forwarding Standard
Batch transmission Standard
Parallel memory Standard (Automatically selected.)
transmission
Image rotation No
Book fax No
Transmission deadline No
Closed network No
(transmission)
Confidential No
transmission/with ID
Transfer request No
Transfer transmission No
Multi-step Transfer No
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Transmission Features continued
Polling transmission No
Double sided No
transmission
Transmission reserve No
Well log transmission No (Max. 1.26 m transmission is
(14m) available.)
Reception Features:

Automatic reception Standard
Manual reception Standard
Substitute reception Standard
Authorized reception No
Multicopy No
Reverse order printing No
Memory lock Yes
Confidential reception No
Special reception No
numbers
Closed network No
Polling reception Standard Free polling: Available
Polling with ID: Available
Poll later Standard
Polling from memory No
Multi-polling reception Standard
Continuous polling Yes
Reception time printing Standard
Centre mark Standard
Chequered mark Standard
2 in 1 (two in one) Yes
Image rotation No
Image reduction No
Economy printing No
mode
Duplex reception No
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Telephone Features:
DMR12 DMR13 Remarks

Handset / telephone No
Telephone connection Standard
Monitor speaker Standard
Automatic voice message No
Voice request No
On hook dial Standard
Tone transmission Standard
Pause Standard
Pulse/tone selection Standard
Chain dialling Standard
Reception mode Standard
selection
Automatic fax/phone Standard
change
Reception mode switch No
over (remote)
Answering machine Standard
interface
Reception mode No
switching timer
Auto answer delay time Standard (UP mode)
Busy tone detection Standard
Silent ringing detection No
(1300hz/16hz)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Printer Features:
General Specifications of Printer Controller:
DMR12/F DMR13/F
CPU Destiny ASIC D8401A 75MHz (PowerPC 401 microprocessor
embedded)
Memory Standard: 16MB SDRAM
Optional: 32MB or 64MB or128MB Max capacity: 144MB
Hard Disk Drive Not Available
Printer Description PCL5e
Language PCL6
Option: PostScript2 Compatible
Maximum Model DMR12/F 12ppm (A4 SEF / Letter SEF)
Continuous Model DMR13/F 13ppm (A4 SEF / Letter SEF)
Print Speed
Print Resolution PCL5e PCL6 PS2
300/600dpi*1 600dpi 300dpi/600dpi
Host Interface Standard: Parallel Port IEEE1284 (ECP)
Option: Network Port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
(NIC option required)
MIB support MIB II, SNMP Printer MIB and Host Resource MIB (RFC1759),
RICOH Private MIB
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions
(Printer Key Top is added on the left side of LCD)
LCD Language Same as mainframe
Drivers Win Win Win NT Win2000 Win Mac
95/98 NT NT 4.0 Professional, 3.1 8.x/9.x
/Me 3.51 4.0 TSE Server *2 /(X)*3
PCL5e Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes -
PCL 6 Yes - Yes Yes Yes Yes -
PS2 Yes - Yes - Yes - Yes

(PPD)
Supported Driver For PCL5e, PCL6
Language 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch,
(Localization) 7.Swedish, 8.Norwegian, 9.Danish, 10.Czech, 11.Hungarian,
12.Finnish, 13.Polish, 14.Portuguese
For PostScript2
1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.
Swedish 8. Norwegian 9. Danish
UNIX Filter (PS2) *4 Solaris 2.6, HP UX Red Hat Red Hat SCO AIX 4.3
7, 8 10.x, 11.0 Linux 6.x Linux 7 OpenServer
5.x
Installer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Device Option Yes Yes - Yes - -
Utility Software SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin
Fonts 45 PCL fonts (35 Intellifonts + 10 TrueType Fonts)
80 PS fonts (only available with PS option)
Euro currency font (PCL and PS)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Note*1: Only 600dpi is selectable from the printer driver

Note*2: Windows 3.1 driver is not included in the CD. Web release only.
Note*3: MacOS X (Classic) will be supported but MacOS X (Native) is TBC.
Note*4: PS2 (Option) is required
Network Interface Board (Option):
A Network Interface Board is necessary for network printing.
Model NIB DPO3000E (NetSilicon DPI)

Topology Ethernet 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T(auto detected)
Network Interface 1 x RJ45
Cables Requirement:
UTP/STP Cable
Category (Type5) or better
Frame Type Ethernet II, IEEE802.3, IEEE802.2, Ethernet_SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, (Auto Switching)
Network Operating Systems Novell NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5.x
Microsoft Windows NT4.0/2000
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Mac OS 8.x/9.x
Other functions for Printing IPP 1.0 support
Other function for Standard Web Browser access to HTML
Maintenance Management Access Program (MAP) utility
Telnet capability for TCP/IP
Netware set-up (NWSETUP) utility
Driver Specifications:
Operation System Remarks

PJL All Basic format is based on HP LJ4000/5000. Extended
specifications are based on Ricohs specification.
PCL5e Win95/98/Me, Resource: Software2000, development: Ricoh.
Driver WinNT4.0/2000 Equivalent to HP LJ4000/5000. Compatibility is in
conformity to HP LJ4000/5000.
PCL6 Win95/98/Me, Resource: Software2000, development: Ricoh. Equivalent to
Driver WinNT4.0/2000 HP LJ4000/5000. Protocol level is 2.0.
PS2 Win95/98/Me, Development: Destiny. Compatible with Adobe
Driver WinNT4.0/2000 PostScript level 2.0.
PS PPD Mac OS 8.x/9.x MacOS X (Classic): Supported
MacOS X (Native): TBC
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Memory Specifications:
- 144Pin SDRAM-DIMM
- PC100
- CL (CAS Latency) = 2
- Access time: 6ns
- 3.3Volt
- Capacity: 32MB, 64MB, 128MB
Number of pages stored in the memory when collating:

[Test condition]
OS: Windows 98SE
CPU: Pentium -800Mhz
Resolution: 600dpi
Paper Direction: LEF
Collate=ON
Copies=2
[Test 1] Cplxdoc1-PCL.doc_x50.doc
Word doc, total 100 pages [Letter]
PDL Stored pages by PDL
Memory Capacity PCL5e PCL6 PS2
Standard (16MB) 57 pages 32 pages 33 pages
48MB (Additional32MB) 100 pages (all) 100 pages (all) 100 pages (all)
[Test 2] B3068637.pdf
Acrobat Reader 4.05, total 92 pages [Letter]
48MB (Additional32MB) 92 pages (all) 92 pages (all) 92 pages (all)
[Test 3] PPoint50.ppt
PowerPoint 97 color print, total 200 pages [Letter]
48MB (Additional 4 pages 24 pages 14 pages
32MB)
64MB)
128MB)
Note: The number of pages that can be collated depends on the data.
Therefore the above test results are provided to you for reference.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Auto Document Feeder:

Original size: A4 - A5(SEF) LG - HLT
Original weight: 52 - 105 g/m2
Stack capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Power consumption: 50w or less
Dimensions (W x D x H): 110 x 360 x 95 mm, (Excluding the platen cover)
Weight: 2kg
Paper Bank (1 x 500 sheets):

Paper size: A4(SEF), 8 1/2 x 11(SEF), 8 1/2 x 13(SEF), 8 1/2 x 14(SEF)
8 1/4 x 13(SEF), 8 1/4 x 14(SEF)
Paper weight: 60-90 g/m2
Paper capacity: 500 x 1 tray (80 g/m2)
Power consumption: 15W or less
Dimensions (W x D x H): 430 x 414 x 140 mm
Weight: 6kg or less
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
IN THE BOX ACCESSORIES LIST

Main Unit:
Model DMR12/F DMR13/F
1 Platen Cover Yes
2 Operation Panel Symbol
3 Operating Instruction No (separate option)
4 Installation Procedure No
5 Multi Language ROM Yes
(For Operation Panel)
6 NECR (English) Yes
7 Branding and product name plaque Yes
8 Energy Star Sticker Yes (attached to machine)
9 Branding sticker for the operation Yes
panel
Remarks: Fax operations decal on are not included on the operation panel for DMR12F and
DMR13F. The decal should be provided with the fax operation instruction
Options:
Model ADF DF74 1 tray Paper Bank
PS480
1 Parts for Installation Yes Yes
2 Installation Procedure Yes Yes
(English)
3 NECR No No
4 Decal (Non-Word) Yes Yes
Options:
Model Fax DIF1013F
1 Parts for Installation Yes
2 Installation Procedure Yes
(English)
Remarks: Installation of the fax controller is not recommended. Please refer to page 9 for details.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Options:
Model Printer Controller
- DIF1013P
1 Parts for Installation Yes
2 Installation Procedure (English) Yes
3 CD (printer driver) Yes
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Sound Power Level:
Mainframe only Complete system

Copying 62dB or less 67dB or less
Stand-by 40dB or less 40dB or less
Ozone Emission Level:
0.02 mg/m3 or less
Dust Level:
0.075 mg/m3 or less
Styrene Emission Level:
Less than 0.07 mg/m3
Identification of Plastic Components:

All plastic components for the mainframe that weigh more than 25g are identified in accordance
with DIN54840 or ISO11469.
Power consumption:
Copier Only Fax & Printer

Installed
Low Power Mode Power Consumption 50w 60w
Default Interval 15 minutes 15 minutes
Recovery Time Less than 10 seconds Less than 10 seconds
Sleep Mode Power Consumption - Less than 20w
Default Interval - 30 minutes
Recovery Time - Less than 20 seconds
Auto Off Mode Power Consumption Less than 2w -
Default Interval 30 minutes -
Recovery Time Less than 20 seconds -
Environmental Regulation:
BAM Energy Star Swan Zesm Energy 2000

Yes Yes No No TBA
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
SUPPLIES AND RELIABILITY DATA
Supplies: Yield 1:
Toner 2 DT41BLK (DMR12/F) Average 7,000

Toner 2 DT40BLK (DMR13/F) Average 7,000
Photo-conductor Unit DMU24 Average 45,000
1
Notes: : Yield based on A4 6% Ricoh Chart
2
: Toner is new, toner from existing models cannot be used
Target User Classification and Reliability:
Average Printer Volume: DMR12/F: 1.5K (copy, fax, print total outputs)
DMR13/F: 2K (copy, fax, print total outputs)
Max printer Volume: All models: 5K (copy, fax, print total outputs)

Unit life Approx. 300K or 5 years, whichever
comes first
Duty Cycle 15K
Target MCBC 21.2K outputs PM:45, EM: 40K
PM cycle 45K
Please note that the above figures are design targets. The actual yields and reliability data
may vary, depending on the customers operation, maintenance conditions and servicing
history.
Machine Volume Definitions:
Average Monthly Volume (AMV) is the expected Average Monthly Volume (print/copy/fax) for
target customer.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is the recommended Maximum Monthly Volume for target
customer.
Machine Life (ML) is total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes or 5 years, whichever comes first.
Duty Cycle (DC) is maximum occasional peak volume to keep machine reliability (target Mean
Copies Between service Calls (MCBC) remains unchanged).
It is recommended that machines are placed to handle MMV and not Duty Cycle.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
WHAT FITS WHAT

Machine Nashuatec Rex Rotary Gestetner
DMR12 1205 1208 1202

DMR12F 1205f 1208F 1202f
DMR13 1305 1308 1302
DMR13F 1305f 1308F 1302f
Peripherals:
ADF (DMR12 and DMR13 only) DF74
Paper Bank (1 tray x 500 sheets, DMR13/F only) PS480
Fax Unit Type 1013 DIF1013F
Printer Controller Type 1013 DIF1013PV2
Or: DIF1013PV3***
PostScript 2 Type 1018 (Emulation) DIF1018PS
Printer Ethernet NIC Type 1018 DIF1018E
32MB Printer Memory DMEBP32
See Distributor Whiteboard for memory specifications
Low flat pack cabinet (for use on DMR13/F with PS480) DMR13SFPCABX
High flat pack cabinet (for use with DMR12/F/13/F with no
paperbank) DMR13HFPCABX
Supplies
Black toner, DMR12/F DT41BLK
Black toner, DMR13/F DT40BLK
PCU Type 1013, all models DMU24
Language Sets:
Copier: Fax: Printer Printer Language:
(DIF1013PV2): (DIF1013PV3)***:
DDK1013GB DDK1013FGB DDK1013PV2GB DDK1013PV3GB English
DDK1013F DDK1013FF DDK1013PV2F DDK1013PV3F French
DDK1013D DDK1013FD DDK1013PV2D DDK1013PV3D German
DDK1013I DDK1013FI DDK1013PV2I DDK1013PV3I Italian
DDK1013P DDK1013FP DDK1013PV2P DDK1013PV3P Portuguese
DDK1013N DDK1013FN DDK1013PV2N DDK1013PV3N Norwegian
DDK1013S DDK1013FS DDK1013PV2S DDK1013PV3S Swedish
DDK1013CZ DDK1013FCZ DDK1013PV2CZ DDK1013PV3CZ Czech
DDK1013PL DDK1013FPL DDK1013PV2PL DDK1013PV3PL Polish
DDK1013H DDK1013FH DDK1013PV2H DDK1013PV3H Hungarian
DDK1013SF DDK1013FSF DDK1013PV2SF DDK1013PV3SF Finnish
*Installation of the fax controller is not recommended. Please refer to page 9 for details.
Please apply to your Regional Sales Manager if you wish to receive a price for this item. Please
note that this item may not be held ex-stock.
Note: Both the copier operator instruction DDK1013xx and fax language set DDK1013Fxx
are required with the DMR12F and DMR13F.
***DIF1013PV2 will be replaced by DIF1013PV3 from April 2003.
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
COMPETITIVE COMPARISON
NRG Brother Canon Konica Muratel

Functions: LFO CMR120A CMR121A DMR12 DMR12F CMR130C CMR131C DMR13 DMR13F MFC-9750 MFC-9750 PC860 PC890 NP6512 1212 1312 MFX120
LT
Analogue / D A A D D A A D D D D A A A A A D
Digital
Copy Speed 10 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
(cpm)
Warm-up Time 15 15 15 20 20 35 35 20 20 45 45 0 0 0 55 20 TBC
(seconds)
First Copy 12 9 9 8 8 6.9 6.9 8 8 18 18 10 10 10 7.5 7.9 12
Speed
(seconds)
Max. Original A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A3 A3 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A3 A4 A4
Multi-copies 1-99 1-50 1-50 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-100 1-100 1-100 1-99 1-99 TBC
Standard Paper 150 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 2 x 250 250 250 250 250 250 500
Capacity
Extra Capacity 100 - - - - - - 250 250 250 - - - - 250 250 500
Bypass 1 1 1 1 1 80 80 100 100 1 1 1 50 50 50 1 50

Capacity
Document 30 - - Opt 30 30 - Opt 30 Opt 30 30 50 50 - 30 - - - 50
Feeder (sheets)
Zoom (%) 50-200 - 70-141 50-200 50-200 - 61-141 50-200 50-200 25-400 25-400 70-141 70-141 70-141 60-165 70-141 50-200
Consumables T/D T/D T/D HT/D HT/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D T/D T/D T/D AIO AIO AIO T/D/D T/D/D T/D
Copier Memory 244KB - - 8 8 - - 8 8 2 10 - - - - - 8

(MB)
Max. Copier 4.244 - - 40 40 - - 40 40 18 18 - - - - - 16
Memory (MB)
Printer Opt - - Opt Opt - - Opt Opt Std Std - - - - - Opt
Fax Std - - Opt Std - - Opt Std - - - - - - - Std
Network Opt - - Opt Opt - - Opt Opt No No - - - - - Opt

Option
Max. Monthly 2000 3000 3000 5000 5000 7500 7500 5000 5000 2500 2500 2000 2000 4000 6000 5000 TBC
Volume
Date Launched 11/97 06/99 06/99 12/01 12/01 03/00 03/00 10/01 10/01 04/00 04/00 10/99 10/99 10/99 03/96 09/99 2001
Fax Modem 14400 - - 33600 33600 - - 33600 33600 - - - - - - - 14400

Speed (Kbps)
Copy 400 - - 600 600 - - 600 600 600 600 - - - - - 600
Resolution
(dpi)
DMR12 / 12F / 13 / 13F
Competitive Comparison continued
Kyocera Mita Lanier Minolta Oce Sharp Olivetti Panasonic Toshiba Xerox
Functions: DC-1460 DC-1470 CC-60 7214 EP1030 EP1031 EP1030F EP1031F 3012 AL-1220 AR-121E Copia Copia FP-7713 1360 1370 214PC 214DC
9912A 9912B
Analogue / A A A A A A A A A D D D D A A A D D
Digital
Copy Speed 14 14 12 14 13 13 13 13 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14
(cpm)
Warm-up 30 30 30 30 11 11 11 11 15 0 0 0 0 37 27 27 40 40
Time
(seconds)
First Copy 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.9 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 10 9.5 9.6 9.6 9.5 6.5 7.7 7.7 6 6
Speed
(seconds)
Max. Folio Folio Folio A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 B4 B4 B4 B4 B4 A3 Folio Folio B4 B4
Original
Multi-copies 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-199 1-199 1-100 1-100
Standard 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 500 500
Paper
Capacity
Extra - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 250 250
Capacity
Bypass 1 1 1 - 1 30 1 30 1 50 1 1 50 50 1 1 50 50
Capacity
Document - 50 - - - - 50 50 - 30 0 - 30 - - - Opt 30 Opt 30
Feeder
(sheets)
Zoom (%) 70-141 70-141 70-141 64-129 - 64-156 - 64-156 64-156 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 65-141 - 65-141 50-200 50-200
Consumables T/D/D T/D/D TBC T/D/D T/D T/D T/D T/D T/D/D T/D T/D/D TBC T/D TBC T/D/D T/D/D AIO AIO
Copier - - - - - - - - - TBC TBC - TBC - - - TBC TBC

Memory
(MB)
Max. Copier - - - - - - - - - TBC 12 - TBC - - - TBC TBC
Memory
(MB)
Printer - - - - - - - - - GDI Opt GDI Opt GDI Std GDI Opt - - - Std -
Fax - - - - - - - - - - - Std - - - - - -
Network - - - - - - - - - - - No - - - - Third party -

Option
Max. 3000 3000 1000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 3000 3000 5000 4000 3000 5000 10000 10000 3500 3500
Monthly
Volume
Date 05/98 05/98 06/98 03/98 11/97 01/98 11/97 01/98 03/96 01/99 08/00 04/99 01/99 01/98 06/97 06/97 06/98 07/98
Launched
Fax Modem - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Speed
(Kbps)
Copy - - - - - - - - - 600 600 - 600 - - - 600 600
Resolution
(dpi)
Note: Please also see the Competitive Comparison in the NPS for the DMR15S/18S/18D.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR13A
Digital 13ppm
Standalone Copier
Nashuatec 1315
Rex Rotary 1318
Gestetner 1312
First
April, 2003 June, 2003 China

Date Created: March, 2003
Version 2
April, 2003
DMR13A
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview and Main Features 3
Product Configuration 5
Target Market 12
What Fits What 19
Competitor Products 20
Product specifications may change during a products life and,

if in doubt, you are advised to contact NRGI Guernsey for
confirmation of exact product details.
K:\Company\Market\NPS\DMR13A.doc 1
DMR13A
INTRODUCTION
The DMR13A is a standalone A3 digital copier, designed to convert our analogue MIF into digital.
It is an inexpensive, simple operation device with a comparable cost per page price to analogue
appealing to existing analogue users. It also has the added benefits of digital technology with the
optional memory.
Our mission is to increase our segment 1 digital market share by accelerating the analogue to digital
conversion. We want to have a complete digital product line-up, as by the end of 2003 we will only
have one analogue product in our range, the CMR151C.
Analogue sales are continuing to drop at a huge rate in the European market and as always the trend
will impact the rest of the world. An evolving trend is that many office automation manufacturers
are now pulling out of the analogue market and are concentrating their research and development in
digital document solution products.
We predict that by 2004 manufacturing will have completely switched to digital.
Another aim of our manufacturer is to be the number 1 environmental company, by using

environmentally friendly materials in various parts of our machines such as controller boards with
less lead content to meet the requirements of the Environment Protection Act. Analogue products,
which do not meet the needs of the Environment Protection Act, will have to be discontinued. The
DMR13A is designed to replace these analogue products.
DMR13A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW AND MAIN FEATURES

The DMR13A is a new standalone A3 digital copier, with a very simple operation, appealing to
existing analogue users. With the optional 16MB of copier memory your customers can benefit
from scan once, copy many, which places less stress on the scanner and moving parts of the copier.
This ensures there is no deterioration of your original and is more productive as users can take away
their original as soon as it is scanned. The copier memory will also give you electronic sorting
again making users more productive when copying multiple sets of originals.
DMR13A shown with optional ADF fitted:

Optional ADF (30 sheets)
Internal Output Tray

Capacity 250 sheets Multi Bypass Tray (100 sheets)
Standard Paper Trays:

DMR13A = 1 x 250 sheets
Main features are:
Separate toner and drum

Easy to install and use
Comparable Cost per Page with analogue machines
Fast first copy speed (6.9 seconds) and high productivity
Small footprint
Warm-up time of 25 seconds
Environmentally friendly
Easy jam recovery (automatic release of paper feed on opening the side door)
DMR13A
Product Overview And Main Features (Continued):

Copier
600dpi copy quality

13cpm copy
Zoom from 50 200%
3 Enlargements, 122%, 141% and 200%
4 Reductions, 93%, 82%, 71% and 50%
50 User codes of 8 digits
Operation Panel
DMR13A
PRODUCT CONFIGURATION
The standard DMR13A comes with 1 x 250 sheet paper tray and 1 x 100 sheet, multi bypass tray.
The machines and options are detailed below:
ADF
Platen Cover
(PC1018) (DF72)
13cpm
DMR13A
250
Cabinet
(DMR15LFPCABX)
Note: These hardware peripherals are common with DMR15S/18S/18D
DMR13A
Internal Options:
Copier: Memory 16MB (DME1018) same for DMR15S
Memory 32MB (DME185P32) same for DMR15S/18S/D (when you attach
32MB, 16MB is mandatory)
Configuration Requirements DMR13A:

- must install together - cannot install together
Copier memory
32MB Memory
Platen Cover
(DIMM)
16MB
ADF
Purchasing Option
Platen Cover
ADF
Copier memory
16MB
32MB Memory
(DIMM)
*16MB copier memory is mandatory when installing the ADF

Without memory, scan once copy many feature is not supported
When you attach 32MB, 16MB is mandatory
Languages (Operation Panel):
The DMR13A has six languages installed in the machines firmware. The following languages will
be installed in each machine at the factory:
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
A further seven languages will be available to download:

Swedish
Norwegian
Finnish
Czech
Hungarian
Polish
Portuguese
Service engineers, using existing tools, can easily handle the replacement of the languages.
DMR13A

Specification: DMR12 DMR13 CMR130C/CMR13 DMR13A CMR151C DMR15S: DMR18S/D:
1C (zoom)
Copy Speed (cpm) 12 13 13 13 15 15 18
Max paper size A4 A4 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Standard Paper Capacity (sheets) 250 + 1 sheet 250 + 100 sheet 250 + 80 sheet 250 + 100 sheet 500 sheets + 80 250 + 100 sheet 500 + 100 sheet
bypass bypass bypass bypass sheet bypass bypass bypass
Maximum Paper Capacity (sheets) 251 850 330 350 580 1,350 1,600
Expected Average Monthly 1.5k 2k 1.5k-3k 3k 4.5k 3.5k 4k

Volume
Maximum Monthly Volume 5k 5k 7.5k 10k 10k 10K 10K
First Copy Speed (Seconds) 8 8 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9
APS/AMS No No No No No Yes Yes
Scan once, copy many Yes Yes No Yes with optional No Yes with optional Yes
memory memory
Electronic sort Yes with optional Yes with optional No Yes with optional No Yes with optional Yes
memory memory memory memory
Image Rotation No No No No No Yes with optional Yes
memory
Enlargements 2E 2E 2E (not CMR130C) 3E 3E 3E 3E
Reductions 3R 3R 3R (not CMR130C) 4R 4R 4R 4R
Copier Memory standard (MB) 8MB 8MB - 0MB - 0 16MB
Copier Memory options (MB) 32MB 32MB - 16MB, 32MB - 16/32 32MB
Supplies AIO cartridge Toner, Developer & Toner, Developer & Toner, Developer & Toner, Developer & Toner, Developer & Toner, Developer &
Drum Drum Drum Drum Drum Drum
Dimensions W550xD450xH371 W550xD450xH371 W579xD560xH420 W550xD568x420H W579xD560xH420 W550xD568xH420 W550xD568xH518
DMR13A
PRODUCT POSITIONING
The DMR13A is a standalone digital copier. It does not replace any existing digital machines
but is designed to accelerate the migration from analogue to digital. The CMR130C/131C
will be discontinued by 3rd quarter 2003. The CMR151C will remain our only analogue
product up to at least the end of 2003.
New
DMR18S/D 18cpm
DMR15S New
15cpm
CMR151C
CMR131C
DMR13A
A3
CMR130C DMR13 New

13cpm
A4
01 02 03 04 05
= Analogue machines = Digital machines
It is essential that we sell the DMR13A as a replacement to our 13 and 15 analogue machines.
It is very simplistic appealing to existing analogue users and has a comparable cost per page
to analogue.
DMR13A
Market Situation:
The DMR13A fits into Infosource Category 1, which covers copiers in the range of 1-19ppm.
In terms of units, this segment represents over 50% of the total units sold, so is of significant
importance to us. Coupled with the decline in the analogue market the DMR13A is a key
product for us to accelerate the analogue to digital conversion
The following graphs are from Infosource Autumn 2002 Report and show activity in the
market.
Total Market
With close to 1.5 million units, 15% more copiers were sold in January-June 2002 than in the
same period a year earlier. Growth over the full year is projected to reach 26% with over 3.2
million units.
European Market: Photocopy Industry 1998-2002
3,500,000
3,300,000
3,100,000
2,900,000
2,700,000
2,500,000
2,300,000
2,100,000 To tal M arket
1,900,000
1,700,000
1,500,000
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 proj.
B&W office, analogue v- digital
The steep decline in the sales of analogue copiers continues, dropping from 38% to 22% of
the office market in 1st half 2002. Digital equipment enjoyed a corresponding rise.
European Market: Photocopy Industry 1998-2002

1,000,000
900,000
800,000
700,000
600,000
500,000
400,000
B &W Off. A nalo g
300,000 B &W Off. Digital
200,000
100,000
-
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 proj.
DMR13A
European Market Share Analogue, Category 1, estimated 1st 6 months 2002 by Brand
(market size 105,402)
CANON
2%
0% DEVELOP
10%
KONICA
4% MINOLTA
35% NRG
10% OCE
OLIVETTI
4% PANASONIC
5% RICOH
1% SHARP
6% 5% TOSHIBA
11% 7%
XEROX
OTHERS
European Market Share Digital, Category 1, estimated 1st 6 months 2002 by Brand
CANON
INFOTEC
9% 7%
4% KONICA
7% 3%
KYOCERA MITA
LANIER
10%
7% MINOLTA
NRG
4%
9% OCE
7% OLIVETTI
RICOH
SHARP
17% 13%
3%
0% TOSHIBA
XEROX
OTHERS
DMR13A
European Market Share, Category 1 Analogue & Digital, Estimated 12 months of 2002
CANON
INFOTEC
7%
5% KONICA
20%
KYOCERA MITA
8% LANIER
2% MINOLTA
6% 4% NRG
OCE
6% OLIVETTI
PANASONIC
14% 3%
RICOH
8% SHARP
3%
4%0% 10% TOSHIBA
XEROX
OTHERS
DMR13A
TARGET MARKET
The DMR13A is targeted at the following markets:
Replacing existing analogue machines in small offices with copy demands of less than
3,000 per month
Replace the 13cpm analogue copier by offering the following features:
Simple and easy to use digital features such as scan once, copy many (with
optional 16MB memory)
Space saving by wingless design
Small office (1-4 users)
Business personal users
Small workgroup within mid to large offices
The competitors analogue machines
DMR13A
General Specifications:
Technology:
Reading Element Flatbed with moving CCD array image sensing element
Print Processing Laser beam scanning/marking & electrophotographic
printing.
Dry, dual component toner development.
Dimensions (W x D x H (mm)):
Standard configuration: DMR13A 550 x 568 x 420
With ADF (Height approx): DMR13A 510
Weight: DMR13A 34 Kg or less

(75lbs)
Input Capacity:
DMR13A 1 tray x 250 sheets
Multi-bypass x 100 sheets
Output Capacity:
Standard 250 sheets (internal tray)
Paper Size / Weight:

a) Size Standard tray: A5 (LEF) A3 (SEF)
Bypass tray: A6 (SEF) A3 (SEF)
b) Weight Standard tray: 60 90 g/m2
Bypass tray: 52 162 g/m2
Power Specifications: 100V model: 110 120V, 50 / 60 Hz

200V model: 220 240V, 50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption: Full system = less than 1.2 KW
First Copy Speed: < 6.9 seconds (A4, LEF from tray 1, no R/E)
DMR13A
Product Specifications (continued):
Multi Copy Speed: DMR13A 13cpm (13cpm 1-1 copying)

(A4, LEF no R/E)
Multiple Copy: Up to 99
Resolution: 600dpi
Grey Scale (per dot): Scanning: 64 levels, Marking: Binary
Warm-up Time: < 25 seconds at 20C
Memory Capacity:
a) Standard DMR13A: 0MB
b) Option DMR13A: 16MB and 32MB
Enlargement: 3E (122, 141, 200%)
Reduction: 4R (93, 82, 71, 50%)
Zoom: 50 200% in 1% steps
Image Density Adjustment: Manual or Automatic
Interrupt Copy: Not available
Electronic Counter: Standard
User Codes: Standard (50 codes, 8 digits)
Languages: English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,

Swedish, Norwegian, Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Finnish,
Hungarian
Enhanced Specifications
APS/AMS: No
Since APS is not supported, the machine cannot detect the
orientation of the original document. Therefore, please set
the original document in the same direction as the paper in
the input tray, otherwise a miscopy will happen.
Auto Tray Switch: No
Directional Magnification
(% size): No
DMR13A
Enhanced Specifications (continued):
Photo Mode: Standard
Auto Start: Standard
User Program: No
Duplex: No
Electronic Sort: With 16MB memory
Scan Once, Copy Many: Yes, with 16MB of memory
Image Rotation: No
Series Copy: No
Combine Copy: No
Double Copy: No
Erase Centre/Border: No
Repeat Copying: No
Stapling: No
Stamp Features: No
Cover/Sheet Insertion: No
DMR13A
Copy Speeds
Continuous Copying DMR13A A4 13ppm

(no reduction or A3 6ppm
enlargement):
ADF One to One Copying DMR13A A4 13ppm

(no reduction or A3 6ppm
enlargement):
Copier Peripherals
Auto Document Feeder (DF72):

Original Size: A5 A3 (SEF)
Original Weight: 52 105 g/m2
Stack Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
Power Consumption: 25W or less
Dimensions: (W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 90mm
Weight: 7 Kg
DMR13A
As a leading manufacturer in producing environmentally friendly machines, you are able to

publish to your customers the following information. This covers noise levels, BAM
standards (which indicate whether a part is recyclable), environmental marks (e.g. Energy
Star, Swan etc.), power consumption, ozone & styrene emission levels and dust levels.
Sound Power Level:

Mainframe: Complete System:
Copying: 63dB 67dB
Standby: 40dB 40dB
Ozone Emission Level: 0.02 mg/m3 or less
Dust Level: 0.075 mg/m3 or less
Styrene Emission Level: Less than 0.07 mg/m3
Identification of Plastic All plastic parts which weigh more than 25g are identified
Components: according to DIN45840 or ISO11469
Environmental Regulations: BAM: Yes

Energy Star: Yes
Swan: No
Power
Consumption:
Low Power Mode Power Consumption 70wh

Default Interval 15 min
Recovery Time Less than 30 secs.
Sleep Mode Power Consumption -
Default Interval -
Auto Off Mode Power Consumption Less than 1wh
Default Interval 30 min
DMR13A

Supplies: Yield 1:
Toner DT34BLK (260g cartridge) Average 9,000

Developer DD6BLK (365g bag) Average 60,000
DMU21 OPC Drum B0399510 Average 60,000
1
Reliability:
Machine Life (ML): 5 years or 600,000, whichever comes

first
Expected Average Monthly Volume (AMV): DMR13A: 3,000 pages
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV): 10,000 pages
Duty Cycle (DC): 30,000 pages
Please note that the above figures are design targets. The actual yields and reliability
data may vary, depending on the customers operation, maintenance conditions and
servicing history.
Average Monthly Volume (AMV) is the expected Average Monthly Volume

(print/copy/fax) for target customer.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is the recommended Maximum Monthly Volume for
target customer.
Machine Life (ML) is total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes or 5 years, whichever comes
first.
Duty Cycle (DC) is maximum occasional peak volume to keep machine reliability (target
Mean Copies Between service Calls (MCBC) remains unchanged).
It is recommended that machines be placed to handle MMV and not Duty Cycle.
DMR13A
WHAT FITS WHAT

DMR13A 1315 1318 1312
Peripherals:
PC1018 Platen Cover
DF72 ADF
DME1018 16MB Copier Memory
DME185P32 32MB Copier Memory
DMR15LFPCABX Large Cabinet
Supplies
DT34BLK Toner, 260g cartridge Yield 9,000 at 6%
B0399510 DMU21 Photoconductor unit Yield 60,000 at 6%
DD6BLK Developer, 365g bag Yield 60,000 at 6%
Operating Instructions Language Sets:

Language: Copier:
English DDK1113GB
French DDK1113F
German DDK1113D
Italian DDK1113I
Portuguese DDK1113P
Norwegian DDK1113N
Swedish DDK1113S
Czech DDK1113CZ
Polish DDK1113PL
Hungarian DDK1113H
Finnish DDK1113SF
Copier Quick Copy DDK1018AR
Guide Arabic
DMR13A
COMPETITOR PRODUCTS
We see the DMR13A primarily replacing our own analogue products, but of course other
manufacturers analogue machines will also be in competition with the DMR13A.
The following machines can be seen as the main competitors for the DMR13A:
Analogue Machines:
Canon PC890 12ppm
Minolta EP1030 13ppm
Konica 1312 12ppm
Minolta EP1030F 13ppm
Canon NP6512 12ppm
Extracts from What to buy for business September 2002
Canon PC890 12ppm, A4

The Canon PC890 is a reasonably featured model, offering 250 sheet on-line paper tray, a 50
sheet bypass and 30 sheet document feeder all as standard. In an ever-decreasing analogue
market, this is a good workhouse, with reasonable speed output, albeit a low monthly volume
(1,000). First-copy time is 10 seconds and with a maximum daily output of 50 copies this
machine is suitable for a small office. However, new digital models are available at around
this price with a larger volume and better speeds.
Minolta EP1030 13ppm

The EP1030 from Minolta has been on the market for over four years and is a pretty standard
workhorse, with 13cpm A4 speed and a basic feature set. It promises a monthly volume of
5000 copies, with a 250 sheet paper tray and a single sheet bypass. There is no reduction
facility.
Konica 1312 - 12ppm

The Konica 1213 is a basic A4 analogue copier with a monthly volume of 5000 copies, based
on a speed of 12ppm. The feature set is standard although it does offer an optional 250 sheet
paper tray. There is a 70-141 per cent zoom feature, which is missing from many machines
at this price point.
Minolta EP1030F 13ppm

The Minolta EP1030F is a desktop model capable of handling A4 at 13cpm. It does have a
semi automatic document feeder for up to 50 originals as standard, which is exceptional in
the analogue segment. Paper handling is standard with a 250 sheet online tray and a single
page bypass. There is no zoom facility. Monthly volume is 5000 copies.
DMR13A
Canon NP6512 12ppm

The Canon NP6512 is a standard A4 analogue copier with a surprisingly low monthly volume
of 4000, although it offers 12ppm. It has a standard 250 sheet on line paper tray with a 50
sheet bypass and auto paper select. However, in this price bracket you can get more for your
money speed and output wise.
Please also see the NRG Competitor Newsletter for information on low-end digital
competitor models launched March 2003. If you are not receiving this newsletter by e-mail,
please ask our Training Manager to add you to the mailing list.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR15S / DMR18S / DMR18D

Digital 15 / 18ppm
Nashuatec 1505 / 1805 / 1805d

Rex Rotary 1508 / 1808 / 1808d
Gestetner 1502 / 1802 / 1802d
First
DMR15S March, 2001 May, 2001 China

DMR18S March, 2001 May, 2001 China
DMR18D October, 2001 November, 2001 China

Version 10
January, 2002
DMR15S/18S/18D
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Target Market 14
What Fits What 29
Competitors Comparison 30

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\ DMR15S_18S_18D.doc 1

DMR15S/18S/18D
INTRODUCTION
The DMR15S/18S are simplex only digital copiers, designed to replace the existing DMR15/18
machines. The DMR18D is a new duplex model, which will be launched in November 2001.
Obviously, these second generation machines offer several enhancements and new features but,
specifically, the new models offer two major advantages over the existing machines:
Competitive Cost per Page

Competitive machine price
Segment 1 (1 20cpm) is a key market, commanding over 50% of total units sold in Western
Europe, ye t it has some of the lowest levels of digitalisation (35% in 2000). Our aim is to
encourage true migration from analogue (with corresponding connectivity and, therefore, increased
volumes) without compromising our analogue sales.
These second-generation digital machines have been designed to offer all the major digital features.
Significantly, the 15cpm model will now offer a fax option and additional paper tray options.
With the introduction of the new printer controller for the DMR18D duplex machine, there have
been some enhancements to printing functionality. Please read further for more details.

DMR15S/18S/18D

The DMR15S/18S are two new digital machines with copy/print speeds of 15/18ppm. These
machines replace the current digital DMR15/18 models. The DMR18D is a new model with duplex
as standard and with a copy/print speed of 18ppm.
DMR15S shown with optional ADF fitted:
Optional ADF (30 sheets), ARDF (50 sheets)

Multi Bypass Tray (100 sheets)
Standard Paper Trays:

DMR15S = 1 x 250 sheets
DMR18S/18D = 2 x 250 sheets
Main features are:
Separate toner and drum

Easy to install and use
Competitive Cost per Page with analogue machines
Fast first copy speed and high productivity
Small footprint (one of the smallest copiers ever launched by NRG)
Modular functionality (can be upgraded)
Improved warm- up time (reduced from 40 seconds to 25 seconds)
Toner recycling system (environmentally friendly)
Easy jam recovery (automatic release of paper feed on opening the side door)

DMR15S/18S/18D
Product Overview And Main Features (Continued):
Copier, Printer, Fax Selling Points:
600dpi copy and print quality

15/18ppm copy and print speeds
Zoom from 50 200%
Easy to install print and fax options (approximately 5 minutes each)
PCL6/5e and PS2 emulation (option)
Slip sheet insertion
Super G3 fax modem (33.6Kbps)
Large paper capacity up to 1,350 (DMR15S) and 1,600 (DMR18S)
Printer Copier
Fax
Printer Functionality:
The following points should be noted when the printer option is installed:
Rotate sort will be supported by the second version printer controller (DIF1018PV2)*
Rotate sort is NOT supported by the first printer controller (DIF1018P)
Duplex printing is NOT possible using paper in the bypass tray
Fonts can be downloaded and temporarily stored in RAM memory only
Proof printing, form overlay, macro storage and secure printing are NOT available
Auto Continue: This feature allows printing to continue after ten seconds, automatically,
even when the wrong size paper request has been sent, i.e. sending letter sized print job but
only A4 paper available - job will print on A4 paper
Slip Sheet: This feature allows a slip sheet to be inserted after every page
* This requires additional memory (32MB or more) to be fitted to the printer controller and
A4, SEF and LEF to be available in two paper trays.

DMR15S/18S/18D
The standard DMR15S comes with 1 x 250 sheet paper tray and 1 x 100 sheet, multi bypass tray.
The standard DMR18S comes with 2 x 250 sheet paper trays and 1 x 100 sheet, multi bypass tray.
The DMR18D is the same as the DMR18S except that duplex is standard on the machine. The
machines and options are detailed below:
Platen Cover ADF AR DF * Only for DMR18D
(PC1018) (DF72) (DF71)
15cpm 18cpm 18cpm Duplex
DMR18S DMR18D
DMR15S 250 250
250 250 250
1 Tray Paper Bank 2 Tray Paper Bank

(PS460) (PS450)
500 500
500
Cabinet
Cabinet
(DMR15LFPCABX) Cabinet
(DMR15MFPCABX)
(DMR15SRCABX)
Notes:
1. You can attach either 1 tray or 2 tray paper bank

2. Cabinet sizes are the same as for DMR15/18 but the colour is different

DMR15S/18S/18D
Internal Options:
Copier: Memory 16MB, DMR15S only (DME1018)

Memory 32MB} Common with DMR22/27 (DME185P32)
Fax: Fax option (DIF1018F)
* There are no additional fax options
Printer: Printer Controller (DIF1018P or DIF1018PV2)
PostScript 2 option, emulation (DIF1018PS)
Ethernet Network Card (DIF1018E)
Printer Memory 32MB (DMEBP32)
Notes:
1. There are no common external options between the new DMR15S/18S/18D and the existing
DMR15/18. External options for the new models will be in a new colour, to match the
colour of the mainframe.
2. The 32MB printer memory is common between the DMR15S/18S/18D and the DMR15/18.
Configuration Requirements DMR15S:
- must install together X - cannot install together
Option
32MB Copier
16MB Copier
Platen Cover
1 Tray Paper
2 Tray Paper
Memory
Memory
Bank
Bank
ADF
Option
Platen Cover X
ADF* X
1 Tray Paper Bank X
2 Tray Paper Bank X
16MB Copier
Memory
32MB Copier
Memory
* When installing the ADF, the 16MB Copier Memory is required to support the multipage
copy functionality (i.e. scan once, print many).

DMR15S/18S/18D
Configuration Requirements DMR18S:
X - cannot install together
Option
32MB Copier
Platen Cover
1 Tray Paper
2 Tray Paper
Memory
Bank
Bank
Option ADF
Platen Cover X
ADF X
1 Tray Paper Bank X
2 Tray Paper Bank X
32MB Copier
Memory
Configuration Requirements DMR18D:
X - cannot install together
Option
32MB Copier
Platen Cover
1 Tray Paper
2 Tray Paper
Memory
ARDF
Bank
Bank
ADF
Option
Platen Cover X X
ADF X X
ARDF X
1 Tray Paper Bank X
2 Tray Paper Bank X
32MB Copier
Memory

DMR15S/18S/18D
Languages:
The DMR15S/18S/18D can accept six languages installed in the machines firmware. The
following languages will be installed in each machine at the factory:
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
A further seven languages will be available to download:
Swedish
Norwegian
Finnish
Czech
Hungarian
Polish
Portuguese
Service engineers, using existing tools, can easily handle the replacement of the languages.

DMR15S/18S/18D
Specification: DMR15S: DMR18S/D: DMR15: DMR18: CMR151C: CMR181C:

Copy Speed (cpm) 15 18 15 18 15 18
Standard Paper Capacity (sheets) 350 600 350 350 580 580
Maximum Paper Capacity (sheets) 1,350 1,600 350 1,350 580 580
Expected Average Monthly Volume 3,500 4,000 3,000 3,000 4,500 4,500
Maximum Monthly Volume 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K
Machine Life Five years or 600K, whichever comes first Five years or 600K, whichever
comes first
First Copy Speed (Seconds) 6.9 6.9 6.5 6.5 6.9 6.5
Warm-up Time (Seconds) 25 25 40 40 45 45
Enlargements 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E 3E
Reductions 4R 4R 3R 3R 4R 4R
Copier Memory standard (MB) 0 16 16 16 - -
Copier Memory options (MB) 16/32 32 32 32 - -
Fax Function Option Option N/A Option - -
Supplies: Toner/Drum/ Y Y - - Y Y
Developer
AIO (All- in-one) - - Y Y - -
Dimensions: Width (mm) 550 550 550 550 579 579
Depth (mm) 568 568 575 575 560 560
Height (mm) 420 518 460 460 420 465

DMR15S/18S/18D
PRODUCT POSITIONING
The DMR15S/18S are successors to the DMR15/18 and can be positioned alongside our analogue
CMR151C/181C machines. The DMR18D is a new model, to be launched in December 2001,
offering duplex functionality, a feature that does not exist in our current range of models in this
segment.
Please note that there are no plans to discontinue the analogue machines.
DMR18D
DMR18 DMR18S
CMR181C
CMR151C
DMR15 DMR15S
99 00 01 02
Analogue Machines
Although the DMR15S/18S offer feature improvements over the DMR15/18, the crucial difference
will be the price positioning of the mainframe and, more importantly, the cost per page pricing.
In order to achieve a more competitive price on the DMR15S model, the standard 16MB of copier
memory is omitted. Without the memory, the DMR15S does not have the scan once, copy many
feature. This is in line with both analogue and competitors digital machines. Additional memory
options are available at an extra cost.

DMR15S/18S/18D
The main weakness of the DMR15/18 was the cost per page, due to the fact that an All- in One
cartridge was used. The new DMR15S/18S/18D come with separate toner and drum, which allow
them to be very competitive with our CMR151C/181C analogue models. The new supplies of the
DMR15S/18S/18D bring the cost per page to nearly one third of the cost per page of the existing
digital DMR15/18 machines. At the time of writing, very few of the competitors in segment 1 offer
machines with separate consumables.
Market Situation:
The DMR15S/18S/18D models fit into Infosource segment 1, which covers copiers in the range
120cpm. In terms of units, this segment represents over 50% of the total sold, so is of key
importance. The overall market is predic ted to shrink by 3% this year and remain flat over the next
few years.
At 35% digitalisation in the year 2000, the take up of digital models in this segment is low.
However, it should be noted that 2000 was 30% up on 1999 and forecasts for 2001 indicate that
60% of machines shipped will be digital.
Note:
Source of information: Infosource Autumn Report 2000, Infosource Spring Report 2000 and
Infosource 2000-2003 Long-Range Forecast report.

DMR15S/18S/18D
The graphs below indicate the current mix of analogue and digital, by brand:
Konica
Sharp 6% Others
8% 20%
Xerox
9%
Ricoh
8%
Canon
21%
NRG
9%
Minolta Toshiba
9% 10%
Figure 1: Segment 1, Analogue and Digital, Year 2000 (Market Size: 669,204)
Konica
Others
5%
14%
Sharp
19%
Canon
10%
Toshiba
4%
Minolta
Xerox 6%
22%
NRG
Ricoh 13%
7%
Figure 2: Segment 1, Digital, Year 2000 (Market Size: 192,729)

DMR15S/18S/18D
Sharp
Konica
4%
6%
Others
Xerox
24%
3%
Ricoh
9%
NRG
7%
Minolta
10% Canon
25%
Toshiba
12%
Figure 3: Segment 1, Analogue, Year 2000 (Market Size: 476,475)

DMR15S/18S/18D
TARGET MARKET
The DMR15S/18S/18D are targeted at the following markets:
Replacing existing analogue or 1st generation digital machines in small offices with
copy/print demands of less than 4,000 per month.
Mid to large offices as a workgroup fax and/or printer
Mid to large offices as a personal all- in-one multifunctional product (copy plus print and
fax)
Canon analogue machines
Xerox / Sharp digital units
The key personnel that will be involved in the decision making process (with their decision criteria)
can be identified as follows:
Buyer - requires low operating costs and best value for money
IT Manager - concerned with Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) as well as
issues such as connectivity, reliability and upgradeability
End User - who needs ease of use and productivity
Financial Manager - who monitors Total Cost of Ownership and requires a
future-proof investment
Currently, the NRG brand is heavily dependent on the direct channel for the sale of machines in
Segment 1, particularly digital. The current, overall European trend is, however, slightly weighted
towards the indirect channel at 61% for the market (Infosource figures for the first six months of
2000). This indicates a potential area for growth in Segment 1 sales, by focusing on our indirect, as
well as direct, channel.

DMR15S/18S/18D
Technology:
Reading Element Flatbed with moving CCD array image sensing element
Print Processing Laser beam scanning/marking & electrophotographic printing.
Dry, dual component toner development.
Dimensions (W x D x H (mm)):
Standard configuration: DMR15S 550 x 568 x 420
DMR18S 550 x 568 x 518
DMR18D 587 x 568 x 518
With ADF (Height approx): DMR15S 510
DMR18S/18D 608
With ARDF (Height approx): DMR18D 648
Weight: DMR15S = 35 Kg
DMR18S = 42 Kg
DMR18D = 45 Kg
Input Capacity:
a) Standard DMR15S 1 tray x 250 sheets
DMR18S/18D 2 trays x 250 sheets
b) Options 1 tray x 250 sheets
Or: 2 trays x 250 sheets
c) Maximum Total Capacity DMR15S 1,350 sheets
DMR18S/18D 1,600 sheets
Output Capacity:
Standard 250 sheets (internal tray)

a) Size Standard tray: A5 (LEF) A3 (SEF)
Bypass tray: A6 (SEF) A3 (SEF)
b) Weight Standard tray: 60 90 g/m2
Bypass tray: 52 162 g/m2
Duplex tray (DMR18D only): 64 90 g/m2
Power Specifications: 100V model: 110 120V, 50 / 60 Hz

200V model: 220 240V, 50 / 60 Hz
Power Consumption: Full system = less than 1.2 KW
First Copy Speed: < 6.9 seconds (A4, LEF from tray 1, no R/E)

DMR15S/18S/18D
Multi Copy Speed: DMR15S 15cpm (15cpm 1-1 copying)

DMR18S/18D 18cpm (15cpm 1-1 copying)
(A4, LEF no R/E)
Multiple Copy: Up to 99
Resolution: 600dpi
Grey Scale (per dot): Scanning: 64 levels, Marking: Binary
Warm-up Time: < 25 seconds at 20C
Memory Capacity:
a) Standard DMR15S: 0MB
DMR18S/18D: 16MB
b) Option DMR15S: 16MB and 32MB
DMR18S/18D: 32MB See Distributor Whiteboard for
Memory Specifications
Enlargement: 3E (122, 141, 200%)
Reduction: 4R (93, 82, 71, 50%)
Zoom: 50 200% in 1% steps
Image Density Adjustment: Manual or Automatic
Interrupt Copy: Not ava ilable
Electronic Counter: Standard
User Codes: Standard (50 codes, 8 digits)
Languages: English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish,

Norwegian, Danish, Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Finnish,
Hungarian
Enhanced Specifications
APS/AMS: Standard
Auto Tray Switch: DMR15S Option, with optional paper bank

DMR18S/D Standard
(% size): No

DMR15S/18S/18D
Enhanced Specifications (continued):
User Program: No
Duplex: DMR15S/18S No
DMR18D Standard
Electronic Sort: DMR15S Option, 16MB memory is required, for rotate

sort 16MB + paper bank required
DMR18S/18D Standard
Scan Once, Copy Many: DMR15S Option, 16MB memory required (when ADF
is installed, 16MB memory option is required
for one to multipage copies)
DMR18S/18D Standard
Image Rotation: DMR15S Option, 16MB memory required

DMR18S/18D Standard
Series Copy: DMR15S Option, 16MB memory required

DMR18S/18D Standard
(Book to 2 x one-sided sheets)
Combine Copy: DMR15S Option, 16MB memory required

DMR18S/18D Standard
(2 in 1, 4 in 1)
Double Copy: No
Erase Centre/Border: No
Image Overlay: No
Repeat Copying: No
Positive/Negative No
Stapling: No
Stamp Features: No
Cover/Sheet Insertion: No

DMR15S/18S/18D
Copy Speeds
Continuous Copying DMR15S A4 15ppm

(no reduction or enlargement): A3 9ppm
DMR18S/18D A4 18ppm
A3 10ppm
ADF One to One Copying DMR15S A4 15ppm

(no reduction or enlargement): A3 8ppm
DMR18S/18D A4 - 15ppm
A3 9ppm
Duplex (DMR18D)
One-sided to two-sided: Continuous A4 15ppm

A3 4ppm
Two-sided to two-sided Continuous A4 15ppm
A3 4ppm
Fax Specifications
General:
Circuit: PSTN, PBX
Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3
Resolution: 200 x 100dpi, 200 x 200dpi, 200 x 400dpi

8 x 3.85 l/mm, 8 x 7.7 l/mm, 8 x 15.4 l/mm
Compression Method: MH, MR, MMR
Scanning Speed: 1.2 seconds (200 x 100dpi, 200 x 200dpi, A4 SEF)

2.4 seconds (200 x 400dpi)
Number of Pages Scanned: SEF 30ppm (200 x 100dpi, 200 x 200dpi)

16ppm (200 x 400dpi)
LEF 36ppm (200 x 100dpi, 200 x 200dpi)
33ppm (200 x 400dpi)
Modem Speed: Standard with Automatic Shift Down:

336000, 31200, 28800, 26400, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400,
12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
Transmission Speed: G3: Approx. 3 seconds (200 x 100dpi, ITUT #1 chart, TTI off,
memory transmission)
SAF Memory: Standard: 2MB

No SAF memory option available

DMR15S/18S/18D
Page Memory: 4MB

No page memory option available
Fax Specifications (continued):
Memory Back-up: One hour
Super Smoothing: Standard
Stamp: Option (Available with document feeder)
TTI/RTI: Standard
CSI: Standard
Quick Dial: Standard (32 numbers)
Speed Dial: Standard (100 numbers)
Group Dial: Standard (9 groups, Max. 100 numbers per group)
Keystroke Program: No
Redial: Standard
AI Short Protocol: Standard
Direct Fax Number Entry: Standard
Dual Access: Standard
Restricted Access: Standard (8 digits, 20 personal codes)
Label Insertion: Standard
Auto Document: No
Telephone Directory: Standard
Page Count: No
Auto Reduction: Standard
Wild Cards: Standard
Summer Time
(Daylight Saving Time): Standard

DMR15S/18S/18D
Fax Specifications (continued):
ID Code Programming: Standard (4 digits)
Programming by OMR: No
User Function Key: Standard (3 keys)
Night Timer: No
Energy Saver: Standard
LCD Prompt: Standard
Remaining Memory Indication: Standard
Time Indicator / Clock

Adjustment: No / Standard
User Parameter Setting: Standard
User Data transfer: Standard
Memory File Transfer: Standard
Transmission Features
Immediate Transmission: Standard
Memory tra nsmission: Standard
Serial Broadcasting (later): Standard (max. 100 numbers)
Send Later: Standard
Error Correction Mode: Standard
Page Re-transmission: Standard
Economy Transmission: No
Forwarding: Standard
Batch Transmission: Standard

DMR15S/18S/18D
Transmission Features (continued):
Parallel Memory Transmission: Standard (automatically selected)
Image Rotation: Standard
Book Fax: No
Transmission Deadline: No
Closed Network Transmission: No
Confidential Transmission /
with ID: No
Transfer Request: Standard (transfer station: 1 location)
Transfer Transmission: No
Multi-step Transfer: No
Polling Transmission: No
Double-sided Transmission: DMR15S/18S No

DMR18D Yes (ARDF is required)
Transmission Reserve: No
Well Log Transmission: Standard (Max. 1.2m)
Reception Features
Automatic Reception: Standard
Manual Reception: Standard
Substitute Reception: Standard
Authorized Reception: Standard
Multicopy: No
Reverse Order Printing: No
Memory Lock: No

DMR15S/18S/18D
Reception Features (continued):
Confidential Reception: No
Special Reception Numbers: No
Closed Network: No
Polling Reception: Standard:

Free Polling available
Polling with ID not available
Poll Later: Standard
Polling from Memory: No
Multi-polling Reception: Standard
Continuous Polling: No
Reception Time Printing: Standard
Centre Mark: Standard
Chequered Mark: Standard
2 in 1 (two in one ): No
Image Reduction: Standard
Economy Printing Mode: No
Duplex Reception: No
Telephone Features
Handset / Telephone: Option
Telephone Connection: Standard
Monitor Speaker: Standard
Automatic Voice Message: No

DMR15S/18S/18D
Telepho ne Features (continued):
Voice Request: No
On Hook Dial: Standard
Tone Transmission: Standard
Pause: Standard
Pulse / Tone Selection: Standard
Chain Dialling: Standard
Reception Mode Selection: Standard
Automatic Fax / Phone Change: No
Reception Mode Switch Over

(remote): No
Answering Machine Interface: No
Reception Mode Switching

Timer: No
Auto Answer Delay Time: Standard (UP mode)
Busy Tone Detection: Standard
Silent Ringing Detection

(1300Hz / 16Hz): No

DMR15S/18S/18D
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
General:
CPU Destiny ASIC D8401A 75MHz (PowerPC 401 microprocessor embedded)
Optional: 32MB or 64MB or 128MB
Max capacity: 144MB
Printer PCL5e
Description PCL6
Language Option: PostScript2 Compatible
Maximum Model K-C1b 15ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Continuous Model K-C1c 18ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Print Speed Model K-C1c/C1c duplex: One side printing 18ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Duplex print ing 15ppm
300/600 dpi *1 600dpi 300dpi/600dpi
RICOH Private MIB
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions (Printer
Key Top is added on the left side of LCD)
Win Win WinNT
95/9 NT WorkStation Server 4.0 Server 4.0 Server 4.0
8 3.51 4.0 TSE Enterprise
/Me Edition
PCL5 Yes - Yes (SP6a or Yes (SP6 or Yes (SP6a or -
e above) above) above)
PCL 6 Yes - Yes (SP6a or Yes (SP6 or Yes (SP6a or -
above) above) above)
PS2 Yes - Yes - Yes -
Drivers Win2000 Win Mac8.x/9.
Pro Server Server Advanced Datacenter 3.1*2 x/
Terminal Server Server (X)*3
Svc
PCL5 Yes Yes Yes - - - -
e
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes - - - -
PS2 Yes Yes - - - - Yes
(PPD)

DMR15S/18S/18D

Language 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.Swedish,
(Localization) 8.Norwegian, 9.Danish, 10.Czech, 11.Hungarian, 12.Finnish, 13.Polish,
14.Portuguese, (15.Traditional Chinese, 16.Simplified Chinese)
For PostScript2
1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7. Swedish 8.
Norwegian 9. Danish
UNIX Filter (PS2) Solaris HP Red Red SCO AIX 4.3 AIX 5L
*4 2.6,7,8 UX Hat Hat OpenServer
10.x, Linux Linux 5.x
11.0 6.x 7
Installer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes TBA
Device Yes Yes - Yes - TBA TBA
Option
Utility Software SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin (Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000)

Printer Utility for Mac (PS option is required)
Fonts Resident 45 PCL fonts (35 Intellifonts + 10 TrueType Fonts)
Download 1. Possible to download fonts by using PCLs or PJLs command.
2. Possible to download fonts to Mac by using Printer Utility for Mac.
Note *1: Both 300/600dpi is selectable from the printer driver

Note *2: Windows 3.1 driver is not included in the CD.
Note *3: The support of Windows ME and Mac OS10 will be officially announced after the release
of these OS.
Note *4: PS2 option is required. Unix filter will be released in Jan 02
Printer Specifications (continued):
Network interface Card (Option)
Model: NIB DPO3000E (NetSilicon DPI)
Topology: Ethernet 100BaseTx / 10BaseT (autodetected)
Interface: RJ45 x 1
Cabling: Requires UTP / STP Cat 5 or better
Frame Type: Ethernet II, 802.3, 802.2, Ethernet_SNAP
Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Network Operating Systems: Novell NetWare: 3.x, 4.x, 5.0, Intranetware

Windows: NT4 / 2000

DMR15S/18S/18D
Windows: 95/98
Mac OS: 8.x, 9.x
Internet Printing: IPP 1.0 support
Other Utilities: HTML Standard Web browser interface

MAP utility
TCP/IP Telnet interface
NWSETUP Netware utility
Copier Peripherals

Original Weight: 52 105 g/m2
Stack Capacity: 30 sheets (80 g/m2 )
Dimensions: (W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 90mm
Weight: 7 Kg
Auto Reverse Document Feeder (DF71) Only for DMR18D:

Original Weight: Simplex original: 40 128 g/m2
Duplex original: 52 105 g/m2
Stack Capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2 )
Dimensions W x D x H): 550 x 470 x 130mm
Weight: 10 Kg
Paper Bank [500 sheets x 1] (PS460):

Paper Size: A5 A3 (SEF)
Paper Weight: 60 105 g/m2
Paper Capacity: 500 x 1 tray (80 g/m2 )
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550 x 520 x 134mm
Weight: 12 Kg
Paper Bank [ 500 sheets x 2] (PS450):

Paper Size: A5 A3 (SEF)
Paper Weight: 60 105 g/m2
Paper Capacity: 500 x 2 trays (80 g/m2 )
Weight: 25 Kg

DMR15S/18S/18D
Sound Power Level:

Mainframe: Complete System:
Copying: = 63dB = 67dB
Standby: = 40dB = 40dB
Ozone Emission Level: 0.02 mg/m3 or less
Dust Level: 0.075 mg/m3 or less
Styrene Emission Level: Less than 0.07 mg/m3
Identification of Plastic All plastic parts which weigh more than 25 Kg are identified
Components: according to DIN45840 or ISO11469
Power Consumption: Full system, less than 1.2 KW
Environmental Regulations: BAM: Yes

Energy Star: Yes
Swan: No
Zesm: No
Energy 2000: TBA
Power Consumption:
Copier Only Fax and Printer
installed
Low Power Mode Power Consumption 80W 120W
Default Interval 15 min 15 min
Recovery Time Less than 30 secs. Less than 30 secs.
Sleep Mode Power Consumption - 70W
Default Interval - 60 min
Auto Off Mode Power Consumption 10W -
Default Interval 60 min -

DMR15S/18S/18D

Supplies: Yield 1 :
Toner 2 DT34BLK (260g cartridge) Average 9,000

Developer DD6BLK (365g bag) Average 60,000
DMU21 OPC Drum B0399510 Average 60,000
1
2
Reliability:
Machine Life (ML): 5 years or 600,000, whichever comes first
Expected Average Monthly Volume (AMV): DMR15S: 3,500 pages (copy/print/fax)

DMR18S/18D 4,000 pages
history.
target customer.
customer.

DMR15S/18S/18D
WHAT FITS WHAT

DMR15S 1505 1508 1502

DMR18S 1805 1808 1802
DMR18D 1805d 1808d 1802d
Peripherals:
PC1018 Platen Cover
DF72 ADF
DF71 ARDF (to fit DMR18D only, launch December 2001)
PS460 Paper Bank (1 tray x 500 sheets)
PS450 Paper Bank (2 trays x 500 sheets)
DIF1018F Fax Unit Type 1018
DIF1018P Printer Controller Type 1018 DMR15S/18S (Note: NOT DMR18D)
DIF1018PV2 Printer Controller V2 DMR15S/18S plus 18D
DIF1018PS PostScript 2 Type 1018 (Emulation)
DIF1018E Printer Ethernet NIC Type 1018
DMEBP32 32MB Printer Memory
DME1018 16MB Copier Memory (DMR15S only)
DME185P32 32MB Copier Memory - See Distributor Whiteboard for memory specifications
FAX HANDSET Handset for any fax
DMR15MFPCABX Medium Cabinet (use with PS460)
DMR15SRCABX Small Cabinet (use with PS450)
DMR15LFPCABX Large Cabinet
Supplies
DT34BLK Toner, 260g cartridge Yield 9,000 at 6%
B0399510 DMU21 Photoconductor unit Yield 60,000 at 6%
DD6BLK Developer, 365g bag Yield 60,000 at 6%
Language Sets:
Copier: Fax: Printer Printer Language:
(DIF1018P): (DIF1018PV2):
DDK1018GB DDK1018FGB DDK1018PGB DDK1018PV2GB English
DDK1018F DDK1018FF DDK1018PF DDK1018PV2F French
DDK1018D DDK1018FD DDK1018PD DDK1018PV2D German
DDK1018I DDK1018FI DDK1018PI DDK1018PV2I Italian
DDK1018P DDK1018FP DDK1018PP DDK1018PV2P Portuguese
DDK1018N DDK1018FN DDK1018PN DDK1018PV2N Norwegian
DDK1018S DDK1018FS DDK1018PS DDK1018PV2S Swedish
DDK1018CZ DDK1018FCZ DDK1018PCZ DDK1018PV2CZ Czech
DDK1018PL DDK1018FPL DDK1018PPL DDK1018PV2PL Polish
DDK1018H DDK1018FH DDK1018PH DDK1018PV2H Hungarian
DDK1018SF DDK1018FSF DDK1018PSF DDK1018PV2SF Finnish
DDK1018AR Copier Quick Copy Guide Arabic

DMR15S/18S/18D
COMPETITORS COMPARISON
The following machines can be seen as the main competition for the DMR15S/18S/18D models:
Digital Machines: Analogue Machines:
Canon GP160/160F, Imageclass 2200 Canon NP6317

Konica 7015, 7415, 7415 Konica 1216
Kyocera-Mita Vi 150/155, KM-1510/1810/1525/1530 Kyocera-Mita DC-1560
Minolta EP1054/1085
Minolta Di151/181 Sharp SF2218
Muratec MFX2500 Toshiba 1550
Panasonic DP150P, DP150FP Xerox 5815
Sharp AR150/155/161
Toshiba DP1600, eStudio 16
Xerox XD155f, DC214
Please see the attached table for a quick comparison of competitor and NRG machines.
Note: The sources of information are:
1. InfoMarkt Copiers Guide, Edition 25 2000

2. BERTL, Datacheck 3-in-1 Fact Book, Winter 2000
3. What to Buy for Business, Edition 234, September 2000
5. Competitor Internet Web Sites

DMR15S/18S/18D
NRG CANON MINOLTA SHARP TOSHIBA

Functions: DMR15S DMR18S CMR151C CMR181C GP160* GP160F* NP6317 Di151 Di181 EP1054 EP1085 AR150 ARF151 AR155 AR161 SF2218 DP1600 eStudio 1550
16
Analogue / Digital D D A A D D A D D A A D D D D A D D A
Copy Speed (cpm) 15 18 15 18 16 16 17 15 18 15 18 15 15 15 16 18 16 16 15
Warm-up Time 25 25 45 45 15 15 30 28 30 30 30 0 0 0 30 35 TBA 60 28

(seconds)
First Copy Speed 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.5 12 12 9.4 11 9 7.2 7.2 9.6 9.6 9.6 7.2 5.3 7.9 7.9 5.8
(seconds)
Max. Original A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A4 A3 A3 A3 B4-A4 B4-A4 B4-A4 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Standard Paper 350 600 580 580 350 350 550 251 550 251 251 300 300 300 350 250 550 550 501
Capacity
Max. Paper Capacity 1,350 1,600 580 580 1,100 1,100 550 751 1,800 300 300 550 550 550 850 300 1,200 1,200 1,001
Bypass Capacity 100 100 80 80 100 100 50 1 50 50 Opt. 50 Opt. 50 50 50 100 50 Opt. 100 100 Opt. 1
Opt.
Duplex None DMR18S: None None None None None None None None None None None Standard None None Opt Opt. None
None
DMR18D:
Standard
Document Feeder ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. None ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt/ ARDF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. RADF RADF ADF
ARDF Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
On ADF ADF
DMR18D Opt. Opt.
Multi Copies 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-100 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-999 1-999 1-999
Zoom (%) 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 25-400 25-400 50-200 50-199 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-
200
Consumables T/D/D 1 T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D AIO AIO Toner/PCU T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D PCU/T TBA T/D/D
Copier Memory 0 16 - - 8 8 - 8 16 - - 6 6 6 0 - 32 32 -
Max. Copier Memory 48 48 - - 16 16 - 34 24 - - 6 6 6 134 - 160 160 -
Printer Opt. Opt. - - Opt. Opt. - Opt. Opt. - - Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. - Opt. Standard -
GDI
Fax Opt. Opt. - - Opt. Standard - Opt. Opt. - - No Standard No Opt. - Opt. Opt. -
Network Card Opt. Opt. - - With printer With printer - Opt. Opt. - - No Opt. No Opt. - Opt. Opt. -
Max. Monthly 20K

Volume 10K 10K 10K 10K 15K 15K 10K 10K 15K 12K 15K 5K 5K 5K 15K 10K 10K 15K
Date Launched May 2001 May 2001 Nov. 1999 Nov. 1999 May 1999 May 1999 July 1999 August March 2000 April 1999 April 1999 Nov. 1999 Nov. 1999 Nov. 1999 Jan. 1999 Jan. 2000 N/A Nov. May
2000 2000 1996
Fax Modem Speed
(Kbps) 33.6 33.6 - - 33.6 33.6 - 33.6 33.6 - - - 14.4 - 33.6 - 33.6 33.6 -
Copy Resolution 600 600 - - 600 600 - 600 400 - 0 400 400 400 400 - 600 600 -
* Also sold
1
= Toner / as
Drum / Imageclass
Developer 2200

DMR15S/18S/18D
KONICA KYOCERA MITA MURATEC PANASONIC XEROX

Functions: 7015 1216 7415 Vi150 Vi155 DC1560 KM-1510 KM-1810 KM-1530 KM-1525 MFX2500 DP150P DP150FP XD155f DC214 5815 WCPro416Pi
Analogue / D A D D D A D D D D D D D D D A D
Digital
Copy Speed 15 16 15 15 15 15 15 18 15 15 16 15 15 15 14 16 16
(cpm)
Warm-up 45 55 28 45 45 45 30 30 30 30 22 20 20 10 30 30 7
Ttime
(seconds)
First Copy 8.5 5.5 11 10 10 4.5 6.3 6.3 5.5 5.5 10 8.3 8.3 9 6 9 8
Speed
(seconds)
Max. A3 A3 A4 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 A3 A3 A3 A4 A4 A3-A4 B4-A4 A3 TBA
Original
Standard 300 550 251 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 751 300 300 550 550 300 500
Paper
Capacity
Max. Paper 1,050 1,800 751 1,050 1,050 300 550 550 1,050 300 3,251 300 300 550 800 300 1,750
Capacity
Bypass 50 50 1 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 1 50 50 50 50 50 100
Capacity
Duplex None None None None None None None None None None Opt. None None Standard None None Standard
Document ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. ADF Opt. Standard ADF Opt. 1 sheet 30 sheets Opt. None Standard None None ADF ADF None Standard
Feeder ADF Opt. ADF Opt. Standard Standard
Multi Copies 1-99 1-99 1-100 1-99 1-99 1-100 1-99 1-99 1-250 1-250 1-99 1-999 1-999 1-100 1-99 1-99 1-999
Zoom (%) 50-200 50-200 50-199 50-200 50-200 64-141 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 25-400 50-200 50-200 50-200 50-200 64-156 TBA
Consumables Toner/PCU T/D/D AIO T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D TBA TBA Toner/PCU AIO Toner/PCU TBA
Copier 2 - 8 2 2 - 0 16 32 32 16 TBA TBA - - - 32
Memory
Max. Copier 10 - 40 10 10 - 16 16 64 64 64 TBA TBA - - - 128
Memory
Printer Opt. - Opt. Opt. Opt. - Opt. Opt. Opt. No Standard Standard Standard Opt. Opt. - TBA
GDI GDI
Fax No - Opt. No Standard - - - No No Standard No Standard No No - TBA
Network Opt. - Opt. Opt. Opt. - Opt. Opt. Opt. No Opt No No No No - TBA
Card
Max. 10K 12K 10K 10K 10K 10K 15K 10K 15K 15K 35K 5K 5K 10K 5K 15K TBA
Monthly
Volume
Date Dec. 1998 Sept. 1998 Q1 2001 April 1998 Sept. 1999 April 1997 May 2001 May 2001 April 2001 June 2001 April 2001 June 2000 June 2000 July 1999 July 1998 July 1997 TBA
Launched
Fax Modem - - 33.6 - 33.6 - - - - - 33.6 - 33.6 - - - TBA
Speed
(Kbps)
Copy 600 - 600 600 600 - 600 600 TBA TBA 600 600 600 600 600 - TBA
Resolution

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR22A / DMR27A / DMR32A

Digital 22 / 27 / 32ppm
Digital Copiers
Nashuatec 2205 / 2705 / 3205

Rex Rotary 2238 / 2738 / 3238
Gestetner 2212 / 2712 / 3212
First
DMR22A September, 2001 December, 2001 Japan

DMR22A December, 2001 February, 2002 France
DMR27A December, 2001 February, 2002 Japan
DMR32A March, 2002 April, 2002 Japan

Date Created: August, 2001
Version 10
July, 2002
DMR22A/27A/32A
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction
o Marketing Objectives 2
o Key Product Attributes 3
o Target Markets 4
o Supplies 4
o Conclusion 4
General Specifications
o Mainframe 8
o Copier 9
o Fax 14
o Printer 18
o Scanner 21
o External Options 24
o Environmental 27
Whats in the Box 29
What Fits What 30
DMR22/27 Peripheral Compatibility 32

to change. If in doubt, or specifications are required for
tenders etc, please contact NRGI Guernsey for confirmation of
K:\ Company\Market\NPS\ DMR22A_27A_32A.doc 1

DMR22A/27A/32A
INTRODUCTION
The DMR22A/27A/32A are the successors to the highly successful DMR22/27 series and are due to
be mass-produced in September 2001 for a December 2001 launch. Like the DMR22/27, the
DMR22A/27A/32A also come in 22cpm and 27cpm speeds, but there is an additional 32cpm
machine that will be launched in May 2002.
The DMR22A/27A should be thought of as the DMR22/27 with all the benefits of the
DMR35A/45A, such as a large touch screen LCD (overcoming a major annoyance with the
DMR20/25, DMR35/45 and DMR22/27), shorter warm up time and GW architecture.
In addition to the new DMR22A and DMR27A, a 32cpm model, the DMR32A, is being added to
the range. With all the improved features of the DMR22A/27A, the DMR32A is ideal for tenders
specifying a machine of above 30cpm. The duplex, bypass and document server are options for the
DMR32A, whereas they are standard with the DMR35A. This allows the DMR32A to offer a more
competitive mainframe price.
The machines are NRGs next generation of digital machines, which are not just copiers but
document solutions with fax, print, scanning and local storage functionality. Although we have
already had multifunctionality with previous models, GW architecture now means that it is much
easier and cheaper to install additional options such as printer, scanner and fax. Not only this, but
the machines also have very powerful software utilities such as ScanRouter and Desktop Binder
which adds to their functionality.
It is now five years since the launch of the first digital machines and, with typical 5- year contracts
now beginning to expire, this is an ideal time to launch this machine. With the massive growth in
printer and scan volume, it is important that we dont just sell this machine as a copier. We should
aim to capture far greater volumes of the customers documents, (i.e., not just copy volume).
Marketing Objectives:
To increase unit placements and market share through building the strongest segment 2 copier
range with a completely new digital offering
To maintain the current leading position in segment 2 as the supplier of digital copying
solutions
To encourage greater connectivity and in turn encourage customers to maximise print volume
performed on our machines
To increase sales of high-end fax solutions
To increase sales of network scanning solutions
Replace DMR20/25 MIF, which are now coming to the end of their five-year contracts
Encourage optimal use of the software

DMR22A/27A/32A
Key Product Attributes:
Overall selling points:

Modular functionality
Space and power saving benefits of having one machine instead of four
Shorter warm- up times allowing for lower power consumption
Optional Document server facility
Increased productivity, especially useful for walk- up copying
Very high duplex productivity
New 500 sheet finisher (DMR22/27 only had 1000 sheet)
Improved 1000 Sheet Finisher
Copier selling points

Electronic sorting
Improved first copy time
Large touch screen LCD
Small Footprint
Printer selling points

Multiple original printing and finishing
Versatile finishing and sorting option
Easier to install and cost-efficient because of GW architecture
Advanced functionality of Ricoh printer language (RPCS)
Access to A3 printing and high productivity duplexing
Superior functionality of Desktop Binder and SmartNet Monitor
Fax Selling Points

Fast transmission- reducing cost of calls
Option of 3 lines working simultaneously
400 quick dial numbers, expandable to 1,200 with JBIG option
PC-Faxing
Scanner Selling Points

GW architecture means good price premium
High Resolution
Network scanning
All the benefits of ScanRouter.

DMR22A/27A/32A
Target Markets:
Customers who are replacing existing analogue copiers

Customers who are looking for an all- in-one document solution to handle copying, printing,
faxing and scanning
Customers who have a need for networking scanning, partic ularly large documents where the
traditional flatbed scanner is not sufficient.
Customers requiring high specification /high volume faxing.
Customers who need a document solution not just a multifunctional machine.
Customer for whom a desktop scanner is no t sufficient. Customer would want to put large
documents through the ADF and have it linked to the network to ensure everyone had access.
Replacing digital MIF, which is coming to the end of its 5-year contracts, particularly our own
DMR20/25, the Canon GP215 and the Xerox DC20.
Much like their predecessors the DMR22A/27A/32A are aimed at workgroups of 5-30 people.
However, with the addition of their document solution benefits they can also be targeted at the
larger office, as a document solution.
The additional DMR32A machine should help in our tender business above 30cpm. Since many of
the features of the DMR35A are not standard, this means the DMR32A should, at its lowest cost,
provide a more competitive digital offering.
Supplies:
The supplies for the DMR22A/27A/32A consist of the following:
Toner
The yield is the same as the previous models, at 11,000 copies per bottle (A4 @ 6%). This will be a
unique product for the DMR22A/27A/32A.
PCU
The yield is the same as the previous models, at 60,000 copies per unit (A4 @ 6%). This will be a
unique product for the DMR22A/27A/32A.
Conclusion:
Segment Two is a key success story for NRG and this is expected to continue with the launch of the
DMR22A/27A/32A. The DMR22/27 has been highly successful due to the massive growth of
digital in this segment. As the digital market in Segment Two matures, there will be increasing
demand for the document solution multifunctional machine, with easy and affordable options. With
the increase in printer volume from the traditional printer vendors, there is an increasing need for us
to capture more document, and not just copy volume. With their superior functionality, the
DMR22A/27A/32A will allow us to fulfil both of these aims and lead the market in Segment Two
during 2002.

DMR22A/27A/32A
Feature: DMR22/27: DMR22A/27A/32A:

Speed (ppm) 22/27 22/27/32
Architecture Multi-controller (4) Single controller (1)
GW Architecture
Configuration Copier + RAM Copier + HDD + NIC +
Print + HDD + NIC + RAM RAM
Scanner + RAM Fax
Fax + Options Print or Print/Scan
Colour of Machine N/A New colour (although
technically possible to
install some old peripherals)
Printer Controller Availability Post launch (several At launch
months)
Ease / Cost of Option Installation Complex / high Easy / cheaper
Dimensions (W x D x H) 550 x 580 x 710mm 550 x 604 x 980mm*
Software Aficio Manager SmartNet Monitor
ScanRouter ScanRouter V. 2
DeskTop Binder V.2
Productivity:
Operation Panel LCD Small touch screen with Large touch screen with
many buttons minimum buttons
Warm-up Time 45 seconds 15 seconds
First Copy Speed 4.9 seconds 4.9 seconds
Finisher Optional Optional
1,000 sheets (one tray, one 500 sheets (1 staple
staple position) position) or 1,000 sheets
(two trays, four staple
positions)
Document Server Option N/A Optional
6GB HDD for storing copy,
print, fax & scan data
ADF 1-1 Speed 5ppm less than engine Matches engine speed
speed
Duplex Speed Less than engine speed Matches engine speed
Stamp Features Limited Improved, preset stamps in
multiple languages
* Including paperbank

DMR22A/27A/32A
NRG Product Comparison continued
Network Scanning:
Interface Separate scanner network Integrated in printer /
option scanner kit, uses existing
NIB option
Software ScanRouter ScanRouter V. 2
DeskTop Binder V. 2
Faxing:
Standard Option 33.6 Super G3 33.6 Super G3
Expansion Super G3 + G4 (ISDN) Super G3 + G4 (ISDN)
Simultaneous Line Usage 2 lines All 3 lines
JBIG Option Option
PC-Fax Hardware PC-Fax software bundled
Option with printer / scanner kit
Printing:
Installation (Ease/Speed) Hard / time consuming Easy / fast
Software None DeskTop Binder V. 2
PDLs PCL5e PCL5e
PCL6 PCL6
PS3 (Option) PS3 (Option)
RPCS
Save Regularly Used Settings in N/A Yes, with RPCS
Driver
IEEE1394 (FireWire) N/A 2 ports (Option)
Memory 16MB 96MB
Option 32 or 64MB (32MB standard + 64MB
obligatory option)
HDD Option Option
(<1.6GB) (<6GB Document Server)
RPCS Driver N/A Windows 9x / Me / NT4 /
W2K
PCL Drivers Windows 9x / Me / NT4 / Windows 9x / Me / NT4 /
W2K W2K
(Windows 3.x available on
Internet)

DMR22A/27A/32A
NRG Product Comparison continued

PS Drivers Windows 9x / Me / NT4 / Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 /
W2K 2000
Macintosh 8.1 or later Macintosh 8.6
Macintosh OS X Classic
Macintosh OS XNative -
TBC
Fonts 35 Intellifonts 35 Intellifonts
10 TrueType fonts 10 TrueType fonts
1 Bitmap font 1 Bitmap font
136 Adobe Type 1 fonts 136 Adobe Type 1 fonts
Driver Languages Controller: 11 Controller: 11
PCL: 11 PCL: 11
PS: 6 PS: 6
RPCS: 11
Rotate Sort Yes Yes
Stapling Maximum 1 position 4 positions SR790 or
1 position SR820
Form Overlay Yes Yes
Watermarks Yes Yes
RIP once, print many Yes Yes
Font Download PCL5e only PCL or PJL commands or
Macintosh printer utility

DMR22A/27A/32A
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mainframe Specifications:
Engine:
DMR22A / 27A / 32A Remarks

1. Technology
a) Scanning element Flatbed with moving CCD array image-sensor
b) Printing processing Twin Laser beam scanning & Electro-
2. Dimensions (W x D x H): Approx. 550 x 604 x 980 mm Including
paper bank
3. Weight Less than 62 kg
4. Input Capacity
a) Standard 500 sheets tray x 2
b) Options (Bank, Bypass Bank: 500 sheet tray x 2
and LCT) Bypass: 100 sheets
LCT: 2000 sheets
5. Output Capacity
a) Standard Internal Tray: 500 sheets
With Bridge Unit : 250 sheets
b) Option 1 Bin Tray: 125 sheets
Finisher SR790: max 1,000 sheets + 250
(finisher proof tray)
Finisher SR820: max 500 sheets
Max:250 + 125 + 1,250 sheets (internal + 1-bin +
finisher)
6. Paper size / weight
a) Size: Tray 2: B6 SEF - A3
Tray 1: A5 SEF - A3
Bypass: B6 SEF - A3
LCT: A4 / LT
Duplex: A5 SEF - A3
b) Weight: Paper Tray 1 : 60 g/m2 105 g/m2
Paper Tray 2 : 52 g/m2 - 157 g/m2
Bypass: 52 g/m2 157 g/m2
Duplex: 60 g/m2 - 105 g/m2
7. Rating power 220-240V, 50/60Hz *
specifications:
8. Power consumption: Less than 1.5kW
* Please refer to the Product Manager for details of the 100V model

DMR22A/27A/32A
Copier Features
DMR22A / 27A / 32A DMR22 / 27

st
1 copy speed DMR22A (22cpm): 4.9 sec. DMR22: 4.9 sec.
DMR27A (27cpm): 4.9 sec. DMR27: 4.9 sec.
DMR32A (32cpm): 4.5 sec.
(A4 / LT long edge feed from first input
tray to internal tray, no reduction/
enlargement)
Continuous copy speed DMR22A: 22 cpm (A4 / LT long edge (except DMR32A )
feed, No R/E)
DMR27A: 27 cpm (A4 / LT long edge
feed, No R/E)
feed, No R/E)
One to one copy speed DMR22A: 22 cpm (A4 / LT long edge (except DMR32A )
feed, No R/E)
feed, No R/E)
feed, No R/E)
Resolution 600dpi
Grey Scale 256 levels (scanning)
No HDD: 2 levels (marking)
With HDD: 4 levels (3 levels for Photo
Mode)
Copy Size Output: A6 A3
Maximum Original: A3
Warm-up time DMR22A: 15 seconds 45 seconds
(from Main Switch off) DMR27A: 15 seconds
DMR32A: 15 seconds
Enlargement 115, 122, 141, 200, 400% 5E
Reduction 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% 7R
DMR22A, DMR27A & DMR32A have
minimum 25% reduction.
Zoom DMR22A / 27A: Contact Glass: 25% - 25% - 400% in 1% steps (Scan through
400% in 1% steps ARDF: 50% -200% in 1% steps)
ARDF: 25% - 200% in 1% steps
DMR32A: TBA
Adjustment
User code 100 codes (Max. 500 codes with optional 50 codes
User Account Enhance Unit)
[DME1045RAM]
Display Languages English, French, German, Italian, English, German, French, Italian,
Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian,
Danish, Finnish, Portuguese, Polish, Danish, Portuguese, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian and Czech are provided via Finnish, Hungarian & Russian.
download.

DMR22A/27A/32A
Enhanced Features
DMR22A / 27A / 32A DMR22 / 27

Auto Paper Selection Standard
Auto Magnification Selection Standard
Auto tray switch Standard
Directional magnification (%) Standard
Directional size magnification Standard
(inch/mm)
Series copy: Book - Simplex Standard
Series copy: Duplex - Simplex
Photo mode Standard (photo mode, text / photo mode)
Auto start Standard
Interrupt Key Standard
User program Standard (10 modes) Standard (5 modes)
Combine: 2 in 1 simplex Standard Standard
Combine: 4 in 1 duplex Standard Standard
Combine: 16 in 1 booklet Standard Standard
Booklet Copy Option (Duplex + HDD) No
Magazine Copy Standard
Double copy Standard
Erase centre / border Standard
Stamp / User Stamp Page No. (Standard) Standard
Date Stamp (Standard) *Page numbering
Presets 1 *Preset stamps
(Requires 32MB memory) (Prints limited (Preset stamps are
preset messages) available in English only).
Presets 2
(Requires Document Server + 64MB
copier memory)
1 COPY
2 URGENT
3 PRIORITY
4 For Your Info
5 PRELIMINARY
6 For Internal Use Only
7 CONFIDENTIAL
8 DRAFT
(Available in standard 14 languages)
Background Numbering
(Requires Document Server + 32MB
copier memory)
User Stamp
(Requires 32MB & Document Server)
Electronic sort / Rotate Sort Standard
Repeat copying Standard

DMR22A/27A/32A
Image rotation Standard

Positive/Negative Standard
Archive File Document Server (HDD option) no
Cover insertion Standard
Paper designate Standard
OHP slip sheet Standard
Stapling Finisher SR790: 4 positions Finisher SR720: 1
(1 staple 2 positions position
2 staples 2 positions)
Finisher SR820: 1 position
Margin adjust Standard
Bypass feed Option

DMR22A/27A/32A
Memory
DMR22A / 27A / 32A DMR22 / 27 DMR35A / 45A

Standard 32MB 20MB 32MB
Optional Memory 32MB 32MB -
(Copier)
Optional Memory 64MB 32MB 64MB
(Printer/Scanner)
Copier/ Printer/ Fax/ Scanner - all four functions use the same Type-B memory. However Fax
memory enhance uses a slot on the fax board. Copy, print and scan memory enhancements all use
the same slot on the main controller. The maximum total copier memory is 64MB, even if a 64MB
chip is inserted.
Please note that the basic copier will run without additional memory, but there are two possible
situations where the machine will not function properly:
1) Certain modes of duplex copying such as A3, heavy density photo or text mode. Adding the
32MB memory, 64MB memory or HDD option will ensure performance and allow
increased pages.
2) Electronic sorting. The maximum number of sheets (54) without the additional memory is
less than the current DMR22 / 27 (90). Adding the 32MB memory will allow it to do the
same number of sheets as the DMR22 / 27. With the addition of the Hard Disk Drive
(HDD), the number of pages stored increases to 1,000.
3) Certain stamp functions: See earlier section on Stamp / User stamp.

DMR22A/27A/32A
HDD Option:
The following functions are provided, by adding the hard disk drive option (DHD1027):
Document Server
Increased maximum number of pages stored in memory for electronic sorting (allows up to
1,000 pages)
Sample copy
Certain stamp features (background numbering, User Stamp and Presets 2)
Locked / secure printing
Sample printing
Printing to the document server
Font and macro download
Increased page capacity for electronic sort printing

DMR22A/27A/32A
Fax Features:
General Features
Circuit: PSTN, PBX, ISDN (option)

Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3, Additional G3 (option), G4 (option)
Resolution: 8 x 3.85, 7.7 l/mm, 200 x 200/100dpi (std.)
8/16 x 15.4 l/mm, 400 x 400 dpi (option)
Compression method: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG (Option)
Scanning speed: DMR22A/27A: less than 0.47 seconds (200 x 100dpi, A4)
DMR32A: less than 0.66 seconds (200x100dpi, A4)
Number of Pages DMR22A 48 pages/minute (Standard Mode, A4 LEF)
Scanned: DMR27A 48 pages/minute (Standard Mode, A4 LEF)
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000,
9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
G4 option: 64000, 56000 bps
Transmission speed: G3: Approx.3 seconds (200x100dpi, ITUT #1 chart, TTI off,
G3: Approx.2 seconds (200x100 dpi, with JBIG, ITUT #1 chart TTI
off, memory transmission)
G4: Approx.3 seconds (200x200dpi, ITUT #1 chart)
SAF memory: Standard: 2 MB,
Option: 24MB (total 26MB)
Page memory Standard: 4MB
Memory backup: One hour
Stamp: Standard (with document feeder)
TTI/RTI: Standard
CSI: Standard
Quick and Speed dial: Standard: 400quick dial only (no Speed dial)
Option: 1200quick dial (default) / 1000quick dial and 200speed dial
(SP mode setting), selectable
Group dial: Standard: 64group
Program: Standard: 100 numbers, Max 200 numbers with JBIG option
Redial: Standard
Direct fax number entry: Standard
User Code: Std. 100 Codes (Max. 500 codes with optional User Account
Enhance Unit) [DME1045RAM]
Auto document : Standard (6 documents), Max. 18 documents with option

DMR22A/27A/32A
General Features continued
Page count Standard

Auto reduction Standard
Wild cards : Standard
Summer time (daylight Standard
saving time)
ID code programming: Standard (four digits)
User function key: Standard (3 keys)
Night timer: No
Energy saver: Standard
LCD prompt : Standard
Remaining memo ry Standard
indication
Time indicator / clock No / Standard
adjustment :
User parameter setting Standard
Transmission features

Serial broadcasting (later) Standard (Max. 500 numbers)
Send later Standard
Economy transmission Standard
Forwarding Standard
Parallel memory Standard (Automatically selected.)
transmission
Book fax Standard
Closed network Standard
(transmission)
Confidential Standard
transmission/with ID
Transfer request Standard (Transfer station: 99 location, receiver: 30 terminals)
Transfer transmission Standard
Multi-step Transfer Standard
Polling transmission Standard
Double sided transmission Yes

DMR22A/27A/32A
Reception features

Authorized reception Standard (30 patterns) Max 50 patterns with option
Multi-copy Standard
(1 to 9 sets with sorting)
Reverse order printing Yes, One Bin Tray (Option) only
Memory lock Standard
Confidential reception Standard
Special reception numbers Standard (30 numbers)
Polling reception Standard (Max. 500 senders)
Poll later Standard (Max. 500senders)
Polling from memory Standard
Continuous polling No
2 in 1 (two in one) Standard
Economy printing mode No
Duplex reception Yes
Telephone features
Handset / telephone No
Voice request No
Pause Standard
Reception mode selection Standard
Automatic fax/phone change Standard
Reception mode switch over Standard
(remote)
Answering machine interface Standard
Reception mode switching Standard
timer
Auto answer delay time Standard (SP mode)
Silent ringing detection Standard

DMR22A/27A/32A
Fax Memory
DMR22A / 27A / 32A DMR22 / 27 DMR35A / 45A

Modem speed 33.6Kbps 33.6Kbps 33.6Kbps
Standard SAF 2MB 2MB 2MB
memory
Standard page 4MB 4MB 4MB
memory (up to 200x200 dpi) (up to 200x200 dpi)
Standard work 2MB
memory
400 dpi page
memory Option: Option:
SAF memory +32MB SD-RAM = total 32MB EDO memory
(Feature 40MB *local procurement
Expander) (26MB SAF + 12MB page *common with DMR15/18 & DMR22/27 fax
memory +2MB work memory
memory)
*Common with
DMR35A/45A &
DMR22/27 Type B printer
memory
Function Upgrade
Option:
Ricoh proprietary Function Upgrade + JBIG
*DME185J-F
JBIG
Hard Disk - - -

DMR22A/27A/32A
Printer Features
CPU RM5231 (200MHz)

Memory Standard : 96MB (Resident 32MB + mandatory additional 64MB)
Hard Disk Drive Option: 6GB
Printer PCL5e
Description PCL6
Language RPCS
Adobe PostScript3(Option)
Continuous Print DMR22A: 22ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Speed DMR27A: 27ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
DMR32A: 32ppm (A4 LEF / Letter LEF)
Print Resolution: PCL5e PCL6 RPCS PS3
Driver does not 300 / 600 dpi 600 dpi 600 dpi 300 / 600 dpi
support 300dpi,
but controller can
print at 300dpi.
Host Interface Standard:
Parallel Port IEEE1284 (ECP)
IC Card Slot (for service use only)
Option: (These options can not be installed together.)
Network Port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) or
2 ports x IEEE1394 (6 pin)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI*, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
(NIC option
required) * Requires SmartNetMonitor client software to be installed
MIB support SNMP Printer MIB, Ricoh MIB
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions (Printer
Key Top is added on the left side of LCD )

DMR22A/27A/32A
Printer features continued
Drivers Win WinNT WinNT4.0 (See Note 1-3. below this chart)
95/98/Me 3.51 Workstation Server Server Server + 4.0
l **Adobe 4.0 4.0 4.0 Enterprise
does not TSE Edition
release PS PCL5e Yes - - Yes Yes -
driver for
PCL 6 Yes - - Yes Yes -
W2K. Only
MS-PostScript RPCS Yes - - - Yes -
driver is
PS3 Yes - - - Yes -
available and
PPD file for Win2000 Win Mac
MS-PS is Professional Server Server Advanced Datacentre 3.1 8.6 OS
included in the Terminal Server Server X
Driver CD- Svc (Classic)
ROM. PCL5e Yes Yes Yes - - - -
l PS driver for PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes - - - -
Mac OS 7.6.1- RPCS Yes Yes - - - -
8.5 will be
released on PS3 Yes Yes Yes - - Yes
Web. Mac OS (mini (mini (mini
X (Native) driver) driver) driver)
Driver TBA. ** ** **
Supported Driver For PCL5e, PCL6 and RPCS:
Language English, German, French, Italian, Swedish, Norwegian, Czech, Hungarian, Finnish,
(Localization) Polish, Portuguese,
For PostScript3:
English, German, French, Italian, Swedish, Norwegian
UNIX Filter and Install Shell & Super Option (Device Option Setting) are available (Web
release)
Utility Software Printer Optio n (Number of supported Languages): Desktop Binder V2 Lite (11) /
(Bundle Software) SmartNetMonitor for Admin (11) / SmartNetMonitor for Client (11) / LAN-FAX
M1 (11) / 1394 utility (1) / Printer Utility for Mac (1) [3 x CD-ROMs]
Printer / Scanner Option (Number of supported Languages): Desktop Binder V2 Lite
(11) / SmartNetMonitor for Admin (11) / SmartNetMonitor for Client (11) /
ScanRouter V2 Lite (5) / LAN-FAX M1 (11) / 1394 utility (1) / Printer Utility for Mac
(1) / TWAIN Driver (11) [3 x CD-ROMs]
Note 1: PCL driver and RPCS driver require Service Pack 4 in order to work in WinNT4.0
Workstation or Server.
Note 2: PS driver requires Service Pack 5 in order to work in WinNT4.0 Workstation or
Server.
Note 3: PCL driver requires Service Pack 6 for Terminal Server Edition in order to work in
WinNT4.0 TSE.

DMR22A/27A/32A
64MB Memory (Option)
This option is a mandatory item for Printer Option, Printer/Scanner Option, Network Interface
Board or IEEE 1394 Interface.
Note: This item is commonly used with DMR35A/45A (DMEBP64)
Hardware Specification
144pin SDRAM-DIMM
PC100 CL2
Access Time: 6ns (3.3volt)
Network Interface Board (Option)
Network Interface Board is necessary for network printing and scanning. This option is mandatory
item for Printer Scanner Option.
Topology Ethernet 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T

Cables Requirement:
STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) Cable
Frame Type Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet
SNAP
IEEE1394 Interface
Hardware Specifications:
Interface IEEE1394 (6-Pin)

Number of Ports 2
Data Transmission Speed 400Mbps / 200Mbps / 100Mbps
Note: IEEE1394 Interface includes two types of IEEE1394 cables. One is a 6-pin 4-pin cable
and the other is a 6-pin 6-pin cable. The length of each of these cables is 2.0m.
Hard Disk Drive (DHD1027):
The following printing functions require the HDD option to be installed:
o Locked / secure printing

o Sample printing
o Printing to the document server
o Font and macro download
o Increased page capacity for electronic sort printing (up to 1,000 pages)

DMR22A/27A/32A
Scanner Features:
General Features
Item Specification
Optical resolution 600 dpi 256 shades of grey
Scan speed ScanRouter: 42 cpm/ min (200dpi binary/SEF/MMR)
Twain: 29 cpm/ min (200dpi binary/SEF/MMR)
0.8 second/sheet (200 dpi binary/SEF/without
compression)
Scan area Main scan: 297mm
Sub scan: 432mm
Detectable original size: NA model;
contact glass DLT SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF/LEF, USB4 SEF, Foolscap
SEF, EngQuatro LEF
EU/Asia model;
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, Foolscap
SEF, LG SEF
Detectable original size: NA model;
ADF DLT SEF, LG SEF, LT SEF/LEF, HLT SEF/LEF,
USB4 SEF, EngQuatro LEF
EU/Asia model;
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5
SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF
Compression Method Binary: MH, MR, MMR
Greyscale: JPEG
Network Topology Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Protocol TCP/IP
Network Interface RJ45
Connector
Memory capacity 23MB
Web Status Monitor Standard
Operating Ambient -30C - 50 degrees C
Temperature
Operating Humidity 5% - 80%
Power Requirements 5VDC +/- 5%
Power Consumption 5VDC 1A max
Emissions Compliance FCC class A level

DMR22A/27A/32A
ScanRouter V2 Lite:
Resolution 100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi

Scan mode Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Grey Scale
Original size DLT SEF, LG SEF, Foolscap SEF, LT SEF/LEF, HLT SEF/LEF, A3
SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, Free
Image density Lighter to Darker: 7 degrees
2 sided scan Yes (optional ARDF required)
Image format when TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)
using TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Multi-page TIFF
PDF
JPEG
OS <Delivery Server>
Windows 95(OSR2 or later), 98/98SE
Windows ME
Windows NT Server4.0 (SP5 or later)
Windows2000Server
<Client PC>
Windows 95(after OSR2), 98/98SE
Windows ME
Windows NT Workstation 4.0(SP5 or later)
Windows NT Server4.0 (SP5 or later)
Windows2000 Professional, Windows2000Server
Memory <Delivery Server>
Min 64MB (128MB or more recommended)
<Client PC>
Min 48MB (64MB or more recommended)
CPU <Delivery Server>
Pentium 200MHz minimum
(Pentium? 350MHz minimum recommended)
<Client PC>
Pentium 133MHz or faster
(Pentium 266MHz or faster recommended)
HDD <Delivery Server>
At least 200MB of disk space are required for installation. In addition,
500MB or more are is required
<Client PC>
50MB or more (200MB recommended)
Network Topology: Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Protocol: TCP/IP

DMR22A/27A/32A
Network Twain Driver
Document size Max A3 / 11x17

Resolution Scanner : 600dpi
Driver: Platen Binary 2400dpi
256 level 2400dpi
ADF Binary 1200dpi
256 level 1200dpi
Greyscale 256 level
OS Win95/98/ME, WinNT4.0, 2000
Memory Minimum required memory for OS + 8MB
CPU Pentium 75MHz or more, or minimum required CPU for OS
HDD More than 100MB of disk space is required.
Network Topology: Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
Protocol: TCP/IP
Duplex scanning Yes (With optional ARDF)
Skew correction Yes
Image Rotation Yes
Soft Endorser Yes

DMR22A/27A/32A
External Options
ARDF (DF75):
Original size
Simplex: A5 - A3 (SEF)
Duplex: A5 - A3 (SEF)
Original weight: Simplex: 40 - 128g/m2
Duplex: 52 - 105g/m2
Stack capacity: 50 sheets (80g/m2 )
Power consumption: Less than 50W
Weight: Approx 10Kg
Paper Bank (PS490):
Paper size: A5 SEF - A3

Paper weight: 60 - 105g/m2
Paper capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Power consumption: Less than 28W (power is supplied from the mainframe)
Weight: Approx 25Kg
One-Bin Tray (PT280) requires interchange unit (DIF1027IU):

Paper capacity: 125 sheets (80g/m2 )
Weight : Less than 1.1Kg
500 Sheet Finisher (SR820):
Paper size: A3 - B5 (LEF),

Paper weight: 60 - 128g/m2 (64-90g/m2 with stapling)
Stack capacity: 500 sheets
Staple capacity: 30 sheets (A4, B5 LEF, 80g/m2 )
20 sheets (B4, 80g/m2 )
Staple paper size: A3 - B5 LEF
Staple paper weight 64 90g/m2
Staple position: 1 position
Shift tray (Doggy tail): Standard
Power consumption 48W (power is supplied from the mainframe)
Dimension: 350 x 490 x 230mm
Weight: Approx 10Kg

DMR22A/27A/32A
Paper size /Paper weight:

Proof Tray: A3 A6T, 60 - 157g/m2
Shift Tray: A3 - B5, 60 157g/ m2
Stack capacity:
Proof Tray: 250 sheets (A4 LEF, 80g/m2 )
50 sheets (B4, 80g/m2 )
Shift Tray: 1000 sheets (A4 LEF, 80g/m2 )
500 sheets (B4, 80g/m2 )
Staple capacity: 50 sheets (A4, 80g/m2 )
30 sheets (B4, 80g/m2 )
Staple paper weight: 64 - 90g/m2
Staple position: 1 staple ~ 2 position
2 staple ~ 2 position
Noise (Power level): Operating: Less than 64dB (full system)
Power consumption: 75W
Weight: Approx 25Kg
Bridge Unit (DIF1027BU):
To connect 500 or 1000 sheet finisher to copier mainframe
Proof Tray:
Paper size: A5 - A3, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, A4 (LEF)
Bridge to the finisher:
Paper size: A5 - A3, B6 SEF
Duplex (AD420) requires interchange unit (DIF1027IU):
Paper size: A5 - A3 (SEF)

Paper capacity: 1
Power consumption: 35W (power is supplied from the mainframe)
Weight: Approx 6Kg

DMR22A/27A/32A
Shift Sort Tray (DIF1027SS):
Paper capacity: 250 sheets (A4 or smaller) (80g/m2 )

125 sheets ( B4 or larger) ) (80g/m2 )
Power consumption: 3.6W
Weight: Approx 1.6Kg
LCT (PS500):
Paper size: A4 (LEF)

Paper capacity: 2000 sheets (80g/m2 )
Weight: Less than 25Kg

DMR22A/27A/32A
Environmental Specifications
Mechanical Noise Level (power level):
(1) Sound power level DMR22A/27A DMR32A

Stand-by (Mainframe only): 40dB 40dB
Operating (Mainframe only): 63dB 65dB
Operating (Full System): 68.5dB 69dB
(2) Sound pressure level

Stand-by (Mainframe only): 34dB TBA
Operating (Mainframe only): 57dB TBA
Operating (Full System): 61dB TBA
Maximum: 0.02PPM
Dust Level:
Maximum: 0.075mg/m3
Maximum: 0.07mg/m3
Average Power Consumption:
Basic Copier Full System*

DMR22A DMR27A DMR32A DMR22A DMR27A DMR32A
(22cpm) (27cpm) (32cpm) (22cpm) (27cpm) (32cpm)
Low Power
Mode 130W 130W 140W 140W 140W 140W
Auto Off
mode 8W *2 8W *2 8W *2 42W 42W 42W
* Full system = Printer, Scanner, Fax, Finisher 1000, G3, ISDN, Paper Bank, Duplex, etc
*2 = 7W on the 100V model
Environmental Regulations:
BAM Energy Star Swan

Yes Yes Yes (EU)

DMR22A/27A/32A

Supplies: Yield 1 :
Toner 2 DT43BLK Average 11,000

Photoconductor Unit DMU23 Average 60,000
1
Notes: : Yield based on A4 @ 6% Ricoh Chart
2
Reliability:
Machine Life (ML): 5 years or 1,200,000, whichever comes first
Expected Average Monthly Volume (AMV): DMR22A: 5,000 pages (copy/print/fax)

DMR27A: 8,000 pages
DMR32A: 10,000 pages
history.
target customer.
customer.
It is recommended that machines are placed to handle MMV and not Duty Cycle.

DMR22A/27A/32A
WHATS IN THE BOX
Mainframe:
1. PCU Yes
2. Operation Panel Yes (non-Word)
3. Operation Instructions No *1
4. Branding and product name plaque Yes (attached to machine)
5. Energy Star Sticker Yes (attached to machine)
*1 : The copier operation instructions must be ordered separately (DDK27Axx or DDK1032xx)
Fax:
1. Parts for Installation Yes

2. Installation Procedure Yes (English)
3. Language Set No *1
4. Fax Decal (non-Word) No *1
*1 : The language set must be ordered separately and will include the decals (DDK27APxx)
Print and Print / Scan:
1. Parts for Installation No

2. Function Button for Operation Panel Yes
3. Language Set No *1
4. CD ROM Yes *2
*1 : The language set must be ordered separately

*2 : CD ROM contains Printer Drivers and Utilities and Document Management Utility

DMR22A/27A/32A
WHAT FITS WHAT

DMR22A 2205 2238 2212

DMR27A 2705 2738 2712
DMR32A 3205 3238 3212
(Launch May 2002)
Peripherals: Description: Compatibility:
= New colour, will fit existing DMR22/27

X = Not compatible with DMR22/27
PC1018 Platen Cover (also DMR15S/18S)

DF75 ARDF X
PS490 Paper Bank (2 trays x 500 sheets)
PS500 LCT (internal)
PT280 1-bin tray
DIF1027SS Shift Sort Tray
AD420 Duplex Unit X
BT1027 Bypass Tray
DIF1027IU Interchange Unit
SR790 1,000 sheets finisher X
SR820 500 sheet finisher X
DIF1027BU Bridge Unit X
KCB1027 Key Counter Bracket
DMR15SRCABX Small Rigid Cabinet (also DMR15S/18S)
Fax Options:
DIF1027F Fax Option (includes ink stamp) X
DIF1027G3 Additional G3 Interface X
DIF1027G4 Additional G4 ISDN Interface X
DIF185J-F Upgrade Card (JBIG) (also DMR15/18/35A/45A)
Print/Scan/Document Server Options:

DIF1027P Printer Controller only DMR22A/27A only
DIF1027PV2 Printer Controller only Version 2 DMR22A/27A/32A
DIF1027S Printer/Scanner Kit DMR22A/27A only
DIF1027SV2 Printer/Scanner Kit Version 2 DMR22A/27A/32A
DHD1027 Hard Disk Drive (Document Server) X
DIF1027E Ethernet NIC X
DIF1027PS PostScript 3 Option X
DIF1045FW IEEE1394 Interface X (common with DMR35A/45A)

DMR22A/27A/32A
What Fits What continued
Memory for Copier/Printer/Fax:

DMEBP32 32MB Memory (also multi-fit)
DMEBP64 64MB Memory (also multi-fit)
DME1045RAM User Code Enhancement Kit X (common with DMR35A/45A)
Supplies:
DT43BLK Toner X Yield 11,000 @ 6%
DMU23 * Photoconductor Unit X Yield 60,000 @ 6%
CSC720 Staples for SR820
CSC760A Stapler Cartridge for SR790 X
CSC760B Stapler Refill Cartridge for SR790 X
* 1 x PCU unit comes as standard with the machine.
Language Sets:
Language: Copier Copier Fax: Print: Print:
DMR22A/27A DMR22A/27A/ DIF1027P DIF1027PV2
: 32A: Print/Scan: Print/Scan:
DIF1027S DIF1027SV2
English DDK27AGB DDK1032GB DDK27AFGB DDK27APGB DDK1032PGB
German DDK27AD DDK1032D DDK27AFD DDK27APD DDK1032PD
French DDK27AF DDK1032F DDK27AFF DDK27APF DDK1032PF
Italian DDK27AI DDK1032I DDK27AFI DDK27API DDK1032PI
Swedish DDK27AS DDK1032S DDK27AFS DDK27APS DDK1032PS
Czech DDK27ACZ DDK1032CZ DDK27AFCZ DDK27APCZ DDK1032PCZ
Hungarian DDK27AH DDK1032H DDK27AFH DDK27APH DDK1032PH
Norwegian DDK27AN DDK1032N DDK27AFN DDK27APN DDK1032PN
Portuguese DDK27AP DDK1032P DDK27AFP DDK27APP DDK1032PP
Polish DDK27APL DDK1032PL DDK27AFPL DDK27APPL DDK1032PPL
Finnish DDK27ASF DDK1032SF DDK27AFSF DDK27APSF DDK1032PSF
Note: Please see the Pictorial What-Fits-What to obtain the option

configuration, i.e. which additional options must be fitted when a
particular peripheral/option is installed, and which options cannot be
installed together.

DMR22A/27A/32A
DMR22/27 PERIPHERAL COMPATIBILITY WITH

DMR22A/27A/32A
= Compatible with DMR22A/27A/32A but old colour
X = Not compatible with DMR22A/27A/32A
Peripheral: Description: Compatibility:

DF69 ARDF X
DPC185 Platen Cover
PS440 Paper Bank
PS420 LCT
PT270 1-bin tray
DIF270SS Shift Sort Tray
AD360 Duplex Unit X
BT270 Bypass Tray
DIF270IU Interchange Unit
SR720 1,000 sheet Finisher X
DIF270BU Bridge Unit X
DIF270F Fax Option X
DIF270G3 Additional G3 Board X
DIF270G4 ISDN Option X
DME185J-F Upgrade Card JBIG
DIF185PC PC-Fax Expander X
DIF270P Printer Controller X
DIF270S Scanner Option X
DHD185P or Printer HDD X
DHD185PV2
DIF185EI Ethernet NIC X
DIF185PS PostScript 3 X
209851 Key Counter Bracket
DMR18SRCAB Small Rigid Cabinet
DME185 Copier Memory X

DMR22A/27A/32A
The following machines can be seen as the main competition for the DMR22A/27A/32A models:
Digital Machines:
Canon: GP220, GP225, IR2200, IR2800, IR3300

Konica: 7020, 7035
Kyocera-Mita: Vi200, Vi230, Vi310
Minolta: Di250f, Di350f, Di251f, Di351f
Panasonic: FP-D250
Sharp: AR200, AR250, AR287, AR337, AR235, AR275, ARM350
Toshiba: DP2570, E-Studio 20/25, E-Studio 35
Xerox: DC332/1, DC332/2
Please see the table on the following page for a quick comparison of competitor and NRG
machines.
Note: The sources of information are:

1. Infomarkt Copier Guide, Edition 26 2000/2001
2. BERTL, Datacheck 3-in-1 Fact Book, Winter 2000
What to Buy for Business, Edition 246, September 2001
Competitor Internet Websites, various , July 2001
Ricoh Europe Competitor Information Spreadsheets, June 2001
First Hand Overview:
During product training in October 2001, NRGI had the opportunity to look first
hand at the following competitors machines: Canon IR2000, Toshiba E-Studio and
Minolta Di251. The following observations were made, which you might find useful
in your selling activities:
Canon IR2000:
One bin tray overhangs

Machine has far greater depth than normal
Machine has corona wires, so gives off more ozone and requires more maintenance
Consumable appears to be all- in-one
Toner hard to change
Noisy

DMR22A/27A/32A
Toshibe E-Studio:
Machine has corona wires

Consumable again appears to be all- in-one or at least like our DMR12
Difficult to clear
No document server
Slow warm up
On the plus side, it has internet fax, scan to email and a step-by-step paper clearance
Minolta Di251:
Extremely noisy
Left hand feed
No scanning
Slow duplex
Flimsy bypass

DMR22A/27A/32A
NRG Canon Konica Kyocera-Mita Minolta

Functions: DMR22A: DMR27A: DMR32A: GP220: GP225: IR2200: IR2800: IR3300: 7025: 7035: Vi200: Vi230L: Vi310: Di251: Di350f: Di251f: Di351f:
Analogue / D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
Digital
Copy Speed 22 27 32 22 22 22 28 33 25 35 20 23 31 25 35 25 35
(cpm)
Warm-up Time 15 15 15 8.6 8.6 29 29 29 30 45 45 45 45 60 70 60 70
(seconds)
First Copy 4.9 4.9 4.5 9.2 9.2 5.8 5.8 5.8 5.0 5.0 6.5 5.2 5.2 5.8 4.7 5.8 4.6
Speed
(seconds)
Max. Original A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Standard Paper 1000 1000 1000 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 1050 550 1100 1300 751 751 751 751
Capacity
Max. Paper 3100 3100 3100 3050 3050 4650 4650 4650 3550 2550 1050 5400 4300 3751 3751 3751 3751
Capacity
Bypass 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 100 200 1 1 1 1
Capacity
Duplex Opt. Opt. Opt. - Std. Std. Std. Std. Std. Std. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Std. Opt. Std.
Document Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Feeder
Multi Copies 1-99 1-99 1-99 1-100 1-100 1-100 TBA 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-99 1-999 1-999 1-99 1-999 1-99 1-999
Zoom (%) 25-400 25-400 TBA 25-800 25-800 25-800 25-800 25-800 25-400 25-400 50-200 25-400 25-400 25-400 25-400 25-400 25-400
1 2 4
Consumables T/PCU T/PCU T/PCU T/D T/PCU T/PCU T/PCU TBA T/D/D T/D/D TBA T/D/D TBA T/D/D T/D/D T/D/D
Copier Memory 32 32 32 32 32 128 128 128 16 288 2 16 16 16 16 32 32

(MB)
Max. Copier 64 64 64 64 64 128 128 128 160 288 10 80 64 144 64 64 64
Memory (MB)
Printer Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Fax Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. - Std. Opt. Opt. Std. Std. Std.
Scanner Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. - Opt. - Opt. - Opt. Opt.
Network Card Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Max. Monthly 20K 20K 20K 30K 30K 3-30K 3 5-35K 3 10-40K 3 30K 50K 15K 30K 50K 35K 55K 35K TBA
Volume
Date Launched Nov. 2001 Nov. 2001 May 2002 Feb. 2000 Mar. 2000 Q3 2001 Q3 2001 Q3 2001 Oct.. 2000 Mar. 2001 Mar. 1999 Jul. 2000 Oct. 1999 Jun. 2001 Mar. 2000 Aug. 2001 Jun. 2001
Fax Modem 33.6 33.6 33.6 14.4 14.4 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 - 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
Speed (Kbps)
Copy 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Resolution
(dpi)

DMR22A/27A/32A
Panasonic Sharp Toshiba Muratec

Functions: DP-2500: AR287: AR275: ARM350: E-Studio 25: E-Studio 35: MFX1600:
Analogue / Digital D D D D D D D
Copy Speed (cpm) 25 28 27 35 25 35 25
Warm-up Time (seconds) 35 65 40 95 60 30 60
First Copy Speed (seconds) 4.5 5.2 4.8 5.3 7.9 3.9 5.7
Max. Original A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A4
Standard Paper Capacity 1100 1050 1100 TBA 550 1100 800
Max. Paper Capacity 2250 5050 2100 TBA 4250 3700 850
Bypass Capacity 50 50 100 TBA 100 100 50
Duplex Opt. Std. Std. TBA Opt. Std. Opt.
Document Feeder Opt. Std. TBA TBA Opt. Opt. Std.
Multi Copies 1-999 1-999 TBA TBA 1-999 TBA 1-999
Zoom (%) 25-400 25-800 25-400 25-400 50-200 25-400 25-400
Consumables TBA T/D/D TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA
Copier Memory (MB) 34 16 32 64 TBA 32 16
Max. Copier Memory (MB) TBA 16 288 320 TBA 323 160
Printer Std. Opt. Opt. Std. Std. Opt. Std.
Fax Opt. - Opt. TBA Opt. Opt. \Std.
Scanner Std. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Network Card Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt. Opt.
Max. Monthly Volume 21K 80K TBA TBA 50K TBA 35K
Date Launched Oct. 2000 Jun. 2000 Apr. 2001 Q4 2001 Nov. 2000 TBA Nov. 2000
Fax Modem Speed (Kbps) 33.6 - 33.6 TBA 33.6 33.6 33.6
Copy Resolution (dpi) 600 400 400 600 600 600 600
Notes: 1 = Toner / PCU

2 = Toner / Drum
3 = Average expected monthly volume
4 = Toner / Drum / Developer

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR35A / DMR45A
Digital 35 / 45ppm
Nashuatec 3525 / 4525

Rex Rotary 3508 / 4508
Gestetner 3502 / 4502
First
February, 2001 April, 2001 China

Date Created: February, 2001
Version 4
July, 2001
DMR35A/45A
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Marketing Objectives 3
Product Overview 5
Market Overview 16
Product Comparison & Product Range Plan 18
Product Selling Points 21
General Specifications 22
What Fits What 37

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\ DMR35A_45A.doc 1

DMR35A/45A
INTRODUCTION
Since 1998 the DMR35/45 Series of machines have proved to be well-positioned and very
successful products, but recently we have seen a number of competitor products introduced into this
segment which has created a very competitive market.
The new DMR35A/45A contain many new upgraded features such as a large touch-screen LCD,
600dpi printing, document server and network scanner. However the machines are not simply
upgrades of the DMR35/45, but wholly new machines incorporating completely new architecture.
This architecture (GW Architecture) will bring the cost of a fully configured MFP down, thus
increasing our connectivity rates. This will allow us to gain a considerable competitive advantage
over our competition.

DMR35A/45A
MARKETING OBJECTIVES
1. Re-establish our position in this segment by offering a machine that contains many of the
features that have become the standard since the original launch of the DMR35/45 series.
2. Increase the strength of our mono MFP range with all copiers now printing at 600dpi
3. To increase unit placements and market share
4. To encourage greater connectivity and digitalisation.
Target Markets
The DMR35A (35cpm) is targeted at the walk-up environment in the small to middle office, where
the machine will be shared between 3 to 10 users.
The DMR45A (45cpm) is targeted at a workgroup in the small to middle office, where the machine
will be shared between 20 and 30 users.
As a fully configured machine, both machines can also be targeted as a core document solution
MFP in the large office.
Positioning Objectives
Introduce customers to the improved functionality, productivity and efficiency benefits of

the new machine, not just in comparison to the DMR35/45 series but with many of its
competitors products.
To encourage greater use of the DMR35A/45A as a printer, thus increasing the print volume
made on our products.

DMR35A/45A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The DMR35A/45A are two new machines with copy/print speeds of 35 and 45 pages per minute.
They have been designed to replace the current DMR35/45 series, and include a number of new
features that the DMR35/45 series did not have and which have become standards for machines in
this sector since the launch of the DMR35/45 series.
Key Features, Advantages and Benefits
The DMR35A/45A have a large touch screen LCD that is the same size as the DMR55A/70A.
Since the introduction of the DMR35/45 series, a touch screen LCD has become a standard for
copiers in this segment.
User Tools/Counter Check Modes Program Clear Modes Energy Saver Interrupt
Document Server Key Touch Panel Screen

Copy Key Sample Copy
Application Keys
(Fax, Printer, Scanner)

DMR35A/45A
Image Quality
Product Resolution Scanning Marking
Maximum When memory copy

DMR35A/45A 600 dpi 256 shades of grey 4 levels 4 levels
per dot
DMR35/45 400 dpi 256 shades of grey 16 levels 16 levels
per dot (option HDD
required)
DMR22/27 600 dpi 256 levels shades of 4 levels 4 levels
grey per dot
Whereas the DMR35/45 series had a copy quality of 400dpi, the new DMR35A/45A copies at
600dpi. The addition of the new DMR35A/45A means that all our mono MFPs from 15 to 105cpm
offer 600 dpi image quality.
Network Scanning
With network scanning, the DMR35A/45A become highly productive black and white scanners
with superior image quality of 600dpi with 256 greyscales. The main benefit of this compared to
the previous SCSI scanners is that there is no longer the need for a PC to be located close by. Users
can also scan and send the image to any user on the network, without having to retrieve the scanned
document from a PC first. Please note that the scanner comes as part of a printer/scanner kit and
cannot be purchased separately. Like the printer option, the printer/scanner kit has Desktop Binder,
SmartNet Monitor and PC-Fax, but it also has ScanRouter so that users can scan effortlessly and
distribute documents to any other user on the network.
The scanner option has a limit of 100 users. This can be expanded to 500 users with the addition of
the User Enhance Kit (or NV RAM) option.
Improved Fax Capability

The fax option on the DMR35A/45A has such powerful specification that it can effectively be
positioned as a central fax of a division or workgroup in middle to large office. It has 3 key
features.
High Speed
1) Modem speed 33.6Kbps
2) Transmission speed: 3 seconds (2 seconds with JBIG)
3) Scanning speed of 0.43 seconds, compared to 0.99 seconds for the DMR35 and 0.75 seconds for
the DMR45
Multi-Port
With the DMR35A/45A fax option one can have up to 3 lines available simultaneously, when
additional G3 and G4 (ISDN) are installed.
Quick Dial Maximum of 1200 numbers

DMR35A/45A
Conventional fax machines usually have a quick dial feature limited to a maximum of 56 since
these use a hard key for quick dials. The touch screen on the DMR35A/45A allows this maximum
to be increased to 400, and even 1200 with the JBIG option.
PC-Fax Software
Unlike the conventional PC-Fax option, DMR35A/45A PC-Fax (Software) will be provided as
bundled software with Printer Kit or Printer / Scanner Kit. This is to prevent the user using the PC-
Fax as a printer without purchasing the Printer or Printer / Scanner Kit.
This PC-Fax allows you to transmit fax messages from your PC, which will reduce the number of
steps you take when you send your fax. It will not receive the fax data as electronic data into your
PC. For this function, you will need to purchase a full ve rsion of ScanRouter (Cherry) software.
Document Server
The previous DMR35/45 series did not possess a document server feature. The document server on
the new DMR35A/45A is now more advanced than even the DMR55A/70A series. The document
server on the DMR55A/70A could only store, copy and print data, with printing as the only method
of output.
Document Server for the DMR55A/70A
Input Storage Output
1. Copy HDD
2. Printer 4.3GB
Printing
The new document server for DMR35A/45A can now store not only copy and printer data, but PC-
fax and scanner data as well. This data can then be stored on a hard disk twice the size of the
DMR55A/70A For output, one can still print the data but one can also re- fax and re-distribute.

DMR35A/45A
Document Server for the DMR35A/45A
(1) Printing
1. Copy
2. Printer
3. Fax (Transmission) (2) re-Fax
4. PC-Fax HDD
(Transmission) (3) re-Distribution
5. Scanner
Document Explorer Desktop Binder (Plumeria)

Desktop Binder software allows one to use the Document Server function from a networked PC.
With this it is now possible to view, search, print, re- fax and delete the document stored on the
Document Server function direct from the PC.
Shorter Warm-up Times

The combination of a heat roller with ultra thin shell, two internal heaters and a low temperature
fusing toner, give the new DMR35A/45A models a fast warm- up speed. This is not only much
quicker than our own DMR35/45 series but also than much of our competition.
There is considerable evidence to suggest that many customers do not use this feature due to the
long warm- up times on the market at the moment. With the new DMR35A/45A, we expect to see
customers making far greater use of this feature and with more and more environmental standards
being introduced such as ISO 14001 this will be seen as a key selling point of our machine.

DMR35A/45A
DMR35A (35cpm)
Product Name DMR35A DMR35/45 Canon Xerox Konica Toshiba

IR330S/ 332DC 7033 DP3580
GP335
CPM 35 35 33 32 33 35
*Warm-up 15 85 81 60 90 90
Time(sec.)
*Recovery 10 83 NA NA NA NA
Time(sec.)
DMR45A (45cpm)
Product Name DMR45A DMR35/45 Canon Xerox Konica Toshiba
IR400S/ 340DC 7040 DP4580
GP405
CPM 45 45 40 40 40 45
*Warm-up 20 100 81 60 90 420
Time(sec.)
*Recovery 15 98 NA NA NA NA
Time(sec.)
In recognition of these shorter warm- up times, the DMR35A has received the first Copier of the
Future award from the Internal Energy Agency (IEA) for a mid-range network capable digital
copier. The main criteria against which this award were given are as follows
Award-winning machine
Project Criteria DMR35A DMR45A

Recovery Time 10 seconds 10 seconds 15 seconds
(from Sleep mode)
Sleep Mode Power 10W 10 W 10W
Duplex Productivity 75% (30cpm) 95% 95%

80% (40cpm)
Auto Shut-down Time 10 seconds 60 seconds 60 seconds
(Default time to sleep mode) (*acceptable for
60sec. Default)
Higher Productivity
Improved 1 to 1 Document Feeder Speed
The DMR35/45 series has a 5cpm difference between mainframe and document feeder speed. With
the DMR35A/45A the 1 to 1 document feeder speed is muc h enhanced and now matches engine
speed.

DMR35A/45A
1 to 1 Copy Speed
(1) DMR35A
Product ADF 1 to 1 Copy Speed (cpm) Continuous Speed (cpm)
DMR35A 35 35
DMR35/45 30 35
(2) DMR45A
Product ADF 1 to 1 Copy Speed (cpm) Continuous Speed (cpm)
DMR45A 45 45
DMR35/45 40 45
Enhanced Duplex Productivity
Like the DMR85/105, we are now able to offer 100% duplex productivity, both with continuous
and 1 to 1 duplex speed.
(1) Continuous Duplex Speed

Product Duplex Continuous Speed (cpm)
DMR35A/45A 35 / 45
DMR35/45 28 / 36
*Note: The data above is a continuous copy speed, not a speed measured by BLI method. The
productivity data by BLI method will be provided later when it is ready.
(2) ADF 1 to 1 Duplex Speed (1 to 2)

Product Duplex ADF 1 to 1 Speed (cpm)
DMR35A/45A 35 / 45
DMR35/45 30 / 40 13 / 16
Stamp Functions
1. Page Numbering
Absent from the previous DMR35/45 series, and present on most of our competitors machines.
This function prints page numbers onto copies.
2. Date Stamp
Again this feature was absent from previous DMR35/45 series and can be found on most of our
competitor machines in this sector. This function prints the date on copies
3. Preset Stamp
This function prints preset messages on copies. The messages for preset stamp are available in
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Finnish,
Portuguese, Czech, Hungarian, Polish and Japanese, and are all pre- installed on the hard drive.
4. Background Numbering
Function prints numbers on the background of copies.

DMR35A/45A
5. User Stamp
Prints custom messages on copies.
Please note stamp functions 3-5 are only available if either the standard memory is expanded by
32MB, or if a printer or printer/scanner options are added. Please note that the 32MB
should be offered for copier and copier/fax users who need these
functions. If printer or printer scanner option are added, then 64MB should
be offered. The reason for this is that there is only one Dimm slot, so the
32MB Dimm has to be discarded and replaced by the 64MB.
New Toner Bottle

DMR35A/45A employs new toner bottle using environment- friendly material.
This toner bottle :

1. uses PET as its base material which is not only thin but strong enough.
2. is almost half the weight compared with the current Ricoh toner bottle,
which makes it possible to contribute still further to resource conservation.
GW Architecture
The DMR35A/45A is our first GW architecture machine. GW architecture means that you no
longer need to separate controller boards for each function, instead all the controller boards are
combined in the main copier controller. To add the printer and fax functionality all that is needed is
a kit rather than a controller.
Previous MFPs DMR35A/45A with GW Architecture
Copy/Engine Engine
HDD Controller Controller HDD RAM NIC
RAM
Printer Scanner Fax Main(Copy) Controller

Controller Controller Controller
NIC NIC NCU Printer Printer/Scanner

DIMM DIMM FAX FCU
RAM RAM DIMM NCU
RAM RAM

DMR35A/45A
This has a number of key advantages.
1) The kit is a lot cheaper than a controller which means that the configured price for a copier
with printer option is much reduced.
2) Installation is a lot easier and quicker. This should help break down customer preconceptions
that installing printers, faxes etc is a complicated and expensive process. Instead we are offering
them a quick and cost effective upgrade.
3) Faster R&D. With previous MFPs, the printer controller was launched a few months after the
mainframe. This is because the copier engine had to be finalised, before a third party began to
work on the printer controller. With GW architecture, they are now developed in conjunction
and, for the first time, we will launch the printer option at the same time as the mainframe.

DMR35A/45A
Product Configuration & Options

Configuration
*Sheet Through DF
*Multi Tray Finisher Platen Cover
*1 bin Tray
*Bridge Unit
FIN 1000
External Tray
*Mainframe:
(500 sheet x 2 trays,
50 sheet Bypass,
Mail Box Duplex unit)
MB Bridge unit
1500 sheet LCT

Paper Bank
* New Option for DMR35A/45A
Other Options
Copier: Fax: Printer / Scanner:

*Punch Unit (US 2/3 hole) *Fax Kit *Printer Option
*Punch Unit (EU 2/4 hole) *Additional G3 port unit *Printer/Scanner Option
*Punch Unit *G4 unit *64MB Memory
(Scandinavian 4 hole) JBIG (common with DMR18) *PS3
*32MB Memory for Stamp SAF (common with DMR18) *NIC
Key Counter Bracket Fax Stamp marker ink *IEEE 1394 I/F
Handset (only for NA)

DMR35A/45A
Option Compatibility
DMR35/45 Compatibility DMR35A/45A
DF67 ARDF Sheet Through DF
SR 730 Finisher Multi Tray Finisher
Staple for Multi Tray Finisher
Staple Cartridge Type F (for SR 730)*
Staple Cartridge for Multi Tray Finisher
PT300 1 bin Tray 1 bin Tray
3 hole Punch Unit Type 450 US 2/3 hole changeable Punch kit
2 hole Punch Unit Type 450 EU 2/4 hole changeable Punch kit
NA Scandinavian 4 hole Punch kit
Bridge Unit Type 450 Bridge Unit
NA 32MB memory for Stamp
Fax Option Type 450 Fax Unit
Fax Function Upgrade Type185
Fax Feature Expander Type 450
(Common with Stinger C)
SAF memory
Fax Feature Expander Fax HDD Type 460
(Local Procurement: Common with Stinger C)
NA Additional G3 port unit

ISDN Option (G4) Type 450 G4 unit
Printer Controller Type 450 Printer Option
Scanner Option Type 450 Printer/Scanner Option
NA 64MB Memory
PostScript 3 PS3 Option
Network Interface Card NIB-450E NIC
NA IEEE 1394 I/F
Platen Cover ?
PS360 Paper Tray Unit ?
RT36 Large Capacity Tray ?
SR720 Finisher ?
Staple Cartridge Type G (for SR720) ?
External Output Tray Type 450 ?
Key Counter Bracket Type H ?
9-Bin Mailbox Option ?
Mailbox Bridge Unit Type 460 ?
Cabinet (Local Procurement) ?
Marker Type 30 ?
AD340 Duplex Unit Standard
Bypass Tray Type 340 Standard
Interchange Unit Type 340 Standard
Image Enhance Kit (1.7GB HDD) Type 450 HDD Standard
Electric Sort Kit Type 340 Not necessary
Expansion Box Type 450 Not necessary
Fax Stamp Type 450 Not necessary (included in ARDF)
NA (PC-Fax Software bundled with Printer and
PC-Fax Expander Type 450
Printer/Scanner unit.)
Not Necessary (Font can be downloaded in the resident
Printer Hard Disk Type450(for Font download)
HDD)
Can be used for this model
Cannot be used with this model. Note: For product codes refer to WFW page

DMR35A/45A
Option Correlation
? - must install together *- can not install together
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Mailbox Bridge Unit

Multi Tray Finisher
Printer/Scanner
Mandatory
FAX Stamp Unit

External tray
Finisher 1000
JBIG
Platen Cover
ISDN G4 Unit
Printer Unit
Option
Bridge Unit
32MB Memory
64MB Memory
SAF Memory
1 Bin Tray
Paper Bank
Punch Unit
Purchasing
IEEE 1394
FAX Unit
Option
400dpi
Mailbox
G3 Unit
ARDF
Unit
LCT
PS3
1 ARDF *
2 Platen Cover *
3 1 Bin Tray
4 Bridge Unit
5 Paper Bank
6 LCT ?
7 External tray ? * * * *
8 Finisher 1000 ? * * * *
9 Multi Tray ? * *
Finisher
10 Punch Unit ? * * ? *
11 Mailbox ? * *
12 Mailbox Bridge ? ?
Unit
13 32MB Memory *
14 FAX Unit
15 G3 Unit ?
16 ISDN G4 Unit ?
17 SAF Memory ?
18 400dpi JBIG ?
19 FAX Stamp Unit ? ?
21 Printer Unit * ?
22 Print/Scan * ?
Unit
23 64MB Memory * ? ?
24 PS3 ? ? ?
25 IEEE 1394 ? ? ?

DMR35A/45A
Target Markets
Identifying Target Markets

The DMR35A/45A is aimed at the following markets.
The small workgroup in a small/medium sized office (35cpm) and a workgroup in a medium
sized office (45cpm). Both of these groups would be looking to replace an analogue or a 1 st
generation digital copier.
Customers who are already used to the principle of multifunctionality and who are looking
for a machine with lower cost options.
Replacement of a conventional fax- machine in a large office.
The increased hard-drive capacity allows us to offer the DMR35A/45A as a core document
solution MFP in the large office.
Targeted Prospects
The different people (all with their own specific role and decision criteria) involved in the decision
making process are:
Buyer: low operating costs, in line with current contractual arrangements and 'best value for
money';
IT manager: connectivity issues, like manageability, upgradeability, reliability and Total Cost of
Ownership;
Operator/User (CRD environment only): ease of use, productivity, finishing and quality and
Financial manager: total cost of ownership and future-proof investment

DMR35A/45A
MARKET OVERVIEW
European Market Situation
DMR35A/45A fit into the segment between InfoSource segments 3 and 4. Please find below a
review of the current market situation in this segment. Please note that these percentages include
both analogue and digital products.
31-44cpm. 2000 Full Year Projection

Xerox
15%
Canon
4% Minolta
29%
5% Konica
6% Ricoh
8% NRG
10% 23%
Sharp
Others
45-69cpm. 2000 Full Year Projection
Xerox
13% Canon
29% Minolta
17% Konica
Ricoh
4% 8% NRG
11%
14% 4% Sharp
Others

DMR35A/45A
The DMR35/45 series was our second generation of digital MFPs in the 31-45cpm category, and
since its introduction the market has undergone a lot of changes. Many new machines have been
introduced since 1998, and thus deliver far better performance, functionality and price performance
than the DMR35/45 series. This can always be expected during the lifecycle of a product, but this
particularly affected the DMR35/45 because this had a longer lifecycle than originally expected.
The DMR35/45 series weak position is reflected in our 5% share of the 31-44cpm market, against
a 6% share in 1999. Our position in the 45-69cpm market place is far stronger due to the fact that
we are now on our second generation of 55-70cpm machines.
Digitalisation is expected to account for around 70% of units sold in 2001.
Source: All figures from the Infosource 1999 and 2000 Autumn Report
Major Competitors
The main competitors for the DMR35A/45A are:
For DMR35A (35cpm model) For DMR45A (45cpm model)

Canon IR330s/GP335 Canon IR400s/GP405
Xerox Document Center 332 Xerox Document Center 340
Konica 7033 Konica 7040
Toshiba DP3580 Toshiba DP4580
Sharp AR-336 Sharp AR-405
Minolta Dialta DI350
Mita PointSource Ai3010
Many of the digital offerings above deliver better quality and performance than our current
DMR35/45 series. The launch of the DMR35A/45A products is therefore of key importance in
stealing a march from the competition.

DMR35A/45A
PRODUCT COMPARISON
Product Range Plan
Product Plan Map
CMR
512B
50
DMR45 DMR45A
40
= Digital
= Analogue
DMR35 DMR35A
30
1998 1999 2000 2001

DMR35A/45A
Replacement Model Comparison
DMR35A/45A DMR35/45
Copy Speed 35/45 35/45
Maximum Paper Capacity 2500 sheets 2500 sheets
ACV 10/20K per month 10/20K per month
Maximum CV 50k per month (both machines) 40/50k per month
Lifetime 5 years or 3000k whichever comes first DMR35/45: 5 years or 2400k whichever
(both machines) comes first.
Continuous copy speed 35 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No R/E)

45 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No R/E)
One to one copy speed 35 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No R/E) DMR35/45cpm (A4 / LT long edge
45 cpm (A4 / LT long edge feed, No R/E) feed, No R/E)
Resolution 600dpi DMR35/45: 400dpi
Gray Scale 256 levels
Warm-up time 35cpm: 15 seconds DMR35 85 sec.
(from Main Switch off) 45cpm: 20 seconds DMR45 100 sec.
Recovery time 35cpm: 10 seconds DMR35 83 sec
(from Auto Off mode) 45cpm: 15 seconds DMR45 98 sec
Enlargement 115, 122, 141, 200, 400%
Reduction 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% DMR35: 93,87,82,71,65,50,25%
*Both 35&45cpm have minimum 25% DMR45: 93,87,82,71,65,50,35%
reduction.
Zoom 25% - 400% in 1% step DMR35: 25% - 400% in 1% step
*Both 35&45cpm have 25% minimum DMR45: 35% - 400% in 1% step
reduction.
Printer DMR35A/45A DMR35/45
Print speed 35 / 45 ppm (600/300dpi) 35 / 45 ppm (600/400/300dpi)

Printer language RPCS, PCL6, PCL5e, PS3 PCL6, PCL5e, PS3
Resolution RPCS : 600dpi PCL5e : 600 / 300 dpi
PCL5e : 600 / 300 dpi PCL6 : 600dpi
PCL6 : 600dpi PS3 : 600 / 400 dpi
PS3 : 600 / 300 dpi
NIC Option
Ethernet(100 base TX /10 base T)*
IEEE1394 Option N/A
2 ports (6 pin)
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, Apple Talk TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, EtherTalk
(Auto Switching)
Memory capacity Standard : 32MB Standard : 8MB
Option : 1 x 64MB (Mandatory item) Option : up to 2 x 32MB
HDD Copier HDD: standard (more than 10GB) Copier HDD: mandatory option

RPCS driver Win95/98/Me, WinNT4.0, N/A
Win2000
(Win3.x on Web)

DMR35A/45A
PCL drivers Win95/98/M e, WinNT4.0, Win3.x, Win95/98, Win NT4.0

Win2000
(Win3.x on Web)
PS drivers Win95/98/Me, WinNT4.0, Win3.x, Win95/98/Me, Win NT4.0,
Win2000 Macintosh7.1 or later
(Win3.x on Web)
Macintosh7.6.1 or later
Fonts 35 intelli fonts , 10 true type fonts, 1 bitmap,
136 Adobe type1 fonts,
Supported Mainframe : 16 languages Mainframe : 14 languages
languages PCL drivers : 16 languages PCL drivers : 14 languages
PS drivers : 9 languages PS drivers : 5 languages
Rotate sort Yes
Stapling Max. 4 position
Punching 2, 3 or 4 holes 2 or 3 holes
Form overlay Yes
Watermarks Yes
Rip once, print Yes
many
Mailbox Optional 9bin mailbox
Font download 1. Possible to download fonts by using PCLs Yes (PCL5e)
or PJLs command.
2. Possible to download fonts to Mac by using
Printer Utility for Mac.
When compared to the machines the DMR35A/45A are due to replace, they offer features that not
only improve and update DMR35/45 machines, but futureproof our new machines against
future market trends.

DMR35A/45A
PRODUCT SELLING POINTS
The main selling points are:
Overall Selling Points

Modular functionality.
Easy configuration of options (GW Architecture)
Powerful document server.
Shorter warm- up times
High productivity.
Improved functionality over previous DMR35/45 series
Copier Selling Points

Digital = High Quality (600dpi).
35 and 45 cpm copy speed.
Powerful finishing capabilities.
Touch screen control panel.
Printer Selling Points

Multiple original printing and finishing as opposed to printing then copying.
Versatile finishing and sorting options.
35 and 45 ppm print speed.
Powerful job storage features with the document server.
New Ricoh proprietary printer language RPCS (Successor to IPDL-C)
IEEE 1394 Interface
Printer utility for Mac provides several convenient features for printing with Macintosh
clients
Fax Selling Points

Modem Speed. 33.6Kbp.
Scanning Speed. 0.43 seconds.
Maximum 3 Lines that are all able to work simultaneously.
Has specifications as powerful as many existing standalone faxes.
Quick dial has a maximum 1200 numbers.

DMR35A/45A
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mainframe specification
DMR35A/45A Remarks
1. Technology
a) Scanning element Flatbed with moving CCD array image-
sensor
b) Printing processing Twin Laser beams scanning & Electro-
2. Dimensions Approx. 670 x 650 x 720 mm
(WxDxH):
3. Weight Less than 78 kg
4. Input Capacity
a) Standard 500 sheets tray x 2 + 50 sheet bypass
tray
b) Options Bank: 500 sheet tray x 2
(Bank and LCT) LCT: 1500 sheets
5. Output Capacity
a) Standard Internal Tray: 500 sheets
With Bridge Unit : 250 sheets
b) Option 1 Bin Tray: 125 sheets
External Tray: 125 sheets
or
Finsher 1000: max 1000 sheets
or
Multi Tray Finisher: Multi Tray Finisher
Upper Tray: 500 sheets can be installed with
Lower Tray: both 35A and 45A
Default: 2000 sheets,
Multi tray mode: 1500 sheets
Mailbox: 100 sheets x 9 bins + 500
sheets proof tray (used for printer only)
6. Paper size / weight
a) Size: Trays: A5 SEF - A3
Bypass: A6 SEF - A3
LCT: A4 / LT
Duplex: A5 SEF -A3
b) Weight: Paper Tray : 64 g/m2 - 105 g/m2
LCT: 64 g/m2 - 105 g/m2 DMR35/45 Bypass
weight
Bypass: 52 g/m2 163 g/m2 52 g/m2 157 g/m2
Duplex: : 64 g/m2 - 105 g/m2
7. Rating power spec.: 100V model: 110-120V, 60 Hz
200V model: 220-240V, 50/60Hz
8. Power consumption: TBA

DMR35A/45A
n Copier Features
DMR35A/45A DMR35/45
Copier Memory 32MB Standard, Optional 32MB to 12MB
enable preset stamp, background
numbering and user stamp
1st copy speed (35cpm): 4.3 seconds DMR35: 3.9 sec.
(45cpm) : 3.6 seconds DMR45: 3.2 sec.
(A4 long edge feed from first input
tray to internal tray, no reduction/
enlargement)
Continuous copy 35cpm (A4 long edge feed, No R/E)
speed 45cpm (A4 long edge feed, No R/E)
One to one copy speed 35cpm (A4 long edge feed, No R/E) 30cpm (A4 long edge feed, No R/E)
45cpm (A4 long edge feed, No R/E) 40cpm (A4 long edge feed, No R/E)
Resolution 600dpi DMR35/45: 400dpi
Grey Scale 256 levels

Warm-up time 35cpm: 15 seconds DMR35/45: 85 seconds
(from Main Switch off) 45cpm: 20 seconds DMR35/45: 100 seconds
Recovery time 35cpm: 10 seconds DMR35/45: 83 seconds
(from Auto Off mode) 45cpm: 15 seconds DMR35/45: 98 seconds
Enlargement 115, 122, 141, 200, 400%
Reduction 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% DMR35: 93,87,82,71,65,50,25%
*Both 35 & 45 have minimum 25% DMR45: 93,87,82,71,65,50,35%
reduction.
Zoom 25% - 400% in 1% step DMR35: 25% - 400% in 1% step
*Both 35 & 45 have 25% minimum DMR45: 35% - 400% in 1% step
reduction.
Adjustment
User code 100 codes 50 codes
Display Languages
220-240V 220-240V
<EU model> <EU model>
English, French English, German, French
German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish,
Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish,
Finnish, Portuguese, Polish, Portuguese, Polish, Hungarian and
Hungarian and Czech are provided Czech are provided by FTP server.
by FTP server.

DMR35A/45A
Enhanced Features
DMR35A/45A DMR35/45
Auto Paper Selection Standard
Auto Magnification Standard
Selection
Directional magnification Standard
(%)
Directional size Standard
magnification (inch/mm)
Series copy Book to Standard
Simp.
Series copy - Dup. to
Simp.
Photo mode Standard (photo mode, text / photo mode)
Auto start Standard
User program Standard (10 modes)
Combine: 2 in 1 simplex Standard
Combine: 4 in 1 simplex Standard
Combine: 4 in 1 duplex Standard
Combine: 8 in 1 simplex Standard NA
Combine: 8 in 1 duplex Standard
Combine: 16 in 1 duplex Standard NA
Combine: 16 in 1 booklet Standard
Magazine Copy Standard NA
Erase center / boarder Standard
Stamp / User Stamp Standard: Page Numbering, Date stamp NA
Option*: Background Numbering,
User Stamp, Preset Stamp
*Optional stamps are available with 32MB
memory or 64MB memory for Printer or
Printer/Scanner (64MB memory is
mandatory for Printer or Printer/Scanner.)
Electronic sort / Standard
Rotate Sort
Positive/Negative Standard
Archive File Document Server Standard
Cover insertion Standard
Paper designate Standard
OHP slip sheet Standard
Stapling Finisher 1000: 1 position Finisher 1000: 1 position
Multi Tray Finisher: 4 position Finisher 3000 (only for DMR35): 4
*Multi Tray Fin can be installed with both position
models
Margin adjust Standard
Bypass feed Standard

DMR35A/45A
Fax Features
General Features
DMR35A/45A
Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3, Additional G3 (option), G4 (option )
Resolution: 8 x 3.85, 7.7 l/mm, 200 x 200/100dpi (std.)
8/16 x 15.4 l/mm, 400 x 400 dpi (option)
Compression method: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG(Option)
Scanning speed: Approx. 0.43 second (200x100dpi, A4)
Number of Pages TBA
Scanned:
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000,
9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
G4 option: 64000, 56000 bps
Transmission speed: G3: Approx.3 seconds (200x100dpi, ITUT #1 chart, TTI off,
G3: Approx.2 seconds (200x100 dpi, with JBIG, ITUT #1 chart TTI
off, memory transmission)
SAF memory: Standard: 2 MB,
Option: 24MB (Total 26MB)
Page memory Standard: 4 MB,
Option: 8MB (Total: 12MB)
Stamp: Option (with document feeder)
TTI/RTI: Standard
CSI: Standard
Quick and Speed dial: Standard: 400quick dial only (no Speed dial)
Option:1200quick dial / 1000quick dial and 200speed dial, selectable
Group dial: Standard 64group (500 numbers per group)
Program: Standard: 100 numbers, Max. 200 numbers with JBIG option
Redial: Standard
User Code: Standard (100 Codes)
Auto document : Standard (6 documents),Max. 18 documents with option

DMR35A/45A
General Features (Continued from the previous page)
DMR35A/45A
Page count Standard
Wild cards : Standard
Summer time (day light saving Standard
time)
Night timer : No
Energy saver : Standard
LCD prompt : Standard
Remaining memory indication Standard
Time indicator / No / Standard
clock adjustment:
Transmission features
DMR35A/45A
Serial broadcasting (later) Standard (Max. 500numbers)
Send later Standard
Forwarding Standard
Parallel memory transmission Standard (Automatically selected.)
Book fax Standard
Closed network (transmission) Standard
Confidential transmission/with ID Standard

DMR35A/45A
Reception features
DMR35A/45A
Multicopy Standard
Poll later Standard (Max. 500 senders)
Continuous polling Standard
Center mark Standard
Checkered mark Standard
Telephone features
DMR35A/45A
Handset/telephone Option
Voice request No
Pause Standard
Chain dialing Standard
Automatic fax/phone change Standard
Reception mode switch over Standard
(remote)
Answering machine interface Standard
Reception mode switching timer Standard
Silent ringing detection Standard

DMR35A/45A
Printer Controller
General Features
DMR35A/45A
CPU RM5231 200MHz
Memory 96MB (Resident 32MB + 64MB Memory Option)
*64MB Memory is mandatory item for printing feature
Hard Disk Drive More than 10GB (HDD is standard with DMR35A/45A copier, and it is commonly
used for Printer and/or Scanner function)
Language PCL6
RPCS (Newly supported)
Option: PostScript3
Continuous Print 35ppm (A4 )
Speed 45ppm (A4 )
Print Resolution PCL5e PCL6 RPCS PS3
300dpi / 600 dpi 600dpi 600dpi 300dpi/600dpi
Option:
Network Port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
2 ports x IEEE1394 (6 pin)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
MIB support SMNP Printer MIB, Ricoh MIB
Operation Panel Mainframe s Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions (Printer Key
Top is added on the left side of LCD )
Drivers Win WinNT WinNT4.0
95/98/ 3.51 Service Pack TSE Server Server+
l * not included Me Level
in Driver CD, just PCL5e Yes - - Yes Yes -
for Web Release
l **Adobe does
PCL 6 Yes - - Yes Yes -
not release PS RPCS Yes - - - Yes -
driver for W2K.
Only MS- PS3 Yes - - - Yes -
PostScript driver
is available and Win2000 Win3. Mac
PPD file for MS- Professional Server Server Advanced Advanced 1 7.6.1
PS is included in Terminal Server Server+
-
the Driver CD- Svc
ROM. PCL5e Yes Yes Yes - - Yes* -
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes - - Yes* -
RPCS Yes Yes - - - - -
PS3 Yes(mini Yes(mini Yes(mini - - - Yes
driver)** driver)** driver)**
Supported Driver For PCL5e, PCL6 and RPCS
14.Portuguese, 15.Traditional Chinese, 16.Simplified Chinese
For PostScript3
Norwegian 9. Danish
UNIX TBA

DMR35A/45A
Utility Software
(Bundle Software) Printer Option (Number of supported Language) : DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (14) /
SmartNetMonitor for Admin (14) / SmartNetMonitor for Client (14) / LAN-FAX
M1 (14) /
1394 utility (1) / Printer Utility for Mac (1)
Printer / Scanner Option (Nu mber of supported Language) : DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
(14) / SmartNetMonitor for Admin (14) / SmartNetMonitor for Client (14) /
ScanRouter V2 Lite (5) / LAN-FAX M 1 (14) / 1394 utility (1) / Printer Utility for
Mac (1)
Note1: PCL driver and RPCS driver requires Service Pack 4 in order to work in WinNT4.0 Workstation or Server.
PS driver must require Service Pack 5 in order to work in WinNT4.0 Workstation or Server.
PCL driver must require Service Pack 6 for Terminal Server Edition in order to work in WinNT4.0 TSE.
Note2: Available schedule of DeskTopVinder V2 Lite and ScanRouter V2 Lite
For US and Asia
English version of the software will be available with the 1st Mass Production of Printer Option and
Printer/Scanner Option.
For European
This software will be bundled when all language support complete. (Schedule: TBA)
CD-ROM (Bundled with Printer or Printer/Scanner Option)

1) Drivers & utilities 2) Manual CD for 3) Utilities &
CD for Printer Printer Manual CD for
Scanner
Printer Option Yes Yes -
Printer/Scanner option Yes Yes Yes

DMR35A/45A
Printer Optional Items

1 Printer Unit PCL5e, PCL6, RPCS New
2 Printer/Scanner Unit PCL5e, PCL6, RPCS New
Scanner
3 64MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM (144pin) Common with Memory option
for Kir-P and Win-A+
4 PostScript3 Option Genuine Adobe PostScript3 New
5 NIB Ethernet card with RJ45 port New
6 IEEE1394 Interface IEEE1394 Expansion Card New
Note 1. : No.1 and No.2 cannot be installed together.
Note 2. : 64MB Memory (#3) must be installed with Printer Unit (#1) or Printer/Scanner Unit (#2).
Note 3.: NIB Option (#5) must be installed with Printer/Scanner Unit (#2). (Scanner function is available only through
network.)
Configuration of Printer and Scanner related items

Additional
Copier Mandatory items for Printing / Scanning Options
#1
#4 PostScript3
Printer #3
Unit + 64MB Memory
#5 NIB
DMR35A
DMR45A Or
#6 IEEE1394
#2 #3
Printer & 64MB Memory
Scanner #4 PostScript3
+
Unit
#5 NIB
+ #6 IEEE1394

DMR35A/45A
64MB Memory (Option)
This option is mandatory item for Printer Option or Printer/Scanner Option.

Note: This item is commonly used with PMR26s (B&W Laser Printer), Win-A+ controller (for
Colour MFP CCR060A/62A).
144pin SDRAM-DIMM
PC100 CL2
Access Time: 6ns (3.3volt)

Network Interface Board is necessary for network printing and scanning. This option is a
mandatory item for Printer Scanner Option.
Topology Ethernet 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T

Cables Requirement:
STP (Shielded Twisted-Pair) Cable
Frame Type Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk, (Auto Switching)
Network Operating Systems Novell NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.x, 5.0, Microsoft WindowsNT4.0,
Microsoft 2000
Microsoft Windows 95/98, Me Mac OS 7.6.1, 8.1, 8.5,
8.51, 8.6, 9
Other functions for Printing Built- in Web Server, Built- in Telnet Server, Built- in lpd daemo n
and Maintenance Built- in IPP daemon
IEEE1394 Interface
Interface IEEE1394 (6pin)
Number of ports 2 ports
Data Transmission speed 400Mbps / 200Mbps / 100Mbps
Note: IEEE1394Interface includes two types of IEEE1394 cables. One is a 6pin-4pin cable and the other is a 6pin -6pin
cable. Length of these cables is 2.0m.

DMR35A/45A
External Options
ARDF (New)
Original size
Simplex: B6 SEF - A3
Duplex: B5 SEF A3
Original weight: Simplex: 40 - 128 g/m2
Duplex: 52 - 105 g/m2
Stack capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2 )
Feeding speed: 35 cpm / 45 cpm
Noise (Power level): less than 66.5dB
Power consumption: less than 60 W
Weight: Less than 12 kg
Paper Bank
Paper size: A5 SEF - A3,
Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2
Paper capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Noise (Power level): Operating: less than 71 dB (full system)
Stand-by: less than 40 dB (full system)
Power consumption: 50 W
One-Bin Tray (New)

Paper capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/ m2 )
Weight: Less than 4 kg, 8.9 lbs
Finisher 1000
Paper size: A6SEF A3, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF - 11 x 17
Paper weight: 52 - 157 g/m2 , 14 - 42 lbs
Stack capacity: 1000 sheets (A4 LEF or smaller) (80 g/m2 )
500 sheets ( B4 or larger) (80 g/m2 )
Staple capacity: 30 sheets (A4, B5 or smaller) (80 g/m2 )
20 sheets ( B4 or larger) (80 g/m2 )
Staple paper weight 64 - 80 g/m2
Staple position: 1 position (upper left)
Dimension: 568 x 520 x 625 mm
Weight: 21 kg

DMR35A/45A
Multi Tray Finisher (New)

Upper Tray:
Paper size: A6 A3
Stack capacity: 500 sheets (A4/A5 LEF - 80 g/m2 )
250 sheets (A3, B4, A4 SEF, B5 SEF
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
Lower Tray: Normal Mode (Default)
Paper size: A6 A3
Stack capacity: 1,500 sheets (A4/LEF - 80 g/m2 )
750 sheets (A3, B4, A4 SEF, B5 SEF)
500 sheets (A5 LEF,)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, HLT)
*Staple output on upper tray is not available in Default mode.
Lower Tray: Multi Tray Mode
Paper size: A6,B5,A5 - A3
Stack capacity: 1,500 sheets (A4LEF)
750 sheets (A3, B4, A4 SEF, B5)
500 sheets (A5 LEF,)
100 sheets (A5 SEF, HLT)
Dimension: 680 x 620 x 1030 mm
Weight: 53 kg
Mailbox
Number of bins: 9 bins and 1 Proof Tray
Paper size:
Each bin: A5 - A3, LT
Proof Tray: A6 - A3
Paper weight:
Each bin: 60 - 90 g/m2
Proof Tray: 52 - 157 g/m2
Stack capacity:
Each bin: 100 sheets (A4 LEF 80 g/m2 )
Proof Tray: 500 sheets (A4 LEF 80 g/m2 )
Stapling: Not available
Weight: 40 kg

DMR35A/45A
Bridge Unit (New)

Proof Tray:
Paper size: A5 - A3, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, A4 (LEF)
Bridge to the finisher/mailbox:
Paper size: A5 - A3, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, A4 (LEF
LCT
Paper size: A4 (LEF)
Paper weight: 60 - 105 g/m2 ,
Paper capacity: 1500 sheets
Weight: Less than 17 Kg
Punch Kit for EU 2/4 hole (New)

Paper size:
2 hole: A3-A5
4 hole: A3-B5
Paper weight:
2 hole: 52 - 163 g/m2
4 hole: 52 163 g/m2
Weight: 2.9 Kg
Punch Kit for Scandinavian 4 hole (New)

Paper size: A3-A5
Weight: 2.9 Kg

DMR35A/45A
Reliability Information
Average Monthly Volume (AMV) DMR35A 10k/Month

DMR45A 10k/Month
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) 50k Month
Duty Cycle (DC) 200k Month
Machine Life (ML) 3000K or 5 years whichever comes first
MCBC 50k
MCBF 75k
Average Monthly Volume (ACV) is the expected Average Monthly Volume (print/copy/fax) for
target customers
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is recommended Maximum Monthly Volume for target
customer.
Machine Life (ML) is total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes or 5 years, whichever comes first
Duty Cycle (DC) is maximum occasional peak volume to keep machine reliability. (Target Mean
Copies Between service Calls [MCBC] remains unchanged).
Recommendation: It is recommended that machines are placed to handle MMV and not
Duty Cycle

DMR35A/45A
Mechanical noise level (power level)
(1) Sound power level
TBA
(2) Sound pressure level
TBA
Ozone Emission Level

Maximum 0.02PPM
Dust Level
0.075mg/m3
Styrene Emission Level

0.07mg/m3
Identification of Plastic Components

All Plastic components for DMR35A/45A which weigh more than 25g are to be identified
according to DIN548490 or ISO11469.
Average Power Consumption

TBA
Environmental Regulation
Yes Yes No

DMR35A/45A
WHAT FITS WHAT
Machine
Nashuatec Rex Rotary Gestetner
DMR35A 3525 3508 3502
DMR45A 4525 4508 4502
Paper Handling Description Comments Yield/

Compatibility
PC540 Platen Cover

DF70 ARDF
SR760 Multi Tray Finisher
SR720 1000 Sheet Feeder
PS360 Paper Bank
RT36 Large Capacity Tray
PT1045 1 Bin Tray
DIF460BU Mail Box Bridge Unit
DIF1045BU Bridge Unit
DOT450 Output Tray
CS360 9-bin Mail Box
DHPU451E4H 2/4 Adjustable Only compatible
Hole Punch with SR760
DHPU451S4H 4 Hole Punch Only compatible
(Swedish Market) with SR760
Internal Options
DMEBP32 32MB Memory
DMEBP64 64MB Memory
DME1045RAM User Account Enhance Kit
Printer Options
DIF1045P Printer Controller
DIF1045E NIC
DIF1045FW * IEEE 1394 I/F
DIF1045PS PostScript 3
DIF1045S Printer/Scan kit Includes Printer
& Scan Option
Fax Options
DIF1045F Fax Option
DIF1045G3 G3 Option
DIF1045G4 G4 Option
DME185J-F Feature Expander
FSTP30 Fax Stamp

DMR35A/45A
Language Kits
Short Code: Description: Language:
DDK1045AR Copier Operator Instructions Arabic - SASO Use Only

DDK1045GB Copier Operator Instructions English
DDK1045F Copier Operator Instructions French
DDK1045D Copier Operator Instructions German
DDK1045I Copier Operator Instructions Italian
DDK1045S Copier Operator Instructions Swedish
DDK1045P Copier Operator Instructions Portuguese
DDK1045N Copier Operator Instructions Norwegian
DDK1045H Copier Operator Instructions Hungarian
DDK1045PL Copier Operator Instructions Polish
DDK1045CZ Copier Operator Instructions Czech
DDK1045SF Copier Operator Instructions Finnish
DDK1045FGB Fax Language Kit English

DDK1045FF Fax Language Kit French
DDK1045FD Fax Language Kit German
DDK1045FI Fax Language Kit Italian
DDK1045FS Fax Language Kit Swedish
DDK1045FP Fax Language Kit Portuguese
DDK1045FN Fax Language Kit Norwegian
DDK1045FH Fax Language Kit Hungarian *
DDK1045FPL Fax Language Kit Polish
DDK1045FCZ Fax Language Kit Czech *
DDK1045FSF Fax Language Kit Finnish *
* These languages will only be ordered on receipt of a customers order
DDK1045PSGB Print / Scan Language Kit English

DDK1045PSF Print / Scan Language Kit French
DDK1045PSD Print / Scan Language Kit German
DDK1045PSI Print / Scan Language Kit Italian
DDK1045PSS Print / Scan Language Kit Swedish
DDK1045PSP Print / Scan Language Kit Portuguese
DDK1045PSN Print / Scan Language Kit Norwegian
DDK1045PSH Print / Scan Language Kit Hungarian *
DDK1045PSPL Print / Scan Language Kit Polish
DDK1045PSCZ Print / Scan Language Kit Czech *
DDK1045PSSF Print / Scan Language Kit Finnish *
* These languages will only be ordered on receipt of a customers order

DMR35A/45A
What Fits What /Cont.
Description Comments Yield
Supplies
DT33BLK Black Toner 550g Bottle 23K, A4 @ 6%
DD5BLK Black Developer 500g 300K, A4 @ 6%
A2309510 DMU6 Drum 150K, A4 @ 6%
CSC760A Staple Cartridge For SR760 only
CSC760B Staple Refill For SR760 only
CSC720 Staples For SR720 only
Others
DMR35RCAB Rigid Cabinet
DKCBH Key Counter Bracket
Note: DIF1045FW (IEEE1394 I/F)

DMR35A/45A
IEEE Interface
IEEE1394 is New Standard Serial interface for Multimedia products and PC peripherals including
printing devices. Major features of IEEE1394 are as follows:
High Speed data transmission 400/200/100Mbps

Easy connection Hot PnP
Easy handling Thin cable (around 5.5mm in diameter)
Outline
IEEE1394 is one of the industry standards, which was authorized as IEEE1394-1995 by IEEE
(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) in 1995. This interface is expected to be used for
sending large-capacity data such as multimedia data at high speed. Digital Video Camera is one of
the popular products having this interface. Recently, the interface is supplied with many PCs as
standard, and also many IEEE1394 expansion card for PCs are available in the market.
Features of IEEE1394
IEEE1394 provides High Speed data transmission at 100Mbps, 200Mbps and 400Mbps. It offers
much faster speed than USB, Universal Serial Bus, which has 1.5Mbps and 12Mbps mode.
Connecting Cable & Connector

IEEE1394 cable is simple and flexible like USB cable.
There are 2 types of IEEE1394 cables in the market. One is 6 wires with 6-pin connector, and the
other is 4 wires with 4-pin connector.
Picture 1 below shows the cable structure of 6 wires cable and its diameter is 5.5mm. The 4
wires cable does not have 2 Electric wires and is used for digital video and digital camera etc.
(diameter is 4mm).
Picture 1: Cable structure of IEEE1394 (6-wires)

Electric wires
Twisted pair
Signal wire shield
(signal wires)
Shield of the Cable
Picture 2: Interface
USB IEEE1394 IEEE1394

4pin connector 6pin connector

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR35B / DMR45B
Digital 35 / 45ppm

Launch Country of
Month Origin
May 2003 China

Date Created: February 2003
Version 2
May 2003
DMR35B_45B
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Key Features, Advantages & Benefits 4
Product Configuration & Options 7
Replacement Model Comparison 10
Peripheral Specifications 22
WebStatusMonitor 25
Targeted Reliability 29
What Fits What 30
Product specifications may change during a products

life and, if in doubt, you are advised to contact NRGI
Guernsey for confirmation of exact product details.
k:\company\market\nps\dmr35b_45b.doc 1
DMR35B_45B
INTRODUCTION
The DMR35B/45B series consists of a 35ppm and a 45ppm machine and replaces the
current 35 / 45ppm machines.
As a GW architecture machine, the DMR35A/45A was already a market leader, so the

DMR35B/45B is an updated version of an already successful idea.
As far as Unique Selling Points (USPs) are concerned, we still have one of the easiest
to use MFPs on the market, with market-leading warm-up times and a Document
Server but we also now have an improved image quality, environmentally friendly
toners, wireless LAN capability and browser-enabled software tools. The
DMR35B/45B also sees the introduction of scan-to-email and booklet making
functionality, where we are updating the machine to keep pace with the market
developments.
The machines are due for launch in May 2003.
DMR35B_45B
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The DMR35B/45B series consists of two machines with copy/print speeds of 35 and
45 pages per minute (ppm). They are designed to replace the DMR35A/45A series
and are due for launch in May 2003. These machines are very similar to the highly
regarded and commercially successful previous series, with a few changes to keep the
machines competitive.
DMR35B_45B
KEY FEATURES, ADVANTAGES & BENEFITS
Improvements on the Previous Models
Browser-based Software Tools:
This means that no longer does software have to be loaded onto each PC for basic
functions. Only the IP address needs to be set up on the browser in order to gain
access to the machine. Through surveys, we have found that a number of major
accounts will not allow software to be loaded onto PCs, especially from a vendor that
is fairly unknown. This improvement should allow us to overcome this objection.
Booklet Finishing:
Whilst many of our competitors have had this feature on 35 50cpm machines for a
while, this is the first time it has been introduced on NRG machines. This basic
booklet finishing (no hole punch, 15 sheets, no trimming) is ideal for general office
use. This means that there are a total of three finishers for the DMR35B/45B, the
booklet finisher, a basic stapler (SR790 also used on DMR22A/27A/32A) and a
finisher with hole punching capability.
Scan-to-email:
With scan-to-email, the user can simply type in the email address and email subject
directly from the control panel. This is a good alternative to faxing as there is a
considerable cost saving (particularly for heavy documents being sent internationally)
and, from a security point of view, unlike a fax, you can be assured that your
document will go straight to the individual.
New Chemical Toner:
The DMR35B/45B is also the first machine to use the new NRG chemical toner. This
toner has smaller particles than previously. This means that less energy is needed to
produce it and that the image quality is substantially improved. With the old
pulverised toner, it is difficult to control the shape or size of the particle so the quality
is sometimes rough. However, the new chemical toner has particles of uniform shape
and size and, therefore, there is much improved image quality.
More Efficient LAN Fax:
With the DMR35A/45A it was only possible to receive faxes on the desktop with
ScanRouter Pro. With the DMR35B/45B, it is possible for the Document Server to
store all incoming faxes in the SAF memory. Faxes can then be viewed, printed,
deleted or downloaded onto PC via the browser. The real benefit of this, compared to
the DMR35A/45A, is that all of this is done on the Document Server (HDD) and a
separate, dedicated server does not have to be installed.
DMR35B_45B
Bigger HDD and More Processing Power:
The HDD (Document Server) on the DMR35B/45B is 20GB, twice the size of its
predecessor. The controller element is a 300MHz, 192MB RAM processor rather
than a 200MHz, 96MB RAM processor. This means that printing jobs can be
processed far quicker.
Connectivity USB, Wireless LAN & Bluetooth:
Like the DMR60/75 and CCR081/101, the DMR35B/45B has the option to upgrade to
USB and wireless LAN. Please note that both options use the same slot so they
cannot be used simultaneously. We also now have a Bluetooth option for the
DMR35B/45B and details of this will be published as soon as they are known.
Competitive USPs
Environmental Features:
Like the DMR35A/45A, the DMR35B/45B is one of the few machines on the market
that is designed with the environment as a major concern. The DMR35A/45A has
revolutionary warm-up times, which the DMR35B/45B also has. Add to this the new
environmentally friendly toner and chrome and lead-free components and you have a
machine which you can sell strongly on an environmental basis. This makes the
machine ideal for government accounts, which often insist on strict environmental
criteria.
Image Quality:
As above, the new toner also gives us a strong USP versus our competitors.
Document Server:
Although many machines have Hard Disks, few have a document server. With this,
the machine becomes a second server where frequently held documents (expense
forms, maps) can be stored. It is also extremely useful for combining different
formats of document (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, PDF, hard copy etc.) into one
finished document. All of this is easily done via the control panel or DeskTopBinder.
RPCS Drivers:
NRGs RPCS drivers are very simple to use and allow users to take full advantage of
all the finishing functions. Where many competitors drivers involve a 4-5 click
process to get to a complex setting, with RPCS a setting can be saved and used time
and time again.
The other advantage of RPCS is that the RIP process is done on the PCs hard disk so
every time the office PCs are replaced with faster machines, printer RIP also becomes
faster. This also helps to ease network traffic.
DMR35B_45B
Browser-based Software Tools:
The advantages of this are described above but this should be considered a major
competitive advantage.
Wireless LAN:
NRG is one of the first manufacturers to offer wireless LAN (IEEE802) functionality.
Although this technology is only just beginning, it is bound to become more popular
and our machines are significantly future-proofed to be able to cope when this transfer
happens. Offices without wireless LAN capable machines will never be able to move
to wireless LANs until they have replaced all their printers and copiers.
Ease of Use:
The DMR35B/45B has the same control panel and RPCS drivers as the
DMR35A/45A, meaning that it is extremely easy to use. Tests and reviews (BERTL)
have frequently highlighted our MFPs as some of the easiest to use on the market.
Whilst many competitors have, in the past, boasted that their functionality (booklet
finishing, scan-to-email) is better than ours, the reality is that not all customers benefit
from this because such extra functions are often difficult to use.
DMR35B_45B
PRODUCT CONFIGURATION & OPTIONS

External Configuration:
*Sheet Through DF *Platen Cover
*Multi Tray Finisher
*1 bin Tray
*Bridge Unit
*Finisher 1,000 (SR790)
*Mainframe:
(550 sheet x 2 trays,
50 sheet Bypass,
*Booklet Finisher Duplex unit)
*1,500 sheet LCT
*Paper Bank
Because of the new NRG colour, most of the external peripherals are new for the
DMR35B/45B. The exceptions are the 1,000-sheet finisher (SR790), which is also
compatible with the CCR081/101 and the DMR22A/27A/32A, and the platen cover,
which is compatible with the PCR38. The multi-tray finisher takes the same punch as
the DMR35A/45A.
The DMR35B/45B offers all of the same paper handling options of the
DMR35A/45A, with the addition of a booklet finisher.
Internal Configuration:
As with the DMR35A/45A, extra memory needs to be added to handle printer and
printer/scanner. The key differences with the DMR35B/45B and its predecessor on
internal configuration are as follows:
The NIB is included in the kits
The memory is greater (192MB total versus 96MB)
Wireless LAN
USB
Bluetooth
Adding memory makes no difference to copy memory. Functions such as
stamping are standard
Note: Only one of USB, wireless LAN, Bluetooth or IEEE1394 can be
installed at any time, as they are all inserted into the same slot
DMR35B_45B
Option Interchangeability:
DMR35B/45B Compatibility DMR35A/45A

Key Counter Bracket Type H OK Key Counter Bracket Type H
Marker Type 30 OK Marker Type 30
Fax Function Upgrade Type 185 OK Fax Function Upgrade Type 185
EU 2/4-hole Changeable Punch OK EU 2/4-hole Changeable Punch
Unit Unit
Scandinavian 4-hole Punch Unit OK Scandinavian 4-hole Punch Unit
Staple for Multi-tray Finisher OK Staple for Multi-tray Finisher
Staple Cartridge for Multi-tray OK Staple Cartridge for Multi-tray
Finisher Finisher
NV RAM OK NV RAM
ARDF (DF76) X ARDF (DF70)
Bridge Unit Type 2045 X Bridge Unit Type 1045
1-bin Tray (PT330) X 1-bin Tray (PT1045)
Paper Tray Unit X Paper Tray Unit (PS360)
2,000-sheet Multi-tray Finisher X Multi-tray Finisher (SR760)
(SR880)
Fax Unit X Fax Unit
SAF Memory (32MB) X SAF Memory (32MB)
Local Procurement Local Procurement
Additional G3 Port Unit X Additional G3 Port Unit
Not Available X G4 Unit
Not Available X Printer Option
Printer / Scanner Option Type 2045 X Printer / Scanner Option
PS3 Option X PS3 Option
NIC X NIC
IEEE1394 Interface X IEEE1394 Interface
Bluetooth X Not Available
Platen Cover X Platen Cover
Large Capacity Tray X Large Capacity tray (RT36)
Finisher (SR790) X Finisher (SR720)
Paper Bank (PS530) X Paper Bank (PS360)
128MB Memory X -
Staple Type K (SR790) X -
Booklet Finisher (SR890) X -
Not Available X External Output Tray Type 450
Not Available X 64MB Memory
Not Available X Staple Cartridge Type G
(for SR720)
Not Available X 9-bin Mailbox Option
Not Available X Mailbox Bridge Unit Type 460
X = Not Compatible
OK = Compatible
DMR35B_45B
What Fits What Guide:
Printer / Scanner Unit

SAF 32MB Memory
1,000-sheet Finisher
Multi-tray Finisher
USB 2.0 Interface

Booklet Finisher
128MB Memory
Wireless LAN
Platen Cover
Paper Bank
Bridge Unit
Punch Unit
1-bin Tray
IEEE1394
Bluetooth
Interface
Fax Unit
Handset
G3 Unit
ARDF
JBIG
LCT
NIC
PS3
ARDF
Platen Cover
1-bin Tray
Bridge Unit
Paper Bank
LCT
1,000-sheet Finisher
Multi-tray Finisher
Punch Unit
Booklet Finisher
IEEE1394
Wireless LAN Interface
USB 2.0 Interface
NIC
Fax Unit
G3 Unit
SAF 32MB Memory
JBIG
Handset
Printer / Scanner Unit
128MB Memory
PS3
Bluetooth
= Cannot be installed together

= Must be installed together
Notes:
Printer / Scanner Unit comes with a NIC as standard.
IEEE1394, Wireless LAN interface and USB 2.0 interface can be installed
with NIC but NIC cannot be used together with IEEE1394, Wireless LAN
interface and USB 2.0 interface. Manual switching is required.
Supplies:
The DMR35B/45B supplies are unique to the new models but have the same yield as
the previous DMR35A/45A series. The DMR35B/45B is our first machine to have
the new chemical toner, which gives a higher image quality and is more
environmentally friendly.
Yield Content Coverage Versatility

Toner 30K 550g Bottle @ 6% Unique
Developer 300K 500g Cartridge @ 6% Unique
Drum (spare part) 150K 1 Drum @ 6% TBA
DMR35B_45B
REPLACEMENT MODEL COMPARISON

DMR35B/45B DMR35A/45A
Print Speed 35ppm / 45ppm 35ppm / 45ppm
Booklet Making Yes No
Mailbox No Yes
ISDN Faxing No Yes
Server-less Yes No
LAN faxing
SAF Memory 4MB 2MB
Page Memory 8MB 4MB
Copier Memory 64MB 32MB standard,
(standard & maximum) 64MB maximum
Stamping Standard Optional
(memory has to be added)
Scan-to-email Yes No
NIB Standard Option
Ethernet (100 base TX/10 base T) Ethernet (100 base TX/10 base T)
IEEE1394 Option: 2 ports (6-pin) Option: 2 ports (6-pin)
Interface (SCSI print and IP over 1394) (SCSI print)
Wireless LAN Option Not Available
Interface
USB 2.0 Option Not Available
Interface
Network TCP/IP, IPX, NetBEUI Apple TCP/IP, IPX, NetBEUI Apple
Protocols Talk (Auto Switching) Talk (Auto Switching)
Controller CPU RM7065A 300MHz RM5231 200MHz
Memory 192MB (resident 64MB + 96MB (resident 32MB + optional
Capacity optional 128MB) 64MB)
Document Standard: 20GB Standard: 10GB
Server (HDD)
Spool Printing Yes No
(Job Spool)
The DMR35B/45B represents improvements on an already market-leading machine.

The decision not to have a mailbox and ISDN fax options was taken because of very
low fit rates on the existing DMR35A/45A.
DMR35B_45B
Technology:
a) Scanning element Flatbed with moving CCD array image- Flatbed with moving CCD array image-
sensor sensor
b) Printing Processing Twin laser beam scanning & electro- Twin laser beam scanning & electro-
photographic printing photographic printing
Dimensions (WxDxH): Approx. 670 x 650 x 720mm Approx. 670 x 650 x 720mm
Weight: Less than 79kg Less than 78kg
Input Capacity:
a) Standard 500 sheets tray x 2 + 50 sheets bypass 500 sheets tray x 2 + 50 sheets bypass
tray tray
b) Options Paper bank: 500 sheets tray x 2 Paper bank: 500 sheets tray x 2
(Paper bank & LCT) LCT: 1,500 sheets LCT: 1,500 sheets
Output Capacity:
a) Standard Internal tray: 500 sheets Internal tray: 500 sheets
With bridge unit: 250 sheets With bridge unit: 250 sheets
b) Option 1-bin tray: 125 sheets 1-bin tray: 125 sheets

OR External tray: 125 sheets
Finisher 1,000: Max. 1,000 sheets OR
OR Finisher 1,000: Max. 1,000 sheets
Saddle stitch finisher: OR
Proof tray: 50 sheets Multi-tray finisher:
Shift tray: 1,000 sheets Upper tray: 500 sheets
OR Lower tray:
Multi-tray finisher: Default: 2,000 sheets
Upper tray: 500 sheets Multi-tray mode: 1,500 sheets
Lower tray: Mailbox: 100 sheets x 9 bins + 500
Default: 2,000 sheets sheets proof tray (used for printer only)
Multi-tray mode: 1,500
Sheets
Mailbox: Not available
External tray: Not available
a) Size: Trays: A5 SEF A3 Trays: A5 SEF A3
Bypass: A6 SEF A3 Bypass: A6 SEF A3
LCT: A4 LCT: A4
Duplex: A5 SEF A3 Duplex: A5 SEF A3
b) Weight (Bond): Paper trays: Paper trays:

Tray : 64g/m2 105g/m2 Tray : 64g/m2 105g/m2
Tray : 60g/m2 105g/m2 Tray : 60g/m2 105g/m2
LCT: 60g/m2 105g/m2 LCT: 64g/m2 105g/m2
Bypass: 52g/m2 163g/m2 Bypass: 52g/m2 163g/m2
Duplex: 64g/m2 105g/m2 Duplex: 64g/m2 105g/m2
Rating Power Specifications: 200V Model: 220-240V, 50/60Hz 200V Model: 220-240V, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption: TBA 200V Model: Less than 1.5kW
DMR35B_45B
Copy Features:
1st Copy Speed: 35ppm: 4.5 seconds 35ppm: 4.5 seconds
45ppm: 3.6 seconds 45ppm: 3.6 seconds
(A4 long edge feed from first input tray to (A4 long edge feed from first input tray to
internal tray. No reduction / enlargement) internal tray. No reduction / enlargement)
Continuous Copy Speed: 35ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction 35ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction
/ enlargement) / enlargement)
45ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction 45ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction
One to One Copy Speed: 35ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction 35ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction
45ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction 45ppm: (A4 long edge feed. No reduction
Multiple Copies: Up to 999 Up to 999
Resolution: 600dpi 600dpi
Grey Scale: 256 levels 256 levels
Warm-up Time 35ppm: 15 seconds 35ppm: 15 seconds
(from Main Switch off): 45ppm: 20 seconds 45ppm: 20 seconds
Recovery Time 35ppm: 10 seconds 35ppm: 10 seconds
(from Auto Off Mode): 45ppm: 15 seconds 45ppm: 15 seconds
Enlargement: 115, 122, 141, 200, 400% (EU) 115, 122, 141, 200, 400% (EU)
Reduction: 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% (EU) 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% (EU)
Zoom: 25% - 400% in 1% steps 25% - 400% in 1% steps
Image Density Adjustment: Manual or automatic Manual or automatic
User Code: 100 codes 100 codes
(Max. 500 codes with optional User (Max. 500 codes with optional User
Account Enhance Unit) Account Enhance Unit)
Display Languages: English, French English, French
* German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, * German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Finnish,
Portuguese, Polish, Hungarian, Russian Portuguese, Polish, Hungarian, Russian
and Czech are provided by FTP Server and Czech are provided by FTP Server
Control Panel: Symbols Symbols
Enhanced Copy Features:
Auto Paper Selection: Standard Standard
Auto Magnification Standard Standard
Selection:
Auto Tray Switch: Standard Standard
Directional Magnification: Standard Standard
Directional Size Standard Standard
Magnification (inch/mm)
Series Copy Book to Standard Standard
Simplex:
Series Copy Duplex to Standard Standard
Simplex:
Photo Mode: Standard (photo mode, text / photo mode) Standard (photo mode, text / photo mode)
Auto Start: Standard Standard
User Program: Standard (10 modes) Standard (10 modes)
Combine: 2 in 1 simplex: Standard Standard
Combine: 4 in 1 duplex: Standard Standard
DMR35B_45B
Combine: 8 in 1 duplex: Standard Standard
Combine: 16 in 1 booklet: Standard Standard
Magazine Copy: Standard Standard
Double Copy: Standard Standard
Erase centre/border: Standard Standard
Electronic Sort / Rotate Standard Standard
Sort:
Repeat Copying: Standard Standard
Image Rotation: Standard Standard
Positive / Negative: Standard Standard
Archive File: Document Server Document Server
Cover Insertion: Standard Standard
Paper Designate: Standard Standard
OHP Slip Sheet: Standard Standard
Stapling: 1,000 finisher: 3 positions 1,000 finisher: 1 position
Multi-tray finisher: 4 positions Multi-tray finisher: 4 positions
Booklet finisher: 3 positions
Margin Adjust: Standard Standard
Bypass Feed: Standard Standard
Copier Memory:
Standard: 64MB 32MB
Optional Memory: - 32MB
Note: 32MB optional memory for DMR35A/45A is for Preset Stamp, Background
Numbering and User Stamp. (Page numbering and date stamp are standard so
32MB optional memory is not necessary.)
DMR35B_45B
Printer Specifications:
DMR35B/45B
CPU: RM7065A 300MHz
Memory: 192MB (resident 64MB + 128MB memory option)
Additional 128MB memory required for printer or printer/scanner kit
Hard Disk 20GB (HDD is standard with DMR35B/45B copier and it is commonly used for
Drive: Printer and Scanner function)
Printer Standard: RPCS, PCL6, PCL5e
Description Option: Adobe PostScript3
Language:
Continuous DMR35B: 35ppm A4 long edge feed
Print Speed: DMR45B: 45ppm A4 long edge feed
Print RPCS PCL6 PCL5e PS3
Resolution: PDL: 600dpi/200dpi 600dpi 600dpi/300dpi 600dpi/300dpi
Driver: 600dpi/200dpi/300dpi 600dpi 600dpi/300dpi 600dpi
Interface: Standard:
RJ-45 network port (100 Base-TX/10Base-T)
Option:
Wireless LAN Interface (IEEE802.11b)
IEEE1394 x 2 port (6-pin)
USB 2.0 Interface
Bluetooth Interface
Network TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, SMB (NetBEUI *1, NetBIOS over TCP/IP), AppleTalk (Auto
Protocol: Switching)
MIB Support: Private MIB
Ricoh Original
Standard MIB (SMNP Printer MIB)
MIBII [RFC1213]
Host Resource [RFC1514]
Printer MIB [RFC1759]
Operation Mainframes operation panel is commonly used for printer functions (Printer Key
Panel: Top is added on the left-hand side of LCD)
Drivers: Win9x/Me WinNT4.0 Win2000
Workstation Server 4.0 Server 4.0 Server 4.0 Professional
4.0 TSE Enterprise
Edition
RPCS Yes Yes *2 Yes *4 Yes *2 - Yes
PCL6 Yes Yes *2 Yes *4 Yes *2 - Yes
PCL5e Yes Yes *2 Yes *4 Yes *2 - Yes
PS3 Yes Yes *3 Yes *4 Yes *3 - Yes (mini
driver) *5
Win2000 WinXP Mac
Server Advanced Datacenter Professional 8.6-OS X OS X
Server Server / Home Classic Native *8
Edition
RPCS Yes Yes *6 - Yes *7 - -
PCL6 Yes Yes *6 - Yes - -
PCL5e Yes Yes *6 - Yes - -
PS3 Yes (mini Yes (mini - Yes (mini Yes Yes
driver) *5 driver) *5, 6 driver) *5
DMR35B_45B
Supported RPCS, PCL6 and PCL5e:

Driver 1. English, 2. German, 3. French, 4. Italian, 5. Spanish, 6. Dutch, 7. Swedish,
Language 8. Norwegian, 9. Danish, 10. Czech, 11. Hungarian, 12. Finnish, 13. Polish,
(Localization): 14. Portuguese, 15. Russian, 16. Korean,
17. Chinese (Chinese version only), 18. Taiwanese (Taiwanese version only)
PostScript3:
1. English, 2. German, 3. French, 4. Italian, 5. Spanish, 6. Dutch, 7. Swedish,
8. Norwegian, 9. Danish,
10. Chinese (Chinese version only), 11. Taiwanese (Taiwanese version only)
UNIX: Filter and Install Shell and Super Option (Device Option Setting) are available
(web release)
Support OS: TBA
*1: SmartNetMonitor is required for NetBEUI.

*2: Service pack 4 is required.
*5: Adobe does not release PS driver for W2K. Only MS-PostScript driver is available and PPD
file for MS-PS is included in the driver CD.
*6: Cluster Server configuration is NOT supported.
*7: RPCS Driver does not support Fast User Switching function of Windows XP.
*8: Mac OS version 10.1.x is supported. (Mac OS X version 10.0.x is not supported).
Note: Wireless LAN I/F, IEEE1394 I/F and USB 2.0 I/F cannot be installed at the
same time.
Wireless LAN I/F and NIB can be installed into the mainframe but do not
work at the same time (need to select either one manually).
Point & Print:
Server Client (Push to) PCL5e PCL6 RPCS PS3

Windows XP Professional Windows XP Y Y Y Y
Windows 2000 Professional Y Y Y Y
Windows NT4.0 Workstation Y Y Y Y
Windows 9x/Me Y Y Y Y
Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Y Y Y Y
Server & Advanced Server Windows 2000 Professional Y Y Y Y
Windows NT4.0 Workstation & Windows XP N N N N
Server (Intel) Windows 2000 Professional Y Y N Y
Terminal Service:
Driver
Server PCL5e PCL6 RPCS PS3
Windows 2000 Server Y Y N Y
Windows NT4.0 TSE Y Y N Y
Y: Supported
N: Not supported
DMR35B_45B
Additional Memory:
144pin SDRAM
PC133 CL3
Access Time: 5.4ns (max.)
Common with CCR081/101 and DMR60/75
Wireless LAN:
Note 1:
Wireless LAN interface is installed into PCI slot of main board (only 1 PCI slot is
available on main board). Therefore, this cannot be installed together with other
optional items that are inserted in the PCI slot, such as IEEE1394 Interface and USB
Interface.
Note 2:
10/100Base-TX NIB and Wireless LAN I/F cannot be used at the same time. Manual
switching from the operation panel is required.
Data Transmission Speed Auto (11Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 2Mbps, 1Mbps), 11Mbps

fixed, 5.5Mbps fixed, 2Mbps fixed, 1Mbps fixed
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, SMB (NetBEUI*, NetBIOS over
TCP/IP), AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Frequency From 2,400MHz to 2,497MHz
Channel 1-13 channels
Type of Connections Ad hoc mode, 802.11b Ad hoc mode, Infrastructure
mode
Distance between Devices 11Mbps - 140m, 5.5Mbps - 200m, 2Mbps - 270m,
1Mbps 400m
The above are the maximum distances when using
in the open air and will depend on office
environment
WEP (Encryption) Setting 64bit (10 digits) / 128bit (26 digits)
Antenna 2 antennas are included in this option
* SmartNetMonitor for Client is required for NetBEUI
DMR35B_45B
IEEE1394:
Two types of connection are available, SCSI print and IP over 1394.
SCSI Print IP over 1394

Available function Print Print, Scan
PC OS Windows 2000 SP1, XP Windows Me (*), XP
Protocol SBP-2 TCP/IP
Bi-directional Yes Yes
Communication
(*): When printing with IP over 1394 from a PC (OS: Windows Me),
SmartNetMonitor for Client (version 5.0 or later) is necessary.
This function enables the customer to connect and use the DMR35B/45B as a printing
device (only from the PC installed Windows 2000 and XP).
Notes: This type of connection can only be used for printing functions.
The IEEE1394 I/F is installed into the PCI slot of the main board (only 1 PCI
slot is available on the main board). Therefore, this cannot be installed
together with other optional items that are inserted into the PCI slot, such as
Wireless LAN I/F and USB I/F.
DMR35B_45B
Scanner Specifications:
Item: Specifications:
Optical Resolution 600dpi, 256 shades of grey
Scan Speed ScanRouter: 49ipm/min (200dpi binary/LEF/MH)
Twain: 36ipm/min (200dpi binary/LEF/MH)
0.8 seconds/sheet (200dpi binary/SEF/without
compression)
Scan Area Main scan: 297mm
Sub scan: 432mm
Detectable Original Size: A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5
Contact Glass SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF, LG SEF
Detectable Original Size: A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5
ADF SEF/LEF, Foolscap SEF
Compression Method Binary: MH (default), MR, MMR
Greyscale: JPEG
Network Topology Ethernet 10/100BaseTX
IEEE1394/IP over
Wireless LAN (802.11b)
Protocol TCP/IP
Memory Capacity 192MB
Web Status Monitor Standard
Operating Ambient 0 - 50 Celsius
Temperature
Operating Humidity 5% - 80%
Power Requirements 5VDC +/- 5%
Power Consumption 5VDC 1A max.
Emissions Compliance FCC class A level
Scan to e-mail:
Requirement SMTP (Mail Server) Gateway and TCP/IP (POP before

SMTP is not supported)
Register e-mail Address Max, 2,000
Destination Max. 500
Group Address Max. 100 Group (max. 100 users in one group)
Destination Address Input Yes (via soft key)
Maintain e-mail Address Operation panel, WebStatusMonitor, SmartNetMonitor
Attention To, cc, bcc
Search By name, e-mail address
Input Subject Max. 20 characters via soft key
e-mail Size 64 102, 400KB (102.4MB), default: 2.048KB
File Type Single page TIFF/JPEG/Multi Page TIFF, PDF
Divide and Send e-mail Yes *
Batch Transmission Yes (by page or size)
* If the sent file exceeded the maximum e-mail size, it would be divided to multiple sending. In
addition, the sent files might not be accepted by the receiver, due to either a limitation in the
receiving capacity at the receiver SMTP server or e-mail software setting.
DMR35B_45B
Fax Specifications:
DMR35B/45B
Circuit PSTN, PBX
Compatibility ITU-T (CCITT) G3, Additional G3 (Option)
Resolution 8 x 3.85, 7.7l/mm, 200 x 200/100dpi (standard)
8/16 x 15.4l/mm, 400 x 400dpi (option)
Compression Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG (Option)
Scanning Speed TBA
Number of Pages Scanned TBA
Modem Speed Standard with Automatic Shift Down
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 21600, 19200, 16800,
14400, 12000, 9600, 7200, 4800, 2400 bps
Transmission Speed G3: Approx. 3 seconds (200 x 100dpi, ITUT #1 chart,
TTI off, memory transmission)
G3: Approx. 2 seconds (200 x 100dpi, with JBIG,
ITUT #1 chart, TTI off, memory transmission)
SAF Memory Standard: 4MB
Option: 24MB (total: 28MB)
Page Memory Standard: 8MB
Memory Backup 1 hour
Super Smoothing Standard
Stamp Option (with document feeder)
TTI/RTI Standard
CSI Standard
Quick / Speed Dial Standard: 500 dial
Option: 1,200 dial or 2,000 dial
Group Dial Standard 100 groups (500 numbers per group)
Program Standard: 100 numbers
Maximum: 200 numbers with JBIG option
Redial Standard
AI Short Protocol Standard
Direct Fax Number Entry Standard
Dual Access Standard
User Codes Standard: 100 codes
Maximum: 500 codes with optional User Account
Enhance Unit
Auto Document Standard: 6 documents
Maximum: 18 documents with JBIG option
Page Count Standard
Auto Reduction Standard
Wild Cards Standard
Daylight Saving Time No
(Summer Time)
ID Code Programming Standard (4 digits)
Programming by OMR No
User Function Key Standard (3 keys)
Night Timer No
DMR35B_45B
Energy Saver Standard

LCD Prompt Standard
Remaining Memory Standard
Indication
Time Indicator / No /
Clock Adjustment Standard
User Parameter Setting Standard
User Data Transfer Standard
Memory File Transfer Standard
Transmission Features:
DMR35B/45B
Immediate Transmission Standard
Memory Transmission Standard
Serial Broadcasting (later) Standard (Maximum 500 numbers)
Send Later Standard
Error Correction Mode Standard
Page Retransmission Standard
Economy Transmission Standard
Forwarding Standard
Batch Transmission Standard
Parallel Memory Standard (automatically selected)
Transmission
Image Rotation Standard
Book Fax Standard
Closed Network Standard
(Transmission)
Confidential Transmission / Standard
With ID
Transfer Request Standard (Transfer station: 99 locations, receiver: 30
terminals)
Transfer Transmission Standard
Polling Transmission Standard
Double-sided Transmission Yes
Transmission Reserve No
Reception Features:
DMR35B/45B
Automatic Reception Standard
Manual Reception Standard
Substitute Reception Standard
Authorized Reception Standard (30 patterns)
Maximum: 50 patterns with option
Multicopy Standard
Reverse Order Printing No
DMR35B_45B
Memory Lock Standard

Confidential Reception Standard
Special Reception Numbers Standard (30 numbers)
Closed Network Standard
Polling Reception Standard (Maximum 500 senders)
Poll Later Standard (Maximum 500 senders)
Polling from Memory Standard
Multi-polling Reception Standard
Continuous Polling Standard
Reception Time Printing Standard
Centre Mark Standard
Chequered Mark Standard
2 in 1 Standard
Economy Printing Mode No
Duplex Reception Yes
Telephone Features:
Telephone Connection Standard

Monitor Speaker Standard
Automatic Voice Message No
Voice Request No
On-hook Dial Standard
Tone Transmission Standard
Pause Standard
Pulse / Tone Selection Standard
Chain Dialling Standard
Reception Mode Selection Standard
Automatic Fax / Phone Standard
Change
Reception Mode Switchover Standard
(Remote)
Answering Machine Standard
Interface
Reception Mode Switching Standard
Timer
Auto Answer Delay Time Standard (SP Mode)
Busy Tone Detection Standard
Silent Ringing Detection Standard
DMR35B_45B
PERIPHERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Document Feeder DF76 (New)
Original Size:
Simplex: B6 SEF A3
Duplex: B5 SEF A3
Original Weight: Simplex: 40 128g/m2
Duplex: 52 105 g/m2
Stack Capacity: 80 sheets (80g/m2)
Feeding Speed: 35cpm (DMR35B), 45cpm (DMR45B)
Noise (Power Level): Less than 66.5dB
Power Consumption: Less than 60W
Weight: Less than 12kg
Paper Bank PS530 (New)

Paper Size: A5 SEF A3
Paper Weight: 60 105g/m2
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Noise (Power Level): Operating: Less than 71dB (full system)
Stand-by: Less than 40dB (full system)
Power Consumption: 50W
1-bin Tray PT330 (New):

Paper Size: A5 SEF A3, HLT SEF DLT
Paper Capacity: 125 sheets (80g/m2)
Finisher 1000 SR790 (Common with DMR22A/27A/32A and CCR081/101)

Note: Only units produced from December 2002 and with Serial number J1021201907 or higher are
compatible with the DMR35B/45B:
Paper Size / Paper Weight: Proof Tray: A3 A6T, 60 157g/m2
Shift Tray: A3 A5, 60 157g/m2
Stack Capacity: Proof Tray: 250 sheets (A4 LEF or smaller) (80g/m2)
50 sheets (B4 or larger) (80g/m2)
Shift Tray: 1,000 sheets (A4 LEF or smaller) (80g/m2)
500 sheets (B4 or larger) (80g/m2)
Staple Capacity: 50 sheets (A4, B5 or smaller) (80g/m2)
30 sheets (A3 or larger) (80g/m2)
Staple Paper Size: A3 B5 LEF
Staple Paper Weight: 64 90g/m2
Staple Position: 1 staple 2 positions, 2 staples 3 positions
Shift Tray (Doggy tail): Standard
Weight: 25kg
DMR35B_45B
Multi Tray Finisher SR880 (New):

Upper Tray:
Paper Size: A6, B5, A5 A3
Paper Weight: 52 163g.m2
Stack Capacity: 500 sheets (A4/B5/A5)
250 sheets (A3, B4)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
Lower Tray: Normal Mode (Default):
Stack Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4 LEF)
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
* Staple output on upper tray is not available in Default mode
Lower Tray: Multi Tray Mode:
Stack Capacity: 1,500 sheets (A4 LEF)
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
Staple Capacity: 50 sheets (A4)
30 sheets (B4)
Stapler Capacity: 5,000 shots per cartridge
Weight: 53kg
Booklet Finisher SR890 (New):

Upper Tray:
Paper Size: A5 A3
Stack Capacity: 150 sheets (A4 LEF, B5 LEF, A5 LEF)
75 sheets (A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 SEF, B5 SEF)
Lower Tray:
Paper Size: A5 A3
Stack Capacity: 1,000 sheets (A4 LEF, B5 LEF, A5 LEF)
Staple Capacity: 50 sheets (A4 LEF, B5 LEF, A5 LEF)
Stapler Capacity: 5,000 shots per cartridge (Type E)
Booklet Tray:
Paper Size: A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B5 SEF
Stack Capacity: 11 15 sheets folder: 10 sets
6 10 sheets folder: 15 sets
Less than 5 sheets folder: 25 sets
Staple Capacity: 15 sheets
Stapler Capacity: 2,000 shots per cartridge (Type J)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 68.9 x 62.3 x 105.5mm
Weight: 50kg
DMR35B_45B
Bridge Unit (New):

Proof Tray:
Paper Size: A5 A3, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, A4 LEF
Stack Capacity: 250 sheets
Bridge to the Finisher / Mailbox:
Paper Size: A5 A3, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, A4 LEF
LCT RT45 (New):

Paper Size: A4 LEF
Paper Capacity: 1,500 sheets
Stand-by: Less than 40dB (full system)
Punch Kit for EU 2/4-hole:

Paper Size:
2-hole: SEF: A3 A5
LEF: A4 A5
4-hole: SEF: A3, B4
LEF: A4, B5
Paper Weight: 2-hole version: 52 163g/m2
4-hole version: 52 163g/m2
Weight: 2.9kg
Punch Kit for Scandinavian 4-hole:

Paper Size: SEF: A3 A5
LEF: A4 A5
Dimensions (W x D x H) 142 x 456 x 92mm
Weight: 2.9kg
DMR35B_45B
WEB STATUS MONITOR

Function Availability List for Each Application:
Function: WebImageMonitor: WebStatusMonitor: DeskTopBinder MFP Operation
V2 Lite: Panel:
Document Server View YES NO YES YES
Print Yes NO YES YES
(Except Scandata)
Delete YES NO YES YES
Download YES NO YES YES
(Fax, Scanner)
Delivery to NO NO YES NO
ScanRouter
Document
Server
Address Book Add YES NO NO YES
(Scan to e-mail): Change YES NO NO YES
Delete YES NO NO YES
Print NO NO NO YES
Job Log: View YES YES YES YES
Print NO NO NO NO
Delete YES YES YES NO
Machine Status: View YES YES NO YES
Incoming Fax: View YES NO YES YES
Resend NO NO YES YES
Download YES NO YES
Print YES NO NO YES
Delete YES NO YES YES
System Set-up NO NO NO YES
Network Setting View YES NO NO YES
Restore YES NO NO YES
Change YES NO NO YES
Administrator Mode:
According to the list below, the functions differ by mode:

Administrator User Mode:
Mode:
Status YES YES
Document Server YES YES
Fax Received File YES YES
Job YES YES
Address Book YES NO
Configuration Device Setting YES NO
Protocol TCP/IP YES YES
SMTP YES YES
NetWare YES YES
AppleTalk YES YES
SMB YES YES
SNMP YES NO
System Log YES YES
Web Page YES YES
Security Password YES NO
Access Control YES NO
IPP Authentication YES NO
DMR35B_45B
Address Book:
Users can manage their address book through their web browser:
1. Add the new account for e-mail/group address
2. Edit the e-mail/group address account
3. Delete the e-mail/group address account
Note: It is not possible to import address data (e.g. CSV files)
Function: WebImageMonitor: WebStatusMonitor: DeskTopBinder V2 MFP Operation

Lite: Panel:
Add YES NO NO YES
Delete YES NO NO YES
Print NO NO NO YES
Machine Status:
Users can see the machine status easily from their PC, through the web browser.
The following machine status can be monitored through the web:
1. Paper tray
2. Output tray
3. Toner
4. Available machine functions (e.g. Duplex, Bypass, Staple etc.)
5. System
6. Installed PDL information

Lite: Panel:
View YES YES NO YES
Network Settings:
Users can manage the following items through their web browser:
1. I/F Setting
2. Paper type
3. Network protocol
4. TCP/IP
5. SMTP
6. NetWare
7. AppleTalk
8. System log
9. Password
10. Web Setting
11. SMB
12. Access control
13. SNMP
14. IPP

Lite: Panel:
View YES NO NO YES
Restore YES NO NO YES
DMR35B_45B
Job Log:
Users can monitor the Job log easily through their web browser
1. Printer log
2. Spool log
3. LAN-fax log
4. Document Server print log

Lite: Panel:
View YES YES YES YES
Print NO NO NO NO
Delete YES YES YES NO
System Requirements:
OS Specification Required for Client PC:
Windows 95 / 98 / 98SE / Millennium

WindowsNT4.0 Workstation / Server: Service Pack 6 or later
Windows 2000 Professional Server / Advanced Server: Server Service Pack 2 or later
Windows XP (Home and Professional Edition)
Browser Specification Required for Client PC:
Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5.5 or later (6.0 or later recommended)

Netscape Navigator 4.7 or later (6.2 or later recommended)
DMR35B_45B
As a leading manufacturer in producing environmentally friendly machines, you
are able to publish to your customers the following information. This covers noise
levels, BAM standards (which indicate whether a part is recyclable),
environmental marks (e.g. Energy Star, Swan etc.), power consumption, ozone &
styrene emission levels and dust levels.
Sound Power Level (dB: Decibel):

Copier Only Full Systems*
DMR35B DMR45B DMR35B DMR45B
Stand-by: Less than Less than Less than Less than
42dB 42dB 42dB 42dB
Copying: Less than Less than Less than Less than
69dB 70dB 73dB 74dB
* Note: Full systems includes Mainframe, Finisher and LCT
Sound Pressure Level (dB: Decibel):

Copier Only
DMR35B DMR35B
Copying: Less than Less than
54dB 57dB
DMR35B/45B: DMR35A/45A:
Ozone Emission Level: TBA 0.02PPM
Styrene Emission Level: TBA 0.075MG/M3
Power Consumption: TBA 0.07MG/M3
Chrome-free Steel: YES NO
Lead-free Controller Board: YES NO
Energy Star: YES YES
BAM: YES YES
Also, the DMR35B/45B has chrome-free steel plate, a lead-free controller board
and is constructed of Polyvinyl chloride free technology.
DMR35B_45B
TARGETED RELIABILITY
There is no change in reliability between the DMR35A/45A and the
DMR35B/45B:
DMR35B: DMR45B: DMR35A: DMR45A:

ACV: 10K/month 20K/month 10K/month 20K/month
Max CV 50K/month 50K/month 50K/month 50K/month
(5 years):
Duty: 200K/month 200K/month 200K/month 200K/month
PM Cycle: 150K 150K 150K 150K
EM Cycle: 75K 75K 75K 75K
MCBC: 50K 50K 50K 50K
Life: 5 years or 5 years or 5 years or 5 years or
3,000K prints, 3,000K prints, 3,000K prints, 3,000K prints,
whichever whichever whichever whichever
comes first comes first comes first comes first
DMR35B_45B
WHAT FITS WHAT

Machine: Nashuatec: Rex Rotary: Gestetner:
DMR35B 3545 3518 3532
DMR45B 4545 4518 4532
Supplies: Yield:
DD10BLK Developer 300K @ 6%
DT39BLK Toner 30K @ 6%
A2309510 Drum 150K
Peripherals:
PC3800C Platen Cover
DF76 ADF
RT45 1,500 sheet LCT
PT330 1-bin Tray
PS530 Paper Bank
DMR35BFPCAB Cabinet Flat Pack
SR880 Multi Tray Finisher
CSC760A Staple Cartridge for SR880 / 790
CSC760B Staple Refill for SR880 / 790
SR790 1,000 sheet Finisher
SR890 Booklet Maker / Finisher
CSC750 Staple Cartridge for Booklet Maker
CSC1035 Staple Cartridge for Normal Stapling
DHPU451E4H 4-hole Punch
DHPU451S4H Swedish 4-hole Punch
Language Kits:
Language: Copier Kits: Fax Kits: Printer Kits:
English DDK2045GB DDK2045FGB DDK2045PSGB
French DDK2045F DDK2045FF DDK2045PSF
German DDK2045D DDK2045FD DDK2045PSF
Italian DDK2045I DDK2045FI DDH2045PSI
Portuguese DDK2045P DDK2045FP DDK2045PSP
Norwegian DDK2045N DDK2045FN DDK2045PSN
Swedish DDK2045S DDK2045FS DDK2045PSS
Polish DDK2045PL DDK2045FPL DDK2045PSPL
Czech DDK2045CZ DDK2045FCZ DDK2045PSCZ
Hungarian DDK2045H DDK2045FH DDK2045PSH
Finnish DDK2045SF DDK2045FSF DDK2045PSSF
Fax Options:
DIF2045F Universal Interface
DIF2045GB G3 Option
DME185J-F Feature Expander
DMEBP32 Fax Memory
DMR35B_45B
Printer Options:
DIF2045S Print / Scan + NIB Kit
DIF2045PS PostScript 3 Kit
DIF1232WL Wireless LAN
DIF4510FW IEEE1394 Firewire Board
DIFBT2045 Bluetooth
DUSB1075 USB
DME1045RAM NV RAM User Code Enhancement
DIMM128 128MB Memory (Required with Print Controller)
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR55B
Digital 55ppm
Multifunctional Product
Nashuatec 5505
Rex Rotary 5508
Gestetner 5502
Launch Month: Country of Origin:
December 2002 Japan

Date Created: September, 2002
Version 2
October, 2002
DMR55B
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Target Markets 3
Product Overview 4
Product Configuration & Options 5
Specifications Product 8
Specifications Printer 12
Specifications Peripherals 16
What Fits What 21
This is a pre-launch document and specifications are

subject to change. If in doubt, or specifications are
required for tenders, etc. please contact NRGI Guernsey
for confirmation of exact product details.
K:\Company\Market\NPS\DMR55B.doc 1
DMR55B
INTRODUCTION
We have had considerable success with the 45 60cpm market since the initial introduction of the
DMR55 and the introduction of the DMR55A in 2000. The DMR55As direct replacement is the
DMR60. This represents many benefits over the present DMR55A, such as GW architecture, true
1200dpi printing, network scanning and, most importantly, it is a full 5ppm faster than the current
DMR55A.
Because of these considerable feature improvements, the DMR60 is actually positioned higher than
the current DMR55A and a large gap has now opened up between our highest mid-range product
(45ppm) and our lowest high-range product (60ppm). We intend to fill that gap with a new product,
the DMR55B. Technically, the product is virtually identical to the old DMR55A, i.e. it is a non-GW
architecture machine. The only real differences are the fact that the DMR55B sports the new plastics
colour, has the central cyclops brand plaque and has a limited range of options.
From a marketing perspective, the products are quite different. This places it in a different market to
both the DMR60 and the DMR55A. Whereas these products should be seen as showcase entry-
level CRD machines, the DMR55B is more of a price competitive solution for the busy office. It has
been deisgned as a competitive machine in the 50 55ppm market (targeting the Canon IR5000 and
Minolta Di550) particularly useful for the price-sensitive tender business.
DMR55B
TARGET MARKETS
Whereas the DMR60 is targeted at both the walk-up environment and the CRD, the DMR55B
should only really be targeted at the walk-up environment, where price is the overriding factor.
It is an ideal machine for tenders that ask for a price competitive machine over 50ppm, where Canon
and Minolta are particularly strong. It is only really meant for the parts of the 50ppm + market that
the DMR60 cannot reach.
DMR55B
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The higher specification DMR60, with its network scanning, 1200dpi printing and versatile finishing is
our showcase machine in the higher end walk-up and low-end CRD. The DMR55B is really a price
fighter, aimed at plugging a particular gap in the market. On a product basis, it is very similar to the
old DMR55A so it does show most of the basic features and benefits of that machine. The major
product difference between the DMR55A and DMR55B is that the DMR55B has a more limited
range of finishing options.
Key Features, Advantages & Benefits
For product selling points, please consult the original DMR55A New Product Specification. Please
note that some options (100 sheet stapling and booklet finishing) are not available with the DMR55B.
DMR55B
PRODUCT CONFIGURATION & OPTIONS
Copy New
Conne ctor ki t Controller 1 0 0 s heets ARDF
Ne w
Finisher
(50she e ts 1 ,5 5 0 s heets x 2
S tapl e r)
3 ,5 0 0
S heet
LCT
5 5 0 s heets
5 5 0 s heets
External Compatibility:
DMR55B DMR55A DMR60 DMR85A

SR870 (NEW) Y N N N
3,000 sheets finisher with
50 sheets stapler
SR740 N Y N N
50 sheets stapler
SR810 N Y N Y
100 sheets stapler
SR750 N Y N N
Finisher with saddle
stitch function
Punch Unit Type 850 Y N N N
RT44 (NEW) Y N N N
3,500 sheets LCT
RT37 N Y N N
DMR55B
3,500 sheets LCT

CS360 N Y N N
Mail Box
LG Kit (NEW) Y N N N
DMR55B DMR55A DMR60 DMR85
DIF700TD Y Y N N
Copy Connector Kit
DIF700P Y Y N N
Printer Controller
DCT1075 Y Y Y N
Output Tray
Key Counter Bracket Y Y N N
Notes: Y: Can be attached to the machine

N: Cannot be attached to the machine
Because of the new colour, the DMR55B has a new range of external options, such as the LCT and
finisher. The old DMR55A options are not compatible with the new machine.
Internal Compatibility:
Item: Description: Notes:

DIF700P2 (NEW) Printer controller main New item. Minor change from current model.
Printer Controller board. Printer driver and Unique to DMR55B.
Type 700 utility CD included.
DIF700PS Adobe genuine PostScript Existing item.
PostScript 3 Kit option. Also compatible with DMR55A/70A.
DIF450EI Ethernet network interface Existing item.
Network Option option. Also compatible with DMR55A/70A &
DMR85A/105A.
DHD850P Hard disk for font and Existing item.
Printer Hard Disk macro downloading. Also compatible with DMR55A/70A &
DMR85A/105A.
RAM 32MB, 64MB or 128MB As with the DMR55A, should be purchased
locally.
Notes:
1. Fiery (EFI) Printer Controller (DIFEB70P) is not supported in the DMR55B.
2. Memory = 1 slot with 32MB standard RAM and 1 open slot for additional RAM.
168 pin PC100 SDRAM DIMM (32, 64 or 128MB) can be used in both slots.
Internally, only the printer controller is a new item for the DMR55B. Also, please note that
SmartNetMonitor is now bundled rather than Aficio Manager. The new printer controller is NOT
backwards compatible with the old DMR55A.
DMR55B
Supplies
Toner:
DT28BLK Same as for the DMR55A/70A
Yield: Average 46K/bottle @ A4 6% chart
Content: 1,220g bottle
4 bottles/carton
Interchangeability DMR55A/70A, DMR55B
Developer:
DD4BLK Same as for the DMR55A/70A
Yield: Average 300K/Unit
Content: 1Kg/bag
4 bags/carton
Interchangeability: DMR55A/70A, DMR55B
Drum:
A2949510 Same as DMR55A/70A. Available as a spare part
Yield: Average 360K/Unit
Content: 1 unit/carton
Interchangeability: DMR85A/105A, DMR55A/70A, DMR55B
Staples:
CSC80
Content: 1 cartridge with 5,000 staples
4 refills with 5,000 staples each
Interchangeability: SR870, SR740
DMR55B
SPECIFICATIONS PRODUCT
Configuration: Console
Printing Process Two laser beam scanning & electro-photographic
printing
Reading Element Flatbed with moving CCD array image-sensing
Main Functions Standard: Copier / Document Server
Option: Printer
Originals: Sheet / Book
Original Set Position: Left rear corner
Original Size: Maximum A3
Copy / Print Paper Size: Maximum A3
Minimum A6 (short-edge feed)
Copy Paper Weight: Front trays: 52.3 to 127.9g/m2
Bypass with finisher: 52.3 to 157g/m2
Duplex: 64 to 104.7g/m2
Reproduction Ratio: 6 reduction and 5 enlargement
Shrink / Centre mode available
A4 / A3 Version:
Reduction: 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50%
100%: 100%
Enlargement: 115, 122, 141, 200, 400%
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% steps
Continuous Copying Speed: 55 copies/minute (A4 long-edge feed)

28 copies/minute (A3)
37 copies/minute (LG)
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: 55 originals/minute (A4 long-edge feed)
Resolution: 600dpi
Grey Scales: Scanning: 256 levels
Writing: 4 levels
Warm-up Time: Less than 330 seconds (Off mode at 68 F/23C)
Less than 30 seconds (Low power mode)
First Copy Time: Less than 3.5 seconds (Face-up feed, A4 long-edge
feed, feeding from 1st tray)
Less than 5.3 seconds (Face-down feed, A4 long-edge
feed, feeding from the 1st tray)
Copy Number Input: Ten keys, from 1 to 999
Manual Image Density: 7 steps
Paper Feed: 3,100 sheets (2 x 1,550 sheet trays), tandem tray + 2 x
550 sheets trays + 50 sheets bypass tray
DMR55B
Paper Capacity: Tandem tray: Approx 1,500 sheets x 2 or less than

155mm height x 2
550 sheet tray: Approx. 550 sheets or less than 55mm
height
Output Tray Capacity (New): 500 sheets (A4, B4)
250 sheets (A5, B5, A3)
Power Source: 220-240V / 50, 60Hz 10A
Maximum Power Consumption: Mainframe only: 1.5kw
Full system: 1.75kw
Dimensions (W x D x H): TBA
Weight: TBA
Optional Equipment: 3,000 sheet finisher with 50 sheets stapler (New)
3,500 sheet large capacity tray (LCT) (New)
Output tray
Copy connector kit
Printer option
Special Features:
Document Server 20GB

Paper Selection:
Auto Paper Selection: Standard (A5 A3)
Limitless Feeding: Standard
Magnification:
Size Magnification: Standard
Directional Magnification: Standard
Designated Area Magnification: No
Shrink and Centre Mode: Standard
Default Mode: 93% reduction plus centring
By UP setting, reduction ration can be changed between 99% and 90%
Editing:
Image Repeat: Standard
Double Copy: Standard
Erase Edge / Centre: Standard
Margin Adjustment: Standard
Centring: Standard
Cornering: No
Combine Mode:
Simplex Combine: Standard
2 pages, 4 pages, 8 pages, 1 sheet (2 pages) duplex
original into one-sided copy
Right to left / Top to bottom can be set
Duplex Combine: Standard
4 pages, 8 pages, 16 pages, 2 sheets (4 pages) duplex
original onto double-sided copy
Right to left / Top to bottom can be set
DMR55B
Magazine Mode: Standard

Booklet Mode: Standard
Duplex: Standard from tandem / front / LCT trays
One-sided originals to Two-sided copies
Two-sided originals to Two-sided copies
Book (Right to Left page) to Two-sided copies
Facing pages (Top to Bottom page) to Two-sided
copies
Series Copy: Standard
Clear Mode:
Clear: Standard
Application Clear: Standard
Clear / Stop: Standard
Energy Saver Mode: Standard (Default 1 minute)
0 seconds or between 10 and 999 seconds can be set by
UP
Low Power Mode: Standard (Default 15 minutes)
Between 1 and 240 minutes can be set by UP
Auto Off Mode: Standard (Default 90 minutes)
Between 1 and 240 minutes can be set by UP
Interrupt Key: Standard
Display of Number of Originals: Standard
Display of Job Time: Standard
Job Time Calculation: Standard - in electrical sort mode
Weekly Timer: Standard
Sample Copy Mode: Standard
Tandem Copying: Optional
User Code Mode: Standard - 500 accounts (BY UP mode)
Copy volume by user codes can be printed
Job Program: Standard - 10 programmes
Job Recalls: No
Display of Type of Paper: Standard
Selection of original Type Setting:
Letter Mode: Standard
Letter / photo Mode: Standard
Pale Mode: Standard
Generation Copy: Standard
Auto Image Density: Standard
Human Sensor: TBA
Finishing:
Electronic Sort: Available
Sort: Available with optional copy tray
Shift Sort: Available with finisher
DMR55B
Image Rotate Sort: Available with 50/100 sheet staple finisher by changing UP
mode
Electronic Stack: Standard with optional finisher
Staple: Optional with finisher
Punch Function: Optional with 50/100 sheet staple finisher and punch units
Cover / Slip Mode:
Cover Sheet Mode: Standard
Slip Sheet Mode: Standard
Paper Designate: Standard (Up to 20, can input 3 digit pages)
Chapters: Standard (Up to 20, can input 3 digit pages)
Mixed Size Original: Standard with standard ARDF (Same edge length only)
Preset Job: Standard (Up to 8 jobs, 100 page x 8 jobs)
Positive / Negative: No
Outline: No
Shading: No
Italicizing: No
Mirroring: No
Stamp: Yes
Document Server: Yes
Photo-Conductor: New OPC drum
Charge System: Double wire
Development System: Magnetic Brush
Developer: New developer (1kg/bag(, 300K/bag *
Toner: Dry dual component
New bottle (1,220g/bottle), 43K/bottle *
Toner recycling system
Fusing: Heat Roller
Paper Feeding System: FRR system
Duplex Feeding System: Non-stacking interleaf method
Paper Transfer / Separation: Belt transfer / separation, Separation pawl
* This figure depends on the usage conditions.
DMR55B
SPECIFICATIONS PRINTER
Notes: Basic specifications are the same as Printer Controller DIF700P for DMR55A
Print speed DMR55B: 55cpm model: 55ppm / A4 LEF

(continuous speed from copier HDD)
CPU Power PC740 266MHz
Memory Standard: 32MB
Optional: 32 / 64/ 128MB SDRAM (1 open slot)
Hard Disk Drive Mainframe HDD: 20GB
Optional Printer HDD: 6GB
PDL Standard: PCL5e/6
Option: Adobe PostScript3
Print resolution PCL5e PCL6 PS3
300/600dpi 300/600dpi 600dpi
Host Interface Standard: Parallel port IEEE1284
Option: Ethernet 10/100 base T network interface
Network TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Protocol
Fonts PCL : 35 intellifonts,10 true type fonts,1 bitmap
PS3 : 136 Postscript fonts
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions (Printer Key Top is
added on the left side of LCD)
Drivers Win WinNT 3.51 Win WinNT4.0 Mac
95/98/ 3.1 WS / TSE Enterprise 8.6 OS X
Me Server Edition OS X Native
classic
PCL5e Yes - - Yes*1 Yes*3 - - -
PCL6 Yes Yes*1 Yes*3
PS3 Yes - - Yes*2 - - Yes TBA
Win2000 Win XP
Professional Server Server Advanced Home/
Terminal Server Professional
Service
PCL5e Yes Yes Yes Yes*5 Yes
PCL6 Yes Yes Yes Yes*5 Yes
PS3 Yes (mini Yes (mini Yes Yes Yes
driver) driver) (mini (mini (mini driver) *4,*5
*4 *4 driver) driver)
*4 *4,*5
DMR55B
Supported PCL5e, PCL6

Driver Language 1. English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.Swedish, 8.Norwegian,
(Localization) 9.Danish, 10.Czech, 11.Hungarian, 12.Finnish, 13.Polish, 14.Portuguese,
PostScript 3
1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7. Swedish, 8. Norwegian,
9. Danish,
Utility Software SmartNetMonitor for Admin (14 languages)
(Bundled) SmartNetMonitor for Client (14 languages)
Printer Utility For Mac (1 language)
*1 Service pack 4 is required

*4Adobe does not release PS driver for W2K. Only MS-PostScript driver is available and PPD
file for MS-PS is included in the Driver CD
*5 Cluster Server configuration is NOT supported
Network Interface Board Specifications:
The Network Interface Board has network printing capability in order to support multiple protocols;
Web browser based management, and set up as follows.
Item Specification
Network Topology Ethernet 10/100 Base T
Host Interface Connector RJ45
CPU Osicom NET + ARM
RAM 1 MB
ROM 1 MB
Power Consumption 5VDC 1A max.
Printing Functionality 1. Novell NetWare Printing in NDS (NetWare 4.x native) and bindery,
(NetWare 4.x with bindery
Emulation, or 2.15 or 3.x) modes
2. TCP/IP printing using LPR (Win95, Win NT, Unix, other OS)
3. Windows Peer to Peer printing over IP using DPI supplied port monitor
(Win95, Win NT4.0)
4. Windows Peer to Peer printing over IPX using DPI supplied port monitor
(Win95, Win NT4.0)
5. AppleTalk printing over Ethertalk protocol
NIB Utility 1. IPX Peer to Peer port monitor
2. IP Peer to Peer port monitor
3. MAP
4. NetWare setup
DMR55B
Further Printer Specifications:
Features PCL5e PCL6 PS3 Notes

Send to Document Yes Yes User codes up to 8 alphanumeric
Server characters
Sample Print Yes Yes
Locked Print Yes Yes
Copies Yes Yes Up to 999
Collation Yes Yes
Layout print Yes Yes 1 / 2 / 4 / 6 / 9 / 16 pages per sheet
Draw frame border Yes Yes Enable only if layout is more than 1
page per sheet.
Orientation setting Yes Yes Portrait or Landscape
Staple Yes Yes l Off
l Upper left slant
l Left 2
l Upper 2
l Upper Left Horizontal
l Upper Left Vertical
l Booklet
Duplex Yes Yes l Side Binding
l Top Binding
l Booklet
Punch Yes Yes Left or Top
Save settings Yes Yes Save driver settings
Fit to print size Yes Yes Can set document size and designate
print size with just fit image.
Paper selection Yes Yes l Same paper for all pages
l Different paper for first page
l Use slip sheet
Print on slip sheet Yes Yes On or Off
Auto tray select Yes Yes
Manual tray select Yes Yes
Paper type setting Yes Yes l Plain
l Recycled
l Special
l Thin
l Thick
l Translucent
l Tab stock
l User colour 1
l User colour 2
Output tray selection Yes Yes
Resolution setting Yes Yes 300 / 600dpi
Edge smoothing Yes Yes 2400 dpi enhance x 600dpi
DMR55B
Toner saver Yes Yes

Graphic Mode Yes Yes l HP-GL/2
selection l Raster
Halftone setting Yes Yes l Photographic image
l Line art
l Scanned images
True type mode Yes Yes l Download as True Type
l Download as Bit image
l Print as graphic
Watermark Yes Yes
Contents of CD-ROM:
CD #1 PCL5e driver for DMR55A/70A

(Bundled in current PCL6 driver for DMR55A/70A
Printer Controller PS3 driver for DMR55A/70A
Type700) Peripheral Manager for Admin
Peripheral Manager for Client
Port NAVI
Agfa Font Manager
Printer Reference (PDF file)
PS Supplement (PDF file)
NIB Quick Configuration Guide (PDF file)
Acrobat Reader
CD #2 PCL5e driver for DMR55B
(Added from new PCL6 driver for DMR55B
Printer Controller PS3 driver for DMR55B
Type700) SmartNetMonitor for Admin
SmartNetMonitor for Client
Agfa Font Manager
Printer Reference (PDF file)
PS Supplement (PDF file)
NIB Quick Configuration Guide (PDF file)
Acrobat Reader
The difference between the old and new controller is that SmartNetMonitor is bundled rather than
Aficio Manager.
DMR55B
SPECIFICATIONS - PERIPHERALS
Finisher with 50 sheets stapler (SR870):
Item Specification Remarks

Paper Size Proof Tray: A6 SEF - A3 SEF Number of punch hole s is
Shift Tray: A5 - A3 SEF not switchable.
Shift Tray Staple Mode:
B5 - A3 SEF
Punch
EU 2 holes / Swedish 4 holes:
A5 - A3 SEF
EU 4 holes: A3 SEF, A4 LEF
Paper Weight Proof Tray: 52- 157 g/m2
Shift Tray: 52- 157 g/m2
Shift Tray Staple: 64- 80g/m2
Punch: 4holes: 52- 128g/m2
2/3 holes: 52-157 g/m2
Paper Stack Capacity Proof Tray: (without Punch) All these data are in
250 sheets (A4 or smaller) 80g/m2
50 sheets (B4 or larger)
Proof Tray: (with Punch) A4/LEF
200 sheets (A4 or smaller)
Shift Tray (without Punch):
3,000 sheets (A4/LEF)
1,500 sheets (others)
100 sheets( A5/SEF)
Shift Tray (with Punch):
2,500 sheets (A4/LEF)
100 sheets(A5/SEF)
Staple Capacity With Punch In 80g/m2
50 sheets ( A4 or smaller)
Without punch
40 sheets ( A4 or smaller)
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staples, Top Slant
Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange 5,000 pieces/ cartridge
Number of Punch Europe: 2 holes or 4 holes* * European or
Scandinavian type
Punch Replenishment 2 holes- 40,000 sheets
3 holes- 15,000 sheets
Power Source From Mainframe
Dimension (W x D x H) 625 x 545 x 960mm
Weight 45kg Without Punch unit
DMR55B
Notes: * Punch Option will be necessary.
DMR55B
Copy Connector Kit:
The specifications of the Copy Connector Kit are the same as the DMR55A/70A Copy Connector
Kit.
Functional Specifications :
The following functions are or are not available in connect copy mode.
Function Availability Remarks

1. Number of set & Clear
1) Set Number of copy Master
2) Number of copy Display Master, Sub Master- Customer can select to
display total number of copies
or total number copied in
Master unit in sort or staple
mode.
Sub- Display only output number
from sub unit.
3) Decrease Counting X Count up method only.
4) Number of original Display Master
5) Clear/ Stop Master
6) Clear Modes Master To clear all modes except Connecting.
2. Paper Selection
1) Auto Paper Select Master
2) Manual Paper Select Master Sub unit will display the paper sizes.
3) Bypass Tray X
4) Auto Tray Switching Master, Sub Including Image Rotation.
5) Paper Size Display Master, Sub
3. Image Density
1) Auto Image Density Master
2) Manual Image Density Master
3) Special Original Master
4. Magnification
1) Preset Magnification Master
2) User Set Magnification Master
3) Zoom Magnification Master
4) Directional Magnification Master
5) Size Magnification Master
6)Directional Size Master
Magnification
7) Auto Magnification Select Master
5. Duplex & Combine
1) 1 to 2 Master Can select Top to Top, Top to Bottom
2) 2 to 1 Master
3) 2 to 2 Master
4) Book? 1 sided Master
DMR55B
5) Book? 2 sided Master

6) Multi- 2 sided Master
7) Booklet Master
8) Magazine Master
9) N to 1( Combine) Master Can do both simplex and duplex
6. Cover & Slip Sheet
1) Cover Master Can select Front, or Front/ Back
2) Paper Designate Master
3) Chapters Master
4) Slip Sheet Master
7. Edit Image
1) Erase- Centre, Border Master
2) Margin Adjustment Master
3) Centring Master
4) Double Copies Master
5) Image Repeat Master
8. Special Originals Feed
1) Mixed Originals Master
2) Thin or Thick Originals Master
3) Batch (SADF) Mode Master
9. Finishing
1) Shift Stack Master Need finishers to both units.
2) Shift Job Master Need finishers to both units.
3) Electrical Sort Master
4) Rotate Sort Master Can use, if finishers are not equipped to
both machines.
5) Shift Sort Master Need finishers to both units.
6) Staple Master Need finishers to both units.
7) Punch Master Need finishers with punch options to both
units.
10. Other Features
1) Auto Clear Master Will be cleared in the master unit
condition.
2) Auto Start Master Will start, if both units become Ready to
copy condition.
3) Job Preset X
4) Program Mode Master Recall the program of the master unit.
Can not store program in Connect
mode.
5) Sample Copy Master Will be output only at the master unit.
6) Next Job Scan Start X
7) Energy Saver Key Master Both units will be in energy saver
situation. The key of the sub unit is not
effective.
8) Energy Saver, and Auto Off Master The sub unit cannot use these modes.
Mode
9) Weekly Timer Master The sub unit timer will not be
active.
10) Interruption Mode Sub Can use only at sub unit.
DMR55B
11) Left Original Detection Master

12) Document Server Master
Master = Can set at the Master unit

Sub = Can set at the Sub unit
Master, Sub = Available at both Master and Sub units
X = Cannot use this function
Document Server Specifications (Standard):
Category Content Specification

Storage Number of Job Up to 200 files *2)
*1) Number of Page*3) Up to 976 pages at ITUT No4 chart
(600dpi print data)
Scanning Scanning Speed 55opm (A4 or LT LEF, in normal scanning
mode) *4)
Printing Resolution 600dpi, 4 level (Scanning data),or
600dpi, binary (Electrical data)
Speed 55ppm
Number of Merge File Up to 200 files
Print Mixed Size Yes.
Originals
Print Mixed direction Ditto ( same width only)
Originals
Printer User ID Max. 8 letters (Alphanumeric Code,
Mandatory)
Driver File Name Max. 8 letters (Alphanumeric Code, Option)
Password Max. 4 digits (Numeric Code, Option)
Support OS Windows 95, 98, NT4.0 , Mac
Support Printer PCL 5e/6, PS
Language
Connect Copy Standard
Effective Original Data Paper Size*5), Resolution, Magnifications,
Conditions from PC to Simplex Combine
Document Server (Other conditions are ignored even if
transmitted.)
<Notes>
*1) Maximum number of files or pages, whichever comes first.
*2) When storing 201st file, an error message will be displayed on mainframe operation panel.
*3) Number of pages is an estimated value, based on Ricoh Word Sample original. Number of
stored pages can be changed at setting screen of Initial Conditions.
*4) Document name is determined as Scan01, Scan02, -- automatically, but can be changed to
unique name.
*5) User ID cannot be changed but Password can.
DMR55B
ARDF Specifications (Standard):

2
Stack Capacity 100 sheets or less than 12mm 80g/m paper
Original Size A5 - A3 (SEF)
Original Weight Simplex- Kick back mode A5 SEF: Up to 128g/m2
52- 156 g/m2
Simplex- No- kick back/
Combine mode
40- 156 g/m2
Duplex: 52- 128 g/m2
Original Feed ADF, SADF, ARDF mode
Special Original Setting Batch, Mixed Size, Thin mode
Original Set Face Up, First sheet on top
Original Separation Mode Feeding belt and reverse roller
Original Transport One flat belt
Original Feeding Speed 55opm A4 LEF
DMR55B
WHAT FITS WHAT

DMR55B 5505 5508 5502
Supplies: Yield:
DD4BLK Developer 300K
DT28BLK Toner 46K
A2949510 Drum 360K
Peripherals:
SR870 3,000 sheet finisher
RT44 3,500 sheet LCT
DIF700TD Tandem
DIF700P2 Print Controller
DIF700PS PostScript
DIF450EI Network Interface
DHD850P Print Hard Disk
CSC80 Staples
DHPU850E2H 2-hole punch
DHPU850S4H 4-hole punch
DCT1075 Output Tray
Operating Instructions & Language Kits:
Language: Copier O/Is: Printer Language Kits for DIF700P2:
English DDK1055GB DDK1055PGB

German DDK1055D DDK1055PD
French DDK1055F DDK1055PF
Italian DDK1055I DDK1055PI
Norwegian DDK1055N DDK1055PN
Swedish DDK1055S DDK1055PS
Portuguese DDK1055P DDK1055PP
Hungarian DDK1055H DDK1055PH
Polish DDK1055PL DDK1055PPL
Czech DDK1055CZ DDK1055PCZ
Finnish DDK1055SF DDK1055PSF
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR60 / DMR75
Digital 60 / 75ppm
Digital Multifunctional Products

Launch Country
Month of Origin
August, 2002 Japan

Date Created: May, 2002
Version 7
April 2003
DMR60/75
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Target Markets 3
Product Overview 4
Key Features, Advantages and Benefits 5
Option Compatibility Chart 15
Model Comparison with DMR55A/70A 17
Printer Specifications 26
What Fits What 38

tenders etc., please contact NRGI Guernsey for confirmation
of exact product details.
K:\Company\Market\NPS\DMR60_75.doc 1
DMR60/75
INTRODUCTION
The high-end of the walk-up market and the lower end of CRD are recognised as key strategic areas
for NRGI. Although the number of potential units is small, the page volumes and thus the click
opportunities are massive. Dataquest calculated that, in 1999, the 45-90cpm market place
accounted for 44% of total market revenue.
In July 2002, the DMR55A/70A is due to be replaced by the new DMR60/75 range. This range
consists of two machines a 60cpm and a 75cpm machine. With a 5cpm speed increase, an
increase in reliability and many other improvements, the DMR60/75 will be market-leading
machines, which our competitors will benchmark against.
The DMR60/75 are also our first GW Architecture machines in this segment. GW Architecture
brings multifunctionality to the next level, meaning that it is much cheaper and easier to add
internal options such as printer and scanner. There are also very powerful software utilities such as
ScanRouter and DeskTopBinder, which add functionality to the machines.
DMR60/75
TARGET MARKETS
The DMR60/75 has two main target markets.
The first is the walk-up environment that, typically, will account for around 80% of 60cpm sales
and around 60% of 75cpm sales. These customers will be looking for a machine that is easy to
operate (i.e., doesnt need a dedicated operator) and can produce multi-page, multi-copy documents
very quickly.
The second market is the lower end of the CRD market. In this case, the machine will be used by a
dedicated operator and will either be a business producing documents for clients or a reprographics
room within a large corporate or government office, producing documents as a service for other
users in the organization. By introducing 60 and 75cpm models to our existing range, we can now
offer a complete CRD range that can cater for all volumes and budgets.
DMR60/75
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Quite apart from the obvious increases in speed and the substantial increase in reliability, the
machines have many new features, some of which are seen for the first time on our MFP range.
The machines offer an ARDF that scans both sides of an original simultaneously, allowing for
maximum duplex productivity and far less chance of damage to the original. They are also our first
MFPs to offer Wireless LAN connections and 1200 x 1200dpi print quality. They incorporate the
highly popular software advantages of GW Architecture, DeskTopBinder, SmartNetMonitor and
ScanRouter. They are also our first machines above 45cpm to have network scanning facilities.
What has to be remembered is that the DMR55A/70A were widely recognized, both internally and
externally, as well-featured machines with few negative features. With the major improvements
incorporated in the DMR60/75, we can now offer machines that are real market leaders, to the envy
of our competitors.
DMR60/75
KEY FEATURES, ADVANTAGES AND BENEFITS
Improved speed and Productivity:
High-speed copying and printing.
At 60cpm and 75cpm, the DMR60/75 represent greater speed than the previous DMR55A/70A and
DMR65 machines. With the use of the tandem (copy connect kit), two machines can be coupled
together to double the speed, as below. This is especially useful for large jobs and gives the user an
increased level of flexibility.
DMR75 75 CPM + DMR75 75 CPM = 150 CPM

Improved Productivity:
With theDMR55A/70A, the ADF and mainframe speeds became equal and the DMR60/75, with its
5cpm increase, also has equal mainframe and ADF speeds. As can be seen below, the DMR60/75
are considerably ahead of a lot of our competition.
Model Mainframe speed DF 1 to 1

DMR60 60CPM
60 OPM (originals per minute)
DMR75 75CPM 75 OPM
DMR55A 55CPM 55 OPM
DMR70A 70CPM 70 OPM
Canon IR600/GP605 60 CPM 55 OPM
Konica 7060 60 CPM 55 OPM
Toshiba 6570 65 CPM 65 OPM
DMR60/75
Simultaneous Scanning:
Another revolutionary improvement is the simultaneous double-sided document feeder. Not only
does this make the duplex functionality more productive but it also means that, with simpler paper
feed, there is less opportunity for damage to the original.
Originals (face up)
CIS: Scan the back page

CCD: Scan the front page
Scanning Speeds:
DMR60 (60ppm) 60 images per minute (30 sheets in both sides images)
DMR75 (75ppm) 75 images per minute (37.5 sheets in both sides images)
Fast 1st Copy Speed:
As is increasingly becoming a standard with NRG MFPs, the 1st copy speed is considerably faster
than much of the competition.
DMR60/75 from platen Less than 3.5 sec.

(Face-up feeding)
DMR55A/70A Less than 3.5 sec.
Canon IR600 from DF Less than 6.5 sec.
Canon IR5000 Less than 3.8 sec.
Xerox 265 Less than 6.5 sec.
Minolta 620 Less than 7.2 sec.
Konica 7065 Less than 3.9 sec.
High Finishing Capability
Finishers:
Like the DMR55A/70A series, the DMR60/75 has three finishers. For the general office walk-up,
there is the finisher with the 50-sheet stapler. For the low volume CRD, there is the finisher with
the 100-sheet stapler and, finally, for the professional finish, there is the finisher with the saddle-
stitching function for making booklets.
DMR60/75
Mailbox:
Like the DMR55A/70A there is also the option to add a 9-bin mailbox. The difference is that the
DMR60/75 mailbox conveniently sits on top of the finisher (saddle stitcher or 50-sheet stapler only)
and doesnt increase the footprint size, as can be seen below:
Mainframe + LCT + 9-bin mailbox + Finisher with 50-sheet stapler
Cover Interposer:
Also new with the DMR60/75 is a cover interposer. Most of our other machines, and indeed most
of our competitors, allow the user to insert slip sheets in a finished job. The difference with the
colour interposer is that it inserts the covers without putting them through the fuser mechanism,
thereby minimizing the risk of damage. This is particularly relevant for colour or transparent
covers.
Hole Punching:
Like the DMR55A/70A, the DMR60/75 offers hole punching options for the finishers. The
difference here is that, for each finisher, one punch is offered that can switch between 2 and 4 hole
punches, whereas the previous machine had a separate 2 hole and a separate 4 hole punch. Like our
other hole punch options, a Scandinavian hole punch option is available.
High Paper Capacity:
With a total paper capacity of 8,300 sheets, the DMR60/75 has a higher paper capacity than the
previous DMR55A/70A. It should be noted that, with the tandem option, this paper capacity could
be doubled.
DMR60/75
High Quality:
The DMR60/75 are the first mono MFPs to offer genuine 1200 x 1200dpi quality. In previous
models it was possible to have 1200dpi print, through the edge smoothing function on the driver,
but this was not true 1200 x 1200dpi quality. Please note that the ADF still scans at 600dpi, so true
1200 x 1200dpi quality is only possible on the printer function.
Many of our competitors will claim 1200 or even 2400dpi quality but, at the time of writing, all of
these are achieved via edge smoothing. The DMR60/75 are unique in having true 1200dpi quality.
Connectivity Features
High-speed Printer:
Like all our MFPs, the DMR60/75 is not just a copier but can be turned into a printer with high
print speeds of 60ppm and 75ppm. Multi-copy documents are only RIPped once and subsequent
copies can be printed from the memory. With the addition of the PostScript 3 option, print jobs
with heavy graphic content can be considerably speeded up. With the document server feature,
print jobs can be saved in post RIP format so that, should you wish to make another copy, all you
have to do is access the document server from either the control panel or via DeskTopBinder and
another copy can be quickly produced.
Scanning:
Another new feature with the DMR60/75 is network scanning. This is the first time we have
brought network scanning to a machine over 45cpm. Like the DMR35A/45A and DMR22A/27A,
network scanning is provided in a printer/scanner kit, which includes both features. As opposed to
having an expensive printer controller and an expensive scanner controller, we have a
printer/scanner kit that provides a good price premium. Like the DMR35A/45A and
DMR22A/27A, this comes bundled with ScanRouter Lite software and scan to e-mail functionality
can be added if the ScanRouter Pro option is purchased. Please note that the DMR60/75 does not
have a fax option, as there is no market demand for fax options for such high-speed machines.
Unlike our previous MFPs, scan to e-mail is now possible from the copiers LCD.
Scan-to-email:
The DMR60/75 are our first MFPs to have scan-to-email functionality. The user can simply type in
the e-mail address and e-mail subject directly from the control panel. This is a good alternative to
faxing as there are considerable cost savings (particularly for heavy documents being sent
internationally) and, from a security point of view, unlike a fax, you can be assured that your
document will go straight to the individual.
Users can maintain an e-mail address book in the HDD directly from the operation panel or through
SmartNetMonitor. By using SmartNetMonitor, users can download e-mail addresses straight to the
HDD without having to enter each one individually through the control panel. Also, via
SmartNetMonitor, it is possible to create group addresses and import address books from the HDD
to be used on another machine.
DMR60/75
GW Architecture:
Internally, the machine adopts the GW Architecture that has become standard in the NRG 22-
45cpm range. This means that, instead of installing controllers, all that has to be activated to install
printing or scanning is a chip, one piece of memory and one Network Interface Board (NIB). Like
the DMR35A/45A, we expect that this technology improvement will mean a cheaper connected
product than its predecessor. It also means that, with the connected DMR60/75, users get a greater
price performance. There are no longer a range of memory options and hard disks that can be
added to the printer controller. Instead, users get a huge standard memory of 256MB, together with
a powerful document server.
Software:
Like the DMR35A/45A and DMR22A/27A, the machine benefits from SmartNetMonitor,
ScanRouter and DeskTopBinder. Likewise, it also benefits from the unique RPCS drivers, which,
with its one-click icon, makes choosing print settings easier. This is especially important for high-
volume printers such as the DMR60/75, as having saved settings reduces misprints through human
error.
Connectivity:
The DMR60/75 are our first MFPs to have the Ethernet NIB bundled with the printer and
printer/scanner kits. This should help make ordering connectivity options easier.
The DMR60/75 can be plugged into a network with a 10/100base-t NIB and can also be connected
via Firewire IEEE1394. However, unlike our other mono MFPs, the DMR60/75 offers a USB port
and Wireless LAN interface, ensuring that it is future proofed. This is the first NRG mono MFP to
offer this feature. Please note that only one of the IEEE1394, Wireless LAN and USB ports can be
installed at any one time.
Also, unlike the DMR55A/70A, NETBEUI is supported.
DMR60/75
Improved Document Server:
With the addition of network scanning, the document server can hold not only print and copy jobs
but also scanned jobs, which can either be printed or sent to other users either on the network, with
ScanRouter Lite, or to e-mail addresses, with ScanRouter Pro. DeskTopBinder functionality means
that the contents of the document server can actually be examined from the PC. With the thumbnail
view, whole documents can be examined page by page without actually opening the documents.
DMR60/75 DMR55A/70A
1 Display the thumbnail of data in client PC O*1 x
2 Retrieving scanned images in DS from client PC O*1 x
3 Retrieving any images in DS from client PC X x
4 Job Binding (a) O*1 x
5 Batch Printing (b) O*1 x
6 File conversion to PDF O*3 x
7 OCR O*3 x
8 File attachment to e-mail O*3 x
(a) Job Binding: To make a print file by page even if the pages are in a different application
such as MS Word and Excel.
(b) Batch printing: To make a print file by file. (Pages are not mixed.)
O*1 Possible with DeskTopBinder Lite or Pro version

O*2 Possible with DeskTopBinder Lite or Pro with File format conversion option
O*3 Possible with DeskTopBinder Pro with File format conversion option
X Not available
The File Format Converter will not be available until 2003. This, in combination with
DeskTopBinder Pro, allows users to convert documents into PDF format and then OCR or e-mail
them.
DMR60/75
External Configuration:
Cover Interposer Mainframe
9-Bin Mailbox
LCT
1550 x 2
550 4,000
550
Booklet Finisher 3,000 sheets 3,000 sheets Finisher

With 50 sheets Finisher with 50 with 100 sheets stapler
stapler (A) sheets stapler (B) (A)
NA 2/3 hole Punch for

Finisher (A) and (B)*1 DLT/A3 Tray for tandem tray
EU 2/4 hole Punch for Tab Sheet option

Finisher (A) and (B)1*
Scandinavian 4 hole for LG/B4 option for LCT

Finisher (A) and (B)*1
Jogger with Finisher

stapler
Like the previous DMR55A/70A, there are three different finishers available. There is also a new
mailbox available that unlike the CS360 (which is not compatible with the new machine), sits on
top of the finisher and does not increase the footprint any further. There is also a cover interposer
available for the first time. This allows users to incorporate colour or transparent cover sheets into
a finished job, without them having to pass through the feeder roll. The LCT has a paper capacity
increase of 500 sheets from the DMR55A/70A, bringing the total maximum paper capacity to 8,300
sheets.
Note *1: There are separate, incompatible punch units for both Finisher A and B.
DMR60/75
Internal configuration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1. Printer Unit X
2. Printer / Scanner X
3. Post Script 3 M M
4. RAM (128 or M M
256MB)
5. USB2.0 M M X X
6. Wireless LAN M M X X
7. IEEE1394 M M X X
X: Cannot be installed together

M: Must be installed together
DMR60/75
Internal Configuration:
*1
Printer KIT or Printer/Scanner KIT
Printer or
HDD RAM RAM Printer/Scanner
(40GB or More) (128MB) 128/256MB IEEE1284 10/100BaseT
Software NIB
(Centronics)
RAM DIMM 1 RAM DIMM 2
*2 Program DIMM 1
Main (GW) Controller
*3
PCI Option I/F 3 PCI Option I/F 2 PCI Option I/F 1 Program DIMM 2
IEEE1394
Copy File Format
or PS3
Connector Converter
USB2.0
or
Engine
Wireless LAN
Controller
Standard *1Note. NIB is now bundled in printer & printer/scanner kits

*2Either 128MB or 256MB memory option is necessary.
*3Only one item out of three can be attached
Option
The charts above are largely self-explanatory. Although the USB, Wireless LAN and IEEE1394
can all be installed with the network card, they cannot be installed together as they all use the same
slot on the machine. Like the DMR35A/45A and DMR22A/27A, memory must be added in order
to activate the printer and printer/scanner kits- in this case 128MB or 256MB, giving users a
standard RAM of 256MB compared to the standard RAM of 32MB on the printer controller of the
previous DMR55A/70A. Please also note that, for the first time, NRGI are now bundling the
Ethernet NIB with the printer and printer/scanner kit.
DMR60/75
General Features
DMR60/75 DMR55A/70A DMR55B DMR65 DMR85A/ CCR081
105A /101
3,000 sheets Finisher with 50
sheets stapler (new: SR850)
3,000 sheets Finisher with
100 sheets stapler (New:
SR840)
Finisher with saddle stitch
function (New: SR860)
Cover Interposer
Punch unit type (new) with
100 sheets stapler E4/E2/S4
Punch unit type (new) with
50 sheets stapler
NA3/NA2/E4/E2/S4
4,000 Large capacity tray
9-bin Mail Box (new)
Copy connector kit (new)
Printer Controller (new)
Copy Tray (new)
Key Counter Bracket
File Format converter TBA

RAM Memory
: Can be attached to this machine.
: Cannot be attached to this machine.
DMR60/75
OPTION COMPATIBILITY CHART

Necessary
item
Scandinavian punch for 50

Scandinavian punch for
2/4-hole punch for 100
2/4-hole punch for 50
File format converter

Finisher (100 sheets
Finisher (50 sheets)
Tab sheet option

Cover interposer
Booklet Finisher
Copy connector
Copy Tray
Mailbox
A3 tray
Jogger
LCT
100
Purchasing
item
Copy Tray X X X X X
Finisher (50 X X X X
sheets)
Finisher (100 X X X
sheets)
Booklet X X X X
Finisher
Jogger X X M X
LCT
A3 tray
Copy
connector
Cover X m m m X X
interposer
Tab sheet
option
Mailbox X m X m X X
2/4-hole punch M X X X
for 100
Scandinavian M X X X
punch for 100
2/4-hole punch m m X X X
for 50
Scandinavian m m X X X
punch for 50
File format
converter
X- not compatible, M- mandatory
This chart is largely self-explanatory. There are no bridge units or interchange units either. The
cover interposer or the mailbox cannot be installed without a finisher.
DMR60/75
Finisher combination chart

The DMR60/75 can be attached to three different types of finisher. Each finisher's combination
chart with mailbox is as follows:
Punch unit Punch unit Mail box Cover

(100 sheets) (50 sheets) Interposer
1)Finisher with 100 sheets
stapler
2)Finisher with 50 sheets
stapler
3) Finisher with saddle stitch
function
o - Can attach
- Cannot attach
DMR60/75
MODEL COMPARISON WITH DMR55A/70A
The new DMR60/75 offer some substantial improvements on the previous model. Particular note
should be drawn to the following:
- Reliability improvements
- Increase in memory of both RAM and Document Server
- Quality improvements- 1200dpi and 4 beam laser
DMR60/75 Improve- DMR55A/70A

ments
Configuration Console Console
Laser writing methods 4 Beam Laser O 2 Beam Laser
PM cycle 300K O 150K
Machine Life 9,000K or O 6,000K or
5 years 5 years
MCBC 75K O 56.3K
Dimensions (WxDxH) 690x750x1165 mm 690 x750 x1138mm
Weight Less than 200kg 188kg

Toner Dry, Dual Component Dry, Dual Component
Photo-conductor OPC Drum OPC Drum
Message Guidance TBA 600 x 240 dot wide Touch
screen
RAM 128MB O 48MB
HDD 40GB (plan) O 4.3GB
Warm-up time 300 seconds 330 sec.
First copy time 3.5 sec. 3.5 sec.
Multi-copy speed (A4/LT) 75/60cpm O 70/55cpm
Multi-copy speed 38/34cpm O 36/28cpm
(A3/DLT)
Duplex (1 to 2, 5/10sets) TBA 70cpm:55/60cpm
Duplex (2 to 2, 5/10sets) TBA 70cpm:54/59cpm
Max.original size A3/DLT A3/DLT
Doc. Feeder capacity 100 sheets 100 sheets
(A4/LT,80g/m2/20lb) (A4/LT,80g/m2/20lb)
Doc. Feeder speed 75/60opm O 70/55opm
Paper capacity(Standard) 4,300 sheets O 4,250 sheets
Paper capacity(Maximum) 8,300 sheets O 7,200 sheets
Minimum copy size A6 SEF/ 5 1/2x8 1/2 A6/HLT
Maximum copy size A3/DLT A3/DLT
Paper weight from Tray 52.3 127.9g/m2 52-128g/m2
Paper weight from bypass Max 216g/m2 O Max.157g/m2
Sorter Standard Electrical Sort Standard Electrical Sort
Finisher Optional (3type) Optional (3type)
Punch Function Optional O Optional (EU2/4,
EU2/4 switchable, Scandinavian 4holes)
Scandinavian 4holes)
Saddle Stitch Function Optional Optional
DMR60/75
DMR60/75 Improvements DMR55A/70A
Copy Quality Letter, Photo, Letter, Photo,

Letter/Photo, Pale, Letter/Photo, Pale,
Generation Generation
Resolution 1,200 dpi O 600dpi
Greyscale 256 level 256 level

Magnification 6R5E 6R5E
Variable Magnification 25-400%(in 25-400%(in
1%increments) 1%increments)
APS/AMS Yes Yes
Duplex (Size/Capacity) A3-A5/DLT-HLT, A3-A5/DLT-HLT,
unlimited unlimited
Combine Originals Yes Yes
Multi Copy Range 999 999
Directional Magnification Yes Yes
Stamp Function Yes Yes
Book Copy Yes Yes
Double Copy Yes Yes
Erase Centre/Border Yes Yes
Image Shift Yes Yes
Image Overlay No No
Image Repeat Yes Yes
Sample Copy Yes Yes
Job Program Yes Yes
Job Preset Yes( Up to 8 jobs) Yes( Up to 8 jobs)
Book Mode Yes Yes
Magazine Mode Yes Yes
Cover Yes Yes
Designate Yes Yes
Chapter Yes Yes
Specials Special Paper/OHP Special Paper/OHP
interleave/Tab interleave/Tab
Drum Yield 500K 360K
Toner Yield 43K 43K
Developer Yield 350K 300K
DMR60/75
Specifications Remarks
Feature
1 Configuration Console
2 Printing Process Four laser beams &
Electro-photographic printing
Reading Element Simultaneous Double-sided Scanner
Flatbed with moving CCD array image-
sensing and Sheet through with fixed
CIS array image-sensing
3 Photo-conductor OPC Drum (100)
4 Charge system Double wire Scorotron
5 Development system Magnetic brush
6 Fusing Heat and Pressure Roller
7 Cleaning system Counter Blade & Fur Brush
Toner Replenishment Black: Bottle exchange
Colour: Not available
8 Duplex Feeding system Non-stacking interleaf method
9 Paper transfer/separation Belt transfer/Separation, Separation Pawl
10 Engine Speed 60ppm A4
75ppm
11 Input capacity 1st Tray 1,550 x 2 (Tandem)
(Standard capacity) 2nd Tray 550
3rd Tray 550
Bypass 100
Total : 4,300 sheets
12 Paper Feeding System FRR System
13 Output capacity 500 sheets /A4 With Copy tray
250 sheets/ A3
14 Copy / print paper size A3 A6 SEF A6 SEF :Bypass
Bypass (non-standard)
Vertical: 100-305mm
Horizontal: 140-432mm
15 Non Printable area Leading edge: less than 4 +/-2 mm
Trailing edge : more than 1 mm
Left edge : more than 2 +/- 1.5 mm
Right edge : more than 0.5 mm
16 Copy paper weight 52.3 ~ 216g/m2 Bypass: In Thick
1-3 Tray: 52.3 ~ 127.9g/m2 paper mode
Bypass : 52.3 ~ 216g/m2
Duplex : 64-127.9g/m2
17 Warm-up time Operation switch : less than 300 sec.

Low Power mode: less than 25 sec.
18 Rating Power spec. EU: 220-240V 50/60Hz 10A
19 Power consumption Max. 1.75kw
20 Dimension (WxDxH) 690 x 750 x 1,165 (mm)
21 Weight Less than 200kg
DMR60/75
Copy Features:
DMR60/75 Specification Remarks

Features
1 1st Copy Speed Face up: 3.5 seconds A4 LEF, Contact
Face down : 5.3 seconds glass mode, Auto
paper select Off, 1st
Tray
2 No of Multiple copy Up to 999
3 Resolution Marking: 1,200dpi
Scanning: 600dpi
4 Original Mode Text Default: Text
Photo/Text
Photo
Pale mode
Generation Copy
5 Original size A3 A5 Max size on ADF
(ADF) 12 x 17
6 Grey Scale Scanning: 256 scales
Marking : 2 levels
7 Memory Capacity Standard: 128MB HDD size is subject
40GB HDD to change.
-23.45 GB for Document Server
-4.5 GB for memory sorting
-12.05 GB for others
8 Reduction (6) EU: 93,82,75,71,65,50%
9 Enlargement (5) EU:115,122,141,200,400%
10 Zoom 25-400% 1% step
11 Manual Paper Select Standard
12 Auto Tray Switch Standard
13 User Code 500 8 digits
14 Image density Automatic or Manual: 7 notch
Adjustment Manual Automatic: Error
Diffusion
DMR60/75
Enhanced Copy Features:
Features DMR60/75 Remarks

1 Auto Paper Select Standard
2 Auto Magnification Standard
Select
3 Special Paper Display Standard
4 Magnification Standard
5 Directional Magnification Standard 1% step
6 Directional Size Standard 1 mm/0.1 inch step
Magnification
7 Stamp mode Standard
- Background Numbering
- User stamp
- Preset stamp Multi language
- Date
- Page numbering
8 Repeat Copy Standard
9 Double Copy Standard
10 Delete Inside/Outside Standard
11 Border/Center Erase Standard
12 Image Shift Standard Centering
13 Margin Adjustment Standard
14 Combine copy Standard
-2,4,8 into 1 x simplex sheet
-4,8,16 into 1 x duplex sheet
-Magazine mode
15 Series copy Standard
Book -> 2 x One side sheet
Duplex -> 2 x One side sheet
16 Duplex Standard
Simplex to Duplex
Duplex to Duplex
Book 2 pages-> 2 sided
17 Job Interrupt Standard
18 Original Counter Standard Scanned original
(Operation Panel) to be counted
19 Copy Counter Standard Finished sets to be
(Operation panel) counted
20 Estimated Finish Time Standard
counter
21 Weekly Timer Standard
22 Sample Copy Standard
23 Job Preset Standard Up to 8 jobs
24 Document Server Standard

25 Copy Connector Optional
DMR60/75
Features DMR60/75 Remarks

26 Auto start Standard
27 User Program Standard
28 Job recall Not available
29 Clear mode Standard
Clear
Application clear
Clear / Stop
30 2 Languages Panel Standard Change through UP

Switch Imperial- English, Spanish mode
Metric- English, French
31 Electronic Sort Standard Sort: Copy Tray
Shift sort: with
Finisher
32 Stack Standard
33 Staple Option With optional
Finisher
34 Punch Option With optional
(NA) 2 or 3 holes switchable Finisher
(EU) 2 or 4 holes switchable
Scandinavian 4 holes
35 Cover sheet Standard
36 Chaptering Standard
37 Paper designate Standard
38 Slip sheet Standard
39 ADF Standard
-100 sheets capacity or 12mm
height of originals stack
- Mixed size original
40 Anti-humidity Heater Service option
41 Dew Prevention Heater Service option
42 Total Copy/Print counter Standard
43 Key Counter Bracket Option
44 Key Card Recommended system only
DMR60/75
Document Feeder Specifications:
Please note that the document feeder comes as standard with the mainframe
2
Stack Capacity 100 sheets or less than 12mm 80g/m
Original Size A5 - A3 (SEF)
Original Weight Simplex
40- 128 g/m2
Duplex:
52- 128 g/m2
Original set position Left-rear corner
Original Feed ADF, SADF mode
Original Separation Feeding belt and reverse roller
Mode
Original Feeding Speed 75/60 opm A4 LEF
Copy Connect Functions:

Master Sub
1) Set Number of copy O
2) Number of copy Display O O Master- Customer can select to
or total number copied in
Master unit in sort or staple
mode.
Sub- Display only output number
from sub unit.
3) Decrease Counting X X Count up method only.
4) Number of original O
Display
5) Clear/ Stop O
6) Clear Modes O To clear all modes except
Connecting.
2. Paper Selection
1) Auto Paper Select O
2) Manual Paper Select O Sub unit will display the paper sizes.
3) Bypass Tray X X
4) Auto Tray Switching O O Including Image Rotation.
5) Paper Size Display O O
DMR60/75

Master Sub
3. Image Density
1) Auto Image Density O
2) Manual Image Density O
3) Special Original O
4. Magnification
1) Preset Magnification O
2) User Set Magnification O
3) Zoom Magnification O
4) Directional Magnification O
5) Size Magnification O
6)Directional Size O
Magnification
7) Auto Magnification Select O
5. Duplex & Combine
1) 1 to 2 O Can select Top to Top, Top to
Bottom
2) 2 to 1 O
3) 2 to 2 O
4) Book1 sided O
5) Book2 sided O
6) Booklet O
7) Magazine O
8) N to 1( Combine) O Can do both simplex and duplex
1) Cover O Can select Front, or Front/ Back
2) Paper Designate O
3) Chapters O
4) Slip Sheet O
7. Edit Image
1) Erase- Centre, Border O
2) margin Adjustment O
3) Cantering O
4) Double Copies O
5) Image Repeat O
1) Mixed Originals O
2) Thin or Thick Originals O
3) Batch (SADF) Mode O
DMR60/75

Master Sub
9. Finishing
1) Shift Stack O Need finishers to both units.
2) Shift Job O Need finishers to both units.
3) Electrical Sort O
4) Rotate Sort O Can use, if finishers are not equipped
to both machines.
5) Shift Sort O Need finishers to both units.
6) Staple O Need finishers to both units.
7) Punch O Need finishers with punch options to
both units.
10. Other Features
1) Auto Clear O Will be cleared in the master unit
condition.
2) Auto Start O Will start, if both units become
Ready to copy condition.
3) Job Preset X X
4) Program Mode O Recall the program of the master unit.
Cannot store program in Connect
mode.
5) Sample Copy O Will be output only at the master unit.
6) Next Job Scan Start X X
7) Energy Saver Key O Both units will be in energy saver
situation. But the key of sub unit is
not effective.
8) Energy Saver, and Auto O The sub unit will not use these
Off modes.
Mode
9) Weekly Timer O The sub unit timer will not be
active.
10) Interruption Mode O Can use only at sub unit.
11) Left Original Detection O
12) Document Server O
Master = Can set at the Master unit
Sub = Can set at the Sub unit
Master, Sub = Available at both Master and Sub units
X= Cannot use the function in copy connection model
DMR60/75
DMR60/75
CPU RM7000A 375MHz
384MB (Resident 128MB + 256MB Memory Option)
Hard Disk Drive 40GB (HDD is standard and is commonly used for Printer and Scanner
function)
PDL Standard: PCL5e/6, RPCS Option: Adobe PostScript3
Continuous Print DMR60 DMR75
Speed A4 / LT LEF (Plain paper) 60 ppm 75 ppm
A4/LT LEF TBA TBA
(Thick/OHP)
Duplex A4/ LT LEF TBA TBA
(Plain)
Print Resolution PCL5e PCL6 RPCS PS3
Controller 600/1200 dpi
PDL 300/600 600/1200 300/600/120 600/1200
0
Driver 300/600 600/1200 300/600/120 600/1200
0
RJ-45 network port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Option:
IEEE1394 x 2 port (6 pin), Wireless LAN Interface
(IEEE802.11b), USB2.0
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI*1, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Job Spool Max. Spooled Job: 150 (500MB is allocated)
(Printer Key Top is added on the left side of LCD)
DMR60/75
DMR60/75
Drivers Win Win Win WinNT4.0 Mac
95/98/ NT 3.1 WS / TSE Enterp 8.6 OS X
Me 3.51 Server rise OS X Nativ
Editio classi e
n c
PCL5e Yes - - Yes*2 Yes* - - -
4
PCL6 Yes Yes*2 Yes*
4
RPCS Yes - - Yes*2 - - - -
PS3 Yes - - Yes*3 - - Yes TBA
Win2000 Win XP
Profess Server Server Advanced Home/
-ional Terminal Server Professional
Service
PCL5e Yes Yes Yes Yes*6 Yes
PCL6 Yes Yes Yes Yes*6 Yes
RPCS Yes Yes - Yes*6 Yes
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(mini (mini (mini (mini (mini driver)
driver) driver) driver) driver) *5,*6
*5 *5 *5 *5,*6
Supported PCL5e, PCL6 and RPCS
Driver 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.Swedish,
Language 8.Norwegian, 9.Danish, 10.Czech, 11.Hungarian, 12.Finnish, 13.Polish,
(Localization) 14.Portuguese, 15. Traditional Chinese, 16. Simplified Chinese
PostScript3
1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7.
Swedish, 8. Norwegian, 9. Danish, 10. Traditional Chinese, 11.
Simplified Chinese
UNIX Filter and Install Shell & Super Option (Device Option Setting) are
available (web release)
Support OS: Sun OS 4.x.x / Solaris 2.6, 7, 8 / HP UX 10.20, 11.00 /
Red Hat Linux 6.x, 7.x / SCO OpenServer 5.05 / AIX 4.3, 5L
Utility Printer Option (Number of supported Printer / Scanner Option (Number
Software Language) of supported Language)
(Bundled
Software) 1. DeskTopBinder CW2 Lite (14) 1. DeskTopBinder CW2 Lite (14)
2. SmartNetMonitor for Admin (14) 2. SmartNetMonitor for Admin
3. SmartNetMonitor for Client (14) (14)
4. 1394 utility (1) 3. SmartNetMonitor for Client
5. Printer Utility for Mac (1) (14)
4. 1394 utility (1)
5. Printer Utility for Mac (1)
6. ScanRouter SG2 Lite (6)
7. TWAIN Driver (14)
DMR60/75
*1 SmartNetMonitor is required for NetBEUI

*5Adobe does not release PS driver for W2K. Only MS-PostScript driver is available and PPD
file for MS-PS is included in the Driver CD
Note: IEEE1394, USB2.0 and Wireless LAN I/F cannot be installed at the same time.
Note: Wireless LAN I/F and NIB can be installed into the mainframe but do not work at the same
time (need to select either one manually).
DMR60/75
Item DPK1075 DIFEB70P DIF700P

Print speed 60 / 75 ppm 55 /70 ppm 55 /70 ppm
Type Embedded
CPU RM7000A(QED) 375MHz MIPS Type R7000 266MHz Power PC 740 266Mhz
Interface <Standard> <Standard> <Standard>
IEEE 1284/ECP IEEE1284 typeC IEEE1284
Ethernet 100/10 base TX Ethernet 100 base TX / 10 <Option>
<Option> base T Ethernet 100 base TX / 10
1.IEEE 1394 base T
2.USB2.0
3.Wireless LAN
(IEEE802.11b)
Network TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, EtherTalk, TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, EtherTalk
protocol NetBEUI
Print <Standard> <Standard> <Standard>
language RPCS, PCL5e / 6 PCL5e / 6 PCL5e, PCL6
<Option> Adobe PostScript 3 (Genuine) <Option>
Adobe PostScript 3 (Genuine) PostScript 3
Supported Win95/98, Windows ME, Win95/98, WinNT, Win2000, Win95/98, WinNT, Win2000,
OS WinNT4, Win2000, Macintosh Macintosh
Macintosh, UNIX
(WinXP-TBA)
Resolution RPCS: 300/600/1200dpi PCL5e: 300/600dpi PCL5e: 600dpi
PCL5e: 300/600dpi PCL6: 600dpi PCL6: 600dpi
PCL6: 600/1200dpi PS3: 600dpi PS3: 600dpi
PS3: 600/1200dpi
Memory Standard: 256MB Standard: 64MB Standard: 32MB
(with 128MB Option) Max: 128MB Max: 128MB
MAX: 384MB
(with 256MB Options)
HDD <Standard> <Standard> <Standard>
8.0GB or more. 4.3GB (on mainframe) 4.3GB (on mainframe)
6.0GB (on controller) <Option>
6GB (for Font Download)
Utility <Standard> <Standard> <Standard>
software SmartNetMonitor for Admin Printer Manager Ricoh Printer Manager,
SmartNetMonitor for Client, EFI Fiery Link, WEB Tools PortNavi
WebStatusMonitor, (WEB Status, WEB Spooler,
Printer Utility for Mac, WEB Link, Web Setup,
IEEE1394 utility, Installer), Fiery Downloader,
<Scanner/Printer> Fiery Spooler
DeskTopBinder-CW2 Lite <Option - EFI>
ScanRouter SG2 Lite DocBuilder Pro,
Command WorkStation
Localization RPCS/PCL: 16 Languages PCL & PS3: 6 languages PCL6: 14 languages

for PS3: 9 Languages PS3: 5 languages
Operation
panel &
Printer
Driver
DMR60/75
3,000 sheets Finisher with 100 sheets stapler (Name: SR840):

Configuration Console type attached mainframe
Proof Tray (Stack capacity) Using 80g/m2 paper
(Paper size)
A6 SEF A3 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 216g/m2
Shift Tray (Stack capacity) Using 80g/m2 paper

3,000 sheets (A4/B5 LEF)
1,500 sheets (A3/A4 SEF, A5)
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
(Paper size) Tab sheets can be stored on

A5 A3 SEF the shift tray.
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 216 g/m2
Stack Capacity with Stapler (Staple capacity per set) 80g/m2 With auto staple
2-100 sheets (A4/LT/B5 LEF) cut*1
2-50 sheets (A3, B4, A4 SEF,B5 SEF)
*1)Extra portion of staple
will be cut automatically,
(Set Stack Capacity and size) depending on the number of
Page /set No of set Size sheets
10-100 200-30 A4/B5 LEF
2-9 150 A4/B5 SEF
10-50 150-30 A3, B4
2-9 150
(Paper size)
A3 B5
Stop during finishing job Yes Feature name still tentative

Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange 5,000 pins/ cartridge
Number of Punch Europe: 2 or 4 holes switchable* Scandinavian 4 holes *Punch option is required.

Power Source DC24V From Mainframe
Weight Less than 65kg (Finisher only)
DMR60/75
Punch unit for Finisher with 100 sheets stapler:
Punch unit Type 1090 Paper size

2&4 holes type (EU) 2 holes SEF A3-A5
LEF A3-A5
4 holes SEF A3, B4
LEF A4, B5
Scandinavian 4 holes 4 holes SEF A3-A5
LEF A4-A5
Paper weight 4 holes 52-128g/m2
2 or 3 holes 52-163g/m2
3,000 sheets Finisher with 50 sheets stapler (Name: SR850):

(Paper size)
A5 A3 SEF, A6 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 163g/m2
Shift Tray (Stack capacity) Using 80g/m2 paper

3,000 sheets (A4 LEF)
1,500 sheets (A3/A4/LT SEF)
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
(Set Stack Capacity and size: normal mode)

Page /set No of set Size Mixed size paper
Page 2-30 pages/set
10-50 250-50 A4 LEF Sets up to 16 sets
29 50 Size A3 & A4 LEF
10-30 125-40 the others B4 & B5 LEF
2-9 125
(Paper size)
A5 A3 SEF, A6 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 216 g/m2
Staple Capacity Paper weight

Same paper size 50 sheets ( A4 or smaller) 64g/m2 90g/m2
30 sheets (B4 or larger) Number of sheets to be counted
Mixed paper size 30 sheets ( A4 or smaller, A3 SEF) with 80g/m2

Number of Punch Europe: 2 or 4 holes (switchable)
Scandinavian: 4 holes
Punch Replenishment EU 2 holes- 10,000 sheets
EU 4 holes- 8,000 sheets Scandinavian 4: 8,000 sheets
Power Source From Mainframe DC 24V, 3A
Weight 63kg Saddle stitch without Punch
65kg Saddle stitch with Punch
DMR60/75
3,000 sheets Finisher with saddle stitch (SR860A):

(Paper size)
A5 A3 SEF, A6 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 163 g/m2
(Upper) Shift Tray (Stack capacity) Using 80g/m2 paper
500 sheets (A4, A5 LEF)
250 sheets (A3 SEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
(Paper size)
A5 A3 SEF, A6 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 216 g/m2
Staple Capacity Staple size A3 SEF, A4 Paper weight
64g/m2 90g/m2
Same paper size 50 sheets (A4 or smaller) Number of sheets tested with
30 sheets (B4 or larger) 80g/m2
Mixed paper size 30 sheets (A4 or smaller, A3 SEF)

(Lower) Shift Tray (Stack capacity) Using 80g/m2 paper
1,250 sheets (A3/A4 SEF)
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
(Paper size)
A5 A3 SEF, A6 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 216 g/m2
Staple Capacity Staple size A3 SEF, A4 Paper weight
64g/m2 90g/m2
Same paper size 50 sheets ( A4 or smaller) Tested with 80g/m2 paper
30 sheets (B4 or larger) Saddle stitch :
Centre 2 positions
Mixed paper size 30 sheets ( A4 or smaller, A3 SEF)
(Size) A3 SEF, A4 SEF,
Saddle stitch
(SEF only) 15 sheets (A3/B4/A4 SEF)
Saddle stitch position Centre 2 positions
Centre folding without stitch 1 sheet
Saddle stitch Replenishment Cartridge exchange 2,000 pieces/ cartridge
EU 4 holes- 8,000 sheets
Scandinavian 4: 8,000 sheets
DMR60/75
LCT (Name: RT43):
Item Specification Notes

Paper Size A4 LEF, B5 (LEF)
Paper weight 52-128g/m2
Paper capacity 4,000 sheets 80g/m2
Dimensions (WxDxH) 314 x 458 x 659mm
Weight Less than 20 kg
Interface requirement No
B4 option (for LCT):

This is an option to be fitted to the LCT to make it possible to feed B4 size paper.
Paper Size B4, A4 SEF
DMR60/75
Cover Interposer (Name: DCIT1075)
The Cover Interposer feeds papers that are used for the front and cover page. This option is set
between the mainframe and the finisher.

Paper Size A3-A5
Paper weight 64 216g/m2
Paper capacity 200 sheets 80g/m2
Paper set Centre position
Dimensions (WxDxH) 500 x 600 x 200 (mm)
Weight Less than 12kg
Power consumption Less than 48W
Size change Touch screen
Pick-up
Feed belt
Interposer Tray Reverse Roller
Pull-out
Sensor

Entrance Roller
Punch
Mainframe
DMR60/75
Mailbox (Name: CS390):
The new 9-bin Mailbox option can be attached to either the 50 sheets stapler Finisher or the saddle
stitch stapler.

No of Bins 9 bins
Stack capacity of each bin 100 sheets 80g/m2
Paper size A3-A5
Dimension (WxDxH) 540 x 600 x 660 (mm)
Weight Less than 15 kg
9-bin Mailbox
A3 Tray (Name: DTK1075):

The A3 tray can be put in the Tandem LCT in the first tray of the mainframe and can feed A3
paper. The first tandem tray can normally feed A4 size paper only. It is useful mainly for heavy
users of A3, such as in booklet making.
Specification
Paper size A3/B4 SEF, A4
Dimension (WxDxH) 495 x 215 x 535 mm
Weight TBA
Paper Capacity 1,000 sheets
DMR60/75
Tab sheet unit (Name: DTSH1075):
The Tab sheet unit is necessary to feed tab sheets from the second or third trays.
(Both trays cannot feed the tab sheets.)
Specification
Dimension (WxDxH) 275 x 110 x 70 mm
Weight 250g
Paper Capacity TBA
DMR60/75
Sound Noise Level (Mainframe/target):
Stand-by: 48db
In operation: 70db
Ozone Emission Level (In continuous copying mode):
Average: less than 0.04ppm
Dust Level:
Less than 0.075mg/m3
Less than 0.07mg/m3
TBA
Energy Star Default Specifications:
Item
Copy Mode Simplex to Simplex
Low power mode timer 15 minutes
Sleep mode timer 90 minutes
Yes Yes On a request basis
DMR60/75
WHAT FITS WHAT
DMR60 6005 6008 6002

DMR75 7505 7508 7502
Supplies: Yield:
DD9BLK Developer 350K @ 6%
DT50BLK Toner 43K @ 6%
B0649510 Drum 500K
Peripherals:
DCT1075 Copy Tray
SR860A Finisher Booklet Maker
DHPU451E4H 2/4 Hole Punch Unit
DHPU451S4H Scandinavian 2/4 Hole Punch Unit
CSC860A Staple Holder 1 x 2,000 (staples for booklet finishing)
CSC860B Staple Refill 4 x 2,000 (staples for booklet finishing)
CSC760A Staple Cartridge 1 x 5,000 (staples for normal stapling)
CSC760B Staple Refill 3 x 5,000 (staples for normal stapling)
SR840 3,000 Sheet Finisher, 100 Sheet Stapler
DHPU1090E 2/4 Hole Punch Unit for SR840
DHPU850S4 Scandinavian 2/4 Hole Punch Unit for SR840
CSC810A Staples Cartridge SR810 1 x 5,000
CSC810B Staples Refill SR810 5 x 5,000
SR850 3,000 Sheet Finisher, 50 Sheet Stapler
DHPU451E4H 2/4 Hole Punch Unit
DHPU451S4H Scandinavian 2/4 Hole Punch Unit
CSC760A Staple Cartridge 1 x 5,000
CSC760B Staples Refill 3 x 5,000
DCK1075 Copy Connector Kit
DCRB1075 Card Reader Bracket
DTK1075 A3 Tray
DADJ1075 B4 Adjuster
DTSH1075 Tab Sheet Holder
DCIT1075 Cover Interposer Tray
RT43 4,000 Sheet Large Capacity Tray
CS390 9-bin Mailbox
DPSK1075 Printer/Scan Kit + Ethernet
DPS31075 PostScript 3
DIF1232WL IEEE802.11b Interface Kit - Type B
DUSB1075 USB 2.0 Interface
DIMM128 128MB Memory Type C
DIMM256 256MB Memory Type C
DMR60/75
Operator Instructions:
Language: Copier: Print or Print/Scan:
English DDK1075GB DDK1075PGB
German DDK1075D DDK1075PD
French DDK1075F DDK1075PF
Italian DDK1075I DDK1075PI
Swedish DDK1075S DDK1075PS
Czech DDK1075CZ DDK1075PCZ
Hungarian DDK1075H DDK1075PH
Norwegian DDK1075N DDK1075PN
Portuguese DDK1075P DDK1075PP
Polish DDK1075PL DDK1075PPL
Finnish DDK1075SF DDK1075PSF
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR85/85A
DMR105/105A
DIGITAL MULTI-FUNCTIONAL
PRODUCT - DMR85/85A/105/105A
Nashuatec D485/8505/D4105/10505
Rex-Rotary 2885/8508/28105/10508
Gestetner 3285/8502/32105/10502
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Production
Launch Date Location
DMR85 April 2000 Japan

DMR105 September, 2000 Japan
DMR85A September, 2001 Japan
DMR105A July, 2001 Japan

Date Created: August 1999
Version 14
January, 2002
DMR85/DMR105
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Major Features 9
Configuration and Option Interchangeability 17
EFI Specialist printer Controller (DIF105P) 38
Competitor Comparison 45
What Fits What 46
DMR85A/105A 48
Plockmatic Booklet Maker 58
Horizon Booklet Maker (Biwako) 74

subject to change. If in doubt or specifications are
required for tenders, etc please contact NRGI Guernsey
K:\Company\Market\NPS\DMR85_85A_105_105A.doc 1
DMR85/DMR105
Introduction
As part of our programme to have a full range of digital units we are pleased to announce the launch
of the 85cpm copier/printer. This unit will be launched to the market on a trial basis in a number of
European countries from October 1999. We are anticipating making the product available to
selected distributor markets that are able to meet the launch criteria from April 2000.
Following the launch of the 55 and 65cpm digital units, one in every three placements in this segment
in Europe in the first six months of 1999, has been one of these two units. This is an excellent
performance and bodes well for the launch of the 85cpm model, which will be based on the 65cpm
engine.
The unit is designed to provide an alternative to the hugely expensive Xerox Docutech solution in the
copy volume range 150,000 350,000 prints per month and to be a more productive alternative to
the HP/Canon mopier system. The main competitive models it is targeted against are: Xerox 5100,
Oce 2475, Konica 6190, Canon NP6085, see page 38 for a fuller competitive model listing.
Currently estimates vary on the size of placements in this segment in the European market at
somewhere between 40,000 and 50,000 units, which is a huge base to target for product changes,
plus the new market we expect to create with the feature of tandem copy or tandem print. Please
see the targeted MCBCs in the Product Overview section on page 8.
Please note it is not a competitor for the Xerox Docutech, which is targeted at the half a million plus
per month print market.
As this market will require specialist selling and excellent service response and hotline
support we will be introducing a pre-launch approval process to ensure that only
distributors who are able to meet our minimum criteria will be allowed to sell this product.
DMR85/DMR105
Product Overview
ARDF (equipped to Mainframe)
Sheet through type
Max 100 originals
Finisher (Standard Option)

100 staple
3,000 stack LCT (Option)
3 trays
4,550 sheets
Punch Unit
(Option)
10.4 Dual STN LCD Colour Touch Panel
Display
Contrast
Counter
User Tools Switch Display
Language
Program
Mode Clear
Application Keys
Energy Saver
Copy
Document Server Clear/Stop
File Edit
Printer Start
Sample Set Key
DMR85/DMR105
Marketing Objectives
To provide a digital solution for high volume customers, and thereby increase present
digital unit sales and generate huge secondary revenue .
Background
1. With the introduction of electronic documents, (PC's, Internet, Intranet) customers want
products to meet the new workflow giving more productivity.
Customer Requirements
Increase Electronic Documents

Faster printing speed for a large print jobs.
PC for each person
Distribute then Print

Faster & high quality image printing.
Internet & Intranet
Centralise a large print job at CRD

On Demand Printing
Professional Type of Document
Re-Engineering
New High Speed Digital Solutions for more Productivity
2. There are many customers who cannot solve current workflow requirements with the
competitors solutions. The Xerox solution in DocuTech 135 is often too expensive since its
breakeven point is 500-600k copies. The HP and Canon Mopier solution for total
productivity and finishing functions, even in a several Mopier connecting system is not
adequate. So, there is a market for a product to meet customer needs of a wide range of
functions at a cost-effective price.
DMR85/DMR105
Centralise Office CV
to DocuTech 135 Xerox
Too expensive to use for many
customers due to high breakeven
point CV
Ricoh
Need more copy & finishing functions
Change Office CV
to PV in Mopier HP & Canon Products with more functions in
Less price
Design concept of DMR85 is "To provide the DocuTech 135 like solutions to cover the
requirements of high CV customers in walk up, and small to middle size CRD at a much lower
price."
In order to achieve this design concept, DMR85 has the following six major product concepts.
1. High
Productivity 2. Durable
6. Friendly &
Reliable
5. Competitive 3. Professional
Cost Documentation
4. Digital
Features
Concept Features
1. High Productivity To achieve the fastest speed scanning and printing for more
productivity.
2. Durable & Reliable To provide the most durable and reliable NRG MFP to meet high
CV customer usage.
3. Professional Documentation Provide the features to create a professional style of document
through enhanced options.
4. Digital Features Provide the digital features to meet new job flows for electronic
documents, thus increasing total productivity.
5. Competitive Cost Minimise the initial cost and achieve lower CPC than previous high
segment NRG products.
6. Friendly Environment friendly. Easy to use.
DMR85/DMR105
Positioning and mass production
CPM
105 cpm DMR105
100
Digital
90 Analogue
DMR85
80 cpm RDH
82 cpm S/S
80
'96 '97 '98 '99 2000
l DMR85 is 85 ppm MFP to succeed CMR802/805 80/82 cpm

l DMR105 is 105 ppm MFP to succeed CMR1055 105 cpm (NOTE Second half 2000 launch)
Target Markets
As customers purchasing segment 6 high volume machines expect a faster response time, it is
planned to set minimum guidelines distributors must commit to before launch approval in a country.
These will cover:-
Number of pre-launch trained technicians

Hotline support
Response times
Minimum spares holding
Dedicated technicians
Meter click billing capabilities
Please discuss with your NRG contact.
DMR85/DMR105
Target Users Classification
Target UsersImage by group:
DMR85 is targeted to cover the Division, and CRD groups in the following conditions.
Type of User User Image
1 Division Majority of DMR85 Target User

Used as Stand Alone or Network machines
ACV : 50-100K Stand Alone user who wants to have more quality copy
and/ or finishing functions.
User who wants to increase productivity by printing at
high speed and with high quality.
2 Low CV CRD Another major target user of DMR85.

User who wants electronic documents
ACV : 100-250K system, but cannot afford to purchase DocuTech 135.
3 Mid CV CRD Targeted user for Connect Copy Solution.

User who wants electronic documents
ACV : 250-500K system, but can not purchase DocuTech 135.
User who wants easier connectivity than DocuTech
135.
4 High CV CRD User who already has DocuTech

User who wants to have high speed digital PPC
ACV : 500K + as sub- machine, to cover the overflow copy volume,
User who already has DocuTech
DMR85/DMR105
Installation Image by Targeted User:

Type of Installation Image of Usage
Stand Alone User l Used as a Floor Centre Machine or a Copy Corner
Machine shared by more than 50 persons.
l Used as a Centre Machine at Low CV CRD.
l Used as a Centre System with Copy Connector Kit at
Mid CV CRD.
l Used as a sub- machine at Mid and High CV CRD.
Network User l Used as a Floor Centre Machine or a Copy Corner
Machine shared by more than 50 persons.
1 to 1 User l Most common usage style at CRD
l PC connected with Network receives electronic
documents, and prints on DMR85.
DMR85 and DMR105 Specifications
DMR85 DMR105
Machine Life 15,000K or 5 years whichever 15,000K or 5 years whichever
(ML) comes first comes first
Target AMV 50- 300K 70- 500K (TBC)
*1)
AMV *2) 80K 120K
MMV *3) 800K 1,000K
Target MCBC 80K (Full System) *4 85.7K (Full System) *5
PM cycle 300K 300K
*1) AMV range of target customers.

*2) AMV of most major customers.
*3) Maximum usage volume in a month.
*4) In the condition of C/O = 5. (Average number of copy sets per job.)
*5) In the condition of C/O = 10. (Average number of copy sets per job.)
target customer.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is recommended Maximum Monthly Volume for target
customer.
Copies Between service Calls [MCBC] remains unchanged).
Recommendation: It is recommended that machines are placed to handle MMV and not
Duty Cycle.
DMR85/DMR105
Major Features
DMR85 has the following six major product concepts as described on page 5. The new technology
and the latest Ricoh technical know how have been used to achieve these product advantages.
1. High
Productivity 2. Durable
6. Friendly &
Reliable
5. Competitive 3. Professional
Cost Documentation
4. Digital
Features
High Productivity
In order to achieve high productivity, DMR85 features improved scanning and printing speed,
improved data handling and finishing options.
72opm Scanning in Four Channel CCD (New Technology):
Existing Digital PPC uses Two Channel CCD for scanning. DMR85 uses the new Technology of
Four Channel CCD to achieve faster data scanning, which achieves the fastest digital scanning MFP
in the world in 600dpi 256 levels.
Existing 2 channel CCD New 4 channel CCD

Rear Odd channel data
Rear Even channel data
Even channel data

Front Even channel data
Odd channel data

Front Odd channel data
DMR85/DMR105
85 & 105cpm Printing in Four Beam LDA (New Technology):
DMR85 adopts the latest technology of Four Beam Laser Diode Array. It achieves not only 85 or
105cpm copy speed in 1,200 (pseudo) x 600dpi resolution, but also provides a stable image
quality.
4 levels printing mechanism

4 Beam Laser Diode Array
White
Left Black
Right Black
All Black
600dpi, 4 level = 1,200 (pseudo) x 600dpi
Five CPUs for Fast Data Control (Improvement System):
In order to process data promptly, DMR85 has five CPUs on the three major PCBs allowing the
DMR85 system to achieve high speed scanning and printing control more accurately.
Image Control Board
Scanner Control Board
HDD x 2
8 bit CPU
32 bit CPU
Main Control Board
DMR85/DMR105
Real Multi-Task In Two HDD system (New System):
The DMR85 has two Hard Disk Drives with a total memory in excess of 8 GB. It is not only able
to save image data, but also to scan and print in different HDD at the same time separately. This
allows the DMR85 to scan and print without any speed loss.
Save scanning data into HDD 1
Download data from HDD 2, and printing
Image Control Board
Duplex Printing in Four Page Feeding (Improvement System):
Page Printing Order
1 3 5 7 2 9 4 11 6
4 11
2
3
1 1 8 3 10 5 12 -----------------
9
7 5
in case of duplex copy for 12 originals.
Duplex printing is today the defacto standard for large printing jobs.
With the unlimited stack capacity and Four Page Feeder mechanism the improved performance
makes it the best in this category.
DMR85/DMR105
Limitless Toner & Paper Supply
Both toner and paper can be replenished without the need to stop the machine.
Independent toner unit cover, allows the toner bottle to be changed whilst the machine is in
operation.
Two toner bottles are set in the toner unit. As one bottle empties, toner will automatically be
supplied from the second new bottle.
Auto paper tray shift allows paper replenishment whilst the machine is in operation.
Tandem paper bank systems are also used in DMR85.
Rag Stapling & Punching (New & Improved Options) at machine operation speed:
DMR85 enhanced finisher will staple and punch at the same speed of printing.
1st page of
next set
2nd page of
next set
turn and cut in high speed
Stapling unit
No Time Rag Stapling System High Speed Punch Unit

There are two paper paths in the Finisher. 1st While paper is passing the punch unit, drills will
page of the next set is waiting at the stapling unit make punch holes.
entrance of special paper path, while stapling a
previous set of documents. By powering up a drill motor, the DMR85 can
make hole punching without reducing the printing
Soon after the previous set is stapled and exit speed.
from the unit, 2 pages are delivered to the staple
unit at the same time.
So, mainframe can print without reducing speed.
DMR85/DMR105
Copy Connect Systems (Options):
The DMR85 can connect two machines into one tandem system, and provide twice speed of
printing. In combination with the Document Server, DMR85 can make both tandem copying and
printing in a same tandem option kit to provide more productivity to the customers.
DMR85 a x 2 units = 170ppm

DMR85 + DMR105 = 190ppm
DMR105 x 2 units = 210ppm
Durable & Reliable

The DMR85 is designed to improve durability and reliability at a competitive cost for covering the
targeted high CV customers usage.
* Table 1. ACV in High Segments in USA

Seg ACV (k) 60 Months(k)
5 (70cpm-) 52.6 3,156
6 (91cpm-) 177.0 10,620
Source from Dataquest in 1996
* Table 2. Durability & Reliability Comparison Data
CMR822 DMR85 CMR1055 DMR105

CPM 80/82 85 105 105
Life 9m 15m 15m 15m
ACV 80k 80k 150k 120k
Max CV 150k 300k 400k 500k
MCBC 52k 80k 80k 85.7k
(PM) 150k 300k 240k 300k
(EM) 80k 110k 120k 120k
The most Reliable Copier of Ricoh:

The DMR85 is targeted not only to achieve 300k PM cycle which is the longest PM cycle from
Ricoh, but also to achieve 110k/ 120k EM which is the same reliability as the 101cpm and the
105cpm.
DMR85/DMR105
Professional Documentation
The DMR85 provides the following professionally styled documents due to quality peripherals and
mainframe capabilities.
1. 100 page staple finisher and 100 page original capacity of ARDF
2. 2, 3, or 4 holes punch unit options
3. 216 g/m2 (80 lb. Covers) cover papers
4. Booklet copy in booklet maker* and magazine copy mode
5. Covers, designated paper, chaptering, and with tab copy documents
6. Stamp, Watermark, and page numbering on documents
* Booklet maker is Horizon or Plockmatic brand option.
Digital Features
DMR85 also provides the following digital features:
1) Digital Scanning:
Quality Scanning- 600dpi, 256 levels, 72opm
Higher Reliability and Less Noise from scan once, print many
Job Preset- up to 10 jobs
2) Digital Printing:
Unlimited & Speedy Duplex Copying
Multi-Language Stamp, Watermark, Page Numbering
Sample Set Proof Printing
All Original Quality Printing
3) Connectivity:
Print through a Printing Controller
Network Printing in NIC
DMR85/DMR105
Document Server:
Document Server has been improved in order to provide more digital solutions to customers.
Paper original handling without printer controller.
Tandem copying and printing features.
Make Job preset from Document Server
Save printing conditions with original data.
Save and download data from CD-R or CD-R/W.
Competitive Cost
DMR85 is targeted to achieve real TCO reduction in;
1. Competitive SRP (Street Retail Price) with Analogue PPC
2. Competitive CPC (Cost-per-Copy) in high segment
3. Increase real Productivity and less Manpower
Friendly
1. Friendly to User:
Rounded edge shape covers for easy movement by an operator
10.4 DSTN Colour LCD Touch Panel
Less Noise in Digital Scanning
2. Friendly to Environment:
Recyclable Design
MFP Energy Star- Tier 2
DMR85/DMR105
New User Friendly Image Rotation Functions:
In order to achieve What You See is What You Get for less operator participation, DMR85
allows the user to set output conditions and original direction separately.
Staple & punch from Portrait originals
R
R
Set A3 originals& AMS.
R Then hit 90turn key. Rotate images, and
print as you want.
Damage
by punch
Set staple and punch or staple
conditions.
R
R
When leftside of originals are damaged, Rotate image, and

set originals up side down, then hit Print as you want.
Reverse set key.
DMR85/DMR105
Configuration and Option Interchangeability
Printer
Controller
Punch Unit with NIC
(Option) (Options)
ARDF
1,000
Duplex 1,000
1,000 1,000
2,550
500
500
Finisher Mainframe LCT

(Standard Option) (with ARDF) (Option)
Option Interchangeability
Model DMR85/105 Other MFP

Item
Finisher
Booklet Maker
LCT
Punch Unit
Copy Connector Kit
Printer Controller with NIC
DMR85/DMR105
Product Specifications
Engine
DMR85/105 Remarks
1. Technology:
a) Reading element 4 channel CCD array image-sensing New Device
element
b) Printing processing 4 way Laser Diode Array & Electro- New Device
Dry, dual-component toner development
2. Dimensions
(W x D x H):
a) Standard 2,096 x 730 x 1,487 mm *Mainframe with ARDF, and
Configuration finisher.
b) With Options 2,218 x 730 x 1,487 mm *Standard Configuration + LCT.
3. Weight: Mainframe with ARDF: 270kg Total: 412kg
Finisher: 60kg
LCT: 82kg
4. Input Capacity:
a) Standard 1st: 1,000 sheets x 2 1st: Tandem Tray
2nd and 3rd : 500 sheet 2nd & 3rd : Universal Tray
b) Options LCT 4th and 5th: 1,000 sheet 4th- 6th trays are LCT trays
6th: 2,550 sheet 4th and 5th : Universal
Total: 7,550 sheet 6th: Technical Adjustment
5. Output Capacity:
a) Standard Finisher: Finisher Proof Tray: 500 sheet
Finisher Shift Tray: 3,000 sheet
6. Paper size /
weight:
a) Size: Tray 1st : A4 (LEF) and LT (LED) Duplex copy:
Tray 2nd and 3rd : Common unit for Europe and NA.
Europe: A5 (LEF) - A3 (SEF), So, can make auto-duplex copy
onto all sizes described on left
Tray 4th-6th: A5 - A4 (LEF), Column.
b) Weight: Tray 1st 3rd : 52 to 163 g/m2 Tab sheet can be set on 4th and 5th
trays. (Only for simplex copy)
Tray 4th and 5th : 52 to 216g/m2 No bypass tray.
OHP and adhesive labels can be
Tray 6th : 52 to 163 g/m2 set at the 5th tray. Adhesive labels
should always exit
Duplex: 64 to 163 g/m2 the machine face up.
7. Rating power Europe: 220-240V, 50 Hz, 16A
spec.:
8. Power
Max.: 3 kW (Full system)
Consumption:
DMR85/DMR105
Copier Features
General Features
DMR85/105 Remarks
st
1 copy speed 4.1 sec. A4 LEF from 1st input tray to
Finisher Proof tray.
Multi-copy speed DF 1 to 1: 72cpm (for both DMR85a & -b) A4 LEF, no R/E
DMR85- a: 85cpm
DMR105- b: 105 cpm
Multiple Copy Up to 9,999
Resolution 600 dpi
Grey Scale (per dot) Scanning: 256 levels *1. Printer data is binary.
Marking: 4 levels *1 *2. Save and printing for
Document Server: 4 levels *2 paper original is 4 levels,
and Electrical original is
binary.
Warm-up time Less than 480 seconds
Memory Capacity Standard- 48MB x 2 (RAM)
4.3GB x 2 (HDD)
Option- No
Enlargement European model:115, 122, 141, 200, 400% 5E
Reduction European model: 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 7R
25%
Zoom 25% to 400% in 1% step 50%-200% in 1% step
Image dens ity Manual or automatic Manual: 9 notch
adjustment
Interrupt copy Standard
User code Standard (Copier- 500 codes, eight digits
Printer- 500 codes, eight digits)
Language English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Any two display languages can
Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish be stored in IC cards.
* Default of Display Languages: (Switchable in a key)
Europe: English & French
DMR85/DMR105
Enhanced Features
DMR85/105 Remarks
APS / AMS Standard
Special Paper Display Standard Type of paper and colour
Size Magnification Standard
Directional Standard 1% steps
Magnification
Directional size Standard 1mm/ 0.1 inch step
Magnification
Stamp features Standard Language of Pre-set
*Page numbering stamps are different by
*Pre-set stamps display language.
*User stamps
Erase centre / border Standard
Erase Area Standard Inside and outside.
Up to 2 areas
Margin Adjustment Standard 1mm/ 0.1 inch step
Image Shift Standard Centring
Combine copy Standard N to 1 in simplex and
(2, 4, 8 pages into one simplex sheet, duplex
4, 8, 16 pages into one duplex sheet)
Image overlay No
Positive/Negative No
Duplex Standard Interleaf duplex unit
*Simplex to Duplex (limitless)
*Duplex to Duplex
*Book - 2 sided
*Multi - 2 sided
Series copy Standard
*Book 2 one sided sheets
*Duplex original2 one sided sheets
Book copy Standard Booklet, and Magazine
Original Type Setting Standard (text, text / photo, photo, pale, and Default: text mode
generation copy mode)
DMR85/DMR105
Special Original Standard (Batch, Mixed Size, Thin, Up side (1) To make copies from
Setting Down (1), 90 turn (2) ) damaged originals by
staple, etc.
(2) To scan portrait
original in LEF
direction to shorten
copy time, etc.
Adjusting Copy Auto, Manual, and Auto Manual Combine
Image Density
Timers Standard
Mode Clear, Energy Saver, Auto shut off,
Sleep mode, System reset, Weekly timer
Auto start Standard
Sample Set Standard
Job Preset Standard Up to 10 jobs
Connect Copy Option Need Connect Copy Kit
Document Server Standard
File Edit Standard
User Program Standard 25 programs.
User default screen will be
set in Program No. 25.
Electronic sort Standard
Stack Standard With Finisher
Stapling Standard (Top, Bottom, Slant, 2 Staples) With Finisher
Punching Option With Punch Unit and
NA: 3 holes Finisher
Europe: 2, European 4, and
Cover Sheet insertion Standard (Front, Back, Front & Back) Can select Copy or Not.
(Default: Copy)
Paper Designate Standard (can select from 3 trays) Up to 20 positions.
Chapters Standard (can use with paper designate) Up to 20 positions
Slip Sheet Standard Can select Copy or Not.
(Default: Copy)
Status Indicator Standard
Lamp Green- Printing & scanning
Green blinking- Printing, but can scan.
Red - Paper or toner near end
Red blinking- Malfunction
Off- Ready
DMR85/DMR105
Dehumidify Heater TBA Paper trays

Dew Prevention Service Option
Heater
Copy Counter Electrical, and Mechanical counter
Key Counter Bracket Option (Interharness part is necessary to Same as DMR55/65.
install with LCT)
Key Card Do not support
Coin Operation Do not support
Remote Diagnostic Option
Copy Speed Matrix
1) Simplex to Simplex Speed of A4:

l DMR85: (cpm)
1st Tray nd
2 Tray rd
3 Tray 4th Tray 5th Tray 6th Tray
DF 1 to 1 72 68 60 56 70 57
Platen Copy (Continuous) 85 85 85 85 85 85
l DMR105: (cpm)
st nd rd
1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4th Tray 5th Tray 6th Tray
DF 1 to 1 72 72 65 60 72 71
Platen Copy (Continuous) 105 105 105 105 105 105
2) Continuous Copy Speed of Other paper size: (cpm)

Paper Size DMR85 DMR105
A3 41 49
A4 SEF 64 75
A5 LEF 100 115
3) BLI Productivity:
TBA
Memory Configuration
1) Memory Capacity:
Type of Memory Capacity Remarks
RAM 48MB x 2 pieces Work area to save and download print data
from HDD to printer or scanner unit.
HDD 4.3GB x 2 pieces Save print image data.
* Optional memory is not necessary.
DMR85/DMR105
Stamp Features
1. Available Stamp Functions:

The following stamp functions are available in this machine
Document Numbering
Pre-set Stamps
User Stamps
Date Printing
Page Numbering
2. Document Numbering Specifications:

1) Function to print document numbers on each page.
2) You can set document number from 1 to 999.
3) Document number will increase by 1 automatically, according to number of set.
3. Pre-set Stamps Specifications:

1) Function to print pre-set stamp word(s) on each or first page.
2) Pre-set Stamps are;
COPY, URGENT, PRIORITY, For Your Info, PRELIMINARY, For Internal Use Only,
CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT
3) Language of Pre-set Stamps;
The above pre-set stamps are interpreted into multi-languages. Same language with
display will be applied for pre-set stamping except Norwegian and Swedish.
English stamps will be applied for Norwegian and Swedish.
4. Printing Specifications:
Resolution: 600dpi, binary
Image Density: Solid (Normal Pre-set Stamp), Water Mark, and Thinner Water
Mark
Print Pattern: can select in black, in white, and reverse in UP mode
COPY COPY COPY
< in Black> <in White> <Reverse>

Printing Size: x 1, x 2, x 4, x 8 scale of printing size
(x 1 size is 32 x 64 mm / 1.3 x 2.5)
DMR85/DMR105
Printing Position:
You can select printing position from the following 9 positions.
(Header Position)
(Centre Position)
(Footer Position)
DMR85/DMR105
User Stamps Specifications
1) Function to print a stamp saved from the mainframe scanner on each or first page.
2) Number of User stamps; up to 5
3) Scanning Specification;
Resolution; 600dpi, 4 levels
Size; up to 40,000 mm2 / 0.43 sq. ft
(same as 200 x 200 mm area)
4) Printing Specification
Resolution: 600dpi, 4 levels
Image Density: One position only. (can change image density by original)
Print Pattern: can select in black, in white, or reverse from User Tools.
COPY COPY COPY
< in Black> <in White> <Reverse>

Printing Size: Same with Scanning Size
Printing Position:
You can select printing position from the following 9 positions.
(Header Position)
(Centre Position)
(Footer Position)
Date Printing Specifications

1) Function to print date on each page.
2) Print patterns - You can select from following 3 layout patterns in User Tools each available
with different densities
DD/ MM/ YYYY (Default of European model)
YYYY. MM. DD
DD. MAR. YYYY
DMR85/DMR105
3) Print Position - You can select from following 6 positions. (No centre positions)
(Header Positions)
(Footer Positions)
Page Numbering Specifications
1) Function to print page numbering from designated page.

2) Page Numbering Patterns - You can select from following 6 patterns.
P 1, 1/ N, -1-, P. 1, 1, 1-1
* have to enter total page, in case of 1/N type.
3) Print Positions - You can select from following 6 positions. (No centre positions)
(Header Positions)
(Footer Positions)
4) Start page for page numbering page which page numbering starts on.
Start number number which page numbering starts from.
Ex; If you set Numbering Start Page as 2, and Start Number as 1,

page numbering will start from 2nd page. 2nd page will be printed as Page 1.
l In chapter mode, blank pages are counted automatically.

If you set numbering from 1st page, front pages will be odd numbers, and back pages
will be even numbers.
DMR85/DMR105
Job Preset Specifications
Job Preset is the function to set preset jobs from Copy mode or Document Server Mode.
Specifications are as follows.
Item Specification
Number of Preset Job Up to 10 jobs
Estimated Completion Time Can check for each job from Job Preset List screen.
Change Preset Job Order Can change from Job Preset List screen.
Delete Preset Job Can change from Job Preset List screen.
Change Preset Job Conditions Can change printing conditions. Can not change scanning
conditions, since originals have been scanned already.
Unavailable Function Print sample set, Connect Copy
Document Server Specifications
1. Major Difference with DMR65 Document Server:

1) Can use Document Server for paper originals without a printer controller.
2) Can make Connect Copying to both paper and electronic originals from Document Server.
3) Can make Job Preset from Document Server. (up to 10 jobs)
4) Can save printing conditions with document data.
5) Can save and download data from CD-R, R/W.(Originally it is File Edit feature.)
6) Can change file name of scanning original data, and set a password.
7) Can make Booklet, and Magazine mode printing.
8) Can make a sample set printing automatically, after save a document.
9) Sort in User ID or Time, and Search in Document file name.
DMR85/DMR105
2. Document Server Specifications:

Category Content Specification
Storage Number of Job Up to 200 jobs *2)
*1) Number of Page *3) Default- up to 1,000 pages
(600dpi print data) Max.- up to TBA pages
Scanning Scanning Speed 72 opm (A4 or LT LED, in normal scanning
mode) *4)
Printing Resolution 600dpi, 4 level (Scanning data),or
600dpi, binary (Electrical data)
Speed DMR85/105: 85ppm / DMR85/105: 105ppm.
Number of Merge File Supported in Document Manager.
Print Mixed Size Yes. (can not print in copier mode.)
Originals But can not select duplex, staple nor punching.
Print Mixed direction Ditto
Originals
Printer User ID Max. 8 letters (Alphanumeric Code, Must)
Driver File Name Max. 8 letters (Alphanumeric Code, Option)
Password Max. 4 digits (Numeric Code, Option)
Support OS Windows 3.xx, 95, 98, NT4.0 Only
(MAC is not supported.)
Support Printer PCL 5e/XL (6) Only
Language (PS is not supported.)
Connect Copy Standard
Effective Original Data Paper Size *5), Resolution, Magnifications,
Conditions from PC to Simplex Combine
Document Server (Other conditions are ignored even if transmitted.)
Notes
*1) Storage capacity will be full when the number of files or pages reach maximum quantity.
*2) When storing the 201st file, the number of file messages will be displayed on the mainframe
operation panel screen, measuring storage in full.
*3) The number of storage pages is an estimated value measured in Ricoh Word Sample original.
The storage page can be changed at the setting screen of Initial Conditions.
Please refer to, Memory Configuration for details.
*4) Doc. name is determined as Scan01, Scan02, -- automatically, but can change to unique
name.
User ID cannot be set up, but a Password can be set in option.
*5) Only paper size condition is effective. Original direction, portrait or landscape is the same
direction to the PC screen display.
DMR85/DMR105
File Edit Specifications
File Edit is the support application of Document Server.

The following functions are available in this application.
Available Functions
Function Remarks
Delete File Delete File from Document Server List
Change File Name Change Document Server File Name
File Merge Merge up to 200 files into one.
File Insertion Insert a certain file into the other file.*1)
Delete Page Delete designated pages from a file.
Save File to CD Save Document Server file into CD.*2)
File Down Load from CD Retrieve a file in a CD to Document Server.
*1) File Insertion;

To insert a file after or before the designated page of Base File.
Base File Insert File
*2) Save File to CD-R, R/W;

You can connect one CD- R or CD- R/W to a machine.
You can save up to 10 documents or total 600 pages in a CD-R or CD-R/Wdisk.
DMR85/DMR105
Counter Specifications
The following are counters in the DMR85.

Counter Name Type Remarks
Recycle Counter Mechanical For internal use. 7 digits. Hidden by a cover.
Total Counter Electrical Count up with Recycling counter. CV + PV
Printer Counter Counter for Print Volume
Copy Counter Counter for Copy Volume
Duplex Counter Counter for Duplex mode
Staple Counter Counter for stapled sets
A3 Counter Counter for A3. It activates, when A3 double count is on.
(Default)
LPC Counter Counter for a Large Print Contract.
LPC1= CV+ PV less than 11 c/o.
LPC2= CV+PV 11 c/o or more than.
Can change display in SP. (Default: Not)
ARDF Specifications

Stack Capacity 100 sheets or less than 12mm In 80g/m2
Original Size A5 - A3(SEF)
Original Weight Simplex- Kick back mode
(Kick back mode) 52- 128 g/m2
Combine mode
40- 128 g/m2
Duplex: 52- 105 g/m2
Original Feeding Speed 72 cpm A4 LEF
DMR85/DMR105
Finisher

Paper Size Proof Tray: A6SEF A3SEF
Shift Tray: A6SEF A3SEF
Staple Mode: A4- A3 SEF Can staple B5 SEF
Punch*1: A5 - A3SEF
Paper Weight Stack: 52- 216 g/m2
Staple: 64- 80g/m2
Punch*1: 52- 128g/m2
Paper Stack Capacity Proof Tray:
500 sheets (A4 or less than) All these data are in
250 sheets (more than A4) 80g/m2. Bond
Shift Tray (without Punch): paper.
Shift Tray (with Punch):
Shift Tray (with Staple):
10- 100 originals = 200- 30 sets* * A4
Staple Capacity 2- 100 sheets (A4 LEF) In 80g/m2, 20lbs Bond
2- 50 sheets (others) With auto staple cut*2
Number of Punch Europe: 2 holes or 4 holes* *European or
Scandinavian type
Weight 60kg Without Punch unit
[Notes] *1) Punch Option will be necessary.

*2) Extra portion of staple will be cut automatically, depending on the number of sheets.
DMR85/DMR105
LCT
Tray Paper Capacity Paper Weight Remarks

4th 1,000 sheets * 52-216g/m2
Universal
5th 1,000 sheets * 52-216g/m2 Universal
6th 2,550 sheets * 52-163g/m2 Technician adjustment
Total 4,550 sheets
[NOTE] * Paper Weight Condition = 80g/m2

Tab Paper and OPC Set = 4th or 5th tray
Paper Detect Sensors = 4th and 5th tray--- 500 sheets & Near End
6th tray --- 1,000, 500 sheets & Near End
Dimension (W x D x H): 540 x 730 x 980 mm
Weight: 82kg
Power Source: from Mainframe
Copy Connector Kit
The basic specifications of the Copy Connector Kit are the same as the DMR65 Copy Connector
Kit. The major difference is to be able to use this function in Document Server mode, and add
booklet and magazine mode printing.
DMR85/DMR105
Functional Specifications
The following functions are/are not available in connect copy mode.

1) Set Number of copy Master
2) Number of copy Display Master, Sub Master- Customer can select to
or total number copied in the
master unit in sort or staple
mode.
Sub- Displays only output number
from sub unit.
3) Decrease Counting X Count up method only.
4) Number of original Display Master
5) Clear/ Stop Master
6) Clear Modes Master To clear all modes except Connecting.
2. Paper Selection
1) Auto Paper Select Master
2) Manual Paper Select Master Sub unit will display the paper sizes.
3) Bypass Tray Master, Sub To use only for Covers and Slip
Sheets. Special paper mode has to be
selected before connecting.
4) Auto Tray Switching Master, Sub Including Image Rotation.
5) Paper Size Display Master, Sub
3. Image Density
1) Auto Image Density Master
2) Manual Image Density Master
3) Special Original Master
4. Magnification
1) Preset Magnification Master
2) User Set Magnification Master
3) Zoom Magnification Master
4) Directional Magnification Master
5) Size Magnification Master
6)Directional Size Master
Magnification
7) Auto Magnification Select Master
DMR85/DMR105
5. Duplex & Combine

1) 1 to 2 Master Can select Top to Top, Top to Bottom
2) 2 to 1 Master
3) 2 to 2 Master
4) Book -1 sided X
5) Book - 2 sided X
6) Multi- 2 sided X
7) Booklet Master
8) Magazine Master
9) N to 1( Combine) Master Can do both simplex and duplex
1) Cover Master Can select Front, or Front/ Back
2) Paper Designate Master
3) Chapters Master
4) Slip Sheet X
7. Edit Image
1) Erase- Centre, Border Master
2) margin Adjustment Master
3) Centring Master
4) Double Copies X
5) Image Repeat X
1) Mixed Originals Master
2) Thin or Thick Originals Master
3) Batch (SADF) Mode Master
9. Finishing
1) Shift Stack Master Need finishers to both units.
2) Shift Job Master Need finishers to both units.
3) Electronic Sort Master
4) Rotate Sort Master Can use, if finishers are not equipped on
both machines.
5) Shift Sort Master Need finishers on both units.
6) Staple Master Need finishers on both units.
7) Punch Master Need finishers with punch options on
both units.
DMR85/DMR105
10. Other Features

1) Auto Clear Master Will be cleared in the master unit
condition.
2) Auto Start Master Will start, if both units become Ready to
copy condition.
3) Job Preset X
4) Program Mode Master Recall the program of the master unit.
Can not store program in Connect
mode.
5) Sample Copy Master Will be output only at the master unit.
6) Next Job Scan Start X
7) Energy Saver Key Master Both units will be in energy saver
situation. But the key of sub unit is not
effective.
8) Energy Saver, and Auto Off Master The sub unit will not activate these
Mode modes.
9) Weekly Timer Master The sub unit timer will not be
active.
10) Interruption Mode Sub Can use only at sub unit.
11) Left Original Detection Master
Master = can use at the Master unit

Sub = can use at the Sub unit
Master, Sub = can use at both Master and Sub units
X = can not use this function
DMR85/DMR105
Peerless Printer Specifications

Print Speed 85, 105 ppm A4 LEF continuous speed
from engine HDD
Resolution PCL6: 600 dpi
PS3: 600 dpi
Print Language Standard: PCL6 (5e + XL)
Option: Adobe Post Script Level 3
PCL Driver OS: Windows 95, 98, NT4.0~
PS Driver OS: Windows 95, 98, NT4.0~ ,
Macintosh
Font- PCL 6 Laser Jet 5 Si compatible
Scaleable typeface: 50 types
Symbol Set: 37 type * *Scaleable typeface only.
Bitmapped fonts:
Line printer 16.66 pitch, 8.5 point,
Medium* * portrait and landscape,
including 6 separate
typefaces.
Memory Standard: 32MB (Expandable to 160MB)
Interface Parallel Port (IEEE 1284)
Network Port (for option NIC)
PCMCIA Card Interface* * for program download
NIC Standard (Ethernet- 100/ 10 BaseT)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Apple Talk
HDD Copier HDD: standard (in Mainframe)
Printer HDD*: Option * for fonts
European Languages PCL 6 driver: 9 languages* * same as mainframe
PS driver: 5 languages* * E, G, F, I, S
DMR85/DMR105
Supply Specifications
Yield
Item Target Yield Content Number of carton Remarks

Toner 55k copies/ bottle 1,450g/ bottle TBA Unique
Developer 300k copies/ bag 1000g/ bag TBA Unique
OPC Drum 360k copies/ each - - Common to
DMR55/65
(Notes) Toner yield is based on 6% of Ricoh A4 test chart under normal machine
conditions.
Yield will change according to original, Image size/ type, and machine operating
conditions.
Interchangeability
Machines DMR85/DMR105 Other

Existing
Supplies Machines
DMR85 Toner
DMR85 Developer
DMR85 OPC Drum
: Can be used for this model
: Can not be used for this model
Transport and Storage Condition
Item Transport & Storage Conditions Storage Period

Toner Under 40C, 15- 90% RH 12 months
Developer Under 40C, 15- 90% RH 12 months
OPC Drum -30- +43C, 15- 90% RH 12 month
DMR85/DMR105
Standard Accessories List NRG
NRG Version
Model DMR85/DMR105 Remarks

NRG model
Model Name DMR85/105
Ricoh Product Code -22
CMR Code DMR85/105
1 Output Tray No Not Available
2 Original Exit Tray Yes
3 Original Holder No
4 Cassette No Not necessary
5 Platen Cover No
6 Operating Instructions Yes Spiral type with Nashuatec, Rex
(English) (metric version) Rotary, and Gestetner front covers.
7 Operating Instructions No Supplied from manufacturer.
(Multi- Languages)
8 Inner Instruction Yes Fixed to a machine
Decal(Non-word)
9 Decal Sheet No Supplied from manufacturer, if any.
10 Installation Procedure No
11 Plaque & Branding Yes For Nashuatec, Rex Rotary, and
Decal Gestetner
12 Drum Yes Installed into a Machine
(Notes)
No 120V version, since all models are required more than 200 V.
EFI Specialist Printer Controller (DIF105P)
1. Market Overview
The DMR85/105 are our entry models to offer digital copying and printing to the production
market of PFP (Print-For-Pay) and CRD (Centralized Reprographic Department). For these
customers, not only copy/print speed but also document handling utilities, will be a big concern
for purchasing. When we look at our major competitors products, like Xerox or Canon, we
understand that these points will be more important in the near future to take advantage against
them.
DMR85/DMR105
>>>XEROX
Docutech holds top share in PFP (Print-For-Pay) market, with various document handling
utilities.
>>>CANON
Entered middle to high volume Black & White MFP market with EFI printer controller, which
has top share and high reliability on colour MFP market.
2. Benefit of EFI Printer Controller and Utilities
EFI is the leading controller brand in the colour MFP market. Most colour users rely on their
image quality but, in CRD/PFP customers, also high PostScript productivity is required in order
to make their print jobs smooth. By offering many products to CRD/PFP, EFI were able to
build various kinds of utility software, based on their daily job flows.
The new controllers Fiery Web Tools TM expand desktop printing capabilities via the Internet
or a corporate intranet, enabling remote users with any Java-enabled browser to retrieve printer
status information and change job parameters from their desktops. Fiery WebSpoolerTM
provides an intuitive graphical user interface for queue management, including quickly reprinting
jobs and changing job priorities. Additionally, within Fiery WebSpooler, users can benefit from
the job log feature for accurate tracking of print jobs, a plus for commercial operations. The
Fiery DownloaderTM utility allows users to download fonts, PostScript and PCL files directly to
the Fiery, which accelerates the printing process. All Fiery utilities for the controller are cross-
platform, supporting both Mac OS and Windows clients.
Optional Command Workstation will enable easy machine management of up to 5 Fiery

controllers in 1 screen. At the same time, by using DocuBuilder Pro, you can make your print
setting such as page ordering, editing, file merging, right in front of your PC.
By connecting EFI controllers to DMR85/105, these utilities will be one of the solutions that
NRG can provide to our new CRD/PFP customers and it will bring out the best benefits of
DMR85/105, not only as a highly productive digital copier but also as a printer.
DMR85/DMR105
3. Target Customer
DIF850P Controller: Walk-up environment

l Improve MIF & PV by offering high speed MFP in a competitive price
range.
l Selectable system by various option items (PostScript, NIC, HDD)
DIF105P Controller : CRD/PFP environment

l Fiery brand name and reliability
l High productivity and various document handling utilities.
CRD/PFP
This pyramid shows the target environment of DMR105.
The DIF105P controllers main target is CRD/PFP DIF105P 30%
Environments, which is expected to be 30% of the
mainframe sales. Also, some walk-up customers
who are familiar with EFI will be our target as well.
Walk Up
DIF850P 70%
4. Point of Sales to CRD/PFP Customers
PostScript Printing
CRD/PFP handles various kinds of data, which their customers bring in. However, the output
may be different from what their customer desires because of the specification of printer they
use. A major problem will be the printable area. The printable area of a printer is different
between each model and driver, so the output may not be the same as their customer saw on
their PC. To avoid this trouble, CRD/PFP would mostly prefer their customer to bring in the
data in PDF format. This is why CRD/PFP are heavy users of PostScript, since it prints out in
PDF format, with higher productivity and image quality.
DMR85/DMR105
Utilities
EFI has been the leading brand in the colour printing market. Also, they have been working
with CRD/PFP customers for a long time. The utility softwares they offer were designed based
on CRD/PFP customer requirements. Most utilities are common with colour printers and even
competitors EFI printers. As a result, customers can manage or handle all EFI printers from
one PC with these utilities installed.
DMR85/DMR105
Printer Specification
Controller & Engine specification
DIF105P Controller Remarks

Maximum continuous 85/105ppm A4/Letter LEF
print speed
CPU MIPS R7000 266Mhz
RAM Resident : 64MB SDRAM 1 open slot for option RAM.
Option : 64MB or 128MB SDRAM
Max capacity : 256MB
HDD 6GB (on controller board) For job spooling, job log
recording, font downloading.
Interface Standard : parallel IEEE 1284 type C
100baseTX /10baseT Network
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, EtherTalk (Apple Talk)
Printer Language PCL5e, PCL6, Adobe PostScript level3
Resolution 300 / 600dpi 300dpi for PCL5e only.
Fonts PCL : TBD (45 Scalable Fonts 35 Intelli
Fonts & 10 True Type Fonts)
PS : 136 (126 Adobe type1 PostScript &

10 true types)
LCD language 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian,
5.Spanish, 6.Dutch,
Driver Specification
DIF105P Controller Remarks

Operating system Windows95/98, WindowsNT4.0, Drivers for Windows2000
(Windows2000), Macintosh =TBD
Printer language PCL6, PCL5e, Adobe PostScript level3
Driver language 1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian,
5.Spanish, 6.Dutch,
DMR85/DMR105
Major Specifications ( vs. Peerless Controller)

Item DIF105P Controller DIF850P Controller (Peerless)
Print speed 85 /105 ppm (supported by same controller) 85ppm
Controller type Embedded
CPU MIPS Type R7000 (266MHz) Power PC 740 (200Mhz)
Interface <Standard> <Standard>
IEEE1284 typeC IEEE1284
Ethernet 100 base TX / 10 base T <Option>
Ethernet 100 base TX / 10 base T
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, EtherTalk
Print language <Standard> <Standard>
PCL5e / 6 PCL5e, PCL6
Adobe PostScript 3 <Option>
Adobe PostScript 3
Supported OS Win95/98, WinNT, (Win2000), Macintosh Win95/98, WinNT, (Win2000), Macintosh
Resolution PCL5e: 300/600dpi PCL5e: 600dpi
PCL6: 600dpi PCL6: 600dpi
PS3: 600dpi PS3: 600dpi
Memory *note 1 Standard: 32MB
Standard: 64MB Max: 256MB
Max: 128MB
HDD <Standard> <Standard>
4.3GB x 2 (on mainframe) 4.3GB x 2 (on mainframe)
6 GB (on controller) <Option>
6GB (on controller for Font Download)
Utility software <Standard> <Standard>
? NRG ? NRG
Peripheral Manager, PortNavi Peripheral Manager, PortNavi,
q EFI
Fiery Link, WEB Tools (WEB Status,
WEB Spooler, WEB Link, Web Setup,
Installer), Fiery Downloader, Fiery
Spooler
<Option>
q EFI
DocuBuilder Pro,
Command Work Station
Localization for PCL6 & PS3: 6 languages PCL6: 8 languages
Operation panel & English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, (English, German, French, Italian, Spanish,
Printer Driver Dutch Dutch, Norwegian, Swedish)
PS3: 5 languages
(English, German, French, Italian, Spanish)
Note1: Optional SDRAM specification is 60 nanosecond Synchronous DRAM in 168 pin

DIMMs.
DMR85/DMR105
(All data below are tentative figures)
Sound Power Level (Target)
Condition DMR85 DMR85 system DMR105 DMR105

Mainframe Mainframe System
Stand- by 59 dB 63 dB 65 dB 69 Db
In Operation 74 dB 78 dB 76 dB 80 dB
Less than 0.05 ppm in average.
Dust Level
Less than 0.10 mg/m3.
Less than 1.70 mg/m3.
All plastic components for DMR85, of which weight is more than 50g are to be identified, according
to ISO 11469.
BAM Energy Star Swan Energy 2000

Out of regulation Yes No Yes
object (MFP Tier 2)
Energy Star Default Specifications

Item European model
Copy Mode Simplex to Simplex
Energy Save mode Sleep mode on
Sleep mode timer DMR85: 90 minutes
DMR105: 120 minutes
DMR85/DMR105
Competitor Comparison
DMR85 vs. Major Competitive Models
SEGMENT *1) 5F 5F 5F 5F 5S 5S
COMPANY XEROX OCE XEROX SHARP KONICA CANON Average NRG
MODEL 5385 2475 5680 SD4085 6190 NP6085 DMR85
CPM 80 75 80 85 90 83 83 85
DF RDH RDH/SADF RDH/SADF RDH ARDF RDH ARDF
DF Capacity 100 75 100 100 100 100 91 100
FINISHING S/S FINISHER FINISHER FINISHER S/S S/S FINISHER
Staple Capacity 50 50 50 100
Max. Paper Weight 200 170 200 176 90 200 175 216
(g/m2)
Paper Capacity 2,200 1,500 1,500 3,500 3,000 2,100 2,338 3,000
Mainframe
Paper Capacity Total 4,800 3,000 2,500 3,500 5,000 6,100 4,425 7,500
Duplex Capacity 50 UNLIMITED 50 100 50 50 64 UNLIMITED
1:2cpm (20sets) 73 69 75 86 64 76 TBA
Productivity % 97% 86% 88% 96% 77% 90% TBA
Max Copy Volume *2) 200K 350K 200K 250K 300K 350K 275K 300K
Introduction Sep-93 Apr-93 Jun-95 Aug-96 Sep-94 Jan-97
* 1) Segmentation 5F= 70- 90cpm machine with Finisher.

Segment 5S = 70- 90cpm machine with Sorter Stapler.
* 2) Competitors MAX CV are data on BLI published in USA.
DMR105 vs. Major Competitive Models
SEGMENT *1) 6F 6F 6F 6F 6F
COMPANY XEROX XEROX XEROX OCE KODAK Average NRG
MODEL 5100 5388 5390 2600 IS110 DMR105
CPM 100 92 135 100 110 112 105
DF RDH/SADF RDH/SADF RDH/SADF RDH/SADF ARDF ARDF
DF Capacity 100 100 250 250 100 150 100
FINISHING FINISHER FINISHER FINISHER FINISHER FINISHER FINISHER
Staple Capacity 100
Max. Paper Weight 200 200 200 200 200 200 216
(g/m2)
Paper Capacity 1,100 1,500 1,700 4,500 3,000 2,250 3,000
Mainframe
Paper Capacity Total 3,500 2,500 4,300 4,500 5,000 4,017 7,500
Duplex Capacity 100 50 250 UNLIMITED 100 125 UNLIMITED
1:2cpm (20sets) 89 79 107 96 100 99
Productivity % 89% 86% 79% 96% 91% 89%
Max Copy Volume *2) 500K 400K 1,000K 1,000K 500K 733K 500K
Introduction Feb-91 Apr-93 Jul-93 Dec-94 Jun-95
* 1) Segment 6F = 91 + cpm machine with Finisher.

* 2) Competitors MAX CV are data on BLI published in USA.
DMR85/DMR105
WHAT FITS WHAT
DMR85/105 Digital Multi-Functional Product

Ordering Code Description
Machine
DMR85 Digital copier
DMR105 Digital copier
Peripherals
Comments
SR810 Finisher
RT42 LCT 4,550 sheets
DTK850A3 A3 tray kit
DIF850IB Interface board
DIF850TD Copy connector cable Tandem kit
DIF450EI Ethernet NIB
DHPU850E2H Punch kit 2 hole European
DHPU850S4H Punch kit 4 hole Swedish
DHD850P Printer Hard Disk Drive 6GB
DDK85PD Language Kit Printer DIF850P - German
DDK85PF Language Kit Printer DIF850P - French
DDK85PGB Language Kit Printer DIF850P - English
DDK85PI Language Kit Printer DIF850P - Italian
DDK85PS Language Kit Printer DIF850P - Swedish
DIF850PS PostScript 3 Option For DIF850P
DIF105P Printer Controller Specialist Controller
DSW105CWS Command Workstation Software
DSW105DBPRO Doc Builder Software
DDKD105PD Language Kit Printer DIF105P - German
DDKD105PF Language Kit Printer DIF105P - French
DDKD105PGB Language Kit Printer DIF105P - English
DDKD105PI Language Kit Printer DIF105P - Italian
DDK85GB Operation Instructions - English DMR85 only
DDK85N Operation Instructions - Norwegian DMR85 only
DDK105F Operation Instructions French
DDK105D Operation Instructions German
DDK105I Operation Instructions Italian
DDK105GB Operation Instructions English
DDK105S Operation Instructions Swedish
DDK105N Operation Instructions Norwegian
DCD850 CD Connector Cable For CD Writer
DMR85/DMR105
Peripherals /Cont
SR85 Plockmatic Booklet Maker
TR85 Trimmer
SR85RAIL Rail Unit
SR85CVRFEED Cover Inserter
DDKSR85GB SR85 Operation Instructions English
DDKSR85D SR85 Operation Instructions German
DDKSR85F SR85 Operation instructions French
DDKSR85I SR85 Operation instructions Italian
DDKSR85N SR85 Operation Instructions Norwegian
DDKSR85S SR85 Operation Instructions Swedish
N/A Horizon Booklet Maker Purchase directly from
Horizon
Supplies
DT22BLK Blk toner Yield 53K

DD3BLK Blk developer Yield 300K
A2949510 DMU12 Drum Yield 360K
CSC810A Staple set cartridge
CSC810B Staple refill pack 5 x 5000 staples
CSCSR85 Staple Cartridge 4 x 5000 staples
Printer Memory
DME700P32 32MB Memory expansion

DMR85A/DMR105A
NEW
PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
UPDATE
DMR85A
DMR105A
DIGITAL
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT
DMR85A/105A
Nashuatec: 8505/10505
Rex Rotary: 8508/10508
Gestetner: 8502/10502
DMR85A/DMR105A
CONTENTS
Page
Product Overview 50
Improved Output Quality 51
New EFI Controller 52
Supplies Compatibility 55
What Fits What 56
DMR85A/DMR105A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Like the DMR85 and DMR105, the DMR85A and DMR105A are digital copiers with 85cpm and
105cpm speeds, respectively.
The new machines have improved copy quality and an improved EFI (Fiery) controller
(DIF105EP). Aside from that, there is no change to the physical machine.
The improved output quality gives us a new impetus and a stronger argument with which to sell the
Bellini machines. Customers do not have to compromise quality when they go for the price. The
improved quality also allows it to compete against the new Canon IR8500, which will be launched
during 2001.
DMR85A/DMR105A
IMPROVED OUTPUT QUALITY
The output quality of the DMR85A and DMR105A has been improved by the introduction of new
toner and developer.
Although the output quality of the old machines was adequate for text documents, on black images it
did not compare favourably to the competition. For this reason, it was decided to improve the
output quality in order to keep the machine ahead of the many competitor machines that have been
introduced during 2000 and 2001.
The new DMR85A/105A machines employ a smaller particle toner, which gives an improved output
quality. The chart below shows how this has improved from the previous machines and that we are
now in a far stronger position in the market.
The DMR85 and DMR105 machines can be upgraded to become DMR85A and DMR105A, with
an upgrade kit, in order to benefit from the improved output quality, although this upgrade is not
encouraged unless customers have a particular concern about the quality of output.
Granularity (at 60 Brightness)
DigiMaster 911 0.58
Oce316 0.6
5
DMR85A/105A 0.75 New Target Level
DC551 0.77
DC265 0.98
DMR85/105 1.14
GP605 1.5
(IR600)
0 0.5 1 1.5
(Granularity)
DMR85A/DMR105A
NEW EFI CONTROLLER

With a new EFI controller (DIF105EP), the DMR85A/105A can offer greater functionality, which
will be of considerable use in the CRD environment. With this new controller, covers, chapters and
paper insertion can be done directly from the PS driver and you can also print on custom-sized
paper and tabs.
A full list of the new features can be seen below:
DIF105EP DIF105P
1 Various imposition settings from printer driver Supported Not supported.
(Booklet, Double, Speed, Perfect) Supported by DocBuilderPro
2 Creep Supported Not supported
3 Custom paper size Supported Not supported
4 Chapter separation (mix media) Supported Not supported
5 Tab (index) paper handling Supported Not supported
6 Full bleed printing (Fit to Print) Supported Not supported
7 Image shifting (cornering, centering) Supported Not supported
8 Booklet finisher support Supported Not supported
9 Shift sort On/Off setting Supported Not supported
10 Brightness Tune Supported Not supported
This new DIF105EP can be used with either the old or the new models. Also there is an upgrade
kit available to turn your existing DIF105P controller into a DIF105EP. There are also new
instruction manuals, which explain the new functions.
DIF105P (note 1) DIF105EP

DMR85 (old 85cpm model) OK OK
DMR105 (old 105cpm model) OK OK
DMR85A (new 85cpm model) OK (note 2) OK
DMR105A (new 105cpm model) OK (note 2) OK
Note 1: If a DIF105P user requires DIF105EP features after installing, you can upgrade. This
option includes firmware CD, driver CD, additional operating instruction, Decal,
additional release note and installation procedure.
Note 2: Limitation = Old mainframe model name appears in Peripheral Manager via the
network.
Imposition Settings:
This new option means that pages can be arranged in special layouts for folding or cutting after
printing. With the previous DIF105P, this function was only available if you bought the separate
DocBuilder Pro option.
Creep:
With thick booklets, the image may shift from the centre of the page. With the creep feature, you
can adjust these images so that the booklet is consistent. The net result is a more professional
looking booklet.
DMR85A/DMR105A
Custom Paper Size:
This allows you to set the custom size of trays 2 & 3 of the Bellini mainframe:
Chapter Separation (mix media):
This allows the user to print ranges of pages on different weights of paper. For example, you can
specify one type of media for the cover, add blank pages, specify some duplex pages and some
simplex, all from the printer driver. Please note that this is not available in either the Mac or
Windows 2000 driver.
Tab Printing:
This allows the user to print directly on the tab of the paper.
Full Bleed Printing:
This allows the user to eliminate the non-printed area of the jobs.
Image Shifting:
Enables the user to shift the printing area within a page.

Print direction
XY-Center Left-Y-Center Right-Y-Center Top-X-Center
imposition
Bottom-X-Center XY-Center
DMR85A/DMR105A
Booklet Maker Support:
The user can send a print job to the SR85 booklet maker direct from the print driver. Previously you
could only do this via the document server.
Shift Sorting On/Off:
With this feature, the user can disable the shift sorting for the finisher.
Brightness Tune:
Print jobs can be either brightened or darkened.
DMR85A/DMR105A
SUPPLIES COMPATIBILITY
Supplies:
Item: Target Yield: Content: Carton Quantity: Remarks:

Toner 55K 1,430g/bottle 4 bottles/carton Unique
Developer 300k copies/bag 1,000g/bag 4 bags/carton Unique
OPC Drum 360K copies/each - - Common to DMR85/105
Staple - With 5,000 1 cartridge/carton Common to DMR85/105
Cartridge staples
Refill Staple - 5,000 staples 5 refills/carton Common to DMR85/105
The new model will have new toner and developer, which give far better output quality.
Note: Toner yield is based on 6% A4 Ricoh test chart, under normal machine conditions.
Yield will change depending on original, image size/type and machine operating
conditions.
DMR85A/DMR105A
WHAT FITS WHAT
DMR85A/105A Digital Multi-Functional Product

Ordering Code Description
Machine
DMR85A Digital copier
DMR105A Digital copier
Peripherals: Comments:
SR810 Finisher
DTK850A3 A3 tray kit
DIF850IB Interface board
DIF850TD Copy connector cable Tandem kit
DIF450EI Ethernet NIB
DHPU850S4H Punch kit 4 hole Swedish
DHD850P Printer Hard Disk Drive 6GB
DDK85PD Language Kit Printer DIF850P - German
DDK85PF Language Kit Printer DIF850P - French
DDK85PGB Language Kit Printer DIF850P - English
DDK85PI Language Kit Printer DIF850P - Italian
DDK85PS Language Kit Printer DIF850P - Swedish
DIF850PS PostScript 3 Option For DIF850P
DIF105P Printer Controller Specialist Controller
DIF105EP Printer Controller Specialist Controller
DSW105CWS Command Workstation Software
DSW105DBPRO Doc Builder Software
DDKD105PD Language Kit Printer DIF105P - German
DDKD105PF Language Kit Printer DIF105P - French
DDKD105PGB Language Kit Printer DIF105P - English
DDKD105PI Language Kit Printer DIF105P - Italian
DDKD105EPGB Language Kit and Driver for DIF105EP - English
DDKD105EPD Language Kit and Driver for DIF105EP - German
DDKD105EPF Language Kit and Driver for DIF105EP - French
DDKD105EPI Language Kit and Driver for DIF105EP - Italian
DDK1105AR Quick Copy Guide DMR85A/105A - Arabic SASO Purposes only
DDK1105GB Operation Instructions DMR85A/105A - English
DDK1105N Operation Instructions DMR85A/105A - Norwegian
DDK1105F Operation Instructions DMR85A/105A - French
DDK1105D Operation Instructions DMR85A/105A - German
DDK1105I Operation Instructions DMR85A/105A - Italian
DDK1105S Operation Instructions DMR85A/105A - Swedish
DCD850 CD Connector Cable For CD Writer
DMR85A/DMR105A
Peripherals /Cont
SR85 Plockmatic Booklet Maker
TR85 Trimmer
SR85RAIL Rail Unit
SR85CVRFEED Cover Inserter
DDKSR85GB SR85 Operation Instructions English
DDKSR85D SR85 Operation Instructions German
DDKSR85F SR85 Operation instructions French
DDKSR85I SR85 Operation instructions Italian
DDKSR85N SR85 Operation Instructions Norwegian
DDKSR85S SR85 Operation Instructions Swedish
N/A Horizon Booklet Maker Purchase directly from
Horizon
Supplies
DT37BLK Blk toner Yield 55K

DD8BLK Blk developer Yield 300K
A2949510 DMU12 Drum Yield 360K
CSC810A Staple set cartridge
CSC810B Staple refill pack 5 x 5000 staples
CSCSR85 Staple Cartridge 4 x 5000 staples
Printer Memory

DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Plockmatic Booklet Maker

(Short Code SR85)
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
INTRODUCTION
Many of our competitors in the high volume market offer booklet makers with their machines. In
order that we can compete with this level of functionality, we will be offering two booklet maker
options for the DMR85/105: The Horizon Biwako, which is positioned as a premium product and
the Plockmatic booklet maker, which is an entry level model.
Plockmatic are a Swedish company who specialize in document finishing machines and OEM for a
number of our competitors such as Xerox, Oce and Kodak. The booklet maker is similar to
Plockmatics own SR85 machine but differs in that it has been configured especially for the
DMR85/105.
The booklet maker is aimed at small to mid CRDs that require occasional booklet making facilities.
The product is designed to have space-saving qualities at a price that is attractive to the infrequent
user.
To provide a flexible booklet making solution at a competitive price.
To provide a booklet maker suitable for application in Low-Mid CRD/PFP (Print-For_Pay),
i.e. a flexible entry-level model.
It is estimated that up to 20% of 100cpm copiers are equipped with on-line booklet makers.
Key target replacement models for the DMR85/105, such as the Xerox 5100 and 1090, offer
detachable on-line booklet making. In order that our product can effectively compete with our
competitors, it is critical that we offer a similar level of functionality.
To give distributors an opportunity to increase revenue on sales of DMR85/105 products.
Positioning
Biwako
CRD Large-CRD
Plockmatic Mid-CRD
Small-CRD
Walk-up
The Plockmatic booklet maker is aimed at the smallmid size CRD market. At the higher end,
customers are more likely to opt for a dedicated system and it is for this market that the Horizon
Biwako is aimed.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Target User Classification
The product is targeted towards the small-mid sized CRD/PFP environment, where booklet making
has been previously done manually or using off-line devices. By automating this labour intensive
task, the customer benefits from considerable cost savings. With the Plockmatic booklet maker, the
customer has an affordable booklet making system, which avoids the expense of investing in an
expensive dedicated system.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Product Overview
Appearance
Plockmatic Basic Booklet Maker (SR85) with Rail Unit

(SR85RAIL) attached to DMR85
Plockmatic Booklet Maker (SR85) with optional Trimmer

(TR85) and Rail Unit (SR85RAIL)
It should be noted that the Plockmatic booklet maker will be branded as Plockmatic and not
NRG. The booklet maker is also a slightly lighter colour than the NRG grey.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Product Configuration
Model Item DMR85/105 with SR810
Booklet maker
Trimmer with booklet maker
Rail Unit with booklet maker
Can be used for this model
The standard DMR85/105 finisher (SR810) must be attached in order to add the Plockmatic
booklet maker.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Sales Points and Major Features
The main purpose of the booklet maker is to provide a flexible booklet making solution for the
small-mid sized CRD/PFP. The product has the following benefits:
Cost savings: Producing booklets manually is extremely time consuming and labour intensive.
By automating this task, the customer is able to benefit from considerable cost savings.
Quality: Produces high quality, professional looking booklets.
Attachment and detachment: One of the key advantages of this booklet maker is that the user
can attach or detach it from the mainframe to give them extra flexibility.
Optional Trimmer and Rail Unit: These options are available separately. The trimmer is
particularly useful for larger booklets. The rail unit allows for smooth attachment/detachment of
the booklet maker, without damaging the finisher.
Off line use: The booklet maker can be used as a stand alone unit, i.e. the paper can be
manually fed into the booklet maker without having to go through the copier.
Efficiency: The finisher matches the engine speed of the mainframe, no matter what combination
(A4 or A3, 2 to 20 sheets), for both the 85cpm DMR85 and the 105cpm DMR105.
Product Codes
Short Code: Description: Versatility:

SR85 Plockmatic Booklet Maker DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
TR85 Trimmer DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
SR85RAIL Rail Unit DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
SR85CVRFEED Cover Inserter DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
CSCSR85 Staple Cartridge 4 x 5000 DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
DDKSR85GB Operating Instructions English DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
DDKSR85F Operating Instructions French DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
DDKSR85D Operating Instructions - German DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
DDKSR85I Operating Instructions Italian DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
DDKSR85S Operating Instructions Swedish DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
DDKSR85N Operating Instructions Norwegian DMR85/105 &
DMR55A/70A
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Standard Accessories List
Items Included with the Plockmatic Booklet Maker

1. Base for Booklet Maker, with castor
2. Paper Tray
3. Docking Unit To install under SR810 base
4. SR810 Tray Detach Kit
5. Staple Cartridge 2 cartridges set in the machine
6. Bracket to add SR810
7. Cable for communication between SR810 and Booklet
Maker
8. EPROM to replace in SR810
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Specifications
Major Specifications
Maximum Speed 50 Booklets / Min. (A4), 33 Min. (A3)
Available Sizes A3 and A4 To make A4 and A5 booklets
Paper Weight 60 200 g/m2 Engine duplex: 64 163 g/m2
Input / Output (Sheets) 2 20 sheets (80 g/m2 equivalent) Stapled
Input / Output (Sheets) 2 sheets Non-stapled folding
Off line use Possible Stitch/Fold/ Side Bind (2 staples)
Weight 80kg or less
Dimensions (L x H x D) 1,305mm x 590mm x 545mm Including base and stacker
Power Source 220/230/240V (Independent) 10%
Power Consumption 200 W or less Continuous Operation
Quality Specifications
Target Shut Down * 1 / 500 booklets or less 1 / 4000 copies
Fold Skew 0.7mm (A4), 1.0mm (A3) See Figure 1
Fold Variation 0.5mm
Fold Quality Less than 22mm (A3, 80 g/m2 , 4 sheets) See Figure 2
Staple Quality Anvil Type, 1.5mm Max flatness See Figure 4
Max. 1.0mm Staple leg offset
Stapled Set Registration 0.7mm Maximum See Figure 5
Staple Line Position variation Less than 0.6mm See Figure 3
Paper Curl Acceptance Maximum 10mm (measure on flat If curl from engine is more than
surface) 10mm, try turning the paper in the
Maximum Radius 70mm machine tray around
* Shut down: Booklet maker stops through paper jam or staple jam.
Attachment to DMR85/105
Physical Connection Attached after SR810 (detachable) Bracket is standard accessory
Attach by bracket (docking unit)
Released by foot release

Electrical Connection Jam signal to stop DMR85/105 Same as Plockmatic for Xerox
Set signal from DMR85/105 to start

motor
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Attachment to DMR85/105
Physical Attached after SR810 (detachable) Bracket is standard accessory

Connection Attach by bracket (docking unit)
Electrical Jam signal to stop DMR85/105 Same as Plockmatic for Xerox
Connection Set Signal from DMR85/105 to start motor
Trimmer
Maximum Speed 50 booklets / Min (A4), 33 /Min (A3) Same as SR85
Available Sizes A3 and A4
Paper Weight 60-200 g/m2 Engine Duplex : 64 163 g/m2
Input / Output Sheets 2 20 Sheets (80 g/m2 equivalent) Stapled
Trimming Edge Trail End (One End Trim)
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Default Trim Width 4mm (Maximum 10mm) Good for 2 to 5 sheets*1

Weight 71 kg
Dimensions 1227 mm x 880 mm x 595 mm (Stacker Incl. SR85
hold up)
1732 mm x 880 mm x 595 mm ( Hold
down)
Power Source From SR85
Power consumption 230 V, 2.0A (max) = 460 W Maximum With SR85 and TR85
*1 : Adjustable by pressing hard key on TR85 (0.5mm for one press)
6 10 sheets : 5mm
11 15 sheets : 6mm
16 20 sheets : 7mm
will be the recommended amount for trim.
Quality Specifications
Target Shutdown 1 / 1000 Booklets
Trim Quality 0.5 mm (Sheet to Sheet) See Figure 6
1.0 mm (Peak)
2.0 mm (Parallel /Skew)
Rail Unit
The Rail Unit is designed as an optional unit to the SR85 / TR85.
It is advisable to offer this option to clients who
have a flooring surface which makes it difficult for the operator to move the SR85
have the TR85 Trimmer (Total weight is 150kg) and would like to make the detachment /
attachment of the Booklet maker easier
Dimensions 120 x 500 x 1730 mm Package dimensions
Supplies
The staple cartridge is the only consumable needed for the booklet maker.
Staple cartridge: 5000 staples / cartridge

(Required: 2 staple cartridges per machine)
3 cartridges per carton
This staple cartridge is unique with this system and has no interchangeability with any other finishers.
Product code: CSCSR85
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Targeted Reliability
Unit Life 1,500K booklets 12 Million copies (4 sheets /
booklet)
ACV TBC
Max CV TBC 25K booklets / month
(theoretical figures)
Duty Cycle TBC
EM Rate 83K booklets 1 / 664K copies
EM Ratio 1 / 83000 booklet
PM Cycle 125K Booklets (SR85)
240K Booklets (TR85)
MTTR 1 hour or less
PM Interval TBC
MTTR 1 hour or less For EM
Shutdown 1 / 500 booklet or less Including paper and staple jams
Installation Time 80 minutes (SR85)
30 minutes (TR85)
Functional Remarks
Booklet Making from Printer
Booklet making finishing is only possible via the Document Server. It is not possible to control the
booklet making function direct from the printer driver. It is possible to control the booklet maker
from the DMR85/105 control panel and partly from the booklet maker. There are also some minor
manual adjustments to switch between the A3 and A4 output.
Paper Jams
The DMR85/105 recognizes all jams on the booklet maker (including trimmer) as jams on the
SR810 finisher. The operator will have to remove paper in the DMR85/105 and the SR810 in
order to restart the machine.
Selection of Staple Key
When the SR85 is attached, all staple keys are recognized as booklet staple keys. However, please
select the key for one staple, in order to keep optimum system productivity. If you select two
staples, it will slow down the productivity. If you do not select a staple key, all the copy paper will
exit from the SR810 proof tray.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Thin Paper Use
If you use thin paper and there is a paper jam, please turn the paper in the engine tray around.
(Premier Xerix 60g/m2 has been tested under normal temperature / humidity).
Attachment and Detachment Procedure
In order to avoid unnecessary service calls, please instruct your customer to follow the attachment /
detachment procedure correctly. The lifting up of the pin (on the SR810) will be especially
important when docking the SR85 with the SR810.
When you detach the SR85 and use the SR810 as a normal finisher, be sure to attach the finisher
tray before switching the unit on. Otherwise, the tray unit will move above the upper limit and
necessitate a service call.
Appearance
Detailed shot of the

SR85CVRFEED
The DMR85A/105A with Booklet maker SR85 and

Cover Feeder SR85CVRFEED.
Remarks:
It is also possible to use the TR85 trimmer with
this combination although it is not shown here.
The combination can also be used offline.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Background & Objectives
- Since the Bookletmaker SR85 was launched at the end of 2000, it has been a great success.
- A feature that customers requested from the beginning was to add colour covers to sets and
more specifically to Booklets. Colour copies cannot be fed from the trays of the
DMR85A/105A, (unlike normal covers) so we had to look for an alternative method together
with Plockmatic.
- Some of the new competitors models (IR8500 & 7075) in the speed range of the
DMR85A/105A offer colour copy insertion as an option and also use this as a tactic to
differentiate their product from the DMR85A/105A.
- By adding this option to the Bookletmaker we want to enhance the competitiveness of the
DMR85A/105A and further increase sales.
Positioning of SR85
Unlike the bookletmakers of some competitors (like IR8500 & 7075), the SR85 has been
positioned as a PROFESSIONAL Bookletmaker. The main differences between our
bookletmaker and the option from others such as Canon, Konica and Minolta are:
- Accurate and exact folding / stapling (staple exactly on the same place => in the middle, fold on
the same place => no difference between 1st and last set).
- User Adjustable if necessary (no technician required).
- Suitable for short and long runs (most competitors can only do short runs, up to 10 25 sets).
- Possible to make sets of up to 20 A4/A3 Sheets (80 images, competition maximum is usually 15
sheets).
- On line trimming possible using the TR85. Thicker sets (> 4 sheets) look especially
unprofessional because of creep. The TR85 will trim those edges (up to 10 mm); most
competitors do not offer this.
- Competitive products for this reason are, feature-wise, more comparable with the
DMR55A/70A in combination with the SR750.
The SR85CVRFEED offers this same level of heavy-duty design and professionalism, using a
combination of friction feeding, combined with air-separation for the cover feeding.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Target User Classification
The SR85CVRFEED is targeted at the same customers as the SR85. The SR85CVRFEED can be
installed on new SR85s and also on ALL already installed Bookletmakers (SR85).
Suppliers suggested sheets per Booklet is 4 (16 pages booklet).
Remarks
Unit life 1,500 K Booklets 12 Million Copies (4 sheets /
booklet)
ACV 20% of Engine CV
Max CV Not Specified 25K Booklets / Month (Theoretical
Figures)
Duty Not Specified
EM rate 83K Booklets 1,664K Copies
PM cycle TBD
MTTR 1 hour or less
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
To provide a combination of Bookletmaking and Coverfeeding in combination with the

SR85
To Provide aProfessional Booklet

- High Booklet Making Quality, which Customers of CRD/PFP will accept.
To Keep Optimum Engine Productivity

- In any combination (A4 or A3, 2 to 20 sheets) the system maintains engine speed.
Features:
Double Detection
The Cover feeder has an optical double detection. The Cover feeder will detect the double and
show it on the Control panel on the Cover feeder. It will also send a signal to the Copier, which will
generate a hard stop.
Misfeed Detection
The Cover feeder has an optical misfeed detection. The Cover feeder will detect the miss and show
it on the Control panel on the Cover feeder. It will also send a signal to the Copier, which will
Empty Bin Detection

The Cover feeder has optical empty bin detection. The Cover feeder will detect the empty bin and
show it on the Control panel on the Cover feeder. It will also send a signal to the Copier, which will
Cover Feeder Specifications
Major Specifications :
Maximum Speed 50 booklets / Min (A4), 33 /Min (A3) Same as SR85
Available Sizes A3 and A4 To make A4 and A5 booklets
Paper Weight 70-200 gsm
Paper Size (Width) 210 320 mm
Paper Size (Length) 279 457 mm
Cover Feeder Capacity 20 mm (approx. 200 sheets of 80gr/m2
paper)
Offline Use Possible Stitch/ Fold/ Side Bind (2
staples)
Weight 80 kg or less
Dimensions 1,378 mm x 590 mm x 1,003 mm (L x H x Incl. Base and Stacker & SR85
D) Covers Insertions Unit
Power Source 220/230/240V + - 10%
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Power consumption 200 W or less Continuous Operations
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Configuration and Option Interchangeability
Model DMR55A/70A DMR85A/105A
Item with SR810 with SR810
Bookletmaker SR85
Trimmer TR85 with SR85 with SR85
Rail Unit for SR85 with SR85 with SR85
SR85COVERSWE with SR85 with SR85
: Can be used for this model
The system is dedicated for all DMR85A/105A models and DMR55A/70A models - always in
combination with the SR810. The system CANNOT be connected using other Finishers.
Option Correlation:
- Must install together Cannot install together

Bookletmaker
Cover Feed85
Trimmer
Railunit
TR85
SR85
Purchasing Option
Bookletmaker SR85
Trimmer TR85
Rail Unit
CoverFeed 85
Trimmer TR85 and Rail Unit are the sub options to the Booklet maker SR85. And they are installed
with the Booklet maker.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Horizon Booklet Maker [Biwako]
Note:
THIS IS A THIRD PARTY COMPANY.
NRGI ARE NOT SUPPLYING THIS ITEM.
ALL ENQUIRIES SHOULD BE MADE DIRECT WITH
HORIZON.
CONTACT DETAILS TO FOLLOW
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Product Concept
Appearance
Booklet Staple & Stacker with DMR85/105 with LCT

Stacker Trimmer Folder Cover Feeder
Biwako
NRG Products
(Horizon Brand Produced by Horizon)
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Marketing Objective
Provide on line Booklet making solution to CRD/PFP, in order to increase sales of

DMR85/105 units.
Positioning
CPM
DMR105
100 Covered by Biwako

DMR85
80
DMR70
A Finisher with Booklet SR750
60
DMR55
A
2000
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Air Knife Feeding

2. Cover Insertion
Feeder
3. Booklet Stapling
5. Trimming
1. Booklet mode
Printing
4. Folding
Stack or Sort
6. Booklet Stack
High Speed & Quality Booklet Printing
With DMR85/105, Biwako can make high speed and quality booklet printing.
A3 / Ledger size Booklet Speed: 3 sheets 9 booklets / minute

8 sheets 3 booklets / minute
Maximum sheets per booklet 16 sheets = 32 pages (80g/m2, 20lbs. Bond)
With Trimming Within 2mm difference between top and bottom.
(6 16 sheets)
Colour Copy Cover Insertion

The Cover Insertion Feeder can insert special paper as a cover sheet.
Since it uses air knife feeding, which separates each sheet and then feeds it, the customer can use
colour copies as cover sheets.
1,500 Sheets Stacker

The Stacker unit can hold up to 1,500 sheets. It is also capable of shift sorting.
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Configuration
Biwako consists of and is provided in the following four units:
Booklet Stacker Trimmer Stapler and Folder Sheet Stacker with

Cover Feeder
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Main Specifications
Biwako System Specifications
Applicable Speed 55 105cpm
Feature Booklet making, Folding, Shift Sort * * at sheet stacker unit
Stapling & Folding Booklet - 16 sheets In 80 g/m2
Folding - 3 sheets
Machine Life 15,000K or 5 Years
Dimensions (W x D x H) 2,856mm x 621mm x 1,114mm
Weight 361.8kg
Power Source Europe: 230 240V / 50Hz Need two power outlets
Power Consumption 900W
Speed Sheet Stack same as the mainframe speed
Booklet depends on paper size
A3 / Ledger (85ppm machine)
A4 / Letter (85ppm machine)
Booklet Stack Capacity 40 booklets In 80 g/m2
Copy Stacker with Cover Feed Specifications
1. Copy Stacker Feature
Stacker Table One Table Shift Tray table
Stack Capacity 1,500 sheets (A4) In 80 g/m2
Stack paper size A3, A4, A5 Can stack tab sheets
Paper Weight Simplex: 52 216 g/m2
Duplex: 64 163 g/m2
Shift Sort Standard
Shift Sort Amount 30mm 2mm Vertical Shift Sort
Stack Alignment 12mm, 0.5 or less 30mm, 1.2 or less for A5
Full Stack Detector Standard
Paper Jam Sensor Standard
Door Cover Sensor Standard
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Copy Stacker with Cover Feed SpecificationsContinued
2. Cover Feeder Feature

Paper Feed Method Air knife feeding
Stack Capacity 500 sheets (80mm) In 80 g/m2
Paper Size A3, A4 SEF only
Paper Weight 62 216 g/m2
Add Paper Sensor Standard
Mis-feeding Sensor Standard
Near end Sensor Standard 15 8 sheets
Cover Sensor Standard
Paper Size Setting Guide Manual Setting
Booklet Making Quality
1. Horizontal Alignment 0.8mm or less (paper size difference should be within 0.2mm)
2. Stitch Position - within 0.8mm from centre position (up to 5 sheets)

- within 1.5mm from centre position (6 16 sheets)
3. Skew within 1.0mm (Error of paper square should be within 0.5mm)
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
4. Top and Bottom size difference by Trimming within 1.0mm (up to 5 sheets), within
2.0mm (5 16 sheets)
5. Folding Alignment within 1.5mm
6. Swelling of a booklet within 42mm (16 sheets of A3 / Ledger, 80 g/m2 Bond paper)
7. Paper tear by stitching within 2.0mm (16 sheets of 80 g/m2 Bond paper)
8. Mis-stitching 1 / 1,000 booklets
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Reliability
MCBC 200K prints

PM Interval 300K prints (20 minutes)
PM Parts Trimmer blade: 500K booklet (10 sheets of 80 g/m2 Bond paper)
Blow Motor: 200K prints
Stitcher: 250K booklet (10 sheets of 80 g/m2 Bond paper)
EM - 800K prints (60 minutes)
Installation - 15 minutes (two people)
Supply Specifications
5,000 staples / cartridge
DMR85/85A_DMR105/105A
Biwako Limitations
1. Since the Biwako is a system for the professional user, several adjustments and maintenance
procedures are necessary, to create a better output.
Target users should be CRD or PFP professionals who are experienced and have knowledge of
on line or off line booklet making.
2. The Biwako is an FCC Class A system. Installations are for commercial premises and not for
users who have minimal requirements for booklet making.
3. If a booklet is out of specifications, the following adjustments will be necessary:

Horizontal alignment
Folding position
Each adjustment value will be reset when the paper size is changed, when the mode is
changed and if a jam occurs.
4. The maximum number of sheets per booklet is 16 sheets. The following paper is recommended:
Use 105 g/m2 or heavier when folding one sheet of A3 paper in order to prevent creasing.
Use 90 g/m2 or heavier when creating a two sheet booklet, in order to prevent bending
of the leading edge.
5. Set the paper correctly to prevent skew or curl. Copy face should be down for the mainframe
trays and copy face should be up for the LCT tray. If paper skew occurs, then reverse the
paper in the trays.
6. When a jam is detected before exiting the trimmer section, an extra booklet will be created, thus
giving one more booklet than the number set originally.
7. Check for jammed paper carefully.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMR90B/105B
(Bellini B-C2)
DIGITAL 90/105ppm
DIGITAL MULTI-FUNCTIONAL
PRODUCTS
Nashuatec 9005/10515
Rex-Rotary 9008/10518
Gestetner 9002/10512
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Production
March 2003 Japan

Date Created: January 2003
Version 3
April, 2003
DMR90B/105B
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Model Comparison with DMR85A/105A 10
Supply Specifications 25
DPSK2105 Controller Specifications 28
EB105EX Controller Specifications 30
SR90/105 Booklet Maker 31
What Fits What 42

K:\Company\Market\NPS\DMR90B_105B.doc 1
DMR90B/105B
INTRODUCTION
The CRD (Central Reprographics Department) and print market is recognised as a key
strategic growth area for all manufacturers of high volume products. Whilst the number of
potential units is relatively small, the page volumes and thus, the opportunity for growth in
TDV (Total Document Volume), is enormous. A recent Dataquest report calculated that the
90+ ppm market accounted for a mere 0.4% of units, but generated 11.6% of total market
revenue.
The new models consist again of 2 machines at different speeds, with the lower end machine
being 5ppm faster, at 90ppm, to help with differentiation from the DMR75. The top speed
product remains at 105ppm. Unit life is also vastly improved with both machines capable of
24 million copies over 5 years.
The new model will also incorporate GW Architecture allowing us to offer superb
connectivity features and additional bundled software. Add this to the same advanced
finishing features that are available with the DMR60/75 and we again have a market leading
product.
DMR90B/105B
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
ARDF (Equipped to Mainframe) Bypass Tray (Option)

Sheet through type Max 500 sheets
Max 100 originals Max 12 x 18 inch
Up to 216g/m2
Cover Interposer (Option)
Max 200 sheets
Finisher (Option)
100 sheets staple
3,000 sheets stack LCT(Option)
3 trays
4,550 sheets
(Total)
Punch Unit (Option)

EU: 2/4 switchable hole punch
The DMR90B/105B range consists of two machines, 90ppm and 105ppm respectively.
These machines replace the existing 85ppm and 105ppm product and are expected to be
launched in March 2003.
Apart from the speed increase on the lower model, there are a number of key advances which
significantly boost the competitiveness of our HV offering. The most important is the
increased durability of the machines which should enable us to attack CRDs with print
volumes of up to 1,000,000 copies per month.
The DMR85A/105A was widely recognised as a well featured machine with few detracting
features, so much so that Canon copied it! This new model gives us the opportunity to
position DMR90B/105B as a genuine market leader.
DMR90B/105B
Target User Image by Volume
Type of User User Image

Division Used as Stand Alone or Network machines
Stand Alone user who wants to have higher
ACV: 50- 100K quality copy and/ or finishing functions.
User who wants to increase printing productivity
with high speed and high quality finishing.
Low CV CRD User who wants to use electrical documents
system, but can not purchase DocuTech 135.
ACV: 100- 250K
Mid CV CRD Targeted user for Connect Copy Solution.
User who wants to use electrical documents
ACV: 250- 500K system, but can not purchase DocuTech 135.
User who wants easier connectivity than
DocuTech 135.
High CV CRD User who wants to have a high speed digital PPC
as a secondary machine, to cover the overflow
ACV: 500K-1000K copy volume, quick copy jobs, and minimize the
copy quality gap with DocuTech 135.
User who already has DocuTech but it is not
profitable and who wants to reduce the cost of
maintenance.
DMR90B/105B
KEY FEATURES, ADVANTAGES & BENEFITS
Improved durability and speed
At 90ppm, the lower speed model sees a 5ppm increase, primarily to differentiate from the
DMR75. The 105ppm model stays the same, with the development focus in Japan having
been on durability rather than outright speed (the engine speed is actually slower on the
DMR90B/105B, with the output speed maintained by feeding papers closer together).
In terms of durability this new model makes significant progress over the outgoing range, and
this will prove to be a strong feature for us in a marketplace where so much is expected of
hardware.
DMR90B DMR85A DMR105B DMR105A

CPM 90 85 105 105
Life 24M 15M 27M 15M
ACV 80K 80K 190K 120K
Max CV 400K 300K 450K 500K
MCBC 105K 80K 105K 85.7K
(PM) 350K 300K 350K 300K
(EM) 150K 110K 150K 120K
The improvement on unit life from 15M to 24M copies is the most significant, along with the
improved MCBC and maintenance figures.
Professional finishing options
The DMR90B/105B has 2 optional finishers for the 90ppm product and 1 for the 105ppm
currently. Available for both machines is a 3000 sheet finisher with 100 sheets stapler.
Available only for the 90ppm product is the saddle stitch/booklet finisher common to
DMR60/75.
There will also be an updated version of the SR85 Plockmatic booklet maker, which for
DMR90B/105B is developed in conjunction with Japan, giving us much better linkage to the
machine, control from the operation panel and software drivers etc. This product will
provide a solution for HV CRD booklet making whilst the 90ppm model with saddle stitch
finisher caters for lower volume booklet requirements
Cover Interposer
Also new with the DMR90B/105B is a cover interposer common to the DMR60/75. Most of
our other machines and indeed most of our competitors, allow the user to insert slip sheets in
a finished job. The difference with the colour interposer is that it inserts the covers without
putting them through the fuser mechanism, thereby minimizing the risk of damage. This is
particularly relevant for colour or transparent covers.
DMR90B/105B
Hole Punching
Like the DMR85/105, the new model offers hole punching options for the finishers. The
difference here is that for each finisher one punch is offered which can switch between 2 and
4 hole punches, whereas the previous machine had a separate 2 hole and a separate 4 hole
punch. This switchable punch is also applicable to the US punch. Like all our other hole
punch options, a Scandinavian hole punch option is available.
Tab Copying
Tab copying is also available.
Bypass Tray / Improved paper capacity
The addition of a bypass tray with the ability to feed papers up to 216gsm increases
flexibility for the user as well as raising overall paper capacity to 8,050 sheets.
High Quality
The DMR90B/105B is only the second (after DMR60/75) mono MFP to offer genuine
1200x1200 dpi quality. In previous models, it was possible to have 1200 dpi print through the
edge smoothing function on the driver but this was not true 1200 x 1200 dpi quality. Please
note that the ADF still scans at 600dpi, so true 1200x1200dpi quality is only possible on the
printer function.
Connectivity Features
High Speed Printer
Like all our MFPs, the DMR90B/105B is not just a copier but can be turned into a printer
with high print speeds of 90ppm and 105ppm. Multi-copy documents are only RIPped once
and subsequent copies can be printed from the memory. With the addition of the PostScript 3
option, print jobs with heavy graphic content can be considerably speeded up. With the
document server feature, print jobs can be saved in post RIP format, so that if you wish to
make one more copy, all you have to do is access the document server from either the control
panel or via DesktopBinder and another copy can be quickly produced.
Scanning
Another new feature with the DMR90B/105B is network scanning. This is the first time we
have bought network scanning to our HV range. Like the DMR60/75, DMR35A/45A and
DMR22A/27A/32A, networking scanning is provided in a printer/scanner kit which includes
both features. As opposed to having an expensive printer controller and an expensive scanner
controller, we have a printer/scanner kit which provides a good price premium. As with the
slower models, this comes bundled with ScanRouter Lite software and scan-to-email
functionality can be added if the ScanRouter Pro option is purchased.
Unlike our previous MFPs, scan to email is now possible from the copiers LCD.
DMR90B/105B
GW Architecture
Internally the machine adopts the GW architecture which has become the standard in the
NRGI 22-75cpm range. This means that instead of installing controllers, all that has to be
activated to install printing or scanning is a chip, one piece of memory and one NIB. Like the
DMR35A/45A & DMR60/75, we expect that this technology improvement will mean a
cheaper connected product than its predecessor. It also means that with the connected
DMR90B/105B you get a greater price performance. There are no longer a range of memory
options and hard disks which can be added to the printer controller, instead you get a huge
standard memory of 384MB together with a powerful document server.
Software
Like the DMR35A/45A and DMR60/75, the machine benefits from SmartNetMonitor,
ScanRouter and DeskTopBinder. Likewise it also benefits from the unique RPCS drivers,
which, with its one-click drivers, makes choosing print settings easier. This is especially
important for a high volume printer such as the DMR90B/105B, because having saved
settings reduces misprints through human error.
Connectivity
The DMR60/75 can be plugged into a network with a 10/100base-t NIB, and can also be
connected via Firewire IEEE1394. However unlike our other mono MFPs, the
DMR90B/105B offers a USB port and wireless LAN interface, ensuring that it is future
proofed. This incorporates the technology first seen on the DMR60/75. Please note that only
one of the IEEE1394, Wireless LAN and USB ports can be installed at any one time.
Also unlike the outgoing model, NETBEUI is also supported
Improved Document Server
With the addition of network scanning, the document server can not only hold print and copy
jobs, but also scanned jobs which can be either printed or sent to other users either on the
network (with ScanRouter Lite) or to email addresses (with ScanRouter Pro). Desktop Binder
functionality, means that the contents of the Document Server can actually be examined from
the PC. With the thumbnail view, whole documents can be examined page per page without
actually opening the documents.
DMR90B/105B
External Configuration
Model DMR90B/105B DMR85A/105A DMR60/75

Item
3,000 sheets Finisher w/100 sheets stapler X
(SR840)
Finisher w/saddle stitch function (SR860A) (DMR90B only) X
4,550 Large Capacity Tray X X
Punch Unit X
Cover Interposer Tray X
Bypass Tray X X
A3/Ledger Tray kit* X
Tandem Connector Cable X X
Booklet Finisher (Plockmatic) X
- compatible
X not compatible
DMR90B/105B
Internal Configuration
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Printer / Scanner Kit M
2. RAM 256MB M
3. PostScript 3 Kit M
4. USB2.0 M M X X
5. Wireless LAN M M X X
6. IEEE1394 M M X X

DMR90B/105B
MODEL COMPARISON WITH DMR85A/105A
Replacement Model Comparison
DMR90B DMR105B DMR85A DMR105A
Product Design
GENERAL FUNCTION
Architecture GW -
Max CV 400K (DMR90B) / 450K (DMR105B) 300K
Scan/Copy/Print Resolution 600dpi / 1200dpi / 1200dpi 600dpi / 600dpi / 600dpi
Memory Capacity 96MB RAM, 96MB RAM,
128MB RAM, 80GB HDD (40GB x 2)
8GB HDD 20GB HDD
Copy Speed 90 cpm 105 cpm 85 cpm 105 cpm
Custom Paper Size Yes No
Original Feeding Speed 80ppm 72 cpm
INPUT CAPACITY
Standard 2,000 sheets Tandem Tray (1,000 x 2) 2,000 sheets Tandem Tray (1,000 x 2)
500 sheets x 2 Trays 500 sheets x 2 Trays
Optional LCT 1,000 sheets x 2 Trays 1,000 sheets x 2 Trays
2,550 sheets Tray 2,550 sheets Tray
Bypass Tray 500 sheets Tray -
Total/Sources 8,050 sheets / 7 7,550 sheets / 6
FINISHER
Stack Capacity (Shift Tray) 3,000 sheets 3,000 sheets
Staple Capacity / Positions 100 sheets / 4 100 sheets / 4
Max Staple Paper Size 11 x 17 11 x 17
Punch Unit Optional(Switchable) Optional
Pause Key
Yes No
(Stop during finishing job)
Jogger Yes (Optional) No
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
Total Capacity (Shift Tray) 3,000 sheets - - -
Staple Capacity / Positions 50 sheets / 4 - - -
Saddle Stitch Staple 15 sheets / 1 - - -
Capacity / Positions
Punch Unit Optional - - -
COVER INTERPOSER
Cover Interposer Tray Yes (Optional) - -
COPIER FUNCTIONS
Batch mode Yes (2,000 sheets) Yes (1,000 sheets)
Capters Yes (100 position) Yes (20 position)
Cornering Yes No
Simplex/Duplex copy Yes No
in one job
YIELDS
Developer 350K copies / bag 300K copies / bag
OPC Drum 360K copies / each 360K copies / each
PM Cycle 350K copies 300k copies
Toner 55K copies / bottle 55K copies / battle
DMR90B/105B
Mainframe Specifications
Item DMR90B/105B Remarks

1. Technology:
a) Reading element 4 channel CCD array image-sensing element
b) Printing processing 4 way Laser Diode Array2 1,200dpi
& Electro-photographic printing.
Dry, Dual-component toner development
2. Dimensions (W x D x H):
Standard Configuration 2,105 x 858.5 x 1,476 mm * Mainframe with ARDF,
and Finisher.
b) With Options 2,318 x 858.5 x 1,476 mm * Standard Configuration
+LCT.
3. Weight: Less than 275Kg Mainframe with ARDF
4. Input Capacity:
a) Standard 1st: 1,000 sheets x 2 (Tandem Tray)
2nd and 3rd : 500 sheets 2nd & 3rd : Universal Tray
b) Options LCT 4th and 5th: 1,000 sheets (LCT Tray) 4th & 5th : Universal Tray
6th: 2,550 sheets (LCT Tray) 6th: Technical Adjustment
7th. 500 sheets (Multi Bypass Tray) 7th : Multi Bypass Tray
Total: 8,050 sheets
5. Output Capacity:
a) Finisher w/100 sheets Finisher Proof Tray: 500 sheets A4 and LT LEF capacity.
stapler: Finisher Shift Tray: 3,000 sheets
b)Finisher w/saddle stitch Finisher Proof Tray: 250 sheets

function Finisher Shift Tray: Upper 500 sheets
Lower 2,500 sheets
6. Paper size / weight:
a) Size: Tray 1st : Duplex copy:
A4 (LEF) and LT (LED) Common unit for Europe
Tray 2nd and 3rd : and NA. So, can make
Europe: A5 (LEF) - A3 (SEF), auto- duplex copy onto all
sizes described on left
Column.
Tray 4th - 6th:
A5 - A4 (LEF),
Tab sheet can be set on 4th
st rd 2
b)Weight: Tray 1 3 :52 to 163 g/m and 5th trays. (Only for
simplex copy)
Tray 4th and 5th : 52 to 216g/m2 OHP can be set except at
Tray 6th : 52 to 163 g/m2 1st tray. Peel off paper can
Tray 7th : 52 to 216g/m2 be set at 5th tray.
Duplex: 64 to 163 g/m2 Peel off paper should be
exit in face up always.
7. Rating power spec.: Europe: 220-240V, 50/60Hz, 16A
8. Power Consumption Max.: Less than 3 ,000W Mainframe+LCT+Finisher
(Notes: SEF: short-edge feed, LEF: long-edge feed)
DMR90B/105B
Copying Specifications
Features DMR90B/105B Remarks

st
1 Copy speed DMR90B : 4.75 second A4 LEF from 1st input tray
DMR105B : 4.20 second to Finisher Proof tray in
platen mode.
Multi copy DF 1 to 1: 80cpm
speed A4 / 8 1/2 x 11 LEF, no R/E
Multiple copy Up to 9,999

Resolution 1200 dpi (Copier/Printer)
600 dpi (Scanner)
Gray Scale Scanning: 256 levels *1.Printer data is binary.
(per dot) Marking: 4 levels *1 *2.Save and printing for paper
Document Server: 4 levels *2 original is 4 levels, and
Electrical original is binary.
Warm-up Less than 360 seconds
time
Memory Standard : 128MB, HDD 80GB (40GB x 2)
Capacity Option : 256MB (for Printer / Scanner)
Enlargement European model : 115, 122, 141, 200, 400% 5E
Reduction European model: 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25% 7R
Zoom 25% - 400% in 1% step
Image density Automatic or Manual Manual: 9 notch
adjustment
Interrupt Standard
copy
User code Standard (Copier- 500 codes, 8 digits)
(Printer- 500 codes, 8 digits)
Language American English, British English, German, Any two display languages can
French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Swedish, be stored in IC cards.
Norwegian, Danish, Finnish, Portuguese, (Switchable in a key)
Czech, Japanese (14 languages)
* Default of Display Languages:
Europe: British English & French
DMR90B/105B
Enhanced Features

Auto Paper Select Standard
Auto Magnification Select Standard
Special Paper Display Standard Type of paper and colour
Directional Magnification Standard 1% steps
Directional size Standard 1mm/ 0.1 inch step
Magnification
Stamp features Standard Language of Preset stamps are
* Background Numbering different by display language.
* User Stamp
* Preset Stamp
* Date Stamp
* Page Numbering
* Stamp Text
Boarder / Centre Erase Standard
Delete Area Standard Inside and outside.
Up to 2 areas
Margin Adjustment Standard 1mm/ 0.1 inch step
Image Shift Standard Centring
Combine copy Standard ((2,4,8 pages into one simplex sheet,
4, 8, 16 pages into one duplex sheet)
Image overlay No
Positive / Negative No
Duplex Standard Interleaf Duplex unit
*Simplex >>> Duplex (Limitless)
*Duplex >>> Duplex
*Duplex >>> Magazine
*Book >>> 2 Sided Duplex
*Multi >>> 2 Sided Duplex
Series copy Standard
*Book 2 one sided sheets
*Duplex original 2 one sided sheets
Book copy Standard Booklet, and Magazine
Original Type Setting Standard (text, text / photo, photo, pale, Default: text mode
and generation copy mode)
Special Original Setting Standard (Batch, Mixed Size, Thin, *1. To make copies from
Rotate Original *- Up side Down*1, 90turn*2 damaged originals by staple,
etc.
*2. To scan portrait original in
LEF direction to shorten
copy time, etc.
Adjusting Copy Image Auto, Manual, and Auto Manual Combine
Density
Timers Standard
Mode Clear, Energy Saver, Auto shut off,
Sleep mode, System reset, Weekly timer
Auto start Standard
Sample Set Standard
DMR90B/105B

Job preset Standard Up to 20 jobs
Tandem Copy & Option Need Interface Board and
Printing Tandem Connector Cable.
Document Box Standard Up to 20 jobs
Document Editor Standard
User Program Standard 25 programs.
User default screen will be set
in Program No.25.
Electronic Sort Standard With Finisher
Stack Standard With Finisher
Stapling Standard
4 Positions: (Top, Bottom, Top slant, 2 staples) With Finisher (SR840)
5 Positions: (Top, Bottom, Top slant, 2 staples, With Finisher (SR860A)
Saddle stitch)
Punch Option With Finisher
EU : 2/4 switchable hole punch
Scandinavian: 4 hole punch
Cover / Slip Sheet Standard
Cover (can select Front Cover or Back Cover) Default : Copy
Slip Sheet (can select Copy or Blank) Default : Blank
Paper Designate Standard (can select from 3 trays) Up to 100 positions.
Chapters Standard (can use with Paper Designate) Up to 100 positions
Cover Sheet Insertion Option (can feed the papers that are used for the front Refer to Cover Interposer
and back cover page) Tray for detail.
Separation Standard (can select Per n sets or Per Job) Default : Per n sets
Status Indicator Lamp Standard
Off - Ready
Green Blinking - Scanning
Green Printing / Copying,
But can scan originals.
Red - Malfunction
Red Blinking - Toner near end
Dehumidify Heater Service Option Paper trays
Dew Prevention Heater Service Option
Copy Counter Electrical and Mechanical counter
Key Counter Bracket Option* (Interharness part is necessary to install with
LCT)
Key Card Recommended system only.
Remote Diagnostic Option
DMR90B/105B
Copy Speed Matrix
Simplex to Simplex Speed of A4 / 8 1/2 x 11:
DMR90B: (cpm)
1st Tray 2nd Tray 3rd Tray 4th Tray 5th Tray 6th Tray 7h Tray
DF 1 to 1 75 75 75 75 75 75 75
Platen Copy (Continuous) 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
DMR105B: (cpm)
1st Tray 2nd Tray 3rd Tray 4th Tray 5th Tray 6th Tray 7th Tray
DF 1 to 1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Platen Copy (Continuous) 105 105 105 105 105 105 105
Continuous Copy Speed of Other paper size:

(cpm)
Paper Size DMR90B DMR105B
A3 45 51
A4 SEF 60 68
A5 LEF 105 115
11 x 17 45 51
10 x 14 60 68
8 1/2 x 14 SEF 60 68
8 1/2 x 11 SEF 70 80
90ppm BLI Productivity
Letter
Mode 1 set 5 set 10 set 20 set
CPM 1 to 1 43.5 74.6 82.0 86.2
1 to 2 34.9 71.2 81.7 88.3
2 to 2 37.8 73.8 83.5 89.3
Productivity % 1 to 1 48.3 82.9 91.1 95.8
1 to 2 38.7 79.1 90.8 98.1
2 to 2 42.0 82.0 92.8 99.2
Double Letter
CPM 1 to 1 28.8 41.0 43.2 44.5
1 to 2 24.8 36.8 39.3 40.5
2 to 2 27.0 37.7 39.7 40.8
Productivity % 1 to 1 64.0 91.1 96.1 98.9
1 to 2 55.2 81.9 87.3 90.1
2 to 2 60.1 83.7 88.2 90.7
DMR90B/105B
A4
CPM 1 to 1 43.7 74.8 82.2 86.3
1 to 2 35.0 71.8 82.6 89.5
2 to 2 38.0 74.6 84.4 90.5
Productivity % 1 to 1 48.6 83.2 91.3 95.9
1 to 2 38.9 79.8 91.7 99.4
2 to 2 42.2 82.9 93.8 100.5
A3
CPM 1 to 1 29.2 41.2 43.4 44.6
1 to 2 24.9 37.0 39.4 40.7
2 to 2 27.5 37.9 39.9 41.0
Productivity % 1 to 1 64.9 91.6 96.4 99.0
1 to 2 55.4 82.2 87.5 90.5
2 to 2 61.0 84.3 88.7 91.1
105ppm BLI Productivity
Letter
CPM 1 to 1 45.9 82.6 91.7 98.8
1 to 2 38.0 77.9 89.3 96.3
2 to 2 38.8 78.3 89.9 96.6
Productivity % 1 to 1 43.7 78.6 87.3 94.1
1 to 2 36.2 74.1 85.0 91.7
2 to 2 37.0 74.5 85.6 92.0
Double Letter
CPM 1 to 1 29.7 45.3 48.5 50.3
1 to 2 26.6 40.6 43.5 45.1
2 to 2 27.8 41.1 43.7 45.2
Productivity % 1 to 1 58.2 88.8 95.1 98.5
1 to 2 52.1 79.7 85.3 88.3
2 to 2 54.6 80.7 85.8 88.6
A4
CPM 1 to 1 45.9 83.6 93.2 98.9
1 to 2 37.9 78.1 89.6 96.8
2 to 2 39.2 78.8 90.1 97.0
Productivity % 1 to 1 43.7 79.6 88.8 94.1
1 to 2 36.1 74.4 85.4 92.2
2 to 2 37.3 75.0 85.8 92.4
DMR90B/105B
A3
CPM 1 to 1 30.2 45.5 48.6 50.3
1 to 2 27.2 41.0 43.8 45.3
2 to 2 28.1 41.4 43.7 45.4
Productivity % 1 to 1 59.2 89.3 95.4 98.7
1 to 2 53.3 80.4 85.8 88.8
2 to 2 55.0 81.1 85.7 89.1
(Notes)
1.Measured by BLI method.
2.Letter and A4 size paper are delivered from 1st tray.
3.Double letter and A3 size paper are delivered from 2nd tray.
4.Time are measured from hit start key till start key turns to green again.
ARDF Specifications

Stack Capacity 100 sheets or less than 12mm In 80g/m2, 20lbs Bond
Original Size A5 - A3(SEF)
Original Weight Simplex- Kick back mode
52- 156 g/m2 ,
Combine mode
40- 156 g/m2 ,
Duplex: 52- 128 g/m2 ,
Original Feeding Speed 80cpm A4 LEF or LT LEF
DMR90B/105B
Volume Specifications
DMR90B DMR105B
Unit life *1) 24,000K 27,000K
or 5 years which ever comes first or 5 years which ever comes first
Target ACV *2) 50- 400K 50-500K
ACV *3) 80K 190K
Max CV 400K 450K
Duty *4) 800K 1,000K
Target MCBC 105K (Full System) *5 105K (Full System) *5
PM cycle 350K
EM cycle 150K
*1) In the condition of P/J (Print per Job) = 25

Unit life of the machine is determined based on average P/J.
C/O (number of sets) x O/J (number of originals) = P/J (number of copies)
The more P/J you take, the machine unit life becomes longer.
*2) ACV range of target customers. (Please refer to 1.7 for conditions)
*3) ACV of the most major customers (Based on actual data of DMR85A/105A)
*4) Maximum usage volume in a month.
*5) In the condition of C/O = 5
Unit life of DMR90B/105B
1. (90ppm)
DMR90B
P/J Unit life Max CV Max CV
36 Months 60 Months
25 24,000K or 5 years which ever comes first 650K 400K
2. (105ppm)
DMR105B
P/J Unit life Max CV Max CV
36 Months 60 Months
500 37,000K or 5 years which ever comes first 1,000K 600K
Durability of the machine will also be affected by customers usage. For example, short
running time of the motor improves the durability of the machine. However, when P/J is less,
the intermittence (Start and Stop movement) will increase and the motor runs wastefully.
That means large number of P/J (= less intermittence) lead to improvement of durability.
However, in general usage, it cannot achieve 650K / month in P/J=25. For reference, the
table listed below is actual calculated data based on motor durability (6,000 hours) in various
job modes.
DMR90B/105B
DMR90B DMR105B
P/J Monthly CV TCV / 60 months Monthly CV TCV / 60 months
25 56K 3,360K 56K 3,360K
100 190K 11,400K 200K 12,000K
500 560K (33,600K) 600K 36,000K
*Conditions of Monthly CV & TCV (60 months):

Running time : 10 hrs/day
Running days: 20 days/month
Job intervals : 5 minutes
Durability & Reliability Comparison Data
(DMR90B/105B vs DMR85A/105A)
DMR90B DMR85A DMR105B DMR105A

CPM 90 85 105 105
Life 24M 15M 27M 15M
ACV 80K 80K 190K 120K
Max CV 400K 300K 450K 500K
MCBC 105K 80K 105K 85.7K
(PM) 350K 300K 350K 300K
(EM) 150K 110K 150K 120K
Longer Machine Life :
DMR90B/105B also uses Pipe Frames at major points of main frames and Rigid Frame
Structure at major points of joint as well as DMR85A/105A for more durability. In addition,
by reducing the line speed and interval between sheets in order to lighten the burden of the
running gear, the machine life increased to 24,000K (DMR90B) / 27,000K (DMR105B)
which is longer than DMR85A/105A.
The most Reliable Copier of NRG:
DMR90B/105B is targeted not only to achieve 350k PM cycle, which is higher than
DMR85A/105A (300K) and the longest PM cycle of any NRG machine, but also to achieve
150k EM, a higher reliability than DMR85A/105A (110K/120K).
DMR90B/105B
3000 sheets finisher with 100 sheets stapler (Name: SR840A)

Configuration Console type attached mainframe
Proof Tray (Stack capacity) All these data are in
500 sheets (A4 or smaller) 80g/m2
(Paper size)
A6 SEF A3 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 216g/m2
Shift Tray (Stack capacity) All these data are measured in
3,000 sheets (A4/B5 LEF) 80g/m2,
1,500 sheets (A3/A4 SEF, A5,
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
Tab sheets can be stored on the
(Paper size)
shift tray.
A5 A3 SEF
(Paper weight)
52 g/m2 216 g/m2
Stack Capacity with (Staple capacity per set) 80g/m2, With auto staple cut*1
stapler 2-100 sheets (A4/B5 LEF)
2- 50 sheets (A3, B4, A4 SEF,B5 SEF, *1)Extra portion of staple will be
cut automatically, depend on the
(Set Stack Capacity and size) number of sheet
Page /set No of set Size
10-100 200-30 A4/B5 LEF
2-9 150 A4/B5/LT SEF
10-50 150-30 A3, B4,
2-9 150
(Paper size)
A3 B5,
Stop during finishing Yes (by using Pause key) Feature name is tentative.
job
Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange 5,000 pins/ cartridge
Number of Punch Europe: 2 or 4 holes switchable *Punch unit option is required.
Power Source DC24V From Mainframe
Weight Less than 65kg / (Finisher only)
DMR90B/105B
Punch unit for Finisher SR840A (Name: Punch Unit Type 1075)
Punch unit Type 1075 Paper size
2&4 holes type (EU) 2 holes SEF A3-A5
LEF A3-A5
4 holes SEF A3, B4
LEF A4, B5
Paper weight 4 holes 52-128g/m2,
2 holes 52-163g/m2,
Optional Jogger for Finisher SR840A (Name: DOT 840)
The Jogger option is equipped with the SR840A (100 sheets staple finisher) to jog outputs
and make them tidy to be stored on the tray.
Jogger fence
Paper
direction
Output Paper
Side Fence
Shift Tray
Stack
DMR90B/105B
3,000 sheets Finisher with saddle stitch (Name: SR860A)

Proof Tray
Stack Capacity 250 sheets (A4 or smaller) Number of sheets are
50 sheets (B4 or larger) counted with 80g/m2
Paper size A5 A3 SEF, A6 SEF
Paper weight 52 g/m2 163 g/m2
(Upper) Shift Tray
Stack capacity 500 sheets (A4, A5 LEF) Number of sheets are
250 sheets (A3 SEF) counted with 80g/m2
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
Staple Capacity
Staple size A3 SEF, A4 Paper weight
Same paper size 50 sheets ( A4 or smaller) 64g/m2 90g/m2
30 sheets ( B4 or larger) Number of sheets
Tested with 80g/m2,
Mixed paper size 30 sheets ( A4/LT or smaller, A3 SEF)
(Lower) Shift Tray
Stack capacity 2,500 sheets (A4 LEF) Number of sheets are
1,250 sheets (A3/A4 SEF) counted with 80g/m2
500 sheets (A5 LEF)
100 sheets (A5 SEF)
Staple Capacity Paper weight
Staple size A3 SEF, A4 64g/m2 90g/m2
Same paper size 50 sheets ( A4 or smaller) Number of sheets
30 sheets (B4 or larger) tested with 80g/m2
Mixed paper size 30 sheets ( A4 or smaller, A3 SEF) Saddle stitch :
Saddle stitch (Size) A3SEF, A4SEF Centre 2 positions
(SEF only) 15 sheets (A3/B4/A4 SEF)
Saddle stitch position Centre 2 positions
Centre folding without stitch 1 sheet
Saddle stitch Replenishment Cartridge exchange 2,000 pieces/ cartridge
EU 4 holes- 8,000 sheets
Scandinavian 4: 8,000 sheets
Dimension (W x D x H) 700 x 620 x 960mm, 28x 24.8x 38.4
DMR90B/105B
Cover Interposer Tray Specifications (DCIT1075A)
Cover Interposer can feed the papers that are used for the front and back cover page.
2 types of Finisher can work together with this interposer.
This option is set between the mainframe and the finisher.

Paper Size EU: A3-A5
Paper weight 64 216g/m2
Paper capacity 200 sheets Counted in 80g/m2
Paper set Centre position
Dimensions 500 x 600 x 200 (mm)
(WxDxH)
Power consumption Less than 48W
Size change Touch screen
(Notes)
1. The option cannot feed slip sheets between OHP sheets.
2. Interposer is fitted between the mainframe and the finisher. No image can be copied nor
printed on the cover sheet.
Pick-up Roller
Feed belt
Interposer Tray
Reverse Roller
Pull-out
Sensor
Entrance Roller
Punch
Mainframe
DMR90B/105B
LCT Specifications
Tray Paper Paper Weight Remarks

Capacity
4th 1,000 sheets * Covers / 52-216g/m2 Universal
5th 1,000 sheets * Covers / 52-216g/m2 Universal
6th 2,550 sheets * Index / 52-163g/m2 Technician adjustment
Total 4,550 sheets

Tab Paper set Tray 4th,5th
Peel off paper set TBA
Paper Volume Sensors In 5 steps (including Near end)
Tray 4th,5th ,6th : 25%, 50%, 75%,
100%
Dimension (W x D x H) 540mm x 730mm x 980mm
Weight Less than 82Kg
DMR90B/105B
SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS
Toner / Developer / Drum Yield:
Item Target Yield Content Number of Remarks

Carton
Toner 55K copies/bottle 1,430g/bottle 4 bottles/carton Common to
DMR85A/105A
Developer 350K/bottle 1,000g bag 4 bags/carton Common to
DMR85A/105A
OPC Drum 360K copies/each - - Common to
DMR85A/105A
Staple - With 5,000 1 catridge/carton
Cartridge staple
Refill Staple - 5,000 staple 5 refills/carton
Notes:
Toner yield is based on 6% of Ricoh A4 test chart under normal machine conditions.
Yield will change with original, image size/type and machine operating conditions.
DMR90B/105B
As a leading manufacturer in producing environmentally friendly machines, you are able to
publish to your customers the following information. This covers noise levels, BAM
standards (which indicate whether a part is recyclable), environmental marks (e.g. Energy
Star, Swan etc.), power consumption, ozone & styrene emission levels and dust levels.
Sound Noise Level (Mainframe):
Sound Power: Sound Pressure:

Stand-by Less than 60db DMR90B Less than 54db DMR90B
Less than 65db DMR105B Less than 59db DMR105B
In operation Less than 74db DMR90B Less than 68db DMR90B
Less than 76db DMR105B Less than 70db DMR105B
Ozone Emission Level (In continuous copying mode):

Average: Less than 0/02mg/m3
Dust Level:

Less than 0.07mg/m3

TBA
Energy Star Default Specifications:

Item: EU Version:
Copy Mode Simplex to Duplex
Auto Off mode timer 90 minutes DMR90B
120 minutes DMR105B
Power Consumption:
Mainframe
DMR90B: DMR105B:
Operation Mainframe 2.5kW 2.6kW
System 2.6kW 2.7kW
Warm-up Mainframe 2.1kW 2.1kW
System 2.2kW 2.2kW
Stand-by Mainframe 0.65kW 0.65kW
System 0.7kW 0.7kW
Auto off mode EU 6W 6W
Recovery Less than 360 sec. Less than 360 sec.
Low power mode EU 340W 350W
(Energy saver mode) Recovery 40 sec. 40 sec.
DMR90B/105B
NRG Canon Xerox
DMR90B/105B IR8500/105 DC490ST
Basic Multi-Copy 90ppm DMR90B 85/105ppm 90ppm

Function Speed (A4) 105ppm DMR105B
First Copy Time 3.5sec. DMR90B 2.9sec. 6.0sec.
3.2sec. DMR105B
Document Feder 80cpm 80cpm 65cpm
Speed
Resolution 600 x 600dpi (Scan) 600 x 600dpi (Scan) 600 x 600dpi
1,200 x 1,200dpi (Copy) 1,200 x 600dpi
(Copy)
RAM 128MB 196/196MB 64MB
HDD 80GB (40GB x 2) 10GB 9.1GB
Paper Paper Capacity 3,000 sheets 4,100 sheets 7,100 sheets
Capacity (Std)
Paper Capacity 8,050 sheets 7,650 sheets 7,150 sheets
(Max)
Paper Weight Max 216g/m2 200g/m2 NA
from Bypass
Finisher Finisher Optional (2 types) Optional (3 types) Standard
Saddle Stitch Option Option NA
Paper Folding NA Option NA
Total Capacity 3,000 sheets 3,000 sheets 2,250 sheets
Staple Positions 4 positions 3 positions 3 positions
Scanner Scanner Function Option Option Option
Function Twain Option Option NA
Scan to e-mail Option Option Option
File Management Option Option Option
SW
Printer Printer Function Option Option Standard
Function PDL/PCL RPCS, PCL 5e/6, PS3 PCL 5e/6, PS3 PCL 5e/6, PS3
EFI Controller Option Option NA
Interface Ethernet Option Option Option
USB Option Option NA
IEEE1394 Option NA NA
Wireless LAN Option NA NA
DMR90B/105B
DPSK2105 CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS

GW Controller Specifications
Major Specifications (vs. DMR85A/105A Type A/B Controllers)
Printer Controller Printer Controller

Printer Controller EB-105e
Item Type 2150 Type 850
(DMR85A/105A/EFI)
(DMR90B/105B/GW) (DMR85A/105A/Peerless)
Print speed 90 / 105 ppm 85 /105 ppm 85 ppm
Type Embedded
CPU Duron 800MHz MIPS Type R7000 266MHz Power PC 740 266Mhz
<Standard> <Standard> <Standard>
IEEE1284 TypeC IEEE1284 TypeC IEEE1284
Ethernet 100 base-TX / 10 Ethernet 100 base-TX / 10 <Option>
base-T base-T Ethernet 100 base-TX / 10
Interface <Option> base-T
1.IEEE 1394
2.USB2.0
3.Wireless LAN
(IEEE802.11b)
Network TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Ether Talk
protocol Ether Talk, NetBEUI
RPCS, PCL5e / 6 PCL5e / 6 PCL5e, PCL6
Print language <Option> Adobe PostScript 3 <Option>
Adobe PostScript 3 (Genuine) PostScript 3
(Genuine)
Win 95/98, Win95/98, Win95/98,
Win ME, WinNT, WinNT,
Win NT4, Win2000, Win2000,
Supported OS Win 2000, Macintosh Macintosh
Win XP UNIX UNIX
Macintosh,
UNIX
RPCS: 200/300/600/1200dpi PCL5e: 300/600dpi PCL5e: 600dpi
PCL5e: 300/600dpi PCL6: 600dpi PCL6: 600dpi
Resolution
PCL6: 600/1200dpi PS3: 600dpi PS3: 600dpi
PS3: 600/1200dpi
Standard: 384MB Standard: 64MB Standard: 32MB
Memory
(with 256MB Option) Max: 128MB Max: 128MB
80GB (40GB x 2) RAID 4.3GB (on mainframe) 4.3GB x 2 (on mainframe)
HDD
6.0GB (on controller) <Option>
6GB (for Font Download)
SmartNetMonitor for Admin Printer Manager Ricoh Printer Manager
SmartNetMonitor for Client, EFI Fiery Link, WEB Tools Port Navi
Printer Utility for Mac, (WEB Status, WEB Spooler,
Utility IEEE1394 utility, WEB Link, Web Setup,
software USB Printing Support Installer), Fiery Downloader,
Agfa Monotype Font Mana- Fiery Spooler
ger 2000 <Option - EFI>
Plumeria-CW3 Lite, DocBuilder Pro,
Cherry SG2 Lite Command WorkStation
Localization RPCS/PCL: 12 languages PCL6 & PS3: 6 languages PCL: 9 languages
for PS3: 9 Languages PS3: 5 languages
Printer Driver
Major Specifications (vs. DMR90B/105B EFI / Model DMR60/75 Type 1075)
DMR90B/105B
Printer Controller Printer Controller Printer Controller

Item Type 2105 EB-105EX (DMR90B/105B Type 1075 (DMR60/75/GW)
(DMR90B/105B/GW) /EFI)
Print speed 90 / 105 ppm 90/105 ppm 60 / 75 ppm
Type Embedded External Embedded
CPU Duron 800MHz Pentium III 1GHz RM7000A(QED) 375MHz
IEEE 1284 Type C Ethernet 100Base-TX / 10 IEEE 1284/ECP
Ethernet 100 BaseTX/10 base-T Ethernet 100/10 baseTX
Base-T <Option>
Interface <Option> 1. IEEE 1394
1.IEEE 1394 2. USB 2.0
2. USB 2.0 3. Wireless LAN
3. Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11b)
(IEEE802.11b)
Network TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, Ether Talk TCP/IP, IPX/SPX,
protocol Ether Talk, NetBEUI EtherTalk, NetBEUI
RPCS, PCL5e / 6 PostScript3(Genuine), PCL5e RPCS, PCL5e / 6
Print language
<Option> /6 <Option>
PostScript3 (Genuine) PostScript 3 (Genuine)
Win 95/98, Win ME, Win 95/98, Win ME, Win95/98, Windows ME,
Supported OS Win NT4, Win 2000, Win NT4, Win 2000, WinNT4, Win2000,
Win XP, Macintosh, UNIX Win XP, Macintosh, UNIX WIN-XP, Macintosh, UNIX
RPCS: 200/300/600/1200dpi PS3 : 600dpi / 1200dpi RPCS: 300/600/1200dpi
PCL5e: 300/600dpi PCL5e: 600dpi PCL5e: 300/600dpi
Resolution
PCL6: 600/1200dpi PCL6 : 600dpi / 1200dpi PCL6: 600/1200dpi
PS3: 600/1200dpi PS3: 600/1200dpi
Standard: 384MB Standard: 256MB Standard: 256MB
(with 256MB Option) (with 128MB Option)
Memory
MAX: 384MB
(with 256MB Options)
HDD
80GB (40GB x 2) RAID TBA 40.0GB
DMR90B/105B
EB105EX CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS

Printer Controller EB105EX for DMR90B/105B
Controller Type External type
Maximum continuous print speed DMR90B: 90ppm
DMR105B: 105ppm
(A4, 1,200dpi)
Mother Board:
CPU Intel Pentium III 1GHz
Cache Level 2 cache (256KB)
Host Interface RJ-45 Network Port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) (standard)
Memory 256MB (standard and max.)
168 pin SDRAM: PC100, CL2, NonECC
Direct Access Storage Device
Internal HDD 40GB x 2 IDE w/RAID controller (not fixed yet)
CD-ROM Drive Rotational Rate: TBA (standard)
Operating System Linux
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto switching)
Printer Description Language Adobe PostScript 3 (standard)
PCL5e / PCL6* (standard)
Supported Driver Langauge PS, PCL5e and PCL6
(PLC5e and PCL6 printer driver is provided by NRG)
(Localization) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Dutch
Print Resolution PS3: 600dpi / 1,200dpi
PCL5e: 600dpi
PCL6: 600dpi / 1,200dpi
Scan Resolution Max. 600dpi
Fonts PS: 136 (126 Adobe type 1 fonts and 10 TrueType fonts)
PCL: TBA
Operation Panel The Operation Panel of the DMR90B/105B is commonly used for printer/scanner
functions such as Fiery Menu
(Localization) English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Dutch

Controller LCD The controller also has a small LCD. This is used only for technical services
such as re-install system software, upgrade system software etc.
Utility Standard:
Command WorkStation 4
Fiery Spooler (for Mac only)
Fiery Downloader
Fiery Web Tools
Fiery FreeForm2
Fiery Scan (Twain plug-in, Remote Scan)
Fiery Link
Optional:
DocBuilder Pro (includes PitStop PDF editing software)
Atlas PrintShopMail (Fiery version)
Pageflex Persona (Fiery version)
Note:
* In the back panel of the controller there are several interface ports such as Parallel Port, USB Port,
Keyboard Port and Mouse Port. These ports, though present, are non-functional.
The PCL driver is provided by NRG. Therefore, the user interface is different to that of the EFI
Unidriver but similar to the GW controller PCL driver.
DMR90B/105B
SR90/105 BOOKLET MAKER

Product Appearance:
CF90 Cover Feeder (Option)
SR90/105 Booklet maker

Folding up to 20 sheets
User Interface
One user interface
controlling the Booklet
TR90 Trimmer (Option)
maker and the peripherals.
Optional trimmer that
trims the front edge of the
booklet.
To provide an on-line booklet maker at a competitive price.

To provide a booklet maker suitable for application in Low-Mid CRD/PFP
DMR90B/105B
Positioning:
CRD Large-CRD
Plockmatic Mid-CRD
Bookletmaker
Small-CRD
Bookletfinisher
SR860
Walk-up
CPM
SR85 SR90/105
100
90 SR85 SR90/105
80
2000 2001 2002
SR90/105 will replace the SR85:
Unlike the Booklet makers of some competitors (like IR8500 & 7075), the SR85 was
positioned as a PROFESSIONAL Booklet maker. The SR90/105 is an even more
professional Booklet maker and we will keep our position in the market. The main
differences between our Booklet maker and the option from others such as Canon, Konica
and Minolta are:
Accurate and exact folding/stapling (staples exactly in the same place, in the
middle, and folds in exactly the same place, ensuring no difference between 1st
set and last set).
User adjustable if necessary (no technician required).
Suitable for short and long runs (most competitors can only do short runs, up
to 10-25 sets).
Possible to make sets of up to 20 x A4/A3 sheets (80 images). Competition
max. is usually 15 sheets.
DMR90B/105B
Online trimming is possible, using the TR90. Thicker sets (>4 sheets) can
look unprofessional because of creep. The TR90 will trim those edges (up
to 10mm). Most competitors do not offer this.
Competitive products are, feature wise, more comparable with the DMR60/75 and the SR860
for the above reasons.
The SR90/105 design has the following design targets / product concepts. The SR90/105
offers improved reliability, durability and User Friendliness.
Communication
More Durable Improvement
and Reliable
New User
Interface
Fold Quality Fully Automatic

Improvement System
New Stapling
System
More Durable and Reliable:
Possible monthly production volume has been increased by a more robust design. More
heavy-duty motors, higher quality ball bearings and an improved stapling section are features
directed to ensure high reliability.
DMR90B/105B
Fold Quality Improvement:
The famous Plockmatic dual action fold system has now been further improved. Optimised
fold pressure combined with increased fold duration will put the fold under increased
pressure. This gioves the SR90 the best and sharpest fold in the industry.
New Stapling System:
Clinchers, instead of anvils, in the stapling section will give the stapled output a professional
flat look, as well as an increased life and durability as mentioned above.
More Integrated Communication with the Machine:
The SR90 will have a more integrated communication with the DMR90B/105B. This means
that the operator will no longer have to worry about paper settings or directions. The booklet
maker will simply follow the commands from the copier and make the settings automatically.
The new soft stop feature means that all papers will now be fed out of the printer in
situations where the booklet maker has stopped. This will mean no more paper jams in this
situation!
New User Interface:
There will be only one user interface on the new SR90. All necessary settings that the
operator wants will be performed from there. It is simple to use. On top of that, the User
interface has been equipped with a job manager (Job Memory), where up to ten customised
(preprogrammed) jobs can be stored at one time.
Service will benefit from fault codes and a diagnostic system that has been built into the new
design.
Fully Automatic System:
Motors will perform all settings. No manual adjustments will have to be performed by the
operator.
Suppliers suggested sheets/booklet is 4 (16 page booklet)
Remarks:
Unit Life: 2 Million Booklets 16 Million Copies (4 sheets/booklet)
ACV: 20% of Engine CV Based on 20% usage for Booklets
Max CV: Not Specified 30K Booklets/Month (theoretical
figures)
Duty: Not Specified
EM Rate: TBA
PM Cycle: TBA
MTTR 1 hour or less
Durability and Reliability Comparison Data (SR90/105 versus SR85):

DMR90B/105B
SR90/105 SR85
CPM Copier Speed Copier Speed
Life 2M 1.5M
ACV TBA TBA
Max CV TBA TBA
MCBC TBA TBA
Longer Machine Life:
More heavy duty motors, higher quality ball bearings and an improved stapling section, with
clinchers. The clinchers will increase the life of the stapler head five times.
Sales Points and Major Features:
To Provide a Flexible Booklet making Solution for Small to Large CRD/PFP:

Attachment and detachment: You can resume all original features such as engine
finisher corner/side staple and punch within minutes.
Optional Trimmer and Rail Unit.
Offline Use: Standard feed to make booklet offline is possible.
Optional Cover Feeder for colour inserts.
To Provide a Professional Booklet:

High Booklet Making Quality that customer or CRD or PFP will accept.
Patented solutions for benchmark booklet quality.
To Keep Optimum Engine Productivity:

In any combination (A4 or A3, 2-20 sheets) the system maintains engine speed, so
attachment of the Booklet maker has no impact on the engines printing speed.
Communication with the Copier:

The new soft stop feature means that all papers will now be fed out of the printer
in situations where the booklet maker has stopped.
The booklet maker will simply follow the commands from the copier and make the
settings automatically.
The Booklet maker can receive paper size information from the copier and set-up
automatically A3 SEF / A4 SEF. This means less operator interference.
User Interface:
There will be only one user interface on the new SR90. All necessary settings that
the operator wants to do will be performed from there.
The User interface has been equipped with a job manager, where up to 10
customised jobs can be stored at one time.
DMR90B/105B
Configuration and Option Intercgangeability:
Configuration:
CF90 Cover Feeder (Option)
TR90 Trimmer (Option)
Belt Stacker (Standard Equipment) SR90/105 Booklet maker (Main frame)

Rail Unit (Option)
= Can be used for this model

Item: DMR90B/105B with SR840:
Booklet maker
Trimmer with SR90/105
Rail Unit with SR90/105
Cover Feeder with SR90/105
The system is dedicated to DMR90B/105B (90ppm and 105ppm). The Trimmer, Rail Unit
and Cover Feeder are sub options to the Booklet maker. They are installed with the Booklet
maker.
In order to attach the SR90/105 Booklet maker, the SR840 finisher is mandatory.
DMR90B/105B
Booklet maker Specifications:
Major Specifications:
Specifications: Remarks:
Speed (Online Usage) 2 A4 sheets from the copier 800 Maintain engine speed
books/hour
2 A3 sheets from the copier 500 Maintain engine speed
books/hour
Maximum Speed 50 booklets / Min (A4), 33 / Min (Off line usage)
(A3)
Standard Paper Sizes A4, A3 Custom sizes are
available
Paper Weight (Minimum) 64g/m2 Engone Duplex: 64g/m2
Paper Weight (Maximum) 240g/m2 Engine Duplex: 163g/m2
Input / Output Sheets 2-20 sheets (80g/m2 / equivalent) Stapled
Input / Output Sheets 2 sheets Non-stapled Folding
Off-line Use Possible Stitch / Fold (2 staples)
Weight 90kg or less
Dimensions (L x H x D) TBA Incl. Base and Stacker
Power Source 100/110/115/127/220/230 50-60Hz 10%
Power Consumption 200W or less Continuous operation
Quality Specifications:
Target Shut Down* 1/500 booklets or less 1/4000 copies
Fold Skew 0.7mm (A4), 1.0mm (A3)
Fold Variation 0.5mm
Fold Quality Less than TBAmm (A3, 80g/m2, 4 Maximum height
sheets)
Stapled Set 0.7mm Maximum
Registration
Staple Line Position Less than 0.5mm
Variation
* Shut Down: Finisher stops due to paper jam or staple jam
Attachment to DMR90B/105B:
Physical Connection Attached after SR840 (detachable) Bracket is standard

Attach by bracket (docking unit) accessory
Electrical Jam signal to stop DMR90B/105B (Hard stop) Two types of paper
Connection Jam signal to stop DMR90B/105B (Soft stop) size information:
Set signal from DMR90B/105B to start A3 SEF / A4 SEF
SR90/105
Paper size information from DMR90B/105B
DMR90B/105B
Option Specifications:
Trimmer:
Speed Same as SR90/105
Standard Paper Sizes Same as SR90/105 Custom sizes are available
Default Trim Length 4.5mm Adjustable
Minimum Trimming 0.5mm
Maximum Trimming 12.5mm
Paper Weight (Minimum) Same as SR90/105 Engine Duplex: 64g/m2
Paper Weight (Maximum) Same as SR90/105 Engine Duplex; 163g/m2
Input / Output Sheets Same as SR90/105
Off-line Use Possible Stitch / Fold / Side Bind (2
staples)
Weight 70kg or less
Dimensions (L x H x D) TBA Incl. Base and Stacker
Power Source 100/110/115/127/220/230 10%
50-60Hz
Cover Feeder:
Maximum Speed Same as SR90/105
Standard Paper Sizes Same as SR90/105
Paper Weight (Minimum) 70g/m2
Paper Weight (Maximum) Same as SR90/105
Cover Feeder Capacity 20mm (approx 200 sheets of
80g/m2 paper)
Off-line Use Possible Stitch / Fold / Side Bind (2
staples)
Weight 12.5kg or less
Dimensions (L x H x D) TBA Incl. Base, Stacker and CF90
Power Source 100/110/115/127/220/230 10%
50-60Hz
Supplies Specifications:
Yield:
Staple Cartridge: 5,000 staples / cartridge NEW

(2 staple cartridges per machine are required)
Interchangeability:
This staple cartridge is unique to this system and there is no interchangeability with any other
finishers.
DMR90B/105B
Standard Accessories List:
Included Items:
1. EPROM for SR840 finisher To install in SR840 finisher
2. Exit arm catcher To install on SR840 finisher
3. Template Used during the installation
4. Communication cable Between SR840 and SR90/105
5. Power cord For SR90/105
6. Shift tray plate To install on SR840 shift tray
7. Exit tray plate To install on SR840 finisher
8. Docking assembly To install under SR840 Base
1. EPROM 2. Exit arm catcher 3. Template 4. Com. cable
5. Power cord 6. Shift tray plate 7. Exit tray plate 8.Docking

assembly
DMR90B/105B
User Interface:
Configuration:
The READY screen will be shown during the run and when the machine is ready to create
booklets. The READY screen shows what the machine is set for. It shows the size, if it is set
for stapling, if it is set for trimming and if the user would like to add a cover. Users can
scroll up or down with the ARROW button (1) to select and highlight the item they would
like to change. There is an ESC button on all screens that will take you back to the previous
screen.
1 2 3 4
DMR90B/105B
Specification Comparison (Model SR90/105 vs. SR85):
Model SR90/105: Model SR85:
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
Unit Life 2000K 1500K
Booklet Speed Maintains engine speed Maintains engine speed
Custom Paper Size Yes No
Stapling / Folding Capacity
Input Capacity 20 sheets of 80g/m2 20 sheets of 80g/m2
Max. Staple Paper Size 11 x 17 11 x 17
Paper Weight (Minimum) 64g/m2 64g/m2
Paper Weight (Maximum) 240g/m2 163g/m2
Trimmer
Optional Trimmer Yes Yes
COVER INTERPOSER
Cover Interposer Yes Yes
FUNCTIONS
Automatic Size Adjustment Yes No
Job Manager Yes No
Change Paper Size 5 seconds 1 minute
Fold Quality TBA Lerss than 22mm (A3,
80g/m2, 4 sheets)
Controlled by one User Yes No
Interface
Languages Yes, 13 No
Diagnostics Yes No
DMR90B/105B
WHAT FITS WHAT

Nashuatec Rex Rotary Gestetner
Machine:
DMR90B 9005 9008 9002
DMR105B 10515 10518 10512
Supplies:
DT37BLK Toner
DD8BLK Developer
A294510 Drum
Peripherals:
BT2105 500 sheets Bypass Tray
DIF2105FW IEEE1394 Firewire
DIF2105TD Copy Connect Kit
DIF2105WI Wireless LAN
DME256MB2105 256MB Memory
DPSK2105 Print/Scan NIB Controller
DPS32105 PS3
DTK2105A3 A3 Tray Kit
DUSB2105 USB 2.0 I/F
SR90 Booklet Maker (Plockmatic)
SR90CVRFEED Cover Inserter Unit for SR90
TR90 Trimmer for SR90
SR840A 3,000 sheets Finisher
SR860A Finisher Booklet Maker
DCIT1075A Cover Inserter for SR860A
DHPU850S4 Swedish 2/4 Hole Punch Unit for SR840A
DHPU1090E 2/4 Hole Punch for SR840A
CSC810A Staple cartridge for SR840A
CSC810B Staple refill for SR840A
DOT840 Output Jogger for SR840A
DHPU451E4H 2/4 Hole Punch for SR860A
DHPU451S4H Swedish 2/4 Hole Punch for SR860A
CSC860A Staple cartridge for SR860A (for Booklets)
CSC860B Staple refill for SR860A (for Booklets)
CSC760A Staple cartridge for SR860A (normal stapling)
CSC760B Staple refill for SR860A (normal stapling)
DFFC2105B File Format Converter
CSCSR85 Staples for Plockmatic Booklet Maker
DMR90B/105B
Operator Instructions:
Mainframe: Print / Scan Kit: Language:
DDK2105GB OIPRSC2105GB English
DDK2105F OIPRSC2105F French
DDK2105D OIPRSC2105D German
DDK2105I OIPRSC2105I Italian
DDK2105S OIPRSC2105S Swedish
DDK2105N OIPRSC2105N Norwegian
DDK2105CZ OIPRSC2105CZ Czech
DDK2105H OIPRSC2105H Hungarian
DDK2105P OIPRSC2105P Portuguese
DDK2105PL OIPRSC2105PL Polish
DDK2105SF OIPRSC2105SF Finnish
Further, in depth information can be found in the Product Information Guide (PIG)
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DMRA07
DIGITAL WIDE FORMAT PRODUCT
Nashuatec A070
Rex Rotary A070
Gestetner A070
Launch Schedule
First Production Launch Country

July, 2001 September, 2001 Japan

July, 2001
Version 5
March, 2002
DMRA07
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 3
Market Situation (Europe) 5
Key Product Issues 6
Product Overview 7
Product Sales Points 8
Target Customers 12
Environment 14
Competition 16
Mainframe Specifications 21
What Fits What 24
Targeted Machine and Supply Yields 25
RW-470 Printer Controller (DIFPRC470W)
Introduction 28
Controller Option Configuration 29
Printer Features 34
Scanner Specifications 38

K:\Customer\Technic\NPSDOC\DMRA07.doc 2
DMRA07
INTRODUCTION
NRGI have experienced strong growth within the analogue wide format range over the last three
years and now our distributors are demanding a digital product.
The opportunity now exists to launch a new digital, wide format copier, which will enable us to
target increased page volume in wide format markets, as well as introducing the benefits of digital
technology to our wide format offering.
The current analogue models have proven to be extremely competitive and reliable machines and are
positioned at the low end of the market. They are particularly popular for their price, image quality
and user friendliness. This is more and more important, as inexperienced, non-specialists become
the typical user.
Competition in the digital market will come from Oce (64%), Xerox Engineering Systems (16%),
Mita (12%) and Kip (8%).
A huge percentage of the total units are sold by specialist sales people and not by general office
sales people, which further enhances the need for specialist sales people.
We now intend to improve the NRGI product offering with a move into the mid range of the digital
market with the launch of the A070.
This will provide us with a competitive product in a market where the higher page volumes offer the
opportunity to generate good supplies revenue.
DMRA07
1. To offer existing customers a total connected digital solution, to include their engineering
copying needs.
2. To extend a strong revenue stream of supplies in a market where pirates are absent and
margins can remain relatively high.
3. To obtain the same market share position in digital as has already been achieved in
analogue.
DMRA07
MARKET SITUATION (EUROPE)
General Background:
The wide format market in Europe continues to be affected by two trends:
1. A decline in the effectiveness of the specialist sales forces of Xerox and Mita, due to their
respective difficulties.
2. A move from analogue to digital technology.
As we launch this new model into our markets, we have to position NRG strongly as a digital
solutions provider for wide format. Our current channel has been demanding a digital product
and, therefore, we expect to have a ready market for this product from launch.
Digital Wide Format Europe Sales Results:
5000
4500
1995
4000
1996
3500
1997
3000
1998
2500
1999
2000
2000
1500 2001
1000 2002
500 2003
0
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003
Source Infosource: No Mita or XES data; Estimates 00-03.
DMRA07
KEY PRODUCT ISSUES
Key Selling Points:
Concurrent printing and scanning (with controller)

First machine to market with genuine 600dpi scanning
Noticeably better copy quality then selenium-drum (Xerox) machines
Easy to use, even for first time users Touch Panel Screen
Environmentally friendly OPC drum, toner in a cartridge, Energy Star, Energy Saver
Mode
Target Market:
The primary target markets for the A070 are:
Architects
Engineers
Design Agencies
Utilities
Local Government
Copy Shops
We should also approach customers who are currently using an A0 copier, or are paying
money to a Print/Copy Shop
DMRA07
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The A070 offers full digital functionality, printing and scanning concurrently with the controller fitted.
It has the following options available:
2nd Roll Tray (for 3rd roll)

Roll Holder
Copy Stacker
Hard Disk Drive (for electronic sorting)
Controller
The roll feeders are built into the mainframe, unlike previous analogue products.
Features that differentiate the product include:

1st to market with genuine 600dpi scanning
Touch screen LCD
5.4m/min engine speed
Simple paper setting technique
Printer and scanner combined in one box.
DMRA07
PRODUCT SALES POINTS
Copy Quality:
The A070 provides the first product in the digital wide format market with genuine 600dpi scanning,
giving excellent quality copies and the markets best quality scan. Copy Quality is a major concern in
the engineering market, where engineering drawings are often drawn to scale. The major issue for
all toner or ink-based copiers is the fact that Diazo, for all its faults, produces the best quality copy
of any copying technology.
Problems with Diazo:
Can only use translucent originals

Environmentally unfriendly, especially requiring special chemicals
Needs reasonably experienced user to get good results
Diazo copies need to be frequently re-copied
Diazo paper, though cheap, has a limited shelf life
No paste ups, duplex originals, or writing on the back possible
Key Copy Quality problems that users face include:
Shrinking of paper over time (many drawings are kept for 100 years or more)
Shrinking of copy paper especially when being fused
Changes in copies over a long run, caused by changes to the original, toner run out
Fading of ink drawings over time
Fading of Diazo copies over time
Reproduction of Diazo greyscales
Smudging of ink-based drawings when handled or used in the rain/damp
The need to copy with an increased margin on the leading and/or trailing edge to allow for
binding, folding, labelling etc
The A070 achieves consistent, high copy quality on a wide range of copy media, by a
combination of engine design items, which cannot be easily copied by
our competitors:
Unique 600dpi scanning resolution (can be digitally enhanced to

1200dpi)
A0 Wide Toner Cartridge distribution system
Mid-temperature with Pressure Fusing
Black Toner
Glass Contact Sensor
256 Grey scale scanning, 4 grey scale printing
DMRA07
Product Sales Points continued
Toner:
Oce has developed a rapid fusing system, which is also used in other Oce machines, and similar
technology is used by Canon in office copiers. One characteristic of these systems is the grey
quality of the toner once deposited. This has the effect of making further copies even greyer, with a
consequent reduction in accuracy. The Ricoh toner is black, avoiding this problem.
Toner Cartridge:
Oce supply the toner in a bottle, which is placed at one end of the machine. The toner then runs
along the entire length of the drum. On long copy runs, the toner may struggle to reach the far end
of an A0 copy and so later copies may have less toner on one side than the early copies.
The A070 has an A0 long toner cartridge, which is not only cleaner to use toner always remains
sealed but also ensures that toner is always available across the length of the copy.
Fusing:
The ideal fusing should combine low heat with low pressure to ensure that the copy paper does not
stretch nor shrink, together with high temperature and high pressure to make sure that the toner is
firmly welded to the paper.
Oce tries to compromise with a very hot fuser system (the Toast Rack), and no pressure at all. The
result is that any paper jams in the fuser section lead to a small fire (the fragility of the Oces
mechanism makes this much more likely than with a roller type fuser, as in the NRG model). All
Oce digital copiers come with a fire extinguisher for these emergencies. Even with this system, the
grey toner does not bond with the paper and is easily scratched off.
A070 has a heat and pressure system, which is a better compromise than the Oce system, and is
supported by much better optics than Oce or Xerox provide. The fusing can also be controlled by
the user, allowing selection to be made depending on the copy paper type. This means that NRG
copiers can also handle much wider paper weight and film thickness ranges than other machines.
Contact Sensor:
The contact sensor (scanner) of the Oce models is made of plastic and, as originals are frequently
pasted up, or dusty, this can be easily scratched. Once scratched, this will affect copy quality.
NRG copiers have contact sensors made of glass, which will withstand much rougher treatment than
plastic.
DMRA07
Ease of Use:
Again, this term is much used and, in the case of the A070, this is absolutely true. If the problems
with Diazo are that an experienced hand is required to get the best quality, digital toner copiers
provide a suitable alternative for normal office staff.
The A070 is one of the easiest copiers in the world to use:
Touch Screen LCD Control Panel the same as a normal office copier
Original side guides
Flange roll paper setting
Manual or Automatic original feed
Most productive
Speedy warm up time (2 minutes)
Side Guides:
The side guides help users to align the original in the centre of the copy roll. Amazingly, this feature
is not available on other manufacturers copiers, making it very difficult to feed large pieces of paper
centrally. Expert users often find them a distraction. The A070 has, as standard, original feeder
guides.
Flange-type Roll Paper Setting:
Current wide format feeders require that the paper roll is threaded onto a metal pole, and centred by
eye. This can result in mis-registration. The A070 has a revolutionary flange-type mechanism that
simplifies the changing of rolls, and allows inexperienced users to easily change rolls and to have
multiple rolls, beyond the capacity of the feeder trays.
Manual or Automatic Original Feeding:
First-time users will take more time than experienced ones to align a large original before starting to
copy. Automatic original feeding is necessary, especially for those making many copies. However,
Oce models only have a manual feed button and take the original as soon as this button is pressed,
while the user has only one hand on the original skews are the natural result with large originals.
Previous NRG wide format models had a variable delay after setting the original, but obviously if
there were many users this would only be optimised to one user. Now, the automatic feeding on the
A070 can be changed to manual feeding, so that any user can be confident that the original can be
placed in their own time.
DMRA07
Productivity:
Although Xerox, Oce and Kip all sell copiers in the mid range with engine speeds around 4-5
m/min, the A070 is the fastest in its class at 5.4m/min. Also tests have shown that the technology in
NRGs copiers will outperform similar engine speed machines. This is partly due to the ease of
setting the originals, partly due to the faster return of the machine to ready after a copy and partly
due to the much faster first copy time.
DMRA07
TARGET CUSTOMERS
Any person creating, reproducing or archiving paper documents bigger than A3 (420 x 297mm).
Document Volumes:
The volume of paper/film can be anything from 1000 copies per month to about 10,000 copies per
month for regular users signing a 3-5 year contract. The anticipated average monthly volume is
3000 copies.
Document Types:
These can be:
handmade drawings in pencil

ink drawings
CAD plots
Blue prints
Diazo prints
Sepia prints
Offset prints
(Although modern large documents are typically (re) produced on robust paper, older types of
documents can be flimsy, fragile, damaged and often changed by paste-ups, which make copying
harder.)
Industry Types:
In the creation of large documents, for the design areas of many industries, such as:
Engineering automotive, aerospace, oil & gas, plant (process & production factory),
Construction civil engineers, architects, contractors, labourers
Housing architects, designers, decorators, landscape gardeners, housing associations
Utilities supply electricity, water, gas, oil
Government land registries, utility management, town planning
Copy & Print shops supplying services to the above

Libraries company, private & public storing these records, typically for over 100 years
DMRA07
Target Customers continued
Replacing Equipment:
Target customers will be:
Existing Aficio customers with a need for digital Wide Format

Users of plotter + Diazo
Users of plotter + analogue Wide Format
Users of separate plotter and scanner
Customers with high image quality archiving requirements
Special Cases:
There may be special cases where a company specialising in document archiving or scanning wishes
to scan a large library of documents to create an electronic archive.. A070 would be ideal for this
type of project. Or, in a war/disaster zone, the need to make multiple copies of maps, utility
services, construction drawings etc. The A070 would also be ideal for a project such as this.
DMRA07
ENVIRONMENT
Office Friendliness:
More and more wide format machines are installed in normal office environments, side by side with
staff users, customers and buyers. Copy shops are typically office working environments and do
not want the environmental hazards of Diazo machines near workers for a full working day.
The A070 combines the most office, user and environment-friendliness of any digital wide
format device.
Unlike some competitors machines,

the A070 comes with wheels and, as it
consists of only one unit for both
scanning and printing, is easier to locate
in the office. For cleaning, recabling, or
any other move, the A070 does not
require special equipment.
Even the installation can be made

against a wall, as the A070 can be used purely from the front. The Oce needs space at the side for
toner replenishment.
User Friendly:
A070 is the simplest, easiest to use digital wide format copier. However, it is also friendly to users
in other ways.
The A070 has a simple touch screen LCD control panel, which makes it as easy to use as a
normal office copier.
When it is time to change toner, the cartridge system ensures that users never come into
contact with the toner.
In an emergency (for example, a mis-feed) the Emergency Stop button is easily found on the
Operation Panel, stopping the feeds immediately.
Any mis-feeds are easily cleared from the clamshell and rotating drum system, unlike the Oce
models, which also require clearing of the dangerously hot toast rack fuser system.
Inexperienced hands can also be reluctant to open up the fragile Oce models, but A070 is
simple and robust.
Setting new paper rolls is also made easier with the new flange type system.
A roll can weigh anything up to 26 lb/12 kg; with an A070, the user simply lifts out and
drops in the new roll - with competitive models the user has to crouch down and place the
roll with outstretched arms, again requiring confidence and experience.
DMRA07
Environment continued
Environmentally Friendly:
The drum is of the environmentally friendly, organic type; the toner comes in a cartridge, making it
much easier to dispose of cleanly than the bottle type of Oce. Both models are Energy Star rated
and have a selectable Energy Saver mode. All plastic parts are marked for recycling.
Environmental Improvements:
All data shown below is maximum figures. Actual figures achieved in analogue models
(CMRA08A) are in brackets:
Sound Power Level:
A070:
Working: 72dB (70.7dB)
Waiting: 52dB (54.7dB)
Less than 0.02 mg/m3 (0.008 mg/m3)
Dust Level:
Less than 0.075 mg/m3 (0.015 mg/m3)
Less than 0.07 mg/m3
TBA
(All plastic components that weigh more than 50g are identified according to ISO11469)
Environmental Regulation:

TBA Yes TBA TBA
DMRA07
COMPETITION
Oce:
Oce, with its European manufacturing base, and the largest MIF of Diazo machines, is the key
player in the European digital wide format market. Oce has a market share of about 64 % in the
digital market, partly as a result of having the largest MIF. Oce is in the process of updating their
product range to include extensive connectivity options with drivers for most commonly used
CAD/CAM packages. Oce offer a wide range of optional accessories such as additional roll
feeders (up to six). Their systems are modular with separate scanner and printer, apart from this one
weakness, their dominance of the market leads many customers to consider an alternative supplier.
Xerox (XES):
XES has a range of older models spanning 4 digital machines. Xerox systems are also modular
featuring a separate scanner and printer unit. Although it has the oldest product range, they also
have the widest product range of any of the 4 major manufacturers. However, their high end
machine is OEMd from KIP, giving us the opportunity to up sell their customers to our machine..
XES sales are in decline and have dropped to 15 %. As a non-core activity, Xerox Engineering
Systems is up for sale. XES employees are active in the employment market, seeking job security.
Ricoh:
Ricoh, although a leader in the Japanese market, has only a limited range in the European market,
and NRG currently takes the full Ricoh range of analogue products. Currently it takes about 20 %
of the European market. In terms of digital product Ricoh has been selling the Cetus (OEMd from
Mita) without great success due in part to territory limitations from Mita, and also because of the un-
competitive price and low duty cycle.
Kip:
Kip is the fourth manufacturer, with an 8 % digital market share. Kip is the European brand for
Katsuragawa Electric Co Ltd. In the US they have been sold as Shacoh, although this company
and its brand have been bought out by Kip. Shacoh also distributed Kip in Europe, but they have
been bought out by management and now call themselves Europoint. With a strong focus on the
solution, and a very wide range of product from many manufacturers, the Kip channel has grown
over the past few years, at the expense of the box-moving OEMs like Regma, Ozalid and Neolt.
DMRA07
Competition continued
Mita:
Mita sells mainly in Germany under its own brand and that of Utax, as well as other Germany-only
distributors like Sihl. In the rest of Europe it does not have a strong channel to distribute product.
As Germany is the largest market in Europe, this gives Mita a disproportionately large market share.
However the weakness of their Xi8020, especially its low duty cycle, provides NRG with an
opportunity in our markets where Mita are present.
European Wide Format Market Shares:
70
60
50
40
% Analogue
30 Digital
20
10
0
Kip Ricoh Xerox Oce Mita
As one of only 5 major manufacturers, NRG intends to continue to grow market share at the
expense of the major MIF holder Oce and weaker companies such as XES and Mita. NRGs
strong analogue range partly explains its market share in this area; its absence in the digital market
provides an opportunity to attack this area and attain a strong number two position.
DMRA07
Competition continued
Channels:
Both Oce and Xerox employ a large direct specialist sales force, these sales forces concentrate on
selling high end Digital solutions and only selected dealers are offered the opportunity to take these
products adding local or applications support. A good example of how manufacturer support is
provided is from the following recruitment advertisement from Oce UK:
Consultant Wide Format Printing Systems

Strategic Major Accounts Group
This role is required within the Wide Format Printing Systems (WFPS)
Division of Oce (UK) Limited, to build strategic partnerships within a complex
market that has complex selling cycles. This position will introduce "added
value" to the sales process by facilitating a consultancy service, which will
enable a solution sell. The key focus will be to provide high level support to the
Account Managers and Regional Managers within Oce WFPS and to utilise
new technology to exploit information management.
Areas of expertise will include:
Document Flow Analysis

Network Needs Analysis
Document Conversion Analysis
Solution Design incorporating third party products
Ideally you will have a complete understanding of the WFPS market, also you
will need to have a good understanding of business and information
distribution processes, full IT literacy is a pre-requisite for this position.
Your personal qualities will include: high communication skills at all levels,
good co-ordination / organisational skills and the ability to work under
pressure to tight deadlines whilst balancing the needs of several stakeholders.
The advertisement stresses the added value of a consultancy approach needed to succeed in this
business, as well as the business knowledge to understand both the customers document flow and
the technological process of document conversion.
The opportunity for NRG exists in the fact that we can provide a total document solution that
expands far beyond that which can be offered by Oce, Xerox or Kip.
We already have customers in Government and engineering, for example, who will be using wide
format machines; we can offer these customers the opportunity to completely centralize their
purchasing of office solutions. None of the competitors in this channel can offer that facility, as both
Oce and Xerox have separate divisions for wide format and KIP is a specialist.
DMRA07
COMPARISON OF DMRA07 vs. COMPETITIVE MID-RANGE DIGITAL COPIERS,

PLOTTERS
SPECIFICATIONS DMRA07 Ricoh 7030D KIP 2950 Oce 9600 Xerox 8830DDS
Description LED Plotter/Scanner/ LED LED Plotter/Scanner/ LED LED Plotter/Scanner/
Copier with External Plotter/Scanner/ Copier with External Plotter/Scanner/ Copier with
Copier with External controller Copier with embeddedcontroller
controller
controller External controller
List Price Euro 51,043 (UK) Euro 40,669 (UK) varies, e.g., 9600 Euro 45,017
approx. Euro
48,900 (excl.RF:
UK)
Price equivalent to Euro 30,000
mainframe
Max. CV (m/mo) 6,500 1,500 8,100 15,600 3,150
PRINTER
Speed (m/min or 5.4m per min. 4.8m per min. 4.8m per min. 5m per min. 4.5m per min.
A0/A1) 4 A0 / 7 A1 per min. 2 A0 / 3.5 A1 per 3.7 A0 / 7 A1 per min. 3.8 A0 / 7 A1 per 3.5 A0 / 7 A1 per min.
min. min.
Resolution 600dpi 400dpi 400dpi 400dpi 400dpi
Output Image Width 914mm 914mm 914mm 914mm 914mm
Max
Max Copy/Print 6m 5m 6m 15m 15m std; 24m
Length w/128MB SDRAM
# of rolls 2 to 3 36 x 500 2 to 3 36 x 2 to 3 36 x 650 2 to 6 36 x 2 to 3 36 x 500
500/650 500; 1-2 cassettes
(18x24)
Sheet Bypass yes yes yes yes yes
Development Dual component Dual component Mono component Dual component Mono component
Toner System cartridge Closed - bottle cartridge Closed - bottle Cartridge
Fusing Heat/pressure Heat/pressure Heat/pressure radiant Hot roller/fabric guide
Warm-up Time < 2 minutes <10 minutes @ 68F 9 minutes @ 70F instantaneous 2 minutes
Noise (operation) 72dB 63dB 65dB 68dB 67dB
Printer Weight (lbs.) 485 528 463 2-roll; 550lbs.; 6- 650
roll+1S.F.: 792lbs
Printer Size HxWxD 47 x 50 x 29 43.6 x 53.3 x 25 45.3 x 53.9 x 20.1 58 x 55 x 30 43 x 57 x 23
Print Exit/Rollfeed Front * back exit (2 Same side as rollfeed Opposite side from Opposite side from Same side as rollfeed
Access ways) (front exit) rollfeed (back exit) rollfeed (back exit) (front exit)
SCANNER
Minimum Original 8.3 8.5 8.5 8.5 4.5
Width
Maximum Original 36 36.2 36 40.7 41
Width
Automatic Exposure Yes as copier As copier, only yes yes Yes, AutoIQ scans
first 0.7
Resolution 600dpi as copier 400x400dpi 400x400dpi 400dpi 200, 300 or
150-1200dpi as scanner 400x400dpi
Gray Scale 256 n/a n/a n/a 33 gray scales
Magnification/Scale 25-400% (0.1-0.2%) 25-400% (1%) 25-400% (0.1%) 25-400% (0.1%) 25-400% (0.1%)
Margin Adjustment 8.0 2.4 (0.1 3.93 3.0 (in 0.1
increments) increments)
Scanning Speed 3.54ips 3.14ips 3.14ips 3.14ips 3.0 ips in line mode
Multiple Copies 1-99 1-19/99 1-99 n/a n/a
w/Scanner
DMRA07
COMPARISON OF DMRA07 vs. COMPETITIVE MID-RANGE DIGITAL COPIERS,

PLOTTERS contd.
SPECIFICATIONS DMRA07 Ricoh 7030D KIP 2950 Oce 9600 Xerox 8830DDS
SCANNER contd.
Multiple Copies n/a 1-127 n/a n/a n/a
w/Memory
Multiple Copies 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999
w/Controller
Scanner Size HxWxD n/a n/a 10.7 x 53.9 x 20.1 53.3 x 51.7 x 23 n/a
Scanner Weight (lbs) n/a n/a 134.5 311 n/a
SCAN-TO-FILE CONTROLLER
CPU n/a n/a
RAM n/a n/a
HDD n/a n/a
CD-ROM n/a n/a
PRINTER CONTROLLER
Scan-to-File external external external N5T
Thumbnail Scan/Plot standard standard n/a Standard Scan-to-Net
Viewer
View/Mark-up/Edit standard Included with n/a Creates JPEGs on
Software Powerprint Scan network retrieve
w/Doc. Retrieval Tool
CPU Dual Pentium II 400 MHz Dual Pentium II 450 MHz Pentium II, 350 MHz PowerPC 740, 200 MHz
RAM 192-768MB 256MB 128-256MB 64-192MB SDRAM
Hard Drive 9.1GB 5.1GB 4GB spooling; 9GB Standard 4.5GB Ultra
storage SCSI, 7200 RPM
Vector Input File HPGL 1/2, 906/907, opt. HPGL 1/2, 906/907 HPGL 1/2, 906/907 HPGL 1/2, 906/907
Formats DWG, DXF
Raster Input File HP-TRL, CALS 1&2, HP-RTL, CALS-G4, HP-RTL, CALS1, CALS1&2, TIFF6.0-G4,
Formats TIFF-G3/G4, BMP, WMF TIFF-G4, PCX & TIFF TIFF6.0, NIRS, C4 CGM, VDS, C4,
Packbits FileNET, HP -RTL
Automatic Data Format yes yes yes yes
Recognition
Automatic yes n/a yes yes
Scaling/Rotation
Automatic Size yes n/a yes yes
Detection
Plot Nesting none n/a
AutoCAD Drivers ADI v. 14, HDI (2000) n/a V.12, 13, 14 v. 12, 13, 14
MicroStation Drivers Windows 95,98, NT4.0 n/a n/a n/a
Windows Drivers Windows 95, 98, NT4.0 KIP Jet Windows driver Windows 3.x, 85, NT Yes
Pens 1-256 1-256 n/a 1-256
Pen Width 0.06-1.91mm 1-250 n/a
Pen Patterns 1-31 n/a n/a 1-64
Remote Job Queue Available through yes yes Yes, w/opt. Web Print
Management Windows NT Print Mgr Mgmt Tool
Job Accounting standard yes n/a Standard
PostScript 2 optional optional optional PostScript 1&2 (3-opt.)
Interfaces RS-232, standard Ethernet RS-232, standard RS-232, Centronics RS-232, IEEE parallel,
Ethernet parallel, optional VPI, SCSI-2, std
Ethernet 10/100; 100BaseTx; opt
optional Ethernet Ethernet 10BaseT,
10Base2, Token Ring 10Base2
Plot Autoposition yes n/a yes yes
Plot Rotation 0, 90, 180, 270 deg. 0, 90, 180, 270 deg. 0, 90, 180, 270 deg. 0, 90, 180, 270 deg.
Stamps Custom date, time Time, date stamp Name, time/date Name, time/date
DMRA07
MAINFRAME SPECIFICATIONS
(SEF: Short-edge feed; LEF: Long-edge feed)

(D LEF; E SEF)
Technology
Configuration : Console
Copying/Printing Process : Electro-photographic printing
Photo-conductor: OPC drum (970mm x 80)
Drum yield: 40K/A1 (24Km)
Charge system: Scorotron (corona charge)
Development system: Magnetic brush
Dual component dry toner system
Fusing: Heat and Pressure
Roller material: Heat roller: Teflon
Pressure roller: Silicone rubber
Fuser oil: Not used
Cleaning system: Counter Blade
PM cycle: 16.8K copies @ A1/D LEF (10Km)
Main Specifications:
Original feed: Sheet original
Original set position: Centre
Original image (scan) size: Maximum 914mm x 6,000mm
Minimum 210mm x 182mm
Copy size: Maximum 914mm x 6,000mm (6M: roll paper)
914mm x 2,000mm (2M) (Bypass feeding)
(Length: min.210mm from 1st roll tray
Min.250mm from 2nd roll tray)
Max. original width : 950mm
Original paper feed: 3 ways (Top, Top-rear, Rear straight path)
Copying speed: 4 cpm/ppm @ A0, 3.8cpm/ppm @E (SEF)
7 cpm/ppm @A1/D (LEF)
Copy Paper feed: Front and Rear : switchable
(Front) Internal output tray
(Rear) Copy Tray
Reproduction ratio: 1:1
Reduction/Enlargement:
Metric Version
Reduction 25, 35, 50, 71%
100% 100%
Enlargement 141, 200, 283, 400%
Zoom: 25% to 200% by 0.1% steps
200% to 400% by 0.2% steps
DMRA07
Mainframe Specifications continued
Resolution: 600dpi
Grey Scale: Scanning: 256 levels
Printing: 4 levels
Image density: Auto 7 steps, Manual 7 steps
Warm up time: less than 2 minutes (20C, EU:230V)
First copy time: 18 sec. @A1 (LEF), 25 sec. @A0 (SEF)
19 sec. @D, 26 sec. @E
No. of repeat copies: 1-99 (Ten key input)
Paper capacity (Roll paper): Max. Diameter: 175mm, Max. length:150M
Bypass feed
Output tray capacity: Front: 99 sheets @A1/D (Plain paper)
10 sheets @A1/D (Application paper)
Rear: 10 sheets @A0/E, A1/D (Plain paper)
1 sheet @A0/E, A1/D (Application paper)
Paper cut method : Synchronized cut, Preset size cut, Variable cut
Memory Capacity: 160MB (equivalent to 1 x A0/E size)
HDD (optional): more than 4.3GB
Power source: EU 220V-240V, 50/60Hz, 10A
Maximum Power Consumption: EU less than 1.76kw
Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,260 x 740 x 1,200 (mm)
Weight: 220Kg
Special features:
Selection of original type:

Letter mode: Standard
Letter/Photo mode: Standard
Photo mode: Standard
Pale mode: Standard
Generation copy: Standard
Job program: Standard (20 jobs)
Interrupt job: Standard
Paper selection: Auto Paper Selection (standard)
Auto magnification selection: Standard
Editing: Overlay
Mirroring
Negative/Positive
Erase
Image Shift
Double copy
Repeat copy
Margin adjustment: Standard 0 to +/- 500mm (by 1mm step)
DMRA07
Mainframe Specifications continued
Electronic sort: Number of pages to be stored
Size Standard Memory Optional HDD(4.3GB)

A0/E 1 50
A1/D 2 100
A2/C 4 100
A3/B 8 100
A4/A 16 100
(1) With optional HDD, the number of pages to be stored is minimum.

(2) The number is subject to the image coverage.
(3) Inch: ANSI
Restart key: Standard

Emergency Stop: Standard (key)
Proof copy: Standard
Check copy: Standard
Operation Panel:
Feature Selection: Touch Panel LCD (240 x 640 dot)

Guidance languages (6): English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Dutch
DMRA07
WHAT FITS WHAT
Machine Description Nashuatec Rex Rotary Gestetner

DMRA07 Digital Wide Format Product A070 A070 A070
Peripherals / Options
DRT2NDA07 2ND Roll Tray

DRHLDA07 Roll Holder
DHDA07 Hard Disk Drive (4.3GB)
DSTA07 Original Stacker
DIFBRD470W I/F Board Use with Controller
DIFPRC470W Print Controller 1 to 1 with I/F Board
DSWL470SCO Scan Option
DSWL470PS3 PS3
DSWL470CGM CGM Option
DSBA070 Stamp Board
DDKA070GB Operator Instructions DMRA07 English
DDKA070F Operator Instructions DMRA07 French
DDKA070D Operator Instructions DMRA07 German
DDKA070I Operator Instructions DMRA07 Italian
Supplies
Yield:
DT70BLK Toner Black (800g) 2,200/A1
DD70BLK Developer Black (1,200g) 67,000/A1
DOPC70 OPC Drum 40,000/A1
DMRA07
TARGETED MACHINE AND SUPPLY YIELDS
Supplies:
Description: Ordering Code: Yield:

Toner Black DT70BLK 2.2K/A1
Developer Black DD70BLK 67K/A1
DOPC70 OPC Drum B0109510 40K/A1
Note: Yields quoted using 6% original
Machine:
Unit Life: 60 months or 657K/A1 copies (390Km)
Average Monthly Volume (AMV): 2,530/A1 copies
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV): 10,940/A1 copies
Duty Cycle: TBA
Recommendation:
It is recommended that machines are placed to handle MMV and NOT Duty Cycle
DIFPRC470W
TYPE RW-470
PRINTER
CONTROLLER
(Product Code: DIFPRC470W)
DIFPRC470W
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 28
Controller Option Configuration 29
Printer Features 34
Scanner Specifications 38
DIFPRC470W
INTRODUCTION
Accelerate AD Conversion:
The needs of wide format users are now moving to electronic formats such as CAD. The target of
printer controller type RW-470 is to accelerate Analogue to Digital conversion of wide format
products and offer wide format users high quality printing, scanning and archiving solutions.
Replace Wide Format Inkjet Plotters:
Printer controller type RW-470 will enable the A070 to replace wide format plotters. One of the
most popular wide format printing devices is the inkjet plotter but most of the inkjet plotters take
minutes to print out one page of A1/D sized document. However, the A070 will offer high
productivity of 7ppm (A1/E) output, with 600dpi crisp image quality and also save costs by using
toner instead of expensive ink cartridges.
The printer controller type RW-470 is developed by Ratio, a German company that has high
experience in wide format plotter development. They also provide a wide range of scanning and
software solutions.
DIFPRC470W
CONTROLLER OPTION CONFIGURATION

Product: Notes:
(Type 470 Interface Option) Mandatory to connect A070 mainframe and printer controller
(server PC).
Printer Controller Type RW-470 Printer controller board with drivers and utilities.
(Scanner Option) Option to enable scanner function.
(PostScript 3 Option) Option to enable printing PostScript files.
(CGM Option) Option to enable printing CGM files.
(Operation Manual Kit) Included with printer controller on CD
Server PC (procured locally) Not included in the controller.
Required PC spec is,
l OS: Windows2000 Professional
l CPU: Pentium III 800Mhz or higher
l HDD: 10GB or more
l RAM: 512MB or more
l FSB: 133Mhz
l Display Controller: 1024x768 pixels resolution
l CD-ROM drive
l Network Interface
Required spec of Pentium4 server l OS: Windows2000 Professional (SP1 or 2)
PC l CPU: Pentium4 1.4Ghz (Minimum spec) or higher
l RAM: 256MB or more
l PCI Slot: PCI2.0 x 1 slot (with +5V power supply)
l FSB: 133Mhz
l Display Controller: 1024x768 pixels resolution
l Network Interface: 10/100 Base T, TCP/IP configuration
l Recommended Mother Boards: intel 845, intel 845D, VIA
P4X266, SiS 645, SiS 650(SD), SiS 650 (DDR)
Note: Pentium III PCs are still supported. AMD Athlon series
CPU is not supported. Intel 850 is not supported. P4M266 is not
supported.
l Recommended Chipset: Intel 845, Intel 845D, SiS650
Note: Intel 850 chipset is no recommended
DIFPRC470W
A070 mainframe Server PC
Plot Control
Software
A070 Engine Server PC
Engine I/F Controller

Board Board
Internal
Video I/F
IMPORTANT!!!
Scanner option, PS3 option and CGM option only includes licence document.
Software modules for these options are already installed in the controller board, but protected by
key codes (they cannot be activated unless you type in the key code)
The licensed document has the individual licence number printed.
Customer should access Ratio WEB site and submit their licence number to receive key codes.
To receive the key code, you need to type in Controller Board serial number & licence number.
DIFPRC470W
Type RW-470 (DIFPRC470W) Remarks

Controller type External (server PC type) Requires Win2000 Professional
Service Pack 1
Interface slot PCI2.0 or higher 3.3V or 5V auto PCI slot must accept
adaptive, maximum load 5A. BUSMASTER transfer.
Maximum continuous 7ppm@A1/D size
print speed 4ppm@A0, 3.8ppm@E size
Maximum print size 914mm x 6,000mm
note) max. length depends on RAM &
status.
Scan
Only: Plot: Simultaneous:
256MB 2072 2072 1036
512MB 6000 6000 3140
768MB 6000 6000 6000
1GB 6000 6000 6000
Paper capacity Please refer to the DMRA07 mainframe
specification.
Output capacity Please refer to the DMRA07 mainframe
specification.
CPU Pentium III 800Mhz or higher required. Depends on server PC
specification.
RAM Minimum 512MB required Depends on server PC
specification.
HDD Minimum 10 GB required Depends on server PC
Features using HDD are, specification.
l Collation
l Click charge management
l Data maintenance (Job history)
l Spooling, cache for print
l Sample print,
l Secure print
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, lpr/lpq, HTML, SMB Depends on server PC
specification.
Resolution 600dpi
Output file format Standard: DWG format printing requires
TIFF(uncompressed/G3/G4), T6X, BMP, AutoCad2000i
CIT, RLC, HPGL/2, HP/RTL,
Calcomp906/907, PCX, WMF, CALS,
DWG
Option:
PostScript 3, CGM
DIFPRC470W
Client software :
On this controller, different clients (printer drivers) are supplied. Every print must be created by one
of following clients:
Type Description Platform

RW-470 PLOTBASE Server Software Win2000 Professional SP1
RW-470 PLOTCLIENT/WIN Standalone Client Software Win95/98, NT4.0, 2000, Me
RW-470 WINPRINT Windows Printer Driver Win95/98, NT4.0, 2000, Me
RW-470 AutoCAD System Driver AutoCAD13/14/2000/2000i/
PLOTCLIENT/HDI/ADI LT2000/LT2000I
RW-470 PLOTCLIENT/WEB HTML Client for internet/intranet access Netscape Navigator 4.0 6.0
MS internet Explorer 5.5
RW-470 PLOTCLIENT MAC PPD file for MAC Mac OS 9.x
SCANTOOL Standalone scanning tool Windows 2000 professional
(server PC)
DIFPRC470W
Print data flow:
HTML UNIX Shell ftp, Windows AUTOCAD SCANTOOL

BROWSER nfs, Application
Win-explorer
PLOTCLIEN lpr WinPrint PLOTCLIEN PLOT
T/WEB T/HDI/ADI CLIENT
PLOT PLOT PLOT

CLIENT CLIENT CLIENT
CLIENT
SERVER
CFG or SSL-Spool
CFG-READER SSL-READER
USER INTERFACE
Command and process
JOB QUEUE / control (security and test
PRIORITY DATABASE print)
PLOT
CLIENT
RIP cache JOB --> Single page converter / sorter / EXTERNAL

DWG
rasterizer
CONVERTER
DIFPRC470W
PRINTER FEATURES
Feature Description
Auto paper size Automatically determines the size of actual image data dimension and selects
select smallest paper size available.
Media selection Controller offers selection of following media types.
(Paper type Ignore (= any of the following)
selection) Plain paper
Recycled paper
Translucent
Film
Roll select Specifies the tray.
Auto
1 (roll)
2 (roll)
3 (roll)
Bypass
Limitless paper feed 3 settings available.
-OFF
no limitless paper feed.
-SAME SIZE
switching only to alternative roll of same size and media.
-SMART
switching to any alternative that gives same output.
Image rotation Automatically rotates the image to fit to the paper size.
Output tray select Client can select output tray from front tray, back tray or system default.
Default: front tray
Multiple copy 1-99
Collation Sorted automatically in server PC under windows printer driver.
Maximum 5 pages of A0/E size document as 1 set.
Secure print By specifying from driver, server holds the data without paper output and
start output by operating from server PC.
Trial print By specifying from driver, printer only outputs one copy of multiple set, and
(sample print) holds the data. After trial, the rest of the copies will be output by operating
from server PC.
Image rotation By 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees.
Automatic rotation available for paper saving and SMART limitless print.
Magnification (zoom) By standard size
By percent value (1-999%)
By specified size
Border setting Prints frame around the image.
Mirror setting Available X and Y direction.
DIFPRC470W
Printer Features continued
Pen setting In case of output of vector data, pen setting can be defined by user.
HPGL/HPGL2, Calcomp 906/907
Pen numbers 0 to 255
Pen thickness in mm or inches or pixels
Grey scale level 0 to 100%
Stamp setting Text Stamp
9 positions (top left, top centre, top right, centre left,,,,,,,,,,,, bottom right)
font style and size selectable
Enhanced stamp
Macro stamping (time, date, filename, etc.)
User defined position
Stamp rotation available (0 359 degrees)
Text-Logo merge and multi stamp available
DIFPRC470W
Client / Feature matrix:
Feature
Plot WIN Plot Plot SCAN
TOOL
Client PRINT Client Client
ACAD WEB
Auto paper size select Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Medium selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(Paper type selection)
Roll select Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Limitless paper feed Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Image rotation Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Output tray select Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Multiple copy Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Collation No No No Yes Yes
Secure print Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Trial print Yes Yes No Yes Yes
(sample print)
Magnification Yes No Yes Yes Yes
(fixed format)
Magnification Yes No Yes Yes Yes
(percentage)
Magnification Yes No No Yes Yes
(custom dimension)
Border setting Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Mirror setting Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Pen setting Yes No No Yes No
Text Stamp Yes No Yes Yes Yes
Enhanced stamp Yes No No No Yes
DIFPRC470W
Printer Features continued
Others:
Feature Description
CFG spool TBA
SSL spool TBA
Click charge utility Utility software is installed on server PC and manages the following items.
l User name or ID code
l Media type
l Paper size (length and width)
l Number of print
l Time record
Status monitor Utility software is installed in client PC and available to confirm the printer
status on network.
l Working/error status
l Controller hardware configuration
l Controller software configuration
DIFPRC470W
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
Type RW-470 (DIFPRC470W) Remarks

Controller Type Same as printer controller spec.
Maximum continuous 7ppm@A1/D size SEF
scan speed
Resolution 150 1200dpi
Scan size 210 x 182 914 x 6,000
File format TIFF(uncompressed/G3/G4), T6X, BMP,
RLC, HP-RTL, PCX, CALS1&2
Scanner software SCANTOOL software Scanning software for server PC.
Scanner features:
Feature : Description:
Contrast setting Level to 7
Reading area setting Auto, Fixed form, User define
Mirror Mirror in X axis.
Invert Black <-> White invert
Rotation 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees
Scan modes Single copy mode
Scans one original into memory.
Set copy mode
Scans one original into the memory and waits for next original until operator hits
the stop button. Controller automatically generates a set of scan data.
Batch scanning mode
Scans one original into the memory and waits for next original until operator hits
the stop button. Controller automatically generates the file name and saves all
data to the disc.
Scan to archive mode
Same as Batch scanning mode, except that after every scan, controller asks the
operator to fill in file name.
Integrated editor l Zoom in and out
l Crop image to user defined extent
l Crop data to predefined format
l Cut and paste between Windows applications
l Merge data with other image data
l Erase rectangle
l Fill rectangle
l Draw line
l Enter text in four orientations
l Erase data by eraser utility
Version 1.11
Printers
C7005P C7006 C7006W C7006DW
DSc38 DSc38U PCR10 PCR16
PML16 PML19B PML19BN

PML16 PCR10
PMR26
PMR26N PMR32A PMR45A
Memory Matrix
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
A3 COLOUR LASER PRINTER

FRESA PS
Nashuatec C7005p
Rex-Rotary C7005P
Gestetner C7005p
Launch Schedule
Launch Month Country Of Origin
September, 1999 Japan

November, 1999
Version 1
C7005p
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Selling Points And Benefits 6
What Fits What 22
Whats In The Box 23

K:\Department\Market\Users\Julie\NPS drafts\C7005p 1
C7005p
Introduction
The C7005p is an A3 colour laser printer, which is designed specifically for the
specialist/professional colour user.
The C7005p along with the C7005w are the first NRG Group manufactured A3 colour laser
printers to be launched by NRG International Ltd.
The C7005p prints at 5 ppm Full Colour and 17 ppm Mono.
The Colour Market
The colour printer market grew by 42% in 1998.
Colour Page Printers

W. European Market Forecast 1996 - 2002
Unit Shipments (000s)
200
Rest of Europe
UK
150 Switzerland
Sweden
Spain
Portugal
100
Norway
Netherlands
Italy
50 Germany
France
Finland
0 Denmark
1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 Belgium
Year Austria
End user prices are massively eroded.

Distinct categories are now established both vertically (home and professional markets)
and horizontally (inkjet, electrophotographic and thermal transfer markets).
The thermal transfer market is being squeezed out.
Price points are low in the inkjet market, but there are marked improvements in output
quality.
There are few manufacturers and brands in the desktop colour page printer market.
C7005p
Product Overview
Basic Specifications
Specification C7005p
Engine Speed (FC/BW) 5/17
First print speed (FC/BW) 30/14 secs
Warm-up time 450 secs.
Paper Capacity 300 sheets std.
1,300 sheets max.
Paper Weight 64 163 g/m 2
Paper Size A3 wide / 13 x 18 A6
By-pass tray Std. 50 sheets
Print volume (month) 25,000 mono
6,250 full colour
NIC Std. Ethernet 10/100BaseTX / 10 Base5
Token Ring Optional
Memory (Std./Max) 32 MB / 160 MB
HDD Optional 1.6 GB
PDL Adobe PostScript 3
PCL5C/5e
PS font Adobe
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Gradation 1, 2 bit
Colour Management PostScript CRDs
Press simulation control
Device profiles
Calibration Visual Colour Calibration (VisualCal)
Network Management Aficio Manager
Utility Fiery Web Tools
Mainframe
C7005p
Mainframe and optional paper feed units
Operation Panel
Bypass Tray
(50 sheets)
Standard Paper Tray

(250 sheets)
Optional Paper Units

(2 x 500 sheets)
Operation Panel
C7005p
Target Markets
Segment: Specialised business
Graphic design companies, and advertising agencies, for example, and
Copy/Print Shops, and in-house copy centres.
Main usage: Colour proofs, catalogues, leaflets, presentations, direct mail, greeting
cards, A3 size, for example.
Specialist Business Environment
Colour application and usage of colour already exists in this environment, and the
customers requirement for quality and productivity is forever on the increase.
Main colour requirements for these users include very high image quality, PC connectivity,
cross-mark printing, and reliability.
Typical businesses/departments are: Graphic Designers, Advertising Agencies, Planning
Office, Engineers, Copy Service.
There can be much higher instances of Macintosh computers over PCs in this environment
(different to the general office environment where PCs are king).
Application software will include Adobe Photoshop, QuarkXpress, Adobe Illustrator, and
Adobe PageMaker, for example.
DTP is the mainstream of digital printing in this environment, but the print-for-pay market
is also expanding.
Another rapidly developing area is that of the Internet and Intranet, Web Publishing and
printing.
On-Demand Colour Printing
The most obvious use for colour printers may be to tidy up black/white documents, however,
these machines can also offer an alternative to commercial printing. Instead of having colour
brochures printed on an offset machine, a user could start producing them on a just-in-Time
basis on their own laser machine.
While the per-page cost of an on-demand colour laser print may not be any lower, the user
could avoid the storage costs and wastage typically associated with producing long runs of
promotional literature. Materials can also be kept up-to-date, and personalised to the needs of
recipients.
C7005p
Selling Points And Benefits

High Speed Printing
F/C : 5 ppm
B/W : 17 ppm (A4 LEF)
The first print speed of Fresa is much faster than that of the current and new competitors
models thanks to its Short Paper Path2 design. This is particularly useful when printing one-
off proofs. (The figures for QMS 330 and Phaser 780 are based on Epsons model using the
same Fuji Xerox engine. The figures for HP CLJ8500 are based on Canons model using the
same Canon engine.)
Fresa PS HP CLJ Xerox QMS 330, Phaser 780,

8500 C55 Xerox-4LP, Epson LP8000C
First print Mono 14 19 - 25
speed (sec.) Colour 30 35 - 48
PPM Mono 17 24 12 16
Colour 5 6 3 4
High Image Quality

600 dpi x 600 dpi
The Fresa prints with an outstanding image quality all kinds of colour data including colour
photographs and drawings, thanks to 600 x 600 dpi resolution and 256 colour gradations. The
toner particles are as small as 5.5m. (HP CLJ8500: 6.5m). Black text is pleasant to the eyes
because it is not glossy compared with existing competitors colour laser printer s. Thin Line
mode available in the Fresa Win IPDL-C driver is not supported by C7005p. However,
selecting the Detail setting for Halftone Graphics tab in the PostScript driver will help to print
fine lines or thin diagonal lines clearly , which is very useful for CAD drawing or design offices.
EFI Controller
The C7005p has an embedded EFI Fiery controller enabling reliable, high performance colour
printing. Genuine Adobe PostScript 3 ensures compatibility with all software applications and
accurate colour management. Reliable network connectivity comes as standard enabling
workgroup colour printing direct from the desktop. With an optional hard disk, the Check &
Print function is also available.
Fiery WebTools
Ideal for both Internet and corporate intranet applications, Fiery WebTools enable job
management from any platform via a Java-enabled Web browser. All job control options
such as job merging, editing, and previews, as well as information on the status of jobs are
accessible through Fiery WebTools. With Web Set-up, administrators can even configure a
Fiery remotely.
C7005p
Versatile Paper Handling
Up to two optional 500 sheets paper feed units can be added to the C7005p enabling a
maximum of 1,300 sheets input capacity and a variety of up to four types of media to be
installed in the paper trays for total flexibility. For example, A3 oversize paper, headed note
paper, white A4 copy paper and OHPs can all be stored in the C7005p printer enabling a
workgroup to print on a variety of media over the network without having to change paper
within the trays.
A3 Full Bleed Printing On A3 Oversize Paper
The C7005p achieves A3 full bleed printing on A3 oversize paper up to 13 x 18. Therefore,
the user can print proofs, floor plans, etc. Advertising agencies, graphics designers, etc will
appreciate this feature.
High Image Quality On Heavier Media
When the user selects OHP Mode or Thick Paper Mode in the printer driver, the fusing speed
decreases to ensure high image quality on OHPs or thicker paper. This results in a slower
print speed. When the OHP transparency mode is selected, paper is automatically inserted
between each OHP transparency to prevent them from being stuck together.
C7005p
Engine Specifications
C7005p
Configuration Desk Top
Technology Laser Beam & Dry, Single-Component Electro-Photographic
Printing
Resolutions 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 2 bits / pixel
Throughput A4/LT (LEF) F/C: 5 ppm B/W: 17 ppm
A3 F/C: 2.5 ppm B/W: 11 ppm
Transparency F/C: 1.1 ppm B/W: 1.6 ppm
Thick media F/C: 2.3 ppm B/W: 3.8 ppm
First print speed F/C: Less than 30 sec., B/W: Less than 14 sec.
Dimensions (WxDxH) 660 x 575 x 475mm without expander tray
Input capacity Standard: 250 sheet cassette
+50 sheet bypass tray (80g/m)
Optional: 50 sheet Paper Tray x 2 (80g/m)
Max.: 1,300 sheets
Output capacity Face down stacking: 250 sheets (80g/m) A4
100 sheets (80g/m) for paper larger than A4
Paper size A3 wide (330mm x 457mm)
- A6 (105mm x 148mm)
Duplex printing None
Max. printable area 321.7mm x 448.7mm
Non printable area 4.3mm (This may vary depending on paper size, printer
language and printer driver settings. For thick paper, 7mm for
trailing edge.)
Paper weight Tray (Friction Pad) : 64-105g/m
Bypass (FRR) : 61-163g/m
Rating power spec. EU version : 220/240v, 50/60Hz
Power consumption Max. : Less than 1,200w
Energy Star mode : Less than 45w
(Possible set-up; every 30, 60, 120, 180 min. and off)
Warm-up time Less than 450 secs.
Safety standard EU version : EN60950
Laser/EMI standard EU version : EN60825/EN55022:1994+A1:1995,EN50082-1
Duty (prints/month) 15k prints for monochrome, 3.75k prints for colour. Can be
increased to 25k prints for monochrome/ 6.25k prints for colour
with a remark that if continuous prints of multiple pages are
made, toner scattering may occur.
Durability (life) 300,000 prints (based on colour ratio 50%) or 5 years
whichever comes first.
C7005p
Mechanical Noise Level

(Based on the Ricoh internal measurement. Sound Power Level)
Stand-by: 43dB or less

In Operation: 64dB or less

(Based on the Ricoh internal measurement)
Avg. Density : 0.04 mg / m 3 or less
Dust Level
(Based on the Ricoh internal measurement)
Avg. Density : 0.075mg / m3 or less
C7005p
Paper Handling
Paper Capacity
The C7005p comes as standard with a 250 sheets paper feed unit which will handle media
from A5 to A3 oversize (13 x 18) and from 60-105g/m . A standard bypass tray will also
take 50 sheets (80g/m) and will handle A6 to A3 oversize (13 x 18) and heavier media (60-
163g/m) such as OHPs and card stock.
Up to two optional 500 sheets paper feed units can be added to the C7005p enabling a
maximum of 1,300 sheets input capacity and a variety of up to four types of media to be
installed in the paper trays for total flexibility. For example, A3 oversize paper, headed note
paper, white A4 copy paper and OHPs can all be stored in the C7005p printer enabling a
workgroup to print on a variety of media over the network without having to change paper
within the trays.
OHP Mode/Thick Paper Mode
When the user selects OHP Mode or Thick Paper Mode in the printer driver, the fusing speed
decreases to ensure high image quality on OHPs or thicker paper. This results in a slower
print speed as shown below:
Media Type Full Colour Print Speed Mono Print Speed

A4 paper 5 ppm 17 ppm
A3 paper 2.5ppm 11 ppm
OHP (A4) 1.1ppm 1.6 ppm
Thick media (A4) 2.3ppm 3.8 ppm
When the OHP transparency mode is selected, paper is automatically inserted between each
OHP transparency to prevent them from being stuck together.
C7005p
Paper Sizes
PostScript OEM Feeding Dimension Europe

PPD Name Name Direction (mm or inches) Std. Tray Bypass Opt.
Tray Tray
Tabloid Extra A3 Wide Short 12"x 18" Y X
- Short 13 x 18 Y* X
A3 A3 Short 297mm x 420mm Y X Y
A4 A4 Short 210mm x 297mm
A4 Rotated A4 Long 297mm x 210mm Y X Y
A5 Rotated A5 Long 210mm x 148mm Y X
A6 A6/post Short 105mm x 148mm X
card
B4 B4 Short 257mm x 364mm Y*d X Y*
B5 B5 Short 182mm x 257mm
B5 Rotated B5 Long 257mm x 182mm Y* X Y*
B6 B6 Short 128mm x 182mm X
Tabloid Ledger Short 11"x 17" Y* X Y
Legal LG Short 8.5"x 14" Y* X Y
Letter LT Short 8.5"x11"
Letter LT Long 11"x 8.5" Y X Y
Rotated
Statement HLT Short 5.5"x 8.5"
- HLT Long 8.5"x 5.5" Y* X
Executive EXE Short 7.25"x 10.5"
- EXE Long 10.5"x 7.25" Y* X Y
- F Short 8"x 13" Y* X Y*
Folio Folio Short 8.25"x 13" Y* X Y*
FanFold Foolscap Short 8.5"x 13" Y X Y*d
GermanLegal
Y: Selected by paper size select dial.

Y*: Select * on a size select dial and set a paper size on control panel.
Y*d means default size.
X: Selected by Printer driver or control panel setting.
C7005p
Embedded Controller (EFI)
Controller Specifications
C7005p
CPU R4700
CPU Frequency 133MHz
Compression ECT
Total DIMM slots for ROM/RAM 4 (2 for standard, 2 for optional RAM)
Printer Description Language Adobe Postscript level 3, PCL5C/5e
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, SMB and AppleTalk
Standard ROM / RAM 32 / 32 MB
Upgrade Memory (DRAM DIMM) 64 MB, Up to 160MB (32 MB std.+64 MBx2)
Model Type DIMM (Dual In-Line Memory Module)
Memory Type PC100 SDRAM (precisely described as PC100
Rev1.0 compatible)
Number of Pins 168 pins
Access Time (Frequency) 100 MHz
CAS Latency 2
DIMM slots for Upgrade 2
Hard Disk Drive 2.5/1. 6GB (Option)
Connectivity
Parallel (B connector) IEEE 1284
Ethernet (RJ45) 10BaseT, 100BaseTX
Ethernet (DB9) 10 Base 5
10Base2 is supported, but an external transceiver must be prepared by the user
Token Ring Optional
Calibration Visual Calibration & Adjustment
Power Consumption 5V, 5A (Max.)
C7005p
Calibration
Calibration by the user is required when selling to professional colour users who need to
ensure colour consistency across different print jobs.
Visual Colour Calibration (VisualCal Calibration)
The Visual Colour Calibration feature allows experienced users to calibrate the engine
themselves (or service personnel). This kind of calibration will allow users to overcome the
colour drift in printers that is typically due to ageing or adverse environmental conditions. The
person doing the calibration is asked to enter certain values into the front panel, after which
the calibration is completed. The process for calibrating the engine involves the printing of two
pages from the front panel.
The first page is used to determine the Min. and Max. densities the engine is printing.
This page has 9 colour strips printed with ten toner densities.
1. There are two strips for each CMYK colour and one for a grey balance at 30% density.
2. For each strip, the user determines what density best matches the surrounding colour strip.
3. This value is input through the front panel.
The next page is for doing grey balance calibration by matching a CMY grey to the grey
produced by the K of the engine.
1. The user sees a number of colour patches surrounded by a grey background.

2. The grey background is printed with pure black in k only.
3. The patches are printed with CMY inks.
4. One of these patches shows the user the current grey balance calibration of the engine.
5. If the current CMY grey of the engine does not match the background, the user picks a
different colour patch that better matches the surrounding grey.
6. The row and column numbers of the patch are input through the front panel.
Visual Colour Adjustment
The Colour Adjustment feature provides creative control to increase or decrease the
brightness of an image, or the density of each colour; red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, or
magenta by using the operation panel keys.
Colour Management System
The controller has a full complement of colour management technologies built-in. Since
effective colour management requires both client environment and controller support, EFI has
leveraged its extensive colour expertise into the following components :
C7005p
Standard Colour Management Components
Component Description Location / Platforms

PostScript colour CRDs optimized for photos, In controller ROM /
rendering graphics, presentation objects; Flash
Dictionaries paper / transparency media types
Press simulation control Lookup tables to simulate Controller SRAM
Density characteristics of
Offset printing processes
Device profiles ColorSync 2/ICM profiles Macintosh / Windows
Compatible with Macintosh and 95
Windows colour management
systems
Compression Method
The controller uses EFIs proprietary ECT compression technology to compress typical office
documents in a loss less manner. Loss less compression ensures the highest level of print
quality is achieved. A highly compact page representation enables many pages to fit within the
page buffer memory pool and facilitate continuous print. The compression level, and therefore
the image quality achieved for a system with a given memory configuration, is dependent upon
the complexity of pages that are being processed. The table below identifies classes of page
complexity, associated document types and estimated compression ratios.
Page Description Typical Compression

complexity document ratio estimates
Level
A Text-only / text Letter, legal 200-300
with simple graphics brief
B Text with complex Presentation, 100-200
graphics / small photos report, newsletter
C Complex graphics Illustrations, maps 50-100
D Complex page Magazine spreads 25-75
Layouts professional brochures
E High resolution Graphic arts 6-20
Photos or photo proofs
Hard Disk Drive (optional)
The Hard Disk drive enables C7005p to enjoy various functions such as Check and Print,
WebSpooling, Job Logging, and Electronic Collation.
Check & Print allows you to print a single copy of a multiple copy job that can be visually
checked before printing additional copies. When the Check and Print copy has been printed,
you can specify the number of additional copies of the job to print using the Check and Print
screens on the printer's operation panel. You can also use the Fiery WebSpooler to print
remaining copies of spooled Check and Print jobs.
C7005p
Electronic Collation allows the pages of each copy of a print job to be printed in sequence. If
this mode is off, multiple copies of each page of a print job are printed in sequence. The
C7005p without the hard disk has RIP Once & Send Once-Print Many capabilities without
collation.
WebSpooler (one of the WebTools) allows you to view, manipulate, reorder, reprint, and
delete jobs currently spooling, processing, or printing on the C7005p. All jobs are stored on
the hard disk.
With WebSpooler, you can view and print a log of all the jobs printed to the C7005p. You can
also export the Job Log as a tab-delimited text file and import into a database, spreadsheet or
word processing application for job accounting purposes.
Other features of WebTools (WebStatus, WebLink, WebDownloader, WebSetup) are

available even without the hard disk.
Utility
The Fiery Web Tools are a collection of utilities that allow users to monitor remotely the
printer and job status through a corporate Intranet or the Internet. Web Tools, are Java-based
and can be used on any platform through any Internet browser that supports frames, such as
Netscape Communicator v 4.06 and later with Java enabled (both for Windows & Macintosh)
and Microsoft Internet Explorer v 4.x and later with Java enabled (for Windows only).
Requirements are as follows:
TCP/IP-enabled network with valid IP address for the printer

TCP/IP-enabled client workstation with valid IP address
Internet browser that supports Java and frames (such as Netscape Communicator v4.06 or
Microsoft Internet Explorer v4.x) installed on client workstation.
The Fiery Web Tools include:
Fiery Web Status

Fiery Web Spooler (Available only with the Hard Disk Drive)
Fiery Web Link
Fiery Web Down loader (Not supported for Macintosh)
Fiery Web Set-up (Not supported for Macintosh)
Fiery Web Status
This utility allows the user to monitor the Fierys basic spooling (if available), RIPping and
printing status while using a minimum of monitor space. This utility polls the printer every 20
seconds and displays the current RIPping and Printing information.
C7005p
Fiery Web Spooler
This utility displays greater detail than the Status. It allows the user to manipulate jobs
(duplicating / copying / deleting / held or printed jobs) on the Fiery. It allows the user access
to the Fiery Job Log (status, document name, user name, file size, media type, number of
colour pages, number of B & W pages, total number of pages, number of originals, PDL).
This utility can only be used when the printer has a hard disk drive.
Fiery Web Link
Selecting the Web Link button will link the user to a remote WWW site in a new Browser
window, provided the Internet Browser is connected to the Internet.
Fiery Web Down loader (Not supported for Macintosh)
This utility allows the user to send a PostScript or PCL file from a personal computer to the
printer without first opening the file in another application. Downloading PostScript Type 1
fonts and Adobe Type 1 fonts is also available.
Fiery Web Set-up (Not supported for Macintosh)
This utility allows a user to view remotely and modify the printer configuration in a graphical
environment.
- System Set-up
- Network Set-up
- Printer Set-up
C7005p
Page Description Language
The C7005p comes as standard with Adobe PostScript3 and PCL5C.
The following tables describe the client tools available in both the diskless and disk-based
systems.
Diskless System (without Hard Disk)

Client Tools PCL PostScript
Parallel Network Parallel Network
Printer Driver and PPDs
PCL5 Driver Y Y - -
PostScript Driver - - Y Y
Client Internet Tools
Fiery Web Spooler - - - -
Fiery Web Down loader - Y - Y
Fiery Web Status - Y - Y
Fiery Web Setup - Y - Y
Fiery Web link(HTTP based - uses browser) - Y - Y
Check & Print Y Y Y Y
Miscellaneous Files and Colour Enhancement Tools
Pantone Colour Reference Books - - Y Y
CMYK Reference File - - Y Y
ICC/ICM Device Profiles - - Y Y
Disk-based System (with Hard Disk)

Client Tools PCL PostScript
Parallel Network Parallel Network
Printer Driver and PPDs
PCL5 Driver Y Y - -
PostScript Driver - - Y Y
Client Internet Tools
Fiery Web Spooler - Y - Y
Fiery Web Down loader - Y - Y
Fiery Web Status - Y - Y
Fiery Web Setup - Y - Y
Fiery Web link(HTTP based - uses browser) - Y - Y
Check & Print Y Y Y Y
Miscellaneous Files and Colour Enhancement Tools
Pantone Colour Reference Books - - Y Y
CMYK Reference File - - Y Y
ICC/ICM Device Profiles - - Y Y
C7005p
Connectivity
The C7005p comes with a standard Parallel port and Ethernet 10/100BaseT network interface
port. There is an optional Token-Ring network interface card. All I/O ports are bi-directional
and have drivers that support multiple independent logical channels.
Supported Operating Systems:

- Windows 95/98: Adobe PostScript Printer Driver for Windows v4.2 or later
- Windows NT 4.0: Adobe PostScript Printer Driver for Windows NT4.0 v.5.0 or
later
- Apple Macintosh, Power Macintosh: System OS 8.0 or later, Adobe PostScript
Printer Driver v. 8.5 or later
Parallel IEEE 1284 compliant parallel port connection
The physical connection is a standard parallel-B connector

The following IEEE 1284 modes are supported:
Compatibility
Nibble
ECP
Ethernet 10/100 Mb/s
The following list highlights the Network Operating Systems supported as well as associated
frame types:
NetWare 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.x, IPX/SPX

Ether Talk, TCP/IP
Frame types: 802.2, 802.3, SNAP, Ethernet-II
The following are not supported :
NetBEUI/NetBIOS
DLC
Local Talk
C7005p
Token Ring
This connectivity requires an optional network card.
Protocol stacks
Network Frame Type Protocol Stack LPD PServer PAP SMB
Ethernet Ethernet 802.2
(10/100Mbps) Ethernet 802.3 IPX/SPX - Y - -
Ethernet II
Ethernet SNAP
Ethernet II TCP/IP Y - - Y
Ethernet SNAP Apple Talk - - Y -
Token Ring Token Ring 802.2 IPX/SPX - Y - -
(4/16Mbps) Token Ring SNAP
Token Ring SNAP TCP/IP Y - - Y
- Apple Talk - - - -
Services
Services include printing applications as well as other network services such as HTTP and
SNMP. All of the services are capable of running over any interface on which their underlying
protocol can run. There are two general categories of services: Printing services and
Management services.
Printing Services
This provides native printing services for all supported protocol stacks and various network
environments. In particular, the following printing protocols are supported:
LPD (Line Printer Daemon)

Allows printing in TCP/IP networks using an LPR client.
PServer (Print Server)
Allows printing in NetWare networks. Capable of running in bindery and NDS modes
simultaneously. Supports connections to up to eight bindery servers plus an NDS connection.
PAP (Printer Access Protocol)
Allows printing in AppleTalk networks.
SMB (Server Message Block)
Allows printing in Windows networks. This is Microsofts File Sharing Protocol, which allows
a printer to be shared in a Windows workgroup.
C7005p
The following table provides a matrix view of the available print support in various network
environments.
Novell UNIX AppleTalk Windows

NetWare TCP/IP Network TCP/IP
(Pserver) (LPD) (PAP) (SMB)
Win NT 4.0 IPX/SPX Y - -
TCP/IP - Y - Y
AppleTalk - - Y -
Win 95/98 IPX/SPX Y - -
TCP/IP - - - Y
Macintosh AppleTalk - - Y -
Management Services
Management services refer to application level protocols that allow remote management of the
controller. This service is an HTTP server, which allows management of the controller
through a standard Web browser. Please refer to the Fiery WebTools for details.
System Software
The controller comes loaded with system software in the boot flash and ROM. The system
software falls into three broad categories:
Boot System
The boot system includes all parts of the system required to start-up and test the controller.
Components include: boot code, diagnostics and operating system.
Print System
The print system includes all parts of the system required to print a job.
Components include: drivers, networking, IO manager, print manager, PDL & PDL
resources (PostScript, PCL, Fonts Colour Management, etc.), page manager and video
manager.
Device Management System
The device management system includes all parts of the system required to control and
administer the printer.
Components includes: drivers, front panel, administrative utilities, IO manager and device
manager.
System software is upgradable by the replacement of the masked ROM DIMMs.
C7005p
Fonts
PostScript Interpreter Standard in base, PS3

Roman fonts 136 (117 Adobe Type 1,
19 True Type)
PCL5C Interpreter Standard in base
Roman fonts 35 Intelli fonts
10 True Type
1 bitmap LP
C7005p
WHAT FITS WHAT
Order Code Description
Machine
PCR5P C7005p
Peripherals
DPFU17 Paper feed unit 500 sheets (max 2 per machine)
DHD505 Ram Memory Hard disk (1.6gb) purchase locally
Supplies
CT305BLK Black toner (400g) Yield 15,000

CT305CYN Cyan toner (400g) Yield 15,000
CT305MGT Magenta toner (400g) Yield 15,000
CT305YLW Yellow toner (400g) Yield 15,000
DMU305 Drum Yield 60,000
DF0305 Fuser oil Yield 20,000
TDB305 Waste toner bottle Yield 20,000
PLS3GB English operator manual
PLS3F French operator manual
PLS3D German operator manual
PLS3I Italian operator manual
NOTE:
All yields are based on 5% originals.
C7005p
Whats In The Box
Whats in the box?
Mainframe
Power cable
Quick Installation Guide (English)
CD-ROM (Drivers & Utilities (5 languages):
- Adobe PostScript Driver
- PCL Printer Driver
- PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs)
- PostScript Screen Fonts
- Adobe Type Manager (ATM)
- Colour Management files
- Colour Reference files
Starter toner kit:
1 x black toner cartridge (210 g); 6,000 prints @ 5%
1 x cyan toner cartridge (150 g ); 3,000 prints @ 5%
1 x magenta toner cartridge (150 g ); 3,000 prints @ 5%
1 x yellow toner cartridge (150 g ); 3,000 prints @ 5%
1 x Fuser oil
1 x Waste toner bottle
1 x Photoconductor unit
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PCR6
Nashuatec C7006
Rex Rotary C7006
Gestetner C7006
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
April, 2001 Japan

Version 4
June, 2001
PCR6
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Target Markets 5
Selling Points and Benefits 5
Targeted Supplies Yield 13
Standard Accessories List 15
What Fits What 16

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\PCR6.doc 1
PCR6
INTRODUCTION
The PCR6 is NRGs first A4, full colour, laser printer.
The PCR6 has been introduced to fill the low-end of a very extensive colour line-up of
printers and colour copiers capable of printing.
This 1200 x 600dpi A4 laser printer, which has an Hitachi engine (this is an upgrade of
QMSs successful magicolour 2 product), will assist us in market penetration in the A4
market.
With print speeds of 6ppm in colour and 24ppm in mono and a full feature set, including
optional duplex, we have a very powerful entrant in the well contested market place.
The PCR6 is an important element in our objective to be known as a printer vendor and, in
conjunction with the PCR38, will increase customer awareness. Aimed at the general office,
with a competitive price, our existing target markets will be the perfect place to start sales of
this product.
PCR6
Product Overview
Mainframe:
LCD
Output Tray
(250 Sheets)
Input Tray
(250 Sheets)
Option:
Output Capacity : 250 sheets
Controller Options
PCR6 Memory:
32MB DIMM
64MB DIMM
128MB DIMM
Duplex Unit
(Installed in rear side. Std.2501 Connectivity:
Optional paper tray is required.)
100Base-TX
Legal Cassette Paper Tray Ricoh-Script 2 :

2501 5001 Standard
(* Used for standard tray only.
Same cassette as Pomelo Win.)
Max. Input Capacity : 750 sheets
PCR6
Operation Panel
[EU version]
Europe
LCD Characters 2 x 16
Message English Y
French Y
Italian Y
German Y
Dutch Y
Spanish (Newly added) Y
Japanese Y
Key 8 Keys
Driver and Operating Instructions:

9 languages:
(English / French / Italian / German / Dutch / Spanish / Swedish / Danish / Norwegian)
Product Concept:
Comfortable Colour Printing for Windows Applications

The PCR6 has high speed and high image quality and is aimed at the general office market
that typically uses Word, Excel and PowerPoint.
PCR6
Target Markets
Target Segment:
PCR6
Colour Printer Segmentation
Production Vertical General Office Personal

No. of Users / Shared printer
30 - High Speed Connectivity High Speed

Processing Processing
-
10 - 29
High Quality Needs Compact
Paper Handling Easy To Install
5-9
Low Cost
-4
Selling Points and Benefits:

Compact Desk Top size
Our Competitors (W x D x H)
410 LaserJet 4500: 391mm x 500mm x 569mm
mm Phaser 740: 507mm x 464mm x 501mm
520
mm
500
mm
Easy to install and replenish Consumables
This model has only 5 consumables: Toner, PCU (Photo

Conductor Unit), Fuser oil, Fuser cleaning roller and
Waste toner bottle.
The toners, which need the most frequent replacement,

are easy to change.
High image quality 1200dpi x 600pdi
Useful functions Envelope printing / Duplex printing (option) / High Light

(Twin Colour) printing
PCR6
High performance:
Vendor: NRG HP Xerox QMS Tektronix

Model: PCR6 CLJ4500 NC60 Desk laser Phaser740
First Print: Mono 17.5 - - -
(Sec.) Colour 25 - - -
PPM: Mono 24 16 12 16 16
Colour 6 4 3 4 5
1. High Performance:
PPM: F/C: 6ppm B/W: 24ppm (A4 LEF)
First Print : F/C: 25sec. B/W: 17.5sec.
Processor: R5261-200MHz
2. Improved Image Quality:1200dpi x 600dpi
3. R-PS Standard:
As a result of user surveys in 1999, it was found that many users printed PDF files
(through Internet/Digital camera, etc) in the General Office. In addition, competitors
Colour Laser Printers tend to have PostScript as a standard PDL. As a result of these
findings, the PCR6 has both PostScript and IPDL-C as standard PDLs.
4. Duplex Printing:
Many users have duplex printing needs in their workflow. The PCR6 supports
duplex printing with an optional Duplex unit.
5. Envelope Printing:
Another useful feature for office printing is the ability to print envelopes in colour.
The PCR6 supports envelope printing as standard.
6. Options and Consumables:
1. Options:
- Paper Feed Unit for higher capacity
- Duplex Unit
- Network Interface Board for higher performance
- SDRAM (DIMM) 32MB/64MB/128MB
2. Consumables:
- C/M/Y/K toner
- Photo Conductor Unit
- Fuser Cleaner
- Waste Toner Bottle
PCR6
Engine (by Hitachi): New Engine:
Configuration: Desk Top

Technology: Laser Beam & Single Component Electro-Photographic Printing
Resolutions: 1200dpi x 600dpi
Speed (PPM): 4colour Mono
A4/LT
Simplex 6 ppm 24 ppm
Duplex 3 ppm 12 ppm
Legal
Simplex 6 ppm 12 ppm
Duplex 3 ppm TBD
Transparency & Thick
Simplex 2.7ppm 4.1ppm
Duplex 1.4ppm 2ppm
First print speed: A4/LT 4 colour Less than or equal to 25.0 sec.
Mono Less than or equal to 17.5 sec.
Warm-up Time: 210 sec. maximum (from power on).

After printing OHP sheets, there will be a 120 second warm- up time.
After printing 60 continuous prints in mono colour, there will be a 90
second warm- up time.
Dimensions
(W x D x H): 500 x 520 x 410mm (19.7 x 20.5 x 16.1)
500 x 520 x 555mm (19.7 x 20.5 x 21.9) with Optional Paper unit
500 x 605 x 605mm (19.7 x 23.8 x 23.8) with Optional Paper unit
& Duplex unit
Weight: Approx. 39Kg(86 lbs.) with starter consumables/without packing
Input capacity: Standard: 250 sheets (80g/m2, 20 lb Bond)

Optional: 500 sheets A4/Letter Paper unit (80g/m2, 20 lb Bond)
Max. : 750 sheets
Output capacity: Face down stacking: 250sheets (80g/m2 , 20 lb Bond)
Paper Size: Std: Max. A4/Letter (210mm x 297mm/8.5x 11)

(See Paper Size) Opt: Max. Legal (8.5x14)
Duplex printing: Option (Duplex unit & Paper unit are required)
Simplex Duplex
Non-printable Area: Side: Approx. 5mm Approx 7mm
Leading & Tailing Edge: Approx. 5mm Approx 7mm
(The printable area may vary depending on paper size, paper type,
printer language and printer driver settings.)
PCR6
Product Specifications Continued
Paper Weight: Paper mode: 64-90g/m2

Thick mode
Simplex: 90-160 g/m2
Duplex: 90-105 g/m2
*Print media other than paper, such as thick stock, labels,
transparenc ies and envelopes should be fed through the standard
paper tray.
Rating Power Spec. EU version: 220-240V, 50Hz
Power Consumption: Maximum: 1,000W

(Max.) Energy Star Mode: 25W
(Possible setup: Every 5, 15, 30, 45, 60min and off)
Duty (prints/month): 20,000 prints - Monochrome

5,000 prints - Colour
Targeted Monthly
Volume: Avg. 1.5K prints / Max. 2.0K prints (Colour 50%)
Target Colour Ratio: 50%
Durability (Life): 300,000 prints for Monochrome / 75,000 prints for Colour or 5 years,
If used for 5 years, MPV (Max. Print Volume per month) is
5,000 prints for Monochrome and 1,250 prints for Colour.
Safety standards: 220-240 / 50Hz

Product safety: EN60950: 1992
+A+A2+A3+A4+A11
EMI: EN55022: 1998,Class B
EN61000-3-2, Class A (From01/2001)
EN61000-3-3 (From 01/2001)
PCR6
Controller Specifications (by Ricoh):
CPU: R5261
CPU Frequency: 250MHz
Additional DIMM slots for RAM: 1
Printer Description Language: IPDL-C, Ricoh Script level 2
Network Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX (NetWare)
Standard RAM: 32 MB
Upgrade Memory (SIMM): 32 / 64 / 128MB, up to 256MB

Type: SDRAM (50 DIMM) 66/100MHz 64 bit Non-
ECC/Parity 144 pin, Access time 6 Nano seconds
DIMM slots for Ricoh PostScript: 1

(When installing 256MB upgrade, the standard 32MB must be removed)
Hard Disk Drive: None
Connectivity: Std: Parallel Bi-Centronics (IEEE 1284)

Opt: Ethernet (RJ45) 100BaseTX
Token Ring None
OS:
OS
PDL Win3.1 Win95/9 Win Win 2000 Mac Win Me UNIX 3
8 NT4.0
IPDL- No Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
C
RPS No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mac OS: Use Laser Writer 8.0 or later

Win Me: Win 95/98 driver can be used
UNIX 3: Solaris 2.5.1/2.6/7/8, HP-UX 8.x/9.x/10.x/11.0, Red Hat Linux 6.x/7
PCR6
Controller Specifications (by Ricoh) Continued

Calibration (SP Mode):
Calibration takes place via the operation panel of the PCR6. Enter the SP Mode (Push the
On-Line key and Reset key)
Each colour, C / M / Y / K, has a standard Ricoh gamma correction curve. You can
customize the gamma curve for each colour and dither pattern in SP mode. These defaults
are linear.
Ricoh standard SP mode gamma Default

gamma curves correction
You can customize
Print CMYK Input CMYK

density density
17 points.
Min = 0 and max = 255 are
fixed. You can adjust 15
points on the curve.
The general user can adjust the density of each colour on the operation panel. This adjusting
method controls the laser power to change the colour density.
Min = -1 to max = 13
Default are 8 on each colour.
PCR6

Utilities:
Aficio Manager: Please refer to the NPS of Aficio Manager when available.
Port Navi: Please refer to the NPS of Aficio Manager when available.
MDP3 (Multi Direct Print) will be available with the PCR6.
Printer Description Language:
IPDL-C:
IPDL-C (Windows GDI based) is Intelligent Page Description Language-Colour, developed

by Ricoh.
The data is transferred to the printer as an image (every line or text) without using any
additional printing system information and memory. Ordinarily, the GDI printers of our
competitors transfer the data by page. Therefore additional resources and memory are
required.
IPDL-C focuses on the performance when using Windows applications.
As a major feature, IPDL-C has an Auto Page detection function, which is an advantage
when printing documents that have separate colour and black & white pages. When IPDL-C
receives mixed colour and black & white pages in one document, the black & white pages are
printed at 24ppm engine speed even if colour mode (default) is selected.
RPS2:
RPS2 is an abbreviation for Ricoh PostScript level 2. This PDL was developed by Ricoh and
supports the same applications as Adobe PS level 2.
Connectivity:
1) Parallel:
The physical connection is a standard parallel-B connector.
The following IEEE 1284 modes are supported: Compatibility & Nibble
2) Ethernet:
The following list highlights the Network Operating Systems supported,
as well as associated frame types: NetWare, IPX/SPX, Ether Talk, TCP/IP, NetBEUI
and NetBIOS.
The following are currently not supported: DLC and Local Talk
3) Token Ring: Not supported
PCR6

Ricoh Script Font:
Europe
Roman Fonts 39
Ricoh has developed its own fonts. These fonts are not compatible with Adobe PS level2.
Environmental Specifications:
Mechanical Noise Level (Based on the Ricoh internal measurement):

Stand-by: Less than 48Db
In Operation: Less than 55 Db
Ozone Emission Level: Max. Density: 0.1PPM (0.2mg/m3 )*
* This standard number is calculated as 8 hours time -weighted average concentration,

as defined in UL1950/1995 third edition.
PCR6
Targeted Supplies Yield

Black Toner 12,000 prints
C, M, Y Toner (each) 7,200 prints
PCU 60,000 developments
Fuser Oil Bottle Approx. 12,000 prints / bottle
Fuser Cleaning Roller 12,000 prints
Waste Toner Bottle 12,000 developments
A4 (Letter) / 5% Chart is used to measure the above yield.
This yield number may change, depending on the circumstances and printing conditions.
Starter kits for C, M, Y, K toner:

Black Toner Approx. 5,000 prints / cartridge
C, M, Y Toner (each) Approx 3,000 prints / cartridge
Remarks:
The life of the Fuser Cleaning Roller and the Fuser Unit can vary, depending on the
area of the printed page covered by an image.
The life of the Photo Conductor Unit can vary, depending on the number of pages per
job.
1. Fuser Cleaning Roller:
If Life is 12,000 pages
Coverage* Rating Life

- 20% 1 12,000
20% - 40% 1/2 6,000
40% + 1/3 4,000
*Coverage ratio of Image area on page
2. Fuser Unit:
If Life is 60,000 pages
Coverage* Rating Life

- 12.5% 1 60,000
12.5% - 20% 1/1.2 50,000
20% - 40% 1/1.5 40,000
40% - 60% 1/2 30,000
60% + 1/3 20,000
*Coverage ratio of Image area on page
PCR6
Targeted Supplies Yield Continued
3. Photo Conductor Unit:
If Life is 50,000 developments
Pages / Job* Rating Life

1 page 1/2.50 20,000
2 1/2.27 22,000
3 1/2.08 24,000
4 1/1.72 29,000
5 1/1.61 31,000
6 1/1.47 34,000
7 1/1.39 36,000
8 1/1.35 37,000
9 1/1.28 39,000
10 1/1.25 40,000
11-25 1 50,000
*Colour ratio: 50%
PCR6

CD-ROM contents: Print drivers: IPDL-C / RPS2
Aficio Manager 3.5 for Admin and Client
PortNavi
MDP (Multi Direct Print Utility)
Operator Instructions for:
NibManagement
P S Driver
Unix setup
Machine setup
Installation instructions
PCR6
What Fits What
PCR6 C7006 C7006 C7006
Peripherals:
DPFU206 500 sheet Paper Feed Unit

AD390 Duplex Unit
DIF54 Network Interface Board
Supplies:
Short Code: Description:
CT206BLK Black Toner Type 206

CT206CYN Cyan Toner Type 206
CT206MGT Magenta Toner Type 206
CT206YLW Yellow Toner Type 206
DMU206 Photo Conductor Unit Type 206
DFO204 Fuser Oil Type 206
TDB206 Waste Toner Bottle Type 206
DFC206 Fuser Cleaner Type 206
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION

FRESA WIN +
PCR6DW / PCR6W
Nashuatec C7006 dw & w

Rex Rotary C7006 DW & W
Gestetner C7006 dw & w
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
October, 2000 Japan

Version 3
March, 2001
PCR6DW/PCR6W FRESA WIN+
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
What Fits What 17
Whats In The Box 18
Competition 19

K:/Company/Market/Nps/PCR6W_PCR6DW.doc 1
INTRODUCTION
The C7006dw/w is an A3 colour laser printer, which is designed specifically for the general
office market.
The C7006w prints A4 size at 6ppm Full Colour and 24ppm Mono.
The Colour Market
The colour printer market grew by 50% in 1999.
End user prices are massively eroded.
Distinct categories are now established both vertically (home and professional markets)
and horizontally (inkjet, electrographic and thermal transfer markets).
The thermal transfer market is being squeezed out.
Price points are low in the inkjet market but there are marked improvements in output
quality.
There are few manufacturers and brands in the desktop colour page printer market.
The C7006dw has a standard duplex unit.
The C7006w has no duplex option but duplex prints can be made via the bypass tray.
As duplex printing is becoming more frequent in the general office, the C7006dw has dup lex
capabilities.
Product Overview
Product Image
Mainframe
Expander tray
Paper path in
automatic duplex
printing
Inverter section
Simplex Model Duplex Model
Duplex Mainframe and Optional Paper Feed Unit
Bypass Tray (50 sheets)
Mainframe
Std. Paper tray: 250 sheets
Invert section in duplex

printing
2 x optional paper feed

units: 500 sheets
Operation Panel
Panel design is identical to PCR5W/P
Language can be selected by the user via the operation panel.
LCD Characters 16 x 2
Language English
French
Italian
German
Dutch
Spanish (New)
Japanese
Key 8 Keys
SELLING POINTS AND BENEFITS
PCR6W/D Major Improvements
Improved Performance
Faster first print speed
Faster continuous print speed: F/C: 6ppm; B/W: 24ppm (A4 LEF)
Improved warm-up time
PostScript Level 2 (standard)
A3 full bleed printing on A3 oversize media
First Print S peed and Continuous Print S peed Comparison

PCR5W PCR6W/D HP CLJ 8500 QMS 330 QMS 6100N
Phaser 780
Xerox-4LP
EpsonLP8000C
First Print Mono 14 13 19 25 N/A
(secs.) Colour 30 26 35 48 N/A
ppm Mono 17 24 24 16 24
Colour 5 6 6 4 6
Fast first print speed

One of the key strengths of PCR5W / PCR6W/DW engine is a fast first print speed thanks to
its Short paper path. As the first print speed in monochrome printing is much faster than
competitors models, PCR6W/D can also be recommended to replace conventional B/W LP.
(Please note: The competitive figures for QMS330, Phaser780, Xerox-4LP, EpsonLP8000C
are based on Epsons model using the same Fuji Xerox engine. The figures for HP CLJ8500
are based on Canons model using the same Canon engine. )
Fast continuous print speed

F/C: 6ppm, B/W: 24 ppm
PCR6W/D continuous print speed (F/C: 6ppm, B/W:24ppm) is faster than PCR5W and
several other competitors models.
Improved warm-up time

Ricoh Japan carried out an end user survey of colour laser printers in 1999 & one of the key
points with which end users are unsatisfied is a slow warm up time. With PCR6W/D the
warm- up time has been improved from 450 secs. to 380 secs.
Duplex Printing
Many users in the general office have duplex printing needs. Duplex printing is not available
with the PCR5W model, and for this reason it cannot be recommended to users who would
like to print booklets, fliers, mailers, etc. in duplex. With PCR6W/D, a duplex model has
been developed to meet market needs.
Paper path in Fusing unit

Automatic duplex printing
OPC belt
Transfer Belt
PCU
Toner
Paper tray
Inverter section
Automatic duplex printing process
Feed paper from Paper tray

Print 2nd page first and then go to paper path in automatic duplex printing
at back side of mainframe
Reverse paper in Inverter section
Feed paper again from Inverter section
Print 1st page
Printing on both sides is completed
Duplex printing availability
Simplex Model Duplex Model

Paper Source Manual Auto Duplex Manual Auto Duplex
Duplex Duplex
Std. / No No No Yes (A5
Optional -A3/DLT)
Tray
Bypass Yes No Yes No
Duplex model
Automatic duplex printing unit is standard

Continuous duplex printing speed is F/C: 5.5ppm, B/W: 21.7ppm.
Bypass tray does not support automatic duplex printing
Simplex model
Supports manual duplex printing (printing on reverse side) only

Duplex unit option is not available.
Please Note: When the user needs to print on the reverse side, they need to select bypass
tray from the paper tray menu, and backside from paper type menu in driver. Reverse side
printing using the standard or optional paper trays is not supported. This is because the
fusing oil on the front side will damage the paper tray friction pad.
Improved Image Quality
600dpi x 600dpi
(1800dpi x 600dpi equivalent)
2 bit/pixel data processing
1800dpi x 600dpi equivalent image quality is realised thanks to the following technologies:
Improved line frequency
PCR5W PCR6W/D
Photograph 106 lpi 180 lpi
Graphics 106 lpi 106 lpi
Text 211 lpi 268 lpi
Line frequency has been improved with PCR6W/D. The most suitable print mode for each
type of image should be selected by the user to achieve the most suitable line frequency and
hence the perfect printed output.
Photograph mode
Line frequency is improved from 106lpi to 180lpi. This improvement is effective on photo
image printing e.g. digital camera data. With PCR6W/D, smoother and more detailed photo
images are realised.
Graphics
Line frequency remains the same as PCR5W to avoid unevenness in solid images.
Text
Line frequency is improved from 211lpi to 268lpi to realise sharper text images.
Different dither patterns

With PCR6W/D, a different dither pattern has been employed to realise a smoother
print image.
Colour targets
Targets more natural colouring closer to PC image display.
Moderate glossy image

Glossy ratio is reduced compared to PCR5W.
Black text printing is pleasant to the eye.
New driver User Interface
User friendly driver User Interface (IPDL-C)

Additional functions
Additional 4 languages are available
Flat tab layout
Driver user interface has been re-designed with easy to find tabs to give user faster access to
functions.
N-up mode
Up to 4-up is available through the driver.
Watermark
Overlay
Languages (User Interface, Help)
English, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Spanish, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish
Counter display
Either development count or print count can be selected

In SP mode you can select to display the counter on the operation panel
Two types of counter menu
Two types of counter menu can be selected at any time in SP mode.
The counting menus are as follows:
Development Count (Can select A3 double count menu on/off by SP mode)

Black 1C 2C 3C F/C
Black +1 +1
Colour +1 +2 +3 +3
Print Count (Can select A3 double count menu on/off by SP mode)

Black 1C 2C 3C F/C
Black +1
Colour +1 +1 +1 +1
Engine
Configuration: DeskTop
Technology: Laser Beam & Single Component Electro-Photographic Printing
Resolutions: 600 dpi x 600 dpi, 2 bits/pixel
Speed: A4 (LEF) F/C: 6 ppm Mono: 24 ppm
A3 F/C: 3 ppm Mono: 12 ppm
Transparency F/C: 1.2 ppm Mono: 1.7 ppm
* When OHP slip sheet mode is on.
Thick media F/C: 2.9 ppm Mono: 4.5 ppm
*Duplex
A4 (LEF) F/C: 5.5 ppm Mono: 21.7 ppm
A3 F/C: 2.7 ppm Mono: 8.5 ppm
First print speed: A4 Mono: Less than 13 sec.
F/C: Less than 26 sec.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
W D H
Simplex model 660mm/26.0 575mm/22.6* 475mm/18.7
(Duplex model) (660mm/26.0) (652mm/25.7)** (610mm/24.0)
With 1 optional paper
feed unit 660mm/26.0 575mm/22.6* 601mm/23.7
With 2 optional paper
feed units 660mm/26.0 575mm/22.6* 727mm/28.6
*With expander output tray
Simplex: 625mm (24.6)
**With expander output tray
Duplex: 695mm (27.4)
Weight Simplex model Approx. 62Kg (137 lbs.)

Duplex model Approx. 82Kg (181 lbs.)
Input capacity Standard: 250 sheets cassette

+50 sheet bypass tray (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond)
Optional: 500 sheet paper tray x 2 (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond)
Max: 1,300 sheets
Output capacity Face down stacking: 250 sheets (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond) for A4
*100sheets (80g/m2 , 20 lb. Bond) for paper larger than A4
Paper Size Std: Max. A3 (420mm x 297mm) / 11x17

(See 7. Paper Size) -A6 (105mm x 148mm)
Bypass Tray: A3 full bleed printing on A3+ / 12x18
*Possibility of printing on envelope (DL, COM10) is under study
Auto duplex printing: Max: A3/11x17 - Min.: A5 (LEF)
Duplex printing Simplex model: Only manual duplex is available
Optional duplex unit is not available
Duplex model: Both manual and auto duplex is available
Automatic duplex unit is pre- installed.
Non Printable Area 4.3mm (1/6)
*It may vary depending on paper size, printer language and printer
driver settings. For thick paper, 7mm for Trailing edge.
Paper Weight Tray (Friction Pad) : 64-105g/ m2 , 17 lb. Bond 28 lb. Bond
Bypass (FRR) : 64-160g/m2
17 lb. Bond - 90 lb. Index
Rating Power Spec. EU version : 220-240V 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Max. : 1,200W
(Max.) Energy Star Mode : Less than 45W
(Possible setup; Every 5, 15, 30, 45, 60 min and OFF)
Warm-up Time Less than 380 sec
Safety Standard EU version : TUV (IEC950)

Laser/EMI StandardEU Version : IEC825/ CISPR
Duty (prints/month) 15K prints for monochrome, 3.75K prints for colour
Can be increased to 25 K prints for monochrome/ 6.25K prints for
colo ur with a remark that if continuous prints of multiple pages are
made, toner scattering may occur.
Durability (Life) 300,000 prints (based on colour ratio 50%) / 750K developments or 5
years whichever comes first
Controller:
CPU R4310
CPU Frequency 177 MHz
Additional DIMM slots for RAM 2 (1 slot is used by std. RAM.)
Printer Description Language IPDL-C, PostScript level 2
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX (Netware)
Standard RAM Simplex Model: 32 MB
Duplex model: 64MB
Upgrade Memory (DIMM; 144 pin) 32/64/128 MB, Up to 256MB (To use 256MB,
Std. RAM should be replaced with 128MB
DIMM)
32 and 64MB RAM has compatibility with
Stinger-C, PII, Russian-C, and P
Optional slots for Upgrade 2
Hard Disk Drive Connectivity None
Std: Parallel Bi-Centronics (IEEE 1284-B ECP,
Nibble, Compatible)
Opt: Ethernet (RJ45) 100BaseTX
New consumables for PCR6DW & W (Please refer to Target Supply Yield)
1. PCU (Yield: 60K developments - 72K developme nts)

- Charger unit and Waste toner bottle is pre-set in printer
- No interchangeability with PCU for PCR5W
72K deve lopments
PCU
24K developments
Charger Unit
Waste Toner Bottle 72K developments
2. Waste Toner Bottle (Yield: 72K developments)

- Charger unit is not included
- Need to replace before PCU replacement under high coverage printing
conditions
3. Charger Unit (Yield: 24K developments)

- Need to reset counter on operation panel when it is replaced
4. Toner (Yield: 17K prints each colour @ 5% coverage)

- 8.75% coverage TBA
- Can be used for PCR5W. However, toner for PCR5W cannot be used for
PCR6D/W
5. Fusing Oil (Yield: 20K developments)

- Can be used for PCR5W. However, Fusing Oil for PCR5W cannot be used
for PCR6DW
Consumable Interchangeability
PCR5W PCR6DW Remarks
PCR6DW PCR5W
PCU x x No interchangeability with one
another
Charger Unit N/A N/A With PCR5W, included in Waste
Toner Bottle
Waste Toner x x No interchangeability with one
Bottle another
Fusing Oil x o Oil for PCR5W cannot be set in
PCR6DW
Toner x o Toner for PCR5W cannot be used
for PCR6DW
x = not interchangeable
o = interchangeable
Parallel Centronics (IEEE 1284-B Compatible)

Token Ring None
Operating Systems Compatibility
IPDL-C RPS2
Win 3.1 No No
Win 95/98 Yes Yes
Win NT4.0
Win 2000
MAC OS No Yes
UNIX No Yes *
*In case of using the LPR and FTP commands
Calibration
Calibration is operated through the operation panel of PCR5W in SP mode. Users can also
adjust the density of each colour in maintenance mode.
Utilities
Aficio Manager: Please refer to the Aficio Manager PIG.
Port Navi: Please refer to the Port Navi PIG.
MDP3 (Multi Direct Print) will be available with PCR6WD.
IPDL-C
IPDL-C is a Windows GDI based Intelligent Page Description Language developed by
Ricoh. Data is transferred to the printer as an image (every line or text) without the
requirement for additional printing systems and memory. Ordinarily, competitors GDI
printers transfer the data page by page, which slows down the processing speed & requires
additional memory. IPDL-C focuses on improving perfo rmance through Windows
applications. Due to low performance, Windows ICC profiles are not supported. Instead,
Ricohs unique colour matching is supported.
As a major feature, IPDL-C has an Auto Page detection function, which improves print speed
and reduces print cost when printing documents that have separate colo ur and black & white
pages. When IPDL-C receive s mixed colo ur and black & white pages in one document, black
& white pages are printed as true black & white pages at 24 ppm engine speed even if colour
mode (default) has been selected.
PostScript Level 2
PCR6DW has PostScript level 2 emulation. This PDL is a clone developed by Ricoh and
supports to the same level as Adobe PS level 2. This clone has been sold in Japan since 1986.
Connectivity
Parallel
The physical connection is a standard parallel-B connector. The following IEEE 1284 modes
are supported:
ECP
Nibble
Compatibility
Ethernet
The following list highlights the Network Operating Systems supported as well as associated
frame types:
NetWare , IPX/SPX
Ether Talk
TCP/IP
NetBEUI / NetBIOS (Preliminary)
The following are not currently supported :
DLC
Local Talk
Token Ring
Not supported (Use AHS Server)
PostScript Level 2 Fonts

Roman Fonts 39
These fonts are not compatible with those of Adobe PostScript Level 2.
Mechanical Noise Level

Based on the Ricoh internal measurement. Sound Power Level
Stand-by : 43dB or less
In Operation : 65dB or less

Based on the Ricoh internal measurement
Max. Density : 0.04 mg/m3
Paper Size
Paper Size (Preliminary)
PostScript OEM Name Feeding Dimension Std. Tray Bypass Opt.

PPD Name Direction (mm or inches) Tray Tray
Tabloid Extra Legal wide Short 12"x 18" X

- A3 wide Short 330mm x 470mm X
A3 A3 Short 297mm x 420mm Y X Y
A4 A4 Long 297mm x 210mm Y X Y
A5 A5 Long 210mm x 148mm Y* X
A6 A6 (Post Card) Short 105mm x 148mm X
B4 B4 Short 257mm x 364mm Y* X Y*
B5 B5 Short 182mm x 257mm
B5 B5 Long 257mm x 182mm Y* X Y*
B6 B6 Short 128mm x 182mm X
B6 B6 Long 182mm x 128mm
Tabloid DLT (Ledger) Short 11"x 17" Y X Y
Legal LG Short 8.5"x 14" Y X Y
Letter LT Short 8.5"x11"
Letter LT Long 11"x 8.5" Y X Y
Statement HLT Short 5.5"x 8.5"
- HLT Long 8.5"x 5.5" Y* X
Executive EXE Short 7.25"x 10.5"
- EXE Long 10.5"x 7.25" Y X Y
- F Short 8"x 13" Y* X Y*
Folio Folio Short 8.25"x 13" Y* X Y*
FanFold Foolscap Short 8.5"x 13" Y*d X Y*d
GermanLegal
Free (Max.) 297mm x 432mm Short 11"x 17" X
Free (Min.) 90mm x 148mm Short 3.6"x 6" X*
Y: Selected by paper size select dial.

Y*: Select * on a size select dial and set a paper size on control panel.
Y*d: Default size for *.
X: Selected by Printer driver or control panel setting.
X*: Input print size.
Paper Feed
Paper feed direction is common between IPDL-C and RPS2.
(SEF)
ABC
Paper Feed
Portrait Landscape
ABC
(LEF)
ABC
Paper Feed Portrait Landscape
WHAT FITS WHAT
Machine
PCR6W C7006W
PCR6DW C7006DW
Peripherals
DFU17 Paper feed unit 500 sheets (max. 2 per machine)
DME18
DIF24 Network interface board 100 baseT (RJ45)

DIF25 1EEE1284 parallel board
DIF53 Network interface board
DIF54 1EEE 1284 parallel board
DME37 128MB RAM
Supplies
CT306BLK Black toner (400g) Yield 17,000 @ 5%

8.75% TBA
CT306CYN Cyan toner (400g) Yield 17,000 @ 5%
8.75% TBA
CT306MGT Magenta toner (400g) Yield 17,000 @ 5%
8.75% TBA
CT306YLW Yellow toner (400g) Yield 17,000 @ 5%
8.75% TBA
DMU306 Drum Yield 72,000
TDB306 Waste Toner Bottle Yield 72,000
DCU1 Charger Unit Yield 24,000
DAFMANV3-5 Aficio Manager 3.5
DFO306 Fuser Silicon Oil Yield 20,000
NOTE:
All yields are based on 5% originals.
Operator Manuals
PLS2GB English operator manual

PLS2F French operator manual
PLS2D German operator manual
PLS2I Italian operator manual
WHATS IN THE BOX
Mainframe:
Starter toner kit:

- 1 x black toner cartridge (210g); 6,000 prints @ 5%
- 1 x cyan toner cartridge (150g); 3,000 prints @ 5%
- 1 x magenta toner cartridge (150g); 3,000 prints @ 5%
- 1 x yellow toner cartridge (150g); 3,000 prints @ 5%
- 1 x Fuser Oil
- 1 x Waste Toner Bottle
- 1 x Photoconductor Unit
- 1 x Charger Unit
Competition
Colour Laser Printer Competitors
1. Brother
Model Brother HS-5000 Brother HS-5300

List Price None None
Street Price (Nov. 98) $1,499 $1,799
Printing technology Solid inkjet Solid inkjet
Maximum resolution 600dpi 600dpi
Full colour print engine 4ppm @ 300dpi 4ppm @ 300dpi
speed (pages per minute) 2ppm @ 600dpi 2ppm @ 600dpi
Black only print engine 4.5ppm @ 300dpi 4.5ppm @ 300dpi
speed (pages per minute) 2ppm @ 600 dpi 2ppm @ 600 dpi
PostScript PostScript 2 standard PostScript 2 standard
Maximum memory 72MB 72MB
Hard drive No No
Standard paper supply 1 x 200 2 x 200
Optional paper supply No No
11 x 17 paper No No
Automatic duplex No No
Ethernet Optional Optional
Integrated copy function No No
Warranty 1 year (not on site) 1 year (not on site)
Year introduced 1998 1998
Engine manufacturer Unclear Unclear
2. Canon
Model Canon C LBP 460PS Canon imageCLASS C2100

List Price $3,735 Not known
Street Price (Nov. 98) $2,995 $6,000
Printing technology Laser Laser
Full colour print engine 4ppm 6ppm
speed (pages per minute)
Black only print engine 16ppm 24ppm
Hard drive Optional Optional
1 x 250 2 x 500
Optional paper supply 1 x 500 1 x 1,000
1 x 2,000
11 x 17 paper No Yes
Automatic duplex Optional Optional
Ethernet Standard Standard
Integrated copy function No Optional
Warranty 1 year (on site) 1 year (on site)
Engine manufacturer Canon Canon
3. Fujitsu
Model Fujitsu PrintPartner 21C

List Price Not announced
Street Price (Nov. 98) Not announced
Printing technology Laser
Maximum resolution 600 x 1,800dpi
Full colour print engine speed (pages per minute) 13ppm
Black only print engine speed (pages per minute) 21ppm
PostScript Not announced
Standard memory 52MB
Maximum memory 116MB
Hard drive Not announced
Standard paper supply 1 x 100
1 x 500
Optional paper supply 3 x 500
11 x 17 paper Yes
Automatic duplex No
Ethernet Optional
Integrated copy function No
Warranty Not announced
Year introduced 1998
Engine manufacturer Fujitsu
4. Hewlett Packard
Model Hewlett Packard Colour Hewlett Packard Colour

LaserJet 4500 LaserJet 4500N
List Price $3,175 $3,735
Street Price (Nov. 98) $2,499 $2,950
Hard drive No No
1 x 250 1 x 250
Optional paper supply 1 x 500 1 x 500
11 x 17 paper No No
Automatic duplex Optional Optional
Ethernet Optional Standard

LaserJet 4500 DN LaserJet 8500
List Price $4,825 $7,500
Street Price (Nov. 98) $3,799 $5,999
PostScript PostScript 2 standard PostScript 3 (optional)
Hard drive No Optional
1 x 250 2 x 500
1 x 500
11 x 17 paper No Yes
Automatic duplex Standard Optional
Ethernet Standard Optional

LaserJet 8500 N LaserJet 8500 DN
List Price $8,475 Not known
Street Price (Nov. 98) $6,799 $8,699
PostScript PostScript 3 (optional) PostScript 3 (optional)
Hard drive Standard Standard
2 x 500 2 x 500
1 x 2,000
11 x 17 paper Yes Yes
Automatic duplex Optional Standard
5. Konica
Model Konica KL-3015

List Price $3,295
Street Price (Nov. 98) $2,995
Printing technology Laser
Maximum resolution 600dpi
Full colour print engine speed (pages per minute) 3ppm
Black only print engine speed (pages per minute) 15ppm
PostScript PostScript 3 (optional)
Standard memory 16MB
Maximum memory 80MB
Hard drive Optional
Standard paper supply 1 x 50
1 x 250
Optional paper supply 1 x 500
11 x 17 paper No
Automatic duplex No
Ethernet Optional
Integrated copy function No
Warranty 1 year (on site)
Year introduced 1997
Engine manufacturer Konica
Model Konica KL-3015N Konica KL-3015N+

List Price $4,495 $4,995
Street Price (Nov. 98) $3,995 $4,495
Hard drive Optional Standard
1 x 250 1 x 250
11 x 17 paper No No
Engine manufacturer Konica Konica
6. Lexmark
Model Lexmark Optra SC 1275 Lexmark Optra SC 1275n
List Price $3,599 $4,199

Street Price (Nov. 98) $2,753 $3,212
Hard drive Optional Optional
1 x 250 1 x 250
11 x 17 paper No No
Ethernet Optional Standard
Engine manufacturer Minolta Minolta
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
A3 COLOUR/MONO LASER PRINTER
PCR38
Nashuatec DSc38
Rex Rotary DSc38
Gestetner DSc38
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
September, 2001 Japan

Date Created: January, 2001
Version 12
September, 2002
PCR38
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Selling Points and Benefits As a Printer 6
Product Specifications - Printer 9
Product Specifications - Copier Feature Expander 25
Document Server Functions 29
Product Specifications - Scanner Functions 31
Product Specifications - Fax Feature Expander 33
Targeted Print Volume and Reliability 39
What Fits What 40

tenders, etc. please contact NRGI Guernsey for confirmation
of exact product details.
K:\Company\Market \NPS\PCR38.doc
1
PCR38
INTRODUCTION
The PCR38 is a revolutionary product aimed at the general office market, which will give us the
opportunity to satisfy our customers varying needs and create a new market segment for this true
mono/colour combination (Hybrid) product.
The PCR38 has been designed as:
A high performance office network printer that prints at 38ppm in mono and 28ppm in
colour.
A high quality network printer capable of 1200dpi resolution.
A versatile and powerful printer with options that include large capacity trays, a finisher
with stapling and punching capabilities, duplex and optional copy/scanner/fax units.
The PCR38 can be targeted at either a mono or colour environment and its price positioning will
make it possible to introduce colour into environments where price has caused a resistance to colour
sales in the past.
As a high speed, 38ppm, mono printer with extensive finishing capabilities and a high level of
productivity, we will have a product that will be extremely competitive in this growing market.
As a high speed, 28ppm, full colour printer, also with extensive finishing capabilities and a print
speed of more than double the accepted speed for the general office, the PCR38 will astound your
customers.
When you combine these qualities into one unit, as has been done with the PCR38, you have a
unique product that will create great demand and generate revenue, as well as assist our brand in
becoming recognized as a printer manufacturer.
Please note :
The PCR38 was launched as a printer in October 2001. The Copy Feature Expander and Fax
Expander have now been launched. The copy and scan / fax options will fit onto existing
printers in the field.
2
PCR38
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PCR38 Mainfra me
PCR38 with 2 x 500 sheet Paper Feed Unit
3
PCR38
PCR38 with 4bin Mail Box
PCR38 with Duplex Unit, Face up output tray and 1 x 500 sheet Paper Feed Unit
4
PCR38
PCR38 with 2000 sheet Finisher, Duplex Unit and 2000 sheet Large Capacity Tray
5
PCR38
SELLING POINTS AND BENEFITS AS A PRINTER

High Performance:
Continuous Print Speed:

Monochrome 38 ppm (A4, LT : LEF)
Colour 28 ppm (A4, LT : LEF)
First Print Speed:

Monochrome Less than 9.0 sec.
Colour Less than 12.0 sec.
Processor:
CPU RM7010 250MHz
High Image Quality:
Resolution True 1200 x 1200dpi / 1bit for General Office Use
Versatile and powerful options:
Input Paper options : 2000 sheets LCT, 500 x 1 tray, 500 x 2 tray
Output Paper options : 2000 sheets Finisher, 4bin Mailbox, Auto Duplex
Controller options : HDD, IEEE1394, Memory
Scanner options: Copier (Scanner) upgradeable, Fax upgradeable (from October
2001)
High Image Quality:
One objective of the PCR38 is to provide affordable image documents to customers
(1) 1200dpi high resolution

True resolution of 1200dpi.
(2) PCL5c (Standard):

The PCR38 supports PCL5c, which is based on HPs Colour LaserJet 5 emulation.
The specifications (except for Colour command) of PCL5c are compatible with those of the
PCL5e.
(3) PostScript level 3 (Standard):

The PCR38 supports Adobe PostScript Level 3 (genuine) Version 3011.103.
(4) RPCS (Standard):

The PCR38 supports the new Ricoh PDL, which is a successor to Ricohs IPDL-C.
Target User:
Workgroup users in a Network Environment
6
PCR38
a) Standard Configuration:
Monochrome 38ppm / Colour 28ppm engine with 2 x 500 sheets paper trays,
100 sheets Multi Bypass Tray, 500 sheets output tray (Face Down), 100 sheets output tray
(Face up) & Network Interface Board (Ethernet).
b) Options:
Input Paper Options

(1) 500 sheets x 1 Paper Tray Alternative with (2) / (3)
(3) 2000 sheets Large Capacity Tray Alternative with (1) / (2)
Output Paper Options

(4) 2000 sheets Finisher (7) (9) and (1) or (2) or (3) is required
(5) Punch Kit (3 types) Option for (4), 1 type can be installed
(6) 4 bin Mailbox Alternative with (4) / Scanner Options
(7) Duplex Unit
Controller Options
(8) Memory (4types) 1 type can be installed
(9) HDD (2types) 1 type can be installed
(10) IEEE1394 board
Scanner Options
(11) Copier Unit Alternative with (6)
(12) ARDF Option for (11)
(13) Platen Cover Option for (11), Alternative with (12)
(14) Multi-bin sorter (TBA) Option for (11), (7) is required,
Alternative with (4)
(15) Fax Unit Option for (11)
(16) G3 additional Line Option for (15), Alternative with (17)
(17) G4 Line Option for (15), Alternative with (16)
(18) JBIG Option for (15)
(19) Hand Set Option for (15)
(20) Fax Stamp Option for (15)
7
PCR38
Versatile and Powerful Options

The PCR38 enables the users to do complete finishing of their jobs thanks to the many input and
output options listed below:
(1) Input Paper Options

There are three types of input paper options, a 2000 sheets LCT, 1 x 500 sheet paper tray
and 2 x 500 sheet paper trays.
Standard input paper capacity is 1,100 sheets (2 trays x 500 sheets and 1 x 100 sheet multi
bypass tray).
If the 2000 LCT is installed, the maximum input capacity is 3,100 sheets.
(2) Output Paper Options

There are two options for handling the paper output, a 4 bin mailbox and a 2000 sheet
finisher.
Standard output paper capacity is 600 sheets (1 x 500 sheet face down tray and 1 x 100
sheet face up tray)
If the 2000 sheet finisher with high capacity mode (2500 sheets) is installed, the maximum
output capacity is 3,100 sheets.
(3) Auto Duplex option

The PCR38 has a continuous duplex speed (100% productivity) that is the fastest among
mid-range network printers for workgroups.
(4) Controller options
Standard Memory is 64MB. Maximum memory is 384MB (256MB & 128MB). There is
only one additional slot so standard memory has to be removed when upgrading to higher
than 288MB.
(5) Scanner options

The PCR38 supports a scanner unit, which is capable of Copy/Fax/Scanner functions. This
is due for rele ase in early 2002.
As the PCR38 is designed for an advanced office environment, the Ethernet interface board
is standard. In addition, you can add optional IEEE1394 HDD (standard IEEE1284) and
memory to increase productivity.
8
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PRINTER

Engine:
Configuration: Desktop
Technology: Laser beam scanning, electro-photographic printing and dual-component

toner development
4 tandem drums
Resolution: True 1200 x 1200 dpi

1200 x 600dpi (Default)
600 x 600dpi
PPM:
A4/LT (LEF) Resolution Plain Paper Thick/OHP
Mono 600dpi x 600dpi 38ppm 10ppm
1200dpi x 600dpi 38ppm 10ppm
Colour 600dpi x 600dpi 28ppm 10ppm
Duplex Speed: Auto Duplex (Option)

100% productivity
First Print Speed:

Monochrome: 9.0 sec. or less (A4 / LT - LEF, 1st Tray)
Colour: 12.0 sec. or less (A4 / LT - LEF, 1st Tray)
Dimensions
(W x D x H): 575 x 648 x 715mm (22.7 x 25.6 x 28.2)
Weight: Less than 77Kg (170lb)
Input Capacity: Standard: Paper tray: 2 x 500 sheets

(80g/m2 ) Bypass tray: 1 x 100 sheets
Optional: Paper Tray: 1 x 500 sheets or 2 x 500 sheets

LCT: 2,000 sheets
Max. capacity with options: 3,100 sheets
Output Capacity Standard: Face down: 500 sheets

(80g/m2 ) Face up: 100 sheets
Optional: 4-bin mailbox: 4 x 125 sheets
Finisher: 2,000 sheets
(High Capacity Mode: 2,500sheets without shift tray mode)
9
PCR38
Product Specifications continued
Paper Size Standard: No.1 (upper) tray: A4 / LT (LEF)

No.2 (lower) tray: A3 / DLT, 11x17 A5 (SEF)
Envelope* (TBA)
(*Guide fence is required)
Bypass tray: 305 x 458mm 90 x 148mm
Optional: Paper tray: A3 / DLT, 11x17 A5 (SEF)
LCT: A4 / LT (LEF)
Paper Type: Paper tray / LCT: Plain Paper

By-pass Tray: Thick Paper (105g/m2 , 28lbs. more)
Special Paper (OHP)
Paper Weight: Paper Trays (Std./Opt.): 60 - 105 g/m2

Multi Bypass Tray: 60 - 163 g/m2
LCT: 60 - 105 g/m2
Duplex Printing: Auto (Option)

A3 - A5 (LEF)
60 - 105 g/m2
Non-Printable Area: Side: Approx. 4.2mm

Leading & Tailing edge: Approx. 4.2mm
(The printable area may vary depending on paper size, printer language and
printer driver settings.)
Rating Power Specifications: 220 / 230 / 240V, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption: Maximum: 1,300W or less

Energy saver mode: 45W or less
Warm-up Time: Less than 120 sec. (from power on)
Energy Star Mode: 60min.

Selectable: 0.5min. / 15min. / 30min. / 60min.
Safety Standard: EN60950, EN60825-1 (Laser)
EMI: EN55022 Class B
Environmental Standard: Energy Star Tier2 specifications
Sound Power Level: Stand-by: Less than 42dB

Printing: Less than 68dB
Energy Saver: Less than 40dB
(Measured by Ricoh Standard methodology)
10
PCR38
Controller:
CPU: RM7010 250MHz
Printer Language: PCL5c: CLJ5 class compatible

Adobe PostScript Level 3 (Genuine): Interpreter 3011.103
RPCS: IPDL-C successor
PS: NRGI provides a PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file,

which defines the specific printer features (such as paper handling
options, paper size range, and so on) and the user interface built into
the driver.
Resolution: PCL5c: 300 x 300dpi / 600 x 600dpi

PS: 600 x 600dpi / 1200 x 600dpi / 1200 x 1200dpi
RPCS: 600 x 600dpi / 1200 x 600dpi / 1200 x 1200dpi
RAM: 64MB (Up to 384MB, 1 slot free*)

144 pin (SO_DIMM) 66/100 MHz 64 bit Non-EEC parity
Acs: 6ns
(* When the optional copier unit is installed, there are no free slots)
Memory Requirements:
11
PCR38
HDD: Type 1: 20GB (Printer HDD)

Type 2: 40GB (Copying HDD)
Fonts: PCL5c: 35 intelli fonts,

10 TrueType fo nts
1 Bitmap font
(31 fonts can be downloaded by Agfa Font Manager)
PS: 136 Adobe Type 1 fonts

RPCS: N/A
Driver: PCL5c: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000

PS: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000, Mac 7.6.1 or later
RPCS: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000
Auto Tray Select: Yes

From Default Tray - Tray 1 (Upper tray)-Tray 2-Tray 3 (or LCT)-
Tray 4.
Bypass tray not available.
Auto Tray Change: Yes

When the paper runs out in the current tray while printing is in
progress, the printer searches for another tray that contains the same
size, orientation and media type of paper and switches to that tray
automatically.
Paper Runs out: Yes

When the paper runs out in the current tray, while printing
is in progress, the printer automatically searches for another
tray that contains the same size and orientation of paper. If there is no
tray with the specified paper, the Load (Paper Size) (Tray No.)
message appears on the LCD of the printer operation panel. If the
specified paper is loaded in the specified tray, the printer re-starts the
printing automatically.
Tray Lock: Yes (Default: Off)
Connectivity: Standard: Parallel: Bi-centronics (IEEE1284 ECP)

NIB: 100/10 Base TX (Standard)
Option: IEEE1394
(Token Ring is not supported)
*USB available: Parallel-USB cable is not included.
Network Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI*, AppleTalk

*Only supported by SmartNet Monitor
Utilities: SmartNetMonitor
ScanRouter
Print Utilities for Mac
12
PCR38
Spooling: No
Job Cancel: Yes (from Operation Panel)

Includes printing and processing jobs
Rotate Sort: No
OHP Slip Sheet: Yes (Blank paper only)
Cover Sheet: Yes (with Electronic sorting enabled)

(Front cover / Back cover) Blank or Copied paper can be selected in the Print Driver
Requirements: HDD required

Up to 105g/m2 (28lbs.) paper weight
RPCS driver only *
(*PCL has First page / Other page function only)
Sample Print (=Proof Print): Yes
Job Stock Spec.: Max. stock pages: 2,000 pages

Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Proof + Secure print)
Overflow job record: latest 20 jobs
Secure Print: Yes

Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Sample + Secure print)
13
PCR38
Controller Options
HDD:
Capacity: Approx. 20GB
Specifications: Font download
Electronic sorting
Print Job Spooling (Proof/Secure printing)
Logging Data
Memory:
Type: SO DIMM (SD-RAM),
144 pin, 6ns access time
PC 100 MHz 64bit Non-ECC/Parity
Capacity: 64MB, 128MB, 256MB
IEEE1394:
Outline :
IEEE1394 is one of the industry standards, which was authorised as IEEE1394-1995
by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) in 1995. This interface is
expected to be used for sending large-capacity data, such as multimedia data, at high
speed. Digital Video Camera is one of the popular products having this interface.
Recently, the interface is equipped with many PCs as standard, and also many
IEEE1394 expansion card for PCs are available in the market.
Features:
IEEE1394 provides High Speed data transmission at 100Mbps, 200Mbps and
400Mbps. It offers much faster speed than USB (Universal Serial Bus ), which has
1.5Mbps and 12Mbps mode.
Connecting Cable & Connector:

The IEEE1394 cable is simple and flexible, like a USB cable. There are 2 types of
IEEE1394 cables in the market. One has 6 wires with a 6-pin connector, and the
other has 4 wires with a 4-pin connector.
Picture 1, over the page, shows the cable structure of the 6 wire cable. The diameter
is 5.5mm.
The 4 wire cable is used for digital videos and digital cameras etc. The diameter is
4mm.
14
PCR38
Picture 1: Cable structure of IEEE1394 (6-wires)
Electric wires
Twisted pair
Signal wire shield
(signal wires)
Shield of the Cable
Picture 2: Interface
USB IEEE1394 IEEE1394

4-pin connector 6-pin connector
Network Style Topology

There are two ways to configurean IEEE1394 network: Daisy Chain and Node
Branch.
The Daisy Chain style allows users to connect a maximum of 16 nodes (machines which
have a 1394 port), and the maximum cable length is 4.5m (between each device).
Node branch style allows users to connect a maximum of 63 nodes (physically possible
node addresses). [See Picture 3] As Hot-plug-in is available, users can connect & pull out
the cable s while the machine is working.
Picture3. Network Style of IEEE1394
Work stationn PC HDD
400Mbps 200Mbps
CD-R Camera Printer Scanner

100Mbps
100
Mbps 200Mbps 100Mbps
15
PCR38
(1)
1394
1394
(2)
1394
1394
(3)
1394
1394
Note 1: Printing feature through IEEE1394 I/F is available only with PCs with Windows
2000 installed .
Note 2: Recent PCs and IEEE1394 Expansion cards for PCs have a couple of IEEE1394
ports. The connection types depend on the number of IEEE1394 ports on each
device.
Note 3: IEEE1394 Expansion cards for PCs must support Windows 2000.
Note 4: In case of using 6-pin to 4-pin cable, IEEE does not recommend that a device of 4-
pin side connects with other devices.
Interface IEEE1394 (6pin)

Number of ports 2 ports
Data speed 400Mbps / 200Mbps / 100Mbps
System requirements:
Connectable devices 1. PCs

OS: MS-Windows2000
with IEEE1394 port
2. IEEE1394 Repeaters
Number of Hops 16 hops (Max.)
Length of cable 4.5m between devices (Max.)
16
PCR38
Note: IEEE1394 Interface does not include IEEE1394 cables and customers need to prepare it.
(There are two types of ports in IEEE1394 Standard, 4-pin and 6-pin, the IEEE1394 option
for the PCR38 has 6-pin ports. Therefore, the cable must have a 6-pin connector to
connect to the PCR38)
High Speed data transmission 400/200/100Mbps

Easy connection Hot PnP
Easy handling Thin cable (around 5.5mm in diameter)
NV-RAM(64KB):
This is used for storing the User Code when you manage your clients by SmartNet Monitor
(successor to Aficio Manager for Admin), such as Usage-restriction or Colour mode-restriction.
This capacity is for up to 400 user codes (std. is 0).
[User Management Tool]

IT Manager (Administrator) can manage / restrict the user (Client)
for Color and B/W printing. (Max. 400 users)
System Requirement
SmartNetMonitor for Admin (Standard accessories)
User Account Enhance Unit Type B (Option)
Client 1 Client 2 Client 3 Color & B/W
B/W only
Admin
Color B/W
Client 1 No Yes
Client 2 No Yes
Client 3 Yes Yes
User Account Enhance Unit Type B
17
PCR38
Counter (Meter Click Mode)
How to set Meter Click mode: By SP mode (Once, under minus counter)
Only once Selectable Developing Count or Print
Count method.
Selectable A3 single count or double count.
Fax number can be input.
Not exceed 0 count.
How to count-up:
Developing Count (Default)
Application Mode Bk counter Colour counter
Printer Full colour +1 +3
Black +1
Copy Full colour +1 +3
2C* +2
1C* +1
Black +1
Fax Black +1
*1C/2C : All Colour PCU and Developer are used
Print Count
Application Mode Bk counter 1C/2C counter Colour counter
Printer Full colour +1
Black +1
Copy Full colour +1
2C* +1
1C* +1
Black +1
Fax Black +1
Default number:
(at factory site)
Developing Count
Type Default count
Bk counter -6,000 200
Color counter -6,000 200
Print Count
Type Default count
Color counter -2,000 200
18
PCR38
Non-counted page:
1. Counter Sheet
2. SP mode printing
3. Colour Calibration Sheet
4. Front Cover page (Blank paper)
5. Back Cover page (Blank paper on Duplex printing)
6. Error report printing
7. Jam before printing on output tray
8. OHP Slip sheet (Blank Paper)
Limitation:
Default Mode :
After ACS mode, all print pages including Black (For annual contract) pages are
counted as Colour, based on internal processing (Colour PCU and Developer are
used), in order that the customer can refer to the actual yield of the Colour PCU and
Developer on the configuration sheet
1 job
Bk Bk FC FC Bk Bk FC
Bk count Colour count Colour count Colour

count
Meter Click mode :

After ACS mode, due to the legal matter, the Colour page is counted as Colour and the
Black page is counted as Black, even though Colour PCU and Developer are used.
(We have to charge to the customer based on output document, not internal process)
1 job
Bk count Color count Black count Color

count
Colour PCU and Developer are used.

*The # of Black prints (Colour PCU and Developer are used) after ACS mode is mentioned
on the Logging sheet (7003-14) of the SMC print in SP mode , so that the user can check pure
Black process prints (=B/W mode on Driver setting and Before ACS) and the others in Total
Black prints.
19
PCR38
Product Image
PCR38 + Copy Feature Expander
20
PCR38
Product Image
PCR38 with Copier Feature Expander and 1 x 500 Paper Feed Unit
NOTE:
Recommended configuration
due to height of scanner unit
when configured as a Copier.
(1 x 500 sheet paper feed will
reduce operational height)
PCR38 with Copier Feature Expander, Duplex Unit, Multi-bin and 2 x 500 Paper Feed Unit
21
PCR38
PCR38 with Copier Feature Expander, 2000 Finisher, Duplex Unit and LCT
Operation Panel (Full Configuration)
22
PCR38
Product Concept
The PCR38 Copier Feature Expander is designed as:

A Solution device for Colo ur Input and Output needs (Paper Saving)
Centre machine for Occasional Copy and Fax needs (Space saving)
To target Corporate users with a full function Colour MFP
Target Users
Companies with more than 100 employees

Shared by Workgroup users mainly
Target of PCR38 Copier Feature Expande r
Number of users
sharing the machine
Number of Employees
Centralized More than 100

More than 100
Division
50-100 M1
30-99
Work Group
20-30
S2
Small Work Group 5-29
3-10
S1
Business Personal
1-4
23
PCR38
Scanner / FAX Options

(1) Copier Unit (4) or (5) are required.
Optional tray, (2) and (3) are recommended.
(2) 40GB HDD Option for (1)
(3) Rack Option for (1)
(4) ARDF Option for (1), Alternative with (5)
(6) Multi-bin Option for (1), Optional Duplex unit is required
Alternative with Finisher
(7) *Fax Unit Option for (1)
(8) G3 additional Unit Option for (7), Alternative with (9)
(9) G4 Unit Option for (7), Alternative with (8)
*Including fax stamp ink.
FAX Supply
(1) FAX Stamp Supply for (7)
24
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - COPIER FEATURE EXPANDER,

WHICH INCLUDES SCANNING FUNCTION
(OPTION)
Please be advised that specifications may change!

Copy Feature Expander, which includes scanning function and ARDF or Platen cover must
be installed together.
Originals: Sheet / Book / Object
Original Size: Max. 11 x 17 / A3
Paper Size: Max. 12 x 18
Resolution: 600dpi / 2bit
Gradation: 256 gradations
Copy Size: Max.: 11 x 17 /A3 full bleed on 12x18
First Copy Speed

Monochrome 8 seconds (A4 / LT LEF, 1st Tray)
Colour 10 seconds (A4 / LT LEF, 1st Tray)
(Original on platen glass from standard paper tray)
Copy Speed (A4 LEF):

Normal Mode: BW: 38cpm / FC: 28cpm
OHP / Tick Paper Mode: BW : 10cpm / FC: 10cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: BW: 38cpm / FC: 28cpm
Multiple Copying: Up to 99
Reproduction Ratio: 6 reductions, 5 enlargements plus 100%

400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 100, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25%
Duplex Copy: Auto (Optional Duplex unit and HDD are required )
Simplex original to Duplex copy
Duplex original to Duplex copy
Simplex Book original to Duplex copy
Duplex Book original to Duplex copy
Memory: 192MB (64 + 128MB)

(64MB standard printer memory + 128MB standard with Copier
Feature Expander)
25
PCR38
Copier Unit 570 x 757 x 100mm
Printer
with 1 x 500 tray 730 x 770 x 1100mm
with 2 x 500 tray 730 x 770 x 1200mm
with LCT 730 x 770 x 1200mm
*Height : equal to Contact glass
Weight: (Copier unit) 15kg
Power Source:
EU. System: 220 / 230 / 240V 8A, 50/60Hz
Copier System: 220 / 230 / 240V 1.1A, 50/60Hz
Max. Power Consumption: Less than 250W
Operation Panel: Monochrome LCD
Colour Selection: Black + Single colour (Able to change Black colo ur to other
colo ur)
Black + Red ( Detect red text )
Single Colour:
Pre-set colour pallet: 12 colours with 4 levels density selection

Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Yellow Green,
Orange, Beige, Pink, Purple and Marine Blue
User Colour Memory: 15 colours (The ratio of Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black)
Twin Colour: Black + Pre-set colour + User colour memory
Copy Mode: Auto Text & Photo Separation Mode/Photo Mode/Text

Mode/ Map Mode / 2nd Generation Mode
In Auto Text & Photo Separation Mode and Photo
Mode, the following three photo types can be selected:
6 Press Print Mode
6 Glossy Photo Mode
6 2nd Generation Mode
Reduce / Enlarge:
Auto Paper Selection (APS): Yes

Auto Magnification Selection (AMS): Yes
Zoom: Yes (25-400%, 1% step)
Size Magnification: Yes
Directional Magnification: Yes (% input)
Directional Size Magnification: Yes (mm/inch input)
Poster Mode: No
26
PCR38
Shift / Erase / Book Copy:
Centring: Yes
Cornering: No
Margin Adjustment: Yes
Erase Centre: Yes
Erase Border: Yes
Erase Centre / Border: Yes
Combination (N-up):
Simplex 6 types
(Original: Simplex x 2 / Simplex x 4 / Simplex x 8 /
Duplex x 1 / TBA / Duplex x 2 )
Duplex* 6 types
Duplex x 2 / Duplex x 4 / Duplex x 8 )
6 For Duplex printing, the Duplex unit is required.
ADS (Auto Density): Yes
Manual Density Selection: 9 levels
OHP Slip Sheet: Yes (Blank paper)
Cover Sheet : Yes (with Electronic sorting enabled)

(Front cover / Back cover) Blank paper or Copied paper can be selected in the Print
Driver

Image Editing :
Area Editing: No
Outline: No
Italic: No
Under colour: No
Mirroring: No
Shadow: No
Repeat / Double copy: Yes
Erase selected colour: Yes ( 4 colour selectable Black / Yellow / Magenta / Cyan /
Red / Blue / Green)
27
PCR38
Image Colour Adjustment:
Auto Colour Calibration(ACC): Yes

Colour Balance Adjustment: Yes
Colour Balance Programme: Yes
Colour Separation Adjustment: Yes
Sharp / Soft Adjustment: Yes
Contrast: Yes
Background Density Control: Yes
Pastel Image Adjustment: No
UCR Adjustment: Yes
Auto Text & Photo Separation Adjustment: Yes
Electronic Sort: Yes (with 40GB HDD)
Rotation Copy: Yes
Rotation Sort: Yes (with 40GB HDD)
1 Scan to Multiple Copies: Yes
Pause / Interrupt: Yes
Energy Save r Mode: Yes
Proof Copy: Yes
Job Recall: No
Reserved Copy: No
User Codes Yes - 400
28
PCR38
DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTIONS

Black + Single color (Able to change Black color to other color)
1.
1.Copy
2.Printer
3.Fax (Transmission)
4.PC-Fax (Transmission) HDD
RECOPYING
5.Scanner
PCR38
Hardware Configurations: Scanner Unit and HDD are required.
Applications: Printer / Copier / Scanner*1 / Fax*2 functions

*1 : excluding TWAIN
*2 : Fax unit is required. Excluding direct transmission
Specifications: 1)Storage on HDD

2)Manage the stored files on HDD
Sorting /Referring
Changing the file name and Deleting the file
3)Combining the stored files (if required) and then:
Refaxing (Fax Transmission data)
Redistributing (Scanner data)
Recopying
User Interface: By Operation panel or on clients PC, through a utility called

DeskTopBinder
Limitations: Does not support Duplex printing
Requirements: Storage data: 1200 x 1200dpi

Paper Size: Over A4/LT (e.g. DLT/A3/B4)
29
PCR38
Supported Functions:
Copy Fax Fax Printer Scanner
(Transmission) (Reception)
Storage Yes Yes No No Yes
Re-print/copying Yes Yes No No No
Distributing No No Yes No Yes
Forwarding No No Yes No No
Re-Faxing No Yes No No No
Referring No No No No No
*Storage: To store the data in 40GB HDD (Document Server) for re -copying, re -
faxing and distributing.
*Re-Printing: To re-print the Copied and Fax trans mitted data stored in 40GB HDD.
*Distributing: To send the Scanned data or Received Fax data by ScanRouter via the
Network.
*Forwarding: To forward the Fax received data
30
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - SCANNER FUNCTIONS

(INCLUDED WITH COPY FEATURE EXPANDER)
The copy feature expander includes scanning.
Documents
PCR38
Document
(Electronic Data)
Copy Feature Expander unit and Platen cover or ADF must be installed together.
Model type: Platen cover: Desktop flatbed scanner unit (component)
ADF: Sheet pass through type
Driver: Network Twain version 1.7 or later
OS: Win95 / 98 / NT4.0 / 2000 / Me
Connectivity: 100/10 Base-TX
Scanning Area: Main Scanning: 297mm

Sub-Scanning: 432mm (ADF: 1260mm)
Resolution: 600dpi (Total 384MB memory is required)

400dpi (Total 256MB memory is required)
200dpi (Standard total 192MB memory is required)
Grey scale: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel
31
PCR38
ADF throughput :
Without HDD: B/W: 21ppm (A4 / LT SEF, 200dpi, 1 bit)
Colour: 11ppm (A4 / LT SEF, 200dpi, Full Colour
With HDD: B/W: 30ppm (A4 / LT SEF, 200dpi, 1 bit)
Scanning time: Less than 6 sec. (A4 / LT SEF, 200dpi, 1bit)
Scan to e-mail: Yes (ScanRouter Pro is required)
32
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - FAX FEATURE EXPANDER

(OPTION)
Scanner unit, ADF and Fax unit must be installed together.
General Features:
Model Type: Transceiver (G3)
Line Options: Std. G3 x 1 line / Max. 2 lines (G3 orG4)
Circuit : G3 (Standard): PSTN, PBX,

G4 (Optional): ISDN
Resolution: G3: 8 x 3.85 L /mm

8 x 7.7 L /mm
G4: 8 x 15.4 L/mm

6 x 15.4 L/mm
Compression Method: Standard: MH/MR/MMR

Optional: JBIG
Scanning Speed: Approx. 0.7 sec. (A4/LT SEF, 200 x 100dpi)
Modem Speed: G3: 33,600 2400 bps Automatic shift-down

G4: Max. 64Kbps
Transmission Speed: G3 (8 x 3.85/mm, 28.8Kbps more): 3 sec. level (ITU-

T No.1 Chart)
G4 (200 x 200dpi, 64Kbps): 3 sec.
SAF memory: Standard: 2MB

Optional: * 26MB (Memory Unit 32MB)
* Rest of Memory used for page memory
Memory Backup: 1 hour
Fax Stamp: Yes
Dual Access: Yes
TTI/RTI: Yes
CSI: Yes
Quick Dial: 400 numbers
33
PCR38
Fax Functions (Option) Continued
Speed Dial: 200 numbers
Group Dial: 64 groups
User Program: 100 programs (Max 200 programs)
Redial(Automatic/Manual): Yes
AI Short Program: Yes (10 calls)
Direct Fax number entry: Yes
Dual Access: Yes
User Code: Yes
Auto document: Standard: 6 documents

Maximum 18 documents
Page count: Yes (Prints on upper right side)
Auto Reduction: Yes
Wild Cards: Yes
Summer Time (daylight saving time): No
ID code programming: Yes (4 digits)
User Function Keys: Yes (3 keys)
Night Timer: No
LCD prompt: Yes
Remaining Memory Indication: Yes
User Parameter Setting: Yes
User Data Transfer: No
Memory File Transfer: Yes
34
PCR38
Immediate Transmission: Yes
Memory Transmission: Yes
Serial Broadcasting(later): Yes
Send Later: Yes
Error Correction Mode: Yes
Page Re-transmission: Yes
Economy Transmission: Yes
Forwarding: Yes
Batch Transmission: Yes
Parallel Memory Transmission: Yes
Image Rotation: Yes
Book Fax: Yes
Closed Network(transmission) : Yes
Confidential Transmission (with ID): Yes
Transfer Request: Yes
Transfer Transmission: Yes
Multi Step Transfer: Yes
Polling Transmission: Yes
Double Sided Transmission: Yes
Transmission Reserve: Yes
Reception Features
Automatic Reception: Yes
Manual Reception: Yes
Substitute Reception: Yes
35
PCR38
Authorized Reception: Yes
Multi Copy: Yes

Reverse Order Printing: Yes
Memory Lock: Yes
Confidential Reception: Yes
Special reception numbers: No
Closed Network: Yes
Polling Reception: Yes
Poll Later: Yes
Polling From Memory: No
Multi-Polling Reception: No
Reception Time Printing: Yes
Centre Mark: Yes
Chequered Mark: Yes
2 in 1 (Two in one): Yes
Duplex Reception: Yes
Telephone Features
Handset / Telephone: No
Telephone Connection: Yes
Monitor Speaker: Yes
Voice Request: No
On Hook Dial: Yes
36
PCR38
Tone Transmission: Yes
Pause: Yes
Pause & Tone Selection: Yes
Chain Dialing: Yes
Reception Mode Selection: Yes
Automatic Fax/Phone Change: No
Reception Mode Switch Over(Remote): No
Answer machine Interface: No
Reception Mode Switching Timer: No
Auto Answer Delay Time: No
Busy Toner Detection: Yes
Silent Ringing Detection: Yes
Backup Telephone: No
Options
a) 40GB HDD
Capacity: Approx. 40 GB
Specifications: Electronic sorting of copier function and Stored Copying
data for local Storage Function
b) Rack
Weight: 30kg
c) ARDF
Original Size:
Simplex A3,A4,,B4,B5,11x17,LG,LT
Duplex A3,A4,,B4,B5,11x17,LG,LT
Original Weight:
Simplex 60-128g/m2
Duplex 60-105g/m2
Stack Capacity: 80 sheets (80g/m2 )
Weight: 12kg
37
PCR38
d) Platen Cover
Original Size: 530 x 600 x 80mm
Original Weight: 3.0kg
Weight: 3.8kg
e) Multi bin (Cannot be used with Finisher)

Option for CF unit (sorting Printer / Copier / Fax printing)
Duplex unit is required.
Number of bins: 2
Paper size : A3, A4, *A5, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT (Detectable size from
Paper Feed Unit
Available only A5Y
Paper weight: 60-105g/m2
Stack capacity :
Tray 1 : 100 sheets 80g/m2
Tray 2 : A4, smaller than LT 250 sheets 80g/m2
B4, LG 100 sheets 80g/m2
f) Memory
Type SO DIMM (SD-RAM),
PC 100MHz 64bit Non-ECC/Parity
Capacity 64MB, 128MB , 256MB
Memory Requirements
Copy Fax Scanner

w HDD w/o HDD - Resolution on
Scanning (A4/LT)
Standard 192MB - - - 200x200
256MB No improvement No improvement No improvement 400x400
Max. 384MB Performance Ditto Ditto 600x600
improvement
for Duplex and
Finishing
38
PCR38
TARGETED PRINT VOLUME & RELIABILITY:

Average Monthly Print Volume (AMV): 10K prints (Colour ratio: 50%)
Maximum Monthly Print Volume (MMV): 50K prints (Colour ratio: 50%)
Machine Life (ML): 3,000k prints or five years, whichever comes first
Duty Cycle (DC): 200K prints (up to 15 months) (Colour ratio: 50%)
target customer.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is recommended Maximum Monthly Volume

Duty Cycle (DC) is maximum occasional peak volume to keep machine reliability.
RECOMMENDATION:
It is recommended that machines be placede to handle MMV and not Duty Cycle.
39
PCR38
WHAT FITS WHAT

PCR38 DSc38 DSc38 DSc38
Peripherals:
AD3800C Duplex Unit

CS3800C 4-bin Mailbox
DHD38A Printer Hard Disk 20GB
DMEBP128 128MB Memory
DME38 256MB Memory
DPFU38A 1 x 500 sheet Paper Supply Unit
DPFU38B 2 x 500 sheet Paper Supply Unit
PS470 2000 sheet Large Capacity Tray
SR770 Finisher Unit
DHPU451E4H 4-hole Punch Unit
DHPU451S4H Swedish 4- hole Punch Unit
DMEBP32 32MB Memory
DMEBP64 64MB Memory
DMENV1 NV RAM for user accounting
Copy Feature Expander:
DIF3800C Copy Option for PCR38

DF73 Document Feeder
DHD38B 40GB Hard Disk Drive for Copy Option
RACK3800C Rack to hold Copy Option
PT460 Multi Bin
Fax Feature Expander:
FAX3800C Fax Option for PCR38

DME185J-F Optional Fax Memory 32MB
FAX3800CG3 G3 Interface (Second line)
FAX3800CG4 G4 Interface
Note: Please see Copy Feature Expander product configuraton for compatible options.
40
PCR38
Language Codes:
Printer: Copy Feature Fax Feature
Expander: Expander:
PLS38GB CFLS8GB FAXKIT380GB Language Kit English
PLS38F CFLS38F FAXKIT380F Langauge Kit French
PLS38D CFLS38D FAXKIT380D Langauge Kit German
PLS38I CFLS38I FAXKIT380I Langauge Kit Italian
PLS38P CFLS38P FAXKIT380P Language Kit Portuguese
PLS38N CFLS38N FAXKIT380N Language Kit Norwegian
PLS38H CFLS38H FAXKIT380H Language Kit Hungarian
PLS38CZ CFLS38CZ FAXKIT380CZ Language Kit Czech
PLS38PL CFLS38PL FAXKIT380PL Language Kit Polish
PLS38S CFLS38S FAXKIT380S Language Kit Swedish
PLS38SF CFLS38SF FAXKIT380SF Langauge Kit - Finnish
Note: Fax Language Kits will not be held ex-stock.
Supplies:
DD38BLK Black Developer Yield 100K

DD38COL 3 Colour Developers In One (CMY) Yield 100K
DT38BLK Black Toner Yield 20K @ 5%
DT38CYN Cyan Toner Yield 10K @ 5%
DT38YLW Yellow Toner Yield 10K @ 5%
DT38MGT Magenta Toner Yield 10K @ 5%
DFU1 Fuser Unit Yield 100K
DFO38 Fuser Oil Supply Unit Yield 20K
TDB38 Waste Toner Bottle Yield 50K
PFR38 Paper Feed Roller Yield 150K
DMU38BLK Black Photo Conductor Unit Yield 50K
DMU38COL 3 Colour Photo Conductor Unit (CMY) Yield 50K
CSC760A Staple Cartridge SR760/770 - 1 x 5,000 Yield 5,000
CSC760B Staple Cartridge SR760/770 3 x 5,000 Yield 15,000
41
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PCR38U
Nashuatec DSc38 u
Rex Rotary DSc38 U
Gestetner DSc38u
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
May, 2003 Japan

Date Created: April, 2003
Version 1
April, 2003
PCR38
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 4
Selling Points and Benefits As a Printer 5
Product Specifications - Printer 8
Product Specifications - Copier Feature Expander 25
Document Server Functions 29
Product Specifications - Scanner Functions 31
Product Specifications - Fax Feature Expander 33
Targeted Print Volume and Reliability 39
What Fits What 40

K:\Company\Market\NPS\PCR38U.doc 1
PCR38
INTRODUCTION
The PCR38 has been very successful and we plan to build on that success with the introduction of
an updated version, the PCR38U.
Two of the areas where there have been improvements are in processing speed and quality. There
has also been an increase in the fuser oil yield and improvements made to the fuser unit. Please see
the section below that details the main changes from the PCR38 to PCR38U.
The positioning of the PCR38U has not changed and with the marketplace getting more and more
competitive, the PCR38U should create new focus and help us to build on the success gained over
the last 18 months with the PCR38.
Main Differences Between PCR38U and PCR38
Processor speed increased from 300MHz to 500MHz

Warm-up time reduced from 119 seconds to 99 seconds
Reduction in colour shift (improved registration)
SWOP, Euroscale and HP CLP colour simulation
Newly designed fuser unit
Increase in fuser oil yield to 30,000
Better dot reproduction to improve overall image quality
Shorter calibration time
New development and drum maintenance kits
New duplex unit
New copy feature expander (functions remain the same)
New rack
The PCR38U has been designed as:
A high performance office network printer that prints at 38ppm in mono and 28ppm in
colour.
A high quality network printer capable of 1200dpi resolution.
A versatile and powerful printer with options that include large capacity trays, a finisher
with stapling and punching capabilities, duplex and optional copy/scanner/fax units.
The PCR38U can be targeted at either a mono or colour environment and its price positioning will
make it possible to introduce colour into environments where price has caused a resistance to colour
sales in the past.
As a high speed, 38ppm, mono printer with extensive finishing capabilities and a high level of
productivity, we will have a product that will be extremely competitive in this growing market.
PCR38
As a high speed, 28ppm, full colour printer, also with extensive finishing capabilities and a print
speed of more than double the accepted speed for the general office, the PCR38U will astound your
customers.
When you combine these qualities into one unit, as has been done with the PCR38U, you have a
unique product that will create great demand and generate revenue, as well as assist our brand in
becoming recognized as a printer manufacturer.
Please note :
There are certain options that are common with the existing PCR38 and some that have been
changed and are new. Please check the WFW for a complete list.
PCR38
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PCR38U Basic Printer (without CFE unit)
The height of the main unit will be about 30mm taller than the PCR38 because of the redesigned
fuser unit and higher oil capacity. The top of the standard tray will be also taller in order to have
the same output tray angle.
Appearance of all paper handling options remain the same as the PCR38.
PCR38
SELLING POINTS AND BENEFITS AS A PRINTER
Enhanced Productivity :
Continuous Print Speed, B/W 38 ppm and Color 28 ppm, remains very competitive in the
market place.
Faster CPU RM7000C 500MHz and re-tuned controller improves printing performance.
18% improvement in warm-up time: less than 99 sec.
Calibration time improved
Improved Image Quality:
Average colour shifting will be improved by approx. 20% over the PCR38
2 types of ink simulation profiles, SWOP and Euroscale, are available with the PS driver.
SWOP is the industry standard in the USA, and Euroscale in Europe for CMYK ink and colour
reproduction by commercial printing press. These profiles will help users who wish to simulate
the colour reproduction of a printing press on the PCR38U.
Maximum Paper Input Equals to Maximum Ouput:
Versatile paper handling options that were available for the PCR38 remain available for the
PCR38U. Maximum paper input and output are the same at 3,100 sheets.
3 type of input options: 500 sheets x1, 500 sheets x2 and a 2000 sheets LCT.
2 type of output options: 4 bin Mailbox and Finisher.
Duplex printing : Auto Duplex option that provides duplex productivity @ 100%
Advanced Interface Support:
Standard Network Interface Board for 10/100 Base TX.

Optional choice for IEEE1394 (IP over), Bluetooth, IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN) and USB2.
Improved Fuser Oil Yield:
The maximum yield of the fuser oil has been improved by 50% from 20,000 to 30,000 pages
PCR38
a) Standard Configuration:
Monochrome 38ppm / Colour 28ppm engine with 2 x 500 sheets paper trays,
100 sheets Multi Bypass Tray, 500 sheets output tray (Face Down), 100 sheets output tray
(Face up) & Network Interface Board (Ethernet).
b) Options:
Input Paper Options

(3) 2000 sheets Large Capacity Tray Alternative with (1) / (2)
Output Paper Options

(4) 2000 sheets Finisher (7) (9) and (1) or (2) or (3) is required
(5) Punch Kit (3 types) Option for (4), 1 type can be installed
(6) 4 bin Mailbox Alternative with (4) / Scanner Options
(7) Duplex Unit
Controller Options
(8) Memory (4 types) 1 type can be installed
(9) HDD (40GB) 1 type can be installed
(10) IEEE1394 board
Scanner Options
(11) Copier Unit Alternative with (6)
(12) ARDF Option for (11)
(14) Multi-bin sorter (TBA) Option for (11), (7) is required,
Alternative with (4)
(15) Fax Unit Option for (11)
(16) G3 additional Line Option for (15), Alternative with (17)
(17) G4 Line Option for (15), Alternative with (16)
(19) Hand Set Option for (15)
(20) Fax Stamp Option for (15)
PCR38
Versatile and Powerful Options

The PCR38U enables the users to do complete finishing of their jobs thanks to the many input and
output options listed below:
(1) Input Paper Options

There are three types of input paper options, a 2000 sheets LCT, 1 x 500 sheet paper tray
and 2 x 500 sheet paper trays.
Standard input paper capacity is 1,100 sheets (2 trays x 500 sheets and 1 x 100 sheet multi
bypass tray).
If the 2000 LCT is installed, the maximum input capacity is 3,100 sheets.
(2) Output Paper Options

There are two options for handling the paper output, a 4 bin mailbox and a 2000 sheet
finisher.
Standard output paper capacity is 600 sheets (1 x 500 sheet face down tray and 1 x 100
sheet face up tray)
If the 2000 sheet finisher with high capacity mode (2500 sheets) is installed, the maximum
output capacity is 3,100 sheets.
(3) Auto Duplex option

The PCR38 has a continuous duplex speed (100% productivity) that is the fastest among
mid-range network printers for workgroups.
(4) Controller options
Standard Memory is 64MB. Maximum memory is 384MB (256MB & 128MB). There is
only one additional slot so standard memory has to be removed when upgrading to higher
than 288MB.
(5) Scanner options

The PCR38U supports a copy feature expander unit, which is capable of Copy/Fax/Scanner
functions.
The PCR38U is designed for an advanced office environment and the Ethernet interface
board is standard. In addition, you can add an optional HDD and memory to increase
productivity.
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - PRINTER

Engine:
Technology: Laser beam scanning, electro-photographic printing and dual-component

toner development
4 tandem drums
Resolution: True 1200 x 1200 dpi

1200 x 600dpi
PPM:
A4/LT (LEF) Resolution Plain Paper Thick/OHP
Duplex Speed: Auto Duplex (Option)

100% productivity
First Print Speed:

Monochrome: 9.0 sec. or less (A4 / LT - LEF, 1st Tray)
Colour: 12.0 sec. or less (A4 / LT - LEF, 1st Tray)
Dimensions
(W x D x H): 575 x 648 x 745mm (22.7 x 25.6 x 29.3)
Weight: Less than 85Kg (187lb)
Input Capacity: Standard: Paper tray: 2 x 500 sheets

(80g/m2) Bypass tray: 1 x 100 sheets
Optional: Paper Tray: 1 x 500 sheets or 2 x 500 sheets

LCT: 2,000 sheets
Output Capacity Standard: Face down: 500 sheets

(80g/m2) Face up: 100 sheets
Optional: 4-bin mailbox: 4 x 125 sheets
Finisher: 2,000 sheets
(High Capacity Mode: 2,500sheets without shift tray mode)
PCR38
Paper Size Standard: No.1 (upper) tray: A4 / LT (LEF)

No.2 (lower) tray: A3 / DLT, 11x17 A5 (SEF)
Envelope* (TBA)
(*Guide fence is required)
Bypass tray: 305 x 458mm 90 x 148mm
Optional: Paper tray: A3 / DLT, 11x17 A5 (SEF)
LCT: A4 / LT (LEF)
Paper Type: Paper tray / LCT: Plain Paper

By-pass Tray: Thick Paper (105g/m2, 28lbs. more)
Special Paper (OHP)
Paper Weight: Paper Trays (Std./Opt.): 60 - 105 g/m2

Multi Bypass Tray: 60 - 163 g/m2
LCT: 60 - 105 g/m2
Duplex Printing: Auto (Option)

A3 - A5 (LEF)
60 - 105 g/m2

Leading & Tailing edge: Approx. 4.2mm
(The printable area may vary depending on paper size, printer language and
printer driver settings.)
Power Consumption: Maximum: 1,300W or less

Energy saver mode: 45W or less
Energy Star Mode: 60min.

Selectable: 0.5min. / 15min. / 30min. / 60min.
EMI: EN55022 Class B
Sound Power Level: Stand-by: Less than 42dB

Printing: Less than 68dB
Energy Saver: Less than 40dB
(Measured by Ricoh Standard methodology)
PCR38
Controller:
CPU: RM7000C 500MHz

PS: NRGI provides a PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file,

which defines the specific printer features (such as paper handling
options, paper size range, and so on) and the user interface built into
the driver.
Resolution: PCL5c: 600 x 600dpi

PS: 600 x 600dpi / 1200 x 600dpi / 1200 x 1200dpi
RPCS: 600 x 600dpi / 1200 x 600dpi / 1200 x 1200dpi
RAM: 64MB (Up to 384MB, 1 slot free*)

144 pin (SO_DIMM) 100 MHz 64 bit Non-EEC parity
Acs: 6ns
(* When the optional copier unit is installed, there are no free slots)
Memory Requirements:
Resolution Paper Size Sim plex Duplex

Norm ally Possible Always Possible Norm ally Possible Always Possible
600x600dpi A3/DLT 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB
B4 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB
LG 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB
A4/LT 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB
B5 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB
A5 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB
1200x600dpi A3/DLT 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB
LG 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB
A4/LT 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB
B5 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB
A5 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB
1200x1200dpiA3/DLT 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB 128MB+256MB
B4 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB 64MB+256MB
LG 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB 64MB+256MB
A4/LT 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+128MB
A5 64MB(Std.) 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB 64MB(Std.)+64MB
PCR38
HDD: 40GB (Copying HDD)

10 TrueType fonts
1 Bitmap font

RPCS: N/A
Driver: PCL5c: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000

PS: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000, Mac 7.6.1 or later
RPCS: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000

From Default Tray - Tray 1 (Upper tray)-Tray 2-Tray 3 (or LCT)-
Tray 4.
Bypass tray not available.

progress, the printer searches for another tray that contains the same
size, orientation and media type of paper and switches to that tray
automatically.
Paper Runs out: Yes

When the paper runs out in the current tray, while printing
is in progress, the printer automatically searches for another
tray that contains the same size and orientation of paper. If there is no
tray with the specified paper, the Load (Paper Size) (Tray No.)
message appears on the LCD of the printer operation panel. If the
specified paper is loaded in the specified tray, the printer re-starts the
printing automatically.
Tray Lock: Yes (Default: Off)

Option: IEEE1394
(Token Ring is not supported)
*USB available: Parallel-USB cable is not included.
Network Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI*, AppleTalk

*Only supported by SmartNet Monitor
Utilities: SmartNetMonitor
ScanRouter
Print Utilities for Mac
PCR38
Spooling: Yes (HDD required)
Job Cancel: Yes (from Operation Panel)

Includes printing and processing jobs
Rotate Sort: No
Cover Sheet: Yes (with Electronic sorting enabled)

(Front cover / Back cover) Blank or Copied paper can be selected in the Print Driver

RPCS driver only *
(*PCL has First page / Other page function only)

Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Proof + Secure print)
Locked Print (=Secure Print): Yes

Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Sample + Secure print)
CLP Simulation: Available with RPCS, PCL5c and PS drivers

Colour profile that simulates colour reproduction of HP CLP. Target
is colour laser Jet 4550 with PCL5c
Ink Simulation: Available with PS driver. Colour profile that simulates colour
reproduction of commercial offset printing. SWOP is industry
standard in North America for CMYK ink and its colour
reproduction. Euroscale is the industry standard in Europe.
Ink Simulation Euroscale: Available with PS driver. Colour profile that simulates colour
reproduction of commercial offset printing. Euroscale is industry
standard in Europe for CMYK ink and its colour reproduction.
NOTE : The colour and tone range that can be reproduced by offset
printing press is wider than that of Colour Laser Printer. Therefore the
Ink Simulation function does not match colours perfectly to SWOP
and Euroscale.
PCR38
New default profile: Available with RPCS, PCL 5c and PS drivers. When using the PCR38
a default profile is applied for both letter and graphic objects. This
default profile is effective to reproduce both letter and graphic objects
more vividly, but as a side effect blue-green colours can be
reproduced as Cyan which often looks different to the colour on the
monitor. When using the PCR38U a new default profile for letter
mode has been added and, as a result, there will be two different
profiles for each letter and graphic object so that the blue-green
colour in a graphic object (ex: background) will be close to monitor
colours.
Black Over Print : Now available with RPCS in addition to PCL 5c and PS drivers.
When this function is enabled in the driver, there is less image shift between black letters and the
colour background.
M M M
1
Vertical cross Y Y Y
section.
K replaces
background. (M+Y)
M M
2
BOP When black
letter is printed.
Y K Y
M
M Y M
3
BOP If K is shifted. Y K Y
Image shift appears.
M M
M M Y Y M
4
BOP When black
over print is
Y Y K Y
selected. Black will be over printed

on background.
PCR38
User Interface example with PS drivers in advanced colour setting tab
Note : Design may be changed without prior notice.
PCR38
Controller Options
HDD:
Electronic sorting
Print Job Spooling (Proof/Secure printing)
Logging Data
Memory:
Type: SO DIMM (SD-RAM),
PC 100 MHz 64bit Non-ECC/Parity
IEEE1394:
This option enables customers to print through an IEEE1394 interface. Two function (Type of
connection) are available:
1) SCSI print (the same function supported by IEEE1394 option on the PCR38 and PCR10)
Windows 2000 Service pack 1 or later
Data transfer at 400/200/100Mbps
Cable length max 4.5m (1 hop)
2) IP over 1394
Supported OS => Windows XP
Cable length max 4.5m (1 hop)
Use TCP/IP
SmartNetMonitor will not be supported.
Interface IEEE Std. 1394-1995 compliant

IEEE Std. 1394a-2000 compliant
Interface Ports IEEE1394 (6pin x 2 ports)
Data Transmission Max 400Mbps
Number of devices Max. 63 in a bus
Number of cable Hops Max. 16 hops in a bus
IEEE1394 Interface Unit option includes 2 cables. (6pin x 4pin, 6pin x 6pin)
PCR38
NV-RAM (64KB)
This is used for storing the "User Code" when you manage your clients using SmartNetMonitor
such as Usage-restriction or Color mode-restriction.
Up to 400 user codes can be registered
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)
IEEE802.11b was authorized as an enhanced standard of IEEE 802.11 by IEEE (Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers) in 1999. IEEE 802.11b use 2.4GHz frequency range, and
realizes 11Mbps as max. data transfer speed. Wireless LAN can provide users with layout free
network environment, however, its was not so popular because of low data transfer speed, high cost
and no compatibility among products, before IEEE802.11b was authorized. With IEEE 802.11b,
those issues are resolved. Market demand has been expanded since the year 2000 accordingly.
Specification
Transmission spec: Based on IEEE802.11b
Protocol: TCP/IP
Data transfer speed: Auto select from speeds listed below
1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps
Frequency range: 2400 2497Mhz (1-14 channel)
Transmittable distance: 1Mbps => 400m*
2Mbps => 270m*
5.5Mbps => 200m*
11Mbps => 140m*
*These figures are guideline for outdoor use.
In general it is said the distance is 10-100m for indoor use and it depends on environment.
Transmission mode: ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode
SmartNetMonitor : Supported
WebStatusMonitor : Supported
Transmission mode
ad hoc mode : Direct data
transmission between PC &
printer. Each client needs to have
PC same frequency range by selecting
the same transmission channel.
Transmittable distance is approx.
PC PC 50m
PCR38
Access point
PC PC infrastructure mode : Data

transmission via access point. Each
client needs to have common SSID
to access the Access Point. If the
Access Point is connected to a wired
PC PC LAN, it is possible to access the
printer from an external network.
Transmittable distance is approx.
100m
PC PC
PC
Channel
It is necessary that each client uses the same frequency range to be connected to the Wireless LAN.
- ad hoc mode : Select channel from operation panel. The channel should be same between
the printer and the other client (PC).
- infrastructure mode : Channel will be automatically set to same channel of Access Point if
it has common SSID to client (printer).
Security
- SSID (Service Set ID)

It is the ID, which enables connection between the Access Point and client. Transmission is
possible between the Access Point and client if they have a common SSID. SSID can be set by
Web Status Monitor or telnet. Only one SSID can be set for the printer.
PCR38
Example from Web Status Monitor
- ANY mode
If no SSID is set up, automatic connection through the nearest Access Point is possible if the
Access Point allows ANY mode connection.
Note 1: It is not possible to connect 10/100Base TX and IEEE802.11b at the same time.
You can switch manually using the operation panel of the printer.
Note 2: Some Wireless LAN cards for PCs may require SSID even for sn ad hoc mode
connection.
Note 3: The IEEE802.11b interface option contains a Wireless LAN card for the printer
only. An Access point, Wireless LAN card for PCs and other necessary items need
to be purchased by end users.
PCR38
USB2
The USB2 interface offers simple and quick peer-to-peer connection for desktop and mobile PCs.
Transmission spec: USB1.1 and USB2.0.

Data transfer speed: High speed (USB2.0) => 480Mbps
Full speed => 12Mbps
Low speed => 1.5Mbps
PnP (Plug and Play): When USB cable is connected, OS will automatically recognize the
printer and proceed to one of followings.
1.USB driver is installed: OS automatically set up the printer.
2. USB driver is not installed: Pop-up menu comes up which
recommends installing the driver.
Supported OS: USB1.1 => Windows 98/ 2000/ Me/ XP, MAC OS 9.x, X classic
mode
USB2.0* => Windows 2000/ Me/ XP
*Depends on driver support schedule of Microsoft. .
USB cable : USB cable should be procured locally.
Notes): 1. USB2.0 includes USB1.0 specification.

2. USB2.0 support is required on the PC.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth is the technology specification that was developed by the "Bluetooth Special Interest
Group" (SIG).
Bluetooth is a short distance radio communication technology:

- Cableless communication
- Range of around 10m
- Low electricity consumption
- Low price
- 2.4GHz ISM band used. Same electric wave as a microwave oven and 802.11b (Wireless LAN).
- Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) system
- Many of the protocols used with infrared communication (IrDA) can also be used with Bluetooth.
Communication model
- Communicates by being separated into a Master and Slave
- Forms Piconet. Seven devices can communicate to one master simultaneously.
- When entering Park mode (a low consumption electricity mode), it forms Piconets up to a
maximum of 255
- The device has different electricity consumption and electric wave bands with each of the 4
models available (Active, Sniff, Hold, Park)
Global standard
The latest standard is Bluetooth 1.1
Specifications:
PCR38
Supported OS: Same as Printer Driver
Requirements for Bluetooth operation:
1) PCR38U
2) PCR38U Bluetooth Option
3) Host PC with PCMCIA card slots
4) 3COM Wireless Bluetooth PC Card 3CRWB6096
or
3COM Wireless Bluetooth USB Adaptor 3CREB96
Transmission spec: Based on Bluetooth V1.1
Profile: Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP), Serial Port Profile (SPP)
PCR38
Counter (Meter Click Mode)

How to set Meter Click mode: By SP mode (Once, under minus counter)
Only once Selectable Developing Count or Print
Count method.
Selectable A3 single count or double count.
Fax number can be input.
Not exceed 0 count.
How to count-up:
Developing Count (Default)

Application Mode Bk counter Colour counter
Printer Full colour +1 +3
Black +1
Copy Full colour +1 +3
2C* +2
1C* +1
Black +1
Fax Black +1
Print Count
Application Mode Bk counter 1C/2C counter Colour counter
Printer Full colour +1
Black +1
Copy Full colour +1
2C* +1
1C* +1
Black +1
Fax Black +1
Default number:
(at factory site)
Developing Count
Type Default count
Colour counter -6,000 200
Print Count
Type Default count
Colour counter -2,000 200
PCR38
Pages not counted:

1. Counter Sheet
2. SP mode printing
3. Colour Calibration Sheet
4. Front Cover page (Blank paper)
5. Back Cover page (Blank paper on Duplex printing)
6. Error report printing
7. Jam before printing on output tray
8. OHP Slip sheet (Blank Paper)
Limitation:
Default Mode :
After ACS mode, all print pages including Black (For annual contract) pages are counted as Colour,
based on internal processing (Colour PCU and Developer are used), in order that the customer can
refer to the actual yield of the Colour PCU and Developer on the configuration sheet
1 job
Bk count Colour count Colour count Colour

count
Meter Click mode :

After ACS mode, due to the legal matter, the Colour page is counted as Colour and the Black page
is counted as Black, even though Colour PCU and Developer are used.
(We have to charge to the customer based on output document, not internal process)
1 job
B B F F B B F
Bk Color Black Colo

count r
Colour PCU and Developer are
*The # of Black prints (Colour PCU and Developer are used) after ACS mode is mentioned on the
Logging sheet (7003-14) of the SMC print in SP mode, so that the user can check pure Black
process prints (=B/W mode on Driver setting and Before ACS) and the others in Total Black
prints.
PCR38
Product Concept
The PCR38U Copier Feature Expander is designed as:

A Solution device for Colour Input and Output needs (Paper Saving)
Centre machine for Occasional Copy and Fax needs (Space saving)
To target Corporate users with a full function Colour MFP
Target Users
Companies with more than 100 employees

Shared by Workgroup users mainly
Target of PCR38 Copier Feature Expander
Number of users
sharing the machine
Number of Employees
Centralized More than 100

More than 100
Division
50-100 M1
30-99
Work Group
20-30
S2
Small Work Group 5-29
3-10
S1
Business Personal
1-4
PCR38
Scanner / FAX Options
(1) Copier Unit (4) or (5) are required.
Optional tray, (2) and (3) are recommended.
(2) 40GB HDD Option for (1)
(3) Rack Option for (1)
(4) ARDF Option for (1), Alternative with (5)
(6) Multi-bin Option for (1), Optional Duplex unit is required
Alternative with Finisher
(7) *Fax Unit Option for (1)
(8) G3 additional Unit Option for (7), Alternative with (9)
(9) G4 Unit Option for (7), Alternative with (8)
*Including fax stamp ink.
FAX Supply
(1) FAX Stamp Supply for (7)
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - COPIER FEATURE EXPANDER,

WHICH INCLUDES SCANNING FUNCTION (OPTION)
Please be advised that specifications may change!
The DIF7000CS is the new copier feature expander which has the same functionality as the
DIF3800C (PCR38 CFE), although it cannot be retro fitted.
Copy Feature Expander, which includes scanning function and ARDF or Platen cover must
be installed together.
Configuration: Rack Type
Paper Size: Max. 12 x 18
Resolution: 600dpi / 2bit
First Copy Speed

Monochrome 8 seconds (A4 / LT LEF, 1st Tray)
Colour 10 seconds (A4 / LT LEF, 1st Tray)
(Original on platen glass from standard paper tray)
Copy Speed (A4 LEF):

Normal Mode: BW: 38cpm / FC: 28cpm
OHP / Tick Paper Mode: BW : 10cpm / FC: 10cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: BW: 38cpm / FC: 28cpm
Reproduction Ratio: 6 reductions, 5 enlargements plus 100%

400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 100, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25%
Duplex Copy: Auto (Optional Duplex unit and HDD are required )
Simplex original to Duplex copy
Duplex original to Duplex copy
Simplex Book original to Duplex copy
Duplex Book original to Duplex copy
PCR38
Memory: 192MB (64 + 128MB)

(64MB standard printer memory + 128MB standard with Copier
Feature Expander)
Copier Unit 570 x 757 x 100mm
Printer
with 1 x 500 tray 730 x 770 x 1100mm
with 2 x 500 tray 730 x 770 x 1200mm
with LCT 730 x 770 x 1200mm
*Height : equal to Contact glass
Weight: (Copier unit) 15kg
Power Source:
EU. System: 220 / 230 / 240V 8A, 50/60Hz
Copier System: 220 / 230 / 240V 1.1A, 50/60Hz
Max. Power Consumption: Less than 250W
Operation Panel: Monochrome LCD
Colour Selection: Black + Single colour (Able to change Black colour to other
colour)
Single Colour:
Pre-set colour pallet: 12 colours with 4 levels density selection

Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Yellow Green,
User Colour Memory: 15 colours (The ratio of Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black)
Twin Colour: Black + Pre-set colour + User colour memory
Copy Mode: Auto Text & Photo Separation Mode/Photo Mode/Text

Mode/ Map Mode / 2nd Generation Mode
In Auto Text & Photo Separation Mode and Photo
Mode, the following three photo types can be selected:
6 Press Print Mode
6 Glossy Photo Mode
6 2nd Generation Mode
Reduce / Enlarge:
Auto Paper Selection (APS): Yes

Auto Magnification Selection (AMS): Yes
Zoom: Yes (25-400%, 1% step)
Size Magnification: Yes
PCR38
Directional Magnification: Yes (% input)

Directional Size Magnification: Yes (mm/inch input)
Poster Mode: No
Shift / Erase / Book Copy:
Centering: Yes
Cornering: No
Margin Adjustment: Yes
Erase Centre: Yes
Erase Border: Yes
Erase Centre / Border: Yes
Combination (N-up):
Simplex 6 types
Duplex x 1 / TBA / Duplex x 2 )
Duplex* 6 types
Duplex x 2 / Duplex x 4 / Duplex x 8 )
6 For Duplex printing, the Duplex unit is required.
ADS (Auto Density): Yes
Manual Density Selection: 9 levels
OHP Slip Sheet: Yes (Blank paper)
Cover Sheet : Yes (with Electronic sorting enabled)

(Front cover / Back cover) Blank paper or Copied paper can be selected in the Print
Driver

Image Editing :
Area Editing: No
Outline: No
Italic: No
Under colour: No
Mirroring: No
Shadow: No
Repeat / Double copy: Yes
Erase selected colour: Yes ( 4 colour selectable Black / Yellow / Magenta / Cyan /
Red / Blue / Green)
PCR38
Image Colour Adjustment:
Auto Colour Calibration(ACC): Yes

Colour Balance Programme: Yes
Colour Separation Adjustment: Yes
Sharp / Soft Adjustment: Yes
Contrast: Yes
Pastel Image Adjustment: No
UCR Adjustment: Yes
Auto Text & Photo Separation Adjustment: Yes
Electronic Sort: Yes (with 40GB HDD)
Rotation Copy: Yes
Rotation Sort: Yes (with 40GB HDD)
1 Scan to Multiple Copies: Yes
Energy Saver Mode: Yes
Proof Copy: Yes
Job Recall: No
Reserved Copy: No
User Codes Yes - 400
PCR38
DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTIONS

Black + Single color (Able to change Black color to other color)
1.Copy
1.
2.Printer
3.Fax (Transmission)
4.PC-Fax (Transmission) HDD
RECOPYING
5.Scanner
PCR38
Hardware Configurations: Scanner Unit and HDD are required.
Applications: Printer / Copier / Scanner*1 / Fax*2 functions

*1 : excluding TWAIN
*2 : Fax unit is required. Excluding direct transmission
Specifications: 1)Storage on HDD

2)Manage the stored files on HDD
Sorting /Referring
Changing the file name and Deleting the file
3)Combining the stored files (if required) and then:
Refaxing (Fax Transmission data)
Redistributing (Scanner data)
Recopying
User Interface: By Operation panel or on clients PC, through a utility called

DeskTopBinder
Limitations: Does not support Duplex printing
Requirements: Storage data: 1200 x 1200dpi

Paper Size: Over A4/LT (e.g. DLT/A3/B4)
PCR38
Copy Fax Fax Printer Scanner
(Transmission) (Reception)
Storage Yes Yes No No Yes
Re-print/copying Yes Yes No No No
Distributing No No Yes No Yes
Forwarding No No Yes No No
Re-Faxing No Yes No No No
Referring No No No No No
*Storage: To store the data in 40GB HDD (Document Server) for re-copying, re-faxing
and distributing.
*Re-Printing: To re-print the Copied and Fax transmitted data stored in 40GB HDD.
*Distributing: To send the Scanned data or Received Fax data by ScanRouter via the
Network.
*Forwarding: To forward the Fax received data
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - SCANNER FUNCTIONS

(INCLUDED WITH COPY FEATURE EXPANDER)
The copy feature expander includes scanning.
Documents
PCR38
Document
(Electronic Data)
Copy Feature Expander unit and Platen cover or ADF must be installed together.
Model type: Platen cover: Desktop flatbed scanner unit (component)
ADF: Sheet pass through type
Driver: Network Twain version 1.7 or later
OS: Win95 / 98 / NT4.0 / 2000 / Me
Connectivity: 100/10 Base-TX
Scanning Area: Main Scanning: 297mm

Sub-Scanning: 432mm (ADF: 1260mm)
Resolution: 600dpi (Total 384MB memory is required)

400dpi (Total 256MB memory is required)
200dpi (Standard total 192MB memory is required)
Grey scale: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel
PCR38
ADF throughput:
Without HDD: B/W: 21ppm (A4 / LT SEF, 200dpi, 1 bit)
With HDD: B/W: 30ppm (A4 / LT SEF, 200dpi, 1 bit)
Scanning time: Less than 6 sec. (A4 / LT SEF, 200dpi, 1bit)
Scan to e-mail: Yes (ScanRouter Pro is required)
PCR38
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS - FAX FEATURE EXPANDER

(OPTION)
Scanner unit, ADF and Fax unit must be installed together.
General Features:
Model Type: Transceiver (G3)
Line Options: Std. G3 x 1 line / Max. 2 lines (G3 orG4)
Circuit: G3 (Standard): PSTN, PBX,

G4 (Optional): ISDN
Resolution: G3: 8 x 3.85 L /mm

8 x 7.7 L /mm
G4: 8 x 15.4 L/mm

6 x 15.4 L/mm
Compression Method: Standard: MH/MR/MMR

Optional: JBIG
Scanning Speed: Approx. 0.7 sec. (A4/LT SEF, 200 x 100dpi)
Modem Speed: G3: 33,600 2400 bps Automatic shift-down

G4: Max. 64Kbps
Transmission Speed: G3 (8 x 3.85/mm, 28.8Kbps more): 3 sec. level (ITU-

T No.1 Chart)
G4 (200 x 200dpi, 64Kbps): 3 sec.
SAF memory: Standard: 2MB

Optional: * 26MB (Memory Unit 32MB)
* Rest of Memory used for page memory
Memory Backup: 1 hour
Fax Stamp: Yes
Dual Access: Yes
TTI/RTI: Yes
CSI: Yes
PCR38
Fax Functions (Option) Continued
Speed Dial: 200 numbers
Group Dial: 64 groups
User Program: 100 programs (Max 200 programs)
Redial(Automatic/Manual): Yes
AI Short Program: Yes (10 calls)
Direct Fax number entry: Yes
Dual Access: Yes
User Code: Yes
Auto document: Standard: 6 documents

Maximum 18 documents
Page count: Yes (Prints on upper right side)
Auto Reduction: Yes
Wild Cards: Yes
Summer Time (daylight saving time): No
ID code programming: Yes (4 digits)
User Function Keys: Yes (3 keys)
Night Timer: No
LCD prompt: Yes
User Data Transfer: No
PCR38
Serial Broadcasting(later): Yes
Send Later: Yes
Page Re-transmission: Yes
Forwarding: Yes
Parallel Memory Transmission: Yes
Image Rotation: Yes
Book Fax: Yes
Closed Network(transmission): Yes
Confidential Transmission (with ID): Yes
Multi Step Transfer: Yes
Double Sided Transmission: Yes
Reception Features
PCR38
Authorized Reception: Yes
Multi Copy: Yes

Memory Lock: Yes
Special reception numbers: No
Closed Network: Yes
Polling Reception: Yes
Poll Later: Yes
Polling From Memory: No
Multi-Polling Reception: No
Centre Mark: Yes
Chequered Mark: Yes
2 in 1 (Two in one): Yes
Duplex Reception: Yes
Telephone Features
Handset / Telephone: No
Voice Request: No
On Hook Dial: Yes
PCR38
Pause: Yes
Pause & Tone Selection: Yes
Chain Dialing: Yes
Reception Mode Selection: Yes
Automatic Fax/Phone Change: No
Reception Mode Switch Over(Remote): No
Answer machine Interface: No
Reception Mode Switching Timer: No
Auto Answer Delay Time: No
Busy Toner Detection: Yes
Silent Ringing Detection: Yes
Backup Telephone: No
Options
a) 40GB HDD
Capacity: Approx. 40 GB
Specifications: Electronic sorting of copier function and Stored Copying
data for local Storage Function
b) Rack
Weight: 30kg
c) ARDF
Original Size:
Simplex A3,A4,,B4,B5,11x17,LG,LT
Duplex A3,A4,,B4,B5,11x17,LG,LT
Original Weight:
Simplex 60-128g/m2
Duplex 60-105g/m2
Stack Capacity: 80 sheets (80g/m2)
Weight: 12kg
PCR38
d) Platen Cover
Original Size: 530 x 600 x 80mm
Original Weight: 3.0kg
Weight: 3.8kg
e) Multi bin (Cannot be used with Finisher)

Option for CF unit (sorting Printer / Copier / Fax printing)
Duplex unit is required.
Number of bins: 2
Paper size: A3, A4, *A5, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT (Detectable size from
Paper Feed Unit
Available only A5Y
Paper weight: 60-105g/m2
Stack capacity :
Tray 1 : 100 sheets 80g/m2
Tray 2 : A4, smaller than LT 250 sheets 80g/m2
B4, LG 100 sheets 80g/m2
f) Memory
PC 100MHz 64bit Non-ECC/Parity
Capacity 64MB, 128MB , 256MB
Memory Requirements
Copy Fax Scanner

w HDD w/o HDD - Resolution on
Scanning (A4/LT)
Standard 192MB - - - 200x200
256MB No improvement No improvement No improvement 400x400
Max. 384MB Performance Ditto Ditto 600x600
improvement
for Duplex and
Finishing
PCR38
TARGETED PRINT VOLUME & RELIABILITY:

Average Monthly Print Volume (AMV): 10K prints (Colour ratio: 50%)
Maximum Monthly Print Volume (MMV): 50K prints (Colour ratio: 50%)
Machine Life (ML): 3,000k prints or five years, whichever comes first
Duty Cycle (DC): 200K prints (up to 15 months) (Colour ratio: 50%)
target customer.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is recommended Maximum Monthly Volume

RECOMMENDATION:
PCR38
WHAT FITS WHAT

PCR38U DSc38 u DSc38 U DSc38u
Peripherals:
AD7000 Duplex Unit

CS3800C 4-bin Mailbox
DME38 256MB Memory
DPFU38A 1 x 500 sheet Paper Supply Unit
DPFU38B 2 x 500 sheet Paper Supply Unit
PS470 2000 sheet Large Capacity Tray
SR770 Finisher Unit
DHPU451E4H 4-hole Punch Unit
DHPU451S4H Swedish 4-hole Punch Unit
DMEBP32 32MB Memory
DMEBP64 64MB Memory
DMENV7000 NV RAM for user accounting
DIFBT2045 Bluetooth Interface
Copy Feature Expander:
DIF7000CS Copy Option for PCR38U

PHD7000C40 40GB Hard Disk Drive for Printing and Copy Option
RACK7000 Rack to hold Copy Option
PT460 Multi Bin
Fax Feature Expander:
FAX3800C Fax Option for PCR38U

DME185J-F Optional Fax Memory 32MB
FAX3800CG3 G3 Interface (Second line)
FAX3800CG4 G4 Interface
Note: Please see Copy Feature Expander product configuration for compatible options.
PCR38
Language Codes:
Printer: Copy Feature Fax Feature
Expander: Expander:
PLS38GB CFLS38UGB FAXKIT380GB Language Kit English
PLS38F CFLS38UF FAXKIT380F Language Kit French
PLS38D CFLS38UD FAXKIT380D Language Kit German
PLS38I CFLS38UI FAXKIT380I Language Kit Italian
PLS38P CFLS38UP FAXKIT380P Language Kit Portuguese
PLS38N CFLS38UN FAXKIT380N Language Kit Norwegian
PLS38H CFLS38UH FAXKIT380H Language Kit Hungarian
PLS38CZ CFLS38UCZ FAXKIT380CZ Language Kit Czech
PLS38PL CFLS38UPL FAXKIT380PL Language Kit Polish
PLS38S CFLS38US FAXKIT380S Language Kit Swedish
PLS38SF CFLS38USF FAXKIT380SF Language Kit - Finnish
Note: Fax Language Kits will not be held ex-stock.
Supplies:
PMK7000D Black Developer Yield 100K

PMK7000B 3 Colour Developers In One (CMY) Yield 100K
DT38BLK Black Toner Yield 20K @ 5%
DT38CYN Cyan Toner Yield 10K @ 5%
DT38YLW Yellow Toner Yield 10K @ 5%
DT38MGT Magenta Toner Yield 10K @ 5%
PMK7000C Fuser Unit Yield 100K
PMK7000G Fuser Oil Supply Unit Yield 30K
TDB38 Waste Toner Bottle Yield 50K
PFR38 Paper Feed Roller Yield 150K
PMK7000F Black Photo Conductor Unit Yield 50K
PMK7000A 3 Colour Photo Conductor Unit (CMY) Yield 50K
CSC760A Staple Cartridge SR760/770 - 1 x 5,000 Yield 5,000
CSC760B Staple Cartridge SR760/770 3 x 5,000 Yield 15,000
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION

Model U-P1
PCR10
Nashuatec C7010
Rex Rotary C7010
Gestetner C7010
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
December, 2002 China

Version 9
March 2003
PCR10
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 4
Major Selling Points and Benefits 8
What Fits What 30
Whats In The Box 31

K:\Company\Market\NPS\PCR10.doc 1
PCR10
INTRODUCTION
2-in-1 product (Colour and Mono)
The PCR10 is the new A3 colour laser printer that will replace the PCR6W and PCR6DW.
With its 10ppm speed in colour and 36ppm in mono, the PCR10 will be positioned as a 2-in-1
product, suitable for colour and mono applications, in the general office environment.
Besides the engine speed, the new printer is characterised by the modularity of the paper handling
features available as options: duplex, mailbox or finisher, additional paper trays.
Nashuatec C7010
Rex-Rotary C7010
Gestetner C7010
The model name of this new machine is C7010 for all three brands, where C identifies the colour
capabilities and 10 the colour speed.
Unlike the PCR38, the other A3 printer to be launched this year, the PCR10 is not a Hybrid
machine and it cannot be upgraded with a Copier Function option for multifunctional capabilities.
Together with the A4 PCR6 (C7006) and the 28ppm PCR38, the PCR10 will give us a
comprehensive range of up-to-date colour printers to satisfy our office customers needs.
Recent market survey information shows that the ratio of mono and colour toners used by colour
laser printers is changing. Due to better quality and faster speeds, as well as reduced purchase
costs, colour printers are being used for mono and colour now.
As more manufacturers are bringing down the cost of mono prints on colour printers, more and
more colour printers will be sold to do mono work and occasional colour. Some users still feel that
colour printers to do dedicated colour printing are not good value for money.
The forecast on the following page shows that the process of shifting mono print volume to colour
laser printers started in the year 2000 and will make strong progress during the life cycle of the
PCR10.
PCR10
Colour Printers: Black vs Colour Toner

W.Europe 1998 2003 US$ Millions
700
600
500
400
Co lo u r
300 M on o ch ro me
200
100
0
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003
00000000 25
PCR10
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Product Image
PCR10 Main Unit
PCR10 with optional Duplex Unit
PCR10
PCR10 with optional 4-bin Mail Box
PCR10 with optional finisher
PCR10
Standard Configuration:
10ppm in colour, 36ppm in monochrome printing

250-sheet standard tray and 100-sheet bypass tray
64MB Memory
Options:
Input Paper Options
500-sheet paper feed unit with auto page size detection

Up to 2 trays can be installed
Output Paper Options (*Interchange unit is necessary)
(1) Duplex unit

(2) 500-sheet finisher Not configurable with 4-bin mailbox
(3) 4 bin mailbox Not configurable with 500-sheet finisher
Controller Options
(1) Memory (64/128/256MB) Standard (64MB) memory occupies 1 slot.

One spare slot is available.
Maximum memory capacity is 384MB.
(2) HDD 40GB
(3) IEEE 1394 board (IP Over)
(4) IEEE 802-11b Wireless LAN Same option as for PMR26A
Max. Output Capacity : 500 sheets

Controller Options
4-bin Mailbox: 500 sheets total Finisher: 500 sheets
Memory:
32MB DIMM
64MB DIMM
128MB DIMM
256MB DIMM
500
HDD:
HDD (20GB)
100
PCR10
I/F:
64MB IEEE1394 board
250 Duplex Unit
500 2
Max. Input Capacity : 1,350 sheets
PCR10
Target Customers
Target Users:
# of people using # of people at the location

the machine
Centralized: 100- 100-
DSc38
High-performance mono & colour
Division: 50-100
30-99
PCR10
Work Group:
Colour & high-performance mono
20-30
5-29
Small Work Group: PCR6

3-10 Colour & Mono
1-4
Business Personal
User Profile and Major Applications:
Type of Business: General Office
Division: Marketing, Sales, Planning, Administration, and Personnel
Application: MS Office (Word/Excel/PowerPoint) for reports, presentations

Internet (Mail, PDF files, home pages)
Corel Draw
Output: Reports, Presentations, Promotional Materials, Diagrams, Tables and

Spreadsheets, Mixed Colour and Mono Print pages and documents
PCR10
MAJOR SELLING POINTS AND BENEFITS
Major Selling Points
1. High Performance:
10ppm in colour, 36ppm in monochrome printing
Fast first print speed
99 seconds warm-up time
High duplex productivity
2. High Image Quality:

Clear solid and smooth gradation quality
Supports RPCS, PCL5c and Adobe PS3
3. Compact Body:
Can fit in the same space as an A3 mid-range printer
No extra space for finishing options
4. Versatile, Powerful Paper Handling:

250 sheets tray and 100 sheets bypass tray standard
Auto page size detecting paper tray
Auto duplex
4-bin mailbox and finisher
5. Easy Maintenance:
Consumables and Maintenance Kit
High Performance:
For mono users who consider purchasing a new colour laser printer, one of the top priorities is high
performance. High performance is the key to accelerating the conversion from mono to colour in
the market.
High Continuous Printing Speed:

In addition to its 10ppm colour printing speed, the PCR10 has a monochrome printing speed
in the same range as major mid-range network printers.
Colour: 10ppm
Monochrome: 36ppm
Fast First Print Speed:

In colour printing: Less than 18 seconds
First print speed is the fastest of any single drum colour laser printer engines. The speed in
colour printing is equal to the Xerox Phaser 1235, which uses 4 drums.
In monochrome printing: Less than 7.5 seconds
First print speed is very competitive, even if the PCR10 is compared to the major mid-range
mono laser printers.
PCR10
Comparison chart of continuous print speed and first print speed:
Model NRG NRG Xerox Xerox HP HP Lexmark

PCR10 PCR6W/DW Phaser Phaser 1235 CLJ 8550 LJ8100N Optra
790 (Tandem) W810N
PPM:
(colour) 10ppm 6ppm 6ppm 12ppm 6ppm N/A N/A
(mono) 36ppm 24ppm 26ppm 20ppm 24ppm 32ppm 35ppm

First print:
(colour) Less than Less than 26 26 sec. 18 sec. 36 sec. N/A N/A
18 sec. sec.
(mono) Less than Less than 13 11 sec. 13 sec. 21 sec. 17sec Less than 9.5
7.5 sec. sec. sec.
Fast Warm-up Speed:

Conventional colour laser printers have slow warm-up speeds and this frustrates users. The
PCR10 has a fusing belt system and its warm-up speed has been shortened considerably
when compared to the PCR6W/DW.
Warm-up speed comparison:
PCR10: Less than 99 seconds

PCR6W/DW: Less than 380 seconds
High Duplex Productivity:

Duplex printing productivity is more than 95% of simplex printing speed.
High Image Quality:
There are a wide variety of documents printed in the general office. In addition to documents
created in MS Office, documents are printed from other applications, web sites and digital cameras.
As a result, general office users need a printer that can cover various printing requirements.
Clear, Solid and Smooth Gradation Quality:

1800 x 600dpi equivalent image quality
Selectable resolution setting:

1800 x 600dpi equivalent image quality (default) (= 600 x 600dpi/2bit)
600 x 600dpi/1bit
2bit/pixel data processing:

The controller transmits 4 different sets of data for the horizontal direction
The engine changes the horizontal dot size (3 patterns) accordingly
Main scanning direction: 1800dpi
Sub-scanning direction: 600dpi
PCR10
In the resolution setting tab / print quality setting screen in RPCS driver, 600 x 600dpi/2bit
mode is shown as 1800 x 600dpi.
PCL5c (Standard):
PCL5c, based on HP Colour LaserJet 5, is supported as standard
The specifications, except for the Colour command) of PCL5C are compatible with PCL5e
PostScript 3 (Standard):
Adobe PostScript 3 (genuine) is supported. (PDF direct printing is not supported)
RPCS (Standard):
RPCS is a new, unique PDL designed to make the printer very easy to use
Compact Body:
PCR6W/DW
XeroxWin/Win+/PS
HP8550
Fresa N3225
Phaser790
PCR10
Xerox N3225 (32ppm B/W LP)
HP8100 (32ppm B/W LP)

PMR32 (32ppm B/W LP)
Phaser790
Lexmark Optra W810N (35ppm B/W LP)
HP8550
The PCR10 has a small footprint and is designed to fit into the same space required by a
conventional, mid-range mono printers. The footprint of the PCR10 is smaller than competitive A3
colour laser printers.
The finishing options are fitted on top of the machine, so no extra space is required when the
options are fitted.
PCR10
Versatile and Powerful Paper Handling:
A variety of finishing options are available.
There is a standard paper tray of 250 sheets and a standard, 100-sheet bypass tray.
(3) 4-bin mailbox (2) 500 sheets finisher
Interchange unit
* Required with duplex, 4-bin mail box
and finisher
(4) Auto duplex unit
(1) 500 sheets paper feed units

can be installed (max 2 x 500
sheets trays)
Input Paper Option:
500 sheets paper feed unit

Up to 2 trays are installable. The optional paper feed unit can detect the paper size in the additional
tray automatically, as well as in the standard tray. Therefore, users do not have to set the paper size
manually.
Output Paper Options:

Two paper output options are available. Either one can be installed. 400 sheets can be stacked at
the standard paper exit tray of the main unit. The maximum output paper capacity is 900 sheets.
500 sheets finisher (Interchange unit is necessary to install the finisher):

Three finishing modes are available:
Normal mode: Up to 500 sheets (A4/LT) can be stacked
Shift tray mode: Up to 500 sheets (A4/LT) can be stacked
Staple mode: Up to 30 sheets (A4/LT) can be stapled
PCR10
4-bin mailbox (Interchange unit is necessary to install the finisher):

When a 4-bin mailbox is installed, users can use five different paper exits.
Auto duplex option (Interchange unit is necessary to install the duplex option):
The duplex unit has a vertical design.
Auto duplex is also available when using the bypass tray
Paper weight: 60-105g/m2. Paper size: A3-A5 (SEF)/11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5 (SEF).
Front view of paper feeding path
Controller Options:
As the PCR10 is designed for office environments, an Ethernet network interface board is standard.
In addition, an optional IEEE1394 (Standard: IEEE1284), HDD and three types of optional
memory (64MB / 128MB / 256MB) are available.
Standard memory is 64MB, while the maximum capacity is 384MB. One slot is occupied by the
standard memory so, to install the maximum memory of 384MB, remove the standard memory and
install 256MB and 128MB.
Easy Maintenance:
Fusing oil
Fusing unit
Development
Photoconductor
2 x Waste toner
Charger unit
Toner
PCR10
Consumables and Maintenance Kits:
Toner: The toner cartridge can be detached from the developer unit. To
change the toner cartridge, pull the cartridge out from the front.
Fusing Oil: The fusing oil unit is a cartridge design. Replacing the fuser
cartridges is easy and trouble free.
Waste Toner Bottle: There are two separate waste toner bottles. If either of the bottles is
full, both will need to be replaced at the same time.
Photoconductor Unit: The photoconductor unit has a targeted yield of 120K developments.
This means that users who are doing average print volumes will only
need to change this unit every two years. A charger unit is preset
with the unit and two filters are packed in the box.
Development Unit: The development units are stacked one on top of the other on the left-
hand side of the machine. The left-hand side panel opens to enable
unit replacement.
Fusing Unit: Target yield is 120K prints. A paper feed roller and friction pad for
the standard tray are packed together in the box. When the fusing unit
is replaced, the roller and friction pad should also be replaced.
Charger Unit: Target yield is 120K developments. Two filters are packed together
in the box. When the unit is replaced, the filters should be replaced at
the same time.
PCR10
Engine
Technology: Dual laser beam, electro-photographic printing & mono component toner
development
Resolution: 600 x 600dpi 2bit /pixel
PPM: A4/LT(LEF): F/C: 10ppm Mono: 36ppm

A3/Legal/11x17: F/C: 5ppm Mono: 18ppm
Transparency */Envelope:
F/C: 2ppm Mono: 3.2ppm
*When OHP slip-sheet mode is off
Thick media: F/C: 4ppm Mono: 6.5ppm
Duplex speed: More than 95% of simplex printing speed
First print speed: A4/LT(LEF): F/C: Less than 18 sec.

Mono: Less than 7.5 sec.
W D H
PCR10 540mm 670mm 470mm
PCR10, Duplex, Finisher and 2 540mm 670mm 991mm
Paper Feed Units 636mm*
PCR10, Duplex, Mailbin and 2 540mm 670mm 991mm
Paper Feed Units 636mm*
* bypass is included
Weight: Less than 59kg.

Including starter toners and maintenance kits
Input capacity (80g/m2, A4/LT)

Standard: 250-sheet tray + 100-sheet bypass
Optional: 500-sheet paper tray x 2 trays
Max: 1,350 sheets
Output capacity (80g/m2, A4/LT):

Standard: 400 sheets
250 sheets/A3
Optional: 4-bin mailbox - 125 sheets x 4
Finisher: 500 sheets
Max: 900 sheets
PCR10
Paper Size:
Regular size: Standard tray* A6(SEF) - A3
*Paper size is automatically detected by tray except A6 (SEF)
Bypass tray A6(SEF) - A3
Custom size: Standard tray Min. 100 x 148mm

Max. 297 x 432mm
Bypass tray Min. 90 x 148mm
Max. 305 x 457mm
* printable area is 297 x 432mm - Measured by Ricoh Standard methodology
Paper Weight: Standard tray (Friction Pad): 64-105g/m2

Bypass tray (FRR): 64-163g/m2
Optional trays see Paper options
Duplex Printing: A5 A3
(option) 60-105g/m2
Auto duplexing is available with bypass feeding as well.
Max. Printable area: 297 x 432mm

Leading & Trailing edge: Approx. 4.2mm
Varies depending on paper size, printer language and printer driver
settings.
Rating Power Spec. EU version: 220-240V 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Max. Less than 1,500 (Max.)

Energy Star Mode Less than 35W
Warm-up Time Less than 99 sec. (From main power switch on until ready)
Energy Saver Mode Energy Saver 1 (Preheat Mode): On/Off (Default On)
Warm-up time from Mode 1 is less than 40 sec.
Energy Saver 2: On/Off (Default On)
Selectable time to switch to Energy Saver mode: 5/15/30/45/60 min. (Default 30 min.)
Safety Standard: EU version: EN60950, EN60825
EMI: EU version: EN55022 Class B
Sound Power Level: Mainframe: Stand-by: 38db

Printing: 67db
Energy Saver: TBA
Full configuration: Stand-by: Less than 42db
Printing: Less than 70db
Energy Saver: TBA
PCR10
Controller
CPU: RM5261 250MHz

Adobe PostScript 3: Genuine, Interpreter 3011.xxx
Resolution: PCL5c: 300 x 300dpi * / 600 x 600dpi / 1 bit, 2 bit

PS: 600 x 600dpi / 1bit, 2bit
RPCS: 1800 x 600dpi equivalent** (= 600 x 600dpi / 2bit)
*In case of receiving 300dpi Colour data, this data is printed as 300dpi B/W data.
**In the resolution setting tab at print quality setting screen in RPCS driver, 600 x 600dpi / 2bit
mode is shown as 1800 x 600dpi
RAM: Standard 64MB

Max. 384MB
Slot 2 slots
1 slot is occupied with std. Memory
Remove std. memory to use 384MB
Memory type SDRAM (SO-DIMM)

66/133MHz 64bit Non-ECC/Parity
Pin 144
Access Time 6 ns
Memory Requirement
Resolution Paper Simplex Duplex

Size
Normally Always Normally Always Possible
Possible Possible Possible
600 x 600dpi A3 64MB (Std.) + 64MB =
(600 x 600 / 1bit) B4 128MB
A4/LT
B5 64MB (Std.) 64MB (Std.) 64MB (Std.) 64MB (Std.)
A5
B6
A6
1800 x 600dpi A3 64MB (Std.) 256MB (128 + 128MB)
(600 x 600 / 2bit) B4 + 64MB = 64MB (Std.) + 128MB =
128MB 192MB
A4/LT 64MB (Std.) 64MB (Std.) 64MB (Std.) + 64MB =
B5 128MB
A5 64MB (Std.)
B6 64MB (Std.)
A6
PCR10
HDD: 40GB (Option)
Fonts: PCL5c: 35 intellifonts

10 TrueType fonts
1 Bitmap font
* (24 Type 2 and 112 Type 14 fonts)
RPCS: Not available
Driver: PCL5c: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000 / XP

PS: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0/2000/XP, Mac 8.6, 9.x, 10.1.x,
(10.0.x is not supported)
UNIX**
RPCS: Win 95 / 98 / Me/ NT4.0 / 2000 / XP
** Solaris 2.6/7/8, HP-UX 11.0, RedHat Linux 6.2 / 7.0 / 7.1 / 7.2
MS Certification has been obtained
Function RPCS PCL5c PS3 Remarks

Sample Print Yes Yes Yes HDD is required
Locked Print Yes Yes Yes HDD is required
Layout Yes Yes Yes* Selectable Draw frame border
* Win9x only
Duplex Yes Yes Yes with Op. Duplex
Staple Yes Yes Yes with Op. Finisher, RAM or HDD
First page/other page Yes Yes Yes* *Win 9x only
Slip sheet Yes Yes Yes
Custom paper size Yes Yes Yes
Resolution 1800 x 600 / 600 / 300* 600 *B/W printing only
600 x 600/300 x 300
Image Adjustment Yes Yes Yes
Grey Reproduction Yes Yes Yes * * Black Text/Graphic tab
Black Over print No Yes Yes
ICM Yes ** Yes ** Yes*/** *Mac/ ColorSync
** Does not support WinNT/Win95
Watermarks Yes Yes Yes * * Win9x / Mac only
Toner Saver Yes No Yes
Reverse print Yes No Yes* *Win2K/Mac only
Rotate Yes Yes Yes* *180 / landscape data only
(180 only) (180 only)
Do not print blank Yes No No
page

Requirements: HDD
Job Stock Spec: Max. stock pages: 1,000 pages / A4/LT (Total pages of proof
and secure print)
Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Total jobs of proof and secure print)
Overflow error record: latest 20 jobs
PCR10
Locked Print (=Secure Print): Yes

Requirements: HDD
Job Stock Spec: Max. stock pages: 1,000 pages / A4/LT (Total pages of proof
and secure print)
Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Total jobs of proof and secure print)
Overflow error record: latest 20 jobs
OHP Slip Sheet: Yes (Default - Off )

When OHP slip-sheet mode is On, blank paper is inserted
between OHPs. If OHP slip mode is not selected, remove
from the tray as they are printed, to avoid static build-up.
Cover Sheet : Yes (with Electronic sort set to On)

(Front cover) In the driver, select to print on front and back covers or to
leave blank.
Condition: HDD or optional RAM (min 64MB)
Up to 105g/m2 paper weight
RPCS driver only
(PCL has First page/Other page function as usual.)
Auto Tray Selection: Yes

From Default Tray - Tray 1 (standard tray) - Tray 2 -Tray 3
Tray 2 / 3 is available when optional paper feed units are
installed.
By default, the bypass tray is not included for auto tray
selection.

(Limitless Paper Supply) When the paper runs out in the current tray while printing is in
progress, the printer searches automatically for another tray
that contains the same size, orientation and media type.
Paper Runs out: Yes - When the paper runs out in the current tray while
printing is in progress, the printer automatically searches for
another tray that contains the same size, orientation and media
type. If there is no tray with the specified paper, the Load
(Paper Size) (Tray No.) message appears on the operation
panel. As soon as specified paper is loaded in the specified
tray, the printer will re-start printing automatically. The user
can also select the paper tray by using the operation panel to
print from a specified tray.
Tray Lock: Yes (Default - Off ) by Operational Panel

The locked tray is not used when auto tray change is selected.
PCR10
Sub Paper Size Setting: Yes (Default Off)

When an A4-sized job is sent to the printer controller and A4-
sized paper is not loaded in any paper trays but Letter sized
paper is found, the printer controller automatically feeds the
Letter size as Sub Paper Size and prints.

USB: USB 2.0 * (1.1, 2.0)
* USB is on another board and occupies the optional interface slot. It is
necessary to detach the USB 2.0 board when the optional interface is
installed
Option: IEEE1394 (IP Over):
Compatible with PMR45A and PMR26AN
Token Ring is not supported
IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Compatible
with PMR26AN
Network Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, and AppleTalk
Utility: SmartNetMonitor
DeskTop Binder
Printer utility for Mac (Refer to Appendix I)
Spool: Yes (at controller enhancement)
Sort: Yes (HDD or optional DIMM (Min. 64MB) is required)
Capacity: HDD: Up to 1,000 pages (Sort+Sample print+Locked print)

Memory: Up to 150 pages
Rotated Sort: No
Smoothing: No
Adjustment:
Registration: Yes (By Operation Panel)
Colour Registration: No
Image Density: Yes (By Operation Panel)
Calibration: Auto calibration in process control
New PDL: RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
What is RPCS?
New PDL developed by Ricoh (a successor of IPDL-C)
Common PDL for use in B&W / Colour LPs and MFPs (GW architecture base products)
Optimal PDL for Windows client (dedicated for Windows)
PCR10
Positioning of RPCS
RPCS is a strategic PDL to expand printing business in both machine sales (MIF) and after market
(Print Volume)
RPCS is one of the promoting tools for MFPs and LPs sales to differentiate from competitor models
supporting only PCL and PostScript.
PCL is also supported in MFPs and LPs to maintain HP compatibility as well as PostScript.
PCR10
Major Advantages
Faster throughput speed than HPs PCL XL
Comprehensive Driver User Interface
RPCS provides new Driver User Interface in addition to the conventional type User Interface with
multiple tabs (HP-Like user interface). Customers can select either one and can also switch to another at
any time.
[New User Interface]

Concept: Easy Print Setting
Some icons are prepared in driver windows as default, and each icon is assigned print option
settings such as duplex and staple. Customer can set any print job setting by clicking the icon. Also
customers can create and register additional icons to default icon set.
The customised icon set streamlines the users printing operation. (See the screen shot of the new User
interface below.)
With one click, the user can use

complicated pre-set print settings
Button to add or change icons
[Conventional Multiple-Tab type Interface (HP-like U/I)]

This user interface is prepared for customers who are accustomed to manipulating PCL driver.
Compatible to Ricoh Document Solution software (JobBinding, Batch Printing in DeskTop
Binder)
PCR10
New Auto Installer:
A new auto installer has been prepared for the PCR10.

It is easier to use than the conventional installer. The Quick Install button allows the user to
install PCL5c, RPCS and SmartNetMonitor together.
After Quick Installation is selected, follow the instructions.
Pop up help to explain each

function
Install PCL5c, RPCS and
SmartNetMonitor together.
Default driver is set as
PCL5c.
Click here for PS driver

installation
PCR10
Paper Options:
1 Tray x 500 sheets (Up to 2 additional trays are installable)

Paper size: A5 - A3, HLT (LEF)
Paper capacity: 1 tray x 500 sheets
500-sheet Finisher
Weight: Less than 8.5 kg
Normal Mode (Default)

Paper size: A5 (LEF) A3, LT
Stack capacity: 500 sheets (A4, LT, B5, A5 LEF - 80g/m2)
250 - 500 sheets (A3, B4, 11x17, Legal)
Shift tray Mode

Paper size: B5 A3, LT
Stack capacity: 500 sheets (A4, LT, B5 LEF - 80g/m2)
250 - 500 sheets (A3, B4, 11x17, Legal)
Staple Mode
Staple paper size: B5 (LEF) A3, LT
Staple paper weight 64 - 128g/m2
Paper type: Plain Paper (N/A: Label/ Thick Paper /OHP)
Staple capacity: 3000 staples / cartridge
Same size: 2-30 sheets / A4, B5, LT (80g/ m2)
30 sheets / A3, B4, (80g/ m2), Legal
Mixed size: Not supported
Number of Staples: 3,000 staples / cartridge
(4 x 3,000 staples with 1 cartridge are packed in the box)
Staple Position: Upper left, horizontal
Unacceptable conditions: 1. When collation is not specified.

2. When memory for storage is full.
3. When the finisher is not installed.
4. When the above staple position is not specified.
5. When the number of sheets exceeds limited capacity.
6. When unacceptable paper conditions are specified,
such as paper size, paper type and paper orientation in
one job.
7. When "Add Staple" or Error: Finisher message
Appears on the LCD of the operation panel.
PCR10
Mailbox
Number of bins: 4 bins
Paper size: A5 - A3, LT
Paper weight: 64 128g/m2
Stack capacity: 125 sheets (A4 LEF 80g/m2)
Stapling: Not available
Weight: Less than 7kg.
Duplex Unit
Type: Auto
Paper size: A5 - A3 / HLT (SEF
Controller Options:
a) HDD
(PS only, 500MB is available for font download)
Electronic sorting (Collation)
Logging Data
b) Memory
144 pin
PC 133 MHz
Capacity 64MB, 128MB, 256MB
c) NV-RAM (64KB) Compatible with PCR38

This is used for storing the User Code when you manage your clients by SmartNet
Monitor, such as Usage restriction or Colour mode restriction. There is a capacity of up to
400 user codes (Standard is 0)
d) IEEE1394 (IP Over) Compatible with DMR35A/45A, PMR45A and PMR26AN

For detailed information please refer to the relevant NPS.
e) IEEE 802.11b (Wireless LAN) Compatible with PMR26AN.

For detailed information please refer to the relevant NPS.
PCR10
Paper Handling
Paper Input Size / Output Size
EU version
Type SEF/LEF Size Std. Paper Op. Paper Bypass Duplex Finisher Mail
Tray Feed Unit Tray Unit Normal/Shift/Staple Bin
A3 W SEF 12 x 18 N N S N N N N N
A3 SEF 297x420 Y Y * Y Y Y Y Y
B4 SEF 257x364 Y Y * Y Y Y Y Y
A4 SEF 210x297 Y Y * Y Y Y Y Y
LEF 297x210 Y Y * Y Y Y Y Y
B5 SEF 182x257 Y * * Y Y N N Y
LEF 257x182 Y * * Y Y Y Y Y
A5 SEF 148x210 * * * Y N N N Y
LEF 210x148 Y Y * Y Y N N Y
B6 SEF 128x182 S N S N N N N N
A6 SEF 105x148 * N * N N N N N
Ledger SEF 11x17 * Y * Y Y Y Y Y
Legal SEF 8 1/2x14 * * * Y Y Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8 1/2x11 Y Y * Y Y Y Y Y
LEF 11x 8 1/2 * Y * Y Y Y Y Y
Half SEF 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 * N * Y N N N Y
Letter LEF 5. 1/2 x 8. 1/2 * * N N N N N Y
Executive SEF 7 1/4x10 1/2 * * * Y Y N N Y
LEF 10 1/2x7 1/4 * N * N Y N N Y
F SEF 8 x 13 * * * Y N N N Y
Foolscap SEF 8 1/2 x 13 * * * Y Y Y Y Y
Folio SEF 8 1/4 x 13 * * * Y Y N N Y
8 Kai SEF 267 x 390 * * * Y Y Y Y Y
16 Kai SEF 267 x 195 * * * Y N N N Y
LEF 195 x 267 * * * Y Y Y Y Y
Com10 LEF 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 N N * N N N N N
Monarch LEF 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 N N * N N N N N
C6 LEF 114 x 162 N N * N N N N N
C5 LEF 162 x 229 N N * N N N N N
DL Env. LEF 110 x 220 N N * N N N N N
Custom Width 100 297 S N - N N N N N
Length 148 432 S N - N N N N N
Width 90 305 N S N N N N N
Length 148 457 N S N N N N N
Standard Paper Tray / Bypass Tray / Optional Paper Feed Unit

Y: Available: Paper size is automatically detected.
*: Available: Need to select paper size by operation panel.
S: Available: Need to input paper size by operation panel and driver.
N: Not Available
Duplex / Finisher / Mail-bin

Y: Available
N: Not Available
Notes: Prints made from the bypass tray cannot be finished. They will exit in the standard
output position.
When printing on 12 x 18 (A3W: 305 x 457mm), the max. printable area is 297 x
432mm full bleed.
PCR10
Envelope Feeding
When loading envelopes, make sure to open the flap and load the flap side opposite to the paper
feed directions.
Print side facing down

Requires more than Print Side Facing
140mm Down
Test Page Print
The PCR10 supports the following Test Page Print functions. To print a test page, change the status
from on-line to off-line and follow the menu tree using the operation panel. Each report is printed
in portrait, even if landscape is selected using the operation panel.
1. System Summary Page (Configuration Page)

This sheet includes the printer systems configuration, options, printer controller firmware version,
cancelled job log data, etc.
All PCL, PS and RPCS system summary pages are available
2. Demo Page (Colour sample page)

This sheet is used for demonstration purposes.
3. PCL / PS Configuration Page

This sheet shows all the font and symbol information that is supported by the PCR10.
PCL fonts and directory list and Postscript fonts list are available.
4. Menu Map Print

This sheet includes the menu information for the operation panel.
The user can find items that can be set in the menu.
5. Log List Print

This sheet includes the logging information (by SP mode).
6. Counter Sheet (In case of Meter-Click mode)

This sheet includes the number of Colour and Monochrome prints.
7. Printer Error Report

This sheet is printed on memory overflow
8. User Registration Sheet

This sheet is used for adjusting the registration.
9. Development Unit Installation Conformation Sheet

This unit is used to check that the development unit is installed correctly.
PCR10
Consumables
Toner:
Black Approx. 18K developments / cartridge
C,M,Y (each) Approx. 10K developments / cartridge
Starter toner
Black Approx. 4.5K developments / cartridge
C,M,Y (each) Approx. 3K developments / cartridge
Fusing oil Approx. 30K prints / units
Waste toner bottle 1 Approx. 50K developments / container*
Waste toner bottle 2 Approx. 120K developments / container*
* Preset with PCU
PCU Approx. 120K developments / unit *
* 1 charger is preset with PCU. 2 different filters are packed
together in the box
Black development unit Approx. 120K developments / unit
C/M/ Y development unit Approx. 60K developments / unit
Fusing unit Approx. 120 K prints.
* 1 Paper feed roller and friction pad for standard trays are
packed together in the box.
Paper feed rollers for
Optional paper feed unit Approx. 150 K prints.*
* Compatible with PCR38
*A4 (LEF)/5% chart is used to measure the above yield based on the job condition of 5 pages per job
(5 continuous prints per one print job.)
*The conditions used for the test were standard temperature and humidity.
*The yields may change depending on the circumstances and printing conditions.
Targeted Print Volume & Reliability

Monthly Print Volume
Average: 10K prints / 100% monochrome printing

4K prints / 50% monochrome, 50% full colour printing
2.5K prints / 100% full colour printing
Max. (Preliminary): 13.2K prints / 50% monochrome, 50% full colour

printing
Colour Ratio 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Black & White 33,000 22,846 16,500 12,158 9,000 6,600 4,714 3,194 1,941 892 0
Full Colour 0 2,538 4,125 5,211 6,000 6,600 7,071 7,452 7,765 8,027 8,250
Total Print Volume 33,000 25,385 20,625 17,368 15,000 13,200 11,786 10,645 9,706 8,919 8,250
Duty (Preliminary): Targets 100K developments (*Up to 20 months)
Estimated Unit Life: 5 years or 2,000K developments, whichever comes first
PCR10
Counter
Default mode: # of Prints (total/colour/black) is described on System
Summary Page (=Configuration Page).
Meter-Click Mode: # of prints or developments both in colour and B/W are

displayed on the operation panel and shown on Counter
sheet.
Display Flow (on LCD)
Ready
PCL5c
Menu Key
Menu Counter
Counter Sheet
# key
Black: 1234
Colour: 123
Show Counter Print
Serial No. : 123456789
Fax No. 973-882-xxxx # key # key
Black: 1234
Colour: 123 Printing
How to set Meter Click mode: Set by SP mode

Can select Print count or Development count only
once before counter reaches 0.
A3 single count / double count is selectable.
PCR10
How to count-up:
Development Count (Default)
Bk Counter Colour Counter

Full Colour +1 +3
3C (+1*) +3 (+2*)
2C (+1*) +2 (+1*)
1C +1
Bk +1
* Black is included in 3C or 2C.
Print Count
Bk Counter Colour Counter

Full Colour +1
3C +1
2C +1
1C +1
Bk +1
Default Number at Factory Site:
Development Count
Type Default count

Bk counter -3000 200
Colour -3000 200
counter
Print Count
Type Default count

Bk counter -1000 200
Colour -2000 200
counter
Uncounted Printed Pages:
SP mode printing
Sheet for manual adjustment
Front Cover page (Blank paper)
Back Cover page (Blank paper on Duplex printing)
Error report printing
Jammed sheet before paper exit
PCR10
WHAT FITS WHAT
Machine
PCR10 A3 Colour Laser Printer (C7010)
Peripherals
AD5000C Duplex Unit

DIF5000C Interchange Unit
CS5000C 4-bin Mailbox Type 3600C
PPFU5000C 500-sheet Paper Feed
SR780 500-sheet Finisher
DIMM64 64MB Memory
DIMM128 128MB Memory
DIMM256 256MB Memory
PHD5000C40 40GB Hard Disk Drive
DIF1045FW IEEE1394 (IP Over) Board
DIFWLAN IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN
Supplies
DMU5000 Drum Unit Yield 120K Developments

DDU5000BLK Black Developer Yield 120K Developments
DDU5000CLR Colour Developer Yield 60K (C/M/Y) Developments
CT31BLK Black Toner Yield 18K Developments @ 5%
CT31CYN Cyan Toner Yield 10K Developments @ 5%
CT31MGT Magenta Toner Yield 10K Developments @ 5%
CT31YLW Yellow Toner Yield 10K Developments @ 5%
DFO5000 Fuser Oil Yield 30K Pages
DFU5000 Fuser Unit Yield 120K Pages
TDB15000 Waste Toner Bottle Yield 50K Developments
TDB25000 Second Waste Toner Bottle Yield 120K Developments
This bottle is included with PCU so should
not be required to change under normal
circumstances.
Note: All yields are based on 5% originals
PCR10
WHATS IN THE BOX
TBA
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Nashuatec C7116 / C7116DN

Rex Rotary C7116 / C7116DN
Gestetner C7116 / C7116DN
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
March 2003 Japan

Date Created: March 2002
Version 2
February 2003
PCR16 / PCR16DN
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Targeted Supplies Data 24
What Fits What 26

K:\Company\Market\NPS\PCR16_PCR16DN.doc 1
PCR16 / PCR16DN
INTRODUCTION
The PCR16 / PCR16DN is a new, A4, full colour laser printer with a tandem engine. This printer is
targeted for use in the general office, as a business graphics printer. Quality and processing speed
are very good and will help to sell this printer into more quality-conscious environments
encountered in the general office.
There will be two models available. The PCR16 will be the basic model, with optional duplex &
network card as well as the paper tray options. The PCR16DN will be standard with a duplex unit
and network card.
With a full colour print speed of 16ppm and a mono print speed of 20ppm, it will be perfect for
small departments, i.e. marketing departments in a large corporate business for communication
materials, such as direct mailers, brochures, reports etc.
The PCR16 / PCR16DN will complement the PCR6, which will continue in our product range as
the entry level A4 colour offering.
The range of business colour printers is now more comprehensive and, with the recent release of the
PCR10 (A3 10ppm colour laser printer) later this year, the colour printer line-up will have an
offering for most applications from 6ppm up to 28ppm.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PCR16 / PCR16DN Main Unit:
* Both models have the same appearance, as the duplex unit and network card are
installed internally.
Product Concept
High Quality at a Low Price
a) High Image Quality

Resolution True 1200x 1200dpi / 1bit
b) High Performance
Continuous Print Speed:
Colour: 16ppm (A4/LT, SEF)
Monochrome: 20ppm (A4/LT, SEF)
Warm-up time: Less than 45 sec.
High duplex productivity
High Performance Controller
c) User friendly & Ecology

- Space saving design
- Optional built-in auto duplex unit
- Low power consumption
- Easy maintenance
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Target User:
Design Business Graphics General Office

Retail Service RealEstateHealthCare IT Marketing Finance Planning
Professional Professional Users demand:
- Need colour to make document
attractive
Target User - Internal use = Cost orientated
General Office
General
Office Users demand:
- Colour is a must for business e.g.
- Colour quality orientated Report, Manual,
Presentation material
Internet etc.
e.g.
Brochure, DM / Mailer
Customized report, POP etc.
The PCR16 / PCR16DN is aimed at the business graphics user. The high quality of its
colour prints, and its productive performance, should enable the PCR16 / PCR16DN to be
recognized as a valuable, competitive product.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Product Configuration:
Controller option:
I/F: - 64/128/256MB DIMM (Option)
- Bi-Centronics - HDD (Option)
- Ethernet (100Base-TX) - User Account Enhance Unit (Option)
(Standard for PCR16DN)
- IEEE1394 (Option)
- USB2 (Option)
- IEEE802.11b (Option)
Duplex unit: Standard for PCR16DN
/ option for PCR16
Standard tray: Built-in design
- 1 tray x 530 sheets
Bypass tray:
- Embedded in the standard tray
Paper Feed Unit (Option):
- 100 sheets
- 1 tray x 530 sheets
- Up to 2 trays can be installed
PCR16 / PCR16DN

High Image Quality: Target Phaser Quality:
1. The PCR16 has high image quality to meet business graphics users needs:
True 1200 x 1200dpi.
Target Xerox Phaser 790/7700 quality to support business graphics printing.
Benchmark Xerox Phaser 790 / 7700
2. RPCS, PCL5c and PostScript Level 3 as standard PDLs:

Supports Adobe PostScript Level 3 (genuine) resource - Version 3011.104.
Supports RPCS, which is developed to provide a user friendly user interface and
high performance in Windows environments.
High Performance: Reduced Print Time:
1. Colour 16ppm / Monochrome 20ppm:

Single pass technology delivers 16ppm in colour and 20ppm in black and white.
Due to the employment of an intermediate transfer belt the paper path is very short,
resulting in reliable operation.
Paper Path (Side View from Right Hand Side):
Optional Auto Duplex Unit
Bypass Tray Standard Paper Tray
Optional Paper Feed Units
2. The warm-up time is dramatically reduced, compared to conventional colour laser printers.
Brand/Model PCR16 / HP4600 Xerox Phaser 620 Xerox Phaser 1235

PCR16DN
Warm-up time Less than Less than Less than 75 sec.*3
30 sec. 102 sec.*1 30 sec.*2
*1: Data resource: HP4600 specification (Same engine as HP4550)
*2: Data resource: Xerox 620 specification (Same engine as Phaser 750)
*3: Data resource: OKI C7200 specification (Same engine as Phaser 1235)
PCR16 / PCR16DN
3. Duplex Productivity: 100% of simplex printing.
4. High Performance Controller:

The target is to have a higher performance controller than the PCR38, in order to
compete with other A4 tandem models in this segment.
5. Various network environment capabilities:

NIB standard with PCR16DN, optional for PCR16.
Optional USB2 offers simple and quick connection for peer-to-peer use for desk top
and mobile PCs.
Optional wireless LAN offers layout free network environment.
Optional Bluetooth offers layout free wireless environment
6. Built-in Duplex Unit: Standard on PCR16DN, optional on PCR16.

The duplex unit is designed to be installed out of view, inside the machine.
No extra space is required to install the duplex unit.
Easy installation:
o Step 1: Open the front cover
o Step 2: Slide the duplex unit into the guide
Duplex Unit
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Engine
Technology: Laser beam scanning, electro-photographic printing and

Mono-component toner development
4 drums tandem method
Resolution: True 1200 x 1200 dpi / 1 bit

1200 x 600dpi
Continuous Print Speed (PPM):
Simplex printing:
A4/LT (SEF) Resolution Plain Paper Thick/OHP
Duplex printing:
(100% of simplex printing)
A4/LT (SEF) Resolution Plain Paper Thick/OHP
First Print Speed:

Monochrome / Colour: 15.5 sec. or less
Notes: 1. Print mode 600x 600dpi simplex printing

2. Media type and size A4/Letter (SEF) plain paper
3. 120V or 230V 20C 65%
4. Time required for output paper to reach exit tray after Processing" blinks on the
LCD
Dimensions (W x D x H): 419mm x 536mm x 395mm

When standard tray is extended to legal setting, the depth is
591mm
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Weight: PCR16: Less than 31kg

PCR16DN: Less than 32kg
Media size and weight:
Item Media Type Media Size Media

Weight/Thickness
Standard Paper Tray Plain Paper A4, B5, Letter, Legal 60-105g/m2
Bypass Tray Plain Paper A4, B5, Letter, Legal, 60-105g/m2
Executive
Custom size:
Min. 90mm x 148mm
Max. 216mm x 356mm
Thick Paper Ditto 105-165g/m2

Glossy (*Preliminary) A4, Letter 120g/m2
Transparency A4, Letter 4mil
Envelope Com10, Monarch 75-90g/m2
C5, C6, DL
Label (*Preliminary) A4, Letter --
Auto Duplex Unit Plain Paper A4, B5, Letter, Legal 60-105g/m2
(Option)
*Bypass tray feeding
is not supported.
Input/Output Paper Capacity:
Tray Type Media Type Paper Capacity

Standard in engine Standard Paper Tray Plain Paper 530 sheets
(80g/m2)
Bypass Tray Plain Paper 100 sheets
(80g/m2)
Transparency 50 sheets
Envelope (max. 24lb) 10 sheets
Label (*Preliminary) 50 sheets
Exit Tray (Face-up) Plain Paper 250 sheets
(80g/m2)
Option Optional Paper Feed Plain Paper 530 sheets
Unit (80g/m2)
* A maximum of 1,690 sheets are available for paper input, including 2 optional paper feed units.
Non Printable Area: Side: Approx.4.2mm

Leading & Tailing edge: Approx.4.2mm
(The printable area may vary depending on paper size, printer language and printer driver settings.)
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Power Consumption: Max: 1,300W or less *Preliminary

Energy Saver: 11W or less
Energy Star Mode Selectable: 5 / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 minutes
EMI: EN55022 Class B, EN55011 Class B
Sound Power Level: Stand-by: Less than 40dB*

Printing: Less than 63dB*
Energy Saver: 40dB*
* Measured by Ricoh Standard methodology
Sound Pressure Level: Stand-by: 34dB

Printing: 57dB
Controller:
CPU: RM7065 400MHz

Resolution: PCL5c: 600x600 dpi / 300x300dpi*

PS: 600x600 dpi / 1200x600 dpi** / 1200x1200 dpi
RPCS: 600x600 dpi / 1200x600 dpi / 1200x1200 dpi
*300x300dpi is supported in monochrome printing only
**600dpi / Fast Mode: 600x600dpi
600dpi / Standard Mode: 1200x600dpi
1200dpi / Fast Mode: 1200x1200dpi
PCR16 / PCR16DN
RAM: 64MB Standard

Max. 384MB
There are two slots for RAM, one of which is occupied by the
standard DIMM
Memory type: SDRAM (SO-DIMM) PC133MHz 64bit Non-ECC/Parity
Pin: 144
Access Time: 6ns
Memory Requirement:
Resolution: Paper Size: Normally Possible: Always Possible:

600x600dpi A4
B5 64MB (Standard) 64MB (Standard)
A5
A6
1200x600dpi A4
B5 64MB (Standard) 64MB (Standard)
A5
A6
1200x1200dpi A4 64MB (standard) +
B5 64MB (Standard) 64MB
A5 64MB (Standard)
A6
HDD: 10GB (Option)
PCR16 / PCR16DN

10 TrueType fonts
1 Bitmap font
(31 fonts can be installed to Windows by Agfa Font
Manager)
PS: 136 Type 1 fonts* (24 Type2 and 112 Type14 fonts)
*For sales material, please use 136 Type 1 fonts
RPCS: N/A
Drivers: PCL5c: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000 / XP

PS: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, Mac 8.6
UNIX *1
Version 8.6 to 9.2 of the Mac OS

(Mac OS X Classic mode is supported)
Mac OS X 10.1 or later (Native mode)
(Mac OS X Version 10.0.0x is not supported)
*1: Sun Solaris 2.5.1 / 2.6 / 7 / 8, HP-UX 8.x / 9.x / 10.x/11.x, Red
Hat Linux 6.x / 7.x, IBM AIX V4.3 / 5L V5.1 are supported by
using UNIX filter.
RPCS: Win 95 / 98 / Me / NT4.0 / 2000 / XP
Driver Functionality:
Main Function RPCS PCL5c PS3 Remarks
Sample Print Yes Yes Yes With HDD
Locked Print Yes Yes Yes With HDD
Layout Yes Yes Yes Selectable Draw
frame border
Poster Yes No No
Duplex Yes Yes Yes With Optional
Duplex Unit
Staple N/A N/A N/A
Punch N/A N/A N/A
First page/other page Yes Yes Yes* *Win 9x only
Slip sheet Yes Yes Yes
Custom paper size Yes Yes Yes
Resolution 600/1200dpi 600/300dpi* 600/1200dpi *Monochrome
printing only
Image Adjustment Yes Yes Yes
Grey Reproduction Yes Yes Yes
Black Over print No Yes Yes
ICM Yes Yes Yes
Watermarks Yes Yes Yes
Toner Saver Yes No Yes
Reverse print No No No
Rotate Yes Yes Yes
Do not print blank page Yes No No
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Sample Print (=Proof Print): Yes (only with optional HDD installed)
Job Stock Specification: Max. stock pages: 1,000 pages (Sample + Locked)
Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Sample + Locked)
Locked Print (=Secure Print): Yes (only with optional HDD installed)
Job Stock Specification: Max. stock pages: 1,000 pages (Sample + Locked)
Max. stock jobs: 30 jobs (Sample + Locked)
Cover Sheet : Yes (with setting of Electronic sorting and optional HDD
installed)
(First Page) Printing / Blank Paper
OHP Slip Sheet: Yes

Blank paper
If OHP slip mode is not selected, remove one by one from the
face up tray to prevent paper stock problems.

From Default Tray to Tray 1 (Standard Paper Tray) to Tray 2
to Tray 3
The Bypass tray is not included in this sequence.
Limitless Paper Supply: Yes

progress, the printer searches automatically for another tray
that contains the same size, the same direction and the same
media type.
N-Job: Yes (Default: Yes)

Mode to access this programme will be determined later.
Interface: In addition to the standard interface, one optional

interface is installable.
Parallel: Bi-centronics (IEEE1284 ECP)
USB2
NIB: 100/10 Base TX (Standard with PCR16DN)
IEEE1394 *1
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN) *2
Bluetooth
Token Ring is not supported.

*1: Compatible with PMR26AN and PMR45A
*2: Compatible with PMR26AN
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Network Protocol: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI *1, AppleTalk

*1: Only supported by SmartNetMonitor
(peer to peer environment)
Utility: SmartNetMonitor (Please refer to SmartNetMonitor

NPS for details).
DeskTopBinder (Please refer to DeskTopBinder NPS)
Auto Colour Sensing (ACS): On/Off (B&W Page Detect by operation panel)
(Default: On): Auto page detection is supported. When printing a
document with mixed colour and monochrome pages,
the printing speed is automatically switched between
the colour and monochrome pages.
ACS ACS ACS
1 job
Developed in black Developed in full Developed in Developed in

only colour developing black only full colour
developing
Notes: 1. There is no effect on yield of consumables if ACS is on.

2. Time to switch printing mode:
Monochrome to Colour: 14.0 seconds
Colour to Monochrome: 15.5 seconds
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Off: When ACS is switched off, a document with mixed

monochrome and colour pages is printed in full colour
printing mode.
1 job
Developed in full colour
Spool: Yes (Max. 50 jobs)
Sort: Yes (HDD or optional DIMM (Min. 128MB) is required.)

Capacity: HDD: Up to 1,000 pages (Sort+Sample print +Locked print)
Memory: Up to 150 pages
Rotated Sort: No
Edge Smoothing: No
Adjustment:
Paper Registration: Yes (Optional paper feed unit only, by operation panel)
Colour Registration: Yes (Automatic and Manual)
Automatic adjustment runs in the following situations:
1. When power switch is turned on
2. Before printing a new colour job after printing more
than 250 pages
Manual adjustment is available by operation panel
Image Density: Yes (Manual adjustment only by operation panel)
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Paper Options:
1 x 530 sheet tray:

Paper Size: A4, B5, Letter, Legal
Paper Capacity: 1 tray x 530 sheets (Measured based on Xerox 4024)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 410mm x 536mm x 147.1mm
(When a tray is extended to legal setting, the depth is 591mm)
Weight: 0.74kg
Duplex Unit (Standard with PCR16DN, optional for PCR16):

Paper Size: A4, B5, Letter, Legal
Weight: 0.74kg
Controller Options:
HDD:
Capacity: 10GB
0.5MB for Font download
1GB for Job Spool
7GB for Collation, Sample Print and Locked Print
10MB for storing logging data
Memory:
Type: SO DIMM (SD-RAM)
PC 133MHz, 64bit Non-ECC/Parity
Compatible with PCR10 and PMR45A
IEEE1394 (IP Over): IP Over function is supported as follows:
This option enables customers to print through the IEEE1394 interface. Two functions (type of
connection) are available:
1. SCSI print (the same function supported by IEEE1394 option of PCR38 and PCR10):
Windows 2000 Service Pack 1 or later
Cable length max. 4.5m (1 hop)
2. IP over 1394:
Supported OS: Windows Me, XP
Cable length max. 4.5m (1 hop)
Use TCP/IP
SmartNetMonitor version 5.0 or later will be supported
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Interface IEEE Std. 1394-1995 compliant

IEEE Std. 1394a-2000 compliant
Interface Ports IEEE1394 (6-pin x 2 ports)
Data Transmission Max. 400Mbps
Number of Devices Max. 63 in a bus
Number of Cable Hops Max. 16 hops in a bus
IEEE1394 interface option includes 2 cables (6-pin x 4-pin, 6-pin x 6-pin).
Example of configuration for IP over 1394:
100Base-T
IP over 1394
Host Print
n

I
tBXoffice
General
n

PCR16 / PCR16DN
NV-RAM (64KB)
This is used for storing the User Code when you manage your clients by SmartNetMonitor
(please refer to the NPS for SmartNetMonitor) such as usage restriction or colour mode restriction.
This capacity is for up to 400 user codes (standard is 0).
IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN):
IEEE802.11b was authorised as an enhanced standard of IEEE802.11 by IEEE (Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers) in 1999. IEEE802.11b uses 2.4GHz frequency range and
realizes 11Mbps as max. data transfer speed. Wireless LAN can provide users with layout free
network environment, however it was not as popular because of low data transfer speed, high cost
and no compatibility among products before IEEE802.11b was authorised. With IEEE802.11b,
those issues are resolved. Market demand has been expanded since the year 2000 accordingly.
1. Specifications:
Transmission specifications: Based on IEEE802.11b
Protocol: TCP/IP
Data transfer speed: Auto select from 1Mbps, 2Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 11Mbps
Frequency range: 2412-2472MHz (1-13 channel)
Transmittable distance: 1Mbps: 400m*
2Mbps: 270m*
5.5Mbps: 200m*
11Mbps: 140m*
* These figures are a guideline for outdoor use. In general, it
is said that the distance for indoor use is 10-100m, depending
on the environment.
Transmission mode: Ad hoc mode and infrastructure mode
SmartNetMonitor: Supported
WebStatusMonitor: Supported
Note: The outdoor use of wireless LAN is legally prohibited in Canada, The
Netherlands, France, Belgium, Germany and Italy.
2. Transmission Mode:
ad hoc mode : Direct data transmission

PC between PC & printer. Each client
needs to have the same frequency range
by selecting transmission channel.
Transmittable distance is approx. 50m
PC PC
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Access point
infrastructure mode : Data
PC PC transmission via access
point. Each client needs to
have common SSID to
Access Point. In case
Access Point is connected
PC PC to wired LAN, it is
possible to access from
external network.
Transmittable distance is
PC PC approx. 100m
PC
3. Channel:
It is necessary that each client uses the same frequency range to have Wireless LAN connected.
Ad hoc mode: Select channel from operation panel. The channel should be the same
between the printer and the other client (PC).
Infrastructure mode: The channel will be automatically set to the same channel of the
Access Point if it has a common SSID to the client (Printer).
4. Security:
SSID (Service Set ID)

This is the ID which enables connection between the Access Point and the client.
Transmission is possible between the Access Point and client if these have common
SSID. SSID can be set by WebStatusMonitor or telnet. Only one SSID can be set for
the printer.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
WebStatusMonitor:
ANY mode
If no SSID is set up, automatic connection through the nearest Access Point is only
possible where the Access Point allows ANY mode connection.
Notes:
1. It is not possible to connect 10/100 Base TX and IEEE802.11b at the same time. It is
possible to switch between them manually, from the operation panel of the printer.
2. Some Wireless LAN cards for PC may require SSID, even for ad hoc mode
connection.
3. The IEEE802.11b interface option contains a Wireless LAN card for the printer
only. Access point, Wireless LAN card for PCs and other necessary utilities to be
procured locally.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
USB2:
The USB2 interface offers simple and quick connection of peer to peer use for desktop and mobile
PCs.
Transmission specifications: USB1.1 and USB2.0

Data transfer speed: High speed (USB2.0) 480Mbps
Full speed 12Mbps
Low speed 1.5Mbps
PnP (Plug and Play): When the USB cable is connected, the OS will recognize the printer
automatically and proceed to one of the following:
1. USB driver is installed: OS sets up the printer automatically
2. USB driver is not installed: A pop-up menu appears, which
recommends installing the driver
Supported OS: USB1.1: Windows 98 / 2000 / Me / XP, Mac OS 9.x, X Classic mode
USB2.0*: Windows 2000 / Me / XP
* Depends on driver support schedule of Microsoft
USB Cable: USB cable should be procured locally.
Notes:
1. USB2.0 includes USB1.1 specifications
2. USB2.0 port is required for PC
Bluetooth:
Bluetooth technology was developed by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG).
Bluetooth is a short distance radio communication technology:

Aiming for substitution of a cable
A range of around 10m
Low consumption of electricity
Low price
2.4GHz ISM band is used, which is the same electric wave as a microwave oven and
802.11b (Wireless LAN)
Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS) system
Many of the protocols used with infrared communication IrDA can also be used with
Bluetooth
Communications Model:
Communicates by being separated into Master and Slave
Forms Piconet. Seven devices can communicate to one master simultaneously
When entering Park mode (a low electrical consumption mode), forms Piconets up to a
maximum of 255
The device possesses different electrical consumption and electric waveband with each
of the four models (Active, Sniff, Hold and Park)
Global Standard:
The latest standard is Bluetooth 1.1
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Specifications:
Supported OS: Windows XP / 2000 / 98 / SE / Me (It will also depend on the support OS of
the Bluetooth card.
What is needed for operation:

1. PCR16 / PCR16DN
2. PCR16 / PCR16DN Bluetooth option
3. Host PC with PCMCIA card slots
4. 3COM Wireless Bluetooth PC Card 3CRWB6096
OR
3COM Wireless Bluetooth USB Adaptor 3CREB96
Transmission specifications: Based on Bluetooth V1.1
Profile: Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP), Serial Port Profile (SPP)
Bi-directional transmission:
SPP does not support bi-directional transmission as a system but HCRP does. This is a limitation of
Windows.
Contents of the Bluetooth option:
1. Bluetooth PCMCIA Card x 1

2. PCMCIA Adaptor x 1
3. Bluetooth DIMM x 1
4. Operation Manual x 1
Test Page Print:
The PCR16 / PCR16DN supports the following Test Print functions. Test Page is available when
the printer is OFF-LINE. The Test Page printing is executed by the control panel operation. Each
report is printed in portrait, even if landscape is selected through the operation panel.
Configuration Page:
This sheet shows the printer systems configuration, options, printer controller firmware
version, cancelled job log data etc. All PCL, PS and RPCS system summary pages are
available.
Colour Demo Page:

This sheet is used for demonstration purposes.
PCL / PS Configuration Page:

This sheet shows all the fonts and symbols information that are supported by the PCR16 /
PCR16DN. Both PCL fonts and directory list and PostScript fonts list are available.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Menu List:
This sheet shows the menu information of the operation panel. Users can find what items
can be set in the menu.
SMC Logging List:

This sheet shows the logging information (by SP mode).
Counter Sheet (In case of Meter-Click Mode):

This sheet shows the number of both Colour and Monochrome counts.
Print Error Report (Memory Overflow):

This sheet is printed when there is memory overflow.
Print Error Report (PS Command Error):

This sheet is printed when there is a printer command error.
Registration Test Sheet:

This sheet is used for adjusting the registration.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
TARGETED SUPPLIES DATA
Supplies: Yield 1:
Black Toner Approx. 5,000 prints/cartridge

Cyan Toner Approx. 5,000 prints/cartridge
Magenta Toner Approx. 5,000 prints/cartridge
Yellow Toner Approx. 5,000 prints/cartridge
Black Starter Toner Approx. 2,500 prints/cartridge
Yellow Starter Toner Approx. 2,500 prints/cartridge
Magenta Starter Toner Approx. 2,500 prints/cartridge
Yellow Starter Toner Approx. 2,500 prints/cartridge
Maintenance Kit:
Print Cartridge
Black OPC
Charger
Cleaning and Developer Approx. 18,000 prints/unit
Print Cartridge
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow OPC
Charger
Cleaning and Developer Approx. 18,000 prints/unit
Fusing Unit Approx. 100,000 prints/unit
Transfer Roller Approx. 100,000 prints/unit
Intermediate Transfer Belt Approx. 100,000 prints/unit
Waste Toner Bottle Approx. 36,000 developments/bottle
Notes:
1. Yield based on A4 5% Ricoh Chart.
2. Continuous Printing: (Yield under 5 Pages/Job and 2Pages/Job will be evaluated.
Updated information will be distributed later.)
3. The conditions were standard temperature and humidity.
Toner End Conditions:
Case 1: Cyan. Magenta or Yellow toner is empty:

If Colour Mode on Driver is B/W, the data will be printed by Black toner.
Case 2: Black toner is empty:

No operation until new toner has been installed.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
Reliability:
Machine Life (ML): 5 years or 300,000 prints, whichever comes

first
Expected Average Monthly Volume (AMV): 3,000 prints
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV): 5,000 prints
Duty Cycle (DC): 50,000 prints (up to 6 months)
history.
target customer.
customer.
Machine Life (ML) is total Machine Life in prints, or 5 years, whichever comes first.
PCR16 / PCR16DN
WHAT FITS WHAT

PCR16 C7116 C7116 C7116
PCR16DN C7116DN C7116DN C7116DN
Ordering Code: Description:
Peripherals:
AD3000 Duplex Unit for PCR16 only
PPFU3000 Paper Feed Unit (1 x 530 sheets)
PHD3000 Printer HDD 10GB
DIF3000 10/100 Base T Network interface card for PCR16 only
DIMM64 64MB RAM memory
DIF4510FW IEEE1394 Firewire board
DIFWLAN IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN board
DIFBTA Bluetooth option Type A
DMENV1 NV RAM (User accounting unit)
Language Kits:
PDK16GB Language Kit English
PDK16F Language Kit French
PDK16D Language Kit German
PDK16I Language Kit Italian
PDK16P Language Kit Portuguese
PDK16N Language Kit Norwegian
PDK16H Language Kit Hungarian
PDK16CZ Language Kit Czech
PDK16PL Language Kit Polish
PDK16S Language Kit Swedish
PDK16SF Language Kit - Finnish
Supplies:
Yield:
DT125BLK Black Toner 5,000 prints/cartridge
DT125CYN Cyan Toner 5,000 prints/cartridge
DT125MGT Magenta Toner 5,000 prints/cartridge
DT125YLW Yellow Toner 5,000 prints/cartridge
DMU125BLK Black PCU / Charger / Developer 18,000 prints/unit
DMU125COL Colour PCU / Charger / Developer 18,000 prints/unit
DITB125 Waste Toner Bottle 36,000 developments/bottle
DFU125 Fusing Unit 100,000 prints/unit
TBA Intermediate Transfer Belt 100,000 prints/unit
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PML16B
Mono Laser Printer
SARANAC
Nashuatec P6216
Rex Rotary P6216
Gestetner P6216
First
October, 2001 December, 2001 South Korea

Version 7
January 2002
PML16B
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 4
What Fits What 27
In the Box Accessories 28

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\PML16B.doc 1
PML16B
INTRODUCTION
The NRG Group has maintained an OEM relationship with Lexmark since 1994 and, over the past
seven years, NRG Group have marketed a range of Lexmarks mono and colour business laser
printers in several countries, with most success in those countries employing page-volume
orientated selling systems, such as Germany, Belgium and the Netherlands.
As there have been continual requests for a competitively priced A4 laser printer, it is planned to
launch a new 16ppm printer with a totally new, Lexmark designed engine. The PML16B is the first
Lexmark product in this price segment to be developed from internal Lexmark technology. This
new printer will be manufactured in South Korea.
Although Lexmark will market three versions of this printer, we will only be selling one unit, which
will have an optional network card.
PML16B
The marketing objectives specific to our relationship with Lexmark are as follows:
To satisfy the diverse network printing needs of our customers by maintaining a robust
range of A4 network printers, complementing the range of A3 printers from Ricoh
To facilitate bundled sales concepts like Paperflow and Pay-Per-Page
To increase our share of page volume
To be able to provide printing solutions for all network environments
To reinforce our stance as a capable IT Printing vendor
Specific marketing objectives for the PML16B will be to ensure that NRG are able to market a
competitive A4 product in the 1120ppm segment of the printer market. This segment represents
the largest opportunity for capturing office page print volume.
Marketing Communication Objectives:
To position the PML16B as NRGs entry desktop laser printer for business users needing
performance, reliability and network capability in a small size. Customers looking to purchase this
class of product, in this speed segment, tend to consider five key points in the following order of
importance:
Price
Size
Print Quality
Ease of Use
Reliability
The PML16B is positioned to compete in the same segment as the HP LJ1200, offering more speed
and functionality in a smaller, more compact package than the HP product.
Additionally, the PML16B should increase awareness of NRG as a printer supplier and reinforce
NRGs message of being a complete hardcopy output solution provider to the networked
environment, thus increasing the proportion of total print volumes made on NRG products.
PML16B
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PML16B:
The PML16B has the following features:
16ppm A4 printer
133MHz processor
1200dpi Image Quality
PCL6, PostScript Level 2, PPDS are all standard
8MB RAM base, expandable to 72MB
Standard input 150 sheets, plus single sheet manual feed
Optional 250-sheet second drawer
Plain paper, transparencies, envelopes, labels, card stock
Parallel and USB ports
Optional Ethernet card
PML16B
Speed and Performance:
The PML16B printer supports the maximum print speeds listed below. As with most page printers
in this class, performance depends on:
Interface to host (parallel, serial, USB or network)

Host system and application
Complexity and content of the page
Certain options installed or selected with the printer
Available memory in the printer
Media size
Resolution
The following table specifies throughput speeds, based on resolution and media size.
Important Note: In some circumstances throughput may be reduced for narrow media, to
protect the printer from thermal damage.
PML16B
Resolution 300dpi, 600dpi, 1200dpi Image Quality
Media Size (simplex printing on full-sized media):

Letter 8.5 x 11.0 16.2ppm
A4 8.3 x 11.7 15.7ppm
Legal TBA
Typical First Copy Time:

First copy time (seconds) <15
First copy time from Power
Saver (seconds) <40
Note: All first copy times are measured for 300dpi and 600dpi simplex printing, on Letter sized
paper. The test job consists of the character A followed by a form feed (single page job).
The First Copy Time is defined as the elapsed time from hitting Enter on the PC keyboard
to the page exiting to the output bin. All tests pick paper from the primary input tray.
Print Quality:
The PML16Bs print quality is consistent with the print quality of the current E31x Lexmark
family. During the life of the printer, components are subject to wear, based on usage. Printers
continuously operating at or near the maximum duty cycle may require service, for replacement of
these components, to ensure high quality printing and good performance throughout the life of the
printer.
The following resolutions are available:
1200 Image Quality

600 x 600dpi
300 x 300dpi with PQET
PML16B
Toner Darkness:
The Toner Darkness setting offers a choice of ten user-selectable settings to balance the customer
needs for print darkness and toner savings. The highe r the value selected, the darker the print (1 is
the lightest). Lexmark offer up to 50% toner savings, thus reducing the cost of printing.
The Toner Darkness setting is accessible in the print drivers.
Print Cartridge:
The PML16B print cartridges and high yield print cartridges are designed for use only with the
PML16B. See What Fits What for ordering codes.
The PML16B print cartridges have a lifetime warranty.
Data Streams:
The following data streams are supported by the PML16B:
PostScript Level 2 Emulation

Hewlett-Packard Company PCL6 Emulation
PPDS Migration Tool
Memory, Ports and Electronics:
Various printer memory, flash memory, local connection, network connection and application
solution features are available for use with the PML16B printer. Additional memory may be
required for printing very complex pages or full-page, high-resolution images in 1200 Image
Quality at rated speeds. See the What Fits What for a list of available memory and connectivity
options.
PML16B

Fast Print Speed:
16ppm speed provides superior output in record time

The 100+MHz processor and 8MB of memory prints complex jobs quickly
Built for Business:
High yield, single element print cartridge reduces replacements

Robust design supports up to 15,000 pages per month
Expandable with optional second drawer, memory and networking options
Toner low indicator, designed for proactive management of printer supplies
Broad Compatibility:
Parallel, USB or Ethernet support

Wide range of operating system support and compatibility
Standard PostScript and PCL data streams provide extra flexibility to print from a range of
applications
High Quality Print:
Professional output with 1200dpi Image Quality resolution

High quality results on a range of media weights and types
One of the most critical points when selling into a networked environment, and particularly when
selling direct to IT/MIS professionals, will be the very wide range of operating system support
available on the PML16B.
Target Markets:
The PML16B is suitable for either individual desk top use or for small workgroup printing
requirements in the general office environment. It can be used for single or multi- user, either direct
or via the network. We would expect the majority of installations to be made in the network
environment.
Target Customers:
Large businesses looking for a printer that can handle a wide range of complex documents,
with the expandability to add an extra tray and networking
Small businesses desiring a highly reliable printer that can print anything they desire
Financial institutions needing a printer with a small footprint that can fit under counters and
on desk tops with the ability to add an extra paper source to support multiple media types
Educational institutions needing a printer that supports a range of operating systems
(Windows and Macintosh) as well as media (plain paper and card stock)
Healthcare institutions looking for a small printer to fit into nursing stations and doctors
offices that can be remotely managed, with the additional ability to support electronic forms
printing and paper labels
PML16B
The PML16B is an ideal major account machine, since many print tenders request products at the
16ppm level as entry products supporting a range of higher speed single function printers and MFP
devices. The current Ricoh based P7016, whilst being a very well specified machine, has become
too expensive to be a viable contender in these large tenders. By being able to bid a competitive
16ppm machine in these tenders, NRG will also be able to maintain an account presence and
control and to bid higher machines in the range, either A4 or A3, at the same time or at a later stage.
Sales Channels:
It is NRGs objective to obtain pricing that will enable us to position this product head to head
against the HP LaserJet 1200 at the dealer price level. This should enable us to compete effectively
in dealer going-rate business to professional users, SOHO and small and medium businesses.
Our direct sales force will also find this product attractive in terms of being able to meet the large
tender requirements from large accounts.
Whilst the printer industry as a whole tends to sell printers at this price point through the indirect
channel, there is no reason why companies such as NRG, with a large, well-trained sales force,
should not be able to sell this product directly to large accounts. This has been precisely what
competitors such as Lexmark have been able to do, with some measure of success. However, in
Lexmarks case, whilst they create demand with a direct sales force, they still use the dealer channel
as a fulfilment channel in order to avoid potential conflict.
Supplies:
The PML16B will use a new cartridge that is not compatible with other Lexmark models. The
product will be shipped with a 3K AIO cartridge. The after-market cartridge will be a 6K AIO unit.
NRG will not sell the 3K cartridges as an after- market item.
PML16B
PML16B
Memory:
Standard DRAM 8MB
Optional SDRAM 4, 8, 16, 32, 64MB
Maximum DRAM 72MB
Optional Flash Memory 1, 2, 4MB
Processor:
Type and Speed Toshiba 3927, RISC 133MHz
Connections:
Standard Local Connections Parallel & USB, Ethernet & USB
Optional Network Connections 10/100BaseTx Ethernet
Optional Local Connections RS-422
Option Slots:
Memory Slots 1 DIMM slot for SDRAM
1 SIMM slot for user flash
Expansion Slots 0
(for optional interface cards)
Environmental Specifications:
PML16B
Specified Operating Environment
Operating Temperature 15.6 to 32.3C (60 to 90F)
Humidity 8 to 80% Relative Humidity
Altitude 0 to 2500M (8,200feet)
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 22.8C (73F)
Storage & Shipping Environment
Shipping/Storage Temperature (packaged):
- Printer -20 to 40C (-40 to 104F)
- Printer + Print Cartridge -20 to 40C (-40 to 104F)
Humidity 8 to 95% Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb Temperature 29C (84.2F)
PML16B
Supplies: Yield:
AIO Toner Cartridge DT48BLK 6,000 @ 5%
Reliability Information:
Average Monthly Volume (AMV) ~2000 pages
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) 15,000 pages
Duty Cycle (DC) 15,000 pages
Machine Life (ML) 900,000 pages
MCBC 150,000
target customers
customers
Machine Life (ML) is total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes, or 5 years, whichever comes first
Recommendation: It is recommended that machines be placed to handle MMV and not

Duty Cycle.
PML16B
Printer Physical Dimensions and Clearance:
The following table contains the dimensions and weights for the PML16B. This does not include
packaging but does include the print cartridge that is shipped with the printer.
PML16B
Physical Dimensions:
Height 221mm
Width 380mm
Depth 362mm
Weight (printer + print cartridge) 10kg
Operating Clearance:
Left & Right Sides 304.8mm
Front 508mm
Rear 304.8mm
Power and Electrical Specifications (to be verified during Energy Star testing):
The following table specifies normal average power requirements for the base printer configuration.
All power levels are shown in Watts (W). Maximum current is given in Amperes (A).
PML16B
Printing States:
Power Consumption, Continuous Printing 375W
Power Consumption, Standby -
Power Saver On 12W
Power Saver Off 70W
Maximum Short-term Current Draw 3.8A
High Voltage Model:
200 to 240V at 47 63Hz (not available in all countries)
PML16B
Fonts and Symbol Sets:
The PML16B includes international font support. The resident fonts include support for languages
that use the following character sets:
Latin 1 (US, Western Europe, etc.)

Latin 2 (Eastern Europe)
Latin 5 (Turkish)
Latin 6 (Baltic)
Cyrillic
Greek
Japanese (Katakana characters only)
There are eighty-three symbol sets in the PCL emulation to support all the languages tha t use these
characters. The symbol set names are listed below. Not all symbol sets are supported by all fonts.
Refer to the Technical Reference Manual to find which symbol sets are supported by each font.
Support for the Euro currency character () is included in all applicable fonts for both the PostScript
and PCL emulation. Twelve of the PCL symbol sets support the Euro character, including all seven
Windows symbol sets.
The PML16B printer has a wide range of standard fonts. The following table lists the number of
fonts available in each emulation. The typeface names are shown in the following pages.
Emulation: Number of Scaleable Fonts: Number of Bitmapped Fonts:

PCL6 75 2
PostScript 75 0
PPDS 39 5
The fonts in the PCL emulation are compatible with the fonts in the HP 4500 and include many
extra symbol sets to support extra languages and applications. The fonts in the PostScript
emulation are compatible with all 35 fonts in Adobe PostScript Level 2 and include 40 additional
fonts.
Additional fonts can be downloaded to the printer RAM or optional Flash DIMM. PCL emulation
supports both scaleable and bitmapped downloadable fonts. PostScript emulation supports only
downloadable scaleable fonts and PPDS emulation supports only downloadable bitmapped fonts.
Font cards and font cartridges are not supported.
Included on the Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD-ROM shipped with the printer are a variety
of downloadable fonts for Hebrew and Arabic.
Also included on the Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD-ROM are the FontVision Font
Management utility and screen fonts to match the resident scaleable fonts. An additional 48
TrueType fonts are available on the Lexmark website, when a customer registers the printer.
PML16B
Fonts:
The PML16B printer supports all the fonts in the following list:
Note: Font order is partially alphabetical and partially functional.
PML16B:
PCL Fonts PostScript Fonts PPDS Fonts
75 Scaleable Fonts 75 Scaleable Fonts 39 Scaleable Fonts
2 Bitmapped Fonts 5 Bitmapped Fonts
Arial Arial
Arial Italic Arial Italic
Arial Bold Arial Bold
Arial Bold Italic Arial Bold Italic
Courier Courier Courier
Courier Italic Courier Oblique Courier Oblique
Courier Bold Courier Bold Courier Bold
Courier Bold Italic Courier Bold Oblique Courier Bold Oblique
Times New Roman Times New Roman Times New Roman
Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Bold Italic Times New Roman Bold Italic Times New Roman Bold Italic
Albertus Medium Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold Albertus Extra Bold
Antique Olive Antique Olive
Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Italic
Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Bold
ITC Avant Garde Book Avant Garde Book Avant Garde Book
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique Avant Garde Book Oblique Avant Garde Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Demi Avant Garde Demi Avant Garde Demi
ITC Avant Garde Demi Oblique Avant Garde Demi Oblique Avant Garde Demi Oblique
ITC Bookman Light Bookman Light Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic Bookman Light Italic Bookman Light Italic
ITC Bookman Demi Bookman Demi Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi Italic Bookman Demi Italic Bookman Demi Italic
Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Roman Century Schoolbook Roman
Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Italic Century Schoolbook Italic
Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold Century Schoolbook Bold
Century Schoolbook Bold Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Italic Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
CG Omega CG Omega
CG Omega Bold CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Italic CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold Italic CG Omega Bold Italic
CG Times CG Times
CG Times Italic CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic CG Times Bold Italic
Clarendon Condensed Bold Clarendon Condensed Bold
Coronet Coronet
PML16B
Garamond Antiqua Garamond Antiqua

Garamond Halbfett Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Helvetica Helvetica Helvetica
Helvetica Italic Helvetica Italic Helvetica Italic
Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Bold Italic Helvetica Bold Italic
Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Italic Helvetica Narrow Italic
Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Italic
Helvetica Light Helvetica Light Helvetica Light
Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Light Oblique Helvetica Light Oblique
Helvetica Black Helvetica Black Helvetica Black
Helvetica Black Oblique Helvetica Black Oblique Helvetica Black Oblique
Letter Gothic Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Italic Letter Gothic Italic
Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Bold
Marigold Marigold
Palatino Roman Palatino Roman Palatino Roman
Palatino Italic Palatino Italic Palatino Italic
Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic Palatino Bold Italic Palatino Bold Italic
Symbol Symbol Set Symbol
Univers Medium Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic Univers Medium Italic
Univers Bold Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic Univers Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Medium Univers Condensed Medium
Italic Italic
Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Wingdings Wingdings Regular
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Zapf Chancery Medium Italic Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats Zapf Dingbats Zapf Dingbats
2 bitmapped fonts 5 bitmapped fonts

Line Printer 16 Courier 10
POSTNET Barcode Courier 12
Courier 17.1
Courier 10 Bold
Boldface PS
PML16B
Symbol Set Names:
There are 83 symbol sets in the PCL emulation.
Note: Not all fonts support all symbol sets. Refer to the Technical Reference Manual for your
specific printer to find the symbol sets supported by each font.
Note: Symbol set order is partially alphabetical and partially functional.
Symbol Set Names:

ABICOMP Brazil/Portugal PC-8 Bulgarian
ABICOMP International PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (437N)
DeskTop PC-8 Greek Alternate (437G)
Legal PC-8 Turkish (437T)
MC Text PC-8 Latin/Greek
Microsoft Publishing PC-8 PC Nova
Russian-GOST PC-8 Polish Mazovia
Ukrainian PC-8 Code Page 437
PCL ITC Zapf Dingbats
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats PC-775 Baltic (PC-8 Latin 6)
PS Math PC-850 Multilingual
PS Text PC-851 Greece
Pi Font PC-852 Latin 2
Symbol PC-853 Latin 3 (Turkish)
Wingdings PC-855 Cyrillic
POSTNET Barcode PC-857 Latin 5 (Turkish)
PC-858 Multilingual Euro
ISO : German PC-860 Portugal
ISO : Spanish PC-861 Iceland
ISO 2: IRV (Intl Ref Version) PC-863 Canadian French
ISO 4: United Kingdom PC-865 Nordic
ISO 6: ASCII PC-866 Cyrillic
ISO 10: Swedish PC-869 Greece
ISO 11: Swedish for Names PC-911 Katakana
ISO 14: JIS ASCII PC-1004 OS/2
ISO 15: Italian
ISO 16: Portuguese Math-8
ISO 17: Spanish Greek-8
ISO 21: German Turkish-8
ISO 25: French Roman-8
ISO 57: Chinese Roman-9
ISO 60: Norwegian version 1 Roman Extension
ISO 61: Norwegian version 2
ISO 69: French Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats
ISO 84: Portuguese Ventura International
ISO 85: Spanish Ventura Math
Ventura US
ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 Windows 3.0 Latin 1
ISO 8859-5 Latin/Cyrillic Windows 98 Cyrillic
ISO 8859-7 Latin/Greek Windows 98 Greek
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 Windows 98 Latin 1
Windows 98 Latin 6 (Baltic)
PML16B
Acoustics:
All measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
1 Meter Average
Sound Pressure, dBA
600 dpi printing 49 dBA
Idle (Standby mode) 35 dBA
Certifications:
Like all Lexmark products, the PML16B printer complies with the global safety standard for
Information Technology Equipment, i.e. IEC 60950, and its country equivalents in the markets we
serve. The following sections highlight the approvals and the certifications that the PML16B is
expected to receive.
Safety:
220V Version:
CB Certificate and Test Report will be used to obtain some of the country safety approvals
listed hereafter. CB Certificate to read:
A sample of the product was tested and found to be in conformity with: IEC 60950 Third
Edition. National Deviations for all participating CB Scheme countries as listed at
www.cbscheme.org, with exception of US, Canada, and Japan.
IEC 60825-1, Laser Safety Standard and Report to be included in CB Report.
GS mark (Germany): by TUVR or other authorized agency.
S mark (Sweden): by SEMKO
C-tick/CAN (Australia / New Zealand)
CCIB
CISPR 22:1993 Class B
CE Mark (EU) Class B
Lexmark may use the CB Certificate/Report to obtain the following certifications through
Lexmark Export Division:
Argentina IRAM
Belarus Bel GISS
Bulgaria KPSIM
Croatia ZIK
Czech Republic EZU
Hungary MEEI
Poland PCBC B Mark
Russia GOST R Cpt Mark
Singapore PSB
Slovenia SIQ
Slovakia EVPU
South Africa SABS
PML16B
Archival Tests:
Swedish Archival Test (SAT) certification

German PTS certification
Netherlands COT certification
Finland VTT
Blue Angel (BAM)
Media Support:
Input & Output Configurations:
The following table shows the standard number of input sources and output destinations, as well as
the estimated capacity of each. Capacity may vary and is subject to media specifications and
printer operating environment. The capacities listed in the table below are based on plain paper at
75g/m.
The table also conveys the maximum input and output configurations supported by the PML16B
with the addition of paper handling options.
Sources and Capacities PML16B:

Input Sources
Number of Standard Sources 2
Optional Input Drawers 1
Maximum Number of Input Sources 3
Input Capacities
Primary Tray (standard) 150
Multipurpose Tray Capacity (standard) 1
Total Standard Capacity 150 + 1
Output Destinations
Number of Standard Destinations 2
Output Capacities
Standard Output Bin Capacity 100
PML16B
Media Sizes, Types & Weights:
The following table details the standard paper/envelope sizes media supported (i.e. paper,
cardstock, labels, transparencies, etc).
Source Media Size Paper Weight Capacity

Tray 1 Paper, labels, Paper: 64 163g/m 150 sheets 20lb paper
transparencies, A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, (17 43lb bond, 10 labels
cardstock, and Executive 90lb index, 10 transparencies
envelopes Envelopes: 50 100lb tag) 10 cardstock
Monarch (7), 9, Com-10, C5, C6, Envelopes 90g/m2 10 envelopes
B5, DL, Cardstock 90lb index
Minimum Feed size:
70 x 127 mm (3x 5)
Single -sheet Paper, labels, Paper: 64 163g/m 1 sheet only
manual feed transparencies, A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, (17 43lb bond,
cardstock, and Executive 90lb index,
envelopes Envelopes: 50 100lb tag)
Monarch (7), 9, Com-10, C5, C6, Envelopes 90g/m2
B5, DL Cardstock 90lb index
Minimum Feed size:
70 x 127 mm (3x 5)
Tray 2 Paper only A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, 64 90g/m 250 sheets 20lb paper
(option) Executive (17 24lb bond)
Note: Paper labels shall be no thicker than 0.25
Print Area:
The PML16B printable area is limited to within 4mm of the top, bottom and left or right edges of
the media. Any information placed outside this specified printable area will not print.
Additional Guidelines:
Due to the PML16B print technology, paper designed for use with xerographic copiers should
provide satisfactory print quality and feed reliability. Other types of supplies may be suitable. It is
recommended that users test any particular brand for suitability to their applications. Refer to the
printer Users Guide for additional media specifications.
Paper:
Follow the media guidelines below for successful printing:
Rough, highly textured, limp or pre-curled papers will result in lower print quality and more
frequent paper feed failures
Coloured papers must be able to withstand 200C (392F) fusing temperature.
Pre-printed forms and letterheads should be selected using guidelines found in the printer Users
Guide. The chemical process used in pre-printing may render some papers unsuitable for use
with the PML16B.
Unsuitable papers include multipart forms and documents; chemically treated papers: coated,
synthetic and thermal papers: A5 paper less than 80g/m; recycled paper less than 75g/m
Recycled paper less than 80g/m may cause unacceptable results.
PML16B
Envelopes:
All envelopes should be new, unused, and without package damage.

Envelopes with excessive curl or twist exceeding 6mm, those stuck together, those with bent
corners or nicked edges, or those that interlock should not be used.
Minimum weight: 90g/m (24lb)
The following envelopes should not be used:
Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cut-outs, or deep embossing
Envelopes with metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
Envelopes with exposed flap adhesive when the flap is in the closed position.
Envelopes with stamps attached.
For best results, printing on new 90g/m sulphite or 25% cotton bond envelopes is
recommended
Under high humidity conditions (over 60%) the envelopes may seal during printing
Transparencies:
Use letter or A4 sized sheets only.

Transparencies specifically designed for use with laser printers may be used with the PML16B.
See Ordering Information for recommended part numbers.
Labels:
Labels should be selected using the guidelines found in the Users Guide or the Cardstock and
Label Guide, and tested for acceptability.
Options and Features:
Input Media Option:
250-sheet Drawer: This input option can be installed beneath the printer to offer an added input
source, which holds approximately 250 sheets of 75g/m2 paper.
250-sheet Tray: A separate tray option is available. (Drawer includes tray plus support unit.) For
example, the tray might hold an alternate media, such as letterhead, and temporarily replace a tray
with standard media, as required.
E3xx Paper Tray Cover: This option provides protection for the paper in the primary tray.
E32x Paper Tray 2 Cover: This option provides protection for the paper in the optional second
tray.
PML16B
Memory and Flash Memory:
The PML16B DRAM memory options are 100-pin synchronous DRAM DIMMs (dual in- line
memory modules). Lexmark SDRAM DIMMs for the PML16B are available in 4MB, 8MB,
16MB, 32MB and 64MB.
The Flash memory options for the PML16B are 80-pin SIMMs. Flash SIMMs are available in
1MB, 2MB and 4MB.
Connections :
The PML16B has a standard parallel port and a standard USB port. An Ethernet 10/100BaseT card
is optional.
USB support:
1. Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 operating systems

2. Suns Sun Ray Appliances running Sun Ray Server code version 1.2 or later, Sun Blade
workstations
3. Apple Macintosh iMac computer with Operating System 8.6 or higher
Cables:
Personal Computers:
The recommended PC parallel printer cable (P/N 1329605 or 1427498) is required for
attachment of the PML16B and must be ordered separately.
For PC serial attachment, the External Serial Adapter and a serial cable should be ordered.
For USB attachment of the PML16B, USB cable P/N 12A2405 is recommended and must be
ordered separately.
IBM AS/400:
For parallel attachment through a display or PC, parallel cable (P/N 1329605 or 1427498) is
required.
For seria l attachment through a PC, an external serial adapter and a printer serial cable are
required. See Ordering Information for part numbers.
For serial attachment to the IBM AS/400 ASCII Workstation Controller, refer to the IBM
AS/400 ASCII Workstation Reference and Example manual (SA41-9922) for specific cable
information. The printer requires an external serial adapter.
Operating Systems:
The PML16B is compatible with applications running under the following operating systems for
either local or network connections. For information about USB connections, see Connections.
PML16B
Apple Macintosh:
Apple Macintosh System 7.5 Operating System or later with standard Ethernet connection or
MarkNet Print Server
Apple MacOS 8.6 or later with USB Interface, standard Ethernet connection or MarkNet Print
Server
Download the Lexmark printer PPD file or printer driver from the Lexmark Web Site
Note: The software applications that operate with most Apple LaserWriter printers will generally
operate with the PML16B. The Macintosh 128, 512 and 512e Computers are not supported.
Microsoft Windows:
Microsoft Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98 2nd Edition
Microsoft Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4. 0
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Download the latest printer driver from the Lexmark Web Site
Note: The Windows software applications, which operate in the operating systems, listed above,
are best suited to run with the drivers supplied with the PML16B. These drivers for
Windows take advantage of your printer functions and increase the printer performance
wherever possible.
Novell:
Novell NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5.x including full DNS and NDPS support
Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS) 2.0 or later with Lexmark NDPS IP Gateway
Novell NetWare Enterprise Print Services (NES) with Lexmark NDPS IP Gateway
Linux:
Caldera eDesktop 2.4
Red Hat Linux 6.x, 7.0 or later
SuSE 6.3, 6.4, 7.0 Linux or later
TurboLinux Workstation 6.0, 6.1 or later
PML16B
UNIX:
Compaq Tru64 (Digital) UNIX 4.0D
HP-UX 10.20x, 11.x
IBM AIX 4.21 or later
SCO OpenServer 5.0.4 or later (now Caldera owned)
SGI IRIX 6.x
Sun Solaris x86 2.6, 7, 8
Sun Solaris 2.6, 7, 8
UnixWare 7.x
Other:
Virtually any platform supporting TCP/IP
IBM AS/400 Systems with TCP/IP with OS/400 V3R1 or later using OS400 Host Print
Transform
MarkVision Professional and printer drivers are provided on the Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities
CD that is packaged with the printer. See Package Contents for details. MarkVision Professional
for Sun Solaris, SuS E Linux, Red Hat Linux, HP-UX and IBM AIX operating systems are available
from the Lexmark Web Site.
Network Connections:
External Network Connections:

The Lexmark MarkNet X2000 Series of External Print Servers
MarkNet X2011e (1 port) Ethernet 10Base/100BaseTX
MarkNet X2012e (1 port) Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX
MarkNet X2030t (3 port) Token Ring
The standard Ethernet connection and the MarkNet X2000 Series print servers support NetPnP 7.0
on Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 systems.
The Ethernet and Token-Ring print servers and the standard Ethernet connection support the
following protocols:
TCP/IP
Novell (IPX/SPX including NetWare Directory Services)
AppleTalk
LexLink (DLC/LLC)
The TCP/IP standard set of application services are supported including DHCP, WINS, SNMP
(industry standard printer MIB), http, lpr/lpd, ftp, tftp, ping, finger, telnet, bootp and rarp.
The following protocols are also supported:
IPP: Internet Printing Protocol
SLP: Service Location Protocol
NTP: Network Time Protocol
PML16B
The printers with standard Ethernet and the MarkNet X2000 external print servers support a
Resident Web page with Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or later and Netscape Navigator 4.5 or
later for Windows 95, Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000, or Windows NT. The remote operator
panel is available using the standard Ethernet connection or MarkNet X2000 print servers used with
the PML16B.
IBM Host Connections:
AS/400:
IBM AS/400 with OS/400Version 3 Release 1 or later utilizing OS/400 Host Print Transform.
Use Manufacturer Type and Model (MFRTYPMDL) of *LEXOPTRA
PML16B
Solutions:
Management Solutions:
MarkVision Professional (provided on Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD):

MarkVision Professional is a cross-platform print management solution that enables IT
administrators to monitor and manage network devices proactively in an enterprise environment via
a web browser. MarkVision Professional provides IT administrators with real-time device status
and information centralized device setup, remote printer monitoring and management, and asset
management capabilities.
MarkVision Professional is designed and optimized for IT administrators responsible for supporting
hundreds or even thousands of network printers.
Note: The printer must be network-attached to be managed with MarkVision.
MarkVision Messenger (provided on Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD):
MarkVision Messenger provides real-time notification of printer conditions via e-mail, paging or
together applications and facilitates automated responses to these conditions before they become
critical and disruptive to user productivity. MarkVision Messenger enhances administrators
quality for service and improves end- user productivity and satisfaction.
NetPnP (Provided on Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD):

NetPnP senses when a new Lexmark printer is attached to the network and automatically creates a
shared printer object on the Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 system and notifies users via e- mail
that the new network printer is available for printing. Designed for Windows NT 4.0 and Windows
2000 environments, Net PnP makes the Lexmark printers available to end-users within seconds of
network attachment.
Software Installation and Distribution tools (Provided on Drivers, MarkVision and

Utilities CD:)
In Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 environments, these tools enable administrators to push
Lexmark software installation to other Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 workstations or to
write a script that will install specified Lexmark software on specified Windows NT 4.0 or
Windows 2000 workstations on the network. In Windows 9X, Windows NT 4.0 and Windows
2000 environments, it enables administrators to write installation scripts that can then be distributed
to other workstations. When executed these scripts will silently install all Lexmark software that is
specified.
Solaris Ready Printer for Sun Customers:

The PML16B is certified Solaris Ready by Sun and include Lexmarks Enhanced Printer Drivers
for Sun Systems and Sun specific documentation for seamless installation and use in Sun Solaris
environments. The Lexmark network printers are Ethernet-ready for use in Sun networks. The
Lexmark printers with USB interfaces are certified for USB attachment to Sun Blade workstations
and Sun Ray appliances. MarkVision Professional is available from the Lexmark Web Site.
PML16B
Optra Forms:
Optra Forms uses up-to-the- minute data directly from customer applications and combines it with
printer resident electronic forms with text and graphics to produce (print) completed forms such as
invoices, statements, pick slips, labels, purchase orders or confirmations with bar codes or other
specialized graphics on a variety of paper types. For Optra Forms:
1. No Server-based or host based merge program or software is required.

2. Use with virtually any ASCII text print file from any platform, mainframe, AS/400, UNIX or
workstation, over Coax, Twinax, parallel, serial or LAN (TCP/IP)
3. Generally, make no changes to host applications
4. Print different forms at different locations from the same database, possibly using the same data.
5. Update forms quickly and easily (globally) over the LAN
6. Provide support for bar codes, multipage form sets and more
7. Store forms as efficient, compact forms in flash
Optra Forms is supported with the PML16B printer using the Optra Forms 1, 2 and 4MB Flash
SIMMs.
Optra Forms Director:
Optra Forms Director is a Windows NT or Windows 2000 server-based program. Using no

additional host software (AS/400, UNIX or Mainframe), the host application sends a print spool file
to a Windows NT or 2000 print queue. Optra Forms Director service automatically parses the print
spool file into single or multiple print jobs using Microsoft Visual Basic Script or Jscript methods
and Named Pipes. The spool file, which may contain many individual documents, is customized by
separating it into individual jobs or by adding data or particular commands to the individual
documents that are then sent to IP, LPR, or Windows printer destinations. Print jobs are
customized and distributed electronically to network printers or multifunction printers automatically
without making any changes to host applications.
PML16B
Packaging & Shipping Dimensions:
Individual Carton Specifications Pallet Specifications
W D H Wt Qty/Plt W D H Wt
Kg Kg
Printer:
PML16B (mm/kg) 450 452 315 10.9 36 920 1370 2015 405.2
Options:
250-sheet Drawer 375 450 185 2.6 30 920 1145 1050 92.5
250-sheet Tray TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA
E3xx Paper Tray
Cover 33 39.4 18.4 9.5 45 101.6 121.9 106.7 61.3
E32x Paper Tray 2
Cover TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA TBA
Supplies:
Print Cartridge, All
Yield Points
Individual Ctg (mm) 330 220 160 1.4 96 1350 920 1113 186.9
12 pack 665 450 495 17.9 8
Transparencies
(Letter) Overpack 30 23.6 10.9 3 765 121.9 101.6 119.1 449.9
Transparencies (A4)
Overpack 32 22.9 10.4 3.1 720 48 40 47 469.9
PML16B
WHAT FITS WHAT
Machine Nashuatec Rex Rotary Geste tner

PML16B P6216 P6216 P6216
Supplies: Description:
DT48BLK AIO Toner Cartridge 6,000 Yield @ 5%
Peripherals:
DPFU26 250-sheet Second Drawer
DIF57 10Base/100BaseTX NIB

DIF58 10BaseT/100BaseTX NIB
DIF59 10BaseT/100BaseTX 3 Port NIB
DIF60 Token Ring 3 Port
DME18 2MB Flash SIMM Optraforms

DME19 4MB Flash SIMM Optraforms
Note: Other options TBA
PML16B
IN THE BOX ACCESSORIES

Contents Whats In The Box?
It is planned to produce just one generic mainframe for NRG with just one EDP code. All the
hardcopy documents, softcopy documents, drivers and utilities are shipped in the mainframe carton.
This simplifies logistics:
Mainframe carton contents (to be agreed):
Toner Cartridge
The mainframe comes complete with one 3K-toner cartridge.
Roadmap
1-page hardcopy document that explains the contents of the carton
- English, Dutch, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese
Set-up Guide
3-page hard copy document, which also has a pocket to hold the CD-ROMs
- English, Dutch, Frenc h, German, Italian and Spanish
Quick Reference Instruction

1-page hardcopy document, folded into three for pocket size reference
- English, Dutch, French, German, Italian and Spanish
Branding labels
For front panel x 3 (packed inside language kit)
Cardboard placement guide

Enables accurate placement of the label on the top right corner of the machines front panel
Logo Positioning Instructions

Explains how to use the cardboard placement guide and label
Control panel overlays

6 overlays in a plastic bag in the following languages:
- Italian, Dutch, German, Spanish, French, Brazil/Portuguese
- Machines come with English silk-screened onto the control panel. These labels cover the
English words when adhered to the machine.
PML16B
Publications CDROM containing :

- On-Line Users Guide in English, Italian, German, Spanish, French and
Brazilian Portuguese, Danish, Dutch, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Simplified
Chinese or Traditional Chinese.
- Set-up Guide in English, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese, Dutch, French, German,
Catalan, European Portuguese, Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, Finnish, Czech,
Slovak, Hungarian, Polish, Russian, Turkish, Hebrew, Greek, Italian, Simplified
Chinese or Traditional Chinese.
- Quick Ref in English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese,
Danish, Dutch, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Simplified Chinese or Traditional
Chinese.
Drivers CDROM containing:

- Printer Drivers, MarkVision & network support software
Packaging & Branding:
Mainframe Packaging:
The mainframe carton is unbranded except for a barcode label on the outer carton, which has NRG
Model Name, EDP code, Short Name and Lexmarks EDP codes on it.
Three branding labels are included in the box with the machine, one each for the three NRG brands.
Options Packaging:
All options have neutral packaging with no branding.
Supplies Packaging:
The toner cartridge has neutral packaging with no branding. The 3K cartridge that is shipped with
the PML16B is planned to have a label that instructs the user to replace the cartridge with the 6K
after- market version.
Supplies Compatibility:
The PML16B cartridges are new and will not fit other Lexmark printers.
NRG mainframes are designed to accept NRG-specific toner cartridges only. The toner
cartridges have an electronic lockout on them, which identifies the cartridge type to the mainframe.
Therefore, NRG cartridges will not work in a Lexmark machine and Lexmark cartridges will not
work in an NRG- version machine.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PML19B / PML19Bn
Mono Laser Printer
CAPRI H / CAPRI Hn
Nashuatec P6319 / P6319n

Rex Rotary P6319 / P6319n
Gestetner P6319 / P6319n
First
April 2003 June 2003 South Korea

Date Created: May 2003
Version 1
May 2003
PML19B_Bn
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 4
What Fits What 23
Whats In The Box 24

K:\Customer\Technic\NPSDOC\PML19Bn.doc 1
PML19B_Bn
INTRODUCTION
NRGI has maintained an OEM relationship with Lexmark since 1994 and, over the
past eight years, has marketed a range of Lexmarks mono business laser printers in
several countries.
As there have been continual requests for a competitively priced A4 laser printer it
has been decided to launch a 19ppm printer, an evolution of the PML16B. This new
printer will also be manufactured in South Korea.
We will be launching two versions of this new printer, the PML19B and the
PML19Bn:
PML19B is a stand-alone desktop mono A4 printer.
PML19Bn is a network ready version of the PML19B, having an

integrated Ethernet Board.
PML19B_Bn
The marketing objectives, specific to entry-level A4 print environments, are as
follows:
To satisfy the diverse network printing needs of our customers by

maintaining a full range of A4 network printers, complementing our range
of A3 printers.
To enable the sales of a full printer range from entry level to high volume
workgroups
To increase our share of page volume
To be able to provide printing solutions for all network environments
To reinforce our stance as a capable IT Printing vendor.
Specific marketing objectives for the PML19B/Bn will be to ensure that NRG are able
to market a highly competitive A4 product in the 11 20ppm segment of the printer
market. This segment represents the largest opportunity for capturing office page
print volume.
Marketing Communication Objectives:
To position the PML19B/Bn as NRGs entry level desktop laser printer for business
users needing performance, reliability and network capability in a small size.
Customers looking to purchase this class of product, in this speed segment, tend to
consider five key points, in the following order of importance:
Price
Size
Print Quality
Ease of Use
Reliability
The PML19B/Bn is positioned to compete in the same segment as the HP LJ1200,

offering more speed and functionality in a smaller, more compact package than the
HP product.
Additionally, the PML19B/Bn will continue to increase awareness of NRG as a

printer supplier and reinforce NRGs message of being a complete hard copy output
solution provider to the networked environment, thus increasing the proportion of
total print volume made on NRG products.
PML19B_Bn
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PML19B:
The PML19B/Bn has the following features:
19ppm A4 printer
200MHz processor
1200dpi image quality
PCL6, PostScript Level 2
16MB RAM standard on PML19B, expandable to 140MB
16MB RAM standard on PML19Bn, expandable to 144MB
Standard input 150 sheets, plus single sheet manual feed
Optional 250-sheet second drawer
Plain paper, transparencies, envelopes, labels, card stock
PML19B: Standard parallel and USB
PML19Bn: Standard Ethernet and USB
Optional Ethernet for PML19B
PML19B_Bn
Speed and Performance:
The PML19B/Bn printer supports the maximum print speeds listed below:
A4: 19ppm from both Tray 1 and Tray 2

Simplex printing on full-sized media
Speeds are for 300, 600 and 1200IQ
Throughput may be reduced for narrow media in some circumstances
As with most page printers in this class, performance depends on:
Interface to host (Parallel, serial, USB or network)

Host system and application
Complexity and content of the page
Certain options added to or selected with the printer
Available memory in the printer
Media size
Resolution
# of seconds
Time to First Print (TTFP) Tray 1 Tray 2
Time from Standby Mode 9.5 TBA
Time from Power Saver Mode TBA TBA
Note: All first print times are measured for 300 dpi and 600 dpi simplex printing on letter-sized paper. The
test job consists of the character A followed by a form feed (single page job). The First Copy Time is
defined as the elapsed time from hitting enter on the PC keyboard to the page exiting to the output bin. All
tests will pick paper from the indicated input tray and the page exits into the top output bin.
Print Quality:
The PML19B/Bn print quality is consistent with the print quality of the current
PML16B. During the life of the printer components are subject to wear, based on
usage. Printers continuously operating at or near maximum duty cycle may require
service or replacement of these components to ensure high quality printing and good
performance throughout the life of the printer.
Resolution:
The following resolutions are available:
1200dpi Image Quality (driver default)

600 x 600dpi (printer default)
300 x 300dpi
PML19B_Bn
Toner Darkness:
The Toner Darkness setting offers ten user-selectable settings to balance the
customers needs for print darkness and toner savings. The higher the value selected,
the darker the print (i.e. 1 is the lightest). The printer is shipped with a default setting
of level 8. The PML19B/18Bn offer up to 50% toner savings, from level 10 to 1, thus
reducing the cost of printing.
The Toner Darkness setting is accessible in the print drivers.
Print Cartridge:
Cartridge Offerings
Approx Yield SWE
(Shipped with the printer)
Print Cartridge 3,000 Yes
High Yield Print 6,000 No
Cartridge
MICR Cartridge 3,000 TBA
Yield is based on approximately 5% coverage
The PML19B/Bn high-yield print cartridges are designed for use only with the
PML19B/Bn. See What Fits What section for ordering codes. The print cartridges
have a lifetime warranty.
Data Streams / Printer Description Language:
The PML19B/Bn supports the following data streams / printer description languages:
PostScript Level 2
PCL6
PPDS Migration Tool
Memory, Ports and Electronics:
Various printer memory, flash memory, local connection, network connection and
application solution features are available for use with the PML19B/Bn printer.
Additional memory may be required for printing very complex pages of full-page,
high-resolution images in 1200dpi Image Quality at rated speeds. See the What Fits
What section for a list of available memory and connectivity options.
The memory options for the PML19B/Bn are 100-pin synchronous S-DRAM DIMMs
(Dual In-line Memory Modules). S-DRAM DIMMs are available in 8MB, 16MB,
32MB and 64MB.
The Flash memory options for the PML19B and PML19Bn are also 100-pin DIMMS.
Flash DIMMs are available in 2MB, 4MB, 8MB and 16MB.
S-DRAM and Flash Memory options are interchangeable within any of the memory
slots available on the PML19B/Bn system boards. However, only one Flash memory
PML19B_Bn
option will be recognized at a time. If multiple Flash memory options are installed,
the system will recognize the largest one.
PML19B_Bn

Fast Print Speed:
19ppm speed provides superior output in record time

The 200MHz processor and 16MB RAM on the PML19B/Bn print
complex jobs quickly and efficiently
Built for Business:
High yield, single element print cartridge reduces replacements

Robust design supports up to 15,000 pages per month
Expandable with optional second drawer, memory and networking options
Toner low indicator, designed for proactive management of printer
supplies
Broad Compatibility:
Parallel, USB as standard on PML19B and USB, Ethernet as standard on

the PML19Bn
Wide range of operating system support and compatibility
Standard PostScript and PCL data streams provide extra flexibility to print
from a range of applications
High Quality Print:
Professional output with 1200dpi Image Quality resolution

High quality results on a range of media types and weights
One of the most critical points when selling into a networked environment,
particularly when selling direct to IT/MIS professionals, will be the very wide range
of operating system support available on the PML19B/Bn.
Target Markets:
The PML19B/Bn is suitable for either individual desktop use or for small workgroup
printing requirements in the general office environment. It can be used for a single or
multi-users, either direct or through the network. We would expect the majority of
installations to be made in the network environment.
Target Customers:
Large businesses looking for a printer that can handle a wide range of
complex documents, with the expandability to add an extra tray and
networking
Small businesses wanting a highly reliable printer that can print anything
they require
PML19B_Bn
Financial institutions needing a printer with a small footprint that can fit
under counters and on desktops, with the ability to add an extra paper
source to support multiple media types
Educational institutions needing a printer that supports a range of
operating systems (Windows and Macintosh) as well as media (plain paper
and card stock)
Healthcare institutions looking for a small printer to fit into nursing
stations and doctors offices that can be managed remotely, with the
additional ability to support electronic forms printing and paper labels
The PML19B/Bn is an ideal major account machine, since many print tenders request
products at the 16ppm level and above as entry products, supporting a range of higher
speed single function printers and MFP devices. The current PML16B, whilst being a
very well specified machine, has come to the end of its product life cycle and is being
replaced by the faster and more powerful PML19B/Bn. By being able to bid a
competitively-priced 19ppm machine in large account tenders, NRG will also be able
to maintain an account presence and control and to bid higher machines in the range
(either A4 or A3) at the same time or at a later stage.
Sales Channels:
It is NRGs objective to obtain pricing that will enable us to position this product head
to head against the HP LaserJet 1200 at the dealer price level. This should enable us
to compete effectively in dealer going-rate business to professional users, SOHO
and small and medium businesses. Our direct sales force will also find this product
attractive, in terns of being able to meet the large tender requirements from large
accounts.
Whilst the printer industry as a whole tends to sell printers at this price point through
the indirect channel, there is no reason why companies such as NRG, with a large,
well-trained sales force, should not be able to sell this product directly to large
accounts. This has been precisely what competitors, such as Lexmark, have been able
to do, with some measure of success. However, in Lexmarks case, whilst they create
demand with a direct sales force, they still use the dealer channel as a fulfilment
channel in order to avoid potential conflict.
Supplies:
The PML19B/Bn will continue to use an All In One (AIO) cartridge that is not
compatible with Lexmark branded machines. The PML19B/Bn will be shipped with a
3K AIO cartridge. The after market cartridge will be a 6K AIO unit.
PML19B_Bn
PML19B: PML19Bn:
Processor:
Speed and type 200MHz, Lawrin ASIC 200MHz, Lawrin ASIC
Memory:
Standard DRAM 16MB 16MB
Optional SDRAM 8, 16, 32, 64MB 8, 16, 32, 64MB
Max. DRAM 140MB 144MB
Optional Flash Memory N/A 2, 4MB
Connections:
Standard local connections Parallel & USB Parallel & USB / Ethernet & USB
Standard network connections - 10/100BaseTx Ethernet
Optional local connections RS-422 or RS-232 serial RS-422
Optional network connections 10/100BaseTx Ethernet -
Option Slots:
Memory slots (80 or 100-pin) 1 DIMM slot for SDRAM 1 DIMM slot for SDRAM
1 DIMM slot for User Flash
Expansion slots (for optional 0 0
interface cards)
Printer Physical Dimensions and Clearance:
The following table contains the dimensions and weights for the PML19B and
PML19Bn. This does not include packaging but does include the 3K print cartridge
that is shipped with the machine.
Physical Dimensions Width Depth: Height Weight1

PML19B/Bn 388.0 mm 362.0 mm 221.0 mm 9.00 kg
250-Sheet Drawer TBD mm TBD mm TBD mm TBD kg

PML19B/Bn TBD mm TBD mm TBD mm TBD kg
2
with 250-Sheet Drawer
1
Printer weight includes the print cartridge that is shipped with the printer
2
Total height of PML19B/Bn printer installed with the optional drawer is TBD mm less than the
combined height of the individual items because of the way the printer and drawers fit together
Operating Clearances
Left and Right Sides 304.8mm
Front 50.8mm
Rear 304.8mm
Note: When installing the printer, the customer should leave enough room to access the paper
tray(s), the Multipurpose Feeder, and the Rear Exit Door
PML19B_Bn
If you are using the second tray option, the following will apply:
The additional depth is listed below, which is caused by the tray sticking out of the
front. There is no addition to the width. The paper guide is flush with the front of the
second drawer plastic for letter-sized paper, which then pulls out slightly more for A4
paper.
With the end guide set for A4 paper, the drawer protrudes 76mm
With the end guide set for letter-sized paper, the drawer protrudes 58mm
With the end guide set for legal-size paper, the drawer protrudes 135mm
Power and Electrical Specifications (to be verified during Energy Star testing):
The following table specifies normal average power requirements for the base printer
configuration. All power levels are shown in Watts (W). Maximum current is given
in Amperes (A).
Printing States PML19B PML19Bn

Off 0W 0W
Power Consumption
Continuous Printing 375 W 375 W
Power Consumption, Standby
Power Saver On 10 W 12 W
Power Saver Off 70 W 70 W
Maximum Current while printing:
230 Volts 3.8 A 3.8 A
High Voltage Model:
200 240V at 50/60Hz
Notes:
The use of any voltage converter is not recommended with these
printers
Both models are Energy Star compliant
Fonts and Symbol Sets:
The PML19B/Bn models include international font support. The resident fonts
include support for languages that use the following character sets:
Latin 1 (Western Europe, USA, etc.)

Latin 2 (Eastern Europe)
Latin 5 (Turkish)
Latin 6 (Baltic)
Cyrillic
Greek
Japanese (Katakana characters only)
PML19B_Bn
There are 83 symbol sets in the PCL emulation to support all the languages that use
these characters. The symbol set names are listed below. Not all symbol sets are
supported by all fonts.
Support for the Euro currency character () is included in all applicable fonts for both
the PostScript and PCL emulation. Twelve of the PCL symbol sets support the Euro
character, including all seven Windows symbol sets.
The PML19B/Bn has many additional fonts. The following table lists the number of
fonts available in each emulation. The typeface names are shown in the following
pages.
Emulation # of Scalable Fonts # of Bitmapped Fonts

PML19B/Bn PML19B/Bn
HBP
PCL 5e / 6 89 2
PostScript 89 0
BarCodes
(3 of 9 narrow, regular, wide)
OCR-A, OCR-B
PPDS 39 5
Additional fonts can be downloaded to the printer RAM or optional Flash DIMM.
PCL emulation supports both scaleable and bitmapped downloadable fonts.
PostScript emulation supports only downloadable scaleable fonts and PPDS
emulation supports only downloadable bitmapped fonts. Font cards and font
cartridges are not supported.
Included on the Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD-ROM shipped with the
machines are a variety of downloadable fonts for Hebrew and Arabic. Also included
on the Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD-ROM are the FontVision Font
Management utility and screen fonts to match the resident scaleable fonts.
Media Support:
Input and Output Configurations:
The following table shows the standard number of input sources and output
destinations, as well as the estimated capacity of each. Capacity may vary and is
subject to media specifications and printer operating environment. The capacities
listed in the table below are based on plain paper at 75g/m2.
The table also conveys the maximum input and output configurations supported by
the PML19B and PML19Bn with the addition of paper handling options.
PML19B_Bn
Sources and Capacities PML19B PML19Bn

Input Sources
Number of Standard Sources 2 2
Number of Optional Input Drawers 1 1
Optional Envelope Feeder N/A N/A
Maximum Number of Input Sources1 3 3
Input Capacities
Primary Tray (standard) 150 150
Multipurpose Tray Capacity (standard) 1 1
Optional Tray Capacity 250 250
Total Standard Capacity 150 +1 150 +1
Maximum Input Capacity 4013 4013
2
Output Destinations
Number of Standard Destination 2 2
Output Capacities
Standard Output Bin Capacity (top) 100 100
Standard Output Bin Capacity (front) 1 1
1
Optional input drawer is a 250-sheet capacity drawer. Only one optional drawer may be
installed at any time.
2
The PML19B/Bn printer supports top and front output as standard. No additional output
options are available.
3
Includes optional 250-sheet second drawer.
Media Sizes, Types & Weights:
The following table details the standard paper/envelope sizes of media supported (i.e.
paper, cardstock, labels, transparencies, etc.)
1
Source Media Size Media Weight Capacity
Tray 1 - Paper Continuously adjustable Paper: - 150 sheets paper
(150 sheet) - Paper Labels TBC x TBC mm to TBC x 64 - 163 g/m; - Up to 10 paper
2
- Transparencies TBC mm. (Markings for: Envelopes: labels
- Envelopes Letter, Legal, TBD) 90 g/m - 10 transparencies
- 10 envelopes
250-Sheet 2nd - Paper only Continuously adjustable 60 - 163 g/m; - 250 sheets paper
Drawer option TBC x TBC mm to TBC x
TBC mm.
PML19B_Bn
Source Media Size Media Weight Capacity1

MPF - Paper, Minimum Feed size: Paper: - 1 sheet paper
- Paper Labels 76 x 127 mm 64 - 163 g/m; - 1 envelope
- Transparencies Envelopes: - 1 transparency
- Envelopes 90 g/m
1
For 20 lb print media, unless otherwise noted.
2
The capacity may be reduced on some labels.
Paper labels shall be no thicker than 0.25 mm and shall be within the smoothness range of 100 to
400 Sheffield points.
Output Capacity by Media & Source:
Source Media Capacity Orientation

Standard output bin Supports all sizes listed in 100 sheets Face down
(top) the Media Input Size, Collated
Weight and Capacity table
Front output bin Supports all sizes listed in TBD sheets Face up
the Media Input Size, Printer does not
Weight and Capacity table stack these sheets.
The printer automatically sends print jobs to the standard output bin unless the front output bin is
open.
The printer automatically sends print jobs to the front output bin when it is open.
Print Area:
The PML19B/Bn printable area is limited to within 4mm of the top, bottom and left or
right edges of the media. Any information placed outside this specified printable area
will not print.
Additional Guidelines:
Paper designed for use with xerographic copiers should provide satisfactory print
quality and feed reliability. Other types of supplies may be suitable. It is
recommended that users test any particular brand for suitability to their applications.
Refer to the printers Users Guide for additional media specifications.
PML19B_Bn
Paper:
Follow the media guidelines below for successful printing:
Rough, highly textured, limp or pre-curled papers will result in lower print
quality and more frequent paper feed failures
Coloured paper must be able to withstand 200C fusing temperature
Pre-printed forms and letterheads should be selected using guidelines
found in the printers Users Guide. The chemical process used in pre-
printing may render some paper unsuitable for use with the PML19B and
PML19Bn
Unsuitable papers include multipart forms and documents, chemically
treated papers: coated, synthetic and thermal papers, A5 paper less than
80g/m2 and recycled paper less than 75g.m2
Recycled paper less than 80g/m2 may cause unacceptable results
Envelopes:
All envelopes should be new, unused and without package damage

Envelopes with excessive curl or twist exceeding 6mm, those stuck
together, those with bent corners or nicked edges or those that interlock
should not be used
Minimum weight: 90g/m2
The following envelopes should not be used:
o Envelopes with windows, holes, perforations, cut-outs or deep
embossing
o Envelopes with metal clasps, string ties or metal folding bars
o Envelopes with exposed flap adhesive when the flap is in the closed
position
o Envelopes with stamps attached
For best results, printing on new, 90g/m2 sulphite or cotton bond envelopes
is recommended
Under high humidity conditions (over 60%) the envelopes may seal during
printing
Envelopes less than 90g/m2 may wrinkle
Transparencies:
Use A4 sized sheets only

Transparencies specifically designed for use with laser printers may be
used with the PML19B/Bn
Labels:
Labels should be selected using the guidelines found in the Users Guide
or the Cardstock and Label Guide and tested for suitability
Vinyl labels are not supported
PML19B_Bn
Options & Features:
Input Media Option:
250-sheet Drawer:
This input option can be installed beneath the printer to offer an added input source,
which holds approximately 250 sheets of 75g/m2 paper
250-sheet Tray:
A separate tray option is available (drawer includes tray plus support unit). For
instance, the tray might hold an alternative media such as letterhead and temporarily
replace a tray with standard media, as required.
Memory & Flash Memory:
The PML19B/Bn DRAM memory options are 100-pin synchronous DRAM DIMMs
(dual in-line memory modules). SDRAM DIMMs for the PML19B/Bn are available
in 4MB, 8MB, 16MB, 32MB and 64MB.
The Flash memory options for the PML19B/Bn are 80-pin SIMMs (single in-line
memory modules). Flash SIMMs are available in 1MB, 2MB and 4MB.
Connections:
The PML19B has a standard parallel port and a standard USB port.
The PML19Bn has a standard USB port and a built-in Ethernet 10/100Base TX port.
Operating Systems:
The PML19B/Bn is compatible with applications running under the following

operating systems for either local or network connections:
Apple Macintosh:
Apple Mac OS 8.6 9.x

Apple Mac OS X
Note: The software applications that operate with most Apple LaserWriter printers
will generally operate with the PML19B/Bn. Macintosh 128, 512 and 512e
computers are not supported.
PML19B_Bn
Microsoft Windows:
Windows 95 4.00950 or later

Windows 98 2nd Edition
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows NT 4.0 Server
Windows NT 4.0 Terminal Server
Windows NT 4.0 Terminal Server with Citrix MetaFrame 1.8
Windows NT 4.0 Terminal Server with Citrix MetaFrame XP 1.0
Windows 2000 Professional
Windows 2000 Server
Windows 2000 Advanced Server
Windows 2000 Server running Terminal Services
Windows 2000 Server running Terminal Services with Citrix MetaFrame
1.8
Windows 2000 Server running Terminal Services with Citrix MetaFrame
XP 1.0
Windows XP
Novell:
Novell NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, 6.x including full DNS and NDPS support
Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS) 2.0 or later with Lexmark NDPS
IP Gateway
Novell NetWare Enterprise Print Services (NES) with Lexmark NDPS IP
Gateway
Linux:
Caldera eDesktop 2.4

Red Hat Linux 7.0, 7.1, 7.2
SuSE Linux 7.1, 7.2, 7.3
TurboLinux 6.0, 6.1
Unix:
Compaq (Digital) UNIX 4.0D

Compaq tru64 (Digital) UNIX 4.0F
HP-UX 10.20, 11.0
IBM AIX 4.2.1, 4.3.3, 5.1
SCO OpenServer 5..0.4, 5.0.5, 5.0.6 or higher
SGI IRIX 6.5
Sun Solaris x86 2.6, 7, 8
Sun Solaris 2.6, 7, 8, 9
(SCO) UnixWare 2.1.3, 7.0, 7.1
PML19B_Bn
Other:
Virtually any platform supporting TCP/IP

IBM AS/400 Systems with TCP/IP with OS/400 V3R1 or later, using
OS/400 Host Print Transform
Printer drivers are provided on the Drivers and Utilities CD that is packaged with the
printer.
The Windows software applications, which operate in the operating systems listed
above, are best suited to run with the drivers supplied with the PML19B/Bn. These
drivers for Windows take advantage of your printer functions and increase the printer
performance wherever possible.
The software applications that operate with most Apple LaserWriter printers will
generally operate with the PML19B/Bn.
Network Connections:
Internal Network Connections:
The PML19Bn network model comes standard with Ethernet 10/100Base TX built-in.
External Network Connections:
MarkNet X2011e (1 port) Ethernet 10Base/100BaseTX

MarkNet X2012e (1 port) Ethernet 10BaseT/2, 10BaseT/100BaseTX
MarkNet X2030t (3 port) Token Ring
The standard Ethernet connection and the MarkNet X2000 Series print servers support
NetPnP 7.0 on Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 systems.
The Ethernet and Token Ring print servers and the standard Ethernet connection
support the following protocols:
TCP/IP
Novell (IPX/SPX including NetWare Directory Services)
AppleTalk
LexLink (DLC/LLC)
The TCP/IP standard set of application services are supported, including DHCP,
WINS, SNMP (industry standard printer MIB), http, lpr/lpd, ftp, tftp, ping, finger,
telnet, bootp and rarp are supported.
PML19B_Bn
The following protocols are also supported:
IPP: Internet Printing Protocol

SLP: Service Location Protocol
NTP: Network Time Protocol
The printers with standard Ethernet and the MarkNet X2000 external print servers
support a Resident Web page with Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or later and
Netscape Navigator 4.5 or later for Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000, XP or NT. The
remote operator panel is available using the standard Ethernet connection or MarkNet
X2000 print servers used with the PML19B/Bn printer.
PML19B_Bn
As a leading manufacturer in producing environmentally friendly machines, you are
able to publish to your customers the following information. This covers noise levels,
BAM standards (which indicate whether a part is recyclable), environmental marks
(e.g. Energy Star, Swan etc.), power consumption, ozone & styrene emission levels
and dust levels.
Specified Operating Environment

Temperature 15.6 to 32.2C (60 to 90F)
Humidity 8 to 80% Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Altitude 0 to 2,500 m (8,200 feet)
Storage and Shipping Environment (Packed)
Temperature -20 to 40C (-4 to 104F)
Humidity 8 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Altitude 0.25 atmospheric pressure (equivalent to 10,300m; 34,000 feet)
Storage and Shipping Environment (Unpacked)
Temperature -20 to 40C (-4 to 104F)
Humidity 8 to 80% RH (non-condensing)
Acoustics:
All measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in
conformance with ISO 9296.
Printer Mode 1 Meter Average Sound Pressure Level,

dBA
Printing 49 or less dBA
Idle (Standby mode) 35 or less dBA
Measurements apply to 300 dpi, 600 dpi, and 1200IQ printing
Certifications:
The PML19B/Bn printers comply with the global safety standard for Information
Technology Equipment, i.e. IEC 60950 and its country equivalents in the markets we
serve. The following sections highlight some of the approvals and certifications that
the PML19B/Bn are expected to receive:
Safety:
The CB Certificate and Test Report will be used to obtain some of the
country safety approvals listed hereafter:
o IEC 60320 Appliance Couplers for Household and Similar General
Purposes
o IEC 60825-1, Safety of Laser Products
o Blue Angel RAL UZ-85 (Germany)
o GS Mark (Germany): by TUV Rhineland or other authorized agency
o CE Mark (EU) Class B
PML19B_Bn
Archival Tests:
Swedish Archival Test (SAT) certification

German PTS certification
Netherlands COT certification
Finland VTT
PML19B_Bn
Supplies:
AIO Toner Cartridge DT56BLK 6,000 @ 5%
Supplies Compatibility:
The PML19B/Bn toner cartridges are new and will not fit other printers.
NRG mainframes are designed to accept NRG-specific toner cartridges only.

The toner cartridges have an electronic lockout on them, which identifies the cartridge
type to the mainframe. Therefore, NRG cartridges will not work in a Lexmark
machine and Lexmark cartridges will not work in an NRG version machine.
Reliability Information:
Average Monthly Volume (AMV): ~2,000 pages
Machine Life (ML): TBA
MCBC: TBA
MCBF: TBA

(print/copy/fax) for target customers.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is the recommended Maximum Monthly

Volume for target customers.
Machine Life (ML) is total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes, or 5 years,

(Target Mean Copies Between service Calls (MCBC) remains unchanged).
Recommendation: It is recommended that machines be placed to handle MMV

and not Duty Cycle.
PML19B_Bn
WHAT FITS WHAT

PML19B P6319 P6319 P6319
PML19Bn P6319n P6319n P6319n
DT56BLK AIO Toner Cartridge 6,000 yield @ 5%
Peripherals:
TBA 250-sheet second drawer
DIF57 10.Base/100BaseTX NIB

DIF58 10BaseT/100BaseTX NIB
DIF59 10BaseT/100BaseTX 3 Port NIB
TBA 8MB RAM

TBA 16MB RAM
TBA 32MB RAM
TBA 64MB RAM
TBA 2MB Flash SIMM Optraforms

TBA 4MB Flash SIMM Optraforms
Language Kits:
DLS19BIN1 Language Kit: English / French / German / Dutch
DLS19BIN2 Language Kit: Italian / Spanish / Catalan / Portuguese
DLS19BIN3 Language Kit: Finnish / Swedish / Danish
DLS19BIN4 Language Kit: Hungarian / Czech / Slovakian / Polish / Russian
Note: Other options TBA
PML19B_Bn
WHATS IN THE BOX

PML19B: PML19Bn:
PML19B printer PML19Bn printer
Print Cartridge
Drivers and Utilities CD
Set-up Guide (hard copy)
Quick Ref Card
Errata Sheet TBC
Publications CD
Op Panel Overlay (languages other than English, country dependent)
Supplies Programme Flyer
Power Cable
Mainframe Carton Contents (to be confirmed):
Toner Cartridge:
o The mainframe comes with one complete 3K toner cartridge
Roadmap:
o 1-page hard copy document that explains the contents of the carton
(English, Dutch, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese)
Set-up Guide:
o 3-page hard copy document, which also has a pocket to hold the CD-
ROMs (English, Dutch, French, German, Italian and Spanish)
Quick Reference Instructions:
o 1-page hard copy document folded into three for pocket-sized
reference (English, Dutch, French, German, Italian and Spanish)
Branding Labels:
o For front panel x 3
Cardboard Placement Guide:
o Enables accurate placement of the label on the top right-hand corner of
the machines front panel
Logo Positioning Instructions:
o Explains how to use the cardboard placement guide and label
Control Panel Overlays:
o 6 overlays in a plastic bag, in the following languages: Italian, Dutch,
German, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Brazilian Portuguese
o Machines come with English silk-screened onto the control panel.
These labels cover the English words when adhered to the machine
PML19B_Bn
Publications CD:
On-line Users Guide: English, French, Italian, German, Spanish,

Brazilian Portuguese, Danish, Dutch, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish,
Russian, Polish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese
Set-up Guide: English, French, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese, Dutch,
German, Italian, Norwegian, Swedish, Finnish, Danish, Catalan,
Portuguese, Czech, Slovak, Hungarian, Greek, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Hebrew, Arabic, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese
Quick Reference Instructions: English, French, Italian, German,
Portuguese, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese, Danish, Dutch, Norwegian,
Swedish, Finnish, Russian, Polish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese
Drivers, MarkVision and Utilities CD:
Drivers: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Brazilian Portuguese,

Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese and Japanese
o Windows 95/98/Me PCL printer drivers
o Windows 95/98/Me PostScript Level 2 printer drivers
o Windows NT 4.0 PCL 6 printer drivers
o Windows NT 4.0 PostScript Level 2 printer drivers
o Windows 2000 PostScript Level 2 printer drivers
o Windows 3.1x1 Interwin Network Printer Utility
AIX colon files (release 4.x)
Apple Macintosh PostScript PDD files
Adobe/Aldus PageMaker PPD files
Apple Macintosh Screen Fonts
FontVision Utility and Screen Fonts (all screen fonts for use with this
printer are already installed in the Windows operating system)
Enhanced printer drivers for Sun, SuSE 6.3, 6.4, Red Hat 6.x, and
TurboLinux 6.0 Linux systems
MarkVision Professional (Windows 9x, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Red Hat Linux)
Soft copy documentation:
o Local Printer Install Guide
o Network Printer Install Guide
o Script Install Guide
o Driver Profiler Install Guide
o MarkVision Professional Installation and Configuration Guide
o Screen Font Installation Instructions
1
: Printer drivers for Windows 3.1x and OS/2 and Enhanced Printer Drivers for
Sun, UNIX and Linux systems are available from the Lexmark Web Site
PML19B_Bn
Packaging & Branding:
Mainframe Packaging:
The mainframe carton is unbranded except for a barcode label on the outer label,
which has NRG model name, NRGD EDP code, short name and Lexmarks EDP code
on it.
Three branding labels are included in the box, one for each of the three NRG brands.
Options Packaging:
All options have neutral packaging, with no branding.
Supplies Packaging:
The toner cartridge has neutral packaging with no branding. The 3k cartridge, which
is shipped with the PML19B/Bn, is planned to have a label that instructs the user to
replace the cartridge with the 6K after-market version.
Customer Responsibilities and Installation:
The PML19B/Bn laser printers and options are designed for customer set-up. The
documentation shipped with the machine contains all instructions needed for setting
up and using the printer. The printer installation utilities and drivers are also shipped
with the machine. The utilities can be used to install drivers and screen fonts or
download soft fonts if available for the printer and the program flash. The installation
of most printer options will be covered in the Users Guide. A power cable is
provided with the printer. A system attachment cable is NOT included.
Problem Determination:
The installation procedure outlined in the Set-up Guide includes a self-test power-up
for verification of proper set-up. Should an error occur during set-up, the
troubleshooting section contained in the printer documentation CD will assist the user
in identifying the appropriate corrective action.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PMR26 / N
Nashuatec P7026/n
Rex Rotary P7026/N
Gestetner P7026/n
First
Production Launch Production
Month Month Location
October, 2000 January, 2001 China

Version 2
November, 2001
PMR26 / PMR26N
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Target Markets 4
Product Overviews 6
Configuration 6
Range Plan 15
Market Situation 16
Sales Points 20
Logistics 22
Controller Specifications 26
Targeted Supplies Yields 28
Competitive Specifications 29
What Fits What 30

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\PMR26_N.doc 1
PMR26 / PMR26N
INTRODUCTION
The two new 26ppm printers are direct replacements for the current 21ppm (PMR21). The 16ppm
(PMR16) will continue to be available throughout 2001.
The new printers come in two configurations, which are:
1. PMR26N (A3 capable)
This model comes network ready, with the network card already installed.
2. PMR26 (A3 capable)
This model is identical to the one above but the network card is an option.
Both models will be available from December 2000.
The development of these two new models shows our commitment to the printer market and how
we value this business as part of our future strategy. These products form only one part of our
Complete Customer Ownership business development strategy but, without these types of product,
we will not be able to become true solutions providers.
The print market is continuing to grow, whereas the copy market is decreasing. Whilst the low
speed end of the market is dominated by names such as Hewlett Packard and Lexmark etc. the high
speed end of the market is still an open forum. It is also in the higher speed segments that better
secondary revenue can be achieved. This can be done through both supplies and service as, unlike
low speed printers, which require no maintenance, the higher speed segment printers, because of
their obvious technology enhancements to enable them to print and move paper at these speeds, will
require service support.
In addition to this, with the future high speed, low cost, mono-colour solutions planned for next
year, it is essential that a client base be established to ensure we are ready to make full use of our
competitive advantage.
The products continue to strengthen our network solutions products and are fully compatible with
all current network management tools, such as Aficio Manager 3.5 and PortNavi.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Product Outline
- 26 ppm (printing A4) A3-size laser printer

- Duplex option
- 1200 x 1200 dpi resolution
- PCL5, PCL6 and Adobe PostScript 3 as standard
- 10/100 Ethernet interface as standard on PMR26N (option on PMR26)
- Up to 1,350 pages paper capacity (with options)
- Shift tray for collating output (option)
- 4-bin mailbox (option)
Key Selling Points
- High speed printing for individuals and workgroups

- 1200 dpi quality
- Compact, front access design
- Duplex capability (option)
- Versatile paper storage
- Network ready (PMR26N)
- High standard specifications (PS3 and Ethernet)
PMR26 / PMR26N
Target Markets
The PMR26N is suitable for individual and workgroup printing requirements in the general office
environment. It can be used for single or multi- user use, either directly attached to a PC or via the
network. It is expected that the majority of installations will be made in a networked environment.
The PMR26N is an ideal major-account machine, as many printer tenders are for products in the 15-
32ppm range. The aggressive price positioning should enable it to compete on both specifications
and price.
As with the other Aficio printers, the real opportunity with the PMR26N is to combine it with our
print-capable MFP range and to offer customers a complete range of Aficio Printing Solutions. This
approach enables distributors to target customers according to their complete printing needs, rather
than just looking at their desktop printer requirements.
To date this has proved difficult to do, as sales people are often reluctant to offer a single- function
printer when they could be selling a print-capable MFP. During the second half of 2000, we are
focusing on encouraging distributors to invest in the infrastructure, training and incentive schemes
to make the successful transition to selling print solutions.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Mass-Production
Short Name Description Model First Production Expected First Expected

Number Month Arrival Launch
PMR26N 26ppm printer P7026N October 2000 December 2000 January 2001
PMR26 26ppm printer P7026 October 2000 December 2000 January 2001
Challenges
One year after launching the first Aficio mono printer, one of the biggest issues we face is to get the
direct salesforce to market network printers and overcome the brand loyalty and the "channel
loyalty" that printer buyers have to HP and the IT dealer channel. To overcome this requires
ongoing sales training and development of local consultative selling skills, to enable a multi-
technology sale plus investment in local support infrastructure.
Distributors can also plan their activities with the IT dealer channel and find ways to sell into this
channel while avoiding conflict with the direct sales force and those printer-capable office
equipment dealers who will sell these products.
All distributors need a comprehensive Strategic Marketing Plan for the printer business if they want
to succeed and become the next generation of office equipment suppliers.
Conclusions
The PMR26N is a great product in terms of both basic specifications and price/performance. It is
also an attractive machine for demanding individual users and small workgroups.
The copier and printer markets are converging very quickly. In Europe, copy volume continues to
reduce at a rate of 3-4% per year, while print volume increases at 10-15%. With the assumption that
the electronically- generated and distributed document will ultimately replace the hard-copy
document, it is essential that we capture a significant share of the printed document volume over the
next 2-3 years, to be prepared for the next technology shift to electronic document management.
The Aficio printer range combined with the print-capable MFP range, enables us to position our
brands as offering a complete print solution for all common business environments from single
users right through to centralised printing applications. This is the essential message to
communicate to the market in our transition from being a copier vendor to being a solutions
provider for their entire document needs.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Product Overview
The PMR26 and PMR26N are 26 ppm, 1200 x 1200 dpi network laser printers based on an engine
that is also being used for the new MFP range to be launched in 2001. The PMR26N has a standard
Ethernet NIB, while this is an option with the PMR26. A wide range of paper handling options is
available, including duplex, mailboxes and a shift tray.
Configuration
The standard configuration of the PMR26/N includes a 250-sheet paper drawer, a 100-sheet bypass
plus an Ethernet interface (for the PMR26N):
Standard Bypass Tray

(100 sheets)
Standard Paper Tray

(250 sheets)
Optional Paper Feed Unit

(500 sheets x 2)
As shown above, a maximum of two optional Paper Feed Units (500 sheets each, A3/DLT) can be
attached to the PMR26/N.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Other options include a Duplex Unit, an Envelope Feeder (which goes in the place of an optional
Paper Feed Unit, similarly to the PMR20), a 4-bin Mail Box and a 1-bin Shift Tray. These last two
options cannot be installed at the same time:
Optional 4-bin Mail Box
Optional 1-bin Shift Tray
Optional Duplex Unit
PMR26 / PMR26N
External Options
PMR26/N
4-bin Mail Box 1-bin Shift Tray
BypassTray: 100
Duplex Unit
Base Unit
Envelope
250 Feeder 250 A3/DLT size Printer
(26ppm)
500
500-sheet Paper Feed Unit
500 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit
Note: All the external options are unique to the PMR26/N and have no interchangeability with the
PMR21 or DMR15/18.
Internal Options
Interface Options
- 10Base-T/100Base-TX automatic switching (Option on the PMR26, Standard on the
PMR26N)
- IEEE1394 FireWire
* Customers can select one of the above interface options.
Memory Unit TypeB (64MB) : common with RC-210

- Additional memory DIMM
- Memory type: PC100 SDRAM
- Number of pins: 144 pins, Access time: Maximum 6 ns.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Hard Disk Drive

- More than 6 GB
- For Font download (PCL & PS), Form overlay, Electronic sorting, Proof print &
Secure print.
Option List
O: Can be installed, Std.: Standard, TBA: To Be Advised

No. OPTIONS Description For For Option
PMR26 PMR26N Interchangeability
1 Paper Feed Unit Paper Feed Unit for
(A3/DLT) max. A3 size / 500 O O Unique to PMR26/N
sheets
2 Envelope Feeder Optional tray for Unique to PMR26/N
envelopes O O
3 Network Interface Network interface
Board board O Std. Unique to PMR26/N
4 IEEE1394
Fire Wire O - Unique to PMR26/N
5 USB Cable TBA TBA Unique to PMR26/N
6 Hard Disk Drive 6 GB Hard Disk

Type Drive O O Unique to PMR26/N
7 Memory Unit 64MB additional
TypeB (64MB) memory DIMM O O
8 Duplex Unit O O Unique to PMR26/N
9 4-bin Mail Box O O Unique to PMR26/N
10 1-bin Shift Tray O O Unique to PMR26/N
* The Envelope Feeder requires the installation of the Paper Feed Unit.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Controller Overview
The PMR26/N has a new controller design with a 200MHz RM5231 processor with 16MB RAM as
standard and one optiona l RAM slot capable of taking a 64MB SDRAM DIMM to give a maximum
memory capacity of 80MB. The controller can be fitted with an optional 6GB hard disk, which
enables collation, proof printing, downloading fonts, secure printing and form overlay.
PCL5, PCL6, Adobe PostScript 3 and a new Ricoh PDL printer language are supported and drivers
are provided to print from Windows 3.1x (PCL only), Windows 95/98, Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, and Mac OS 7.5 or later (PostScript only).
There is a single parallel port, which is bi-directional and IEEE1284 compliant and a standard
Ethernet 10/100BaseT network interface (optional on the PMR26). Both machines have two
expansion interfaces, which can be used for the Hard Disk, Ethernet NIB (in the case of the
PMR26) and the IEEE1394 interface (Fire Wire).
PMR26 / PMR26N
Drivers Overview
Note: PMR27 images have been used as the PMR26/N images are not available.
The PMR26/N supports PCL5e, PCL6, PostScript 3 and a new Ricoh PDL. Details of the drivers
for PCL6, PostScript 3 and the new Ricoh PDL are as follows:
PCL 6 emulation
PCL 6 is the latest version of PCL family. The firmware of the PMR26/N printer controller supports
both PCL 5e and PCL XL commands. PCL XL commands are designed to match Window's GDI
(graphical device interface) commands closely. This gives users several performance and print-
quality benefits, which are especially noticeable for complex graphics:
1. Improved graphical performance

2. Refined document integrity through font synthesis
Resource: Software 2000

Supported OS: Windows 95/98
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Languages: 14 Languages supported
PMR26 / PMR26N
Adobe PostScript 3
A PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file is provided for the PMR26/N. This file defines the
specific features of the printer (such as paper handling options, paper size range, etc.) and the user
interface built into the driver.
Resource: Adobe (genuine)

Version: TBC
Supported OS: Windows 95/98,
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Macintosh system 7.5 or later
PMR26 / PMR26N
New Ricoh PDL
What is the new PDL ?
New PDL made by Ricoh (a successor of IPDL-C)

Common PDL for use in future B&W & Colour printers and MFPs
Optimum PDL for Windows client (dedicated for use under Windows)
Major Advantages
Faster throughput speed than HPs PCL XL

Comprehensible GUI
- Preset GUI provided in addition to conventional type GUI with many tabs
- Preset type (new)
Typical icons are provided as defaults, and also customers can create and
register additional icons to their own specifications, such as combinations of
2 in 1 with duplex mode. Customers can then print any type of job by
clicking a single icon.
- Tab type (conventional)
More convenient for customers who are used to a PCL driver.
The objectives of introducing a new PDL into the market
To differentiate from competitor models with a new and attractive PDL.

- PCL driver is also provided to maintain HP Compatib ility for users who are
accustomed to using PCL drivers.
Print setting flow when using the Preset Type User Interface
Example print job: 2 in 1 with duplex printing
STEP-1
To open print dialogue window, select Print
in File menu. Click properties button.
(This is the normal procedure in any printer
driver)
PMR26 / PMR26N
STEP-2
Select the pre-set icon for Duplex, 4 pages per
sheet in Pre -Settings area, and then click
OK to return to the print dialogue window.
Typical Preset Icons such as

2 in 1 and Duplex are
presented as defaults.
If you cannot find a preset
icon that matches the job you
want to use, new icons can be
created and registered through
the New Pre -Settings or
Change Pre -Settings buttons.
Once your icon is registered, it
will appear in the Pre-Settings
area.
STEP-3
Click OK in the print dialogue window and your job
will run.
Note: The User Interface, including the terminology used, is not the final version and may be
changed later.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Range Plan
Since December 1999, we have had a mono printer range, which covered from 14 to 45 pages per
minute. Now we have launched the 16 and 21ppm upgrades to the PMR14/20 family and, in
January 2001, we will replace the PMR21 with the 26ppm PMR26/N models and introduce the
replacement model for the PMR27, the DMR32. The PMR45 will also be upgraded in September
2001:
Aficio Mono Printer Range Plan

PP
45
45 45 Sept
40
35
32 32
30 Jan Dec
27 26 26
25
26 26
Jan Nov
20 20 21 X
May
15
14 16
10
Aug
2000 2001 Shows Launch 2002
PMR26 / PMR26N
Market Situation
European Market Trends
1999 2000 2001 2002

Segment K Units share K Units share K Units share K Units share
1 6ppm 500.8 13.9% 59.0 1.5% 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0.0%
7 12ppm 2,126.5 59.0% 2,756.3 71.3% 2,917.3 72.2% 2,947.3 71.1%
13 20ppm 862.7 23.9% 894.3 23.1% 927.9 23.0% 957.9 23.1%
21 30ppm 93.2 2.6% 121.5 3.1% 156.6 3.9% 194.4 4.7%
31 49ppm 19.7 0.5% 28.2 0.7% 35.9 0.9% 40.9 1.0%
50+ ppm 4.2 0.1% 4.7 0.1% 5.0 0.1% 5.3 0.1%
Total 3,607.1 100.0% 3,864.0 100.0% 4,042.7 100.0% 4,145.8 100.0%
(Source : InfoSource Spring 1999)
The 21-30ppm segment has grown strongly since 1998. Vendors have driven the product
availability in this range particularly with HP and Lexmark marketing 24ppm machines. The market
share situation in 1999 was as follows:
7% CANON
3%
21% 1% EPSON
HP
8% KYOCERA
9% 4% LEXMARK
2% MINOLTA
OKI
QMS
XEROX
45%
OTHERS
PMR26 / PMR26N
Target Customers & Channels

Target Customers
Using a direct sales approach and our increasing use of cross-selling sales concepts, the Aficio
printer range will most often be sold as part of a total package that includes MFPs and copiers. The
PMR26/N is at the low-mid end of the range between the PMR16 (16ppm) and the PMR32
(32ppm). It is suitable for very demanding individual users and small workgroup applications
requiring fast network printing.
Size of Office Network Environment

Sharing Group
Large
Centralized
(shared by (100+)
50-100 users)
Work Group (30-99)

(20-30)
Small Work
Group (5-29)
(3-10)
(1-4)
Business Personal Small Network 1 to 1 Standalone

(LAN) (Peer-to-Peer)
Network Environment
The PMR26/N is equipped with a multiple protocol NIB (option with PMR26), so it can be used in
the following networks:
- TCP/IP
- IPX/SPX
- NetBEUI
- EtherTalk
Outside of these environments, we expect that connectivity will be through the third partys external
print server. These will include Unix, AS/400 etc.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Sales Channels
The chart below is based on data from Cap Ventures. It shows the normal channel structure for all
page printers over 12ppm sold in Europe. Each box shows the percentage of units sold through that
channel member during 1997 (the situation has not changed significantly since these figures were
published):
% Unit Shipments 1997
4 21 71 4
Direct Dealer 69 Distrib 2 Retail
4 90 6
Mail Sales VAR Small Multiple PC/Elec General Off the

Order Force Dealer Dealers Stores Stores Page
0 4 30 23 37 4 1 1
Users
Cap Ventures made several comments on these figures as follows:
"Compared to 1996, in 1997, we saw a move away from direct sales and towards multiple
dealers as well as the retail channel. Note that the retail channel at 4% is on par with direct sales.
Direct sales are most likely to have lost out because of the high costs involved with keeping such a
force, as well as the competition from multiple dealers and VARs both offering Added Value to the
sale, particularly in providing network solutions. Multiple dealers have gained significantly in
percentage of shipments sold via the dealer channel firstly because they have strong buying power
which can compete with the retail channel as well as the distributor and secondly because they offer
a wider range of vendor products. Smaller dealers are more dependent on the vendor, and if they
cannot supply a full range of products, the smaller dealer's offering is incomplete.
"Why the retail channel and specifically the PC/Electrical stores channel should gain in importance
is a sign of the times - consumers and small businesses understand more about printers today
and so are more willing to forfeit the service and consultancy a dealer offers , in addition to the
obvious price advantage.
"Lastly, as a general rule, page printers are getting faster. If 6ppm was the entry level of the home
user in 1996, then it was 8ppm in 1997. This means the segment of the market (>12 ppm) is not
necessarily 100% SME (small and medium size enterprises) and corporate users."
PMR26 / PMR26N
In this market, it is the vendors who hold the power. HP has such a large market share that it
dictates the actions of the channel. Furthermore, the printer market is driven by pull marketing, with
advertising and sales promotion practices by companies like HP generating demand which is then
"pulled" through the channel.
Direct Sales Force Actions
Direct sales forces must be capable of selling printers and MFPs together, using a
consultancy-selling approach
- Requires significant training and a "MindShift" for most sales teams

- Requires the formulation of a standard consulting system
- Sales and marketing effort must target the key decision makers who are responsible for
print / document flow and document storage. These contacts are different from our
standard contacts and they understand the need for consultancy.
Focus must be on our major accounts to displace currently installed competitor printers and
replace them with a mix of our own printers and MFPs
Indirect Channel Actions
Current office equipment dealers
- Develop those dealers who are capable of selling networked products and encourage
them to add our printers to their range
IT dealer channel including VARs
- Recruit dealers from the IT channel through our unique offering:

- Increased hardware margins
- Secure after-sales supplies and service revenue
- Access to a full product range of MFPs
PMR26 / PMR26N
Sales Points
High Speed
Fast Printing Speed
The PMR26/Ns engine runs at 26ppm (A4/LT LEF) and achieves a first print speed of 6.5 sec./A4
or LT.
Short Operating Time (Front-Access Operation)
Once installed, a user operates everything from the front panel. This includes adding the paper,
checking the LCD, removing paper jams and replacing Toner Cartridges.
Network Ready
Printers in this market segment are likely to be used as shared printers among 3 to 10 people.
One of the top requirements for printers in this segment is that they are network ready.
Therefore, two versions of the PMR26 are available , one comes with a NIB as standard and, on the
other one, the NIB is optional.
Many Options
With a variety of paper handling options, the PMR26/N series enables users to complete their print
jobs efficient ly:
- 4-bin Mail Box

- 1-bin Shift Tray
- Paper Feed Units
- Duplex Unit
Standard PostScript 3
In addition to PCL6 emulation, the PMR26/N comes with genuine Adobe PostScript 3 as standard.
This means that users can expect better quality and faster performance than with PostScript Level 2.
For complex documents, PostScript Level 3 processes each component as a separate object to
optimize imaging throughput. This means that the PMR26/N can support the Mac environment as
well. In addition, PDF files can be printed faster than on PCL-only or PostScript Level 2 printers.
PMR26 / PMR26N
High Image Quality
Provides consistent quality output, with crisp images and text.
A) 1200 x 1200 dpi

Resolution is true 1200dpi, giving high quality output of all types of documents.
B) PCL6
PCL6 is a combination of PCL5e and XL commands. PCL XL provides improved printing for
complex graphics. It closely matches the Windows GDI environment, which is used by main
applications and gives the user a more faithful reproduction of the original.
C) Adobe PostScript 3 (Standard)

Better quality and more accurate WYSIWYG than other print languages.
Security
The PMR26/N has a Secure Print function, allowing confidential prints to be secured with a user
password. When using this function, documents will not be printed out automatically and the users
must input their valid ID number at the printer to release the print job.
Note: The optional HDD must be installed for this.
Network Utilities
Aficio Manager, consisting of Administration and Client version, Multidirect Print and PortNavi
will be provided on the Driver CD-ROM.
Multidirect Print
As IPP (Protocol Ver.1.1) is supported, users can print documents to the PMR26/N via the Internet
as well as through Peer-to-Peer printing.
PortNavi
Through this software several convenient functions such as Parallel Printing and Recovery Printing
will be available.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Logistics
Mainframe carton contents
- Starter toner cartridge with 6K yield (normal cartridge is 20K)

- Brand plaques x 3
- Other contents TBC
Maintenance Kit
- 1 x Fusing Unit (for the mainframe)

- 1 x Transfer Roller (for the Mainframe)
- 3 x Friction Pad (one for the mainframe and others for optional Paper Feed Unit)
- 3 x Paper Feed Roller (one for the mainframe and others for optional Paper Feed
Unit)
Network Interface Board CD-ROM Pack Contents
TBC
Language Kit Contents
TBC
CD-ROM Contents Printer Driver and Utilities
TBC
PMR26 / PMR26N
Packaging & Branding
Mainframe Packaging
The mainframe carton is unbranded. As there is only one model name for all three brands, there is
just one model name and one set of brand label placement marks on the carton. The carton is of a
new design that can be opened and resealed easily. This means the branding operation can be
done without damaging the carton.
Three branding labels are included in the box with the machine. These can be placed on the top left
corner of the front panel of the printer.
The details of the Aficio logo type (silk-screened or label) and position are to be confirmed, as are
the Energy Star and Adobe Certified label positioning.
Options Packaging
Supplies Packaging
The toner cartridges are unique. There are three branded versions.
Operating Instructions Language Kits
These have the Aficio logo and the model name on the front cover, but no brand is mentioned.
Unlike most of our other language kits, these have just one front page and no tear-off sections.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Configuration Desktop
Technology Laser beam scanning & electrophotographic printing
Dual component toner development
Resolution PCL 5e: 600 / 300 dpi
PCL XL: 1200 / 600dpi
PS 3: 1200 / 600 / 300dpi
Ricoh new PDL: 1200 / 600dpi
Continuous Print Speed 26ppm (A4/LT-LEF)
First Print Speed 6.5 sec. or less (A4/LT-LEF, Std. Tray)
* The time to feed a sheet of paper and print an image, excluding data processing time.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 468 x 410 x 305mm (18.4 x 16.1 x 12.0)
Weight 17kg or less (37.5lb or less)
Input Capacity Standard Tray: 250 sheets (80g/m2 , 20lb)
Standard Bypass Tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2 , 20lb),
10 envelopes
Optional Paper Feed Unit: 500 sheets x 2 (80g/m2 , 20lb)
Optional Envelope Feed Unit: 60 envelopes
Output Capacity 250 sheets
Duplex Printing Option
Input Paper Size Standard Tray: A3 / 11 x 17 A5 LEF
Optional Paper Tray: A3 / 11 x 17 A5 LEF
Bypass Tray: A3 / 11 x 17 A6
Bypass Tray, Custom Paper Size / PCL5e/XL, PS3, Ricoh new
PDL: 11.69 x 17 3.88 x 5.83 (297 x 431.8 98.4 x
148mm)
Bypass Tray & Envelope Com #10, C6, DL, Monarch
Feeder:
Paper Weight Paper Tray 60 105g/m2 (16 28lb)
(Standard/Optional):
Bypass Tray: 55 157g/m2 (14 42lb)
Rating Power Specifications US Version: 115V, 60Hz
EU Version: 220 240V, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption Max 850W or less
Printing TBA
Energy Saver 30W or less
Warm-up Time Less than 20 sec.
Safety Standard US Version: UL1950, cUL

EU Version: IEC950, EN60950
EMI US Version: FCC Class B
EU Version: EN55022 Class B
Environmental Standard US Version: Energy Star Tier 1 specifications
EU Version: BAM specifications
Sound Power Level Stand-by: Less than 40dB (A)
(ISO7779) Printing: Less than 66dB (A)
(full system)
PMR26 / PMR26N
Paper Handling Option Specifications

Paper Feed Unit
(Unique for PMR26/N series)
Paper Size: A3 / 11 x 17 A5 SEF
Paper Weight: 60 105g/m2 (16 28lb)
Paper Capacity: Max. 500 sheets
Dimensions (W x D x H): 468 x 500 x 130mm (18.4 x 19.7 x 5.1)
Weight: 7kg, 15.4lb
Envelope Feeder
Paper Size (Envelope): Com #10, C6, DL, Monarch
Envelope Capacity: 60
Weight: 7kg, 15.4lb
4-bin Mail Box

Paper Stack: 50 sheets / bin (80g/m2 )
Weight: 5.5kg, 12.1lb
1-bin Shift Tray

Paper Stack: 250 sheets / bin (80g/m2 )
Weight: 3.5kg, 7.7lb
Duplex Unit
Paper Size: 182 297mm (7.2 x 11.7 [width])
148 432mm (5.8 x 17.0 [length])
Weight: 5kg, 11.0lb
E1 Option Interchangeability TBC

E2 Option Interchangeability TBC
PMR26 / PMR26N
Controller Specifications
CPU RM5231-200
Printer Languages PCL5e, PCLXL, PostScript Level3 emulation, ImagePrint and Ricoh new
PDL
Fonts For PCL: 35 Intellifonts, 10 TrueType fonts, 1 bitmap font
For PS: 136 Type 1 fonts
Font Manager and 61 additional fonts for PCL to be loaded to PC
Memory Standard 32MB, up to 96MB (with optional DIMM)
HDD Optional 6.0GB
Drivers PCL5e & PCL 6 Mono Drivers: For Win 3.1x / 95 / 98, Win NT
4.0 / 2000
PS Level 3 PPD File: For Win 95 / 98, NT 4.0 / 2000
& MacOS 7.5 or later
Interface Standard: Bi-directional IEEE1284 compliant parallel x 1
Optional: IEEE1394
10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX (standard for PMR26N)
10 Base-T / 100 Base-TX (for PMR26)
(10 Base- T / 100 Base-TX automatic compatible)
Two open expansion interfaces for the following options:
One for HDD and the other for either IEEE1394 or
Network Interface Board
Network Protocol Network Interface Board supports the following protocols:
TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI and EtherTalk
Network Utility Aficio Manager management utility for Win 95 / 98 & Win NT 4.0 /
2000
The controller supports SNMP-MIBII & industry standard MIB
(RFC1759)
PortNavi
Operation Panel 16 characters x 2 line LCD + 4 LEDs + 8 Hard keys
Supported Language US Version: English
EU Version: Following 14 languages:
English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch,
Norwegian, Danish, Swedish, Polish, Portuguese,
Finnish, Hungarian and Czech
PMR26 / PMR26N
Controller Overview
TBC
Printer Languages
TBC
Resident Fonts
TBC
Network Interface Board Specifications
TBC
PMR26 / PMR26N
Consumable Items
Toner: AIO
Main frame automatically stops printing at 100 prints after toner end message
blinks
Maintenance Kit: To be replaced every 90K prints. Includes the following materials:
1. 1 x Fusing Unit (for the mainframe)
2. 1 x Transfer Roller (for the mainframe)
3. 3 x Friction Pad (one for the mainframe and others for
optional Paper Feed Unit)
4. 3 x Paper Feed Roller (one for the mainframe and others
for optional Paper Feed Unit)
* The above items are all unique to the PMR26/N
Monthly Print Volume Average: 4K, Max. (Range Target): 10K
Duty 100K / month
Estimated Unit Life 5 years or 600K prints, whichever comes first
PM 90K (by user)

* PM parts are provided as a Maintenance Kit
MTBF (EM Cycle) 200K
MTTR Average 30 Minutes (by service)
* Please note that the above figures are design targets and will be confirmed only through
laboratory tests.
* The actual yields and reliability may vary, depending on the customers operating and
maintenance conditions and servicing.
PMR26 / PMR26N
Competitive Specifications
Note: First Print Speed: The figures are application and system dependent
NRG Advantage HP HP
PMR26/N to LaserJet 4050 LaserJet 5000
PMR26/N
Input Paper TOTAL: 1,350 sheets TOTAL: 1,100 sheets TOTAL: 1,100 sheets
Capacity 250 sheets x 1 v 500 sheets x 1 250 sheets x 1
100 sheets 100 sheets 100 sheets
Envelope Feeder Standard & Optional - Standard & Optional Standard
Input Paper Size
(Standard Tray) 11 x 17/A3-A5 (SEF) v A4-A5 (LEF) 11 x 17/A3-A5
Input Paper Size (SEF)
(Optional Tray)
Print (Engine) 26ppm/A4, LT (LEF) v 17ppm/A4 (SEF) 17ppm/LT (LEF)
Speed
First Print Speed 6.5 seconds v 13 seconds 13 seconds
(A4)
Duplex Printing Optional - Optional Optional
Printing 1200 dpi - 1200 dpi 1200 dpi
Resolution
Memory
(Standard / Max. 16MB / 80MB - 8MB / 200MB 4MB / 100MB
with optional)
HDD Optional - Optional Optional
Interface 1 x Bi-centronics 1 x Bi-centronics 1 x Bi-centronics
(IEEE1284), 10 Base- T v (IEEE1284), (IEEE1284),
/ 100 Base-TX 1 x RS232C 1 x RS232C
Ethernet Interface Optional - Optional Optional
Printer Language HP PCL5e/XL, PS HP PCL5e, HP PCL6, HP PCL5e, HP PCL6,
level3 emulation, Ricoh v PS level2 emulation PS level2 emulation
new PDL
Utility Aficio Manager, - Web Jet Admin Web Jet Admin
PortNavi
Dimensions 468 x 410 x 305mm v 390 x 493 x 343mm 475 x 585 x 375mm
(W x D x H) 18.4 x 16.1 x 12.0 15.3 x 19.4 x 13.5 18.7 x 23.0 x 14.8
Weight Less than 17kg / 37.5lb - 16.4kg / 36.2lb 23kg / 50.8lb
Duty 100K / month v 65K / month 65K / month
Notes:
v = PMR26/N is superior to competitors models

- = Competitors models match PMR26/N specifications
PMR26 / PMR26N
What Fits What

PMR26 Nashuatec P7026
Rex Rotary P7026
Gestetner P7026
PMR26N Nashuatec P7026n
Rex Rotary P7026N
Gestetner P7026n
Peripherals: Versatility:
DPFU25 Paper Feed Unit Type 2600 500 sheet PMR26/N only
CS260 4-Bin Mailbox Type 2600 PMR26/N only
DIF2600SS 1-Bin Shift / Sort Tray Type 2600 PMR26/N only
AD410 Duplex Unit Type 2600 PMR26/N only
DEFU8 Envelope Feeder Type 2600 PMR26/N only
Connectivity Options:
DIF2600E Ethernet 10/100 Base-T NIB Type 2600 PMR26/N only

DIF2600FW IEEE1394 Firewire Board Type 2600 PMR26/N & Model J
DHD2600 6GB Hard Disk Drive Type 2600 PMR26/N only
DMEBP64 Printer Memory Expander Type B PMR26/N, Model J,
64MB DMR35/45X, PMR45X,
PMR32, RC-210
Note:
The memory option above is an SDRAM DIMM. It is a Ricoh product and will be available from
NRGI. However, this type of memory will also be available from third parties at a lower cost and
NRGI will not stock when they are available locally.
Supplies: Yield @ Versatility

5%
DT32BLK Toner Cartridge (xxxg) 20,000 PMR26/N only
DMK9 Maintenance Kit 90,000 PMR26/N only
PMR26 / PMR26N
Language Kits:
PLSxD (TBC) Language Kit - German PMR26/N

PLSxGB (TBC) Language Kit English PMR26/N
PLSxF (TBC) Language Kit French PMR26/N
PLSxI (TBC) Language Lit Italian PMR26/N
PLSxNL (TBC) Language Kit - Dutch PMR26/N
PLSxE (TBC) Language Kit Spanish PMR26/N
PLSxP (TBC) Language Kit Portuguese PMR26/N
PLSxDK (TBC) Language Kit - Danish PMR26/N
PLSxS (TBC) Language Kit Swedish PMR26/N
PLSxPL (TBC) Language Kit Polish PMR26/N
PLSxN (TBC) Language Kit Norwegian PMR26/N
PLSxSF (TBC) Language Kit Finnish PMR26/N
PLSxCZ (TBC) Language Kit Czechoslovakian PMR26/N
PLSxH (TBC) Language Kit Hungarian PMR26/N
Note: Could either be single language O/Is or two combined multi- language kits, like the
PMR16/21 - TBC
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PMR32
Nashuatec P7032
Rex Rotary P7032
Gestetner P7032
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
First Launch Production

Production Month Location
Month
November, 2000 January, 2001 China

Version 3
December, 2001
PMR32
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Configuration 3
Range Plan 9
Market 10
Sales Points 11
Logistics 15
Differences 17
Controller Specifications 21
Paper Handling Option Specifications 28
Paper Handling Overview 32
Targeted Supplies Yield 36
Competitive Specifications 38
What Fits What 39

K:/Company/Market/Nps/PMR32.doc 1
PMR32
INTRODUCTION
The PMR32 is an upgrade from the existing PMR27. The speed is increased by 5ppm to
32ppm. This takes the PMR32 into a new segment of 31-49ppm, which is contested by
Xerox and Hewlett Packard, both with a 37% share of the market.
Our printer product range will now be spread evenly from 16-45ppm with the launch of the
two new PMR26 models in November 2000. With the complete upgraded range, we can now
focus our sales on solutions, in the knowledge that we have products to meet the customers
business needs, whatever their requirements.
PMR32
Product Overview
The PMR32 is a 32 ppm, 600 x 600 dpi network laser printer that replaces the current 27 ppm
PMR27. The PMR32 shares the same engine as the 22 and 27 cpm DMR22/27. It has a
standard Ethernet NIC and a wide range of paper handling options, some of which are shared
with the DMR22/27 models.
Configuration
The standard configuration of the PMR32 includes 2 x 500-sheet paper drawers and an
Ethernet interface. It is shown below in its base configuration:
PMR32
The paper handling options available for the PMR32 are as follows:
1. 2 x 500-sheet paper bank (1 x 500-sheet bank for the PMR27 is not available
for the PMR32)
2. 2000-sheet Large Capacity Tray
3. Duplex unit (NEW version)
4. 4-Bin mailbox
5. Interchange unit for duplex and/or mailbox (mandatory with 3 or 4)
6. 1000-sheet finisher
7. 500-sheet finisher (PMR32 only)
8. Bridge unit for finisher (mandatory in conjunction with 6 or 7) (NEW
version)
9. Bypass tray
The line drawing below shows the PMR32 with the 2 x 500-sheet paper bank, duplex, bypass,
mailbox, interchange unit, bridge and 1000-sheet finisher options installed:
PMR32
External Options
Bridge Unit
4-bin Mail Box
500 Finisher
Interchange Unit
Duplex Unit
500
500
PMR32
Multi Bypass Tray
1000 Finisher
500
1000 1000
500
Paper Tray Paper Tray

OR
Cabinet
Notes:
1. Interchange Unit is required when Duplex Unit or 4-Bin Mailbox is attached.

2. Bridge Unit is required when a finisher is attached.
3. Optional memory is required when duplex option is added.
4. Optional 2 x 500-sheet paper bank, LCT or cabinet must be fitted if 1000-sheet finisher is
to be attached.
5. The 2nd and Bypass trays support a variety of paper media, such as thick paper,
transparencies and envelopes.
PMR32
Controller Overview
The PMR32 has a new controller design with a 250MHz RM5261 processor. It has 32MB
RAM as standard and one optional RAM slot capable of taking a 32, 64 or 128MB SDRAM
DIMM to give a maximum memory capacity of 160MB. The controller can be fitted with an
optional 2GB hard disk drive (same as the optional printer hard disk drive for DMR15/18 and
DMR22/27), which enables collation, proof printing, downloading PostScript fonts and
secure printing.
PCL5e, PCL6 and real Adobe PostScript 3 printer languages are supported and drivers are
provided to print from Windows 95/98, NT 4.0, 2000, and Mac OS 7.5 or later (PostScript
only).
There is a single parallel port, which is bi-directional and IEEE1284 compliant, and a
standard Ethernet 10/100BaseT network interface.
Internal Options
There are four internal options for the PMR32:
1. 32MB SDRAM memory DIMM

4. Hard Disk Drive
Details of these internal options are as follows:
Option Description
1 32MB memory DIMM Additional memory SDRAM DIMM.
2 64MB memory DIMM Additional memory SDRAM DIMM.
3 128MB memory DIMM Additional memory SDRAM DIMM
4 Hard Disk Drive 6GB divided into three partitions:
2GB for collation
2GB for sample/locked print
500MB for font download
PMR32
Drivers Overview
* Note: PMR27 images have been used as PMR32 images are not available.
The PMR32 supports PCL6 and PostScript 3. Details of the drivers for these two printer
languages are as follows:
PCL5e and PCL6 Emulation
PCL6 is the latest version of the PCL family. The firmware of the PMR32 printer controller
supports both PCL5e and PCL XL commands. PCL XL commands are designed to match
Window's GDI (graphical device interface) commands closely. This gives users several
performance and print-quality benefits, which are especially noticeable for complex graphics:
1. Improved graphical performance

2. Refined document integrity through font synthesis
Resource: Software 2000

Supported OS: Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
PMR32
Adobe PostScript 3
A PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file is provided for the PMR32. This file defines the
specific features of the printer (such as paper handling options, paper size range) and the user
interface built into the driver.
Resource: Adobe (genuine)

Version: TBC
Supported OS: Windows 95/98/Me,
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Macintosh system 7.5 or later
PMR32
Product Range Plan

By December 1999, we had a mono printer range, which stretched from 14 to 45 pages per
minute. Since then we have partially launched the 16 and 21 ppm upgrades to the PMR14/20
family, and at the end of this year, we replace the PMR21 with the 26 ppm PMR26/N models
and introduce the PMR32, which is an upgrade for the PMR27:
Aficio Mono Printer Range Plan

PP
45
45 45
40 Jan
35
32
30 Jan
27 26 26
25
26 26
Jan Apr
20 20 21 X
May
15
14 16 16
Aug Dec
10
2000 2001 Shows Launch Month 2002
PMR32
Market
European Market Trends
1999 2000 2001 2002

Segment K unit Share K unit Share K unit Share K unit Share
1-6 ppm 500.8 13.9% 59.0 1.5% 0.0 0.0% 0.0 0.0%
7-12 ppm 2,126.5 59.0% 2,756.3 71.5% 2,917.3 72.1% 2,947.3 71.1%
13-20 ppm 862.7 23.9% 894.3 23.1% 927.9 23.0% 957.9 23.1%
21-30 ppm 93.2 2.6% 121.5 3.1% 156.6 3.9% 194.4 4.7%
31-49 ppm 19.7 0.5% 28.2 0.7% 35.9 0.9% 40.9 1.0%
50+ ppm 4.2 0.1% 4.7 0.1% 5.0 0.1% 5.3 0.1%
Total 3,607.1 100.0% 3,864.0 100.0% 4,042.7 100.0% 4,145.8 100.0%
(Source : InfoSource Spring 1999)
The 31-49 ppm segment was developed in 1998, with the introduction of 32 ppm HP LJ8100
series. This model had a relatively lower duty cycle, but a much lower price position, when
compared to the traditional mid-range dedicated printers. This segment is expected to grow
strongly in the next 2 to 3 years even though it accounts for a low portion of the overall page
printer market.
Category 4 (31-49) Market Share
37%
CANON
11% HP
KYOCERA
2%
9% LEXMARK
XEROX
3%
OTHERS
37%
PMR32
Sales Points
The PMR32 is designed as a fast, mid-volume workgroup network printer. With an engine
speed of 32 ppm in simplex mode (duplex: 25 ppm) it is the ideal solution for multi- user,
printer-sharing environments.
With its versatile paper handling options such as the duplex unit, finishers, 4-bin mailbox and
LCT, the PMR32 makes document production easier and faster than traditional office
printers. In addition to its high productivity, the PMR32s high image quality, reliability and
ease of use satisfy the customers expectations for accessible quality printing.
Key Sales Points
High Speed
Versatile Paper
Handling
NIB Standard
Adobe PS3 Standard
Network Utility
Easy Paper Jam

Recovery
Security
High Speed
The PMR32 has a 32 ppm engine speed. This is faster than the HP LaserJet 8000 (24ppm),
and the same speed as the LaserJet 8100 (32ppm). Compared to the PMR27, the PMR32 has
a faster 200MHz processor (PMR27 is 166MHz) and a 64 bit controller ASIC (the PMR27 is
32 bit).
PMR32
The PMR32 also has a fast, first print speed of less than 5 seconds, due to its short paper
path:
Versatile Paper Handling
One of the PMR32s major features is its modular paper handling options, which enable
tailor- made configuration:
A) Duplex Printing*
With the Duplex Unit option installed, double-sided printing is available. The duplex speed is
25 ppm (A4), which is close to the simplex (engine) speed.
*Optional memory is required when printing duplex.
This feature can save paper, especially in heavy print volume environments.
B) Multiple Original Printing

With either of the optional finishers installed and the HDD installed, even more efficienc y is
gained. Multiple page documents can be printed and stapled in multiple sets directly from the
clients PC. By using the Proof Print feature, users can check one copy of the document
before committing to print the remaining sets.
Multiple original printing can save considerable time for users compared to printing one set
and then copying it on a copier.
C) Support for a Wide Variety of Media

The standard tray (2nd tray only) supports a variety of media such as thick paper*,
transparenc ies and some envelopes.
* 60-157g/m2
D) Large Paper Capacity

With the optional LCT and bypass tray, total paper capacity is boosted to a massive 3,100
sheets. This feature saves users from having to reload paper continuously when print
volumes are high.
PMR32
E) Individual Mailboxes
With the optional 4-bin mailbox, output can be collated for 4 groups, departments or
individual users. This feature is especially useful in shared environments.
This feature improves security and eliminates the need to search through documents printed
by other people in a shared environment.
Standard Network Interface Board (NIB)
The PMR32 comes network-ready from the box with its standard Ethernet NIB.
The following protocols are supported as standard:
- TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk
Standard PostScript 3
In addition to PCL6 emulation, the PMR32 comes with genuine Adobe PostScript 3 as
standard.
Users can expect better quality and faster performance than PostScript Level 2. For complex
documents, PostScript Level 3 processes each component as a separate object to optimize
imaging throughput. This means that the PMR32 can support the Mac environment as well.
Also, PDF files can be printed faster than on PCL-only or PostScript Level 2 printers.
High Image Quality
Provides consistent quality output with crisp images and text.
A) 600 dpi plus Edge Enhancement:

Resolution is true 600dpi. Smoothing technology provides better print quality for slanted
and curved lines.
B) PCL6
PCL6 is a combination of PCL5e and XL commands. PCL XL provides improved printing
for complex graphics. It closely matches the Windows GDI, which is used by main
applications and gives the user a more faithful reproduction of the original.
C) Adobe PostScript 3 (Standard)

Better quality and more accurate WYSIWYG than other print languages.
PMR32
Easy Paper Jam Recovery
The PMR32 is designed to help users remove jammed paper easily. When you open the right
side cover, you can reach the jammed paper easily without any risk of touching the fusing
unit. The short paper path makes removing jammed paper easy.
Jammed Paper
Security
The PMR32 has a Secure Print function, so confidential prints can be secured with a user
password. Using this function, documents will not be printed out automatically, and the user
must input their valid ID number at the printer to release the print job.
Network Utilities
Aficio Manager, consisting of Administration and Client version, Multidirect Print and
PortNavi will be provided on the Driver CD-Rom.
Multidirect Print
As IPP (Protocol Ver.1.1) is supported, users can print documents to the PMR45x via the
Internet as well as through Peer-to-Peer printing.
PortNavi
Through this software several convenient functions such as Parallel Printing and Recovery
Printing will be available.
PMR32
Logistics
Mainframe carton contents
- PCU is included in the box, so only toner cartridge is required at installation

- Brand plaques x 3
- Power cable (C Type 2-pin European cable, attached to the mainframe)
- Network interface board CD-ROM pack
- Operation Decal
- Caution Decal
- Energy Star and Adobe Certified stickers are on the front panel
- Network ferrite core
Network Interface Board CD-ROM Pack Contents
CD ROM Contents Printer Driver and Utilities
CD ROM contains drivers and utilities for the following environments:
Environment: Contents: Language: Remarks:

Windows PCL5e Driver 14 Language Windows 95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000
PCL6 Driver 14 Language Windows 95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000
PS3 Printer Driver 9 Language Windows 95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000
Agfa Font Manager English Only Windows 95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000
Printer Manager *1 Admin 14 Language Windows 95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000
Printer Manager *2 Client 14 Language Windows 95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000
Port Navi 14 Language Windows 95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000
Multidirect Print 14 Language
Adobe Acrobat Reader 8 Language *1
README.TXT English Only
Macintosh Adobe PS3 Printer Driver 9 Language Mac OS System 7.1 or later
Adobe Acrobat Reader 8 Language *1
Win / Mac NIB Reference 14 Language PDF File
PS Supplement 9 Language PDF File
Printer Reference 14 Language PDF File
Setup Guide 14 Language PDF File
Unix Manual 14 Language PDF File
Web Status Monitor 6 Language *2 Help File
CD ROM also contains SmartNe tMonitor for Administrator or Client

*1 Supporting 8 languages of Adobe Acrobat Reader are as follows: English, German, French,
Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Dutch and Portuguese.
*2 Supporting 6 languages of Web Status Monitor Help are as follows: English, German, French,
Italian, Spanish and Dutch.
PMR32
Language Kit Contents
There are 14 language versions of this kit containing:

- 1 x Hardcopy Operating Instruction manual
- 1 x Quick Installation Guide
- Printer Driver and Utilities CDROM
Note: TBC Could be fewer, multiple-language sets
Packaging & Branding
Mainframe Packaging
The mainframe carton is unbranded. As there is only one model name for all three brands,
there is just one model name and one set of brand label placement marks on the carton.
Three branding labels are included in the box with the machine. These labels are plaques that
can be placed in an indent on the top left corner of the front panel of the printer, in exactly the
same way as the PMR27.
The Aficio logo is silk-screened on the top right corner of the front panel and there are also
Energy Star and Adobe Certified stickers on the front panel.
Options Packaging
Supplies Packaging
The toner cartridges are shared with the DMR22/27 and PMR27. There are three branded
versions. The PCU is a new version, which also works with DMR22/27 and PMR27. It is
unbranded.
Operating Instructions Language Kits
These have the Aficio logo and the model name on the front cover, but no brand is
mentioned. Unlike most of our other language kits, these have just one front page and no tear-
off sections.
PMR32
Differences
PCU
There is a new PCU, DMU17, introduced with the PMR32. It also works with the
DMR22/27 and PMR27 and replaces the current DMU11.
PS400 Paper Bank (500 x 1) Not available for the PMR32
PS400 is currently used with the PMR27 and DMR18. It does not work with the PMR32.
PS440 Paper Bank (500 x 2) & PS420 LCT
These options support two print speed modes and one of them is occup ied with the
DMR22/27 and PMR27 (27 ppm). As the other mode can be used for the PMR32 (32 ppm),
there will be a modification applied to these items. This modification consists of changing a
motor and will be made from June production. Production from June onwards can be
identified by the serial number and by a label on the carton.
DMR22/27 & PMR27 Any PS440 or PS420 can be used (no matter when it's
produced).
PMR32 Only PS440s and PS420s made from June 2000 production
onwards can be used.
As the mass production of the PMR32 is scheduled to start at the end of November (shipment
in January 2001), we predict the inventories of current P440 and P420 (until May production)
will be cleared by the time the PMR32 launches.
CS370 4-bin Mailbox

This option supports two print speed modes as well, and one of them is occupied with the
PMR27 (27 ppm). The other mode can be used for the PMR32 (32 ppm). There will be a
modification for this item (changing a ROM) made from June production. Production from
June onwards can be identified by the serial number and by a label on the carton.
PMR27 Any CS370 can be used (no matter when it's produced).
PMR32 Only CS370s from June 2000 production onwards can be used.
AD380 Duplex Unit

The AD370 supports only one print speed mode and this is occupied by the PMR27 (27
ppm). If the AD370 were modified to support the PMR32 (32 ppm), there would be technical
problems when attaching to the PMR27 (27 ppm). Therefore, a new version, AD380 will be
produced for the PMR32 from November 2000 production.
PMR32
The DIF280BU only supports one print speed mode and this is occupied by the DMR22/27
and PMR27 (27 ppm). If the DIF280BU were modified to support the PMR32 (32 ppm),
there would be technical problems when attaching to the PMR27 (27 ppm). Therefore, a new
version, called DIF320BU will be produced for the PMR32 from October 2000 production
onwards . This new Bridge Unit is applicable for both 1000 sheet and 500 sheet Finishers.
Please note that you must continue to order the current one for the DMR22/27 even after the
launch of the PMR32.
Memory (SD-RAM 32MB, 64MB & 128MB)
To correspond to the change in clock frequency, new memory will be launched for the
PMR32.
Multi-bypass Tray, Interchange Unit, 1000 sheet Finisher & HDD
There are no modifications or changes to these items.
SR510 500-sheet Finisher
This is a brand new option that, initially, will only work with the PMR32.
PMR32
Engine Specifications
Configuration Desk Top
Technology Laser beam scanning & Electro-photographic printing

Dual-component toner development
Resolution 400/600 dpi
Throughput 32 ppm (A4/LT-LEF)
First Print Speed 5 sec. or less (A4/LT - LEF, 1st Tray)

*The time from start of 1 st tray paper feeding to finishing
print out at Standard Tray. (Not including the time of
Polygon Motor start - up)
Dimensions 550 x 548 x 516mm (Standard Configuration)
Weight 40Kg or less
Input Capacity 500 sheets x 2

Optional (Paper Trays) : 500 sheets x 2
(LCT) : 1000 sheets x 2 (A4/LT-LEF)
(Multi Bypass) : 100 sheets
Output Capacity 500 sheets

Optional (4-bin Mailbox) : 120 sheets x 4
(Finisher) : 1000 sheets, 500 sheets
Paper Size Paper Tray (2nd) : A3 A6 (SEF)

11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5
Paper Tray (1st /option) : A3 A5
11 x 17 8.5 x 11
Bypass Tray : A3 A6
11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5
*Feeding way is only SEF.
LCT : A4 (LEF) / LT (LEF)
PMR32
Paper Weight Paper Tray (2nd) : 60 157 g/m2 (16 42 lbs)

Paper Tray (1st /option) : 60 105 g/m2 (16 28 lbs)
Bypass Tray : 60 157 g/m2 (16 42 lbs)
LCT : 60 105 g/m2 (16 28 lbs)
Duplex printing 25 ppm (with optional duplex unit, A4/LT LEF )

A3 A5 (SEF)/11 x 17 8.5 x 11
Feeding Paper Size Max. 297 x 432mm (11.7 x 17)
Printable Area Max. 297 x 432 mm
Rating Power Specifications US version : 100-120V/60Hz

EU version : 220-240V/50-60Hz
Power Consumption Maximum. Less than 1000w (full configuration)

Less than 145w (weighted average)
Less than 40w (energy saver mode)
Warm-up Time Less than 45 sec. (20C)
Safety Standard US version : UL1950, CSA : cUL

EU version : IEC950, EN60950
EMI US version : FCC Class B, IC Class B

EU version : EN550022 Class B
Environmental Standard US version : Energy Star
Sound Power Level Stand-by : 40db or less

(ISO7779) Operating : 40db or less
Printing : 65db or less
Printing : 71db or less (with full options)
Energy Saver : 40db or less
* Measured by Ricoh Standard methodology
PMR32
CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
CPU RM5261 (250MHz)
ASIC SR64 (64 bit / 83.3MHz)
Printer Language PCL6/PCL5e Emulation, Adobe PS3 (Genuine)
Fonts PCL : 10 TrueType fonts

: 35 Intellifonts
: 1 Bitmap font
PS : 136 fonts (Type 2 : 24, Type 14 : 112)
RAM Resident : 32MB SDRAM

Option : 1 slot
Max. : 160MB
ROM Flash : 8MB (Coding)

Mask : 4MB (PCL/PS Fonts)
HDD Option* (6.0GB)
Driver Windows 95/98, NT4.0, 2000, Mac OS 7.5 or later
Interface Bi-directional (IEEE1284), Ethernet (100baseTX)
NIB Standard (C4000)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI and AppleTalk
Supported Network Novell NetWare 3.11 or later, 4.1 or later, 5.0,5.1*1

Windows NT4.0*2,*3, 2000 *4
Unix Solaris2.5.1, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8 / HP-UX 8.x, 9.x, 10.x, 11.0
Red Hat Linux 6.2
Utility Print Manager (Admin. Client),

Multidirect Print (MDP3)
PortNavi
* With optional HDD, the following features are available.

Collation, Font Download, Sample Print and Locked Print
*1:NDPS is not supported.

*2:PCL 6 and 5e supports NT4.0 Terminal Server Edition (Service Pack 6 for TSE is
required.)
*3:PS3 requires Service Pack 6 or later for NT4.0 server or Workstation.
*4.:Windows 2000 Professional and Server (including Terminal Service) are supported.
PMR32
Controller Overview
Printer Languages
The PMR32s controller has the following languages as standard. The details are in the table
below.
Language Resource Specifications

PJL Xionics Basic format: Compatible with HP LJ 5Si.
Expansion specifications: Compatible with NM34.
PCL 5e Xionics LJ 4+ compatible
PCL XL Xionics LJ 6P compatible, Protocol level 1.1
PostScript Adobe Level 3, 3010.106
Resident Fonts
The PMR32 has 46 PCL fonts and 136 PS fonts as standard. The details are as follows.
PCL : 46 fonts (TrueType: 10 fonts, Intellifont: 35 fonts, Bitmap Font: 1 Font )

PS : 136 fonts (Type 2: 24 fonts, Type 14: 112 fonts)
Euro Currency glyph
The Euro Currency glyph is ava ilable on both PCL and PS fonts
PCL
Supports all fonts except Windings, Symbol, Line Printer, Stick font and Arc font.
Symbol set PCL 5e : 19U, 9E, 5T (Win31 Latin 1, 2, 5) 0x80
PCL XL : 19U, 9E, 5T, 19L (Win31 Latin1, 2, 5, Win Baltic) 0x80
PS
Compatibility : Adobe PS3 3010
Code : 0xa0
Supporting Encoding : Standard Encoding and ISOLatin1 Encoding
HDD Specifications
The following 3 functions are available with optional HDD. This HDD has 6GB capacity
and it is divided into 3 areas for each function.
Collation : 2GB
Sample Print/Protected Print : 2GB
Font Download : 500MB
Form printing is also available when HDD is attached.
PMR32
1) Collation
There are 2 methods of collation available, normal and rotate collation. The conditions are
as follows.
Normal Collation
Max. Storing pages : 1500 pages
Max. Storing capacity : 2GB (out of 6GB)
* Collation is disabled when bypass tray is chosen.
Rotate collation only

Available paper size : A4, B5, 8.5 x 11
Available size and type of both long edge and short edge paper should be in paper
tray.
Under certain circumstances, rotate collation is cancelled and normal collation is re-activated:
1. When memory becomes full

2. When paper sizes other than the ones above are selected
3. If paper size changes during job
4. When Stapling is selected
5. When collating with RAM
2) Sample Print
When printing documents with this function, just 1st set of documents will be printed out
automatically. If this 1st set appears correctly, remaining sets can be printed simply by
pressing the button on the printer so users do not have to go back to own client PC to
continue printing.
This function is only applicable when optional HDD is attached.
Max. Storing pages : 2000 pages

Max. Job storing : 30 jobs
Max. Overflow job record : 20 jobs
Max. Storing capacity (HDD) : 2GBMB (out of 6GB)*
* These figures are total sum for both sample print and protected print.
3) Locked Print
This function is ideal for printing confidential documents in a shared environment.,
particularly when the printer has many users. When function is used, documents will not
be printed out unless users enter valid password, which was entered in the Printer Driver
when sending print jobs, at printer controller panel. This function is only applicable when
optional HDD is attached. This was formerly known as Secure Print which has since
discovered to be already trademarked- please make sure Secure Print is not used in any
external documentation.
Max. Storing pages : 2000 pages*

Max. Job storing : 30 jobs*
Max. Overflow job record : 20 jobs
Max. Storing capacity (HDD) : 2GBMB (out of 6GB)*
*These figures are total sum for both sample print and locked print.
PMR32
4) Sequential Stack
This function enables the optional mailbox to continue printing by changing output tray
automatically once output tray gets full. To enable this function, Sequential Stack mode has
to be selected from the operation panel.
Other conditions and remarks are as follows.
1) Tray will be changed automatically by full stack detection on each tray.

2) When the last Mailbox Tray becomes full, a warning message Remove Paper All
Tray appears
3) When all papers are removed from all trays (cancelled full stack detection),
printing will restart from Finisher Tray if it is attached or otherwise is will restart from
the standard tray.
4) When Collation is selected, shift sort will be enabled on the Finisher Tray,
but rotate collation will be disabled on the Mailbox Trays. (Case 1)
5) When Collation is selected, rotate collation will be enabled. (Case 2)
6) When Staple is selected, it will be enabled on the Finisher Tray.
7) When Sequential Stack is selected during continuous multiple print jobs, the tray will
not be changed between 2 different jobs but will continue on same output tray unless
stack gets full. When any of the trays are out of order, that particular tray will be
skipped.
5) Font Download
Some PCL fonts can be downloaded to HDD, and they can be used in addition to the
resident font. The partition of HDD for this function is 500MB out of a total HDD size of
6GB.
PMR32
The following table shows fonts that are available to download to the HDD.
Language Font format Remarks

PCL5e PCL encapsulated Bitmap Download by PJL
PCL encapsulated Outline
PCL encapsulated TrueType
PostScript Type1 Adobe Roman Font Download by PS
Type2 CFF: Compact Font Format
Operator
Type3 User Defined Font
Type9
Type10
Type11
Type14 Chameleon Font
Type32 Bitmap Font
Type42 TrueType Font
There are no utilities for downloading PS fonts to the printer HDD under Windows
environment. Some PS fonts can be downloaded by using the Printer Utility for Mac.
Memory (RAM) Specifications
The following table shows the details of memory (RAM) specifications.
RAM Total PCL/COS PS Function

Component Capacity Portion Portion Compression Duplex RAM Collation
Resident 32768KB 3072KB/ 3072KB Compression No No

(32MB) 22938KB
+32M 65536KB 8192KB/ 6144KB Simplex: Yes A4:30 pages

47514KB Non 12288KB
Complession
Duplex:
Compression
+64M 98304KB 10240KB/ 12288KB Non Yes A4:50 pages

72090KB Copmression 20480KB
+128M 163840KB 12288KB/ 12288KB Non Yes A4:100 pages

135578KB Compression 40960KB
For collation with optional RAM, the above figure is based on A4/600dpi with 5000
characters.
Installation of optional HDD is recommended for frequent users of the collation function.
PMR32
Operation Panel
On Line Job Reset Escape
Form Feed Menu Enter#
Power Error Data In
LCD: 16 characters x 2 lines
LCD Color Mode Details

Power Green On Power On
Off Power Off, Standby Mode, Energy Saver Mode
Online Green On Online
Off Offline
Data in Green Blinking Processing, Printing
On Job does not end, waiting for next command and
printing is not in progress
Error occurs and stops printing
Off Job ends and finishing paper exit
Alarm Red On Error causing printing to stop occurs *
Off Not in error mode
* Following status is acknowledged as an error.

1. Paper ends while jobs are in progress
2. Duplex unit is not attached when duplex printing is selected.
3. Output tray is full.
4. Cover opens.
5. Paper miss-feed occurs.
6. Toner ends.
7. SC is required.
PMR32
Network Interface Board Specifications

LAN Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Frame Type Ethernet II, IEEE802.2, IEEE802.3, SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP : Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, 2000

: NetWare 5
IPX/SPX : NetWare 3.12, 3.2, 4.1, 4.11, 4.2, 5,
: IntranetWare
NetBEUI : Windows 95, 98, NT 4.0, 2000
AppleTalk : Mac OS 7.1 or later
IPP : Windows 95, 98, NT4.0, 2000*
* Multidirect Print is required on all
environments except for Windows 2000.
SNMP MIB-II, PrinterMIB,

HostResourceMIB, RicohPrivateMIB
PMR32
Paper Handling Option Specifications

2x 500 Paper Bank (PS440)
Paper Size: A5 (SEF) A3, 11 x 17 8.5 x 11

Paper Weight: 60 105 g/m2 (16 28 lbs.)
Paper Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Power Consumption: Max: 45W
Dimensions: 660 x 675 x 275 mm, 26.0 x 26.6 x 10.8
Weight: 22.8 Kg, 50.7 lbs.
LCT (PS420)
Paper Size: A4 (LEF), 11 x 8.5

Paper Capacity: 2000 sheets
Interchange Unit (DIF280IU)
Paper Size: A3 A5 (SEF), 11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5

Power Consumption: No power consumption
Weight: 2 Kg, 4.4 lbs.
4-Bin Mailbox (CS370)
Paper Size: A3 A5 (LEF), 11 x 17 8.5 x 11

Stack Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m2 ) / each bin
Weight: 7 Kg, 15.6 lbs.
Duplex Unit (AD380)

Printing Speed: 25 ppm (A4 LEF, 11 x 8.5)
Weight: 6.3 Kg, 14 lbs.
PMR32
Bypass Tray (BT270)

(Custom size: 90 148 mm x 148 432 mm)
Power Consumption: No Power Consumption
Bridge Unit (DIF320IU)
Paper Size: A3 A5 (SEF), 11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5 (Finisher Tray)

A3 A6 (SEF), 11 x 17 8.5 x 5.5 (On Bridge Unit)
Paper Weight: 60 105 g/m2 (16 28 lbs.) (Finisher Tray)
60 157 g/m2 (16 42 lbs.) (On Bridge Unit)
Output Capacity: 250 sheets (Smaller than A4, 8.5 x 11: 80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
(On Bridge Unit) 125 sheets (Larger than B4, 8.5 x 14: 80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
Power Consumption: Powered by Finisher
Weight: 4.5 Kg, 10 lbs.
1000 Sheet Finisher (SR720)

Paper Weight: 52 157 g/m2 (14 42 lbs.)*
(A4 LEF, 8.5 x 11 LEF or smaller: 80 g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
500 sheets
(A3, A4 SEF, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11 SEF)
Staple Capacity: 30 sheets (A4, 8.5 x 11 or smaller: 80g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
Staple Paper Size: A3 B5, 11 x 17 8.5 x 11
Staple Position: 1 position (upper left)
Shift Tray (Doggy Tail): Standard
Dimension: 568 x 520 x 625 mm (22.4 x 20.5 x 24.6)
Weight: 21 Kg (46.7 lbs.)
* When SR720 is used as the PMR32s finisher, it can only handle paper of between.
60 and 105 g/m2 .
PMR32
500 Sheet Finisher (SR510)
Paper Size: A3 B5 (LEF), 11 x 17 8.5 x 11

Staple Capacity: 30 sheets (A4, B5 LEF, 8.5 x 11: 80g/m2 , 20lbs.)
20 sheets (A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14: 80g/m2 , 20 lbs.)
Staple Paper Size: A3 B5 (LEF), 11 x 17 8.5 x 11
Shift Tray: Standard
Dimension: 350 x 490 x 230 mm (13.8 x 19.3 x 9.1)
Weight: 8.3 Kg (18.4 lbs.)
Main Unit and Optional Paper Bank

Standard paper sizes described on the dial are automatically detected.
The 2nd paper tray of main unit (bank) is designated for multi purpose; special papers such
as envelopes or transparency can be used here simply by switching to Special Paper mode.
Please note Custom size paper is not supported.
Bypass Tray
Both Standard size and Custom size papers can be supported by selecting the desired size
(either in metric or imperial) on the operation panel. If one is printing Custom size with PS
and PCL XL, a size registered in the driver is automatically applied.
Paper Type
The following type of paper can be set up for each paper tray from the operation panel.
1. Plain Paper
2. Recycled Paper
3. Special Paper
Paper Tray Select:
Default Tray
Default tray, paper size and type can all be registered on the operation panel. Default tray
does not mean the first sequential search tray when Auto Tray Select is selected.
Tray Lock
This function is available to make a designated paper tray. Only one tray can be have this
function at any one time. Please note that this feature cannot be used on the Bypass tray.
Once a tray has been selected as Tray Lock, Auto Tray Select and Auto Tray Change are
no longer available.
PMR32
Auto Tray Select

When the printer controller receives the command Auto Tray Select, the printer searches
for a tray that contains the specified size and type of paper. The searching order is as follows:
Start Point Tray 1

Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
If there are no trays that contain the specified size and type of paper, a warning message
Load x size paper appears on the printer operation panel. Please note that Auto Tray
Select will not search a Locked Tray, the Bypass Tray or a Tray in special paper mode.
Auto Tray change

Once the current paper supply tray runs out of paper during a print job, the printer searches
automatically for another tray that contains the same size, same orientation and same media
type of paper. If printer has the correct paper, the printer continues printing from the other
tray. Otherwise, the Load Tray x with x size paper warning message appears on the
printer operation panel. Like Auto Tray Select, Locked Tray, Bypass Tray and any tray in
specia l paper mode are not selected.
PMR32
Paper Handling Overview
Default Output Tray

Default output tray can be registered from operation panel. If the output tray is not
designated on the printer driver, then the output paper is fed to the default. Papers that do
not match default tray in size are fed to standard tray. When errors occur, the Output tray is
always referred to as Standard Tray.
Finishing Capability (Output Tray)
It is possible to add finishing functions from the following trays direct from the printer driver.
1. Standard Tray: Collation, Rotate Collation

2. 4-Bin Mailbox: Collation, Rotate Collation
3. Finisher: Collation, Stapling
Note
1. When the Finisher is attached, Bridge Unit is called the standard tray.
2. When Bypass Tray is selected, collation is disabled and Finisher cannot be selected.
Stapling
Stapling functions are available with the following 2 types of the optional Finisher, SR720
and SR510. The conditions, in detail, are described as follows:
SR720: 1000 sheet Finisher

Max. Stapling Pages A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 : 20 sheets
A4, 8.5 x 11, B5 : 30 sheets
Stapling positions vary according to paper size and orientation. The charts below show how
this varies with the PCL driver.
Case 1: Portrait & Short Edge Feed

Pattern
ABC ABC
U
Paper Size in Tray Upper Left Upper Right
A3S, B4S, 11 x 17, Simplex N/A 180

8.5 x 14, A4S, B5S, Duplex Short Edge Bind N/A 180
8.5 x 11 Long Edge Bind N/A 180
Other Paper Size N/A
PMR32
Case 2: Landscape & Short Edge

Pattern
ABC
ABC
A3S, B4S, 11 x 17, Simplex 0 N/A
8.5 x 14, A4S, B5S Duplex Short Edge Bind 0 N/A
8.5 x 11
Long Edge Bind 0 N/A
Case 3: Portrait & Long Edge

Pattern
ABC
ABC
A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14
A4L, B5L Simplex 180 N/A
11 x 8.5
Duplex Short Edge Bind 180 N/A
Case 4: Landscape & Long Edge

Pattern
ABC ABC

A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14
A4L, B5L Simplex N/A 180
11 x 8.5, 10.5 x 7.25
Duplex Short Edge Bind N/A 180
Long Edge Bind N/A 180
Note: S = Short Edge Feed, L = Long Edge Feed
PMR32
SR510: 500 sheet Finisher

Max. Stapling Pages A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 : 20 sheets
A4, 8.5 x 11, B5 SEF : 30 sheets
As with the SR720, Stapling positions vary according to paper size and orientation. The
charts below show this for the PCL driver:
Case 1: Portrait & Short Edge Feed

Pattern
ABC ABC

A3S, B4S, 11 x 17, Simplex N/A 180
8.5 x 14, A4S, Duplex Short Edge Bind N/A 180
8.5 x 11 Long Edge Bind N/A 180
Case 2: Landscape & Short Edge

Pattern
ABC
ABC

A3S, B4S, 11 x 17, Simplex 0 N/A
8.5 x 14, A4S,
8.5 x 11
Case 3: Portrait & Long Edge

Pattern
ABC
ABC

A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14
A4L, B5L Simplex 0 N/A
11 x 8.5
PMR32
Case 4: Landscape & Long Edge

Pattern
ABC ABC

A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14
A4L, B5L Simplex N/A 180
11 x 8.5, 10.5 x 7.25 Duplex Short Edge Bind N/A 180
Long Edge Bind N/A 180
PMR32

Toner Same as for PMR27/DMR22/27
Photo Conductor Unit New
Maintenance Kit Same as for PMR27
(Paper Feed Roller, Fusing Unit, Transfer Unit, Friction Pad)
Toner Yield Average 12K/bottle (A4/5% coverage)

Photo Conductor Unit 60K (A4/1 to 1 mode)
Maintenance Kit 120K
Monthly Print Volume Average: 8K / Max.: 20K

Duty 100K / month
Estimated Unit Life 1,200K
PM Cycle 120K (Choosing PM parts or Maintenance Kit)
Multi Language Preparation

LCD Display O/I PCL Driver PS Driver
English yes yes yes yes
German yes yes yes yes
French yes yes yes yes
Italian yes yes yes yes
Dutch yes yes yes yes
Swedish yes yes yes yes
Norwegian yes yes yes yes
Danish yes yes yes yes
Spanish yes yes yes yes
Finnish yes yes yes no
Portuguese yes yes yes no
Czech yes yes yes no
Polish yes yes yes no
Hungarian yes yes yes no
Note:
1) 14 language PCL drivers and 9 language PS drivers are in a single CD-ROM.
2) O/I and Driver (CD-ROM) are procured locally for the European version.
PMR32
Meter Click Counter Questions

The PMR32 supports click charge by means of a software counter. This software counter can
be recognized by the Configuration page and is also available on the operation panel at SP
mode.
Note:
a) Max. count is 99999999.
b) A3 or 11 x 17 can be changed to double count by SP mode.
c) Duplex print will be counted double.
d) Blank back page of duplex print will not be counted.
PMR32
Competitive Specifications
Vendor: Ricoh Ricoh HP Xerox Lexmark Lexmark
Model: PMR27 DMR22/27 LJ8150N N3225 Optr a T616N Optra

W810N
Launch December 1st quarter November February September 1999 September
1999 2000 2000 2000 1999
Print Speed Simplex 27ppm 32ppm 32ppm 32ppm 35ppm 35ppm
Duplex 22ppm 25ppm N/A 15ppm
First Print 4.9sec. 5 sec. or less Less than 13 sec. Less than 9.5
sec.
Paper Size A3 / 11 x 17 A3 / 11 x A3 / 11 x 17 A3 / 11 x A4 / Legal A3 / 11 x 17
17 17
Paper Input Std. 500 x 2 500 x 2 500 x 2 + 100 500 x 2 + 50 500 x 2 + 100 500 x 2 + 250
Capacity Max. 3,100 3,100 3,100 3,550 4,100 3,750
Paper Std. 500 500 600 500 500 300
Output Max. 1,750 1,750 3,600 2,500 3,000 2,500
Capacity
CPU VR4310 RM5261 QED RM5261 PowerPC RM5231 RM5231
167MHz 250MHz 250MHz 266MHz 200MHz 200MHz
RAM Std. 16MB 32MB 32MB 32MB 16MB 16MB
Max. 80M B 160MB 192MB 192MB 384MB 384MB
HDD Opt. 1.6GB 6.0GB 3.2GB 2.0+GB 2.1GB 2.1GB
Resolution 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi 1200dpi 600dpi
1200dpi 1200dpi
(Fast Res.) (XIE)
Language PCL6 / PCL5e PCL6 / PCL6 / PCL5e PCL6 / PCL6 / PCL5e PCL6 / PCL5e
Adobe PS3 PCL5e PS3 (Xionics) PCL5e PS3 (Clone) PS3 (Clone)
Adobe PS3 Adobe PS3
Font PCL 46 46 80 46 86 86
PS 136 24 x Adobe 136 39 x Adobe 156 156
Type 2 Type 1
112 x Adobe 157 x Type
Type 14 soft
19 x
TrueType soft
Interface Std. IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284
100 Base-TX 100 Base-TX 100 Base-TX 10/100 Base- 10/100 Base-TX 10/100 Base-
3 EIO TX TX
USB
Opt. USB 10Base-2 10Base-2/T 10Base-2/T
Token Ring Token Ring Token Ring Token Ring
RS232C/RS422 RS232C RS232/RS422 RS232/RS422
USB USB
Tre-Port Tre-Port
Coax/Twinax Coax/Twinax
Duty (Monthly) 100K 100K 150K 150K 200K 150K
Dimensions 550x520x516 550x538x516 566x520x540 642x525x486 418.1x513x404.3 590x680x556
(W x D x H mm)
Weight 40Kg 40Kg 51Kg 45Kg 20.4Kg 47Kg
PMR32
WHAT FITS WHAT

Machine Gestetner Rex Rotary Nashuatec
PMR32 P7032 P7032 P7032
Peripherals - Paper Handling Options

Versatility
PS500 LCT (Internal) DMR22A/27A/32A
PS440 Paper Bank - 2 x 500-sheet DMR22/27 & PMR27/32
PS420 LCT - 2000-sheet DMR22/27 & PMR27/32
CS370 4-Bin Mailbox PMR27 & PMR32
SR510 500-sheet finisher (NEW) PMR32 only
SR720 1000-sheet Finisher DMR22/27/35/45 &
PMR27/32
DIF320BU Bridge unit for Finishers (NEW) PMR32 only
AD380 Duplex unit (NEW) PMR32 only
DIF280IU Interchange unit- for Duplex and/or Mailbox PMR27 & PMR32
BT270 Bypass tray DMR22/27 &PMR27/32
CSC720 Staples 4 x 3,000 DMR22A/27A/35A/45A
& PMR32/45A
Peripherals - Connectivity Options
DHD185P Printer hard disk Type 185 DMR18/22/27 &

PMR27/32
DMEBP32 Print Memory 32MB (NEW) PMR32 & DMR35/45,
PCR38 Model J
DMEBP64 Print Memory 64MB (NEW) PMR32, DMR35/45,
PCR38 Model J,
PMR26N, PCR6DW/W
& RC-210
DMEBP128 Print Memory 128MB (NEW) PMR32, PCR38 Model J,
PCR6DW/W & RC-210
Note: Ethernet 10/100Base Network Interface Board is installed as standard
PMR32
Supplies
Short Name Description Yield at Versatility

5%
DT20BLK Nashuatec Toner cartridge (340g) 12,000 DMR22/27 &

PMR27/32
DT20BLK Gestetner toner cartridge (340g) 12,000 DMR22/27 &
PMR27/32
DT20BLK Rex Rotary toner cartridge (340g) 12,000 DMR22/27 &
PMR27/32
DMU17 PCU 60,000 DMR22/27 &
PMR27/32
DMK10 Maintenance Kit 120,000 PMR27/32
Language Kits
Short Name Description Versatility

PLS32D P7032 Language Kit German PMR32
PLS32GB P7032 Language Kit English PMR32
PLS32F P7032 Language Kit French PMR32
PLS32I P7032 Language Kit Italian PMR32
PLSxNL - TBC P7032 Language Kit Dutch PMR32
PLSxE - TBC P7032 Language Kit Spanish PMR32
PLS32P P7032 Language Kit Portuguese PMR32
PLSxDK - TBC P7032 Language Kit Danish PMR32
PLS32S P7032 Language Kit Swedish PMR32
PLS32PL P7032 Language Kit Polish PMR32
PLS32N P7032 Language Kit Norwegian PMR32
PLS32SF P7032 Language Kit Finnish PMR32
PLS32CZ P7032 Language Kit Czech PMR32
PLS32H P7032 Language Kit Hungarian PMR27
PLS263AR P7032 Language Kit Arabic PMR26/26N/32
(For SASO use only)
Special Note:
Toner Cartridges
The PMR32, PMR27 and DMR22/27 use the same toner cartridges. The toner cartridges
currently have the two DMR22/27 model numbers plus the PMR27 model number printed on
the carton. The toner carton artwork will be updated to include the PMR32 model number on
it as well Timing will be advised.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PMR45A
45ppm Mono Laser Printer
Nashuatec P7145
Rex Rotary P7145
Gestetner P7145
First
November 2001 January 2002 China

Date Created: November 2001
Version 3
December 2001
PMR45A
CONTENTS
Page:
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Major Selling Points 4
Target Market 8
Market Overview 10
What Fits What 24
This is a pre-launch document and

specifications are subject to change. If in
doubt, or specifications are required for
tenders, etc. please contact NRGI Guernsey for
K:\ Company\Market\NPS\PMR45A.doc 1
PMR45A
INTRODUCTION
The PMR45A is a highly featured 45ppm network printer, which replaces the PMR45.
It forms the top end of our Aficio network printer range, above the PMR32, PMR26/N
and PML16B models.
When it comes to network printing, NRGs primary objective is to place networked

MFPs into print situations to maximise combined copy and print volume. NRG
already has a strong range of print-capable MFPs to do this; however, it is necessary
to have a full printer range in order to meet customers individual needs. Where a
customers requirement is for a single-function printer, either through their business
needing only print functionality or through an unwillingness to accept networked
MFPs, NRG can now meet that customers requirement from the Aficio printer range.
The PMR45A has significant enhancements compared to the PMR45:
1. A much faster processing speed

2. More memory and
3. One of the fastest duplex printing speeds available in its segment
It has a new controller, with a 300MHz processor; 64MB RAM as standard and one
optional RAM slot to give a maximum memory capacity of 320MB. An optional
10GB hard disk drive can be attached for storing RIPped print jobs from the controller
and for downloading and storing PostScript fonts. There is a simple parallel port that
is bi-directional, as well as a standard Ethernet 10/100BaseTX network interface.
The PMR45A is a special product because it combines very fast printing with a
modular configuration and a wide range of paper handling and finishing options. The
PMR45A is unique in its segment, since it maintains its 45ppm printing speed even
when printing in duplex. Almost all competitive printers print significantly more
slowly in duplex than in simplex. This makes the PMR45A ideal for demanding
workgroup environments and mid volume print-on-demand applications but not for
high volume printing applications. Current competitors products of a similar speed
are designed to handle high volume workloads but are not as flexible. There is no
other product on the market like the PMR45A and so its positioning is different to
competitors products of similar speed.
PMR45A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The PMR45A is designed as a successor model to the PMR45, the Mid-range Office
Printer. It has a 45ppm (simplex/duplex) engine speed and is the fastest among
comparable competitive printers in the Mid-range segment for networked/workgroup
users.
Continuous printing speed: 40% faster than HP LJ8150 (32ppm) and 13%
faster than Xerox N4025 (40ppm).
Duplex printing speed: 40% faster than Xerox N4025 (32ppm) and 25%
faster than PMR45 (36ppm).
HP has not announced the duplex speed of the LJ8150 series.
With its versatile and powerful options such as Large Capacity Tray (LCT), finishers
(stapling/punching) or mailbox, the PMR45A increase clients efficiency in document
workflow. On top of its high productivity, the PMR45As high image quality, high
reliability and ease of use will more than satisfy clients requirements for printing.
Eco Printer:
The 21st Century is an Ecological Era. In this respect, the PMR45A holds the
competitive advantage, with less energy consumption than its main competitors.
Approximately 60% less energy is used in Energy Saver Mode, when compared with
the PMR45. In Energy Saver Mode the PMR45A consumes 9W/h. Rapid warm- up
and recovery time (15 seconds compared with 85 seconds for the PMR45) mean that
the PMR45A saves energy without users having to wait for recovery from the Energy
Saver Mode.
Product Outline
45ppm A4 printing in simplex and duplex modes.

A3-sized laser printer.
64MB RAM as standard, 320MB RAM maximum.
Duplex as standard.
600 x 600dpi resolution.
Less than 6 seconds to first page.
PCL5e, PCL6 and Adobe PostScript 3 as standard.
10/100BaseTX Ethernet interface as standard.
Up to 3,550 pages paper capacity.
1,000 and 3,000-sheet finishers with stapling and hole punching (optional).
9-bin mailbox (optional).
10GB Hard Disk Drive (optional).
IEEE1394 Serial Interface (optional).
PMR45A
MAJOR SELLING POINTS
High Print Speed:
Duplex printing is enhanced by 9ppm from the previous model, as the PMR45A
realizes the same print speed for both simplex and duplex. Time to first page is less
than 6 seconds. The 300MHz CPU and 64MB standard memory makes throughput
very fast.
Versatile Paper Handling:
Duplex printing is standard on the PMR45A. The productivity of duplex has been
increased from the previous model to 45ppm, the same as for simplex.
The target users for this model are medium to large workgroups who require duplex
printing. Since duplex is standard, users do not have to add duplex accessories
separately. Duplex printing saves paper when high print volume is required.
Multiple Original Printing:
With the optional Finisher + Memory or HDD options, paper handling becomes very
efficient. For example, multiple page documents can be printed and stapled in
multiple sets directly from the Client PC. To help users make multiple prints easily,
the Sample Print function is available. This prints the first set of documents and
allows users to check for accuracy at the printer and then, if correct, users can resume
printing the remaining sets.
This can save time in collecting documents, making copies, sorting and stapling.
Sample print avoids printing errors and can save toner and paper costs.
Individual Mailbox:
With the optional Mailbox accessory and Memory or HDD options, printed material
can be collated into 9 individual mailboxes. (Users can also print 1 x sample print,
giving 9 + 1 total printed copies). These can be assigned for shared use.
This increases privacy and can avoid mix-ups with other users documents.
Large Paper Capacity:
With optional 2 x 500-sheet paper trays and 1,500-sheet LCT, the total paper input
capacity is up to 3,550 sheets. Paper output capacity is up to 4,900 sheets with the
mailbox and 3,000-sheet finisher.
High Image Quality:
Real 600 x 1,200dpi image quality with edge enhanced smoothing. The new engine,
combined with a toner that is 10% more precise, realizes a crisp image and high print
quality.
PMR45A
High Reliability and Ease of Use:
The long- life photo conductor unit (PCU) lasts 150K prints. The Duty Cycle is
250K/month. Toner replacement is easy and clean.
Duty Cycle of 250K/month is enough for target users monthly print volume range
and is competitive against Xerox and Lexmark (Average: 20K, maximum:
50K/month).
Adobe PostScript 3:
In addition to PCL6 emulation, the PMR45A offers Adobe PostScript 3 (genuine) as

standard.
This enables applications, such as PDF files, to be printed rapidly.
RPCS:
This PDL, unique to Ricoh, has been developed especially for the Windows
environment. The performance and operability are superior to other PDLs.
Network Interface (onboard):
The network interface is standard on the PMR45A and conforms to multiple

protocols. Protocols available are: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI*, IPP and
AppleTalk.
* Only peer-to-peer environment with SmartNetMonitor.
Network Utility:
SmartNetMonitor software, for network management, and DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

software, for document management, are bundled with the machine.
IEEE1394 Interface:
IEEE1394 is the new standard serial interface and provides high-speed data
transmission at 100Mbps, 200Mbps and 400Mbps. It offers a much faster speed than
USB 1.0/1.1 (1.5 12Mbps).
Two types of connection can be used: SCSI print (direct connection) and IP over
1394 (network connection).
Job Spool:
This function enables up to 50 print jobs to be spooled into the optional HDD. With a
browser, users can see the status of the spooled jobs and delete unnecessary jobs.
PMR45A
Edge-to-Edge printing:
This function maximizes the print area and allows users to print from edge to edge of
the paper (297mm printing width).
Locked Print:
This function protects users confidentiality when printing in a shared environment.

With this function, documents are not printed unless the user enters a valid password
(password is entered at the user PC when sending the print job). This function is only
applicable when the optional HDD is attached.
Quicker Response and Energy Conscious:
Thanks to quick start- up technology, the PMR45A realizes a shorter warm-

up/recovery time (15 seconds or less from Energy Saver Mode). In energy saver
mode, the PMR45A consumes 9W/h.
PMR45A
PRODUCT POSITIONING
The PMR45A is a direct replacement for the PMR45, positioned at the high end of the
NRG range.
PMR45A within the NRG Range:
PPM Shows Target Launch Month Jan

45
45 45A
40
35 Jan
32
30 Jan
April
27 26A
26
25
May 26n 26AN
20 20 21 X
May
15
X
14 16
10
2000 2001 2002
PMR45A
TARGET MARKET
The PMR45A is not a general office printer. With its speed, functions and size, it is
designed for large workgroup use, to be shared by many users and for centralised
environments such as data-centre print rooms and print-on-demand applications.
However, because it has a lower duty cycle than some of the competitors printers of a
similar speed, the PMR45A should not be placed into very high volume printing
environments. This means that care must be taken when targeting customers, to
ensure that the PMR45A is not placed into environments where the expected monthly
print volume is too high. Some competitors, especially HP, quote very high duty
cycle and lifetime figures for their products in their sales support material and it is
therefore essential that the PMR45A is positioned with the focus on speed, flexibility
and cost of ownership.
The PMR45A is targeted at the following market:
Large and medium offices and departmental workgroups sharing printers in the
network environment, requiring A3, duplex printing, collating and stapling
capabilities.
To enable distributors to grow their market share within the 40-79ppm segment
(this segment will represent 16,300 placements in 2001 and is anticipated to grow
at a compound rate of 44% for the next 4 years).
To increase multiple original network printing and the distributors ability to
offer a complete hard copy output service to the networked environment, thereby
increasing the print volume and supply revenue.
To compete with Xerox N4525, Lexmark W820 and HP LJ9000 directly, creating
the opportunity to get Copy/Print volume from competitors.
To establish a complete mono printer line- up with the PML16B (16ppm),
PMR26/N (26ppm) and PMR32 (32ppm) as well as strengthen printer business.
Issues and Challenges to be Overcome:
The PMR45A is an ideal device for Value Added Resellers (VARs) and Systems
Integrators (SIs). Having a full line up of network printers increases our ability to
enter the IT dealer channel. In Europe, 96% of page printers above 12ppm are sold
indirectly so it is essential that distributors continue to build a presence in the IT
channel, starting with the printers and leading on to the MFP products.
The biggest issue when launching the PMR45A is that of enabling the direct sales
force to market network printers and overcome the brand loyalty and channel
loyalty that printer buyers have to HP and the IT dealer channel. To overcome this
requires extensive and ongoing sales training, development of local cons ultative
selling systems, to enable a multi-technology sale, and integrated marketing
communication plans, to communicate NRGs unique product and support offering.
PMR45A
Distributors must plan their activities with the IT dealer channel and find ways to
integrate with this channel, whilst avoiding conflict with the direct sales force and
with those printer-capable office equipment dealers who will sell these products.
Conclusions:
The PMR45A is a powerful and versatile network printer that can bring real
productivity benefits and cost reductions to enterprises with high-speed print
requirements. It is also quite different to other printers on the market at the moment,
especially due to its advanced paper handling options. However, as we are entering a
new market with this product, one where our brand positioning is not strong, the
PMR45A will not sell itself.
The copier and printer markets are converging very fast. Across Europe, copy
volume continues to reduce at a rate of 3-4% per year, while print volume increases at
10-15%. Using the assumption that the electronically generated and distributed
document will ultimately replace the hard copy document, it is essential that NRG
continue to capture a significant share of the printed document volume to be prepared
for the shift to electronic document management.
The Aficio printer range, combined with the print-capable MFP range, enables NRG
to position their brands as offering a complete print solution for all common business
environments. This is an essent ial message to communicate to the market, as we
make the transition from being a copier Company to being an IT and
communications solutions provider.
PMR45A
MARKET OVERVIEW
The table below shows the forecasted unit growth of each of the main mono page
printer segments through to the end of 2005:
Mono Page Printers Forecast (Units in Thousands):
PPM: 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 CAGR

16
7 12 2797.0 3151.5 2779.0 2632.8 2413.7 2170.7 1874.6 -9.9%
13 24 999.9 835.4 1153.1 1351.8 1516.4 1664.0 1807.5 16.7%
25 39 33.3 88.4 136.1 157.8 239.3 287.4 347.2 31.5%
40 79 4.9 6.8 16.3 28.8 33.0 38.0 42.1 44.1%
80+ 0.8 1.6 4.8 6.1 8.1 9.9 11.5 48.7%
Total 4164.5 4083.7 4089.2 4177.2 4210.4 4170.0 4082.9 0.0%
Source: CAP Ventures May 2001.
Overall, it can be seen that the mono laser market is forecast to decline slowly, by
around 3% per year. However, this overall decline hides a very large variation
between the different speed segments. The personal laser market under 13ppm is
falling fairly fast. However, the workgroup segments, particularly network printers
between 25ppm and 50ppm, are expected to grow extremely fast with growth rates of
around 45% per year.
The PMR45A is situated in the 40 79ppm speed segment, which is forecast to

grow at more than 44% compound until 2005. This segment has become hot in
2001. Xerox launched the 45ppm N4525 in March, and then HP introduced the
LJ9000 with a 50ppm engine. Lexmark enriched the product line with the 40ppm A4
T622 and the 45ppm A3 W820 in June. This trend shows the continued increase in
demand for 40 50ppm printers.
The PMR45A will remain at the top of the NRG range of printer offerings. It will
complete a range of A3 format capable printers, which will start at 26ppm and which
will also include the 32ppm printer, the PMR32.
PMR45A
Configuration:
The standard configuration of the PMR45A includes a 45ppm engine, 2 x 500-sheet

paper banks, Duplex unit, Multi-bypass tray and Network Interface Board (Ethernet).
The main unit is shown below (with the optional 2 x 500-sheet paper bank):
PMR45A MAIN UNIT
Other paper handling options are as follows:
Option: Note:
(1) 2 x 500-sheet paper tray unit Mandatory with (2)
(2) 1,500-sheet Large Capacity Input Tray
(3) 1,000-sheet finisher Alternative with (4) or (5)
(4) 3,000-sheet finisher Alternative with (3) or (5)
(5) 9-bin Mailbox Alternative with (3) or (4)
Can be installed with (4)
(6) Bridge Unit Mandatory with (3), (4) or (5)
(7) Mailbox Adaptor Mandatory with (4) or (5)
(8) Punch Unit Option for (4)
(9) Printer Hard Disk Option for main unit
(10) IEEE1394 Interface Option for main unit
(11) 64MB, 128MB, 256MB Memory Option for main unit
Supplies:
(1) Toner
(2) Developer
(3) PCU (spare part)
(4) Staple
Notes:
1. Accessories (1), (2), (3), (4), (5), (7) and (8) and Supply (4) can also be used for the PMR45
2. Accessories (9) and (10) and supplies (2) and (3) are unique to the PMR45A
3. Accessory (6) and Supply (1) can also be used for the PMR27A
4. Accessory (11) can be used for the PCR10 as well.
PMR45A
A drawing of a fully specified PMR45A is shown below:
PMR45A with full options
Notes:
*The colo ur is the same as the PMR45.

**The main visual difference from the PMR45 will be the large emblem placed in the
middle of the front panel (not shown in artwork).
PMR45A
External Options:
1,000-sheet
Finisher
Bridge Unit
3,000-sheet Main Unit

Finisher
9-bin Mailbox
LCT
Paper Bank
Mainframe Guided Tour
See notes over the page:
PMR45A
1. Printer Board
Remove this board when installing printer options.
2. Network Cable Connector
3. Parallel Interface Connector
4. Power Switch
5. Output Tray
Printed output is stacked here with the print side face down.
6. Operation Panel
Contains keys for printing operation and a panel display that shows the printer status.
7. Front Cover
Open this cover for replacement of some parts or if a paper misfeed occurs.
8. Paper Tray
9. Optional Paper Bank PS430
1. Duplex Unit
Allows the user to print onto both sides of the paper.
2. Duplex Unit Right Cover

Open this cover if you want to print onto both sides of the paper larger than B4
3. Bypass Tray
Holds up to 50 sheets of plain paper. (80g/m2 )
PMR45A
4. Upper Vertical Paper Feed Cover

Open this cover when accessing the inside of the printer. If installing the optional
Large Capacity Tray RT36, remove this cover.
5. Lower Vertical Paper Feed Cover

Open this cover when accessing the inside of the printer.
6. Power Cord
Obtained locally.
7. Ventilator
Helps to keep components inside the printer from overheating.
1. Fusing Unit
2. Transfer Unit
3. Toner Lock Handle

Turn up the handle when replacing the toner.
4. Toner Holder
Slide this out when replacing the toner.
5. Development Unit
6. Right Cover
Open this cover when accessing the inside of the printer.
PMR45A
Controller Overview:
The PMR45A uses a RM7000A, 300MHz processor, running at 300MHz. It has

64MB RAM as standard and has 1 x RAM expansion slot to give a maximum
capacity of 320MB RAM. Unlike the PMR45, there is no standard HDD.
However, an optional 10GB HDD may be fitted for downloading and storing
PostScript fonts.
Drivers Overview:
The PMR45A supports PCL5e, PCL6, PCL XL and PostScript 3.
Drivers are supplied for Windows 95/98/ME/2k/NT4.0 and Mac OS8.6 and higher
(PS3 only). Windows XP support is due but no time schedule has been set for this.
There is currently no Mac OS X support, with no plans for future support.
Language Support:
The PMR45A operation manual, PCL driver and LCD display will be supported in the
following 14 languages: English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish,
Norwegian, Danish, Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish and Hungarian.
The PMR45A PostScript driver will be supported in the following 9 languages:

English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish and Spanish.
Model Improvements:
1. 45ppm speed for both simplex and duplex:

The PMR45A has 9ppm higher printing speed with duplex and appeals to
heavy print users.
2. Better performance:
RM7000A 300MHz CPU and 64-bit ASIC.
3. Quicker response and energy conscious:
Ricohs quick start-up technology gives rapid warm- up time and less power
consumption.
15 seconds or less from start up to first page (warm- up time of the PMR45
was ~100 seconds).
Under Energy Saver Mode, power consumption is 9W or less.
Matching of new engine and super precise toner makes for finer print quality.
The diameter of toner particles is 10% smaller than the previous toner. With
edge-smoothing on, the PMR45A achieves 1,200dpi image quality.
4. New Interface IEEE1394 (option):
A new interface, IEEE1394, is available for the PMR45A, as an option. The
interface enables high-speed data transmission of up to 400Mbps. Two types
of connection can be used. One is SCSI print (direct connection) and the other
is IP over 1394 (network connection).
5. RPCS, Ricohs unique printer description language:
RPCS is designed specifically for the Windows environment, to obtain better
performance and operability than others (PCLs and PS).
PMR45A
Engine Specifications:
Technology Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing

Dual component toner development
Resolution 300dpi (PCL5e), 600dpi (all PDLs), 1,200dpi image quality

with edge-smoothing
Continuous Print Speed 45ppm (A4 - LEF)
First Print Speed 5.9 seconds or less (A4 - LEF 1st tray)
Dimensions (W x D x H) 670 x 640 560mm

(Standard configuration)
Weight 63Kg or less
Input Capacity Standard:

Standard tray: 2 x 500-sheet trays [80g/m2 ]
Bypass tray: 50 sheets [80g/m2 ]
Optional:
Paper tray unit: 2 x 500-sheet trays [80g/m2 ]
Large capacity tray (LCT): 1,500 sheets A4 - LEF
Output Capacity Standard:

500 sheets A4 LEF (with bridge unit: 250 sheets)
Optional:
(9-bin mailbox): 100 sheets x 9 + 500 sheets
(Finisher): 3,000 sheets or 1,000 sheets
Duplex Printing Standard (top and side binding, interleaving) A3 A5

(LEF), 64 105g/m2
Continuous duplex print speed: 45ppm (A4 LEF)
Input Paper Size Paper trays (standard/Optional): A3 A5 (SEF)

Bypass tray: A3 A6 (SEF)
Feeding way is only SEF
Large capacity tray: A4 (LEF) only
Paper trays (Standard/Optional): 64 105g/m2
Bypass tray: 52 163g/m2
Large capacity tray: 64 105g/m2
Rating Power 220 240V, 50/60Hz

Specifications
PMR45A
Power Consumption Maximum (full configuration): 1450W

Maximum (main unit): 1350W
Printing (full configuration): 870W
Printing (main unit): 790W
Energy Saver Mode: 9W
Warm-up Time 15 seconds or less
Recovery from Energy 15 seconds or less

Saver Mode
Recovery from Stand-by 3 seconds

Mode
Safety Standard TUV (EN60950) CE Mark
EMI EN55022 Class B
Environmental Standard TBA
Sound Power Level Printing: 70dB or less

(ISO7779) Stand-by: 42dB or less
74dB or less (with full options)
Energy Saver Mode: TBA
Sound Pressure Level Printing: 58dB or less
Controller Specifications:
CPU RM7000A 300MHz
Printer Language PCL5e / PCL6

PCL XL (IPS2000 1.8 IPS PRINT SIX, LJ4000 compatible)
Adobe PS3 (genuine)
RPCS
Fonts PCL: 35 Intelli fonts, 10 TrueType fonts, 1 bitmap font

PS: 136 fonts (Type2:24 fonts, Type14:112 fonts)
RAM Resident: 64MB

Option: 1 slot / 64MB, 128MB, 256MB
Specification: 133Mhz 64-bit Non-ECC/Parity 144-pin / 6ns
HDD 10GB
PMR45A
Driver PCL5e: Win 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000

PCL6: Win 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000
PS3: Win 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/Mac OS 8.6 or later
RPCS: Win 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000
* Windows XP will be supported but the schedule is TBA
Driver Resolution PCL5e: 300dpi / 600dpi

PCL6: 600dpi
PostScript 3: 600dpi
RPCS: 600dpi
* 1200dpi image quality with edge smoothing
Interface Standard: IEEE1284 I/F (Compatible, ECP, Nibble)

Ethernet (100baseTx, 10base-T)
Option: IEEE1394 I/F
Network Interface Onboard
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI*, AppleTalk, IPP

* Peer-to-peer environment with SmartNetMonitor
Supported Network Novell NetWare 3.12 or later, 4.1 or later, 5.0, 5.1
Windows NT4.0, 2000
UNIX
Layout:
PMR45A
Paper Bank (Model Name: PS430)

Paper Size A5 (SEF) A3
Paper Weight 60 105g/m2
Paper Capacity 2 trays x 500 sheets
Large Capacity Input Tray (Model Name: RT36)

Paper Size A4 (LEF), LT (LEF)
Paper Capacity 1,500 sheets
3,000-sheet Finisher (Model Name: SR730)

Shift Tray:
Paper Size B5 A3
Stack Capacity:
Without punch hole 3,000 sheets (A4/LT LEF 80g/m2 )
1,500 sheets (A3, A5 SEF, A5, B5 SEF - 80g/m2 )
With punch hole 2,500 sheets (A4/LT LEF, B5, LEF - 80g/m2 )
1,500 sheets (A3, A4 SEF, A5, B4, B5 - 80g/m2 )
Proof Tray:
Paper Size A5 A3
Stack Capacity:
Without punch hole 250 sheets (A4, LT or smaller - 80g/m2 )
50 sheets (B4 or larger - 80g/m2 )
With punch hole 200 sheets (A4, LT or smaller - 80g/m2 )
Staple Capacity:
Without punch hole 50 sheets (A4 or smaller - 80g/m2 )
With punch hole 40 sheets (A4 or smaller - 80g/m2 )
Staple Paper Size A3 B5
Staple Paper Weight 64 80g/m2
Staple Position 1 staple 3 positions
2 staples 1 position
Shift Tray (Doggy Tail) Standard
Weight 45Kg
PMR45A
1,000-sheet Finisher (Model Name: SR720)

Stack Capacity 1,000 sheets (A4 LEF or smaller - 80g/m2 )
500 sheets (A3, A4 SEF)
Staple Capacity 30 sheets (A4 or smaller - 80g/m2 )
Staple Paper Size A3 B5
Staple Paper Weight 64 - 80g/m2
Staple Position 1 position (upper left)
Shift Tray (Doggy Tail) Standard
Weight 21Kg
Mailbox (Model Name: CS360)

Number of Bins 9 bins and 1 x proof tray
Paper Size:
Each Bin A5 A3
Proof Tray A6 A3
Paper Weight:
Each Bin 60 90g/m2
Proof Tray 52 157g/m2
Stack Capacity:
Each Bin 100 sheets (A4 LEF - 80g/m2 )
Proof Tray 500 sheets (A4 LEF - 80g/m2 )
Stapling Not available
Weight 40Kg
Bridge Unit (Model Name: Bridge Unit Type 1045)

Proof Tray:
Stack Capacity 250 sheets
Bridge to the Finisher/Mailbox:
Paper Size A6 SEF A3
PMR45A
Punch Unit (Model Name: Bridge Unit Type 450)

Option for SR730
2-hole Version:
Paper Size B5JIS (LEF) A3 (SEF)
3-hole Version:
Paper Size A5 A3 (SEF), LT (LEF)
Power Consumption 33.6W (power is supplied from SR730)
Weight 2.4Kg
Mailbox Adaptor (Model Name: Bridge Unit Type 460)
PMR45A
Targeted Supplies Yield:
YIELD
Toner 500g/bottle 30,000 (A4 - 5% coverage)
Photo Conductor Unit 150,000
Developer 150,000
Targeted Print Volume and Reliability:
Expected Average Monthly Print 20,000

Volume (AMV):
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV): 50,000
Duty Cycle (DC): 250,000 *
Estimated Machine Life (ML): 5 years or 3,000K prints, whichever comes first.
*: Duty is evaluated at 5% coverage per job
Please note that the above figures are design targets and confirmed only in
laboratory tests. The actual yields and reliability may vary, depending on the
users operating and maintenance conditions and servicing.
Recommendation:
It is recommended that machines be placed to handle MMV and

not Duty Cycle.
PMR45A
WHAT FITS WHAT
PMR45A P7145 P7145 P7145
Peripherals:
PS430 Paper Ba nk (2 x 500-sheets)
RT36 Large Capacity Tray
SR730 3,000-sheet Finisher
CSC80 Staples for SR730 (5 x 5,000/box)
SR720 1,000-sheet Finisher
CSC720 Staples for SR720 (4 x 3,000/box)
CS360 9-bin Mailbox
DIF1045BU Bridge Unit, when fitting Finisher or Mailbox - Type 450
DIF460BU Bridge Unit for Finisher and Mailbox fitted together
DHPU4502H 2-hole Punch for SR730 - Type 450
Peripherals Connectivity:
DHD4510 Printer Hard Disk Drive - Type 4510
Memory TBC
Supplies:
Short Code: Description: Yield @ 5%
DT33BLK Toner (500g bottle) 30,000
DD5BLK Developer (500g bag) 300,000
A2309510 DMU6 Drum 150,000
Language Kits:
Short Code: Description:
PLS4AGB Language Kit English
PLS4AD Language Kit Germa n
PLS4AF Language Kit French
PLS4AI Language Kit Italian
PLS4AP Language Kit Portuguese
PLS4APL Language Kit Polish
PLS4AN Language Kit Norwegian
PLS4AS Language Kit Swedish
PLS4ACZ Language Kit Czech
PLS4AH Language Kit Hungarian
PLS4ASF Language Kit Finnish
PMR45A
Vendor: NRG HEWLETT PACKARD XEROX LEXMARK
Model: PMR45 PMR45A LJ8150DN LJ9000DN N4525DX W820dn
Launch: August 1999 January 2002 November 2000 May 2001 March 2001 June 2001
Print Speed: Simplex: 45ppm 45ppm 32ppm 50ppm 45ppm 45ppm
Duplex: 36ppm 45ppm N/A 50ppm 39ppm N/A
First Print: Less than 6 sec. Less than 5.9 sec. N/A Less than 8 sec. 4 sec. / 7 sec. Less than 7 sec.
Paper Size: A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3
Paper Input Standard: 2 x 500 + 50 2 x 500 + 50 2 x 500 + 100 2 x 500 + 100 2 x 500 + 50 2 x 500 + 35
Capacity: Maximum:
Paper Output Standard: 500 500 600 600 500 500
Capacity: Maximum: 4,900 4,900 3,600 3,600 3,500 3,550
CPU: PowerPC603 RM7000A 300MHz RM5261 250MHz PMC Sierra PowerPC740 RM5231A 350MHz
100MHz 300MHz 233MHz
RAM: Standard: 8MB 64MB 32MB 64MB 64MB 64MB
Maximum: 72MB 320MB 160MB 384MB 192MB 384MB
(2-slot SIMM)
HDD: Standard: Approx 1.6GB
(MSU)
Maximum: Approx 1.6GB 10GB 3.2GB 5GB 5GB 5GB
(Cont.)
Resolution: 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi
Edge smoothing 1,200dpi with edge 1,200dpi (FastRes) 1,200dpi (FastRes) 1,200dpi (XIE) 1,200dpi image
smoothing
Language: PCL5E + XL PCL5e + 6 + XL PCL5e + XL PCL5e + XL PCL5e + XL PCL6/PPDS
Adobe PS3 Adobe PS3 PS3 (Clone) PS3 (Clone) Adobe PS3 PS3 (Clone)
RPCS
Interface: Standard: IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284 IEEE1284
10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX 10/100Base-TX
JetDirect Fast Ether USB USB
Option: IEEE1394 10Base-2/T JetDirect Token 10Base-2/T 10Base-2/T
(IP over 1394) Token Ring Ring Token Ring Token Ring
USB Fast InfraRed RS232C Tre-Port
InfraRed Card JetDirect Card Coax/Twinax
Duty (Monthly): 200K 250K 150K 300K 250K 250K
Version 1.11
Valid Until :August 2003
Color Multifunctional
CCR06A CCR132 CCR081 CCR101
E310 E710 E820 RC210
Memory Matrix
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
COLOUR COPIERS
IRIS II AND LILAC II
CCR060A Basic Model

Nashuatec CS525 / Rex Rotary CS825 / Gestetner CS225
CCR062A Basic Auto Duplex Model

Nashuatec CS531 / Rex Rotary CS831 / Gestetner CS231
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
November, 2000 Japan

Version 5
July, 2001
CCR060A / CCR062A Colour Copiers
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 3
Product Overview 8
Target Markets 9
Major Features, Selling Points and Benefits 11
Peripheral Interchangeability 18
Target Reliability 34
Supplementary Information 39
What Fits What 42

K:Company\Market\Nps\CCR060A_62A Page 2
INTRODUCTION
The CCR060A and CCR062A will be replacing the CCR060/62/68. The new
colour copiers look the same, but there are some important differences between
the old and new models.
Please note the CCR068 will not be replaced. You will simply add the edit
option to the CCR062A.
Print speed has been increased to 6ppm in full colour on both models and to
25ppm in black & white for the CCR060A and 31ppm for the CCR062A.
Copy resolution has been increased from 400dpi to 600dpi and this will make it
even more competitive in this segment.
There is an optional black and white Fax unit that fits on the CCR062A only.
These new models have been aimed at the general office market to replace
existing B&W MFPs with a copier/printer that is both B&W and colour capable.
As this is the quickest growing segment of the market we need to focus our
efforts on replacing units in the office markets by providing a good printing
solution.
Appearance
CCR060A (Replaces CCR060)
Configuration: Mainframe / Platen Cover / 3 Tray Paper Bank / Controller Interface Unit (Behind)
Controller Interface Unit

Platen Cover (Option):
(NEW/Option):
Non-Folding type platen
Necessary to install printer
cover
controller
500sheet x1 Paper Tray 3 Tray Paper Bank Unit :

Standard equipment of model (Option)
I-2 mainframe 500sheet x 3
Also:
Optional 2 tray (500shts x 2)
* Copy (output) Tray is a standard accessory of the mainframe.
B) Operation Panel (with Guidance Display for Printer Operation)
Guidance Display for Printer Option (either RC210 or E310)
CCR062A (replaces CCR062/CCR068)

Configuration: Mainframe / Platen Cover / 3 Tray Paper Bank / Controller Interface Unit (Behind)
Controller Interface Unit

(NEW/Option)
Platen Cover (Option)
Necessary to upgrade the
Non-Folding type platen
CCR062A with printer and/or
cover
FAX.
*New Front Cover
Auto Duplex Unit 3 Tray Paper Bank Unit :

Standard equipment of the (Option)
CCR062A mainframe. 500sheet x 3
Also:
Optional 2 tray (500shts x 2)
* Smoother curve line from LCD to front cover.

** Copy (output) Tray is the standard accessory of mainframe.
Operation Panel (with Operation Panel for FAX)
Guidance Display for Printer attached here Wide Colour LCD Display (10.4inch)
Fax Operation Keys Copy / FAX Function Switch

(Accessory of the fax option)
Full Colour touch panel of the CCR062A simultaneously serves as copy operation panel, colour
display editor (with editing option) and fax operation panel (with optional FAX controller).
* Please note that fax function only fits the CCR062A
Product Concept
Office Standard MFP - Colour and BW solution
NRG has been aiming to penetrate the office colour market with a low-cost digital colour copier
since the introduction of the CCR031/32/36 series in 1996, and capitalising its growth with the
CCR060 and CCR062/68
Although the CCR060A/62A is based on the CCR060/62/68, there are many improvements
incorporated to meet user requirements.
For example, image rotation capability significantly accelerates productivity. The true 600dpi copy
quality makes the CCR060A/62A more competitive in this class. The CCR062A is the 1st colour
MFP that can be upgraded to high performance black/white fax.
With the additions of these productive features and enhancements, the CCR060A/62A will establish
a new standard of colour MFP in the office market.
The marketing objective of the CCR060A/62A is to be the No.1 selling colour copier in the office
market where we expect dramatic growth in the future.
US and European Colour MFP Placement

( K Units )
140
We cannot exp ect typical growth
120 in Production and Specialized
Business segments, because the
100 market is saturated and many
users have already acquired
80
colour output devices.
60
The growth of colour MFP market
40 will be led by the General Office
segment.
20
0
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003
General Office Specialized Productio n
Total unit : Dataquest[US], Infosource[EU]

Segment Breakdown : Estimation by Ricoh FCP Marketing)
Begin Colourisation Strategy

According to a market survey in Japan, approximately 74 % of non-colour users have practical
needs for colour copiers. By pioneering this potential market with the CCR060A/62A, NRG will be
a leading player in the colour MFP market.
Customers can select appropriate models according to their needs as below:
For price conscious customers
Model CCR060A (FC: 6cpm / BW: 25cpm)

Affordable machine cost
Entry Model
Easy Operation
Good performance in BW/FC
Expandability to Printer
For customers who require productive features and expandability
Model CCR062A (FC:6cpm / BW 31cpm)

High-performance Colour MFP
Wide Touch Panel Display with GUI
Auto Duplex Capability
Area Editing Capability (with editing option)
Expandability to Printer and B/W FAX
Market Survey in Japanese Market (N=255 / Non-Colour Users)
Q.1) Do you have needs for a colour copier in your office?
Yes: 74%
No: 26%
Q.2) Why have you not acquired a colour copier? Requirements for entry colour user:
Good performance both in FC/BW (not
(Top 4 answers) colour exclusive machine)
Needs for colour copier is still low Affordable Pricing
High machine cost High image quality
Unsatisfactory Image quality Reasonable CPP
High Running Cost
Our proposal to non-colour users is:
Begin Colourisation with the CCR060A/62A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Product Positioning
FC CPM
Cattleya E
10cpm
Cattleya B
Lilac ED CCR062A FC: 6cpm / BW: 31cpm

Lily E Standard Auto Duplex Unit
6cpm Lilac BD CCR060A
Lily B Expandability with Printer & FAX
Iris
FC: 6cpm / BW: 25cpm
Azalea ED Standard 500sheets paper tray
3cpm Azalea BD Expandability with Printer
Azalea B
96 97 98 99 00 01 Year
Major improvements over CCR060/62/68 are as below:
Resolution is true 600dpi for copying, printing and scanning.

B/W copy speed and BW/FC print speeds have been increased.
Image rotation is a new feature
BW FAX option for model CCR062A
Area-editing function will be provided as option.
Film Projector will be eliminated. (Current SPU4 cannot be used with model CCR060A/62A
due to a difference in scan resolution)
Comparison with Iris / Lilac
CCR060 CCR060A CCR062/68 CCR062A

Copy Resolution 400dpi 600dpi 400dpi 600dpi
Scan Resolution 400dpi 600dpi 400dpi 600dpi
BW copy Speed 21cpm 25cpm 28cpm 31cpm
FC Print Speed 4ppm 6ppm 4ppm 6ppm
BW Print Speed 14ppm 25ppm 18ppm 31ppm
Image Rotation N/A Yes. N/A Yes.
Both in Both in
FC/BW FC/BW
Area Editing N/A N/A Edit Model Option
BW FAX Option N/A N/A N/A Yes
Film Projector Unit Yes N/A Yes N/A
TARGET MARKETS
Segmentation
Number of users Number of Employees

sharing the machine
Target Market of Model CCR060A/62A
Centralized
CCR060A/62A
More than 100 More than 100
Number of Employees:
Division S2 - M1 (5 - 99)
50-100
M1 Number of Users:
30-99 Small Work - Work Group (3-30)
Work Group
20-30
Target of CCR060A/62A
Business Type:
1. General Office
Small Work S2 2. Small production office and specialized business
3-10
Group 5-29 office
Business Personal S1
1-4
Target Market
A) User Profile
Number of Employees: S2 - M1 (5-99)
Number of users: Small Work Group - Work Group (3-30)
Business Type: 1) General Office
2) Small production office and specialized business office
Typical Applications: Presentation Materials, Catalogue, Report, DM,
Greeting Card etc.
Colour Original: Inkjet Printed Document, Catalogue, Map, Photo etc.
Computer: IBM PC or Compatible (Networked)
Application Software: MS Office
B) Option Attachment Ratio:

Printer Controller: US= 80%, EU= 60%
FAX Controller: US= 25% (of CCR062A), EU=25% (of CCR062A)
C) Installation Type:
Replace BW Copier: 30%, Replace FC Copier: 20%
Add: 40%, New:10%
D) Target Model:
Colour Copier DFC, Azalea, Lily, X5750, MajestiK, CLC7/800
BW copier 20-31cpm analogue / digital BW copier
*FAX upgraded BW MFP could be a replacement target
of model CCR062A
Monthly Copy Volume
CCR060A CCR062A
ACV (outputs) 3,000 outputs 5,000 output
ACV (developments) 7,500 dev. 12,500 dev.
Max. CV (outputs) 12,000 outputs 12,000 outputs
Duty Cycle (development) 30,000 dev. 30,000 dev.
Colour Ratio 50% 50%
MAJOR FEATURES, SELLING POINTS & BENEFITS
Selling Points and Benefit
True 600dpi / 8bit both in Copying and Printing

The resolution of the CCR060A/62A is true 600dpi/8bit both in copying and printing.
This gives smooth gradation and precise reproduction quality.
CCR060/62/68: 400dpi / 8bit Model CCR062A/62A: 600dpi / 8bit
Colour Depth = 8 bit:

Capable to etch 28 =
256 levels of gradations per dot.
Competitive Comparison: Copy Resolution

Model Copy Resolution Colour Depth
CCR060A/62A 600dpi 8bit
CCR060/62/68 400dpi 8bit
Canon CP680 (HP8550) 600dpi 2 or 4bit (not clear)
XEROX X575x (Acolour62x) 400dpi 8bit
Canon CLC 7/8/900 400dpi 8bit
MINOLTA CF910 400dpi 8bit
600dpi Scanner: 10bit input

The CCR060A/62A scans original in at 600dpi/10bit. After image adjustment, original data is
converted into 600 dpi 8bit data and then transported to the IPU.
This significantly improves the reproduction quality of halftone and gradation areas.
600dpi/10bit input and 600dpi/8bit Output (image illustration)
There are mechanical noises existing in scanned data.

The scanned data is converted into 8bit data and
mechanical noises are removed.
10bit data Noise Noise
8bit data
Create clear and precise 600dpi/8bit data by extracting
from 10bit data.
Copy Speed
CCR060A/62A offers competitive copy speed both in FC and BW.
Though copy resolution has been increased from 400dpi to 600dpi, the CCR060A/62A offers even
faster BW copy speed than CCR060/62/68. FC copy speed remains at 6cpm.
Competitors Comparison: FC/BW Copy Speed (A4/LT LEF)
BW Copy Speed FC Copy Speed Copy Resolution

CCR060A 25cpm 6cpm 600dpi
CCR062A 31cpm 6cpm 600dpi
CCR060 21cpm 6cpm 400dpi
CCR062/68 28cpm 6cpm 400dpi
CCR031/32/36 21cpm 3cpm 400dpi
XEROX X5750 24cpm 6cpm 400dpi
Canon CP680 (HP8550) 24cpm 6cpm 600dpi
MINOLTA CF910 23cpm 6cpm 400dpi
Canon CLC7/8/900 28cpm 7cpm 400dpi
Copy Speed
BW 1st copy speed of CCR060A/62A remains at 8.0sec. The 1st copy speed is especially important
for this class of copiers, as the customers make small numbers of copies per original.
Competitors Comparison: FC/BW 1st Copy Speed (A4/LT LEF)
BW 1st Copy FC 1st Copy Copy

Speed Speed Resolution
CCR060A/62A 8.0sec. 22.4sec. 600dpi
CCR060/62/68 8.0sec. 22.4sec. 400dpi
CCR031/32/36 15sec. 32sec. 400dpi
XEROX X5750 8.9sec. 23.9sec. 400dpi
Canon CP680 (HP8550) 18sec. 34.0sec. 600dpi
MINOLTA CF910 14sec. 30.0sec. 400dpi
Canon CLC7/8/900 17sec. 27.0sec. 400dpi
Print Speed
The CCR060/62/68 lowered engine speed during printing to enable 600dpi printing. The
CCR060A/62A offers the same productivity both in copying & printing. The printing speed has been
significantly improved compared to the CCR060/62/68 as below:
Print Speed (A4/LT LEF)
CCR060 CCR060A CCR062/68 CCR062A

FC Print 4ppm 6ppm 4ppm 6ppm
BW Print 14ppm 25ppm 18ppm 31ppm
FC Print Speed BW Print Speed
50 % up 72.2% up
78.5% up
31cpm
6cpm
25cpm
4cpm
18cpm
14cpm
Iris/ I-2 / Iris I-2 Lilac L-2

Lilac L-2
Productivity in printing is significantly improved both in FC and BW.
Image Rotation
Newly adopted image rotation accelerates actual productivity in your office.
With the CCR060A/62A, image rotation is available both in FC and BW mode.
Image Rotation
A4 SEF to A4LEF
(LT SEF to LT LEF)
Always Satisfactory
Copy Speed
No sacrifice in image
quality
Save paper tray use
Reduction copy from A3
to A4
(DLT to LT)
Paper Tray Assignme nt

This is a useful function for office colour users who use the machine for both BW and FC copying.
When using the CCR060A/62A, paper tray selection can be registered to solve user problems as
below:
Priority Tray for Full Colour Copy Mode
User Problem
We need high quality output when colour copying.
We dont like to use expensive colour copy paper for daily BW copying and FAX
output.
Solution
You can pre-assign any or all of the paper trays for Full Colour Copy Mode, and
set colour copy paper in the assigned tray/s. The machine automatically selects the
assigned tray where colour copy paper is located whenever Full Colour Copy
Mode is selected.
Paper Type Policy (APS on / Original Size is A4/LT)
APS on &
Auto Colour Selection*
Normal Paper Tray
BW Copy Mode
A4/LTR LEF
Single Colour Mode
Twin Colour Mode
FC Priority Tray
A4/LTR LEF
(Colour Copy Paper)
APS on &
FC Copy Mode
*In Auto Colour Selection mode, the paper is fed from normal paper tray.
FAX Priority Paper Tray
You can assign the paper tray for fax output as well. For example, you can print fax messages on
yellow paper by setting it in the priority tray, so that you can identify faxes at a glance.
Auto-Duplex Copying and Printing (CCR062A only)

Auto-duplex is a standard feature on the CCR062A.
Auto-duplex saves paper, reducing both cost and filing space requirements.
New Twin Colour

Twin colour is a useful function to make a copy with red highlights quickly.
In addition to current twin colour capability, the new twin colour feature allows users to select the
combination of the colour outputs.
Current Twin Colour (Black and Other Colours)
Black part on the original: Copied as Black (User can select colour.)
Other Colour part on the original: Copied as Red (User can select colour.)
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
Current twin colour function separates original image into black part and colour part and
changes the colour of each part.
New Twin Colour (Red and Black)
Red part on the original: Copied as Red (fixed)

Other Colour part on the original: Copied as Black (fixed)
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
New twin colour function separates original image into red part and other colour part to
highlight red part on the original. Unlike current twin colour mode, user cannot change
colour in this mode. Red part of original is copied as red and other part is copied as
black.
New Energy Saver Mode

The machines enter energy saver mode automatically to decrease power consumption after periods
of non-operation. The CCR060A/62A users can choose power consumption and recovery period
from 3 selections.
Multi-Function Colour Copier
Expandability
Installing optional controller units enables the CCR060A/62A to serve as a high performance colour
printer, colour scanner, and fax (CCR062A only)
Function Matrix
FC/ BW Printer FC Scanner FAX
CCR060A O O / *X X
CCR062A O O / *X O
* Not supported in RICOH made printer controller
Please see Printer Controllers product information for details of printer functions.
FAX Option
With the optional Fax unit, the CCR062A can be upgraded to deliver high performance faxing as
well. Since no competing colour model has a fax option, this is a strong selling point.
In this regard, CCR062A is the only colour copier in the market that can replace BW MFP with fax
capability.
In addition, this fax option allows both black and single colour output. Please note that this fax
option is not a full colour fax solution.
CCR062A FAX Features & Options
A) Super G3
The CCR062A fax is equipped with a 33.6Kbps modem. Transmission of an A4 page takes just 3
seconds when sending to another super G3 FAX.
B) ISDN G4 (Option)
The ISDN option ensures fast and clear digital transmission.
Three-second transmission is possible in 200 x 200dpi mode.
C) JBIG
The 400dpi option type 450 helps to send a clear image faster with JBIG compression.
It allows you to send documents with photos or small text faster, especially in detail mode .
(200x200dpi) or super fine mode (400 x 400dpi).
D) AI Protocol
Even when sending to a 14.4Kbps fax, you can still achieve 6-seconds transmission speed
regardless of the manufacturer.
Moreover, if the other machine is a NRG fax, the AI protocol can further save time and money.
E) Parallel Memory Transmission

Some conventional fax machines do not start initiating contact with the receiving terminal until all of
the documents are scanned and stored in the memory.
The fax for the CCR062A initiates contact with the receiving terminal while the documents are being
scanned.
If the receiving terminal is busy, the fax unit automatically switches from parallel memory
transmission to regular memory transmission.
F) Mono-Colour Print and Toner Switch

To identify a fax message easily, you can select the colour of fax output from black, cyan or
magenta.
Even if the selected toner runs short, the machine can switch colour automatically to the second
selected toner.
Mono- Colour Print

A user can easily find a fax message
y
Print in the output.
Cop y Print FAX
Cop y Print FAX
Cop FAX
Toner Switch
User can select 2nd print colour for
fax output.
FAX FAX For customers who dont like to use
FAX FAX colour toner for FAX output, this
FAX FAX
function can be disabled.
In this case, fax messages are kept
in memory and printed after new
2nd toner not selected toner bottle is set.
Page images are kept in memory.
PERIPHERAL INTERCHANGEABILITY
Configuration
The CCR060A/62A has a variety of options as below:
No Item Product Name Comments

1 Platen Cover Platen Cover Common with CCR060/62/68 & CCR100/106
Type 100
2 ARDF DF64 Common with CCR060/62/68 & CCR100/106 and BW
models
3 Original Tray Original Tray Common with CCR060/62/68 & CCR100/106 and BW
Type F models
4 10 Bin Sorter Stapler ST10 Common with CCR031/32/36 & CCR060/62/68 and BW
models
5 3 Bin Unit CS160 Common with CCR060/62/68
6 20 Bin Sorter Stapler ST32 Common with CCR060/62/68
7 3 Tray Paper Bank PS390 Common with CCR060/62/68
8 2 Tray Paper Bank PS380 Common with CCR060/62/68
9* Edit Option Edit Option NEW
Type 4000 Area Editing Function can be added to CCR062A
by inserting this unit into scanner IPU board.
10 Controller Interface Controller Interface NEW
Unit Type H Have 2 slots for Printer Controller and FAX unit
Necessary to install Printer and/or FAX option
11* Fax Unit Fax Option NEW
Type 4000 For CCR062A only
12 Print Controller 1 E310 New )
Print Controller RC210 New ) Do not fit CCR060/62/68
* Only For CCR062A
Other Options for FAX Function
No Item Product Name Comments

1 G4 Option ISDN Option Type 450 Common with DMR35/45 series
2 SAF Memory FAX Feature Expander Type 4MB SAF memory
450 Common with DMR35/45 series
3 HDD FAX Feature Expander Type New
Memory 4000* 130MB fax HDD. Must be installed
with SAF memory option.
4 FAX Stamp FAX Stamp Type 4000* New
ARDF. Must be installed together
5 JBIG Option FAX 400dpi Option Type 450 400dpi memory + JBIG feature
Common with NAD series
6 Handset Handset Type 4000* New
FAX handset for USA territory
Model CCR060A CCR062A CCR060/62/68 CCR0100/106 BW Copier

Item
Platen Cover OK OK OK OK NG
ARDF OK OK OK OK AD31/41
10 Bin Sorter OK OK OK NG Phoenix
Stapler
20 Bin Sorter OK OK OK NG NG
Stapler
3 Bin Unit OK OK OK NG NG
3 Tray Paper OK OK OK NG NG
Bank
2 Tray Paper OK OK OK NG NG
Bank
Original Tray OK OK OK OK Penguin
Controller OK OK NG NG NG
Interface
Edit Option NG OK NG NG NG
Fax Unit NG OK NG NG NG
SAF Memory NG OK NG NG NAD
HDD Memory NG OK NG NG NG
FAX Stamp NG OK NG NG NG
JBIG Option NG OK NG NG NAD
Handset NG OK NG NG NG
OK: Can be used for this model

NG: Cannot be used for this model
Option Correlation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 Platen Cover X
2 ARDF X
3 Original Tray
4 10 Bin Sorter Stapler X X
5 3 Bin Unit X X
6 20 Bin Sorter Stapler X X
7 3 Tray Paper Bank X
8 2 Tray Paper Bank X
9 *Edit Option
10 CTL I/F Unit M M
11 Printer Controller M
12 *Fax Controller
13 *G4 Option M M
14 *SAF Memory M M
15 *HDD Memory M M M
16 *FAX Stamp M M M
17 *JBIG Option M M
18 *Handset M M
*Only for CCR062A

M must be installed together
X Cannot be installed together
Scan Resolution: 600dpi
Copy/Print Resolution: 600dpi
(Max. Image able area: 11.69x17 / 297x432mm)
Min.: 5 x8 / A6 SEF
Paper Size: Paper Tray Inch version:
Feed: 11 x 17(DLT), 8 x14(LG), 8 x13(F4), 8x13(F)
8 x11(LT) LEF/SEF, 5 x8 (HLT) SEF
Metric version:
A3, B4, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5 SEF
Bypass Tray Max. 12 x 18/ 305mm x 457mm
Feed Min. A6 SEF / 100x148mm
First Copy Speed Normal Mode: FC: 22.4 sec. BW: 8 sec.
(LT / A4 LEF): OHP / Thick Paper Mode: FC: 35 sec. BW: 23 sec.
Copy Speed CCR060A: Normal Mode: FC: 6cpm BW: 25cpm
(LT / A4 LEF) OHP / Thick Paper Mode: FC: 3cpm BW: 5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: FC: 4cpm BW: 25cpm
CCR062A: Normal Mode: FC: 6cpm BW: 31cpm
OHP / Thick Paper Mode: FC: 3cpm BW: 5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: FC: 4cpm BW: 28cpm
Warm-up Time: Approx. 7 min.
Multiple Simplex: Model I-2: Up to 99copies
Copying Model L-2: Up to 100copies
Auto Duplex Single colour copy: Up to 30copies (DLT/A3)
(CCR062A): Up to 50copies (Other size)
Full Colour copy: Up to 20copies
Paper Capacity: CCR060A 500sht. + 50sht from Bypass Tray (with 100g/m paper)
(Stand Alone) CCR062A: 50sht. from Bypass Tray (with 100g/m paper)
Max Paper CCR060A 2,050shts
Capacity: CCR062A: 1,550shts.
(with PS390)
Copy Paper Normal Tray: 17 - 28lbs / 64 - 105g/m
Weight: Bypass Tray: 14 - 43lbs / 52 - 160g/m
Reproduction Inch Version: 7 Reductions, 5 enlargements plus 2 Programmable Ratios from
Ratio: 25 to 400 %
400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 100, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
Mm Version: 7 Reductions, 5 enlargements plus 2 Programmable Ratios from
25 to 400 %
400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 100, 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% Steps
Product Specifications /Cont.
Non- Leading Edge: Less than 0.2 0.08 (5mm2mm )

Reproduction Side: Less than 0.08 0.08 (2mm2mm)
Area: Trailing Edge: Less than 0.08 +0.08 / - 0.06 (2mm+2mm / -1.5mm)
Three side full Yes
bleed:
Duplex Copy: CCR060A Manual
CCR062A: Auto / Manual
Duplex Unit: Paper Weight: 17-28lbs / 64-105g/m
(CCR062A) Paper Size: 11 x 17(DLT), 8 x14(LG) , 8x13(F),
8 x11(LT) LEF/SEF, 5 x8 (HLT) LEF
A3, B4, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF
Tray Capacity: 1C: 30shts (11x17/A3) / 50shts (Other size)
2C,3C,FC: 20shts
Dimension CCR060A: 24.4x26.7x24.4 / 620x680x620mm
(WxDxH) : CCR062A: 24.4x29.8x24.4 / 620x757x620mm
Weight: CCR060A: 231lbs / 105 kg
CCR062A: 237lbs / 108 kg
Power Source: US Model: 120V 12A, 60Hz
Europe & Asia 220 - 240V 8A, 50/60Hz
Model:
Taiwan Model 110V 12A, 60Hz
(CCR060A only):
Max. Power Consumption: Less than 1.5KVA
Operation CCR060A: Hard Key Type
Panel: CCR062A: 10.4 Inch Full Colour LCD
Copy Speed Matrix

Copy Speed (CCR060A)
Copy Mode Bk copy, FC Copy, 1C Copy: 1C Copy: R
3C Copy B or G 2C Copy:
Bk+Y Bk+M
Bk+C
Normal Paper LT/A4 LEF: 25cpm 6cpm 9cpm 7cpm
LT/A4 SEF: TBA 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
LG/B4/F4 TBA 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
DLT / A3: 13cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
12x18: 13cpm 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
OHP/Thick Paper LT/A4 LEF: 5cpm 3cpm 4cpm 3.5cpm
LT/A4 SEF: 3.5cpm 1.5cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm
LG/B4/F4 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm
DLT / A3: 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
12x18 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 LT/A4 LEF: 25cpm 4cpm - -
Copy Speed (CCR062A)

Copy Mode Bk copy, FC Copy, 1C Copy: 1C Copy: R
3C Copy B or G 2C Copy:
Bk+Y Bk+M
Bk+C
Normal Paper LT/A4 LEF: 31cpm 6cpm 9cpm 7cpm
LT/A4 SEF: TBA 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
LG/B4/F4 TBA 3cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
DLT / A3: TBA 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
12x18: TBA 3cpm 4.5cpm 3.5cpm
OHP/Thick Paper LT/A4 LEF: 5cpm 3cpm 4cpm 3.5cpm
LT/A4 SEF: 3.5cpm 1.5cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm
LG/B4/F4 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm
DLT / A3: 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
12x18 2.5cpm 1.5cpm 2cpm 1.5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 LT/A4 LEF: 28cpm 4cpm - -
1st Copy Time (CCR060A/62A)

Copy Mode Bk FC 1C 1C 1C Copy: R
copy, Copy, Copy: Copy: 2C Copy:
3C Copy Blue Green Bk+Y
Bk+M
Bk+C
Normal Paper LT/A4 LEF: 8sec. 22.4sec. 19sec. 16sec. 16sec.
DLT/A3 10sec. 24sec. 21sec. 17sec. 21sec.
OHP/Thick Paper LT/A4 LEF: 23sec. 35sec. 30sec. 27sec. 27sec.
DLT/A3: 32sec. 43sec. 39sec. 35sec. 39sec.
Special Features
Copy Mode: Auto Text & Photo Separation Mode
Photo Mode
Text Mode
Special Original Mode
-Map Mode
-Highlight Pen Mode
-Inkjet Original Mode
(3 types of IJ printers can be selected.)
Photo Type Selection: In Auto Text & Photo Separation Mode and Photo Mode,
the following 3 photo types can be selected.
-Press Print Mode
-Glossy Photo Mode
-2nd Generation Mode
Paper Auto Paper Yes
Selection: Selection (APS):
Bypass Tray: Paper Type: Normal Paper Mode
Thick Paper Mode
OHP Transparency Mode
Manual Duplex: Duplex Copy Backside Mode
Paper Size: Normal Size
Custom Size
Colour Mode: Auto Colour Selection (ACS)
Full Colour
Black & White
Single Colour
Twin Colour
Single Colour: CCR060A 48colours + BK
Preset Colour 12colours (x 4 levels density selection)
User Colour Memory N/A
Scan Colour N/A
CCR062A: 108colours + BK
Preset Colour 12colours (x 4 levels density sele ction)
User Colour Memory 15colours (x 4 levels density selection)
Scan Colour N/A
Twin Colour: BK & Other colours
Red & Black
Preset colour pallet: Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Yellow Green,
Density ADS: Yes
Selection: Manual Density 9 levels
Selection:
Image Rotation Yes. (Default On)
Custom Size Original: Yes.
Energy Saver Mode: Yes. (3 levels)
Pause / Interrupt: Yes.
(Previous Copying Mode) Recall: No.
Job Program: Yes. (5 Programs)
Special Features /Cont
Reduce / Enlarge: Auto Magnification Selection: Yes

Size Magnification: No
Directional Magnification: Yes
Directional Size Magnification: Yes
Poster Mode: No
Shift / Erase / Book Copy: Centring: Yes
Cornering: Yes
Margin Adjustment: Yes (0 - 20mm /
1mm step)
Erase Centre: No
Erase Border: No
Erase Centre / Border: No
Book Copy: Yes.
Series Copy: Yes. (with ADF)
Combine 2 originals: Yes. (with ADF)
Cover Sheet Yes
User Code: Yes. (Max. 50 codes)
Auto Tray Switching: Yes.
Image / Colour Adjustment: Sharp / Soft: Yes
Contrast: Yes
Pastel Image: Yes
UCR Adjustment: Yes
Colour Separation Adjust: Yes
Auto Text & Photo Separation- Yes
-Adjustment:
Colour Balance Memory: Yes
Colour Balance Sample: No
ACC Yes
Full Image Copy: No.
Duplex Copy 1 sided originals to 2 sided copies
(CCR062AOnly): 2 sided originals to 2 sided copies
Book original to 2 sided copies
Multiple book originals to 2sided copies
Colour CCR060A Colour Conversion, Colour Erase
Creation: CCR062A Colour Conversion, Colour Erase, Colour Background
Image Creation: Mirror / Positive Negative
Scan Colour: No
Counterfeit Prevention: Bill recognition function: Yes
Invisible Marking Function: Yes
Paper Tray Policy: Full Colour Copy Mode: Max. 3 trays
(Priority Tray Registration) FAX (CCR062AOnly): Yes
Area Editing (CCR062A with Edit Option)
Area Shape : Rectangle / Right Angle Polygon / Polygon / Closed Loop /

Multi Closed Loop / Line
Input Area: Max. 500 points.
Max. No. of Areas: Max. 500 areas (by closed loop)
Max. Group: 20 groups
Area Edit: Colour Conversion, Colour Erase, Colour Background, Paint,
Positive Negative, Save Area, Delete Area, Shift, Image Adjustment
Colour Pallet: 108 colours + Black + White
FAX Features (Model CCR062A with Fax controller)

General Features
Circuit: PSTN, PBX, ISDN(Option)

Compatibility: ITU-T(CCITT) G3, G4 (Option)
Resolution: G3 Standard Mode: 8 x 3.85L/mm / 200x100dpi
Detail Mode 8 x 7.7L/mm / 200x200dpi
Fine / Superfine mode 8 x 15.4mm, 16 x 15.4 L/mm
(Option) 400x400dpi (Superfine)
G4 (Option) Standard Mode 200x100dpi
Detail Mode 200x200dpi
Superfine Mode (Option) 400x400dpi
Compression: MH, MR, MMR, SSC, JBIG (option)
Scanning Speed (A4/LT SEF): Standard Mode: 0.9sec.
Detail Mode: 0.9sec
Super Fine Mode: (Option) 3.8sec.
Modem Speed: G3: 33.6K / 31.2K / 28.8K / 26.4K / 24K / 21.66K / 19.2K /
16.8K / 14.4K / 12K / 9.6K / 7.2K / 4.8K / 2.4K bps
G4 (option):
US model: 64K bps
EU model: 56K bps
Max Transmission Speed: G3: 3 sec. (ITUT #1 chart SEF, TTI Off, Memory Transmission)
G4: 3 sec. (ITUT #1 chart SEF, TTI Off, Memory Transmission)
Max. Original Size 297 x 432 mm / 11x17
Paper Size: Inch Version 11 x 17(DLT), 8 x14(LG), 8x13(F4),
8x13(F), 8 x11(LT) LEF/SEF,
5 x8 (HLT) SEF
Metric Version A3, B4, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5 SEF
SAF Memory: 2MB (+4MB SAF Memory Option, +80MB HDD Option)
Page Memory: 2MB (+ 2MB PMU Option)
Memory Backup: One Hour
Stamp: Option
TTI/RTI: Yes
CSI: Yes
Speed Dial: Standard: 100numbers
Up to 1,000 numbers with optional 4MB SAF memory
Group Dial: Standard: Up to 9 groups
Up to 30 groups with optional 4MB SAF memory
User Program: Yes
Redial: Yes
AI Short Program: Yes
Direct FAX Number Entry: Yes
Dual Access: Yes
Auto Document: Standard: 6 documents
Up to 18 documents with optional 4MB SAF memory
Telephone Directly: Yes
Page Count: Yes
Fax General Features /Cont
Auto Reduction: Yes

Wild Cards: Yes
Summer Time: Yes
(Daylight saving time)
ID Code Programming: Yes (Four Digits)
User Function Key: Yes (Five Keys)
Energy Saver: Yes
Time Indicator: Yes
Clock Adjustment: Yes
Dry Line: Yes

Serial Broadcasting: Yes (Max. 200 numbers)
Send Later: Yes
Page Transmission: Yes
Forwarding: Option
Parallel Memory Transmission: Automatically selected
Image Rotation: Yes
Book FAX: Yes
Transmission Deadline: Yes
Closed Network (Transmission): Yes
Confidential Transmission with ID: Yes
Multi-step Transfer: Option
Double -sided Transmission: Option (with ARDF)
Reception Features

Authorized Reception: 30 patterns. Upgrade to 50 with function upgrade card
Multi Copy: Option (with 4MB SAF Memory)
Memory Lock: Yes
Special Reception Numbers: 30 numbers. Upgrade to 50 with 4MB SAF memory
Closed Network: Yes
Polling Reception: Yes (Max. 200 senders)
Poll Later: Yes (Max. 200 senders)
Polling from Memory: Yes
Multi-polling Reception: Yes
Continuous Polling: Yes
Centre Mark: Yes
Chequered Mark: Yes
2 in 1 (Two in one) Yes
Duplex Reception: Option (with 4MB SAF Memory)
Telephone Features

On Hook Dial: Yes
Pause: Yes
Pulse: Yes
Pulse / Tone Selection: Yes
Chain Dialling: Yes
Busy Tone Detection: Yes
Memory Features Matrix
Standard Memory: 2MB

FAX Feature Expander Type 450: 4MB SAF Memory
FAX Feature Expander Type 4000: 130MB HDD
2MB 2MB + 4MB 2MB + 4MB +

130MB HDD
Memory Capacity (MB) 2MB 6MB 130MB HDD
Memory Capacity (*page) 160pages 480pages 3,000pages
User Code 20 50 50
Group Dial 9 30 30
Auto-Document 6 18 18
Speed Dial 100 1,000 1,000
Memory File 200 1,000 1,000
Number of senders when 30 50 50
forwarding
Authorized reception 30 50 50
settings
Special reception numbers 30 50 50
* ITU-T No.1 Chart
Option Specification
DF64 / ARDF
Original Size: Inch Ver. 11x17(DLT), 8 x14(LG), 8 x11(LT), 5 x8 (HLT)
mm Ver. A3, A4, A5,B4, B5, B6
Original Weight: SADF / ADF mode: 11lbs - 34lbs (40 - 128g/m)
Auto reverse mode: 14lbs - 28lbs (52 - 105g/m)
Combine originals mode: 14lbs - 34lbs (52 - 128g/m)
Stack Capacity: 50 sheets with 80 g/m paper or less than 6mm
Power Consumption: DC24V from copier
Dimensions (W x D x H): 24.0x20.0x5.1(610 x 507 x 130mm)
Weight: 23.1lbs / 10.5kg
ST10 / Ten Bin Sorter Stapler

Number of bins: 10 bins + Proof Tray (Moving type)
Paper Size: Proof tray: Max.: 11x17(DLT) / A3
Min.: 5 x8 (HLT) SEF / A6 SEF
Sort / Stack: Max.: 11x17(DLT) /A3
Min. : 5 x8 (HLT)SEF / A5 SEF
Paper Weight: 14 - 43lbs (52-160g/m)
Bin Capacity: Proof Tray: All size: 100 sheets with 80g/m paper
Sort: 8 x11 / A4 or smaller size: 30 sheets with 80g/m paper
8 x14-11x17(DLT) / 25 sheets with 80g/m paper
B4-A3:
Stack: 8 x11/ A4 or smaller size: 25 sheets with 80g/m paper
8 x14- 11x17(DLT) / 20 sheets with 80g/m paper
B4-A3:
Stapling Capacity: Number of pages: 2-20 sheets with 20lbs paper (80g/m)
Paper Size: Min.: 8 x 11(LT) / B5
Max.: 11 x 17(DLT) / A3
Time: Less than 3.0 sec. / bin
Position: One position (horizontal)
Replenishment: Cartridge change
(2000 pieces/cartridge)
Paper Weight: 14-21lbs (52-80 g/m)
Power Source: DC24V from copier
Dimension (W x D x H): 15x 21.6x17.5(381 x 548 x 443mm)
Weight: 29.4lbs (13.3kg)
* ST10 cannot accept 12x18 paper. A3 full bleed copy / print is impossible when ST10 is attached.
ST32 / Twenty Bin Sorter Stapler

Number of bins: 20 bins + Proof Tray (Moving type)
Paper Size: Proof tray: Min.: 5 x8 (HLT) SEF / A6 SEF
Max.: 12x18 (A3 wide: 305mm x 457mm)
Sort / Stack: Max.: 12x18 (A3 wide: 305mm x 457mm)
Min. : 5 x8 (HLT) / A5 SEF
Bin Capacity: Proof Tray: All size: 100 sheets with 80g/m paper
Sort: 8 x11/ A4 or smaller size: 30 sheets with 80g/m paper
8 x14- 12x18/ 25 sheets with 80g/m paper
B4-A3wide:
Stack: 8 x11 / A4 or smaller size: 25 sheets with 80g/m paper
8 x14- 12x18/ 20 sheets with 80g/m paper
B4-A3wide:
Stapling Capacity: Number of pages: 2-30 sheets (80g/m) or less than
3mm
Paper Size: Max.: 11 x 17(DLT) / A3,
Min.: 8 x 11(LT) / B5
Time: Less than 3.0 sec. / bin
Position: One position (Change horizontal or
35 by manual)
Replenishment: Cartridge change
(2000 pieces/cartridge)
Power Source: DC24V from copier
Weight: 48.4lbs (22kg)
Dimension (W x D x H): 16.9x22.4x26.8(430 x 570 x 680mm)
CS160 / Three Bin Unit

Number of bins: 3 bins + Auto reverse tray
Facedown Print: Yes. (Only for printing)
Paper Size: Max.: 12 x 18 (A3 wide: 305mm x 457mm)
Min.: 5 x 8 (HLT) SEF /A6 SEF
Paper Weight: 1st tray: 14 - 42lbs (52-160g/m)
2nd & 3rd tray: 14 - 28lbs (52-105g/m)
Face-down Printing: 17 - 28lbs (64-105g/m)
st
Bin Capacity: 1 tray: 500 sheets with 8 x11/A4 & 80g/m
paper
250 sheets with 11x17(DLT)/A3 &
80g/m paper
2nd & 3rd tray: 250 sheets with 8 x11(LT)/A4 &
80g/m paper
125 sheets with 11x17(DLT)/A3 &
80g/m paper
Power Source: DC24V, 5V from copier
Weight: 30.8lbs(14kg)
PS390 / Three Tray Paper Bank

Number of trays: 500 sheets tray x 3 (with 100g/m paper)
Paper Size: Inch Ver. 11 x 17(DLT), 8 x14(LG), 8 x13(F4), 8x13(F),
mm Ver. A3, B4, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF
Paper weight: 17-28lbs (64-105g/m)
Weight: 81.4lbs (37kg)
PS380 / Two Tray Paper Bank

Number of trays: 500 sheets tray x 2 (with 100g/m paper)
Paper Size: Inch Ver. 11 x 17(DLT), 8 x14(LG), 8 x13(F4), 8x13(F),
mm Ver. A3, B4, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF
Paper we ight: 17-28lbs (64-105g/m)
Weight: 70.4lbs (32 kg)
TARGET RELIABILITY
CCR060A CCR062A
ACV (colour ratio 50%) 3,000 outputs 5,000 outputs
Colour Ratio 50% 50%
Max Duty Cycle (development) 30,000 dev. 30,000 dev.
Max CV (outputs / colour 12,000 outputs 12,000 outputs
ratio:50%)
PM Interval 60,000 dev. 60,000 dev.
EM Interval 30,000 dev. 30,000 dev.
MCBC Target (mainframe) 20,000 dev. 20,000 dev.
Unit Life 1,440K dev. or 1,440K dev. or
5 years whichever 5 years whichever
comes first comes first
Max. CV (Number of Outputs by Colour Ratio)

Outputs
35000
30000
BW
25000
20000
Target Colour Ratio
15000 Colour
10000
5000
0 Colour Ratio
0%
1 10%
2 20%3 30% 440% 50%
5 60%
6 70%
7 80%890% 100%
9 10 11
Colour ratio 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
BW 3000 2076 1500 1105 8181 6000 4286 2903 1765 812 0
0 9 0 3
Full Colour 0 2308 3750 4737 5454 6000 6429 6774 7059 7297 7500
TTL 3000 2307 1875 1579 1363 1200 1071 9677 8824 8109 7500
0 7 0 0 5 0 5
Supply Yield and Supply Interchangeability
Toner
Cartridge Capacity (4 colours): 220g / CTRG
Target Yield / CTRG:

with 8.75% chart
Black 5,142 outputs
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow 4,571 outputs
Developer
Capacity (4 colours): 380g / Bag

Target Yield:
Black: 60,000 development
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 45,000 development
Supply Interchangeability
CCR060A/ CCR060/62/ CCR100/106 CCR031/32/
62A 68 36
Black Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Cyan Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Magenta Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Yellow Toner for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Black Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Cyan Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Magenta Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
Yellow Developer for CCR060/62/68 OK OK NG NG
OK: Can be used for this machine
NG: Cannot be used for this machine
CCR060A
EU. (220V)
Product code B018-22
EDP Code 405275
CMR Code CCR060A
Model name Gestetner CS225
Nashuatec CS525
Rex Rotary CS825
1 Platen Cover No (Option)
2 Copy Tray Yes
3 Drum Yes
4 Operation panel Symbol
5 Language ROM Standard
6 Language 1.English
(Pre -installed) 2.German
3.French
4.Italian
7 Operation Instruction No
8 O/I Holder Yes
9 Favourite Key Decal Yes
Symbol
10 Inner Instruction Sheet (Non word) Yes
11 NECR No
12 User Survey Card No
13 Drum Warranty Sheet No
14 Machine Warranty Sheet No
15 Branding Plaque Yes
Gestetner / Nashuatec / Rex Rotary
16 Brand Decal on Operation panel Yes
17 Caution Decal Yes
(Prevention against Counterfeit) English
18 Instruction Procedure Sheet Yes
(Prevention against counterfeit) (English/German/ French/Spanish/ Italian)
CCR062A
EU. (220V)
Product code B017-22
EDP Code 405283
CMR Code CCR062A
Model name Gestetner CS231
Nashuatec CS531
Rex Rotary CS831
1 Platen Cover No (Option)
2 Copy Tray Yes
3 Drum Yes
4 Operation panel Symbol
5 Language ROM Standard
6 Language 1.English
(Pre-installed) 2.German
3.French
4.Italian
7 Operation Instruction No
8 O/I Holder Yes
9 Inner Instruction Sheet (Non Yes
word)
10 NECR No
11 User Survey Card No
12 Drum Warranty Sheet No
13 Machine Warranty Sheet No
14 Branding Plaque Yes
15 Brand Decal on Operation panel Yes
16 Caution Decal Yes
(Prevention against Counterfeit) English
17 Instruction Procedure Sheet Yes (English/German/ French/Spanish/ Italian)
(Prevention against counterfeit)
18 Touch Panel Pen No (Accessory of Edit Option)
Sound level
Stand-by:
Mainframe:50dB(A) or less
Full system: 54dB(A) or less
Operating:
Mainframe:68dB(A) or less
Full system: 72dB(A) or less
Ozone emission level

Average: 0.05PPM or less
Max. 0.3PPM or less
Dust level
0.1mg/m or less
Environmental standard
Model Type Standard
US Model Safety Standard UL 1950, c-UL 1950
Laser CDRH class 1
EMI FCC class B, IC class B (ICES-003 CSA C108, 8-
M1983)
Europe Model Safety Standard TUV (IEC950)
Laser IEC825/VDE0837
EMI VDE0871 class B
CE Mark EN60950, EN60825, EN55022 B, EN61000-3-2,
EN61000-3-3, EN50082-1(IEC801-2/3/4)
Asia/Pacific Model - AS/NZS3548 class B
Taiwan Model - CNS13483 (Otsu-rui)
SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION
Languages
Firmware Language List for CCR060A / 62A

Languages CCR060A CCR062A CCR062A
Firmware Firmware Fax Option
1 English Yes Yes Yes
2 French Yes Yes Yes
3 German Yes Yes Yes
4 Italian Yes Yes Yes
5 Spanish Yes Yes Yes
6 Dutch Yes Yes Yes
7 Danish Yes Yes Yes
8 Swedish Yes Yes Yes
9 Portuguese Yes Yes Yes
10 Norwegian Yes Yes Yes
11 Czech Yes Yes Yes
12 Polish Yes Yes Yes
13 Taiwan Chinese Yes No No
14 Brazilian Portuguese Yes No No
15 Russian Yes No No
Release schedule:
Languages Firmware for Release Date
1st Release English CCR060A End of August
French CCR062A (Mass-production)
German CCR062A Fax
Italian
Spanish
2nd Release Dutch CCR060A End of October
Danish CCR062A
Swedish CCR062A Fax
Portuguese
Norwegian
Czech
Polish
Brazilian
Portuguese
Russian
Taiwan Chinese
Counter Specifications:
Counter style (Development Count or Copy Count)
Style Counter Remarks
*Development Count Count number of development (scan) Same as current RICOH colour
copiers
Copy Count Count number of copied/printed pages Same as Canon colour copier
*Default Counter Style is Development Count
A) Development count
BK counter Colour counter
Full colour copy 1 click 3 clicks
BW copy 1 click
1C copy 1 click
2C copy 2 clicks
3C copy 3 clicks
Full colour print 1 click 3 clicks
BW print 1 click
1C print (CMYK format)* 1 click
2C print (CMYK format)* 2 clicks
3C print (CMYK format)* 3 clicks
1C / 2C / 3C (RGB format)* 1 click 3 clicks
FAX (Black Toner) 1 click
FAX (Cyan / Magenta Toner) 1 click
* While number of colour(s) used for print equals counter clicks under CMYK format, it is always 3 clicks for
colour and 1click for BK counted under the RGB format no matter how many colours are printed. (CMYK format
is applied to DTP type of software. All others generally use RGB format.)
B) Copy count
Colour BW Colour BW Colour BW
Copy Copy Print Print Total Total
Full colour copy 1 click 1 click
BW copy 1 click 1 click
1C copy 1 click 1 click
Full colour print 1 click 1 click
BW print 1 click 1 click
1C print 1 click 1 click
FAX (Black Toner) 1 click 1 click
FAX (Colour Toner) 1 click 1 click
Special Cases
The counter doesnt click in the following cases:
Situation Remarks
OHP Slip Sheet Copying / Printing OHP slip
sheet
Cover Sheet Mode Copying / Printing blank
cover sheet
SP Mode Copying from SP mode Not to charge customers for copies
made by service engineers. TEST
COPY is printed on whole page.
ACC Printing ACC test pattern
Recommended Paper
TBA
What Fits What

CCR060A / CCR062A - Copier/Printer
ORDERING CODE DESCRIPTION
Machines
CCR060A 6cpm/ppm Colour Copier
CCR062A 6cpm/ppm Colour Copier with duplex as standard
Peripherals
ST10 10 Bin Sorter Stapler
CS160 3 Bin Sorter
PC100 Platen Cover
PS380 2 Tray Paper Bank
PS390 3 Tray Paper Bank
CCOTF Original Tray
E310 Fiery Controller
RC210 Print Controller
CCINTH Interface Kit Type H for E310 and RC210
DMEBP64 64MB Memory
Peripherals for CCR062A Only
CC4000ED Edit Option Type 4000 (CCR062A only)

CC4000F Fax Unit Type 4000 (CCR062A only)
CC4000FE Fax Feature Expander Type 4000 (CCR062A only)
CC4000FS Fax Stamp Type 4000 (CCR062A only)
DIF450G4 ISDN Option Type 450 (CCR062A only)
DME450F Feature Expander Type 450 Memory (CCR062A only)
DME450F400 Fax 400dpi Type 450 (CCR062A only)
Supplies
CD112BLK Black Developer 700g Yield 60,000

CD112CYN Cyan Developer 700g Yield 45,000
CD112MGT Magenta Developer 700g Yield 45,000
CD112YLW Yellow Developer 700g Yield 45,000
CT114BLK Black Toner 220g Yield 5,142
CT114CYN Cyan Toner 220g Yield 4,571
CT114MGT Magenta Toner 220g Yield 4,571
CT114YLW Yellow Toner 220g Yield 4,571
CSC1035 Staples (ST10)
CSC80 Staples (ST32)
CFSOIL Silicon Oil
B0179510 COPC19 OPC Drum Yield 80,000
Note: Toner and Developer yields based on 8.75% originals.
Operator Instructions for CCR060A
CCDK060AR Arabic Quick Guide (for SASO purposes only)

CCDK60AGB English
CCDK60AD German
CCDK60AF French
CCDK60AI Italian
CCDK60AN Norwegian
CCDK60AP Portuguese
CCDK60AS Swedish
CCDK60APL Polish
Operator Instructions for CCR062A
CCDK62AGB English
CCDK62AD German
CCDK62AF French
CCDK62AI Italian
CCDK62AN Norwegian
CCDK62AP Portuguese
CCDK62AS Swedish
Operator Instructions (cont..)
Operator Instructions for Fax Option of CCR062A
CCDK62AFGB English
CCDK62AFD German
CCDK62AFF French
CCDK62AFI Italian
CCDK62AFN Norwegian
CCDK62AFP Portuguese
CCDK62AFS Swedish
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
COLOUR COPIERS
C2
CCR132 Basic Duplex Model

Nashuatec CS513
Rex Rotary CS813
Gestetner CS213
Launch Schedule
Launch Month Country of Origin
March 2001 Japan

Version 2
July, 2001
CCR132
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 3
Product Overview 4
Target Markets 7
Advanced Features 15
Option Specifications 18
Supplies 21
What Fits What 22
Competitive Comparisons 23

K:\Company\Market\NPS\CCR132.doc Page 2
CCR132
INTRODUCTION
Advanced Colour for Quality Conscious Customers
The competition in the mid-range colour copier market is very intense and, as you are no doubt
aware, the highest priority with a colour copier aimed at the professional user is quality.
To meet this requirement, the CCR132 image quality and reliability have been improved over the
CCR100/106.
By synchronising existing and newly developed technologies and by making changes to the copier
there is enhanced sharpness, smoothness and gradations in the image quality. Allied with increased
copy speed and paper capacity, the CCR132 has been adapted to meet the demanding
requirements of the production business segment and on demand print markets.
As connectivity is a key in this market place, and connectivity rates are high, there are also two new,
improved controllers one embedded and one external.
CCR132
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
CCR132 Mainframe Appearance:
600dpi / 10 bit Controller

Single Scan Interface Unit
Embedded or
External
600 dpi / 8 bit (New/Option)
Engine
Colour: 13CPM 250 sheet
B & W: 51CPM Bypass Tray
Available to feed
Extra Thick Paper
1st Copy Speed
Colour: 14 sec.
Rear View
with
Embedded I/F Unit
External Controller I/F

comes out from here
E810A + CC Int J
Embedded
Controller I/F Unit
(Option)
E710 + CC Int I
CCR132
CCR132 Operation Panel:
Printer Operation 10.4 inch Colour LCD Editing Pen

Panel Touch Panel (Enclosed with Edit Option)
CCR132
The configuration of the CCR132, with the optional peripherals, is shown graphically below:
2
1
9 Edit 8
Item :
1. Platen Cover Fits: CCR060/062/068, CCR060A/062A &

CCR100/106
2. DF64 / ARDF Fits: CCR060/062/068, CCR060A/062A &
CCR100/106
3. 20 bins sorter stapler Fits: CCR100/106
4. Original Tray Fits: CCR060/062/068, CCR060A/062A &
CCR100/106
5. Large Capacity Tray (LCT) Fits: CCR100/106
6. LCT Adaptor Fits: CCR100/106
7. Controller Interface For Embedded Controller (CC Int I)
8. Controller Interface For External Controller (CC Int J)
9. Editing Kit ROM Kit for Area Editing (CC6000ED)
CCR132
TARGET MARKETS
A) User Profile (Primary Target)

User Type: Graphic and Industrial Design Office,
Advertisement Office, etc.
Number of Employees (Users): 10 100 persons
Typical Business (Section): Planning, Advertisement, Design, Engineer,
Copy Service, etc.
Typical Applications: Colour Proof, Catalogue, Leaflet, Presentation
Materials, DM, Greeting Card, etc.
Colour Original: Photo, Drawing, Map, Catalogue, Colour
Printed Document, etc.
Computer: Macintosh, IBM PC or Compatible
Application Software: Adobe Photoshop, QuarkXpress, Adobe
Illustrator, Adobe PageMaker, MS Office, etc.
B) Target CTL Attachment Ratio: EU = 50%
C) Installation Type: Replace B & W = almost none, Addition = 40%
Replace Colour Copier = 50%, New = 10%
D) Target Model:
Replacement: NRG : CCR066, CCR066A/67A,
CCR100/106
Compete: Competitors: CLC700/800series, X5760,

X5790, CF900, CLC900 series,
X5799, CE4130, CLC1150
DocuColor 12, Sharp ARC150,
Toshiba FC15
Target Market by Copy Volume
CCR132
ACV (outputs) 10,000 outputs (colour ratio
90%)
ACV (developments) 37,000 dev.
Max. CV (outputs) 21,621 outputs (colour ratio
90%)
Max. CV (development) 80,000 dev.
Colour Ratio 90%
CCR132
Major Features, Selling Points and Benefits

Enhanced Image Quality
The CCR132 has greatly increased image quality. Its stability and durability have also been
improved. Its excellent quality level is achieved by brushing up the fundamental image processing
system as follows:
New Technologies & Improvements:
New CCD : 7300 Pixel - 600dpi / 10 bit Scanner

Mechanical noise exists in 10 bit, scanned data. The scanned data is converted into 8 bit data
and mechanical noise is removed to enhance digital information.
New Dither Pattern
New Development Method
Improved Paper Transfer Method
High Productivity
The CCR132 offers higher performance in copying and printing productivity, compared with the
CCR100/106. The engine speed is increased by 30%. Full Colour Image Rotation offers increased
productivity. With both the optional 20 bin sorter stapler and a 1500 sheet LCT, the CCR132
offers high productivity.
13 CPM / PPM in Full Colour

51 CPM / PPM in B & W
14 sec. Full Colour 1st Copy
Full Colour Image Rotation
Full Colour Image Rotation
A4 SEF to A4LEF
(LT SEF to LT LEF)
Reduction copy
from A3 to A4
(DLT to LT)
High performance without sacrificing image quality
CCR132
Product Comparison:
Item CCR100/106 CCR132

Scanner 400dpi / 10 bit 600dpi / 10 bit
Full Colour CPM / PPM 10cpm 13cpm
B & W CPM / PPM 40cpm 51cpm
1st Copy Speed in FC 16.5 sec. 14 sec.
Image Rotation Bk, 1C Full Colour
Wider Paper Capabilities:
The CCR100/106 had industry-leading paper handling capabilities. In order to increase our
advantage over the opposition, the bypass tray capacity has been increased to 250 sheets
(100g/m2).
In addition, extra thick paper (256g/m2) can also be fed from trays 2 and 3.
250 sheets
(100g/m2)
Available up to
256 g/m2,68lbs.
Paper
(Paper tray setting

should be changed in
User Tools.)
Two Types of Controller:
Two types of EFI controller will be available for the CCR132. One is an embedded type controller
and is aimed at the general office / specialized user. The other one is an external type controller and
is designed to achieve the high performance that is required by professional users.
Please see the forthcoming New Product Specifications for the E710/E810A for further information.
Note: The embedded controller and external controller cannot be attached together.
CCR132
New Twin Colour:
Twin colour is a useful function to highlight a segment of a copy. In addition to the current twin
colour capability, a new twin colour feature allows users to select the combination of the colours that
are copied.
Current Twin Colour (Black and Other Colours)
Black part on the original: Copied in Black (or other selected colour)
Other colour part on the original : Copied in other selected colour
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
Current twin colour function separates original image into black part and
colour part and changes the colour of each part.
Newly added Twin Colour (Red and Black)
Red part on the original: Copied in red

Other colour part on the original: Copied in Black
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
New twin colour function separates original image into red part and other
colour part to highlight red part on the original.
New Energy Saver Mode:
The machine enters energy saver mode automatically, to decrease power consumption, after a
certain period of non-operation. The CCR100/106 has this function, but some customers have
complained about the long recovery time.
In the case of the CCR132, the user can select the power consumption and recovery period from 3
selections.
CCR132
Priority Copy Mode for B & W Copying:
Most customers select Text Mode for B & W copying. However, the CCR100/106 could not pre-
assign copy mode (e.g. text, photo etc.) for B & W copies. With the CCR132 you can pre-assign
Text Mode for B & W Copies.
Priority Tray for Full Colour Copy Mode:
This feature enables customers to pre-select suitable types of paper. Many customers change paper
type according to the output requirements. When the output is in colour, users would choose high
quality paper. When the output is in B & W, users will probably not want to choose high quality,
high cost paper. With the CCR132, users can pre-assign any or all of the paper trays (including the
LCT), except the bypass tray, in Full Colour Copy mode.
Note: When the ACS (Auto Colour Selection) mode is selected, this feature is not
available, because the paper is already partly fed from a certain paper tray before
the CCR132 automatically selects colour mode in the ACS mode.
CCR132
General Features:
Configuration: Console
Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system
Resolution: Scan: 600dpi / 10 bit
Copy: 600dpi / 8 bit
Single Scan: Yes
Copy Size: Max.: 11 x 17 / A3 full bleed on 13 x 19
Min.: 5 x 8 / A6 (lengthwise)
Maximum Imaging Area 323mm x 473mm, 12.7 x 18.6
Paper Size:
1st tray feed (small tray): 8 x 11, 5 x 8 (S), A$, B5, A5(S)
2nd & 3rd tray feed: 11 x 17(L), 11 x 15(L), 10 x 14(L), 8 x 11,

8 x 14(L), 8 x 13(L), 8 x 10(L), 8 x 10(L),
5 x 8(S), A3(L), B4(L), A4, B5, A5(S)
Bypass tray feed: 13 x 19(L), 12 x 18(L), 11 x 17(L), 8 x 11, 5 x 8,

330mm x 483mm, 305mm x 457mm, A3(L), B4(L), A4, B5, A5,
B6(L), A6(L)
(Available custom paper size:
Length: 148 483mm, Width: 100 330mm)
First Copy Speed:
Normal Mode: FC: 14 sec. or less / B & W: 8 sec. or less
Thick Paper Mode: FC: 25 sec. or less / B & W: 17 sec. or less
Extra Thick Paper Mode: FC: 31 sec. or less / B & W: 23 sec. or less
Copy Speed:
Normal Mode: FC: 13cpm / B & W: 51cpm
OHP/Thick paper Mode: FC: 5cpm / B & W: 8cpm
Extra Thick Paper Mode: FC: 4cpm / B & W: 5cpm
ADF 1 to 1 Speed: FC: 8cpm / B & W: 31cpm

Warm-up Time: Less than 8.5 minutes
Paper Capacity: 1,750 sheets
Paper Tray: 3 x 500 sheet
Bypass Tray: 250 sheets or 32mm / 1.26 or less (100g/m2 / 28lb)
CCR132
Mainframe Specifications Continued
Copy Paper Weight:

1st paper tray: 17 28lb / 64 105g/m2
2nd & 3rd paper trays: 17 68lb / 64 256g/m2
Bypass tray: 17 68lb / 64 256g/m2
Auto duplex tray: 17 28lb / 64 105g/m2

Reproduction Ratio:
Inch Version: 7 reductions, 5 enlargements + 100%
400, 200, 155, 129, 121, 100, 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25
Metric Version: 7 reductions, 5 enlargements + 100%

400, 200, 141, 122, 115, 100, 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
Programmable Ratio: 2 programmable ratios from 25 to 400%

Non-Reproduction Area:
Leading Edge: Less than 0.16 0.08 (4mm 2mm)
Side: Less than 0.08 0.08 (2mm 2mm)
Trailing Edge: Less than 0.08 0.08 (2mm 2mm)
Three Side Full Bleed Yes

Duplex Copy: Auto
Duplex Stack: FC-20 sheets (all sizes)
B & W, 1C 2C:
A3 / DLT: 30 sheets
Less than B4: 50 sheets
Dimensions (W x D x H): 29.5 x 30.7 x 38.6 / 750mm x 780mm x 980mm
(Excluding platen cover)
Weight: Less than 245kg (545lb)
Power Source:
European Model: 220 240V 50/60Hz 8A
US Model: 120V 60Hz 16A
Taiwan Model: 110V 60Hz 16A

Maximum Power Consumption:
Less than 1.75 KVA
CCR132
Copy Speed:
Normal Paper : 64 g/m ~ 105 g/m : 17 lbs ~ 28lbs
Thick paper : More Than 105 g/m ~ 157 g/m : More Than 28lbs ~ 42lbs
Extra Thick Paper : More Than 157 g/m ~ 256 g/m : More Than 42lbs ~ 68lbs
2C copy,
FC copy 1C copy, 1C copy, 1C copy, 2C copy,
Copy Mode Bk+M
3C copy CMY G, B R Bk+C
BK+Y
Normal Paper
less than LT/A4 (S): 13cpm 51cpm 16.5cpm 13cpm 16.5cpm 13cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 6.5cpm 22.5cpm 8cpm 6.5cpm 8cpm 6.5cpm
less than 13 x 19 : 6.5cpm 22.5cpm 8cpm 6.5cpm 8cpm 6.5cpm
OHP/Thick Paper
less than LT/A4 (S): 5cpm 8cpm 6cpm 5cpm 6cpm 5cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 2.5cpm 4cpm 3cpm 2.5cpm 3cpm 2.5cpm
less than 13 x 19 : 2.5cpm 4cpm 3cpm 2.5cpm 3cpm 2.5cpm
Extra Thick Paper
less than LT/A4 (S): 4cpm 5cpm 5cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm 4.5cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 2cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm 2cpm
less than 13 x 19 : 2cpm 2.5cpm 2.5cpm 2cpm 2cpm 2cpm
ADF 1 to 1
less than LT/A4 (S): 8cpm 31cpm 8cpm 8cpm 8cpm 8cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L): 5cpm 15cpm 5cpm 5cpm 5cpm 4cpm
Auto Duplex (Normal
Paper)
13cpm 45cpm 16.5cpm 13cpm 16.5cpm 13cpm
less than LT/A4 (S):
6.5cpm 22.5cpm 8cpm 6.5cpm 8cpm 6.5cpm
less than DLT/A3 (L):
*L : lengthwise, S : sideways
First Copy Speed:

Copy Mode FC copy 1C copy; 1C copy; 1C copy; 2C copy; 2C copy;
(use platen, A4 sideways 3C copy CMY G, B R Bk+M Bk+C
from 1st tray) BK+Y
Normal Paper 14sec. 8sec. 13sec. 14sec. 13sec. 14sec.
(Pre-Scan mode)* or less or less or less or less or less or less
Thick Paper 25sec. 17sec. 23sec. 25sec. 23sec. 25sec.
or less or less or less or less or less or less
Extra Thick Paper 31sec. 23sec. 27sec. 27sec. 27sec. 27sec.
or less or less or less or less or less or less
*Because of the increase of the Bypass Tray capacity, the tray adopts the tray rise system.
Therefore, OHP mode is slower than Thick Paper mode, while the bypass tray rises.
*Copy Mode of Thick Paper and Extra Thick Paper is fed from Paper Tray.
* As a result of CPM increase, only Pre-Scan mode is available.
CCR132
Advanced Features:
Colour Mode : Auto Colour Selection (ACS) / Full Colour / Black & White
/ Single Colour / Twin Colour
Single Colour:
-User Colour: 60 colours
(15 user colours x 4 density levels)
-Pre-set Single Colour: 48 colours
(12 single colours x 4 density levels)
[Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Yellow Green, Orange,
Beige, Pink, Purple, Marine Blue]
-Scan Colour: 1 colour (With Editing Option)
Twin Colour:
-Black + Other colours
(Black can also be changed to one of single colours )
-Red + Black
(red colour extraction)
Image Density Selection: Auto(ADS)
Manual (9 steps)
Copy Mode : Auto Original Type Selection
Auto (Text/Photo Separation) Mode
(one of the following original types can be selected)
-Press Print Mode
-Glossy Photo Mode
Text Mode
Photo Mode
-Press Print Mode
-Glossy Photo Mode
Special Original Mode
-Map Mode
-Highlight Pen Mode
-Inkjet Original Mode
Paper Selection: Auto Paper Selection (APS)
Manual Paper Selection (Paper Trays 1-3)
By-pass Feed Selection
Paper Type:
-Normal Paper
-Thick Paper
-Extra Thick Paper
-OHP transparencies
-OHP Slip Sheet
Manual Duplex
-Duplex Backside
Paper Size
-Normal Size
-Custom Size
Large Capacity Tray (LCT)
CCR132
Advanced Features Continued

Full Size/AMS: Full Size: 100%
Auto Magnification Selection (AMS)
Sorting/ Stacking/ Stapling: Yes (with optional item - Sorter/ Stapler)
Image Rotation: Yes: 90 rotation (Max. A4 size)
Reduction and Enlargement: Preset R/E (7R5E+2User R/E)
Zoom (25-400%, 1% step)
Directional Size Magnification
Poster Mode
Shift / Erase / Book: Shift
Centring
Cornering
Margin Adjustment
Erase
Erasing Centre
Erasing Border
Erasing Centring and Border
(A4/A3 version: 1 - 20mm in 1mm steps)
(LT/DLT version: 0.04 - 7.87 in 0.04steps)
Book / Series
Book Original to Two 1-sided Copies
2-sided Originals to Two 1-sided Copies
Combine two Originals on One Sheet*
Combine four Originals on One Sheet*
*ADF is required
Note: The cornering function is not available for use with 13 x 19 paper. (Always shift
centre)
Cover Page Mode: Front Cover
Front & Back Cover
See below for the Cover Page Mode
Front Cover Copy Selectable: Copy/Do not copy/Do not insert

Cover Page
Back Cover back cover
Front & Back Cover Bypass Tray
Paper Feed
Inner pages Paper Tray
Colour Mode ACS or one colour mode can be set
Paper transfer Front & Back Cover Thick Paper Mode (fixed)
mode Inner pages Normal Paper Mode
*ARDF is required
Duplex: 1-sided Originals to 2-sided Copies

2-sided Originals to 2-sided Copies
Book Original to 2-sided Copies
Multiple (Book Original) to 2-sided Copies
Colour Balance: Colour Balance Adjustment
Colour Balance Memory
Colour Balance Sample
CCR132
Advanced Features Continued

Colour Creation: Colour Conversion
Colour Erase
Colour Background
Paint*
Colour Line*
Frame Line*
*Available only with Area Editing Option.
Image Creation: Outline Image
Positive / Negative Image
Shadow Image (Block/ Offset)
Mirror Image
Slanted Image
Repeat Image
Type Mask
Image Adjustment: Sharp/ Soft
Contrast
Background Density Control
Pastel
UCR Adjustment
A.C.S. Sensitivity Level
Auto Text & Photo Sensitivity
User Colour Memory: Max 15 colours
Area Editing:
Are a Shape: Rectangle / Right Angle Polygon / Polygon / Closed Loop
/ Multi-Closed Loop / Line
Input Area: Max. 500 points
Maximum No. of Areas: 500 areas (500 points)
Up to 30 points per one area
Maximum Groups: 20 groups
Colour Image Overlay:
Area Image Overlay Yes Max. Original Size : A4 / LT
Full Image Overlay No
Opacity No
Text Image Overlay: No
Auto Colour
Calibration (ACC): Yes (Copy / Print)
Job Programme: Yes (5 Programs)
Special Mode Programme: Yes (2 Programs)
Recall: Yes
Custom Size Original: Yes
Energy Saver Mode: Yes (3 Levels)
User Code: Yes (Max. 200 codes)
Auto Tray Switching: Yes
Full Image Copy: Yes
Counterfeit Prevention: Bill recognition function
Invisible Marking Function
CCR132
Option Specifications
DF64 / ARDF :
Original Size: 11x17, 8 x14, 8 x11, 5 x8

(A3, A4, A5,B4, B5, B6)
Original Weight: SADF / ADF mode: 11lbs - 34lbs (40 - 128g/m)
Auto reverse mode: 14lbs - 28lbs (52 - 105g/m)
Combine originals mode: 14lbs - 34lbs (52 - 128g/m)
Stack Capacity: 50 sheets with 80 g/m paper or less than 6mm
Power Consumption: DC-24V from copier
Dimensions (W x D x H): 24.0 x 20.0 x 5.1 (610 x 507 x 130mm)
Weight: Less than 23.1 lbs. /10.5kg
ST33 / 20 Bin Sorter Stapler:
Number of bins: 20 bins + Proof Tray

Paper Size: Proof tray: Max.: 13 x 19
Min.: 5 x 8 /A6
Sort / Stack: Max.: 13 x 19
Min.: 5 x 8 / A5 (lengthwise)
Paper Weight: Proof tray: 17 - 42 lbs. / 64 - 157 g/m
Sort / Stack: 17 - 68 lbs. / 64 - 256 g/m
Bin Capacity: Proof Tray: 250 sheets ( 80g/m / 20 lbs. paper)
Sort /Stack: 50 sheets / bin (80g/m / 20 lbs. paper)
Stapling Capacity:
Number of pages: 2-50 sheets. (80g/m , 20 lbs.)
Paper Size: Max.: 13 x 19

Min.: 8 x 11 /B5
Paper Weight: 17-68lbs (64 - 256 g/m)
Time: Less than 2.5 sec. / bin (one position)
Less than 3.5 sec. / bin (two positions)
Position: Three positions
Replenishment: Cartridge change (5000 pieces/cartridge)
Power Source: DC-24V from copier mainframe
Dimension (W x D x H): 600 x 615 x 980mm (23.7 x 24.3 x 38.6)
Weight: 65kg (143 lbs.)
CCR132
RT36 / Large Capacity Tray (LCT):
Paper size: A4(LEF),LT(LEF)

Paper weight: 60-105g/m, 20-28lbs
Paper capacity: 1,500 sheets
Noise (Power level): Operating: less than 71dB (full system)
Stand-by: less than 40dB (full system)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 390 x 500 x 390mm, 15.4x19.7x15.4
Weight: Less than 17 Kg, 37.5lbs.
Remarks: LCT Adaptor is required for installation.
CCR132
Targeted Reliability:
CCR132
ACV (colour ratio 80%) 10,000 outputs
Colour Ratio 80%
Max CV (development) 80,000 dev.
Max CV (outputs / colour 23,528 outputs
ratio:80%)
PM Interval 80,000 dev.
EM Interval 60,000 dev.
MCBC Target (mainframe) 34,400 dev.
Unit Life 3,840K dev. or
5 years whichever comes first
Max. CV (Number of Outputs by Colour Ratio)
80,000
70,000 B&W
Target Colour Ratio Full Colour
60,000
50,000
40,000
30,000
20,000
10,000
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Colour Ratio 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Full Colour 0 6,154 10,000 12,632 14,546 16,000 17,143 18,065 18,824 19,459 20,000
B&W 80,000 55,384 40,000 29,474 21,818 16,000 11,428 7,740 4,704 2,164 0
Total 80,000 61,538 50,000 42,106 36,364 32,000 28,571 25,805 23,528 21,623 20,000
CCR132
Supplies
Toner:
Cartridge Capacity (4 colours): 270g / CTRG
Target Yield / CTRG:
With 5% chart With 6% chart With 8.75%

chart
Cyan/ Magenta/ Yellow/ Black 10,000 outputs 8,333 outputs 5,714 outputs
Developer:
Capacity (4 colours): 700g / Bag
Target Yield:
Black: 60,000 development

Cyan/Magenta/Yellow: 48,000 development
Supply Interchangeability:
CCR132 CCR060A/062A CCR100/106 CCR067/A

Black Toner for CCR132 OK N OK N
Cyan Toner for CCR132 OK N OK N
Magenta Toner for CCR132 OK N OK N
Yellow Toner for CCR132 OK N OK N
Black Developer for CCR132 OK N OK N
Cyan Developer for CCR132 OK N OK N
Magenta Developer for CCR132 OK N OK N
Yellow Developer for CCR132 OK N OK N
OK: Can be used for this machine

N: Cannot be used for this machine
CCR132
What Fits What

ORDERING CODE DESCRIPTION
Machine
CCR132 Basic auto duplex colour copier
Peripherals
CC6000ED Edit option
PC100 Platen cover
DF64 ARDF
CCOTF Original tray
RT36 Large capacity tray 1,500 sheets
ADAPTYPEA Large capacity tray adaptor
ST33 20 bin sorter/stapler
E710 / E810A Controller
CCINTI Controller Interface For E710
CCINTJ Controller Interface for E810A
Language Rom TBA
Supplies
CD113BLK Black developer 700g Yield 60,000
CD113CYN Cyan developer 700g Yield 45,000
CD113MGT Magenta developer 700g Yield 45,000
CD113YLW Yellow developer 700g Yield 45,000
CT115BLK Black toner 270g Yield 5,714
CT115CYN Cyan toner 270g Yield 5,714
CT115MGT Magenta toner 270g Yield 5,714
CT115YLW Yellow toner 270g Yield 5,714
B0239510 COPC20 OPC drum Yield 80,000
TBA Silicon oil
NOTE: Toner yields based on 8.75% originals
CCDK106 D German Decals

CCDK106 F French Decals
CCDK106 I Italian Decals
CCDK106P Portuguese Decals
CCDK106N Norwegian Decals
CCDK106GB English Decals
CCDK106S Swedish Decals
CCR132
Competitive Comparisons
Specification CCR100/106 CCR132 CLC 1120/CLC1150 DocuColor 12
Resolution Scan 400dpi / 10 Bit 600dpi / 10 Bit 400dpi 400dpi
Copy True 600 x 600dpi True 600 x 600dpi Equivalent 800 x 400dpi True 600 x 600dpi
Gradation 256 gradations 256 gradations 256 gradations 256 gradations
Max. Original Size A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17"
13" x 19", 13" x 19", 12" X 18", 12.6" X 18",
Paper Size Max.
330mm x 483mm 330mm x 483mm 305 X 457.2 mm 320 X 457.2 mm
Min. A6 A6 A6 A6
Max. Copy Size A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17"
A3 Full Bleed Yes Yes Yes Yes
Crop Mark Yes Yes No No
Paper Weight
64-105 g/m2 1st Tray 64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2 1st Tray 64-105 g/m2
Paper Tray
/17-28 lb /17-28 lb /17-28 lb /17-28 lb
2-3 Tray 64-256 g/m2 / 17- 2-4tray 64-128 g/m2
68 lb /16-32 lb
64-256 g/m2 64-256 g/m2 64-256 g/m2
By-pass Tray 64-209 g/m2
/ 17-68 lb / 17-68 lb / 17-68 lb
64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2 64-128 g/m2
LCT (Option)
/17-28 lb /17-28 lb /17-28 lb /16-32 lb
64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2
Auto Duplex Trayless
/17-28 lb /17-28 lb /17-28 lb
Paper Capacity CLC 1120
3 X 500 + 50 3 X 500 + 250 3 X 550 + 250 1X 560 + 3 X 620 + 150
Standard
= 1550 = 1750 = 1900 = 2570
1550 + 1500(LCT) 1900 + 2500(LCT) 2570 + 2000(LCT)
Max. 1750 + 1500(LCT) =3250
=3050 = 4400 = 4570
CLC1150
Standard 2 X 550 + 250 = 1350
Max. 1350 + 2500 = 3850
Copy Speed FC 10cpm 13cpm 11cpm 12.5cpm
B&W 40cpm 51cpm 42cpm 50cpm
1st Copy Speed
16.5 sec. 14.0 sec. or less 18.1 sec. 14.1 sec.
FC
B&W 8.0 sec. 8.0 sec. or less 9.6 sec. 5.8 sec.
Image Rotation Yes (1C) Yes (Full Colour) No Yes (Full Colour)
Single Scan Yes Yes No Yes
Warm-up Time 8.5 min 8.5 min 8.5 min 8.5 min
1120: Manual
Duplex Auto Auto Auto (Trayless) /Option
1150: Auto
Dimensions 730 x 780 x 980 (mm) 750 x 780 x 980 (mm) 768 x 774 x 1000 (mm) 620 x 788 x 1038 (mm)
(W x D x H) 28.7 x 30.7 x 38.6 29.5 x 30.7 x 38.6 30.2 x 30.5 x 39.4 24.4 x 31 x 40.9
CCR132
Competitive Comparisons Continued
CLC
Specification CCR100/106 CCR132 DocuColor 12
1120/CLC1150
Operation Panel Colour LCD Colour LCD B & W LCD B & W LCD
Main Options ARDF ARDF Editor Board 10 bin Mailbox / Sorter
20 bin S/S 20 bin S/S 20 bin S/S Platen Conversion Kit
FPU LCT FPU Editing Pad
LCT Editing Kit Side Paper Deck High Capacity Feeder
CCR132
Specification CCR132 Toshiba FC-15 Sharp AR-C150

Resolution Scan 600dpi / 10 Bit 600dpi / 10 Bit 600dpi
Copy True 600 x 600dpi Equivalent 9,600 x 600dpi True 600 x 600dpi
Gradation 256 gradations 256 gradations 256 gradations
Max. Original Size A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17"
Paper Size 13" x 19",
12" x 18", 305 x 457mm 12" x 18", 305 x 457 mm
Max. 330mm x 483mm
Min. A6 A6 A6
Max Copy Size A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 19"
A3 Full Bleed Yes Yes Yes
Crop Mark Yes No No
Paper Weight
1st Tray 64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2 60-105 g/m2
Paper Tray
/17-28 lb /17-28 lb /16-28 lb
2-3 Tray 64-256 g/m2
/ 17-68 lb
64-256 g/m2 64-209 g/m2 60-200 g/m2
By-pass Tray
/ 17-68 lb / 17-55 lb / 16-53 lb
64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2
LCT (Option) No Information
/17-28 lb /17-28 lb
64-105 g/m2 64-80 g/m2 60-105 g/m2
Auto Duplex
/17-28 lb / 17-21 lb /16-28 lb (Stock-less)
Paper Capacity
3 x 500 + 250 = 1750 3 x 600 + 50 = 1850 3 x 500 + 50 =1550
Standard
Max. 1750 + 1500 =3250 1850 + 600 + 1500 = 3950 4 x 500 + 50 + 3000 = 5050
Engine Speed FC 13cpm 15cpm / 18ppm 15cpm
B & W 51cpm 22cpm / 25ppm 25cpm
1st Copy Speed FC 14.0 sec. or less 10.3 sec. 10.5 sec.
B & W 8.0 sec. or less 10.3 sec. 19.5 sec.
Image Rotation Yes (Full Colour) No No
Yes (Scan Once Print
Single Scan Yes Yes
Many)
Warm-up Time 8.5 min 9 min 3.3 min.
Duplex Auto Auto (Option) Auto (Stock-less)/Option
Dimensions 750 x 780 x 980 (mm) 845 x 750 x 1000 (mm) 750 x 695 x 1060 (mm)
(W x D x H) 29.5 x 30.7 x 38.6 33.3 x 29.6 x 39.4 29.5 x 27.4 x 41.7
Operation Panel Colour LCD B & W LCD B & W LCD
Main Options ARDF ARDF 20 bin S/S
20 bin S/S 20 bin S/S ARDF
LCT (1500 sheets) LCT (1500 sheets) LCT (3000 sheets)
Editing Kit Auto Duplex Unit
CCR132

Specification CCR132 Toshiba FC-22 Sharp AR-C250
Resolution Scan 600dpi / 10 Bit 600dpi / 10 Bit 600dpi
Equivalent
Copy True 600 x 600dpi True 600 x 600dpi
9,600 x 600dpi
Gradation 256 gradations 256 gradations 256 gradations
Max. Original Size A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17"
Paper Size
13" x 19", 330mm x 483mm 12" x 18", 305 x 457 mm 12" x 18", 305 x 457 mm
Max.
Min. A6 A6 A6
Max Copy Size A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 17" A3, 11" x 19"
A3 Full Bleed Yes Yes Yes
Crop Mark Yes No No
Paper Weight
1st Tray 64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2 60-105 g/m2
Paper Tray
/17-28 lb /17-28 lb /16-28 lb
2-3 Tray 64-256 g/m2
/ 17-68 lb
64-256 g/m2 64-209 g/m2 60-200 g/m2
By-pass Tray
/ 17-68 lb / 17-55 lb / 16-53 lb
64-105 g/m2 64-105 g/m2
LCT (Option) No Information
/17-28 lb /17-28 lb
64-105 g/m2 64-80 g/m2 60-105 g/m2
Auto Duplex
/17-28 lb / 17-21 lb /16-28 lb (Stock-less)
Paper Capacity
3 x 500 + 250 = 1750 3 x 600 + 50 = 1850 3 x 500 + 50 =1550
Standard
Max. 1750 + 1500 =3250 1850 + 600+ 1500 = 3950 4 x 500 + 50 + 3000 = 5050
Engine Speed FC 13cpm 22cpm / 24ppm 25cpm
B & W 51cpm 22cpm / 24ppm 25cpm
1st Copy Speed FC 14.0 sec. or less 10.3 sec. 10.2 sec.
B & W 8.0 sec. or less 10.3 sec. 19.5 sec.
Image Rotation Yes (Full Colour) No No
Yes (Scan Once Print
Single Scan Yes Yes (Scan Once Print Many)
Many)
Warm-up Time 8.5 min 9 min 5.5 min.
Duplex Auto Auto (Option) Auto (Stock-less)/Option
Dimensions 750 x 780 x 980 (mm) 845 x 750 x 1000 (mm) 750 x 695 x 1060 (mm)
(W x D x H) 29.5 x 30.7 x 38.6 33.3 x 29.6 x 39.4 29.5 x 27.4 x 41.7
Operation Panel Colour LCD B & W LCD Colour LCD
Main Options ARDF ARDF 20 bin S/S
20 bin S/S 20 bin S/S ARDF
LCT (1500 sheets) LCT (1500 sheets) LCT (3000 sheets)
Editing Kit Auto Duplex Unit
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
COLOUR COPIER/MONO MFP

WITH COLOUR
CCR081/101
Nashuatec DSc224/232
Rex Rotary DSc224/232
Gestetner DSc224/232
Launch Schedule
Launch Month Country of Origin

February 2003 Japan

Date Created: October 2002
Version 4
February 2003
CCR081/101
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Product Specifications:
o Mainframe 35
o Fax 40
o Printer 43
o Print Options 47
o Scanner 53
o External Options 57
Target Reliability 59
Supply Yield & Interchangeability 60
What Fits What 63
Competitive Information 65

K:\Company\Market\NPS\CCR081_101.doc 1
CCR081/101
INTRODUCTION
The CCR081/101 are strategic products for the future of our colour business. As colour spreads
into the office environment, these models will be our first MFPs with colour capability and are set
to take the general office market by storm.
Although the machines are designed as mono MFPs with colour capability, for the general office,
they have been classified as colour copiers (hence the CCR names) for logistical reasons.
The CCR081/101 start as stand-alone copiers and users can then add the options that turn the copier
into a fully functional MFP (print / scan and fax).
The CCR081/101 have not been designed to be used in a professional colour environment, although
copy quality is targeted to be higher than that of the DSc38 with copy option.
These machines are targeted to replace mono MFPs in the office environment (with their 24/32cpm
mono speeds) with the added benefit of having either 8/10cpm full colour, plus all the benefits
normally associated with a mono MFP (sorting, printing, document server etc.).
The colour document server is fully functional for printing, copying, scanning and faxing and the
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) and 128MB RAM are standard with both machines.
The target market will be the general office and these models will enable us to differentiate
ourselves from the opposition, by being able to offer an MFP with colour capability at a competitive
price.
The target for positioning these products is to get the purchase price close enough to that of the
mono equivalent machines so that the added feature of colour balances out the price difference and
is acceptable to the market place.
Of course, another important consideration is the Cost Per Page (CPP), especially for mono and,
with cooperation between NRG and the distribution channel on this subject, this will probably be
the key to their success.
CCR081/101
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Mainframe:
The appearance of the machine is very similar to the latest Black & White (BW) MFPs.
ARDF
Internal Tray
1000sheet Finisher
Auto-Duplex Unit
250sheet x 2
standard paper
500sheet x 2
Adjustment Table Paper Bank Unit
Operation Panel:
The operation panel of the CCR081/101 is similar to the DMR22A/27A/35A/45A. Most of the
Copy / Fax / Printer operations can be done on the Touch Panel Screen.
Application Key Colour Mode Monochrome Touch Panel Sample Copy Key
Key Screen (85 x 215mm)
CCR081/101
Product Concept:
A fully functional networkable MFP with colour capability. A DMR22A/27A with

colour.
By introducing the CCR081/101, NRG aims to dramatically increase the use of colour in the
general office by adding colour capability to an MFP that fits into the 20-35cpm segment of the
market.
In order to be able to successfully replace BW MFPs, the CCR081/101 has been equipped with the
latest digital features, including document server, network print/scan functionality and fax.
Black to Colour conversion in the 20-35cpm copier market.
According to the result of a telephone survey of segment 2 to 5 BW MFP users, about 60% of
general office customers have requirements for colour printing and 46% have colour copying needs.
In total, about 68% of general office users have requirements for colour output.
The CCR081/101 offers an all-in-one network solution to meet the requirements of general office
users who need a high performance BW MFP and occasional high quality colour output.
There is a large potential for colour in the general office market. The CCR081/101 offers the best
solution for occasional colour users in the general office.
Increase Market Share, by replacing competitors B/W MIF:
The Ricoh group of companies, which includes NRG, are leaders in the European market for digital
MFPs and have increased market share by converting analogue to digital. The digital BW MFP
market becomes more competitive all the time and the differentiation of our products becomes more
and more difficult.
With the introduction of colour to our already strong MFP range, NRG hope to increase market
share by aggressively attacking competitors BW MFP MIF.
CCR081/101 Competitors 20-35cpm Line-up

35cpm BW MFP The CCR081/101
33cpm BW MFP FC MFP
offers a copying
solution equivalent
32cpm CCR101 to the latest BW 28cpm BW MFP
MFP. FC MFP
Adding the
27cpm BW MFP 22cpm BW MFP
CCR081/101 to
our BW MFP line-
up is a very strong Conventional colour MFPs offer a poor BW
24cpm CCR081 competitive copying function and the machine price is too
advantage. high for occasional colour users.
Realistically, they are colour-dedicated
22cpm BW MFP machines
CCR081/101
Product Positioning:
BW
cpm
DMR35 DMR35A 32 / 10cpm
35cpm CCR101
CCR062A DMR32
31 / 6cpm 32cpm
CCR062
DMR27 DMR27A
27cpm
CCR060A
CCR081
25 / 6cpm
24 / 8cpm
DMR22 DMR22A
22cpm
CCR060
2000 2001 2002 (Year)
The CCR081/101 is a replacement for the CCR060A/062A, for general office users.
The CCR060A will be continued, with the E310, for small professional users.
There is expected to be a small shift of sales from the DMR22A/27A/35A to the
CCR081/101.
Target User Classification:

Centralized M2-L2
(More than 100) 100-
Division M1
(50-100) 30-99
Work Group
Target of CCR081/101
(20-30)
S2
Small Work Group
5-29
(3-10)
Business Personal S1 1-4
CCR081/101
Target User Profile:
Business Type: Primary Target: General Office

Secondary Target *: Small, specialized business office *
Small production office *
Number of Employees: S2 M1 (5-99)
Number of Users: Small work group work group (3-30)
Replacement Target: BW Products 20-35cpm B/W Copier
(B to C Conversion)
Full Colour (FC) Products *: FC MFP with Low Colour Ratio (lower
than 50%):
NRG: Colour Copiers
Ricoh: Colour Copiers
Canon: CLC320 / 700/800/CP660
XEROX: Office 6 / X5750 / X579x
* For customers that need EFI utility, 600dpi / 8bit image quality and area editing functions,
the CCR060A is recommended.
M1 = Medium segment 1: 30 99 users

M2 = Medium segment 2: 100+ users
CCR081/101
External Option Layout:
ARDF Platen Cover

500-sheet
Finisher Interchange Unit
Bridge Unit
Auto Duplex Unit

Shift Tray
1 Bin Tray Bypass Tray
1,000-sheet
Finisher
2000-sheet 1,000-sheet
LCIT Paper Bank Unit
Options:
Item Product Comment

Name
Original Platen Cover PC120 New Item
Feeding ARDF DF75 Common with DMR22A/27A
Auto reverse document feeder. Feeds the originals
from top page.
Paper 500sheet x 2 PS510 New Item
Feeding Paper Bank Paper bank unit with 2 x 500 sheets trays.
1,000sheet x 2 PS520 New Item
LCIT Tandem style LCIT with 2 x 1,000 sheets.
Bypass Tray BT 1232 New Item
Bypass tray with 100-sheet capacity.
Paper Interchange DIF1232IU New Item
Transfer Unit Separate paper feed to output tray or Duplex unit.
Must be installed with Duplex unit or 1-Bin tray.
Bridge Unit DIF1232BU New Item
Optional paper path unit to transfer paper from
internal tray exit to finisher entrance.
Must be installed with finisher.
Duplex Unit AD430 New Item
Non-stack system
Must be installed with interchange unit.
CCR081/101
Item Product Name Comment

Finishing 1,000 sheets SR790 Common with DMR22A/27A
finisher Finisher with 1,000-sheet tray. 2-position staple.
Bridge unit & Adjustment table must be installed
together.
Adjustment DIF1232AT New Item
Table Adjust the height of SR790 to fit CCR081/101.
Necessary to install SR790 finisher
500-sheets SR830 New Item
finisher Finisher with 500-sheet tray. 1 position staple.
Bridge unit must be installed together.
1 bin Tray PT290 New Item
Separate outputs by application.
Must be installed with interchange unit.
Shift Tray DIF1232SS New Item
Attached to internal copy tray for electronic
sorting
Fax Fax Unit DIF1232F New Item
33.6kbps Fax option.
J-BIG Option DME185J-F Common with DMR35A/45A
Enhances fax features.
G4 Unit DIF1232G4 New Item
G4 Option
Optional G3 DIF1232G3 New Item
Unit Additional G3 option.
Printer / DIF1232S New Item
Scanner Unit Upgrades machine to colour printer and scanner.
NIC is included.
Post Script 3 DIF1232PS3 New Item
Genuine Post Script Level 3 supported
Wireless LAN DIF1232WL Common with DMR60/75
Interface
IEEE 1394 DIF4510FW Common with PCR10, PCR16, DMR60/75
Interface
Additional 128MB RAM DIMM128 Common with PCR10, PCR16, DMR60/75.
Memory 128MB or 256MB memory is necessary to install
printer/scanner function (see Option & Function
List)
256MB RAM DIMM256 Common with PCR10, PCR16, DMR60/75.
Other Key Counter DIF1232KCB New Item
Bracket Millennium Grey
CCR081/101
Option Correlation:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1.Platen Cover X
2.ARDF X
3.Bypass Tray
4.Paper Bank X
5.LCIT X
6.Shift Tray X X X
7.Bridge Unit X
8.500 Finisher X M X
9.1000 Finisher M M X M X M
10.Adjustment Table M M M
11.Interchange Unit
12.Duplex Unit M
13.Inner 1 bin Unit M
14.Fax Unit
15.JBIG M
16.G3 Unit M
17.G4 Unit M
18.Handset M
19.Printer / Scanner
20.Post Script 3 M
21.Wireless LAN M X
22.1394 Interface M X
23.Key Counter

CCR081/101
MAJOR FEATURES, SELLING POINTS AND BENEFITS
The CCR081/101 has many beneficial features for the general office:
High Productivity
Copy Speed (CCR081/101): 8/24cpm / 10/32cpm
BW 1st Copy Speed; 7.8sec.
FC 1st Copy Speed: 18.0sec.
Warm Up time: 99sec.
Paper Handling Function Expandability

CCR081/101 supports superior paper handling, Super G3 Fax
which is equivalent to latest BW MFP. LAN Fax
Finisher Network Colour Printer
Stack-less Auto Duplex Network Colour Scanner
Paper Handling Colour Scan to e-mail
Memory Copy Features

Scan Once Copy Many
Colour Document Server Electronic Sorting
Sample Copy
Colour document server functions. BW & FC
Job Preset
documents, from different applications, can be
Combine Copy
stored in 40GB HDD for reuse.
Colour Stamp
Easy to Use Compact Design

The operation of the CCR081/101 is almost the Dimension: 550x670x781mm
same as the DMR22A/27A/35A. If customer has Wingless design
BW copier and CCR081/101 in the same office,
there is no need to learn a new operation
procedure.
High Image Quality

CCR081/101s 600dpi/2bit engine creates
clear and stable reproduction image quality.
Variety of Copy mode
Auto Colour Calibration
CCR081/101
Copying Features:
High Productivity:
The CCR081/101 has productive copying speeds in both BW and FC mode.
CCR081 CCR101 DMR22/ DMR22A/ CCR060A Canon XEROX

27 27A /062A CP680 DC2006
BW 1st 7.8sec. 7.8sec. 4.9sec. 4.9sec. 8.0sec. 18.0sec 11.5sec.
Copy .
Speed
FC 1st 18.0sec. 18.0sec. - - 22.4sec. 34.0sec 26.8sec.
Copy .
Speed
BW Copy 24cpm 32cpm 22cpm/ 22cpm/ 25cpm/ 24cpm 26cpm
Speed 27cpm 27cpm 31cpm
FC Copy 8cpm 10cpm - - 6cpm 6cpm 6cpm
Speed
Scan Once Copy Many:
Both in BW and FC mode, the machines scans the original only once, stores the image into the
memory and makes multiple copies. The user can pick up the originals when scanning finishes,
even though the copying is still in process.
BW
BW Make Multiple Copies
Scan Original Once,

both in BW & FC mode
FC
FC Make Multiple Copies
CCR081/101 CCR060A/062A CCR132

BW Number of Scans Once per Once per Original Once per
Copy Original Original
Mode Store Scanned Max. 800 pages 1 page 1 page
Image (A4 size) (Any size) (Any size)
FC Copy Number of Scans Once per 4 times (CMYK) Once per
Mode Original per original Original
Store Scanned Max. 200 pages N/A 1 page
Image (A4 size) (Any size)
CCR081/101
Electronic Sorting:
Electronic sorting has not been available in conventional colour MFPs, due to the limitation of
memory capacity. The CCR081/101 is equipped with 128MB RAM and 40GB Hard Disk Drive
(HDD) as standard. Up to 800 pages of monochrome images (200 page sin full colour) can be
stored on the HDD. The electronic sorting function enables users to make multiple sets of copies
without being limited by the number of sorter bins (common in competitors colour MFPs).
Rotate Sort
Shift Sort
(Optional shift tray or finisher is required)
Finisher:
The CCR081/101 supports finishing in both copying* and printing modes.
The same 500-sheet and 1,000-sheet finisher is available for the CCR081/101 as for the
DMR22A/27A.
* Minoltas CF2001/1501 and Canons IRC2050/2100 have finisher options but they do not work in
copying mode. There is a mechanical sorter option for customers that need the collating function in
copying mode but the finisher and the mechanical sorter cannot be installed together.
SR790 (1,000-sheet Finisher) and SR830 (500-

sheet Finisher) are available for the
CCR081/101.
User Benefits
o No limitation by number of sort bins
o Easy to take out complete sets
o Copies complete one by one
o No need to remove copies left on the bin
before the next sorting job
CCR081/101
Stack Less / Tray Less Auto Duplex:
The CCR062A and CCR132 are equipped with standard duplex trays and the number of duplex
copies is limited by the tray capacity (normally 20 sheets in FC).
The tray less duplex function works in the same way as on our existing mono MFPs.
User Benefits
o High Productivity
o No limitation by tray capacity
o Easy to clear paper jams
o No need to count originals
Optional Auto Duplex Unit
Sample Copy:
The sample copy function prevents miscopies and saves money. When the sample copy button is
pushed, the machine makes one set (sample copy) and the user can then check the copy and then
make the remainder of the sets.
Job Preset:
The CCR081/101 has a job preset function. One copy job can be preset. If a long copy job is in
progress, the machine can scan in the next copy jobs originals and start copying after the job in
progress has finished.
CCR060A/062A The CCR060A/062A doesnt have memory copy capability.

The user has to wait for the ongoing job to finish.
1st Job 2nd Job
Scan Scan
Making Copies Making Copies
CCR081/101 The machine scans the originals of the 2nd job during the
current copy job.
1st Job 2nd Job
Scan Scan 2nd job
Making Copies Making Copies
CCR081/101
Warm Up Time:
The CCR081/101s warm up time is much faster than conventional colour machines. This fast
warm up speed is a result of having a belt fusing mechanism.
CCR081/101 CCR060A/062A DMR22A/27A Canon XEROX MINOLTA

CP680 DC2006 CF1501
Warm 99sec. 270sec. 15sec. 390sec. 300sec. 300sec.
Up Time
Copy Modes:
The CCR081/101 has a variety of copy modes, to ensure ease of use and high reproduction quality.
The Auto Colour Selection (ACS) setting is beneficial when copying originals that have mixed
colour and BW pages. The machine automatically selects between BW and FC, without doing a
pre-scan.
CCR081/101s Copy Modes:

Colour Mode o Auto Colour Selection
o Full Colour Mode
o Black and White (Default)
o Single Colour Mode
o Twin Colour Mode *
Copy Mode o Auto Photo / Text Separation Mode
(Default)
o Photo Mode
o Text Mode
o Map Mode
o Pale Mode
o Generation
Photo Type o Glossy Photo
(When selecting Auto Photo/Text or Photo Mode) o Printed Photo (Default)
o Copied Photo
Twin Colour Mode:
* Twin Colour Mode is useful to highlight coloured text in a document quickly and easily. This
function is the same as on the CCR060A/062A/132 and offers two types of twin colour mode, as
below:
CCR081/101
Black and Other Colour (Default):
The original image is separated into a black part and an other colour part. Each part is copied
in the selected colour:
Black part on the original: Copied in selected colour

Other Colour part on the original: Copied in selected colour
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
Red and Black:
The original image is separated into a red part and an other colour part. The red part is copied
in red and the other colour part is copied in black. This mode is good for making copies of BW
originals with red stamps or corrections written in red pen:
Red part on the original: Copied as Red (fixed)

Other Colour part on the original: Copied as Black (fixed)
Original Copy
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
ABCABC ABCABC
High Image Quality:
The CCR081/101 offer high image quality, to meet office users requirements. Scan/print
resolution is as below:
Scan Resolution: True 600dpi / 8bit
Print Resolution: True 600dpi / 2bit
Auto Colour Calibration (ACC):
Customers can correct the colour balance themselves, with the easy to use ACC function. The
machine automatically adjusts the density of all four colours (Cyan / Magenta / Yellow / Black) by
reading the test pattern and calibrating itself.
2) Scan Test Pattern
3) Machine calibrates CMYK density

and automatically adjusts them.
1) Print Test Pattern
CCR081/101
Compactness:
The CCR081/101 has a compact, space-saving design. The size of the CCR081/101 is similar to
the mono MFPs and the wingless design is suited to the office environment.
Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight
CCR081/101 550 x 670 x 781 mm 80kg
CCR060A 620 x 680 x 620 mm 108kg
CCR062A 620 x 744 x 620 mm 111kg
DMR22A/27A 550 x 604 x 709 mm 62kg
DMR35A/45A 670 x 650 x 720 mm 78kg
Canon CP680 650 x 781 x 1,074mm 158kg
XEROX DC2006 650 x 730 x 1,160 mm 164kg
Ease of Use Will Assist with Black & White to Colour Conversion:
The CCR081/101s operation panel is very similar to the DMR22A/27A/35A/45A and its
functionality is almost the same. If the customers currently use our BW machines, there will be
minimum training needed for the CCR081/101.
The operation of the copier, printer, scanner, fax and document server can be made on the large,
touch panel screen.
Paper Handling:
The CCR081/101 has a large paper handling capacity. OHP transparencies can be fed from the 1st
and 2nd trays and envelopes can be fed from the bypass tray.
INPUT & OUTPUT Capacity
Inner 1 Bin Tray Multi Bypass Tray (Option):

(Option): 125 100 sheets
sheets Standard Paper Tray: Max 2,600 sheets
Standard: 500 250 sheets x 2
sheets
Shift Tray: 250 Paper Bank Unit (Option): 500 sheets x 2
sheets LCT (Option): 2,000 sheets
Bridge Unit: 125
sheets
CCR081/101
Combine Copy:
Combine copy saves costs by reducing paper use. A maximum of 16 pages of BW and/or FC
images can be printed.
Simplex Duplex (Duplex Unit Required)

Combine Copy 2 into 1 simplex 4 into 1 duplex
4 into 1 simplex 8 into 1 duplex
8 into 1 simplex 16 into 1 duplex
Colour Stamp Features:
Four types of stamp functions are available and the user can select the stamp colour from
CMYKRGB (Default = Black).
User Stamp
Date Stamp Up to 4 stamps can be
5 Styles:
registered (As mono-
R
MM/DD/YYYY
MM/DD/YYYY, MM.DD.YYYY,
DD/MM/YYYY, DD.MM.YYYY
colour image).
& YYYY,MM,DD
Preset Stamp CONFIDENTIAL
8 Stamps: Page Number

COPY, URGENT, PRIORITY, - 1- 6 Styles:
For Internal Use Only, P1, P.1, -1-, 1/5, 1 &
CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT, For 1-5
Your Info. & Preliminary
Standard HDD:
The CCR081/101 has 128MB RAM and a 40GB HDD as standard. Users do not need to add any
additional memory for copying functions, as may be required with the DMR22A/27A. However,
when upgrading to a printer, the additional 128MB RAM (option) is required.
CCR081/101 DMR22A/27A DMR22A/27A DMR22A/27A

without memory with 32MB with 6GB HDD
option Memory
Electronic Sorting: BW: 800 sheets Approx. 50 sheets Approx. 100 sheets 1,000 sheets
FC: 200 sheets (A4/6%) (A4/6%) (A4/6%)
(A4/Any
Coverage%)
Stamp Function: Page Numbering Page Numbering Page Numbering Page Numbering
Date Stamp Date Stamp Date Stamp Date Stamp
Preset Stamp (full) Preset Stamp (half) Preset Stamp (full)
User Stamp Background
(All Stamps can be Numbering
coloured) User Stamp
CCR081/101
CCR081/101 DMR22A/27A DMR22A/27A DMR22A/27A

without memory with 32MB with 6GB HDD
option Memory
Sample Copy: Yes (BW & Colour) No No Yes
Job Preset: Yes (BW & Colour) No No Yes
Document Server: Yes (BW & Colour) No No Yes
Equivalent Copying Features:
The CCR081/101 support most of the copying features that the DMR22A/27A support. The
exceptions are: book copy, background numbering and chapters.
Comparison of copying features (excluding colour functions):

CCR081/101 DMR22A/27A
Standard Memory 128MB RAM 32MB RAM
Optional Memory +128MB / 256MB (for +32MB / 64MB
Printer and Scanner
feature)
HDD Standard: 40GB Option: 6GB
Paper Capacity (Standard) 250 sheet x 2 500 sheet x 2
Number of Copies Up to 100 Up to 99
Job Preset 1 Job 1 Job (with optional HDD)
Book Copy N/A Yes (with optional HDD)
Background Numbering N/A Yes (with optional 32MB
RAM or HDD)
Chapter N/A Yes
User Code 80 / 200 (with Printer 100 / 500 (with option)
Scanner Option)
Document Server Yes Yes (with optional HDD)
Colour Document Server:
BW and colour documents from different applications, such as copier, printer, fax and scanner, can
be stored in the HDD for re-use.
INPUT OUTPUT
Store
Copy Re-Printing
In
Print Re-Faxing
HDD
Fax (send) Re-Distribution
LAN Fax
Scanner
CCR081/101
Storage Capacity by Application:
Maximum number of files = 1,000
File Format in Application Max. Number of pages* (target)

Document Server
Copy Unique Format Monochrome Copy Approx.1,600 pages (A4) / 800 pages (A3)
Full Colour Copy Approx. 400 pages (A4) / 200 pages (A3)
Print Unique Format Monochrome Print Approx.1,600 pages (A4) / 800 pages (A3)
Full Colour Print Approx. 400 pages (A4) / 200 pages (A3)
Fax TIFF Fax (BW only) Approx. 2,000 pages (A4 / ITUT# 1 Chart)
400 pages/Job (Standard)
1,000 pages/Job (with Fax Memory)
Scan TIFF / JPEG Monochrome Scan Approx. 2,000 pages
(A4 / ITUT#1 Chart / 200dpi /MMR)
Full Colour Scan Approx. 1,500 pages
(A4 / ITUT#6 Chart / 200dpi/JPEG)
* If one application uses full memory
Document Management:
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, document management software, is bundled with the Printer Scanner
option. With DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, users can:
View the stored document in the document server from their PC
Search stored documents by user name and file name
Delete stored documents
Change name, time and file format
Print stored file from the document server (Batch print is available)
Note: For details of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, please refer to the NPS for DeskTopBinder V2
Professional.
Fax Features:
With the optional fax unit, the CCR081/101 can be upgraded to a high quality monochrome fax (not
colour fax).
High Speed:
Modem Speed: 33.6Kbps

Transmission Speed: MMR: 3 sec. / JBIG: 2 sec.
Scanning Speed: 1.11 sec. (A4 / LT SEF)
Number of pages scanned per minute: 28cpm (A4/LT SEF)
CCR081/101
Multi-Port:
Upgradeable, up to 3 lines (3 lines are available simultaneously).
CCR081/101 DMR22A/27A CCR062A

Number of lines G3x2/G4 G3x2/G4 G3/G4
Max 3 lines Max 3 lines Max. 2 lines
Multiple process with Yes (3 lines) Yes (3 lines) No
multiple lines G3x2+G4 G3x2+G4
Advantages when 3 lines work at the same time:

CCR081/101 fax with multiple process No multiple process fax
The CCR081/101 can receive an Cannot receive whilst transmitting.
incoming fax whilst transmitting
(memory or immediate).
While the CCR081/101 is busy Users cannot fax an immediate transmission
transmitting from memory, users can while other documents are being transmitted
send an immediate transmission. from memory. The message Line is busy.
Switch to memory transmission appears.
Quick Dial (Maximum 1,200 Numbers):
CCR081/101 DMR22A/27A CCR062A

Standard 400 400 56
with Option 1,200(*) 1,200(*) N/A
* With Fax Function Upgrade DME185J-F, users can choose either Quick dial 1,200 numbers (default) or Quick dial
1,000 numbers and Speed dial 200 numbers (SP mode setting).
(Speed dial is not available without Fax Function Upgrade DME185J-F.)
LAN Fax:
LAN fax software will be bundled with the Printer / Scanner option. This software allows users to
transmit faxes directly from their PC.
Mono Colour Print & Toner Switch:
To make fax messages easy to identify, users can select faxes to be printed in Black, Cyan or
Magenta. If the selected colour toner runs out, the machine can switch to a second selected colour
automatically, to ensure that received faxes are printed out.
Mono-Colour Print Toner Switch

1st print colour 2nd print colour
Print runs short
Copy Print FAX FAX
Copy Print FAX FAX FAX
Copy FAX FAX FAX
FAX
If a 2nd print colour is not selected,

Fax messages are easily identifiable in the received fax message is stored in
the output tray. the memory.
CCR081/101
Printer Features:
GW-based Printer Functionality with Colour:
The CCR081/101 printer controller is the third GW-based print controller. In addition to the
current GW-based printer features (DMR22A/27A/35A/45A), this next generation print controller
has additional functions to meet customers needs more completely.
Compatible with Document Server (Send to Document Server, Sample Print, Locked
Print, Send to JobBinding - JobBinding is supported by RPCS only)
Electronic sorting
OHP Slip Sheet
Cover Page (RPCS only *1)
Layout print
Poster (RPCS only)
Booklet (RPCS and PCL5c)
Sub Paper Size Setting (A4<=>Letter Override)
Spool Printing (Job Spool)
Adjust photographs (RPCS only)
*1 PCL has First page/Other page function as usual
Special Features for Printing:
Spool Printing (Job Spool):
The complete print job is saved in the HDD before printing. This function can be set from the
system menu in WebStatusMonitor. It is useful when users make prints of large files from
applications without spooler functionality.
Specification:
LPR and IPP protocols are supported.

Up to 50 jobs can be spooled at a time (1GB is allocated to this function).
CCR081/101
Job Management from Web Browser:
Spooled jobs can be seen through a Web Browser (through WebStatusMonitor).

Users can delete unnecessary jobs via the Web Browser.
Adjust Photographs (RPCS only):
The RPCS driver has a new adapt photographs function. Digital camera pictures often appear too
dark or too light when printed. Traditionally, the user would be required to open the picture in
another application, make the image adjustments (lightness, saturation etc) and then place it back
into the application being printed from. With the adjust photographs function switched on in the
print driver, the photo data will be automatically adjusted.
Limitation: This function has an effect on all the image data. When users send a job that
includes both photo data taken by a digital camera and image data made with
certain applications that are recognized as image data, the adjustments are made to
both. This may lead to unexpected results so please ensure this function is only
applied to photo data taken by a digital camera.
CCR081/101
Specification Comparison versus DMR22A/27A:
The items shown in yellow are advantageous over the DMR22A/27A.
CCR081/101 DMR22A/27A
Print speed CCR081: B/W-24ppm, F/C-8 ppm CCR081: B/W-22ppm, F/C-n/a
(A4/LT LEF) CCR101: B/W-32ppm, F/C-10ppm CCR101: B/W-27ppm, F/C-n/a
Supported Standard: RPCS, PCL5c Standard: RPCS, PCL6, PCL5e
Printer language Option: Adobe PostScript 3 Option: Adobe PostScript 3
UNIX Support Yes Yes
NIB Standard Option
Ethernet (100 base TX /10 base T) Ethernet (100 base TX /10 base T)
IEEE 1394 Option: 2 ports (6 pin) Option: 2 ports (6 pin)
SCSI Print, IP over 1394 SCSI Print
Wireless LAN Option Not available
I/F
Network TCP/IP, IPX, NetBEUI TCP/IP, IPX, NetBEUI,
protocol Apple Talk (Auto Switching) Apple Talk (Auto Switching)
Controller CPU RM5261A 250MHz RM5231 (QED) 200MHz
Memory 256MB (resident 128MB + Op. 96MB (resident 32MB + optional
capacity 128MB) 64MB)
384MB (resident 128MB + Op.
256MB)
Document Standard: 40GB Option: 6GB
Server (HDD)
Fonts PCL5c; 35 intelli fonts, 10 true type PCL: 35 intelli fonts, 10 true type
fonts, 1 bitmap fonts, 1 bitmap
PS3; 136 Adobe type1 fonts PS3: 136 Adobe type1 fonts,
Colour Yes No
capability
Utilities SmartNetMonitor for Admin/ for SmartNetMonitor for Admin/ for
Client Client
WebStatusMonitor WebStatusMonitor
Printer Utility for Mac Printer Utility for Mac
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
IEEE 1394 utility IEEE 1394 utility
LAN FAX LAN FAX
(Job Spool)
CCR081/101
Specification Comparison versus Colour Controller RC210 (Ricoh controller for

CCR060A/062A):
The items shown in yellow are advantageous over Colour Controller RC210
CCR081/101 RC210 for CCR060A/062A
Print speed CCR081: B/W-24ppm, F/C-8ppm CCR060A: B/W-25ppm, F/C-6ppm
(A4,LT LEF) CCR101: B/W-32ppm, F/C-10ppm CCR062A: B/W-31ppm, F/C-6ppm
Supported Printer Standard: RPCS, PCL5c Standard: IPDL-C, Ricoh-SCRIPT2TM
language Option: Adobe PostScript 3
UNIX support Yes Not supported
NIB Standard: Standard:
Ethernet (100 base TX /10 base T) Ethernet (100 base TX /10 base T)
IEEE 1394 Option: 2 ports (6 pin) Not available
Wireless LAN Option: Not available
I/F
Network protocol TCP/IP, IPX, NetBEUI, TCP/IP, IPX, NetBEUI,
Apple Talk (Auto Switching) Apple Talk (Auto Switching)
Controller CPU RM5261A 250MHz QED5261 200MHz
Memory capacity 256MB (resident 128MB + Optional Standard: 64MB
128MB) Option: 64MB (128MB as total)
384MB (resident 128MB + Optional 128MB (192MB as total)
256MB)
Document Server Standard: 40GB Not available
(HDD)
Fonts PCL5c: 35 intelli fonts, 10 true type Ricoh-SCRIPT2: 39 Roman Fonts
fonts, 1 bitmap,
PS3: 136 Adobe type1 fonts
Utility SmartNetMonitor for Admin/ for Client Printer Manager for Admin/Client
WebStatusMonitor Multidirect Print*1
Printer Utility for Mac PortNavi*1
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite WebStatusMonitor
IEEE 1394 utility
LAN FAX
Calibration Off-the-glass Calibration Off-the-glass Calibration
Windows Yes No
ICM2.0 support
Colour profile ICM Profile for Windows ColourSync Profile for Macintosh
ColourSync Profile for Macintosh
(Job Spool)
*1 The functions of Multidirect Print and PortNavi are supported in SmartNetMonitor.
CCR081/101
High Image Quality:
Enhanced 1800 x 600 dpi (600 x 600 dpi/ 2 bit) - Note 1

Genuine Adobe PostScript 3 support (Option)
Extended Windows ICM 2.0 support - Note 2
Off-the-glass calibration
Note 1: 1800 x 600dpi equivalent image quality:
2 bit / pixel data processing:

The controller transmits 4 different sets of data for the horizontal direction of each dot of the 600dpi
print resolution. The engine changes the horizontal dot size (3 patterns) accordingly.
Main scanning direction: 1800dpi
Sub-scanning direction: 600dpi
In the resolution setting tab, in the print quality setting screen in the RPCS driver, 600 x 600dpi/2bit
mode is shown as 1800 x 600dpi.
Note 2: Extended Windows ICM2.0 support:
The CCR081/101 supports ICM 2.0* including ICM method and ICM intent as below.
With the ICM support, the CCR081/101 will obtain Microsoft Certification.
*ICM2.0 stands for Image Colour Management version 2.0, which comes as standard with MS
Windows Operating Systems Windows 98, Me and 2000.
Screen shot of RPCS driver
CCR081/101
Unique PDL RPCS:
In addition to PCL5c, the printer/scanner option of the CCR081/101 has a unique printer description
language RPCS. RPCS is designed specifically for general office use and makes using all the
features of the CCR081/101 very easy.
Intuitive and Simple operation (driver user interface) - Note 1

High performance
Note 1. Driver User Interface
The RPCS driver for the CCR081/101 provides two user interfaces. In addition to the interface that
has been used in RPCS drivers in the past, users can select to have a multi-tab (HP-like) user
interface. The customer can then select either one or switch to another at any time.
[RPCS User Interface]

Concept: Easy Print Setting
Some icons are prepared in the driver window as default and each icon is assigned print option
settings such as duplex and staple. Customers can set any preset print job setting by clicking
the icon. Customers can also create and register additional icons over and above the default icon
set. The customized icon set streamlines the users printing operation. (See the below screen shot
of the RPCS User interface.)
Customer clicks one of the icons in this area. These icons have preset print options and
complicated jobs are printed at the touch of a button.
Button to add or change
icons
[Conventional Multiple-Tab type Interface (HP-like User Interface)]

This user interface is prepared for customers who are accustomed to using PCL drivers.
Compatible with NRG Document Solution software (JobBinding, Batch Printing which is bundled
with DeskTopBinder V2 Lite).
Recommended PC (Client) Environment for using RPCS:
CPU: Pentium II 233MHz or higher, Memory: 64MB or more.
CCR081/101
Versatile Network Connectivity:
In addition to the standard 10/100baseT network card, that comes with the print option, a Wireless
LAN Interface (IEEE802.11b) or (IEEE1394) can be used.
Wireless LAN Interface (Option) IEEE802.11b

IEEE 1394 (Option)
Standard 10/100baseT
Wireless LAN Access

Point
Note:
* Wireless LAN I/F option and IEEE1394
cannot be installed at the same time.
* Wireless LAN I/F and standard NIB do
not work at the same time (switch
between the two at the operation panel)
Device Management:
With the convenient device management tools, the IT Manager and/or Network Administrator can
monitor and check the device status easily, such as the current toner amount. Furthermore, by
allocating a User Code for each end user, the IT Manager can control access rights to the device by
user code and by function.
SmartNetMonitor for Admin - Note 1

WebStatusMonitor
Note 1. SmartNetMonitor for Admin provides the IT manager with the following:
Monitoring the networked devices
CCR081/101
Access Control by functions, by User Code
Counting by User Code
WebStatusMonitor:
This utility enables customers to monitor machine status and to change network settings etc.
through a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer *1 and Netscape Communicator *2.
*1 : Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or later.

*2 : Netscape Communicator 4.06 or later.
Note: Language Support - 6 languages (English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Dutch).
Top Page Screen

Enter IP address
Model Name is displayed
In this Top Page Screen, customers can

see the current status of the machine.
An additional 4 buttons are placed in the
Main Screen to get detailed information
and configure the printer (Status, Admin
Info, Config. Reference, Configuration).
CCR081/101
Status Menu:
6 sub-menus are available in this screen.

Customers can view the status of the
machine, i.e.:
Input/Output Tray information
Remaining toner amount for each toner
Functions of the printer
Firmware version and Total memory
installed
PDL name installed and its version
information
Admin Info Screen:
Two sub-menus are available in this

screen, and customers can get the
information below:
Job History
Spool Printing Job List
NIB information such as Mac
Address, Firmware version
Config. Reference Screen:
Six sub-menus are available in

this screen. Customers can only
check the information, not make
changes:
List of protocol status
Details of TCP/IP setting
Details of NetWare setting
Details of AppleTalk setting
Details of NetBEUI setting
Details of SMTP setting
CCR081/101
Configuration Screen:
Ten sub-menus are available in

this screen. Customers can check
and change the settings. The
correct password must be input to
enter this menu:
List of protocol status
Details of each protocol settings
Settings of paper type (plain,
recycled etc.) for each tray
Password setting
* With IEEE 1394 option or

Wireless LAN option, customers
can make settings from this menu.
Other Utilities:
The following utility software is bundled with the printer/scanner option. For details, please refer to
the individual NPSes:
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
SmartNetMonitor for Admin / for Client
Scanner Features:
The CCR081/101 can be upgraded to a network colour scanner when the printer/scanner option is
installed.
Scanning Solutions:
The CCR081/101 offer three types of scanning solutions:
Scan to e-mail (please see further information on the following page):

Scanned documents are delivered to PCs directly via the Internet or Intranet.
Internet
SMTP or
Server Intranet
HDD
CCR081/101
ScanRouter V2 Lite (Bundled Software):

Scanned documents go to the delivery server and are distributed to client PCs on the network.
ScanRouter V2 Client PC
Lite Outside of Network
Delivery Server
U-C1
BWFF&
Client PC Colour
On network CC File
Image
Network TWAIN Scan (Bundled Software):

Users operate the scanner using the TWAIN driver installed on a PC.
Client PC
BWFF& With TWAIN Driver
Colour
CC File
Image
CCR081/101
Scan to e-mail:
In addition to scanning using ScanRouter V2 Lite and the TWAIN Driver, colour scan to e-mail is
available in the CCR081/101 with or without using ScanRouter Pro V2.
Benefits for the Customer:
Scan to e-mail is an easy to use document distribution solution. Scanned documents are sent
directly to the PC over the Internet or Intranet.
Colour: The CCR081/101 offers a colour document distribution solution.

Easy Operation: The operation of the scan to e-mail function is almost the same as that
of the fax function.
Security: Unlike fax transmissions, scanned documents are sent directly to
individuals.
Cost Saving: Customers can save transmission costs by sending data over the
Internet.
CCR081/101
Scan to e-mail from mainframe & via ScanRouter Professional V2:
Scan to e-mail from mainframe:
A delivery server for scan to e-mail is not necessary.

e-mail addresses are stored in the local HDD (max. 2,000).
Good for small and middle-sized companies.
Only SMTP is supported.
Scan to e-mail via ScanRouter Professional V2:
e-mail is sent from the ScanRouter Pro V2 server.

e-mail addresses are stored in the ScanRouter Pro V2 server.
A variety of mail systems are supported (ScanRouter Pro V2 / Enterprise only)
LDAP support (ScanRouter Pro V2/Enterprise only), a good solution for a large
company
Please see the ScanRouter Pro V2 NPS for further details.
Scan to e-mail from mainframe & via ScanRouter Pro V2:

Users can switch Scan to e-mail between the mainframe and ScanRouter Pro V2. They can be
used together.
Scan to e-mail from mainframe
SMTP
Mail addresses are stored in Server
machines HDD.
e-mail is sent directly from

the CCR081/101.
HDD
Scan to e-mail via ScanRouter Pro V2
ScanRouter
Server Mail Server
Mail addresses are stored

in the ScanRouter server
e-mail is sent from the LDAP Support

ScanRouter server (ScanRouter Pro V2/ Enterprise Only)
Maintain e-mail address list:
Customers can register and maintain the e-mail address book on the HDD directly from the
operation panel. The user can also use SmartNetMonitor for Admin to maintain the address
book.
CCR081/101
Maintaining the e-mail address book through SmartNetMonitor:
Functions available:
Download address book from mail tools. Most mail systems can export address books
as CSV format data. Users can download address book data to the machines HDD
through SmartNetMonitor for Admin. This saves time registering a huge number of
mail addresses.
Create and delete individual and group addresses.
Import the address book from the machines HDD to make a back-up copy or to copy
the address book to another machines HDD.
Entering contents of e-mail:
Subject Customers can write subject using the soft keyboard, which
appears on the operation panel. (Max. 20 characters)
Senders e-mail Input directly or select from the address book.
address Users can receive return mail and error messages on their PC.
Body Message This e-mail includes an attached file sent from XXXX
(fixed) (machines name)
Date Transmission date
Queries to Administrators e-mail address
Scanned Data Attached file
Scan Modes Menu (for Scan to e-mail):

The CCR081/101 has a variety of scan modes, for appropriate scan quality.
Scan Mode Depth / Pixel

BW Scan Text For text original 1 bit
OCR For OCR purpose 1 bit
Text / Photo For original containing text 1 bit (create halftone image by
and photo error diffusion)
Photo For photo original 1 bit (create halftone image by
dithering)
Greyscale For halftone original 8 bit
FC Scan Photo For Colour photo original 8 bit / RGB
Text For Colour Text Original 8 bit / RGB
Resolution:
100dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi / 400dpi / 600dpi
CCR081/101
Data Format:
Single Page TIFF/ Multi Page TIFF / PDF / JPEG
Scan mode Data Format Mode Compression Data format

1 bit scan Single Page On/Off TIFF
(BW Text, OCR, BW Text / Multi Page TIFF On/Off TIFF
Photo & BW Photo) PDF On/Off PDF
8 bit scan Single Page On JPEG
(Greyscale, FC Photo & FC Off TIFF
Text) Multi Page TIFF Off* TIFF
PDF On/Off PDF
* If the customer sets data compression to ON in system settings and selects multi-page TIFF in 8
bit scanning mode, the data format will be changed automatically to JPEG.
Function and Required Option List:

O: Necessary to use this function.
Printer Function
Job RPCS / PostScript 3 Electronic Duplex Wireless IEEE 1394
Option PCL5c Sorting Print LAN
Printer Scanner Unit O O O O O O
Auto Duplex Unit O
Interchange Unit O
128 or 256MB RAM O O O O O O
PS3 DIMM O
IEEE 1394 X O
Wireless LAN O X
Scanner Function
Job TWAIN Scanner Scan to e-mail ScanRouter
Option
Printer / Scanner Unit O O O
128 or 256MB RAM O O O
ScanRouter V2 Lite (bundled) + PC O
Document Server
Job DS (Copy) DS (Fax) DS (Printer) DS (Scanner)
Option
128 or 256MB RAM O O
Printer / Scanner Unit O O
Fax Unit O
CCR081/101
General Features:
Print Process: 2 Laser Beam & Dry Electrostatic Transfer System
Development System: Mono Component System
Original Type: Sheet / Book / Object
Original Size: Max: 11x17 / A3
Thickness of Original: Less than 30mm / Less than 5kg
Scan Resolution: 600dpi / 8bit / 256gradations
Copy/Print Resolution: 600dpi / 2bit / 256gradations
Copy Size: Max.: 11x17 / A3 full bleed on 12 x 18
Min.: A6 SEF (100x148mm)
Max. Image-able Area: 11.69x17 / 297x432mm
Paper Size: Paper Tray Feed: 11x17(DLT) SEF, 8 x14 (LG) SEF,
(see paper size 8 x11 (LT) LEF/SEF, 5 x8 (HLT) LEF/SEF
matrix for A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5
details) LEF/SEF,
B6 SEF, A6 SEF
7 x10 (Executive) LEF/SEF, 8x13 (F) SEF,
8 x13 (Foolscap) SEF, 8 x13 (Folio) SEF,
264x390mm (8K) SEF, 195x267mm (16K) LEF/SEF,
Custom Size Paper: Width: 100297mm, Length: 148-
432mm
Bypass Tray Feed: 12x18SEF, 11x17(DLT) SEF, 8 x14 (LG) SEF, 8
(Option) x11 (LT) LEF/SEF, 5 x8 (HLT) SEF/LEF
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5
LEF/SEF,
B6 SEF, A6 SEF
7 x10 (Executive) LEF/SEF, 8x13 (F) SEF,
264x390mm (8K) SEF, 195x267mm (16K) LEF/SEF,
4 1/8x9 (Com 10) LEF, 3 7/8x7 (Monarch) LEF,
114x162mm (C6) LEF, 162x229mm (C5) LEF,
110x220mm (DL Envelope) LEF
Custom Size Paper: Width: 90305mm, Length: 148-
457.2mm
Duplex Unit: 11x17(DLT) SEF, 8 x14 (LG) SEF, 8 x11 (LT)
(Option) LEF/SEF, 5 x8 (HLT) SEF
A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5
LEF/SEF,
7 x10 (Executive) SEF, 8x13 (F) SEF,
264x390mm (8K) SEF, 195x267mm (16K) LEF/SEF
Auto Original EU/Asia Model: A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 LEF /
Size Detection: SEF (only from ADF), 8x13 (F) SEF,
264x390mm (8K) SEF, 195x267mm (16K) LEF/SEF
Paper Weight: Standard Tray 64-163 g/m2
Paper bank 64-128 g/m2
Bypass Tray 64-163 g/m2
Duplex Unit 64-105 g/m2
CCR081/101
Copy Speed: CCR081 FC: 8cpm / BW: 24cpm

(LT/A4 LEF) CCR101 FC: 10cpm / BW: 32cpm
1st Copy Time (LT/A4 LEF/from 1st tray) FC: 18sec. / BW: 7.8sec.
Warm-up Time Approx. 99 sec.
Multiple Copying Simplex Up to 100 copies
Duplex Up to 100 copies
Reproduction EU/Asia Model: 7 Reduction & 5 Enlargement
Ratio: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 93%, 82%,
75%, 71%, 65%, 50%, 25%
Zoom: From 25% to 400% in 1% step
Paper Capacity: Standard: 250 sheets x 2 trays
Option: Bypass Tray: 100 sheets (less than 10mm)
Paper Bank Unit: 500 sheets x 2 trays
LCT: 2,000 sheets
Max. Paper Capacity 2,600 sheets (with bypass tray and LCT)
Paper Tray LT / A4 or smaller Up to 500 sheets
Capacity: B4 or larger Up to 250 sheets
(Output Tray)
Document Full Colour 200 pages (A3/DLT), 400 pages (A4/LT)
Server: Black & White 800 pages (A3/DLT), 1,600 pages (A4/LT)
(Copy)
Power Source: EU/Asia Model 220-240V 8A 50-60Hz
Max. Power Consumption: Less than 1.5KW (Full Configuration)
Paper Volume Indicator: (Operation 5 Levels
Panel)
Paper Volume Sensor (in paper tray) Standard Tray: 3 Levels
Paper Bank Unit: 4 Levels
LCT: 5 Levels
Bypass: N/A
Dimensions (W x D x H): 21.65 x 26.37 x 30.74 (41.22 with Paper Bank)
550 x 670 x 781 (1,047 with Paper Bank) mm
Machine Weight: Less than 187lbs / 85 kg
CSS: Option
Counterfeit Prevention: Bill Recognition Function & Invisible Marking Function
Counter: Electronic counter & Mechanical counter x2 (Masked)
Copy Speed Matrix:
Copy Speed:
Copy Speed Simplex:

(cpm) CCR081 CCR101
FC Mode BW Mode FC Mode BW Mode
Normal A4/LT LEF 8 24 10 32
Mode A3/DLT 4 12 5 16
OHP Mode A4/LT LEF 2 3.2 2 3.2
A3/DLT 1 1.6 1 1.6
Thick Paper A4/LT LEF 4 6.5 4 6.5
Mode: A3/DLT 2 3.2 2 3.2
CCR081/101
ADF 1 to 1 Copy Speed (Simplex Original / Simplex Copy):

(cpm) CCR081 CCR101
FC Mode BW Mode FC Mode BW Mode
Normal A4/LT LEF 8 24 10 32
Mode A3/DLT 4 12 5 16
OHP Mode A4/LT LEF 2 3.2 2 3.2
A3/DLT 1 1.6 1 1.6
Thick Paper A4/LT LEF 4 6.5 4 6.5
Mode: A3/DLT 2 3.2 2 3.2
Duplex Copy Speed (A4 / LT LEF)

(cpm) CCR081 CCR101
FC Mode BW FC Mode BW Mode
Mode
Simplex Original Platen 8 22 9.5 32
Duplex Copy ADF 1 to 1 8 18 9.5 22
Duplex Original ADF 1 to 1 8 16 9.5 16
Duplex Copy
1st Copy Time (A4/LT LEF, From 1st tray, from standby mode):
BW Mode Full Colour Mode
Manual Colour Mode Select / Normal Paper 7.8sec. 18sec.
Auto Colour Selection Mode / Normal Paper 9.8sec. 20sec.
Thick Paper / OHP Mode 16sec. 25sec.
Special Features:
Image Density: Auto Density Selection
Manual: 9 levels
Colour Mode: Default = Black & White Mode
o Auto Colour Selection (ACS)
o Full Colour
o Black & White
o Single Colour
(Preset: 12 colour & User colour: 15 colour x 4 density)
o Twin Colour
- Black and Other Colour
- Red and Black
Copy Mode: Default = Auto Text & Photo Separation
o Auto Text & Photo Separation
o Photo
o Text
o Map
o Pale
o Generation
Photo Type Selection: In Auto Text & Photo Separation Mode and Photo Mode, users can
select the photo type for the most appropriate reproduction quality.
o Printed Photo (Default)
o Glossy Photo
o Copied Photo
CCR081/101
Paper Selection: Default = Auto Paper Selection (APS)

o Auto Paper Selection (APS)
o 1st Tray
o 2nd Tray
o 3rd Tray (with Paper Bank)
o 4th Tray (with Paper Bank)
o LCIT (with LCIT)
o Bypass (with Bypass Tray Unit)
Paper Type Mainframe Normal Paper (No Display Paper Type), Recycle Paper, Special Paper,
Display: 250 sheet Tray Colour Paper, Letterhead, Label Paper, OHP,
Thick Paper, Punched Paper, Cardstock, Pre-printed Paper, Bond paper
Paper Bank Normal Paper (No Display Paper Type) , Recycle Paper, Special Paper,
Unit Colour Paper, Letterhead, Punched Paper, Cardstock, Pre-printed Paper,
LCT Bond paper
Bypass Tray Normal Paper (No Display Paper Type), Recycle Paper, Special Paper,
Colour Paper, Letterhead, Label Paper, OHP,
Thick Paper, Punched Paper, Cardstock, Pre-printed Paper, Normal Paper
Backside, Thick Paper Backside
Auto Tray Switch: Yes
Reduce/Enlarge: Auto Magnification Selection (AMS)
Size Magnification
Directional Magnification (%)
Directional Size Magnification (Inch/mm)
Full Image Copy (93% & Centring)
Duplex: 1 sided to 2 sided (with Duplex Unit)
2 sided to 2 sided (with ARDF & Duplex Unit)
Book to 2sided (with Duplex Unit)
Book / Series / Combine: Book to 1 sided
2 sided original to 1 sided copies (with ARDF)
Combine Copy
o 2 into 1 simplex
o 4 into 1 simplex
o 8 into 1 simplex
o 4 into 1 duplex (with Duplex Unit)
Shift / Erase / Margin Centring: Yes
Adjustment: Cornering: No
Margin Adjustment: 1mm step (0-30mm)
Default = Front page: 5mm left
Back page: 5mm right
Erase Centre: 1mm step (2-99mm)
Erase Border: 1mm step (2-99mm)
Erase Centre / Border: 1mm step (2-99mm)
Cover Sheet Front Cover Copy or Blank (Default = Copy)
Front & Back Cover Copy or Blank (Default = Copy)
Image Rotation: Yes (A4, LT and B5 Size)
Electronic Sort: Yes
Electronic Stack: Yes
Stapling: Yes (with Finisher)
CCR081/101
Editing Colour Colour Conversion: Yes

Function: Creation: Colour Erase: Yes
Colour Background: Yes
Image Repeat: Yes
Creation: Double Copy: Yes
Mirror: Yes
Positive / Negative: Yes
Stamp / Numbering: Stamp (Preset): Yes (8 Stamps / RGBCMYK)
User Stamp: Yes (4 Stamps can be registered / 2 sizes /
RGBCMYK)
Date Stamp: Yes (5 styles/ RGBCMYK)
Page Number: Yes (6 styles / RGBCMYK)
Image Colour Colour Balance Adjustment
Adjustment: Adjustment: Colour Balance Program
Auto Colour Calibration (ACC)
Image Sharp / Soft
Adjustment: Contrast
Background Density Adjustment
Under Colour Removal (UCR) Adjustment
Auto Colour Selection Sensitivity Adjustment
Text & Photo Separation Sensitivity Adjustment
Colour Erase Sensitivity Adjustment
Program: 10 programs
User Code: Yes 8 digits / 80 user codes (up to 200 codes with Printer Scanner option)
Interrupt Copy: Yes
Auto Start: Yes
Job Preset: Yes (1 job)
Sample Copy: Yes
Document Server: Yes
Panel Off: Yes (see below for detail)
Low Power: Yes (see below for detail)
Auto-Off: Yes (see below for detail)
Power Consumption & Recovery Time:

Auto Switch Power Consumption Recovery Time
Panel Off Mode Default: 60sec. Lower than 0.2KW User can select from 3sec. or
10-999sec. 15sec.
Low Power Mode Default: 15min. Lower than 0.1282KW 30sec.
(Energy Saver Mode) 1-240min
Auto-Off Mode Default: 60min. Lower than 0.015KW 99sec.
1-240min.
CCR081/101
Fax Specifications:
General Features:
Compatibility: ITU-T (CCITT) G3, Additional G3 (option), G4 (option )
Resolution: 8 x 3.85, 8 x 7.7 l/mm, 200 x 200/100dpi (std.)
8/16 x 15.4 l/mm, 400 x 400 dpi (option)
Compression method: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG (Option)
Scanning speed: 1.11sec. (A4/LT SEF, Any mode)
Number of Pages Scanned: A4/LT SEF Standard mode: 28cpm
(With ADF) Detail mode: 28cpm
Super Fine Mode: 28cpm
A4/LT LEF / Standard mode: 32cpm
image rotation Detail mode: 30cpm
Super Fine Mode: 21cpm
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400, 12000, 9600,
7200, 4800, 2400 bps
G4 option: 64000, 56000 bps
Transmission speed: G3: Approx.3 seconds (200x100dpi, ITUT #1 chart, TTI off, memory
transmission)
G3: Approx.2 seconds (200x100 dpi, with JBIG, ITUT #1 chart TTI off, memory
transmission)
SAF memory: Standard 2MB (TTL: 8MB)
With 32MB option 26MB (TTL: 40MB)
Page memory: Standard 2MB for Scan / 2MB for Print
With 32MB option 4MB for Scan / 8MB for Print
Stamp: Yes (with document feeder)
TTI/RTI: Standard
CSI: Standard
Quick and Speed dial: Standard: 400quick dial (no Speed dial)
Option: 1,200 quick dial (default) / 1,000 quick dial and 200 speed dial (SP mode
setting) are selectable
Group dial: Standard: 64 groups
Program: Standard: 100 numbers, Max 200 numbers with Function upgrade option
Redial: Standard
User Code: Std. 80 Codes (Max. 200 codes with optional Printer / Scanner Kit)
Auto document: Standard (6 documents), Max. 18 documents with option
Page count Standard
Wild cards: Standard
Summer time (day light No
saving time)
CCR081/101

Night timer: No
Energy saver: Standard
LCD prompt: Standard
Remaining memory Standard
indication
Time indicator / clock Yes / Standard
adjustment:
Transmission features:
Serial broadcasting (later) Standard (Max. 500numbers)
Send later Standard
Forwarding Standard
Parallel memory transmission Standard (Automatically selected.)
Book fax Standard
Closed network (transmission) Standard
Confidential transmission/with Standard
ID
Reception features:
Multicopy Standard
Poll later Standard (Max. 500senders)
CCR081/101

Continuous polling No
Single Colour Print Yes (Black / Cyan / Magenta)
Auto Toner Switch Yes (Black / Cyan / Magenta)
Telephone features:
Voice request No
Pause Standard
Automatic fax/phone change No
Reception mode switch over No
(remote)
Answering machine interface No
Reception mode switching No
timer
Silent ringing detection No
CCR081/101
General Features of Printer Controller:

CCR081/101
CPU RM5261A 250MHz
384MB (Resident 128MB + 256MB Memory Option)
Hard Disk Drive 40GB (HDD is standard with the CCR081/101 copier, and it is commonly used for Printer
and Scanner function)
Printer Description Standard: PCL5c, RPCS
Language Option: Adobe PostScript3
Continuous Print CCR101 CCR081
Speed A4 / LT LEF (Plain paper) B/W 32 ppm, F/C 10 ppm B/W 24 ppm, F/C 8 ppm
A4/LT LEF (Thick/OHP) Thick: Thick:
B/W 6.5 ppm, F/C 4 ppm B/W 6.5 ppm, F/C 4 ppm
OHP: OHP:
B/W 3.2 ppm, F/C 2 ppm B/W 3.2 ppm, F/C 2 ppm
Duplex A4/ LT LEF (Plain) B/W 32 ppm, F/C 9.5 ppm B/W 22 ppm, F/C 8 ppm
Print Resolution 1800 x 600 dpi Equivalent (=600x 600dpi/2bit)
PCL5c RPCS PS3
PDL 300 x 300dpi (BW only) 300 x 300dpi 600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 1800 x 600dpi
1800 x 600dpi 1800 x 600dpi
Driver <Resolution> <Resolution> <Resolution>
- 600dpi - 300x300dpi - 600dpi
<Gradation *10> - 600x600dpi <Gradation *10>
- Fast (1bit), - 1800x600dpi - Fast (1bit),
- Standard (2bit) - Standard (2bit)
- 300dpi*1 - 300dpi*1
Interface Standard:
RJ-45 network port (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
Parallel Port IEEE 1284 (ECP)
Option:
IEEE 1394 x 2 port (6 pin)
Wireless LAN Interface (IEEE802.11b)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI*2, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for Printer functions (Printer Key Top is
added on the left side of LCD)
CCR081/101
Drivers Win Win Win WinNT4.0 Mac

95/98/ NT 3.1 WS / TSE Enterprise 8.6OS X Mac
Me 3.51 Server Edition classic OS X Native *8
PCL5c Yes - - Yes*3 Yes* - - -
5
RPCS Yes - - Yes*3 - - - -
PS3 Yes - - Yes*4 - - YES YES
Win2000 Win XP
Professional Server Server Advanced Home Edition Professional
Terminal Server
Service
PCL5c Yes Yes Yes Yes*7 Yes Yes
RPCS Yes Yes - Yes*7 Yes *9 Yes *9
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(mini driver) (mini driver) (mini driver) (mini driver)
(mini driver) (mini driver)
*6 *6 *6 *6,*7
*6 *6
Supported Driver PCL5c and RPCS
14.Portuguese
PostScript3
1.English, 2.German, 3.French, 4.Italian, 5.Spanish, 6.Dutch, 7. Swedish,
8. Norwegian, 9. Danish
UNIX Filter and Install Shell & Super Option (Device Option Setting) are available (web
release)
Support OS: Sun Solaris 2.6/7/8, HP-UX 10.x/11.x, SCO Openserver 5.0.6, RedHut Linux
6.x/7.x, IBM AIX V4.3/5L V5.1
* The underlined version supports Device Option.
* In case there is an update of support OS until the market release of Model U-C1, it will be announced
separately.
Utility Software Printer / Scanner Option (Number of supported Language)
(Bundled Software)
1. DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (14)
2. SmartNetMonitor for Admin (14)
3. SmartNetMonitor for Client (14)
4. LAN-FAX M2 (14)
5. 1394 utility (1)
6. Printer Utility for Mac (1)
7. ScanRouter V2 Lite (6)
8. TWAIN Driver (14)
*1 When receiving 300dpi colour data, the data is printed as 300dpi B/W data.
*2 SmartNetMonitor is required for NetBEUI
*6Adobe does not release PS driver for W2K. Only MS-PostScript driver is available and the
PPD file for MS-PS is included in the Driver CD
*8 Mac OS X ver.10.1.x is supported. (Mac OS X ver.10.0.x is not supported.)
*9 RPCS does not support Fast User Switching of Windows XP.
*10With the combination of Resolution and Gradation settings in printer drivers, the variation
of print resolution, 600 x 600dpi or 1800 x 600dpi is selectable.
CCR081/101
Settings from Printer Driver

Resolution 600dpi 600dpi
Gradation Fast Standard
Result 600 x 600dpi 1800 x 600dpi
(1bit) (2bit)
Note: IEEE 1394 and Wireless LAN I/F cannot be installed at the same time.
Note: Wireless LAN I/F and NIB can be installed into the mainframe but do not work at the
same time (users need to select either one manually).
Image-able Area / Non-image-able Area for Printing:
[All sizes except 12x18]

The printable area is different, depending on the PDL and print settings.
The illustration below shows the non-printable area as a reference.
4.3 mm (1/6) 4.3 mm (1/6)
4.3 mm (1/6)
Printable
Area
4.3 mm (1/6)
[12x18]
With 12 x 18 paper, printable area is as below illustration. It supports full printing of
both A3 and 11x17.
Width of A3 paper
Printable Feed
Length of 11x17 Area Direction
paper
CCR081/101
CD ROM (Bundled with Printer / Scanner option:
Printer/Scanner Option
CD #1 Printer Drivers and Utilities
RPCS Driver
PCL5c Driver
PS3 Driver
SmartNetMonitor for Admin
SmartNetMonitor for Client
Printer Utility for Mac
1394 Utility
LAN FAX M2
Address Book
Agfa Font Manager
CD #2 Scanner Driver and Document Management Utilities
TWAIN Driver
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite*
ScanRouter V2 Lite**
CD #3 Operating Instructions
Printer Reference 2
PS Supplement
Network Printing Guide
Scanner Reference***
*DeskTopBinder V2 Lite includes Set-up Guide, Introduction Guide and ScanRouter V2 Link
Guide.
**ScanRouter V2 Lite includes Set-up Guide and Management Guide.
***Scanner Reference includes Network TWAIN Scanner Reference.
CCR081/101
Print Options Specifications:

1 Printer/Scanner Unit PCL5c, RPCS Unique for CCR081/101
Scan to e-mail, TWAIN
Driver, DeskTopBinder
V2 Lite, ScanRouter
V2 Lite
2 128MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM Common with Memory option for
PCR10, PCR16, DMR60/75
(144 pin)
3 256MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM Common with Memory option for
PCR10, PCR16, DMR60/75
(144 pin)
4 PostScript3 Option Genuine Adobe Unique for CCR081/101
PostScript3
5 Wireless LAN I/F Installed into PCI slot Common with DMR60/75
6 IEEE 1394 Interface Installed into PCI slot Common with PCR10, PCR16,
DMR60/75
Note 1. : No.1 and No.2 cannot be installed together.

Note 2. : Either No.3 or No.4 item is mandatory for No.1 and No.2
Configuration of Printer and Scanner related items:
Recommended option
Printer / Scanner PostScript3 DIMM

option
(NIB included)
*1 128MB
IEEE1394
Mandatory 256MB
option *2 Wireless LAN I/F
*1 Either 128MB or 256MB memory option is necessary.

*2 Need to select one item out of the two.
CCR081/101
Additional Memory 128MB/256MB (Option):
Either the 128MB memory or the 256MB memory must be installed with the Printer/Scanner
Option.
144pin SDRAM
PC133 CL3
Access Time: 5.4 ns (max.)
Note: Two types of memory are available for GW models. One is resident memory, and the other is
additional memory (option). Resident memory is installed as standard to run the machine itself.
For the CCR081/101, 128MB memory is available as resident memory. Additional optional
memory is required for the printer/scanner option. 128MB and 256MB optional memory is
available for the CCR081/101. Therefore, when installing the Printer/Scanner option, the total
memory will be 256MB (resident memory 128MB + optional memory 128MB) or 384MB (resident
memory 128MB + optional memory 256MB).
Total memory capacity has an effect on maximum scan size and scanning resolution as shown in the
following data. (The difference does not affect the printing function.)
Regarding the information about the differences, please refer to Scanner Features mentioned in this
NPS.
Wireless LAN Interface (Option) IEEE802.11b:
With this interface, the CCR081/101 can be connected to the wireless network environment. This
optional interface is installed in the CCR081/101 and enables it to communicate with the PCs that
have wireless interface cards.
Note 1: The Wireless LAN Interface is installed into the PCI slot of the main board
(only 1 PCI slot is available on the main board). Therefore, this cannot be
installed together with other optional items that would be inserted in the
PCI slot, such as the IEEE 1394 Interface.
Note 2: The 10/100Base-TX NIB and Wireless LAN I/F cannot be used at the same time. Manual
switching between the boards, from the operation panel, is required.
Note 3: The sale of the Wireless LAN Interface option requires local approval.
Please make sure to confirm that it is approved prior to launch.
CCR081/101
Data transmission speed Auto (11Mbps, 5.5Mbps, 2M bps, 1Mbps), 11Mbps fixed, 5.5Mbps
fixed, 2Mbps fixed, 1Mbps fixed
Protocol TCP/IP
Frequency From 2,400 MHz to 2,497MHz
Channel EU model 1-13 channels
Type of connections (*1) Ad hoc mode, Infrastructure mode
Distance between devices 11 Mbps 140 m / 5.5 Mbps 200 m / 2 Mbps 270 m
1 Mbps 400 m
The above is the max distance when using in the open air, and these
depend on office environment.
WEP (Encryption) Setting 64 bit (10 digits) /128 bit (26 digits)
(*2)
Antenna 2 antennas are included in this option.
(*1)Types of connection
(1) Ad hoc Mode
(2) Infrastructure Mode
Please refer to the following heading for the details.
(*2)WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy

WEP is an encryption method that protects wireless data communication. Both devices
that send and receive data through wireless communication need to have the same WEP
Key when communicating with the other device.
Types of connection:
(1) Ad hoc mode communicates between each wireless client
NOTE: Ad hoc mode connection does NOT

support communication with a Novell
NetWare Server because NetWare does not
support wireless LAN interface.
NOTE: 2 types of Ad hoc mode are

selectable. One is Ad hoc mode and
the other is 802.11 ad hoc mode. The
former mode uses only the channel setting
and the latter uses the channel setting and
SSID (SSID stands for Service Set ID and
only those devices that have the same
SSID can communicate with each other
through wireless networks. The SSID can
be set through WebStatusMonitor).
CCR081/101
(2) Infrastructure modecommunicates through Access Point device
Access Point
Supported application through Wireless LAN Interface
The Wireless LAN interface provides the same functions as NIBs and can be used for printing and
scanning.
IEEE 1394 Interface (Option)
Two types of connection are available: SCSI print and IP over 1394.
SCSI print IP over 1394

Available functions Print Print, Scan
PC OS Windows 2000 SP1, XP Windows Me (*), XP
Protocol SBP-2 TCP/IP
Bi-directional Yes Yes
communication
(*) When printing with IP over 1394 from a PC (OS: Windows Me), SmartNetMonitor for
Client (version 5.0 or later) is necessary.
CCR081/101
(1) SCSI print (same function supported by DMR35A/45A)
This function enables customers to connect and utilize the CCR081/101 as a printing device (only
from a PC installed with Windows 2000 or XP).
Note: This type of connection can only be used for printing, NOT scanning.
Note: The IEEE 1394 Interface is installed into the PCI slot of the main board (only 1 PCI slot
is available on the main board). Therefore, this cannot be installed together with other
optional items that would be inserted in the PCI slot, such as Wireless LAN Interface.
Interface IEEE 1394
Number of ports 2 ports (6 pin)
Bundled cables 1 x 6pin-4pin cable
1 x 6pin-6pin cable
Length of cable; 2.0m (78.74inch).
System requirements for SCSI print:

Supported OS MS-Windows2000*, XP
*Supported OS
- MS-Windows 2000 Professional with Service Pack 1
- MS-Windows 2000 Server with Service Pack 1
(2) IP over 1394
This provides printing and scanning through the IEEE 1394 interface.
Interface IEEE 1394
Number of ports 2 ports (6 pin)
Bundled cables 1 x 6pin-4pin cable
1 x 6pin-6pin cable
Length of cable; 2.0m (78.74inch).
System requirements for IP over 1394:

Supported OS Windows Me(*), XP
Protocol TCP/IP
(*) When printing with IP over 1394 from a PC (OS: Windows Me), SmartNetMonitor for
Client (version 5.0 or later) is necessary.
CCR081/101
Example of configuration for IP over 1394:
MFP or LP
100Base
100Base--T
IP over 1394
Print
Host

n
I
tB
GeneralX
n

office
Outline of Printer Utility for Mac
utility is bundled with the MFPs controller options, and LPs that support Adobe PostScript3,
and is installed into Apple Macintosh Clients connected to the MFPs and LPs through an
EtherTalk network. By using this software, Macintosh customers can download PS fonts/files
to printers hard disk drive/memory, change Printer Name/Zone and print Font Catalogues etc.
CCR081/101
Scanner Specifications:
General Features:
Original Size: Max 11x17 / A3
Original Type: Sheet / Book / Object
Scan Speed: ARDF: 0.6sec.
Platen Cover: 1.2sec
Network TWAIN Scan:
BW: 30spm (from ADF / ITU-T #1 Chart LEF / 200dpi / MMR)
FC: 6spm (from ADF / ITU-T #1 Chart LEF / 200dpi / JPEG)
Scan to e-mail:
BW: 45spm (from ADF / ITU-T #1 Chart LEF / 200dpi / MMR)
FC: 17spm (from ADF / ITU-T #1 Chart LEF / 200dpi / JPEG)
Scan Area: Max. 297 x 432mm / 11.7 x 17
Auto scan size EU/Asia Platen A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF,
detection: model 8 x13 SEF
ADF A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF,
8 x13 SEF
Resolution: From 100dpi to 1200dpi
(100dpi to 600dpi in full colour mode)
sRGB Support: Option (With File Format Converter)
Data Compression: 1 Bit / dot: MMR (*)
8 or 24 Bit / dot: JPEG
Network Topology: Ethernet 10/100 base T, Wireless LAN, IEEE1394
Protocol: TCP/IP, SMTP
Memory Frame Standard: 51.4MB / Max. 116MB
Capacity (for Memory
scanner Storage Max. 16.2GB (HDD)
application): Cache 900MB (HDD)
memory for
delivery
Scan From ADF: Yes (with DF75 / Simplex & Duplex)
Image Rotation: Yes
SADF: Yes
(*) Compression method: MH or MR can be selected in the SP mode.
CCR081/101
Scan to E-mail:
Register e-mail Address: Max. 2,000
Group Address: Max. 100 group (max. 100 users in one group)
Destination: Max. 100 (total of to, cc and bcc)
Resolution: 100dpi, 200dpi (Default), 300dpi, 400dpi, 600dpi
Original Size: Auto Select, A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF,
11x17 SEF, 8 x14 SEF, 8 x13 SEF, 8 x11 LEF/SEF, 5 x8
LEF/SEF, Custom Size
Scan Mode: BW Text, BW OCR, BW Text/Photo, BW Photo, BW Greyscale, FC
Photo, FC Text
Scan Black: 7 Levels
Density: Colour: 7 Levels
Program User Setting: Yes (up to 9 programs)
ADS: Yes. Effective only in BW scan mode
File type: Single Page TIFF/JPEG, Multi Page TIFF, PDF
Maintain e-mail Address: Direct input on operation panel or through SmartNetMonitor
Attention: to, cc, bcc
Subject: Max. 20 Characters / Program Subject: Max.12 6-u
Divide and send e-mail: Yes (per page), Yes (per file size) or No
Search: By name and e-mail address
File Size: 102,400kB
POP Before SMTP / SMTP Not supported (will be supported from Q1 2003)
Authentication
ScanRouter V2 Lite (Bundled in Printer / Scanner Unit) :

OS: Delivery Windows95 (OSR2 or Later), 98/98SE
Server: Windows ME
Windows NT Workstation 4.0(SP5 or later)
Windows NT Server 4.0 (SP5 or Later)
Windows 2000 Server
Windows XP HomeEdition/Professional
Admin Windows95 (OSR2 or Later), 98/98SE
Utility: Windows ME
Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (SP5 or Later)
Windows NT Server 4.0 (SP5 or Later)
Windows 2000 Server
Windows XP Professional & Home edition
Memory: Delivery Min.64MB (Recommended: 128MB or More)
Server:
Client PC: Min. 48MB (Recommended: 64MB or More)
CPU: Delivery Pentium 200MHz minimum
Server: Pentium II 350MHz minimum recommended
Client PC: Pentium 133MHz minimum
Pentium 266MHz or faster recommended
HDD: Delivery At least200MB of disk space are required for installation. In addition,
Server: 500MB or more is required.
Client PC: 50MB or more (200MB recommended)
Network Topology: Ethernet 10/100 Base TX
Protocol: TCP/IP
CCR081/101
* In accordance with the policy of Microsoft, ScanRouter V2 Lite cannot be installed to

Windows NT 4.0 Workstation/Windows 2000 Professional/Windows XP HomeEdition /
Professional when using the following functions:
Access to the In-tray using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

Access to the In-tray using ScanRouter V2 Lite
Only use Save as Windows File function when installing to the above Windows OS.
Network TWAIN Driver (Bundled in Printer / Scanner Unit):

Scan Resolution: 100 1200dpi (Black and White / Greyscale)
100 600dpi (Full Colour)
OS: Windows 95/98/98SE
Windows ME
Windows NT 4.0 (SP5 or Later)
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Memory: 128MB or more
CPU: Celeron /Pentium 2 or faster
HDD: 1GB or more
Scan Mode: Standard / Photo / OCR / Filing
Image Adjustment: Brightness / Contrast / Threshold /Gamma Adjustment / Halftone
Pattern
Stamp: Date / Page Number / Text
Scan Size & Optional Memory:
OK = Can be read
N/A 1 = Cannot be read due to limitation of frame memory capacity
N/A 2 = Cannot be read due to limitation of CCD capacity
Standard: 128MB + Memory Unit Type C 128MB (TTL 256MB / Frame Memory 45611KB):
Paper Size 100dpi 200dpi 300dpi 400dpi 600dpi 800dpi 1200dpi
BW Scan A3 OK OK OK OK OK N/A 2 N/A 2
A4 OK OK OK OK OK OK N/A 2
A5 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
11x17(DLT) OK OK OK OK OK N/A 2 N/A 2
8 x11 (LT) OK OK OK OK OK OK N/A 2
5 x8 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
(HLT)
Greyscale A3 OK OK OK OK N/A 1 N/A 1 N/A 1
A4 OK OK OK OK OK N/A 1 N/A 1
11x17(DLT) OK OK OK OK N/A N/A 1 N/A 1
8 x11 (LT) OK OK OK OK OK N/A 1 N/A 1
5 x8 OK OK OK OK OK OK N/A 1
(HLT)
CCR081/101

FC Scan A3 OK OK N/A 1 N/A 1 N/A 1
A4 OK OK OK OK N/A 1
A5 OK OK OK OK N/A 1
A6 OK OK OK OK OK
11x17(DLT) OK OK N/A 1 N/A 1 N/A 1
8 x11 (LT) OK OK OK OK N/A 1
5 x8 OK OK OK OK N/A 1
(HLT)
Standard 128MB + Memory Unit Type C 256MB (TTL 384MB / Frame Memory 102609KB):
BW Scan A3 OK OK OK OK OK N/A 2 N/A 2
(HLT)
Greyscale A3 OK OK OK OK OK N/A 1 N/A 1
(HLT)
FC Scan A3 OK OK OK OK N/A 1
A4 OK OK OK OK OK
A5 OK OK OK OK OK
A6 OK OK OK OK OK
11x17(DLT) OK OK OK OK N/A 1
8 x11 (LT) OK OK OK OK OK
5 x8 OK OK OK OK OK
(HLT)
CCR081/101
External Options:
ARDF (DF75):
Original Size Simplex 5 x 8 LEF/SEF 11x17 / A5 LEF/SEF - A3
Vertical: 4.2-11.7 / 105-297mm
Horizontal: 5.1-47.0 / 128-1,200mm
(5.1-17.0 / 128-432mm for copy & scanner function)
Duplex 5 x 8 LEF/SEF 11x17 / A5 LEF/SEF - A3
Original Simplex 40-128g/m2
Weight: Duplex 52-105g/m2
Stack Capacity: 50 sheets with 80g/m2 paper or less than 11mm / 0.43
Power Consumption: Less than 50 W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 550x470x130mm
Paper Bank Unit (PS 510):

Paper Size: 5 x8 SEF/LEF 11x17 / A5 SEF/LEF -A3
Paper Weight: 64-128g/m2
Paper Capacity: 500 sheet x 2 trays (with 80g/m2 paper)
Power Consumption: Less than 30W (Power is supplied from mainframe)
LCIT (PS520)
Paper Size: 8 x11 LEF / A4 LEF
Paper Capacity: 1000 sheet x 2 (with 80g/m2 paper)
Power Consumption: Less than 30W (Power is supplied from mainframe)
1000 sheet Finisher (SR790):

Paper Size: Proof Tray 5 x8 (HLT) LEF/SEF 12x18 A6 SEF - A3 wide
Shift Tray 5 x8 (HLT) LEF/SEF 12x18 / A5 LEF/SEF A3 Wide
Paper Weight: Proof Tray 52-260g/m2
Shift Tray 52-163g/m2
Stack Capacity: Proof Tray 250 sheets (A4 / 8 x11 or smaller / 80g/m2)
50 sheets (B4 / 8 x14 or larger / 80g/m2)
Shift Tray 1000 sheets (A4 / 8 x11or smaller / 80g/m2)
Staple Capacity: 50 sheets (A4 / 8 x11 or smaller / 80g/m2)
Staple Paper Size: 12x18, 11x17, 8 x14, 8 x 11 SEF/LEF,
10 x7 SEF/LEF, 8x13, 8 x 13, 8 x13
A3, B4, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 SEF/LEF, 8K, 16K SEF/LEF
Staple Paper Weight: 64-90g/m2
Staple Position: 1 staple / 2 position
2 staple / 3 position
Weight: Approx. 25kg
CCR081/101

Paper Size: 5 x8 LEF 11x17 / A5 LEF A3
Paper Weight: Stack 52-128 g/m2
Stapling 52-128g/m2
Stack Capacity: 500 sheet (8 x11 LEF/SEF, A4 LEF/SEF or smaller)
250 sheet (11x17, 8 x14, A3, B4)
Staple Capacity: 30 sheet (with 80g/m2)
Staple Paper Size: 11x17, 8 x14, 8 x13, 8 x11 SEF/ LEF,
A3, B4, A4 SEF/LEF, B5 LEF, 8K, 16K /LEF
Shift Tray: Standard
Power Consumption: 40W (Power is supplied from the mainframe)
Dimension (W x D x H): 350x490x230mm
Weight: Approx. 10kg
Internal Shift Tray (DIF1232SS):

Paper Size: 5 x8 SEF 12x18 / A6 SEF A3 Wide
Paper Capacity: 250sheet (8 x11 / A4 or smaller) (80g/m2)
125sheet (8 x14 / B4 or larger) (80g/m2)
Power Consumption: 3.6W (Power is supplied from the mainframe)
Weight: Approx. 1.6kg
Bridge Unit (DIF1232BU):

Paper Size: Internal Tray 5 x8 SEF 12x18 / A6 SEF A3 Wide
To Finisher 8 x5 12x18 / A5-A3 Wide
Paper Weight Internal Tray 60-163g/m2
To Finisher 60-163g/m2
Stack Capacity: 250 sheet
One Bin Tray (PT290):

Bin Capacity: 125 sheets with 80g/m2 paper
Paper Size: 5 x8 SEF 11x17 / A5 SEF A3
Paper Sensor: Yes
Power Consumption: Less than 0.5W
Auto Duplex Unit (AD430):

Paper Size: 5 x8 LEF 11x17 / A5 SEF/LEF A3
Paper Capacity: 1
Power Consumption: 35W (Power is supplied from the mainframe)
Weight: Approx. 6kg
CCR081/101
TARGET RELIABILITY
CCR081 CCR101 CCR060A CCR062A DMR22A DMR27A

ACV 5K Print 8K Print 3K Print 5K Print 5K Print 8K Print
FC=1.5KP FC=2.4KP FC=1.5KP FC=2.5KP
BW=3.5KP BW=5.6KP BW=1.5KP BW=2.5KP
Target Colour 30% 30% 50% 50% - -
Ratio
Max CV dev. 33.3K dev. 33.3K dev. 30K dev. 30K dev. - -
Max CV Print 17.5K Print 17.5K Print 12K Print 12K Print 20K Print 20K Print
(Colour Ratio= FC=5.3K FC=5.3K FC=6K FC=6K
30%) BW=12.3K BW=12.3K BW=6K BW=6K
Duty 100K dev. 100K dev. - - 45K Print 45K Print
Max CV per Day FC: 10Kdev. FC: - - - -
BW: 5Kdev. 10Kdev.
BW:
5Kdev.
PM Interval 120K dev. 120K dev. 60K dev. 60K dev. 120K Print 120K Print
EM Interval 40K dev. 40K dev. 30K dev. 30K dev. 100K Print 100K Print
(MCBF)
MCBC 30K dev. 30K dev. 20K dev. 20K dev. 54.5K Print 54.5K Print
Unit Life 5 years or 5 years or 5 years or 5 years or 5 years or 5 years or
2,000K dev., 2,000K 1,440K 1,440K 1,200K 1,200K
whichever dev., dev., dev., Prints, Prints,
comes first. whichever whichever whichever whichever whichever
comes first. comes first. comes first comes first. comes first.
Max CV (Number of prints by colour ratio)

35,000
30,000
25,000
20,000
FC Print
15,000 BW Print
10,000
5,000
0
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
Colour Ratio 0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
BW Print 33,333 23,077 16,667 12,281 9,091 6,667 4,762 3,226 1,961 901 0
FC Print 0 2,564 4,167 5,263 6,061 6,667 7,143 7,527 7,843 8,108 8,333
TOTAL 33,333 25,641 20,833 17,544 15,151 13,333 11,905 10,753 9,804 9,009 8,333
CCR081/101
SUPPLY YIELD AND INTERCHANGEABILITY
Target supply Yield:
Toner:
Cartridge Capacity:
Black: 670g/CTRG
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow: 495g/CTRG
Target Yield (with A4 5% coverage chart)

Black: 25K output / CTRG
Cyan / Magenta / Yellow: 17K output / CTRG
Starter Toner:
Machine and development units (technical parts) are shipped with starter toner.
Cartridge Capacity / Yield

Black: 60g / 1.2K output (with A4/LT 5% coverage chart)
Cyan / Yellow / Magenta: 50g / 1.2K output (with A4/LT 5% coverage chart)
Staples for Finishers:
For 1000 sheet Finisher: 5K staples / CTLG

For 500 sheet Finisher: 3K staples / CTLG
Counter Specifications:
Counter Style:
Style Counter Remarks
*Development Count Count number of developments Same as current NRG colour copiers
Copy Count Count number of copied/printed pages Same as Canon colour copier
*Default Counter Style is Development Count
A) Development count
BW counter Colour counter
BW copy 1 click
1C copy 1 click
2C copy 2 click
3C copy 3 click
BW print 1 click
1C print 1 click
2C print 2 click
3C print 3 click
FAX (Cyan / Magenta Toner) 1 click
CCR081/101
B) Copy count
Colour BW Copy Colour BW Print Colour BW Total
Copy Print Total
BW copy 1 click 1 click
BW print 1 click 1 click
FAX (Colour Toner) 1 click
Special Cases:
The counter does not click in the cases shown below:
Situation Remarks
OHP Slip Sheet OHP blank slip sheet
Cover Sheet Mode Copying / Printing blank cover
sheet
SP Mode Copying from SP mode Not to charge customers for copies made by
service engineers. Grids are printed on whole page.
ACC Printing ACC test pattern
CCR081/101
As a leading manufacturer in producing environmentally friendly machines, you are able to publish
to your customers the following information. This covers items such as noise levels, BAM
standards (which indicate whether a part is recyclable), environmental marks (e.g. Energy Star,
Swan etc.), power consumption, ozone & styrene emission levels and dust levels.
Please note that these are targeted values only. Please refer to Product Environment
Information for actual details.
Noise Level :
Mainframe Full System

Standby 45db(A) or Less 50db(A) or Less
Operating 67db(A) or Less 70db(A) or Less
Average: 0.02mg/m3 or Less
Dust Level:
0.075mg/m3
Environmental Standards:
Type Standard
EU Model Safety Standard TUV(EN60950) CE Mark
EMC EN55022 Class B
Energy Star:
Standalone MFP
CCR081 No OK
CCR101 OK OK
CCR081/101
WHAT FITS WHAT

CCR081 DSc224 DSc224 DSc224
CCR101 DSc232 DSc232 DSc232
Peripherals:
Order Code: Description: Compatibility:

PC120 Platen Cover New
DF75 ARDF DMR22A/27A
PS510 Paper Bank (2 x 500 sheets) New
PS520 LCT (2 x 1,000 sheets) New
BT1232 100 sheet bypass tray New
DIF1232IU Interchange Unit (*) New
DIF1232BU Bridge Unit (*) New
AD430 Duplex Unit (*) New
SR790 1,000 sheet finisher (*) DMR22A/27A
SR830 500 sheet finisher (*) New
DIF1232AT Adjustment Table (*) New
PT290 1-bin tray (*) New
DIF1232SS Internal Shift Sort Tray (*) New
DIF1232KCB Key Counter Bracket New
Fax Options:
DIF1232F Fax option New
DME185J-F Fax Function Upgrade DMR35A/45A
DIF1232G3 G3 Option New
DIF1232G4 G4 Option New
Print/Scan Options:
DIF1232S Printer/Scanner Option NIC included (*) New
DIF1232PS3 PostScript 3 Option New
DIF1232WL IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN Board DMR60/75
DIF1232FW IEEE 1394 Interface LAN Board PCR10, PCR16,
DMR60/75
DIMM128 128MB RAM PCR10, PCR16,
(Minimum required for printing) DMR60/75
DIMM256 256MB RAM Upgrade PCR10, PCR16,
DMR60/75
(*): See product configuration section to ensure all required options are included.
Supplies: Description: Yield:

CT116BLK Black Toner 25K developments
CT116YLW Yellow Toner 17K developments
CT116MGT Magenta Toner 17K developments
CT116CYN Cyan Toner 17K developments
* Drum and developers etc. are spare parts. Please check service manuals for codes and yields.
For information: Drum (B0519100) yield is 120K developments.
CCR081/101
Operator
Instructions:
Language: Copier O/Is: Print / Scan O/Is: Fax O/Is:

English CCDK101GB OI1224PRSCGB OI1224FAXGB
German CCDK101D OI1224PRSCD OI1224FAXD
French CCDK101F OI1224PRSCF OI1224FAXF
Italian CCDK101I OI1224PRSCI OI1224FAXI
Swedish CCDK101S OI1224PRSCS OI1224FAXS
Czech CCDK101CZ OI1224PRSCCZ OI1224FAXCZ
Hungarian CCDK101H OI1224PRSCH OI1224FAXH
Norwegian CCDK101N OI1224PRSCN OI1224FAXN
Portuguese CCDK101P OI1224PRSCP OI1224FAXP
Polish CCDK101PL OI1224PRSCPL OI1224FAXPL
Finnish CCDK101SF OI1224PRSCSF OI1224FAXSF
Note: Please see the Pictorial What-Fits-What to obtain the option configuration, i.e. which
additional options must be fitted when a particular peripheral/option is installed and
which options cannot be installed together.
CCR081/101
CCR081/101 CCR060A/062A DMR22A/27A Canon MINOLTA
CP680 CF1501
Configuration: Desk Top Desk Top Desk Top Console Desk Top
Dimensions: 550 x 670 x 620 x 680/ 550 x 604 x 650 x 781 x 620 x 730 x
(W x D x H) 781mm 744x620mm 709mm 1074mm 675mm
Weight 85kg 108 / 111kg 62kg 158kg 111kg
Resolution: 600dpi /2bit 600dpi / 8bit 600dpi / 2bit 600dpi 600dpi
Paper Size: Max A3 + A3 + A3 A3 A3 +
.
Min. A6 A6 B6 A5 A6
Paper Weight: 64-163g/m2 52-160g/m2 60-157g/m2 64-135g/m2 64-209g/m2
Paper Std. 500sheet 500+ 50sheet 1000sheet 1500+100 sheet 750sheet+
Capacity / 50sheet Bypass
Max 2600sheet 2050sheet 3100sheet 2550sheet 3250sheet
. / 1550 sheet
Copy BW 24 / 32cpm 25 / 31cpm 22 / 27cpm 24cpm 20cpm
Speed FC 8 / 10cpm 6cpm N/A 6cpm 15cpm
1st Copy BW 7.8sec 8.0sec. 4.9sec. 18.0sec. 12.0sec.
Speed FC 18.0sec. 22.4sec. N/A 34sec. 15.0sec.
Warm-up Time 99sec. 270sec. 15sec. 390sec. 300sec.
Duplex: Tray-less Duplex Tray Tray-less Tray-less Tray-less
Duplex Unit (L-2 Only) Duplex Unit Duplex Unit Duplex Unit
(Option) (Option) (Option) (Option)
Electronic Sorting: Yes N/A Yes N/A N/A
(Copying)
Scan Once Copy Yes Yes Yes N/A Yes
Many: (BW / 1page only)
Fax Function: Yes (Option) Yes (Option/ Yes (Option) N/A N/A
CCR062A only)
Document Server: Yes N/A Yes N/A N/A
(BW&FC)
Scan to e-mail Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A
(BW&FC)
Finisher / Sorter 500 / 1000 10 / 20 Bin 500 / 1000 7 Bin Finisher
Finisher Mechanical Sorter/ Finisher Mechanical (Print mode
Stapler Sorter only)
10 Bin
Mechanical
Sorter
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
FIERY E310 CONTROLLER
Product E310 Version 1 256MB Standard

Version 2 128MB Standard
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Launch
Month Country of
Location
Month Origin
December, 2000 U.S.A.
April 1999 U.S.A.

Date Created: October, 2000
Version 3
June, 2001
E310
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Target Customers 5
Key Features 7
Supported Copier Functions 11
Supported Copier Peripherals 12
System Requirements 23
Safety Standards and Emissions 25
Export Control 26
Code and Shipping Information 30
What Fits What 31

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\ E310.doc 1

E310
INTRODUCTION
The Fiery E310 Controller is a new, embedded controller that fits onto the CCR060A and
the CCR062A.
The E310 is a replacement for the E300, which will not fit onto the new range of 6cpm
colour copiers.
Besides improved performance, the E310 is based on new, interna l architecture, which is
similar to that of the E800A.
The E310 supports a range of new utilities from Fiery that have been designed to make
printing faster and of an even higher quality. The new features and improvements are
covered in depth in this document.
Please note:
There will be two versions of the E310 and the version can be determined by the serial
number and standard RAM.
The E310 will initially be released with 256MB of RAM as standard. When new
compression technology is incorporated, the E310 will be shipped with 128MB
standard maximum RAM.
The two versions will have similar performance, thanks to the more advanced
compression technology.

E310
Product Overview
Mainframe
The controllers operation

panel can be attached to the
copiers operation panel.
This will be supplied as an
option.
The E310 can be

inserted in the
interface kit, which
Front view of CCR060A/062A is attached to the
rear of the copier.
Connectivity and Option
CCR060A/062A + E310* + Controller Interface Type H**
AppleTalk, TCP/IP, IPX, on Ethernet 10/100baseT
IBM PC compatible Macintosh Unix Workstation
* Main components of the E310 - Motherboard, cables, documents, User CD, (System CD-TBA), PrinterManager CD
** Main component of Controller Interface Type H Interface unit, covers, cables
*** LCD operation panel will be provided as a separate option.

E310
Product Positioning
Embedded
00.3
External
E800A
99.3
CCR100/ E700
106 E650
00.8
00.8 00.12
99.4
CCR062A
CCR062 99.11 E310
/68 E300
99.2
RC200
CCR060 CCR060A
E300 RC210
RC200
99.3
00.10
99 1Q 99 2Q 99 3Q 99 4Q 00 1Q 00 2Q 00 3Q 00 4Q
Performance Test
TBA

E310
Target Customers
(1) Specialized Business (Primary target)
Demand for superior image quality with precise colo ur adjustment using ColorWise
Pro Tools, fast speed, A3/11x17 full bleed on 12 x18, PS controller and specific
price/performance goals.
Type of Business: Graphic and Industrial design, Advertisement
(2) General Office (Secondary target)

Demand for a high productivity, paper capacity, a variety of finishing options,
reliability, and specific price/performance goals.
Type of Use: Shared Printer for a department or a division
Target of E310 in General Office

who share the machine
Centralized L2/L1/M2
More than 100 More than 100
Division
50-100
M1
30-99
Work Group
20-30 Target of CCR060A/062A + E310
Target of CCR060A/062A + RC210
Small Work Group S2 Target of I-2/L2
3-10 5-29
S1
Business Personal
1-4

E310
Product Outline
Model Colour Controller E310
Memory 256MB Standard (Version 1)
128MB Standard (Version 2)
See Introduction for explanation.
Direct Access Storage
Device
Internal HDD 8.4GB EIDE drive
CD-ROM Drive Optional (For System Installation only)
Motherboard
CPU Intel Celeron 366MHz
Interface RJ45 for Ethernet 10/100 base T
Slots PCI for SCSI (for system CD installation)
32 bit PCI for Copier I/F
Operating System Windows NT v4.0
Compression ECT Compression Technology (Always ON)
Page Description PostScript 3
Language
Fonts Expanded 136 Adobe Typ e 1
Power Supply 110 / 220V
Network Protocol Apple Talk, TCP/IP, Novell IPX
(Auto switching )
Utility Fiery Scan, Fiery Down Loader, Fiery Web Tools,
(See 2.4.9 for available ColorWise Pro Tools, Fiery Unidriver(Win95/98), Fiery
utility by platform) Link
Fiery Spooler (for Mac only),
Command WorkStation software (option for Windows only )
Colour Management ICC Profile, PANTONE, Colour Chart, CMYK Colour
Tools Reference Pages, RGB Colour Tests, Trapping and
Overprinting Support, ColorWise Pro Tools (Calibrator,
Colour Editor, Profile Manager, Colour Setup)
Calibration Auto CAL2, Client-base Calibration
Print Resolution 600 x 600 for all paper size
Scan Resolution Max 600 dpi

E310
Key Features
600dpi / 6ppm
Copying resolution has been increased to 600dpi at 6 copies per minute in full colour
for both the CCR060A and CCR062A. Black and white copying and printing speeds
have been increased to 25 for the CCR060A and 31 for the CCR062A. Print
resolution is 600dpi at 6ppm.
Continuous Print
Because the E310 stores the entire document in RAM before it is sent to the copier,
the engine does not pause or cycle down to wait for the E310 to finish processing the
data during printing. This technology saves time and allows the E310 to drive the
CCR060A/062A at its highest speed.
Rip-While-Print
This technology increases throughput by allowing the E310 to begin processing new
documents whilst the current document is printing. Rip-While-Print is not supported
with reverse order printing and electronic collation, which require processing of the
entire job before printing.
ECT Compression Technology
This compression technology from EFI optimises memory storage by blending a

combination of lossless and lossy compression techniques, choosing the best
technique for each portion of the image. However, to the human eye, the net result is
visually lossless compression.
Colour Management
The E310 supports ColorWise2.0. In addition to the feature set of ColorWise1.0,

ColorWise2.0 allows users to download ICC monitor profiles to the E310, which
fully integrates the E310 into industry level colour reproduction standards. It also
includes a ColorWise Pro Tools utility, which replaces the Fiery Print Calibrator.
Calibration Methods
The following calibration methods are available:
- AutoCAL2
- Calibration via Client
CMYK Simulation
Converts all CMYK data to match selected colourspace parameters

(DIC/Euroscale/SWOP coated/None). When CMYK Simulation is enabled,
CMYK Simulation method is always FULL.

E310
Pure Black Text/Graphics
Defined RGB (0,0,0) blacks will be printed using 100% black toner.
Using Press Standard mode, black text may be printed at a lower density than
expected. By setting the pure black text/graphics feature ON, a deep black text is
printed.
Black Overprint
Composite PostScript printing devices typically knockout background layers when

drawing on top of them. By using Black Overprint, black text and graphics are
rendered over the background (solid colour, blend, or Image) as overprint. Using this
method prevents unpleasant results such as haloing, regardless of the application
used.
This mode is always ON, but is ignored if Pure Black Text/Graphics is turned OFF.
RGB Separation
Simulates RGB data based on CMYK Simulation profile. This is enabled only when
CMYK Simulation is enabled.
Copier Mode
Allows user to specify document type (Photo/Map). Details TBA.
Spot Colour Matching
Look-up tables on the E310 are used to provide the most accurate simulation of
Named Colours for each output device. Initially, Pantone tables will be provided,
but the mechanism supports the existence of multiple tables for various Named
Colour Systems.
Downloadable ICC Profiles
The support of user downloadable ICC Profiles is a core feature of ColorWise2.0.

Users can download ICC profiles to replace the function of EFIs printer profile. This
allows advanced users to define the CMYK values when converting from RGB, or
when simulating another printing device. The use of ICC Profiles is further described
in the Profile Manager of ColorWise Pro Tools.
Networking/Connectivity
The E310 supports NetWise2.0. NetWise2.0 allows users to set up the E310,
quickly and easily, within any network environment. It also supports the
management service including SNMP agent to support a variety of MIBs.

E310
Network Protocol, Printing services, Frame Type
Protocol Printing Frame Type Platform

Service
Novell Pserver Ethernet 802.2 WindowsNT4.0
IPX/SPX Ethernet 802.3 Windows95/98
Ethernet-II
Ethernet SNAP
TCP/IP LPD Ethernet-II WindowsNT4.0

Windows95/98
Solaris 2.4
SunOS 4.1.x
TCP/IP SMB Ethernet-II WindowsNT4.0
Windows95/98
Windows2000
Apple Talk PAP Ethernet SNAP WindowsNT4.0
(EtherTalk Phase 2 only) Macintosh
Note;1) LPD and PServer printing support for Windows95/98 requires

additional, user-provided software.
Printing Service

Pserver (Print Server)
Management Service
HTTP Daemon
SNMP agent
Supported MIBs
Host Resource MIB - system, storage, and device groups only

Printer MIB - customized for support of specific engine features
MIB-II - TCP/IP interface
EFI MIB - Fiery specific support
Auto-detect 10 and 100 BaseT Ethernet
The E310 motherboard has an Auto-detect 10/100 BaseT port as standard.

E310
Novell NDS/NDPS Support
In addition to Bindery mode, the E-310 supports NDS simultaneously in NetWare

network.
The E-310 also supports printing over a NetWare 5.X network, running either the
TCP/IP protocols or the IPX protocol. For pure IP printing, the E-310 takes
advantage of features in NDPS. For IPX printing, the E-310 supports the Pserver
service in Bindery emulation or through NDS.
SMB
The E310 supports direct printing from Windows 95/98/2000 and Windows NT.
Auto Configure IP
The E310 supports DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - the protocol that
enables automatic set up on a TCP/IP network - which automatically communicates
with a DHCP server and obtains information directly from the network when the IP
Auto radio button has been selected. This feature allows users to set up the E310
quickly and easily.
Printer Manager Support (SNMP Support)
The E310 supports print management (e.g. Aficio Manager) for printing solution
utilities. This enables the E310 to broadcast reports to agent software on the network
regarding the Fiery configuration and status. The E310 provides support for a
variety of MIBs. Macintosh is not supported. For the basic features of print
management please refer to the NPS for Aficio Manager (Peripheral Manager V3.5).
The following are the limitations of using print management with the E310.
- NIB set up is not available.

- Print management basically supports 14 languages, but installing languages
except for English, French, German, Spanish and Italian may cause
unexpected character description in some parts of the system. This is because
the E310 only supports the above- mentioned 5 languages.
- Only the default product bitmap will be displayed.
- Job Statistics will not be supported.
- Scanne r information cannot be monitored or managed.
- Energy saver control is not supported.

E310
Supported Copier Functions
Sort/ Staple
Sorting and stapling with the 10bin/20bin sorter is supported.

Staple position : one position
Supported paper sizes for sorter are:

LT, DLT, A3, A4, B4, B5, LG and F4 (8.5 x 13)
Auto Duplex Printing
Auto duplex printing with the CCR062A is supported.

The E310 offers two binding modes in duplex printing, Top Binding and Side
Binding.
Supported paper sizes for auto duple x printing are:

LT, DLT, A3, A4, B4, B5, LG, A5(LEF), HLT(LEF) and F4 (8 x 13)
.
Auto Duplex Printing with Sort/Staple
Binding. In the PPD option, please select the appropriate combination of paper
size(LEF,SEF), landscape or portrait, Rotation on or off, stapler mode and Top
Binding or Side Binding for the correct output.
11x17 / A3 Full Bleed Printing on 12x18 Paper
The E310 supports printing on wide format paper. An 11x17/ A3 full bleed print is
possible with 12x18 paper.
NB 11x17 / A3 Three sides full bleed printing will NOT be supported.

NB Ten Bin sorter will NOT support 12 x18 paper. Therefore, A3 full bleed
print is impossible with the 10 bin sorter.
OHP Slip Sheet
Blank paper can automatically be inserted between OHP transparencies when they
are printed out. You can choose Transparency + Slip-sheet as Media Type in the
PPD option.
Auto Tray Switching
When the user sends a job with tray set to Auto Select and the tray runs out of
paper during printing, it automatically switches to another tray (but not to the by-pass
tray) with the same paper size/direction.

E310
Supported Copier Peripherals
Printer Copier
DF64/ARDF Scanning from ARDF is Available
available with limitations.
Please see the Fiery Scan
section below.
ST10/10 bin sorter Available Available
ST32/20 bin sorter Available Available
CS160/3 bin unit Available Available
PS390/ 3 tray paper Available Available
bank
PS380/ 2 tray paper Available Available
bank
Fiery Utilities
There are some utilities that the E310 will not support, although the E800A
supports them. See Features NOT supported with the E310 below for such
utilities.
Fiery Downloader
This allows users to:
- Download PS files, EPSF files and PDF files to the Fiery.

- Check the status of the Fiery
- Manage and display the PostScript printer fonts stored on the Fiery hard
disk
- Drag PostScript files and Type1 fonts onto the Fiery Downloader icon to
download them (Windows95 / 98 only)
Fiery Scan
The Fiery Scan plug- in module allows users to retrieve scanned files from the Fiery,
remotely. The supported application for scanning is Adobe Photoshop. The support
of other TWAIN compatible applications has not been tested and will not be
supported.
Scan Resolution
Scan resolution is selectable between 75 600 dpi. The Fiery Scan reads the
document from the copier-glass at 600 dpi but uses software compression inside the
Fiery. Therefore, the maximum resolution is A3/Tabloid 600dpi, but it is software
enhanced 600dpi.
The user can adjust brightness to lighten or darken the images. Threshold is
supported only if Black and White is selected, to specify certain level as threshold.

E310
ARDF support
Scanning from ARDF is supported with limitations. The E-310 will initially attempt
to scan a document from the ARDF. If no document is present in the ARDF, the
E-310 will scan from the platen- glass.
After the user pre-scans and scans a page, whether from the ARDF or platen, the
Fiery Scan plug- in module closes to return the page to the application. To scan each
subsequent page, whether the next page of the ARDF job or a new job in the platen,
the user needs to reopen the Fiery Scan plug- in module to pre-scan and scan the
page. Duplex scanning is not available.
File Retrieval
EFI officially supports Adobe Photoshop only. User can retrieve from TWAIN
compatible applications, but they will not be tested nor supported by EFI.
Fiery Link
The Fiery Link is a utility designed to give the user up-to-date status on printer jobs
and connected Fierys from their workstations. It tracks the status of each print job
sent by the user and alerts the user to any error reported by the E310. The Fiery Link
includes the following tools that can be used to either monitor a users print job or a
connected E310.
o Status Shows the state of the job

o Queue Position Shows the number of remaining jobs queued to print on the E310
o File Info Displays the file name, when it was sent, target Fiery and number of
copies
o Input Trays Shows paper levels in all trays
o Toner Shows the level of available toners
o Fiery Info Shows Model name, amount of memory, HDD space, software
version of the E310
o Support List the contact names for the E310 and the copier

E310
Fiery Unidriver
The Fiery Unidriver is a unified printing interface for use with the Adobe PSDriver
for Windows 95/98. The collapsible bars in the Fiery Printing tab serve as a control
centre for all frequently used printing functions. By locating infrequently used
features in other tabs, Fiery Printing reduces the total number of tabs that are
needed in the driver and provides visual feedback to the users.
ColorWise Pro Tools
In the replacement of the Fiery Print Calibrator, The ColorWise Pro Tools (CWPT)
are the primary means for the user to utilise the advanced capability of ColorWise
2.0. CWPT are composed of the following modules:
o Calibrator
The Calibrator option is designed to make calibration as simple as possible.
There are 2 modes in this option, Standard Mode and Expert Mode. Users can
select the measurement method and check print settings, etc.
o Profile Manager
The Profile Manager allows users to download/upload ICC profiles between
Client Profiles (ICC profiles on the clients workstation) and Server Profiles
(ICC profiles resident on the E310).
o Color Editor
By clicking the Color Editor icon, users can customise a specific profile. Users
can customise the curves of CMYK, Bright ness, D-max, and Dot Gain in this
Color Editor.
o Color Setup
Color Setup is used to set the default ColorWise settings for the E310 and can be
accessed by clicking its icon in the ColorWise Pro Tools main window. For most
users, the factory defaults result in optimal colour output.

E310
Fiery WebTools
The Fiery WebTools reside on the Fiery Color Server and are loaded into the
working memory of a client workstation for use through any Internet browser
that supports frames and Java such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft
Internet Explorer (please refer to the below Requirements.)
Requirements:
Use of the Fiery WebTools requires the following:
The enablement of TCP/IP with a valid IP address on the Fiery

Installation of TCP/IP on the users workstation with a valid IP
address
The installation of an Internet Browser that supports Java and frames,
such as Netscapes Navigator or Microsofts Internet Explorer, on the
users workstation. The recommended version of each browser is to
be announced.
The Fiery must be TCP/IP enabled and have a valid IP address entered.
No DNS name is required. The user is responsible for all internet or
intranet security issues.
Fiery WebTools consist of 6 applications:
Status
WebSpooler
Installer
WebLink
Web Downloader
WebSetup
Fiery Status
Fiery Status displays Printing and Ripping information and is updated every 30
seconds by the Fiery.
WebSpooler
The Fiery WebSpooler provides the same functions as the stand-alone Fiery Spooler,
with the following exceptions:
1. Authorization
This determines the level of authorization from the initial connection
from the users browser to the Fiery Server. Administrator and
Operator logins can view and modify all print jobs on the Fiery.
Guest logins can only view print jobs on the Fiery.

E310
2. JobLog
It is not possible to retrieve the error message through the
WebSpoolers Job Log when double-clicking on an entry in the Job
Log that generated an error while printing.
Installer
The PostScript printer drivers shipped with the Fiery are also shipped on the Fiery
hard drive. Users can access these drivers by clicking the appropriate link in the
Install WebTool window.
WebLink
Selecting the WebLink WebTool, links the user to a remote site in the Tool Frame.
Web Downloader
Allows users to download PostScript, EPSF, and PDF files to the E310.
Web Setup*
The Fiery Web Setup allows a user to remotely configure the Fiery in a graphical
environment.
*The Fiery Web Setup cannot be accessed from Macintosh.
Fiery Spooler (for Macintosh only)
The basic functions of the Fiery Spooler are to:
Override current job option setting

Delete jobs and cancel processing
Duplicate or rename jobs
RIP a job and hold the raster data
Hold jobs in the spooler area or the RIPped area
Remove raster data from RIPped files
Change the priority of jobs
Display, print, save, or delete the Job Log
Preview thumbnail* and full-screen representations of print jobs
Note: Fiery Spooler is available on Macintosh only. Windows users can

use the same feature through Web Spooler or Command WorkStation
software (Option), installed on the clients Windows computer.
* Thumbnail
The Spoolers Thumbnail allows you to preview and edit raster data.

E310
Command WorkStation software (Option)
This software is available as an option. Command WorkStation can be installed on

Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000 to centrally manage Fierys on a TCP/IP or IPX
network. Up to 5 Fierys can be connected to Command WorkStation.
Command WorkStation extends control beyond that of Fiery Spooler. Downloader

and ColorWise Pro Tools are available through the Command WorkStation software.
It also enables data archiving to the E310 hard disk drive, or network connected
drives.
Available Utility by platform
Macintosh Win3.1 Win95/98 WinNT v4.0/

Win2000
Fiery AppleTalk N/A IPX/SPX, TCP/IP
Downloader TCP/IP
Fiery Scan AppleTalk N/A IPX/SPX, TCP/IP
plug-in TCP/IP
Fiery TCP/IP N/A N/A N/A
Spooler Java
Command N/A N/A TCP/IP, TCP/IP,
WorkStation IPX IPX
Data Archive N/A N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP
Fiery Link TCP/IP N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP

Java Java Java
Fiery N/A N/A Available N/A
Unidriver
ColorWise TCP/IP N/A TCP/IP TCP/IP
Pro Tools Java Java Java
Fiery Available N/A Available Available
WebTools except
WebSetup

E310
Software Version
TBA

E310
Features NOT supported with the E310

o Dual copier
o Plotter
o Fiery FreeForm
o DocBuilder Pro
Controller/Copier Compatibility
The following combinations are NOT supported :
o Current controllers (i.e. E300, RC200) to the CCR060A/062A

o E310 to copiers other than the CCR060A/062A (i.e. CCR060/062/068 /
CCR100/106)
Printable Paper size

O : The paper size that can be used.
X : The paper size that cannot be used.
Paper Size Paper Tray Bypass Tray***

A3 SEF 297 x 420 O O
A4 SEF 210 x 297 O O
A4 LEF 297 x 210 O O
A5 SEF 148 x 210 O O
A5 LEF 210 x 148 X O
A6 SEF 105 x 148 X O
B4 SEF 257 x 364 O O
B5 SEF 182 x 257 O O
B5 LEF 257 x 182 O O
B6 SEF 128 x 182 X O
11x17 (DLT) SEF 11 x 17 O O
8.5x14(Legal) SEF 8.5 x 14 O O
8.5x13(F4) SEF 8.5 x 13 O O
8x13(F) SEF 8 x 13 O O
8.5x11(Letter) SEF 8.5 x 11 O O
11x8.5(Letter) LEF 11 x 8.5 O O
5.5x8.5 (HLT) SEF 5.5 x 8.5 O O
8.5x5.5 (HLT) LEF 8.5 x 5.5 X O
12x18 SEF 12 x 18 X O
*Hagaki (SEF) 100 x 148 X O
* Double Postcard (SEF) 148 x 200 X O
**Custom 100 x 140-305 x 457 X O
* Hagaki and Double Postcard, are Japanese standard postcard / double-postcard sizes.
** Make sure that paper size selected in the E310s properties dialogue box matches the
actual paper size set in the bypass tray to avoid an unexpected result.

E310
Printable Area / Non-printable Area
Paper Size Printable Area (mm)

Leading edge Near edge
A3 SEF 293 413
A4 SEF 206 290
A4 LEF 293 203
A5 SEF 144 203
A5 LEF 206 141
A6 SEF 101 141
B4 SEF 253 357
B5 SEF 178 250
B5 LEF 253 175
B6 SEF 124 175
11 x 17 (DLT) SEF 275 425
8.5 x 14 (Legal) SEF 212 349
8.5 x 13 (F4) SEF 212 323
8 x 13 (F) SEF 199 323
8.5 x 11 (Letter) SEF 212 272
8.5 x 11 (Letter) LEF 275 209
5.5 x 8.5 (HLT) SEF 136 209
8.5 x 5.5 (HLT) LEF 212 133
12 x 18 SEF 301 450
Hagaki SEF 96 141
Double Postcard SEF 144 193
Custom 96 x 133 297 x 450
Non-printable Area
All sizes
(Leading ) (Near) (Far) (Trailing)
5mm x 2mm x 2mm x 2 mm ( 2 mm)
Print Speed
( A4 LEF / LT LEF )
Model I2 Full Colour Single Colour

(C,M,Y,K)
Simplex Plain Paper 6ppm 25ppm
OHP/Thick paper 3ppm 5ppm
Model L2 Full Colour Single Colour

(C,M,Y,K)
Simplex Plain Paper 6ppm 31ppm
OHP/Thick paper 3ppm 5ppm

E310
Counter
Two kinds of counting style can be selected at machine installation, Development
Count and Copy Count.
Development Count: number of developments (scans)
Copy Count: number of copied/printed pages
Development Count
Same as previous copier models.
Colour Printer Mode Copier Mode

Combination Counter increment Counter increment
Black Colour Black Colour
C+M+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +3
C+M+Y +1 +3 0 +3
(*Note 2) (Note *2)
C+M+K +1 +3 +1 +2
(*Note 2) (Note *2)
C+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +2
(*Note 2) (Note *2)
M+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +2
(*Note 2) (Note *2)
C+M 0 +2 0 +2
C+Y 0 +2 0 +2
M+Y 0 +2 0 +2
C+K +1 +1 +1 +1
M+K +1 +1 +1 +1
Y+K +1 +1 +1 +1
C 0 +1 0 +1
M 0 +1 0 +1
Y 0 +1 0 +1
K +1 0 +1 0
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
The Copy Count and the counter in Copier Mode remain the same
(*Note 2) The movement is different from the Copier Mode Counter increment, due to the
restriction of the Interface.

E310
Copy Count

Copy Copy Print Print Total* Total*
Full colour copy +1 +1
BW copy +1 +1
1C copy +1 +1
2C copy +1 +1
3C copy +1 +1
Full colour print +1 +1
BW print +1 +1
1C print +1 +1
2C print +1 +1
3C print +1 +1
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
* Mechanical counter displays Colour total and BW total.

E310
System Requirements
Macintosh System
The Macintosh System can be used with an Ethernet network.
Hardware supported:
- All currently available Power Macintosh models with at least 32MB of RAM.
Software supported:
- Apple System Software version 8.1 or later
- Adobe PostScript Printer Driver version 8.5 or later ( version 8.6 is included with
the user software)
To use Fiery utilities (Fiery Downloader, ColorWise Pro Tools, Fiery Link, and Fiery
Spooler), you also need at least 64 MB of RAM.
To use Fiery Scan, you also need Adobe Photoshop version 4.0 or later.
To use Web Tools you also need Netscape Communicator v4.5 or later, with Java
enabled, or Internet Explorer v4.0.1 or later, with Java enabled.
IBM PC or Compatible PCs
Hardware supported:
- A PC with an 80486, AMD or Pentium processor
- Win 95/98/2000 or Win NT 4.0
- At least 16MB of RAM for Win 95
At least 24MB of RAM for Win 98
At least 32MB of RAM for Win NT 4.0
At least 64MB of RAM for Win 2000
Software supported:
- MS-Windows 95/98 with IPX/SPX or TCP/IP networking protocol and Adobe PS
printer driver for Windows version 4.2 or later (version 4.3.1 is included with the
user software)
- MS-Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 with IPX/SPX, TCP/IP or Apple Talk
networking protocol
-For MS-Windows 2000, MS PS printer driver (included with your Windows
2000 OS)
-For MS-Windows NT 4.0, Adobe PS printer driver version 5.0 (version 5.1 is
included with the user software)
To use Fiery utilities (Fiery Downloader, ColorWise Pro Tools, and Fiery Link), you
also need:
- NT Service Pack 5 or later
- At least 48 MB RAM; 56MB of RAM is recommended
To use Fiery Scan, you also need Adobe Photoshop version 4.0 or later.

E310
To use Fiery Web Tools, you also need either Netscape Communicator version 4.5 or
later, and Java enabled or Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.0.1 and Service Pack
1, or later, with Java enabled.
Windows Me is supported by EFI but has not yet been fully tested.
UNIX
- A workstation with standard TCP/IP connectivity (for example, Sun

SPARCStation or Silicon Graphics workstation with Solaris version 2.x, 7.x, or
SunOS version 4.1.x software)
- TCP/IP printing software that conforms to RFC 1179(Berkeley lpd protocol)
Command WorkStation software CD option
To run the Command WorkStation from a remote workstation, you need:

- A Windows-based computer with a 200 MHz Pentium processor
- Windows 95/98, or Windows NT4.0 with NT Service Pack 5
- TCP/IP or IPX networking protocol installed
- A video adapter card with at least 2MB of video memory
- At least 32 MB of RAM
- An 850MB (or greater) hard disk drive
- A 2x (or greater) CD-ROM Drive

E310
Safety Standards and Emissions

Safety Approval
TBA
Emissions Approval
TBA

E310
Export Control
TBA

E310
Item Check List

Colour Controller E310 for US
Description
E310 for US (366MHz, 128MB)
Screws x 4
Media Pack
User CD Software
Grayscale strip
Doc Pack English
Printing Guide
Getting Started
Job Management
Configuration Guide
Colour Guide
Release Note
End-User License Agreement
Windows NT Certificate
Network CD
Bezel/Label ( Fiery, PS-3)
Colour Controller E310 for International
Description
E310 for Intl (366MHz, 128MB)
Screws x 4
Media Pack
User CD Software
Grayscale strip
Doc Pack English
Getting Started
Color Guide
Job Management Guide
Printing Guide
Configuration Guide
Release Note
Network CD
Bezel/Label ( Fiery, PS-3)

E310
Memory Upgrade 128MB
Description
E Series CD-ROM Drive Option Kit
Description
CD ROM Drive with SCSI cable
CD ROM Drive, 12 speed (Minimum)
SCSI Cable with Ferrite
Cable, Power Cord, US
Cable, Power Cord, European
Doc, Installing the CD ROM Drive, English
Doc, Read Me First, CD ROM Install, English
Command WorkStation software CD option
Description
Command WorkStation CD
Command WorkStation Notes for the E310
E310 Doc Pack, French
Description
Getting Started
Colour Guide
Printing Guide
Configuration Guide
Release Note
E310 Doc Pack, German
Description
Getting Started
Colour Guide
Printing Guide
Configuration Guide
Release Note

E310
E310 Doc Pack, Italian
Description
Getting Started
Colour Guide
Printing Guide
Configuration Guide
Release Note
E310 Doc Pack, Spanish
Description
Getting Started
Colour Guide
Printing Guide
Configuration Guide
Release Note

E310
Code and Shipping Information

Colour Colour Memory Command
Controller Controller Upgrade WorkStation software
E310 for US E310 for Intl 128MB CD option
Supplier EFI EFI EFI EFI
Net weight
lb TBA TBA TBA TBA
kg
Gross weight
lb TBA TBA TBA TBA
kg
Packing
Dimensions: TBA TBA TBA TBA
(W x D x H)
inches
cms
Country of Origin USA USA USA USA
E Series E310 E310 E310 E310

CD-ROM Drive Doc Pack Doc Pack Doc Pack Doc Pack
Option Kit French German Italian Spanish
Supplier EFI EFI EFI EFI EFI
Net weight
lb 4.8
kg 2.2
Gross weight
lb 5.4
kg 2.4
Packing
Dimensions:
(W x D x H)
inches 17 x 9 5/8 x 5 1/4
cms 43.2x24.4x13.3
Country of Origin USA USA USA USA USA

E310
WHAT FITS WHAT

CCINTH Controller Interface Type H
DDPAE310DV2 E310 Document Pack German

DDPAE310FV2 E310 Document Pack French
DDPAE310IV2 E310 Document Pack Italian
E300CCD CD-ROM Drive

E310OP Operation Panel
DSWE310CWS Command Workstation CD Option

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
FIERY E710 CONTROLLER

Product E710
256 MB
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Production
April, 2001 USA

Version 1
March, 2001
E710
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Key Features 5
Target Customers 15
Print Specifications 16
What Fits What 19

K:\Company\Market\NPS\E710.doc Page 1
E710
INTRODUCTION
The E710 Fiery Print Controller is the new embedded controller for the colour copier model
CCR132. It is the replacement for the current E700 and it is not compatible with the CCR100/106.
The E700 has been upgraded to be compatible with the CCR132 and the model name has been
changed to E710. The upgrade is related to the software release - and not to the hardware - so that
most of the specifications and features of the E710 are the same as the current E700.
It is also possible to upgrade the existing E700 to make it an E710, with an Upgrade kit that will be
available as an option.
The E710 will be available for launch in April 2001.
E710
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Product Image
Mainframe
Rear View of Model CCR132
The controllers
operation panel, which
is included in I/F Type
I, can be attached to
the copiers operation
panel.
E710 can be installed in the
interface kit, which is attached
to the rear of the copier.
CCR132 + E710* + Controller Interface Type I**
AppleTalk, TCP/IP, IPX, on Ethernet 10/100BaseT
IBM PC compatible Macintosh Unix Workstation
* Main component of E710 - Motherboard, documents, User CD, Printer Manager CD

** Main component of Controller Interface Type I Interface unit, LCD panel, covers, cables
E710
Model Colour Controller E710

Memory 256MB standard
Device 8.4GB EIDE drive
Internal HDD None
ZIP Drive Optional (For System Install only)
CD-ROM Drive
Motherboard
CPU Intel Celeron 366MHz
Interface RS232C (DB9) serial port (Not Used)
RJ45 for Ethernet 10/100BaseT
Slots 32 bit PCI for Copier I/F
Page Description Language PostScript 3
Fonts Expanded 136 Adobe Type 1
Network Protocol Apple Talk, TCP/IP, Novell IPX (Auto switching )
Utility Fiery Scan, Fiery Down Loader, Fiery Web Tools,
ColorWise Pro Tools, Fiery Unidriver, Fiery Link
Command WorkStation software (option for Windows only )
Colour Management Tools ICC Profile, PANTONE Certification, Color Chart, CMYK
Color Reference Pages, RGB Color Tests, Trapping and
Overprinting Support, ColorWise Pro Tools (Calibrator, Color
Editor, Profile Manager, Color Setup)
Calibration Auto CAL2, Client-base Calibration,
Print Resolution 600 x 600 for all paper size
Enhanced 4800 x 600 dpi with Smoothing
Scan Resolution Max 600 dpi with software compression
E710
KEY FEATURES
Printing Features
Postscript 3
Electronic Collation / Reverse Order Printing can be selected in the PPD for each job, or can
be set up as default in the server.
600dpi / 13ppm
In both copier and printer mode, the CCR132 is 600dpi at 13ppm/cpm(FC) 51ppm/cpm(BW).
In addition, print resolution can be enhanced to 4800 x 600 dpi with Smoothing. This can be
achieved by setting Smoothing to ON in the PPD option.
Continuous Print
Because the E710 stores the entire document in RAM before it is sent to the copier, the engine
does not pause or cycle down to wait for the E710 to finish processing the data. This
technology saves time and allows the E710 to drive the CCR132 at its highest speed.
Rip-While-Print
This technology increases throughput by allowing the E710 to begin processing new documents
while the current document is printing. Rip-While-Print is not supported with reverse order
printing and electronic collation, which require processing of the entire job before printing.

This compression technology of EFI optimises memory storage by blending a combination of
lossless and lossy compression techniques, choosing the best technique for each portion of the
image. However to a human eye, the net result is visually lossless compression.
Colour Management
The E710 supports ColorWise2.0. In addition to the feature set of ColorWise1.0,
ColorWise2.0 allows users to download ICC monitor profiles to the E710 that fully integrates
the E710 into industry level colour management. It also includes a ColorWise Pro Tools utility
that replaces the Fiery Print Calibrator.
Calibration Methods
The following calibration methods are available.
- AutoCAL2
- Local Calibration (TBA)
E710
CMYK Simulation
Converts all CMYK data to match selected colour space parameters
(DIC/Euroscale/SWOP coated/None). When CMYK Simulation is enabled, CMYK
Simulation method is always FULL.

Define RGB (0,0,0) blacks to be printed as 100% black toner.
Using Press Standard mode, black text may be printed at a lower density than the user
expects. By setting this feature ON, a deeper black text is printed.
Black Overprint
Composite PostScript printing devices typically knockout background layers when drawing
on top of them. By using Black Overprint, black text and graphics are rendered over the
background (solid colour, blend, or Image) as overprint. By this, it prevents unpleasant
results, such as haloing, regardless of application.
This mode is always ON, but is ignored if Pure Black Text/Graphics is set to OFF.
RGB Separation
Simulates RGB data based on CMYK Simulation profile. Enabled only when CMYK
Simulation is enabled.
Copier Mode
Allows user to specify document type (Photo/Map). Details TBA.

Look-up tables on the E710 are used to provide the most accurate simulation of Named
Colours for each output device. Initially, Pantone tables will be provided, but the
mechanism supports the existence of multiple tables for various Named Colour Systems.

To support user downloadable ICC Profiles is a core feature of ColorWise2.0. Users can
download ICC profiles to replace the function of EFIs printer profile. This allows advanced
users to define the CMYK values when converting from RGB or when simulating another
printing device. Application of the ICC Profiles are further described in the Profile Manager
of ColorWise Pro Tools.
E710
The E710 supports NetWise2.0. This allows users to be able to set up the E710
quickly and easily within any network environment. It also supports the management
service, including SNMP agent, to support a variety of MIBs .

Service
Novell IPX/SPX Pserver Ethernet 802.2 WindowsNT4.0
Ethernet 802.3 Windows95/98
Ethernet-II
Ethernet SNAP
Token Ring (Option)
Token Ring SNAP (Option)
TCP/IP LPD Ethernet-II WindowsNT4.0
Token Ring SNAP (Option) Windows95/98
Solaris 2.4
SunOS 4.1.x
TCP/IP SMB Ethernet-II WindowsNT4.0
Token Ring SNAP (Option) Windows95/98
Windows2000
Apple Talk PAP Ethernet SNAP WindowsNT4.0
(EtherTalk Phase 2 only) Macintosh
Note 1) LPD and PServer printing support for Windows 95/98 requires additional user-provided software.
.
Printing Services
Management Service
HTTP Daemon
SNMP agent
Supported MIBs

E710
Novell NDS Support

In addition to Bindery mode, the E710 supports NDS simultaneously in NetWare networks.
SMB
The E710 supports direct printing from Windows 95/98/2000 and Windows NT.
Auto Configure IP
The E710 supports DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol-the protocol which
enables auto set up for the client on a TCP/IP network), which automatically communicates
with a DHCP server and obtains information directly from the network when the IP Auto
radio button has been selected. This feature allows users to set up the E710 quickly and
easily.
Printer Manager Support (SNMP Support)

The E710 supports Printer Manager (e.g. Aficio Manager) for printing solution utilities. This
enables the E710 to broadcast reports to agent software on the network regarding the Fiery
configuration and status. The E710 provides support for a variety of MIBs over the UDP
and IPX protocols and conforms to version 1 of SNMP. Macintosh is not supported. For
the basic features of Printer Manager please refer to the NPS for Aficio Manager
(Peripheral Manager V3.5).
The following are the limitations of using Printer Manager with the E710.
- NIB set up is not available.

- Printer Manager basically supports 14 languages, but installing languages except for
English, French, German, Spanish and Italian may cause unexpected character
description in some parts. This is because Fiery only supports the above mentioned 5
languages.
- Only the default product bitmap will be displayed.
- Job Statistics will not be supported.
- Scanner information cannot be monitored or managed.
- Energy save control is not supported.
E710
Sort/ Staple
Sort/Staple with 20bin sorter is supported.
Staple positions : three positions
Supported paper sizes for sorter are:
LT, DLT, A3, A4, B4, B5, 12x18, 13x19, LG
If a user requests more than 20 sets of copies in Sort Mode, the maximum capacity of the
20-bin sorter will be exceeded. The user is requested to resend any additional copies
required after removing the paper from the output bins.
If a print job exceeds the maximum bin capacity, which is approximately 20 pages per bin
for plain paper, the job will resume printing after the output bins are cleared. Sorting of plain
paper from the bypass tray is supported.

Auto duplex printing with the CCR132 copiers is supported.
The E710 offers two binding modes in duplex printing, Top Binding and Side Binding.
Supported paper sizes for auto duplex print are:
LT, DLT, A3, A4, B4, B5, LG, A5 (LEF), HLT (LEF)

In the PPD option, please select the appropriate combination of paper size (LEF,SEF),
landscape/portrait, Rotation on/off, stapler mode, and Top Binding and Side Binding.
11x 17 / A3 Full Bleed Printing on 12x18 Paper,

11x 17 / A3 Full Bleed Printing with crop mark on 13x19 Paper
The E710 supports printing on a very wide format. Printing an 11x17/ A3 full bleed print
is possible with 12x18 paper. Moreover, an 11x17 / A3 full bleed print with crop mark
is possible on 13x19 paper.
* 11x17 / A3 Three sides full bleed printing will NOT be supported.
OHP Slip Sheet

Blank paper can automatically be inserted between OHP transparencies when they are
printed out. You can choose Transparency + Slip-sheet as Media Type in the PPD
option.
Auto Tray Switching

When the user sends a job with the tray selector set to Auto Select and the tray runs out
of paper during printing, it automatically switches to another tray including the LCT (but not
by-pass tray) with the same paper size/direction.
E710
Printer Copier
ARDF Scanning from ARDF is available Available
with limitations
20bin sorter Available Available
Large Capacity Tray Available Available
Film Projector Unit Not available Available
Key Counter Not available Available
Fiery Utilities
There are some utilities that the E710 will not support, although the E810A supports
them. See Features NOT supported with E710 on Page 13 for such utilities.
Fiery Downloader
- Download PS files, EPSF files and PDF files to the Fiery.
- Check the status of the Fiery
- Manage and display the PostScript printer fonts stored on the Fiery hard disk
- Drag PostScript files and Type 1 fonts onto the Fiery Downloader icon to
download them (Windows 95/98 only)
Fiery Scan
This allows users to scan documents from the Copier-glass or ARDF.
Supported application
The Fiery Scan plug-in is supported for use with Adobe Photoshop version 4.0 or later.
Other Twain-compatible applications for both Macintosh and Windows may work with the
Fiery Scan plug-in, but they will not be evaluated or supported.
Scanning feature
Maximum scan resolution is 600 dpi. Users can adjust brightness to lighten or darken the
images. Threshold is supported only if Black and White is selected.
ARDF support
Scanning from the ARDF is supported with limitations. The E710 will initially attempt to
scan a document from the ARDF. If no document is present in the ARDF, the E710 will
scan from the Copier-glass.
After the user prescans and scans a page, whether from the ARDF or platen, the Fiery Scan
plug-in module closes to return the page to the application. To scan each subsequent page,
whether the next page of the ARDF job or a new job on the platen, the user needs to
reopen the Fiery Scan plug-in module to prescan and scan the page.
E710
Fiery Link
Fiery Link is a utility designed to give the user up-to-date status on printer jobs and
connected Fierys from their workstations. It tracks the status of each print job sent by the
user and alerts the user to any error reported by the E710. The Fiery Link includes the
following tools that can be used to monitor either a users print job or a connected E710:
- Status (Shows the state of the job)
- Queue Position (Shows the number of remaining jobs queued to print on the E710)
- File Info (Displays the file name, when it was sent, target Fiery and number of copies)
- Input Trays (Shows paper levels in all trays)
- Toner (Shows the level of available toners)
- Fiery Info (Shows Model name, amount of memory, HDD space, software version of
the E710)
- Support (List the contact names for the E710 and the copier engine)
Fiery Unidriver
Fiery Unidriver is a unified printing interface for use with an Adobe PSDriver for Windows
95/98. The collapsible bars in the Fiery Printing tab serve as a control centre for all
frequently used printing functions. By locating infrequently used features in other tabs, Fiery
Printing reduces the total number of tabs that are needed in the driver and provides visual
feedback to the users.
ColorWise Pro Tools

Replacing the Fiery Print Calibrator, The ColorWise Pro Tools (CWPT) are the primary
means for the user to utilize the advanced capability of ColorWise 2.0. CWPT are
composed of the following modules:
- Calibrator
The calibrator option is designed to make calibration as simple as possible. There are 2
modes in this option, Standard Mode and Expert Mode. Users can select measurement
method, check print settings, etc.
E710
- Profile Manager
Profile Manager allows users to download/upload ICC profiles between Client Profiles
(ICC profiles on the clients workstation) and Server Profiles (ICC profiles resident on the
E710).
- Color Editor
By clicking the Color Editor icon, users can customize a specific profile. Users can
customize the curves of CMYK, Brightness, D-max, and Dot Gain in this Color Editor.
- Color Setup
Color Setup is used to set the default ColorWise settings for the E710 and can be accessed
by clicking its icon in the ColorWise Pro Tools main window. For most users, the factory
defaults result in optimum colour output.
Fiery WebTools
The Fiery WebTools reside on the Fiery Colour Server and are loaded into the working
memory of a client workstation for use through any Internet browser that supports frames
and Java such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer (please refer to the
requirements below.)
Requirements
Use of the Fiery WebTools requires the following:
Installation of TCP/IP on the users workstation with a valid IP address
The installation of an Internet Browser that supports Java and frames, such as Netscapes
Navigator or Microsofts Internet Explorer, on the users workstation. The
recommended version of each browser is to be announced.
The Fiery must have TCP/IP enabled and a valid IP address entered. No DNS name is
required. The user is responsible for all inter/intranet security issues.
Fiery WebTools consist of 6 applications:

Status
WebSpooler
Installer
WebLink
Web Downloader
WebSetup
Fiery Status
Fiery Status displays Printing and Ripping information updated every 30 seconds by Fiery.
E710
WebSpooler
The Fiery WebSpooler provides the same functionality as the stand-alone Fiery Spooler,
with the following exceptions:
1. Authorization
This determines the level of authorization from the initial connection from the users browser
to the Fiery Server. Administrator and Operator logins can view and modify all print jobs
on the Fiery; Guest logins can only view print jobs on the Fiery
2. Job Log
It is not possible to retrieve the error message through the WebSpoolers Job Log when
double-clicking on an entry in the Job Log that generated an error while printing.
Installer
The PostScript printer drivers shipped with the Fiery are also shipped on the Fiery hard
drive. Users can access these drivers by clicking the appropriate link in the Install
WebTools window.
WebLink
Selecting the WebLink WebTool links the user to a remote site in the Tool Frame (usually
the EFI website).
Web Downloader
Allows users to download PostScript, EPSF and PDF files to the E710.
Web Setup
The Fiery Web Setup allows a user to configure the Fiery remotely in a graphical
environment.
* The Fiery Web Setup cannot be accessed from Macintosh.

- Dual copier
- Plotter
- Face down Printing (not required as pages can be printed in reverse order)
- Fiery Spooler (Web Spooler is available)
- Command WorkStation software
- Fiery FreeForm
- DocBuilder Pro (DocBuilder is standard)
E710
The following combinations are NOT supported :
- Current controllers (i.e. E300, RC200, RC210, E800A) to CCR132

- E710 to copiers other than CCR132 (i.e. CCR060/062/068/060A/062A,
CCR067/067A, CCR100)
- E700 without Upgrade kit to CCR132
Note
* Since the copier engine speed and specification will be different for CCR100/106 and CCR132,
the E700 needs to be upgraded to connect to CCR132. For details about upgrading, please refer to
the following paragraph.
Upgrading the E700 to E710
The E700 Upgrade Kit includes:

System CD
User CD (TBA)
Dongle (*)
Manuals (TBA)
The E700 needs to be upgraded with the E700 Upgrade Kit to be connected to the CCR132,
because the copier engine speed and specification will be different for CCR100/106.
If you upgrade the E700 to connect it to the CCR132, the new Interface for the E710 (Interface
Type I) will be required.
(*) With the Dongle, this controller is recognized as an E710. Therefore the Dongle is an essential
item for the E710 and it will be delivered with the new controller.
E710
TARGET CUSTOMERS
Employees Production Specialized Business General Offices
G-A
More than 100 P-A S-A E710
E810A G-B
20-99 E810A /
E710
P-B
CCR132S-B
E710 G-C
Less than 20
P-C
E810A S-C
Primary Target Segment Secondary Target Segment
(1) Specialized Business (Primary target)

Demand for superior image quality, fast speed, A3/11x17 full bleed (Crop Mark
Printing), PS controller and specific price/performance goals.
Type of Business: Graphic and Industrial design, Advertisement
(2) Production Office (Primary target)

Demand for a fast speed, superior image quality, reliability, thick paper support,
A3/11x17 full bleed (Crop mark Printing), PS controller and specific price/performance
goals.
Type of Business : Print / Copy Shop, In-plant Print / Copy Centre,
(3) General Office (Secondary target)

Demand for a high productivity, paper capacity, variety of finishing options, reliability, and
specific price/performance goals.
Type of Use : Shared Printer for a department or a division
E710
PRINT SPECIFICATIONS
O : The paper size that can be used.

X : The paper size that cannot be used.
Paper Size Paper Tray 1st Paper Tray 2nd- Bypass

4th Tray***
A3 SEF 297x420 X O O
A4 SEF 210x297 O O O
A4 LEF 297x210 O O O
A5 SEF 148x210 X X O
B4 SEF 257x364 X O O
B5 SEF 182x257 O O O
B5 LEF 257x182 O O O
B6 SEF 128x182 X X O
11x17 (DLT) SEF 11x17 X O O
8.5x14(Legal) SEF 8.5x14 X O O
8.5x13(Legal) SEF 8.5x13 X O O
8.5x11(Letter) SEF 8.5x11 O O O
11x8.5(Letter) LEF 11x8.5 O O O
5.5x8.5 (HLT) SEF 5.5x8.5 X O O
8.5x5.5 (HLT) LEF 8.5x5.5 O O O
12x18 SEF 12x18 X X O
13x19 SEF 13x19 X X O
*Hagaki (SEF) 100x148 X X O
* Double Postcard (SEF) 148x200 X X O
**Custom 100x140-300x483 X X O
* Hagaki and Double Postcard, are Japanese standard postcard / double-postcard sizes.
** Custom Paper Size is supported under following limitations.

- With Mac OS, if the paper length is 13 inches or smaller feed in LEF direction.
- With WinNT4.0, standard paper size cannot be supported on custom paper size
setting.
- It will not support PageMaker on WinNT4.0.
*** Make sure that paper size selected in E710s properties dialog box matches the actual
paper size set in the bypass tray to avoid unexpected result.
E710

Leading edge near edge
A3 SEF 293 413
A4 SEF 206 290
A4 LEF 293 203
A5 SEF 144 203
A5 LEF 206 141
A6 SEF 101 141
B4 SEF 253 357
B5 SEF 178 250
B5 LEF 253 175
B6 SEF 124 175
11 x 17 (DLT) SEF 275 425
8.5 x 14 (Legal) SEF 212 349
8.5 x 13 (Legal) SEF 212 323
8.5 x 11 (Letter) SEF 212 272
8.5 x 11 (Letter) LEF 275 209
5.5 x 8.5 (HLT) SEF 136 209
8.5 x 5.5 (HLT) LEF 212 133
12 x 18 SEF 301 450
13 x 19 SEF 323 473
Hagaki SEF 96 141
Custom 96 x 133 323 x 473
Non-printable Area
All sizes (except for 13 x 19);
E710
Print Speed
( A4 LEF / LT LEF )
Full Single Colour Single Single Colour
Colour (C,M,Y,K) Colour (R)
(G,B)
Simplex Plain Paper 13ppm 51ppm 16.5ppm 13ppm
OHP/Thick paper 5ppm 8ppm 6ppm 5ppm
Extra Thick paper 4ppm 5ppm 5ppm 4.5ppm

Duplex Plain Paper 13ppm 45ppm 16.5ppm 13ppm
The E710 supports plain, thick, extra thick and transparency media types that are available on the CCR132
- Transparency: only selectable from the bypass tray
- Tray 2 and 3 support Thick and Extra Thick papers in the Duplex model
Make sure that the media type selected in the printer driver matches the actual paper type set in the selected tray
to avoid an unexpected result.
Counter
Two kinds of counting style can be selected at machine installation, Development Count and
Copy Count.
Development Count: number of developments (scans)
Copy Count : number of copied/printed pages
E710
Development Count
(*Note 1):


C+M+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +3
C+M+Y +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) 0 +3
C+M+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
C+Y+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
M+Y+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
C+M 0 +2 0 +2
C+Y 0 +2 0 +2
M+Y 0 +2 0 +2
C+K +1 +1 +1 +1
M+K +1 +1 +1 +1
Y+K +1 +1 +1 +1
C 0 +1 0 +1
M 0 +1 0 +1
Y 0 +1 0 +1
K +1 0 +1 0
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
(*Note 1) The Copy Count and the counter in Copier Mode will remain the same
(*Note 2) The movement is different from the Copier Mode Counter increment due to the restriction
of the Interface.
Copy Count

BW copy +1 +1
1C copy +1 +1
2C copy +1 +1
3C copy +1 +1
BW print +1 +1
1C print +1 +1
2C print +1 +1
3C print +1 +1
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
E710
WHAT FITS WHAT

CCINTI Controller Interface Type I
DDPAE710D E710 Document Pack German

DDPAE710F E710 Document Pack French
DDPAE710I E710 Document Pack Italian
E300CCD E300/E650/E700/E710 CD-ROM Drive

Command Workstation Software
TBC (E700 Upgrade Kit) ............ Upgrades the E700 to an E710
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION

For CCR132 512MB
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
September, 2002 USA

Version 1
August, 2002
E820
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Comparison 3
Product Overview 5
Key Features 7
Product Logistics 28
What Fits What 32


E820
INTRODUCTION
The E820 is a software upgrade on the E810 and is one of two controller options for the
CCR132 (the other is the embedded E710).
The E820 is a very powerful controller and it is recommended that customers requirements
be carefully investigated in order to ensure that the correct controller is provided.
The E820 is specifically designed for the professional print market. It has a range of
functions and options that are additional to those on the E710. Some of these include:
A Pentium III 866MHz processor and the option to add a second processor to increase
the capability to process large print files common to the professional market.
512MB of RAM, upgradeable to 1GB.
Additional software - DocBuilder Pro and Fiery FreeForm - which allow advanced
book and variable data printing.
Standard ZIP drive for archiving files in RIPped format.
Standard CD drive for software updates.
The E820 uses the same hardware as the E810 but there have been several changes to the
software utilities, to add more functionality. There are also new optional software utilities to
help penetrate the graphical / production environment.
The optional GRAPHIC ARTS PACKAGE is designed to give the professional colour user
extens ive manual controls and soft proofing and spot colour matching to enable very accurate
proofing.
Please see the KEY FEATURES section for further details.

E820
PRODUCT COMPARISON
Specification: E820 for CCR132: E810 for CCR132:

Memory 512MB 512MB
Internal HDD 40GB 40GB
CPU Intel Pentium III 866MHz Intel Pentium III 866MHz
optional second processor optional second processor
Connectivity Serial x 2 Serial x 2
Ethernet 10/100baseT Ethernet 10/100baseT
USB x 2 USB x 2
Token Ring (optional) Token Ring (optional)
Operating System Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0
Utilities Fiery Spooler Fiery Spooler
Fiery Scan Fiery Scan
Fiery Downloader Fiery Downloader
Fiery Web Tools Fiery Web Tools
Fiery ColorWise 3.0 Fiery ColorWise 2.0
Fiery FreeForm 2.0 Fiery FreeForm
Fiery Unidriver Fiery Unidriver
Fiery Link Fiery Link
Fiery Command Workstation (software) Fiery Command Workstation (software)
Fiery DocBuilder Fiery DocBuilder
Fiery DocBuilder Pro (optional) V1.5 Fiery DocBuilder Pro (optional)
Graphic Arts Package (optional)
Persona for Fiery
PrintShop Mail for Fiery (optional)
Key Selling Points:
High performance, high speed processing and photographic quality colour

Fiery FreeForm 2.0 (new)
Fiery DocBuilder Pro V1.5 (new)
ColorWise 3.0
NetWise 2.0
Fiery Link
Graphic Arts Package
o Pageflex Persona (Fiery version) (optional)
o Atlas PrintShop Mail (Fiery Version) (optional)
o eMail Services
o Expanded Scanning

E820
Target Markets:
Segment: Specialised business.

e.g. Graphic design companies and advertising agencies, Copy/Print
shops and in-house copy centres.
Main Usage: Colour proofs, catalogues, leaflets, presentations, direct mail, greeting
cards, and A3 size.
Originals: Photographs, drawings, graphics, and high resolution colour.
The E820 will enable NRGI to position the CCR132 Colour Solution at the high-end of the
specialised colour market. With similar competitive solutions being offered by Xerox, Canon
and now Sharp and Toshiba, it is important for NRGI to launch this controller to capture as
much of the specialised colour market as possible.
Furthermore, with the addition of the E820 controller to the product portfolio, we can expect
increased connectivity and this will add incremental sales to our total Colour Solutions
business.

E820
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Mainframe :
Side View of CCR132 Colour Controller E820
CCINTJ is necessary
to connect the E820 to Operation of the
the CCR132. E820 can be done
A small plastic plate via the LCD panel.
can be removed from
the CCR132s side
cover, and the E820
cable connects to the
interface.
Connectivity and Options:
X-Rite
CCR132
+
CCINTJ *
Command Workstation
Server via TCP/IP
(FACI Unit option is
required)
AppleTalk, TCP/IP, IPX, on Ethernet 10/100baseT
IPX, TCP/IP on Token Ring Network

(Token Ring Option is required) IBM PC compatible Macintosh Unix
Workstation
*Parallel Port will not be supported.

E820
Colour Controller E820:
Model Colour Controller E8 20
Memory 512MB standard

Device
Internal HDD 40GB (max.) EIDE drive
ZIP Drive Standard (250 MB)
CD-ROM Drive Standard (40 Rotational rate)
Motherboard
CPU Intel Pentium III 866MHz
Cache Level 2 cache (256KB)
Interface RS232C (DB9) Serial Port x 2
RJ45 for Ethernet 10/100 base T (on board)
USB x 2 (host USB port)
PCI for Token Ring Option (must use slot 6)
* All PCI slots are 64 bit wide but EFI video cards are using 32
bit. There are 6 slots. 4 slots are 5V PCI. 2 slots are 3.3V PCI.
Slots 32 bit PCI Interface slots

64 bit PCI Video Card Connection
AGP for FACI unit option (2 x AGP pro slots for FACI unit)
* AGP card is not standard but included in FACI unit option.
Video Interface to copier through video personality card
Page Description Language PostScript 3
Fonts Expanded 136 Adobe Type 1
Network Protocol Apple Talk, TCP/IP, Novell IPX
(Auto switching )
Utility Fiery Spooler, Fiery Scan, Fiery DownLoader, Fiery Web Tools,
ColorWise Pro Tools, Fiery FreeForm, Fiery Unidriver, Fiery
Link, Fiery Command Workstation (software), DocBuilder Pro
(option)
Colour Management Tools ICC Profile, PANTONE Certification, Colour Chart, CMYK
Colour Reference Pages, RGB Colour Tests, Trapping and
Overprinting Support, ColorWise Pro Tools (Calibrator, Colour
Editor, Profile Manager, Colour Setup)
Calibration Auto CAL2, Client-base Calibration, Local Calibration
Print Resolution 600 x 600 for all paper sizes
*Smoothing is not supported.
Scan Resolution Max 600dpi

E820
KEY FEATURES
Printing Features:
Postscript 3
Electronic Collation / Reverse Order Printing can be selected in the Printer Driver for
each job, or can be set as default in the server.
600dpi / 13 ppm
In both copier and printer mode, the CCR132 is 600dpi at 13ppm/cpm (FC)
51ppm/cpm (BW).
Printable File Format

The E820 supports printing of the following file formats, through Fiery Downloader:
PS
EPSF
PDF
TIFF (new)
Continuous Print
Because the E820 stores the entire document in RAM before it is sent to the copier,
the engine does not pause or cycle down to wait for the E810 to finish processing the
data. This technology saves time and allows the E810 to drive the CCR132 at its
highest speed.
RIP-While-Print
This technology increases throughput by allowing the E820 to begin processing new
documents while the current document is printing. RIP-While-Print is not supported
with reverse order printing and electronic collation, which require processing of the
entire job before printing.

This compressio n technology from EFI optimises memory storage by blending a
combination of lossless and lossy compression techniques, choosing the best
technique for each portion of the image. However, to the human eye, the net result is
visually lossless compression.
Colour Management
The E820 supports ColorWise3.0. In addition to the feature set of ColorWise1.0 and
2.0, ColorWise 3.0 allows users greater control of the E820 colour. Improvements to
ColorWise include:
- New Calibration method: ColorCal
- Expanded full simulation: Full-Source GCR and Full-Output GCR
- Spot Colo ur Support in PDF
- Automatic adjustment to grey balance: Auto Grey

E820
Calibration Methods
The following calibration methods are available.
- AutoCAL
- Local Calibration
- ColorCal (NEW)
* ColorCal utilizes the copiers scanner as a measurement device. It is an

extension of the current AutoCal technology. Unlike AutoCal, ColorCal
analyses 60 measurements per colo ur (AutoCal: 34 measurements). The
measurement scope ha s been enlarged to capture more data per patch. The 256
random patch layouts ensure more accuracy by compensating for spatial
variation on the page.
Measurement Instruments supported:

- X-Rite DTP32 densitometer
- X-Rite DTP41 Spectrophotometer
- EFI Spectrometer (NEW)
- EFI Densitometer (NEW)
* The instruments need to be purchased separately.
Post-Raster Calibration (NEW)

Post-Raster Calibration is the process of applying calibration in the video
hardware. Typically, calibration is applied during the RIPping process. With
Post-Raster, calibration is applied at a later-stage not during the RIPping
process. With Post-Raster, the job does not need ripping again after applying
calibration.
CMYK Simulation
Converts all CMYK data to match selected colour space parameters
(DIC/Euroscale/SWOP coated/None). Default setting of CMYK Simulation method
is Quick, but either Quick or Full can be selected. In addition to these methods,
ColorWise 3.0 offers expanded full simulation in two different ways:
- Full-Source GCR (previously Full)

- Full-Output GCR

Defines RGB (0,0,0) black to be printed as 100% black toner; 100% Black only will
print at copier D-Max. Using Press Standard mode, black text may be printed at a
lower density than the user expects. By setting this feature ON, user can obtain more
deep black text.

E820
Black Overprint
Composite PostScript printing devices typically knock-out background layers when
drawing on top of them. By using Black Overprint, black text and graphics are
rendered over the background (solid colour, blend, or Image) as overprint. This
prevents unpleasant results such as haloing, regardless of application.
Combine Separations
- Combine Separations
Combine Separations works with a maximum of four plates.
* New Combine Separations supports an unlimited number of plates.
(Graphic Art Package required)
- Trapping and Overprinting Support

By using the Combine Separations feature, the E820 supports trapping and
overprinting commands sent with Quark Xpress, Illustrator and PageMaker files
and will recombine desktop colour separated (DCS) files into composite images.
* This mode is not compatible with Spot Colo ur Matching.
RGB Separation
Simulates RGB data based on the CMYK Simulation profile. In ColorWise 2.0, RGB
Separation allows RGB data to be converted first to an intermediate CMYK colo ur
space representing another printing device, then passes through the Simulation path
along with the CMYK data. This feature is important for Pre-Press/Graphics
environments where there is a strong desire to utilize RGB workflows. Enabled
only when CMYK Simulation is enabled.

Look-up tables on the E820 are used to provide the most accurate simulation of
Named Colours for each output device. Initially, Pantone tables will be provided,
but the mechanism supports the existence of multiple tables for various Named
Colour Systems.
- Spot Colo ur Support in PDF (NEW)

- Pantone Calibration (NEW)

To support user downloadable ICC Profiles is a core feature of ColorWise2.0. Users
can download ICC profiles to replace the function of EFIs printer profile. This
allows advanced users to define the CMYK values when converting from RGB or
when simulating another printing device. Application of the ICC Profiles is further
described in the Profile Manager of ColorWise Pro Tools.
AutoGrey (NEW)
AutoGrey is an automatic adjustment to grey balance based on scanner input. The
end result is a modification to the Calibration Target of the selected output profile.
The main benefit of AutoGrey is a better visual match between multiple printers.
AutoGrey adjusts an output profile and makes CMY grey look like grey.

E820
NetWise allows users to setup the E820 quickly and easily within any network
environment. It also supports the management service, including SNMP agent, to
support a variety of MIBs. E-mail services is an expanded feature of NetWise for the
E820.

Service
Novell IPX/SPX*1 Pserver *2 Ethernet 802.2 Windows NT4.0
Ethernet 802.3 Windows 95/98/ME
Ethernet-II Windows 2000
Ethernet SNAP
Token Ring
Token Ring SNAP
TCP/IP LPR/LPD *3 Ethernet-II Windows NT4.0
Token Ring SNAP Windows 2000
Windows 95/98/ME
Solaris (*5)
SunOS (*5)
TCP/IP SMB *4 Ethernet-II Windows NT4.0
Token Ring SNAP Windows 95/98/ME
Windows 2000
Apple Talk PAP Ethernet SNAP Windows NT4.0
(AppleTalk Phase2 Macintosh Windows
only) 2000
[Notes]
*1 Support for IPX/SPX is for printing, not for utilities
*2 Fiery communicates to Netware and not with client OS.
*3 LPD/LPR printing support for Windows 98/ME requires additional user-provided
software.
*4 This covers support for printing.
*5 Supported version: TBA

E820
Printing Service
Port 9100
IPP Support
Management Service
HTTP Daemon
SNMP agent
Supported MIBs

Novell NDS Support

In addition to Bindery mode, the E820 supports NDS simultaneously in NetWare
networks.
SMB
The E820 supports direct printing from Windows 95/98/Me/2000 and Windows NT.
Auto Configure IP
The E820 supports DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol - the protocol
which enables auto set-up for the client on TCP/IP network), which automatically
communicates with a DHCP server and obtains information directly from the network
when the IP Auto radio button has been selected. This fe ature allows users to set up
the E820 quickly and easily.

E820
Network Utility Support (SNMP Support)

The E820 supports Ricohs SmartNetMonitor printing solution utility. This enables
the E820 to broadcast reports to agent software on the network regarding the Fiery
configuration and status. The E820 provides support for a variety of MIBs over the
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and IPX protocols and conforms to version 1 of
SNMP. Macintosh is not supported.
The following are the limitations of using SmartNetMonitor with the E820:
NIB setup is not available.

SmartNetMonitor basically supports 14 languages but installing languages other
than English, French, German, Spanish and Italian may cause unexpected
character descriptions in some cases. This is because the Fiery only supports the
above- mentioned 5 languages.
Only the default product bitmap will be displayed.
Job Statistics will not be supported.
Scanner information cannot be monitored or managed.
Energy save control is not supported.
Parallel printing and Recovery printing are not supported.
IPP Printing
With Internet Printing Protocol (IPP), print jobs are sent to the E820 over the Internet.
EFI supports IPP printing from Windows 95/98/ME/2000.

E820
E-mail Services (NEW)

1. E-mail Services:
a. Submit Job
b. Job Control
c. Notification Internet or
d. Address Book Intranet
SMTP
Server
HDD
POP3 or IMAP
Server
E- mail Services provides a new way to print remotely and control the E820. It allows
the user to print from remote locations and to bypass firewalls. It provides the
administrator with an easier way to be notified of problems with the printing device
and a better way to manage the E820.
a. Submit Job
The E- mail service provides the ability to submit jobs to the E820 in the form of
an e- mail attachment. The user can send an e- mail to the E820 with a file
attached.
* Attached File Format: PS/PDF/EPSF/TIFF
* It is required to register the users e- mail address in the address book.
b. Job Control
<Unique job ID>
Each job submitted to the E820 gets a unique job ID.
<Select Queue>
The user can submit the job to any of the E820 queues (print, hold, and direct).
<Cancel Job>
A job can be cancelled by sending a status message with the job ID. Only the
user who sent the job, or the administrator, can cancel a job.
<Job Status>
The user can request job status by sending a status message with the job ID.
Only the user who sent the job, or the administrator, can get the status.
c. Notification
<Job Completion/Error/Cancel Confirmation/Status Message>
For each job submitted, the E- mail service sends a notification e- mail to the
user saying that the job was completed and providing the unique job ID. The
notification e- mail message also contains any current error in the print device.

E820
d. Address Book
The E-mail service supports downloading a list of e- mail addresses to the E820
by sending an e- mail message to the E820. The message can only be sent from
an administrator account.
2. Scan to E-mail
Please refer to the Fiery Scan section.
3. E-mail Port Monitor

The E-mail Port Monitor allows the user to e- mail a print job to the E820. This offers
the following advantages:
* Ability to print to any E820 accessible by e- mail
* Low cost colour fax alternative
Supported Copier Functions:

Sort/ Staple
Sort/Staple with 20-bin sorter is supported.
Staple positions : three positions
If a user requests more than 20 sets of copies in Sort Mode, the maximum amount
of bins in the 20-bin sorter will be exceeded. The user is requested to resend any
additional copies required, after removing the paper from the output bins.
If a print job exceeds the maximum bin capacity, which is approximately 20 pages
per bin for plain paper, the job will resume printing after the output bins are
cleared.
Sorting of plain paper from the bypass tray is supported.
If a sorter is attached, then thick, extra thick and transparency output is to the first
bin as default. Plain, non-sorted paper outputs to the top tray.

Auto duplex printing is supported.
The E820 offers two binding modes in duplex printing, side binding and top binding.
LT, DLT, A3, A4, B4, B5, LG, A5 (LEF), HLT (LEF), F4 (8x13)

Binding. In the Printer Driver, select the appropriate combination of paper size (LEF,
SEF), landscape/portrait, Rotation on/off, stapler mode, and Top Binding and Side
Binding.
11 x 17/ A3 Full Bleed Printing on 12x18 Paper
11 x 17 / A3 Full Bleed Printing with crop mark on 13x19 Paper
The E820 supports printing on very wide formats, 11x17/ A3 full bleed printing is
possible with 12x18 paper. Moreover, 11x17 / A3 full bleed printing with crop
marks is possible on 13x19 paper.

E820
OHP Slip Sheet

Blank paper can automatically be inserted between OHP transparencies when they are
printed out. Transparency + Slip-sheet can be chosen as the Media Type in the
Printer Driver.
Auto Tray Switching

When the user sends a job with tray set to Auto Select and the tray runs out of paper
during printing, it automatically switches to another tray, including the LCT (but not
the by-pass tray), with the same paper size/direction.
Printer Copier
ARDF Scanning from ARDF Available
is available, with
limitations. Please
see ARDF Support
on the next page
20-bin sorter Available Available
Large Capacity Available Available
Tray
Supported Media Types

Plain paper
Thick paper (2nd / 3rd /bypass tray)
Extra Thick paper (2nd / 3rd /bypass tray)
Transparency (Bypass tray only)
The CCR132 supports Thick/Extra Thick paper from trays 2 and 3.

You can choose the media types in the Printer Driver to print from trays 2 and 3, as
well as the bypass tray.
(When printing Thick/Extra Thick paper/Transparency from the bypass tray, make
sure that the actual media type set in the bypass tray matches the media type selected
in the E820s properties dialogue box, to avoid paper jams etc.)
Fiery Utilities
Note: All the screenshots in this Product Specification are taken from the
utilities of the E800A on Windows 98.

E820
ColorWise Pro Tools

In replacement of Fiery Print Calibrator, the ColorWise Pro Tools (CWPT) are the
primary means for the user to utilize the advanced capability of ColorWise 3.0.
CWPT are composed of the following modules.
- Calibrator
The Calibrator option is designed to make calibration as simple as possible. There are
two modes in this option: Standard Mode and Expert Mode. Users can select the
measurement method, check print settings, etc. Please refer to Calibration Methods
for new calibration methods that have been added as part of ColorWise 3.0.
- Profile Manager
Profile Manager allows users to download/upload ICC profiles between Client
Profiles (ICC profiles on the clients workstation) and Server Profiles (ICC profiles
resident on the E820).
- Color Profile Kit (Option) - NEW -

The option includes profile creation software and an EFI Spectrometer. The EFI
Color Profiler software enables the creation of ICC profiles. The EFI Spectrometer is
a fast, hand held colo ur measurement device.
- Color Editor
By clicking the Color Editor icon, users can customize a specific profile. Users can
customize the curves of CMYK, Brightness, D- max, and Dot Gain in this Color
Editor.
- Color Setup
Color Setup is used to set the default ColorWise settings for the E820 and can be
accessed by clicking its icon in the ColorWise Pro Tools main window. For most
users, the factory defaults result in optimal colour output.
Graphic Arts Package (Option) (for Windows only)

The Graphic Arts Package has a series of features that specifically address concerns
and expectations of the graphic arts market. This market will use Fie ry equipment in
the production of final output printing (short run, digital on demand printing) and
digital proofing. Each of these applications places a high emphasis on colo ur quality
and accuracy, control of output quality, repeatability, the ability to meet known
industry standards and accurately reproduce the characteristics of other output
processes. This feature set attempts to provide a comprehensive series of tools to
address these requirements.
The following are the features of the Graphic Arts Package :

.
Halftone Screening
Users can print in halftone mode and define custom screening functions that will be
applied to their print jobs, for more accurate proofing/simulation of final offset
printing.

E820
Multiple Plate Separations

Supports more than 4 colour plates separations. Support to add plates for Spot colour.
Soft Proofing
Provides accurate preview of RIPped jobs in the CWS Full Screen Preview. It is
accurate for both colour and page layout/contents.
Spot-On Color Editor

Used to edit Pantone tables, or define custom spot colours. Allows measurement
input using the EFI Spectrometer ES 1000 (Color Profile Kit option is necessary).
This functionality allows localized spot colour changes without affecting the overall
colour.
Auto Trapping (new PPD option)

Automatically corrects mis-registration for composite or separated documents with a
simple setting selected in the PPD.
Paper Simulation (new PPD option)

Simulates the colour of paperwhite(white point) of the simulation profile. Simulating
the colour of paper to be used and the effect it will have on the final job (e.g.
newsprint) makes it more accurate as a final proof.
Hot Folders
Allows users to print easily with automated method for sending print files (PS and
PDF) without making settings from PPD. All users have to do is create a folder with
job ticket and drag-and-drop a print file to the folder. This is useful for users who
print repetitive jobs.
TIFF/IT Converter
Bridging proprietary and standard PostScript /PDF workflows through TIFF/IT input
Variable Data Printing
Variable data printing is typically used for personalized mailing, for example promotional
advertisement campaigns, insurance statements or financial statements. It involves merging
data from a database, via some defined rules, with a set of static elements that are common
across copies of a document and a set of variable elements that change from copy to copy.
Data Format
Layout - FreeForm
Database - PrintShop Mail
Business Rules - Persona
Content Generator Support
Language
- PPML
- VPS

E820
Generator (*)
On the input end, VDP requires a generator to aggregate data from a customer database along
with other objects, such as graphics and page layout files. The generator then outputs a coded
document that the RIP engine can read, translate and output to a printer. The generators that
the E820 supports are: FreeForm/PrintShop Mail/Persona.
FreeForm2 (NEW)
Fiery FreeForm is EFIs integrated variable data printing application. FreeForm is
able to distinguish between master and variable data and RIPs master data just once.
In this way, it supports faster processing of documents. FreeForm is platform and
application independent, which allows users to work in standard, familiar
applications. A FreeForm job can be designated from the printer driver or Command
WorkStation.
The benefits of Fiery FreeForm2 are:

* Individual pages from multiple masters to be used with a single variable file.
* Generate a list of all FreeForm2 masters on a Fiery
* Delete a FreeForm 2 master on a Fiery
* Select to print the FreeForm master or not while the master is sent to the Fiery
Atlas PrintShop Mail for Fiery version (Option)

PrintShop Mail for Fiery version is an enhanced version of the PrintShop Mail
software that utilizes FreeForm2 and has the expanded capability of drawing from
multiple masters. PrintShop Mail is PC and Mac compatible, making it appropriate
for a wide range of graphic environments.
Pageflex Persona for Fiery version (Option)

Pageflex Persona software addresses minute levels of variability, ideally positioning it
for demanding and large-scale VDP applications.
Optimize PowerPoint
The Optimize PowerPoint feature enables the user to improve the printing experience
with Microsoft PowerPoint files. Optimize PowerPoint yields the benefit of faster
RIPping of PowerPoint jobs that contain reccurring background images as defined in
the Master Page.
Independent of Fiery FreeForm technology, Optimize PowerPoint is an automatic

acceleration of PowerPoint files containing recurring full page background images. It
is a print driver independent feature and is available in all driver supported platforms.
It is also accessible from CWS/Spooler override.
Language Support
The E820 is compatible with the popular proprietary language VPS (Variable Print
Specification by Creo-Scitex), whilst supporting the emerging VDP industry standard
of PPML (Printer Page Markup Language). PPML is a non- vendor specific language.
Its adoption will offer flexibility for end-users in terms of job portability (output using
any system with a RIP-supporting PPML) and the efficient processing of large and
complex files.

E820
Command WorkStation software Version 4.0 (NEW)

Command WorkStation version 4.0 is the newest version of the Fiery server job
management software. The Command WorkStation version 4.0 user interface is made
up of several sections. All sections except for the Active Jobs window and the menu
bar may also be selected/deselected for viewing. The ability to determine the
different Command WorkStation windows gives the individual user the ability to
decide for themselves how much information they would like to view about the
current state of their connected Fiery servers. At its most basic, Command
WorkStation allows a user to simply monitor the state of all jobs. At its most
powerful, Command WorkStation is a powerful job management tool that allows a
system administrator/operator to simultaneously combine screen views.
The main new points:

- Log into multiple Fiery servers (*) and manage multiple Fiery servers
simultaneously (* Maximum number: TBA)
- Manipulate jobs from any connected Fiery server without having to look at
separate applications, or separate windows.
- Preview print jobs from several different Fiery servers at one time
- Constantly monitor activity on one selected server or on all connected servers
This sofware is available as standard. Command WorkStation can be installed to

Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP to manage Fierys centrally on a TCP/IP network.
Command WorkStation extends the users control beyond that available when using
Fiery Spooler, by adding the availability to access Downloader and ColorWise Pro
Tools from one interface. It also enables Fiery FreeForm data archiving to the E820
hard disk/ZIP drive, or network connected drives. Although the functions of
Command WorkStaion from the FACI Unit and from the client PC are the same,
performance should be faster when operating Command WorkStation from FACI.
Fiery Downloader
- Download PS files, EPSF files, PDF and TIFF(NEW) files to the Fiery.
- Check the status of the Fiery.
- Manage and display the PostScript printer fonts stored on the Fiery hard
disk.
- Drag PostScript files and Type1 fonts onto the Fiery Downloader icon to
download them.

E820
Fiery Spooler ( for Mac only)

The basic functio ns of the Fiery Spooler are;
Override current job option setting
Delete jobs and cancel processing
Duplicate or rename jobs
RIP a job and hold the raster data
Hold jobs in the spooler area or the RIPped area
Remove raster data from RIPped files
Change the priority of jobs
Display, print, save, or delete the Job Log
Preview thumbnail* and full-screen representation of print jobs
Fiery DocBuilderT M * (moving pages between and within applications)
Note: Fiery Spooler is available on Macintosh only. Windows users can use the same
feature through Web Spooler or Command WorkStation software installed in
the client Windows computer.
* Thumbnail and DocBuilder

The Spoolers Thumbnail and DocBuilder tools allow you to preview and edit raster
data. DocBuilder enables you to merge raster data from more than one file, not
necessarily from the same application or even the same computer platform.
Fiery DocBuilder Pro V1.5 (Option) (NEW)

Fiery DocBuilder Pro is an extension to the Command WorkStation software. After
converting source documents to PDF files, DocBuilder Pro allows users to arrange or
impose RIPped data on the E820. Arranging the pages in the correct order and
orientation for printing, selecting from a variety of binding styles, users can easily
make books or booklets. DocBuilder Pro will be even more effective with the support
of the CCR132 duplex function and flexible paper handling feature.

E820
New Features and Enhancements:
Performance
Overall, performance is up 70- fold in certain cases. There is also an increase in
page layout accuracy and flexibility.
Mixed Page Support
It is supported to impose a print job that contains pages of different sizes or
orientation.
Negative gutter size
In addition to positive gutter size supported in v1.0, users can enter negative gutter
size in v1.5. Negative gutter size can be used to eliminate white page margin
between imposed pages. The feature is especially helpful when creating Tri- fold
Brochure, Gate-Fold, or Z-fold where white page margin between pages may be
undesirable. It is also possible to create a page spread where a continuous image or
design is divided and located on two separate pages.
Customizable Trim marks/Fold marks
- colour, length, width, and types (solid and dotted)
- positive or negative
Right Edge Binding
Support right edge binding method, which is often used by many Asian countries.
Right Edge Binding also imposes pages in a document in reverse order.
Add, Delete, and Duplicate Sheet
- Add blank sheet to specific location. Pages on a blank sheet may be edited.
- Delete an imposed sheet from a specific location
- An imposed sheet can be duplicated and inserted in a specific location
Gang UP Unique Collate
Pages on an imposed sheet are ordered in a manner that causes the m to fall into
easily collated page order when the sheets are collated in a stack and cut into
individual pages. Both duplex and simplex are supported.
Late Editing (with PitStop from Enfocus Software)
PitStop plug- in software that is bundled in DocBuilder Pro v1.5 provides
interactive text, graphics editing capability.
Enhanced Template
- Rotation setting for each page
- Alignment setting for each page
- Custom trim/fold mark properties
- Fit to Width, Height scaling information
Fiery Scan -- Scanning Features Variation--

Adding the features of retrieving from web site and delivering the scanned data by e-
mail, the Fiery Scan workflow establishes the E820 as the key element of the network
scanning model.
The following features are possible with Fiery Scan

Fiery Scan (Scan to E-mail + Scan to HDD)
Fiery Scan TWAIN Plug-in
Fiery Remote Scan TWAIN Plug- in

E820
Fiery Scan
Scans are initiated at the E820 and stored on the E820 hard drive and retrieved via the
network. When the user initiates a scan, the user can select the destination for the
scan file as follows:
E- mail, Mailbox (WebScan), and Hold queue (Command WorkStation).
Destination: E-mail (Scan to E-mail) (NEW)

Scanned documents are directly delivered to PCs over the Internet or Intranet.
Internet or
Intranet
SMTP Client PC
Server
HDD Client PC
Make settings and

initiate scan at E820
LCD panel. Client PC
The E- mail service supports sending e-mail messages with an attachment of a scanned
image or a URL pointing to the image. The user can specify the e- mail address
manually or browse through a list of e- mail addresses and pick recipients.
Destination: Mailbox or Hold queue (Scan to HDD)

Scanned documents are retrieved from the Fiery HDD via Web-based utility or
Command WorkStation.
Retrieve scanned data

from:
- WebScan
- Command WorkStation
HDD
Make settings and Client PC

initiate scan at E-820
LCD panel.
When users select as destination:

* Mailbox: Users are allowed to retrieve scanned data through Web-based utility
(WebScan) and save the file in a selectable format to the client s PC.
* Hold queue: Users are allowed to store scanned data in the Command WorkStation
and merge it into the printing workflow (view scan files directly from the Command
WorkStation) as normal print jobs and to use DocBuilder functions such as job
merge/edit. (Viewing thumbnails of the scan file in DocBuilder requires RIPping of
the file). The file is transformed into PDF (Fiery unique) when users select this
destination.

E820
Fiery Scan TWAIN Plug-in

User operates scanner through TWAIN plug- in and 3rd vendor application in PC.
FF
HDD
Greyscale & Client PC
Colour With Fiery Scan TWAIN Plug-in +
Image File PhotoShop
The Fiery Scan plug- in is supported for use with Adobe PhotoShop (version: TBA).
Other TWAIN-compatible applications for both Macintosh and Windows may work
with the Fiery Scan plug- in but they will not be evaluated nor supported.
Fiery Remote Scan Plug-in (NEW)

Users operate the scanner through the Fiery Remote Scan plug- in and deliver the data.
Retrieve scanned data

from:
- WebScan
- Command WorkStation
HDD - Receiving e-mail
Client PC
With Fiery Remote Scan Plug-in
SMTP
Server
Deliver scanned data

via e-mail
(Internet or Intranet)
Client PC
Users are allowed to initiate a scan from the client PC with the Fiery Remote Scan
Plug- in and select the destination for a scan file, as follows: E-mail, Mailbox, and
Hold queue.

E820
Scanner Feature Comparison
Fiery Scan TWAIN Scan Remote TWAIN Notes

Scan to Scan to HDD Scan
Initiate Scan E-mail LCD PhotoShop + Scan Application
LCD Fiery Scan
Scan Settings Document Source ADF and platen ADF and platen ADF ADF and platen instructs the the
(single page engine to scan the
document from
at a time): either the
Automatic
no support Document Feeder
for multi- (ADF) or the
copier's image glass
TIFF) and platen (platen)
simplex/ simplex/ simplex simplex/

duplex duplex duplex
Scan Mode Transform (as
Colour or Greyscale necessary) image to
Sides (Single/Duplex) 8-bit colour data or
greyscale data. Not
applicable to
compressed data
Compression JPEG (Always) Video ASIC
converts to JPEG
during transfer.
Original Size A3, A4, A4-R, Letter, Letter-R, Tabloid

Resolution User defined. Supports 72, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 dpi Allows preview
generation. Not
applicable to
compressed data.
Destination E-mail recipients Mailbox Scan Application Mailbox
(Retrieval) (E-mail message) (WebScan), (WebScan),
Hold Queue Hold Queue
(Command (Command
WorkStation) WorkStation),
E-mail recipients
(E-mail msg),
Scan Application
File Format <Retrieval from> Can support
* WebScan: TIFF/JPEG/PDF multiple pages in
* Command WorkStation: PDF (Fiery Unique) TIFF format. JPEG
* Scan Application: Selectable format on Scan Application only available for
colour engines. File
saved as multiple
* E-mail: TIFF/JPEG/PDF files if ADF.
DocBuilder requires
PDF
Fiery Link
The Fiery Link is a utility designed to give the user up-to-date status on printer jobs
and connected Fierys from their workstations. It tracks the status of each print job
sent by the user and alerts the user to any error reported by the E820. The Fiery Link
includes the following tools that can be used to either monitor a users print job or a
connected E820.
- Status (Shows the state of the job)
- Queue Position (Shows the number of remaining jobs queued to print on the
E820 )
- File Info (Displays the file name, when it was sent, target Fiery and
number of copies)
- Input Trays (Shows paper levels in all trays)
- Toner (Shows the level of available toners)
- Fiery Info (Shows Model name, amount of memory, HDD space, software
version of the E820)
- Support (Lists the contact names for the E820 and the engine)

E820
Fiery Unidriver
Fiery Unidriver is a unified printing interface for use with Adobe PS Driver for
Windows 95/98/ME/2000/NT4.0/XP. The collapsible bars in the Fiery Printing tab
serve as a control centre for all frequently used printing functions. By locating
infrequently used features in other tabs, Fiery Printing reduces the total number of
tabs that are needed in the driver and provides visual feedback to the user.
* This screenshot is
taken from a pre-
productio n unit of the
E800 on Windows 98.
It will be replaced in a
future version of the
NPS.
Fiery WebTools
The Fiery WebTools reside on the Fiery Color Server and are loaded into the
working memory of a client workstation for use through any Internet browser
that supports frames and Java, such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft
Internet Exp lorer (please refer to the below Requirements.)
< Requirements>
Usage of the Fiery WebTools requires the following:
Installation of TCP/IP on the users workstation with a valid IP address
The installation of an Internet Browser on the users workstation that
supports Java and frames, such as Netscapes Navigator or Microsofts
Internet Explorer. The recommended version of each browser is to be
announced.
The Fiery must be TCP/IP enabled and ha ve a valid IP address entered.
No DNS name is required. The user is responsible for all internet /
intranet security issues.
Fiery WebTools consists of 7 applications:

Status
WebSpooler
Installer
WebLink
Web Downloader
WebSetup
WebScan

E820
Fiery Status
Fiery Status displays Printing and RIPping information updated every 30
seconds by the Fiery.
WebSpooler
The Fiery WebSpooler provides the same functionality as the stand-alone
Fiery Spooler with the following exceptions:
1. Authorization
This determines the level of authorization from the initial connection
from the users browser to the Fiery Server. Administrator and
Operator logins can view and modify all print jobs on the Fiery; Guest
logins can only view print jobs on the Fiery.
2. JobLog
It is not possible to retrieve the error message through the
WebSpoolers Job Log when double-clicking on an entry in the Job
Log that generated an error while printing.
Installer
The PostScript printer drivers shipped with the Fiery are also shipped on
the Fiery hard drive. Users can access these drivers by clicking the
appropriate link in the Install WebTool window. The Installer WebTool
also allows users to download the Fiery Link easily from the E820 to their
workstation.
WebLink
Selecting the WebLinkWebTool links the user to a remote site in the Tool
Frame.
Web Downloader
Allows users to download PostScript, EPSF, and PDF files to the E820.
Web Setup
The Fiery Web Setup allows a user to remotely configure the Fiery in a
graphical environment.
*The Fiery Web Setup cannot be accessed from Macintosh.

E820
WebScan
Allows users to retrieve a scan job from a mailbox and specify a file
format in which to save the scan job: PDF, TIFF or JPEG.
* To retrieve scanned data of multiple pages (scanned from ARDF) with

WebScan, please specify a file format, such as PDF or TIFF, to save the
multiple images in a single file. Although JPEG format is also selectable
for data of multiple pages, the data will be saved in multiple files.
Available Features of Utility by Platform
TBA
* Windows 3.1 will not be supported.

Dual Copier
Plotter
Face-down printing
Controller / Copier Compatibility
The following combinations are NOT supported:

Current controllers (i.e. E800A, E650, E300, E310, RC200, RC210) for the
CCR132
E820 to copiers other than the CCR132 (i.e. CCR060/062/068, CCR060A/062A
and CCR100/106)

E820
PRODUCT LOGISTICS
O: The paper sizes that can be used.

X: The paper sizes that cannot be used.
Paper Size Paper Paper Tray Bypass Media Type

(inches) Tray 1st 2nd-3rd Tray** (Thick/Extra
Thick)
Paper Tray 2nd-
3rd
A3 SEF 297 x 420 X O O O
A4 SEF 210 x 297 O O O O
A4 LEF 297 x 210 O O O O
A5 SEF 148 x 210 X X O X
A5 LEF 210 x 148 O O O O
A6 SEF 105 x 148 X X O X
B4 SEF 257 x 364 X O O O
B5 SEF 182 x 257 O O O O
B5 LEF 257 x 182 O O O O
B6 SEF 128 x 182 X X O X
11x17 (DLT) SEF 11 x 17 X O O O
8.5x14(Legal) SEF 8.5 x 14 X O O O
8.5x13(Legal) SEF 8.5 x 13 X O O O
8.5x11(Letter) SEF 8.5 x 11 O O O O
11x8.5(Letter) LEF 11 x 8.5 O O O O
5.5x8.5 (HLT) SEF 5.5 x 8.5 X X O O
8.5x5.5 (HLT) LEF 8.5 x 5.5 O O O O
12x18 SEF 12 x 18 X X O X
13x19 SEF 13 x 19 X X O X
*Hagaki (SEF) 100 x 148 X X O X
* Double Postcard (SEF) 148 x 200 X X O X
Custom 100 x 140 to X X O X
330 x 483
*Hagaki and Double Postcard are Japanese standard postcard / double-postcard sizes.
** Paper size recognition with Bypass Tray (New)

When A4/LT LEF is selected in the Printer Driver but the actual paper set in the Bypass Tray is a different
size, the Bypass Tray senses the size error and jobs will not be printed.
For other paper sizes, ensure that the paper size selected in the E820s properties dialogue box matches the
actual paper size set in the bypass tray, to avoid unexpected results.

E820

Leading edge Near edge
A3 SEF 293 412
A4 SEF 206 289
A4 LEF 293 202
A5 SEF 144 202
A5 LEF 206 140
A6 SEF 101 141
B4 SEF 253 356
B5 SEF 178 249
B5 LEF 253 174
B6 SEF 124 174
11 x 17 (DLT) SEF 275 424
8.5 x 14 (Legal) SEF 212 348
8.5 x 13 (Legal) SEF 212 322
8.5 x 11 (Letter) SEF 212 271
8.5 x 11 (Letter) LEF 275 208
5.5 x 8.5 (HLT) SEF 136 208
8.5 x 5.5 (HLT) LEF 212 132
12 x 18 SEF 301 449
13 x 19 SEF 323 473
Hagaki SEF 96 140
Custom 96 x 133 323 x 473
Non-printable Area
All sizes (except for 13 x 19):

Print Speed ( A4 LEF / LT LEF ):
Full Single Single Single

Colour Colour Colour Colour
(C,M,Y,K) (G,B) (R)
Simplex Plain Paper 13ppm 51ppm 16.5ppm 13ppm
OHP/Thick paper 5ppm 8ppm 6ppm 5ppm
Extra Thick paper 4ppm 5ppm 5ppm 4.5ppm
Duplex Plain Paper 13ppm 45ppm 16.5ppm 13ppm
The E820 supports plain, thick, extra thick and transparency media types due to the CCR132s specifications.
Transparency is only selectable from the bypass tray
Trays 2 and 3 support Thick and Extra Thick papers
To avoid unexpected results, ensure that the media type selected on the printer driver matches the actual
paper type set in the selected tray.

E820
Counter
Two kinds of counting style can be selected at machine installation, Development Count
and Copy Count:
Development Count : Number of developments (scan)
Copy Count : Number of copied/printed pages
Development Count (*Note 1)

The same as previous copier models:
Colour Combination Printer Mode Copier Mode

Counter increment Counter increment
C+M+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +3
C+M+Y +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) 0 +3
C+M+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
C+Y+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
M+Y+K +1 (*Note 2) +3 (Note *2) +1 +2
C+M 0 +2 0 +2
C+Y 0 +2 0 +2
M+Y 0 +2 0 +2
C+K +1 +1 +1 +1
M+K +1 +1 +1 +1
Y+K +1 +1 +1 +1
C 0 +1 0 +1
M 0 +1 0 +1
Y 0 +1 0 +1
K +1 0 +1 0
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
(*Note 1) The Copy Count and the counter in Copier Mode will remain the same
(*Note 2) The movement is different from the Copier Mode Counter increment due to the restriction of
the Interface.
Copy Count
Colour BW Copy Colour BW Print Colour BW

Copy Print Total* Total*
BW copy +1 +1
1C copy +1 +1
2C copy +1 +1
3C copy +1 +1
BW print +1 +1
1C print +1 +1
2C print +1 +1
3C print +1 +1
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0

E820
Macintosh System
TBA
TBA
UNIX
TBA
Safety Standards and Emissions:
Safety Approval
TBA
Emissions approval
TBA
EMC approval
TBA
Export Control:
The following is the updated list of countries restricted from importing Fiery controllers
outside the USA, provided by EFI US.
Cuba
Iran
Iraq
North Korea
Syria
Sudan
Rwanda
Unita /Angola
Myanmar/Burma
Serbias restrictions have been lifted

E820
WHAT FITS WHAT

Machine
E820 E820 Print Controller for the CCR132
Peripherals
CCINTJ Printer Controller Interface

E810CIO Central Interface Option Kit
E820DCPU Dual CPU Kit
E820DOCPRO DocBuilder Pro Software
E800ATOKENKIT Token Ring Option
E820UPKIT Upgrade Kit E810 to E820
E820GART1 Graphic Arts Package
E820COLP1 Colour Profiler Kit
DDPAE820U1 FIGS Document Pack
Language Sets
TBA French
TBA German
TBA Italian

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
RC210 COLOUR CONTROLLER
Product RC210
64 MB / 192MB Max.
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Production
Month Location
November, 2000 Japan

Version 2
August, 2000
RC210
Contents
Page
Introduction 3
Product Overview 4
Key Features 6
Target Customers 18
Product Outline 19
What Fits What ?

E:\Company\Market\NPS\RC210.doc 2
RC210
INTRODUCTION
The RC210 Print Controller is an embedded controller to be launched for use with the
CCR060A/62A series of full colour copiers.
The RC210 has been specifically designed to attack the general office segment of the colour
market.
Please note that the specific target markets for this controller are detailed on page 18.
The RC210 will be available to sell to customers in late November/December, 2000.
The RC210 succeeds the RC200. There have been improvements in both the hardware and
the software.
Improvements from the RC200
Continuous print speed has increased

(A4/LT LEF)
CCR060 CCR062/68 CCR060A CCR062A
Full Colour 4ppm 4ppm 6ppm 6ppm
B/W 14ppm 18ppm 25ppm 31ppm
Powerful CPU (QED 5261 200MHz) Processing time will be improved greatly
Reverse Order Printing is added
Custom Size Paper is supported
Bi-directional communication is supported Printer configuration status can
automatically be reflected in the printer driver
New features in IPDL-C printer driver Watermark, Overlay
More language support Spanish, Swedish, Danish and Norwegian printer drivers and
manuals are planned.
RC210
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Product Image
Below is a digital photograph of the RC210.
The RC210 does not have an interface in the box as the RC200 did; Controller Interface
Type H is required (EFIIF1).
RC210
Product Image
Mainframe
Rear View Operation Panel
The controllers operation panel

RC210 can be shipped with RC210, must be
attached to the rear attached to the copiers operation
of the copier. panel.
Controller * This operation panel is different
Interface Type H is from the controller operation panel
required. for Colour Controller E-310.
(EFIIF1)
Online
Reset Escape # Enter Media Menu
CCR060A/62 + RC210
A + Controller Interface Type H (EFIIF1)
Parallel
TCP/IP Ethernet
IPX/SPX AppleTalk (with RICOH-SCRIPT2)
NetBEUI
* UNIX is
not supported.
IBM PC * Token Ring is not

compatible Macintosh supported.
RC210
Key Features
IPDL-C
IPDL-C (Intelligent Page Description Language Colour) is a PDL developed by Ricoh. It
is designed to print Windows-based applications such as Microsoft Office (Word, Excel and
PowerPoint) with high quality and performance.
Features of IPDL-C :
Area Separation Processing

Different elements (Text, Graphics, Images) on the same page are processed
separately by applying the best suitable processing methods for each element.
Black Printing
Grey/Black text and graphics are printed with single colour black, instead of a
mixture of CMYK toners. This results in improved output quality and lower cost
per page.
Automatic Page Detection
When printing a document with mixed B/W and colour pages, IPDL-C
automatically detects them and prints B/W pages at the B/W print speed. This
gives a substantial productivity advantage to general office users, who in many
cases will be using documents with mixed black and colour pages.
Job Overlap
While printing the current page, IPDL-C will process the next page of a
document, thus enabling high performance.
RICOH-SCRIPT2 standard
The RC210 comes with RICOH-SCRIPT2 standard.
RICOH-SCRIPT2 was developed by Ricoh. It supports applications that require Adobe
PostScript level 2. This allows the following capabilities :
- Supports printing of Adobe applications (graphics and DTP applications / PDF files,
etc.) with high quality and performance.
- Mac users can share the printer.
- Images (eps. files) in PDF format can be printed clearly.
RC210
Print Speed
Continuous print speed has been increased both in B/W and full colour.
(A4/LT LEF)
CCR060 CCR062/68 CCR060A CCR062A
Full Colour 4ppm 4ppm 6ppm 6ppm
B/W 14ppm 18ppm 25ppm 31ppm
FC Print Speed BW Print Speed
50 % up 72.2% up
78.5% up
31ppm
6ppm
25ppm
4ppm
18ppm
14ppm
CCR060/62/68 CCR060A/ CCR060 CCR062 CCR062/68 CCR062

62A A A
Print Quality
True 600 x 600 dpi resolution and 4800 x 600 dpi with smoothing.
1, 2 or 4 bit colour per dot (CCR060A/62A capable of 8 bit colour per dot)
Memory Upgrade
Details TBA.
Network Capabilities

RC210 supports Autodetect 10/100 BaseT as standard.
Windows printing
Multidirect Print utility allows direct printing to RC210 with TCP/IP or NetBEUI
protocol without the need of a network server.
PortNavi also allows direct printing, but via TCP/IP only.
Installing Drivers and Utilities

IPDL-C Printer Driver, Printer Manager, Multidirect Print, PortNavi and
Acrobat Reader can be installed by Auto-run Installation from the user CD.
RICOH-SCRIPT2 PPD must be installed from the Add Printer Wizard.
RC210
Printer Driver features (IPDL-C)
Refined Graphical User Interface

All Tabs are positioned on the same level so that you can access each tab directly.
(With RC200, Finishing, Reduce/Enlarge, Duplex, Layout and MISC. tabs had to be
accessed from Enhanced button of Setup tab.)
Screen shot is
preliminary.
Bi-directional Communication
Under the following conditions, bi-directional communication is possible.
Windows 95/98/(2000/NT4.0) *Windows 2000 and NT4.0 are planned at present.
Network connection via Multidirect Print (with IP address), or Parallel connection
When bi-directional communication is successful, the printer configuration (option
configuration, tray and paper status) will be reflected to the printer driver.
In other conditions, the user must set up the printer configuration from the
Configure Printer button of the Printer Driver.
Reverse Order Printing

Reverse Order Print can be selected from the Finishing tab. This is done by spooling
all pages to the client PC hard disk first, then the pages are changed to reverse order
and spooled to the client PC hard disk again. Print jobs therefore output face-up
from the last page and the pages are in correct order. Note that this occupies the hard
disk of the client PC, and if there is not enough hard disk space available, jobs will
not be printed.
RC210
Overlay
You can save a data item as an Overlay and use that to overlay another data item.
1) Save as Overlay data
A
2) Overlay
A A
The Overlay data can be applied to either the first page only or all pages.
*Note that this is NOT equivalent to Fierys Free Form, but rather similar to
Watermark. (With Free Form, the ripped Overlay data is stored on the hard drive of
Fiery so that it does not need to be ripped for every page.)
Watermarks
Watermark can be selected from URGENT, CONFIDENTIAL, DRAFT,
ORIGINAL, COPY, or you can create/save your own Watermark text or Watermark
image (bitmap). Font, style, colour, position, size, angle, etc. can be customized.
New Print Quality Tab

Four typical document types (Text/Graphics, Photograph, DTP, CAD) are shown.
The quality settings that best suit each document type is pre-set. The user can select
the document type and printing mode either Fast or High Quality.
Screen shot is
preliminary.
RC210
Toner Saving
On or Off.
If On is selected, less toner will be used. This may result in unexpected output
quality and must not be used for final outputs, but it is convenient to use for proofing
and intermediate drafts.
Custom Setting is available for users who want to set up their own combination of the
following modes :
Screen shots are

preliminary.
Smoothing
Auto or Off.
If Auto is selected, Smoothing is done when Gradation is set to Fast.
Image Data
Fast, Standard or High Quality.
Fast : Image data up to 150dpi is printed as it is. Image data higher than 150dpi is
degraded to 150dpi.
Standard : Image data up to 300dpi is printed as it is. Image data higher than 300dpi
is degraded to 300dpi.
High Quality : Image data up to 600dpi is printed as it is. Image data higher than
600dpi is degraded to 600dpi.
Colour Profile
Off, Presentation or Photographic.
Performs colour matching suitable for Presentation (with some contrasts) or
Photographic (with smooth gradations).
RC210
Dithering
Auto, Photographic or Text.
Performs dithering using the dither pattern suitable for the data. If Auto is selected,
it automatically judges whether the data is text or photographic.
Black Text/Graphics
K, K (Text only) or CMY+K
Selects the printing method for black and grey portions of a data.
Gradation
Fast, Standard or High Quality can be selected. This selects the number of colours
used per dot (1bit, 2bit or 4bit / dot).
Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Colour Balance

These can be adjusted with a slide bar.
Calibration Method
Off-the-glass printer calibration is available. (= AutoCal in Fiery) Calibration
must be done separately for 1/2/4 bit
.
Printing Special Pages
Configuration Page, Job Log and Statistics can be printed from the controller
operation panel Setup menu.
Sort/ Staple
Sort/Staple with 20-bin sorter and 10-bin sorter is supported.
Staple position : One position
Supported paper sizes are :
A3, A4, B4, B5, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11, 8.5x13
Sorting is NOT supported with 3-bin sorter in printing mode.
Make sure that reverse order is selected from the application or select Reverse
Order Print from the IPDL-C printer driver when you do Sort/Staple.

Auto duplex printing with CCR062A is supported.
Supported paper sizes for auto duplex printing are :
A3, A4, B4, B5, 11x17, 8.5x14, 8.5x11, 8.5x13
11x 17 / A3 Full Bleed Printing on 12x18 Paper

11x17 / A3 full bleed print is possible with 12x18 paper.
OHP Slip Sheet

Blank paper can automatically be inserted between OHP transparencies when they
are printed out.
This is available if you select On in the RC210 Setup. Factory default is ON.
RC210
Face-down Print with 3-bin sorter

Face-down print is supported with 3-bin sorter, and can be selected in the Printer
Driver for each job.
3-bin sorter Specification
The features of the 3-bin sorter for the CCR060A/62A in Copy mode and Printer
mode will be as follows :
Paper Output Bin Face-down Output Sort (3 copies)

Designation
Copy YES NO YES
Print YES YES NO
"Paper Output Bin Designation" (This description is not a final name of the specification.)
You can designate which bin you want the output paper to exit for copy jobs, print jobs and
faxes. The setting can be done in User Tools when the 3 bin unit is installed on the machine.
For example: 1st bin : Copy output
2nd bin : Fax output (with the CCR062A)
3rd bin : Print output
With the above setting example, the paper will exit from the 1st bin for copy jobs, from the
2nd bin for incoming faxes (with the CCR062A), and from the 3rd bin for print jobs.
The setting can be changed in User Tools, (Default is : 1st bin ; Copy, 2nd bin ; Print, 3rd bin ;
Fax L-2 only.)
You can also assign the same bin for different jobs. (However, you CANNOT choose on a
per-job basis in Printer Driver.)
By using this feature, copied jobs, printed jobs and faxes (with the CCR062A) will not be
mixed up. Users who use the CCR060A/62A as a printer more than a copier, can designate
the 1st bin as the print job output tray, which will be easier for the customer to pick up.
"Face-down Output"
In printer mode, if you print a job with "Face-down print", the printed job will come out
face-down and your job will be in the correct order.
"Sort"
Sort (up to 3 copies) can be used in copy mode, but not in printer mode.
Auto Tray Switch

When the user sends a job with tray set to Auto Select and the tray runs out of
paper during printing, it automatically switches to another tray with the same paper
size/direction. However, the bypass tray is excluded from the selection.
Printer Copier
ARDF Not available Available
3-bin unit Available Available
Film Projector Unit Not available Not available
RC210
Utilities
Printer Manager
Printer Manager for Admin and Printer Manager for Client aresupported :
[Printer Manager for Admin]
View the status of the RC210 on the network.
Perform Network setup.
Others
[Printer Manager for Client]
View the status of the RC210 on the network.
Others
Mac is not supported.
For more details, please refer to the NPS for Aficio Manager.
During Auto-run Installation, user is required to choose either the copier brand
so that it addresses the correct Printer Manager brand, or the Printer Manager
itself out of all brands. (Whether it will be copier brand selection or Printer
Manager selection is not decided yet.)
Multidirect Print
This utility enables direct printing from Windows 95/98/NT4.0/2000, without the
need of a Network server.
(IPP, TCP/IP and NetBEUI are supported.)
Web Status Monitoring function

This function is standard on the Network board and can be loaded into the working
memory of a client workstation for use through an Internet browser.
The RC210 must have TCP/IP enabled and a valid IP address entered.
Web Status Monitor provides following functions :

- View Status of RC210.
- View System information of the Network Interface Board.
- View Setup reference of the Network Interface Board.
- Set up Network Printer Name, URL, etc.
PortNavi
PortNavi is planned to be supported with RC210.
Functions of PortNavi :
Peer-to-peer printing via TCP/IP
Recovery (Substitute) Printing
Parallel Printing
Notification of print job (Job end notification, Printer error notification)
Note :
For Recovery (Substitute) printing and Parallel printing, only RC210 RC210
combination is supported. (However, the copier can be CCR060A and
CCR060A, CCR062A and CCR062A, or CCR060A and CCR062A.)
Printer Manager for Client must be installed.
Only TCP/IP is supported.
For more details, please refer to the NPS of PortNavi.
RC210
Features NOT supported with RC210

- Dual device
- Scan
Following combinations are NOT supported :
- Current controllers (i.e. XJplus, ZX, XJ BP100, XJ80e, E-650, E-300, RC200, E-
800A) to CCR060A/62A
- RC210 to copiers other than CCR060A/62A (i.e. Model O, Azalea, Lily,
Cattleya, Iris, Lilac)
Changing from RC210 to E310

* Make sure that the RC210 and E310 are not sold to the wrong customers.
* If a user with RC210 wishes to change to E310, the user would need to purchase :
- E310 (Product)
The controller interface unit is the same as for RC210 and E310.
The controller operation panel for E-310 comes together with the E310.

O : The paper size which can be used.
X : The paper size which cannot be used.
Paper Size Paper Tray Paper Bank Bypass
1st 3 rd Tray
(I-2 only) (I-2/L-2)
A5 LEF 210x148 X X O
B5 LEF 257x182 O O O
B6 SEF 128x182 X X O
11x17 (DLT) SEF 11x17 O O O
8.5x14(Legal) SEF 8.5x14 O O O
8.5x11(Letter) SEF 8.5x11 O O O
8.5x11(Letter) LEF 11x8.5 O O O
8.5x13(F4) SEF 8.5x13 O O O
Hagaki 100x148 X X O
5.5x8.5 5.5x8.5 O O O
8.5x5.5 8.5x5.5 X X O
8.25x13 8.25x13 O O O
8x13 8x13 O O O
*12x18 SEF 12x18 X X O
*Custom Size X X O
RC210
* In some places with space limitation, 12x18 paper is described as DLT+.

* Custom size paper from the Bypass Tray is supported. (This is an improvementfrom
RC200.)
* When using the Bypass Tray, paper (all sizes) must always be fed in the SEF direction
(View from the front of the CCR060A/62A)

* When you are using the Bypass Tray, you need not set up the paper size from the
controller operation panel.
This is an improvement from RC200

[All sizes except 12x18]
The printable area is different, depending on the PDL and print settings.
The illustration below shows the non-printable area as a reference.
* With IPDL-C, Printable Area is compatible with PCL5e and PCL6.
4.3 mm (1/6) 4.3 mm (1/6)
4.3 mm (1/6)
Printable
Area
4.3 mm (1/6)
[12x18]
With 12 x 18 paper, printable area is as the illustration below. It supports full
printing of both A3 and 11x17.
Width of A3 paper
Printable Feed
Length of 11x17 paper Direction
Area
RC210
Counter
This page explains the copy/print counter that is fitted on the CCR060A/062A engine,
and is different to the log data supported with the RC210.
Two kinds of counting style can be selected at machine installation, Development
Count and Copy Count.
Development Count : number of developments (scan)
Copy Count : number of copied/printed pages
Development Count
Same as previous copier models.

C+M+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +3
C+M+Y +1 +3 0 +3
C+M+K +1 +3 +1 +2
C+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +2
M+Y+K +1 +3 +1 +2
C+M +1 +3 0 +2
C+Y +1 +3 0 +2
M+Y +1 +3 0 +2
C+K +1 +3 +1 +1
M+K +1 +3 +1 +1
Y+K +1 +3 +1 +1
C +1 +3 0 +1
M +1 +3 0 +1
Y +1 +3 0 +1
K +1 0 +1 0
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
Copy Count
BW copy +1 +1
1C copy +1 +1
2C copy +1 +1
3C copy +1 +1
BW print +1 +1
1C print +1 +1
2C print +1 +1
3C print +1 +1
Slip Sheet 0 0 0 0
RC210
Network Environment
Supported Network Protocol
Windows 95/98 Windows NT4.0 Windows 2000 Macintosh

TCP/IP O O O X
IPX/SPX O O O X
NetBEUI O O O X
Apple Talk X X X O
Supported Netware Frame Type

- Auto Select (Factory default)
- Ethernet 802.3
- Ethernet 802.2
- Ethernet II
- Ethernet SNAP
When Frame Type is set to Auto Select, it will automatically detect one by one that
Frame Type which is available. The first one found will be selected.
System Requirements for Printing

IBM PCs and compatibles can print over an Ethernet, Novell, or TCP/IP network or
with the parallel port.
[IPDL-C][RICOH-SCRIPT2]
Hardware supported:
- A PC with Pentium processor 133MHz or higher
Software supported:
- MS-Windows 95 / 98
- MS-Windows NT4.0
- MS-Windows 2000
Macintosh System
Macintosh System can be used with an Ethernet network.
[RICOH-SCRIPT2]
Hardware supported:
- All currently available Power Macintosh models.
Software supported:
- Laser Writer 8.x that comes standard with Mac OS
UNIX
Not supported.
RC210
TARGET CUSTOMERS

who share the machine
Centralized
L2/L1/M2
More than 100
More than 100
Division
50-100
M1
30-99
Work Group
20-30 Target of CCR060A/62A + E-310
Target of I-2/L2
Target of CCR060A/62A + RC210
Small Work Group
S2
3-10
5-29
S1
Business Personal
1-4
General Office (Primary target)

Demand for a large variety of connectivity options, reliability, and specific
price/performance goals.
Type of Use : Shared Printer for a section / small work group and work group.
The Colour Controller RC210 is designed to suit the requirements of the general office
users.
Since it comes with RICOH-SCRIPT2 standard, it can be used by Mac users in the same
network. However, the RICOH-SCRIPT2 should be used as a supplementary solution, as it
does not fit professional use.
For DTP users or professional users in the specialized business segments, the Colour
Controller E310 (Fiery) is the right solution, so the RC210 should not be sold to such
customers.
The Colour Controller E-310 targets high quality / calibration needs with
professional colour matching tools and genuine PostScript 3.
RC210
PRODUCT OUTLINE
Model Colour Controller RC210

Memory 64MB standard / 192MB maximum
Supported Configuration 64MB
128MB (64MB + Memory Unit TypeB 64MB)
192MB (64MB + Memory Unit TypeB 128MB)
* Other memory configurations are not tested, therefore, not
guaranteed.
Direct Access Storage Device - Internal HDD None
Motherboard
CPU QED5261 200MHz
Cache None
Interface Parallel Port ; IEEE 1284B (Compatible / Nibble / ECP supported)
RJ45 for Ethernet 10/100 base T
Slots One slot for memory upgrade
One slot for upgrade of the firmware by IC card.
(Service use only.)
Compression Ricoh unique ABS compression technology
Page Description Language IPDL-C and RICOH-SCRIPT2
Fonts 39 Roman fonts with RICOH-SCRIPT2
Power Supply 120V (US) / 220 - 240V (Intl)
Network Protocol TCP/IP, Novell IPX , NetBEUI,
Apple Talk (with RICOH-SCRIPT2)
(Auto switching )
Utility Network Utilities (Printer Manager for Admin / for Client,
Multidirect Print, PortNavi, Web Status Monitor function)
Colour Management Tools ColorSync Profile for Macintosh
Calibration Off-the-glass printer calibration
(= similar to AutoCal in Fiery.)
Print Resolution 600 x 600 dpi for all paper size
Enhanced 4800 x 600 dpi with Smoothing
Scan Not supported.
Technology to enhance productivity Job Overlap (Process next job while printing current job.)
(= similar to Rip-while-print in Fiery.)
Automatic Page Detection (Automatically detects B/W and colour
pages of mixed documents and prints at their full engine speed.)
2 byte font support Not officially supported.
RC210
Export Control
T.B.A
Safety Standard and Emission
Safety approval
- cUL
- TUV
- CE Mark
Emissions approval
- FCC
- CE Mark
Version 1.11
Scanners
SMR30dc
SMR542
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
MONO/COLOUR BUSINESS
SCANNER
SMR30dc
Launch Schedule
First Production Country

Production Month Launch Date Of Origin
January 2001 March 2001 Japan

Date Created: December, 2000
Version 2
August, 2002
SMR30dc
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Image 4
Key Selling Points 5
Target Market 7
Market Overview 10
Driver Specifications 18
What Fits What 19
Branding Labels 20
Comparison List 21
Scanner Glossary 22

K:\Company\Market\NPS\SMR30dc.doc 1
SMR30dc
INTRODUCTION
Product Concept
Shared High Speed Scanner for a Workgroup in a general office

environment.
Departmental Colour Duplex scanner at a reasonable price.
The SMR30dc is a versatile, departmental scanner that delivers full colour and high quality
images at a very reasonable and aggressive price. The selectable 3 types of Interface Method
(SCSI Interface, Network Interface and IEEE1394Interface) are suitable both for general
office and vertical markets. Its scanning speed (30ppm in B/W and 10ppm in colo ur) is the
fastest in this class.
SMR30dc
1) To propose Total Solution products
To Propose Total Solution Products incorporating software (Next Version of ScanRouter
& DeskTopBinder) and hardware (scanner) distributed by NRG.
2) To utilize the SMR30dc as a door opener with customers

To introduce the SMR30dc as an input device for document management systems to
customers who are not interested in copier/fax/printer business and then expand the
business with these customers for other NRG products. Some sales companies have
already been successful with this kind of approach. Document management systems can
be a key to attract a customers interest and lead to sales of other NRG products, such as
printers.
3) To maintain and expand the current scanner business

To maintain and expand NRGs position in the current vertical scanner market as a
successor model of the SMR24. The SMR30dc can provide new features, such as colour
and expandable interfaces (IEEE1394), in addition to the features of the SMR24.
4) To gain profits with box-moving business (no consumable business)

To attack Copier Sales Channel (BTA channel) and sell the SMR30dc into the general
office market in order to increase the market share with this product. As HP is actively
selling into the general office market, it is recognized that there is a requirement for
scanners in this market.
SMR30dc
PRODUCT IMAGE
Optional display that is part of the Network Interface Kit
SMR30dc
KEY SELLING POINTS
High image quality & full colour scanning:
Optical Resolution = 600dpi, Colour depth = 36 bits

The SMR30dc offers high image quality with real 600dpi optical resolution and a colo ur
depth of 36 bits. Maximum output resolution is 2400dpi and 12 bit input ensures that colo ur
images are crisp, clean and legible.
High speed:
Best-in-class scanning speed of 30ppm in B/W and 10ppm in colour
Colour Scanning Speed: 150% faster than HP Digital Sender 9100C (15/4ppm)
NB No A3/ Flatbed/ Colour Scanners are available from Fujitsu.
B/W Scanning Speed: 100% faster than HP Digital Sender 9100C (15/4ppm)
200% faster than Epson ES6000H/GT10000 (10ppm)
Duplex:
Inexpensive duplex function

A built- in, 50-page ARDF (Auto Reverse Duplex Feeder) delivers inexpensive duplex
scanning. Paper is fed and turned mechanically through the ARDF and only one Charged
Coupled Device (CCD) is required for duplex scanning. (Expensive, Dual CCD is not
required.)
SMR30dc
Broad Compatibility & Support:
3 selectable interfaces
In additio n to the standard SCSI interface (SCSI 2&3), a network interface and an IEEE1394
interface (Windows Me and Windows 2000 only) are available.
With the optional Network Interface Board, the SMR30dc can be connected to a network and
can then be used as a solution device for shared scanner use. A network TWAIN driver
enables a client to use any TWAIN-based applications for scanning. In addition, ScanRouter
Pro enables a client to store scanned images on a shared server and these images can then be
viewed with DeskTopBinder Lite.
The optional IEEE1394 interface offers high-speed data transfer for users who require higher
speeds than the SCSI interface.
Ease of Use:
Easy Operation
Manual scanning can be initiated by pushing the start key.
Excellent Utilities
The SMR30dc comes with excellent solutions software for shared use through a network.
DeskTopBinder Lite* will be bundled with the SMR30dc mainframe and ScanRouter Pro**
will be bundled with the Network Interface Kit.
Friendly User Interface

TWAIN and ISIS drivers are easy to use and configure to any TWAIN-enabled or ISIS-
certified imaging application. Both the TWAIN driver and the ISIS driver operate under
Windows95, 98, Me and NT4.0 and 2000. (The TWAIN driver for the IEEE1394 interface
supports only Windows 2000 and Me, since the other operating system does not support the
IEE1394 interface.) For details, please refer to Driver Specifications.
The straightforward design of the operation panel enables easy use of network scanning.
Auto Size Detection

The Auto Size Detection function works both with the ARDF and in Book mode. The
SMR30dc is the first scanner that has Auto Size Detection available in Book mode!
* DeskTopBinder Lite: A PC-based document management application that enables

users to manage image files and application files seamlessly.
** ScanRouter Pro: A software tool that turns the SMR30dc into a true networked
input output system.
The combination of DeskTopBinder Lite and ScanRouter Pro allows users to deliver,
retrieve, view and manage their documents.
SMR30dc
TARGET MARKET
Segmentation of Document Scanner Market
Document Scanners used in

offices are classified into
Desk Top
(DTP) and Vertical/ General
Image Quality Publishing
(DTP) office market.
Over 600dpi
Over 12bits Target 1: Target 2:
General Office Vertical
Market Market
Productivity
Vertical Market:
-Conventional Scanner Usage
-Mission critical use such as filing, OCR of fixed forms or document
management system such as an archiving system.
-Dedicated PC + Dedicated Operator
General Office Market:

-New usage of scanner in general office
-Distribution / Conversion of paper to Electronic format
-For shared use with a Network Interface installed
*Professional design use is not the target market of the SMR30dc.
SMR30dc
Target User
1) General Office: - Workgroup (more than 10 people)
- Users of other NRG Products (Copier, Fax)
2) Vertical Market:
Target 1: - Mission Critical Users who need Data Entry, OCR and electronic
filing of fixed forms like Banks, Insurance Companies and
Tracking Companies.
Target 2: - Major Accounts who need Document Management system
developed by 3rd party.
Target Users of the SMR30dc:
General Office Vertical Market

Mission Critical Use Document Manage ment
(DM)
Target Workgroup Banks, Insurance Major Accounts
User Users of other NRG Products Companies and Customers
Tracking Companies.
Operator Clients in workgroup Dedicated Operator Dedicated Operator
Connection Network Interface 1 to 1(SCSI Interface 1 to 1(SCSI Interface or
or IEEE1394) IEEE1394)
Main Image Capturing, Image Electronic Filing, Document Management,
purpose Distribution OCR of fixed forms such as Archiving
Type of Any paper documents in Fixed forms (Bank Any paper documents in
scanned general office, including cheque s, Agreements, general office
documents colo ur documents (brochures, Applications, invoices,
etc.) etc)
Main Document Distribution Utility Customized Packaged DM Software
application Application for developed by 3rd party
Software Dedicated System
Sales OA dealer (Copier, Fax) System Channel System Channel
Channel channel (VAR/VAD/SI), OEM (VAR/VAD/SI), OEM
channel channel
Feature of NRG will be a new entry with Traditional and This market has
market the SMR30dc Conventional Market increased recently
SMR30dc
Centralized 100
Division 50 - 100
Work Group 20 - 30
Small Work Group 3 - 10
Business Personal
A workgroup with more than 10 people is a target for the SMR30dc network version.
SMR30dc
MARKET OVERVIEW
European Market
Shipment of Desktop/Workgroup Category Scanners

in Europe
30,000
20,000
Units
Desktop/Workgroup
10,000
0
1996 1997 1998 1999
Year
1996 1997 1998 1999

Desktop/Workgroup 5,830 11,550 22,420 26,300
Increased by 98% 94% 17%
Market Share in Europe in 1999

Workgroup & Departmental (<US$2K & US$2-6K / <20ppm & 20-36ppm )
1999 69% 6% 16% 3% Fujitsu ScanPartner 600C/ M3091DC

9100C Digital Sender
HP
1998 6% 14% 10% DR 3020/4046
63%
Canon IS420, IS01, SMR24
1997 73% 15% 8% 1% Ricoh
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
(Source: European Scanning Program, reported as at April, 2000.)
Fujitsu has dominated the market share of desktop and workgroup scanners in Europe.
SMR30dc
Market Trends
U.S. Market
According to a report by info trends, departmental scanners have the potential to enter the
corporate environment. The price and performance of this class are a natural fit for many
business settings. Duplex and colour capabilities are important features for offices and
networking is another feature to meet the needs of the office environment.
Scanner Feature Penetration Percentage of Total

Shipments; North America
Duplex 56%
32%
Networked 46%
19% 2004
SCSI 94% 1998
82%
Color 80%
20%
0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
(Source: info trends 1999 Document Imaging Scanner Market

Forecast and Analysis issued in October of 1999.)
European Market
Due to the European success of Fujitsus scanners, there was a significant growth in
shipments of duplex capable and colour capable scanners during 1999. The following tables
show the actual shipment data and forecast of device configurations reported by the European
Scanning Program.
Simplex vs. Duplex
Actual Data (Source: European Scanning Program in 2000)

1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
Simplex 96% 84% 76% 63% 59% 56% 43% 36% 29%
Duplex 4% 16% 24% 37% 41% 44% 57% 64% 71%
BW vs. Colour
Actual Data (Source: European Scanning Program in 2000)

1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
B/W 65% 43% 68% 53% 51% 36% 32% 32% 35%
Colour 35% 57% 33% 47% 49% 64% 68% 68% 65%
SMR30dc
PRODUCT POSITIONING
HS2P+ B/W Colour
SMR542
E55ppm/81ipm
Next
Model High-End
Discontinued by
SMR540 the end of
55ppm March 2001
SMR36
36ppm
SMR24 SMR30dc Next Model Low-End

24ppm
Replaced by
the SMR30dc
`FiscalXX 2000 2001 2002 2003
The SMR30dc is positioned as the successor model of the SMR24.
Product Positioning with competitors

Canon NRG Panasonic Fujitsu B+H Kodak
Speed 120/240 9500
90/180 8125D
90 85/160
M4099 -/190 7500
90/180
SS855D M3099H Hi Volume 3590C
80
85/130
Production 85/85:85/170
-/150
Mid Volume 8100D
70 Production
85/130
M3099X
-/120 60/120 60/120
60 55/88
8080D 3500 5500
52/104:10/ -
Low50/100
Volume 50/90 2000DFB
50/100
DR5080C IS450D Production 57/88
50 DR5020 NRG SMR542 S2055 M4097
45/82
2500
52/104 S6045W
40/80 42 40/80 40/80
39/70
36 3338 4040D
40 DR4080U IS420 SS55 M3097D 1500
40/40 1000FB
NRG SMR540
36
30/10
30 Departmental 27/45
Mono S/D:Color S/D
SMR30dc M3093D 24
500FB Sheet Sheet
SMR24 20/40 22 M3096 20:10
20 24 SS25D 620C Flatbed Flatbed
15/15:5/5 Mono Sppm/Dipm
3091DC Workgroup
SMR30dc
Configuration
Mainframe
Flatbed colour image scanner with ARDF (SCSI Interface Version)
Options
Image Processing Unit (common to SMR540/542)
Network Interface Kit (NIB + Enhanced operation panel)
IEEE1394 Card
Memory 32MB, 64MB, 128MB (Common to CCR132, DSC38, PMR26/N, PMR32)
Basic Mainframe Specifications
Scanner Type: Flatbed colour image scanner
ARDF: Sheet pass-through type (with Mechanical Auto Reverse
Duplex function)
Photoelectric device: 7300 pixels, 3 line colour CCD
Functional Specifications
CCD Resolution: 600dpi optical
Resolution: 100 2400dpi
Scanning Speed:
Simplex PPM
200dpi 600dpi
A4 Portrait A4 Landscape A3 A4 Portrait A4 Landscape A3
B/W Binary 30 38.5 22.5 10.5 13.5 8
B/W 8 bit 10.5 13.5 8 3.5 4.5 2.5
Colour 8bit 10.5 13.5 8 3.5 4.5 2.5
Duplex PPM
200dpi 600dpi
A4 Portrait A4 Landscape A3 A4 Portrait A4 Landscape A3
B/W Binary 6 (12ipm) 7 (14ipm) 5 (10ipm) 3 (6ipm) 4 (8ipm) 2.5 (5ipm)
B/W 8 bit 3 (6ipm) 3.5 (7ipm) 2.5 (5ipm) 1.3 (2.6ipm) 1.5 (3ipm) 1 (2ipm)
Colour 8bit 3 (6ipm) 3.5 (7ipm) 2.5 (5ipm) 1.3 (2.6ipm) 1.5 (3ipm) 1 (2ipm)
*The above throughput speed is reference data measured by free-run test.
ADF Capacity: 50 sheets

Document size:
Simplex Maximum Main scanning: 297mm
Sub scanning B/W 2000mm
Colour 630mm
Minimum Main scanning 105mm
Sub scanning: 128mm
Duplex from A5 up to A3 or
from 5.5 x 8.5 up to 11 x 17ADF Minimum
SMR30dc
Output type: B/W and Colour (RGB), (sRGB)
Grey scale: 36bits/pixel internal

24bits/pixel external
Physical Specifications
Power Requirements 120V/60Hz, 220-240V/50/60/Hz

Dimensions: 590 x 546 x 265 mm
Weight: less than 28kg
Reliability Specifications
Average scanning volume: 4,000 pages per month

Max. scanning volume: 10,000 pages per month
Power On time 160 hours per month
SMR30dc
Options Specifications
Network Interface Kit
Configurations of Network Interface Kit

Network Interface
Board
ScanRouter Pro
Network TWAIN driver,
Operation Aficio Manager for Client
Panel Aficio Manager for Admin
Basic Specifications of NIC board
Interface
Between NIB and the host Ethernet 100BASE-TX
Between NIB and the engine APIP Video Interface
Protocol TCP/IP
-SNMP
-Http
-Ftp
-Rshd
Compression method TIFF (G3 FAX MH Compressed)

TIFF (G3 FAX MR Compressed)
TIFF (G3 FAX MMR Compressed)
JPEG
Standard memory size 32MB

Expansion slot for DIMM x 1
(32MB, 64MB, 128MB DIMM can be mounted)
Dimensions 155 x 158 x 12mm
Basic Specifications of Operation Panel
Display 20 letters per line and 4 lines can be displayed

on the operation panel.
Main Functions
When a Network Interface board is mounted on the SMR30dc, the following two functions
will become available.
1) Remote TWAIN function

Clients can scan documents with the Network TWAIN driver through the network interface.
Scanning can be started by using an application program on a PC or by pressing the start
button on the main unit.
SMR30dc
2) Distribution function
Clients can distribute scanned images from the operation panel of the main unit when
ScanRouter Pro is installed on a Client PC.
Optional memory functions
Optional Memory
32MB, 64MB and 128MB of DIMM can be mo unted on the Network Interface board.
Features available with additional memory

Distribution of images
If optional memory has been installed, scanning speed can be increased and larger files
scanned.
Example 1) If an A3/200dpi/full colour document is scanned, the data volume will become
approximately 22MB. This can be compressed with JPEG down to 2.2MB. With standard
memory, up to 3 pages of documents can be scanned without decreasing scanning speed,
however, from the 4th page, the scanning speed may slow down. If optional RAM (128MB)
has been installed on the network interface board, up to 60 pages of this type of document can
be scanned without the speed being reduced.
Example 2) If an A3/400dpi/full colour document is scanned, the data volume will be

approximately 88MB and it can be compressed with JPEG down to 8.8MB. Without optional
memory, scanning time may slow down. With optional memory, A3/ 600dpi/ full colour data
can be scanned without reducing scanning speed.
When the Remote TWAIN function is used, a large amount of data can be scanned without
decreasing the scanning speed.
SMR30dc
IEEE 1394 Interface (Option)
Protocol SBP2
Electrical, Physical Specifications IEEE1394
Data Transfer Speed: 100Mbps, 200Mbps, 400Mbps
Number of connector pins 6
Number of ports: 2
Power Supply N/A
Multi log in less than 4
O/S Windows 2000 and Windows Me
Driver TWAIN in 7 languages
IEEE 1394 Interface can work with Network Interface
Image Processing Unit
Colour B/W
Auto Photo/Letter NO YES
Dynamic Threshold NO YES
Section Area NO YES
SMR30dc
DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS
The table below shows O/S supported by ISIS and TWAIN drivers for the SMR30dc.
Type O/S
For SCSI Interface ISIS* Windows 95, 98, 98SE, Me, Windows NT 4.0 and 2000
TWAIN Windows 95, 98, 98SE, Me, Windows NT3.51, 4.0 and 2000
For IEEE1394 TWAIN** Windows 2000 and Me
For Network Interface TWAIN Windows 95, 98, Me, Windows NT 4.0 and 2000
*ISIS driver for SCSI Interface doesnt support Windows NT3.51.
**TWAIN driver for IEEE1394 supports only Windows 2000 and Me since other O/S do not
support scanners with IEEE1394 Interface.
Improvements of TWAIN driver from the current version (v2 for SMR24) to next version (v3
for SMR30dc)
There are 3 major improvements:
1) Start-up time of driver has been shortened

Current (sec.) New (sec.) % Improvement
SCSI Initial start-up time 4.69 2.75 41%
Start- up time when the scanner is 4.07 2.27 44%
used from the second time.
Network Initial start-up Time 7.58 4.18 45%
TWAIN Start- up time when the scanner is 6.67 2.40 64%
used from the second time
2) The maximum data size that can be scanned with a standard PC in a general
office has been improved.
In the example below, the maximum data size that can be scanned has been improved by 30
times
PC memory size: 128MB
Virtual memory size in Windows2000: 16MB
Application: Photoshop 5.5
Vacant volume of HDD: 5.2GB
Current (v2) Up to 30MB (A4, B/W Greyscale, 580dpi)
New (v3) Up to 900MB (A4, Full Colour, 1800dpi)
3) Colour Matching Feature

Colour data can be adjusted to match the PC display by using ICC profiles.
SMR30dc
WHAT FITS WHAT
Machine Description
SMR30dc 30 B&W/10 Colour ppm Duplex Scanner
Whats in the Box:
Comments:
SCSI Termination Internal
Power Cable C Type
Screwdriver
Installation Procedure
Safety Instruction Sheet 19 Languages
CD-ROM:
Operating Instruction for SCSI and IEEE1394 *1
TWAIN Driver for SCSI Interface *2
TWAIN Driver for IEEE1394 Interface *2
ISIS Driver
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Manual
Notes:
*1 Operating instruction will be provided in PDF format only. No paper manual is bundled.
*2 TWAIN driver will be generic
SCSI Cable and PC SCSI card are NOT supplied. An SCSI Card Type 2 or 3 and
appropriate SCSI cable are required for the end user to connect the PC to the scanner.
Peripherals
SIF350NIB Network Interface Board
SIF350FW IEEE 1394 Firewire Board
SPU2 Image Processing Unit (SMR540/2, SMR30dc)
DMEBP32 32MB RAM (PMR26/N, PMR32, SMR30dc)
SMR30dc
BRANDING LABELS
The SMR30dc is Ricoh branded, with the appropriate NRG brand label included in the box to
be used over the Ricoh label. Users must rebrand the scanners locally, on installation, with
the labels provided in the box.
The box of the SMR30dc does not carry any brand reference.
SMR30dc
COMPARISON LIST
NRG HP Digital Sender Fujitsu Avision Epson SMR24
SMR30dc 9100C M3093DG 820C ES6000H
Colour or B/W Colour Colour B/W Colour Colour B/W
Optical resolution 600dpi 400dpi 400dpi 300 x 600dpi 600 x 1200dpi 400dpi
Output resolution 100-2400dpi 100 - 400dpi 100 - 600dpi 50 - 4800dpi 60, 75,
100 - 600dpi
Min. Document Size (ARDF) 105x128mm (Simplex) A6 (4.1 x 5.8) 140 x 148mm
A5 (duplex)
Max. Document Size (ADF) 297x2000mm LG (8.3 x 11.7) 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 14 A3 A3
(630mm for colour)
Colour Depth 24bit N/A N/A 24bit 24bit 8bit for B/W
Duplex Scanning Method ARDF Not available 2 CCD Not available Available Not available
Throughput Speed
B&W 30ppm (0.605 msec/line) 15ppm 27ppm 20ppm 1.4 msec/line 24ppm
10ppm (1.815 msec/line)
Colour 4ppm 4 msec/line
Number of stack in ADF 50 sheets 50 sheets 50 sheets 50 sheets 50 sheets (option) 30 sheets
Standard I/F SCSI 2 / SCSI 3 Network I/F SCSCI 2 SCSI 2 SCSI 2 SCSI 2
Size (WxDxH) 590 x 546 x 265mm 299 x 285 x 403mm 530 x 376 x 570 x 350 x 656 x 458 x 176mm 550 x 500 x 300mm
198mm 165mm (not including ADF)
Weight 27Kg 16Kg 12Kg 12Kg 21Kg 28Kg
(not including ADF)
Monthly Duty Cycle 10,000 pages 10,000 pages 60,000 pages
Address Book Management Up to 99 200,000
Capacities
Bundled Utility DeskTopBinder Lite Adobe Circulate/
(Scanning Utility) Acrobat Reader, HP
ScanRouter Pro Digital Sender Link/
(Distribution Utility) Address Book
Manager, Jet Admin,
Digital Sender Service
SMR30dc
SCANNER GLOSSARY
Please find below a list of abbreviations and terms used in the document scanning world.
A/D Converter
Analogue/Digital converter is a device used in a scanner to convert analogue data to digital
data.
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

This feeds multi-page documents through a scanner, automatically. If you are setting up a
document management system it is important to get an ADF that can cope with your
workload.
Automatic Photo/Letter
This feature automatically distinguishes photos and text appearing on the same page and
ensures that they are treated appropriately.
BIT
One electronic pulse of data, eight of which make up a byte (see below).
BIT Depth
The number of bits used to represent each pixel in an image.
Bitmap
A generic term used to describe a computer-stored image composed of pixels, especially a
black and white one.
Byte
A collection of eight binary pulses or bits. One byte equals one character.
CCD
Charge-coupled device. A light sensing device built into a scanner, which is used to read the
image being scanned.
CD-R (Compact Disc Recordable)

Also called Writable CD. A type of compact disc, which can be recorded on once only (see
WORM) using special discs and recorders but which can be read in a conventional CD player
or CD-ROM drive.
CD-ROM (Compact Disc-Read-Only-Memory)

A type of compact disc used for storage of digital computer data instead of music or speech.
DIP System
Document Image Processing (also known as document management - see below) is electronic
filing. A DIP system will scan photos, reports and letters, etc. into a computer for archiving.
Digitise
When you scan a document or a piece of microfilm, its image is digitised. This means it is
put into a form that a computer can understand so that it can be saved, distributed, or
manipulated as necessary.
SMR30dc
Scanner Glossary (continued)
Dithering
The process of grouping dots shown on your monitor or produced by a printer into clusters of
varying sizes to simulate varying shades of grey or colour tones. Many desktop scanners
incorporate various software dithering techniques for use with different output devices.
Document Management
Is a way of storing all your information in electronic format and is one of the main reasons
for using a scanner. In order to work it will require a DIP system (see above).
DPI
Dots per inch. A measurement of output device resolution.
Drum Scanner
Also known as a rotary scanner, this works by pages being mounted onto cylinders at the
heart of the scanner.
Duplex
Double-sided scanning.
Dynamic Thresholding
This feature improves image quality further by automatically adjusting contrasts on each
page, smoothing the characters, and removing noise and unwanted marks. This is particularly
important on invoices, shipping notices, etc. where the text is often printed with very pale ink
on fine paper that gets dirty/smudged. Dynamic Thresholding will improve the quality of the
scanned image by darkening the text and whitening the page.
Enlarge
A straightforward image-manipulation feature that allows you to increase the size of an
image.
Ethernet
One of the first networks, Ethernet was developed by Xerox and is now the main network
standard. Ethernet describes the way in which computers can be connected.
Expansion Slot
A slot in a computer into which an interface card can be plugged in, in order to connect the
computer to a scanner.
File Format
Scanner software allows you to store images in a variety of file formats. These will
determine which applications can handle the image file.
Flatbed Scanner
Most closely resembles a desktop photocopier, it has a glass platen onto which you place
documents to be scanned.
SMR30dc
Gamma Correction
A way of adjusting the Gamma curve of an image so that the reproduction results on different
types of output device have similar gradations as the original image.
Gamma Curve
A graph that shows the contrast ratio between the input (original image) and output (image
data) in image processing.
GIF
Graphics Image Format. A compressed 8bit bitmap image file format (see above) developed
by CompuServe.
Greyscale
A continuous tone image made up of black, white and grey data.
Halftone
A continuous tone image reproduced using an array of various sized dots to create the illusion
of tone. Most newspaper images are halftones.
Handheld Scanner
The most basic type of scanner that works by the user manually sweeping the unit over a
page.
Image Compression
By compressing scanned images, you can create more space to store them.
Interpolation
A facility built into many scanners for doubling the resolution available by calculating the
appropriate colour value for pixels positioned in between those actually scanned.
Line Art
Images containing only black and white pixels.
Magneto Optical Drives

Writable compact disks used to store large amounts of scanned data. Usually found in a
document management system.
Multifunction Devices
These provide a combination of two or more of copying, printing, scanning and faxing
functions in a single device.
OCR
Optical Character Recognition. The conversion of scanned data to editable text.
SMR30dc
Optical Resolution
The actual physical resolution of the scanning hardware before any interpolation or zooming
functions are used. The optical resolution of a typical desktop scanner is 300 or 400 dpi, but
most scanners use software interpolation to double the resolution available to the computer.
Parallel Port
A socket on the back of a computer that can be used to connect it to a scanner.
PCMCIA
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. A type of expansion slot in a
notebook computer.
Pixel
Picture element. A matrix of touching pixels make up an image. Each pixel in an image has
a distinct colour or tone.
RAID
Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. A stack of hard disks used to store scanned images
in a document management system.
Red Lamp Unit

The optional red lamp unit replaces the green scanning lamp that comes as standard in the
scanner. The red lamp unit purposely eliminates red text or graphics on a page for use in
OCR applications. The red lamp, rather than reflecting, absorbs red text or graphics.
For example, in a multiple-choice test the form could be set up using only red ink. When the
exam candidate marks their responses and the test is scanned using a red lamp unit, the
scanner only picks up the candidates answers and not the form layout as well. This therefore
makes OCR of the test an easier function. This application can be used in any situation in
which someone is required to fill out forms, checklists, etc.
Resolution
The density of dots or pixels on a printed page or display, usually measured in dpi.
Rotate
Allows you to rotate the scanned image on screen. If a page is scanned upside-down, it can
be corrected and saved, so that you don't have to rotate it every time it is recalled.
RS232
Also known as the Serial port, this is an interface socket on a computer that can be used to
connect it to a scanner.
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface. Interface between a computer and an external device (i.e.
a scanner), capable in its second version (SCSI-2) of 20Mbps data throughput, which is much
faster than standard drives. Standard on all Macintosh computers but only on some PCs.
SMR30dc
Section Area
This function can be set when the scanner is integrated with specific document management
software. It is not possible with the standard TWAIN and ISIS drivers or DocuWare Intro.
This feature enables the assignment of miscellaneous scanning processes (e.g. OCR) to many
different areas.
Serial Port
See RS232 above.
Sheet fed
A sheet fed scanner will scan one page at a time. It looks and works rather like a fax
machine.
TIFF
Tag Image File Format. A popular image file format supported by most computer platforms
and applications.
Transparency Scanners
Very high-end specialist scanners used specifically to produce high resolution scans from
transparency or negative film.
TWAIN
A standard that defines compatibility between a scanner and editing software.
Vector Image
A type of graphic image. You can convert a bitmap image (see above) to a vector image by
using software applications such as Adobe Streamline and Corel Trace.
Video Interface
An expansion card with image processing functions, (e.g. OCR) built- in.
World Wide Web (WWW)

The part of the Internet that displays multimedia information, which allows the user to see
graphic images as well as text. Scanners can be used to capture an image for use on the
WWW.
WORM (Write-Once-Read-Many)
An optical disk technology that allows the user to write data to the disk, but not to erase or
modify data that has already been written.
Zoom
A facility built into many scanners for increasing or reducing the image size, by recalculating
lines in the image with a greater or fewer number of pixels, using the data actually scanned as
a reference. The technique is similar to interpolation but will usually be slightly less
accurate. Zooming can be used in conjunction with interpolation to achieve extra high
resolutions, but this is only recommended when scanning line art.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
MONO BUSINESS SCANNERS

SMR24/36/540/542
Launch Schedule
First Production
Production Month Launch Date
Models already in All models now

mass production available

March, 2000
Version 4
November, 2001
SMR24/36/540/540d
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Marketing 4
Product Outline 6
Key Selling Points 7
Sales Strategy 8
Target Market 9
Timing 9
Conclusion 9
Product Overview 10
Installation 17
What Fits What 18
Branding Labels 19
Scanner Glossary 20

K:\Company\Market\NPS\SMR24_36_540_542.doc 1
SMR24/36/540/540d
Introduction
NRG Group have been in the scanner business since 1995 with products such as the IFO
(FIFOPC) and other fax based machines with scanning capability. The launch of the DMR40
added a low-end business scanner to the Groups product portfolio. With the launch last year
of the SMR24 and SMR36 and this year of the SMR540 and SMR542 the Group launched
the first dedicated scanners.
Model Scan Functionality Machine Launch Date

IFO Via PC fax expander 10/95
LX7 Standard 01/97
FX6 Via PC fax expander 07/95
FX6/II Via PC fax expander 12/95
FX4 Via PC fax expander 01/96
LFO Via connectivity kit (s/w only) 10/96
F64 Via PC fax expander 09/98
R120 Standard 09/99
R150 Standard 09/99
E10 Via connectivity kit (s/w only) 01/99
Lily Back-scanning via Fie ry 08/96
Azalea Back-scanning via Fiery 09/96
Iris Back-scanning via Fiery 04/99
Lilac Back-scanning via Fiery 06/99
Cattleya Back-scanning via Fiery 06/99
ADAM Via PC fax expander 09/96
ADAM-E Via PC fax expander 10/97
SP3 (DMR40) SCSI-2 Interface 09/97
NAD series SCSI-2 Interface 06/98
In this NPS the scanner models will be referred to by their generic or product order code.
Please find below a table, which cross-references the generic code and the brand names.
Scanners have the same model number across all three brands. Ricoh codes are added for
ease of comparison.
Generic Code Nashuatec Rex-Rotary Gestetner Ricoh

SMR24 SC01 SC01 SC01 IS01
SMR36 SC420 SC420 SC420 IS420
SMR540 SC450 SC450 SC450 IS450SE
SMR542 SC450d SC450d SC450d IS450DE
Why scanners for NRG?
We have traditionally been in the business of selling copiers to our customers.

Copies and prints continue to converge and we are now in the business of selling
document output whether it is copies or original prints being sent across the network.
The volume of document output (print) devices continues to grow.
There is a demand from customers for turnkey solutions, not just products.
If customers store their documents electronically we will increase our print clicks when
they require hard copy originals.
SMR24/36/540/540d
It is important therefore to sell document input (scanning) devices to create a complete

document flow in true document management systems.
In addition there is increasing pressure from customers to have faster speed dup lex scanners.
Furthermore as software solutions partnerships such as Docuware have been introduced, a
business scanner range enables us to move into the document management arena. The launch
of the SMR24/36/540/542 mono document scanners will enable us to offer mid- high scanners
to customers with dedicated document management systems.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Marketing
Marketing Objective
Our marketing objective is to add a range of document input devices to our growing sales of
document output (print) devices. With the addition of optical mass storage devices and third
party application software, this will enable us to create true document management systems.
The Scanner Market
The high-speed category is occupied by scanners that are typically monochrome, (although
colour capable devices now feature in the market) and are used for document imaging,
archiving and OCR.
The market is defined on the basis of speed along a continuous range from 10 pages per
minute to over 100 pages per minute.
Speed is measured in pages per minute (ppm) meaning the number of A4 page sides that one
is able to scan in portrait mode at a resolution of 200 dpi. A duplex (two-sided) scan is
considered to capture two images simultaneously, thus a scanner that can process 50 pieces of
two-sided paper per minute is considered to have a speed of 100 ipm (images per minute).
The lower speed categories serve low- volume needs, such as those found in small
installations or supplementary input stations. Higher speed categories serve a smaller market
of very high volume applications, where productivity is the overriding concern. High-speed
scanners have more options dealing with transport, image enhancement, compression,
imprinting, endorsing, stacking, reject trays, encoding and OCR.
High-speed scanners are segmented into four different product scenarios; Workgroup,
Departmental, Low Volume Production and High Volume Production devices
SMR24/36/540/540d
The table below shows the typical product characteristics of the four product categories
within the high-speed market sector:
Market Workgroup Departmental Low Volume High Volume

Segmentation Production Production
Speed Up to 20 ppm 21 - 40 ppm 41 - 75 ppm 76 ppm and above
Configuration Primarily Simplex, Primarily Primarily duplex,
simplex, duplex simplex, simplex declining
duplex duplex
emerging emerging
Key Vendors Hewlett Bell & BancTec, Bell Kodak, Fujitsu,
Packard, Howell, & Howell, BancTec, Scan-
Fujitsu, Fujitsu, Fujitsu, Optics, Panasonic,
Panasonic, Panasonic, Kodak, VisionShape
Ricoh Ricoh, Panasonic,
VisionShape, Ricoh, Scan-
Xerox Optics
For certain applications the achievable speeds of departmental scanners offer a more cost
effective solution for some groups of users than more expensive low volume production
scanners.
Currently all scanners in the departmental sector are greyscale devices. During 1996 only 3%
of devices shipped were capable of duplex scanning and no devices were network capable.
There is strong evidence that the corporate market is beginning to embrace the potential of
scanning. For the market to maintain the projected growth devices will need to continue to
become easier to use and as easy to integrate as other office peripherals. Although there is
limited demand for a colour capability, devices today in the low end must be able to offer this
functionality.
Future product developments that will distinguish products include duplex and network
capability. By the year 2001 duplex scanners will outsell simplex scanners and by 2002
network scanners will be 40%. Colour demands will remain limited to the more specialist
markets.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Product Outline
SMR542 SMR540 SMR36 SMR24
Product concept Mono Mono Scannner, Mono Scannner, Mono Scannner,
Scannner, sheetfed and sheetfed and sheetfed and platen
sheetfed and platen platen
platen
Max. scanning A3 A3 A3 A3
size
ADF minimum 69 x 120 mm 69 x 120 mm 69 x 120 mm A5 (148.5 x 210mm)
document size
Optical 400 dpi 400 dpi 400 dpi 400 dpi
resolution
Output 100 800 dpi 100 - 800 dpi 60, 75, 100-800 60, 75, 100-800 dpi
resolutions dpi
Greyscale 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits 8 bits
Throughput 86 ipm 55 ppm 36ppm 24 ppm
(simplex, A4
portrait, 200
dpi)
Duplex Yes No No No
ADF capacity 150 sheets 150 sheets 100 sheets 30 sheets
Interface SCSI SCSI SCSI SCSI
Optional Video
Interface Unit
Image Processing Optional Optional Optional Optional
Unit
Data No No Optional No
Compression
Unit
Endorser Unit Yes Yes No No
Red Lamp Unit Optional Optional Optional No
SMR24/36/540/540d
Key Selling Points

In summary, the launch of the SMR scanner series of business scanners offers the customer
the following common key selling points:
Simple operation via the scanner driver

The scanners come bundled with standard TWAIN and ISIS scanner drivers which make
them compatible with most of the popular application software packages.
Compact desktop scanner design with easy access operation

All the scanners fit conveniently onto a desktop due to their space-saving design, all are
lightweight so can easily be moved around. Ease of use is foremost in the design with
documents loaded from the front and returned to the front, the operator can remain in the
same position from start to finish.
Scanning from the platen or the feeder

As A3 flatbed type scanners they can scan books and even articles from newspapers.
Moreover, they can scan specified areas on documents beyond A3 size. This is an
exclusive advantage that flat bed scanners have over sheet fed type scanners. The ADFs
employ copier-based feeding technology to keep paper jams to an absolute minimum.
Superior media handling

The scanner range can handle material up to A3 size automatically checking the size both
vertically and horizontally without the intervention of the operator. Furthermore with the
flatbed capability they can scan books, cards or any awkward shaped documents.
Sharp clear image reproduction

Optical resolution of 400 dpi and 256 grey scales graduations (8 bits/pixel) ensures highly
accurate images for a diverse range of document processing needs. Vertical and
horizontal resolution can be set independently to 60, 75 or from 100 to 800 dpi.
Advanced image processing

(a) Dynamic thresholding improves image quality further by automatically adjusting
contrasts on each page, smoothing the characters, and removing noise and unwanted
masks.
(b) Automatic photo/letter automatically distinguishes photos and text appearing on the
same page and ensures they are processed appropriately.
(c) Area extraction allows the user to select a specific rectangular area on a page for
scanning.
(d) Section area enables the allocation of miscellaneous scanning processes to as many
as six areas. This feature is only available when the scanner is integrated with
specific software applications.
(e) Flexible contrast, brightness and gamma curve adjustments provide greater control
over image reproduction characteristics.
Bundled document management software

DocuWare Intro is bundled with each scanner and allows the user basic document image
handling.
SMR24/36/540/540d
SCS1-2 Interface
Standard on all the scanners and makes it possible to connect to almost any PC or
network scan server.
In addition to the above, the key selling points of the individual scanners are as follows:-
SMR24
Fast scanning speed up to 34 ppm (uses the same ADF as the DMR20/25)
SMR36
Fast scanning speeds up to 46 ppm

Optional data compression unit
Optional video interface unit
Optional red lamp unit
SMR540/542
Fast scanning speeds (maximum 100 ipm, A4 landscape @ 200 dpi)

Duplex scanner version (SMR542)
Endorser unit as standard
Optional red lamp unit
Sales Strategy
The SMR24/36/540/542 series is intended to be sold as a part of a total solution, which
with the addition of optical mass storage devices and third party application software, will
enable us to create true document management systems.
The Group currently has only the NAD, as a business document scanner. The
SMR24/36/540/542 series will start a range of dedicated document input devices to
complement our growing sales of print devices, and will move us into the fast growing
duplex segment.
In Paperflow, Pay-per-page and Facilities Management sales, scanners can be included
with installation of other office automation equipment to create a complete document
flow. A soft-click system should be implemented (i.e. clicks per scan made).
SMR24/36/540/540d
Target Market
General shared office use for mono scanning (SMR24).
Mid-volume document scanning applications (SMR36).
High volume document scanning applications with dedicated scanning operators
(SMR540/542).
Legal/Financial organisations requiring a printed record of scanning for audit purposes
(SMR540/542).
Financial organisations requiring scanning of special media e.g. forms/cheques.
Organisations requiring a dedicated document management software solution (when
combined with DocuWare, CD-R) for electronic document storage.
Mission critical applications for scanning of specialised forms (double-sided)
(SMR540/542).
Publishing organisations requiring high volume scanning of text for editing, when
combined with OCR software
Insurance companies with high volumes of paper documents/records.
Shipping/Distribution companies that require high quality image processing and
workflow software.
Government organisations with high volumes of paper documents/records.
Timing
All units are currently in mass production. However, we are not forecasting this item. If you
have a requirement for a larger number (greater than 5) this should be ordered within the
manufacturers lead-time, which is currently 20 weeks.
Conclusions
The launch of the SMR series will provide us with an entry level, low and high-end scanners
in the mid-range business scanner segment. The fit rate of MFP scanner interfaces is
currently around 25%. With the introduction of third party software a complete document
archiving solution can be supplied to our customers, so it is important to supply dedicated
document input devices within the Groups product range. A soft click programme might
also be implemented to ensure distributors continue to gain revenue from service in current
click-based contracts. Furthermore the knowledge that is gained from selling this product
range is an asset in the overall shift towards network connected products.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Product Overview
SMR24
Configuration
The SMR24 is a 24 ppm (simplex A4 portrait, 200 dpi) A3 desktop mono flatbed scanner
with a built- in ADF. It will scan up to 400 dpi resolution and has Advanced Image
Processing. Connectivity is via a SCSI-2 interface.
Design
The unit has easy access operation with documents being fed from the ADF on top and
returned beneath the document feeder.
Options
Image Processing Unit The optional image processing unit features two powerful
functions: Dynamic Thresholding and Automatic Photo/Letter.
SMR24/36/540/540d
SMR36
Configuration
The SMR36 is a 36 ppm, (simplex, A4 portrait, 200 dpi) A3 desktop mono flatbed scanner
with a built- in ADF. It will scan at up to 400 dpi resolution and has Advanced Image
Processing. Connectivity is via a SCSI-2 interface.
Design
The unit has convenient front operation with documents being fed from the ADF on top and
returned beneath the document feeder.
Options
Image Processing Unit - The optional image processing unit features two powerful
functions: Dynamic Thresholding and Automatic Photo/Letter.
Data Compression Unit - This convenient option increases throughput by reducing the
volume of scanned data transmitted to the PC.
Video Interface Unit This option provides optimum 36 ppm performance with the
popular video imaging boards available on the market.
Red Lamp Unit This option eliminates the red background from OCR (optical
character recognition) forms.
Note: The Data Compression Unit and Video Interface Unit cannot be installed at the
same time. Most Video imaging boards incorporate data compression and hence a
further Data Compression Unit would not be required.
SMR24/36/540/540d
SMR540/542
Configuration
The SMR540/542 is a 55 ppm (simplex A4 portrait, 200 dpi) A3 desktop mono flatbed
scanner with a built- in ADF. There are two versions, either duplex or simplex. It will scan at
up to 400 dpi resolution and has Advanced Image Processing. Connectivity is via a SCSI-2
interface.
Design
The scanner is superbly designed with ease-of use for the operator in mind. Documents are
both loaded from the front via the ADF or flatbed and if scanned automatically returned to
the front beneath the feed port, enabling the operator to remain in the same position from start
to finish.
Furthermore it has compact fit to the wall design. There are no protruding cables or
connectors at the back of the machine since they are all located in a recess. The auto
document feeder can be opened fully even when the scanner is positioned right next to the
wall.
The SMR540/542 has a small footprint, especially versus the Fujitsu 3097D, which scans in a
straight paper path and is subsequently a much longer scanner.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Small Footprint
SMR540/542 Fujitsu 3097D
319.6 cm2 497 cm2

35.7%
smaller Front
Front
Superior Media Handling
The SMR540/542 handles media via the ADF from cheque size up to A3 automatically
checking the size both vertically and horizontally without the intervention of the operator. As
an A3 flatbed type scanner the SMR540/542 can scan books, cards or any awkward shaped
documents, e.g. articles from newspapers. Moreover, it can scan specified areas on
documents beyond A3 size. This is an exclusive advantage that flatbed type scanners have
over sheet feed type scanners.
The ADFs employ Ricohs own copier-based feeding technology to keep paper jams to an
absolute minimum. The ADF will scan documents ranging from 52g/m to 128 g/m
enabling the scanning of special media as fine as tracing paper, carbonless copy paper,
shipping documents, etc. up to heavier weighted documents.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Duplex Scanning
The SMR542 scans both sides of the page at the same time while the sheet is being fed in a
single pass through the ADF. This is how it manages to scan duplex at such high speeds and
therefore saves the customers time. The CCD that scans the front page is located as shown in
the diagram below (item B).
Simplex CCD
CCD
The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) that scans the rear page is located as shown below (item C).
Duplex Contact Censor

CIS
There are two different types of scanner for both pages:
Page 1 is scanned by a CCD

Page 2 is scanned by a Contact Image Sensor
Both types of scanner have different characteristics and hence there are limitations to the
functions that are available for page 2 of a double-sided document.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Duplex Limitations:
Duplex scanning resolution
The data bandwidth limits the number of greyscales and the amount of resolution for the
second page as follows:
Paper Size Driver setting Maximum resolution (dpi)

A3 Binary 406
Greyscale 136
A4 Binary 500
Greyscale 192
A5 Binary 600
Greyscale 272
A6 Binary 600
Greyscale 385
11 x 17 Binary 413
Greyscale 138
8.5 x 11 Binary 500
Greyscale 196
8.4 x 14 Binary 500
Greyscale 173
These limitations are not a problem for typical OCR and DIP applications that require high-
volume, high-speed scanning.
Image Processing Unit Functions
The functions of the optional Image Processing Unit will not work on the second page of a
document, which is being scanned duplex.
Auto Photo/Letter
Dynamic/Thresholding
Section Area
Scanning Speeds
The SMR540 offers fast scanning speeds. The SMR540 is rated at 55 ppm (A4 simplex
portrait @ 200 dpi) and the SMR542 duplex speed is 86 ipm (A4 duplex portrait @ 200 dpi).
However the table below shows how the maximum scanning speed of 100 ipm is reached,
enabling high volume document scanning in large document management operations. The
SMR540/542 ADF can stack up to 150 sheets for real high volume document scanning.
Scanning speed Optical A4 landscape A4 portrait A3

via ADF Resolution
Simplex Mode 200 dpi 67 ppm 55 ppm 44 ppm
400 dpi 39 ppm 31 ppm 24 ppm
Duplex Mode 200 dpi 100 ipm 86 ipm 71 ipm
400 dpi 55 ipm 47 ipm 32 ipm
SMR24/36/540/540d
Endorser Unit
The endorser unit is standard on the SMR540/542 and consists of a mini dot- matrix printer
situated as shown in the diagram below. The endorser will print a reference code on the
hardcopy document after it has been scanned. However when the endorser unit is functioning
it slows down the scanner to 16 ppm if a full 19 characters are being printed.
It will print up to 19 characters at a time out of the following list of 43 digits:

0123456789#./-:,ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
The endorser unit uses a user replaceable violet ink roll that has a yield of 400,000 pages.
The endorser unit is critical in legal/financial organisations where documents are scanned and
then stored off-site. When a hardcopy document needs to be retrieved the endorser unit will
print a reference code e.g. date/ref. no. to enable efficient filing and retrieval of the original
document when required.
Endorser Unit
Endorser
Options
Image Processing Unit Only for the first page. The optical image processing unit
features three powerful functions: Dynamic Thresholding, Automatic Photo/Letter and
Section Area.
Red Lamp Unit This option eliminates the red background from the scanned image.
This is typically used for OCR forms, with the form printed in red and the data in another
colour. Only the data would be scanned.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Installation
The scanners all use a SCSI-2 interface to connect to a host computer (PC) or network scan
server. The SMR24/36 scanners do not have built- in SCSI termination and hence require an
external terminator to be connected. The SMR540/542 have built in SCSI termination. The
minimum requirements for the PC are as follows:
CPU Pentium 75MHz or better

Operating System Windows 95/98/3.11, Windows NT3.51/4.0
Memory 16MB minimum, 48MB or more recommended
Hard Disk 100MB or more (1 page A4 scanned at 256 greyscale
400 dpi uses approximately 16MB)
SCSI Card Use standard SCSI card, i.e. Adaptec AHA2940 or
similar
SCSI Cable A cable is supplied (50-50 pin), however the cable
required will depend on the SCSI card fitted above
Rather than use a dedicated PC for scanning, it is possible to connect the scanner unit to an
external network scan server. The recommended product is the AXIS 700 Network Scan
Server. When installed with software version 1.13 full support for the SMR24/36/540/542
scanner, is provided. The Axis 700 allows the scanner option to be connected to Ethernet
networks, thereby allowing easy distribution of paper based information across workgroups
and organisations. Scanned documents can be distributed either by mail or scanned to file or
scanned directly to a web browser, in a variety of file formats including .TIFF and .PDF.
Integration of the SMR24/36/540/542 scanners with the Axis 700 is provided as part of NRG
Groups Plus Partner programme. This programme is dedicated to bringing you value-added
products, service and solutions, and to giving distributors the advantage in an increasingly
competitive world. Axis have a web site with full details of this and other products at
http://www.axis.com/.
More information on the complete Plus Partner programme can be found on the NRGI
Extranet web site at http://www.nrgi.com/Registered/News/PlusPartner.asp.
SMR24/36/540/540d
WHAT FITS WHAT
SMR24
SMR24 24 ppm Scanner Simplex (includes OI,

Twain/ISIS drivers, DocuWare Intro, 50-50 pin
SCSI cable) (SCSI Terminator, European Power
Cable)
Peripherals
SPU1 Image Processing Unit SMR24/36
SMR36

SCSI Cable, SCSI Terminator, European Power
Cable)
Peripherals
SIF1 Video Interface Unit SMR36
SCU1 Data Compression Unit SMR36
SLURED1 Red Lamp Unit SMR36
SMR540/542

Cable)
SMR542 86 ipm Scanner Duplex (includes OI,

Cable)
Peripherals
SLURED2 Red Lamp Unit SMR540/542
Supplies
SIR1 Endorser Ink Roll 5 rolls x 2 SMR540/542
SMR24/36/540/540d
Branding Labels
The scanners supplied by NRG will be provided by Ricoh Europe. The SMR24 is Ricoh
branded whilst the SMR36/540/542 are not branded. You must re-brand the scanners locally
on installation or whenever they are shown at exhibitions or in showrooms.
NRG can provide branding labels, which are produced by Anderson & Lembke. We are
currently investigating the exact process for the provision of these branding labels.
The box of the SMR24 is also marked with Ricoh branding. Please cover the branding with
your own branding tape.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Scanner Glossary
Please find below a list of abbreviations and terms used in the mono document scanning
world.
A/D Converter
Analogue/Digital converter is a device used in a scanner to convert analogue data to digital
data.
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

This feeds multi-page documents through a scanner automatically. If you are setting up a
document management system it is important to get an ADF that can cope with your
workload.
Automatic Photo/Letter
This feature automatically distinguishes photos and text appearing on the same page and
ensures that they are treated appropriately.
BIT
One electronic pulse of data, eight of which make up a byte (see below).
BIT Depth
The number of bits used to represent each pixel in an image.
Bitmap
A generic term used to describe a computer-stored image composed of pixels, especially a
black and white one.
Byte
Collection of eight binary pulses or bits. One byte equals one character.
CCD
Charge-coupled device. A light sensing device built into a scanner, which is used to read the
image being scanned.
CD-R (Compact Disc Recordable)

Also called Writable CD. A type of compact disc, which can be recorded once only (see
WORM) using special discs and recorders, but which can be read in a conventional CD
player or CD-ROM drive.
CD-ROM (Compact Disc-Read-Only-Memory)

A type of compact disc used for storage of digital computer data instead of music or speech.
DIP System
Document Image Processing (also known as document management - see below) is electronic
filing. A DIP system will scan photos, reports, letters, etc, into a computer for archiving.
Digitise
When you scan a document or a piece of microfilm, its image is digitised. This means it is
put into a form that a computer can understand so that it can be saved, distributed, or
manipulated as necessary.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Dithering
The process of grouping dots shown on your monitor or produced by a printer into clusters of
varying sizes to simulate varying shades of grey or colour tones. Many desktop scanners
incorporate various software dithering techniques for use with different output devices.
Document Management
Is a way of storing all your information in electronic format and is one of the main reasons
for using a scanner. In order to work it will require a DIP system (see above).
DPI
Dots per inch. A measurement of output device resolution.
Drum Scanner
Also known as a rotary scanner, this works by pages being mounted onto cylinders at the
heart of the scanner.
Duplex
Double-sided scanning.
Dynamic Thresholding
This feature improves image quality further by automatically adjusting contrasts on each
page, smoothing the characters, and removing noise and unwanted marks. This is particularly
important on invoices, shipping notices, etc. where the text is often printed with very pale ink
on fine paper that gets dirty/smudged. Dynamic Thresholding will improve the quality of the
scanned image by darkening the text and whitening the page.
Enlarge
A straightforward image- manipulation feature that allows you to increase the size of an
image.
Ethernet
One of the first networks, Ethernet was developed by Xerox and is now the main network
standard. Ethernet describes the way in which computers can be connected.
Expansion Slot
A slot in a computer into which an interface card can be plugged in order to connect the
computer to a scanner.
File Format
Scanner software allows you to store images in a variety of file formats. These will
determine which applications can handle the image file.
Flatbed Scanner
Most closely resembles a desktop photocopier, it has a glass platen onto which you place
documents to be scanned.
Gamma Correction
A way of adjusting the Gamma curve of an image so that the reproduction results on different
types of output device have similar gradations as the original image.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Gamma Curve
A graph which shows the contrast ratio between the input (original image) and output (image
data) in image processing.
GIF
Graphics Image Format. A compressed 8-bit bitmap image file format (see above) developed
by CompuServe.
Greyscale
A continuous tone image made up of black, white and grey data.
Halftone
A continuous tone image reproduced using an array of various sized dots to create the illusion
of tone. Most newspaper images are halftones.
Handheld Scanner
The most basic type of scanner which works by the user manually sweeping the unit over a
page.
Image Compression
By compressing scanned images, you can create more space to store them.
Interpolation
A facility built into many scanners for doubling the resolution available by calculating the
appropriate colour value for pixels positioned in between those actually scanned.
Line Art
Images containing only black and white pixels.
Magneto Optical Drives

Writable compact disks used to store large amounts of scanned data. Usually found in a
document management system.
Multifunction Devices
These provide a combination of two or more of copying, printing, scanning and faxing
functions in a single device.
OCR
Optical Character Recognition. The conversion of scanned data to editable text.
Optical Resolution
The actual physical resolution of the scanning hardware before any interpolation or zooming
functions are used. The optical resolution of a typical desktop scanner is 300 or 400 dpi, but
most scanners use software interpolation to double the resolution available to the computer.
Parallel Port
A socket on the back of a computer which can be used to connect it to a scanner.
PCMCIA
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. A type of expansion slot in a
notebook computer.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Pixel
Picture element. A matrix of touching pixels make up an image. Each pixel in an image has
a distinct colour or tone.
RAID
Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. A stack of hard disks used to store scanned images
in a document management system.
Red Lamp Unit

The optional red lamp unit replaces the green scanning lamp that comes as standard in the
scanner. The red lamp unit purposely eliminates red text or graphics on a page for use in
OCR applications. The red lamp rather than reflecting it, absorbs red text or graphics.
For example in a multiple-choice test the form could be set up using only red ink. When the
exam candidate marks their responses and the test is scanned using a red lamp unit, the
scanner only picks up the candidates answers and not the form layout as well. This therefore
makes OCR of the test an easier function. This application can be used in any situation
where someone is required to fill out forms, checklists, etc.
Resolution
The density of dots or pixels on a printed page or display, usually measured in dpi.
Rotate
Allows you to rotate the scanned image on screen. If a page is scanned upside-down, it can
be corrected and saved, so that you don't have to rotate it every time it is recalled.
RS232
Also known as the Serial port, this is an interface socket on a computer that can be used to
connect it to a scanner.
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface. Interface between a computer and an external device (i.e.
a scanner), capable in its second version (SCSI-2) of 20Mbps data throughput, which is much
faster than standard drives. Standard on all Macintosh computers but only on some PCs.
Section Area
This function can be set when the scanner is integrated with specific document management
software. It is not possible with the standard TWAIN or ISIS drivers. or DocuWare Intro.
This feature enables the assignment of miscellaneous scanning processes (e.g. OCR) to many
different areas.
Serial Port
See RS232 above.
Sheetfed
A sheetfed scanner will scan one page at a time. It looks and works rather like a fax machine.
TIFF
Tag Image File Format. A popular image file format supported by most computer platforms
and applications.
SMR24/36/540/540d
Transparency Scanners
Very high-end specialist scanners used specifically to produce high resolution scans from
transparency or negative film.
TWAIN
A standard that defines compatibility between a scanner and editing software.
Vector Image
A type of graphic image. You can convert a bitmap image (see above) to a vector image by
using software applications such as Adobe Streamline and Corel Trace.
Video Interface
An expansion card with image processing functions, (e.g. OCR) built- in.
World Wide Web (WWW)

The part of the internet that displays multimedia information, which allows the user to see
graphic images as well as text. Scanners can be used to capture an image for use on the
WWW.
WORM (Write-Once-Read-Many)
An optical disk technology which allows the user to write data to the disk, but not to erase or
modify data which has already been written.
Zoom
A facility built into many scanners for increasing or reducing the image size, by recalculating
lines in the image with a greater or fewer number of pixels, using the data actually scanned as
a reference. The technique is similar to interpolation but will usually be slightly less
accurate. Zooming can be used in conjunction with interpolation to achieve extra high
resolutions, but this is only recommended when scanning line art.
Version 1.11
Facsmilie
E20 E40 E99 FL1a
FL1b SF1 SF2
Memory Matrix
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
E20 PLAIN PAPER FAX
Nashuatec P692
Rex Rotary 6992
Gestetner 9920
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
First Production Launch Country of

Month Month Origin
December, 2000 March, 2001 China

Version 2
April, 2002
E20
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Target Market 12
Supplies & Reliability Data 16
What Fits What 17


E20
INTRODUCTION
The E20 is a direct replacement for the E10, as a mid-range, laser, plain paper fax. Based on
the E10 engine and supplies, the E20 continues to offer a high speed Group 3 transmission at
33,600bps and key features which include restricted access and closed network (reception).
One of the key selling points is the security function improvement. This is complemented
by enhanced connectivity and high productivity.

E20

The E20 is equipped with a high speed, 33,600bps modem and MMR data compression for a
transmission speed of 3 sec./A4. It has a 30 sheet ADF, standard paper capacity of 250
sheets, expandable with an additional 500 sheet PFU and 100 sheet multi-purpose cassette
tray. Dialling features are supported with 30 Quick, 50 Speed and 5 Group dial keys.
Connectivity is via an optional Type 180 connectivity kit, which will contain a user-
installable interface and an upgraded version of WinStyler, to add printing and scanning
functionality to the E20. PC fax is supported with a bundled version of Wordcrafts Sopwith
Lite application software.
Main Features are :-
High Productivity:
3 sec. transmission speed
2.8 sec. scanning speed
6ppm printing speed
30 page ADF
30/50 quick/speed dials
5 group dials
1MB SAF memory (3MB maximum capacity)
Windows 2000 compatibility (PC I/F)
User Friendly:
Front operation
Compact design
Easy maintenance of consumables (1 unit)
User- installable PC interface option
Easy regis tration of quick/speed dial keys from PC remote set up
Help on Demand function
Reliability:
1MB SAF memory standard, optional upgrade to 3MB SAF memory
All- in-one cartridge
Two user function (dual access)
Language support
The following languages will be supported for LCD and reports:
English German
French Italian
Swedish Norwegian
Portuguese Polish
Czech Hungarian

E20
Enhanced PC Connectivity:
Windows 2000, Windows 95 and Windows NT4.0 compatible
Connectivity kit Type 180
6ppm printing
600dpi + EET (Edge Enhancement Technology)
TWAIN compatible, 200dpi convenient scanning
Bundled PC fax application software solution
Remote fax set up
Bi-directional parallel cable (status update)
Energy Saver Mode (target less than 2W)
AIO recycling (Europe and USA)
Security Function Improvement:

Restricted access
Memory lock
Closed network
6 hours memory back-up (without optional memory)

E20
Overview:
Standard Configuration of Bypass

Model E20 Feeder
AIO
Main Unit
Memory
2MB
PC Interface Kit
Std. Cassette TYPE 180
Universal Cassette TYPE 210

PFU
Extension Trays

E20
FEATURE: ADVANTAGE: BENEFIT:

Super G3 Modem The E20 fax machine is one With decreased transmission
of the few machines to offer times, the end- user will
a 33.6Kbps modem, which experience increased cost-
will improve transmission savings on fax.
times and enhance fax
productivity.
V.34 Fast Handshake V.34 modems will transfer All of these features will lead
data at speeds twice as fast to a further decrease in the
as the current available cost of users telephone bills.
technology. By using line-
probing it is capable of
determining the line quality.
All-In-One Cartridge The AIO includes the drum Simplifies the entire process
and toner, as well as all the of ordering and storing
other components involved supplies for the customer.
with the laser printing
process. This improves the
compact machine design.
100 Sheet Bypass Tray This allows for a paper Customers are now able to
supply of 350 sheets and the expand the applications
availability of two different available to them by the fax
paper types at any given machine, i.e. letterheads or
time. Paper may also be coloured paper may be
manually fed. loaded.
500 Sheet PFU The standard paper capacity Added paper storage means
may be increased to 750 less user interaction and this
sheets by adding this option. will also minimize the
chances of the machine ever
running out of paper.
Remote Set- up Utility Quick, speed and group The user does not have to go
dials, telephone numbers, through the troublesome
CSI, TTI and RTI can be set process of programming at
up from a remote PC. the fax machine.
Upgradeable SAF The machine has 1MB Extra memory to store more
standard SAF memory, pages.
which is upgradeable to
3MB.

E20
Forwarding The fax machine will Users can arrange to receive

transfer incoming faxes from faxes, regardless of where
certain locations to anothe r they are. Important faxes
machine or to several fax can be sent to other
machines. interested parties
automatically.
Batch Transmission & Send Documents stored in Total communication time

Later memory can be sent at the and costs will be greatly
same time, to the same reduced.
location, in a single call.
Transmission Deadline Users can set transmission Greatly increases the

deadlines for documents to occurrence of successful
be sent. The machine will transmissions.
redial every 5 minutes until
the message is sent.
Multi-Sort Document If the user requires more than Does not require user to
Reception one copy of incoming faxes, make photocopies of
the machine is capable of incoming documents for
printing multiple copies up filing or distribution.
to 99.
Reverse Order Printing The machine receives the Users no longer have to
entire incoming document rearrange pages of long,
into memory then prints it multiple fax documents,
with the first page at the top. which leads to increased
productivity.
AI Protocol Artificial intelligence is AI protocol reduces

incorporated for more transmission time, which
effective communication will reduce transmission
technology. The machine costs.
learns the parameters of
other machines (numbers
stored in auto dial
destinations) and the reby
makes communication more
efficient.
Wild Card Search Enhances effectiveness of Greatly reduces transmission

function settings: costs.
Authorized Reception,
Forwarding etc.

E20
Centre Mark A mark is printed halfway Easier for punching holes

down each received page on into received documents, for
the left-hand side and filing.
halfway across the top.
Full Front Operation The machine can be operated The machine requires
from the front when sending minimal working space.
and receiving documents,
dialling, loading paper or
toner and clearing jams.
Energy Saver Mode The machine automatically At least a 20% saving on

switches to this mode, electricity costs, compared to
therefore reducing the other current models.
consumption of electricity.
Night Timer The operator can specify Even when receiving faxes
when the machine should into memory, the machine
power down to minimum maintains a minimum power
consumption, in order to level, which makes it cost
save electricity costs. effective.
Dual Access Whilst the fax machine is This enables other users to
busy with one function it can access the machine, even
also perform other functions though it may be busy. This
at the same time. increases productivity and
efficiency.
Scan Speed 2.8 seconds Pages can be stored at a rate Increased scan speed
of 2.8 seconds per A4 page. influences speed at which
This is ideal for multiple faxes are transmitted, i.e. 30
page documents. pages of fax can be stored
into memory in just over a
minute, which allows the
user to perform other tasks
more efficiently.
6ppm Print Speed Due to the Compact Drum More documents can be
Engine, the print speed is a received in less time. There
fast 6ppm. This is noticeable is also a noticeable
when receiving multiple difference if the printer
page documents. interface is installed.
Direct Fax Number Entry The destination number can The user no longer has to
first be dialled, checked on bend the fax document
the LCD, then the document backward to view the fax
can be placed on the ADF. number or write it on another
piece of paper.

E20
Chain Dialling Allows the user to compile a The user now has added
group of numbers from the flexibility outside of the pre-
quick or speed dials or the programmed group keys.
number keypad.
Restricted Access The operator has to key in a The monitoring of fax usage
four-digit code before access is now made possible.
to the machine can be
obtained.
Help on Demand Function provides user with No need to research the

clear, printed instructions operation manual.
when needing assistance in
fax mode, such as cancelling
memory transmission.
Blank Document Detection Alerts the user, with an Saves time and costs by
audible beep and error preventing blank
message, if the original transmissions.
document is accidentally fed
in with the wrong side up.

E20
Specifications: R120 H1 E10 E20 E30 E40
Document Feeder (sheets) 10 30 30 30 30 50

Cassette Capacity (sheets) 100 100 250 250 250 250
Maximum Capacity (sheets) 350 100 850 850 850 850
Quick Dial 5 20 30 30 30 30
Speed Dial 25 50 50 50 100 100
Group Dial 0 3 5 5 7 7
Fax Modem Speed (Kbps) 14.4 14.4 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
Standard Memory 512KB 1.2MB 512KB 1MB 960KB 2MB
Optional memory upgrades - 2MB 1MB/2MB 2MB 1/2/4MB 2/4MB
Scan Speed (seconds) 10 6 2.8 2.8 2.0 2.0

Print Speed (ppm) 6 6 6 6 10 10
Average Monthly Volume
500 500 750 750 1000 1000
(AMV)
Maximum Monthly Volume
1,500 1,000 1,500 1,500 2000 2000
(MMV)
Supplies (Toner) AIO AIO AIO AIO AIO AIO
Group 4 IDSN Option - - - - Y Y
Inter ne t Fa x Opt io n
- - - - - Y
(LAN or Dia l- Up)
The E20 is almost identical to the E10. Based on the same engine, the E20 also uses the same
supplies. Additio nal features are:
Closed network (transmission and reception)

Quick (parallel) memory transmission
Memory lock
Restricted access
Auto start initial set up
Larger standard memory

E20
PRODUCT POSITIONING
The E20 can be positioned in our range of fax products as shown below:
Business Faxes
Fax-based Products Multifunctional

Products
DMR35/45
DMR22/27
DMR18
E99
New E40, replacing E30
New H1 - LFO
replacing
R120
Market Situation
The latest research for the fax market indicates that growth in demand for plain paper
products continues to compensate for the decline in the thermal sector.
Overall, the total Western European market for faxes is expected to remain flat across the
forecast period (1999 2003) with a 1.7% CAGR expected up to a unit placement level in
2003 of 4.3 million units (CAP Ventures).

E20
Target Market
The E20 is targeted for small workgroups with a daily need to send and receive documents
in an efficient and productive way, with particular emphasis on ease of operation and cost
saving features.
In addition the E20 will be targeted at small companies and corporate single-users in the
business environment that require a personal, MFP solution.
Key target markets will be:
Single users SOHO

Small workgroups 3 to 10 users
Current customers Our present customers who may wish to upgrade their existing
FFX6 or E10 machines
New customers who may wish to replace or upgrade their existing thermal or inkjet
devices.
Environments where the average volume is 750 sheets per month and the maximum
volume is 1,500 sheets per month.

E20
E20 Remarks
Input Document Width Max. 218mm / 8.5
Effective Scanning Width A4: 205mm
Printing Method Laser
Printing Speed 6ppm / Letter / A4
Super Smoothing Yes
Halftone 64 level
Maximum Printing Size A4
Paper Capacity (Standard) 250 sheets
Paper Capacity (Option) 500 sheets + 100 sheets PFU + Bypass feeder
Manual Feeder N/A
Power Supply AC220-240V 15%, 50/60 3Hz
Power Consumption Maximum: 775W Max. copy with option
Standby: Less than 2W Standby: Energy Saver Mode
Weight 12.5Kg / 27.6lb Including AIO, tray and
cassette
Fax Specifications:
Scanning Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7/15.4 l/mm
203 x 98/196/391 lpi
Scanning Speed 2.8 sec./3.85/A4 @ 200 x 100dpi Storing to memory/ITU-T #1
chart
Transmission Speed 3 sec. ITU-T #1 chart/STD/TTI off
Data Transmission Speed Max. 33,600bps
Compression Method MH/MR/MMR
Compatibility G3
Memory Capacity 1MB (80 pages/ITU-T#1, Std.) Option: + 2MB (160 pages)
ADF 30 (A4)
Quick Dial 30
Speed Dial 50
Dual Access Yes
Memory Back-up 6 hours Power off mode: Less than
once per week. (Without
optional memory upgrade)
Copier Specifications
Copy Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7 l/mm
Enlargement/Reduction N/A
Zoom N/A
Warm-up Time Less than 11 seconds Room temperature: 25C at
2W Energy Saver Mode
First Copy Speed Less than 35 seconds Room temperature: 25C
Copy Speed 6cpm

E20
PC Printer Specifications Optional PC Interface Kit

Paper Size A4/A5/LT/LG/F4/HLT/Exe/Env
Printing Resolution 600dpi/600dpi + Edge
Enhancement Technology (EET)
Printing Speed 6ppm
Interface Bi-directional Parallel
PC Compatibility IBM PC-AT
O/S Windows 95/98/2000/NT4.0/Me
Printer Language GDI
Printer Emulations GDI
PCL 4.5 Software Emulation
PC Fax Specifications Op. PC Interface Kit
Compatibility Class 2
Interface Bi-directional Parallel with Com
Redirector
Data Transmission Speed Max. 14,400bps
O/S Windows 95/98
Evaluated Application Cheyenne Bitware 3.30F
Software Wordcraft Sopwith Lite V1.1
Wordcraft Laserfax 3.5
BVRP WinFax 4.04
MS Fax on Win 95
Symantec WinFax Pro 8.0
PC Scanner Op. PC Interface Kit
Specifications
Scanning Resolution 200dpi (8 x 7.7 l/mm) Interpolation:
12 x 11.55 l/mm (300dpi)
16 x 15.4 l/mm (400dpi)
Scan Standard TWAIN 1.7
Scan Mode Line Art/Dither/Error Diffusion
Interface Bi-directional Parallel
O/S Windows 95/98/2000/NT4.0/Me
API TWAIN 1.7
PC Connectivity:
The optional PC Interface Kit transforms the E20 into a personal MFP featuring printing,
scanning and PC fa x functions. With the optional Bi-directional Parallel Interface Board
and driver software, the following features become available:
Printing - 6ppm laser printer with true 600dpi resolution
Scanning - TWAIN compliant scanning
PC-faxing - Computers with PC-Fax software can send and receive faxes by using
the E20 as a modem (max 14,400bps transmission speed with Class 2
compatible commands)

E20
Software:
The user is able to configure the Fax machine, as they would their own personal printer - this
is made possible by the WinStyler T180 Print Properties window. If the machine has been
fitted with the optional paper trays, these can also be conveniently configured from the
desktop PC.
Through the WinStyler software, the E20 offers the user advanced print functions such as
remote copy setting and "N-Up Printing". The N-Up print feature allows the user to print 2
or 4 pages on one single sheet - this will reduce paper consumption and therefore paper
costs.
By means of the bi-directional interface, the machine will inform the PC (and user) if it has a
functional problem. The user has a graphical representation of the machine configuration
and will be flagged when the problem occurs, as well as what it is. These utilities all add up
to "User Friendliness".
The WinStyler software provides the user with a graphical interface whereby they are able to
program the fax machine from the convenience of their desk. Features that are
programmable from the remote setup utility are :
Quick, Speed & Group Dials

Telepho ne Numbers
RTI, TTI & CSI
In the second layer of the set-up utility, the user is able to do many other advanced functions
that would normally require them to leave their desk, as the features available at this level
would require a 4-digit pin code. It is convenient for the user to be able to initiate a journal
print from their desktop, as this would eliminate any wasted time at the fax machine
PC Environments:
The PC kit is guaranteed to be installed and work properly under the following conditions:
Operation System - Windows 95/98/2000/NT4.0/Me
PC - IBM PC-AT
Environment:
Windows 95/98/Me: Pentium 120MHz+ RAM 32MB+
Windows NT4.0/2000: Pentium 166MHz+ RAM 64MB+
Display Driver: VGA
Note: PC-Fax function (Com-Redirector) is NOT available with Windows

NT4.0/2000/Me.

E20

Supplies
Starter Kit All- in-one cartridge Yield 1,000

Toner FT1435BLK-R All- in-one cartridge Yield 4,500 (A4)
Note: Photo Conductor, Charger Mechanism, Cleaning Mechanism, Developing Units, Toner
Tank and Toner are included in the All-in-one cartridge.
Reliability
The monthly volume figures for the E20 are identical to those of the E10.
Expected Average Transmission or reception: 750 sheets per month of each

Monthly Volume
(AMV)
Maximum Monthly Transmission or reception: 1,500 sheets per month of each

Volume (MMV)
Machine Life (ML) 5 years or 45,000 pages, whichever comes first.
history.
Machine Volume Definitions

target customer.
Machine Life (ML) is total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes or 5 years, whichever

comes first.

E20
WHAT FITS WHAT

E20 P692 6992 9920
Peripherals
FAXHANDS ET Handset for any fax
FME2MB150 Feature expander card 2MB
FDCOK180 PC Interface Kit Type 180 European
FDF180 Bypass Feeder Type 180
FPFU180 Paper Feed Unit Type 180
FPFU210 Paper Cassette Type 210
Operator Instructions
FLS920GB Language Set English
FLS920D Language Set German
FLS920F Language Set French
FLS920I Language Set Italian
FLS920S Language Set - Swedish
FLS920CZ Language Set Czech
FLS920H Language Set Hungarian
FLS920N Language Set Norwegian
FLS920P Language Set Portuguese
FLS920PL Language Set Polish
FLS190AR Language Set Arabic (SASO use only)
Supplies
FT1435BLK-R All- in-one cartridge
(yield 4,500 sheets @ 4%)

E20
Main competitive models:
Canon Fax L350

Brother Fax-8350P
Brother MFC-9050
Functions E20 Canon L350 Brother Fax- Brother MFC-

8350P 9050
Scanning Width A4 A4 A4 A4
Modem Speed 33.6 Kbps 33.6 Kbps 14.4 Kbps 14.4 Kbps
Compression MMR, MR, MH MMR, JBIG, MMR, MR, MH MMR, MR, MH
MR, MH
ADF Capacity 30 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets 20 sheets
Standard 80 pages 160 pages 210 pages (Tx) 130 pages
memory (1MB) 130 pages (Rx) (1.3MB)
Optional 2MB No 2MB/4MB 1MB/2MB
Memory
Transmission 3 sec. 3 sec. 6 sec. 6 sec.
Speed
Scanning Speed 2.8 sec./A4 5 sec. N/A N/A
Printing Speed 6ppm (A4) 6ppm (A4) N/A 6ppm
Dual Access Yes Yes Yes Yes
Printer Option Option No Option
Interface/PC fax
Standard Paper 250 sheets 250 sheets 250 sheets 200 sheets
Capacity

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
E40 PLAIN PAPER FAX
Nashuatec P694
Rex Rotary 6994
Gestetner 9940
LAUNCH SCHEDULE

Month Month Origin
December, 2000 April, 2001 China

Date Created: November, 2000
Version 5
April, 2002
E40
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Target Market 8
What Fits What 12

K:/Company/Market/Nps/E40.doc 1
E40
INTRODUCTION
The E40 is designed to replace the existing mid-range E30 model. However, with additional
features, the E40 will play a strategic role in strengthening our mid-high segment of the
NRGI fax product range. Specifically, the E40 offers us two major advantages over the E30:
Dial-Up Internet Option

Improved specifications
With the introduction of the Dial-Up Internet fax capability, we have NRGIs second
product that will compete in the growing eFax market. The advantage of the Dial-Up
option over our existing Internet fax product is that the customers do not need to provide
their own SMTP and POP3 email servers.
The E40 will play a strategic role in assisting us to remain competitive in the mid-high end
fax segment.
E40
The E40 is equipped with a high speed 33.6 Kbps modem which, together with MMR
compression, gives a transmission speed of 3 sec/A4. The E40 also has the option of Group
4 ISDN, offering transmission speeds up to 64 Kbps. It has a 50 sheet ADF, standard paper
capacity of 250 A4 sheets, expandable with an optional 500 sheet PFU and 100 sheet multi-
purpose cassette tray. Dialling features are supported with 30 Quick, 100 Speed and 7
Group dial keys.
An optional Internet Fax LAN card provides network connectivity for the E40. This allows
the machine to connect to the LAN and send and receive Internet faxes via the network
SMTP/POP3 email servers, in a similar way to the E99. For customers who do not have a
network SMTP or POP3 email server facility, there is the alternative Dial-Up Internet
option.
A number of ergonomic enhancements have been made to the operation panel, in particular,
the rearrangement of the keypad to a QWERTY style, rather than ABCD style of the E30
or E99.
Main features are:
High Productivity
Fast 3 sec. transmission speed
2 sec. scanning speed
G4 ISDN interface (option)
10ppm printing speed
50 page ADF
30/100/7 Quick/Speed/Group Dials
2MB (160 pages) memory capacity
Internet Fax option either via the network or dial-up
E40
User Friendly
QWERTY Keyboard Quick Dial Keys
Red/Green status indicator
New LCD/Operation Panel configuration
Backlit LCD display
Reliability
Memory backup
Five programmable user functions
All- in-One (AIO) cartridge
Environmentally Friendly
Energy saver mode (less than 2W)
AIO recycling (certain European countries)
Status indicator
QWERTY keyboard
E40
FEATURE ADVANTAGE BENEFIT

Upgradeable memory E40 has 2MB standard SAF Large page capacity which
memory which can be can be upgraded to suit most
upgraded to 4MB or 6MB demands
All-In-One Cartridge The AIO includes both drum, Permits compact design, ease
toner and other print process of service and reliability for
components the customer
Remote Set- up Utility Quick/Speed/Group dials, Easy programming from the
CSI, TTI and RTI can be set users workplace, rather than
up remotely at the machine
Full front operation The E40 can be operated Minimal work space is
standing directly in front of required and the user can
the machine, including easily access the machine
loading of paper and clearing
paper jams
Direct Fax Number Entry Destination number can be The user does not have to
entered first, checked on the note the fax number
LCD and then the document elsewhere, but can enter it
placed on the ADF and directly from the document
transmitted
Fast Scan Speed Pages can be stored at a rate Fast scan speed allows
of 2.0 secs/A4 page (30 multiple page documents to
originals per minute) be stored to memory very
rapidly
Fast Print Speed The compact AIO engine More documents can be
allows a fast 10ppm print received and printed in less
speed, ideal for printing time
multiple page documents
Internet Fax Sends the documents as a Major cost savings in
scanned email attachment to fax/telephone charges,
the recipients email address particularly when sending to
via the Internet international destinations *
* Note: Savings of up to 90% can be made in a companys international fax phone bill.
When selling the E40 plus Internet Fax option (either LAN or Dial-Up), it is important to
demonstrate to the customer how quickly they can pay for the machine from the savings
made in call charges. Any savings made after the machine has been paid for are pure profit
for the company owning and using the machine. NRGI saved $30,000 in 6 months after
having installed and paid for three Internet faxes.
E40
Specifications: H1 E20 E30 E40 E99
Document Feeder (sheets) 30 30 30 50 50

Cassette Capacity (sheets) 100 250 250 250 250
Maximum Capacity (sheets) 100 850 850 850 1250
Quick Dial 20 30 30 30 64
Speed Dial 50 50 100 100 100
Group Dial 3 5 7 7 9
Modem Speed (Kbps) 14.4 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6
Printing Speed (ppm) 6 6 10 10 15
Standard Memory 1.2MB 1MB 960KB 2MB 2MB
Optional memory 2MB 2MB 1MB/2MB/4MB 2MB/4MB 2MB/4MB/40MB
Scan Speed (seconds) 6.0 2.8 2.0 2.0 1.5

Group 4 ISDN No No Option Option Option
Internet Fax LAN No No No Option Option
Internet Fax Dial-Up No No No Option No
Scanning Width A4 A4 A4 A4 A3
Average Monthly Volume 500 750 1000 1000 3000
(AMV)
Maximum Monthly Volume 1,000 1,500 2000 2000 5000
(MMV)
Supplies (Toner) AIO AIO AIO AIO AIO
Yield (sheets) 4800 4500 4500 4500 10000
QWERTY keyboard layout No No No Yes No
RS232 PC-Fax Interface No No Option No Option
JBIG Compression No No No Yes Option
E40
PRODUCT POSITIONING
The E40 is the successor to the E30 and can be positioned in our range of fax products as
shown below:
Business Fax Range
DMR35/45
Standalone Faxes DMR22/27
DMR18
E99 Multifunctional
Products
New H1 - LFO
replacing
R120
Market Situation
The latest research for the fax market indicates that growth in demand for plain paper
products continues to compensate for the decline in the thermal sector.
Overall, the total West European market for faxes is expected to remain flat across the
forecast period (1999 2003) with a 1.7% CAGR* expected up to a unit placement level in
2003 of 4.3 million units (CAP Ventures).
The workgroup segment of the fax market is set to grow overall by a CAGR of 20.4%. This
growth will be fuelled by users wanting fax-to-email functions. If we look at this in greater
detail, we can see that while single function faxes (toner) are forecast to decline by 19.7%,
multifunction toner faxes are forecast to rise by 30.3%.
* Compound Annual Growth Rate.
E40
TARGET MARKET
The high print speed of 10ppm places the E40 as the ideal solution for the mid-to-high end
of the fax market. The E40 is therefore suited to the workgroup environment. The inclusion
of the Internet Fax network (LAN) option creates a lower-end network solution that
complements the high-end E99. This feature combined with confidential
reception/transmission and multi- sort reception will increase opportunities in the Major
Account business or Direct Sales Channels.
Inclusion of the Internet Fax Dial- Up should also appeal to fax customers via the Indirect
Sales Channel, who have a lower fax requirement, but will benefit greatly from this option.
Key target markets where the E40 can deliver the greatest benefits:
Workgroups or departments in medium to large companies

A number of users would be sharing the machine. The key selling points are a
reliable, productive machine with the major cost-saving benefit of communicating at
33.6Kbps and via the Internet Fax-LAN optio n.
Executive Offices/Floors
Areas where high speed scanning, printing and print quality are important, in
addition to the Quick, Speed and Group dial capacity.
Small/Medium Sized Business

Generally professional companies who use their fax machine as part of their daily
operation. Productivity, together with speed, reliability and cost control features will
be especially important.
Existing Customers
There may be current customers who wish to upgrade their existing C- and F-series
machines. Increased productivity and cost benefits will be important here.
Customers with Internet Connections

Any business which has an Internet connection, either permanent or Dial-Up, is a
potential customer. Since the E40 offers both LAN and Dial- Up connectivity, the
size of the customer does not matter.
E40
Input Document Width Max. 218mm
Scanning Width Max. 210mm
Printing Speed 10 ppm/A4
Maximum Printing Size LG/A4
Standard Paper Capacity 250 sheets
Optional Paper Capacity 500 + 100 sheets
Copy Tray Capacity 100 sheets
Backlight LCD Display Yes
Power Supply AC220-240V+, 50/60 HZ
Weight Approx. 13 Kg
Dimension (w x d x h) 420 x 448 x 306 mm
Minimum Power Consumption Less than 2W (Energy Save Mode)
Fax Specifications
Scanning Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7/15.41 lines/mm
Scanning Speed 2 secs.
Transmission Speed 3 secs.
Modem Speed Max. 33,600 bps
Compression Method MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Compatibility G3 (G4 Option)
ADF 50 sheets (A4 - 80g/m2 recommended)
Quick/Speed/Group Dials 30/100/7
Dual Access Yes
Memory Back-up Yes
Memory Capacity 2MB (160 pages)
Memory Options 2MB/4MB (+160/320 pages)
Copy Resolution 8 x 7.7 lines/mm
Enlarge/Reduction/Zoom No
First Copy Speed 35 secs.
Copy Speed 10 cpm
PC Printing/Faxing/Scanning (via Internet Fax-LAN option)

Paper Size A4
Resolution 200/400 dpi
Printing Speed 6 ppm
Interface RJ45, 10/100BaseT
Operating Systems Windows 95/98/NT4/2000
Printer Languages GDI
Scanner Resolution 200 dpi (8 x 7.7 lines/mm)
Scanning Function Scan to email (expected to be via Scan Router Pro)
E40
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS continued
Options
2MB, 4MB Memory Expansion
Paper Feed Unit (500 sheets)
Bypass Paper Feeder (100 sheets)
Universal Paper Cassette (Legal/Letter), replaces internal paper cassette
Group 4 ISDN Unit
Mechanical Counter
Dial-Up Internet Fax Unit
LAN Internet Fax Unit
Packaging
Dimensions (w x d x h) 543 x 581 x 487
Volume 0.154m
Gross Weight 17 Kg
Feature List
2 in 1 reception
64 halftones
AI protocols
Automatic/Manual reception
Batch transmission
Centre mark
Closed network reception
Confidential reception
Connectivity via Internet Fax LAN option
Counter (software/mechanical option)
Direct FAX number entry
Dual access
Error correction mode
Error report with full page image
Forwarding
LCD prompt (2 lines + lower case letters)
Multi-copy (99)
Multi-Sort document reception
Night timer
On hook dial (PSTN and ISDN option)
Page retransmission
Polling reception (without ID)
Print density control
RDS Compatible
Redial
Reverse order printing
Send later
Serial broadcasting
Stamp
Substitute/authorised reception
Switchable Quick Key layout (QWERTY, ABCD, etc.)
E40
Supplies
Toner FT1435BLK-R All- in-one cartridge * Yield 4,500 (A4)
Note: * Photo Conductor, Charger Mechanism, Cleaning Mechanism, Developing Units,

Toner Tank and Toner are included in the All-in-one cartridge.
Reliability

Monthly Volume
(AMV)

Volume (MMV)
Machine Life (ML) 5 years or 120,000 pages, whichever comes first.
Please note that the above figures are design targets. The actua l yields and reliability data
history.

target customer.

comes first.
E40
WHAT FITS WHAT

E40 * P694 6994 9940
* comes complete with All-in-One cartridge
Peripherals
FNIC210 Internet Fax LAN Option E40
FDIU210 Dial-Up Internet Option E40
FCNTR210 Mechanical Counter Type 210
FME2MB150 2MB Memory
FME4MB150 4MB Memory
FPFU180 Paper Feed Unit Type 180 (500 sheets)
FDF180 Bypass Paper Feeder Type 180 (100 sheets)
FG4190 ISDN Interface Unit Type 190
FPFU210 Universal Paper Cassette Type 210 (Letter/Legal paper)
FLS940GB Language set - English
FLS940D Language set - German
FLS940F Language set - French
FLS940I Language set Italian
FLS940N Language set Norwegian
FLS940P Language set Portuguese
FLS940S Language set - Swedish
FAXHANDSET Handset for any fax
Supplies
FT1435BLK-R All- in-one cartridge
(yield 4,500 sheets @ 4%)
FMAR30 Ink Stamp Cartridge (yield 3000 stamps)
E40
Main competitive models:
OKIFAX 5750
OKIFAX 5950
Toshiba DP120F
Brother 8750P
Panasonic DX-2000
Functions E40 OKIFAX OKIFAX Toshiba Brother Panasonic

5750 5950 DP120F 8750P DX-2000
Scanning A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
Width
Modem Speed 33.6 Kbps 33.6 Kbps 33.6 Kbps 33.6 Kbps 33.6 Kbps 33.6 Kbps
Compression MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG JBIG JBIG JBIG JBIG JBIG
ADF (sheets) 50 50 50 50 30 50
Transmission 3s 3s 3s 3s 3s 3s
Speed
Scanning 2 secs /A4 3 secs /A4 1.5 secs /A4 1.2 secs /A4 2 secs /A4 1 sec /A4
Speed
Printing 10ppm 10ppm 10ppm 12ppm 12ppm 10ppm
Speed
Dual Access Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Paper 250 sheets 250 sheets 250 sheets 550 sheets 250 sheets 500 sheets
Capacity
ISDN Option Yes Yes Yes No No No
Internet Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Option
AIO Yes No No No No Yes
Memory 2MB 2.5MB 4.5MB 3MB 450 pages 2MB
Optional 2/4MB 2/4/8MB 2/4/8MB 4MB No Yes
Memory
Printer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Option
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
E99
Plain Paper Fax
Nashuatec P699
Rex Rotary 6999
Gestetner 9980
First Launch Country

Production Month of Origin
Month
May 2000 June 2000 Japan

Version 7
April, 2002
E99
Contents
Page
Introduction 3
Major Selling Points 5
Product Overview 7
E99 Configuration 7
Language Support 8
E99 Improvements over the F64 9
Target Market 10
General Specifications 12
Internet Fax Specifications 13
Software 13
NIC Fax Applications 13
Features List 14
Supplies 15
Reliability 15
What Fits What 16
Option Compatibility 17
This is a pre-launch document and specifications

are subject to change. If in doubt or specifications
are required for tenders, etc please contact NRGI
K:\Company\Market\NPS\E99.doc
2
E99
INTRODUCTION
The E99 is a powerful expandable office laser PPF. The base machine operates at
Super G3 speed of 33.6 Kbps and offers the following primary options:
Second Super G3 unit or G4 ISDN unit

AND
Internet fax option or PC fax option
AND
Printer Interface with network option
There are also paper feed unit, JBIG, fax memory and other options.
The E99 will directly replace the current F64 plain paper fax and is planned for
launch in July 2000.
The E99 represents the latest in fax technology and continues the fax communication
standards already set by the F64. The E99 now offers not only Internet fax capability
via its network connection but also delivers true network printing at 15 ppm.
The E99 is quite different in appearance from the F64. It is lightweight and wingless.
This means there are no send or receive paper trays protruding outside the footprint of
the machine. This allows the E99 to offer one of the smallest full A3 fax machines in
the world.
ADF (50 sheets)

(250 sheets)
Bypass Tray
(supplied with printer option)
Simple to use Operation Panel

Standard Tray Large 4 line backlight LCD
250 sheets
Paper Feed
Options
2 x 500 sheets
3
E99
The E99 is based on the technology developed for the DMR15/18 and PMR14/20.
This new engine offers:
Extra ports allowing increased communications combinations

High image quality and reliability
Easy maintenance
Lower copy cost / minimum development cost
Increased network connectivity with 100BaseT Internet fax option
Our primary objective for launching the E99 machine is to:
Strengthen our product line in the high-end (high volume) fax market
Expand corporate and major account business
Expand ISDN G4 fax business
Expand into a new sales channel by offering the E99 as a network printer
The E99 is due for mass production in May 2000 with arrivals in June ready for a full
launch in July 2000. It is expected that all options peripherals and supplies will be
available at launch.
4
E99
MAJOR SELLING POINTS
High-End Plain Paper Fax

High speed modem (33.6 Kbps)
1.5 sec. scan speed
Maximum A3 printing size
Up to 1250 sheet paper capacity
2MB SAF memory (optional 40MB)
Heavy Duty (maximum monthly volume [MMV] of 5000)
User replaceable all- in-one toner cartridge
Space Saving
Small footprint A3 fax
Lightweight design
Wingless (no protruding paper trays)
Easy Operation
Large 4 line LCD display
Backlight to LCD display
Communication and error status lights
High Quality Image and Reliability

High speed modem
Heavy duty machine
User replaceable cartridge
Network Integration
Second G3 or G4/ISDN option
High speed Internet fax with 100BaseT network card
Network option for printer controller
15 ppm, 600 dpi true network printing
Internet Fax Option

High speed internet fax with 100BaseT network card
Connects to customers existing LAN
Ease of operation, just as easy as sending a normal fax
Major cost savings on telecommunications charges
5
E99
Internet Fax Features

Send documents as Internet e-mail attachments
Transmission of G3/G4 faxes directly from any network PC
Autorouting of incoming faxes to specific e- mail addresses
Autorouting of all incoming faxes to an e-mail address
Convenience scanning to own e-mail
Internet Fax Benefits

Reduce cost of communication
Sent Internet faxes are delivered to the recipients e- mail
No need to print documents before faxing
Receipt of incoming faxes as e- mail allows user to decide whether to print
Can scan documents to own e- mail to provide electronic copy of items
6
E99
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The E99 is a Super G3 plain paper fax with a 15 ppm laser printer based on the
DMR15/18 and PMR14/20 engines.
E99 Configuration
The standard machine comes with 1 x 250 sheet paper drawer and built in Super G3
faxing. Also included with the machine are an installation procedure, original
document tray set and one AIO (all- in-one) toner cartridge.
7
E99
Common options with other machines are as follows:
1. Common with the current F64

Feature expander 2MB (Storage capacity 336 pages)
Feature expander 4MB (Storage capacity 504 pages)
Function upgrade card (source locally)
Counter
Stamp Marker
2. Common with the PMR 14/20

Network interface board
New options introduced with the E99 and not common with other machines are
as follows:
Feature expander 40MB (storage capacity 1200 pages)

Paper Feed Unit (500 sheets)
ISDN (G4) interface unit
Super G3 interface unit
Printer Interface
PC fax expander
Internet Fax Kit
JBIG memory compression option
New supply introduced with the E99 and not common with other machines is as
follows:
All- in-one cartridge (AIO)
Language Support
The E99 can accept three languages installed in the machines firmware. Service
engineers in the field, using existing service tools can easily handle the replacement of
the languages. Nine languages will be supported in the following combinations:
1. English, German, French (default installed in the factory)

2. English, Italian, Spanish
3. English, Dutch, French
4. English, Swedish, Norwegian
5. English, Portuguese, Spanish
8
E99
E99 IMPROVEMENTS OVER THE F64
The following features have upgraded specifications in the E99 from the F64:
Feature E99 F64

Receive Size Max. A3 (DLT) Max. A4 (LT)
Copy Tray Capacity 250 Pages 150 Pages
Print Speed 15 ppm (A4) 10 ppm (A4)
SAF Memory 2MB 1.5MB
Supply AIO CTM
Yield (ITU-T#1Chart) 10,000 pages 6,750 pages
Maximum CV Tx 5K, Rx 5K Tx 3K, Rx 3K
Internet Fax NIC 100BaseTX / 10BaseT 10BaseT only
Internet Fax + G3 /G4 Options NIC plus G3 or G4 NIC or G3 or G4
Printer Option 600 dpi + network option 300 dpi, LPT only
ByPass Feed Printer Option required N/A
JBIG Unit New option G3 option required
Image Rotation Yes N/A
Status indicator Yes N/A
Note: Printer ne twork interface board is common with the PMR 14/20
9
E99
TARGET MARKET
The aim is to position the machine in departments of 50 to 100 employees, or in a

centralised location serving up to 100 employees. The expected average volume
would be 3000 sheets/month with a maximum monthly volume of 5000 sheets.
The target market would be the replacement of existing high-end plain paper faxes.
In addition, with the connectivity options available (second G3 or G4, Internet fax and
network printer options) we would exp ect to sell new or additional machines.
With the network printer option, the E99 can be positioned alongside our existing
Aficio range of networked workgroup printers.
In more detail, the following target markets for the E99 have been identified:
Work Groups or Departments, within Medium to Large Companies.
These would have a number of users sharing a fax machine and, therefore, they would
need an efficient, reliable, robust and hard working machine.
For example, a regional sales department, which has a high volume of fax traffic
every day and several users all requiring access to the machine. The addition of a
second communication port allows simultaneous transmission and reception.
Multi-national Companies.
A company with a head office in one city, offices all over the world and who have a
high inter-company fax volume. These locations would benefit significantly from
sending faxes over the Internet. For example, an international company would install
the E99 both in the Group Headquarters and Regional Headquarters as a key terminal.
This way the Head Office could send a fax communication with a transfer request via
the Internet to the E99 located in the Regional Headquarters. The incoming message
will then be transferred from the Key Station to Local Offices. In this case the
international communication cost will be cut between Group Headquarters, Regional
and Local Offices. Suitable vertical markets for Internet Fax are Banks and Security
Houses.
Professional Companies.
For example lawyers and accountants, where large documents are faxed and quality
and confidentiality are essential.
Current Customers.
Our present customers who may wish to upgrade from their existing machines, who
are looking for increased productivity and cost saving features.
10
E99
PRODUCT POSITIONING
The E99 can be positioned in both our standalone fax range and our range of printing
products, as shown below:
1. Business Faxes
Standalone Multifunctional
Faxes Products
DMR35/45
DMR22/27
DMR18
NEW - E99
E30
E10
LFO
R120/150
2. Printing Products
Single Function Multifunctional
Printers Products
DMR85/105
DMR55A/70A
PMR45 DMR35/45
PMR27 DMR22/27
PMR16/21 DMR15/18
E99 - NEW
LFO
R120/150
3. Early price indications are that the E99 will cost more than the F64. This cost
can be justified when considering the 14 or so improvements made over the
F64, particularly in the area of printing and network connectivity. It is still
expected to be competitive with devices of similar capability in the market.
11
E99
Type Desktop Transceiver

Circuit PSTN, PABX, ISDN G4 (option)
Internet/Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX (Internet option)
Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseTX (Printer Network option)
Document Input ADF: Length 105 - 600 mm
Size Width 148 - 297 mm
Thickness 0.05 - 0.2 mm
Manual: Length 105 - 1200 mm
Width 148 - 297 mm
Thickness 0.05 - 0.3 mm
ADF Capacity 50 sheets (80g/m2 A4)
Scanning Method Flat bed with CCD
Scanning Width 296 mm (effective)
Resolution G3: Main scan - 8 pels/mm
Sub-scan - 3.85 lines/mm (standard)
7.71 lines/mm (detail)
15.41 lines/mm (fine)
G4: 200 x 100 dpi (standard)
200 x 200 dpi (detail)
Memory Capacity Standard 2MB (168 pages)
Option + 2MB (336 pages)
+ 4MB (504 pages)
+ 40MB (1,200 pages)
Coding Method MH/MR/MMR/SSC/JBIG (option)
Modulation V34, V33, V17, V29, V27ter (G3), V21 (G3), V8
Compatibility ITU (CCITT) Group 3 and Group 4 (option)
Modem Speed 33600 / 31200 / 28800 / 26400 / 24000 / 21600 / 19200 /
16800 / 14400 / 12000 / 9600 / 4800 / 2400 bps
Automatic Fallback
64 / 56 Kbps (G4 option)
Automatic Fallback
Transmission Speed G3: 3 seconds
(ITU-T No. 1 Chart, standard resolution,
MTF:OFF, TTI:OFF, ECM)
G4: 3 seconds
(ITU-T No. 1 Chart, detail resolution,
MTF:OFF, TTI:OFF, 64 Kbps, MMR)
Printing System Laser printing system
Paper Capacity Standard: 250 sheets
Optional: 500 sheets x 2
Paper Size B4, A4, A5, Letter, A3, F4, Foolscap
Power Supply 220 250 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption Minimum 2 w, Maximum 900 w
12
E99
Operating Temperature: 15 - 25 C
Environment Humidity: 40 70% Rh
Dimension 505 (w) x 609 (d) x 450 (h) mm
Weight Less than 26.5 kg
Internet Fax Specifications
Connection Local Area Network, Ethernet 10BaseT / 100BaseTX direct

connection, TCP/IP
Resolution Standard: 200 x 100 dpi
Detail: 200 x 200 dpi
E- mail File Format Single / Multi part MIME Conversion, TIFF-F (MH) / DCX
Transmission Speed 100 or 10 Mbps maximum
Document Size A4 (A3 / B4 is reduced to A4)
Software
Compatible Mail Send mail / Qualcom Pro Server

Servers Post Office
Seattle Lab Mail Server
Netscape Message Server
AT Mail Server
Imail Server for Windows NT
Compatible PC-Fax Sopwith Version 1.1
Applications WinFaxPro Version 8.0
WinFax Version 4.04
MS FAX Windows 95
NIC FAX Application
NIC Fax Monitor Utility for management and monitoring status of the E99
Internet Fax
IC Fax Viewer Image view/edit/save software for Internet fax files
NIC Fax Com Software for redirection of PC-Fax documents
Redirector
Operating System Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0
13
E99
Features List
64 level halftones
1.5 sec. scanning speed
A3 scanning width
A3 receive fax printing
3 sec. transmission speed (G3)
1.5 sec. transmission speed (G4)
15 ppm printing speed
Dual port communication
Double sided transmission
Serial broadcasting
Substitute reception
Triple access
2 MB standard memory
64 quick, 100 speed and 9 group dial key (increased to 1000 speed and 30 group dial
keys with Function Upgrade Card)
ITU error correction mode (ECM)
Send later
Batch transmission
Forwarding
Transmission deadline
Economy transmission
Reverse order printing
Memory backup
Memory lock
Confidential transmission (reception)
AI protocol
Auto redial
Transfer request
Energy saver mode
Wild cards
Authorised reception
Restricted access
Personal codes (150) (increased to 500 with Function Upgrade Card)
Polling
Auto page re-transmission
Centre mark
Multicopy (99)
Remote diagnostic system (RDS)
Function setting by destination
Backlight LCD
14
E99
Supplies
Toner FT500BLK All- in-one cartridge * Yield 10,000 (A4)

Ink Stamp FMAR30 Yield 3,000
Note: * Photo Conductor, Charger Roller, Cleaning Unit, Developer Unit and Toner
are included in the All-in-one cartridge.
Reliability
Machine Life (ML) 5 years, Copies 300,000
Expected Average 3000 sheets (fax, print, copy)

Monthly Volume
(AMV)
Maximum Monthly 5000 sheets
Volume (MMV)
Duty Cycle (DC) TBA
Please note that the above figures are design targets. The actual yields and reliability
data may vary, depending on the customers operation, maintenance conditions and
servicing history.

Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV) is the recommended Maximum Monthly

Volume for target customer.

comes first.
Duty Cycle (DC) is maximum occasional peak volume to keep machine reliability
(target Mean Copies Between service Calls (MCBC) remains unchanged).
Recommendation: It is recommended that machines are placed to handle MMV

and not Duty Cycle.
15
E99
WHAT FITS WHAT

E99 P699 6999 9980
Peripherals / Options
FAXHANDSET Handset for any fax

FPFU500 Paper Feed Unit 500 sheets
FG4500 ISDN G4 Interface Unit
FG3500 G3 Interface Unit
FDCOK500 PC Fax Interface
FNIC500 Internet Fax LAN Option
DIF2000EI Network interface (for Printer Option)
FME2MB140 Feature Expander Card 2MB (336 pages)
FME4MB140 Feature Expander Card 4MB (504 pages)
FME40MB Feature Expander Card 40MB (1200 pages)
DIF500JBIG JBIG Unit
Source Locally * Function Upgrade Card
FCNTR100 Mechanical Counter
FAXLFPCAB Large Cabinet, Flat Pack
FLS500GB Language Set English
FLS500F Language Set French
FLS500D Language Set German
FLS500I Language Set Italian
FLS500P Language Set Portuguese
FLS500N Language Set Norwegian
FLS500S Language Set Swedish
Supplies
FT500BLK All- in-one toner cartridge (yield 10000 at 4%)

FMAR30 Ink stamp cartridge (yield 3000 stamps)
* Source locally, please see Extranet new article for details
16
E99
OPTION COMPATIBILITY
The following chart shows which options can be installed and used at the same time
as other options. Items position vertically, above or below each other, and can be
installed at the same time. Items listed horizontally, in the same line, next to each
other, cannot be installed together.
PAPER FEED UNIT (FPFU500)

PAPER FEED UNIT (FPFU500)
FEATURE EXPANDER FEATURE EXPANDER FEATURE EXPANDER
2 MB 4 MB 40 MB
(FME2MB140) (FME4MB140) (FME40MB)
PRINTER CONTROLLER (DIF500P)
PRINTER NETWORK INTERFACE BOARD (DIF2000EI)
(in common with PMR14/20)
INTERNET FAX NIC PC FAX EXPANDER
(FNIC500) (FDCOK500)
G3 INTERFACE UNIT ISDN INTERFACE UNIT
(FG3500) (FG4500)
JBIG UNIT
(DIF500JBIG)
FUNCTION UPGRADE CARD
(FFC140U)
COUNTER
(FCNTR100)
From the above chart, the following example configurations can be seen:
1. You can attach 2 x 500 paper feed units together.

2. Only one of 2 MB memory or 4 MB memory or 40 MB memory can be
installed (since there is only one memory card slot).
3. The G3 Interface Unit and ISDN (G4) interface options cannot be installed
together. However, the Internet Fax Option (FNIC500) and G3 or G4 option
can be used together.
4. The Internet fax option and PC-FAX Expander cannot be installed together.
17
E99
The NPS for the F64 details five competitor models from four manufacturers. Since
the launch of the F64, many new models have been launched with similar capabilities
to the F64 and now the E99.
A review of competitor models was undertaken at CeBIT 2000. A dedicated report is

available and can be found on the Extranet under the CeBIT link on the Main News
page.
18
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
FL1a/FL1b PLAIN PAPER FAX
Nashuatec F101/F102
Rex Rotary F101/F102
Gestetner F101/F102
LAUNCH SCHEDULE

Month Month Origin
July, 2002 September, 2002 South Korea

Date Created: June, 2002
Version 5
August, 2002
FL1a / FL1b
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Market Overview 5
Limitations and Remarks 13
What Fits What 16
This is a pre-launch document and specifications

are subject to change. If in doubt, or specifications
are required for tenders etc., please contact NRGI
K:\Customer\Technic\NPSDOC\FL1a.doc 1
FL1a / FL1b
INTRODUCTION
The FL1a and FL1b are entry-level plain paper fax machines, designed to refocus customers
on the NRG fax product line. Two models are available and will replace the H1 in the
product range: the FL1a basic machine or the FL1b sister product, which has
multifunctional capability.
With high specifications but competitive market price, it is hoped that a strong presence in
the entry-level segment will drive forward NRG sales in other fax segments.
FL1a / FL1b

The FL1a and FL1b have been developed to meet customer demand for a basic, laser plain
paper fax. Customers at this end of the market require a basic fax function at a competitive
price.
Both machines are equipped with a Super G3 (33,600bps) modem and MMR data
compression for a transmission speed of 3 sec. / A4. They have a 20-sheet ADF and
standard paper capacity of 150 sheets. Dialling features include 20 Quick and 80 Speed dial
keys.
In addition, the FL1b offers print and scanning as standard.
Main Features are:-
Productivity
3 sec. transmission speed
6 sec. scanning speed (FL1a) 3 sec. scanning speed (FL1b)
8ppm printing speed
20 page ADF
20/80 quick/speed dials
150 sheet paper capacity
Dual access memory
User Friendly
Simple design operation panel for ease of use
Small machine footprint (W - 313mm x D - 356mm x H - 195mm)
Reliability
2MB (approx 160 page) SAF memory capacity
All-in-one cartridge
FL1b:
MFP functions as standard
Scanner (TWAIN, 300 x 300dpi)
Printer (GDI, IEEE1284 Parallel, 300dpi)
16 x 1 Line LCD
80 Speed Dial Keys

20 Quick Dial Keys
FL1a / FL1b
Specifications: FL1a FL1b H1 E20 SF1
Fax Modem Speed (Kbps) 33.6 33.6 14.4 33.6 33.6

Document Feeder 20 20 30 30 50
Standard Paper Capacity 150 150 100 250 250
(sheets)
Maximum Paper Capacity 150 150 100 850 850
(sheets)
Quick Dial 20 20 20 30 30
Speed Dial 80 80 50 50 50
Group Dial 20* 20* 3 5 5
Standard Fax Memory (MB) 2.0 2.0 1.2 1 3
Scanning Speed (sec.) 6.0 3.0 6.0 2.8 3.0
Transmission Speed (sec.) 3.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 3.0
Print Speed 8 8 6 6 13
Expected Average Monthly 300 300 500 750 1,000
Volume
Maximum Monthly Volume 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,500 2,000
Machine Life 60K 60K 5 years or 5 years or 5 years / 120
36K 45K scans / 300K
prints
Zoom 50 50 - - -
130% 200%
Options:
Print - Std, GDI - Y, GDI Y,
PCL5e/PCL/PS
Scan - Std, - Y, -
TWAIN TWAIN
PC Fax - - - Y -
Supply Yield 4,300 4,300 4,800 4,500 5,000
* If you have already registered 20 x Quick dial, Group dial is invalid.
FL1a / FL1b
MARKET OVERVIEW
The laser fax market in Europe still represents over 1 million unit sales and so, although
there is much agreement within the industry that the market has started to decline, it is clear
that there is still a large potential market for these machines. The decline has been caused
by the increase in e-mail and other forms of communication, along with a movement
towards multifunctional products. In terms of the speed of the decline, most commentators
view about 3% to be a realistic figure for the next 3 5 years.
The laser plain paper fax segment represents just over 900,000 units in Europe and can be
broadly split between single function machines and multifunctional machines.
1000000
800000
600000
400000 1999
2000
200000 2001
0
S ingle Function Multi-Functional
Total
Machines Machines
1999 596370 271357 867727

2000 563731 378538 942269
2001 518140 404664 922804
The split between the two different segments is approximately 56% single function, 44%
multifunctional (2001). While the single function market remains the highest this masks the
fact that it is declining in size, about 13% between 1999 & 2001. On the other hand, the
multifunctional market has seen an increase of 33% during the same time period.
Summary
It is important to remain in the single function fax market there are still significant sales
opportunities, including converting users to MFP fax options in the future.
FL1a / FL1b
PRODUCT POSITIONING
E99
Sm all O ffice M achine
(w ith netw ork print)
E40
Price
SF1
W orkgroups needing
Fax Applications
E20
FL1a Sm all O ffice /

Personal
FL1b M achines
Super G 3 + G 4 O ption
While all of NRGs models should be sold primarily on features and benefits, the range
offers the opportunity to also sell the machines in many different customer situations.
Target Market
The FL1a / FL1b should be positioned as powerful, low cost models that offer all the
features that a small office requires, including ease of operation.
In addition, the FL1a/FL1b will be targeted at small companies and corporate single users in
the business environment that require a personal, small footprint solution.
Key target markets will be:
Single users (SOHO) through the indirect dealer channel.

Small workgroups 3 to 10 users.
Key Account business our present customers who may wish to upgrade from
their existing H1 or R120/R150 machines.
Environments where the average volume is 300 sheets per month and the
maximum is 1,000 sheets per month.
FL1b for customers needing print/scan capabilities (therefore enabling
distributors to capture additional supplies revenue).
FL1a / FL1b
Model H1 FL1a / FL1b Remarks

Input Document Width Max.218mm Max. 216mm
Effective Scanning Width A4: 204mm 210mm
Printing Speed 6 PPM/Letter, A4 8PPM/Letter, A4
Super Smoothing Yes No
Halftone 64 Level
Maximum Printing Size A4 Legal/A4
Paper Capacity (Standard) 100sheets 150sheets
Manual Feeder N/A FL1b only 1 sheet at a time
Max. 600W Max. 700W
Power Consumption Standby (Energy Save Standby: 50W
Mode): Less than 10W Energy Save:9.5W
W341 x D415.1 x W313 x D356 x H195mm
Dimensions
H293.6mm
Weight 12.5Kg 7.7Kg
FAX Specifications:
8 x 3.85 l/mm
(Standard)
8 x 3.85/7.7 l/mm
Scanning Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7/15.4 l/mm 8 x 7.7 l/mm (Fine)
11.8 x 11.8 l/mm
11.8 x 11.8 l/mm
(Super Fine)
FL1a: 6 seconds
Scanning Speed Less than 6 sec
FL1b: 3 seconds
Transmission Speed 6 seconds 3 seconds
Data Transmission Speed Max. 14.4Kbps 33.6Kbps
Compression Method MH/MR/MMR
Compatibility G3
1MB 2MB
Memory Capacity
(96 pages/ITU-T #1, Std) (approx. 160 pages)
20 sheets
ADF 30 sheets (Letter/A4)
(Letter/Legal/A4)
Quick Dial 20 20
Speed Dial 50 80
If you have already
registered 20 quick
Group Dial 3 20
dial, Group Dial is
invalid.
Dual Access Yes
4 Hours (with Memory opt)
Memory Back-up 30 Minutes
12Hours (w/o Memory opt)
Copier Specifications:
Copy Speed 6 CPM 8 CPM
Optical Resolution:
Copy Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7 L/mm FL1a: 200 x 200dpi CIS
FL1b: 300 x 300dpi CIS
FL1a: 50% to 130%
Enlargement/Reduction N/A
FL1b: 50% to 200%
FL1a / FL1b
Model H1 FL1b Remarks

Generic CD will provide
Printer & Scanner Drivers CD - Printer & Scanner Drivers
Type 1100
A4/Letter/Legal/Folio,
Executive, A5, B5
Paper Size N/A
Envelopes: No.10, DL, C5,
C6, B5, Monarch
Printing Resolution N/A 600 x 600dpi
Printing Speed N/A 8PPM
FL1a also has
Parallel Interface to
Interface N/A IEEE1284 Parallel
upgrade machines
firmware.
Windows95/98/Me/NT4.0
OS N/A
/2000/XP
Printer Language N/A GDI
PC Scanner Specifications:
Scanning Resolution N/A 300 x 300dpi
Interface N/A IEEE1284 Parallel
Windows95/98/Me/NT4.0
OS N/A
/2000/XP
Scanner Language N/A TWAIN
ROM:
The ROM contains seven languages: English, German, Italian, French, Spanish, Dutch and
Portuguese (LCD + reports).
The printer and scanner drivers CD-ROM contains five languages: English, German, Italian,
French and Spanish.
FL1a / FL1b
Detailed Specifications:

General:
Effective Scanning Width 204mm 210mm
Automatic Document Feeder 30 sheets 20 sheets
Manual Document Feeder No FL1b only 1 sheet at a time.
202mm for A4
Effective Printing Width A4
208mm for Letter/Legal
Cassette Capacity 100 150
Dual Access Yes Yes
Handset / Telephone No No
Automatic Shift Down (Max) Yes (14.4K) Yes (33.6K)
Telephone Connection Yes (1) Yes (1)
Quick Dial 20 20
Speed Dial 50 80
Keystroke Program No No
Group Dial 3 20
Energy Saving Mode Yes Yes
Printing:
Smoothing Yes No
Control Print Density Yes Yes
Multi-Sort Document Reception No No
Reverse Order Printing Yes No
Reception Time Printing No Yes
Centre Mark No No
Image Rotation No No
Scanning:
Resolution Control Yes Yes
Contrast Control No Yes
Halftone/Error Diffusion 64 Level/Yes 64 Level/Yes
Stamp No No
Automatic Document Width
No No
Detection
Automatic Resolution Control No No
Specified Image Area No No
Storing Double Sided No No
Documents
Communication:
Busy Tone Detection Yes No
Shortened Preamble/Protocol No/Yes No
Error Correction Mode Yes Yes
Transfer Transmission
No/No No/No
(Transfer/Request)
Line:
Monitor Speaker Yes Yes
Voice Request No No
Tone Transmission Yes Yes
Chain Dialling Yes Yes
FL1a / FL1b

On Hook Dial Yes Yes
Pulse/Tone Selection Yes Yes By Tech mode
Redial (Automatic/Manual) Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
AI Redial Yes No
Silent Ringing Detection No No
Dial In No Yes
Automatic Voice Message No No
Reception Mode Selection Yes Yes
Automatic FAX/TEL Change Yes Yes
Answering Machine Interface Yes Yes
Reception Mode Switching No No
Timer
Transmission:
Immediate Transmission Yes Yes
Memory Transmission Yes Yes
Send Later Yes Yes Delayed Fax
Transmission Deadline No No
Closed Network (Transmission) No No
Confidential Transmission/With No/No No/No
ID
Transfer Request No No
Polling Transmission (ID) No Yes
Serial Broadcasting (Immediate) Yes Yes
Serial Broadcasting (Later) Yes No
Economy Transmission No No
Quick (Parallel) Memory No No
Transmission
Transmission Options:
Batch Transmission No No
Page Retransmission Yes No
Forwarding No Yes
Alternative Destination No No
Fax Header (TTI) Yes Yes
Label Insertion No No
Page Count No Yes
Own Name /Fax Number Yes No/Yes
(RTI/CSI)
Automatic Reduction (TX) No No
Transmission Reserve No Yes
Well Log Transmission No No
Memory Priority Transmission Yes Yes
Programmable Cover Sheet No No
Reception:
Automatic Reception Yes Yes
Manual Reception Yes Yes
Substitute Reception Yes Yes
Closed Network (Reception) No No
Confidential Reception No No
Polling Reception Yes Yes
Poll Later No No
FL1a / FL1b

Multi-polling Reception No No
Authorized Reception Yes Yes Junk Fax Barrier
Continuous Polling No No
Reception Options:
Multiple Reception No No
Chequered Mark No No
Specified Cassette Selection No No
2 in 1 (Two in One) No No
Notification of Reception No No
Power Saving Timer Yes No
Memory Lock No No
Memory Lock By Destination No No
Address
Automatic Reduction (RX) No Yes
Function Setting By Destination
No No
Address
Input:
Direct FAX Number Entry Yes Yes
Personal Code/Program Label No/No No/No
Direct Entry For Labels No No
ID Code Programming No No
Label Registration for
Yes/Yes No
Quick/Speed Dial
Restricted Access No No
Auto Document No No
Wild Cards Yes No
Operation:
Telephone Directory No Yes
User Function Key No No
Copy Mode (Multi-copy Mode) Yes/99 Yes/99
LCD Prompt 20 x 2 Lines 16 x 1 Line
Remaining Memory Indication Yes No
Time Indicator (Clock Yes Yes
Adjustment)
Journal on LCD No No
User Parameter Setting Yes No
Polling From Memory No Yes
Summer Time
Yes No
(Daylight Saving Time)
Help On Demand Yes Yes
Blank Document Detection No No
Reports:
Transmission Result Report Yes Yes Sending
Confirmation
Communication Failure Report Yes No
Error Report Yes Yes Sending
Confirmation
Power Failure Report Yes Yes
Schedule
Memory Storage Report Yes Yes Information
List
FL1a / FL1b

Memory Transmission Result No No
Report
File List Yes Yes Schedule
Information
List
Quick Dial List Yes Yes Phonebook
Speed Dial List Yes Yes Phonebook
Group Dial List Yes Yes Phonebook
User Function List No No
User Parameter List Yes Yes System Data List
Printing Quick Dial Labels Yes No
Environmental Information for Europe:
Mechanical noise level (Power level):
Sound power level:

Stand-by 35dB or less
During Printing 47dB or less
Average power consumption:
Mode:
Energy Save 9.5W and lower
Standby 50W and lower
Scanning 25W and lower
Printing 170W and lower
Maximum 700W and lower
Workplace Environment
Mode:
Ozone Emission 0.0039 mg/m
Noise emission (stand by) 35dB or less
Noise emission (during printing) 47dB or less
FL1a / FL1b
LIMITATIONS & REMARKS

Machine (Hardware):
No: Description: Details / Recommendations /

Countermeasures
1. A smell will be emitted from the ventilation hole Please note that this phenomenon is in no way
when a new AIO is installed. This phenomenon will harmful to people.
stop after approx. 20 sheets have been printed.
2. Depending on the condition of the original After the Toner Low indication appears on the
document, print image may become patchy before LCD, the print image may not be possible to
the Toner Low indication appears on the LCD. read clearly. In this event please shake the AIO
gently, to distribute the toner evenly, to re-
establish the print quality.
Scanner Features:
No: Operating Description: Details / Recommendations /

Systems: Countermeasures:
1. Windows When used with some applications (e.g. Please do not push Advanced button.
95 / 98 / ME Imaging software), after clicking on This bug will be fixed as a running change.
Advanced button under Image The detailed schedule will be announced
Quality tab with the TWAIN driver, an separately, later.
error message appears and the
application will be closed. (Please see
image on next page)
2. Windows Depending on the application, after Please do not select 2,400dpi or higher
95 / 98 / ME selecting high resolution (2,400dpi to resolution. As a running change, the highest
9,600dpi) nothing is scanned and no resolution that a customer can select will be
error message appears. changed to 1,200dpi. The detailed schedule
will be announced separately, later.
3. Windows When used with MS Office package, Please do not select 2,400dpi or higher
95 / 98 / ME / after selecting high resolution (2,400dpi resolution. As a running change, the highest
XP / 2000 to 9,600dpi) nothing is scanned and resolution that a customer can select will be
discarded images are stored on the Hard changed to 1,200dpi. The detailed schedule
Disk automatically. will be announced separately, later.
4. Windows Depending on the application, Please do not use these features in this case.
95 / 98 / ME / destroyed scanned images may be
XP / 2000 printed out if the Rotate or
Mirroring features are used.
FL1a / FL1b
After clicking Advanced button above, the following error message appears.
FL1a / FL1b

Supplies
Starter Kit All-in-one cartridge Yield 1,250

Toner FTL1BLK All-in-one cartridge Yield 4,300 (A4)
Test conditions ITU-T Test Chart #1 in standard mode.
Reliability

Monthly Volume
(AMV)

Volume (MMV)
history.

target customer.
FL1a / FL1b
WHAT FITS WHAT

FL1a F101 F101 F101
FL1b F102 F102 F102
Supplies
FTL1BLK All-in-one cartridge
(yield 4,300 sheets @ ITU-T Test Chart #1 in
standard mode)
Language Sets *:
DDKL1GB Language Set English
DDKL1F Language Set French
DDKL1D Language Set German
DDKL1I Language Set Italian
DDKL1P Language Set Portuguese
* Language set contains Branding Plaque and Operation (Front) panel sheet.
FL1a / FL1b
Due to the range of competitors offering entry and mid-range fax machines, we have
concentrated on the best selling machines for the competitive comparison.
For the year 2001, Brother and Canon models currently hold the top 4 market share positions
for plain paper fax machines in Western Europe.
Model % market share Position

Brother 8060P 6.9% 1
Canon L350 6.1% 2
Brother MFC9060 5.9% 3
Canon L250 4.3% 4
(Source iSIS)
Following a review of fax machines at CeBIT 2002, the following general observations can
be made:
In a similar style to the NRG FL1a and FL1b, a number of manufacturers are
introducing a "sister" model i.e. a standalone machine plus its "upgraded" MFP
version.
Product dimensions are becoming smaller.
Trend continues with copier-based multifunctional machines with a fax option,
even in the low-end category.
Specification information has been taken from the following sources:

Competitor Websites.
Competitor Brochures.
InfoMarkt guides (Telecommunication Edition 25-2001 and Edition 26- 2001/2002).
What to Buy for Business (Edition 232, July 2000 and Edition 255 June 2002).
Note: (x) indicates information unavailable from any of the above sources
FL1a / FL1b
NRG NRG NRG Brother Brother Brother Brother Brother

Model H1 FL1a FL1b FAX-8060P FAX-8070P FAX-8350P MFC9030 MFC9060
Modem (Kbps) 14.4 33.6 33.6 14.4 14.4 14.4 14.4 14.4
Std memory 1.2MB 2MB 2MB 2MB 2MB 3MB 2MB 130 pages
Std Paper Capacity 100 150 150 200 200 250 200 200
(sheets)
Document Feeder 30 20 20 20 20 30 20 20
(sheets)
1 touch quick dial 20 20 20 30 8 32 x 8
2 touch speed dial 50 80 80 - 100 100 100 30
Scan speed (sec.) 6 6 3 x x 2 3.5 x
Transmission speed 6 3 3 6 6 6 6 6
(sec.)
Print Speed (sec.) 6 8 8 6 10 12 8 6
Print - - GDI - - - GDI GDI
Scan - - TWAIN - - - TWAIN, to e- TWAIN
mail
FL1a / FL1b
Brother Canon Canon Canon Samsung Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic Panasonic

Model MFC9070 L250 L200 L350 SF-5100/P KX FL 501 UF585 UF-590 UF-595
Modem (Kbps) 14.4 14.4 14.4 33.6 14.4 14.4 14.4 33.6 33.6
Standard memory 8MB 90 pages 64 pages 340 pages 2MB 2MB 60 pages 120 pages 60 pages
Standard Paper 200 100 100 250 + 100 150 150 250 250 250
Capacity (sheets)
Document feeder 20 20 20 30 20 15 30 30 30
(sheets)
Quick Dial 1 touch x 16 24 32 10 10 28 32 28
Speed Dial 2 touch 100 - - - 80 100 72 100 72
Scan speed (sec.) 3.5 x 6.5 5 x x 6 3 x
Transmission speed 6 6 6 3 6 8 6 3 3
(sec.)
Print Speed (sec.) 10 6 6 6 6 10 6 x 5
Print GDI - - Parallel -/Parallel - Parallel Parallel Parallel
Scan TWAIN, - - - - TWAIN, TWAIN TWAIN,
to e-mail PC-fax to e-mail PC-fax
PC-fax
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
SF1
Laser Plain Paper Fax
Nashuatec: FP103
Rex Rotary: F6103
Gestetner: F9103
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
First Target
January 2002 April 2002 China

Date Created: October 2001
Version 5
March 2002
SF1
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Main Features 6
NRG Range Comparison 8
Market Overview 11
Printer Controller 13
In the Box Accessories List 31
What Fits What 35

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\SF1.doc 1
SF1
INTRODUCTION
The SF1 is designed as a business laser plain paper fax, for small workgroups of 3 10 people.
With a modem speed of 33.6Kbps and 3-second transmission speed, users benefit from high
productivity. With the optional print and network interfaces, the machine can offer full network
printing at 15ppm.
This machine is based on the Segment 1 DMR13/F machine, with the major difference that the SF1
is sheet fed and uses a hopper toner system.
Designed for an overall low total cost of ownership (TCO), distributors will benefit from supply
revenue, which will increase with installation of the print controller.
SF1
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The SF1 is a plain paper laser fax, equipped with a 33.6Kbps modem with JBIG compression. The
machine comes with a 250-sheet A4 standard paper capacity, with a 100-sheet bypass tray and 500-
sheet paper bank as options.
SF1 Standard Configuration:
50-sheet document feeder
New C I Colour
250-sheet paper tray
SF1 with Optional Paper Tray:
Optional 100-sheet bypass tray
Optional 500-sheet paper bank
SF1
Rear View:
Power Switch
Memory card option is installed here
Printer Controller/Network Interface Board and PS2 option are installed

here
Operation Panel:
5 User Function Keys 22 x 2 Line LCD with back

<Note>
light
Each of these keys can be programmed with a
feature that you wish to use frequently
15 x 2 Quick Dial Keys

Status Indicator
Provides operational status
SF1
Overview of Functions:
The following functions are assigned as default:
F1: Print Journal

F2: Fax Header Print
F3: Transmission Result Report
F4: Group
F5: Dial Option
The following new options are assigned when the printer option is installed:
F1: Print Journal

F3: Printer
F4: Online
F5: Job Reset
(Decals for these options are included in the printer option).
Options
The following peripherals are available for the SF1:
100-sheet bypass tray

40MB feature expander
500-sheet paper bank (common with DMR13/F)
Printer controller version 2 (common with DMR12/F and DMR13/F)
Network interface board (common with DMR12/F, DMR13/F and DMR15S/18S/18D)
PostScript 2 option (common with DMR12/F, DMR13/F and DMR15S/18S/18D)
32MB, 64MB, 128MB memory for printer (common with DMR12/F, DMR13/F and
DMR15S/18S/18D)
Toner hopper cartridge (unique)
Photo-conductor unit (common with DMR12/F and DMR13/F)
SF1
MAIN FEATURES
The aim is to benefit the user with long-term cost savings AND increased functionality.
High
Productivity
TCO High
Superiority Reliability
High Productivity
Super G3 fax modem speed of 33.6Kbps, with JBIG compression as standard.

3 seconds transmission speed and 3 seconds scanning speed.
3MB standard memory, with option to upgrade to 40MB (machine can store 240 A4 pages or
1,500 A4 pages, respectively).
15ppm print speed.
Optional print controller with PCL5e/PCL6 capability.
Optional network interface board for all major network environments, giving full network
printing capability (PS compatibility is available for Mac users).
30/50/5 Quick/Speed/Group dial.
SF1
High Reliability
Machine durability has been improved.
SF1 E20
Average Scanning 1,000 750
Maximum Scanning 2,000 1,500
Average Printing 1,000 750
Maximum Printing 5,000 1,500
Memory backup.
TCO Superiority
Separate toner and developer units to reduce supply costs.
Toner Hopper Magazine (THM)
Plug & Play installation as the user turns on the power and chooses the language etc., to
install the unit (as with the E20 and E40).*
Automatic Energy Saver Mode if the machine is not used for five minutes, reducing electricity
consumption to 2W or less.
* Note: In some countries the Service Representative, to meet regulations, must install the
machine.
SF1
NRG RANGE COMPARISON

H1: E20: SF1: E40: DMR12F: LFO: DMR13F: E99:
Document Feeder 30 30 50 50 30 30 30 50
Flat Bed - - - - Y Y Y -
Standard Paper Capacity (sheets) 100 250 250 250 251 150 350 250
Maximum Paper Capacity (sheets) 100 850 850 850 251 250 850 1250
Quick Dial 20 30 30 30 16 10 16 64
Speed Dial 50 50 50 100 50 50 50 100
Group Dial 3 5 5 7 5 3 5 9
Fax Modem Speed (Kbps) 14.4 33.6 33.6 33.6 33.6 14.4 33.6 33.6
Copier Memory Standard - - - - 8MB - 8MB -
Standard Fax Memory (MB) 1 1 3 2 1 of above 224KB 1 of above 2
Optional Fax Memory Upgrades (MB) 2 2 40 2/4 5 of 32 1/2/4 5 of 32 2/4/40
upgrade upgrade
Scanning Speed (seconds) 6.0 2.8 3.0 2.0 2.4 2.3 2.4 1.5
Transmission Speed (Seconds) 6.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 3.0
Compression Method (JBIG) - - Y Y - - - Option
Print Speed (ppm) 6 6 15 10 12 10 13 15
Expected Average Monthly Volume 500 750 1000 1000 1500 1000 2000 3000
Maximum Monthly Volume 1000 1500 2000 2000 5000 2000 5000 5000
Machine Life 5yrs or 36K 5yrs or 45K 5yrs or 120K 5yrs or 120K 5yrs or 300K 5yrs or 60K 5yrs or 300K 5yrs or 300K
scanned /
300K printed
Zoom - - - - 50-200% 50-200% 50-200% -
Group 4 ISDN Line - - - Option - - - Option
Internet Fax - - - Option - - - Option
Printer Controller - Interface kit Option Via NIC Option Option Option Option
NIC - N-Parallel Option Option Option - Option Option
only
SF1
PRODUCT POSITIONING
Product Positioning
The SF1 is positioned above the existing E20, with faster print, more standard memory and network
connectivity. However, it is positioned below the existing E40 as, although the E40 has a slower
print engine, it has Internet fax options (dial- up and NIB).
Fax-based
Products DMR35A/45A
DMR22A/27A
E99
DMR15S/18S
E40
Multifunctional
New SF1 Products
LFO Being replaced by
DMR12F/13F
E20
H1
Target Market
The SF1 is targeted at the following markets:
Small workgroups of 3 10 people who share one facsimile in the office.

Small businesses and corporate departments.
Replacement of older Inkjet, Thermal Transfer and Laser plain paper faxes, to increase market
share.
Replacement of E10 or E20 machines with a slightly more expensive machine with significantly
increased specifications.
An office where the average monthly transmission volume is 1,000 sheets and average monthly
printing volume is 1,000 sheets.
This will enable the distributor to increase revenue by gaining profits from supply sales and
capturing print volume through network connectivity.
SF1
Target Users
SF1 H1 E20 E40

Target Monthly Average 1,000 sheets 500 sheets 750 sheets 1,000 sheets
Transmission Volume Maximum 2,000 sheets 1,000 sheets 1,500 sheets 2,000 sheets
Target Monthly Average 1,000 sheets 500 sheets 750 sheets 1,000 sheets
Printing Volume Maximum 5,000 sheets 1,000 sheets 1,500 sheets 2,000 sheets
<Note> Life: 5 years, 120,000 sheets scanned or 300,000 sheets printed (whichever comes first)
SF1
MARKET OVERVIEW
Within the overall fax market, growth rates vary according to both technology (toner, inkjet etc.)
and market segment (single function, multifunctional etc.).
According to Infosource, during the first half of 2001 the European fax market declined by 3.6%
compared with the same period in 2000. Infosource suggest that this downward trend has been
caused by economic slow down, in conjunction with a shift away from fax towards e-Mail.
Some of this decline is in the thermal sector and the growth in plain paper products is not
compensating. The migration from single function to multifunctionality continues to grow in
2001, as vendors find it increasingly difficult to compete on price in the single function market.
Multifunctional machines showed a growth rate of over 79% in 2000 compared with 1999
(European figures).
Workgroup Environment Overview
The workgroup segment of the market made up 24% of the total European fax market in 2000, up
from 22% in 1999. The segment is made up, almost exclusively, of inkjet and toner machines and
generally enjoys much higher margins than in the personal sector of the market. Users generally
demand at least one of the following additional functions from their fax: network printing, Super
G3, Internet faxing or network connectivity.
Workgroup 1 - <1MB of memory and 200 499 sheets of paper as standard (NRG H1 and
E20)
The year 2000 saw 1 million units placed in this segment of the European market, an 11% growth
over 1999. Of the million units, B/W functionality grew by 12%, while colour machines declined
by 22%. Colour capability in this segment appears not to do well, when more cost-effective
solutions can be found in the colour printer environment. If users want colour output, it is unlikely
that they would also require high volume faxing capability so would probably purchase two
separate devices, a desktop colour printer and a Workgroup fax or choose a colour copier/printer
with fax option.
In terms of technology, toner machines are dominant in this segment representing 96% of total
sales, growing 12% on 1999 compared to a 10% decline for inkjet machines.
SF1
Workgroup 2 - <1MB+ of RAM and 500 sheets plus of paper as standard (NRG E40 and E99)
In Europe, 90,746 units were placed in the Workgroup 2 category during 2000, which is an increase
of 146% over 1999. Multi- functional devices represent 29% of this segment and saw the greatest
growth during 2000. While they increased by 152% over 1999, single function devices rose by
143%. In 2000, Workgroup 2 accounted for 2% of the total European fax market. However, this
segment is forecast to grow considerably in the future, especially in the multifunctional area.
At the high end of Workgroup 2 (e.g. NRG E99), it has been noticeable that most players have
declined to launch any new products. This trend appears to have been driven, in part, by changes in
segment 1 of the copier market, with a large number of vendors showing new models that come
with fax options as standard (e.g. NRG DMR13F [October 2001 launch] and DMR12F [December
2001 launch]).
Conclusion
Overall, the European fax market is now starting to show the decline that many analysts have been
predicting for the past few years. It remains to be seen how much of this is due to the worlds
general economic climate and how much is due to the decreasing importance of faxes in the
business world today. Standalone fax now has competition from e-Mail and, of course, MFPs,
which must all impact on the amount of fax traffic generated today.
It should be noted, however, that there are still growth segments within the overall fax market,
namely in the multifunctional fax arena. As long as NRG continue to target this market with
progressively more advanced machines at the same price or cheaper, then there are still significant
revenue streams to be gained.
SF1
PRINTER CONTROLLER
The SF1 shares a printer controller with the DMR12/F and DMR13/F (DIF1013PV2). The Ethernet
NIB and PostScript are common to the DMR15S and DMR18S.
System Structure
IC card Slot for SDRAM 32/64/128MB (option)

programme download.
(Service person use)
IEEE1284 I/F DIMM Slot

Printer Controller
1 bit Serial
Video I/F
DIMM Slot 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Model SF1
PS2 Compatible (option) NIB (option)
Printer Options

1 Printer Unit PCL5e, PCL6, PS2 compatible Common with DMR12/F and
(Option) DMR13/F)
2 32/64/128MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM (144pin) Common with Memory

option for DMR12/F,
DMR13/F, DMR15S/18S,
DMR22/27, etc
3 PostScript2 Compatible with Adobe PS2 Common with DMR12/F,

DMR13/F and DMR15S/18S
4 NIB Ethernet card with RJ45 port Common with DMR12/F,

DMR13/F and DMR15S/18S
Note 1. : Memory option (#2) must be installed with Printer Unit (#1).
SF1
Printer Function
Collation:
Collation is available, when specified by the PCL or PS driver. The RAM on the controller
executes the collation, not the driver. The number of pages available for collation depends on the
combination of PDL and memory capacity.
Slip Sheet:
This feature allows a slip-sheet after every page. You can select the tray for both printing paper and
slip-sheet paper from the printer driver. You can also select print or not print to slip-sheet.
When this feature is selected, Collation is disabled. This feature is NOT available for Mac users.
Auto Continue :
With this feature set On, printing continues automatically (after 10 seconds) even if the following
errors occur. However, the page where the error occurred may not be printed out correctly.
- Print Overrun
- Memory Overflow
- Memory Full
If Auto Continue is set Off, and one of the above errors occurs, the controller stops printing and
displays an error message on the operation panel.
e.g:

Press Job Reset Key Cancel current job
On ---- Continue to print current job
Page Protect:
On and Auto (Default) are selectable for Page Protect. If the setting is On, users can avoid
the error Print Overrun. However, the productivity may slow down. Users are required to select
between On and Auto before sending the job.
SF1
Auto Tray Select:
This feature automatically searches for a tray with paper size that matches the designated ones, in
the following order.
Start Point Tray 1

Tray 2 (option)
Bypass Tray:
In order to print from the Bypass Tray, the Bypass Tray needs to be specified by the printer driver.
Paper sizes available from the Bypass Tray, such as Custom Size, can be fed from the Bypass Tray,
using Auto Tray Select. However, paper sizes that are also available in other paper banks
(Tray1/Tray2), like Letter, A4, etc., cannot be fed from the Bypass Tray by using Auto Tray
Select.
Tray Locking:
When this feature is On, the machine will practice the following action:
a) Locked tray is not searched when using auto tray select by the printer driver.
b) Tray switch to locked tray, or switch from locked tray to another one is NOT practiced.
c) Bypass Tray cannot be specified as Locked Tray. Tray 1 and Tray 2 are available to use
as Locked Tray.
d) Only one tray can be specified as the Locked Tray.
Font Storage:
Even though the SF1 does not carry a Hard Disk Drive, font storage is available on RAM memory.
These fonts are stored temporarily and, once you turn off the power, reset, or switch the PDL, such
as from PCL to PS, the stored font will not remain.
SF1
Driver function:
Major Driver Functions are as follows:

(Yes= available, No=not available, ** indicates default settings)
SETTING PCL5e/6 PS2 SELECTION OPTIONS REMARKS

(Display (Tab name) (Tab name)
Name)
User ID: Yes Yes Type 8 alphanumeric (a-z, User ID is used to identify the
(Set-up) (Set-up) A-Z, 0-9) characters. user associated with a job. It can
be monitored by
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin/Client to identify the user
in the job history (per job basis).
Layout: Yes Yes 1 page per sheet**
(Set-up) (Set-up) 2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Page Order: Yes No Right, then Down** Enabled only if Layout is set for
(Set-up) Down, then Right more than 2 pages per sheet.
Left, then Down
Down, then Left
Custom Yes Yes Measurement Unit: cm or
Paper (Paper) (Paper) Inch
Paper Yes Yes Same paper for all
Selection (Paper) (Paper) pages**
page
Use slip sheet
Resolution Yes Yes PCL5e: 300/600dpi *1
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) PCL6: 600dpi
PS2: 300/600dpi**
selectable
Edge Yes Yes On** When this function is On,
Smoothing (Print Quality) (Print Quality) Off approximately 1200dpi
appearance
Toner Saver Yes Yes Off**
(Print Quality) (Print Quality) On
Page Yes Yes Auto**
Protect (Print Quality) (Print Quality) On
Watermark Yes Yes (None)** Driver has 5 built-in watermarks.
(Watermarks) (Watermarks) CONFIDENTIAL etc. User can create others.
User Code Yes Yes Displays up to 8 numeric This is used for account
(Statistics) (Statistics) characters management of the user or the
group (as a guideline). It can be
monitored by SmartNetMonitor
for Admin to refer to the
*1: The support timing of 300dpi will be announced later.
SF1
Image of PCL6 Printer Driver (Set-up Screen)
Image of PS Driver (Set-up Screen)
SF1
utility was originally bundled with MFPs controller options and LPs that support Adobe
PostScript3 and is installed into Apple Macintosh Clients connected to the MFPs and LPs through
EtherTalk network. By using this software, Macintosh customers can download PS fonts/files to
the printers memory, or change Printer Name/Zone etc.
Note: Mac is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc. in several countries. When this utility name is
used in leaflets, catalogues or other materials, the following description must be added. Mac is
a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Menu structure :
After launching this utility, the Menu bar below appears (File, Edit, Utility and Help).
By selecting each menu, several functions are shown in each dropdown list.

Display Printers Cut Select Zone Display Help
Fonts
Initialise Printers Copy Display Printer Status
Disk
Page Set-up Paste Launch Dialogue Console
Print Fonts Catalog Clear
Print Fonts Sample Select
All
Rename Printer Font
Quit
Functions :
- File Menu -
Download PS Fonts:
The fonts downloaded to the printers memory will be deleted when the printing device
restarts or is switched off.
The names of downloaded fonts are displayed on this Utility Screen. The downloaded fonts
can also be deleted through this function.
SF1
Page Set-up:
Set up the paper size to print the Printer Font Catalog.
Print Font Catalog:
Print the names of available fonts.
Rename Printer:
Displays the Printer Name shown in Chooser and allows the customer to change the
printer name (Up to 31 alpha/numeric characters).
Restart Printer:
Utility Menu
Download PostScript Files to printer.
Select Zone :
Change current Zone to another.
Display Printers Status :
Display Printer Name, Zone Name , Total VM capacity, Free VM capacity, Total
Disk Space and Free Disk space.
Open editor to create, update, save and download PS files interactively (This function is for
customers skilled in handling PostScript files).
[Note]: Initialise Printers Disk and Print Fonts Sample will NOT be supported for SF1
Localization:
English only
System Requirement:
Mac Hardware PowerPC
Mac OS MacOS8.x, 9.x, 10.x *1
Network EtherTalk
Supported engines SF1
PostScript Type 1018 PostScript level2 Compatible (DIF1018PS)
*1: Mac OS10.x Classic Mode is supported. Support of Mac OS10.x Native Mode TBC.
UNIX Support:
Printing out from UNIX is NOT supported on the SF1.
Sub Paper Size Setting (A4 Letter Override function) :

With this function, even if the customer accidentally sends a Letter size print job to the machine that
does not have Letter paper but only A4 paper, the printer controller automatically feeds A4 paper
set as Sub Paper Size. The details of these features are as follows:
- When "A4 size job" is sent to printer controller and A4 size paper is not loaded in any paper
trays but Letter size paper is found, the printer controller automatically feeds the Letter size
paper as "Sub Paper Size" and prints. In the case of a "Letter size job" being sent, A4 paper is
fed in the same manner.
- When Letter size paper runs out after an "A4 size job" is overridden to "Letter size job", the
printer controller asks the user to load Letter size paper unless the A4 size paper tray is set. In a
case where A4 and Letter size paper trays are set, the printer controller asks the user to load A4
size paper.
SF1
- When the "A4 Letter Override" functions, no "print area adjustment" is done (just print the
original image on the Sub Paper"), therefore there may be a lack of print image on each edge.
- This function is applied to "A4 Letter" only. ("A5 Half Letter" override is not supported).
- Customer can select this function "ON" or "OFF" at the printer features of User Tools (Default
Setting is OFF).
- This function is available for printing jobs from PCL5e/6 and PS2, and not for copying and fax.
-
Printer Related Features NOT available for these machines:
- Proof Print
- Form Overlay
- Macro Storage
- Secured printing
- Form Feed
New CD-Launcher:
The SF1 features a CD-Launcher (development code Holly). The launcher basically enables easy
installation of the printer drivers and utilities. After selecting a language, the launcher will take the
user to the following screen:
Note 1. : Auto-Run is not available for Mac.

Note 2. : This screen shot is taken from CD Version1.00.
SF1
Model E20 SF1

Input Document Width Max.218mm Max.216mm
LT: 210mm LT: 210mm
Effective Scanning Width
A4: 205mm A4: 204mm
Printing Method Laser Laser
Printing Speed 6ppm/A4 15ppm/A4
Super Smoothing Yes Yes
Halftone 64 Level 64 Level
LG/A4
Maximum Printing Size LG/A4 (LG is supported with Bypass
tray or optional PFU)
Paper Capacity (Standard) 250 sheets 250
Paper Capacity (Option) 500 sheets + 100 sheets 500 sheets + 100 sheets
Manual Feeder N/A N/A
AC220-240V +-15% AC220-240V +-15%
Power Supply
50/60+-3Hz 50/60+-3Hz
Max. 775W Max. 1,000W
Power Consumption
Standby: Less than 2W Standby: Less than 2W
Dimension W399 x D316 x H260mm W448 x D494 x H411mm
18Kg
Weight 12.5Kg (Excluding toner)
Fax Specifications
Scanning Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7/15.4 l/mm 8 x 3.85/7.7/15.4 l/mm
Less than 3 sec
Scanning Speed 2.8 sec/3.85/A4
(Standard mode)
3 seconds
Transmission Speed 3 seconds (ITU-T Test Chart#1 in std/Fax
Header off)
Data Transmission Speed Max. 33.6Kbps Max. 33.6Kbps
Compression Method MH/MR/MMR MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Compatibility G3 G3
3MB
1MB (240 pages/ITU-T #1, Std)
Memory Capacity (80 pages/ITU-T #1, Std) Option: 40 MB
(up to 1,500 pages)
30 sheets 50 sheets
ADF
(Letter/A4) (Letter/A4 80g/m2 )
Quick Dial 30 30
Speed Dial 50 50
Dual Access Yes Yes
Memory Back-up 6 Hours 12 Hours *
Key Function 2 5
* The number of hours will be limitless when the 40MB option is installed.
SF1
E20 SF1
8 x 3.85/7.7 L/mm
Copy Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7 L/mm
16 x 15.4 L/mm
Enlarge/Reduction N/A N/A
Zoom N/A N/A
1. Less than 11 seconds
(25C)
Warm-up Time Less than 11 seconds
2. Less than 15 seconds
(10C)
Copy Speed 6cpm 13cpm
Printer Specifications
A4/A5/LT/LG/F4/HLT
Paper Size A4/A5/LT/LG
/Envelope
Printing Resolution 600dpi/600dpi + EET 600dpi
Printing Speed 6ppm 15ppm
Bi-Directional Parallel
Ethernet:
Interface Bi-Directional Parallel 10BaseT/100Base- Tx
Network Interface Board is
option
Windows95/98/ Windows95/98/Me/
OS
NT4.0/2000 NT4.0/2000/XP
PCL5e, 6, PS2 compatible
(option)
PC Fax Specifications
Compatibility Class2 N/A
Interface Bi-Directional Parallel N/A
OS Windows95/98 N/A
PC Scanner Specifications
Scanning Resolution 200dpi (8*7.7 l/mm) N/A
Line Art/Dither/Error
Scan Mode N/A
Diffusion
Interface Bi-Directional Parallel N/A
Windows95/98/NT4.0
OS N/A
/2000
SF1
Detailed Specifications
Feature E20 SF1

General
LT: 210mm LT: 210mm
Effective Scanning Width
A4: 205mm A4: 204mm
Automatic Document
30 sheets 50 sheets ( 80g/m2)
Feeder
Manual Document Feeder No No
Fine mode (Tx/Rx) Yes/No Yes/No
Super Fine Mode (Tx/Rx) No/No No/No
Dual Access Yes Yes
Automatic Shift Down
Yes (33.6K) Yes (33.6K)
(Max)
Quick Dial 30 30
Speed Dial 50 50
Keystroke Program 30 30
Group Dial 5 5
Function Key 2 5
Printing
Smoothing Yes Yes
Multi-Sort Document
No No
Reception
No
Reverse Order Printing Yes (Output can be sorted with
face down printing)
Reception Time Printing No Yes
Centre Mark Yes Yes
Scanning
Contrast Control No No
Stamp No No
Automatic Document
No No
Width Detection
Storing Double Sided
No No
Documents
Communication
Busy Tone Detection Yes Yes
SF1
Feature E20 SF1

Shortened
No/Yes No/Yes
Preamble/Protocol
Line
Voice Request No No
On Hook Dial Yes Yes
Pulse/Tone Selection Yes Yes
AI Redial Yes Yes
Automatic FAX/TEL
Yes Yes
Change
Reception Mode
No No
Switchover (Remote)
Answering Machine
Yes Yes
Interface
Reception Mode Switching
No No
Timer
Transmission
Send Later Yes Yes
Closed Network
Yes Yes
(Transmission)
Confidential
No/No Yes/Yes
Transmission/With ID
Transfer Request No No
Polling Transmission (ID) No/No No/No
Serial Broadcasting
Yes Yes
(Immediate)
Serial Broadcasting (Later) Yes Yes
Economy Transmission No No
Quick (Parallel) Memory
Yes Yes
Transmission
Vertical Blackline
No Yes
Correction
SF1
Feature E20 SF1

Transmission Options
Batch Transmission Yes Yes
Page Retransmission Yes Yes
Forwarding Yes Yes
Label Insertion Yes Yes
Page Count Yes Yes
Own Name /Fax Number
Yes Yes
(RTI/CSI)
Transmission Reserve No No
Computer Form
No No
Transmission
Backup Transmission No No
Programmable Cover Sheet No No
Reception
Closed Network
Yes Yes
(Reception)
Confidential Reception
Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
(Without ID/with ID)
Polling Reception
Yes/No Yes/Yes
(without ID /with ID)
Poll Later No Yes
Multi-polling Reception No Yes
Authorised Reception Yes Yes
Continuous Polling No Yes
Reception Options
Multiple Reception No No
Chequered Mark No Yes
Specified Cassette Selection Yes (With PFU) Yes (With PFU)
2 in 1 (Two in One) No No
Power Saving Timer Yes Yes
Memory Lock Yes Yes
Memory Lock By
Yes Yes
Destination Address
Automatic Reduction (RX) No No
TSI Printing Yes Yes
SF1
Feature E20 SF1

Input
Direct FAX Number Entry Yes Yes
Personal Code/Program
30/Yes 30/Yes
Label
ID Code Programming No No
Label Registration for
Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
Quick/Speed Dial
Restricted Access Yes Yes
Auto Document No Yes
Wild Cards Yes Yes
Number Entering before
Yes Yes
Document Loading
Operation
Telephone Directory Yes Yes
User Function Key 2 5
Copy Mode (Multi-copy
Yes/99 Yes/99
Mode)
LCD Prompt 20 x 2 Lines 22 x 2 Lines
Remaining Memory
Yes Yes
Indication
Time Indicator (Clock Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
Adjustment)
Polling From Memory No No
Feature Available with
Yes No
Memory Card
Summer Time
Yes Yes
(Day Light Saving Time)
Help On Demand Yes Yes
Memory TX Stop Function Yes Yes
Stop Key
Auto Start Initial Set-up Yes Yes
Blank Document Detection Yes Yes
Report
Transmission Confirmation
Yes Yes
Report
Transmission Result Report Yes Yes
Communication Failure
Yes Yes
Report
Error Report Yes Yes
Memory Storage Report Yes Yes
Memory Transmission
No Yes
Result Report
File List Yes Yes
Confidential Reception
Yes Yes
Report
SF1
Feature E20 SF1

Personal Code List Yes Yes
Quick Dial List Yes Yes
Speed Dial List Yes Yes
Program List Yes Yes
Group Dial List Yes Yes
User Function List Yes Yes
User Parameter List Yes Yes
Specified Cassette Selection
Opt. (With PFU) Opt. (With PFU)
List
Printing Quick Dial Labels Yes Yes
Service
Counter (Tx, Rx, SCN, PLT) Yes Yes
Memory File Transfer Yes Yes
Dry Line (Back to Back) No No
Automatic Service Call Yes Yes
System Reset Yes
Yes
#+* 10 sec
Protocol Dump Yes Yes
User Data Transfer Yes Yes
PC Interface
RS232C Interface No No
Bi-Directional Parallel Opt. Opt.
10/100 Base-T No Yes (opt)
Option
Memory Card Option Yes (2MB) Yes (40MB)
Paper Feed Unit Opt. x 1 Opt. x 1
Bypass Feeder Opt. Opt.
ADF Maintenance Kit No Yes
Printer Interface Opt. Opt.
Mechanical Counter No Yes (Opt)
PC-Fax Interface Opt. No
Scanner Interface Opt. No
Dual Port No No
Additional G3 Port with
No No
JBIG
LAN Type Internet Fax No No
Dial- up Type Internet Fax No No
SF1
General Specifications of the Printer Controller
Model SF1
Optional: Ricoh original 32MB or 64MB or128MB
Max capacity: 144MB
Printer PCL5e
Description PCL6
Language Option: PostScript2 Compatible
Maximum Model SF1 15ppm (A4/Letter)
Continuous
Print Speed
300/600 dpi *1 600dpi 300dpi/600dpi
Network TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Protocol (NIC
option required)
RICOH Private MIB
Win Win WinNT
95/98 NT WorkStatio Server 4.0 Server 4.0 Server 4.0
/Me 3.51 n 4.0 TSE Enterprise
Edition
PCL5e Yes - Yes (SP6a Yes (SP6 or Yes (SP6a or -
or above) above) above)
PCL 6 Yes - Yes (SP6a Yes (SP6 or Yes (SP6a or -
or above) above) above)
Drivers Win2000 WinXP Mac8.x/
Professional 9.x/
and Home 10.x *2
Pro Server Server Advanced Datacenter Editions *3
Terminal Server Server
Svc
PCL5e Yes Yes Yes - - Yes -
PCL 6 Yes Yes Yes - - Yes -
PS2 Yes Yes - - - Yes Yes
(PPD)
*1: The support timing of 300dpi will be announced later.

*3: Common with DMR12/F/13/F.
SF1

14.Portuguese
For PostScript2
Norwegian 9. Danish
UNIX Install shell script
Support OS Not Supported
Utility Software SmartNetMonitor for Client / Admin (Win95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000)

Fonts Resident 45 PCL fonts (35 Intellifonts + 10 TrueType Fonts)
Download 1. Possible to download fonts by using PCLs or PJLs command.
2. Possible to download fonts to Mac by using Printer Utility for Mac.
The Network Interface Board is necessary for network printing.
Model NIB DPO3000E (Net Silicon DPI)

Topology Ethernet 100BASE-TX / 10BASE-T(auto detected)
Cables Requirement:
UTP/STP Cable
Frame Type Ethernet II, IEEE802.3, IEEE802.2, Ethernet SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, (Auto Switching)
Network Operating Systems Novell NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5.x
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me
Mac OS 8.x/9.x/10.x *1
Other functions for Standard Web Browser access to HTML
Maintenance Management Access Program (MAP) utility
Netware set-up (NWSETUP) utility
SF1
Driver Specifications
Operation System Remarks

PJL Basic format is based on HP LJ4000/5000. Extended
? specifications are based on Ricohs specification.
PCL5e Win95/98/Me/XP/ Resource: Software2000, development: Ricoh.
Driver WinNT4.0/2000 Equivalent to HP LJ4000/5000. Compatibility is in
conformity to HP LJ4000/5000.
PCL6 Win95/98/Me/XP/ Resource: Software2000, development: Ricoh. Equivalent to
Driver WinNT4.0/2000 HP LJ4000/5000. Protocol level is 2.0.
PS2 Win95/98/Me/XP/ Development: Destiny. Compatible with Adobe
Driver WinNT4.0/2000 PostScript Level 2.0.
PS PPD Mac OS Mac OS10.x Classic Mode is supported. Support of
8.x/9.x/10.x Mac OS10.x Native Mode TBC.
Memory Specifications
Basic specification of Additional Memory:
144Pin SDRAM-DIMM
PC100
CL (CAS Latency) = 2
Access time: 6ns
3.3Volt
Limitations and Remarks
Setting Originals:
Description: Cause: Action to be Taken:

If you set your originals The first few pages have Do not set your originals
roughly, regardless of the jammed or bent due to the way roughly. Please set the
thickness of paper, it might the paper has been placed. originals carefully.
cause a paper jam when the
paper is fed.
SF1
Paper Size:
Note: When the user chooses the paper size from the PCL Driver, please beware of the following:
Description: Action to be Taken:

Even though neither the optional Bank nor Bypass Tray If the user wants to choose Legal, 8.25 x
are installed, the user is given the option of choosing 13 or 8.5 x 13 paper, please install the
the paper size that only the optional Bank and Bypass optional Bank or Bypass Tray
Tray support:
Bank supports: Legal, 8.25 x 13 and 8.5 x 13 paper
size.
Bypass Tray supports: Legal, 8 x 13, 8.25 x 13,
8.5 x 13 and Custom paper size.
Note: When the machine is used as a printer option, 8.25 x 13 is not supported in the main
paper tray or the optional Bank.
SF1
IN THE BOX ACCESSORIES LIST
Area SF1
1. Tray for Document Feed Yes, attached to the machine
2. Toner Hopper Magazine Yes, attached to the machine
3. Photo Conductor Unit Yes, attached to the machine
4. Safety Information Sheet Yes
5. Branding & Product Name Plaque Yes
6. Paper Size Decal Yes
7. Power Cable Yes attached to the machine (2-pin plug)
Note:
A language kit must be ordered to receive the fo llowing parts:
3 types of decal (Operation Panel Sheet, Function Panel Sheet and One Touch Panel Sheet)
Operator Instructions Basic Features (Booklet)
Operator Instructions Advanced Features (CD-ROM)
ROM
The mainframe can accept 5 languages at one time. Languages in the optional ROMs may be
downloaded into the IC card and set by a service representative.
Standard ROM Option ROM 1-1 Option ROM 1-2 Option ROM 2
English English English English
German Danish Spanish Polish
French Swedish Portuguese Hungarian
Dutch Norwegian Czech
Italian Finnish
SF1
Mechanical noise level (Power level)
Sound power level E20 (Actual) SF1 (Target)

Stand-by (Mainframe only) 32.4dB 38.1dB
During Printing 61.9dB 60.8dB
Sound pressure level E20 (Actual) SF1 (Target)

During Printing 53.6dB 57.6dB
Ozone emission level
E20 (Actual) SF1 (Target)

Maximum Less than 0.0057mg/m3 Less than 0.02mg/m3
Dust level

Maximum 0.15mg/m3 0.15mg/m3
Styrene emission level

Maximum 0.0034mg/m3 0.0006mg/m3
Average power consumption

Energy Saver mode 2W and lower 1.5W and lower
Standby mode 25W and lower 15W and lower
Transmission 42W and lower 25W and lower
Reception 280W and lower 400W and lower
Copying 370W and lower 400W and lower
Maximum 770W and lower 1000W and lower
Environmental regulation

BAM No Yes
Energy Star Yes Yes
SF1
Supplies: Ordering Code: Yield*
Toner THM1BLK Average 5,000 sheets

Photo Conductor Unit DMU24 Average 45,000 sheets
* Yield based on ITU-T Test Chart #1 (approx 3.3%) in standard mode.
Target User Classification and Reliability
SF1 Remarks
Machine Life 5yrs, 120K sheets scanned or
300K sheets printed, whichever
comes first
AMV Scan: 1,000 sheets
Print: 1,000 sheets
MMV Scan: 2,000 sheets
Print: 5,000 sheets
PM Cycle 90K sheets User needs to change PCU at
45K sheets
history.
Average Monthly Volume (AMV): is the expected Average Monthly Volume (print/copy/fax) for
target customer.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV): is the recommended Maximum Monthly Volume for target
customer.
Machine Life (ML): is the total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes or 5 years, whichever comes
first.
Duty Cycle: is the maximum occasional peak volume to keep machine reliability (target MCBC
remains unchanged).
Recommendation: It is recommended that machines be placed to handle

MMV and not Duty Cycle.
SF1
WHAT FITS WHAT
Machine: Nashuatec Rex Rotary Gestetner
SF1 FP103 F6103 F9103
Peripherals:
FPF300 100-sheet bypass, Type 300
FME40MB300 Feature Expander, Type 300, 40MB
DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144 pin) Type B
(See Distributor Whiteboard for Memory Specifications)
DIF1013PV2 Printer Controller, Type 1013 Version 2
DIF1018PS PostScript 2, Type 1018 (Emulation)
DIF1018E Printer Ethernet NIB, Type 1018
PS480 Paper Bank (1 tray x 500 sheets)
DMR13SFPCABX Small Low Flat Pack Cabinet (use with PS480)
DMR13HFPCABX High Flat Pack Cabinet (use with no paper bank)
DMK300 ADF Maintenance Kit Type 300
Supplies:
FTHM1BLK Hopper Toner Cartridge

DMU24 PCU, Type 1013
Language Sets:
Language: Fax: Printer:
English DDKSF1GB DDK1013PV2GB

French DDKSF1F DDK1013PV2F
German DDKSF1D DDK1013PV2D
Italian DDKSF1I DDK1013PV2I
Portuguese DDKSF1P DDK1013PV2P
Norwegian DDKSF1N DDK1013PV2N
Swedish DDKSF1S DDK1013PV2S
Czech DDKSF1CZ DDK1013PV2CZ
Polish DDKSF1PL DDK1013PV2PL
Hungarian DDKSF1H DDK1013PV2H
Finnish DDKSF1SF DDK1013PV2SF
SF1
NRG CANON BROTHER PANASONIC OKI

E20 SF1 L280 L350 FAX-8350P UF595 FAX4500
Sheet fed or flat bed Sheet fed Sheet fed Sheet fed Sheet fed Sheet fed Sheet fed Sheet fed
Paper size A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
Printing Speed 6ppm 15ppm 6ppm 6ppm 12ppm 5ppm 8ppm
Paper capacity (standard) 250 250 100 350 250 250 100 + 1
Optional paper capacity 500 PFU + 100 500 PFU + 100 - - 250 250 -
Bypass Bypass
Fax Specifications:
Scanning resolution 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 / 15.4 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 / 15.4 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 / 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 / 15.4 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 / 15.4 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 / 15.4 300 x 300dpi
l/mm l/mm 15.4 l/mm l/mm l/mm l/mm
Scanning speed A4 sheet 2.8 2.8 6.5 5 TBC TBC 6
Transmission speed (sec.) 3 3 3 3 6 3 6
Modem speed 33.6Kbps 33.6Kbps 33.6Kbps 33.6Kbps 14.4Kbps 33.6Kbps 14.4Kbps
Compression method MH / MR / MMR MH / MR / MMR / MH / MR / MMR MH / MR / MMR MH / MR / MMR MH / MR / MMR MH / MR / MMR
JBIG
Memory capacity 1MB 3MB 448 pages 160 pages 2MB 1MB 1MB
(80 pages) (240 pages) (130 pages) (60 pages) (80 pages)
ADF 30 pages, face 50 pages, face down 20 pages 30 pages 30 pages 30 pages 20 pages
down
Quick / Speed / Group dials 30 / 50 / 3 30 / 50 / 5 24 / 100 32 / 100 / 131 32 / 100 / 6 28 / 72 / 4 10 / 70 / 5
Copy Specifications:
Multicopy Up to 99 Up to 99 Up to 99 99 99 99 50
Copy resolution 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 l/mm 8 x 3.85 / 7.7 l/mm 400 x 300dpi 600 x 600dpi 300 x 600dpi 406 x 391dpi 300dpi
Supplies:
All-in-one or separate AIO Toner and PCU AIO AIO Toner and drum AIO Toner and drum
Print interface Opt Opt Std Std No Opt No
Print resolution 600 x 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi - 600dpi -
O/S Windows 95 / 98 / Windows 95 / 98 / Windows 95 / 98 / Windows 95 / 98 / - Windows 95 / 98 / -
NT / 2000 Me / NT / 2000 NT4 NT4 NT4
Interface Bi-directional Bi-directional Parallel / USB Bi-directional - TBC -
Parallel Parallel / NIC Parallel
PC-Fax interface Opt No No No No Opt -
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
SF2
Laser Plain Paper Fax
Nashuatec F104
Rex Rotary F104
Gestetner F104
Launch Country
Month of Origin
April 2003 China

Version 1.1
May, 2003
SF2
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Market Overview 3
Competitor Overview 5
Product Overview 7
Product Specifications - Fax 14
Product Specifications Printer 25
Product Specifications NIC Fax Option 39
What Fits What 46

K:\Customer\Technic\NPSDOC\New Pending Approval\SF2.doc 1

SF2
INTRODUCTION
The SF2 has been developed in order to meet customer demand for versatile, highly
productive faxes. Customers in this segment of the market require more than just
basic fax functions at the lowest possible price. Faxes in this segment are used as
back-up printers, for digital fax distribution and for Internet faxing.
The SF2 features many of the functions that have become commonplace in the market
today, such as a Super G3 modem, a large standard memory (7MB) and a high paper
capacity. In addition, the SF2 has internet faxing, colour scan-to-email and a
QWERTY keypad.
1. Increase NRG fax sales overall, by improving NRGs portfolio of fax products
2. Capture supplies revenue through the Printer function and network
connectivity
3. Capture more of a customers total document volume through scan-to-email
and colour scan functionality
4. Replace the E40, by offering a higher specification machine at a similar price

SF2
MARKET OVERVIEW
Overall, the fax market in Europe is in decline, with Infosource forecasting a
Compound Aggregate Growth Rate (CAGR) of - 8.2%.
5,000,000
4,500,000
- 5.3%
- 6.9%
4,000,000 - 6.2%
3,500,000
3,000,000
2,500,000
T otal
2,000,000
1,500,000
1,000,000
500,000
0
2001 2002 2003 2004
T otal 4,513,654 4,276,220 3,982,588 3,656,699
Despite this downward trend, the market is still extremely large with over 3.5 million
sales forecast each year until 2004. The popularity continues, in spite of the growth
of email, due to certain key factors:
Easy and reliable communication tool

Signatures are still required on documents
Confidentiality and security against computer hackers and network
problems
Confirmation of arrival at recipient can be guaranteed on a fax
No problem with file sizes or file formats

SF2
High Volume Segment:
High Volume faxes continue to come under pressure from Segment 1

copiers
Few new models in this segment
Push on adding value to basic fax
o Colour
o Scan-to-email
o ISDN
o Network printing
o Internet fax (T.38 Protocol)
Price sensitivity becoming greater but not a major issue.

SF2
COMPETITOR OVERVIEW
The SF2 is targeted at the high volume segment of the fax market. As can be seen in
the tables below, within this segment the SF2 has many key advantages including the
number of speed dial buttons, scan-to-email and print speed:
Model Name SF2 L1000 UF-895 UF-885 Okifax5980

Brand NRG Canon Panasonic Panasonic OKI
Launch April 2003 April 2000 July 1999 July 1999 2002
Coding System MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/
JBIG JBIG JBIG JBIG JBIG
Multiport G3 (Std.) / Super G3 G3 G3 G3
Operation G3 x 2
Modem Speed 33.6kbps 33.6kbps 33.6kbps 33.6kbps 33.6kbps
Max. document A4 A4 B4 B4 A4
Size
Receipt Size A4/Letter A4 A4 A4 A4
Transmission 2 sec. 3 sec. X Approx 3 sec. X Approx 3 sec. X 2.5 sec. X
Speed
Scanning BW: 1.3 sec. 1.3 sec. 1 sec. O 2.8 sec. X 1.5 sec. X
Speed Colour: 3.9
sec.
Print Speed 15ppm 16ppm O 10ppm X 10ppm X 10ppm X
Scan 600 x 600dpi 400 x 400dpi X 400 x 400dpi X 400 x 400dpi X 300 x 300dpi X
Resolution
Print 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi
Resolution
Paper Capacity 750 sheets 600 sheets X 500 sheets X 500 sheets X 250 sheets X
Max. Paper 1,350 sheets 1,100 sheets X 1,250 sheets X 1,250 sheets X 750 sheets X
Capacity
ADF 70 sheets 50 sheets X 50 sheets X 50 sheets X 50 sheets X
Memory 7MB 3MB X 120 pages X 60 pages X 4.5MB X
Capacity (Std.) (560 pages) (192 pages)
Max. Memory 40MB 11MB X 640 pages X 640 pages X 12.5MB X
Capacity (2,200 pages) (704 pages)
(Option)
Quick Dial 90 72 X 40 X 40 X 80 X
Speed Dial 200 128 X 160 X 160 X 150 X
Internet Fax Option No No No Option
(LAN)
Network PCL5e/6 (Option) GDI (Option) GDI (Option) Yes
Printer Unit (Option)
Note: X means SF2 specifications higher than competition. O means competition has higher specifications than SF2.

SF2
Model Name SF2 DX-2000 DX-1000 MFC-9880

Brand NRG Panasonic Panasonic Brother
Launch April 2003 1999 July 1999 February 2002
Coding MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR/ MH/MR/MMR X MH/MR/MMR/
System JBIG JBIG JBIG
Multiport G3 (Std.) / Super G3 G3 Super G3
Operation G3 x 2
Modem Speed 33.6kbps 33.6kbps 14.4kbps X 33.6kbps
Max. A4 B4 O B4 O A4
Document
Size
Receipt/Max. A4/Letter A4 A4 A4
Scanning Size
Transmission 2 sec. 3 sec. X 6 sec. X 2 sec.
Speed
Scanning BW: 1.3 sec. 1 sec. O 2.8 sec. X 2.8 sec. X
Speed Colour: 3.9 sec.
Print Speed 15ppm 10ppm X 10ppm X 14ppm X
Scan 600 x 600dpi 400 x 400dpi X 400 x 400dpi X 600 x 2,400dpi O
Resolution
Print 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi 400 x 400dpi X 600 x 600dpi
Resolution
Paper Capacity 750 sheets 500 sheets X 250 sheets X 250 sheets X
Max. Paper 1,350 sheets 1,250 sheets X 500 sheets X 500 sheets X
Capacity
ADF 70 sheets 50 sheets X 50 sheets X 50 sheets X
Memory 7MB 120 pages X 350 pages X 8MB O
Capacity (Std.) (560 pages)
Max. Memory 40MB 640 pages X 32MB X
Capacity (2,200 pages)
(Option)
Quick Dial 90 40 X 40 X 32 X
Speed Dial 200 160 X 160 X 100 X
Internet Fax Option Yes Yes Option
(LAN)
Network PCL5e/6 GDI (Std.) GDI (Std.) GDI/PCL5e
Printer Unit (Option)
Note: X means SF2 specifications higher than competition. O means competition has higher
specifications than SF2.

SF2
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
SF2:
New Status Indicator
100 sheets Bypass Tray (Standard)
Rear view:
250 sheets Paper Tray
Printer Controller
Internet Fax
Power Switch
Additional G3

SF2
Operation Panel:
10 User Function Keys

Each of these keys can be programmed with a 22 x 2 Line LCD
frequently used feature With backlight display
Quick Dial (30 x 3) & Colour Scan Key* High Resolution Scan
200 Speed Dial Key
* Colour Scan Key: This is only used when the optional NIC fax unit is installed.
High Resolution Scan Key:
This key is used to choose the level of detail (Standard, Detail, 300dpi *, Super Fine
and Extra Super Fine **) when scanning.
* 300dpi is only for scanning

** If you select Extra Super Fine for copying or fax reception, the optional 40MB
memory card is required.
User Function Keys:
The following functions are assigned as default:
Basic Model:
F1: Print Journal
F3: Group Dial
Basic Model with the Optional NIC Fax Unit:

F1: Print Journal
F3: Group Dial
F4: Email Message
F5: Internet Fax
F9: JPEG
F10: Scan-to-email

SF2
Basic Model with the Optional Printer:
F1: Print Journal

F3: Group Dial
F4: Email Message *1
F5: Internet Fax *1
F6: Printer
F7: On line
F8: Job Reset
F9: JPEG *1
F10: Scan-to-email *1
*1: This function is only available with the optional NIC Fax Unit installed.
Main Features:
High
Productivity
Network User
Friendly Friendly
Environmentally
Friendly

SF2
High Productivity:
Heavy Duty: Max. 5,000 sheets Scanning & Printing per month
Life: 300K or 5 years, whichever comes earlier
Duty (Max. Print Volume / Month) 15K with the condition of a PM
Cycle of 60K
SF2
Scanning: Average 1,500 sheets
Maximum 5,000 sheets
Printing: Average 1,500 sheets
Maximum 5,000 sheets
Max. 600dpi Fax, Printing and Scanning resolution

Resolution setting includes:
o Standard (200 x 100dpi)
o Detail (200 x 200dpi)
o 300dpi (300 x 300dpi) **
o Super Fine (400 x 400dpi)
o Extra Super Fine (600 x 600dpi) *
* To realize a 600dpi copy and reception, the fax must be installed with the
optional 40MB memory card
** 300dpi is only for scanning
Colour Scanning:
By simply selecting the scan-to-email user function key on the operation panel, the
user is able to send colour documents (or mono) as an email message, with an
attached file. To use this feature, the customer must have purchased both the NIC
card and the optional colour scan unit.
Duplex Printing:
The SF2 is the first fax in the world that comes with duplex printing as standard. It is
now possible to copy, print and receive faxes in duplex.
7MB Standard SAF Memory:
The standard 7MB SAF memory can store up to 560 pages (A4/Letter). This can be
upgraded to 40MB, which increases the memory capacity to 2,200 A4/Letter pages,
assuring maximum data integrity and smooth, uninterrupted communications.
Max. 1,350 Paper Capacity:
Standard: 350 sheets

Paper Feed Unit: 500 sheets (Max. 2 units can be attached)

SF2
Selectable File Format:
The SF2s colour scanner function allows users to choose the file format of the email
attachment. PDF * or JPEG is selectable through the user function key.
* PDF file format is the default setting.
1.3 sec. Scanning Speed / 30-sheets Scan Per Minute:
The fast 1.3 sec. scanning speed capability enables the user to remove the original
from the machine almost immediately. This means that there is no more time wasted
waiting for jobs at the fax machine.
Port Multiplex Capacity:
The SF2 has an optional additional G3 port. This means that the fax can use one port
for transmission and the other for reception.
70-sheet ADF:
Allows up to 70 x A4-sized pages to be stacked / scanned during a fax or copy job.
Printer Capability:
The optional printer controller can provide top quality output with its PCL5e/PCL6
capability, which is common to the SF1 and DMR12/F/13/F (please note that the EDP
code for this item has recently been changed).
Design:
The SF2 has a very similar design to the SF1. However, the SF2 has a larger
operation panel, which allows users to find the feature they require faster, saving time
on operation. There is also a new Status Indicator to help users to check the status of
their fax clearly, from a distance.
Status Indicator

SF2
Network Friendly:
Built-in LAN-Fax Driver:
In a similar way to the E40, the SF2 has a built-in LAN-Fax Driver, which allows
users to send faxes from their PC without installing any fax applications onto the
client PC.
Web Status Monitor:
By using a web browser on any PC connected to the network, users can check the
status of their fax transmission and transmission reports, register Quick/Speed Dial
numbers and make changes to machine settings.
IP-Fax (Real-time Internet Fax: ITU-T Rec.38):
With the IP-Fax feature, users can send or receive faxes through fax machines directly
connected to the same network using the TCP/IP protocol. This works through the
use of the IP address instead of the fax number to specify the destination machine, or
the use of the alias number when using a gatekeeper. The IP-Fax function, supported
by the NIC Fax, is compliant to ITU-T Rec. T. 38.
User Friendly:
Quick Dial / Speed Dial / Group Dial:
Users can register 90 Quick Dial and 200 Speed Dials as most frequently used fax
numbers, email addresses or IP addresses. For destinations that are regularly
broadcast to, users can combine these into up to 9 Groups. In addition, if users
specify several destinations for the same message, it can be broadcast to up to 250
destinations (per Group).
Overview:
Quick Dials: 90 destinations

Speed Dials: 200 destinations
Programmable number of destinations with Number Keys: 100 destinations
Group Dials: 9 Groups

Max. destinations per Group: 250 destinations
Max. destinations in all Groups: 390 destinations
Broadcasting: 250 destinations, of which 100 destinations can be programmed with

Number Keys.
10 User Function Keys:
10 User Function Keys allow users to operate this fax machine very easily.

SF2
Energy Save Mode:
Energy Save Mode starts automatically after 5 minutes of non-operation, reducing

electricity consumption to 1.5W or less.
Recycling Information:
Recyclable parts are identified with an indicator.

SF2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS FAX

Model: E40: SF2: Remarks:

Input Document Size Max. 218mm Max. 216mm
Effective Scanning Width Max. 210mm Max. 215mm
Printing Method Laser Laser
Printing Speed 10ppm / A4 15ppm / A4
Super Smoothing Yes Yes
Halftone 64 Level 64 Level
Maximum Printing Size A4 A4
Paper Capacity (Standard) 250 sheets 350 sheets
Paper Capacity (Option) 500 + 100 500 + 500
Manual Feeder N/A N/A
Power Supply 220-240V, 50/60Hz AC220-240V, 50/60
3Hz (EU/Asia)
Power Consumption Max. Less than 650W Max. Less than 1,000W
Standby: Less than 2W Energy Saver: Less than
2W
Weight 13kg 23kg
Fax Specifications:

Scanning Resolution 8 x 3.85/7.7/15.4 l/mm 8 x 3.85/7.7/15.4,
203 x 98/196/391 lpi 16 x 15.4, 24 x 23/1 l/mm
200 x 100, 200 x 200, 400 x
400, 600 x 600dpi
Scanning Speed 2 sec. 1.3 sec. 200 x 100dpi
Transmission Speed 3 sec. 2 sec.
Data Transmission Speed Max. 33.6kbps Max. 33.6kbps
Compression Method MH/MR/MMR/JBIG MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Compatibility G3, G4 (Option) G3 (Max. G3 x 2)
Memory Capacity 2MB (160 pages) 7MB (560 pages) Option: 40MB
ADF 50 sheets / A4 70 sheets / A4 69g/m2, 75g/m2,
80g/m2 paper are
supported
Quick Dial 30 90
Speed Dial 100 200
Dual Access Yes Yes
Memory Backup 1 hour 12 hours
Function Keys 4 10

SF2
Copier Specifications:

Copy Resolution 8 x 7.7/15.4 l/mm 200 x 100, 200, 400, 600dpi 600dpi requires
optional 40MB
memory card
Enlargement/Reduction N/A N/A
Zoom N/A N/A
Warm-up Time 1. Less than 11 sec. 1. Less than 11 sec. 1. 25C
2. Less than 15 sec. 2. Less than 15 sec. 2. 10C
Copy Speed 10cpm 15cpm

Paper Size A4/LT/LG/F4 See table in PIG
Printing Resolution 200dpi / 400 dpi 600dpi
Printing Speed 6ppm 15ppm
Interface 10/100BaseT Bi-directional Parallel
Ethernet
10BaseT/100BaseTX
O/S Windows 95/98/Me Windows 95/98/Me/NT
4.0/2000/XP
Printer Language (Fax Driver) PCL5e/6, PS2 compatible
Internet Fax Specification:

Applicable Circuit LAN Ethernet LAN Ethernet
100BaseTX/10BaseT 100BaseTX/10BaseT
Coupling 100BaseTX/10BaseT 100BaseTX/10BaseT direct
direct connection connection
Resolution Standard: 200 x 200dpi Standard: 200 x 200dpi
(Internet Fax) Detail: 200 x 200dpi Detail: 200 x 200dpi
Resolution (IP-Fax) N/A Standard: 200 x 100dpi
Detail: 200 x 200dpi
Super Fine: 400 x 400dpi
Extra Super Fine: 600 x
600dpi
Resolution N/A Standard: 200 x 100dpi
(Scan-to-email: B/W) Detail: 200 x 200dpi
300dpi: 300 x 300dpi
600dpi

SF2

Resolution N/A Standard: 100 x 100dpi
(Scan-to-email: Colour) Detail: 200 x 200dpi
300dpi: 300 x 300dpi
600dpi
Email File Format Single/Multi part MIME Single/Multi part MIME
(Internet Fax) conversion. conversion.
Attached file format TIFF- Attached file format TIFF-
F (MH) F (MH)
Email File Format (Scan- N/A Attached file format PDF, PDF is default
to-email: B/W) TIFF-F (MH) setting
Email File Format N/A Attached file format PDF, PDF is default
(Scan-to-email: Colour) JPEG setting
Transmission Speed 10Mbps/100Mbps 10Mbps/100Mbps
Document Size A4 A4
LAN-Fax Driver Yes Yes
NIC Fax Monitor Yes No
Web Status Monitor No Yes
IC Viewer Yes No
POP before SMTP No Yes
Authentication
SMTP Authentication No Yes
SMTP Transmission Yes Yes
POP3 Reception Yes Yes
SMTP Reception Yes Yes
IMAP 4 Reception No Yes
Colour scan-to-email No Yes
Scan-to-email at No Yes
300/400/600dpi
Confirming Reception Yes Yes
(MDN)
Insert Subject Yes Yes
Insert Message No Yes Max. 150
characters,
including the
subject
Selectable File Format No Yes
Add Viewer Information Yes Yes
LAN-Fax Cover Sheet No Yes
Editor *
Date/Time File Name No Yes
IP Fax (Real-time I-fax) No Yes
DHCP No Yes

SF2
Options: (S = Service Installation, U = User Installation)

Paper Feeder Unit Paper Feeder Unit (U) When a second
PFU is required,
a Service
Installation must
be used.
Bypass Feeder Unit Bypass Tray (S)
2MB, 4MB Expansion card Additional G3 Unit (S)
Mechanical Counter NIC Fax Unit (for Internet
Fax & Network Options)
(S)
NIC Fax Kit JPEG Unit (Colour Unit)
(S)
Dial-up Internet Fax Unit Printer Unit (S)
(only for S4)
ADF Maintenance Kit (U)
* The LAN-Fax Cover Sheet Editor Function will only be supported by

machines released after May 2003 production
Extended Features:
General:

Automatic Document Feeder 50 sheets 70 sheets 69g/m2, 75g/m2, 80g/m2 paper are
supported
Manual document Feeder No No
Fine Mode (Tx/Rx) Yes/No Yes/Yes
Super Fine Mode (Tx/Rx) No/No Yes/Yes
Extra Super Fine Mode No/No Yes/Yes * * Rx requires 40MB memory
(Tx/Rx) card
Dual Access Yes Yes
Automatic Shift Down (Max) Yes (33.6K) Yes (33.6K)
Quick Dial 30 90
Speed Dial 100 200
Programmable number of 67 100
destinations with Number
Keys
Keystroke Program 30 90
Group Dial 7 9
Function Keys 4 10

SF2
Printing:

Smoothing Yes Yes
Multi-sort Document Yes No
Reception
Reverse Order Printing Yes No Output can be sorted with face-
down printing
Reception Time Printing Yes Yes
Centre Mark Yes Yes
Scanning:

Contrast Control Yes Yes
Stamp Yes Yes
Automatic Document Width No No
Detection
Storing Double-sided No Yes
Documents
Communication:

Busy Tone Detection Yes Yes
Shortened Preamble/Protocol No/Yes No/Yes
Transfer Transmission No Yes
(Transfer/Request)

SF2
Line:

Voice Request No No
On-hook Dial Yes Yes
Pulse/Tone Selection Yes (dependent Yes (dependent
on country) on country
A1 Redial Yes Yes
Automatic Fax/Tel Change Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
Reception Mode Switchover No No
(Remote)
Answering Machine Interface No No
Reception Mode Switching No No
Timer
Transmission:

Send Later Yes Yes
Closed Network Yes Yes
(Transmission)
Confidential Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
Transmission/With ID
Transfer Request Yes Yes
Polling Transmission (ID) Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
Serial Broadcasting Yes Yes Max. 250 destinations
(Immediate)
Serial Broadcasting (Later) Yes Yes Max. 250 destinations
Economy Transmission Yes Yes
Quick (Parallel) Memory Yes Yes
Transmission
Vertical Blackline Correction No Yes

SF2
Transmission Options:

Batch Transmission Yes Yes Max. 50 files can be stored
Page Retransmission Yes Yes
Forwarding Yes Yes
Label Insertion Yes Yes
Page Count Yes Yes
Own Name/Fax Number Yes Yes
(RTI/CSI)
Transmission Reserve Yes Yes
(Max. 1,200mm) (Max. 1,200mm)
Computer Form Transmission No No
Backup Transmission Yes Yes
Programmable Cover Sheet No Yes
Reception:

Closed Network (Reception) Yes Yes
Confidential Reception Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
(Without ID/With ID)
Polling Reception Yes/Yes Yes/Yes Up to 250 locations
(Without ID/With ID)
Poll Later Yes Yes
Multi-polling Reception Yes Yes
Authorized Reception Yes Yes
Continuous Polling Yes Yes
Reception Option:

Multiple Reception Yes Yes
Chequered Mark Yes Yes
Specified Cassette Selection Option Option
(With PFU) (With PFU)
2 in 1 (Two in One) Yes Yes
Power Saving Timer Yes Yes
Memory Lock Yes Yes
Memory Lock by Destination Yes Yes
Address
Automatic Reduction (RX) No No
TSI Printing Yes Yes

SF2
Input:

Direct Fax Number Entry Yes Yes
Personal Code/Program Label 30/Yes 150/Yes
ID Code Programming Yes Yes
Label Registration for Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
Quick/Speed Dial
Restricted Access Yes Yes
Auto Document Yes Yes
Wild Cards Yes Yes
Number Entering before Yes Yes
Document Loading
Operation:

Telephone directory Yes Yes
User Function Keys 4 10
Copy Mode (Multi-copy Yes/99 Yes/99
Mode)
LCD Prompt 20 x 2 lines 22 x 2 lines
Remaining Memory Yes Yes
Indication
Timer Indicator (Clock Yes/Yes Yes/Yes
Adjustment)
Polling from Memory Yes Yes
Summer Time (Daylight Yes Yes
Saving Time)
Help on Demand Yes Yes
Memory TX Stop Function Yes Yes Stop Key
Auto Start Initial Set-up Yes Yes
Blank Document Detection Yes Yes

SF2
Report:

Transmission Confirmation Yes Yes
Report
Transmission Result Report Yes Yes
Communication Failure Yes Yes
Report
Error Report Yes Yes
Memory Storage Report Yes Yes
Memory Transmission Result Yes Yes
Report
File List Yes Yes
Confidential Reception Yes Yes
Report
Personal Code List Yes Yes
Quick Dial List Yes Yes
Speed Dial List Yes Yes
Program List Yes Yes
Group Dial List Yes Yes
User Function List Yes Yes
User Parameter List Yes Yes
Specified Cassette Selection Option (With Option (With
List PFU) PFU)
Printing Quick Dial Labels Yes Yes
Service:

Counter (Tx, Rx, SCN, PLT) Yes Yes
Memory File Transfer Yes Yes
Dry Line (Back-to-Back) No No
Automatic Service Call Yes Yes
System Reset Yes Yes * + # 10 sec.
Protocol Dump Yes Yes
User Data Transfer Yes Yes

SF2
Configuration:
Bypass Tray ADF Maintenance Kit
40MB Memory Card
Printer Unit
Colour Unit (JPEG Unit)
NIC Fax Unit
G3 (Additional) Mainframe
Std. Paper Tray
PFU
PFU
Optional Items: Compatibility:

ADF Maintenance Kit Common with SF1
Printer Unit Common with SF1
PFU Common with SF1
NIC Fax Unit
G3 (Additional)
40MB Memory Card
Notes:
1. Standard Paper Tray is dedicated to A4/Letter size

2. Paper Feed Unit is dedicated to A4/Letter/Legal size
3. B/W scan-to-email is available with the optional NIC Unit installed. The
optional Colour Unit (JPEG Unit) is required for colour scan-to-email
4. The optional NIC Unit has to be installed for the colour scan option to
function
5. The Printer Unit consists of: Printer Controller, PostScript 2 Compatible and
Network Interface Board
6. Users can attach 2 x 500-sheet Paper Feed Units
7. The NIC Unit and additional G3 Unit can be used together
Limitation: The SF2 can have a maximum of 2 x G3 Units. One is standard the
other is optional.

SF2
Options:
The following options are available for the SF2:
2 x 500-sheet Paper Feed Units * (Common with SF1 and DMR12/13

series)
40MB Memory Card
Printer Controller (Common with SF1 and DMR12/13 series)
Network Interface Board (Common with SF1 and DMR12/13/15/18 series)
PostScript 2 Compatible (Common with SF1 and DMR12/13/15/18 series)
32/64/128MB Memory for printer (Common with SF1 and
DMR12/13/15/18 series)
G3 Unit
NIC Fax Unit (B/W)
ADF Maintenance Kit (Common with SF1)
If a customer requires a second PFU, they must have it installed by a

Service Representative.
Supplies:
The SF2 uses the THM (Toner Hopper Magazine) and PCU (Photo Conductor Unit),
which are common with the SF1.
Toner Yield: Approx. 5,000 sheets

PCU Yield: Approx. 45,000 sheets
Test Conditions:
ITU-T Test Chart #1 (Approx. 3.3%) in standard mode

Memory transmission mode
Fax Header Print function is OFF
One transmission consists of 3 pages
Language Kit Configuration:
3 types of decals (Operation Panel Sheet, LCD Panel Sheet, Function Key
Panel Sheet)
Symbol sheet (Symbol in English is already attached to the mainframe.
Therefore, the Language Kit for English language does not contain this
sheet
Basic Manual
Advanced Manual (CD-ROM)

SF2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS PRINTER

System Structures:
IC card Slot for SDRAM 32/64/128MB (option)

program download
Printer Controller IEEE1284 I/F DIMM Slot
DIMM Slot 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 1 bit Serial

Video I/F Model S-F
PS2 Compatible NIB (option)

(option)
Printer Options:
Model SF2 Printer Options:

1 Printer Unit PCL5e, PCL6 Common with SF1 and
PS2 compatible (Option) DMR12/13 series
2 32/64/128MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM (144 Common with memory
pin) option for SF1,
PMR26/N, RC210 and
DMR15/18 series
3 PostScript 2 Compatible with Adobe Common with SF1 and
PS2 DMR12/13/15/18 series
4 NIB Ethernet card with RJ45 Common with SF1 and
port DMR12/13/15/18 series
Note: Memory option (#2) must be installed with Printer Unit (#1)

SF2
Printer Functions:
Collation is available when it is specified by the PCL or PS Driver. Collate is not

executed by the driver but by the RAM on the controller. The number of pages
available for collation depends on the combination of PDL and memory capacity. For
the memory available, please refer to the Memory Specifications.
Duplex Printing:
Duplex printing is available. Specifications:
The Bypass Tray is not supported

Jam Recovery for both sides of one sheet
When a paper size not suitable for Duplex is used, the document will be
printed in Simplex. After that Duplex will be cancelled and Simplex is
used.
Slip-Sheet:
This feature allows a slip-sheet after every page. Users can select the tray of both the
printing paper and the slip-sheet paper from the printer driver. Users can also select
print or not print to slip-sheet. When this feature is selected, Collation is
disabled. This feature is NOT available for Mac users.

SF2
Auto Continue:
With this feature set to On, printing continues automatically (after 10 seconds) even
if the following errors occur. However, the page where the error occurred may not be
printed out correctly.
Print Overrun
Memory Overflow
Memory Full
If Auto Continue is set to Off and the above errors occur, the controller will stop
printing and display an error message on the operation panel.
User Operation:

Press Job Reset Key Cancel Current Job
On - Continue to print current job
Page Protect:
On and Auto (default) are selectable for Page Protect. If the setting is On,
users can avoid Print Overrun error. However, the productivity may slow down.
Users are required to select On or Auto before sending the job.
Auto Tray Select:
This feature automatically searches for a tray that the paper size matches with the
designated ones in the following order:
Start Point Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Bypass Tray:
In order to print from the Bypass Tray, users need to select the Bypass Tray from the
printer driver.

SF2
Tray Locking:
When this feature is enabled, the following will occur:
a. The Locked tray is not searched when using Auto Tray Select from the
printer driver
b. Tray switch to the Locked Tray or switch from the Locked Tray to another one
is NOT available
c. The Bypass Tray cannot be specified as the Locked Tray. Tray 1, Tray 2 and
Tray 3 are available for use as the Locked Tray
d. Only one tray can be specified as the Locked Tray
Font Storage:
Although the SF2 does not have a HDD, font storage is available in RAM. These
fonts are stored temporarily and, once users turn off the power, reset or switch the
PDL from PCL to PS, the stored font will be erased.

SF2
General Specifications of the Printer Controller:
SF2
Optional: 32MB/64MB/128MB
Maximum Capacity: 144MB
Hard Disk Drive Not available
(HDD)
Language PCL6
Option: PostScript 2 Compatible
Maximum 15ppm (A4)
Continuous Print
Speed
300/600dpi 600dpi 300/600dpi
Option: Network Port (100BaseTX/10BaseT)
(NIB Option
required)
MIB Support MIB II, SNMP Printer MIB and Host Resource MIB (RFC1759) RICOH Private MIB
Operation Panel Mainframes Operation Panel is commonly used for printer functions
Drivers Windows NT
Win Win NT 3.51 Workstation Server 4.0 Server 4.0 Server 4.0
95/98/Me 4.0 TSE Enterprise
Edition
PCL5e Yes - Yes (SP6a Yes (SP6a Yes (SP6a -
or above) or above) or above)
PCL6 Yes - Yes (SP6a Yes (SP6a Yes (SP6a -
or above) or above) or above)
Windows 2000
Pro Server Server Terminal Advanced Datacenter Win XP Mac
Service Server Server Professional 8.x/9.x/
& Home
Edition 10.x *1
PCL5e Yes Yes Yes - - Yes -
PCL6 Yes Yes Yes - - Yes -
PS2 Yes Yes - - - Yes
Yes
(PPD)
Supported Driver 1. English, 2. German, 3. French, 4. Italian, 5. Spanish, 6. Dutch, 7. Swedish, 8. Norwegian,
Language 9. Danish, 10. Czech, 11. Hungarian, 12. Finnish, 13. Polish, 14. Portuguese
(Localization) For PostScript 2:
1. English, 2. German, 3. French, 4. Italian, 5. Spanish, 6. Dutch, 7. Swedish, 8. Norwegian

SF2
SF2
UNIX Install shell script
Support OS Not officially supported
Utility Software SmartNetMonitor for Client/Admin (Win 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP)
Font Resident 45 PCL fonts (35 Intellifonts + 10 TrueType Fonts)
80 PS Fonts (only available with PS option
Download 1. Possible to download fonts by using PCLs or PJLs command
2. Possible to download fonts to Mac by using Printer Utility for Mac
Network Interface Board:
The Network Interface Board is necessary for network printing.
Model NIB DPO3000E (NetSilicon DPI)

Topology Ethernet 100BaseTX.10BaseT (auto detected)
Cables Requirement: UTP/STP Cable
Frame Type Ethernet II, IEEE802.3, IEEE802.2,
Ethernet_SNAP
Protocol TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
Network Operating System Novell NetWare 3.x, 4.x, 5.x
Microsoft Windows 95/98/Me/XP
Mac OS 8.x/9.x/10.x *1
Other functions for Maintenance Standard Web Browser access to HTML
Management Access Program (MAP) utility
NetWare set-up (NWSETUP) utility
Note *1: Mac OS 10.x Classic Model is supported. The Mac OS 10.x Native
Mode is not officially supported.

SF2
Driver Specifications:
Operation System: Remarks:

PJL - Basic format is based on HP LJ4000/5000.
Extended specifications are based on Ricohs.
PCL5e Driver Win Resource: Software 2000, development Ricoh.
95/98/Me/XP/NT4.0/2000 Equivalent to HP LJ4000/5000 protocol.
PCL6 Driver Win Resource: Software 2000, development Ricoh.
95/98/Me/XP/NT4.0/2000 Equivalent to HP LJ4000/5000 protocol.
PS2 Driver Win Development: Destiny. Compatible with Adobe
95/98/Me/XP/NT4.0/2000 PostScript Level 2.0.
PS PPD Mac OS 8.x/9.x/10.x Mac OS 10.x Classical Mode is supported.
Mac OS 10.x Native Mode is not officially supported.
Memory Specification:
Basic specifications of additional memory:
144-pin SDRAM-DIMM
PC100
CL (CAS Latency) = 2
Access time: 6ns
3.3 Volt

SF2
Driver Functionality:
Major Driver Functionality is as follows:

(Yes = available, No = not available, ** = default setting)
Setting PCL5e/6 PS2 Selection Options: Remarks:

(Display Name): (Tab Name): (Tab Name):
User ID: Yes (Set-up) Yes (Set-up) Type 8 alphanumeric User ID is used to
(a-z, A-Z, 0-9) identify the user
characters associated with a job. It
can be monitored by
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin/Client to
identify the user in the
jobs history.
Layout: Yes (Set-up) Yes (Set-up) 1 page per sheet **
2 pages per sheet
4 pages per sheet
6 pages per sheet
9 pages per sheet
16 pages per sheet
Page Order: Yes (Set-up) No Right then Down ** Enabled only if Layout
Down then Right is set at more than 2
Left then Down pages per sheet
Down then Left
Custom Paper: Yes (Set-up) Yes (Set-up) Measurement Unit:
centimetres or inches
Paper Selection: Yes (Paper) Yes (Paper) Same paper for all pages
**
page
Resolution: Yes (Print Yes (Print PCL5e: 300/600dpi **
Quality) Quality) PS2: 300/600dpi **
selectable
Edge Smoothing: Yes (Print Yes (Print On ** When this function is
Quality) Quality) Off On, approximately
1200dpi appearance
Toner Saver: Yes (Print Yes (Print Off **
Quality) Quality) On
Page Protect: Yes (Print Yes (Print Auto ** Refer to Page Protect
Quality) Quality) On section for details
Watermark: Yes Yes (None) ** Driver has 5 built-in
(Watermarks) (Watermarks) CONFIDENTAIL, etc. watermarks. Users can
create others.
User Code: Yes Yes Display up to 8 numeric This is used for account
(Statistics) (Statistics) characters management of the user
or the group (as a
guideline). It can be
monitored by
SmartNetMonitor for
Admin to refer to the

SF2
Image of PCL6 Printer Driver (Set-up Screen):
Image of PS2 Printer Driver (Set-up Screen):

SF2
Printer Related Features NOT Available for SF2:
Proof Print
Form Overlay
Macro Storage
Secured Printing
Form Feed
This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh
clients. This utility, that supports Adobe PostScript 3, was originally bundled with
the controller options of MFPs and LPs and is installed into Apple Macintosh Clients
connected to the MFPs and LPs through EtherTalk network. By using this software,
Macintosh customers can download PS fonts/files to a printers memory and change
Printer Name/Zone etc.
Note: Mac is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc. in several countries. When

this utility name is used in leaflets, catalogues or other materials, the following
description must be added: Mac is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
Menu Structure:
After this utility is launched, the Menu Bar below appears (File, Edit, Utility
and Help). By selecting each menu, several functions are shown in each dropdown
list.

Display Printers Fonts Cut Select Zone Display Help
Initialise Printers Disk Copy Display Printers Status
Page Setup Paste Launch Dialogue Console
Print Fonts Catalogue Clear
Print Fonts Sample Select All
Rename Printer Font
Quit
Functions:
File Menu:
Download PS Fonts:
The fonts downloaded to the printers memory will be deleted when the printing
device is restarted or the power is switched off.

The names of the downloaded fonts are displayed on this Utility Screen. Also, users
can delete the downloaded fonts in this function.

SF2
Page Setup:
Sets up the paper size to Printer Font Catalogue.
Print Fonts Catalogue:

Prints the names of available fonts.
Rename Printer:
Display Printer Name shown in Chooser and allows users to change the printer
name (up to 31 alphanumeric characters).
Restart Printer:
Utility Menu:

Downloads PostScript Files to the printer.
Select Zone:
Changes current Zone to another.
Display Printers Status:

Displays Printer Name, Zone Name, Total VM capacity, Free VM capacity,
Total Disk Space and Free Disk space.

Open editor to create, update, save and download PS files interactively (this function
is for users skilled in handling PostScript files).
Note: Initialise Printers Disk and Print Fonts Sample will NOT be supported
for the SF2.
Localization:
English only.
Mac Hardware: PowerPC
Mac OS: Mac OS 8.x/9.x/10.x *1
Network: EtherTalk
Supported engines: SF2

PostScript: Type 1018 PostScript Level 2 Compatible
Note *1: Mac OS 10.x Classic Mode is supported. Mac OS 10.x Native Mode
will not be officially supported.
UNIX Support:
Printing from UNIX is not officially supported for the SF2.

SF2
New CD-Launcher for SF2:
A new CD-Launcher development code called Holly will be applied for the SF2. This
new launcher requires printer drivers and utilities and enables user to install easily,
using Auto-Run. After selecting a language, Holly will lead you to the following:
By clicking the Quick Install button, Holly will automatically install PCL6 and
SmartNetMonitor for Client.
Note 1: Auto-Run is not available for Mac.

Note 2: The scene shown above is not the final version. It is a sample image.
Limitations and Remarks:
Description: Cause: Action to be Taken:

If originals are placed The first few pages have Do not set the originals
carelessly, regardless of been jammed or bent due carelessly. Please set the
the thickness of paper, it to careless placement. originals correctly.
might cause a paper jam
when the paper is fed
through the machine.

SF2
Setting Originals:
Printer Controller Options:
The Bypass Feeder is standard on the SF2 so please check the Bypass Feeder box in
the printer driver, otherwise an error message will appear.
Please mark here.
Paper Size:
When choosing the paper size from the PCL Driver, please beware of the following:

Even if neither of the optional Paper If you want to choose Legal, 8.25 x 13 or
Bank or Bypass Tray is installed, users 8.5 x 13 paper size, please install the
can still choose a paper size that is only optional Paper Bank or Bypass Tray.
supported by the optional Paper Bank and
Bypass Tray.
Paper Bank support: Legal, 8.25 x 13,
8.5 x 13 paper size
Bypass Tray support: Legal, 8 x 13, 8.25
x 13, 8.5 x 13 and Custom Paper Size.
Note: 8.25 x 13 paper size is not supported in the main paper tray.

SF2
Stamp Function:

When sending a fax message, the If you want the circle mark to be
machine can stamp a circle mark at the dropped, please ask a Service
bottom of the document. If you fax that Representative to disable the MTF.
document again with the SF2, the
recipient will see the circle mark in some
cases.
If you copy the document with a circle

mark, the mark might appear in some
cases.

SF2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS NIC FAX OPTION

What is an Internet Fax?
The NIC Fax Option converts a scanned document image into an e-mail format and
transmits the data over the Internet. An e-mail sent by a NIC Fax can be received by
either another NIC Fax or a PC. Instead of entering the telephone number of the
destination users wish to send to, simply input the applicable e-mail address. The
Internet Fax Function is compliant to ITU-T Rec. T. 37.
Please see the example below:
Server
E-mail: i-fax1@ricoh.com
Fax No. 012-345-678
Server
PC
Internet PC
PC
E-mail: i-fax2@ricoh.com
E-mail: pc1@ricoh.com PC
Fax No. 123-456-789
What is an IP-Fax (Real-time Internet Fax)?
With the IP-Fax feature, users can send or receive faxes through fax machines directly
connected to the same network, using the TCP/IP protocol. Simply use the IP address
instead of the fax number to specify the destination of the machine or use the alias
number when using a gatekeeper. Users can also send faxes to G3 fax machines
connected to PSNT via the VoIP gateways (with T. 38 Function).
No e-mail server is required, since the NIC-Fax communicates directly with the
destination fax machines that are connected to the same network. The transmission
speed is higher than using G3.

SF2
NIC Fax
1 3
2
Internet / Intranet
Gateway
IP Address: 123.123.1.26
Telephone
NIC Fax
Network Gatekeeper IP Address:192.168.1.10
Alias Fax Number Host Name: IPFAX1
2123336666 = 192.168.1.20
NIC Fax
IP Address:192.168.1.20
Host Name: IPFAX2
G3 Fax Fax number:2123336666
212-123-5678
1. Transmission by specifying the destination with the IP address (e.g.

192.168.1.26) or the fax number (e.g. 212-123-5678)
2. Transmission by specifying the destination with the fax number alias (e.g.
2123336666)
3. Transmission by specifying the destination with the IP address (e.g.
192.168.1.10) or the host name (e.g. IPFAX1)
Notes:
The NIC-Fax must be connected to a LAN and set up correctly in order
to use its IP-Fax functions
The IP-Fax function is compliant to ITU-T Rec. T. 38
LAN-Fax Features:
With LAN-Fax users can use a telephone line to send a fax, which has been created
by using a PC application, to another fax machine. To send a fax from a PC just
select Print from the Windows application and then select LAN-Fax as the printer
and specify a destination. In addition to sending faxes, LAN-Fax can be used for
printing documents prepared on a PC for proof reading.

SF2
NIC Fax
Server
Fax No. 123-456-789
Telephone
Network
G3Fax
Fax No. 123-456-789
PC PC
What are Scanning Options?
There are two types of scanner functions on the SF2:
Internet Fax scan-to-email

Scanner scan-to-email
Internet Fax: Scan-to-email:
Users can send a fax to another Internet Fax or PC. In the case of a PC, the scanned
documents are sent as an e-mail message with an attached image file. The recipient
will see a black & white document, converted into a 200dpi resolution TIFF-F (A4).
To use the Internet Fax scan-to-email, select the Internet Fax key on the control
panel. This Internet Fax scan-to-email function is compliant with ITU-T Rec. T.
37.
Scanner: Scan-to-email:
With this function, users can colour scan to e-mail. Scanned documents are sent as an
e-mail message with an attached image file. Black & white documents are converted
into TIFF-F or PDF file format and colour documents into PDF or JPEG. Users can
choose the colour documents file format through the user function key as well as the
resolution.
To use the Scan-to-email, just select the Scan-to-email key on the control panel.

SF2
Network Delivery Scanner Functions: ScanRouter V2 Lite/Pro:
The SF2 can be used as a network scanner, when combined with ScanRouter V2 Lite
or ScanRouter V2 Professional. Documents are scanned in via the NIC-Fax and then
distributed via ScanRouter. They can therefore be sent to designated folders or users
on the network, for easy fax management, e.g. a company secretary can have all faxes
automatically routed to them, digitally there is no need to stand by the machine and
wait for it to print out.
Once on the PC, the image can be retrieved, combined, edited and reprinted using
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
Notes:
ScanRouter V2 Lite and DeskTopBinder V2 Lite are on the CD-ROM,

which comes with the NIC-Fax
ScanRouter V2 Professional and DeskTopBinder V2 Professional are
optional
For a detailed overview of the features of both ScanRouter V2 Lite/Pro
and DeskTopBinder V2 Lite/Pro please see the appropriate NPS
What is Web Status Monitor?
The user can use this feature to check the conditions or change the settings of the
machine, simply by using a Web browser.
The following items can be monitored:
Fax Name
Comments
Status
Memory level
Paper tray
Toner level
Functions available when options are installed:
o Memory usage (Transmission, Reception, Auto Documents)
o Journal (Transmission, Reception)
o Quick Dial destinations, Speed Dial destination, Group destinations
o Forwarding destinations, Forwarding options
o Boxes
o Set-up (General, TCP/IP, e-mail, IP-Fax, Backup, Receiver, Others)

SF2
The following settings can be altered in Administrator Mode:
Destinations for Quick Dial and Speed Dial (Program, Change or Delete)
Destinations for Groups (Program, Change or Delete)
Destinations for Forwarding (Program, Change or Delete or Change
Forwarding Options)
Boxes (Program, Change or Delete)
Set-up (General, TCP/IP, e-mail, IP-Fax, Backup Receiver, Others)
Password
Backup
Restore

SF2
and dust levels.
Mechanical Noise Level (Power Level):
Sound Power Level SF2 (Target)

Stand-by (Mainframe only) Less than 40dB (A)
During Printing Less than 61dB (A)
Sound Pressure Level SF2 (Target)

Stand-by Less than 34dB (A)
During Printing Less than 55dB (A)
SF2 (Target)
Maximum Less than 0.02mg/m3
Dust Level:
SF2 (Target)
SF2 (Target)
Average Power Consumption:
SF2
Energy Saver Mode Less than 2W
Stand-by Mode Less than 15W
Transmission Less than 25W
Reception Less than 400W
Copying Less than 400W
Maximum Less than 1,000W
Please note that these are targeted values only.

SF2

Supplies: Ordering Code: Yield: *
Toner THM1BLK Average 5,000 sheets
Photo Conductor Unity DMU24 Average 45,000 sheets
* Yield based on ITU-T Test Chart #1 (approx 3.3%) in standard mode
Target User Classification and Reliability:
SF2
Machine Life 5 years, 300K sheets scanned or 300K
sheets printed, whichever comes first
AMV Scan: 1,500 sheets
Print: 1,500 sheets
MMV Scan: 5,000 sheets
Print: 5,000 sheets
PM Cycle 60K sheets
Please note that the above figures are design targets. The actual yields and
reliability data may vary, depending on the customers operation, maintenance
conditions and servicing history.

Average Monthly Volume (AMV): is the expected Average Monthly Volume
(print/copy/fax/scan) for target customer.
Maximum Monthly Volume (MMV): is the recommended Maximum Monthly

Volume for target customer.
Machine Life (ML): is the total Machine Life in prints/copies/faxes/scans or 5 years,

Duty Cycle: is the maximum occasional peak volume to keep machine reliability
(target MCBC remains unchanged).
Recommendation: It is recommended that machines be placed to handle MMV

and not Duty Cycle.

SF2
WHAT FITS WHAT

SF2 F104 F104 F104
Peripherals:
DIF410NIC NIC Card Type 410gives internet faxing
DCOU410 Colour Scan Unit
DIF410G3 Additional G3 Interface
PS480 Paper Bank
DMEBP32 32MB RAM
DMEBP64 64MB RAM
DMEBP128 128MB RAM
DMK300 ADF Maintenance Kit
DIF1013PV3 Print Controller Type TP1013
DIF1018E NIB for network printing
DMR13SFPCABX Small Low Flat Pack Cabinet
(use with PS480)
DMR13HFPCABX High Flat Pack Cabinet
(use with no paper bank)
DME40MB410 Feature Expander Type 410, 40MB
FTHM1BLK Hopper Toner Cartridge
DMU24 PCU, Type 1013
Language Sets:
Language: Fax: Printer:
English DDKSF2GB DDK1013PV3GB
French DDKSF2F DDK1013PV3F
German DDKSF2D DDK1013PV3D
Italian DDKSF2I DDK1013PV3I
Portuguese DDKSF2P DDK1013PV3P
Norwegian DDKSF2N DDK1013PV3N
Swedish DDKSF2S DDK1013PV3S
Czech DDKSF2CZ DDK1013PV3CZ
Polish DDKSF2PL DDK1013PV3PL
Hungarian DDKSF2H DDK1013PV3H
Finnish DDKSF2SF DDK1013PV3SF

Version 1.11
Valid Until : Augsut 2003
Analogue Copiers
CMR 130C
CMR 131C
CMR 151C
CMR 181C
CMR 211D
CMRA041
CMRA042
CMRA041
CMR A07
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
13 cpm A3 Series
CMR130C
CMR131C
13 cpm A3 Series
KINGFISHER Series II
CMR130C CMR131C
Nashuatec 3913s 3913
Rex-Rotary 8913 8913Z
Gestetner 2913 2913z
Launch Schedule
Production
March 2000 China

February, 2000
Version 3
July, 2001
CMR130C/CMR131C
Contents
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Competitive Positioning 4
Major Specification Summary 6
Comparison Charts Versus Present Models 7
Detailed Product Specifications 8
Technical and Environmental Details 10
In The Box Items 11
What Fits What 12
K:\Company\Market\NPS\CMR130C_CMR131C 1
CMR130C/CMR131C
Introduction
Stand-alone Segment 1 units remain the largest portion of market demand accounting for over 40%
of sales. Although digital will start to make in-roads into this section analogue products will continue
to provide the majority of sales for some time. Our plan is to remain a major player in this segment
and to do this our plan is to upgrade and reposition our segment 1 line-up. To help achieve this aim,
we are pleased to announce 2 new replacement 13 cpm models.
The 2 new models will use the 15 cpm engine thus giving us the advantage of A3 original scanning
and printing. In addition there are the advantages of using the present 15 and 18 cpm supplies,
spares and peripherals and no technical or product training is required. Other product advantages
will include:
faster first copy

toner recycling system (a good environmental issue selling point)
higher maximum copy volume
user codes
photo mode
series copy
larger by-pass tray
The two major new selling features will be the revised market positioning and A3 copying capability,
which should extend these products life and effectiveness well into the new millennium.
CMR130C/CMR131C
Product Overview
DF44
DF44 (common with CMR131A/CMR151B/C/181B/C

models) Fits only Zoom version
SEGMENT 1 - PRODUCT RANGE POSITIONING showing both analogue and digital

products.
20 cpm
DMR18
CMR181B NEW CMR181C
NEW DMR15 cpm

15 cpm CMR151B NEW CMR151C
CMR131A CMR131C
CMR130A CMR130C
10 cpm CMR121
CMR120
1999 2000
CMR = Analogue
DMR = Digital
CMR130C/CMR131C
Competitive Positioning
As the diagram below shows the Group currently are the number 2 supplier of units in segment 1 in
Europe and these 2 new models are aimed at further improving this position.
1998 European Category 1 Analogue Copier Sales
Manufacturers' Market Share Canon

Others Konica
Xerox 2.7%
6.1% Panasonic
Canon
Toshiba 22.4% Minolta
11.0%
Mita
Sharp Konica
7.8% Olivetti
4.4%
Ricoh/
Panasonic Nashuatec/
3.5%
Rex-Rotary/
Ricoh Group Minolta
17.7% 13.0%
Gestetner
Olivetti Mita Sharp
3.2% 8.2%
Toshiba
Xerox
Source Infosource Others
CMR130C/CMR131C
Competitors
Only a few manufacturers are developing new analogue products. Oc have launched a new 18
cpm analogue copier, a speed-down version of its 23 cpm 3023; it is therefore more comparable to
our 22 cpm. Konica has launched the 1312 A4 12 cpm but this compares more closely with our 12
cpm Skylark products. Thus the analogue competitive position for our new 13 cpm models will not
change dramatically over the next few years.
Model A6 - A3
First Book Toner Zoom ADF 250 + 80 User Speed
Copy Copy Recycling Option Codes
Time System
Canon A7 - A4 10 s No No Yes Yes on 250 + 50 No 12
6112/6312 6312 cpm
Konica A5 - A3 7.5 s Yes Yes Yes No 250 + 50 No 12
1212 cpm
Minolta A5 - A4 6.5 s No No Yes Yes on 250 + 30 No 13
1030/1/F 1s cpm
Panasonic A5 - A3 6.5 s Yes Yes Yes No 250 + 50 No 13
7713 cpm
Sharp A6 - B4 5.9 s No No Yes Yes on 250 + 50 No 14
2314/2414/ 2514 cpm
2514
Toshiba A5 - B4 7.8 s No No Yes No Side No 13
1360/1370 Loading ! cpm
Inferior features are indicated in red (appears as a half tone on black and white prints). Green is
used to denote superior competitive model features (appears in shaded box on black and white
prints).
CMR130C/CMR131C
Major Specification Summary of the new 13 cpm models
Items CMR131A CMR130A

Kingfisher Junior Zoom Kingfisher Junior
Platen Fixed Platen
Max. Original Size A3 / 11"17"
Copy Size A6~ A3
5 1/2 x 8 1/2 ~ 11x17
Copy Paper Weight 64~90g/ / 17~ 24lbs Bond
(52~105g/ /14~42lbs Bond)
Copy Speed A4/LT: 13 cpm
A4R / LT Length: 10 cpm
Warm-up Time Max 35 sec. .
1st Copy Speed Max 6.9 sec. (A4/LT)
Multicopy 1~99
Magnification 3R2E
71,82,93,122,141 %
Zoom 64~141 %
Paper Feed One Cassette
Paper Feed Capacity 1 x 250
Multi by-pass 80 sheets
Toner Recycle Yes
Automatic Exposure Yes
Energy Saver Mode Yes
Photo mode Yes
Series copy Yes
Auto Shut-off Yes
Dimensions(WDH) 579mm x 560mm x 420mm
22.8" x 22.1" x 16.6"
Weight 42 kg / 93.0lbs
Options ADF (Common with present 13, 15
and 18 cpm analogue models.)
CMR130C/CMR131C
Feature Comparison Chart with Present Model

Zoom Version
Item CMR131C (New Model) CMR131A (Present Model)

Original Size A3 A3
Copy Size A3 B4
Paper Weight 64 90 g/m2 64 90 g/m2
(Bypass 52-157 g/m2) (Bypass 52-105 g/m2)
Paper Capacity 250 + 80 250 + 1
Warm-up time max 35 sec. max 30 sec.
First Copy time 6.9 sec. 9 sec.
User Codes 10 codes (001 - 999) None
Photo mode Yes No
Series copy (Book copy) Yes No
Machine Life 450K or 5 years 360K
PM cycle 60K 80K
Save Energy Modes Auto Shut Down No
Toner Recycling System Yes No
Recyclable Parts Yes No
Options DF44 DF44
Non-Zoom Version
Item CMR130C (New Model) CMR130A (Present Model)

Original Size A3 B4
Copy Size A3 B4
Paper Weight 64 90 g/m2 64 90 g/m2
(Bypass 52-157 g/m2) (Bypass 52-105 g/m2)
Paper Capacity 250 + 80 250 + 1
Warm-up time max 35 sec. max 30 sec.
First Copy time 6.9 sec. 9 sec.
User Codes 10 codes (001 - 999) None
Photo mode Yes No
Series copy (Book copy) Yes No
MCBC 10K (real) 18K (target)
PM cycle 60K 80K
Save Energy Modes Auto Shut Down No
Toner Recycling System Yes No
Recyclable Parts Yes No
Highlighted features denote improvements over present 13 cpm models.
CMR130C/CMR131C
Detailed Product Specifications

Technology
Copy Process Dry Electrostatic Transfer System
Photoconductor OPC drum (60K Yield)
Light Source Halogen Lamp
Optic System Lens and Mirrors
Development System Magnet Brush
Toner Dry Dual Component
Fusing Heat Roller
Materials
Heat Roller Teflon
Fusing Roller Silicon Rubber
Fuser Oil Used None
PM Cycle 60K
Special Features
Auto Magnification Selection (AMS) No
Auto Paper Selection (APS) No
Centring No
Mono Colour No
Delete/Save Area No
Duplexing No
Image Overlay No
Image Shift No
Pause/Interrupt No
Photo Mode Yes
Series Copy Yes
Preset Magnification CMR131C only (3R2E)
Zoom CMR131C only (64 ~ 141%)
Two Single Copies Standard
Sort No
Stack No
Combine Two originals No
10 Key Zoom Input No
Program Mode No
Auto Clear Standard (Default: 60 sec)
Auto Shut-off Standard: default 30 min
Auto Density Control (ADS) Standard
Auto Start Standard
Platen Cover Unfolded
User Code Mode 10 codes (any 4 digit number except 0000)
CMR130C/CMR131C
Control Panel
Multi-copy 1 ~ 99
Diagnostics Replace Consumable Symbol
Paper Jam Symbol and Location Indicator
Service Diagnostics Code Number
Physical Description
Foot Print (W x D) 940 (830*) x 560mm
37.0 (32.7*) x 22.1
*Bypass tray folded
Weight
Mainframe 42.0kg (93.0lbs)
Full System (Inc. ADF) 55.0kg (121.3lbs)
Power Source 220, 230V / 50, 60HZ, 8A
Maximum Power Consumption
Mainframe Max 1.4 KW
Full system Max 1.5 KW
In Operation 0.70 KW
Warm-up 0.95 KW
Stand-by 0.16 KW
Plug-in 0.036 KW
CMR130C/CMR131C
Technical and Environmental Details

Average monthly copy volume 1500-3000 copies
Maximum monthly copy volume 7,500 copies
Estimated unit life 450,000 copies or 5 years whichever comes
first.
MCBC 10,000
Environmental Regulations
Energy Star BAM
Sound Power Level

Stand-by (Mainframe only) 40 dB
Operating (Mainframe only) 64 dB
Operating (Full System) 68 dB

Average 0.05 PPM or less
Maximum 0.15 PPM or less
Dust Level
0.1mg/m3 or less
0.0045mg/m3
All plastic components that weigh more than 50g are to be identified accordingly as per DIN54840
or ISO11469.
Operating Conditions
Standard Temp. & Humidity 23C, 65% RH
Temperature 10 ~ 30C
Humidity 15 ~ 90% RH
Light Max 1,500 lux
Dust Max 0.15mg/m3
Ventilation Min 3 times/hour/person
Power Source More than 8A (220V)
CMR130C/CMR131C
IN THE BOX ITEMS
No. Item Status Remarks

1 Copy Tray Yes
2 Original Tray No
3 Original Holder No
4 Platen Cover Yes
5 OPC Drum Yes
6 Operating Instructions Yes English
Order * Other languages available:
French/German/Italian/Portuguese
7 O/I Holder No
8 Instruction Guidance Decal Yes English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish
9 Inner Instruction Sheet No Attached to machine
10 Installation Procedure Yes English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish
11 Branding Decal & Model Name Yes Gestetner, Nashuatec, Rex Rotary
Plaque
CMR130C/CMR131C
WHAT FITS WHAT
Short Order Code Description Commonality
Machine
CMR130C 13 cpm Analogue Copier

Non-zoom model

Zoom version
Peripheral (DF ONLY)
DF44 Auto Document Feeder CMR131

(only fits CMR131C) CMR151B/C/181B/C
Supplies
CT110BLK Toner Black (6 x 215g btls/ctn) CMR151B/C/181B/C

(yield 6,000 copies/btl.)
CD110BLK Developer (4 x 370g bags/ctn) CMR151B/C/181B/C

(yield 60,000 copies/bag)
A2199510 COPC15 OPC Drum CMR151B/C/181B/C

(yield 60,000 copies)
Yields are based on a 6% original
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
CMR151C / CMR181C
15 & 18 ppm Copiers
Nashuatec 3715+ / 3718+

Rex Rotary 8715Z+ / 8718Z+
Gestetner 2715z+ / 2718z+
Launch Country
Month of Origin
November 1999 China

Version 4
July, 2001
CMR151C / CMR181C
Contents
Page
Introduction 3
Product Image 3
Improved Features 4
Product Positioning Grid 5
Main Specifications 6
Peripheral and Supply Interchangeability 9
In the Box Items 10
What Fits What 11
K:\ Company\Market\NPS\ CMR151C_181C.doc 2

CMR151C / CMR181C
INTRODUCTION
In segment 1, which accounts for up to 50% of total sales, price of the machine remains a
key-selling feature. Our plans call for the Group to achieve 20% market share by the year
2000. To help achieve this goal, we are upgrading (see below for the list of improvements)
and repositioning our current 15 and 18 cpm models.
Originally we planned to introduce these upgraded models in the year 2000, but due to the
importance of these models in our plans, we have brought the launch forward to the end of
1999.
Amongst the product improvements are:
1. User codes 10
2. Photo Mode
3. Series Copy
4. PM cycle 60 K from 45 K
5. Machine life 600 K up from 300 K/450 K
6. Warm up on 15 cpm now 35 seconds
PRODUCT IMAGE WITH ADF + SORTER
Kingfisher 2
Grand Kingfisher 2

CMR151C / CMR181C
IMPROVED FEATURES
To meet growing user requirements, a number of features have been improved.
15 cpm New Model Current CMR151B

1 Copy Speed 15 cpm 15 cpm
2 Number of Cassette 500 sheets x 1 500 sheets x 1
3 First Copy Speed 6.9 sec 6.9 sec
4 User Code Mode 10 codes (any 3 digit number None
except 000)
5 ACV 4.5 K 4.5 K
6 Max. CV 10 K 7K
7 Machine Life 600 K or 5 years 300 K
8 Warm-up Time 220V: max 35 sec 220V: max 45 sec
120V: max 30 sec (still to be decided) 110V: max 30 sec
9 Photo mode (Half tone Yes No
mode)
10 Series copy (Book Yes No
copy)
11 PM cycle 60 K 45 K
18 cpm New Model Current CMR181B

1 Copy Speed 18 cpm 18 cpm
2 Number of Cassette 250 sheets x 2 250 sheets x 2
3 First Copy Speed 6.5 sec 6.9 sec
4 User Code Mode 10 codes (any 3 digit 5 codes (fixed 4 digit
number except 000) numbers except 0000)
5 ACV 4.5 K 4.5 K
6 Max. CV 10 K 10 K
7 Machine Life 600 K or 5 years 450 K
8 Warm-up Time 220V: max 45 sec 220V: max 45 sec
120V: max 35 sec 120V: max 35 sec
9 Photo mode (Half tone Yes No
mode)
10 Series copy (Book copy) Yes No
11 PM cycle 60 K 45 K
Embolden text shows improved features.

CMR151C / CMR181C
PRODUCT POSITIONING GRID
DMR18
20 cpm
CMR181A NEW 18 cpm
15 cpm CMR151A NEW 15 cpm
CMR131A CMR131B
CMR130A CMR130B
CMR121 CMR121A
10 cpm CMR120 CMR120A
CMR081A
CMR080A
1998 1999 2000
MODEL CONFIGURATION
AD
DF44 (common with existing models)
10bin
Sorter
CS150 Kingfisher 2 G. Kingfisher 2

(common with
existing models) 500 sheets Multi 250 sheets Multi
Bypass 80 bypass 80
250 sheets

CMR151C / CMR181C
MAIN SPECIFICATION
Major Specification of the Kingfisher 2 and Grand Kingfisher 2
Items 15 cpm 18 cpm

Configuration Desktop ?
Platen Fixed Platen ?
Max. Original Size A3 / 11 x 17 ?
Copy Size A6 ~ A3 ?
5 x 8 ~ 11 x 17
Copy Paper Weight 64 ~ 90g/m / 17 ~ 24lbs Bond ?
(52 ~ 157g/m / 14 ~ 42lbs Bond)
Copy Speed A4/LT: 15 cpm A4 / LT: 18 cpm
A4R /LT Length : 12 cpm A4R/LT Length: 13 cpm
B4 / Legal: 10 cpm B4 / Legal: 11 cpm
A3 / DLT: 9 cpm A3 / DLT: 10 cpm
Warm-up Time 120V: Max 30 sec 120V: Max 35 sec
220V: Max 35 sec 220V: Max 45 sec
1st Copy Speed Max 6.5 sec (A4/LT) ?
Multicopy 1 ~ 99 ?
Magnification 4R3E ?
120V:50, 65, 74, 93, 129, 155, 200%
220V:50, 71, 82, 93, 122, 141, 200%
Zoom 50 ~ 200% ?
Paper Feed One Cassette Two Cassettes
Paper Feed Capacity 500 x 1 sheets 250 x 2 sheets
Multi by-pass 80 sheets ?
Toner Recycle Yes ?
Automatic Exposure Yes ?
Energy Saver Mode Yes ?
Photo mode Yes ?
Series copy Yes ?
Auto Shut-off Yes ?
Dimensions (W x D x H) 579mm x 560mm x 420mm 579mm x 560mm x 465mm
22.8 x 22.1 x 16.6 22.8 x 22.1 x 18.3
Weight 42.5kg 43.5kg
Options ADF, Sorter (Common with ADF, Sorter (Common with
CMR151B/181B) CMR151B/181B)

CMR151C / CMR181C
Technology
Copy Process Dry Electrostatic Transfer System

Photoconductor OPC drum (30, 60K Yield)
Light Source Halogen Lamp
Optic System Lens and Mirrors
Development System Magnet Brush
Toner Dry Dual Component
Fusing Heat Roller
Materials Teflon
Heat Roller Silicon Rubber
Fusing Roller
Fuser Oil Used None
PM Cycle 60K
Special Features
Auto Magnification Selection (AMS) No

Auto Paper Selection (APS) No
Centring No
Mono Colour No
Delete/Save Area No
Duplexing No
Image Overlay No
Image Shift No
Pause/Interrupt No
Photo Mode Yes
Series Copy Yes
Preset Magnification Standard (4R3E)
Zoom Standard (50 ~ 200%)
Two Single Copies Standard
Sort Yes with option sorter
Stack No
Combine Two originals No
10 Key Zoom Input No
Program Mode No
Auto Clear Standard (Default: 60 sec)
Auto Shut-off Standard: default 30 min
Auto Density Control (ADS) Standard
Auto Start Standard
Platen Cover Unfolded
User Code Mode 10 codes (any 3 digit number except 000)

CMR151C / CMR181C
Control Panel
Multi-copy 1 ~ 99
Diagnostics Replace Consumable Symbol
Paper Jam Symbol and Location Indicator
Dimensions (W x D x H)
15 cpm 579 x 560 x 420mm (22.8 x 22.1 x 16.6)
18 cpm 579 x 560 x 465mm (22.8 x 22.1 x 18.3)
Occupied Area (W x D) 940 (830*) x 560mm
37.0 (32.7*) x 22.1
*Bypass tray folded
Weight
(KF2) Mainframe 42.0kg (93.0lbs)
Full System 55.0kg (121.3lbs)
(GKF2) Mainframe 45.0kg (99.2lbs)
Full System 58.0kg (127.9lbs)
Power Source either 120V / 60HZ, 15A
220, 230V / 50, 60HZ, 8A
Maximum Power Consumption
Mainframe Max 1.4 KW
Full system Max 1.5 KW
In Operatio n 0.70 KW
Warm-up 0.95 KW
Stand-by 0.16 KW
Plug- in 0.036 KW
Operating Conditions
Standard Temp. & Humidity 23C, 65% RH

Temperature 10 ~ 30C
Humidity 15 ~ 90% RH
Light Max 1,500 lux
Dust Max 0.15mg/m3
Ventilation Min 3 times/hour/person
Power Source More than 15A (120V)
More than 8A (220V)

CMR151C / CMR181C
Peripheral Interchangeability
DF44 ADF Fits present 15 and 18 cpm models and new

CS150 Sorter version.
Supply Interchangeability
Same supplies and spares as present 15 and 18 cpm models.
Average monthly copy volume 4,500 copies

Maximum monthly copy volume 10,000 copies
Estimated unit life 600,000 copies or 5 years whichever comes
first.
MCBC 20K
Sound Power Level
Stand-by (Mainframe only) 40 dB

Operating (Mainframe only) 63 dB
Operating (Full System) 67 dB
Average 0.02 PPM or less

Maximum 0.15 PPM or less
Dust Level
0.1mg/m3 or less
0.0045mg/m3
All plastic components that weigh more than 50g are to be identified according as per
DIN54840 or ISO11469.
Energy Star BAM
Yes for both 120V and 220V versions Yes

CMR151C / CMR181C
IN THE BOX ITEMS
NO Item Status Remarks

1 Copy Tray Yes
2 Platen Cover Yes
3 OPC Drum Yes
4 Operating Instructions Yes English*
5 Instruction Guidance Decal Yes English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish
6 Installation Procedure Yes English, French, German, Italian,
Spanish
7 Branding Decal & Model Name Yes Gestetner, Nashuatec, Rex-Rotary
Plaque
* Please apply for details of other languages available.

CMR151C / CMR181C
WHAT FITS WHAT
Short Order Code Description Commonality
Machine

(1 x 500 sheet paper tray)

(2 x 250 sheet paper tray)
Peripheral
DF44 Auto Document Feeder CMR151B/181B
CS150 10 Bin Sorter CMR151B/181B
Supplies
CT110BLK Toner Black (6 x 215g btls/ctn) CMR151B/CMR181B

(yield 6,000 copies/btl.)
CD110BLK Developer (4 x 370g bags/ctn) CMR151B/CMR181B

(yield 60,000 copies/bag)
A2199510 COPC15 OPC Drum CMR151B/CMR181B

Yields are based on a 6% original

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PHOENIX MKII RANGE EXPANSION
22CPM MODEL
SWALLOW
Launch Schedule
Launch Month 1st FOP Order Month Country of Origin
January, 1998 October, 1997 Korea

Version 3
July, 2001
CMR221D/222E
CONTENTS
Page
Product Design and Configuration 2
Product Numbering 3
Introduction 4
Improved Features 5
Specifications:-
Copier 22cpm 7
Peripherals 11
In the Box Accessories 15
Technical Specifications 16
What Fits What 17
Page 2
g:\reports\nps\cmr221-2.lwp
CMR221D/222E
PRODUCT NUMBERING
Version
Brand 22cpm
CMR221D
Nashuatec 3722
Rex Rotary 8722Z
Gestetner 2722z
Standard 1000 shts
Brand 22cpm
CMR222E
Nashuatec 3722td
Rex Rotary 8722ZTD
Gestetner 2722ztd
Standard 1500 shts
Plus options of extra 500 sheet (PS270), 1,000sheet (PS280)

or 1,500 (PS290) sheet Paper Tray Units
Page 3
CMR221D/222E
INTRODUCTION
The Phoenix range of 22, 27 and 35 cpm models was first introduced 3 years
ago and, since then, has helped the Group* achieve number 1 placement position
in the European Segment 2 (20-39cpm) (Infosource data).
In February 1997, we launched the new 32 and 40cpm replacement units for the
27 and 35cpm models. This was part of our plan to upgrade the range models.
We are now pleased to announce the launch of the new 22cpm upgraded models
with extra features and new options.
A full list of product improvements is set out in the Improved Features. The
main design targets being:-
Excellent Half tone mode added - same as new 51, 60

Copy Quality and 70cpm models
Immediate Start - ready to copy

Productivity Faster duplex copying
Increased paper capacity on 22cpm
Improved options - new ARDF and paper banks
* All Ricoh brands
Page 4
CMR221D/222E
IMPROVED FEATURES
1. Increased Paper Capacity

From 250 to 500 sheet trays
2. Halftone Mode
same features as new 51, 60, and 70cpm models
3. New ARDF (DF64)

In order to handle the new range of speeds, i.e. 22cpm up to 40 cpm, a new ARDF will be
introduced, again with easy to install one touch connector.
4. Mixed Size Original Selection

As standard - previous models only available through mode seting.
5. Cover Sheet Insertion

Operator can select Copying the front and adding blank back cover sheets.
6. OHP Slip Insertion

When copying an OHP transparency, a slip sheet with the same copy image as the OHPs
will be made. This can be changed by UP mode to blank paper if required.
7. New Type of 20 bin Sorter/Stapler (CS220)

New compact sorter stapler with moving bins (20 sheets for stapling/30 sheets for sorting
A4)
8. New Paper Banks

Now choice of three paper banks.
PS270 2 x 250 sheet trays
Page 5
CMR221D/222E
MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
Highlighted areas show improved features
CMR221D CMR222E
Copy Speed 22cpm 22 cpm
Copy Size A3 ~ A6 A3 ~ A6
First Copy Time - A4 (sec.) 5.9 5.9
Warm-up Time Less than 60 sec. Less than 60 sec.
Magnification Ratio 6R4E 6R4E
Zoom 50~200% 50~200%
Multiple Copy 1~999 sheets 1~999 sheets
Auto Duplex N/A Standard (50 sht)
Paper Capacity (Mainframe) 500 x 2 + 40 (by-pass) 500 x 1 + 40 (by-pass)
1000 sht
Dimensions without LCT 620 x 655 x 562 620 x 655 x 562
(WxDxH/mm)
Weight: 67kg 80kg
Specifications:
Copy Process: Dry Electrostatic Transfer System
Originals: Sheet / book
Original Set Position: Left-rear corner
Original Size: Maximum - A3
Minimum - A6
Copy Paper Size: Maximum - A3
(A4 sideways only for LCT
Minimum (by-pass tray) - A6 lengthwise
(front trays, duplex unit) - A5 sideways
Copy Paper Weight: Front Tray / LCT: 14 to 35lb (52~128g/m2)
By-pass Feed: 52~157g/m2
Duplex: 64~105g/m2
Reproduction Ratios: 6 reduction & 4 enlargement
LT/LDG Version A4/A3 Version
Enlargement 200%, 155%, 129%, 121% 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%
Full Size 100% 100%
Reduction: 93%, 85%, 77%, 74%, 65%, 50% 93%, 82%, 75%, 71%, 65%, 50%

Copying Speed:
A4Y B4 A3 B5Y LTY LG DLT

Front Tray 22 14 12 24 22 14 12
* "Y" stands for sideways
Page 6
CMR221D/222E
Machine Specifications /Cont....
Warm-up Time: Less than 60 secs @ 68 F / 20 C

First Copy Time: [8" x 11" / A4 sideways] 5.9 secs
Paper Feeding Mainframe
1st Paper Feed 5.9 sec
2nd Paper Feed 6.6 sec
1st Paper Bank 8.0 sec
2nd Paper Bank 8.7 sec
3rd Paper Bank 9.5 sec
LCT 5.9 sec
Copy Numb er Input:: Ten keys, 1 to 999
Manual Image Density: 7 steps
Automatic Reset: 1 minute standard setting
Reset time is selective by UP/SP mode
(1 to 999 seconds in 1 second steps)
Paper Capacity:
CMR221D CMR222E
Total 1,040 sht 1,540 sht
Front Tray 500 x 2 500 x 1
Bypass 40 40
LCT --- 1,000
Toner Replenishment: Black: 415g/ bottle

Colour : not available
Copy Tray Capacity: 250 sheets (A4)
(Stack) 100 sheets (A3)
Power Source: 120V / 60Hz
220,230,240V / 50Hz, 60Hz
Maximum Power Consumption: Copier Only: Max. 1.45Kw
Full System: Max. 1.5 Kw
Dimensions & Weight:
Mainframe: w/o platen and copy tray
CMR221D CMR222E
Width: 620mm 848mm
Depth: 655mm 655mm
Height: 562mm 562mm
Weight: 67kg 80kg
Page 7
CMR221D/222E
Machine Specifications /Cont...
Optional Equipment:
New Auto Reverse Document Feeder
Platen Cover
20 Bin Sorter
10 Bin Sorter Stapler
New 20 Bin Sorter Stapler (CS220)
a) 20 sheets for stapling / 30 sheets for sorting (A4)
b) 50 sheets for stapling / 50 sheets for sorting (A4)
Paper Tray Unit
a) 250 x 2 - PS270
b) 500 x 2 - PS280
c) 500 x 3 - PS290
Special Features:
Auto Start: Standard 60 sec.
Auto Shut-Off: Standard 60min (Changeable by SP mode)
Energy Star Equipped machine 1 ~ 120 min
Other machine 1 ~ 999 min
AMS (Auto Magnification Standard
Selection)
APS (Auto Paper Selection) Standard
Magnification
Directional Magnification No
10 Key Zoom Input Optional (by SP Mode)
Available by replacing Size Magnification mode
Duplexing
CMR221D: No
CMR222E: Standard
1) Odd/Even Original Selection - Standard 1 to 2 duplex
2) Duplex to Duplex - Standard
3) Facing pages to Duplex - Standard
Editing
Erase Edge / Centre Standard
Delete / Save Area No
Image Shift Optional (by SP Mode)
Available by replacing Erase Mode
Centering No
Image Overlay No
Positive Negative No
Double Copies No
Outline No
Others
Pause / Interrupt Standard
Clear Modes / Energy Saver Standard
Programme Mode Standard (5 programmes)
User Code Mode Standard (voluntary 50 codes)
Colour No
Photo Mode No
Letter / Photo Auto Separation No
Halftone Mode New Feature!
Page 8
CMR221D/222E
Standard
Page 9
CMR221D/222E
Machine Specifications: /Cont....
OHP Slip Copy Insertion Standard with ARDF

(Default)
1) Insertion of copied slip sheets between OHP transparencies
(By UP Mode)
2) Insertion of Blank slip sheets between OHP transparencies
Cover Sheet Insertion: Standard with ARDF
[Cover Copied] Default
1) Copying the Front cover of the originals (by UP mode)
2) Copying the Front and Back covers of the originals
3) Copying the Front and adding blank back cover sheets
[Cover Blank] Default
1) Adding Front cover sheet (by UP Mode)
2) Adding Front and Back cover sheets
Two Single Copies: Standard
Combine 2 Originals: Standard with ARDF
ARDF Mixed Size original mode: Standard Mark 1 - Optional (by UP Mode)
Special Size Paper: New Feature!
Standard
Control Panel
Feature Control Symbols
Auto Exposure Standard
Diagnostics
Replace Consumable Symbols
Paper Jam Paper Jam and Location Indicator
Guidance Display CMR221D - No CMR222E - Standard
Technology
Photoconductor: OPC Drum
Charge System: Charge Roller
Light Source: Halogen Lamp
Optics System: Lens & Mirrors
Development System: Magnet Brush
Developer: Same developer as 51,60 & 70cpm and 22, 27 & 35cpm
Toner: Same toner as present models
Used Toner Recycling System
Paper Feeding System: FRR (LCT, Bypass)
Corner Separation (Front Trays)
Paper Transfer/Separation: Belt Transfer / Separation, Separation Pawl
Cleaning System: Counter Blade
Fusing: Heat Roller
Rollers - Number 2
Rollers - Materials
Heat Roller Teflon
Pressure Roller Teflon with Silicon Rubber
Fuser Oil Used: No
PM Cycle: 100k
Page 10
CMR221D/222E
PERIPHERAL OPTIONS
Comments
Platen Cover - if DF64 installed platen cover is not required Existing
Feeder - DF64 (ARDF)
Sorters - CS130 10 Bin Sorter Existing

ST10 10 Bin Sorter Stapler "
CS220 20 Bin Sorter "
ST29 20 Bin Sortet Stapler
Additional:
Paper Trays - PS270 2 x 250 sheets Existing

PS280 2 x 500 sheets
PS290 3 x 500 sheets
Cabinets - Flat Pack - CMR35FPCAB

Rigid - CMR35RCAB
Page 11
CMR221D/222E
Document Feeder - DF64 New

Original Size: Maximum: A3
Minimum: B6
Original Weight: [SADF, ADF Mode]
11 to 34lbs (41 to 128g/m2)
[ARDF, Combine original mode]
14 to 28lbs (52 to 105g/m2)
Original Feed [ADF mode] Automatic Feed
[SADF mode] Manual Feed one by one
[ARDF] Auto Reverse Feed
Mixed Size Original Feed: Key Operation
Original Set: Face up - First sheet on top
Original Feed Speed: Same as the mainframe copying speed
Original Select Switch: [Thick original mode (standard)]
14 to 34lbs (52 to 128g/m2)
[Thin original mode]
11 to 35lbs (52 to 128g/m2)
Original Table Capacity: 50 sheets or less than 6mm / 80m2
Power Source: From Main Frame
Dimensions: (WxDxH) 610mm x 507 x 130mm
Weight: Approx. 23.2lb / 10.5kg
Interface requirement: No
Paper Tray Station Options
PS270/PS280 / PS290
No. of Trays PS270: 250 sheet tray x 2
PS280: 500 sheet tray x 2
PS290: 500 sheet tray x 3
Paper Size: A3 /B5
Paper Weight: 52-105g/m2 (14 - 28lbs)
Dimension: 620mm x 632mm x 390mm
Weight: PS270:
PS280: Less than 36kg
PS290: Less than 38kg
Page 12
CMR221D/222E
Peripheral Specifications /Cont.....
Sorters
10 Bin Sorter (CS130) 20 Bin Sorter (CS220)
Paper Size for Bins: Maximum: A3 Maximum: A3
Minimum: A5 Minimum: A5
Paper Weight: 17~24lbs (64~90g/m2) 14~24lbs (52~90g/m2)
for sort/stack for sort/stack
Number of Bins: 10 bins 20 bis + proof tray
Bin Capacity: [Sort / Stack Mode] [Sort / Stack Mode]
20 sheets / A4 30 sheets / A4
10 sheets / A3 10 sheets / A3
[Proof Tray (1st Bin)] [Proof Tray (1st Bin)]
100 sheets 100 sheets
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from main frame) DC 24V, 5V (from main frame)
Power Consumption: Average 15VA Average 24VA
Dimensions: (WxDxH) 402 x 455 x 217mm 346 x 474 x 338mm
Weight: Approx. 16.5lbs (7.5kg) Approx. 27.6lbs (12.5kg)
Interface Requirement: No No
Sorter Staplers
10-Bin (S/S) - ST10
No. of Bins: 10 bins + proof tray
Paper Size & Weight:
Proof Tray 100 sheets 52~80g/m2 / 14~21lb
50 sheets 81~128g/m2 / 22~34lb
30 sheets 129~157g/m2 / 35~42lb
Maximum 11" x 17" / A3
Minimum 5" x 8" / A6R
Sort Bins [Sort/Stack Mode] 52~157g/m2 / 14~42lb
Maximum A3
Minimum B5
Stapling [Standard] 20 sheets / staple (20lb, 80g/m2)
[SP mode setting] 25 sheets/staple (17lb, 64g/m2)
Maximum A3
Minimum B5
Weight 14~21lb (52~80g/m2)
Bin Capacity [Sort Mode] 30 sheets / A4
25 sheets / B4/A3
[Stack Mode] 25 sheets / A4
20 sheets / B4/A3
Staple Position: One position ("horizontal")
Clinch Shape
Staple Time: Approx. 3 sec. / bin
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge exchange (2,000 pieces / cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from main frame)
Dimensions: WxDxH 381 x 548 x 443mm
Weight: Approx. 29.4lb (13.3kg)
Interface: Yes - SAK
Page 13
CMR221D/222E
Peripheral Specifications /Cont.....
20-Bin (S/S) - ST29

No. of Bins: 20 bins + proof tray
Paper Size & Weight:
Proof Tray Maximum A3
Minimum A6R
Sort Bins [Sort/Stack Mode] 52~157g/m2 / 14~42lb
Maximum A3
Minimum B5
Stapling [Standard] 20 sheets / staple (A4/LT, 20lb, 80g/m2)
[SP mode setting] 25 sheets / staple (A4/LT, 17lb, 64g/m2)
Maximum A3
Minimum B5
Weight 14~21lb (52~80g/m2)
Bin Capacity [Sort Mode] 30 sheets / A4
25 sheets / B4/A3
[Stack Mode] 25 sheets / A4
20 sheets / B4/A3
Staple Position: One position
"Inclined 45 or Horizontal changeable by customer
Clinch Shape
Staple Time: Approx. 3 sec / bin
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge exc hange (2,000 pieces/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from main frame)
Dimensions: WxDxH 16.9" x 22.4" x 26.8" (430 x 570 x 680mm)
Weight: Approx. 45.2lbs ( 20.5kg)
Interface: Not required
Page 14
CMR221D/222E
IN THE BOX ACCESSORIES
1. Copy Tray Yes

2. Platen Cover No
3. Drum Yes
4. Operation Instructions: (English) Yes (Nashuatec / Rex Rotary / Gestetner)
5. Operation Instructions: Order Separately
French / German / Italian / Arabic
6. Inner Instruction Sheet (non-word) Yes
7. Instruction Decal (English) Yes
8. Instruction Decal: Order Separately
French / German / Italian / Arabic
9. Installation procedure: No
10. Brand Decal & model name plaque: Yes (Nashuatec / Rex Rotary / Gestetner)
Page 15
CMR221D/222E
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Monthly Copy Volume:
Average Max. (Range Target)

Recommended Target 5 year 3 year
22cpm Approx. 6K sht/mo Approx. 15K sht/mo Approx. 25K sht/mo
Estimated Unit Life:
22cpm Approx. 900K Copies or 5 Years
P.M. Cycle:
22cpm P.M. Interval 120,000 Copies
Transport & Storage Conditions:
Temperature: Less than 35C

Humidity (%RH): Less than 15-90%
Storage Period: 12 months
Page 16
CMR221D/222E
WHAT FITS WHAT
Ordering Code Description Comments
Copier
CMR221D 22cpm copier New
CMR222E 22cpm copier / LCT / Duplex
Peripherals
PC540 Platen Cover Existing
DF64 Document Feeder (ARDF)
CS130 10 Bin Sorter
CS220 20 Bin Sorter
PS280 Cassette Bank 2 x 500 shts
PS290 Cassette Bank 3 x 500 shts
SAK Sorter Adaptor to fit ST10, CS220, ST29
to 22 and 32cpm version
CMR35RCAB Cabinet - Rigid
CMR35FPCAB Cabinet - Flat Pack
Supplies
A1539510 COPC10 Drum Existing
CT98BLK Toner Black
(2 bottles x 415 g / ctn
yield 17,000 btl / 34,000 ctn)
CD55BLK Developer
(4 bags x 1kg / Ctn)
32cpm - yield 100,000 bag / 400,000 ctn
40cpm - yield 120,000 bag / 480,000 ctn
CSC3227 Staples
(3000 pcs / cartridge x 5 ctr/ctn)
CSC1035 Staples
(2000 pcs / cartridge x 5 ctr/ctn)
Yields are Based on 6% A4 chart
Operator Instructions
English - In the Box
CDK22CF French
CDK22CD German
CDK22CI Italian
CDK22CAR Arabic
Page 17
CMR221D/222E
FOR LATEST VERSION PLEASE REFER TO PRICE LIST
Page 18
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
NEW A0 COPIERS
(Successors to CMRA08A/B)
CMRA040 CMRA041
Basic Multi Print
Nashuatec A040 A041
Rex Rotary A040 A041
Gestetner A040 A041
Launch Schedule

Month Month Origin
June, 2001 August, 2001 Japan

Version 5
November, 2001
CMRA040_041
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 3
Product Overview 4
Sales Points & Major Features 6
Comparison with present NRG models 9
Configuration & Option Interchangeability 14
Standard Accessories 17
What Fits What 20
This is a pre-launch document and specifications are subject to

change. If in doubt or specifications are required for tenders,
etc please contact NRGI Guernsey for confirmation of exact
product details.
K:\Company\Market\NPS\CMRA040_041.doc 2
CMRA040_041
INTRODUCTION
The CMRA040 and CMRA041 are successor models to the CMRA08A/B, which were launched by 51
distributors in 39 countries.
Along with the CMRA07, we continue with three A0 models, which will be further expanded by the
arrival of the digital DMRA07. The target for the group is to achieve an overall 20% market share in
the low-end A0 segment. Group market share is currently 15%. The competition models that the new
units are aimed at are:
Xerox 2020/2510/3030/3050
Kip 1030/1880
Neolt 240
Oce 7050
Some of the major features of the new models are:
Easy operation from the front of the machine

Manual feed of originals, to avoid paper skew (Auto feed available on Multi model)
CMRA040_041
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Appearance:
CMRA041
CMRA041
Multiple version
1/2 Roll Feeder

option Essential on multiple
version. This converts the machine
to the console model. No separate
table needed.
CMRA041 (Multiple version) fully optioned

(mainframe + 1/2 Roll Feeder unit)
Operation Panel
CMRA040_041
CMRA040
Basic version
Mainframe
1/2 Roll
Feeder option
CMRA040, basic version with 1/2 Roll Feeder option

(Paper guide is not illustrated.) [ If no Roll Feeder fitted, table CCABA040 can be used.]
Operation Panel
CMRA040_041
SALES POINTS & MAJOR FEATURES

High Productivity:
a. Multiple Copy (CMRA041 version only):

1-10 copies up to A0/E size
High Reliability/Copy Quality:
a. High Copy Quality:

Same toner, developer and drum as for existing models. Reproduces fine line image and clear
copy image without background.
b. Image Density Control:

14 steps, manual density control
c. Enhanced Side Guides Strength to avoid breakage
d. 100% Magnification Ratio Tolerance Adjustment when feeding (CMRA041 only)
Wide Range of Materials:
Bond paper
Vellum
Tracing paper
Film
Ease of Operation/Convenience in Use:
a. Better Copy Catching copy delivery direction selection (CMRA040 only)
b. Front Operation for original/paper setting, original/paper misfeed removal (clamshell design),
mode setting and toner/paper replenishment
CMRA040_041
Sales Points & Major Features continued
c. Versatile Functions/Convenient Features:

Existing features/functions: Edge margin adjustment
Partial copy mode
Fusing temperature control
Auto start
Preset cut mode
Variable cut mode
Bypass feed table
Job programme
Rear feeder
Emergency stop
d. Multiple Copy Stacker is available for the CMRA041; multiple stack of A0/E sized bond
paper available
Environmental Friendliness:
a. All plastic parts weighing more than 50g have component identification codes
b. Energy Saving System (Energy Saver Mode)
c. Paper/toner saving: Partial copy mode
d. Non-polluting OPC drum
e. Space-saving design: compact machine width
Leading & Trailing Edge Adjustment (CMRA040 and CMRA041):
The Leading and trailing edge of the copy can be set with the roll feeder in Synchro cut.
Leading margin
Feed direction
Trailing margin
CMRA040_041
Sales Points & Major Features continued
Notes:
l The margin range is +/- 99mm or +/- 4.0 margin by 1 mm or 0.1 step.
l Feeding a paper from Bypass table with Preset or Variable cut mode, the
trailing margin only can be set.
l The original should be inserted at the leading edge. In a case that the original is
fed from the Rear table, the trailing edge should be inserted first.
Partial Copy (CMRA040 and CMRA041):
Partial Copy is a function to make a part copy of an original. In the Synchro Cut mode, the Partial Copy
is cut in the length of the start point to the end point.
l Partial Copy cannot work when the original is fed from rear table.
l The Leading/Trailing margin adjustment will be cancelled if the Partial Copy is set
together.
start From Bypass with

Preset or Variable cut
end
From Roll Feeder with

Synchro Cut
CMRA040_041
COMPARISON WITH PRESENT NRG MODELS
Specification: CMRA040 CMRA041 CMRA08A CMRA08B
Configuration Desk top ? ? ?

Machine life 60K @ A1/D ? 60K ?
(A1/D) (36,000m)
Original Size Max. A0/E ? Ax. A0/E ?
(Max.)
Original Max. 3m/9.8ft ? Max. 2m/6.6ft ?
Length (Max.)
Original Face up Face down Face up Face down
Setting
Synchronized Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cut Semi- Synchronized (with roll feeder, (with roll feeder, auto)
synchronized (with roll feeder, manual)
(with roll feeder, auto)
manual) Preset
Preset Variable
Variable
Process Speed 60mm/sec. ? 50mm/sec. ?
Copy Speed 2.0cpm @ A0/E ? 2.0cpm @ A0/E 2.4cpm @ A1/D (1:1)
4.0cpm @ A1/D 3.0cpm @ A1/D 3.0cpm @ A1/D
(1:multiple)
Warm-up Less than 180 ? Less than 300 ?
Time sec. sec.
First Copy Less than 21 Less than 25 24 sec. (A1/D) 30 sec. (A1/D)
Time sec. (A1/D) sec. (A1/D)
Multiple Copy N/A Up to 10 (A0/E) N/A Up to 10 (A0/E)
Major advantages over the previous models are:
Features: CMRA040/41 CMRA08A/B

Roll Feeders 1 or 2 optional on either model 1 optional
Warm-up Time Less than 3 mins. Less than 5 mins.
Copy Speed 3.6m/min. 3.0m/min.
4cpm x A1 3cpm x A1
First Copy A040 21 sec. A08A 24 sec.
A041 25 sec. A08B 30 sec.
Max. Original Length 3 metres 2 metres
CMRA040_041
Technology:
Configuration Basic version: Desk top

Multiple version: Console (When Roll Feeder is added)
Copying Process: Electrostatic transfer system
Photo-conductor: OPC drum (970mm x 80)
Drum yield: 50K/A1/D (30Km)
Development system: Magnetic Brush / Dua l component dry toner system
Developer Yield : 20,000 copies/2 kg(1kg/1bag x 2) @A1/D, LEF
Toner replenishment: Cartridge (750g/ cartridge)
Toner consumption: 1,860 copies (A1/D, LEF), 6% chart
Fusing: Heat & Pressure
Roller Heat Roller & Pressure Roller
Roller material Heat Roller: Teflon
Pressure Roller: Silicone Rubber
Fuser oil: NO
Machine life: 60K @A1/D (36,000m) or 5 years, whichever comes first
PM cycle: 3.6K @ A1/D (2,160 m), LEF
Main Specifications:
Original feed: Sheet original

Original set position: Centre
Basic: face-up set (CMRA040)
Multi: face-down set (CMRA041)
Original image (scan) size (Metric): Maximum: 914mm x 3,000mm (3M)
Minimum: 210mm x 297mm
Copy size (Metric): Maximum: 914mm x 3,000mm (3M)
Minimum: 210 mm x 297mm
Max. original width: 960mm
Original paper thickness: Basic: (Front) 35-187 (micron)
(Rear) 35 (micron) ~ 3mm
Multi: (Front) 35 ~ 187 (micron)
(Rear) 35 (micron) ~ 1mm
Copying speed: 60mm/sec.
2cpm @ A0/E (SEF)
4cpm @ A1/D (LEF)
(Basic: Roll Feeder, Multi: Roll feeder and repeat copy)
Paper feed: Bypass (Multiple & Basic)
Optional Roll Feeder (1 Roll & 2 Rolls)
Optional Roll Cutting Rail (for Basic version)
CMRA040_041
Reproduction ratio: 1:1 +/- 0.5%

Reduction/Enlargement: Not available
Zoom: Not available
Image density: Manual (14 steps)
Warm-up time : Less than 3 minutes (23C, EU:230V)
First copy time: Basic: Less than 21 sec. @A1/D
Multi: Less than 25 sec. @A1/D
No. of repeat copies: Multi: 1-10 (Ten key input)
Basic: Not available
Paper capacity (Roll paper): Max. Diameter 170 mm, Max. length 150M/500ft
Bypass feed
Copy Paper Thickness: 68~148 (micron)
Output tray capacity: Front: 99 sheets @ A1/D (Plain paper)
10 sheets @ A1/D (Application paper)
Rear: 1 sheets @ A0/E
Paper cut method: Synchronized (Multi only, with Roll Feeder),
Preset (Basic & multi), Variable cut (Basic & multi)
Power source: EU: 220/230/240V, 50/60Hz, 7A
Maximum Power
Consumption: Basic: Less than 1.4kW (Mainframe + table)
Less than 1.4kW (Mainframe + Roll Feeder)
Multi: Less than 1.5kW (Mainframe + 1-Roll Feeder)
Less than 1.5kW (Mainframe + 2-Roll Feeder)
Dimensions (W x D x H): Basic: (with Roll Feeder): 1,080 x 670 x 1,310 (mm)
Mainframe only: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm
Multi: (with Roll Feeder): 1,200 x 803 x 1,140 (mm)
Mainframe only: 1,080 x 623 x 480mm
Weight : Basic: 79Kg (Mainframe)
Multi: 80Kg (Mainframe)
Special features:
Clear Mode: Standard

Auto Clear : Standard, default: 2min.
Job Program: Standard
Auto Paper Selection: Not available
Auto Image Density: No (manual)
Margin Adjustment: Standard ( 99mm by 1mm)
- Add Margin (Leading/Trailing edge) in Synchronized cut mode
*Trailing edge margin adjustment is available for Multiple version only
- Image Shift in Preset cut mode/Variable cut mode.
Partial Copy: Standard
Emergency Stop: Standard
Fusing temperature adjustment: Standard (High/Normal/Low)
CMRA040_041
100% Ratio Tolerance Adjustment: Available to the vertical direction only

1.0% ~ +1.0% by 0.05% (default 0%)
Job Interrupt: Not available
Sample Copy: Not available
User Code: Not available
Cut Length Adjustment: Standard: -25mm ~ +25mm by 1mm
Operation Panel:
Feature Selection: Sheet key

Diagnostics: Replace consumables
Original/Paper misfeed
Service Diagnostics
1 Roll Feeder unit (Roll Feeder Type 780A):
Paper Roll specifications:

Max. Diameter: 170mm, Max. length: 150M
Maximum Width (Metric): 914 mm (A0: 841 mm)
Minimum Width (Metric): 210mm
Paper Positioning: Centre
Minimum Paper cut length: 280mm
No of Paper Rolls 1-Roll of paper
2 Roll Feeder unit (Roll Feeder Type 780B):
Paper Roll specifications:

Max. Diameter: 170mm, Max. length:150M
Maximum Width (Metric): 914 mm (A0:841 mm)
Minimum Width (Metric): 210mm
Paper positioning: Centre
Minimum Paper cut length: 280mm
No of Paper Rolls 2-Rolls of paper
Note: When the Roll Feeder is fitted to the mainframe, the bypass table of mainframe is taken off,
and a table belonging to the Roll Feeder is used as the bypass table.
Table (Table Type 770):
The Basic version can be put on Table option when no Roll Feeder is fitted.
Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,080 x 636 x 605 (mm)
Weight : 25kg
CMRA040_041
Roll cutting rail (Roll Cutting Rail Type 770):
The Roll Cutting Rail can be equipped, with the Basic version, to set one roll of paper. The paper will
be fed into the mainframe and be cut offline. Off- line means that Synchronize cut or Preset cut does
not work.
Dimensions (W x D x H): 1,285 x 160 x 125 (Growth)

Maximum roll diameter: 170mm
Maximum width of paper roll: 914 mm
Note: The body colour is new. However, the functions are the same. If you have stock of the old
version, and users accept the colour difference, you can use the old cutting rail with the
CMRA040/41.
Side guide option (Side Guide Type 770):
The Side Guide is used on the Bypass tray for the following configuration:
1) Basic version
2) No Roll Feeder
3) Cut paper is used via Bypass tray.

Weight : 50g
Note: When the mainframe is used with the Roll Feeder, the Side Guide option is no longer
necessary because the bypass table of the Roll Feeder has standard side guides.
Copy Stacker (Copy Stacker Type 780):
The Stacker catches the copy output at the front (operator side).
Stack capacity: 10 sheets (A0/36 x 24, long edge feed)
CMRA040_041
CONFIGURATION & OPTION INTERCHANGEABILITY

Configuration:
Basic model configuration:

Roll cutting Rail
Side Guide is
recommended for the
cut paper users only
needed when roll Table
feeder not specified.
Mainframe
1 Roll Feeder
unit
The Copy Stacker is not

available on the basic model.
2 Roll Feeder
Unit
Multiple model configuration:
When the Multi

version is
equipped with a
Roll feeder, the
Side Guide side guide is not
necessary. 1 Roll Feeder
unit
Copy Tray
Mainframe
The Copy Stacker is mandatory

with the Roll Feeder, because 2 Roll Feeder
paper output is at the bottom. unit
CMRA040_041
Model: CMRA040 CMRA041 CMRA08A/B

Item:
Table for Basic model
1- Roll Feeder unit
2 - Roll Feeder unit
Copy Stacker
Roll Cutting Rail
Side Guide
: Can be used for this model : Cannot be used for this model
(Note)
1. The CMRA040/41 will change to the new colour. If colour match is not a problem, the old Roll Cutting
Rail and Side Guide can be used.
2. The Side Guide will be used with the Basic version if paper is frequently fed from the bypass tray
(neither the Roll Feeder nor the Roll Cutting Rail is used).
Option Correlation:
Multiple version:
- must install together cannot install together

Copy Stacker
1 Roll Feeder
2 Roll Feeder
Roll Cutting
Table
Rail
Remarks
Purchasing Option
1 Roll Feeder unit
2Roll Feeder unit
Table Not available to Multiple version

Roll Cutting Rail Not available to Multiple version
Copy Stacker * * Either 1 Roll Feeder or 2 Roll Feeder is
required.
(Note)
* The Copy Stacker is necessary with the 1 or 2 Roll Feeder.
CMRA040_041
Option Interchangeability continued
Basic version:
- must install together cannot install together
Copy Stacker
1 Roll Feeder
2 Roll Feeder
Roll Cutting
Side guide
Remarks
Table
Purchasing Option Rail

1 Roll Feeder unit *2
2Roll Feeder unit *2
Table
Roll cutting rail
Copy Stacker Not available on CMRA040
Side guide *1 *1 *1
(NOTES)
*1 The 1 and 2-Roll Feeders have a paper side guide as standard

*2 The Roll Cutting Rail cannot be equipped with the Roll Feeder
CMRA040_041
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
Item/Product Code: Comments:
1. Copy Stacker Basic: No

Multi: Option
2. Original Stacker (for A3) Basic: Yes
Multi: Yes
3. Original Guide Basic: Yes
Multi: Yes
4. Side Guide Basic: Option Option: Same as for CMRA08A/B
Multi: Option
5. Operating Instructions No Order as Option: English, French,
German and Italian
6. Used toner/Warning Yes
7. Instruction Sheet (non- Yes
worded)
8. Drum Yes Installed in the machine
9. Branding/Model Name Yes (Nashuatec, Gestetner, Rex Rotary)
Decals
CMRA040_041

Supplies:
CT109BLK Toner 10 x 750gm cartridge/carton
(Yield 1,860 A1 copies/cartridge 6% chart)
CD109BLK Developer 6 x 1kg/carton
(Yield 20,000 A1 copies/2kgs 6% chart)
A0989510 CDR109 Drum (Yield 50,000 A1 copies)
Average Monthly
Volume (AMV): 750 copies /A1 per month
Maximum Monthly
Volume (MMV): 1,000 copies / A1 per month
Machine Life (ML): Approximately 60,000 copies / A1 (approximately 36,000 metres) or 5 years,
whichever comes first
Preventative Maintenance
(PM) Cycle: 3,600 copies / A1 (approximately 2,200 metres)
Mean Copies between

Service Calls (MCBC): 1,200 copies / A1
Installation Time: Machine - Approximately 80 minutes

2nd Roller - Approximately 45 minutes
Note: These are target installation times after removal from carton.
CMRA040_041
Sound Power Level:
Basic Multiple
Working 72db 75db
Waiting 57db 57db
Less than 0.02mg/m3
Dust Level:
Less than 0.07mg/m3
All plastic components for CMRA040/41 (both basic and multi versions) that weigh more than 50g are
to be identified according to DIN5480 or ISO11469.
Environmental regulations:
Energy Star Swan Energy 2000

Yes No No
CMRA040_041
WHAT FITS WHAT

CMRA040 A040 A040 A040

CMRA041 A041 A041 A041
Peripherals: Fits Which Machines:

CRCRA040 Roll Cutting Rail Type 770 CMRA040
CCABA040 Table Type 770 CMRA040
CSGDA040 Side Guide Type 770 CMRA040
CPFU1A041 1 Roll Feeder Unit Type 780A CMRA040/041
CPFU2A041 2 Roll Feeder Unit Type 780B CMRA040/041
CSGDA041 Side Guide Type 770 CMRA040/041
DRHLDA07 Roll Holder Type A DMRA07
(not essential but useful to hold CMRA040/041
spare rolls)
CSTA041 Copy Stacker Type 780 CMRA041
CDKA040GB Operator Instructions English CMRA040

CDKA040F Operator Instructions French CMRA040
CDKA040D Operator Instructions German CMRA040
CDKA040I Operator Instructions Italian CMRA040
CDKA041GB Operator Instructions English CMRA041

CDKA041F Operator Instructions French CMRA041
CDKA041D Operator Instructions German CMRA041
CDKA041I Operator Instructions Italian CMRA041
CDKA04AR Operator Instructions Arabic CMRA040/041
(for SASO purposes only)
Supplies:
CT109BLK Toner 10 x 750gm cartridge/carton
(Yield 1,860 A1 copies/cartridge 6% chart)
CD109BLK Developer 6 x 1kg/carton
(Yield 20,000 A1 copies/2kgs 6% chart)
A0989510 CDR109 Drum (Yield 50,000 A1 copies)
CMRA040_041
Specifications CMRA040 XEROX 2950 Oce 7050 KIP 1030
Configuration Table top Table top Table top Table top
Original Size A0~A4R A0~A4R A0~A4R A0~
Min Copy Size:A3
Max Length 2.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m
Magnification 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1
Ratio (+0.5%) (+1%) (+0.5%) (+0.5%)
(Tolerance)
Multiple Copy N/A N/A N/A N/A
Range
Multiple (1 to 1) 3cpm/A1 3cpm/A1 3cpm/A1
Copy Speed 2cpm/A0 2cpm/A0 1.5cpm A0 2cpm A0
Process Speed 3.0 m/min 3.0 m/min 3.0 m/min 3.0 m/min
First Copy Time 24 sec 25 sec 40 sec/A0 35 sec/A0
(A1)
Paper Feed Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder Manual
One Roll Roll Cutter (opt) Roll Cutter (opt)
Feeder (opt)
Roll Cutting
Rail (opt)
Synchronized Yes with Roll N/A Opt for cutting Paper
Cutting Feeder
(Manual Cut)
Power Less than 1.4 1.5kw
Consumption kw
Dimensions 1080 x 570 x 1350 x 900 x 1200 1433 x 545 x 337
(W x D x H) mm 490 with stand
Weight (main Less than 79kg 85kg 85kg
frame)
Photoconductor OPC Drum Se Drum OPC Drum
Image Density 14 Steps 10 Steps 9 Steps
Control
Warm-up Time Less than 5 Less than 1.5 min No warm up-time Less than 7 min
min
Other Features Partial Copy Partial Copy
Job Program Job Recall
Energy Saver Energy Saver
Margin Adjust Cut Length Adjust
Fusing Fuser Selection
Selection
Advantage of Does not have: Does not have:
CMRA040 - Roll Feeder Option - Semi-Auto Synchro
- Semi-Auto Synchro Cut & Feed
Cut - Fine Reproduction
- OPC Drum - Partial Copy
- Fine Reproduction - Roll Feeder Option
CMRA040_041
Specifications CMRA041 XEROX 2950RF KIP1880 Oce 7051 Oce 7055

Configuration Table top Console Table top Desk top Console
Original Size A0~A4R A0~A3 A0~A4 A0~A4 Min Copy A0~A4 Min Copy
Size:A3 Size:A3
Max Length 2.0 m 3.0 m (Roll) 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.0 m
Magnification Ratio 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1
(Tolerance) (+0.5% (+1%) (+0.5% (+0.5%
Multiple Copy Up to 10 Sheets (A0) Up to 9 Sheets (A0) Up to 9 Sheets (A0) Up to 9 Sheets (A0) Up to 9 Sheets (A0)
Range
Multiple (1 to 1) 3 cpm/A1 3 cpm/A1 3 cpm/A1
Copy Speed 1.5 cpm/A0 2 cpm/A0 2 cpm/A0
Process Speed 3.0 m/min 3.0 m/min 3.6 m/min 3.0 m/min 3.0 m/min
First Copy Time 30 sec Less than 25 sec N/A N/A
(A1)
Paper Feed Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder
One Roll Feeder One Roll Feeder (Std) One Roll Feeder (Std) Roll Cutter (Opt) One Roll Feeder
(Opt) (Std)
Roll cutting Rail
(Opt)
Synchronized Yes with Roll Feeder Yes Yes Opt for cutting Yes
Cutting (Auto) paper
Power Consumption Less than 1.4 kw Max 1.5 kw
Dimensions 1080 x 803 x 480 1397 x 660 x 1181 1300 x 460 x 580 1350 x 900 x 1200 1350 x 900 x 1200
(W x D x H) mm with Stand
Weight (main Less than 80 kg 121.5 kg 125 kg 85 kg 152 kg
frame)
Photoconductor OPC Drum Se Drum OPC Drum OPC Drum OPC Drum
Image Density 14 Steps Yes 7 Steps 9 Steps
Control
Warm-up Time Less than 5 min Less than 1.5 min No warm-up time No warm-up time
Other Features Partial Copy Partial Copy Trail Edge Adjust Trail & Lead Edge
Job Program Job Recall Adjust
Energy Saver Trail Edge Adjust Test Copy
Margin Adjust
Fusing Selection
Advantage of Does not have: Does not have: Does not have: Does not have:
CMRA041 - Min Original/Copy Size - Fine Reproduction - Min Copy Size - Min Copy Size
- OPC Drum - Compact in Width - Fine Reproduction - Fine Reproduction
- Fine Reproduction - Roll Feeder - Compact in Width
- Compact in width Option - No Auto Start
- Synchro Cut &
Feed
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
Potential New A0 High Volume Copier

WHALE
CMRA07
Nashuatec 57A0
Rex Rotary 8008
Gestetner 27A0

March, 1997
Version 3
October 2001
A0 WHALE
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
Market Size/Competition
German Market Competitive Pricing
Wide format - Market Background
Diazo copiers process report
2. Main Specifications Versus CMRA03
3. New Feature Functions
4. Detailed Machine Specifications
5. Peripheral Specifications
6. Standard Accessories in the Box
7. Competitive Overview
8. Technical Specifications
9. What Fits What
g:\reports\nps\whale
A0 WHALE
INTRODUCTION
Following the successful launch of our first A0 copier, the CMRA03, a market entry level product,
we are now pleased to announce the introduction of a second mid-volume, faster console unit with 3
way paper feed (2 standard), the CMRA07. The unit is designed for mid-volume segment but will
be price positioned in the upper low segment, making it very competitive - see next 2 pages.
The wide format market until recent years was dominated by the Diazo technology products (with
an estimate million units in use) but this is now changing increasingly to plain paper models. The
dominant plain paper suppliers have been Xerox and Oce with market shares of around 40 and
35% respectfully - see next page. The Group's share is growing and currently is around 12% level
and rising. With this new model offering we anticipate this share to increase even further.
The new model features increased paper capacity, enhanced versatility features and higher
productivity, whilst using the same supplies as the present A0 model.
Targeted customers are high volume users with either dedicated or casual operators in the design /
architecture / engineering / manufacturing office / government / public utility offices and copy shops.
Main competitive models are:-

v Oce 7150 / 7056 v Mita 3020 / 3010
v Xerox 3050 / 3030 v Neolt 300 / 300L
Target users to be replaced:

v Ricoh FW810 / FW830 v Regma 916 / 914
v Oce 7036 / 6036 v Ozalid EF3000 / 1000
v Xerox 3050 / 3030 / 3020 v K & E 7035 / 6036
v Mita DC A0
A demonstration video is available on this product.
This new unit is ideally suited for today's environmentally conscious markets with the following
features, all of which can be used to sell against Diazo and other compassion:-
{ Energy Save Mode

{ Toner Save Mode
{ Paper Save Mode during Sample Copy and Partial Copy Mode
{ Non Polluting OPC drum
{ Space Saving Design
{ Energy Star
{ All plastic parts have a component identification code
A0 WHALE
MARKET
Competitive Market Share Figures for Wide Format Copiers
Xerox, approximately 40%

Oce, approximately 35%
Ricoh, approximately 10-15%
Mita, Neolt - Less than 10%
Segmentation and Market Size in Europe
Segment Definition for Competitive MIF Installs per

Segment Models Year
CPM (A1) Price Range DM
High 10+ Over 90,000 Xerox 7600 4K - 5K 400
Xerox 3090
Xerox 3080
Middle 6 - 10 50,000-90,000 Oce 7360 1K Less than )
Xerox 3060 500 )
Low 4-6 30,000-50,000 Ricoh FW870 5.5K 1,800 ) Target
Xerox 3050 ) Market
Xerox 3030 )
Oce 7150 )
Bottom 2-3 Under 30,000 Ricoh 19.2K 5,000
FW740/830
Xerox 2515
Neolt 240
Oce 7050 series
Diazo Estimate World Wide MIF - (i.e. Prospects)

USA Europe Asia Total
Diazo 1-3 Tube 150,000 250,000 100,000 500,000
Xerox 2510/15 60,000 30,000 10,000 100,000
Total 210,000 280,000 110,000 600,000
A0 WHALE
GERMAN MARKET - COMPETITIVE PRICING
Suggested Retail Pricing Germany - DM

Ricoh FW740 27,430
Ricoh FW830 29,500
Mita DC-A0 33,070
Mita DR-3020 39,000
Oce 7050 13,050
Xerox 2515 9,900
Xerox 3030 22,900
Xerox 3050 34,900
Xerox 3060 89,500
Xerox 3090 74,500
Xerox 5080 195,000
The above competitor pricing shows the range of wide-format copiers available
and that major players, such as Xerox, have a machine price to suit most budgets.
A0 WHALE
WIDE FORMAT COPIERS - BACKGROUND
There is no technological mystery to wide format copiers. Old and environmentally unfriendly Diazo
copiers are being replaced by normal PPC copiers that have the ability to cope with original and
copy paper sizes larger than A3 - up to A0. Basic technology works in the same way as any other
PPC copier and has many advantages over old Diazo machines which can be smelly and difficult to
operate.
So Who Needs To Use A Wide Format Copier?
Construction Industry.
Building site plans, Utility Layouts of wires, cables and pipes
Architects
Large format drawings of buildings need to be copied
For instance numerous copies are needed from drawings made of the Pompadu Centre in
Paris.
Ordinance Survey / Maps

Maps of countries, counties and local districts are produced in large format documents.
Local and Central Government departments as well as Military operations will need to
make copies of these.
Solicitors / Estate Agents

Conveyancing documents usually contain a map of the property that is being sold. These
maps are usually large format documents which need to be copied by solicitors and Estate
Agents.
Engineering
An aeroplane engine would be detailed in a large sized document, similarly the design of
a motor bike will be kept on a large size document. These documents need to be copied.
Utilities
Gas, Electric, Telecom and Water companies have many maps of pipes, cables etc., which
are often in A0/A1 format. These need to be copied many times, often engineers will
carry them when on site.
Advertising Agencies
Advertising Agencies will produce artwork for clients in large format documents for
presentation purposes. They would like to copy these in the same size but often do not
have the ability to do so.
A0 WHALE
DIAZO COPIERS
The place of PPC Wide Format Copiers includes the Diazo copier replacements market and we
thus need to understand the Diazo process and problems associated with it......
The Diazo process has four main steps:-
1. Original
2. Copy Media / Paper
3. Light
4. Development
1. The Original
Diazo machines use a special "Translucent" original. Thus double sided originals are not possible on
thick paper.
2. The Copy Media (or Copy Paper)

Diazo machines cannot use normal copy paper. Thet need special paper that is coated with
'diaxonium salts'. This means that the copy paper is sensitive to ultraviolet light.
This special coated paper is expensive in comparison to normal copying paper which is one of the
main reasons why people change from Diazo to PPC.
3. Light
Ultra violet light is passed through the translucent original to expose the Diazo salts on the copy
paper.
4. Development
Through development the document's image will become visible. However, to make things more
complicated there are four different development methods:-
The Dry Ammonia Process

The Semi-Dry Process (Alkaline, Oce)
Heat Process
Pressure Process
Most Diazo machines use the following two development processes:-
The Dry Ammonia Process

The development of the original into a copy takes place by exposure of Diazo paper with Ammonia
Gas (smelly!)
The use of Ammonia means that Diazo machines cannot be placed near to office workers and
machines are often kept in separate rooms which can be a waste of valuable office space. This is
time consuming to users who have to walk to and from the copier. Offices also have to be well
ventilated and usually volume users need special extraction equipment installed.
A0 WHALE
Copies made through this method will always have an ammonia smell.
The Semi-Dry Process

Development takes place by exposure of Diazo paper with Alkaline solution. After development the
copies are wet. Alkaline solution has to be frequently changed to prevent crystallisation.
In this case the Diazo user cannot have instant copies as they first have to dry. This is not a clean
process and inexperienced users can get themselves into a sticky mess!
Oce use the Semi-Dry Development system but use specially coated paper which means that copies
are dryer. However, again this specialist copy paper is not cheap.
Diazo Copiers - Weak Points Summarised:-

{ Originals have to be translucent (see through)
{ Impossible to copy from thick originals
{ No double sided originals
{ Unpleasant smell (ammonia)
{ Often need special room for machine because of smell
{ Ventilation required
{ Use of chemicals is harmful to environment
{ Operator has to be skilful
{ Copy paper cannot be kept indefinitely and needs special storage
{ Copy paper is expensive
{ Old fashioned looking copies
PPC SELLING POINTS TO EXISTING DIAZO USERS:-
{ Ability to make good copies immediately on plain paper

{ Time saving
{ Machine can be positioned in general office
{ Environmental consciousness
{ Ability to copy from thick originals
{ Lower copy paper costs
{ Long term archiving of copies
{ Double sided copying
{ A wide format copier that is easy to operate - no skilled operator needed
{ A modern method of making copies of wide format documents
A0 WHALE
MAIN COMPARISON WITH CMRA03
CMRA07 CMRA03
Exterior Colour Milky White Milky White
Configuration Console Desktop
Photoconductor OPC OPC
PM Cycle (AI/D) 10K 3.6K
Machine Life (A1/D sideways) 300K 60K
Original Size (Max) A0 A0
Original Length (Max) 3.6m 2m
Copy Size Same as original Same as original
Synchro Cut Yes No
Process Speed 90mm / sec 50mm / sec
Copy Speed * 7.5 cpm * 3 cpm
(A1/D sideways) ** 6 cpm
Warm-up Time (A1/D Less than 360 sec. Less than 300 sec
sideways)
1st Copy Time (A1/D 18 sec. 24 sec.
Sideways)
Multicopy 1 to 10 (A0/E) N/A
Paper Feed (standard) 2 Roll Feeders + Manual Manual Bypass
Bypass
Options * 3rd Roll Feeder * One Roll Feeder
* Roll Cutring Rail
Dimensions (WxDxHmm) 1230 x 690 x 1070 1080 x 570 x 490
Weight (copier only) 195Kg 76Kg
Copy Speed *: 1 to 1
Copy Speed **: 1 to multicopy
A0 WHALE
NEW FEATURE FUNCTIONS
1. Cut Length Adjustment
2. 100% Ratio Tolerance Adjustment
3. Sample Copy Mode
4. 9 Job Programme Mode
5. Job Recall
6. Roll Edge Cut
7. Variable Cut
7a Synchro Cut
7b Preset Cut
7c Variable Cut
A0 WHALE
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS
Technology
Configuration Console
Copy Process Dry electrostatic transfer system
Photoconductor OPC drum (same as for CMRA03)
Drum Yield 90K (AI/D sideways) (same as for CMRA03)
Light Source Fluorescent Lamp
Optics System Cylindrical Lens Array
Paste-Up Suppression Mechanism
Development System Magnetic Brush / Dual Component Dry Toner system
Development Yield 20,000 copies (A1 sideways) 1kg / bag x 2
Developer same as for CMRA03
Toner Replenishment Cartridge (750g/cartridge) (same as for CMRA03)
Toner Consumption 1,860 copies (A1 sideways) based on 6% original
Fusing Heat Roller
Roller Number Two (heat roller, pressure roller)
Roller Material Heat Roller: Teflon
Pressure Roller: Silicone Rubber
Fuser Oil Used No
PM Cycle 10K / A1 sideways
Speed Input/Output Size and Paper Weight
Warm-up Time Less than 360 sec.
First Copy Time Less than 18 sec. (A1 sideways)
Process Time 90mm / sec
Copying Speed (1 to 1) 7.5cpm (A1 sideways, Roll Feed)
4cpm (A0 Roll Feed)
(1 to multicopy) 6cpm (A1 sideways, Roll Feed)
3cpm (A0 Roll Feed)
Original Feed Sheet Feed
Original Size Max: A0, 914 x 3,600mm
Min: 182 x 257mm (B5 lengthwise)
(min. length 245mm)
Max. Length for multicopy: 1200mm
Original Thickness 35~187 u (Rear Feeder: 35~1000u)
Original Weight 21 to 157g/m2
Copy Paper Size Same as original
Copy Paper Thickness 68~148 u
Copy Paper Weight Roll & Bypass Feed: 51 to 134g/m2
Feasible Width
Original 182~960mm
Copy Paper: Roll Feed 210~914mm
Bypass Feed 182~914mm
Specifications /Cont....
Reproduction Ratio 1: 1 (+ 0.5%)

Multi-copy 1 ~ 10 (A0/A1) * up to 20 by SP mode
Input and Output Devices
Paper Feed Standard Two Roll Feeders & Bypass Tray + optional 3rd Roll Feeder
Roll Feeder Capacity (Standard) 150 metres x 2
Roll Feeder Capacity (Option) 150 metres
Manual Bypass 1 sheet
A0 WHALE
Original Set Centre / Front & Rear

Past-up/Folded/Perforated/ Should be fed by using carrer sheer.
Creased/Damaged/Curled
Original
Special Features
Clear Modes Standard
Auto Start Standard
Auto Clear Standard - default: 2 min
(can be set to 1, 3, 4 or 5 min. by SP mode)
Auto Shut-off (only for US default: 30 min
version) (can be set to 1~120 min by UP mode)
Auto Image Density Standard
Manual Image Density 26 steps (normal, 13 steps & lighter 13 steps)
Adjustment
Margin Adjustment Standard (+ 99mm by 1mm
- Add margin (leading/trailing edge) in Synchro Cut Mode
- Image shift in Preset Cut Mode / Variable Cut Mode
Partial Copy Standard
Sample Copy Standard (245 mm long from leading edge)
Job Programme Standard (9 programmes + 1 previous job recall)
Interrupt No
Emergency Stop Key Standard
User Code Mode No
Fusing Temperature Standard (High/Normal/Low)
Adjustment *need approx. 5 min for warm-up/cool-down
Roll Edge Cut Key Standard (Paper Leading Edge Cut)
Paper Cut Method Synchro Cut
Preset Size Cut
Variable Size Cut (245~36,000 mm)
100% Ratio Tolerance Standard (-1%~+1% by 0.05% lengthwise)
Adjustment
Cut Length Adjustment Standard (-10mm ~ 10mm by 1mm)
Specifications /Cont....
Control Panel
Feature Selection Sheet Keys
Display of Kind of Media Standard (Bond, Vellum/Tracing Paper, Film)
Paper Type/Roll Width Entry Standard
Diagnostics Replace Consumables
Original Paper Misfeeds
Service Diagnostics
Total Counter (7 digits) Count by up to 1 foot/1 yard / 1m / 100 inch
50 inch / A1 size (sideways) / a copy
Other Controls Key Counter for office copier can be attached. Key Counter Holder (harness,
Bracket & Cover) is required
Dimensions (WxDxH) Copier Only: 1230mm x 690m x 1070mm
With upper / lower copy stacker: 1230mm x 870mm x 1287mm
Weight Copier Only: Less than 195Kg
with developer (2kg) Less than 197Kg
Power Requirements Europe: 220,230,240V, 50Hz 7A
A0 WHALE
Power Consumption Max. 1.41Kw

Warm-up: 1.21Kw
Ready: 0.1~1.2Kw
Copy Cycle: 1.36Kw
Dedicated Power Line None
Other Comments
Energy Star Specifications US version meets the Energy Star specifications
Optional Peripherals
3rd Roll Feeder (Name: 3rd Roll Feeder Type A)
Roll Paper Width 210mm to 914mm
Weight: 51 to 134g/m2
Roll Stock Capacity / Max. One Roll, 150 metres
Length
Core Diameter 76.4 + 0.25mm
Max. Roll Diameter 175mm
Paper Roll Core Colour Black
Power Source From Main Frame
Weight (without paper) Approximately 5Kg
Interface Requirement No
Others
Bypass Feed Side Guides Side Guides Type 740 (same as for CMRA03)
A0 WHALE
STANDARD ACCESSORIES IN THE BOX
Remarks
1. Copy Stacker Yes
2. Original Stacker (for A3) Yes
3. Original Guide Yes
4. Operating Instructions Yes (1)
(English) (mm version)
5. Operating Instructions (4 No (2) (French, German, Spanish, Italian)
languages)
6. Inner Instruction Decals Yes
7. Decal Sheets (4 languages) No (2) (French, German, Spanish, Italian)
8. Drum Yes Installed into the machine
9. Paper Spools (2) Yes Installed into the machine
(1) Order Separately

(2) Order Separately (French, German, Spanish, Italian)
A0 WHALE
COMPETITIVE OVERVIEW
Specifications CMRA07 Ricoh FW830 Mita DR3020 Xerox 3050 Oce 7150
Configuration Console Desktop Console Console Console
Original Size A0 ~ A4R (B5R) A0 ~ A4R (B5R) A0 ~ A4R A0 ~ A4R A0 ~ A4
Max. Length 3.6m 3.6m 5m 25m 6m
Magnification Ratio 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1 1:1
(Tolerance) (+0.5%) (+0.5%) (+0.5%) (+0.5%) (+0.5%)
Multiple Copy Range Up to 10 sheets (A0) Up to 10 sheets (A1) Up to 20 sheets Up to 15 sheets (A0) Up to 20 sheets (A0)
Up to 5 sheets (A0) up to 1.3m for repeat
copy
Multiple (1:1) 7.5cpm / A1 7cpm (6cpm manual) A1 4cpm / A1 6cpm / A1 6cpm / A1
Copy Speed 3cpm / A0 3cpm A0 3cpm / A0
Process Speed 5.4m / min 5.4m / min 4.8m / min 4.5m / min 6m / min
First Copy Time 18 sec 19 sec Less than 20 sec. Les than 20 sec. N/A
(A1)
Paper Feed Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder Bhpass Feeder Bypass Feeder Bypass Feeder
Roll Feeders Rear Feeder Roll Feeders Roll Feeders Roll Feeders
- standard 2 rolls Opt. Roll Feeder - standard 3 rolls - standard 3 rolls - standard 2 rolls
- Optional 1 roll Opt. Sheet Feeder
Power Consumption Less than 1.41Kw Max. 1.47Kw Less than 1.5Kw 1.84Kw 2 Kw
Dimensions 1230 x 690 x 1070 1410 x 800 x 600 without 1268 x 634 x 1046 1446 x 692 x 1092 1380 x 1056 x 1095
(WxDxH) table
Weight (main frame) Less than 195Kg 175Kg without table 240Kg 281Kg 250Kg
Photoconductor OPC Drum OPC Drum Se - T e Se Drum OPC Drum
Auto Image Density Standard Standard Standard N/A Standard
Warm-up Time Less than 6 min Less than 6.5 min Less than 5.5 min Less than 3 min Less than 5.5 min
Advantage of Whale - Multi-copy Speed - Multi-copy Speed - Multi-copy Speed - Multi-copy Speed
- Machine Size - Machine Width - Machine Width - Machine Size
- Std. Roll Feeder - Copy Quality - Copy Quality - Opt. Roll Feeder
- Less Warm-up Time
Disadvantage of - Multi-copy Range - Multi-copy Range - Multi-copy Range
Whale - Max. Length - Max. Length - Max. Length
- Less Warm-up Time
A0 WHALE
TECHNICAL
Estimated Life
Approx. 300K copies / A1 (Approx. 180,000m) on 5 years
PM Cycle
10,000 copies A1 (Approx. 6,000m)
MCBC
Approx. 2.3k copies / A1 (Approx. 1.380m)
Installation Time Estimate

Machine Approx. 80 minutes
3rd Roll Feeder Approx. 45 minutes
Total Approx. 125 minutes
These are target installation times after removal from carton.
A0 WHALE
WHAT FITS WHAT
Ordering Code Description Compatibility
Machine
CMRA07 A0 Copier New
Peripherals
206230 3rd Roll Feeder Type A New

206176 Optional Side Guides Same as CMRA03
CDKA07 German Operator Instruction
Supplies
CT109BLK Toner Black Same as CMRA03

(10 x 750 gm / Ctn)
(Yield 1860 / Cart)
CD109BLK Developer Black Same as CMRA03
(6 x Kg / Ctn)
(Yield * 20,000 / 2kg)
CDR109 Drum Same as CMRA03
(Yield * 50,000 / Drum)
Version 1.11
Software Solutions
DeskTop Binder V2 Professional
ScanRouter V2 Professional
SmartNet Monitor
Printer Cost & Security Manager
doc-Q- manager
Print Observer
eCabinet 2.1
eCabinet 2100
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional v2
Document Management
Product Launch Production

Name Month Location
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional v2 October 2002 Japan

Solutions Department
Version 1
November, 2002
DeskTopBinder_V2_Pro_v2
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
- Marketing Objectives 3
- Target Market 3
Product Overview 4
- Summary of Enhancements 4
- Differences between Lite and Professional 5
Product Details of New Features 6

- Content Text Search Using OCR 6
- Extended Features Deployment Tool 7
- Auto-addition Tool 8
- Preview and Print 10
- File Format Conversion for MFPs 11
Product Details of Enhanced Features 12

- Job Binding 12
- Extended Features 15
- Thumbnail Creation 16
- Saving Documents 17
Specifications 21
- System Requirements 21
- DeskTopBinder V2 Professional v2 22
- Compatibility 24
- Languages 24
What Fits What 25

K:\Company\Software\DeskTopBinder\DeskTopBinder_V2_Professional_V2.doc 1
INTRODUCTION
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional v2 allows end-users to retrieve, archive, manage,

distribute and print electronic documents. This version of DeskTopBinder is an
upgrade on the previous version of the software.
This software application is specifically designed to integrate with NRGs range of

hardware products and help provide document solutions for the customer. The part of
the document lifecycle covered by this product is:
Document Workflow
Input Distribute Edit Store Retrieve Output
ScanRouter V2 Pro
DeskTopBinder V2
Pro
DeskTopBinder covers document and information management. Other products in

our software solution range cover network print management and control and
document distribution (e.g. SmartNetMonitor, PCSM, PrintObserver and
ScanRouter). The eCabinet solution product is also part of document and information
management and covers the storage and retrieval elements of the document lifecycle.
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite v2 is bundled free of charge with the various hardware

products in our range. The professional version offers additional functionality and
can be purchased as a separate software package.
Please read this New Product Specification (NPS) in conjunction with the NPS for the
previous version of DeskTopBinder Professional.
To offer customers real network scanning, integrated messaging and

document management solutions.
To increase our machine sales by offering software tools that enable

customers to operate more efficiently in their workplace.
To position NRG and its distributors as solution providers of both

hardware and software products.
To increase secondary revenue through additional income generated from

the support, installation, training and pre/post sales consultancy.
Target Market
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a free of charge, bundled product. Therefore, the target
market should be customers who are using this Lite software with our network
scanning devices, both MFPs and scanners, as well as all users of current and future
GW Architecture machines.
The bundled Lite version provides the primary function of managing documents.
However, it does not support advanced document management functions, such as
OCR.
The software product can add value to our hardware product range. This should
enable NRG and, more importantly, its distributors to position itself as a leading
provider of document solutions for the network-connected workgroup. Target users
should be from a variety of different sized companies, departments or workgroups.
These products complement our PageTelligence / Consultancy Selling methodology.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Summary of Enhancements
Functions
DTB V2 Pro (v2) DTB V2 Pro
Preview and print (with

Output Yes No
RPCS driver)
Search Content Text Search
Yes No
Using OCR
View Creation of thumbnails for
multiple selection of Yes No
documents
Job Binding Thumbnail creation (with
Yes No
RPCS driver)
External Job Binding
database now integrated Yes No
with DTB
Editing Saving edited documents
Yes No
with new name
Other
Auto-addition Tool Yes No
Extended Features
Yes No
Deployment Tool
Works with new
generation GW MFPs
Yes No
(CCR081/101,
DMR60/75)
Differences between DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (v2) & DeskTopBinder

V2 Pro (v2)
Functions DTB V2 Lite (v2) DTB V2 Pro (v2)
Conversion Convert to Image Yes Yes

Convert to PDF No Yes
Convert to text (OCR) No Yes
Transmission Data attachment to mail No Yes
Connectivity Document Server Yes Yes
ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) No Yes
Search Broad Search Yes Yes
Specific Search No Yes
Content Text Search No Yes
Folder
Shared cabinet creation NO Yes
Viewer
Application Viewer NO Yes
Other
Export the summary of
Document Properties in NO Yes
CSV format
Print the Summary of

Document Properties by NO Yes
List
Entry Assistant NO Yes
Export HTML NO Yes
Import HTML NO Yes
PRODUCT DETAILS OF NEW FEATURES

The features below are all newly added to the current version of DeskTopBinder.
Content Text Search Using OCR

A content text search enables users to search the text written within a document. Even
if the user forgets the name of the document, the user can find the document by
searching for words as written within the document.
To use this function the users should follow the simple steps below:
1. Select the [Specific Search] icon (1) and select [Content Text Search] tab in the
[Specific Search] dialog box (2)
2. Type in the word (3) and select [Search] (4)
3. Then, search results dialog box appears
4. If you select [List Results] (5), the searched data will be displayed (6)
(1) (2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(6)
Extended Features Deployment Tool

The Extended Features Deployment Tool enables the Administrator to create a
self-extracting .exe file, which mirrors the Extended Features functions of
Administrator. When a user receives the self-extracting file from the Administrator,
the users local settings will reflect the settings of the Administrators system. This
feature saves a large amount of time, as individuals do not have to alter their extended
features locally.
Note: This tool is only for the Administrator and is not available to clients. The
deployment program can be found at:
C: \Program Files\Rdsd\PLGetCfg.exe
To use this function the users should follow the simple process below:
1. Start Extended Features Deployment Tool from MS Explorer (1)

2. Select Extended Features functions, which the Administrator of
DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2) already has (2)
3. Specify the location where the self-extracting file is to be saved and set name
of self-extracting file (3) and press save(4). The file is then created in the
appropriate directory (5)
4. Send this self-extracting .exe to DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2) clients
5. Extended Features functions will be set on the client PC by double clicking
this .exe file
(2)
(1) (3)
(5) (4)
Auto-addition Tool
The Auto-addition Tool monitors a specified folder of the client PC. If there are any
files in the specified folder, the Auto-addition Tool moves the file to the
Cabinet/Folder of DTB V2 Pro (v2) automatically. A user can register files to DTB
V2 Pro (v2) even when the software is not activated.
The Auto-addition Tool can be started in two ways.
(1) Starting from program menu
(2) Starting from icon placed on the task bar
Right click the icon.
Changing setting in Auto-addition Tool
To change settings in the Auto-addition Tool the user should use the Properties
dialog box.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Monitor files in the selected folder and add them as documents
If this check box is selected, the Auto-addition Tool is activated and (2) and (3) can
be selected. If this check box is not selected, then the Auto-addition Tool is not
activated even if its Icon is running in the task bar. The user can move documents
manually by using [Add As Document Now]:
(2) Confirm before addition
The following confirmation dialog box appears before performing auto-addition:
(3) Notify after addition
The following completion dialog box appears after auto-addition is completed:
* During DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2) installation, the user is required to configure

the Auto-addition Tool.
Limitations
The following folders cannot be specified as folders to monitor.
1. Folders that are not displayed in the My Computer of DTB V2 Pro (v2) (The folder
in which Windows is installed, the hidden folder, the system folder)
2. Cabinet folders of DTB V2 Pro (v2)
3. Folders on the network
Preview and Print [with RPCS driver]

Preview and Print enables the user to see a print image of RPCS print files, before
they are printed out with options such as Duplex, Layout, Staple, Punch and
Header/Footer.
<Set up> <Header/Footer>
Note:
1. To use this feature, the user should set this feature in advance from [Extended
Features].
File Format Conversion for MFPs

If the File Format Conversion option for an MFP is installed (currently only available
for DMR60/75 & CCR081/101), you can handle the document within the MFPs
document server.
With File Format Without File Format

Conversion option Conversion option
1 Display the thumbnail

OK OK
data of Document Server
2 Retrieving scanned and
faxed images in
OK OK
Document Server from
client PC
3 Retrieving copied and
printed images in
OK X
Document Server from
client PC
PRODUCT DETAILS OF ENHANCED FEATURES

The following information explains the enhancements made to features that already
exist in DeskTopBinder V2 Pro.
Job Binding [with RPCS driver]

A Job Binding work folder has been added to the DeskTopBinder tree view.
Therefore, the temporary print files (produced by the Job Binding function) are
displayed in this folder as thumbnail. Data under the My Workroom section of
DTB V2 Pro (v2) can be converted into a Job Binding temporary print file just by
dragging and dropping it on to the Job Binding work folder.
Notes:
1. To use this feature the user should enable it in the [Extended Features] menu.
2. As DTB Pro x includes the Job Binding module, the current version of
DeskTopBinder V2 Pro and /or the Job binding module have to be uninstalled
before installing DTB V2 Pro (v2).
3. To display the temporary print file with a thumbnail, the driver version of RPCS
should be those listed below. In cases where the machine is using an RPCS driver,
which is not listed below, the thumbnail data in Job Binding cannot be displayed.
Model Driver
PMR26/N Version 2.0.0 or later
DMR35A/45A Version 2.0.0 or later
PCR38 Version 2.0.0 or later
DMR22A/27A/32A Version 2.0.0 or later
PMR45A Version 2.0.0 or later
PMR26A/AN Version 3.0.0 or later
CCR081/101 Version 3.0.6 or later
DMR60/75 Version 3.0.8 or later
Detail of Job Binding Changes
DTB V2 Pro (v2)
Depending on the RPCS driver the

Thumbnail data in the Job Binding cannot be
displayed (see table above)
Current DeskTopBinder V2 Pro
Temporary print files are displayed with

file information, not with thumbnails.
There are two methods of using Job Binding:
(1) Adding the document by dragging and dropping it onto the Job Binding folder.
This document may be either a DTB V2 Pro (v2) document or a Windows file.
When multiple documents are added through the drag and drop operation, each
document is added separately.
(2) Selecting [Send to Job Binding] from the [Print] dialog box (This method is the
same as with the current version of DeskTopBinder). In the [Print] dialog box,
select the [Send to Job Binding] check box. Also, when printing a document from
the application, select [Send to Job Binding] as a printing method for printer
properties.
Notes:
1. When documents are deleted from the Job Binder, they are not placed in the trash
folder, they are deleted immediately and cannot be restored.
2. Documents can only be copied into the Job Binding folder (RPCS Printer).
3. By adding documents together, even those created in multiple applications, the

page orders can be changed.
Extended Features
The appearance of the [Extended Features] dialog box has been improved.
Explanations of each feature can now be seen in the dialog box.
The following is a list of Icons and optional functions, which can be set from the
[Extended Features] menu. Differences from the current version of DTB V2x Lite are
emboldened and underlined.
Icon Function
Input Scan
Easy scanning
Output Print
Easy Print
Send by E-mail
Send by Fax
Deliver (Note *1)
Preview and Print
Convert Convert to Image
Convert to PDF
Convert to text
Network My Workroom
ScanRouter V2 delivery server (Note *2)
Document Server
My Computer
Job Binding
Tools Print Document Properties Summary by List
Export Document Properties Summary in CSV format
Entry Assistant
Export HTML
Import HTML
*1 This function can be used with ScanRouter V2 Pro & ScanRouter V2 Pro x
*2 From DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2), you may add multiple delivery servers from
extended features.
Thumbnail Creation (for Multiple Documents)

If a user copies several documents from My computer to a Cabinet or folder under
My Workroom in the current version of DeskTopBinder V2 Pro, the user has to create
a thumbnail for each document, separately. In DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2) however,
the user can create thumbnails for multiple documents as one operation.
Saving Documents (as a New Document or a New Section)

Documents registered in DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2) can be saved as a new
document or as a new section in the DeskTopBinder Folder. The original data remains
unchanged in the DeskTopBinder Folder.
Please see process overleaf.
Saving as a New Document
(1) Select the document and

open in Application.
(2) Modify the data and close the application.
(3) User is asked whether changes should be

saved or not?
(4) Then select [Yes].
(5) If user selects [Save as a new document] in

the [Select Save Method] dialog box, [Enter
Document properties Summary] dialog box
appears.
(6) New document name can be set.
(7) New document appears in the Folder.
Saving as a New Section
(1) Select the document and open in Viewer.
(2) Double click the section of the document and

start the application.
(3) Modify the data and close the application.
(4) User is asked whether changes should be saved

or not?
(5) Select [Yes].
(6) If user selects [Save as a new

section] in the [Select Save Method]
dialog box, a new section appears in
the Section Thumbnail View.
(7) A new section is added to the

original section.
* When user opens and modifies the document with an application and selects [Save
as a new section] in the [Select Save Method] dialog box, user can also save the
document as a new section.
SPECIFICATIONS
System Requirements
PC IBM PC/AT Compatible

OS Windows 95 (OSR2 or later)
Windows 98/98 SE
Windows NT Workstation V4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Windows NT Server V4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)
Windows 2000 Server (Server Pack 1 or later)
Windows Millennium Edition
Windows XP (Professional/Home edition)
CPU Pentium 133 MHz minimum
(Pentium II 266 MHz or faster recommended)
Memory 48MB minimum
64MB or more recommended
HDD 200MB or more free disk space is recommended for saving
documents (depending on users)
50MB of free disk space is required for the program.
Support Software Document Editing Applications
MS Office 97/2000/XP (Word, Excel, PowerPoint)
MS Word 97
Related NRG ScanRouter V2 Lite v2, ScanRouter V2 Pro v2
Software Products
Printers Local printers or network printers are available for print.
(Depending on the current PC settings.)
Scanner TWAIN compliant scanners
Limitations
Administration privileges are required when installing DTB V2 Pro (v2)

DTB V2 Pro (v2) does not support "Fast User Switching", "Remote Desktop"
and "Run As Other Users" in Windows XP
We do not recommend upgrading the Operating System of the PC that DTB
V2 Pro (v2) is installed on, from Win 9x/2000/Me to WinXP. However, if user
insists on upgrading, the following steps should be followed:
1. Remove any "Extended Features" activated in DTB V2 Pro (v2)

2. Delete any "Temporary Print Files" which are in the Job Binding
Folder
3. Uninstall DTB V2 Pro (v2)
4. Install DTB V2 Pro (v2) after up grading Operating System from Win
9x/2000/Me into Win XP
DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (v2)
This section describes the main specifications of DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2).
Document management
[Management System]
File System Displayed by tree view
Cabinet Folder - (Subfolder) Document - Section
(File)
Supported Image File Format TIFF, TIFF-F, JPEG, BMP
Supported Application File DOC, RTF, TXT, PPT, XLS
Format
Shared Cabinet Supported
[Registration]
Add file to DTB V2 Pro (v2) Scanner input
Windows files
Add from Document Server
Distributed documents
New Application file
Auto-addition Tool
[Search]
By browsing Icon View / Detailed View / Thumbnail View /
Calendar View
Search Broad Search, Specific Search, Content Text Search
[View]
Document View Thumbnail View / Icon View / Detailed View / Easy
Viewer
*1 When two or more sections are combined, users
can scroll through each thumbnail.
Section View The viewer will be used for viewing sections.
Thumbnail & Section Image / Section Image
[Update]
Operations for Section Add / Delete / Replace / Move / Copy / Update
Other Combine / Separate documents
[Edit]
Operations for Document Copy / Move / Delete / Edit Annotation / Export
Other Change document properties
[Output]
Print Document print
Section print
Convert & Output * 2 TIFF (Uncompressed, MH, MR, MMR, JPEG),
BMP, JPEG
Send by Fax PC-Fax application
[Maintenance]
Backup Manual backup/Auto backup / Restore
Auto-delete Search and delete expired documents
[Other]
Extended Features Deployment Supported
Tool
Support MFPs Option DTB V2 Pro (v2) can cope with the File Format
(File Format Conversion) Conversion Option of Model DMR60/75 or later.
*1. Some restrictions may apply for the operations above depending on applications.
*2. When converting a document into TIFF format, multi page TIFF conversion is
selectable.
Viewer
[View]
Image Document The following file can be displayed by the document
viewer and easy viewer:
TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
Multi-page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR), BMP, JPEG
Application Document N/A
[Edit]
Image Document Line, Horizontal/Vertical Line, Rectangle, Round-
corner Rectangle, Oval, Polygon, Freehand, Text,
Stamp, Rotate and Erase
[Save]
File Format TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, Uncompressed)
Multi-page TIFF (MH, MR, MMR), BMP, JPEG
Add from Viewer Register/Update as DTB V2 Pro (v2) document
Cabinet
[Cabinet Folder Document - Section]

# of Cabinets One cabinet per system
Shared Cabinet N/A
Cabinet Name Fixed
# of Folders Up to 100 folders per cabinet recommended
# of Folder Levels Up to 10 levels recommended
Folder Name Up to 32 characters
# of Documents Up to 1000 documents per cabinet recommended
# of Sections Up to 100 sections per document recommended
Section Name Up to 100 characters
[Document Attribute]
Document Name Up to 100 characters
Expired Period 8 characters (date)
Creator Up to 37 characters
Note One Note per Section
9 colours
Up to 64 characters for Note Comment
Document Status In progress/ Complete
Compatibility
The following matrix shows the various combinations of software available.
DTB V2 Pro DTB V2 Pro (v2)

ScanRouter V2 Pro OK OK
ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) OK OK
Languages
DeskTopBinder V2 Pro (v2) is available in the following languages:
English French German

Italian
WHAT FITS WHAT
Product Code: Description: Notes:
DSWDTBV2A DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (v2) 1

DSWDTBV2A10L DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (v2) 10 user licence 2
DSWDTBV2A50L DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (v2) 50 user licence 2
Notes:
1. This is the actual application on CD-ROM, including single user licence.
2. This is a licence card for 10 or 50 users, which gives the customer a
licence to use the DeskTopBinder V2 Professional (v2) software on the
appropriate number of user PCs.
For a multiple user DeskTopBinder installation (more than one user) it is

necessary to purchase at least the single user CD-ROM (DSWDTBV2A) and the
appropriate licence option.
We recommend that ScanRouter V2 Professional (v2) and DeskTopBinder V2

Professional (v2) are sold to the customer together, as one package, (with the
appropriate number of DeskTopBinder licences). In this way, the customer can gain
the full benefits of a complete solution, rather than a partial one.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
ScanRouter V2 Professional v2
Document Distribution
Product Launch Production

Name Month Location
ScanRouter V2 Professional v2 October 2002 Japan

Version 1
November 2002
ScanRouter_V2_Professional_v2
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
- Marketing Objectives 3
- Target Market 3
Product Overview 4
- Summary of Enhancements 4
- Differences between Lite and Professional 5
Product Details 6
- System Requirements 6
- Supported Machines 7
- Data Delivery Method 8
- Logs 17
- Upgrades and Compatibility 18
- Languages 19
What Fits What 20

K:\Company\Software\ScanRouter\ScanRouter_V2_Professional_v2.doc 1
INTRODUCTION
ScanRouter V2 Professional V2 allows end-users to digitise (scan) and distribute

paper-based documents in an efficient and cost-effective manner.
This version of ScanRouter Professional is an upgrade of the previous version of the

software. This software application is specifically designed to integrate with NRGs
range of hardware products and helps provide document solutions for the customer.
The part of the document lifecycle covered by this product is:
Document Workflow
Input Distribute Edit Store Retrieve Output
ScanRouter V2 Pro
DeskTopBinder V2
Pro
ScanRouter covers document distribution. Other products in our software solution

range cover document and information management, network print management and
control (e.g. DeskTopBinder, SmartNetMonitor, PCSM and PrintObserver). The
eCabinet solution product is also part of document and information management and
covers the storage and retrieval elements of the document lifecycle.
ScanRouter V2 Lite V2 is bundled free of charge with the various hardware products
in our range. The professional version offers additional functionality and can be
purchased as a separate software package.
Please read this New Product Specification (NPS) in conjunction with the NPS for the
previous version of ScanRouter Professional.
To offer customers real network scanning, integrated messaging and

document management solutions.
To increase our machine sales by offering software tools that enable

customers to operate more efficiently in their workplace.
To position NRG and its distributors as solution providers of both

hardware and software products.
To increase secondary revenue through additional income generated from

the support, installation, training and pre/post sales consultancy.
Target Market
ScanRouter V2 Lite V2 is a free of charge, bundled product. Therefore, the target
market for the Professional version should be customers who are using this Lite
software with our network scanning devices (both MFPs and scanners), as well as all
users of current and future GW Architecture machines.
The bundled Lite version provides the primary function of delivering scanned images.
However, it does not support scan-to-e-mail, incoming fax distribution or web-
browser operations.
The software product can add value to our hardware product range. This should
enable NRG and, more importantly its distributors, to position itself as a leading
provider of document solutions for the network-connected workgroup. Target users
should be from a variety of different sized companies, departments or workgroups.
These products complement our PageTelligence / Consultancy Selling methodology.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Summary of Enhancements
Item ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) ScanRouter V2 Pro

Supported OS WinNT 4.0 Server + SP6a or later WinNT 4.0 Server
WinNT 4.0 Workstation + SP6a or +SP5 or later
later Win2000 Server + SP1
Win2000 Server + SP2 or later or later
Win2000 Professional + SP2 or later
Database engine MSDE Windows file system
Manageable Maximum # of 200 200
destination
Incoming fax delivery Yes Yes
In-tray save Yes Yes
Save to Windows Yes Yes
Delivery file
method SMTP Mail Yes Yes
MAPI Mail Yes Yes
Notes R5 Mail Yes No
Web browsing Yes Yes
Lotus Notes Yes Yes
MS Exchange Yes Yes
Mail system
MS Mail Yes Yes
SMTP/POP Yes Yes
Cooperating DeskTopBinder No No
client DeskTopBinder Yes Yes
software V2 Pro
DeskTopBinder Yes Yes
V2 Pro (v2)
Notes R5 DB delivery No No
Server printing Yes Yes
(Only when using RPCS driver)
Additional Auto-adjust image Yes Yes
handlings orientation
Extract text as Yes Yes
document name
Create Content Yes No
Text Search Data
Differences between Lite and Professional
Item ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) ScanRouter V2 Lite (v2)

Supported OS WinNT 4.0 Server Win95/98/Me/XP
+ SP6a or later WinNT 4.0 Server
WinNT 4.0 Workstation + + SP6a or later
SP6a or later WinNT 4.0 Workstation
Win2000 Server + SP6a or later
+ SP2 or later Win2000 Server
Win2000 Professional + SP2 or later
+ SP2 or later Win2000 Professional +
SP2 or later
Win XP Professional
Maximum # of destination 200 100
Delivery method In-tray save Yes Yes
Save to Window Yes Yes
file
Scan to email Yes No
Incoming fax delivery Yes No
Web browsing Yes No
Mail system Lotus Notes Yes No
MS Exchange Yes No
MS Mail Yes No
SMTP/ POP Yes No
Cooperating client DTB V2 Pro Yes No
software DTB V2 Lite No Yes
DTB V2 Lite (v2) No Yes
DTB V2 Pro (v2) Yes No
Additional Image Auto-adjust image Yes No
Handling orientation
Extract text as Yes No
document name
Create Contents Yes No
Text Search Data
PRODUCT DETAILS
System Requirements
Supported OS
> Windows NT 4.0 Server + Service Pack 6a or later

> Windows NT 4.0 Workstation + Service Pack 6a or later*
> Windows 2000 Server + Service Pack 2 or later
> Windows 2000 Professional + Service Pack 2 or later*
* Due to licensing restrictions with Microsoft, users cannot use DeskTopBinder,

ScanRouter Link or ScanRouter Administration utility on remote/client PCs to access
the ScanRouter delivery server.
[Administration Utility] (When installed in client PC)
> Windows 95 OSR2/98/Me

> Windows NT 4.0 Server + Service Pack 5 or later
> Windows 2000 Server + Service Pack 1 or later
> Windows XP Professional/Home Edition
Internal database engine
The following internal engine is used for SR V2 Pro (v2):
> MSDE (Microsoft Data Engine)
[Note]
> MSDE is a free of charge and will be installed automatically when installing
ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2). However, if SQL Server 7.0/2000 is already
installed, MSDE will not be installed.
> Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 1 or later must be installed before
installing MSDE.
Network
> Protocol: TCP/IP

> IP over IEEE1394 (CCR081/101, DMR60/75 or later product)
More than one NIC can be installed on a delivery server. Two network interface
cards (NIC) can be installed and the *NIC / IP set over an IEEE1394 environment.
When one machine can be viewed by two or more networks (when browsing by Set
I/O device), the user may choose from the either one.
* Only when connected to CCR081/101, DMR60/75 or later product
Server PC Specification
> CPU: Pentium 233MHz or faster (Pentium II 450MHz or faster

recommended)
> Memory: 64MB or more (128MB or more, for Windows 2000: 256MB or
more recommended)
> HDD: 500MB or more space left (1GB or more space left recommended)
Related external systems
The server, to which documents are delivered, should be as follows:
> Microsoft Exchange 5.0 or later

> Lotus Notes 4.5x or later (except 4.57,4.58)
> Microsoft mail 3.51 or later
> SMTP/POP server
The following software should be installed on the delivery server (for building the
delivery environment) when using the following functions:
[MAPI mail delivery]
> Windows Messaging (when using Windows NT 4.0)

> Outlook 2000 or later (when using Windows 2000)
[Lotus Notes R5 mail delivery]
> Lotus Note client software
Supported Machines
ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) will support every machine that ScanRouter Professional &
ScanRouter V2 Professional supported. Some new machines have also been added:
> DMR22/27
> E99 + Internet Fax Option
> SMR30dc + NIC Option
> DMR35A/45A
> DMR22A/27A/32A
> PCR38 (with Copier/Scanner function)
> DMR60/75
> CCR081/101
Future Models (when launched)
DMR35B/45B
DMR90B/105B
DMR22B/27B/32B
The maximum number of machines that can be connected to the delivery server at the
same time are as follows:
>ScanRouter V2 Lite (v2) 2

>ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) 16*
* In ScanRouter V2 Pro, the specification of the maximum number of connected

machines was 32. ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) still supports 32 connected machines.
However, Ricoh recommended 16 machines in practice, due to performance factors
on the PC server.
Data Delivery Method

There are several different methods of delivering data included with ScanRouter V2
Pro (v2). They are as follows:
In Tray save
Send by MAPI mail
Send by SMTP mail
Send by Notes R5 mail
Save as Windows file
Delivering Data to the In-tray
*Account set-up (the number of accounts that can be set up)
The total number of accounts in ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) is identical to that of

ScanRouter V2 Pro. This number does not include the number of built-In trays, for
example, Fax in-trays or undelivered data trays.
* Account is the central database of user information, which ScanRouter V2 Pro

(v2) maintains in the Main Destination List (e.g. Each users address book
information, brought from Notes global address book)
Put check in the box only for

users who want to use the In-
tray save function
[Reference]
The total number of accounts is as follows:
ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2): 400 (Destination: 200, Sender: 200)
Delivering MAPI mail
Supported versions
The versions of the mail systems supported by the MAPI mail delivery function has
been updated as follows:
[When installing on Windows 2000 Server]
Mail Server MAPI Mail environment Mail client software

Microsoft Exchange Sever Microsoft Outlook 2000 or Microsoft Outlook 2000 or
5.0/5.5/2000 later later
Lotus Notes 4.5x or later Microsoft Outlook 2000 or Lotus Notes 5.03 or later
(except 4.56 and 4.57) later
Microsoft Mail Server Microsoft Outlook 2000 -
[When installing on Windows NT Server]
Mail Server MAPI Mail environment Mail client software

Microsoft Exchange Sever Windows Messaging Microsoft Exchange Client
5.0 5.0 or Microsoft Outlook
97/98/2000/2002
Microsoft Exchange Sever Windows Messaging Microsoft Outlook 2000 or
5.5/2000 later
Lotus Notes 4.5x or later Windows Messaging Lotus Notes 4.52 or later
(except 4.56 and 4.57) (except 4.56 and 4.57)
Microsoft Mail Server Windows Messaging -
Lotus Notes 5.xx or later is not supported by the MAPI mail delivery function; it is
supported by the Notes R5 mail delivery function (See below).
[Restriction]
1. The MAPI component of Office XP does not support Microsoft Mail.

2. If mail is delivered through the MAPI and the Lotus Notes 4.5x setting is
contained in the profile, Notes R5 mail delivery function cannot be guaranteed.
In addition, the automatic detection and alarm raising function to be performed by
the installer are not supported.
Delivering SMTP Mail
Dividing data
When sending a large-size document or a document containing many pages, data is

divided as shown below.
>Dividing files (one mail for one file)

>Dividing sizes (to be specified in increments of one Kbytes. The default is
2MB and the set-up range is to 10240KB)
After the function of dividing data is selected in the SMTP delivery setting, it works
for all systems. It can be selected or changed during installation or by choosing this
function from the delivery-type options shown in the Administration utility.
[Note]
Size division complies with RFC** and the receiving end must use MUA** that has a
function for reorganizing divided mail.
**RFC (Request for comment): An official document issued from IETF, which
provides the standard of Internet technology.
**MUA (Mail User Agent): It is also known as E-mail software or Mail client.
Ad Hoc e-mail address entry
Ad Hoc e-mail address entry is supported from CCR081/101 and DMR60/75. If

email is to be delivered to multiple addresses, the delivery of the email to one address
is executed as one job. Therefore, [To: and Cc:] is not supported.
[Note]
The Scan to email function, which is standard on the CCR081/101 and DMR60/75
scanner option will support multi-destination delivery (To: and Cc:).
Confirming receipt
Deposition-Notification - To: (mail address of an account designated as a sender) is

inserted into the SMTP mail header of each job. It is inserted when an operator selects
the option on the operation panel.
[Note]
> SR V2 Pro (v2) delivery server only inserts the header to the mail, and does not
affect logging or any other functions.
> Confirming receipt is useless if the receiving end MUA cannot process the above
header.
Pop before SMTP
Pop before SMTP is now supported. It can be selected or changed during installation
or by choosing this function from delivery-type options shown in the Administration
utility.
SMTP authentication
SMTP authentication is now supported. It can be selected or changed during

installation or by choosing this function from delivery-type options shown in the
Administration utility.
Delivering Data to Windows file
Name of generated file
The name of a file generated by ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) is determined according to

the following rule:
{Sender name_YYYYMMDDhhmmss_NNN (an extension of the application)}

YYYYMMDDhhmmss is the date number and NNN is the page number.
Lotus Notes R5 mail delivery
Attached document
A document is attached according to the same rules that are used for SMTP delivery.
Attaching thumbnail data
Thumbnail data on attached files can be used. If multiple documents, such as multi-
page TIFFs or PDF format are integrated into one file, thumbnail data of the first page
can be attached.
Referring to the address book
The following address books can be referenced:
> An open address book in the Lotus Domino Server

> A personal address book that is created during installation of the Notes
client. Refer to an address book, input a name, and perform a search on
address.
Required initial settings
The following information must be typed when selecting a delivery type:
> Notes ID file to use

> Password for the above Notes ID file
Supported versions
> Lotus Notes/Domino version 5.x or later is supported.

> Lotus Notes version 4.5x is supported by the MAPI delivery function.
Difference from MAPI mail delivery function
> MAPI software is not required

> Thumbnail data of scanned image can be attached
> Entry of a password is requested only when setting the delivery type.
[Notes]
It is necessary to install Notes client on the delivery server (Version 5.x or later).
When installing a Notes client, the Notes ID for ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) is required.
In addition, the same ID must be used when using Notes R5 DB delivery function.
>Version 5.x or later must be used for a Lotus Domino server.

>MAPI mail delivery function cannot co-exist on the same server.
Changes to address books
Mapping the account to the address book
To map accounts into the address book, use the dialog box in the Administration
Utility that allows you to perform a search on accounts and narrow down search
results. Enter a specified character string and perform a search on the following using
the partial match method:
> Account name

> Names and comments
If an account is to be mapped on the Built-in address book, a 3 digit short ID will be

automatically assigned from an unused number. The assigned 3 digit short ID is
changeable. When the designated number is already used in other accounts in the
same address book, the account and short ID should be changed.
If account is to be mapped on the Ordinary address book, an account ID must be

copied to a short ID. If that number is already used in the Ordinary address book, an
unused number will be automatically assigned. A short ID can be modified using the
same procedure that is used in the compatible address book.
Backup and restoring of the address book
The backup and the restoring of the address book will be made at the same time as the
account backup and restore. The import and export function from ScanRouter V2 Pro
is no longer available.
Automatic notification of an updated Address Book
Automatic notification is a new feature. The updated address book data can now be
transmitted from the server to the machine. The address book of the machine can
therefore be updated in real time. This function will be supported from CCR081/101
and DMR60/75 machines onward.
Other new features
Fax port sorting
The function of assigning Fax in-trays to each port has been added (this function only
applies to GW supported machines). Any user in-tray can be assigned as a fax in-
trays for each port. This setting is made at I/O device settings. The fax in-tray is
identical to in-tray and, therefore, it is possible to use various additional delivery
settings. The only difference is that the built-in fax in-tray cannot be removed.
Backup of the incoming faxes
The data of each fax in-tray can be backed up to a specified account. The number of
specified accounts in which incoming fax data can to be saved is one per system.
Changes in address books
Addition of the account view (Main Destination List)
Within the ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2), there are only two lists, the Main Destination
List & Standard Destination/Sender List.
The maximum number of accounts, which can be registered in the Main Destination
List, is 400. The following information will be shown in the right pain of the Main
Destination List.
Name
Destination ID
Name 1
Comment
Delivery Type
Default Mail Type
Default Mail Address
The maximum number of users accounts that can to be shown in the right window at
one time is 250.
Address book
Product Maximum destination inside one Total account which the

address book delivery server can hold
ScanRouter V2 200 400 (200 destination and
Pro (v2) 200 sender address book)
ScanRouter V2 100 200 (100 destination and
Lite (v2) 100 sender address book)
Registering an email address book from the MFP HDD
The email address book inside the MFP (CCR081/101, DMR60/75) HDD can be
copied into ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2). The top 200 will be registered in this case.
Automatic backup
After the delivery service is temporarily suspended at specified dates and times, all
data will be backed up, by overwriting to a specified location.
Required set-up conditions are:
> Directory (on a server) to where data is saved

> Day of the week (Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thru, Fri and Sat.)
The task of data saving starts right after the night time maintenance is over. Data is
saved at specified times even if the delivery service is off at such specified times.
Automatic backup cannot be suspended and all events invoked using the
Administration Utility or various external tools are ignored.
The following information will be backed up and stored to the delivery server HDD
automatically:
> Account information

> Address book
> Title
> Documents waiting inside in-trays
> All the other settings made in the system (e.g. I/O device settings, mail
settings, etc.)
[Note]
Backups can also be made manually from the Administration Utility on the server
The following backup can be made manually from the Administration Utility,
running on a remote PC. Data is then stored to the PC HDD where the
Administration Utility is operating.
> Account information

> Address book
> Title
[Limitation]
During the automatic backup, delivery services will be stopped temporarily and, at
this time, users may not able to access the delivery server from the Administration
Utility
When accessing the delivery server from the Administration Utility at the time
that automatic backup is set, automatic backup will not be executed
When the client software (e.g. DeskTopBinder V2) is accessing the in-tray,
synchronization with the directory server will not be executed
Backup tool
When using the backup tool, commercially available backup software can be used to
produce backups of documents inside the in-trays and the system settings.
Delivery of the EXE program
By invoking this EXE program using argument attached, various backup tasks can be
executed. Results of a task executed are given returned values that can be referenced
from a batch program.
EXE name: DdsLaunch.exe
Supported backup software
The backup tool itself is a simple tool that stops and starts the delivery service. Before
or after a backup task is executed, the backup tool can be used along with the type of
software that can invoke an external EXE. However, performance can be guaranteed
only for the following backup software. (OS is NT 4.0 and 2000)
> ARCserve2000 Workgroup Edition

> Backup Exec for Windows NT/Windows 2000
EXE Arguments and Operation
It is possible to call with optional argument
Argument Result Returned value

/ Start The status of current delivery service is 0: Operating
acquired 1:Idle
2:Backup task being
executed
3:Maintenance task being
executed
100:Failure (error)
101:Status unknown
/ Prepare The status of current delivery service is 0:Success
put in memory and preparations for the
start of a backup task are made. This 100: Failure
argument can produce a successful result 101: Failure (unauthorized)
only if the status is operating or idle.
/ Finish The end of a backup task executed is 0: Success
notified to a server. The status of delivery
service is returned to the status that is put 100: Failure (error)
in memory using /Prepare.
/ FinStop The end of a backup task executed is 0: Success
notified to a server. Delivery service is
brought to a stop. 100: Failure (error)
/ FinStart The end of a backup task executed is 0: Success
notified to a server. Delivery service is
turned into ready-to-start conditions. 100: Failure (error)
* If MAPI mail is used. A log-on prompt
might occur and control over the status
might be lost. (The user is responsible for
this.)
/ Force / Force is used along with /FinXXX Always zero
It ignores an error and force the status to
change
[Note]
If the EXE program is invoked using / prepare when delivery service is Starting,
MAPI-related modules continue operating. If MAPI-related tasks are suspended, log-
on prompts would be posted to the Exchange Server or Notes Server when the
execution of MAPI-related tasks resumes. Therefore, a special status results: delivery
service is suspended while a server itself is operating (a temporary halt is shown).
In this status, the following limitation occurs:
Incoming fax delivery cannot be stopped when using non-GW machine in MAPI
environment. Received data remains in a spool area (system disk) of MAPI without
being processed; it is on standby to be retrieved by a delivery server.
However, disk access to a spool area on the side of MAPI cannot be stopped
completely. Therefore, the directories containing the OS and ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2)
installation directory must be partitioned.
Logs
Scan (Scanned Images)
> Logged (Indicates the date and time when the item was added to the log)
> Device (Indicates the I/O device)
> Sender
> Delivered (Indicates the date and time when the item was delivered)
> Delivery type
> Destination (When the delivery was made by ad hoc scan to email, the mail
address will be shown)
> Subject
> Item name
> Data Size (KB)
> Pages
> Original Size
> Resolution
> Status (Possible values are Delivered and Error)
Fax (Incoming Faxes)
> Sender
> Delivery type
> Destination
> Fax delivering ID
> Item name
> Data Size (KB)
> Pages
> Paper Width
> Image Quality
> Reception Port
Document Delivery Log (Documents placed in the Delivery Server from

DeskTopBinder)
> Sender
> Address for reply
> Delivery type
> Destination
> Item name
> Data Size (KB)
> Number of sections
Upgrades and Compatibility
New version Existing version Explanation

SR V2 Pro (v2) delivery Administration Utility Not compatible
server (1.xx)
DeskTopBinder V2 > Only in-trays
Professional (same as DTB V2 Pro x)
> With regards to
destination of delivery from
DeskTopBinder V2 Pro,
only the destination inside
the built-in address can be
seen (All accounts can be
seen by DTB V2 Pro x)
ScanRouter V2 Link > Only in-trays
(same as v2)
Administration Utility No problem
(v2) ScanRouter V2
ScanRouter V2 Link (v2) Professional No problem
Address book import from older versions
(Destination) address book export file (ScanRouter Pro / ScanRouter V2 Pro)
The account will be made when restoring. If there is an account with the same name,
then data in the account is not processed. If there is an account having the same value
as that of a Fax delivery ID, then it too is not processed. After the account is
generated, data is mapped on a built-in address book (for destination).
Sender address book export file (ScanRouter V2 Pro)
The account will be made when restoring. Only the senders information will be
restored. Errors occurring during the account generation are handled in the same way
as they are for the destination. After an account is generated, data is mapped on a
built-in address book (for sender).
TSI export file (ScanRouter Pro / ScanRouter V2 Pro)
The TSI import function of the ScanRouter V2 Pro (v2) is used to import files. If
there is a TSI of the same value, data in this TSI is not processed. If there is no
account to which data is to be delivered, select the [Do not deliver] option to import
data.
Languages
The following languages are supported:
ScanRouter V2 Professional v2 & Lite v2: English, French, German and Italian
WHAT FITS WHAT
Product Code: Description:

DSWSCANRV2A ScanRouter V2 Professional v2
We recommend that ScanRouter V2 Professional v2 and DeskTopBinder V2

Professional v2 are sold to the customer together, as one package (with the
appropriate number of DeskTopBinder licences). In this way, the customer can gain
the full benefits of a complete solution, rather than a partial one.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
Web SmartNetMonitor
Software Product
Workgroup Network Print Management
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Launch Month
April, 2003

Version 2
April, 2003
Web SmartNetMonitor
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Basic Structure of Web SmartNetMonitor 13

tenders etc, please contact NRGI Guernsey for confirmation of
K:\Customer\Technic\NPSDOC\New Pending Approval\DSWEBSNM.doc

1
Web SmartNetMonitor
INTRODUCTION
Web SmartNetMonitor, as our latest web solution, forms part of our new integration into the web
solution business. It enables us to match market trends and remain competitive.
Proliferation of the Internet as the information highway has been a significant contributor towards
the globalization of business enabling organizations to operate anywhere - anytime.
The World Wide Web is not only used for e-commerce, e-mail and as an information source, the
Internet is now used as the medium to run software applications. The attraction of this medium is
obvious in its worldwide use, easy access and acceptance as a common part of everyday life, both
business and personal.
The trend towards web solutions is moving at tremendous speed, allowing remote and local users to
have access to the same software. This, in combination with the fact that the software application
no longer needs to be installed on PCs, means that maintenance and network stability are not
compromised as they have been in the past.
NRG need to have a solution for accounts both large and small alike. The web is a recognized
standard, especially for large accounts that can have thousands of devices to be managed. With this
in mind, NRG is introducing Web SmartNetMonitor.
Web SmartNetMonitor is our new web-based network device management software providing
similar functionality to SmartNetMonitor for Admin. This portal also provides users with
information via a PC web browser without having to install any software on the end users PC. They
simply need the URL of the Web SmartNetMonitor Server to access device information.

2
Web SmartNetMonitor
PRODUCT OVERVIEW & MAIN FEATURES
Web SmartNetMonitor is comparable in functionality to SmartNetMonitor for Admin. The

significant difference is that Web SmartNetMonitor is a web based software application that runs on
the web server. In other words, the software is installed on a server and uses the web browser as the
medium for Administrators and end users.
In summary the main features of Web SmartNetMonitor are:
- Installation / Uninstallation
- Device discovery
- Group management
- User security
- Device management
- Notification
System Outline of Web SmartNetMonitor and Input/Output (I/O) Products
Web SmartNetMonitor V1.0 Server

Printer MFP
Server
Client PC
Router / Internet
Printer / Competitive Products
Client PC MFP
Printer
Red lines indicate the data flow between Web SmartNetMonitor and I/O products regarding Device
Discovery and Configuration (both inside/outside of the network segment.
Blue lines indicate the data flow between Web SmartNetMonitor and Client PC regarding data
display through the web browser (both inside/outside of the segment - Router or Internet).

3
Web SmartNetMonitor
Web SmartNetMonitor and SmartNetMonitor (for Admin) will run in parallel, with the aim that
Web SmartNetMonitor will eventually replace SmartNetMonitor for Admin to focus on web based
solutions in the future.
As a web based solution, Web SmartNetMonitor will possess much of the functionality of
SmartNetMonitor for Admin and a number of new features. Hereon, the major similarities and
differences to SmartNetMonitor for Admin will be explained.
As mentioned, Web SmartNetMonitor is planned to replace SmartNetMonitor for Admin in the

future and is thus positioned as a web based piece of software that is utilised as a device
management portal for administrators.
Web SmartNetMonitor can automatically discover devices on the network via the web (only using
TCP/IP). When there is a change in status of a device installed on the network, this is
communicated via a pop-up and e-mail notification according to the priority of the change in status.
The software is easily installed onto the web-server (server does not need to be dedicated).
Web SmartNetMonitor, as with SmartNetMonitor for Admin, allows the administrator to configure
the device from their desktop regardless of where on the network the device is located.
In a similar style to SmartNetMonitor, Web SmartNetMonitor is divided into two major modules:
1. Server:
This module consists of various types of server functions, which manage the server itself,
database and I/O products. The majority of the management is completed at the Back End
Server for Device Management.
2. Client:
This module provides service for PC clients through the web browser.

4
Web SmartNetMonitor
PRODUCT POSITIONING
Web SmartNetMonitor is positioned as a web-based successor for the current SmartNetMonitor.

Compared to the current SmartNetMonitor series, Web SmartNetMonitor will also enable us to
enter into larger business and to compete with our competitors at a higher level.
Internal Positioning:
DeskTopBinder
Doc-Q-Manager
e Cabinet
Velocity
Document
and Network
Information Print Web SmartNetMonitor
Management Management
and
Control
Print Observer
Document PC&SM
Solutions
Forms Document
Processing Distribution
Workflow
Formscape
ScanRouter Pro
Forms 5 ScanRouter V2 Pro
Target Users:
SmartNetMonitor Web SmartNetMonitor

Target Users: Small to Middle Large
Distribution: Bundled with Machine Downloadable from Internet
Target users are:
o Users who manage all devices throughout the network, remotely, without using any
specific software (IT Administrators etc.)
o Large Account Users / Major Accounts

5
Web SmartNetMonitor
Web SmartNetMonitor does not possess the ACM (Aficio Counter Manager) that SmartNetMonitor
for Admin has and therefore Web SmartNetMonitor will not have the functionality to count and
record page counts but can retrieve status information on the functions.
This helps us differentiate between Web SmartNetMonitor and SmartNetMonitor for our internal
positioning and thus our sales and marketing efforts in this area.
Target Customers & Channels:
Web SmartNetMonitor is targeted at our large / major accounts in order for us to compete more
successfully with the likes of HP and Canon. The current SmartNetMonitor product is targeted
more towards the small to medium-sized organization.
Web SmartNetMonitor will eventually be the successor for SmartNetMonitor for Admin, although
the two products will run parallel initially.
Web SmartNetMonitor, although effective in the smaller organizations, provides huge benefits for
the large organization with a vast number of printing devices to manage, particularly for
administrators who need to manage devices remotely as they sit outside of the LAN/WAN.
Web SmartNetMonitor Number of organizations

that have:
Centralised printing
Divisional printing
Numbers
of employees /
devices Large workgroup printing
Small workgroup printing
Business / Personal printing
SmartNetMonitor

6
Web SmartNetMonitor
This diagram highlights that Web SmartNetMonitor is targeted for an organization with a large
number of employees printing on a large number of devices. However, also note that Web
SmartNetMonitor can be appropriately placed in smaller companies or for smaller workgroups.
Target Customers Summary:
Web SmartNetMonitor is targeted at IT / Network Administrators who manage all printing

devices over the network (LAN and WAN).
Web SmartNetMonitor is also targeted at administrators / users who wish to manage a
defined part of the networked print environment.
Web SmartNetMonitor is targeted at end users who wish to manage a number of NRG
devices installed on the network.
Channels:
Web SmartNetMonitor will be primarily targeted at major accounts, but also at direct
and indirect channels, and will be available for download via the Internet on a free of
charge basis.
Note: There is a difference of delivery between Web SmartNetMonitor and the Current
SmartNetMonitor.
PLEASE NOTE: registration will be required when downloading Web SmartNetMonitor.
As mentioned above, Web SmartNetMonitor will be delivered through the web. The only
difference between current Print Drivers or Utilities and Web SmartNetMonitor is that we will be
asking end-users to register some of their information when downloading it from the web.
This is the same way as we deliver Plug-In (Tivoli/CA Unicenter TNG/HP Open View), UNIX
Filters and SAP R3 Device Types.
Current SmartNetMonitor/Aficio Manager 3.5/PortNavi/MDP:
Current utilities may also be downloaded via the web but no registration is required (the same as
our current Printer Driver delivery).

7
Web SmartNetMonitor
Product Selling Points:
Enables quick and easy installation of NRG networked devices

Simple configuration of devices from the server
Web-browser based is a recognized standard for organizations
No installation of software on end users PCs
Management of the local network and wide area networked devices
Error notification to user via e-mail enhanced status information to improve knowledge of
printing problems
Log of printing errors for analysis and action
User security settings to define access of users
Suitable for the smaller workgroup up to the large corporate environment
Windows operating system based, using TCP/IP over the Internet
Flexibility to modify settings for different profile users
Easy addition of devices to current networked printing environment as defined by Web
SmartNetMonitor

8
Web SmartNetMonitor
Product Advantages Compared to Current Products:
Web SmartNetMonitor is mainly designed for administrators who manage large numbers of devices
throughout the network. The biggest advantage over the existing product line is that Web
SmartNetMonitor does not require extra software installation onto Client PCs but only to enter a
specified URL of the Web SmartNetMonitor server in order to retrieve device information.
In addition, Web SmartNetMonitor can manage all devices remotely, even if the administrator is
off-site.
Web SmartNetMonitor HP WebJetAdmin SmartNetMonitor for

Admin
Installation Uninterrupted flow Uninterrupted flow Uninterrupted flow
Device Discovery Devices can be Devices can be discovered Devices can be
discovered over the over the network by discovered over the
network by broadcast and broadcast and ping. network by broadcast
ping. and ping.
Group Management Yes, 1000 groups on a Yes, 1000 groups on Yes, 1000 groups on a
single domain several domains single domain
Error notification e-mail 500 logs e-mail 100 logs N/A
NIC configuration Yes via NIB set up tool Yes Yes via NIB set up tool
Multiple device settings Yes Yes N/A
Protocol support TCP/IP TCP/IP & IPX/SPX TCP/IP & IPX/SPX
Platform support Windows NT Windows NT, Linux Windows 9x and
Windows NT
Browser support NetScape and Internet NetScape and Internet N/A
Explorer Explorer
User security Admin, Power User & Admin and User Admin
User
Print queue creation N/A Yes N/A
Print driver download support N/A N/A N/A
Firmware download N/A Yes N/A
Upgrading device N/A Yes N/A
Non NRG device support Yes, via Standard MIB. Yes, via standard MIB Yes, via standard MIB
Enable / Disable DHCP Yes Yes Yes
Languages Multiple language Yes (individual language Yes (all bundled in one
support all on one versions exist) version)
version
Print queue settings for Yes via NIB set up tool Yes Yes via NIB set up tool
NetWare server
Number of devices to be 1000 500 (TBC) 1000
managed
Trap support Yes Yes N/A
Technical Manual Yes Yes N/A
Help Yes Yes Yes
Install Manual Yes Yes N/A

9
Web SmartNetMonitor
From this comparison we can see the areas where Web SmartNetMonitor will compete more
effectively with WebJetAdmin in contrast to the current SmartNetMonitor for Admin software.
Furthermore, the plan is for future releases of Web SmartNetMonitor to possess increased
functionality compared to WebJetAdmin.
The above comparison is a useful tool but we should be aware that there are a number of other
competitive products on the market: Lexmarks MarkVision, Canons NetSpot, Xeroxs
CentreWare and Sharps Admin Utility.
Remarks:
The following are issues we would like to draw attention to:
o Upgrades from current SmartNetMonitor series to Web SmartNetMonitor:

Since Web SmartNetMonitor is different software compared to the current
SmartNetMonitor, SmartNetMonitor for Admin will not be replaced by Web
SmartNetMonitor.
Also, Web SmartNetMonitor and SmartNetMonitor for Admin work concurrently when
both are installed in the same PC or Server.
There is no need to uninstall SmartNetMonitor for Admin when installing Web

SmartNetMonitor.
o Software Versions of Web SmartNetMonitor:

The software version of Web SmartNetMonitor will begin from 1.x.
o Network Load of Web SmartNetMonitor:

Network loads regarding Web SmartNetMonitor are currently TBA.

10
Web SmartNetMonitor
Required PC Specifications:
Hardware: Specifications of PC (Server PC):

CPU 500MHz or higher - Pentium II Compatible
Install Image Volume *1 Around 54MB
HDD Volume *2 500MB of available Hard Disk space before installation
400MB of Hard Disk space minimum when running Web
SmartNetMonitor V1.0
Memory (RAM) 256MB RAM minimum
Operating Systems: Specifications required on Server PC / Client PC:

Server PC:
Windows NT 4.0 Server: Service Pack 6 or later
Windows 2000 Server / Advanced: Server Service Pack 2 or later
Client PC:
Windows 95 / 98 / 98SE / Millennium
Windows NT 4.0 Workstation / Server *3: Service Pack 6 or later
Windows 2000 Professional / Server / Advanced Server *4: Server
Service Pack 2 or later
Windows Xp (Home & Professional Edition)
NOTE: Web SmartNetMonitor does NOT support the following Operating
Systems as a server platform:
Windows 3.x & Windows NT 3.x
All Mac Operating Systems
UNIX, LINUX and any Solaris Systems
All other types of operating system not mentioned above
Protocol: Specifications required on both Server PC / Client PC:

Server PC / Client PC:
TCP/IP has to be installed and configured
NOTE: Web SmartNetMonitor does NOT support IPX/SPX
Browsers: Specifications required for Client PC:

Microsoft Internet Explorer: Applicable versions 4.01 or higher
Netscape Navigator: Applicable versions 4.7x.
NOTE: Version 6.x is NOT supported
*1: Amount of volume when downloaded from web sites (.zip files)
*2: Amount of volume needed when installing / running software into PC
*3: Administration Privilege is required when installing Web SmartNetMonitor onto Server
*4 : Web SmartNetMonitor is not applicable for any Terminal Server Editions

11
Web SmartNetMonitor
Required Input / Output (I/O) Products Specifications:
MIB *1: Supported MIBs:

Standard MIB: Printer MIB based on RFC 1759 *2
Host Resource portion based on RFC 1759
Indicates status information of:
Tray information input and output
Printer languages names and versions
Network I/F details of NIC, IP address, Subnet Mask and Node
address
Private MIB: RICOH MIB
All RICOH unique portions such as:
Hardware System Details of Hardware, Model Names, Total
Counter
Function Details of each unique function, varied by the option(s)
added to the machine, Duplex, Thick Paper printing *3 etc
Interfaces: 10/100MB Ethernet (802.x.x compatible)

Wireless LAN devices (802.x.x compatible)
IP Over 1394
NOTE: Web SmartNetMonitor does NOT support the following interfaces:
TokenRing Interface
RS232C Interface
IEEE1284parallel
Any other interfaces not mentioned above
*1: All information is embedded in the Controller and NIC/NIB of each I/O Product
*2 : One of the categories of worldwide MIB standards
*3 : Information depends on what kinds of option(s) are connected to the I/O Products

12
Web SmartNetMonitor
BASIC STRUCTURE AND OPERATION OF

Web SmartNetMonitor
Web SmartNetMonitor consists of the following modules:
Name of Module: Functions:

Web SmartNetMonitor: Base Utility:
Manages all the devices found throughout the network
Discovers all the devices throughout the network
- RICOH (including OEM) and competitive products
Group Management of the found I/O Products
NIB Set-up Tool: Configuration of NIB when found in the network
Changes NIB settings of the I/O Products
WebStatusMonitor Link Boots WebStatusMonitor function of the I/O Products in order to
Software *1: retrieve information of I/O Products
- Only devices that support WebStatusMonitor function
Database *1: SQL Server base
Saves all device information retrieved from Web SmartNetMonitor
software
Web Server *1: Enables input/output to Client PC via web browser
Servlet Engine *1: Management of the Servlet
*1: All of these modules are internal modules that support the base Web SmartNetMonitor
software. Details of these modules are mentioned later in this document.
Web SmartNetMonitor V1.2 supports 7 languages: English, German, French, Italian, Dutch,
Spanish and Japanese.
Functions of Web SmartNetMonitor v1.0:
Below are the main functions of Web SmartNetMonitor v1.0:
o Installation / Un-installation
o Device Discovery
o Group Management
o User Security
o Device Management
o Notification
1. Installation / Un-installation:
Installation / Un-installation is completed in one operation.
Note: Web SmartNetMonitor requires Administration Privilege when installed. It can

only be installed or uninstalled when the user is approved as an Administrator to the
particular Server (PC).

13
Web SmartNetMonitor
Web SmartNetMonitor cannot be upgraded from the current SmartNetMonitor for Admin. This
means that it cannot take over any Group Information when the user has been using the current
SmartNetMonitor for Admin.
Web SmartNetMonitor can be booted in two ways:
o Boot as a Service: Web SmartNetMonitor will be registered as a Service at default

after installation.
o Boot / Exit as an Independent Programme: Web SmartNetMonitor can also be started
or exited from the start menu.
Starting Web SmartNetMonitor (Log in):
Users must select or input the following information when logging in to Web
SmartNetMonitor:
o Log in Mode
o Password
o Language
Profiles:
It is necessary to verify the users level when operating Web SmartNetMonitor. It is

necessary to enter this information whenever logging in to Web SmartNetMonitor.

14
Web SmartNetMonitor

15
Web SmartNetMonitor
Password:
Web SmartNetMonitor requires the password to be input every time a user logs in.
Passwords can be set between 0 to 46 characters. Characters that may not be used for
passwords are indicated by U/I. Passwords can be changed in the Settings of Web
SmartNetMonitor.
Language:
Once a user selects the language, Web SmartNetMonitor memorizes this selected language.
The user does not need to select the language each time they log in, unless they wish to
change the language.
2. Device Discovery:
Web SmartNetMonitor is able to discover the devices that are connected on a network, using the
following methods:
o Ricoh I.O Products

o Ricoh (OEM) devices (NRG, SAVIN, Gestetner, Infotec and Lanier versions)
o Competitive I/O Products which have NICs that support Standard MIB
Note: Web SmartNetMonitor cannot retrieve information from the Private MIB
portion for competitive devices. This is due to the Web SmartNetMonitor specifications.

16
Web SmartNetMonitor
Setting of Device Discovery:
Device Discovery has to be set in advance at the Discovery in the tree on the left-hand
side:
Web SmartNetMonitor is able to discover devices that are connected on a network by the
following methods:
o Broadcasting via TCP/IP

o Ping Shower via TCP/IP
Broadcasting:
Device discovery through Local Segment (Default).

Device discovery outside of the Local Segment by specifying certain subnets.
Note: Segments can be set from 1 up to 255 segments. Discovering devices that
have no particular IP address is only possible when searching on the
Local Segment.
Ping Shower:
Device discovery can be set by specifying ranges (Specified ranges of IP addressees)

through the Local Segment, as well as outside the Segment.

17
Web SmartNetMonitor
Note: Device Discovery can be set by selecting either Broadcasting via TCP/IP
or Ping Shower via TCP/IP, or a combination of both.
Refresh:
Discovery settings can be set in several ways:
o Every day (default)

o Every week
o Every month
Timeout:
Timeout settings can be set within the range of 1 to 60 seconds (default is 3

seconds).
Community:
The Community name of SNMP used to access the device has to be typed in [Read
Community] and [Write Community]. Public is default.
The entered character string is displayed as *.
Note: When the setting or changing of the Discovery execution conditions has
been completed, Discovery is executed once regardless of the execution
schedule.
3. Results of Device Discovery:
The results of Device Discovery can be displayed as a list on a certain frame located on the
screen via the web browser:

18
Web SmartNetMonitor
Up to 1,000 (maximum number) devices can be listed for Web SmartNetMonitor. The
following items can be retrieved, based on the device information *1:
o Name of device *2
o IP address *2
o IP Host Name *2
o Model name (of device) *2
o Comments (of device) *2
o MAC address (of device) *2
o Model name of NIC
o Version of NIC
o Page Per Minute information
o Black & White or Colour (definition of device)
o Status of System
o Status of Copy
o Status of Printer
o Status of Fax
o Status of Scanner
o Total counter
o Latest Comm. time ( last updated time)
Notes:
*1: Not all listed items can be retrieved from a device
*2: These items are shown as default
Changing the Displayed Item:
To change the displayed items, select List Columns in the tree on the left:

19
Web SmartNetMonitor

20
Web SmartNetMonitor
Filtering of Devices by Item:
Users can narrow down the list of devices by using the same displayed items as a filter
(except Total Counter or Latest Comm. Time). This function enables the user to find and
manage devices easily.
Refresh of Results:
Users can refresh results for the following items:
o Refresh Selected: Updates the Web SmartNetMonitor database with the latest
information.
o Refresh List: Applies the contents of the updated database to the window.

21
Web SmartNetMonitor
Export of Discovery Results:
Lists of devices can be exported into a Comma Separated Variable (CSV) file, for reference.
4. Group Management:
Creating Groups:
Web SmartNetMonitor V1.0 can create up to 1,000 groups. Groups are located on the left-
hand side of the screen (frame) in a single tree (image of a single directory cannot create
multiple tree or sub-directories.
Note: Groups can be supported up to 10 layers by Web SmartNetMonitor V1.2.
Up to 1,000 devices in total can be registered, regardless of the number of groups.

22
Web SmartNetMonitor
Groups can be created, deleted and renamed and the following information can be set:
o Password *1
o Notification Settings of e-mail *2
*1: When a password is set for a particular Group, password entry is required when the user
tries to delete or rename that Group.
*2: Notification settings will be fully explained in their own section in this document.
Adding Devices to a Group:
Devices can be added to the Group from the Device List by selecting the device and
applying [Add Device].
5. User Security:
Access Privileges:
Users can be verified for the following access privileges (Profiles) when using Web
SmartNetMonitor:
o Administrator
o User
Each Profile requires an individual password when logging into Web SmartNetMonitor.
Administrator:
Users can operate both Web SmartNetMonitor and I/O Products. Users who administrate
the entire system and I/O Products should use this profile.

23
Web SmartNetMonitor
User:
Users are only able to operate devices. Users who do not manage any system (network) but
wish to control devices on the network should use this profile.
6. Device Management:
Devices can be listed at each Group and the items that can be managed for each device are as per
the list under the section on Results of Device Discovery.
Monitoring Interval for Devices:
The Monitoring Interval can be set from 1 minute up to 24 hours (1,440 minutes). The
default is set at 60 minutes.
The waiting response time of devices can also be set from 1 to 60 seconds. The default is 3
seconds.

24
Web SmartNetMonitor
Reset and Energy Saving ON/OFF:
Reset, Energy Saving and Energy Saving OFF can be set for each device by selecting from
the Tool Menu.
7. Notification:
Web SmartNetMonitor notifies users by e-mail when the following issues occur on devices:
o Call Service Centre (Service Call xxx) *1

o No Toner / Ink
o Paper Misfeed
o No Paper
o Cover Open
o Other Error(s) *2
o Offline
o Toner Almost Empty
o Alert *3
*1: The items listed above are the ones that Web SmartNetMonitor recognizes from the
device. Wordings may differ slightly, since each device has its own recognition of its
status.
*2: Other Error(s) stands for errors that are critical to the device and have to be solved in
order for the device to continue operating.
*3: Alert stands for errors that are not critical to the device but which it is recommended be
solved to ensure efficient operation of the device (errors that are not mentioned in the
above list).

25
Web SmartNetMonitor
Notification Settings:
As mentioned above, Web SmartNetMonitor will notify the user / PC, by e-mail, of the
above items. Here, details about the setting of notification in Web SmartNetMonitor will be
explained.
Notification is enabled in the following way:

26
Web SmartNetMonitor
Web SmartNetMonitor only allows notification by Group and not by device. Therefore,
devices should be added into a Group in order to obtain notification.
o Users can enable / disable notification settings

o Users can select items (as listed previously) to be notified of from a particular Group
o Users can select e-mails to be notified by each Group
e-mail Settings:
Users can only use To for e-mails, no cc copies can be sent and the same rule applies
for notifications by e-mail from Web SmartNetMonitor.
Web SmartNetMonitor can send e-mails via an SMTP Server and users can receive e-mails
from Web SmartNetMonitor via the SMTP Server.
Note: e-mail setting has to be completed before using e-mail notification.
Contents of Notification by e-mail:
As mentioned above, Web SmartNetMonitor will notify users when the following situations
occur:
o When a particular Group has been selected for notification

o Items for notification have been selected (from the earlier list of options)
o At least one e-mail address has been selected for the sending of notification

27
Web SmartNetMonitor
8. NIB Set-up Tool:
Web SmartNetMonitor can also configure devices throughout the network by using the NIB
Set-up Tool.

28
Web SmartNetMonitor
Common Limitations to Web SmartNetMonitor:

Web SmartNetMonitor does NOT support E300 and E650. It only supports EFI products from
E800A onwards (as does the current SmartNetMonitor series).
Web SmartNetMonitor will be able to retrieve status information from competitive products
such as HP, Lexmark etc., based on their standard MIB portion (no access to their private
portion).
Note: NRGI cannot guarantee the status information that Web SmartNetMonitor
retrieves from competitive products (Ricoh OEM products are excluded, they
are treated the same as Ricoh products).
Reasons:
o Even though the competitors support standard MIB, what they support may differ from
what we support as standard MIB (this is because understandings of standard MIB differ
between companies).
o The status information of competitive products (including standard MIB portion) is their
properties. It is impossible for NRGI to guarantee that information.

29
Web SmartNetMonitor
Items: Web SmartNetMonitor WebJetAdmin 6.2 SmartNetMonitor
Admin V2.0
Installation Completed in a single Completed in a single Completed in a single
operation operation operation
Device Discovery Devices can be discovered Devices can be Devices can be discovered
over network segments discovered over network over network segments
(Broadcast and Ping) segments (Broadcast (Broadcast and Ping)
and Ping)
Group Yes Yes Yes
Management (1,000 Groups in a single (1,000 Groups in several (100 Groups in a single
domain) domains) domain, 200 devices per
Group)
Error Notification e-mail e-mail N/A
NIC Yes Yes Yes
Configuration (at NIB Set-up Tool) (at NIB Set-up Tool)
Multiple Device N/A Yes N/A
Settings
Support Protocol TCP/IP TCP/IP, IPX/SPX TCP/IP, IPX/SPX
Support Platform WinNT/2000 WinNT, Linux Win9x, WinNT
Support Browser Netscape 4.7 or higher Netscape -
I.E 4.01 or higher I.E.
User Security Admin & User Admin, User N/A
Print Queue N/A Yes N/A
Creation
Download N/A N/A N/A
Support of Printer
Driver
Firmware N/A Yes N/A
Download
Upgrading Device N/A Yes N/A
Printer Support Yes Yes Yes
(Competitive (via Standard MIB) (via Standard MIB) (via Standard MIB)
Devices)
Enable / Disable Yes Yes Yes
DHCP
Language Yes Yes Yes
Availability (Languages TBC) (each language version (all languages bundled into
exists) one module)
Print Queue Yes Yes Yes
Settings for (at NIB Set-up Tool) (at NIB Set-up Tool)
Netware Server
Manageable 1,000 500 (TBC) 1,000
Devices
TrapSupport Yes Yes N/A
Technical Manual Yes Yes N/A
Help Yes Yes Yes

30
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
PCSM V2.5
Printer Cost & Security Manager
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
First Production Production

Month Launch Date Location
April, 2001 September, 2001 Canada

Version 1
August, 2001
PCSM V2.5
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
- Objectives 2
Product Overview
- Introduction 3
- How does PCSM V2.5 work? 3
- The Core Components 4
- The Add-ons 7
- Product Features and Benefits 9
- Product Functions 11
- Supported Devices 13
- System Specifications 14
Market Situation
- Background 16
- Potential Market 17
- Competition 19
Target Customers and Channels

- Market Segments 23
- Business Drivers 24
- Sales Channels 25
What Fits What 27
Training 28

1
K:\Company\Market\NPS\PCSM_V2.5.doc
PCSM V2.5
INTRODUCTION
Printing costs are much higher than many companies realize. Web printing, the
proliferation of colour printing and unrestricted access to network printers are all
factors that are causing a rapid growth of printing costs. Hardcopy cost management
software is designed to help managers and administrators control printing and copying
costs by regulating and reducing hardcopy volumes, especially on high-cost printers.
By implementing such a system, an organization can easily save 15 to 20% of
hardcopy costs.
Printer Cost & Security Manager (PCSM) is an advanced network print tracking
solution that enables users to monitor, measure and manage all network printing and
copying activity.
PCSM:
Simplifies the management of printers and both digital and analogue copiers;
offers flexible methods to charge printing costs incurred by users and
offers a powerful solution for hardcopy Total Cost of Ownership management by
tracking usage patterns, collecting copier data, and helping to identify the costs
associated with printer and copier management.
PCSM V2.5 is an important product in the Network Printing Control & Management
Solutions range we offer. It fits seamlessly in NRGs strategy to offer our customers
a total solution for all of their document needs. It allows them to measure, manage,
allocate and charge output costs related to our (networked) output devices.
Additionally, PCSM can be used as a consultancy tool to help customers design their
optimal output strategy, maximising the utilisation of their network printing resources.
Objectives
The objectives for launching Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5 are:
To increase the number of (connected) NRG network printing devices installed in

the market;
To complement NRGs offering in the network printing range with a solution for
output cost management by facilitating control over network printing costs and
loads, facilitating control over copying costs and loads and offering a Total Cost
of Ownership model for network printing and copying;
To complement NRGs offering in vertical markets with a solution that fulfils a
requirement in those segment, where needed using specific additional
functionality like Client Billing, Secure Printing and/or Credit Printing;
Promote a consultative selling approach to increase connected Aficio product
sales by providing sales people with a powerful and professional consultancy
selling tool.
2
PCSM V2.5
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Introduction
Because networks often consist of a diverse collection of legacy hardware and
software, it is difficult to find an effective way of tracking and recovering print
resource costs.
Printer Cost & Security Manager (PCSM) V2.5 helps customers audit and manage the
cost of networked resources by tracking printer usage on an individual or group basis.
Also, it provides the infrastructure on which customers can build a secure
environment for managing sensitive documents.
Any automated accounting system must be able to identify consumers, measure

resource use, calculate costs and record transactions at the time of sale. A good
accounting system will also provide customers with an audit trail that classifies and
summarises data in a way that meets the information needs of their decision makers.
PCSM V2.5 performs these tasks, and more.
Printer Cost & Security Manager can accommodate a number of accounting models,
including strategies for quota and charge-back cost-recovery. Its administrator and
end-user features are designed for flexibility and ease-of- use.
Because PCSM fully integrates with the Windows printing subsystem, it provides a
secure environment for network printing. It monitors all use of networked resources,
prevents unauthorised users from accessing them and restricts use to administrator-
defined limits.
Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5 is a network printing management product that
manages hardcopy Total Cost of Ownership in multi- vendor and multi-platform
printing environments. The attributes it manages are hardcopy costs of network
printing, desktop printing, walk- up copying and stand-alone copying.
PCSM is a server-based modular application running on a Windows NT/2000 server,

while supporting also other network environments, like NetWare and Unix. As an
application, PCSM is very robust and scalable, ranging from a small installation
consisting of a single print-server and few network printers to large installations with
tens of multi-platform print servers, hundreds of network printers and thousands of
users.
How does Printer Cost & Security Manager 2.5 work?
PCSM is a server-based software consisting of several independent and co-operating

server components (Accounting Server service, SoftwareMetrics print monitor and the
accounts database). As a package, these components enable customers to measure,
monitor, manage, control and charge for printer usage on the network. PCSMs
distributed architecture is designed for scalability, robustness and low administrator
maintenance. The management applications offer centralised configuration of the
server components and an intuitive interface to the accounts database. Client software
3
PCSM V2.5
is not needed, although PCSM includes two end-user applications that can be added
on any network workstation. These applications allow users to query account
balances, assign billing codes and transfer funds.
The Core Components
The core components of PCSM (the Accounting Server service and the
SoftwareMetrics print monitor) are installed on the Windows NT/Windows 2000
server. The accounts database must be located on the accounting server.
The Accounting Server is a service that verifies users, calculates printing charges
and assigns those charges to an appropriate user or group account. Accounting
Server calculates charges using page count and job attribute information received
form the print monitor, along with printer cost defined by the administrator. It
then updates account balances and writes the transaction information to the
accounts database.
There is one database for each Accounting Server service. The database stores
all printer, user, department, billing code, transaction and balance information.
The database can be either a JET, SQL Server or Oracle database, although only
the JET-database comes as a standard with the package. The Accounts Manager
application is used to modify account and transaction information in the database.
This subset of the larger database is referred to as the accounts database.
The Software Metrics Print Monitor manages communications with the physical
printing devices on the network. It prevents unauthorised users from accessing the
printers without paying for their use. In addition, the print monitor counts the
number of pages in each print job, and assesses job attributes, such as colour,
page, size, so that this detailed information can be sent back to the Accounting
Server service. At the accounting server, accurate printing charges are calculated
from this data and charges are assigned to the proper account.
3. Print Monitor queries the

1. Print job is Accounting Server for valid user
initiated
Network account and sufficient funds.
Client On completion of the print job, the
print monitor will report that the
2. Print Monitor
job was successful.
Intercepts the
print data
Print
Monitor Accounting
Server (AS)
4. AS queries the
Not Authorized Database for all user
Authorized account information and
also records transaction
5. Based on the
information after a
Database successful print job.
Information found by
AS in the database,
the print job is either
sent to the printer, or
discarded.
4
PCSM V2.5
The server components work together in the following way:
The SoftwareMetrics Print Monitor performs the measuring function. It

communicates with the attached printers to determine the size and attributes of
each print job, then passes this information back to the Accounting Server.
Because the SoftwareMetrics print monitor is fully integrated with the Windows
printing environment, the result is high-accuracy page counts and high printing
throughput on the network.
The Accounting Server works with the print monitor to track the use of the
defined network printers . When a print request is received, the print monitor
checks with the Accounting Server to ensure that the user who sent the request has
a valid printing account. The Accounting Server, in turn, checks the accounts
database for the administrator-defined list of users with valid printing accounts.
Once the job has completed printing, the Accounting Server records use in the
accounts database.
All PCSM Accounting Server components work together to help customers

managing their print costs. PCSM can be set up to conform to a number of
accounting models. By setting up printing accounts for users and groups and
assigning to printers, customers can recover resources based on printer use.
Besides the server components, PCSM provides applications for managing network
printing. Two of these applications, System Manager and Accounts Manager, can be
installed on any server or workstation on your network. Cashier is designed for use
on a workstation with restricted access.
The System Manager is a tool for configuring and managing the PCSM
Accounting Server components and SoftwareMetrics Print Monitor.
System Manager has an interface similar to Windows Explorer, with expandable
and collapsible menus. While it is used mainly to configure system components
(like printer registrations, printer port configurations, selecting page count
methods and licensing), System Manager also allows customers to:
Assign costs to individual printers;

Create and assign printer charging schedules;
Select special no-charge and no-limit status for groups;
Customise user notification messages and pop-ups and
View event messages from the accounting server and the print monitor.
The Accounts Manager is a tool that allows customers to manage users,

departments, and billing code accounts in the accounts database, including the set
up of accounting rules and charging schedules for advanced job attribute charging.
It also includes a scheduling function that allows customers to set up recurring
events in the accounts database, such as account transactions, database archives
and automatic reports.
5
PCSM V2.5
PCSM V2.5 contains a comprehensive reporting facility, the Reports Manager,

which allows customers to produce reports on accounts, account activity and
printer use on a yearly, quarterly, monthly, bi-weekly, weekly, daily or custom
basis. Reports can be saved in HTML- format to make them accessible through a
web-browser. Customers can use these reports to recover costs, to identify
patterns of use by individuals or departments, or to identify the load on a
particular printing device. By generating a set of appropriate reports, customers
can demonstrate areas of organizational strength or system wide problems. The
tool displays a preview of the report allowing easy selection of the correct report,
with the column headers being customisable. When the administrator chooses to
execute a certain report, the Report Manager queries the database for the most
current information.
The Reports Customisation Tool allows administrators to change the look of the
reports. Report titles, window titles, headers, standard report page text, footers
and column headings can be customised to specific needs. A bitmap picture (such
as the customers logo) can also be included as a standard.
Aficio Counter Manager has been developed to provide the total output volume
(copy, print and fax) for the NRG Aficio-devices, per defined period, based on the
actual counter information. Also, Aficio Counter Manager feeds serial number
information back to the system, making it a va luable tool for organizations and/or
departments that are managing large installed bases of machines, even when they
are in separate locations (as long as these are connected through a Wide Area
Network).
Based on the data gathered by Aficio Counter Manager, 15 reports, not available
in the standard SoftwareMetrics PAS- version can be generated.
The Cashier is a small application that is designed for use by staff members who
have a role in managing account balances. Cashier allows customers to add and
subtract funds from user accounts.
Finally, there are workstation applications within PCSM, which can be installed on
the network workstations as necessary.
Desktop Printing : This tool is installed on the workstation to track printing to a

non-networked, local printer. The print job transaction is recorded in the database,
as if it were networked. This allows customers to include these desktop printers in
their charging and evaluation of print costs. With this feature, Client Billing (see
Add-ons) will also work on desktop printers. Desktop Printing is standard in the
NRG Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5, but is an option for the
SoftwareMetrics PAS-version.
The Client Tool is an end-user application that allows users to view their printing
account balances, transfer funds between printing accounts and select a default
billing code for their jobs.
6
PCSM V2.5
The Web Tool is also an end-user application, with which users can access their
accounts from remote workstations using a web browser. They can transfer funds
to another account, view their account balance and select a default billing code for
their print jobs.
Deposit Station: Deposit Station is a workstation add-on that allows network

users to deposit funds from an existing payment card system to a PCSM account.
Deposit Station has a simple interface and eliminates the need for staff to
supervise simple account deposits.
Analysis Toolkit: This is a powerful tool used to examine the data gathered by
Printer Cost & Security Manager. The toolkit allows customers or NRG Sales
Consultants to create scenarios and manipulate print variables to forecast changes
in printing behaviour, printing costs and usage rates. This will aid customers or
NRG Sales Consultants in designing a print strategy that will increase the
customer's efficiency. Alternative scenarios can be saved on disk, to allow off-site
analysis. There is also a separate, additional Analysis Tool that is NRG specific.
This additional tool can be used to investigate a customers output environment
further.
Deployment Tool: This tool allows NRG, as the provider and integrator of the
solution, to prepare the implementation and configuration of PCSM off-site. All
the accounts, billing codes, charging models, etc. can be prepared off-site and the n
installed at the customers site in one, easy operation, without much interruption
of a customers printing environment.
The Add-ons
Besides the core components, mentioned above, there are add-on software modules
that integrate with them. Each add-on is licensed separately.
In Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5 there are two categories of add-ons:
Print Servers: As a standard, Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5 supports one
Windows NT4, Windows 2000, Novell NetWare or Unix print server. In case a
customer wants to install additional print servers on his network, the Print Server
add-on is required.
By default, an Accounting Server is also a print server. However, an

administrator might choose to distribute the activity associated with network
printing depending on the number of users, physical layout of the network and
physical location of the print devices. Setting up remote print servers helps to
distribute network traffic, limit bottlenecks and increase response times. PCSM
printers may also be available through an Intranet or Internet connection.
7
PCSM V2.5
Services:
Client Billing Services: The Client Billing service is a client-server software

add-on that provides print-time billing code selection functionality. Client Billing
makes project resource management easy by prompting users to assign billing
codes when they print their document. Client Billing can be used when printing
from a Windows NT, Windows 2000 or Novell Netware environment, but not
with Unix print servers;
Macintosh Services: This service provides comprehensive printing management

services for mixed Windows-Macintosh environments. It eliminates the need for
third party software to ensure authenticated printing from Macintosh workstations
to the Windows server. Additionally, Macintosh Services allow customers to
assign printing costs to user accounts or billing codes at print time;
Secure Document Release Services: This module adds document control

capabilities on a print server where the SoftwareMetrics Print Monitor is installed.
When SDR is installed, documents sent to the print server are held in a proprietary
queue until they are released using one of two remote mechanisms: hardware
(NTS device) or software (Release Station, see below) and
NTS services: These services manage Network Transaction Station (NTS)

devices on a customers network. NTS devices are vending units that control
access to copiers, printers or both copiers and printers. NTS Services interface
with the Accounting Server service so that vending activity at NTS devices can be
tracked in the database.
When NTS Services are installed without the Secure Document Release add-on,
NTS devices can control access to copiers only. When installed with the add-on, a
single NTS-device can control access to both copiers and printers. Another
feature provided by the NTS Services is My Print, in the market also known as
follow- me printing. A customers user has the ability to pull a print job queued
for output on one device to another device and collect it there. To do so, the
customer needs to have the NTS services running and needs to identify Printer
Pull and Release Groups in the Systems Manager. When creating these printer
pull groups, it has to be made sure that the destination printer is compatible with
all of the printers in the pull group.
Workstation components:
Release Station: This add-on allows customers to set up a network workstation

as a point of controlled document release. Using Release Station, network users
can release to the printer documents that are held on an SDR-enabled print server.
In the former version of PCSM, V2.1, there was an additional set of add-on software
modules, which were related to the print server (Netware Print Server and Unix Print
Server). These add-ons have now been integrated in the core components and come
as a standard with PCSM V2.5.
8
PCSM V2.5
Product Features and Benefits
Benefits
Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5 provides many customer benefits. It is known
as an excellent leading-edge hardcopy cost manage ment system that is designed to
suit the needs of customers in diverse computing environments. The following are the
benefits PCSM offers:
Transparency: The system is not intrusive or time-consuming and does not

require any extra training for the end-user. It offers the benefit of being server-
based, thereby greatly reducing the workload of the network administrator and
being completely invisible to end- users. Also, PCSM does not demand expensive
client-side software or extra configuration requirements.
Ease and flexibility: PCSM V2.5 provides the tools to manage the accumulated
hardcopy data and to produce comprehensive reports. It collects and integrates
data about printing and copying and includes a wide variety of reporting options to
fit different information requirements. It also summarises detailed information
into a manageable form. When charging or allocating costs, Printer Cost &
Security Manager offers a flexible amount of accounts, billing codes or
departments to be used, while it also supports a wide variety of cost recovery
strategies.
Connectivity: A companys printing environment may include several different

Operating Systems and various hardware devices of different makes and models,
including plotters. Printer Cost & security Manager V2.5 is flexible enough to
track users at all workstations using all printers and copiers.
Scalability: PCSM works with any number of print servers and in multiple
locations, while maintaining a centralised management facility for easy
administration. PCSM is upgradeable in order to grow with the customers
company.
9
PCSM V2.5
Features
The following features are well known in both the current (V2.5) and former version
(V2.1) of Printer Cost & Security Manager:
Full Windows security integration.

Complete audit trail of all transactions.
Support for unlimited printers.
Synchronous page counting mechanism.
User account query/transfer capability.
Windows domain import/verify.
Scalability to multiple print servers.
Support for Microsoft SQL Server.
Extended job-pricing schedules.
Account management for multiple sites.
Desktop Print monitor (Desktop Server).
The following features are new to PCSM V2.5:
Printer Subsystem:
Additional Printer Language Support: CPCA, LIPS, ESC/Page;
Support for IPP Printing;
Support of pricing for folding;
Support of pricing based on job-size;
Client Billing:
Additional billable non-billable checkbox in pop-up;
Support of pop-ups when printing to NetWare support;
Support of pop-ups when printing to desktop printers;
Option to disable Client Billing pop-up on a per-printer basis;
Wizards:
Enhanced Configuration Wizard;
Windows 2000 TCP/IP port support in Printer Conversion Wizard;
Card swipe Wizard support for low-cost keyboard wedge card readers;
System Manager:
All installed software versions can be reviewed using the System Manager;
System Manager can stop and re-start services;
NTS:
Support for existing XCP devices;
Accounts Manager:
Import users from Microsofts Active Directory or Novells NDS;
Verify users against Microsofts Active Directory or Novells NDS;
Run now capability for scheduled events;
10
PCSM V2.5
Reports Manager:
Improved report selection interface;
More than 70 reports, such as comparative reports versus previous year,
quarter or month, time-of-day device usage reports and billable non-billable
reports;
Save reports as HTML;
Ability to customise report and column headings;
Ability to specify a custom logo in reports;
Analysis Toolkit:
Scenario manager for creating what if scenarios;
Comparison of actual costs with scenarios;
Internal Web Server:

A built- in web-server for easier installation and support;
User account statements available through the web-server;
Others:
ODBC database interface for a smaller download, reduced re-boot
requirements and improved supportability;
Deposit Station included as a standard interface;
Workstation licenses will be required for Client Billing;
Product Functions
Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5 provides the following primary functions:
Printing cost management, containment and recovery tool:
Printer Cost & Security Manager can be used by many organizations to manage
network printing costs, user quota, printer access, and/or to optimise the usage of
hardcopy resources. Its comprehensive charging system enables administrators to set
prices for, and accurately charge for all printing activities on the network. This
allows an organization to control or recover their printing costs, whether from users,
departments or from its own clients or customers.
Network printing management:
Where cost management is not the overriding concern for the organization, Printer
Cost & Security Manager is typically used to manage the overall network-printing
environment. Using a combination of the cost reporting and printer usage reporting,
network administrators can begin to understand the printing patterns, printer usage
and consumable use within their organization. Once this information is understood, it
is then possible for the organization to either optimise its printing activities, or to
switch to the cost containment option.
11
PCSM V2.5
Customer billing tool:
PCSM can generate monthly reports for billing customers on a cost-per-page basis.
The reports can be automatically e- mailed at the end of the month to an accounting
department to be imported by billing and invoicing software packages. The Client
Billing add-on is required to make this function available.
The Client Billing add-on uses billing codes to charge back print jobs. Client Billing
prompts users, at their workstation, fo r a billing code each time they attempt to print a
document. Billing codes can be applied to a project, a customer number or an internal
tracking account.
Client Billing also allows a user to distinguish between billable and non-billable
printing for the billing code the user has entered. The PCSM Accounting Server
tracks usage, by billing code, for effective cost recovery through integrated reporting
and billing code account statements.
Using the Reports Manager, administrators can produce comprehensive reports,

accurately illustrating printing activity for billing code. Scheduled reports can be
automatically e- mailed in CSV- format for accounting personnel to import into
existing accounting applications easily. Other add-ons and modules, like the NTS
device (for tracking walk-up copying), Macintosh Services (to enable identical
functionality on Macintosh workstations) and Desktop Printing (to use billing codes
for desktop printing on Windows-based workstations) integrate seamlessly with Client
Billing.
Secure Document Release:
Secure printing is a very important application in environments where the

confidentiality of the documents has to be maintained. PCSM can allow for
documents to be released only if the appropriate code is entered via the Network
Transaction Station (NTS), connected to the print server. A workstation-based
document release station can be used as an alternative solution. The Secure Print add-
on is required to make this function available.
Pre-sales investigation - analysis and consultancy tool:
PCSM can be used to collect data on network printing usage prior to selling hardware
or software to the end user. The software can be installed on a 45-day free trial
license, which incorporates about 45 standard reports covering almost any aspect of
network printing. Printing costs and usage pattern reports can subsequently be used to
analyse the customers printing environment to offer the best printing solutions to
them. The customer would usually find one of the other functions a sufficient
motivator to purchase the software as well.
12
PCSM V2.5
The following table demonstrates which PCSM add-ons are required for specific
applications:
Print Accounting Copy Accounting Secure Document

Release
CORE S/W
DEMO S/W Demo/Evaluation Demo/Evaluation Demo/Evaluation

only only only
NTS
Secure
Document
Release
Release Station (Only if release

station used)
Supported Devices
Printer Cost & Security Manager V2.5 provides a multi- vendor platform for
measuring, tracking and allocating printer costs. The version marketed by NRG has a
special feature. To increase the accuracy and completeness of the collection of printer
data Aficio Counter Manager is included. The following products from the NRG
product range are evaluated on their compatibility with Printer Cost & Security
Manager V2.5 and Aficio Counter Manager (the list of tested models will be updated
regularly):
Product PCSM V2.5 Aficio Counter Manager

B&W Multi-functional
DMR15S/18S
DMR15/18
DMR20/25
DMR22/27
DMR35A/45A
DMR35/45
DMR40
DMR55/65
DMR55A/70A
DMR85/105
DIF105P (Fiery)
13
PCSM V2.5
B&W Printers
PMR14/20
PMR16/21
PMR26
PMR32
PMR27
PMR45
Colour Copiers
CCR031/32/36
CCR060
CCR060A/062A
CCR066A/067A
CCR100/106
Colour Printers
PCR6
PCR5W
PCR6W/DW
System Specifications
Accounting Server
Operating System Windows NT4, Windows 2000
Hardware Requirements IBM Compatible
Intel Pentium 200MHz or faster
64MB RAM or more
30MB RAM Hard disk space available
Print Server
Operating System Windows NT4, Windows 2000,
Novell NetWare 4.x, 5.x (with NPDS)
Sun Solaris 7, 8
RedHat Linux 6.x, 7.x
Hardware Requirements IBM Compatible
Intel Pentium 200MHz or faster
64MB RAM or more
100MB RAM Hard disk space available
TCP/IP Networking
Workstation
Operating System Windows 3.x, for Workgroups 3.x
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 3.x/4, Windows 2000
Unix
Apple Macintosh 8.x, 9.x
(Requires Macintosh add-on)
14
PCSM V2.5
Printers
Printer Query PJL, NPA
Printer Language PostScript Level 1, 2, PostScript 3
PCL6 (PC XL) 1.1, 2.0
PCL5, 5e, 5c, 4, 3, 3+
HP-GL, HP-GL2
Ricoh IPDL-C, RPS2
Canon LIPS
Epson ESC/PageP, ESCP/P2
Printer Emulations Canon BubbleJet
IBM Proprinter
Genicom LinePrinter
Text
Printing Devices NRG devices
HP LaserJet devices
All other PCL5, 6 & PostScript devices
Printer Connectivity NRG NIBs
JetDirect adapters
All other LPR-compatible adapters
Document Information
Time, date, User, account, printer, number of pages, paper size, media type, input
tray, duplexing, finishing (staple, punch, fold).
15
PCSM V2.5
MARKET SITUATION
Background:
The traditional copier and printer market has changed dramatically over the last few
years. The major driving forces behind these changes have been:
The proliferation of the Internet/Intranet:

Since the early 1990s, the Internet has taken off. Every company has a basic
networking infrastructure in place by now, while most of them have direct access
to the Web. The result of this is that all mid-range and high-end hardcopy devices
will be networked. This not only enhances a companys productivity and
efficiency by the sharing of resources but also introduces new issues, such as
document security, where confidential documents could become readily accessible
for everyone from the networked output device.
Windows Operating System Dominance:

After a slow start, Windows has established itself as the leading network operating
system for the corporate office environment, overtaking Novells NetWare.
Windows NT4 has been a huge success, offering the stability and functionality
required from a heavily used Operating System, while it is expected that, with the
introduction of Windows 2000, this dominant position will only be re-enforced. It
is safe to say that Windows NT/2000 is emerging as the de facto standard for
network printing.
Convergence of hardcopy devices and colour proliferation:

Stand-alone copiers, printers and faxes are being replaced by multifunctional
devices in the office environment. With the price of colour devices coming down
and the forthcoming introduction of hybrid colour & black & white models, it is
safe to assume that colour functionality will be more widespread through the
office environment, leading (on average) to an increase of the output costs.
New purchasing models:

The connection of the hardcopy output devices to the corporate network changes
their position. From a stand-alone device they become system peripherals,
meaning that different people will be involved in the decision-making, e.g. IT-
managers and network administrators. This means that the selling method will
change towards a model that also addresses concerns, such as scalability, stability
and manageability, of these important players in the decision making unit.
16
PCSM V2.5
Potential Market
Printing costs are much higher than many companies realise. Web printing, the
proliferation of colour printing, and unrestricted access to network printers are all
factors that are causing a rapid growth of printing costs. Printing cost management
software is designed to help managers and administrators control printing costs by
regulating and reducing printing volumes, especially on high-cost colour printers. By
implementing such a system, an organization can easily save 15 to 20% of printing
costs.
With more pages being printed, the variable costs of printing are rapidly rising. The
printing cost equation is made up of the fixed hardware costs and the variable costs of
printing each page. Over the past few years, the bulk of total printing costs has
shifted dramatically towards variable costs. Printing hardware costs are no longer the
majority of the printing investment. The continuous fall in hardware prices gave the
illusion of declining printing costs but, in reality, companies spend a lot of money on
the variable costs of printing.
Two factors now affect the variable-to-fixed cost relationship:
Falling Colour Printer Prices:

Printing hardware prices have dropped dramatically over the past few years.
These colour printers, although cheaper than they used to be, have high variable
costs per page. Many companies taking advantage of the low initial investment do
not realise colour printings effect on total printing costs until it is too late.
Rising Consumable Costs:

Today, consumable costs make up more of the total printing costs then ever
before. People are printing more pages on each printer, and the average cost per
page is increasing due to the proliferation of costly colour printing. There are
three main reasons for the comparative increase in consumable costs:
- Networked printers: Now several employees share one printer, causing it to be

used more heavily. This is an excellent way to save on hardware costs but
many companies do not realize the danger of assuming that printing costs are
falling. In fact, just as much output is generated and consumable costs are just
as expensive as before. Because it is now easier to print a hardcopy at the
nearest networked printer, more pages are printed, increasing consumable
costs.
- Colour printing also changes the total printing cost equation. Printing a colour
page costs considerably more than printing a page in black and white. Wit h
more colour printers being purchased and networked, it is easier for employees
to print these expensive colour pages. Unrestricted access to colour printers
often leads to more colour printing, which has noticeably increased the
average cost per page. Many documents that would have been printed in black
and white, such as drafts and department reports, are now being printed in
colour. Many companies also print colour logos on the bottom of pages, as
well as printing more colour overheads for presentations.
17
PCSM V2.5
- Web printing: The volume and variety of information on the Internet

increases daily. Although the information is available on the screen, many
people feel the need to read and analyse information on paper, so they print
hardcopies of all relevant information. This is greatly increasing the number
of pages printed whereas, previously, only the information needed would be
photocopied from a single hardcopy.
Up-front hardware costs no longer make up the bulk of printing costs, as consumable
costs are quickly exceeding the purchase price of network printers. With consumable
costs quickly becoming a greater proportion of total printing costs, companies need to
find a way to contain and control them.
With the increase in hardcopies being printed, one might expect the amount of
copying to go down. This is true although, on an absolute basis, the copy volume in
the market only declines very slowly, remaining an important part of the total
hardcopy/output costs. Companies will look to manage and control this volume as
well.
Hardcopy cost management software can help customers to manage their output costs
by limiting or charging for printer and copier use. They can use several methods to
recover or contain costs:
Full Cost Allocation:

This method allows a company to allocate costs to employees, departments or
even projects, according to their printing policy. The charges for different types
of printed or copied output are decided when the system is implemented. This
allows departments to budget their printing and copying usage and fully control
these costs. This method is an excellent way to implement activity-based
accounting of hardcopy costs that would otherwise be allocated manually.
Partial Cost Allocation:

With this system, a company determines an initial quota of pages that will be
allotted to an employee or a department, free of charge. After they have used their
quota, they cannot print or copy more pages without incurring additional costs.
This method is useful where activity centres are charged for fixed and variable
hardcopy costs separately. A customer can allow a certain number of printouts or
copies free of variable charges, based on the portion of fixed costs that the centre
bears. Centres will be more inclined to make accurate estimates of printer and
copier usage, when buying new hardware, in order to avoid variable hardcopy
costs.
Cost Containment:
Each employee or department is only allowed to print or copy a specified number
of pages, after which no pages will be accepted until the quota is reset. A
company may decide to reset quotas automatically every month, week or even
every day. This method is useful when a company wants to prevent employees
from printing indiscriminately.
18
PCSM V2.5
The hardcopy cost management a company chooses is dependent on their overall

objectives and policies. A software application needs to be able to support all of these
scenarios, while NRG could act as a consultant to decide, together with the customer,
which allocation method would meet their requirements best.
Competition
Hardcopy cost containment has received a lot of interest from the major players in the
'Office Automation market. Being relatively close to the core business, many
vendors have developed, or sourced, solutions that allow them to offer a solution to
their customers.
With the take-over of SoftwareMetrics by EquiTrack, a huge concentration has taken

place on the supplies-side, meaning that many competitor vendors have Printer
Accounting Server 2.5 in their portfolio of solutions.
However, it should be remembered that Printer Accounting Server (PAS) and Printer
Cost & Security Manager (PCSM) are not the same product. Although they share the
same core, Printer Cost & Security Manager has some features that are unique to
NRG/Ricoh:
Aficio Counter Manager is included, offering serial number and counter-

based volume feedback (copy, print and fax) of Aficio devices through a
Wide Area Network, allowing for central resource management
Desktop Printing is standard
Deployment Tool is included
Additional Analysis Tool is included
Competitive products
Currently, there are several competitive products available in the market. Some of
these products are part of a network printing management suite, while others are
specifically designed to offer volume monitoring, cost allocation and charging and
security:
Specifically designed products:

JAS: A highly modular solution that offers functionality very similar to
PCSM 2.5. It looks very similar to PCSM V2.5 but the integration with
Windows is less advanced. Currently, it is being offered by Minolta as part of
their Partner Programme;
Safecom: This well-designed solution from I-Data has a lot of functionality in

common with PCSM V2.5. It is designed in the form of a hardware-box,
looking very attractive. It is included in the portfolio of Lanier, Minolta,
Konica and Toshiba;
19
PCSM V2.5
Vendor-specific solutions:
PageRouter: A Canon-solution by SoftwareMetrics, which offers a less-

specified PAS-version in an appliance concept: a small server with 10
connections that can be fitted into a rack, ready to go;
NetSpotAccountant: As an add-on to the NetSpot network printing

management suite from Canon, this solution offers basic volume tracking and
allocation;
MarkTrack: This add-on module to Lexmarks MarkVision Professional

offers extended cost allocation but is limited to Lexmark products;
JetAdmin: This HP network printing management application has a

reasonably well-specified volume monitoring and allocation function as
standard.
20
PCSM V2.5
The tables below show a comparison of the main features:
Specialised products Included versions

PCSM V2.5 JAS Safecom MarkTrack JetAdmin
Compatibility
Hardware
Copiers X X
Printers
Faxes X X X X
Software
PDLs
MIBs
LPT-capture X
Network
OS
Protocols
Peer-to-peer X X X
LAN
WAN
User Friendliness
Web-client X
Web-admin X X X
Wizards X X
Multiple charging
models
Rule-based printing X
Secure printing X
Deposit station X X
Follow- me printing X X X
21
PCSM V2.5
Specialised products Included versions

PCSM V2.5 JAS Safecom MarkTrack JetAdmin
Reporting
Automated reports
Distribution of reports
Error status reports X X X
Customisable reports X
Invoice format X X X X X
Audit trails X X
Export to spreadsheet
Graphs X X
Administration
Printer settings X
Login names
Queue management X X
Problem solving X X X
Scalability
Task scheduling
Analysis Tool X X
Trial version X
22
PCSM V2.5
TARGET CUSTOMERS AND CHANNELS
Market Segments
Academic Professional Corporate
High interest High interest Medium interest

Large
Large potential Large potential Very large potential

Mature market Maturing market Immature market
Medium
High interest High interest Medium interest

Medium potential Medium potential Large potential
Low interest Medium interest Low interest

Small
Small potential Small potential Small potential

Academic/educational (most mature market)
Includes universities, colleges and primary/secondary schools.

Already acknowledged a requirement for controlling printing costs.
Usually have some NT servers.
Need to sell to IT managers and departments heads.
Primary use: Printing quotas or pre-paid printing for students.
Professional (quickly maturing market)
Maturing with some global companies.

Internal factor: Printing Cost recovery is a driving factor.
External factor: Precise client billing and cost estimates.
Need to sell to IT managers and Principals.
Moving to NT servers.
Already bill costs back to clients but need better tools for tracking and reporting
on printing activities.
Primary use: Charging clients for documents produced for them.
23
PCSM V2.5
Market sub-segments
Architectural and Engineering.

Reprographics and Print Shops.
Marketing and Advertising Agencies.
Law and Accounting Firms.
Real-estate offices.
Corporate/government (largest market)
Includes corporations, general businesses, and government institutions of all

types.
Immature with many global companies - may not yet have acknowledged a need
to control costs.
In many cases, the organizations know only that they consume large quantities of
paper but have no detailed understanding.
Factors: Operating Efficiencies, ISO, and Security.
Need to sell to IT Managers, Business Managers and Purchasing.
Almost all companies have some NT servers + UNIX and NetWare.
Primary use: Managing and understanding network printing costs.
Business Drivers
General Business Drivers
Companies that have a high cost-per-page printing.

Need to have client-billing codes tied to print jobs, in order to generate detailed
customer billing statements.
Need for audit trails for printers for security reasons, ISO standards or specific
account reasons, such as controlling information leaks, e.g. a pharmaceutical
company controlling their R&D information.
Very often the purchasing of a new colour laser printer precipitates the need to
look for a printing management tool.
Architectural/ Engineering Market
Large format printers are expensive to buy and run. Need PCSM to manage both
the device and consumables.
Need a way to force the end-user to enter a project code every time plot files are
printed. These can than be allocated back to the appropriate project or department
for billing.
Project future printing costs and budget for them, across their entire network
infrastructure.
24
PCSM V2.5
Reprographics Printing Market
This group needs to know print patterns at customer sites. This is used to bill
back the printing tickets correctly and also allows them to know their clients print
needs better than the clients themselves. This is a great advantage when they
come back to re-sell to the account.
Files are often transferred back to the Reprographic s Office for printing. Plot files
(pages, toner) need to be counted and billed back to hundreds of different accounts
and across many diverse printing devices. Some printer manufacturers have
methods to track printing on their own devices. They need a solution to work with
their varied applications and print devices at the NT server level.
Marketing Firms
Work with different graphics packages and different colour printers.

Many production runs for customers need to be captured and billed back to the
respective clients.
Clients usually get miscellaneous billing statements for the printing done for them.
Billing statements are usually created manually by the IT group going through
print logs and associating these print jobs and costs with client accounts.
This process is both time consuming and prone to errors, which costs the accounts
money and, ultimately, customer satisfaction.
Sales Channels
PCSM V2.5 can be classified as a typical solution product, which requires close
interaction with customers, a consultancy approach and good knowledge of printing
environments. It is recommended that PCSM be offered to a customer as one of the
following:
A component of the complete solution: PCSM is regarded as a tool to sell more

Aficio products by allowing the sales consultants to prove that centralised
networked Aficio machines are the most cost effective solution for the customer.
The complete solution delivered consists of Aficio machines, PCSM software
solution and consultancy, support and other professional services.
In many cases the customer is not interested in the type of output devices he is
buying. He needs a complete solution, which allows him to deliver all printing to
his organization efficiently and effectively. PCSM will monitor all printing and
copying activities and associate relevant printing and copying costs.
Consultancy tool - pre sales investigation: The trial- version can be used as a
consultancy tool to help NRG to sell more Aficio products. The PCSM trial
version, installed on a customers network, will deliver extensive information
about a customers printing behaviour. The reports can be analysed by the NRG
consultant and a cost saving scenario, including Aficio machines, could be
recommended. Use in conjunction with PageTelligence methodology.
25
PCSM V2.5
Facilities management tool: For organizations providing facilities management

services, PCSM will be the tool used internally to minimise printing cost, optimise
the system and maintain high profitability. In combination with Aficio Counter
Manager, PCSM V2.5 offers a powerful tool to manage large installed bases of
Aficio devices, even remote ones, from one central location.
These applications show that, for NRG, the direct channel is most suitable to sell
PCSM.
However, it is possible to sell PCSM through the indirect channel, either using a
similar business model as described above (for advanced indirect partners) or as an
off-the-shelf product. Potential dealers/distributors will have to have high level of
expertise in custome r printing environments, particularly including Windows NT,
TCP-IP and overall software solution sales capability.
26
PCSM V2.5
WHAT FITS WHAT
Product Code: Description:
PAS25NFR1 45-day Demo version of PCSM on CD-ROM

PAS25LIC 2 Full licence version of PCSM V2.5
PASNTS Network Transaction Station PCSM
Add-ons3 :
PAS25PS Additional print server licence
PAS25MC Macintosh Services Option
PAS25RS Add-on Release Station licence
PAS25SR Secure Document Release Option
PAS25CB Client Billing Option
PAS25WS25 Client Billing Workstation (25 licences)
PAS25WSU Client Billing Workstation (Unlimited licences)
Notes:
1
: This product includes a CD-ROM, which contains all software, manuals and
add-ons.
2
: This product is only a licence agreement/serial number. In order to install a
full version of PCSM V2.5, both PAS25NFR and PAS25LIC are required.
3
: Add-on products contain a licence agreement/serial number. These will be
delivered electronically, either by e-Mail of fax.
When installing any of the above software or add-ons, the system will ask for an
activation key code. This code can be obtained from NRGI: Product Manager,
Marketing or the Technical Department. To request your activation code, please
send an e-Mail that contains both the serial number of the software and the
name of the NT Server that the software will be installed on. The activation code
will be returned to you by e-Mail, allowing you to complete the installation.
Upgrades:
Some distributors have purchased the full version of PCSM V2.1 and upgrades might
be possible. Please contact the Product Manager at NRGIs Marketing Department, to
discuss your requirements.
Upgrades for the Demo version are NOT available.
27
PCSM V2.5
TRAINING
Software product training is available under the web-delivered product training,

known as NRG-e. If you do not already have a user licence, please contact our
Training Manager. The objective of this training module is to give sales staff a basic
understanding of the core concepts and benefits of PCSM V2.5. This, combined with
the PageTelligence methodology, should allow sales staff to identify opportunities for
the PCSM product. This product will also be covered in centralised software product
training scheduled to take place in Q4 2001. Please see the Extranet for more details.
28
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
doc-Q-manager
Print Queue Management
&
Job Ticketing
Launch Country of
Month Origin
March 2003 United Kingdom

Version 1
March, 2003
doc-Q-manager
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Market Situation and Objectives 3
Target Markets 3
Product Overview 4/5

o Core System 6/7
o doc-Q-view 8
o doc-Q-ticket 9
Minimum System Specifications 12
Competition 13
What Fits What 14
Product specifications may change during a

products life and, if in doubt, you are
advised to contact NRGI Guernsey for
E:\Training\!data\NRGI\Word\DSWPQM.DOC 1
doc-Q-manager
INTRODUCTION
doc-Q-manager (dqm) is a Windows (NT and 2000) based print queue management
solution. The version being offered by NRG provides two main elements:-
1) Print Queue Management

2) Job Ticketing (plus print queue management)
Whilst doc-Q-manager is a modular system we are offering the software in two

preconfigured product codes to match the elements done.
The software solution is specifically designed for the efficient management of volume
printers and applications. It allows key operators to manage, manipulate and process
network print jobs and queues. It allows streamlining of the print process giving
companies greater cost efficiency and optimised use of their print devices.
The software installs on top of the Windows NT4 or 2000 operating system and print
spooler. It thereby inherits all the system security features of those operating systems.
All print queues and drivers are installed in the normal manner. Therefore doc-Q-
manager works with any windows compliant printing device.
doc-Q-manager
MARKET SITUATION AND OBJECTIVES
As companies start to integrate their printer and reprographic departments

powerful tools are required to exploit and manage the new systems.
Users for traditionally non-IT backgrounds are now expected to control

complex print output. Many of these print jobs are mission critical. What
is needed is an easy to use, cost effective, yet powerful integrated system
that provides a solution to this problem.
Complement the existing portfolio of printing solutions offered by NRG,

to offer a complete solution for the volume print environment, whether it is
central reprographics departments (CRD) or cost per print customers.
Enhance the high volume multi-functional and printer range.
Increase page volume through connected devices.
Increase unit placements and connectivity rate of print devices.
TARGET MARKETS
Central Reprographic Departments (CRD), especially those using Job

Tickets
Print for Pay environments (PfP)
Decision Making Unit (DMU):
CRD/PfP Manager - Decision Maker

IT Manager - Influencer
Key Operator - Influencer
Vertical markets that should be considered for this software product are:
Legal
Finance
Local Government
Insurance
CRD
IT Print Rooms
Education
Direct Mail
Military
doc-Q-manager
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
doc-Q-manager is a modular software solution. However at NRG we have identified

two main areas of opportunity with the product and have combined the modules
accordingly.
1) Print Queue Management (DSWPQM) contains the following doc-Q-

manager modules:
doc-Q-manager
doc-Q-view (PCL)
doc-Q-view (PS)
2) Job Ticketing (DSWJT) contains the following doc-Q-manager modules:

All those above in print queue management PLUS
doc-Q-ticket
The functions of each of these modules is described below:
doc-Q-manager core system is a simple drag and drop queue management

solution. Users can copy, move, preview and re-print jobs by
just using a mouse. The queue balancing part of the software
allows multiple printers to be clustered as required and allows
large jobs to be split over those printers. Jobs can also be
routed without operator intervention.
Operators can also create new documents from existing jobs.
The emphasis is on ease of use.Gives simple print auditing on a
standalone doc-Q-manager system. This allows the print
department to charge for services without relying on heavy
manual logging of costs by operators.
doc-Q-view: Is a module to preview PCL or PostScript encoded jobs.

Operators can now visually check their jobs before committing
them to paper.
doc-Q-ticket: Gives the operator all the information that is needed to create
and finish a print job. This module includes a job ticket forms
designer and server module and 5 client licences. This allows
users to select their job finishing requirements of print time
from their PC.
The doc-Q-manager software can be integrated with other systems. For example,
PCSM or eCabinet. Working with PCSM print job accounting can be used to bill the
customer, department or user the correct amount for each job. When integrated with
eCabinet a full archive of each print job can be made for later retrieval and even
reprint.
doc-Q-manager
Note:
The doc-Q-forms module of doc-Q-manager is not being offered by NRG. We are
providing an alternative solution with the ReportSuite and PrintSuite (being launched
Q1,2003) products. However, doc-Q-manager fully integrates with the ReportSuite
and PrintSuite products to provide a complete forms processing and print queue
management solution.
doc-Q-manager
Core System:
doc-Q-manager is the basic core system at the heart of the doc-Q-manager suite of
software. The doc-Q-manager core system allows the efficient management of high
volume production and departmental printers and digital copiers. It provides a link
between IT print applications and the traditional reprographics department. The
simple drag and drop nature of this system allows even the most non-technical
operator to perform tasks on printer queues and jobs. The product enables the simple
integration and exploitation of digital copier / printer products in the wider IT network
environment. Mainframe-like control is given to network users, allowing improved
productivity and flexibility in the printing process.
The balance feature allows the creation of printer clusters, to provide virtual high-
speed production devices. This gives the user high performance output with
resilience because multiple devices can now be used, therefore minimising the risk of
a single point of failure.
By exploiting the powerful scripting tool within doc-Q-manager, print management

workflow may be developed, including the automatic routing of jobs to the correct
device without operator intervention.
Features:
EASY to use.
COPY and MOVE print jobs in a queue.
PREVIEW ASCII and Windows format jobs.
REPRINT all or part of a print job.
ARCHIVE jobs onto any archive system.
ENHANCES Windows print management.
ENTERPRISE PRINT MANAGEMENT by connecting multiple doc-Q-manager
servers.
CLUSTER any Windows compatible printers.
SPLIT large jobs over a number of printers.
WORKFLOW printer systems.
ROUTE jobs based upon defined criteria.
AUTOMATE particular print jobs.
CONTROL printer usage (e.g. colour).
Benefits:
Gives greater control of the print process.

Gives operators flexibility.
Streamlines and speeds up the print process.
Increased cost efficiency by optimised throughput.
Removes costly re-running of jobs.
Gives operators the ability to move documents from one doc-Q-manager server to
another, to improve resilience and throughput.
Maximises use of cost-effective multiple high volume devices..
doc-Q-manager
Increases resilience by having multiple devices instead of single point of failure.

Allows better handling of large jobs, saving time and money.
Reduces operator intervention.
Reduces costs by making sure that particular jobs go to the most cost-effective
device.
Deals with peak print periods by clustering required printers to meet critical print
windows.
doc-Q-manager
doc-Q-view:
doc-Q-view gives users of PCL or PostScript applications the ability to preview and
re-print jobs (any page or range of pages) without going back to the application. doc-
Q-view supports zooming, browse by page number and tiling of previewed images to
aid the viewing process.
Features:
doc-Q-view (PostScript) - allows the previewing of PostScript* print jobs.

doc-Q-view (PCL) - allows the previewing of PCL** print jobs.
* Up to PostScript Level 3 and conforming to Adobe DSC.

** Up to PCL5e, PCL5c and PCL 6
Note: There is currently no viewer available for RPCS print jobs. A new viewing
module for RPCS is not expected to be available until 2004.
Benefits:
Jobs can be checked and verified before printing, by viewing, thus eliminating
errors.
Saves time and money by allowing only the necessary parts of a job to be found
and only that part to be re-printed.
Avoids the need to return to the application programme to re-print the job.
doc-Q-manager
doc-Q-ticket:
The doc-Q-ticket module streamlines the production printing process and enhances
the certainty of correct finishing. It replaces manual ticketing processes that are often
error prone and time consuming. The module allows finishing instructions
(duplexing, folding, stapling, binding, delivery etc.) to be attached by the user and
sent with the print job over the network.
Job tickets can be tailored to meet requirements, using the job ticket design tool.
Tickets can show new capabilities as new print shop functions are added. These
tickets are available to users immediately after they have been updated.
Jobs can be submitted locally, across the network or via the Web.
Features:
SIMPLE ticket design.

ENSURES detailed finishing instructions.
SUPPORTS any Windows printer.
TICKET jobs via network or Web
CONTROL centralised on job ticket server.
Benefits:
Reduces costly finishing errors.

Reduces set up time.
Speeds up print turnaround time.
Simplifies and standardises job ticket instruction.
Smoothes the transition from large analogue machines, using manual tickets.
doc-Q-manager
PRODUCT POSITIONING
doc-Q-
manager
Document and
Information
Management
Network Print
Management
and Control
Forms
Processing Document
Solutions
Document
Workflow Distribution
doc-Q-manager
MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
doc-Q-manager and doc-Q-view:
Windows NT / Windows 2000, PIII 800MHz, 128MB RAM, 3MB Installation,

adequate hard disk space for spool file storage (suggested minimum 1GB). For users
to receive notification messages they must be running Windows Messenger.
doc-Q-ticket:
Form Server / Form Designer: Windows NT / Windows 2000, PII 400MHz, 64MB
RAM, 3MB HDD, Internet Explorer 5.0 or above.
doc-Q-ticket Client:
Windows 95 / Windows 98 / Windows NT / Windows 2000, PII 400MHz, 64MB

RAM, 3MB HDD, Internet Explorer 4.0 or above.
Note:
XP operating system support is expected to be available in Q3 2003.
doc-Q-manager
COMPETITION
Name: Manufacturer: Remarks:
Print Queue Manager Software Shelf www.softwareshelf.com
Print Xchange Xerox www.xerox.com
Prismaflow Oc www.oce.co.uk
Micropress T/R Systems Inc. www.frysystems.com
Old Man Tico Microplex www.microplex.de
Uniqprint Macro4 www.macro4.com
Digipath Xerox www.xerox.com
doc-Q-manager
WHAT FITS WHAT
Product Code: Description: Comments:

DSWPQM Print Queue Management (PQM) docQmanager + docQview
(PS + PCL) (5 clients)
DSWJT Job Ticketing + PQM As above + docQticket server
DSWDQMNFR Demo CD Job Ticketing + PQM demo CD all modules (45
days)
Add-Ons:
DSWJT25 Job Ticketing 25 Client Licences
DSWJTUL Job Ticketing Unlimited Client Licences
Annual Maintenance Contracts (AMC):

DSWPQMAMC AMC Print Queue Management
DSWJTAMC AMC Job Ticketing + PQM
DSWJT25AMC AMC Job Ticketing 25 Client Licences
DSWJTULAMC AMC Job Ticketing Unlimited Client Licences
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
Print Observer 2.0

Enterprise Network Print Management
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Country
Launch Month of Origin
PrintObserver September, 2001 The Netherlands

Date Created: September, 2001
Version 1
September, 2001
PrintObserver V2.0
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
- Objectives 2
- Benefits 2
Product Overview 3
- Publishers 3
- Subscriber 4
- Config Tool 6
- Adminstrators Kit 7
Competition 9
- Product Comparison 10
Target Market 11
Specifications 13
- Operation 13
- Installation 14
- Network Traffic 15
- Industry Standards 16
- Languages 16
What Fits What 17

1
K:\Company\Market\NPS\PrintObserver_V2.0.doc
PrintObserver V2.0
INTRODUCTION
In 1999, NRG launched AficioManager and in April 2001 NRG launched its
replacement SmartNetMonitor. This software is a suite of network printing
management applications that allow both users and administrator to monitor and
control the networked output devices.
AficioManager was, and SmartNet Monitor is, an integral part of NRGs network
printing strategy. However, one of the shortfalls of AficioManager/SmartNetMonitor
has proven to be its design. The product was mainly designed for the workgroup
environment, and therefore was not suitable for big networks. Print Observer
provides the solution for such large enterprise-wide networks.
This new network printing management application, Print Observer, has been
designed by Ricoh to give users and administrators in large, enterprise-wide networks,
full visibility of the ir printers and their printing. By employing advanced
technologies, it is much more efficient than AficioManager/SmartNetMonitor in the
way that it transports this information over the network, making it an ideal solution
for larger networks.
Print Observer has been available for some time but NRG is now in a position to
launch the solution. It will help our position as a supplier of printing solutions in the
corporate environment and will be an important tool for the retaining and winning of
large major accounts.
Objectives
Complete NRGIs offering in the network printing market with a network

printing management solution dedicated to the large enterprise-wide
networks.
Increase the number of connected devices by offering a tool to monitor

them on the network.
Increase secondary revenue streams by additional income from support,

installation and training and pre- and after sales consultancy.
Benefits
Ease of use
Ease of installation
Reduced network traffic in large networks
Compatible with industry standards
Status feedback of printing jobs
2
PrintObserver V2.0
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
PrintObserver is a client-server-based network printing management solution that
maximises the integration of network printers into the enterprise-environment.
PrintObserver is easy to install, offers constant feedback on the status of network
printers and the progress of print jobs.
The PrintObserver suite consists of 5 separate applications:
PrintObserver Primary Publisher

PrintObserver Secondary Publisher
PrintObserver Subscriber
PrintObserver Config
Administrators Adaptation Kit (AAK).
Together they offer users and network administrators a comprehensive set of tools to
monitor printers and print jobs on the network.
Publishers
The Primary Publisher is installed and maintained by the network administrator. The
Primary Publisher should be installed on a Windows NT4.0/2000 print-server. It polls
information from all network printers connected to this server. Subscribers or
Secondary Publishers can subscribe to this information and are then automatically
notified about changes in the printer status.
If a number of Subscribers are located in the LAN through a gateway or low

bandwidth connection, one of these subscribers can be assigned as a Secondary
Publisher. Instead of distributing the information from the Primary Publisher to every
Subscriber, it is only distributed to this Secondary Publisher. The Secondary
Publisher then distributes the information to the Subscribers in the LAN.
A Secondary Publisher can also be used to distribute the work burden of the Publisher
on more than one PC. The Subscribers will be automatically distributed evenly on all
available Publishers in a LAN.
Notes:
There can be multiple Publishers for one single device.

One Publisher can publish information of multiple devices.
Publisher polls information from a device and pushes this together with the job
status of all queued print jobs to the Subscribers.
Publisher requires Microsoft Windows NT4.0 or Windows 2000 print server to
run. This server should hold the print queues of all the printers which need to be
monitored.
3
PrintObserver V2.0
Subscriber
The client version of PrintObserver, Subscriber, has to be installed on every PC in the

network. Subscribers are informed by a Publisher about changes in the status of a
network printer they are using, without causing any noticeable network traffic on the
network (because of the push-protocol used).
The PrintObserver Subscriber displays an icon in the bottom right corner of the users
Taskbar for each printer installed. This icon visualises the status of the printer (idle,
warning or attention). Clicking on one of these icons will open the PrintObserver
applet that provides more detailed information of the status and configuration of the
printer.
Task-bar icons for each installed printer driver on the client system
The 'Status' tab of the 'Printers' tab of the PrintObserver applet
4
PrintObserver V2.0
The 'Input' tab of the 'Printers' tab of the PrintObserver applet
Starting from the moment a print job is spooled, a progress bar displays its progress
and shows the number of pages that still need to be printed. Preceding jobs are also
monitored, so the jobs position in the spooler is also displayed.
The 'Documents' tab of the PrintObserver applet
5
PrintObserver V2.0
The 'Print log' tab of the PrintObserver applet
Notes:
Publisher(s) are automatically selected by the Subscriber out of a list of available

Publishers for the device. It will try to select a Publisher according to the
following criteria:
o The Publisher with the optimal availability.

o The Publisher with the minimal virtual distance to the information-source.
o The Publisher with the minimal workload.
There can be multiple Publishers functioning as an information source for each

device.
Publisher can publish information of multiple device(s).
Config Tool
PrintObserver Config is the tool provided to configure the Publishers and Subscribers.
Using this tool, users can:
1) enable or disable the monitoring of the network printers they are using
2) alter the list of Publishers that the Subscriber or Secondary Publisher should
use as an information source
3) changes can be made to the notification method PrintObserver uses to signal

status events
6
PrintObserver V2.0
The 'Printers' tab of the PrintObserver Config tool
The 'Configuration' tab of the PrintObserver Config tool
Administrators Kit
Finally, with the Administrators Adaptation Kit, the network administrator can enable
or disable settings in the PrintObserver installation files. These settings can be saved
in an .ini or .reg file, which can be used during subsequent installations.
7
PrintObserver V2.0
The 'Administrators Adaptation Kit Wizard' start page
8
PrintObserver V2.0
COMPETITION
All printer vendors offer tools to manage and monitor printers in the networked
environment:
o HP: JetAdmin (workgroup and enterprise);

o Xerox: CenterWare (workgroup) and PrintMap (enterprise);
o Lexmark: MarkVision (workgroup and enterprise);
o Canon: NetSpot (workgroup).
However, unlike most of the above that claim to support Administrators and Users,
PrintObserver is mainly targeted at the network-users, whilst making the
Administrators life easier. This will enable NRGI to be seen as an IT friendly
solution provider.
PrintObserver
WAN
Network Size
v2.0
JetAdmin
MarkVision
LAN
Administrator User
Target User
9
PrintObserver V2.0
Product Comparison
Network Printer Manager (IBM)
Aficio Manager v1.x (Ricoh)
PrintObserver v2.0 (Ricoh)

MarkVision (Lexmark)
JetAdmin/WIN95 (HP)
JetAdmin/NT (HP)
Unique features
Installation
Automatic installation (no configuration, no IP address know-how)
Supports printing through NT server
Installs automatically with the driver using same network address (Direct Print)
Compatibility
Supports automatically all printers with full industry standard printer MIB implementation
User Interface
Display of the Device Front Panel
Alert Notification
Popup
Plays a Sound
Network Functionality
Discover/Explore/Look-up network for devices
subnet Broadcast
subnet Ping
Supported Network Protocols
TCP/IP
IPX
Information Retrieval
SNMP polling
PJL (through Parallel port)
Pushing printer status directly to client (non client/server architecture)
Pushing remote printer status to other clients (client/server architecture)
Distributing data from client to client (distributed computing)
Information Retrieved & Displayed
Print Job Information over print server
shows all jobs (Publisher)
shows own jobs only (Subscriber, security)
shows jobs in progress / in queue
shows completed jobs
shows job name, pages, copies
shows job progress in queue(pages preceding this job in queue and printer)
shows job progress (in percent, pages-printed/number-of-pages)
Notifies job print start/end
WAN oriented feature

LAN oriented feature
Administrative oriented feature
10
PrintObserver V2.0
TARGET MARKET
PrintObserver is targeted at the large enterprise network environments with more
than 100 users.
>25
Employees/printer
PrintObserver
25
Aficio Manager
1 100 >100
Employees
The following issues are important in these environments:
Reduced network traffic

Automated installation
Remote device status view
Network Print Job progress information
Support of network printers from multiple vendors.
PrintObserver offers Network Administrators ease of installation and, due to its

unique design, high efficiency on network traffic. Network users have instant
feedback on the status of their network printing devices and the progress of their
network print-jobs.
When compared to our alternative network printing management tool, AficioManager

/ SmartNetMonitor, PrintObserver is designed to be more efficient in larger
environments.
11
PrintObserver V2.0
WAN
PrinObserver
Network Size
Network
v2.0
Printer
Manager
Admin
SNM
SNM Client
LAN
Administrator User
It is recommended that we sell PrintObserver by offering a trial or demo version.

Once they decide to use it on a permanent basis, the customers should buy a server
licence for each print server they wish to install it on. The following three versions
will be available:
o One server
o Five servers
o Unlimited servers
PrintObserver works perfectly in combination with PCSM. Each customer site that
has implemented PCSM in their printing workflow will benefit from PrintObserver.
The reason for this close integration is that PCSM uses the same Microsoft Windows
NT4.0/2000 print-server architecture as PrintObserver. Moreover, PrintObserver
supports PCSMs special Aficio Network Printer Monitor, as well as Windows
standard Print Monitor to monitor printing jobs.
12
PrintObserver V2.0
SPECIFICATIONS
Operation
When the Publisher is installed on the print server, it obtains from the Spooler Agent
all information on queued jobs and jobs currently printing. Additionally,
PrintObserver uses a Print-Job-Analyser to extract information from the spooled
documents to predict the progress of each document in the queue and on the printer.
PrintObserver then combines this information, together with direct information from
the printer, to provide up-to-date printing status.
Subscriber Publisher
Standard
Application Spooler
Print Port
Spooler
Agent
Print Print
Printer
Observer Observer
Polling using SNMP

Pushing over TCP/IP
Printing through server
Print job information extraction inside the print server
In this way, the user will have an estimate of how long it will take before his job will
be printed. This is displayed in the Job Status Bar, which shows the progress of each
print job in an easy to understand graphical format. All jobs in the queue, and at the
printer, are displayed.
The Job Status Bar
13
PrintObserver V2.0
Installation
PrintObserver supports an automatic installation/configuration procedure at the client

side when the user prints through a Windows NT or Windows 2000 print server.
Information about the network address of the printing device is not needed.
In order to achieve this PrintObserver makes use of:
Client/server architecture
The Automatic-IP-Sensing1 feature
The Automatic-IP-Distribution2 feature
PrintObserver needs an IP address of a printer to communicate with the device. In

some network environments it is possible to use a host-name instead of an IP address.
PrintObserver retrieves the IP address or host-name of a printer, without the

interaction of the user, in two ways:
1. Automatically sensing this information on the server it runs on via Automatic-

IP-Sensing (AIP)
2. Automatically receiving this information from a Publisher during an
Automatic-IP-Distribution (AID) process.
Additionally, the user/administrator can insert this information with the Configuration
tool shipped with PrintObserver.
PrintObserver has also been designed and tested to support SMS installations. SMS is
the Microsoft Systems-Manager-Service, which enables administrators of large
enterprise networks to install or upgrade PrintObserver on each client PC, centrally.
1
PrintObserver can automatically sense the IP address or host-name of a printer when
one of the following is fulfilled:
PrintObserver is running on a Microsoft NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 operating
system and the printer driver is using an LPR port to print directly to the printer.
PrintObserver is running on an Microsoft NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 operating
system and the printer driver is installed from a print server using Add Printer
and the print server is using an LPR port to print directly to the printer.
2
Automatic-IP-Distribution (AID) is enabled when:
The host name of a computer has the same name as the network Computer
Name'. This is automatically the case when a DHCP service is used in the
network.
Printing through a print server. This is also true for bigger networks in most cases.
PrintObserver Publisher is installed on each print server in the network. The print-
server where PrintObserver is installed should be either Microsoft Windows NT
4.0 or Windows 2000.
14
PrintObserver V2.0
Network Traffic
PrintObserver uses a unique concept called Publisher-Subscriber. Common printer

monitoring applications uses SNMP to poll, at intervals, the status of a printer on the
network. This produces, for each check or poll, a small amount of network traffic. If
every computer in a WAN does this, it increases the network traffic dramatically.
PrintObserver, on the other hand, polls the status of a printer using SNMP and then
publishes the information to the subscribers in the network. Computers can subscribe
to this Publisher using the Subscriber version of PrintObserver.
The communication between a Publisher and its Subscribers is based on a special

push protocol over TCP/IP. This protocol enables the Subscriber to wait most of the
time for a notification from the Publisher. The Publisher will only notify them if there
is a change in the status of the printer or the print job. This reduces network traffic
tremendously and the communication workload of the printer network interface. The
more users that share the same network printer, the bigger benefit the Publisher-
Subscriber concept delivers.
Printer A Printer B Printer C Printer D Printer E Printer F
Publisher 1 Publisher 2
Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber
Polling
Pushing
Data flow from printer to Publisher to Subscriber
15
PrintObserver V2.0
Industry Standards
In an enterprise network, compatibility with different printer models and brands is

very important.
PrintObserver has been designed to be compatible with the industry standards for
printer management SNMP. SNMP is supported by most of modern network printers,
regardless of the brand.
PrintObserver supports:
Systems MIB (RFC1697);
Host Resources MIB (RFC 1514);
Printer MIB (RFC 1759) and partly the new version 2.0 implemented.
The first HP model that has implemented these MIBs is the LaserJet 5Si. Most of
NRGs latest Aficio products support these as well. Since the implementation of the
standard is under the responsibility of each vendor, the level of information provided
for each product is slightly different.
The supported printer description languages are:

PostScript level 2 & 3
PCL 3 - PCL 6
IPDLC
Finally, PrintObserver requires a Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000 print-

server to enable job status monitoring. PrintObserver is designed around these
standard operating systems and provides more detailed information about print jobs
than any other printer- monitoring tool.
Languages
PrintObserver will be available in the following languages: English; German; French;

Italian and Swedish. More languages might become available in future versions.
16
PrintObserver V2.0
WHAT FITS WHAT
Product Code: Description: See Note:
POBSV20 PrintObserver 2.0 Test Licence 1
POBSVLIC1 PrintObserver 2.0 1 server licence 2

POBSVLIC5 PrintObserver 2.0 5 server licence 3
POBSVENT PrintObserver 2.0 Enterprise licence 4
Notes:
1. This is the actual application on CD-ROM. This item can be used for
demonstration, trials and promotion. If a customer wants to implement
PrintObserver, he should also have one of the server licences.
2. One server licence is a licence card that gives the customer a licence to use
PrintObserver on one print server in their network.
3. As 2) above, except this item gives the customer a licence to use

PrintObserver on up to five print servers.
4. As 2) or 3) above, except this item gives the customer a licence to use

PrintObserver on an unlimited number of print servers.
For fully licenced customer installation, it is necessary to purchase at least

one PrintObserver CD-ROM (POBSV20) and the appropriate licence option.
Full installations of PrintObserver should only be undertaken as often as the
server licence purchased allows.
17
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
eCabinet
Version 2.3.x
Network Office Appliance
Software
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Production
Version: Launch Date Location
Version 2.3.x (software) October, 2002 USA

Date Created: October, 2002
Version 1
October, 2002
eCabinet Version 2.3.x
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Main Components 3
Overview of Software Enhancements 2.3.x 4
Improved Document Processing Rates 4
Improved OCR Accuracy 4
Fully Searchable PDFs 4
Increased Database Availability 4
Scan Capture 4
Features of Scan Capture 5
Usage Note About Scan Capture 5
Overview of Hardware 8
Hardware Specifications 9
Competition 10
Enterprise Wide Document Management Systems 10
Other Document Management Software 10
Groupware 10
Web-based Document Management 11
Hardware Suppliers 11
Conclusion 11
Product Positioning and Sales 12
Target Channels 12
Target Markets 12
Sales Approach 12
Solutions Discovery Guide (SDG) 13
Revenue Sources 13
Key Features 14
Applications 15
What Fits What 17
Additional Information 18

K:\ Company\Market\NPS\eCabinet_Version_2.3.x.doc 1
INTRODUCTION
Following the successful launch of the revolutionary eCabinet product, NRGI is launching version
2.3.x.
Organizations understand the importance of being able to manage documents, select who can see
those documents and share the knowledge that they bring.
Document management systems have been available for fifteen years or more. They have tended to
be expensive, specialised and a considerable resource burden on operating and IT departments
within an organization. Although newer document mana gement systems are targeting small to
medium companies and departments, the solutions still require considerable IT knowledge and time
to implement.
eCabinet is designed to make the implementation of document management quick and easy. It is a
complete document management product, including hardware and software, which can be
incorporated into existing networks without major disruption. It can be set up to capture documents
from a wide range of sources and then index and manage them automatically.
The new features in 2.3.x allow the user and the installer greater flexibility when implementing the
product but they do not detract from the fundamental principle of making eCabinet easy to use and
install.
This document assumes knowledge of previous versions of eCabinet. The New Product
Specification for eCabinet 2.x and the Product Information Guide for eCabinet version 2.1 are
available on the NRGI Extranet.
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
eCabinet is the first of the so-called Network Office Appliances. A Network Office Appliance
(NOA) can be characterised by three things:
Network: it is connected to a network, be it the Internet or an Intranet;

Office: it is targeted at the workgroup environment
Appliance: it is as easy to use and install as a normal home appliance, whilst it adheres to
market standards to ensure the openness of the system.
Within the concept of NOAs, eCabinet is more specifically an Information Appliance, since it will
be used by companies to manage the information within their organization more effectively.
The eCabinet is an intelligently designed software and hardware package that specifically addresses
the needs of both small businesses and the enterprise workgroup customer. In contrast to existing,
high-end, mission-critical document manageme nt solutions, eCabinet requires minimal user
maintenance and administration, features easy-to-use client functionality for simple, quick
information access and scales to the needs of the workgroup.
Most importantly, eCabinet addresses the capture and retrieval problem by leveraging existing
digital multifunctional peripheral technologies. In contrast to dedicated scanners and high labour
overhead required in traditional document management systems, eCabinet uses enhanced MFPs, as
well as network-attached scanners, faxes, printers, copiers and client PCs to allow for simple, low-
cost, unconscious and intuitive document capture.
Main components:
eCabinet device: Although this is a piece of hardware the value of the eCabinet box is in the
software and what it can deliver. eCabinet can capture documents from PCs,
fax machines, printers, e-Mail, scanners and MFPs. These documents are
indexed automatically, saved to an internal hard disc drive and then backed
up to an internal or network storage device.
PC Capture: Software that is installed on client PCs and allows users to capture electronic
documents to the eCabinet.
Browser interface: The main user interface is through a web browser. Users can manage and
search for documents through this intuitive application. Administrators also
use the browser interface to configure and maintain eCabinet.
Scan Capture: Software that is installed on client PCs to simplify the scan and index
process. Users can drag and drop scanned images directly into folders on the
eCabinet.
OVERVIEW OF SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS

Version 2.3.x Software Enhancements
Improved Document Processing Rates:
eCabinet 2.3.x can capture and index image-based documents two to three times faster than with
previous versions. Below are the eCabinet 2.3.x rated continuous input document processing
speeds.
Processing Rate *: eCabinet 1000: eCabinet 2100:

OCRd documents 15 pages per minute 27 pages per minute
Non OCRd documents 25 pages per minute 160 pages per minute
* Single page text documents are used to calculate above rates. Processing rate will vary,
depending on document type and size. Burst processing rates are much higher than continuous
input document processing rates.
Improved OCR Accuracy:
The new OCR engine in eCabinet 2.3.x is not only faster, it delivers greatly improved text
recognition accuracy even on graphically- intense or poorly scanned documents.
Fully Searchable PDFs:
PDFs that are created using eCabinet 2.3.x are fully searchable. Now, when searching for a word or
phrase within a PDF document created using eCabinet 2.3.x, the desired word(s) are highlighted in
the PDF viewer.
Increased Database Availability:
In eCabinet 2.3.x, we have improved the way eCabinet tunes its database in order to make
documents more available for search and retrieval. In previous versions, the eCabinet would
periodically go offline during database optimisation. This no longer happens with eCabinet 2.3.x;
full functionality is available 24/7.
Scan Capture:
Scan Capture for eCabinet is a new scanning application. Scan Capture simplifies the scan and
tag (or index) process when storing documents or images to an eCabinet. Scan Capture offers
eCabinet users a complete scanning workflow solution.
Scan Capture is a Windows PC-based application with a user-friendly and intuitive interface. Scan
Capture controls the scanner to allow users to capture documents or images easily, which can then
be combined, separated or annotated with Drag & Drop ease, prior to being stored on an
eCabinet.
Features of Scan Capture Include:
Capture documents or images from most TWAIN Compliant scanners, or process image
files stored on your PC or file server.
Full eCabinet integration: eCabinet folder listings and custom field information
automatically appear in the Scan Capture user interface.
Easily tag documents with notes, summary data or user-defined field information.
Combine multiple pages into one document, or separate pages into individual
documents.
Drag and drop documents directly to eCabinet folders.
Usage Note about Scan Capture:
Scan Capture allows the user to scan black and white, greyscale and colour documents and then
capture these documents to eCabinet in either Tiff or PDF format.
eCabinet was primarily designed to process black and white documents and, as such, it provides
efficient G4 compression of black and white Tiff images. Greyscale and colour images are most
efficiently and effectively captured on the eCabinet as PDFs. As PDFs they are compressed and
processed by the OCR engine. If greyscale and colour images are saved as Tiffs, they are saved as
uncompressed images and can thus be very large.
In order to prevent these very large files from being created, we recommend using the following
guidelines when using Scan Capture.
When scanning and saving a Black and White document or image that needs to be indexed and
compressed:
Scan the document or image as Black and White with at least 200dpi (300 or better is
preferred).
Check the Convert to PDF box before sending the document/image to the eCabinet.
You will be prompted for any necessary custom field data.
The document will then be captured to the eCabinet as a compressed PDF file. The
OCR engine then processes the file and any custom field data is indexed. A thumbnail
and a summary are then generated.
When scanning and saving a Black and White document or image that needs to be maintained as
a Tiff image:
Scan the document or image as Black and White.

Be sure the Convert to PDF box is not checked and then send the document/image to
the eCabinet. You will be prompted for any necessary custom field data.
The file is then captured as a Tiff file, using G4 compression. A thumbnail and
summary are then produced.
When scanning and saving either a colour or greyscale document or image that needs to be
indexed and compressed:
Scan the document or image as greyscale or colour with at least 200dpi (300 or better is
preferred).
Check the Convert to PDF box before sending the document/image to the eCabine t.
You will be prompted for any necessary custom field data.
The file is then captured to the eCabinet as a compressed PDF file. The OCR engine
then processes the file and any custom field data is indexed. A thumbnail and a
summary are then generated.
When scanning and capturing a colour or greyscale document or image that needs to be
maintained as a Tiff image and where the size of the file is not a consideration:
Scan the document or image as colour or greyscale. Set the minimum resolution (dpi)
that meets your needs.
Be sure the Convert to PDF box is not checked and then send the document/image to
the eCabinet. You will be prompted for any necessary custom field data.
The file is then captured to the eCabinet as a Tiff file, using NO compression. A colour
file will be converted into 24bit/True Colour, thus producing a very large file.
A thumbnail is then produced. An eCabinet using Version 2.3.x software may not
produce a summary.
Please note: An eCabinet using Version 2.2.1 software may generate summaries for grey and
colour Tiffs. An eCabinet using Version 2.3.x software may not generate a summary.
Thumbnails are produced in either case.
Scan Capture Logistics:
The first copy of Scan Capture is now included in the box with your eCabinet. Additional licences /
copies are available to order from NRGI, in the following multiples:
1 user
5 users
10 users
Site licence (up to 100 users)
Please note, Scan Capture has an English language only user interface.
OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE
eCabinet has always been a combination of hardware and software in a single packaged solution.
To complement the desktop version, familiar from version 1.x, a new rack- mounted hardware
device has been launched, the 2100 model.
The eCabinet 2100 was designed for organizations with a more centralised information technology
(IT) department. The eCabinet 2100 must be installed in a standard 19- inch computer rack system
(which is not provided with the eCabinet).
As a second-generation eCabinet, the eCabinet 2100 represents a perfect marriage between form
and function. The sleek architecture of the eCabinet 2100 measures just 1.75 in height (1U);
perfectly fitting your 19 data centre rack. Like its predecessor, the eCabinet 2100 allows you to
effortlessly capture, file, and retrieve any file type from your networked office peripherals.
eCabinet 2100 has a larger 60Gb hard disk.
This model complements existing backup and storage implementations at your location. Instead of
including a DVD-RAM, this model comes standard with a CD-ROM drive for system software
installation and other software updates only. Using our new backup functionality of an NFS server
on your LAN, you can integrate the new eCabinet 2100 seamlessly into your existing IT
infrastructure.
Hardware Specifications
eCabinet 2.1 eCabinet 2100

Offline Storage NFS, DVD-RAM NFS
U/I
LCD Display 122 x 32 Graphics 122 x 32 Graphics
Hardware Interface up/down/left/right/Enter/Cancel up/down/left/right/Enter/Cancel
Physical Information
Dimensions (W x D x H) 394 x 310 x 178mm 428 x 587 x 44
Weight 13.6kg TBD
Hardware Warranty 1 Year Advance Exchange Warranty 1 Year Advance Exchange Warranty
Input Sources Networked Copiers Networked Copiers
Networked Scanners Networked Scanners
Interne t Fax Internet Fax
Networked Postscript / PCL Printers Networked Postscript / PCL Printers
SMTP e-Mail SMTP e-Mail
PC PC
Motherboard Intel CA 810E Intel CA 810AEL
CPU
Manufacturer/Model Intel Celeron 500 Pentium III 800
RAM 2x128MB DIMMS 66Mhz 2 x 256MB 133MHz
Hard drive
Size 30GB UDMA 66 60GB UDMA 66
Speed 7200rpm 7200rpm
Removable Media
Media 4.7 DVD-RAM CD-ROM
Access time 210ms
Power Source Manually switched 110/220 Auto Switching
Controller SCSI ATAPI
I/O Connections
Ethernet 10/100Base-T 10/100Base-T
Ports RS-232 Serial RS-232 Serial
Operating Environment
Temperature 5C to 45C 5C to 45C
Altitude <2500 meters <2500 meters
Relative Humidity 15% to 85% (non-condensing) 15% to 85% (non-condensing)
Storage Environment
Temperature -30C to 60C -30C to 60C
Relative Humidity 10% to 90% (non-condensing) 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Product Safety/Agency UL UL
CE CE
EMC/EMI EMC/EMI
FCC Class B Digital FCC Class B Digital
Reliability >100,000 Ho urs >100,000 Hours
COMPETITION
Document management can mean many different things. It is used to describe anything from
scanning a piece of paper to complex systems that manage every piece of information and workflow
within an organization. The price of these systems varies from a few hundred Euros to many
hundreds of thousands. There are too many systems to investigate and describe in detail so below is
an analysis of some of the major competitive areas.
Enterprise wide document management systems :
Examples of these companies include Documentum, Hummingbird, FileNET and OpenText. These
companies have all been producing document management systems for a long time. They have
very good products with high levels of functionality and the ability to customise them to fit with
exacting customer requirements. Their customer base is strong and they have an extensive list of
distributors and resellers who implement and customise the software.
The solutions are very expensive both in terms of the software capital expenditure and the time and
effort required to implement. They require separate hardware, operating systems and databases.
Typically teams of expensive consultants and IT specialists will take weeks or months working with
the client to specify the system and then install it. This often leads to the client changing
dramatically they way they work.
The administration overhead of running these systems is high.
Typically these solutions cost 100,000 and more.
Other document management software:
Examples of these companies include Xerox DocuShare and DocuWare. These companies produce
software that is feature rich although not as comprehensive as the enterprise wide systems. They
have good installed bases of customers and distribution channels.
The solutions suffer from some of the same problems as the larger systems. As well as the software
clients have to purchase hardware, operating systems and databases. The implementation process
and consultancy is not quite as demanding. The risk element is still present, as the software
components have to be installed.
The basic software packages can be quite inexpensive. To achieve the same specification as
eCabinet the price is approx 28,000. Depending on the complexity of the installation the price can
easily double with implementation charges.
Groupware:
By Groupware we mean e-Mail and similar applications such as Microsoft Outlook and Lotus
Notes. Many companies have these software packages installed and use them as stores for
documents and e-Mails. They have the advantage that users are familiar with the interface.
They are not designed as document management systems and are not good at managing the large
amounts of information that tend to be stored. Most IT departments spend considerable time
managing Groupware systems and the amount of information that users store.
These systems may at first appear low cost. When the lack of document management functionality
and the overheads are taken into consideration, they are not attractive.
Web-based document management:
A number of companies are starting to offer hosted document management systems via the Internet.
This appears attractive, as there is no administrative overhead and no capital cost for setting up the
system.
The client requires high-speed communication links for them to be effective. The client has no
control of the software that is used to manage their documents and little, if any, control over the
configuration. They have to rely on a third party to maintain the system and make documents
available.
Although the capital costs are low the true cost of running these systems is high.
Hardware suppliers:
Our traditional competition have presented themselves as providing document management

solutions, to a certain extent, for a period of time. Canon have a number of products that allow
scanning and storing of paper and Xerox work with DocuShare, as mentioned above.
Sharp Zylab have recently announced a similar package to eCabinet. It includes Zylab software and
a Compaq server. The product (Sharp Find Server) is being positioned for Sharp copiers only as a
document source, not with the range of input devices possible with the eCabinet. Find Server is
only being launched in the UK and the price is expected to be 17,995.00
Xerox are also launching a packaged product called the Document Appliance. This consists of a
server with pre- loaded DocuShare software. The unit comes as a 10-seat version or a 50-seat
version. Additional licences can be purchased in 10-seat increments to a maximum of 50 users.
Limited information is available on this unit.
Conclusion:
Although there are many document management solutions available no other company has the
packaged solution that we have. eCabinet is a complete document management system, including
software and hardware, that is ready to install. Despite the simplicity of the solution it is a highly
featured product that will meet the requirements of many prospects and clients.
Currently we have a unique offering with eCabinet. It is important that we make the most of the
opportunity before the market has a chance to catch up with us.
PRODUCT POSITIONING AND SALES
Target channels:
eCabinet 2.3.x will be made available only to distributors who meet the launch criteria as previously
specified.
Target markets:
eCabinet is targeted at workgroups of between 20 and 100 users. This makes it suitable for
companies of that size or departments within larger companies.
Although the target number of users is 20 to 100 you should not discount clients with more users.
The suggested target size refers to a typical office environment. If, however, the application is for
an archive system when only occasional access to documents is required, eCabinet can potentially
support many more users. In this scenario we have a sales advantage, as we do not charge
additional licence fees for more users.
Sales approach:
The sales teams will need to employ a consultative approach to sell eCabinet. It is unlikely you will
be successful selling eCabinet on a list of the features and functionality or the number of documents
that can be stored. The sales team will be required to identify a potential requirement with a client
and then demonstrate how that requirement can be met with an eCabinet solution.
The creation of vertical market solutions will not only shorten the sales cycle, but also increase the
margin within a complete solution. Potential vertical market applications include:
Regulatory compliance (e.g. finance companies)

Shipping document (logistics companies)
Contracts (legal, finance)
Precedents (legal)
Personnel files (any company)
Invoice archiving (any company)
The sales and implementation cycle is likely to go through a normal process including the following
steps:
Initial meeting to establish what document processes cause the prospect difficulties, how
those processes work, if any budget is available and who the decision makers are
An internal meeting between sales and the product specialist to work out the best possible
solution for the prospect. If necessary, additional meetings with the prospect to confirm the
requirements
Presentation of the customised solution to the prospect. This should prove to the prospect
that you and the product can create a suitable solution to meet their requirements
Placing of an order by the customer
Sales approach continued
Consultancy work to determine the exact requirements and how the proposed solution
should be configured to meet these
Implementation of the solution
Training of the end users and administrators
Support and maintenance of the solution
On going account meetings with the customer to ensure they are happy with the solution and
determine where the next eCabinet solution can be sold
Solutions Discovery Guide (SDG):
The SDG is a sales tool to help reduce the sales cycle and sell more eCabinets. It can be
downloaded from the Solutions page on NRGIs Extranet.
Revenue sources:
eCabinet opens new revenue opportunities compared to our traditional products. As with our
hardware products, there is a margin to be made on selling the actual unit but the real revenue
comes from the services around the product. These are services that may not have been charged for
in the past, but when clients are purchasing IT products they expect to pay for them.
Consultancy is required before the implementation of eCabinet. This may be a relatively simple
site survey to establish the IT environment or it may be more complex, looking at the document
flows within the clients organization.
eCabinet will need to be installed into the clients IT environment. eCabinet makes this a relatively
easy process but it still requires time to integrate the various capture sources and configure the
solution as per the results of the consultancy.
A browser interface makes eCabinet very familiar and easy to use. Users will still need training,
both on the concept of the solution and also the actual use of it.
The client will require support of the solution. This should include the hardware, software and the
overall solution that has been provided.
Often the complete solution will include other products from the NRG range, so there is always the
opportunity to cross sell. In some circumstances eCabinet may lead the sale, in others it will be our
other products.
Key Features:
Remember when using these features that they are only a benefit to the customer if they help to
meet an objective. Features in themselves do not sell eCabinet.
Efficient and Easy Operation
Fast and easy document retrieval through full- text and keyword searches
Innovative visual display of documents for fast inspection
Automatic OCR and indexing enables full- text search on both electronic and paper
documents
Capture through already existing network attached peripherals, printers, scanners, copiers,
etc. faxes, e-mail, and other paper documents
Automatic processing of documents
Simple user interface, accessible through common web browsers interfaces
Office Efficiency
eCabinet can be tailored to your companys needs through classification and organization of
documents into folders, the attaching of keywords, and the option of setting up workgroups,
users, etc.
Seamlessly integrates paper-based and digital documents and stores them in one centralised
location.
Low Total Cost of Ownership - Easy to Install & Maintain
Easy to install and administer because of its single-purpose design

Easy to connect with Ethernet
Little user-training needed
No license fees
Low maintenance through high reliability and automated data backup
Eliminates cost of file cabinets and storage space
Minimises downtime because it is a reliable single-purpose appliance
Scalability and Security
Multiple eCabinets can be connected to allow the sharing of documents between several
workgroups within one location or for linking remote offices
Access to system is restricted to authorised personnel only through password protection
Documents can be secured and made viewable to individual users, groups, or all valid users
Limited network traffic
Applications:
The following table gives a list of sample applications for eCabinet. It will be necessary to tailor
the requirements stated to those in each individual country, as they will depend on the laws and
customs of that country.
Market
Typical Applications Requirements eCabinet Advantages
Segment
Financial Audit Reports, Financial Statements, *Store duplicate and triplicate copies *Frees clerical staff to focus on more
Proposals/Agreements, of documents. valuable tasks and reduces need of
Invoices/Receipts, Tax Statements, additional staff
Expense Reports
*Maintain all client records for 7 *More efficient search and retrieval
years. process for increased overall
productivity.
*Large physical storage space *Recover lost space and facilities for
requirements. physical storage.
*Data Security. *Multiple levels of data security.
Insurance Applications, claims, policies, reports *Maintain copies and records of *Provides faster information access
claims and customers. for faster processing and improved
customer responsiveness
*Duplicate and triplicate copies for *Customer policies and records are
back up and cross-referencing. updated in a timely manner
*Eliminate the need for multiple
copies and manual cross referencing
systems
Human Employment records, benefit packages, *Maintain various employee files *Maintaining and updating employee
Resources regulatory documents data through a single file access
*Data Security. *Increase data security
Legal Sales and Purchase Agreements, *Extensive filing systems to hold *Reduction of physical and financial
Invoices/Receipts, Correspondence, various types of documents burden associated with manual filing
Evidence, Summons, Case References systems.
*Client records are stored at least *Vast repository of storage resources
three years
*Information Security *Increased data security and client
privacy
Medical Patient Records and Test Results, *Multiple copies of same documents *Maintain up to date records
Consent Forms, Accounting Statements filed under different headings
*Information is shared between *Eliminate need for duplicates and
departments that may be physically triplicate copies and manual cross
separated filing systems
*Information needs to be accurate *Reduce physical space for storage
and up to date and associated costs
*Reduce errors from manual data
entry
*Information Security *Increase data security and patient
privacy
Government Documents, Forms, and Filings that are *Information is shared between *Provides a central location for
part of every government bureau and departments and needs to be updated records with easy access
agency timely
Multiple copies are typically *Information is updated timely
maintained
*Data Security. *Increased data security
Applications continued
Real Estate Customer Data, Mortgage Applications, *Property history tracking *Easy searching by address or
Home Data Sheets customer
*Customer and property specific *Reduce physical space for storage
filing needs and associated costs
*Provides faster information access
for faster processing and improved
WHAT FITS WHAT

ECABINETV2 eCabinet 2.1 eCabinet 2.1 eCabinet 2.1

ECABV2RACK eCabinet 2100 eCabinet 2100 eCabinet 2100
Options
ECABINETSDK eCabinet Software Development Kit

ECABSCAN1 eCabinet Scan Capture - 1 user licence
ECABSCAN100 eCabinet Scan Capture - Site licence (up to 100 users)
NRG Compatible Products
Scanners: SMR542 requires AXIS700/7000 Scan Server (SCSI connected) between

scanner and network, SMR30DC (requires ScanRouter Professional)
Fax: F64, E99
Printers: Entire range
Copiers: DMR22A/27A/32A, DMR35A/45A
PCR38 (requires Copy/Scan option and ScanRouter Professional)
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Languages supported by OCR:
English (UK)
English (USA)
Dutch
Irish/Gaelic
Portuguese
Portuguese (Brazilian)
French
French (Canadian)
Spanish
Spanish (Mexican)
German
German (Swiss)
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Danish
Italian
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
e-Cabinet
Version 2.x
Network Office Appliance
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
Production
Version: Launch Date Location
Version 2.0 July, 2001 USA

Version 2.1 September, 2001 USA
Version 2100 (hardware) October, 2001 USA

Version 1
July, 2001
e-Cabinet Version 2.x
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Main Components 3
Overview of Software Enhancements 4
Performance Enhancements 4
Enterprise Level Application Features 4
Ease of Use Features 5
Software Developer Kit (SDK)
(Separate Launch in September 2001) 7
Overview of Hardware 8
Hardware Specifications 9
Competition 10
Enterprise Wide Document Management Systems 10
Other Document Management Software 10
Groupware 11
Web-based Document Management 11
Hardware Suppliers 11
Conclusion 11
Product Positioning and Sales 13
Target Channels 13
Target Markets 13
Sales Approach 13
Revenue Sources 14
Key Features 15
Applications 16
What Fits What 18
Additional Information 19

K:\ Customer\Technic\NPSDOC\New Pending Approval\e-Cabinet_Version_2.x.doc 1

INTRODUCTION
Following the successful launch of the revolutionary e-Cabinet product, NRGI is launching version
2.x.
Organizations understand the importance of being able to manage documents, select who can see
those documents and share the knowledge that they bring.
Document management systems have been available for fifteen years or more. They have tended to
be expensive, specialised and a considerable resource burden on operating and IT departments
within an organization. Although newer document management systems are targeting sma ll to
medium companies and departments, the solutions still require considerable IT knowledge and time
to implement.
e-Cabinet is designed to make the implementation of document management quick and easy. It is a
complete document management product, inc luding hardware and software, which can be
incorporated into existing networks without major disruption. It can be set up to capture documents
from a wide range of sources and then index and manage them automatically.
The new features in 2.x allow the user and the installer greater flexibility when implementing the
product but they do not detract from the fundamental principle of making e-Cabinet easy to use and
install.
This document assumes knowledge of e-Cabinet 1.x and makes some comparisons between the two
versions. Readers should familiarise themselves with e-Cabinet 1.x before reading this document.
The Product Information Guide for e-Cabinet 1.x is available on the NRGI Extranet.

PRODUCT OVERVIEW
e-Cabinet is the first of the so-called Network Office Appliances. A Network Office Appliance
(NOA) can be characterised by three things:
Network: it is connected to a network, be it the Internet or an Intranet;

Office: it is targeted at the workgroup environment
Appliance: it is as easy to use and install as a normal home appliance, whilst it adheres to
market standards to ensure the openness of the system.
Within the concept of NOAs, e-Cabinet is more specifically an Information Appliance, since it will
be used by companies to manage the informatio n within their organization more effectively.
The e-Cabinet is an intelligently designed software and hardware package that specifically
addresses the needs of both small businesses and the enterprise workgroup customer. In contrast to
existing, high-end, mission-critical document management solutions, e-Cabinet requires minimal
user maintenance and administration, features easy-to-use client functionality for simple, quick
information access and scales to the needs of the workgroup.
Most importantly, e-Cabinet addresses the capture and retrieval problem by leveraging existing
digital multifunctional peripheral technologies. In contrast to dedicated scanners and high labour
overhead required in traditional document management systems, e-Cabinet uses enhanced MFPs, as
well as network-attached scanners, faxes, printers, copiers and client PCs to allow for simple, low-
cost, unconscious and intuitive document capture.
Main components:
e-Cabinet device: Although this is a piece of hardware the value of the e-Cabinet box is in the
software and what it can deliver. e-Cabinet can capture documents from
PCs, fax machines, printers, e-Mail, scanners and MFPs. These documents
are indexed automatically, saved to an internal hard disc drive and then
backed up to an internal or network storage device.
PC Capture: Software that is installed on client PCs and allows users to capture electronic
documents to the e-Cabinet.
Browser interface: The main user interface is through a web browser. Users can manage and
search for documents through this intuitive application. Administrators also
use the browser interface to configure and maintain e-Cabinet.

OVERVIEW OF SOFTWARE ENHANCEMENTS

The new features of the e-Cabinet 2.x software can be generally grouped into fo ur categories:
Performance Enhancements
Enterprise Level Application Features
Ease of Use Enhancements
Software Developers Kit
Performance Enhancements:
Depending on the solution for e-Cabinet it may be more important to be able to capture
documents very quickly or to be able to retrieve them quickly. For example, if the solution
requires large quantities of paper documents to be scanned for archive it is unlikely that
users will want access to these quickly. If the solution involves scanning daily post it is
important that people retrieve the documents quickly. An adjustable indexing rate feature
is provided, allowing the administrator to tailor the document processing to suit the user
requirements.
Enterprise Level Application Features:
Data Replication
Data replication allows e-Cabinet to exchange files automatically. This can be to a single
unit or to multiple units. Multiple e-Cabinets can even replicate into a single e-Cabinet
creating a central repository. Documents are encrypted as they are duplicated to another e-
Cabinet. The four methods of replication are:
a. Uni-directional: In which one e-Cabinet (the capturing e-Cabinet) replicates

all, or selected documents, to another e-Cabinet;
b. Bi-directional: In which two e-Cabinets are actively capturing documents
with each e-Cabinet replicating its captured documents
(or selected documents) to the other e-Cabinet;
c. One-to-Many: In which one e-Cabinet replicates all, or selected, documents
to multiple target e-Cabinets (effectively de-aggregation);
d. Many-to-One: In which multiple e-Cabinets replicate all, or selected
documents, to a single target e-Cabinet
(effectively aggregation).
Because data replication can be used to create document identical e-Cabinets, it also
provides an easily accessed failsafe backup. Even in the event of a disaster, document
management can continue uninterrupted by simply selecting a redundant e-Cabinet.

Addition of 5 new user interface languages

The e-Cabinet will have five localised versions available. During the initial set up, the
administrator chooses the desired language. Localisation includes the user interface, screen
shots and graphics, all online help files and manuals (available only in .pdf format). The
administrator can change the language at any time at the expense of having to re-index all
captured documents.
Note: The additional languages French, German, Dutch, Italian and UK English will
be available in version 2.1
HTTP Backup
A new web based back up option, using HTTP, allows documents to be backed up to a
remote host (Internet based WORM storage ISP, for example.)
Simultaneous back up to multiple locations/media

This feature supports simultaneous back up to up to 10 locations. The transfer of documents
is accomplished via a proprietary, highly reliable protocol. Features include document
encryption keys (when using HTTP), sending and receiving acknowledgements and data
recovery. In the unlikely event that the e-Cabinet dies, the index can be rebuilt using the
tags from the remote source. Once the index is rebuilt, all the documents can once again be
retrieved.
Kofax Ascent Capture

e-Cabinet works seamlessly with Kofax Ascent Capture to provide sophisticated batch scan
processing capabilities. Ascent Capture enables the user to verify scanned documents,
validate extracted data, index them for later retrieval, design keyword notes and custom
fields at time of capture for easy document retrieval, and route them directly into folders on
e-Cabinet. Ascent Capture automatically identifies forms and performs highly accurate
recognition of handwriting (ICR), machine print (Accents OCR automatically overrides e-
Cabinets own OCR functions), check marks (OMR), and bar codes to extract even the
toughest data from scanned images without missing a beat. With the addition of Ascent
Capture Internet Server, remote offices can easily scan documents for processing at a central
location, saving time and shipping costs and eliminating the possibility of lost documents.
Note: Separate launch for Kofax Ascent Capture integration planned for September
2001.
Ease of Use features:
Rules Based Capture

Rules based capture allows the administrator to route specific documents to folders based on
a set of pre-defined rules. The document meta data (source, keywords, document title, To
and From fields [e-Mails], capture date, folder name and owner [if available]) can all be
used to construct a set of rules. A rule writing template has been incorporated.
By creating a rule for a fax machine, for example, all faxes from a certain phone number are
not only automatically assigned to a specific owner, they can also be transferred into an e-
Cabinet folder and e-Cabinet can alert the owner to its arrival via e-Mail. By simply
specifying a condition and the resulting actions, e-Cabinet helps take control.

e-Mail Notification
e-Cabinet 2.x can automatically alert via e-Mail any problems it has capturing or processing
documents. By entering in an e-Mail address (or the address of an administrator), e-Mails
will be automatically sent to alert certain problems: DVD Full, DVD Insertion Required for
Restore, and Backup Target. e-Cabinet will continue to e-Mail daily until the problem has
been resolved.
Downloadable Client Software

PC Capture software can now be downloaded to the PC via the network.
Arrow location consistency

When there is a list of documents shown (generated from a search), if there is more than one
page of documents, the continuation arrows are now available at both the top and bottom of
the list.
Installation and Administration Improvements

Improved Installation (network configuration) settings, error reporting and service disk
security warning.
Quick Search
The home page has a quick search facility where a user can type in the words they are
looking for and press go.
Balloons
Usability and auto- hide features have been improved.
Edit Summary
e-Cabinet creates a summary of each document automatically. It is now possible to edit the
summary if required.
One click re -sort

Users can now sort the documents by any of the displayed results criteria just by clicking on
the column header.
Update to PC Capture
The new version of PC Capture allows users to include document specific notes (previously
keywords) at the time of capture.
Time and Date Setting

New improved graphical interface for setting date and time.
User-defined folders
e-Cabinet 2.x has a hierarchical folder structure that lets the user nest folders together,
creating more inclusive folders with smaller sub- groups. Document folder security is
assured because the folder administrator controls who has the read/write privileges, and
retrieval is faster and easier when custom fields have been designated for filing.

Microsoft Outlook Integration

This integration is designed to simplify e-Mail management tasks. Using the built-in
Outlook toolbar, the user can drag and drop e-Mails directly into an e-Cabinet folder,
assign special Custom Fields or case number ID-based retrieval, create summary and
keyword notes, while e-Cabinet automatically indexes the text and creates a summary.
Software Developer Kit (SDK) Separate Launch (provisional launch date of September
2001):
The SDK allows developers to access and manipulate documents that reside on an e-
Cabinet. It also provides programmatic access to frequently used operations on an e-
Cabinet. The SDK supports the following operations:
Search for documents

Retrieve documents from an e-Cabinet
Delete documents from an e-Cabinet
Make copies of documents on an e-Cabinet
Capture documents from local disk to an e-Cabinet
Create/delete folders on an e-Cabinet
Change metadata (e.g., change owner) of documents
Get the list of users and groups on an e-Cabinet
Load the user and group list of an e-Cabinet
A developer can use the SDK to develop a customised front-end (UI) to provide access to e-
Cabinet. It can also be used to write gateway applications that search for documents and
transfer them to other databases or servers, such as Notes, Exchange, Oracle, etc.
The SDK does NOT allow developers to modify administrative settings on an e-Cabinet.
Further, the SDK does NOT allow developers to alter the functionality of the e-Cabinet
appliance. For instance, it is not possible to change the Web UI (including branding) using
the SDK.

OVERVIEW OF HARDWARE
e-Cabinet has always been a combination of hardware and software in a single packaged solution.
To complement the desktop version, familiar from version 1.x, a new rack- mounted hardware
device is being launched, the 2100 model.
The e-Cabinet 2100 model was designed for organizations with a more centralised information
technology (IT) department. The e-Cabinet 2100 model must be installed in a standard 19- inch
computer rack system (which is not provided with the e-Cabinet).
As a second-generation e-Cabinet, the e-Cabinet 2100 represents a perfect marriage between form
and function. The sleek architecture of the e-Cabinet 2100 measures just 1.75 in height (1U);
perfectly fitting your 19 data centre rack. Like its predecessor, the e-Cabinet 2100 allows you to
effortlessly capture, file, and retrieve any file type from your networked office peripherals. e-
Cabinet 2100 has a larger 60Gb hard disk.
This model complements existing backup and storage implementations at your location. Instead of
including a DVD-RAM, this model comes standard with a CD-ROM drive for system software
installation and other software updates only. Using our new HTTP backup functionality or an NFS
server on your LAN, you can integrate the new e-Cabinet 2100 model seamlessly into your existing
IT infrastructure.

e-Cabinet 2.1 e-Cabinet 2100

Offline Storage NFS, DVD-RAM, HTTP NFS, HTTP
U/I
LCD Display 122x32 Graphics 122x32 Graphics
Hardware Interface up/down/left/right/Enter/Cancel up/down/left/right/Enter/Cancel
Physical Information
Dimensions 427mm x 492mm x 309mm TBD
Weight 22 lbs. TBD
Hardware Warranty 1 Year Advance Exchange Warranty 1 Year Advance Exchange Warranty
Input Sources Networked Copiers Networked Copiers
Networked Scanners Networked Scanners
Internet Fax Internet Fax
Networked Postscript / PCL Printers Networked Postscript / PCL Printers
SMTP e-Mail SMTP e-Mail
PC PC
Motherboard Intel CA 810E Intel CA 810AEL
CPU
Manufacturer/Model Intel Celeron 500 Pentium III 800
RAM 2x128MB DIMMS 66Mhz 2 x 256MB 133MHz
Hard drive
Size 30GB UDMA 66 60GB UDMA 66
Speed 7200rpm 7200rpm
Removable Media
Media 4.7 DVD-RAM CD-ROM
Access time 210ms
Power Source Manually switched 110/220 Auto Switching
Controller SCSI ATAPI
I/O Connections
Ethernet 10/100Base-T 10/100Base-T
Ports RS-232 Serial RS-232 Serial
Operating
Environment
Temperature 5C to 45C TBD
Altitude <2500 meters TBD
Relative Humidity 15% to 85% (non-condensing) TBD
Storage Environment
Temperature -30C to 60C TBD
Relative Humidity 10% to 90% (non-condensing) TBD
Product Safety/Agency UL UL
CE CE
EMC/EMI EMC/EMI
FCC Class B Digital FCC Class B Digital
Reliability >100,000 Hours TBD

COMPETITION
Document management can mean many different things. It is used to describe anything from
scanning a piece of paper to complex systems that manage every piece of information and workflow
within an organization. The price of these systems varies from a few hundred Euros to many
hundreds of thousands. There are too many systems to investigate and describe in detail so below is
an analysis of some of the major competitive areas.
Enterprise wide document management systems:
Examples of these companies include Documentum, Hummingbird, FileNET and OpenText. These
companies have all been producing document management systems for a long time. They have
very good products with high levels of functionality and the ability to customise them to fit with
exacting customer requirements. Their customer base is strong and they have an extensive list of
distributors and resellers who implement and customise the software.
The solutions are very expensive both in terms of the software capital expenditure and the time and
effort required to implement. They require separate hardware, operating systems and databases.
Typically teams of expensive consultants and IT specialists will take weeks or months working with
the client to specify the system and then install it. This often leads to the client changing
dramatically they way they work.
The administration overhead of running these systems is high.
Typically these solutions cost 100,000 and more.
Other document management software:
Examples of these companies include Xerox DocuShare and DocuWare. These companies produce
software that is feature rich although not as comprehensive as the enterprise wide systems. They
have good installed bases of customers and distribution channels.
The solutions suffer from some of the same problems as the larger systems. As well as the software
clients have to purchase hardware, operating systems and databases. The implementation process
and consultancy is not quite as demanding. The risk element is still present, as the software
components have to be installed.
The basic software packages can be quite inexpensive. To achieve the same specification as e-
Cabinet the price is approx 28,000. Depending on the complexity of the installation the price can
easily double with implementation charges.

Groupware:
By Groupware we mean e-Mail and similar applications such as Microsoft Outlook and Lotus
Notes. Many companies have these software packages installed and use them as stores for
documents and e-Mails. They have the advantage that users are familiar with the interface.
They are not designed as document management systems and are not good at managing the large
amounts of information that tend to be stored. Most IT departments spend considerable time
managing Groupware systems and the amount of information that users store.
These systems may at first appear low cost. When the lack of document management functionality
and the overheads are taken into consideration, they are not attractive.
Web-based document management:
A number of companies are starting to offer hosted document management systems via the Internet.
This appears attractive, as there is no administrative overhead and no capital cost for setting up the
system.
The client requires high-speed communication links for them to be effective. The client has no
control of the software that is used to manage their documents and little, if any, control over the
configuration. They have to rely on a third party to maintain the system and make documents
available.
Although the capital costs are low the true cost of running these systems is high.
Hardware suppliers:
Our traditional competition have presented themselves as providing document management

solutions, to a certain extent, for a period of time. Canon have a number of products that allow
scanning and storing of paper and Xerox work with DocuShare, as mentioned above.
Sharp Zylab have recently announced a similar package to e-Cabinet. It includes Zylab software
and a Compaq server. The product (Sharp Find Server) is being positioned for Sharp copiers only
as a document source, not with the range of input devices possible with the e-Cabinet. Find Server
is only being launched in the UK and the price is expected to be 17,995.00
Xerox are also launching a packaged product called the Document Appliance. This consists of a
server with pre- loaded DocuShare software. The unit comes as a 10-seat version or a 50-seat
version. Additional licences can be purchased in 10-seat increments to a maximum of 50 users.
Limited information is available on this unit.

Conclusion:
Although there are many document management solutions available no othe r company has the
packaged solution that we have. e-Cabinet is a complete document management system, including
software and hardware, that is ready to install. Despite the simplicity of the solution it is a highly
featured product that will meet the requirements of many prospects and clients.
Currently we have a unique offering with e-Cabinet. It is important that we make the most of the
opportunity before the market has a chance to catch up with us.

PRODUCT POSITIONING AND SALES
Target channels:
e-Cabinet 2.x will be made available only to distributors who meet the launch criteria as previously
specified for version 1.x.
Target markets:
e-Cabinet is targeted at workgroups of between 20 and 50 users. This makes it suitable for
companies of that size or departments within larger companies.
Although the target number of users is 20 to 50 you should not discount clients with more users.
The suggested target size refers to a typical office environment. If, however, the application is for
an archive system when only occasional access to documents is required, e-Cabinet can potentially
support many more users. In this scenario we have a sales advantage, as we do not charge
additional licence fees for more users.
Sales approach:
The sales teams will need to employ a consultative approach to sell e-Cabinet. It is unlikely you
will be successful selling e-Cabinet on a list of the features and functionality or the number of
documents that can be stored. The sales team will be required to identify a potential requirement
with a client and then demonstrate how that requirement can be met with an e-Cabinet solution.
The creation of vertical market solutions will not only shorten the sales cycle, but also increase the
margin within a complete solution. Potential vertical market applications include:
Regulatory compliance (e.g. finance companies)

Shipping document (logistics companies)
Contracts (legal, finance)
Precedents (legal)
Personnel files (any company)
Invoice archiving (any company)
The sales and implementation cycle is likely to go through a normal process including the following
steps:
Initial meeting to establish what document processes cause the prospect difficulties, how
those processes work, if any budget is available and who the decision makers are
An internal meeting between sales and the product specialist to work out the best possible
solution for the prospect. If necessary, additional meetings with the prospect to confirm the
requirements
Presentation of the customised solution to the prospect. This should prove to the prospect
that you and the product can create a suitable solution to meet their requirements
Placing of an order by the customer

Sales approach continued
Consultancy work to determine the exact requirements and how the proposed solution
should be configured to meet these
Implementation of the solution
Training of the end users and administrators
Support and maintenance of the solution
On going account meetings with the customer to ensure they are happy with the solution and
determine where the next e-Cabinet solution can be sold
Revenue sources:
e-Cabinet opens new revenue opportunities compared to our traditional products. As with our
hardware products, there is a margin to be made on selling the actual unit but the real revenue
comes from the services around the product. These are services that may not have been charged for
in the past, but when clients are purchasing IT products they expect to pay for them.
Consultancy is required before the implementation of e-Cabinet. This may be a relatively simple
site survey to establish the IT environment or it may be more complex, looking at the document
flows within the clients organization.
e-Cabinet will need to be installed into the clients IT environment. e-Cabinet makes this a
relatively easy process but it still requires time to integrate the various capture sources and
configure the solution as per the results of the consultancy.
A browser interface makes e-Cabinet very familiar and easy to use. Users will still need training,
both on the concept of the solution and also the actual use of it.
The client will require support of the solution. This should include the hardware, software and the
overall solution that has been provided.
Often the complete solution will include other products from the NRG range, so there is always the
opportunity to cross sell. In some circumstances e-Cabinet may lead the sale, in others it will be
our other products.

Key Features:
Remember when using these features that they are only a benefit to the customer if they help to
meet an objective. Features in themselves do not sell e-Cabinet.
Efficient and Easy Operation
Fast and easy document retrieval through full- text and keyword searches
Innovative visual display of documents for fast inspection
Automatic OCR and indexing enables full- text search on both electronic and paper
documents
Capture through already existing network attached peripherals, printers, scanners, copiers,
etc. faxes, e-mail, and other paper documents
Automatic processing of documents
Simple user interface, accessible through common web browsers interfaces
Office Efficiency
e-Cabinet can be tailored to your companys needs through classification and organization
of documents into folders, the attaching of keywords, and the option of setting up
workgroups, users, etc.
Seamlessly integrates paper-based and digital documents and stores them in one centralised
location.
Low Total Cost of Ownership - Easy to Install & Maintain
Easy to install and administer because of its single-purpose design

Easy to connect with Ethernet
Little user-training needed
No license fees
Low maintenance through high reliability and automated data backup
Eliminates cost of file cabinets and storage space
Minimises downtime because it is a reliable single-purpose appliance
Scalability and Security
Multiple e-cabinets can be connected to allow the sharing of documents between several
workgroups within one location or for linking remote offices
Access to system is restricted to authorised personnel only through password protection
Documents can be secured and made viewable to individual users, groups, or all valid users
Limited network traffic

Applications:
The following table gives a list of sample applications for e-Cabinet. It will be necessary to tailor
the requirements stated to those in each individual country, as they will depend on the laws and
customs of that country.
Market
Typical Applications Requirements e-Cabinet Advantages
Segment
Financial Audit Reports, Financial Statements, *Store duplicate and triplicate copies *Frees clerical staff to focus on more
Proposals/Agreements, of documents. valuable tasks and reduces need of
Invoices/Receipts, Tax Statements, additional staff
Expense Reports
*Maintain all client records for 7 *More efficient search and retrieval
years. process for increased overall
productivity.
*Large physical storage space *Recover lost space and facilities for
requirements. physical storage.
*Data Security. *Multiple levels of data security.
Insurance Applications, claims, policies, reports *Maintain copies and records of *Provides faster information access
claims and customers. for faster processing and improved
*Duplicate and triplicate copies for *Customer policies and records are
back up and cross-referencing. updated in a timely manner
*Eliminate the need for multiple
copies and manual cross referencing
systems
Human Employment records, benefit packages, *Maintain various employee files *Maintaining and updating employee
Resources regulatory documents data through a single file access
*Data Security. *Increase data security
Legal Sales and Purchase Agreements, *Extensive filing systems to hold *Reduction of physical and financial
Invoices/Receipts, Correspondence, various types of documents burden associated with manual filing
Evidence, Summons, Case References systems.
*Client records are stored at least *Vast repository of storage resources
three years
*Information Security *Increased data security and client
privacy
Medical Patient Records and Test Results, *Multiple copies of same documents *Maintain up to date records
Consent Forms, Accounting Statements filed under different headings
*Information is shared between *Eliminate need for duplicates and
departments that may be physically triplicate copies and manual cross
separated filing systems
*Information needs to be accurate *Reduce physical space for storage
and up to date and associated costs
*Reduce errors from manual data
entry
*Information Security *Increase data security and patient
privacy
Government Documents, Forms, and Filings that are *Information is shared between *Provides a central location for
part of every government bureau and departments and needs to be updated records with easy access
agency timely
Multiple copies are typically *Information is updated timely
maintained
*Data Security. *Increased data security

Applications continued
Real Estate Customer Data, Mortgage Applications,*Property history tracking *Easy searching by address or
Home Data Sheets customer
*Customer and property specific *Reduce physical space for storage
filing needs and associated costs
*Provides faster information access
for faster processing and improved

WHAT FITS WHAT

ECABINETV2 eCabinet 2.1 eCabinet 2.1 eCabinet 2.1

ECABV2RACK eCabinet 2100 eCabinet 2100 eCabinet 2100
Options
DIFICB-1 Capture box type 270 for connection to DMR22/27 to capture scans and
copies.
NRG Compatible Products
Scanners: SMR 540, SMR542 requires AXIS700/7000 Document Server (SCSI

connected) between scanner and network, SMR30DC
Fax: F64, E99
Printers: Entire range
Copiers: DMR22/27, DMR35A/45A

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Languages supported by OCR:
English (UK)
English (USA)
Dutch
Irish/Gaelic
Portuguese
Portuguese (Brazilian)
French
French (Canadian)
Spanish
Spanish (Mexican)
German
German (Swiss)
Norwegian
Swedish
Finnish
Danish
Italian
ICB-1 Power supply:
We have been informed that, from July 2001, the ICB-1 power supply will not comply with new EC
regulations.

Version 1.11
CopyPrinters
CPMR 250
CPMR 308
CPMR 308A
CPMR 308B
CPMR 308BA
CPMR 430
CPMR 450A
CPMR 490A
WFW Home ElecBro

NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
CPMR250
CopyPrinter
Digital Duplicator
Nashuatec 6123cp
Rex Rotary 6123cp
Gestetner 6123cp
Launch Country
Month of Origin
June 2003 China

Version 1
March 2003
CPMR250
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Sales Points and Major Features 9
What Fits What 14
Product specifications may change during a products life

and, if in doubt, you are advised to contact NRGI
K:\Company\Market\NPS\CPMR250.doc 1
CPMR250
INTRODUCTION
With the launch of the CPMR250, NRGI are hoping to satisfy potential CopyPrinter
customers that have a need for a product positioned below the successful CPMR308/b.
There are a considerable number of Stencil Duplicator users who are ready to upgrade to a
CopyPrinter and now, with the CPMR250, we have a product that is extremely competitive
against the Riso KS500.
The CPMR250 is a low-end CopyPrinter that is an addition to our already successful

CopyPrinter range. This product is not designed to replace the CPMR308/b but is designed
to encourage users to upgrade from old products to low-end, high quality CopyPrinters and
also to have a price competitive product in aggressively priced tender situations.
CPMR250
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Product Image:
Mainframe 1:
Sheet through Scanner

(Max: 1 sheet)
Paper Feed Tray

(Tray fixed System)
Capacity: 500
sheets
Paper
Delivery Tray
(Tray fixed System)
Capacity: 500 sheets
Paper adjustable lever

(Independent shift)
Controller
Interface
CPMR250
Master Eject Box

Capacity: 30 masters / B4
30 masters / LG
Paper Counter
Master Counter
CPMR250
Mainframe 2:
Main Switch
Controller Interface
Connector **
Power cord for the

inlet cable
Note:
Paper feed tray and paper delivery tray cannot be folded.
When the mainframe is shipped, the paper feed tray and the delivery tray is removed from
the mainframe.
** Optional controller is connected to this area.
CPMR250
Operation Panel:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1. Enlargement / Reduction Indicator 11. Combine Key

2. Error Indicators 12. Image Position Key
3. Image Density Key 13. Speed Key
4. Counter 14. Number Keys
5. Type Of Original Key 15. Clear / Stop Key
6. On Line Key 16. Print Start Key
7. Clear Modes / Recovery Key 17. Master Making Key
8. Auto Cycle Key 18. Proof Key
9. Controller LEDS
10. Enlargement / Reduction Key
CPMR250
Competitive Positioning:
Price
CPMR308/b
Riso CR1610/30
School Tenders Duplo DP2050
VS. KS500C
Superior
Specification
Riso KS 500C At
HIGH-END Competitive
CPMR250 STENCIL
DUPLICATOR
price
Product Concept:
Cost competitive low-end model with B4 sheet scanning/printing image

area
Simplified operation panel with LED for easier operation
Easy maintenance for customers
PC connectivity with controller UC5 and UC5e
Thin paper capability
CPMR250
PRODUCT POSITIONING
CPMR CPMR490 CPMR490A

390
CPMR450 CPMR450MC CPMR450A
CPMR329
CPMR430
CPMR327 TBA
CPMR308
CPMR306
CPMR304
CPMR250
1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003
CPMR250
SALES POINTS AND MAJOR FEATURES

Competitive mainframe pricing.
Reliable paper feeding mechanism. Paper feeding pressure and paper

separation pressure can be manually adjusted to avoid paper jams.
Users can replace consumable spare parts easily, thus alleviating service
calls.
Simplified and easy operation.
PC Connectivity: Controller connectivity enables the CopyPrinter to

become a low-cost high-speed printer. This is a major benefit over the
Riso KS500, as this product does not offer PC connectivity.
Advantages over Stencil Duplicator:

1. Automatic process of Master making, printing and master ejection.
2. Total job time reduced, due to automatic processes.
3. Dramatically improved image quality compared to stencil duplicators.
4. Spot colour.
5. PC Connectivity.
CPMR250
Master Processing Digital
Printing Process Fully automatic one drum stencil system
Original Type Sheets (one original sheet only)
Original Size Max. 275 x 395mm
Min. 90 x 140mm
Pixel Density 300 x 300dpi
Image Modes Letter Mode, Photo Mode
Image Density Lighter, Normal, Darker
Reproduction Ratios 100%
4 reductions: 71, 82, 87, 93%
3 enlargements: 115, 122, 141%
Zoom No
Printing Area B4 drum: Max. 250 x 355mm
Leading Edge Margin 5mm 3mm
Print Paper Size Max. 275 x 395mm
Min. 90 x 140mm
Print Paper Weight 35.0 to 127.9g/m2
First Copy Time (Master Process Time) Less than 45.0 sec. (B4 length)
Second Copy Time (First Print Time) Less than 47.0 sec. (B4 length)
Printing Speed 60 90 sheets/minute
(60, 90cpm / 2 steps)
Paper Feed Tray Capacity 500 sheets (Height limit 55mm, 80g/m2
paper)
Paper Delivery Tray Capacity 500 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Master Counter Standard
Paper Counter Standard
Master Feed 50m (100 masters / roll B4)
Master Eject Box Capacity Max. 30 masters
Colour Drum Change Available
Auto Background Correction Available
Margin Erase No
Auto Cycle Available (Default = Off)
Skip Feed No
Overlay No
Economy Mode No
Security Mode No
Tint Mode No
SP Mode No (Yes - only for Technical Service use)
Combine Two Originals Available
Fine Mode No
Energy Saver Mode No
Class / Memory No
CPMR250
Mainframe Specifications continued:
Program Mode No
Power Source 220 240V
Power Consumption Master Making: Less than 150W
Printing: Less than 150W
Energy Saving Mode: No
Dimensions (W x D x H) Set up: 1,332 x 663 x 519mm
Stored: 582 x 663 x 519mm
(Paper feed tray and delivery table are
separated)
Weight 54kg
Peripherals Specifications:
Product Name: UC5/5e:

Host Interface Parallel IEEE1284-A/ECP, EPP
Emulation Mode None
Screening Mode 5
Image Resolution 300dpi
Paper Size As per connected CopyPrinter
CPU Connected PC
EPROM 4MB
RAM 16MB (transfer)
Power Source 90-240V / 50-60Hz M (UC5)
Power Consumption Below 10W (DC 5V) (UC5e)
Software Drivers Windows 3.11 / 95 / 98 / 2000 / Me / NT
Platform IBM Compatible
Brand Generic
Dot Type Halftone, Stochastic
Dot Shape STD GDI
Auto Detection CopyPrinter Yes
Copy Number Output Available
Auto Printer Detection Available
Connection Test Available
Installation Disk PC Compatible Windows 3.1 / 95 / 98 / NT / 2000 / Me /
XP
CPMR250
Supplies Specifications:
Item: Packaging:
B4 Master for CPMR250 280mm width, 50m length/roll
A4 Master for CPMR250 240mm width, 50m length/roll
Black Ink for CPMR250 500ml/cartridge
CPMR250 Colour Ink (Common with 600ml/cartridge
CPMR430 and CPMR308/b) Product case: 5 packs/case
Shipping carton: 4 cases/carton
Yields:
CPMR250 B4 Drum 100 masters/roll

Maximum 2,000 prints/master
Maximum 200,000 prints/roll
Note: The masters and black ink are unique to the CPMR250. The colour ink is
common to the CPMR308/b and CPMR430.
CPMR250
and dust levels.
Note: All data below are target figures:
Sound Power Level:

Mechanical Noise Level (The German BAM regulations are not required for Digital
Duplicators):
In operation: Less than 63.1dB 76.1dB (60cpm)

Less than 67.9dB 79.3dB (90cpm)
Stand-by: Less than 22.5dB

No emission

No emission
Dust Emission Level:

TBA

All plastic components for CPMR250 that weigh more than 50g or larger than 50cm2
are to be identified as per DIN54840 or ISO11469 regulations.
Power Consumption:
220V:
Master Making 96W
Printing 60cpm 89.46W
90cpm 95.58W
Environmental Regulations:
BAM: Energy Star: Swan: Energy 2000:

- - - -
Currently, there are no categories for digital duplicators in the above regulations.
However, the CPMR250 has achieved equivalent energy efficiency compared to the
PPC standard for Energy Star.
CPMR250
WHAT FITS WHAT

CPMR250 6123cp 6123cp 6123cp
Peripherals:
CPR20FPCAB Cabinet
TBA Colour Drum (B4)
UC5/UC5e Controller
CPIK10A Interface for Controller
CPMT21 Master B4 (Pack 18)
CPI10BLK Black Ink (5 x 500cc)
CPI6BLU Blue Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6BRN Brown Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6GRN Green Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6MRN Maroon Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6NVY Navy Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6ORG Orange Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6PUR Purple Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6RED Red Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6TEA Teal Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6YLW Yellow Ink (5 x 600cc)
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
CopyPrinter
Digital Duplicator
CPMR306/b
CPMR308/b
(Amendment)
CPMR308A/BA
(Amendment)
NASHUATEC CP306/b
REX ROTARY 1224/B
GESTETNER 5306/b
NASHUATEC CP308/b
REX ROTARY 1225/B
GESTETNER 5308/b
NASHUATEC CP308+/b+
REX ROTARY 1225+/B+
GESTETNER 5308+/b+
LAUNCH SCHEDULE
First Production Launch Production

CPMR306/b June, 1998 September, 1998 Korea

CPMR308/b July, 2000 September, 2000 Korea
CPMR308A/BA March, 2003 May, 2003 Korea

Date Created: February, 1998
Version 4
April, 2003
CPMR306
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 3
Product Overview 4
Target Markets 6
What Fits What 11
Competition 12
Support Material 13
CPMR308/b Amendment 14
CPMR308A/BA Amendment 19
Product specifications may change during a products life

and, if in doubt, you are advised to contact NRGI
Page 2
K:\Company\Market\NPS\CPMR306_308-b_308A-BA.doc
CPMR306
INTRODUCTION
With the introduction of the new CPMR306 we can expect to expand the
business volume in the low-end segment which is expected to grow
continuously.
This new A4/B4 machine has a newly developed compact printing engine and
mainframe that also utilises the same scanner as the LSO Multifunctional
Product.
With a removable drum, Book-top Scanner, Reduction/Enlargement, a large

capacity of ejected masters and a user friendly Operation Panel with LCD, we
can now offer a low-end machine that will further enhance our product range.
Page 3
CPMR306
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
The CPMR306 is designed for space saving and easy installation. The newly developed
Printing Engine and Mainframe makes the machine size very compact and the built-in
installation handle is very useful at demonstration or installation.
New Design Operation Panel

The operation panel is designed for easy access. Frequently used function keys are located at
the front, while special function keys are located behind the cover. Furthermore, a 4 digit
counter is added, so that customers can easily enter or recognise the number of prints. The 4
digit counter, Error indicators, and LCD are located in the centre of the operation panel
which the user will find easy to operate.
Improvement of Master Setting

The new master setting mechanism can simplify the master roll replacement job down to the
following steps.
1. Open the platen roller unit
2. Put the leading edge of master roll at the right position
3. Close the platen roller unit
Easy and Clean Master Eject Unit

The master eject unit is designed for easy disposal and clean use. The master eject unit is
directly mounted on the machine side cover. What customers have to do is just to take out
the eject unit and throw away the used masters.
Improved Paper Feed

The separation pad, which has high durability and high friction surface, is applied to the
Paper Separation unit, so that the paper separation capability is improved. As the result of
the above improvement, double feed problems can be eliminated, and envelopes or thin paper
can be fed more smoothly.
Paper Delivery Improvement

The transport unit is driven by an independent motor, which enables the CPMR306 to keep
delivering the paper at the optimum speed for better paper alignment.
Drum Changes for Colour Printing

Drum change for colour printing becomes available even with the lowest model. Eleven
different colour inks (black, red, blue, green, brown, yellow, navy, purple, maroon, orange
and teal) offer various printing applications to customers.
Fine Mode
Scanning capabilities are also improved. The sub scanning resolution is increased to 400dpi
in fine mode which can reproduce slanting lines or small letters more sharply.
Page 4
CPMR306
Product Overview /Cont...
High Versatility
The CPMR306 is a feature rich low-end machine; which can offer the same high versatility
as the current mid-range machine of the CPMR329L. The following features are very useful
for the customer and helps them to make attractive prints:-
Margin erase, Skip feed Economy mode, Security mode, Tint mode, SP mode, Auto
Background correction, Combine two originals, Programme mode.
Page 5
CPMR306
TARGET MARKETS
Traditional Markets
(Educational Institutes, Churches, Government Offices, Hospitals, Unions)
Bid and Tender business
Page 6
CPMR306
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
Printing: Fully automatic one-drum stencil system
Original Type: Sheets, Book
Original Size: Platen Cover: Max. 257 x 364mm
ADF: Max. 257 x 364mm
Min. 148 x 105mm.
Pixel Density: 300 dpi (Fine mode: 300 x 400dpi)
Image mode: Text mode, Photo mode
Text / Photo auto separation
Reproduction: 4 Reduction and 3 Enlargement
Europe / Asia Version:
100, 93, 87, 82, 71%
115, 122, 141%
Printing area: 210 x 288mm with A4 drum
250 x 355mm with B4 drum
Leading edge margin: 5mm
Print paper size: Maximum 268 x 388mm
Minimum 90 x 148mm
Print paper weight: 47.1 to 209.3gm2
Master process time: Approx. 27 sec (A4)
Image position: Vertical: 10mm (0.4)
Horizontal: 10mm (0.4)
Printing Speed: 80-120 sheets / minute (3 steps)
(80,100,120cpm)
Paper feed table capacity: 1000 sheets (20lb paper)
Paper delivery table capacity: 1000 sheets (20lb paper)
Master counter: Available
Paper counter: Available
Master feed: Master auto feed (125m roll; 265 A4 master)
Master eject: 60 masters (B4) / Master eject box
Colour drum change: Available
Margin erase: Available
Auto cycle: Available
Auto background correction: Available
Skip feed: Available
Overlay: Available
Economy mode: Available
Security mode: Available
Tint mode: Available
Auto paper size detection: Available
SP mode: Available
Combine two originals: Available (function key)
Page 7
CPMR306
Main Specifications /Cont....
Class / Memory: Class: 25 / Memory: 25

Programme mode: Available (9 programmes)
Power source: 120V 10% / 60Hz, 230V10% / 50-60Hz
Power consumption: Master Making: 250 w
Printing: 180 w (120 sheets / min)
Dimensions (WxDxH): 1210 x 586 x 567mm
Weight: 63Kg
Page 8
CPMR306
Document Feeder - DF30

Original size: Maximum: 257 x 364mm
Minimum: 148 x 105mm
Original weight: 34.4 to 103.2kg (50 to 90gm2, 10.6 to 31.9lb)
Original table capacity: 30 sheets / 66gm2
Original set: Face up
Original transport: One feed roller
Power Source: From main frame
Weight: 2.2Kg
Options: Key Counter

Colour Drum
Controller
Tape Dispenser
Page 9
CPMR306
COPYPRINTER PRODUCT POSITIONING
CPMR390
A3 - March, '98
A3 CPMR385
A3 CPMR450
Sept. '98
B4 CPMR329L
B4 CPMR327
A4 CPMR304/L A4/B4 CPMR306

Oct. '98
1997 1998
Page 10
CPMR306
WHAT FITS WHAT
CPMR306/B - Nashuatec CP306/b

RexRotary 1224/B
Gestetner 5306/b
Peripherals
DF30 - Document Feeder

Controller - CPIF20/22/23/26
CPIK10 - Video Interface (needed with controller)
CPR20FPCAB - Cabinet
Supplies
CPDR16 - Drum B4
CPDR15 - Drum A4
CPI6BLK - Black Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6BLU - Blue Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6BRN - Brown Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6GRN - Green Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6MRN - Maroon Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6NVY - Navy Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6ORG - Orange Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6PUR - Purple Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6RED - Red Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6TEA - Teal Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6YLW - Yellow Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPMT15 - B4 Master (Pk/2)
CPMT12 - A4 Master (Pk/2)
Page 11
CPMR306
COMPETITION
CPMR306 RISO TR1510 RISO TR1530 RISO

GR1700
Flat Bed Yes No No No
Master Process 27 secs 25 secs 25 secs 17 secs
Time
Print Speed 60-120cpm 60-130cpm 10-130cpm 60-130cpm
Resolution 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi
Reduction / 4R/3E 4R 4R 4R
Enlargement
Zoom No No No No
ADF Option Standard Standard Standard
ADF Capacity 30 sheets 10 sheets 10 sheets 10 sheets
Max. Print Paper 268 x 274 x 395mm 274 x 395mm 325 x 435mm
Size 388mm
Max. Print Image 250 x 210 x 290mm 251 x 357mm 250 x 355mm
Area 355mm
Paper Feed Table 1000 sheets 1000 sheets 1000 sheets 1000 sheets
Capacity
Auto Background Yes Yes Yes No
Correction
Margin Erase Yes No No No
SP Mode Yes No No No
Line/Photo Auto Yes No No No
Separation
Security Mode Yes Yes Yes Yes
master wasted master wasted master wasted
Tint Mode Yes No No No
Economy Mode Yes No No No
Page 12
CPMR306
SUPPORT MATERIAL
Brochures
Product Information Guide
Colour Photographs
Line Drawings
Electronic Brochure
Posters
Page 13
CPMR308/b
CPMR308/b
AMENDMENT
The low-end market is the largest market segment for CopyPrinters. Since the
launch of Risos CR Series and Duplos DP21/23, competition has become
particularly intense. In fact, market analysis shows that 70% of the market
today is concentrated on the low-end machine. Therefore, the CPMR308/b is a
particularly important strategic model, as it offers further enhancements to the
current model.
The following are examples of targeted markets:-
Existing account base customers looking to replace old machines or

looking for a more feature-rich CopyPrinter at an affordable price
Copier users whose requirements for multiple copies of the same original
would make the use of a CopyPrinter more economical
New users with an application of high copy volume and high copy per
original (i.e. restaurants, leisure centres, auctioneers, etc.)
With added enhancements and features of the CPMR308/b at the same price as
the CPMR306/b, we are confident that it will again be well accepted in the
traditional CopyPrinter market.
Page 14
CPMR308/b
New Features
The following four features have been added to enhance the productivity and performance of
CPMR308/b:
Increased Printing Speed - 130cpm

The maximum printing speed, which is one of the key specifications of the CopyPrinter,
has been increased from the current 120cpm (CPMR306/b) to 130cpm.
Energy Saving Feature

The CPMR308/b automatically switches itself into the energy saving mode when not
being used. It reduces about 85% of power consumption (down to below 10W). The
machine becomes immediately ready for operation, with the touch of any keys on the
operation panel.
Enhanced Combine two originals mode

The CPMR308/b is equipped with an image rotation feature, where the scanned image
is first stored in memory, and then rotated 90 degrees by using an image processing
technology. With this image rotation feature, the CPMR308/b is capable of
combining two originals, of up to B4 size, as follows;
Page 15
CPMR308/b
Originals
Output Image
B4 Machine B4+B4 71% B4
Y
X
X Y
A4+A4 Y
87% B4
Y
X
X
A4+A4 87% A4
Y
X
X Y
A4 Machine A4+A4 71% A4
Y
X
X Y
* The above combinations are already programmed and can easily be selected by pressing
[Combine Copies] keys on the operation panel. Combination of other sizes is also possible.
New Optional Controller - TBA
Specification Comparison with current CPMR306/b

CPMR306/b CPMR308/b
Specifications Original Book, Sheet
Original Size 257 x 364 mm
Paper Size max: 268 x 390 mm max: 273 x 390 mm
min: 90 x 148 mm min: 90 x 148 mm
Print Area B4 drum: 250 x 355 mm
LG drum: 210 x 355 mm
A4 drum: 210 x 288 mm
Paper Weight 47.1- 157 g/m2 47.1-209.3 g/m2
Image Shift vertical: 10 mm
horizontal: 10mm
Leading edge margin 5 mm+/-3mm
Magnification 4 Reduction (93, 87, 82,
71%)
3 Enlargement (115, 122,
141%)
Resolution 300 dpi (Fine Mode :
300x400 dpi)
Image Mode Letter, Photo, Letter &
Photo
First Print Time Less than 29.8 sec.
Master Process Time Less than 28.0 sec.
Print Speed 80-120 cpm (3 steps) 80-130 cpm (3 steps)
<80,100,120> <80,100,130>
Page 16
CPMR308/b
Master Capacity B4:260 masters/roll (125m)

A4:300 masters/roll (125m)
Ejected Master Capacity 40 masters (B4)
60 masters (A4)
Paper Feed Capacity 1000 sheets
Delivery Capacity 1000 sheets
ADF Option (30 sheets)
Power consumption (Stand Max. 250W Max. 250W (Saving mode:
by) below 10W)
Dimensions set up: 1187 x 601 x 567 set up: 1187 x 651 x 567
mm mm
stored: 607 x 601 x 567 stored: 607 x 651 x 567
mm mm
Weight 65 Kg 65kg
Features Margin Erase Available
Auto cycle Available
Skip Feed Available
Overlay Available
Program Available
Economy Mode Available
Energy Saving mode Available
Security Mode Available
Tint Mode Available
Auto background Available
correction
2 up Available (SP mode) Available (additional image
rotation)
B4: A4 + A4 * 87%
B4
B4 + B4 * 71% B4
A4 + A4 * 71% A4
A4: A4 + A4 * 71%
A4
SP Mode Available
Master Setting Very easy
Ejected Master Disposal Very easy and clean
LCD Available
ADF Available (30 sheets)
Colour Drum Available
Tape Marker Available
Controller - TBA
Page 17
CPMR308/b
WHAT FITS WHAT
CPMR308/B - Nashuatec CP308/b

RexRotary 1225/B
Gestetner 5308/b
Peripherals

CPIK10A - Controller Interface Kit
CDPK308D - Language Kit German
CDPK308F - Language Kit French
CDPK308I - Language Kit Italian
UC5 - External Controller CPIK10A required
UC5E - Embedded Controller CPIK10A required
UC6 - Network Controller CPIK10A required
Supplies
CPDR16 - Drum B4
CPDR15 - Drum A4
CPMT17 - B4 Master (Pk/2)
CPMT16 - A4 Master (Pk/2)
Page 18
CPMR308A/BA
CPMR308A/BA
AMENDMENT
Aiming at further expansion of our CopyPrinter business aand advantages against

competitors, NRG developed the CPMR3908A/BA as the successor of our best selling model
CPMR308/b.
The CPMR308A/BA machines are identical to their predecessors, except for the new colour
and the square logo located on the front cover.
Page 19
CPMR308A/BA
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Machine:
Configuration: With Auto Document Feeder Unit
Page 20
CPMR308A/BA
Differences between CPMR308A/BA and CPMR308/b:
New Model Current Model

CPMR308A/BA: CPMR308/b:
Exterior:
Emblem Style
Machine Body colour: New Millennium Grey Milky Grey
(4.5GY 8.2/0.1) (2Y 7.5/0.5)
Option (Case) Colour: New Millennium Grey Milky Grey
ADF, Colour drum (4.5GY 8.2/0.1) (2Y 7.5/0.5)
Product Name: Nashuatec: CP308+ / b+ Nashuatec: CP308 / b
Rex Rotary: 1225+ / B+ Rex Rotary: 1225 / B
Gestetner: 5308+ / b+ Gestetner: 5308 / b
Colour Drum Type 15 Colour Drum Type 10
DF Type 35 DF Type 30
Operating Instructions: Change of the product name
and an illustration
Note: No change in consumables (ink and master) and specifications.
Page 21
CPMR308A/BA
WHAT FITS WHAT

CPMR308A / BA CP308+ / b+ 1225+ / B+ 5308+ / b+
Peripherals:
CPIK10A Controller Interface Kit
CPR23FPCAB Cabinet
TBA Language Kit German
TBA Language Kit French
TBA Language Kit Italian
UC5 External Controller (CPIK10A required)
UC5E Embedded Controller (CPIK10A required)
UC6 Network Controller (CPIK10A required)
Supplies:
CPDR21 Drum B4
TBA Drum A4
CPI6BLU Blue Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6BRN Brown Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6GRN Green Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6MRN Maroon Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6NVY Navy Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6ORG Orange Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6PUR Purple Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6RED Red Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6TEA Teal Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPI6YLW Yellow Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPMT17 B4Master (Pk/2)
CPMT16 A4 Master (Pk/2)
Page 22
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
COPYPRINTER
DIGITAL DUPLICATOR
CPMR430
Nashuatec CP430
Rex Rotary 1330
Gestetner 5430
Launch Schedule

November, 2001 January, 2002 Japan

Date Created: December, 2001
Version 4
November, 2002
CPMR430
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
What Fits What 13

required for tenders, etc please contact NRGI Guernsey for
1
K:\Company\Market \NPS\CPMR430.doc
CPMR430
INTRODUCTION
The current A3 CopyPrinter models from NRGI have proven to be high quality, reliable machines
and are positioned at the high and mid-range of the A3 market.
It is now intended to improve the NRG product offering even further, with a move into the low-end of
the A3 market. This will provide us with a competitive product in a market where the ability to offer
a range of solutions is becoming more important.
The CPMR430 uses lower technology than the existing A3 machines. The thermal head resolution is
300dpi and the dual press cylinder system, developed for the CPMR490 and CPMR450MC, is
abandoned in favour of the single drum stencil system.
The CPMR430 will expand the breadth of NRGIs range in order to offer a wider range of
CopyPrinter solutions.
2
CPMR430
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Mainframe with Optional Auto Document Feeder:
New ADF (Max. 50 sheets)
Main Switch
Paper Feed Table
Capacity: 1,000 sheets
Paper
Delivery Table
Capacity: 1,000 sheets
New Design Table

A3 Book Top scanning/printing image area
Utilisation of common parts to maximise low cost manufacturing
Improved paper feeding capability
Simplified operation panel
Reduced set off, due to new mechanism and new ink
New exterior body colour
3
CPMR430
Operation Panel:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 34
1. Security Key 16. Centre / Edge Erase Key

2. Tint / Economy Key 17. Scroll / Zoom Key
3. Image Density Key 18. Controller LED
4. Reproduction Indicator 19. Reduce Key
5. Zoom Ratio Indicator 20. Full Size Key
6. Error Indicators 21. Enlarge Key
7. Counter 22. Combine Key
8. Image Position Key 23. Type of Original Key
9. On Line Key 24. Fine Key
10. Program Key 25. Memory / Class Key
11. Clear Modes / Energy Saver Key 26. Speed Keys
12. Auto Cycle Key 27. Number Keys
13. Clip Tray 28. Clear / Stop Key
14. Skip Feed Key 29. Start Key
15. Over Lay Key 30. Print Key
31. Proof Key
4
CPMR430
High Reliability in Paper Feeding
Retry Feeding Mechanism:
The CPMR430 retries paper feeding when a mis-feed is detected. It avoids stopping the print jobs.
The retry feed mechanism allows non-stop printing jobs by sending the mis-fed papers a second time.
In case of the second mis-feed, the CPMR430 stops with a Jam signal.
Regist. Sensor
Paper Feed Pick-up

Drum Roller Roller
Press
Roller Regist.
Roller Friction
Pad
Adjustments of Contact Pressure :
According to the paper thickness, the paper feeding pressure and paper separation pressure can be
manually adjusted.
Feed Roller Pressure Lever:

Can adjust the contact pressure of the paper feed roller in 3
levels according to the following paper thickness:
Metric version
Thick 127.9 209.3 g/m2
Standard 52.3 127.9 g/m2
Thin 47.1 52.3 g/m2
5
CPMR430
Paper Alignment Trailing Edge

Wings Guides
Neat Paper Alignment:
The air knife and dual-fan are newly added for eliminating the
upper paper-wrapping problem.
The same paper delivery tray is used as for the CPMR490,

for better paper alignment. The trailing edge guides and
alignment wings work especially well for small or thin papers.
Lengthened Paper Feed Tray:
The new paper feed tray is designed to stack A3 papers without curling the end of pages. (The
maximum paper size is 325 x 447 mm.) It is designed for more stable paper feeding.
A3
Papers
Simplified and Easy Operation

Simplified Operation Panel:
The new LED operation panel is designed for easy access and universality. The jam location
monitors are positioned at the centre of the operation panel, for easy recognition. The simplified
operation panel places frequently used function keys at the front and covers specialized keys.
Specialized Functions Jam Location Monitors

Behind Cover
6
CPMR430
Easier Master Setting:
Thanks to the newly developed easy master setting

method, there is no cut master removal after the master
setting and no need to lift the scanner unit.
Users can replace the master roll easily.
Easier Jam Recovery:
The drum can be slid out and locked halfway. It allows hands free operation for the paper jam
recovery and drum access.
Light weight Drum:
The drum weight is lightened by approximately 20% compared to the current A3 drum. The lighter
drum eases the drum change.
High Versatility
Fine Mode :
Fine mode improves scanning capability. In fine mode, the sub scanning resolution is increased to
400dpi and, as a result, the CPMR430 produces slanting lines and small letters more clearly.
Economy Mode :
Economy mode reduces ink consumption by approximately 15%.
7
CPMR430
Security Mode :
Security mode prevents users, other than the operator, from printing additional copies from the used
master on the Drum. Users can therefore print secret documents without worrying.
Skip Feed:
By increasing the time between prints with the Skip Feed Mode, users can prevent dirty marks on the
back of prints when cardboards or non-absorbent paper are used. This not only ensures better ink
fixing on non-absorbent paper but also improves the feeding capability of special paper types, such as
cards and envelopes. The drum rotation for one sheet of print can be set from 1 to 9 times.
Tint Mode:
The CPMR430 features a Tint mode, which makes it possible to print the tint of a colour image
without using the editing function. By using the Tint mode, two images can be combined.
Zoom Feature:
With the Zoom feature, users can reduce or enlarge an original
image from 50 to 200% in 1% increments.
Environmental Friendliness:
Lower Noise Level:
Due to the the new printing mechanism, the machine has achieved a radical reduction in noise level.
Energy Saver Mode :
The CPMR430 automatically switches itself into the energy saving mode when it is not being used.
This reduces power consumption by about 85% (down to below 10W). The machine becomes
ready for operation immediately a key is touched.
Other Improvements:
Improved Black Ink Quality:
Improved black ink fixing reduces roller marks and ink transfer to the feed rollers when printing in
duplex or multi-colour.
8
CPMR430
Master Processing: Digital
Printing Process: Fully automatic one drum stencil system
Original Size: Platen Cover: Maximum 304.8mm x 432mm
ADF: Maximum 297mm x 864mm
Resolution: 300dpi (Fine mode: 300 x 400dpi)
Image Mode: Letter mode
Letter / Photo auto separation
Photo mode
Reproduction Ratio: 100%
4 reduction and 3 enlargement
Metric version: 71, 82, 87, 93, 115, 122, 141%
Zoom: Platen cover: 50~200% (by 1% increments)
ADF: 50~200% (by 1% increments)
Directional Magnification: 50-200% (by 1% increments)
Printing Area: A3 Drum: More than 290mm x 410mm
A4 Drum: More than 290mm x 202mm
Leading Edge Margin: 5mm 3mm
Print Paper Size: Maximum: 325mm x 447mm
Print Paper Weight: 47.1 to 209.3 g/m2
Master Process Time Platen cover: Less than 22.0 seconds (A4)
(First Copy Time):
Image Position: Vertical: 15mm
Horizontal: 10mm
Printing Speed: 60-120 sheets / minute (60, 75, 90, 105, 120cpm)
Paper Feed Table Capacity: 1,000 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Paper Delivery Table 1,000 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Capacity:
Master Counter: Standard
Paper Counter: Standard
Master Feed Capacity: 125 metre master auto feed
(A3 Drum: 220 master/roll, A4 Drum: TBA)
Ejected Master Capacity: More than 30 masters / master eject box (A3)
Colour Drum Change: Available
Auto Background Available
Correction:
Margin Erase: Available
Auto Cycle: Available
Skip Feed: Available
Overlay: Available
Economy Mode: Available
Security Mode: Available
Tint Mode: Available
9
CPMR430
SP Mode: Available
Combine Two Originals: Available
Fine Mode: Available
Energy Saving Mode: Available
Class/Memory: Class: 99
Memory: 25
Program Mode: Available (9 Programmes)
Power Source: 220V - 240V, 50Hz / 60Hz
Power Consumption: Master Making: TBA
Printing: TBA
Energy Saving Mode: Below 10W
Dimensions (W x D x H): Set up: 1,360mm x 700mm x 640mm
Stored: 790 x 700 x 640mm
Weight: Below 90Kg
Original Size: Maximum: 297mm x 864mm

Original Weight: 52.3 to 127.9g/m2
Original Table Capacity: 50 sheets (70g/m2)
Original Set: Face up, Feeding the top page first, Centre setting
Original Transport: One feed roller
Power Source: From mainframe
Weight: 9Kg
Standard Accessories List:

NRG Main Unit:
Brand: NRG
Model: CPMR430
Power Source: 220-240V / 50, 60Hz
Platen Cover: No
Operation Panel: Symbol
Operation Instructions Yes
(English):
Operation Instructions: * No
Decals: ** No
NECR (English): No
Emblem: Yes (Nashuatec, Rex Rotary, Gestetner)
* 6 languages: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Dutch
** 4 languages: French, German, Italian and Spanish (No Dutch decals)
10
CPMR430
Sound Power Level
Mechanical Noise Level:
(The German BAM regulations are not required for a digital duplicator)
In operation: TBA
Identification Of Plastic Components
All plastic components for the CPMR430 that weigh more than 50g or are larger then 50cm2 are to
be identified according to either DIN54840 or ISO11469 regulations.
Environmental Regulations

- - - -
Currently, there are no categories for digital duplicators in the above regulations. However, the
CPMR430 has demonstrated sufficient energy efficiency compared to the PPC standard for Energy
Star.
11
CPMR430
PRODUCT POSITIONING
400dpi 600dpi
CPMR390 CPMR490
CPMR385 X
CPMR450 CPMR450-MC
CPMR329 CPMR430
300dpi
CPMR327
CPMR304 CPMR306 CPMR308
1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001
12
CPMR430
WHAT FITS WHAT

CPMR430 CP430 1330 5430
Peripherals
PC1018 Platen Cover
CPIK10A Controller Interface Kit
UC5 External Controller CPIK10A required
UC5E Embedded Controller CPIK10A required
UC6 Network Controller CPIK10A required
CPR21FPCAB Cabinet
CPDK430D Language Kit - German
CPDK430F Language Kit - French
CPDK430I Language Kit - Italian
Supplies
CPDR18 A3 Drum
CPDR19 A4 Drum
CP16BLU Blue Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16BRN Brown Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16GRN Green Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16MRN Maroon Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16NVY Navy Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16ORG Orange Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16PUR Purple Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16RED Red Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16TEA Teal Ink (5 x 600cc)
CP16YLW Yellow Ink (5 x 600cc)
CPMT19 A3 Master
Note: Machine does not include platen cover or document feeder.
13
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
COPYPRINTER
DIGITAL DUPLICATOR
CPMR450
CPMR450MC
(Amendment)
CPMR450A
(Amendment)
Nashuatec CP450/CP450+
Rex Rotary 1560/1560+
Gestetner 5450/5450+
Launch Schedule

Model: Month: Month: Location:
CPMR450MC March 2000 May 2000 Japan

CPMR450A April 2002 June 2002 Japan

Version 7
November, 2002
CPMR450_450MC_450A
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Target Markets 4
Product Specification 5
What Fits What 8
Competition 9
Support Material 10
CPMR450MC Amendment 11
CPMR450A Amendment 16
K:\Company\Market \NPS\Cpmr450_450MC_450A.doc
1
CPMR450
INTRODUCTION
To expand the A3 market even further, we have developed a completely new

model that is designed to obtain No. 1 market share.
The CPMR450 is superior to any A3 segment competitive models in quality,

specifications, operation and privacy.
Since NRGI launched its first book top scanner model, the CPMR380, the book
top scanner is becoming standard in the Digital Duplicator market. Now we have
book top models in the high segment, middle segment and low segment. The
CPMR450 is using the same scanner unit and ADF which is currently used on
the multi-functional Aficio 20/25cpm products utilising our total technological
resource.
The image quality of our CopyPrinters has been greatly improved and we have
further improved the image quality with the CPMR450. In addition the operation
of the CPMR450 is easy enough for any operator to use just like a copier.
THE CPMR450 REALIZES THE WORLDS FASTEST FIRST PRINT TIME

- 12 SECONDS.
In order to realize the above, a NEW PRINTING ENGINE and a NEW

MAINFRAME BODY have been developed along with new ink and new
masters.
K:\Company\Market \NPS\Cpmr450_450MC_450A.doc 2
CPMR450
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
Excellent Print Quality - The following are improved:-

Solid fill in
Fine line
Registration
Set off
Productivity - The worlds fastest First Print Time: Less than 12 seconds (A4)
Lower Noise Level - The worlds lowest operating noise level: 68dB at 90cpm
Easy Operation - The copier-like user interface:-

e.g. New Master setting system and new master eject unit
Easy access from newly developed Operation Panel with larger LCD
(Horizontal image shift, paper feed pressure, etc.)
Initial setting (customer setting)
Price Competitive
Machine Price
A4 master cut with A3 Print Cylinder (drum)
Tapeless Job Separator (instead of Tape Dispenser/Tape Marker)
Editing Function (high feature, low cost)
High Reliability in Paper Feeding - Paper feeding pressure/separation pressure control from the
LCD
New Supply Packages with Compatibility Detection - Both ink and master for CPMR450 is
not compatible with the current models and with other branded machines.
High Serviceability - Improved serviceability by implementing unit concept.
High Versatility - Maintain the same level of versatility with the CPMR385 and add new unique
functions with New Editing Function (image rotation, image overlay, stamping, etc.)
Easier Installation Handling

The Built-in Installation Handle that will simplify installation procedure
The Built-in I/F Kit that will simplify installation procedure of Controller (European only)
Ecological Care
Less number of parts
Designing each part so it is easy to be recycled
CPMR450
TARGET MARKETS
1. Commercial Offices
With an application of high volume and high copy per original with specific purposes. (manuals,
flyers, cards, forms, price tags, bar codes, and more)
2. Traditional Customers
Who have need for A3 prints or high volume prints.
(education, religion, unions, government, hospitals, and more)
3. Commercial Printers
Who have need for high volume prints with spot colours or on-demand printing.
4. In-Plant Copy Shops

With spot colour needs or on-demand printing.
CPMR450
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS
Printing Process: Press Cylinder System
Original Size: Platen Cover: Maximum 304.5 x 432mm
Minimum 90 x 140mm
ADF: Maximum: 297 x 1260mm
Original Weight: Up to ADF specification (Max. weight is 10Kg)
Pixel Density: 400dpi
Pencil
a) Screen: Sand pattern mode (normal)
Dot pattern mode 1 (fine)
Dot pattern mode 2 (coarse)
b) Contrast: Normal, Light Tone, Dark Tone 1 and
Dark Tone 2
100, 93, 87, 82, 71%
115, 122, 141%
Zoom Platen Cover: 50-200% (by 1%)
ADF: 50 - 155% (by 1%)
Directional magnification: 50-200% (by 1%)
Auto Magnification Selection: Available
Printing area: 290 x 415mm
Minimum 70 x 148mm
Print paper weight: 47 to 209gm2
Master process time: 12 sec (A4)
Image position: Vertical 15mm (0.6)
60,75,90,105,120 cpm
Master counter: Standard
Paper counter: Standard
Master feed: 100m master auto feed 200 masters/roll
Master eject: 60 masters / master eject box / A3
CPMR450

Auto original size detection: Available
Multiple copy mode: Combine two originals
Quadruple copy
2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1, 16 in 1 (option Editing Board)
Quality start: Available
Class: 9 grades x 12 Classes Memory
Job Separation: Available (600 sheets ) Tapeless
Programme Mode: Available (9 programmes)
Paper Size Available
Power consumption: Approx. 310W
Dimensions (WxDxH): A3: 1362 x 650 x 560mm
Weight: Approx. 90Kg
CPMR450
Document Feeder DF55

Original weight: 35 to 110kg
41 to 128gm2
Original set: Face down, Feeding the top page first
Power Consumption: From main frame
Weight: 9Kg
Editing Function CPEF50

Type: 1. Make-up Function: Command sheet method
(Four command sheets at one job)
2. Memory Function
Image overlay, Image rotation, Combine, Repeat
3. Stamp Function
Date, Page, User Stamp, Pattern Registration
No. of Background Patterns: 40 patterns x 2 sizes
Number of Designated areas: No limitation
Image make-up modes for the 1. Line image
designated areas: 2. Outline image
3. Delete image
4. Photo image
5. Image pattern
6. Area pattern
7. Area pattern and image outline
Options: Key counter
Computer Controller
Cabinet
CPMR450
WHAT FITS WHAT
CPMR450 CopyPrinter
Nashuatec CP450
Rex Rotary 1560
Gestetner 5450
Peripherals

CPEF50 - Edit Function
UC5 - Controller
UC6 - Controller
CPDK450D - Language Kit (German)
CPDK450F - Language Kit (French)
CPDK450I - Language Kit (Italian)
Supplies
CPDR13 - Drum A3
CPDR14 - Drum A4
CPI8HGRN - Hunters Green (3 x 1000cc) - Special Order
CPI8GRY - Grey (3 x 1000cc) - Special Order
CPI8VIO - Violet (3 x 1000cc) - Special Order
CPI8BUR - Burgundy (3 x 1000cc) - Special Order
CPI8GLD - Gold (3 x 1000cc) - Special Order
CPMT13 - A3 Master (pk/2)
8
CPMR450
COMPETITION
CPMR450 RISO GR3770

Flat Bed Yes Yes
Master Process Time A4-12 secs 22 secs
Print Speed 60-120cpm 60-120cpm
Resolution 400dpi 600dpi
Reduction / Enlargement 4R/3E 4R/3E
Zoom 50-200% 50-200%
ADF Option Option
ADF Capacity 30 sheets 50 sheets
Max. Original Size A3 A3
Max. Print Paper Size A3 A3
Max. Print Image Area 290 x 415mm 290 x 412mm
Paper Feed Table Capacity 1000 sheets 1000 sheets
Auto Background Correction Yes Yes
Margin Erase Yes Yes
SP Mode Yes No
Line/Photo Auto Separation Yes No
Quality Start Yes Yes (master wasted)
Security Mode Yes Yes (master wasted)
Tint Mode Yes No
Economy Mode Yes No
Directional Magnifications Yes No
CPMR450
SUPPORT MATERIAL
Brochures
Product Information Guide
Colour Photographs
Line Drawings
Electronic Brochure
Posters
CPMR450MC
CPMR450MC
AMENDMENT
With the launch of the CPMR450MC CopyPrinter, we are continuing with the highly successful A3
machine that was initially launched in 1998.
Due to the extraordinary success of the CPMR450, the new CPMR450MC will continue the
success story even further, as a result of having minor improvements implemented.
The minor improvements are as follows:
The CPMR450MC has an Energy Saving Mode. This reduces the energy consumption by
85% (down to below 10W). The CPMR450MC automatically switches itself into Energy
Saving Mode when it is not in use. The machine resumes operation when any key is
touched.
The CPMR450MC can be linked to the optional J Sorter.
Please note that the optional J Sorter will not normally be available, except under very
special circumstances, and only on a back to back status with the full lead time of 130 days.
11
CPMR450MC
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS
Original Size: Platen Cover: Maximum 304.5 x 432mm
Minimum 90 x 140mm
ADF: Maximum: 297 x 1260mm
Original Weight: Up to ADF specification (Max. weight is 10Kg)
Pixel Density: 400dpi
Energy Saver Mode Standard
Pencil a) Screen: Sand pattern mode (normal)
Dot pattern mode 1 (fine)
Dot pattern mode 2 (coarse)
b) Contrast: Normal, Light Tone, Dark Tone 1 and
Dark Tone 2
100, 93, 87, 82, 71%
115, 122, 141%
Zoom Platen Cover: 50-200% (by 1%)
ADF: 50 - 155% (by 1%)
Directional magnification: 50-200% (by 1%)
Auto Magnification Selection: Available
Printing area: 290 x 415mm
Minimum 70 x 148mm
Print paper weight: 47 to 209gm2
Master process time: 12 sec (A4)
Image position: Vertical 15mm (0.6)
60,75,90,105,120 cpm
Master counter: Standard
Paper counter: Standard
Master feed: 100m master auto feed 200 masters/roll
Master eject: 60 masters / master eject box / A3
CPMR450MC

Auto original size detection: Available
Multiple copy mode: Combine two originals
Quadruple copy
2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1, 16 in 1 (option Editing Board)
Quality start: Available
Class: 9 grades x 12 Classes Memory
Job Separation: Available (600 sheets ) Tapeless
Programme Mode: Available (9 programmes)
Paper Size Available
Power consumption: Approx. 310W
Dimensions (WxDxH): A3: 1362 x 650 x 560mm
Weight: Approx. 90Kg
CPMR450MC
Document Feeder - DF55

Original weight: 35 to 110kg
41 to 128gm2
Original set: Face down, Feeding the top page first
Power Consumption: From main frame
Weight: 9Kg
Editing Function CPEF50

Type: 1. Make-up Function: Command sheet method
(Four command sheets at one job)
2. Memory Function
Image overlay, Image rotation, Combine, Repeat
3. Stamp Function
Date, Page, User Stamp, Pattern Registration
No. of Background Patterns: 40 patterns x 2 sizes
Number of Designated areas: No limitation
Image make-up modes for the 1. Line image
designated areas: 2. Outline image
3. Delete image
4. Photo image
5. Image pattern
6. Area pattern
7. Area pattern and image outline
Options: Key counter
Computer Controller
Cabinet
CPMR450MC
WHAT FITS WHAT
CPMR450MC CopyPrinter
Nashuatec CP450
Rex Rotary 1560
Gestetner 5450
Peripherals

CPEF50 - Edit Function
UC5 - Controller
UC6 - Controller
CPDK450D - Language Kit (German)
CPDK450F - Language Kit (French)
CPDK450I - Language Kit (Italian)
Supplies
CPDR13 - Drum A3
CPDR14 - Drum A4
CPMR450A
CPMR450A
AMENDMENT
With the launch of the CPMR450A we continue to maintain NRGIs range of CopyPrinters, in
order to offer a complete printing solution.
The following will explain the main differences between the CPMR450MC and the CPMR450A.
16
CPMR450A
PRODUCT POSITIONING
CPMR390 CPMR490 CPMR490A
CPMR329
CPMR430
CPMR327
CPMR306/b CPMR308/b
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002
CPMR450A
MAIN DIFFERENCES BETWEEN

CPMR450MC AND CPMR450A
Improved image quality, inherited from the CPMR490A

o Additional contrast options, high density black ink
Improved paper feeding reliability

o Auto retry feeding mechanism
o Feed pressure adjustable for paper thickness
Compatible with new RCP80 embedded print controller

o Print controller aimed at digital print market
New machine colour
New document feeder
Platen cover
New editing function board
New cabinet (colour change)
CPMR450A
WHAT FITS WHAT
CPMR450A CopyPrinter
Nashuatec CP450+
Rex Rotary 1560+
Gestetner 5450+
Peripherals

PRIEDIT85 - Edit Function
RCP80 - Embedded controller
PC1018 - Platen Cover
CPR22FPCABX - Cabinet
CPDK450AD - Language Kit (German)
CPDK450AF - Language Kit (French)
CPDK450AI - Language Kit (Italian)
PRIFKIT85 - Interface Kit (Required for RCP80)
UC5 - External Controller PRIFKIT85 required
UC5E - Embedded Controller PRIFKIT85 required
UC6 - Network Controller PRIFKIT85 required
Supplies
CPDR13 - Drum A3
CPDR14 - Drum A4
CPMR450A
Note: Platen Cover or ADF MUST be ordered with the machine.
NEW PRODUCT
SPECIFICATION
COPYPRINTER
DIGITAL DUPLICATOR
CPMR490A
Nashuatec CP490+
Rex Rotary 1395+
Gestetner 5490+
Launch Schedule

January, 2002 April, 2002 Japan

Version 3
November, 2002
CPMR490A
CONTENTS
Page
Introduction 2
Product Overview 3
Target Users 5
What Fits What 10

1
K:\Company\Market \NPS\CPMR490A.doc
CPMR490A
INTRODUCTION
The CPMR490A will replace the extremely successful CPMR490.
Since its launch in March 2001, the CPMR490 has set high standards with its 600dpi resolution and
its advanced features, which are designed to add value to any type of document produced on the
CPMR490.
With the launch of the CPMR490A, further enhanced design features will be brought to this highly
competitive segment of the CopyPrinter market. These enhancements will again confirm that our
600dpi CopyPrinter truly sets a standard to be followed by others.
2
CPMR490A
PRODUCT OVERVIEW
CPMR490A
New DF Unit
Additional tray length for A3

New colour and emblem
3
CPMR490A
PRODUCT POSITIONING
Launch April 2002
CPMR390 CPMR490 CPMR490A
Launch June 2002

CPMR329
CPMR430
CPMR327
CPMR306/b CPMR308/b
1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002
4
CPMR490A
TARGET USERS
The CPMR490A is developed to suit the special demands of professional users, e.g. central
reprographics departments (CRD) and Print for Pay users (PFP).
Typical Applications:
Name cards
Company letterhead
Envelopes
Thick covers
Forms
Common Needs: The Answers:

High image quality 600dpi / contrast levelling / HD inks
Reliable paper feed Flexible friction pads / double feed detector
Network connection New controller
Network utilities Use of SmartNetMonitor
Custom colours Colour matching service
5
CPMR490A
Double Feed Detector

New double feed detector is installed to detect paper misfeeds.
High Image Quality

The CPMR490A uses the 600dpi scanner common to the DMR22A/27A, so quality is
guaranteed.
Enhanced Quality for Proof Printing

The drum has been improved with the addition of a new quality blade inside the drum. This
blade will remove excess ink inside the metal screen, allowing the exact amount of ink to be
transferred onto the paper, thus producing high quality output time after time.
Friction Pad Selection

Multiple friction pads allow selectable resistance according to the paper types used. This will
help eliminate paper misfeeds.
Smooth Paper Delivery

An improved air suction unit has been introduced, to avoid upper paper wrapping problems.
Stabilised Paper Feed Table

Two additional mechanisms have been added, for more reliable paper setting on the feed table.
6
CPMR490A
MAINFRAME SPECIFICATIONS
Master Processing: Digital
Original Size: Platen Cover: Maximum 305mm x 432mm
ADF: Maximum 297mm x 864mm
Resolution: 600dpi x 600dpi
Image Mode: Letter mode
Letter / Photo auto separation
- Contrast: strong, standard, soft
Photo mode
- Dots pattern mode 4 levels
- Contrast: strong, standard, soft
Tint mode
Reproduction Ratio: 4 reduction and 3 enlargement
European version: 71, 82, 87, 93, 100, 115, 122, 141%
Zoom: Platen cover: 50~200% (by 1% increments)
ADF: 50~200% (by 1% increments)
Directional Magnification: 50~200% (by 1% increments)
Auto Magnification Available
Selection:
Printing Area: 290mm x 410mm (11.4 x 16.1) A3
Leading Edge Margin: Less than 8mm
Print Paper Size: Maximum: 325mm x 447mm
Print Paper Weight: 47.1 to 209.3 g/m2
Master Process Time: 25 sec. (A4 / without DF) 28.5 sec. (with DF)
31 sec. (A3 / without DF) 34.0 sec. (with DF)
Image Position: Vertical: 15mm
Horizontal: 10mm
Minimum moveable unit 0.5mm
Printing Speed: 60-120 sheets / minute (5 levels)
(60, 75, 90, 105, 120cpm)
Paper Feed Table Capacity: 1,000 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Paper Delivery Table 1,000 sheets (80g/m2 paper)
Capacity:
Master Counter: Standard
Paper Counter: Standard
Master Feed Capacity: Auto feed above: 255 masters / roll (A3)
140m/roll 410 masters / roll (A4)
Ejected Master Capacity: Above: 70 masters / master eject box (A3)
100 masters / master eject box (A4)
7
CPMR490A
Mainframe Specifications (continued)

Colour Inks: Black, Blue, Red, Green, Grey, Brown, Purple, Yellow, Navy, Maroon,
Teal, Orange, Violet, Hunter Green, Burgundy, Gold,
High Density:
Black, Blue, Red, Navy, Green, Teal, Reflex Blue
Auto Background Available
Correction:
Auto Paper Size Detection: Available
Auto Original Size Detection: Available
Original Storage: Available
A maximum of 8 pages of original images can be stored
Multiple Copy Mode: Combine two originals ]
Quadruple copy ]
2 in 1, 4 in 1, 8 in 1, 16 in 1 ] Standardized Editing Functions
Overlay Available ]
Stamping: Available ]
User Tool: Available
Program Mode: 9 jobs
Paper Size Detection: Available for DF / Contact glass / Paper feed tray
Skip Feed: Available
Quality Standby: Available
Security Mode: Available
Quality Start: Available
Economy Mode: Available
Class: 9 grades x 18 classes memory
20 manual class
Auto Online: Controller required
Double Feed Detector:
Paper Weight: 47.1 to 180g
Paper Size: A6 to A3
Print Speed: 60 to 120cpm
Job Separation: Available (600 sheets)
Auto Paper Size Reduction / Available
Enlargement:
Energy Saving Mode: Available
Power Source: 220/240V 10% 50Hz / 60Hz
Power Consumption: 220V
7.5W (Energy Saving Mode)
Dimensions (W x D x H): In use:
1,435mm x 700mm x 1,020mm
Stored:
1,405mm x 700mm x 1,020mm
Weight: Below 105Kg
8
CPMR490A
Auto Document Feeder:
Original Size: Maximum: 297mm x 864mm

Standard sized papers
Original Size Detection: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5
Original Weight: 52.3 to 127.9g/m2
Original Capacity: 50 sheets (70g/m2 )
Original Set: Face up, feeding the top page first
Centre setting
Power Source: From mainframe
Weight 9Kg
9
CPMR490A
WHAT FITS WHAT

CPMR490A CP490+ 1395+ 5490+
Peripherals
PC1018 Platen Cover
PRIEDIT85 Editing function board
PRIFKIT85 Interface Kit
RCP80 Embedded print controller
UC5 External Print Controller PRIFKIT85 required
UC5E Embedded Print Controller PRIFKIT85 required
UC6 Network Controller PRIFKIT85 required
CPR22FPCABX Cabinet
CPDK490D Language Kit German
CPDK490F Language Kit French
CPDK490I Language Kit - Italian
Supplies
CPDR17 A3 Drum
CPMT18 A3 Master (Pack of 2)
CPI8BLK Black Ink (6 x 1,000cc)
CP18HDBLK High Density Black Ink (6 x 1,000cc)
CP18BLU Blue Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
TBA High Density Blue Ink TBA
CP18BRN Brown Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
CP18BUR Burgundy Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
TBA Maroon Ink TBA
CP18GLD Gold Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
CP18GRN Green Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
TBA High Density Green Ink TBA
CP18GRY Grey Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
CP18HGRN Hunters Green Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
CP18NVY Navy Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
TBA High Density Navy Ink TBA
CP18ORG Orange Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
CP18PUR Purple Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
CP18RED Red Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
TBA High Density Red Ink TBA
CP18TEA Teal Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
TBA High Density Teal Ink TBA
CP18VIO Violet Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
CP18YLW Yellow Ink (3 x 1,000cc)
TBA High Density Reflex Blue Ink TBA
Note: Machine does not include platen cover or document feeder.
10
MEMORY FIT MATRIX BY MODEL
ORDER BRAND MODEL RICOH CODE RECOMMENDED PRODUCT NAME MEMORY
CODE NUMBERS MODEL NAME FOR DESCRIPTION
COLOUR COPIERS & CONTROLLERS
CCR060A CS225/CS825/CS525 AFC3506 I-2 SEE RC210 BELOW SEE RC210 BELOW
CCR062A CS231/CS831/CS531 AFC4506 L-2 SEE RC210 BELOW SEE RC210 BELOW
CCR100 CS210/CS810/CS510 AFC-6010 Cattleya BD NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
CCR132 CS213D/CS813D/CS513D AFC6513 C-2 NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
CCR081 DSc224 AFC1224C Model U-C1a PRINTER DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc224 AFC1224C Model U-C1a PRINTER DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc224 AFC1224C Model U-C1a PRINTER DMENV1 NV RAM
CCR101 DSc232 AFC1232C Model U-C1b PRINTER DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc232 AFC1232C Model U-C1b PRINTER DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DSc232 AFC1232C Model U-C1b PRINTER DMENV1 NV RAM
RC210 RC210 RC210 PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
RC210 RC210 RC210 PRINTER (opt) DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
RC210 RC210 RC210 PRINTER (opt) DME38 256MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
FAXES
H1 9910/6991/P691 1400L H1 FAX FME2MB150 2MB TYPE 20 CARD
FL1a F101 1120L L1a NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
FL1b F102 1160L L1b NO MEMORY NO MEMORY FOR THIS MACHINE
E20 9920/6992/P692 1800L E20 FAX FME2MB150 2MB TYPE 20 CARD W/FLASH
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FME2MB140 2MB TYPE 140 CARD W/FLASH
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FME4MB140 4MB TYPE 140 CARD W/FLASH
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 PRINTER DME45P16 16MB MEMORY EXPANSION
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 PRINTER DME45P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FME40MB 40MB MEMORY EXPANSION
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FFC140U 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE140
E99 9980/6999/P699 5000L Kaizer 1 FAX FFC500 FAX ON DEMAND UPGRADE UNIT
SF1 F9103/F6103/FP103 3310L Stella F1 PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
SF1 F9103/F6103/FP103 3310L Stella F1 FAX FME4MB300 40MB FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE300
SF2 F104 4410L Stella F2 PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
SF2 F104 4410L Stella F2 FAX DME40MB410 40MB FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE410
LFO 4210/3110/D510 Aficio FX-10 LFO FAX FME1MB150 1MB TYPE 10 CARD W/FLASH
DIGITAL COPIERS
DMR12 1202/1208/1205 Aficio 120 Stella C1a COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12 1202/1208/1205 Aficio 120 Stella C1a PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12 1202/1208/1205 Aficio 120 Stella C1a PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12F 1202F/1208F/1205F Aficio FX12 Stella C1a/f COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12F 1202F/1208F/1205F Aficio FX12 Stella C1a/f PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR12F 1202F/1208F/1205F Aficio FX12 Stella C1a/f PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13 1302/1308/1305 Aficio 1013 Stella C1b COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13 1302/1308/1305 Aficio 1013 Stella C1b PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13 1302/1308/1305 Aficio 1013 Stella C1b PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13F 1302F/1308F/1305F Aficio 1013F Stella C1b/f COPY/FAX or PRINT DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13F 1302F/1308F/1305F Aficio 1013F Stella C1b/f PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR13F 1302F/1308F/1305F Aficio 1013F Stella C1b/f PRINTER DMEBP128 128MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR15 3215S/2815S/D415S Aficio 150 Stinger C1 Lite PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR15S 1502/1508/1505C Aficio 1015 Kir C1b COPIER DME1018 16MB COPIER FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 1018
DMR15S 1502/1508/1505C Aficio 1015 Kir C1b COPIER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR15S 1502/1508/1505C Aficio 1015 Kir C1b PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR18 3218/2818/D418 Aficio 180 Stinger C1 FAX DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR18D 1802D/1808D/1805D Aficio 1018D Kir C1c Duplex COPIER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18D 1802D/1808D/1805D Aficio 1018D Kir C1c Duplex PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR18S 1802/1808/1805 Aficio 1018 Kir C1c COPIER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR18S 1802/1808/1805 Aficio 1018 Kir C1c PRINTER DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a SCANNER DME22S32 32MB SCAN MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR22 3222/2822/D422 Aficio 220 Russian C1a FAX DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a COPIER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a C/P/F/S (opt) DHD1027 6GB HDD DOC.SERVER TYPE 1027
DMR22A 2212/2238/2205 Aficio 1022 Russian C2a C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b COPIER DME185 48MB TYPE 185 MEMORY BOARD
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b PRINTER DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b PRINTER DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b PRINTER HDD DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b SCANNER DME22S32 32MB SCAN MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR27 3227/2827/D427 Aficio 270 Russian C1b FAX DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b COPIER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b C/P/F/S (opt) DHD1027 6GB HDD DOC.SERVER TYPE 1027
DMR27A 2712/2738/2705 Aficio 1027 Russian C2b C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 COPIER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 PRINTER DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 C/P/F/S (opt) DHD1027 6GB HDD DOC.SERVER TYPE 1027
DMR32A 3212/3238/3205 Aficio 1032 Russian C2 C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 COPIER DME22S16 16MB MEMORY MODULE
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 FAX (opt) DME450F 4MB TYPE 450 MEMORY BOARD
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 FAX HDD DME460F 130MB FAX FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 460 HDD KIT
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 PRINTER HDD DHD450P 1.6GB PRINTER TYPE 450 HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR35 3235/2835/D435 Aficio 350 NAD 30 COPY/PRINT DHD450 IMAGE ENHANCE KIT (HDD) TYPE 450
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b COPY/FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b PRINT/SCAN DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR35A 3502/3508/3525 Aficio 1035 Adonis C2b C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b PRINT/SCAN DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR35B 3545/3518/3532 Aficio 2035 Adonis C3b C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 COPIER DME22S16 16MB MEMORY MODULE
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 FAX (opt) DME450F 4MB TYPE 450 MEMORY BOARD
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 FAX HDD DME460F 130MB FAX FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 460 HDD KIT
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 PRINTER HDD DHD450P 1.6GB PRINTER TYPE 450 HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR45 3245/2845/D445 Aficio 450 NAD40 COPY/PRINT DHD450 IMAGE ENHANCE KIT (HDD) TYPE 450
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c COPY/FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c PRINT/SCAN DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR45A 4502/4508/4525 Aficio 1045 Adonis C2c C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c FAX DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c PRINT/SCAN DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
DMR45B 4545/4518/4532 Aficio 2045 Adonis C3c C/P/F/S (opt) DME1045RAM USER ACT ENHANCE TYPE A NV RAM
DMR55A 3355/2955/D555 Aficio 551 Mojito C1b PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR55A 3355/2955/D555 Aficio 551 Mojito C1b HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KOT
DMR55B 5505/5508/5502 Aficio 1055 Mojito C2 PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR55B 5505/5508/5502 Aficio 1055 Mojito C2 HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KOT
DMR60 6002/6008/6005 Aficio 1060 Martini C1b PRINT DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR60 6002/6008/6005 Aficio 1060 Martini C1b PRINT DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR70A 3370/2970/D570 Aficio 700 Mojito C1c PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR70A 3370/2970/D570 Aficio 700 Mojito C1c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR75 7502/7508/7505 Aficio 1075 Martini C1c PRINT DIMM128 128MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR75 7502/7508/7505 Aficio 1075 Martini C1c PRINT DIMM256 256MB MEMORY TYPE C
DMR85 3285/2885/D485 Aficio 850 Bellini C1a PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR85 3285/2885/D485 Aficio 850 Bellini C1a HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR85A 8502/8508/8505 Aficio 1085 Bellini C1c PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR85A 8502/8508/8505 Aficio 1085 Bellini C1c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR90B 9005/9008/9002 Aficio 2090 Bellini C2a PRINT/SCAN DME256MB2105 256MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR105 32105/28105/D4105 Aficio 1050 Bellini C1b PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR105 32105/28105/D4105 Aficio 1050 Bellini C1b HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR105A 10502/10508/10505 Aficio 1105 Bellini C1d PRINT DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMR105A 10502/10508/10505 Aficio 1105 Bellini C1d HARD DISK DRIVE DHD850P 6.4GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
DMR105B 10515/10518/10512 Aficio 2105 Bellini C2b PRINT/SCAN DME256MB2105 256MB MEMORY EXPANSION
DMRA07 A070 Aficio 370W Dolphin HARD DISK DRIVE DHDA07 HARD DISK DRIVE
PMR16 P7016 AP1600 Stinger P4II PRINTER (opt) DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR16 P7016 AP1600 Stinger P4II PRINTER (opt) DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR16 P7016 AP1600 Stinger P4II HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2000 1.6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2000
PML16B P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME17 1MB MEMORY FLASH SIMM EXPANSION
PML16B P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME14 8MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PML19BN P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME17 1MB MEMORY FLASH SIMM EXPANSION
PML19BN P6216 AP1610 Saranac PRINTER (opt) DME14 8MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR26 P7026 AP2600 Kir P3c PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR26 P7026 AP2600 Kir P3c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26N P7026N AP2600N Kir P3b PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR26N P7026N AP2600N Kir P3b HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DIDK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26A P7126 AP2610 Kir-P2c HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26A P7126 AP2610 Kir-P2c PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR26AN P7126N AP2610N Kir-P2d HARD DISK DRIVE DHD2600 6GB HARD DISK DRIVE TYPE 2600
PMR26AN P7126N AP2610N Kir-P2d PRINTER (opt) DMEBP64 64MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR27 P7027 AP2700 Russian P PRINTER (opt) DMR185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR27 P7027 AP2700 Russian P PRINTER (opt) DMR185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PMR27 P7027 AP2700 Russian P HARD DISK DRIVE DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
PMR32 P7032 AP3200 Russian PII PRINTER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PMR32 P7032 AP3200 Russian PII HARD DISK DRIVE DHD185PV2 1.6GB (6GB) PRINTER HARD DRIVE TYPE 185
PMR45 P7045 AP4500 Adonis P PRINTER (opt) DME22S16 16MB DRAM SIMM
PMR45 P7045 AP4500 Adonis P PRINTER HDD DHD450P 1.6GB PRINTER TYPE 450 HARD DISK DRIVE KIT
PMR45A P7145 AP4510 Adonis PIII PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PMR45A P7145 AP4510 Adonis PIII PRINTER HDD DHD4510 8GB PRINTER HARD DISK DRIVE
COLOUR PRINTERS
PCR5P C7005P AP505 Fresa PS PRINTER (opt) DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR5P C7005P AP505 Fresa PS HARD DISK DRIVE DHD505 1.6GB PRINTER HARD DRIVE
PCR5W C7005W AP305 Fresa WIN PRINTER (opt) DME700P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR5W C7005W AP305 Fresa WIN HARD DISK DRIVE DHD505 1.6GB PRINTER HARD DRIVE
PCR6 C7006 AP206 Pomelo 3 PRINTER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PCR6W C7006W AP306 Fresa WIN+Simplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6W C7006W AP306 Fresa WIN+Simplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6W C7006W AP306 Fresa WIN+Simplex PRINTER (opt) DME37 128MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6DW C7006DW AP306D Fresa WIN+Duplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P32 32MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6DW C7006DW AP306D Fresa WIN+Duplex PRINTER (opt) DME185P64 64MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR6DW C7006DW AP306D Fresa WIN+Duplex PRINTER (opt) DME37 128MB MEMORY EXPANSION
PCR10 C7010 CL5000 Model U-P1 PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PCR10 C7010 CL5000 Model U-P1 HARD DISK DRIVE DHD3600 20GB HARD DISK DRIVE
PCR10 C7010 CL5000 Model U-P1 USER A/C CODES DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR16 C7116 CL3000 Model AR-P1a PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PCR16 C7116 CL3000 Model AR-P1a PRINTER (opt) DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR16 C7116 CL3000 Model AR-P1a HARD DISK DRIVE PHD3000
PCR16dn C7116DN CL3000DN Model AR-P1b PRINTER (opt) DIMM64 64MB MEMORY TYPE C
PCR16dn C7116DN CL3000DN Model AR-P1b PRINTER (opt) DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR16dn C7116DN CL3000DN Model AR-P1b HARD DISK DRIVE PHD3000 10GB HARD DISK DRIVE
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINTER (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINTER (opt) DME38 256MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINTER HDD DHD38A 20GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT TYPE 3800C20
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J PRINT/COPY HDD DHD38B 40GB HARD DISK DRIVE KIT TYPE 3800C40
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J USER A/C CODES DMENV1 NV RAM
PCR38 DSC38 AP3800C Model J FAX (opt) DME185J-F 0.5MB FEATURE EXPANDER
SCANNERS
SMR30DC SC430DC IS330DC Russian SC SCAN (opt) DMEBP32 32MB SDRAM-DIMM (144PIN) TYPE B

NRG NPS PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NRG NPS PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Version 1.

New Product Specifications

Main Page WFW WFW-Connect

DMR12 DMR12F DMR13 DMR13A

DMR13F DMR15S DMR18S DMR18D

DMR22A DMR27A DMR32A DMR35A

DMR35B DMR45A DMR45B DMR55B

DMR60 DMR75 DMR85A DMR90B

DMR105A DMR105B DMRA07

WFW Home ElecBro

DMR12 / DMR12F / DMR13 / DMR13F

DMR12 October, 2001 December, 2001 China

NRG International Limited

Product Configuration & Option Interchangeability 7

NRG Product Comparison 13

In the Box Accessories List 38

Supplies and Reliability Data 41

What Fits What 42

This is a pre-launch document and specifications are subject

DMR12 and DMR13 standard configuration:

Internal Tray Output

DMR13 only optional 500-sheet paper tray (see picture below)

DMR13F with optional 1 tray paper bank:

Internal Tray Output

Standard paper tray

Fax Printer Copy

DMR12/F DMR13/F CMR130C CMR120A LFO

Easy jam recovery.

DMR12/F CMR120A CMR130C LFO Brother Xerox

Fast warm-up time

DMR12/F CMR120A CMR130C LFO Brother Xerox

12ppm or 13ppm print speed

Option of a machine pre-configured with fax and document feeder

PRODUCT CONFIGURATION & OPTION

The machines and options are detailed over the page: -

Platen Fax unit

Bypass tray Bypass

1 Tray Paper Bank (option)

Fax: Fax option (DMR12 and DMR13 only) ** DIF1013F

Print: Printer controller DIF1013PV2

Option Correlation for Basic Copier and Fax:

-must install together -Cannot install together R - Recommended

-must install together -Cannot install together R - Recommended

-must install together -Cannot install together R - Recommended

-must install together -Cannot install together R - Recommended

DMR12 and DMR13 DMR12F and DMR13F

Number of pages stored in the memory when sort copying:

With 32MB Optional Memory:

Ricoh 6% Chart IT U T No. 4 Chart Lipstick Chart

Note: 32MB optional memory is required to do sort copying.

NRG PRODUCT COMPARISON

Current range October 2001 December 2001

Analogue Machines Digital Machines

The DMR12/F and DMR13/F are targeted at the following markets:-

Small office users (1-4 people) or business personal machines

IEEE1284 I/F DIMM Slot

Printer Controller 1 bit Serial

# Items Remarks Compatibility

2 32/64/128MB Memory SDRAM-DIMM (144pin) Common with Memory

3 PostScript2 Compatible with Adobe PS2 Common with DMR15S/18S

4 NIB Ethernet card with RJ45 port Common with DMR15S/18S

Auto Continue Operation Result

Auto Tray Select: